Ashtadhyayi

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
LIBRARY
WILLIAM
H.
DONNER
COLLECTION
purchased from
gift
by
THE DONNER CANADIAN
FOUNDATION
NINI.
ENGLISH
ASU,
T
B. A.,
W. P.
UNIVERSITY OF TOR(
LIBRARY
WILLIAM
H.
DC
COLLECTI
purchaser
agiJ
BOOK
VI.
THE ASHTADHYAYl OF PANINI

TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
BY
SRISA
CHANDRA VASU,
Provincial Civil Service, N,
B. A.,
IV.
P.
Published by Sindhu Charan Bose

at the Panini
1897-
Office,
5"
17
V3
TO
ifltt'ble
gir John (Mje, JK. <f
CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES,
THIS
WORK
is,
WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION,

AND
IN
RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIP'S
SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF

JUSTICE
AND OF EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
BY HlS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT
THE TRANSLATOR.
BOOK SIXTH.
Chapter
^r*
it
******
<*3tfa
A i n
ti
First,
*%
In the room of the
1.
sm:,
first
It,
stoj^t, n
portion,
containing a
single vowel, there are two*
Upto Sutra VI,
i.
12 inclusive
it is
to be understood that for the
syllable
to be reduplicated.
first
This
two are to be made, I. e, the first

are to be
an adhikara sutra: ail the three words viz $3>n*:, and * and **&&
Samprasarana
of
rule
read in the subsequent sutfas upto VI. I. 12, before the
unreduplicated verbal
begins. Thus Sutra VI. 1. 8 says when fee follows, of an
supply the three
root". The sense of this sutra is incomplete, unless we
syllable
is
is
words of
this sutra,
when
it
fe* follows, there are two

an unredupliportion, containing a single vowel of
will
read thus
when
room of the first

= +
+ 3?cated verbal root". Thus from^:WHTTC C*f +<**lV' 3- 82
from
TO
TTT^,
also
fTO
So
=
4*59
awoke"),
"he
^rmR
* + *nn + T VII.
the
force of the
through
place
takes
the roots T^r, * and H The reduplication
Tense (fefj, the Desideraaffix that follows. Thus the affixes of the Perfect
Aorist in <** all cause
the
vikarana,
the
the Intensive
tive
in
the
(*n0,
(*f),
reduplication.
means that which consists of one* vowel (srw) H When

more than one vowel (is a dissyllabic or polysyllabic
a stem
be titej/lrst syllable: as in w*l the portion *rr is
will
xr^\^
snr*
root), then the
The word
f&tf 3*
or root consists of
the JPTS
i&n%
'
the
first
portion consisting of one vowel
of a single vowel, as?

any portion which may be called
sists
'.
When
a root con-
'to go', then strictly speaking there cannot be

first
(JPT*) or ekach consisting of a single
Reduplication.
io38
Bk. VI. Cii
I.
. 2.
Here, however, will this rule be applied and % will be reduplicated,
vowel).
^q^f^^^TRrni/' "An operation which affects

something on account of some special designation which for certain reasons
maxim
according to the
"
attaches to the latter, affects likewise that which stands alone and to which
therefore, just because the reasons for
So
does not attach".
also in
cpsr
it
there
do not exist, that special designation

is no first syllable strictly speaking,
maxim. In making Reduplications

Thus q^T + sr (nr?* of f^Q
the Rule I. 1. 59 should always be borne in mind.
TH* TTir + 3? = 7 THf + ST (VII. 4. 59 and 60) = TTT^T
The word f$ in the sutra indicates that the very word-form is to be
doubled or pronounccd-twicc, and not that another word of similar meaning is
but
the rule will apply under the above
still
II
In fact this
substituted.
room of one; but of the

^r%:
sreTrtTERrcw
ii
Of
2.
is
not a rule ordaining substitution of two, in the
repetition
s*ra.i
of the one. Compare VIII.
whose
first
room
vowel, there are two in the
I.
M^^TâKt sr^snM^
sT^r%1nV^1?^r^T
that
I.
w$t~
begins with
syllable
portion con-
of the second
taining a single vowel.

This debars the reduplication of the first syllable.
In a verbal root
beginning with a vowel, and consisting of more than one syllable, the second
syllable
(st^
is
be reduplicated and not the
to
+ *r^= ST? + f^-f
VII.
2.
and the 3rd per. sing is 3TT?

changed to q- by VIII. 3. 59.
51).
*R?cT root srf^T,
RsrfrT,
So
the
^ being
elided
by VII.
syllable jzv
also STHnfîf^, srnrc^nt H
4.
The
60
last
and
form
*f
is
(VII. 2. 74) = st* + ? + ST (VII. 3. 84, and VI.

^^=^t + f? +
Here now we have to make reduplication, and if I. 1. 59 be applied,
thus evolved, 3E +
I.
Thus the
first.
35=3Tf^r)> reduplicates the second
then since a vowel affix f follows, the reduplication of st* should take place
sthani should be reduplicated.
i. e. the 3 the
But we have explained the
sutra ff^hr%sf*T
I.
1.
by the phrase f$^^HPTTfsr%,

e. the vowel-affix
Here the vowel-affix f? does not cause reduplication,
59,
causing reduplication.
but the consonant-affix
i.
that
does
so.
Therefore rule
I.
1.
59 does
not
apply, for f? itself is a ^r^T, and the maxim applies ^tsRtIW^ 3>Psif nfaTTrRrT
^fT**^ "surely that which undergoes an operation can, so for as it undergoes
not be made the cause of the application of a grammatical

Thus from the root sftf is formed ^rear here the root ^fr is gunated
the augment f*.
Rule I. I. 5 declaring the prohibition of gunation
that operation,
rule
".
before
With regard
to f%f
or
an indicatory y, yet as
f|^ words does not apply
undergoes an operation
of the application of another rule.
it
here.
itself, it
For though
^frs;
has
cannot be the cause
Bk
VI. Cn.
I.
Some
Reduplication.
word
persons explain the
not Genitive Singular) of
as tne Ablative singular (and
they consider the word
and
BT3flf?'
3T"3Tr?
1039
as a
Karma-
dharaya compound and not a Bahuvrlhi compound. According to them the

word means: " The syllable following the initial vozvel is reduplicated *\
According to this interpretation,
(BTWr^rerf^^nrrf?:, araf^tTOl^nTr * *TW)
ll
the word f$#q^J
*
%
*rrfen*
*r
11
11
11
^stwitcjto
i^^cffa %
srpr^rr^rf
II
T^n^
II
II
*, ? T :
>
h^tt^t:
fl^^Nt s^re^cn": ^mr^r * fe^s^r

*f?iw *FfW-
*r?rcr ?f?r
The
*r^<r
*rr* n
srfHhf f^ra^r% % t^t f fa to***

jrqt fPTOnjr*ra' to***
*rr<>
?i% tossto.
letters
II
11
sfrsspi. n
$<foi&*rNt s
3.
merely explanatory.
?$r. ^pft^r^r:
^^nrr^ro^r
^rro
is
11
11
f and t being the
compound consonant and being
11
11
first
letter of
part of the second syllable,
are not reduplicated.
The word dvitlyasya " of the second syllable ", is understood here.
This sutra debars the doubling of the consonants n, d, and r when forming
parts of the second syllable, provided these letters occur in the
conjunct (sanyoga)
Thus the Desiderative root of 3*9

The second syllable here is f?^ which
letter.
by adding ând ??ll

cated by the last rule.
But
in
doing
so,
will
beginning of a
formed
is
ST^q",
is
to be redupli-
not be doubled.
Thus we get
the form ^fSfftqf^r; so also from 3T^ and sr^r we have axfj r^RT, and 3Tf%N-qfrT h
Why do we say "when ij, 3; and r are the letters"? Observe ff-qr%5fyr
from f$Mn which ss is the initial letter and h?s been reduplicated in to ^r
Why do we say " being the first letter in a conjunct consonant"? Observe
sjn%WT!% from the root 3?^ 'to breathe', the q; being changed into nr by VIII.
11
4.
The phrase
19 and 21.
SFSfiT of the last
sutra
is
understood in this sutra
Thus ^rffcrarra" " Some explain the word gr^rf?: understood in this sutra
in the same way as in the last, namely as a karmadharaya compound in the
Ablative singular. They do so, in order to explain the form f%?fTO, which
Then fS^mg^SJt^
is thus evolvedf??ffi 5ftfSf -{-vaÎII. 1. 8 = s??faii
also.
V$fa + <S^
is
"
rejected in
Here though the second syllable consists of n, d and r, yet ^ alone

reduplication and not ^ and * also, as $ and * are not immediately
after the initial vowel (snnft) % in this case.
Vdrt:
also.
As
330T
This prohibition
TfnTHT^T
should be stated with regard to the letter
This prohibition applies when the word
primarily as having a penultimate
II
But when
it is
is
taught
taught as primarily
Reduplication.
i04o
having a penultmate
then the rule does not apply: the
q,
ordained as a substitute of ^
Vart
Thus STO3W
H^
(III.
I.
There
This
22.
Vart) = 3T^+3 (VII.
however rejected
:
4.
The second
I.
should then be
3-
20.
no prohibition of the
is
the rules of this sutra.
Vfirt
See Tudadi root
when
the Intensive form of the verb
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
sr,
followed by
it is
and
3P) = 9t4, then follows reduplication
g has an
syllable
it
thus evolved: 55 +
is
initial
x.
which
is
by
not
in reduplication.
In the case of the verb fdfe the third should

Some
-Third of what"?
be reduplicated,
say the third of the consonants, and according to
Some say the third syllable, therefore of the root

them the form is ff^rSfanT
the
third
syllable qr is reduplicated: Thus ff^T*, ff&jrq^
+
( f^
^+^l),
(VII. 4. 79) the 3T of q- is changed jnto short f by VII. 4, 79. = ffsatfsp^
II
ffcuq-
II
Vart: The third syllable of the verbs 3T*fT3T &c. is to be reduplicated.

Thus ^f?i + ^+^=^ffa^^ffaf3<srm; so also srgrwrrW &c
The third syllable of verbs derived from nouns is optionally
Vart:
Thus
reduplicated.
artftfgfasrfa or 3rf^TTW?r
Vart:Others say, any syllable of a TFT^mj (verbs derived from nouns)
may be reduplicated, Thus from the noun gsr is derived the root $sfra, the
desiderative root of which
may
syllable
5^fn%^5r^r
as.
II
Or
<*f?*n*r: n
II
^fr^q-, which requires reduplication.
be reduplicated:
^m>fitW^^frT
ff%-
is
may
there
II
v^\*
II
f T% JnTTTJrf
^3^4r%
The
4.
the Reduplicate.
The word f in
purposes of this sutra
srerrcr. n
first
W^%
of the two
taken
in
is
?f3r
H^W^l feMJcKiq % * rer^f
oalled the
is
the nominative case
it is
Abhy&sa or
understood here, but for the
the Genitive case u
e.
The word Abhyasa occurs
$3^:
in
t^: "the first
sutras JJI,
1.
6,
7 &c.
ff%:
^:,
<T?*Af?? *V&H*Z
of the two*' ordained above.
VI.
Here any
^Wf^,
g^^ffi^r, 2. gfMt^WRf, 34be double and treble reduplication simultaneously

as. 1.
11
?Rt
*#n*t
&m* m*wsmm*^w%
The both
* s
fms % t* sift ^5^
wrer*
are collectively called Abhyasta.

% was understood in the sutra, the use of the word
<hoth' indicates that the word Abhyasta applies to the two taken together
and not to any one of them separately. The word abhyasta occurs in sutras
IU, 4- I0 9, VI. 1. 32 &c, Thus sutra VL 1, 189 declares "the first vowel of
5.
Though
&
the word
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
Reduplication.
The Abhyasta
an Abhyasta gets the udatta accent".
name
of the both, the accent will

accent
in f^ttt dadatf, the
the place of
TO
(VI.
sif g
fi%*.
ii
on the
fall
on the
is
first 3?
ll
an Abhyasta, therefore,
$r after
104 i
first
So also by VII. 1.43^ takes

So also
f? + fa = ?f + 3TT% = f^T 3"
II
4. 112).
kmqq:
*sr
aro^rtfrw
ll
^t
These are
it
f^mr^r:,
^s^^r^r
11
vrrrrfr
*nf^T
to
stht-
also the six roots beginning with jakshi are
called abhyasta.
The word abhyasta
verbs that follow
*r$T,
II
w$ f&tti m<iR<uw*T$* t*
So
6.
q^rft
II
being the collective
and not on the second, as
in the
Dhatupatha,
in all
w, 5THJ, fftSTi ^37^, ?irw, ^ft,
and mentions only the
The
understood here.
is
By
first six,
and
verb jakshi and the six
seven verbs, get this designation.
%#
ll
Panini has overlooked %^f

of Abhyasta
getting the designation
these verbs get acute accent on the first syllable when followed by a sarvadhatuka Tense-affix not having the intermediate f? and beginning with a
vowel. Thus *fhrm ja-grati, :#ST^ jakshati, |fi?fa daridrati, 4*1 *ntr chakasati,W^TRT sas*ati, %ffiT dldhyate, and ^^TFT vevyate. The present participle ^r^rf;
is irregularly formed by adding the affix
(?v) and when so formed it does
not take the augment
afMi
^tm
5^ by VII.
ssarrer^r
\9
ll
1,
78.
11
q^TR
llrpr, srrfnn*?;,
sfm:,
^^r^m
11
In the room of a short vowel of the Reduplicate

of the roots rpr &e, a long is substituted.
There is no list of <^ R verbs given any where. The word snft in
So that wherever we
jprrf? therefore should be construed as "verbs like tuj".
may find a word having a long vowel in the Reduplicate, we should consider
7.
it
Thus
a valid form,
^TT^TT*
^RfT^^TK, W*T
the Vedas before
As
g^rsr
î*wt
(<T^+ stfPH* HI.
<pfure
*ft*TO, ST IrTH"
some special
affixes,
II
II
^f%^^ rlfr^sre^ s^fRT %r1t

11
8.
is
io6 =
crg:5jPT:
Rig.
I.
3. 6).
f*fa(. H
fefe vn^fcz'fzm^f
there
2,
This lengthening only takes place in

and not every where or in secular literature.
II
When
^T^^nj;
11
II
fefe, w<ft:,
*rr
11
sr^q-ra^T
II
f^ff^^ ^ft^^ ^trszr;
ii
the tense-affixes of the Perfect follow,
reduplication
reduplicated.
T^rf^r
of the
root,
which
is
not already
Reduplication.
1042
The
reduplication
is
either of the
first
Bk. VI. Ch.
:i
syllable or of the second syllable
Thus
according as the root begins with a consonant or a vowel.

In the case of
qr^ q- 3r + on$ = <r?r TII So also qqT*, ^F^re
s
I.
^,
II
T^+t3K$=--
Rule
III.
1.
36
does not apply, so the Perfect of this word is not formed by adding 3TTO. and the
auxiliary verbs >, >r and sr?=r; but regularly. In fact 3^3 is regarded as if it was j
11
See sutra
III.
Why
I.
crp^ ^*fr#fl
36 Vart.
do we say when
Observe
r?
say "of a Dhatu"?

arises
follows?
Observe
&*&*&,
*Tfnrr*fr
3^,
Why
?tT? "
The
tfptf^F?TCR|fM* U
fact that the root (dhatu) always'directly
from the
RRWqKfa-
*TF?r 33; JTRff^ SRT*Ff, 3TPTJ
do we
question
precedes the affixes
of the Perfect, no vikarana intervenes as in the case of other tenses. So there

was no necessity of using the word dhatu in the sutra. To this it is replied
that
by
base
is
and we have
Why
do we say
5*U ^SR'ffan",
i.
treated as sarvadhatuka,
W\V*R TOP
'of
and then
takes
it
and other
nrern* or <^rm
fa^rm
Vart:
3^
The word
Locative dual.
and
arsr
II
^^?T
sfprci,
So
*Tff-
and
also
optionally reduplication of the root
is
arrffSTP*.
or ^t^,
^<fr
3rHTqT*r% or
$fc%%
w^ or
R^rr%q-Rf \^rr%
<^rg u
;
Su"%
optionally reduplicated in the Perfect. As,
is
*rr*r
q^TT%
fitorf 'fn'pr
Intensive verb
11
*=r;
^#r:,
II
Of a non-reduplicate root ending
9.
derative) or
As
tenses.
^t^- 3?pw%
11
Observe
of the Perfect.
in the 3*t
*rw ^5
The root
(or *rsrrTrc)
11
11
III. 4. 117.
having already caused reduplication.
In the Chhandas there
in the Perfect
*rT#t:
See
II
a non-reduplicate'?
3^
ending
^rrefasj:
Vart
sit *rrTTC
?jfcrc
the Perfect Tense of the
e. it is
not reduplicated again,
^l
is
taking the vikarana 33 becomes *j.g; (III. 1. 74 ) this whole

not a dhatu, therefore when the affixes of Perfect are added there is no
As ^
reduplication,
is
sometimes f<^
III. 4. 117,
vikarana.
(Intensive) affixes, there
is
in
(Desi-
reduplication.
^j-#r: should be construed as genitive dual and not as
In the latter case, the
follow,
meaning would be "when the
a non-reduplicate root
is
The
reduplicated".
affixes
difficulty
would be that while *che root alone would be reduplicated, the augment f?
would not, as in srfcfs^RT, BTraftT<srt% "
e
The phrase
of the
vowel.
first
^WTCT^rcTC*!
ls
understood here
also.
The
reduplication
is
or second syllable, according as the root has an initial consonant or
Thus t^+ST* (HI.
7) TST
reduplicate
ft<rcrr%
(VII.
4. 79).
So
Tjjr
Bk. VI. Ch.
Reduplication.
n]
se avrcraffri 3*?-^*R*Rtm
W^TS^, SHTCRTj WÎF*^
rrq-f^qt^.
83),
I.
no reduplication
is
^fjc^f
(already formed by svarthika

s|)
^r
ff%r:
See
II
ii
III.
(VII.
4.
already a reduplicated one,
Q%
III.
1.
and of
5;,
(the
Intensive
22.
1.
11
*^r T^fr s^r*rei viraresRifw imro^rrfr
11
f$cfcre?? ^r
Of a non-reduplicate root
10.
tion
n <r^7ft n
is
as ^gc^-q-%, ^rwfaTFr being the Desiderative forms of
there
form of
If a root
qrq^
also of arg^r: as,
So
11
3T*T?*Kt,
1043
when the vikarana
lu
(^)
?rown *
there
*W
11
reduplica-
is
follows.
The >^ is the characteristic sign of the roots of the third class, and causes
*jcr
The reduplication is of the first or second
syllable, according as the root has an initial consonant or a vowel.
Thus
the elision of the vikarana
^frfa-
from g
^T%
ffrr
II
),
fa^fa/ fVsf?r
II
T^TR
II
11
11
^T%
II
*rf> T^rfr s^^rer^r srrafts'arera
11
Of a non-rcduplicate root
11.
tion
when
The
^^stptt firft*^ ^rr ^r^T^PT f >r^rr:
reduplication
So
94).
reduplica-
is
the affix ^r^ of the Aorist follows.

is
of the
or second syllable according as the
first
root begins with a consonant or a vowel.
and
there
11
Thusaspfbr^fj;, srqfnrar^, (VII. 4. 93
These are
also 3m%?r, srrRPff^, STTff^J, U
aorists of the causative
roots ojf^- &c.
When
is
the Reduplicated Aorist of the Causative (^rf) verbs cp*
to be formed, as here,
we should
first
elide the causative sign
the penultimate vowel, and then reduplicate.
Then by VII.
for,
4.
&c
then shorten
93 the effect
had followed, and this would not be prohibited by the

short vowel being consdered sthanivat. For rule VI 1. 4.93 says "Let the effect be
as if
had followed, on the reduplicate, if followed by a light vowel, of an in-
would be
like as if ^pj
flective
base to which
sion of
any
for
letter in the
^^
followed by
is
affixed; provided there
of the conditions for the application of this rule
be followed by a light vowel.

is
is
pratyahara bt^ occasioned by the affixing of
We
is
not the
for 11"
that the reduplicate
eli-
One
must
have said above that the long penultimate
^^11 Now arises the difficulty. Should this light vowel

room of a heavy vowel be considered like the heavy
to be shortened before
coming
in
the
vowel by the rule of sthanivat adesa
(I.
1.
56), or
not
It
should not be con-
was established there that

57.
the sthanivadbhava will arise then only when some operation is to be done to
Here no operation
e. original vowel.
a thing anterior to the non-substituted
sidered so, for the reasons given in
I.
For
T.
it
i.
is
to be applied to
something anterior to such original
(BTTlf^S')
vowel, but to
Reduplication.
ID44
a form consisting of such substituted

is
vowel.
(fcrrf??)
Bk. VI. Cm.
I.
12
Therefore, the light vowel
of^q^rell If this order of

incongruities.
The order must be
not considered non-existent for the purposes
operation
not followed, there would arise
is
of r^r
this: ist the elision
VI.
51
4.
2nd the shortening of the penultimate
(VII 4. 4) 3rd the reduplication. If the reduplication take place first and the
vowel be shortened, then the reduplication having taken place before the subsvowel had taken place, such substitute will
titution of the
as sthanivad: the light vowel being considered as
^^^T^
application of
the short
be
in
If this
be
the-
II
considered
prevent the
the form of srnrffaPKl
difficulty will
far
now be
heavy, will
where
order of operations, there
not be the reduplication of the second syllable f? in the word 3if7??j? This
will
is,
The
II
ordained after the
is
still
howwer, done by
I.
;?T^rp* ^nira: tfrfter

ff%:
11
%fri
11
II
fr*^rc; tfriH. *ftf rf^Srar
11
4im*hl
^r>
which
59.
I.
% X *t3rt %
3>snifai
<w<mi u
*rr*
The
12.
^rf^ ^r^rtc, rK, tfffrac,

\\
^t^tai^ki *Trqror ^Tr^rW^ Hm<M%
ll
II
II
11
^-rh^H.
frt
&ikzk
11
see.
^ro
11
u ^r*
11
participles
11
^R^faMf^far ff^^s^rr^s^j
<rr?i%^
%^ ^ #Nr>3ra^
cl&gv&n,
11
11
s&hv&n and mtdhvstn
are irregularly formed without reduplication.
The word
^htpj.
is
from the root ^pj
'to give'
^j (III. 2. 1 07),
with the affix
As q nafcTr
root m^ 'to
here the reduplication and the augment ?? are prohibited irregularly.
The word
3,7).
W%' QWl
endure', by adding the affix spj (III.
(Rig
STr^T^
I-
2.
is
derived from the
being in leng-
107), the irregularity
thening the penultimate, not allowing the augment f^ and the reduplication.
Thus ^rrgT^ ansr?^:
So also jfrf^p^ comes from f*r to sprinkle with the
'
ll
affix
ffs-r
(III. 2. 107)
application of
9 into 5
should be
far
As
ll
the lenthening of the penultimate vowel, and the change of
ft$443iM4 rFRTTO
^T
ll
It
is
not necessary that these words
in the singular always, in their plural
forms also they do not redu-
plicate.
Reduplication
Vdrt\
affix
<%
comes
after ^>r
Vdit:
in
3TT3?
takes ,place
Thus feR 3FCT = $ +
11
ed by the
ment
'
the irregularity consisting in non-reduplication, non-
and
f^
The roots
The
ll
with the force of the affix

"q\, sfps,
T^, and
^t>i
11
^ take reduplication when follow-
134) and the reduplicate (abhyasa) takes the augfinal consonants of the Abhyasa (reduplicate) are not elided
affix 3T** (III.

II
= ?9P,
i
gfi
when ^s^ &c, are followed by the

The affix eR
f$T + ^ = W|jT*
1.
these verbs, in order to give scope to the augment, for
nants be elided
unnecessary
as
py
VII.
there
4. 60,
is
no
if
the final conso-
then the addition of the augment becomes

difference
between
adesa (shortening of the vowel) taught in VII.
4. 59.
augment and the

Thus M<|-^<:, "^Hra,
the
Bk. VI.
Ciii
Vdrt
W,
^r%
*ft
13,
Vocalisation*
The above vartika
n^m
optional, so
we have
the forms *qv 5^:,
&c.
The root 5^
Vdrt
is
1045
s reduplicated before the affix sr^, and the augcomes after the Abhyasa, and M is the substitute of f of the
Abhyasa. Thus f^+ 3r*t:= *n*+ srr^ + f^+ sr^r = MH MH (The second 9 is changed into ^ by VI L 3. 55), as in the phrase srhr: ^PT^T ^M JfiHIH,
ment
BTT5R
'
Vdrt:
there
The causative root
elision of
is
Abhyasa, and
it is
*Tc%:, ^TrJ^"
It
^riTHT*
WT?*
II
qrnr is reduplicated before
pr (sign of the causative), and

lengthened.
Thus
There
II
II
vocalisation of the
is
the affix *r? t
augment of the
the
is
qrf^ + ST^. 3 TTfq?:
4f*M4lftU| i!taiTlHf4l: HfdNf^:
13.
3^
semivowel
of
T^ (IV. 1. 78) when followed in a Tatpurusha compound, by the words 3^" and *rfcT
When the words gsr and rra are the second members^ forming a Tat-
the affix
II
purusha compound, there

affix
is
r^ of the preceding.
samprasarana (vocalising the semi-vowels) of the

That is 3 is changed intof
Thus ^f(W^ T5\frII
s*?r=3JfW*TR^ (a Bahuvrihi compound taking the samasanta

substitute f
The
by V.
4.
chON^reT*^=^^rf^ +
137)
(IV.
feminine of this will be formed by adding **^ (IV.
I.
affix or rather
92) = ^rfPTrr^:
II
Thus we have
Now in forming the Tatpurusha compound of this
**>l<N<H*ff (see IV. 1. 78).
word with ^r or qf^r, the final will be changed into f and we have gnfr^T^ft5^ q lfr r i-fcfl q ffo The srr of ^ becomes merged into % (VI. 1. 108), and
the short * is lengthened (VI. 3. 139). So also ^S^n-tftg^: O li1 %<*?%:
:
1.
78).
?l
>
II
Why do we say
Why do we say
^% ^r5^T^<Hl^.ri^
" ?
Observe f^gr^, ^T^JT^:
"
of the affix T
"
when followed by *&
or TfW "
Observe
II
^jrcfanTOir-
II
Why
do weây "when forming a Tatpurusha compound" ? Observe

It is a Bahuvrihi compound.
^f<m^*rqf?lT^ *TT^3 = 37rtta*^*lTCfrH3 ^R
:
The
IV.
I.
77 and
A
It is
affix szr^
ll
feminine affix 3 followed by srr*
in
maxim
is " an affix denotes whenever

begins with that to which
which
Grammar, a word-form
f^rr^rr^f^rr^rT^ *TfP*." H
feminine affixes, where
(see
relating to all affixes
has been added, and ends with the affix
that affix
(btt)
74).
general
employed
is
here the
itself
sjcMfqqgdr
This maxim, however, does not apply
we have
this rule " a
qtHTrl ST
in case
of
feminine affix denotes whenever
Vocalisation
1046
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
14.
employed in a rule, a word-form which ends with that affix, but which
need not necessarily begin with that to which the affix has been added, but
Thus we have
where the word form is subordinate ^r$rerar ^HTT^^R T "
it is
II
irc^rOsrn^raT: <pr = *H?nirftaTfts** and so also R5îfr<sFT^t Tf?r u Not so

when the word is an upasarjana or subordinate in a compound. As arf^*l**n
T
This vocalisation takes place when g^r and qr?t alone, not compounded
with any other word, stand at the end not so when a word beginning or
:
Thus cffrtfaM^l^^,
ending with these words follows.
Though a word ending

vocalisation
"
RffâFTTTOlfîr vr^RT
enunciated
*q& may have may semi-vowels, yet the
(J^) only, according to the
take the place of that
substitutes
which
maxim
actually
is
".
The word
The
in
place of the affix
takes
efitftar*.gmT<nr : &c.
^ preu im
rules of vocalisation
has regulating influence upto VI.
(change of semi-vowels into vowels)
I.
is
44
inclusive.
contained in
these sutras.
VArt:
IfrcfiR^
\ frr:
11
As
Prohibition must be stated when
1|chUK"3%T:,
**&: *wiM<v\\h*q&rk%
11
There
14.
word
*r?^ follows in
q H rV.qrqr
sutra,
*&'<,
is
vocalisation of the affix
*W when
the
a Bahuvrihi compound.
is
So
\\
is
also s|r3^T?*ft*?$:
a Bahuvrihi"?
a Tatpurusha compound.
There
or cftf<fa*r?^r*Trf^
:
,
Observe
3fir(t-
Like the
last
II
the word s^^FT
TTrT
II
also <TCrerrfta*rwrfaF5:, but arf^rcta^^TSRj:, efitfr'sfiwir*^-
is
exhibited in the sutra in the neuter gender,
masculine word.
HT^T and
word
do we say "when the compound
fact a
follow the
Awn?* H*rf*t
^^ = ^r^TT^^rar^;;, which
we have here
5"5f
arfsfrfr *rer% ^^r^:
Why
Vdrt\
,
ar^s^rrw
^rtta^^^^ = ^qrr;tft^:
Though
*TRT*
and
q-fa
instead of U*ImT^î &c.
Thus
ERrfton^lTWWS!
it is in
^TT^Rm:
is
vocalisation of ssr^ in
Bahuvrihi compound with
optionally: as 3rrfW*T?vffar^: or SKrwr^3r*Tn?:, ^r&5PTlfarf3&:
^vr^q^T?^frrrTr,
^TT^qrr?^r^r^r
makes the word take the udatta on the
ll
The
indicatory
last syllable (VI.
1.
of f\\^^
163), thus debarr-
ing the especial accent of the Bahuvrihi<VI. 2. 1). All Bahuvrihi compounds
ending in *t tak the samasanta affix ^t so *tff would have become *TTfs?r by
,
force of V. 4. 153, so the separate enumeration of

^;q is also optional.
m*
and TT^f here shows that
Kk. VI. Cn.
I.
15
Vocalisation.
^r^rfonrrfRf !%!%
fsf^rqr
?T5TIW, ZC3
frri f^r% *rero
<re<r:
\\
11
q^rf^r
11
11
\*%*W^*W%ftf*t^W
STireR"*
h^tW
1047
fcfo u
srf%, ^rrr, *nrrfrant,
*Xl
TÎ-mfl
Z*ti
?fa&Wmi'
11
verbs are
The semivowels of the roots *% ^tr and *nm%

vocalised when followed by an affix having an
indicatory
3F>
15.
The
anuvritti of
cludes the t*T

(II. 4. 53)
II
<Tft*TFT%
^r
cq^does not run
the root fsjssrrsraof the
is
Adadi
are the last nine roots of the Bhvadi class
and f^
The semivowels
11
responding vowel, when an
^T**ff,
S^TP*, (VIII.
viz.
The
this sutra.
)
and the
^^
The qmr?
class (II 59).

aiar,
3"t,
^<y,
root ^q- in-
substitute of
^st, Ifsj, s*jfT, jgst,
having an indicatory
affix
2.
30).
and
2
Tfi^cj
^ is added
we have
***g*:,
gi^TR; 3
the
to them.
Thus
following forms:
***, *OT*.
(VIII.
WV%
4^<TSff:,
5 *? W*i 37**P*(VIII. 2. 31, 40, VIII. 3. 13 and VI. 3.
6 w*tg^rrp sn^rf^, (VII. 2. 56 VIII. 3. 60) 7 qr^-^:, ^^ r ^, 8 sasr
36)
verbs
of these eleven verbs are changed into the cor-
with the Past Participle affixes

I.
into
of the Adadi class (II. 54
2.
Ill)
^^
^^m?^r rT^n^^ m% f^rrasn When
in a Grammatical rule, an operation

taught with regard to a root (dhatu) by mentioning
particular verbs (dhatu) specifically,and not by using the word "dhatu",generallv
^TrTT
(dependant on an
affix)
is
then the operation takes place only when the root
is
followed by such an affix as
can be added to roots by emunciating the word tihfc
maxim
inferred in the
is
Therefore, there
is
formation of the word
no vocalisation of T^r
in
it
afp*r?t2ra. in
the following
The
VI.
existence of this
4. 174,
which
^r^qfft, ^rN"3f:
il
see.
Here
w*
formed by adding
to ^r^ ( IHff^rfilf ) "

?rr3r is formed by raT
^r, the vowel being lengthened and samprasarana being expressly
prevented by Unadi II. 57. Now, it is a general rule that a root taking the
grssfa
is
added
to
affix f^T<t, fa?, or

is
a root
^3T?r is
III.
1.
*a? to
irrl,
(qTjf),
redoes
and
it
not enunciated to
8) in the rule
come
ordaining
?r* (See Vart. V.
^r,
not lose
its
character of a dhatu.
ought to take vocalisation before the
3.
*rfa, s*rfa, srr%,
Therefore ^pa-
affix c^n*
it
But
dhatu, but after a 5^;^ GjTsmsR:

<fq^
affixing.
So also qrfcr^ formed by adding
after a
its
83).
fe^fo; fsrfe, <j~#t%, ^srcfmro;, r%%,
^n
Vocalisation,
1048
There
16,
3T5;
'to take',
and
By
force of the
Thus
(by
of the
16
*m
become
or
Ho weave',
old', srw
s*ns
'to deceive', r?r 'to cut', jfb^ 'to
co k, to fry\
iBT^r <to
sutra.
affix
'to
'to strike', ^sr 'to shine*, *^r
ask',
I.
vocalisation of the semi-vowels of the
when an
following verbs,
follows:
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
word
'and', the anuvritti
'^r'
*?*nftrT:,i %$ttT%
(by
of |%r^
read
is
into this
and
^3), fE*FTf% (I. 2. 4), *(t^m%

^pmr^ (VIII. 2. 44 * changed to f),
fcHt Mf (1.2. 4), the short f is lengthened by VI. 4. 2 and is shortened again
is
replaced by 5* when
by VII. 3. 80. srsfRret ($^\ 3- *f*f Tne ro t
1.
Intensive).
2.
^rr
<^j
jtffa:,
r^ follows
This
(II. 4. 41).
f%* terminations, which as
f^
given will be of
tion
we know
of that sutra,
are j%?
in snrrf! class
stir,
for
is
takes only
it, it
The examples,
Now
II
substituted)
is
the last sutra
therefore
this ques-
arises
not >sj;(for which ^nr
of verbs given in
get samprasarana
^faf will
affix after
(I. 2. 5).
Thus 3^:, ^5:
affixes only.
'why do you enumerate
already included
f^
can have no
?rfa
and by force
before fo?| affixes",
The
reply
is
numerated herein order to show that the prohibition of sampra"gfg

sarana with regard to jtsi as taught in VI. 1. 40, does not apply to its substiThus while the Perfect of %37 is ^r, ^| ^*,
tute *rfi? in the Perfect Tense ".
is
the Perfect of
its
substitute
qfsr is 4>*tm, 37*I$J :
and
More over VI.
3yg: U
1.
38
not vocalised in f?^ affixes, which therefore, implies

teaches that the g of qq
(jnapaka) that the other semivowel i. e. ^ of ^1 will be vocalised. 4. s^ fa&
is
VT31F1L,
and with ft^
fe<l affixes
tika under
therefore
3^:,
I.
^trt
it,
^f^ffi"
the final
*r
5- 3TCT
II
3fW
;
,
is
considered
to belong
other than those having an

therefore,
as, fffHTcTX 3fff^J*,
of 5T^ changed into
3,
there
sffnT^TO
for
11
by VIII.
By
to <prf^
indicatory
7-
a Var-
class,
or,
31 or
and
the
be samprasarana
will
2,
and with
5jRRr^Rt,
s?rq- Rhlri:, ftp* <H rat f^THf, ^PP5
considered as r%^, and
before these affixes

is
6.
PP-W,
the word sqxr
2. 1,
all affixes after
affix 3T*r, are
How
affixes
ff &**> ^"np[
36 *f ought to have
been changed into q- before the fr^rff affix =rf? ? To this we reply the affix t
replaced by *{ (VII. 2. 42) and as this ^ is not a fRTf? .affix, Rule VIII. 2.
36 does not apply. This is done on the following maxim " The substitute
is
of the Nishtha should
be considered to be siddha or effective when applying
the rules relating to the change of a letter into q, to accent, to

is to
be changed
the addition of the augment $? ". But when
substitute
is
considered asiddha (not to have taken place).
forms %^J[: &c.

(VIII.
\iave
2.
Before f^q; affixes
affix,
into
and to
|,
the
Thus we have the
we have ?paf?f, *frf;^?r

8. if* <&:
The forms qq^ and **s*r would
36), <$Z?\k> fyl1*en%, qtfêgiq^
11
ll
been evolved by the simple rules of Reduplication even, without the
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
17
w^ + ^
But
of this rule.
application
1049
Vocalisation.
(III.
3-
Here there
90) = *** M
is
no
in sutra III. 2. 117

vocalisation, because Panini himself uses the word m*r.
irregular.
H*T* *&> (VIII.
though
9.
form
proper
the
is
this
showing that
*JS^, fTfl ^J^^r,
2. 36),
byWFji^TOSref (VIII.
(viii.
*tt
4. S3),
II
4. 40).
f^yqm^ wmi;
(fc4HK<JlR)
*f%-.
The tf of \^T3T is changed first into *

**?**
and then * is changed into if by ^p tj^r ^p
*wri
11
u ?vs
II
**Sift
f^,:>V4i*<^, sir^m*,
II
11
4i*3 <CM r
i
i^Ht
^ fof* <re*r s*mw& mmw w?r
ii
There takes place vocalisation of the semivowel of the reduplicate (abhy&sa) of both vachyadi (VI. 1.
15) and grahatdi (VI. 1. 16) words, when the affixes of
17.
f^
follow.
Thus *^
ttfw
*rrr,
t^to t^t%t,
As
II
regards
*r?rff
**r
rule).
mw
sr^,
To
II
f^nf, f^nnr, gr*
no speciality
it
is
equal whether there existed this present rule or not.
+ or^^ST + a^+ST^ + eP^+ST (?**Tftw VII. 4.

we reply, this form would be evolved no doubt had this
But when this rule is applied, and you make reduplication
this
rule not existed.
then you will have to vocalise ^ by force of this

Hence the necessity of this rule with regard to 5T^ also, for having
without
rule.
changed
Then
^^nt,
^nrr?, *rqi%sr (there is
For they argue thus,

60)
ssrsr
Fjflfwra', ^fa
S^TO, and z?fvm
fîn*, f^rfw, *rfF
s?r^ RsqiM, nr^r%*r, 5P*^5T*r and totot H Some say that
fsrr^r,
with regard to
5=
u4rf,
forms would have been evolved without even this
in case of this verb, as these
tRTfr, ^ftT*r,
**rcr
verbs;
first
?;
vocalising the
into
^t,
*,
we have fpp^ and then change
this st substitute
no vocalisasion of this
becomes sthanivat
^, for rule
VI.
I.
to ^t
37, prevents the vocalisation
standing before one wjiich has already been vocalised.
with regards to
$regr
and ^5f
which are not f^T
will apply.
And
is
no
of a letter
speciality
'
taught with regard to those
is
With regard
as the rule of vocalisation
cation in order, therefore
There
verbs.
This vocalisation of the reduplicate

affixes
by VII. 4. 66.
and therefore there is
sc into 3?
(I. 1. 59),
is
to
f^R-fj
affixes,
the Rule VI.
1.
15
subsequent to that of redupli-
by the maxim of q-^
I.
4. 2,
vocalisation will take
and then reduplication, according to the maxim tpr: vf^j M^H rfal^qt
"occasionally the formation of a particular form is accounted for by the fact
that a preceding rule is allowed to apply again, after it had* previously been
place
first
superseded by a subsequent rule".
Thus f^+srg: (which
is
f^
I. 2.
5)
Vocalisation.
1050
Though
Bk. VI. Ch.
in this sutra is for
all
20
Thus
events.
sutras, its express
the sake of indicating, that the rule of vocalisation
supersedes even the rule of

place at
the phrase ^h^rt'I could have been supplied into this sutra
by the context and the governing scope of the preceding

mention
I.
S^lf?: ^TCP
VII.
60, the vocalisation
4.
5^ + 01^=53 + 5^ + 9?
Here by VII.
11
must take
the
4. 60,
of zq ought to have been elided, and the equation would
second consonant *l
have stood ^ + 5?pj + aT, and there would have been vocalisation of 3" by this
But that is not intended; there is vocalisation of q and we have fasajn* U
rule.
In
fact,
maxim
the universal
operations dependent on
of vocalisation
3HT:
II
\*
frHHHfc
II
^M"4hTO ôt r^f
Of the
18.
sleep", there
XWXV
errors
".
^^rr%
II
The samprasarana and
"
sr 3RTO* SHTrJ
II
^n-, ^rfe, (ottoptto)
^flF
TOP ^XRTRr *?fa
causative verb
11
II
"to cause one to
^grrft
vocalisation of the semivowel,
is
the
possess greater force than other operations which
it
are simultaneously applicable
*5n^**rr
is
when the
affix
^3F of the Reduplicated Aorist follows.

Thus
the Aorist of pnfq-
is
9T^T^,
BTsr^TrTO,
tion takes place before reduplication, then there
short vowel, then this
again shortened by VII.
is
ST^T^
II
The
vocalisa-
is
guna of the penultimate
4.
1,
then there
is
reduplica-
and then lengthening of the vowel of the reduplicate by VII. 4. 94.

Thus ^TTT +
W* + "^^ = 31 (VI. 4. 51) + -q^ (VII. 3- 86) = %TT + *nF = ?g^+
^(VII. 4. iJ = U + ^ +
VI. 1. ii) = fT5<Tq;( VII. 4. 94) which with the
augment sr becomes 3TH^ni
tion,
^=
^(
II
Why
do we say 'when
q-^ follows'?
anuvritti of fefa has ceased, that of fsT%
^1%:
f^r^n sra *S3
11
tt
h7
*rs?,
There
19.
verbs ^ni
*^
'to sleep',
is
^n*
Observe
however
s^^tfr,
is
ct^,
^tRtT:
The
II
here.
?^<r<*r ^rr^rf arfs7 rc?p
^wc*i
*rer
11
vocalisation of the semivowel of the

'to
shout',
and
sqr
'to
cover',
when
followed by the affix *rôf the Intensive.

Thus ^tl^%, *rflTO%,
do we say 'when
follows'?
5T
ff?p
SRT.
11
II
Ro
(VII.
Observe
4.
25 the short f
^T^
is
lengthened).
formed by ^f^rÎII.
2.
Why
172.
||
^re rt%
^rafr^T^f?
20.
of
3?ftarT
^r, when the
There
is
top
srcrtfrcor
*nrr?f
11
not vocalisation of the
affix qn^ follows.
semi-vowel
VI. Cn.
Bit.
I.
Vocalisation.
23.]
105
i.
Why
The word qfr is understood here. As *rr^%, 31^3%, ^r^F^r
See VI. I. 16 to which
do we say "when HT; follows"? Observe *:, **&&
ll
II
this rule
is
an exception.
^nr. *&
ffrr
11
3#tfa
11
*^
<ttfr
11
ll
^nr., r
11
swrtpttoik^to ^mrare qr?r ^wrr?^ *nn%

The verb 3?t is substituted for the verb ^v
7
^rfa
21.
11
'to
worship, to observe', when the Intensive affix *H follows.

The phrase qf& is understood here. Thus *#^n^r, ^T^ftsR, *3T3tT3F%
The exhibition of sift in the sutra with a long f indicates that there is long vowel
II
even
in
tenses where (^
elided, as %^YrT:
is
f% with a short ^ as the substitute of

been
Thus r% +
valid.
still
causing the lengthening of the short
been %f3uT: which
11
?*rtfr
For
if
the sutra had enunciated
forms
ll
^1%
ll
ll
^t, rf^tp*
^kpt:,
II
f^rnr^^ wfasraf q*cP *qffcs3??r^r hî%

The ^ft is the substitute of^KFT Ho swell',
sTT^nft
11
22.
when the NishtM

Thus
%).
the
wrong.
Rgrcn*
*<*nrcr: *qf?r
^frT*
is
= r% +
II
^r^TPTcT &c would have

+ ^ = % + r%4-^ = % + ^r + g (VII. 4.25
But then the Nishtha would have
"^rr^,
affixes follow.
Why
do we say "when the Nishtha affixes

In the phrase ^rrwr *Rnt, the word p*nfr is
the feminine of the word ^rf^T formed by i%*r
The phrase Rgrar* "when
the Nishtha follows" governs all the subsequent sutras up to VI. 1. 29.
*<*ffrrp,
^TrT^T^
II
follow"?Observe ^^rm; formed by rr*
II
II
R3
q^rfo
^r., sr, ^*r, (^sr^rcnn?;)
RBT^frnt ^%% ^n^KînTm ^ ^qrr f^rr?* *?*fc *c% **i ^^^^^ 1 ^1
^r. sr^^r
ffrr:
*r^
11
11
11
^-
11
changes
The verb *&T
The
I.
and
*&i)
when preceded by
phrases ''when the nishtha follows", and "there
The
^T both assume
(VI.
(^
semivowel to a vowel, when a NishtM
its
understood here.
+ rT
11
23.
5T
11
the*
vocalisation" are
The roots *c% and

Thus q + *n; + ^ = q- + f^The <r of nishtha affix
much as the root
has
anuvritti of *%t does not run here.
*m
form
108) = softer
is
affix follows.
and are included
VI.
4- 2
)i
and
here.
sreftcprr*
II
would have been changed into ^by VIII. 2. 43 in as

But by the vocalisation of j, the condition
a semivowel and ends in long 3?r
for the application of VIII. 2. 43, no longer existing, the affix <r is not
of
changed to ?r
But rT is optionally changed to t by VIII. 2. 54 as JTCcffa: and
11
^^
II
JT*<fprepT H
Why
*TP3R?P*
ll
do we say "when preceded by

If
it
stf"
Observe *r*c2fH: (VIII. 2 43),
was intended that vocalisation should take place when q
Vocalisation.
ios2
[Bk. VI. Ch.
singly stood before, then the sutra could well have run thus
^^
of the word
upasargas
may
implies that the rule applies
intervene between
it
and the
when
stands
V[
Thus
root.
*r*c?r
first,
II
24.
The
use
I.
though other
sra"*rTR : , JTCftdirHI* H
should be explained as a Bahuvrihi = ir: *^t 3*^ îsîtt 1 !yr$%

consisting of root and upasarga is preceded by jt is
which
(that
?J5^HTC2I ^r
rule is made applicable to srereffcr: &c
the
Therefore
called T*jf).
The compound
ir^rest
There
24.
of the
vocalisation
is
semivowel of
(vl) 'to go' when the nishthst affixes follow,

when the sense is " coagulation " or " cold to touch '\
The word ff^f% means hardening of a fluid, by coagulation &c.
" a coagulated butter, grease &c ".
The *r of
Thus ^R ^, 5TRr ^rerr, tfR
^n
the root
nishtha
changed
is
to
?r
by VIII.
2.
But when the sense
47.
mm
is
that of cold
',
'
m%
m%', STRI^t
<T is
used both as a noun meaning 'cold weather &c', and an adjective denoting 'cold'.
not changed
the
There
is
no vocalisation when the sense
as res^RT 3f*^n
&c, by VI.
sRra
ffrT'
II
as ^fht ?r^?r>
53
'
the rolled
up scorpion
The word
II
is
not that of
The
'
short %
coagulation
is
is
'
or
lengthened
here
cold
'
in
',
*fR
4. 2.
11
ffit
q^rft
11
^T%
n srt:, **, (
There
25.
^nmmm
MrHsrHPl 33ra^feroT
<T*cT :
II
^^H^T *T^R
vocalisation of
is
^r
II
preceded by the
srf^r? when the nishtha affixes follow.

Thus str^r: qfcKftw*.
This sutra applies to cases where the words
need not have the meaning of " coagulation " or " cold ".
upasarga
II
^m
sv4d4i^T IRÎI
finrrsrr, srfa, st^t, ^j^t, (frmaKmn
>3 ?r ^ra% arnr snr s^pjî >3Tnmf%r*i f^TRT srsmn:^ H^m
firvrr^T
ffrT:
11
11
26.
followed by the
II
11
There
is
NishtM
optionally the
affixes,
vocalisation
when the upasargas
of
^n
3*f*T
and
3T^ precede it.

This
Thus 3Tf>THftaq; or srfa^lR^ frf, 3T^R1 or ar^R* %f*&Fr
option applies even when the word means "coagulation'' and "cold". As
^T^^ttrfr or BT^CTiTt m%-y &c. 3T^fa or BTÎRWff
bt^TH or bt^^TR *pT, %*F
The 1$ in this sutra serves the same purpose as in VI. I. 23. Thus
stpt^jr or 3TfH^^?R, ST^^R, 3TW33RJI According to the author of SidII
II
dhanta Kaumudi, the word
shows that it is a vyavasthita vibhasha, hence

no option allowed when btPt and are are in the middle, as, *Rfa**lR,
Here we cannot have the alternative forms *Rf*rafhi &c
IPMVIM
there
is
11
'&
VI. Cii.
*Icf <TT#?
29.
jj.
R^
II
<F?Tft
II
*ZZK,
II
Optionally
27.
1
Vocalisation.
<TT*,
*<r is
1053
II
formed
cooked \ by the vocalisation of the semivowel of
the nishtM affix

The word Rr^TTT
sense of
the
in
before
srr
II
The
understood here.
is
roots
'to cook
*sr
'
of the
Bhvadi class, and jr to cook of the Adadi class> and *srr to cook of the
Bhvadi sub-class Ghatadi, are meant here. In all these, j replaces %jt, whether
causative or not Thus &pf ^ft, spj ?1%
This is a vyavasthita vivhasha
'
'
'
so that
Jjsrr
changed to
invariably
is
II
when
*j
'
referring
to tfft
and
but not
^fa,
anywhere else. Thus 'STfarr *m*g J*f<TrTf ^n (VII. 3. 36 and VI. 4. 92). This
word does not take double causative though the sense may require it. As
}
*frf?tT ffit
^frH
The
Devadatta through Yajfiadatta has caused the milk
"
qfl^rH
to be cooked".
srr
Causative, there the form

<*tpt:
<ft
R*
II
28.
*
to increase
The
that die
#T
W,
cT
3/JTf
belongs to Bhvadi
The
vasthita-vibhash&).
ll
The
option here
The
11
substitution,
the root, and
BTPfcfr^:, BTriiR^J
feg^sj
II
II
f^R,
red
is
II
is
II
drawn
li
reduplication
8rr<j:
The
class.
*r
and
is
H^
Indicatory
(VIII.
also a regulated
and
3^ are
in
q^:,
5T,
(qT)
2.
err
45).
shows
Thus
option (vya*
composition
as
substitution of
11
for <an*r
<ft
by
when the
and the Intensive (*ra) follow.

rprm ceases. The phrase c?jnr:
of the word
into this
The
fe^,
tft
force *of the
substitution of
which precedes
takes place after the substitution, by
II
preceded by an upasarga.
it is
the words
tR[Tffr
There
anuvritti
^rrf^rf^:
f^R
when the root is

Thus jjcsrR:.
however, must take place when the preposition
affixes of the Perfect (feqQ
last sutra
*jrr *ftt
29.
The
that of Reflexive, or
substitution takes place invariably
without upasarga, and never when

^fssire^fHT:
is
*wre,
II
and rHr are changed into
5Tr^ <rfa*fc
srr^ precedes
mt
optionally the substitute of the root *mi
*fj is
root 3TRir#
<TRr
cqt^:, it
*jri
before the Nishtha affixes*
'
affixes
11
the sense
As
to be used*
*|rT is
qsrrfr
II
When
intransitive.
is
it
*fa
in
word
q-
'
and
';
of the
thus STlf^r,
3TT-
a subsequent rule, would have debar-
The reduplication, however,

the maxim of 3^: i^fjf & c men-
order.
force of
Bk. VI. Ch.
Vocalisation.
1054
I 31. ]
tioned in VI. I. 17. Thus fr + fo?;=ft + <ft + sr = fa + e3l + ? (VI. 4. 82 the *

being substituted) = sn?TO with the affix srr. So also in the Intensive, as *rfa<fta%,
fk^m
tf%:
ii
11
^n%
11
form,
foauJWrt *3% sjrarcn^ ^1
There
30.
0*f?
*t:
arflF
11
^ ^WRTffrrer *nrcnr>r *reft
optionally the
is
semivowel of fe before the
vocalisation of the
of the Perfect and the In-
affixes
tensive.
The ph rases* f3? 3F?P and
^mmv
*T
So
Thus
are to be read into this sutra.
#|R?%
by any previous rule, this sutra teaches optional vocalisation. The root would have
taken vocalisation before f?$*, which is a fâffix, invariably by VI. I. 15, this
In the alternative,
sutra modifies that by making the substitution optional.
when the root does become vocalised, the reduplicate is also not vocalised in
This explains the form ftrara, which by VI. I. 17 would
spite of VI. 1. 17.
VI. 1. 3o) = 3J+ors (VI. I. 108) = ^y
have been ^pjR
+ ^=(U^f +
+ 3J + 3T(VI. 1. 8)=3JTOU
3J5n% or f^rera, QUld,- or rerf*rag: H
Vffi
The
II
root
{% would not have taken vocalisation before
II
on
Si%:
11
^ *rsF#i:
3?
11
f^wrr îtffi ^tt%
The
11
<rrrr*
sr*re
^r,
11
f%*rrqT
is
( fr
Aorist
Thus
^j^rnT^Hfrr
as 3jf 5Pf?l or
q-^,
H^frT (see sutra
VI.
I.
11
>t^
11
when followed by the Desi-
f**,
*gr^ affix.
understood here.
or f^TOfarefa
arfaWKl
17),
the vocalisation of the
In forming the Desiderative
and the Reduplicated Aorist forms of the Causative of

vocalisation.
mnKum
qrrr *racr*fr%ft*rsrr snrerrcor
optionally
is
^^h,
^r, *rac,
<rc *^r *Tr
and the Aorist
phrase
2T3F
semivowel, in the causative of

<FP*
or *ret-
TJ
There
31.
derative
also in the Intensive as
By
tne
II
So
maxim
also
fsj,
there
optional
is
Reduplicated
in the
srsraTor *rsmR?TP5R
the antaranga substitution of Viiddhi
&c
is
^ *3ref
supers-
eded by the samprasarana and the subsidiary operation? relating to it here.

The vriddhi and the substitution of 3TTC take place after the samprasarana has
taken place.
The sutra VII. 4. 80 teaching the substitution off

when ^\ follows, shows by implication that the
for
the reduplicate,
caused by
for is
stharfivat
though
it
itself
Thus re + foT = %+^ = **rsr + $ = **Tra

*3T*3TO,
does not cause reduplication
In reduplicating ^jrfa
the
S of
substitution
(I. 1. 59).
we cannot form
but must consider the substitute equal to the original 5 of fix and must
it.
We thus get ftr^raf^qf^
In the case of vocalisation, the
reduplicate
rules of Vriddhi
II
&c
are postponed.
*1 = <8t + * + *P* = TO* +* + ** +
^=
Thus f^ + rot + sr^ ( VI.

srr% +
+ *p*= sireft +
I.
) = 3j + for +
Here we requ-
108
Ik.
Pire
VI. Ch.
Vocalisation.
34. ]
Here the substitute
reduplication.
treated sthanivat under
I.
59 to
I.
7,
1055
srr* in
which
is
w*
though not caused by
^,
is
carried in reduplication. Similarly
^ + S + ^=3J + ^T
r** + fa + ^=3J + * + ^=E + ^ + f + ^= ^ +

Aorist;
+
+
+ I it=3 *i*Ht* (VII. 4- 1 )=5 + ^tot3T l VI.
(VII. 4. 94)
the
There
32.
the causative of
live
is'
50=8T^5i^
4-
the vocalisation of the semivowel of
(f) before the Desiderative
and the Redu-
plicated Aorist affixes.
The whole
and
fa*rf*r
of the last sutra
^nfiW H:, ^prf^FST;
is
to be read Into this sutra.
ST^^r?C, *T*|^rTP*and
not take the augment 3 required by VII.
3.
sr^R
11
Thus s^H"-
The
root ^r does
for,
because the
37 before the affix
Samprasarana rule is stronger. The repetition of the word q H MHm in this

sutra, though its anuvritti was present, indicates that the force of the word f^HRT
has ceased. Though this and the next sutra could well have been made one,
their separation shows that the samprasarana does not take place when another
affix,
not causing reduplication, intervenes.
Desiderative of this verb
srererar
11
133.
11
is
f^ra#nrafrT
*rrrft
There
is
11
As ^r^R^T^^r^ffant;
the
II
wmmm, ^r,
( fr
nm<um
11
vocalisation of the semivowel of fr in
the reduplicated form, in both the syllables.
The abhyasta means the reduplicate and the reduplicated,both the

The vocalisation takes place before reduplication. Thus ^<jH ^tgsnr,
syllables.
This and the last sutra are one, in the original of Panini, they
and *Jfsn%
have been divided into two by the authority of a Vartika.
II
STf**
^T%
II
34.
3*
ll
q^rR
II
*I^Ci 3^fa>
*mm < mH
II
In the Chhandas, the semivowel of this root
is
diversely vocalised.
fpT
$pr
Thus ff^- or
The form g^
II
is
^r-
elided,
renrr*,
invocation'.
^r^cfl"
f^ 'Invoke Indra and Agni\
Atmanepada,* Present tense, 1st Pers. sing, the vikarana
then there is vocalisation and substitution of
So also jg^rf%
^qrft, as âHrf r
is
%nm f^FJUû
3^
So
also
^: as ^>fr?^( Rig
ll
I.
2.
1.
'hear the
Vocalisation,
1056
^rc:
*ft
II
^ttt%
II
For
35.
^t:,
II
^r*r
is
^fr
Bk, VI.
C11.
36.'
II
diversely
substituted
the
in
^fr
Ohhandas.
Thus pnj^r Ftnn^
in the affix
sgrfanHr^:
<rrrfa
^raY.^Treftctf:,
ff%:
II
U?fT%
*rp3
f^^f RT^^n;
Sometimes there
3nn
As
no substitution.
BTfa-
f^^3%,
^rr^f:,
facqrar,
T%<nc,
stt<tt:,
II
9TT?f??TniBTrf^ STrfi: fa-e^
f^^
These are forms ending
I!
is
11
sft^sttc,
11
grôf the Perfect.
W^:,f^*
f?t?Tr^,
STr^:,q%f^TT?T^r
*TRft:,
II
In the Chhandas, the following irregular forma
36.
met with : ^^sTri*, *$%%h

facr*;, srrefr and srrsfnr.
The word
5"^f*T
understood here.
is
!%^fr
^n^j:,
are
From
smTT:,
Rr<??nr,
the root ^^f
'
to chal-
lenge', is formed stt^^TPIL being the Imperfect (*t$), 2nd Pers. Dual, Atmanepada there is reduplication of the root, vocalisation of ^, and the elision of
:
As,
sr irregularly.
SHT^fni.
II
Some
vocalisation of
in the
*rr
II
k,
53^
Imperfect (VI.
From
f^^ff
^TT^^T^
In secular language the form
II
is
derived from ^Tff with the preposition stt, the

the elision of ST, and the non-prefixing of the augment st?
say,
3T^f
it is
4. 75).
and
'
3Tf
The counter-example
to respect, to worship
^r: in the Perfect before the 3rd per.
^=
of this will be
sTTrFT*?-
are derived 3TP2^[ and

:
btt-
there being vocalisation of * and
pi. 3SJ,
the elision of 3? .irregularly. Then there

sj, then the lengthening of this sr, then
',
reduplication, then
is
changed to
augment ?r, as
66 )-3TT + ^r^ +
the addition of the
+ 5?r^+^ = BT + 5|t^ + ^T ( VII. 4.

The' irregularity consists
(VII. 4. 7o)=3Tr + ^+-3K^' + 3*T (VII. 4. /O^STT^fThus v^m ST^fopJ^:, ?T ^t!ÎÎ "
\n the saniprasarna with the elision of st
The form f^r^" is the Perfect 2nd
The secular forms will be STPT^, STPTf
f^ + ^-9fi: gr +
:
5(t
II
II
per. sing, of the
root ^31?
II
to go': there
is
vocalisation
of the
and the non-addition of the augment f before the affix %

The form famrsf
The regular form is êgf^
regularity,
II
cirsT,
is
the vocalisation of the reduplicate
rfc^nf M
From
the root
the irregularity.
is
'to cook',
rr>7
As
is
derived
^m
reduplicate,
This
11
is
the
ir-
is
the Perfect of
The
regular form
before the Nishtha
The form nrcf is

H
the
same
root
by
shortening
from
the vowel with the same affix.
also derived
Some say the srr substitution of *sft takes
A s ^ft **^ srfaf^T*, f^T 'ft
place when the word refers to ?fr?r, in the plural, and p* when it refers to oth^r
affix, ff
changed^ to
*sfr
irregularly.
'
rrarc?T
f*^mr
Bk. VI. Ch.
than
^rPT
37
Vocalisation.
Sometimes the word
II
other than
^f*T
Thus
in the plural in the sutra
is
^SfMK^' HST^TTOT^
5T
ffrT
sfasrn^r
11
Trfrrero.
there
cede
11
is
it
<r*rr:
word
srr?Tr:
The words
arT^f}"*
and
^sfr,
^m ^t
is
\*
II
is
As, 3PintfhT gffcf 8TTWrf STSifa,
irregular.
^TI^
II
*nrcrrcr
*rarrW
^MMIW,
*,
II
qmm<U |H
II
11
11
no vocalisation of the other semivowel that

in the same word.
has two semi-vowels
ssjsr;
^ and
the preceding ^ will not be vocalised into
czr^r
3TTf; and taking the affixes

replaced by sftr, and the non-
with the prefix
^rr
ra*#r %w*l
mr* %^tRt?tnî m ^"*^%
When a semivowel hase been once vocalised,
37.
Thus
5,
Nishtha
in the
?r
In fact, the exhibition of the
Before these
riband ^respectively.
addition of
II
not absolutely necessary.
from the same root
stR^tT: are
seen in the singular, referring to objects
is
*x\ri:
^TrR
stf? 'flTrfr
1057
f%r%rT
%^hp
s^^t
Though
II
what particular semivowel

that the operation
is
second semivowel
in
Had
3"
s;
II
the above cases
pre-
vocalised into
rf^f:
From
II
the rule of vocalisation does not specify
to be vocalised,
is
to be performed
when a is once
Thus we have
may
on the
is
maxim
yet according to the
letter nearest to the operator, the
vocalised and the
first is not,
by
force
semi-vowel been vocalised, then there would be no

scope for this sutra, because then no semi-vowel will be found preceding a
of this rule.
the
first
This sutra
vocalised letter.
a jnapaka that the vocalisation
is
commences with
the second of the conjunct semi-vowels.

the anuvritti of ^TOU^T was understood here, the repetition of
Though
this
word shows that the prohibition of double vocalisation
applies even
there
is
when the semivowels
are not contiguous.
in the same word

Thus by VI. I. 133
word %3\, the ^ being changed to T, the q is not

might be objected that when the sr of 5, and s the sam-
vocalisation of the
changed as apr
It,
II
prasarana of ^ coalesce into one by sandhi rules, then there being the substitution of one long 37 for the two 3's and this is sthanivat to the original, the v and
^ of g^rc; should
intervening
be considered
letter,
and
The
good; we reply.
There
and there
is
4- 74-
Why
is
58).
Even though
it
for
two vowels,
is
not
be considered as sthanivat,
II
when followed by
Metres.
As f%$[
samasanta affix sr by
vocalisation of the semivowel of nr
elision of the
W$\ 3reH^= f=er |TtK

V.
I. I.
a separating letter.
Vart:
^^r
contiguous and not separated by an
the explanation given above does not hold
substitution of one long vowel
considered sthanivat (See

it is still
in fact as
therefore,
^T mH
ll
of sjt^,
The word
do we say when referring
when
?r?T
it
refers
takes the
to a metre?
to
Observe
&t*%
11
Vocalisation.
1058
Bk. VI. Cn.
40
Vdrt:
vowel of era followed by the affix
is
as
diversely vocalisation of the semi-
ot + T^= ** + *?=* + * + TFJ:=t + f-l-3<E
Sometimes it does not take place, as

= ^"?C; as, 3TT *^FKJ $T f%^T:
is
not
changed
to ^ as required by VIII. 2. 15.
here
The H
Cra*TR gfs^JrT U
when a Name is meant:
There is vocalisation of 37$^ before
V&rt:
(VIII.
I5)
2.
II
as ^r^Frt
the form
11
^r w
This Vartika
ll
11
^T^r
ll
11
f&fe,
f?j^
11
12 where
11
t stmnKuiftcM^^r fare <m ^% s^tt'cto erirerr?:^ ?r *r^fcr

In the substituted root ^T (II. 4. 41), the
38.
11
is
employed
in this
aphorism
one could have done well without
ffrP
2.
(^swrtun* *)
sr*r-, *r:
the Perfect is not vocalised.

The phrase ?r ^praTTO is understood
word
See VIII.
unnecessary.
is
given.
^ptffarjr is
fefe
ff%J
3ftnr5T-
^r
arcs
mz
qranrro faf*
<rc?fr
3T3RJ:,
3?3 H
:
in
The
sake of subsequent sutras, this
even.
TOrerHT
^s^^^r*
11
Before the tense-affixes of the Perfect that have
39.
an indicatory
(I. 2. 5), for
<%
substituted a
it
Thus z?m,
here.
for the
*J
sr
Thus 3^3:
the *rof
^ may
optionally be
ll
^f or 3>f 11 According to Patanjali, the phrase ^rr^T

ofthiss u tracouldhavebeendispensedwith;this much would have been enough:
or 3*33:,
Thus % + 3T3*t = m + m + 3Tg*T = ***J: and srf (the vocalisation

^r + 3T3^ = 3 + 3T<J^r = 3'-l-3^4 3TÊT(VI.
In the case of ^substitute, the
vocalisation.
Here there is
I. 77) = 3^J
3Jf:
Thus all the three forms have been
sj is never vocalised, so we have 3^g:, 3JJ:
STWJrrc**T rerra
In the alternative:
being prohibited).
:
II
II
evolved without using ^*rev
%3T:
fr%:
ii
II
t|
retar3*3rer
t5r.,(&lKUIH, *0
rmrf$rf <tw wmw*t mft
^r^^mTf^î
%*S
The semivowel of ^ 'to weave* is not vocalised
<T3TT5T
1
40.
11
II
II
11
in the Perfect.
Thus
îrrf^ class and would have

by VI. I. 15; and before non-fg??j[ affixes the
of the Perfect would have been vocalised by VI. I. 17.
^tf, **fj:,
been vocalised before

Reduplicate syllable
^f
fFrt
This root belongs to
II
affixes
Both vocalisations are prohibited

s*rfq
^f%J
ii
11
tigq4ift
41.
q^TFr
11
here.
s*fa, ^(Hsrcrrcnrq;, 1)
^m ^ t^t ^*T
II
^mRii t *t^
The semivowel of % is not vocalised when the
Participial affix g*rr follows.
11
Bk. VI. Ch.
Thus
45
Vocalisation.
J^ra, SFT^ni
The
II
1059
sutra from the
separation of this
last, is for
the sake of the subsequent sutras, into which the anuvritti of Rj^r only runs.
3*TT
fl%:
sed
II
*R
II
TTT^
II
3*T., ^T,
II
II
II
when the
sq-aar
*\
11
q^rft
ll
As
when the
ifsqrg,
11
11
W&fVH
II
=gr,
The
(^TOT^nr, *)
of sqr
11
cover
'to
(S*r)
separation of this sutra from the
which the anuvritti of
sCitra, in
t^tt%
11
The
44.
when 5^ preceded by
Thus
w,
is
not
affix 5*n**\ follows.
the sake of the subsequent

fo*rr*r <rr.
not vocali-
11
The semivowel
43.
vocalised
is
affix ^q-^r follows.
Thus ir^s, sq^ra
11
fsmrsrr, *ft:, (
vocalisation
wum <u m
may
*)
11
optionally take place
5^
qft takes the affix
3T*or
last, is for
runs.
slj
The augment 5^ presented by VI. 1. y\

<rn?aira
which causes the lengthening of the vowel: since VI.
subsequent to VI. 1. 71.
Tft^ffa
is
debarred by VI.
4.
is
BTTâr
ff%:
(^rsr^ROT^ T)
3W WfRrfa^S VTT^^fT TOT ^HT?Tr^ T **!%

42.
The semivowel of 33T 'to grow old'
WJ^TOT
11
^Tf^
^rmr
ftrlr
instruction
fa, $, 3?r
Sr%RT
*%
45.
(i.
and
II
4. 2.
II
<r^c?r *r
3^,
q;^:,
cr*arrerr*mfr
?mft
q^ atf^
ftrfa
3 *<*&
?t
*r?n%
11
In a root, which in the system of grammatical

e. in the Dhatupatha), ends with a diphthong
^r), there
is
thong, provided that no

The word
<T^rft H
II
^rg^tr
srnrr: is
***nTr,.MT3*, Wrrssre,
the substitution of
affix
3rr
for the diph-
with an indicatory
to be read into this sutra from VI.
st
follows
1. 8.
Thus
it.
*<%-
Why
do we say ending
with an <rgr (diphthong)? Observe 3TrT? from $, and frfr from
Why do we
say in upadesa or Dhatupatha ? Observed, ^rrTT where % and

f$ are not
faSTTcrr, fasrrap*,
R^rrcT^qr
ll
11
the forms taught in the
secondary forms.
+ fa* = *t*rarcf
**ntf%
<rôf the Perfect: as

I%q; as
has
r%^,
that
at the end.
first
Why
is
enunciation of the root in the Dhatupatha, but are

say, before non-Rl^ affixes ?
Observe ^r-l-^r^
do we
Exception
II
^,
is,
however,
made
in the
case of the affix
Thfs is explained by interpreting the word

*?%
the affixes having an indicatory ^ in 'the beginning:
J&x
This
term which denotes a
II
done on the maxim qfepi RfwniTO ***T "when a

letter is exhibited in a rule in the form of the
Locative
is
Vocalisation.
io6o
and
case,
which
is
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
48,
some thing else which likewise stands in the Locative case,

by it must be regarded as beginning with the letter
qualifies
that which
qualified
denoted by the term
and not as ending whith
in question
it".
The word STRTR is an example of ?M^mMMqr:- a simple prohibition of

a contingent case. Therefore, the substitution of $TT for qr^r vowels, is not
caused by the affixes that follow, but must take place prior to the occasion for
Thus
the application of the affixes arises.
ending
this affix: thus <*:, *?*:
by presupposing
5T o*ft
fefe
II
Similarly by III.
II
understood in
3TT is
**$
qq*TT%
II
There
is
Diphthong of the root
sq-
46.
5T,
II
w$
ffrT:
roots
i^ and j%
II
the subsequent sutras upto VI.
I.
$7
II
srr
for the
affixes of the Perfect follow.
reduplicate of the Perfect
in Sff^sgrg takes place
by VII.
2.
is
vocalised
115 before
^:r%^^sr>snr
11
srr
we apply 3^ to
S3P, fefe, (3?r^)
The
'
affix
all
when the
Thus *jf^r3, ^f%s3f?l*T

The Vriddhi
1. 17.
prrqr
128
3.
9T after
when applying
not the substitution of
here by VI.
the
136 ordains
1.
as 3TT^rT roots: as u*rtR:, g*?5R:
it
The word
III.
*% and a% are presupposed to end in
in 3TT; so that
11
3tt^ sfir t^^ *g*

1
<îfa
11
'^fa,
^7 ^^f^^raHrc^
*$5c*ft:, srfsr,
**tr ^fq-
(m*()
yta grr^raWr
11
*reret u
In the roots ^p; and ^Jp 'to move', there is

3TT for the diphthong when the affix
47.
the substitution of the

si*^ follows.
Thus fawm: instead of

VIII.
3.
76, the Sf
^r^R? wr
W?T
ftS'tftT:,
and f^rrS: instead of f%F*fa:

f%, as f^scf^:, and f^fcjn^:
II
optionally changed to q after
11
v*
q^rr%
11
jgr,
^, Urnr*,
"ft,
^r^)
II
II
48.
The substution of s?r
place in the causatives of the roots

ftf 'to
conquer.'
Thus
3.
By
is
5EtTO<%,
$frT
diphthong takes
for the
'to by-
% 'to study'
and
srwrar% and
36, since these r.oots
fa^ra^r^rfo*
end
11
in
long
11
^rrrara" U
Tf
The augment
a; is
added by VII.
II
q^rr^
11
r%*r?r.,
arcn^fef*
ll
BK. VI. Cu.
50. ]
Substitution.
srT
The substitution of
takes place
when it clous not
49.
:diphthong in the causative of l%^r,

the next
1061
the
for
refer to
life.
The word TRrfrr'^ is derived form HKfa7 'the next world' by adding
the affix ssj with the force of 'for the sake of (V. I. 109). The double Vrid'
dhi takes place by VII.
The
20.
3.
sense of the word
must
ftrvj
or non-intelligent things for the purposes of this substitution.
TfT
*TP**Tf?T
Why
II
rTT^TTTO %*ra?%,
ledge,
rTPT*T:
do we say when not referring
S^FFT
rcfiSJra'
ZKHUvi
%W*rT
= *TC;THi%r TreflW3'
knowledge
J
ll
next world (f vfiffi) i.

the sake of the next
the next
e.
life,
so acquired produces
does not take
the substitution
place here
result in the
ascetic
3T?t *TTO3I?T,
3TT for q
though the
gift
When
effect,
m^RRrfofref
11
3rr>^
ttItow
f^r^ ^^ror^sr
Ho
*ft
mediation of another action,
then the substitution does not take place.
The
it.
s^pt
*rfcr
fW* sq%wr
And
50.
of
is
here belongs to the Di/adi class and not to the Bhvadi, as the form
flr^nT in the sutra shows
ctttT:
next world, yet as that
in the
the verb favi^directly and not through the
rcr*J
Here
'.
not of the verb RH*, the substitution does take place.
produces paraloukika
verb
produces effect
of the food
II
'
causes food to be prepared for the purpose of giving to the Brahmanas

the effect of ^PT and
for
is
Why
^r^%^lWR he
no substitution of
is
its
m^ of the
therefore, the
and so there
life,
See
The force of f%^ is here that of knowThe ascetic acquires certain know-
austerities, the
ledge through
bt?T rrprafrT*
next world
to the
3^PT
refer to
Thus
hurt
',.fsr
affix *nr follows, as
a <\o
*fRrr%, W5frr%,
ll
nm\ Cr wt,
fr^r
ft^rara., ifasr
suss
sRaran^r^rerei
there
'
q^n%
i)
*m^
substitution of
is
to scatter
and
*,
î"
f$m
sTTsrnrHr Hîcr
srr
^rr^rf rgfa
11
for the
finals
when the
which demand
to decay
well as before those affixes
ft^ro,
this substitution for the diphthong.
By
force of the
word
'
and
in the
sutra,
place of the diphthongs also of these verbs before
and
this substitution
stood as
ing to
if
,J
So
they were enunciated with an
3TT will
apply to them.
Thus
affixes other than
takes
r^,
the occasiDn for the applying of the
takes place, before
affixes arises (3<ff ^PR^TST* 3tr*f "*&&*)
the substitution
all
sprier,
that these Verbs should be under-
btt,
so that
all
rules of affixes relat-
JPtra^W., spTrf*,
ST*fRT,
RTTrTT, R*Tnj*,
f^RRT^*, f?RR, ST^mr, ^T^m^^, STSTcJI., 37^3 H The substitution of 3Tr being understood to have taken place in the very s<Tf sr (in the dhatupa^ha) of
4
io62
Substitution
err
Bk. VI. Ch. L
52.
these roots, the affixes relating to roots ending in f or f do not apply to these
at all.
Thus gq j r 4 r ?4fa, ?^T^R, formed by sfsr and 5^ by taking ff = ^T and
adding these
3.
56)
and
ciw *?nit
srrfo^
11
affixes (III.
??P5(III.
3.
3.
128 and
and not the
sr^ (III.
affixes
11
RHlf^îf wFfir* xr^^r *fk^:
There
51.
is
5^
11
substitution of
optionally the
the final of x 'to adhere

affix
III. 3. 18)
126).
',
3?T
for
dMtup&tha, when the

would demand this substi-
in the very
follows or such an affix as
tution of the diphthong.
The final of ^ will take guna substitution before fo^ affixes, and
become %, this incipient diphthong v[ is changed to 3TT by this rule. The
same is the case with all the roots subsequently taught, thus f^x Wl ^ be %^
and then q" changed to 3TT, ^=T|T and atr changed to 3TT &c. Therefore we
have employed the anuvritti of qf^ diphthong in all sutras. The words
will
'
and
FSfrT
and Kriyadi
ffifa\
fa^Ho
are both included here.
f%rtdM*i
Vdrt:
(III.
56,
3.
fsrfSnra:,
The
Thus
BTrT^T 3"<T^r are understood here.
The
III.
The
rft
and ?a^
t^rtiPT^:, jp=ror
?ft
belonging to Divadi
f^Tg*,
RcilrlF,
faftTcr 5
re^ra,
fafftq U
substitution
3TT
134)
1.
Fwm T^?r
and
roots
(III.
qiin
takes
invariably
does not take place when the

3.
1
126)
f^rr
come
fron,
substitution
3TT
As
of 'showing respect/'deceiving'or 'insulting'.
after FT,fa, A\
f%?rar **%
and
rft
as,
11
when the
3fitc4iy4iqq%,
affix anr^r
sense
that
is
33% ^f%3nWTO%
II
The option allowed by this aphorism is a restricted option (vyavasthita-vibhasha)

The substitution of 3?r for the final off is optional when the sense of the root
is not that of 'showing respect', 'subduing' or 'deceiving*.
But when it has any
one of these three senses, the substitution
ftl$A^fa
fnr
11
pr*rrqf?r
AR
II
*^%
52.
in the
II
q^TR
II
T%^:,
rer?V*is^TO ^cfrdr:
There
is
is
compulsory.
^T%
is
understood here.
ll
I.
70.
sm^^r^ f^m f%vrrsrr btt^tr arT^ >r^r%
optionally
f^rt ^l^frf
I.
II
the
room of the diphthong of the verb
in the Chhandas.
The word m^rm
secular literature we have
See
substitution
fer?
<
of
sit
to sutler pain \
Thus f^xr M<flH
or
fMs*
it
In
Bk. VI. Ch.
ffrf: u gft
I.
56
Substitution.
stt
1063
tott?^** >TnTR7^^ "isfo wr <p* Wl% rwsrr btt^tr Brrf^r *nrr%

There is optionally the substitution of stt in the
53.
:
room of the diphthong
of the root g*: 'to exert'
ceded by the preposition

The
3TT
and taking the
affix
forming the Absolutive Participle
affix <*$;*
is
,3
when
npr
pre-
11
added by
III. 4.
and the word formed by it is repeated. Thus 3T<T*TlT'TT*Trcl. or srriTKHMtlHm

So also this affix is added by III. 4. 53 as, stopptk 3^1% or srewnt ^*F%
u they are fighting with raised swoids
22,
II
'.
fer^dnff
v*
There
54.
room
the
^tr
II
is
^^n,
f%,
II
orr
II
optionally the substitution of
of the diphthong of the roots f% and
in
stt
^*: when
in
the Causative.
Thus
^T2|^
*qTTOftf
(VII.
3.
36 for the addition of v) so also *T?fainT
or wiuift'
sr^%
^Ttt:
11
tffrnfc n <\\
<rrr?r?
^war
11
qîfa
There
55.
II
srer^, pt^t: n
^ ît^^Fc^^^ i**w wn&

is
*nft
^sfto
^ mm
room of the diphthong of the root ^t

when meaning to conceive an embryo \
the
in the
art
ff
in
causative,
'
The root $ Adadi 39 means 'to go, to conceive, to shine, to eat, and to
The substitution takes place when it means 'to impregnate or conceive'.
Thus get ?rrar IP *nrrq-srnr or srerc3frf = rw m^fa
The word ihr means the
receiving of the embryo which in course of time will lead to the birth of a child.
desire'.
11
fa*cft3*r%
*t?ti%
11
11
ir?rf*
11
ft%:,
tg
*rq-
11
11
56.
There
is
the diphthong of the root
the fear
is
Ho
*ff
fear', in
the Causative,
srr
for
when
produced directly through the agent, of the causa"
tive.
sutra
is-
The words #r and f^TTqr are understood here. The word $3 in

the technical ^3 meaning m^TTO JHfnnfi ( I 4- 54* and 55
When
).
the
the
1064
srr
Substitution.
Hetu Agent himself
is
ff*T3 "the fear caused
by the Hetu".
Bk. VI. Cn.
directly the cause of the fear, that fear
Thus gr^t
HfTgcT
VII.
3.
is
36
I.
the
called
or
.58
vrfcTSKT
This root takes the affixes of the

3. 40; So also ^rr^r *rrra% or vrfagar
Atmanepada, by I. 3. 68; and the augment q- is added by VII. 3. 40, which does
not come when there is 3?r substitution, for the vff in VII. 3. 40 is equal to *ft+e. vft ending in f; and means ^f ending in f takes the augment qr
f
(VII.
ll
i.
it
Why
?
r^c^
fi%
wiS
ll
u ^nrr^f^r rarer,
*rr
V9 n
lf??^m
*f
TOT R^TTHfrdw *r^
There
57.
tt%
ll
shows that the
we have
i.
e.
produced from the
is
r? tt*u
ftT^fro*pr??reT ^r^r%-
'to
rc*r
smile'
in
the Causative,
understood here. The word f?^

OtherThus gr^nTT^ IT fWTTTS??
The word >T3 here is taken to mean wn%
See I. 3. 68 where also this meaning has
l\
connection with
11
11
to create \
and
(the
II
far,
iftfeq
and
together; the proper
?g*Tar in
word ought
connection with
vft
II
\*
i#*f *$?% ^fn, 3rr%, wz, 3rfcr%
f^^r^rW^feirrqT^m imv *&m s^rrw *nn%
of *5?
augment sra; (st) comes after the
11
11
11
11
The
58.
for
produced directly through the Agent
connection with
its
^f%^nawr%T%
^*r iwr, ?i%0^%
3?r
fc^TO are both
^f3^^?|qr flrerorai^
to have been ^*ra[ in
^letter
11
anuvritti of pwrqr ceases.
been extended to vr by
is
invariably the substitution of
is
'wondering, feeling astonished'.
srfrT
^ndr:
ft^r,
R^f^rrC^rrsR?
the astonishment
of the Causative.
The words oft and
wise
fear
the producer of the
11
the diphthong of the root
when
Here the
II
is
and not from Devadatta the Agent.
$r>-^37r
vt*k
^N"^%^ ^r^%%3TrT
Observe
fear
do we say 'when the agent of the causative
^sr
'
to see
Mute and the
',
when an
Sibilant)
affix
beginning with a
follows: provided
that
has no indicatry 3?
Thus ^ff + q^*f + 3T- + 3T + ^ = ^f nom. sing. $rer, so also *, tfssara,
fZL %%% ?S^W.Il This 3TH. augment prevents the guna substitute ordained by
it
VII.
II
3.
86.
But
and
in 3WT$fr?
3T?T^f<X trie
Vriddhi takes place
in the Aorist,
augment 3T*I. had taken effect.

do we say when beginning with a Mute or a Sibilant? Observe
Why do we say not having an indicator)' 3T? Observe
^rro with 5
after the
Why
^Sjrjp^,
Jffffs,
ll
before the affix
the rule applies
when
^r-
11
The forms
other affixes relating to
noun
come after these, and not when

Thus ^^^r^CT^, ^^"SfPfcH Here the
than verbs. For the maxim W^l- S^T^t^f
follow.
words are used as nouns rather
^cJF^î
of roots being exhibited in the sutra,
affixes relating to verbs
applies here,
Bk. VI. Cn.
61
I. .
tft^ Substitution.
st^ttt^t ^ftrvj^rff qî^m
\^
\\
q^n%
11
The augment WK comes
59.
55 of those roots which are exhibited
when such
anudatta,
penultimate, and
mute
as
consonant having a 55 as
by an affix beginning with a
^lezPTftrirF
Thus
I!
?tot
or
we have
45), so
2.
Why
instruction " ?
do we say
'
Why
rTTtrrij;,
for
^ letter
'
from
lSW*HL,
3> it
^5?
3SPT? which
takes f? optionally.
Observe
vp^r, StTT
Why
II
beginning with a mute or a sibilant'? Observe

do we say 'not having an indicatory 3? ? Observe ^jp,
affix
'
Before affixes not
be inserted, as
given above
the Upadesa" or the system
has an indicatory
having a penultimate
before an
II
it
in
^, 3^,
Observe
exhibited as TOrT. ar>d because
the three forms
enunciation.
do we say "which are anudatta
of grammatical
do we say
fTTÎ. ^TTO
first
'
',
these roots are also anudatta in their
11
optionally after the
and cr to be happy
?W, ^fqTTT 01* SWT H The roots <i to satisfy
belong to Divadi class, sub-class Radhadi, and they take the aug-
to release',
PP
% ^^, ^
in the Dhatupfitha
understood here, so also
g-q-f^r is
ment f? optionally (VII,
Why
st^^ttt^-,
in a
are followed
?rffar or *mr,
is
11
and not having an indicatory
or sibilant
The word
end
roots
1065
beginning with a ^pj consonant
îr*
this
augment
will
not
II
*&**. 3^T%
u-^% fimv fiwmti
word
The
60.
tftjk^ is found in the Chhandas.
This is not a
This word is another form of f^x and means head
Thus safairf
substitute of rr in the Vedas, for both forms are found therein.
5?m^T% M
ffrP
11
*ff#rafsr
**%*&
^rare tester
II
*renm?
ri
'.
^m
f? rre
one form
*r
'
*rrr%F*i
t&rT 5#r,
f^pc
<rfefr n
11
?rr
%\n
%\
when
must
original
infer
it,
for
11
spfrora. H
v^rft
There
The word
The
^fr s fr
In the secular literature there
is
only
11
*, ^,
mk%
11
ii
61.
for feTCH
3%
ll
^Tfq^
which
The
is
the
substitution of this
a Taddhita-affix beginning with

is
understood here.
this substitution
appropriate original
stem sft^
follows.
This rule teackes substitution.
comes
is
sr
ftrc^
is
II
not given in the sutra,
Thus tfHp^t
f?
3*&3T
we
W^>
Some Substitution.
io66
*ftq^F
^t:
retains
its
The
II
original
by anything
else
follows'? Observe
there
Vdrt:
The word
55.
II
sfHrw
hair
As
'.
?nW-
II
wft
II
There
when a Taddhita
when meaning
optional
is
srfe, fStk:
II
srarft rrra% ftrar tftfors? 3rf?^r *^r?r
62.
affix
the
is
it
11
substitution
of ^fn- for fen^T
beginning with a vowel follows.
Thus ^rrto^TST^ = ^rf^ftf^ formed by adding the Patronymic affix f3

Had the word been tfffc* (instead
96). So also *UH(WT f 5*=-- ^Jr^fm
(IV.
I.
^ffq-
II
as taught herein) then
would have retained
it
its final 7^
and would not have given the proper forms (VI. 4.

forming the feminine of ?Tff?r$frf$" by adding csnr (IV. 1. 78),
affixes
culty
s^
STffrT*nT*P,
(n)
is
a Taddhita affix beginning with
we must apply
being the substitute of
r^r
purposes of that rule VI.
1.
is
prima facie a
when
Again
arises
this diffi-
this
^rfcFdfcri'
^f^W^ + 5^^rf^?<3;+g(the \
substitute a zero or <w?5T)
is
in
applied to
sfrfa; (for
m$^
of ^fr? also for the
get will be
this, fTRrT-
6i) = srRrrtfrTW (VI.
1.
is
substitute
The form which we
61).
(VI.
yrong form, the desired form
the affix
2f,
these
before
168).
the last rule and change the #sf into
*^: + i^ = ?rfsraft$*i+*
is
62
168)
4.
The substitution
rr% ^fr*:
of
3.
the final 3T^ not being replaced
^,
this affix
I.
Wl y do we say when 'a Taddhita-affix

=
rm ft&Trt RRWrT, here q is not a Taddhita affix, and so
(VI.
*ZX' SFSTT: or HjT^t: %3TT:
fr%:
added by IV.
here
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
no substitution.
is
11
affix
form before
is
Now
elided
II
How
by VI.
4.
But this is a
4. 168).
do we explain this ? Thus
148 and in the room off we
adesa becomes sthanivat to f, thus

3 not being directly applied to tfft, because this zero intervenes, ^ftq11
this
by tffq-^ as required by VI. 1. 61, for it is not followed by an

beginning with q but by a zero sthanivat to fâffix.
not replaced
affix
This sutra
is
not of Panini, but
is
really a Vartika
raised to the rank
of a sutra by later authors.
<*?,
*%
f fir
wpt
*&%
*rr*
11
to;,
m^,
WC, h?!,
m m nfam *m *t*
**rtrairera3 <ror tt
srfîr
11
?mm^ *wftr
q-frrl^
fasrr
srsnc,
\**,
cfr**,
V^, 5^,
^nrn^ frcr *** to**^ amnr
^ûr^^
f%
3m^f^'
fan*
*^
11
^c^rg^^R* u
srr*
11
^ *mw*r *<icr^?g
11
f^<rr
top*
t^3C,
sts^ptt
srnra
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
w Substitution.
64.]
weak
In the
63.
(beginning with the ac-
cases
are substituted
cusative plural) the following stems
*S
<rrr>
for
for 5n%*FT>
q^
sr^r,
R5TT, 3t^j; for

SRfiq;
TO
for qpa,
*m, w%
for
m*J
^r^
for ^7,
for
^r^,
for
3^ for t^f: and arre^ for srr^T
?rr^ri;,
The Kasika
^ for
CT^ m?t
^^^
for
t^c,
II
Kau-
gives >HHJ< as the substitute for 3TRRC, the Sidhdnta
say that these substitutions take place
for
Some
gives the original as 3TR3J which has been adopted in the above.
mudi
the Vedic Literature only, others
in
Others read the word 'optionally' into this sutra from
say, they are general.
VI.
1067
59 and hold that these substitutes are optional and not compulsory.
I.
Examples
>wr^R
I.
T^ RfT?TcpT
5T^- sro^^reRrircn" u 4
h 3
*rr^r
TfRRfa TR^
"^rfo
II
rrmw qwnr ^^rr
SrTT
^HUrT rR3
g^ 55 r
*?rt *rstt
Sf[ *r
n 5
v ar^^- -siflreii ^rrt*rt u 8 gq^ ?rc

6 fsrsr- -wrereirai' Rrftr 3%<t
speirt
*r^
f^r arm^TTFT n 9 ^q^- i% ft*jfr Iptf*** 10 g^re12 sf^sjjr $4& ir^r % u 13 sttckbtrjr r% sft t^rt
^raRT tort
Why do we say when the weak terminations ^rsr &c follow ? Observe
As examples of this substitutions in the secular
Trft% STRffrî" TrRcT% ?r 3>5T
Hwft$q*i
ii
qrerpr
ii
ii
II
literature also, the following
may
be given
sarramôr *tr*to <nrars5Rfaw
*r
*rrw ^rrcprfo %^rtrt#r;*tp
ii
These substitutions take place before other

Sf^rq^/jt 3r=q%
Vdrt:
for TrRTT,
T^R^P
The following
and *%
*T*r.
and the word
IV.
3.
55 and V.
Vdrt
when
TTf^ra ^TT^
fr%
*:
v^ranr?:
^rfrRfi*
11
it
The
*T
cRT
is
*r
HRT for HRT,
TfcrTîP (Yaj.
TW, n&
as, *\&Fl,
taught in V.
XXV.
4.
when the
?;
The
II
36),
affixes zng
qqr
f<^
<pg
'
is
and
taught in
45.
?RT for ?rrRJ37r before the affix

cities' as:
^Rrrf?r
vtt^t^:,
%*
wf> ^nrfWr vnrRr
II
II
^rRT^sr ^fr
'a
?jqr
does not
nasal letter*
*F*ni&
II
n, *r.
II
11
gs^rRjflf^^TRri
<*
as, ^n*T ttq^fr,
fnr^rr btp-t^^ for aTfwRrq; n
?r
refers to 'letters', or
being the
Dh&tup&tha.
II
for
substituted for ?ft%3rr only
is
[? follow
64.
the
II
11
1.
Tsr
TOT^TP
The substitution of
take place
vtr^:
^ % fWf
The
Vdrt
substitutions also take place
for stRT: as snTPS"*
*tzn for frRTRpref*,
affixes also
II
JTraq*fr
There
ii
room of
the substitution of ^r in the
is
initial
^*
of a verbal root as enunciated in the
roots exhibited in the
Thus q? ^f, fq^ RJ^frT
II
Dhatupatha with an initial q", change it for

Why do we use the word root ? Observe
*
'
^SUBSTITUTION;
1068
qTTST, qf"3P,
T7^
Why
do we say
'initial
[Bk. Vl. CH.
Observe
'?
^qfrT,
I.
6$
Why
qftr H
Dhatupatha with an initial q, when for

qthis
is
to
be
replaced
by ^r, would it not have been
all practical purposes
easier to spell at once these words with a g" ? This appears cumbersome no
have then roots been exhibited in the
doubt, but the spelling of the roots with
q- is
sake of brevity.
for the
Certain
q when preceded by certain letters those roots

which thus change their letter g- for q have been at once taught with an initial
by VIII. 3. 59 tneir ST is changed to q Thus from r%3" instead
q-, and thus
change
roots
their
tf
into
11
Thus root is exhibited in the Dhatupatha with a q-,

of r^vT^ we have irrq-?r
the
that
Otherwise a list of
know
ST must be changed to q
and thus we
be
separately
given.
One must refer to the Dhatusuch roots would have to
II
11
patha
for a list of
with a
As
such roots.
a general rule,
and followed by a vowel or a dental
Dhatupatha
as
beginning with an
initial
however
roots beginning
all
have been taught
in
the
q as well as the following roots
fff,
letter
though followed by ^ or %
The following roots
*^, f*3T>
though followed by a vowel or a dental are not taught with an initial q viz.
*T*, ", *?T, *?n, %^r, and ^
re^f and
*fr
II
II
Vdrt:
Prohibition
must be stated of the roots derived from nouns,
Thus qr?2T%, wHxm are roots derived from nouns, and

and of fer and 5^7
though these roots begin with q- are not changed so {%% r^TTrT, ^^7^5^% n
The word rg* contains in it two roots rg^r and fs?j^, one with y, another with
11
V, and thus
substitution
ofr ?t:
II
V^
T^rfr
*n,
qfr^ff:
roots beginning with a
*f
t*r
&r$rsqfr *
66.
?r
The
roots are exibited in the
certain
Dhatupa-
.By VIII.
ll
4. 14,
prepositions.
All
should be understood to have been so taught, with

:
ii
There
nft-^TOfcT, tttjt rprf^,
they are exibited with q
;j,
rffs* ?rff
?^,
11
is
when followed by
mv
^[f?,
r
$% t^crR ^t:, *$r<, wfe
*r^ ^x ?Tf iraf$ftr% g*T3T3?T?*rrf*f tT*
11
qraiftfa
Thus
for the initial
not apply to roots derived
when preceded by
v\
into
the exception of the following
and
This does
II
for a similar reason as
these roots change their
11
The
ll
understood here,
is
v&ttW&sfft = ^rfrsicT
from nouns.
ff*r
*tf
But not 3F*r 3T<*T??r
TOfrT H
tha with
ll
There is the substitution of ^

the Dh&tup&tha.
of the root in
The phrase
"J
II
II
65.
Wf
we have two forms in the reduplication

#grs3Rf, ff^farer
of *T for q takes place in the case of the root that has q-
?rr?i
II
eft ^rwir^rrfr^
lopa-substitution
an}'
and
^ra^re^r-
(elision) of the
consonant except
*r
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
The
1.
The
67]
final
a of any stem, be
or
qr
elision of 3
it
and
1069
11
a root or not,
is
by an
elided
affix &c,
Thus ff^+^
e. any consonant except w
beginning with a ^consonant
nom
singular
=
+
+
fff^f^, f^f^mr, TWTTCT:
III. 2. i07)
fH fH ^*I^^f^!
So also the affix 5*
Thus 3^+rf = 3JrT, 'spun', fpg + ^ = 7^ 'made a noise'.
comes after 1TTCT in forming patronymic ( IV. 1. 129). Of the affix *rf, * is
replaced by qa (VII. I. 2). Thus itp*T + T^r + K = *tfar- (the ^ of the affix being
even elided before K) H So also in T%*^, ?m^ the * of fo^ ( III. 4. 102) is
i.
11
II
elided before
sfo3T3 (by
:
affix
^(11 1.
Unadi
io5).So also*
4.
affix
tr^ with the negative
Unadi
tion of
by VI.
affixes (III.
a?
elided in the following:
is
from f&*
-3fr% *3T3 )
3q%r*TTtf'i.
there
is
from Tft%-
formed by the Un6di
There being diversity
II
3. 1),
the
in
not 3>s substitution for
applica-
as required
4. 19.
Why do
we say
any consonant except 3

the word r5f<T is placed
"before
Observe S^TCf,
The elision
first ?
when ^ is not elided. Why
elision
of
in the
take
place
prior
to
the
the
taught
^should
aprrikta
r
and
of 5
=
=
+
(VI.
+
zftv^
%= *{Fj:
So ftrw?*
4. 48 )
next sutra. Thus gfipf;* feq<T 3r&^ *
Why* of 5r*j is not elided before ^ which is a consonant? It is
+ f^r = 95T^;
JKsg%
11
11
not elided, because
it is
Had
so taught.
the elision of * been intended, the root
would have been enunciated as înstead of prs* H If you say the * is taught for
the sake of forms like fwrW by samprasarana. and *5T^ by reduplication, here also
the 'lopa' would have applied, as being an Antaranga rule, while samprasarana,
and the
elision of
%tT*^
II
^ by ^rf^sp
<TTTT%
II
are Bahiranga.
II
3R^W
II
*Tf!%ll
There
67.
to the single letter
The
affix fift*
affix f*
Observe
formed
some
is
is
In
affix ft includes f^TT, ftqq[, p?f &c.
affix
f^r
is
elided.'
elided.
So
when reduced
II
*, which being an aprikta
Here the
elision of the affix fe
is
(I. 2.
So
41),
also
also 3T*Nr^
is
all
Thus
elided.
*rT^, &?^T^
WTT *,
5
these, the real affix is

ffglfr,
ôr^r (III.
(III. 2. 58).
3*fcprr*j (III. 2. 62).
87).
elided.
Why
^J
f^nj;,
do we say " of an aprikta an affix consisting of a single letter" ?

formed by the affix f^(nf being the real'affix) so also
see Unadi Sutras IV. 53. 44. No root can become a noun unless
krit affix
is
added
to
it
(see
I. 2.
45 and 46)
the rank of nouns
from Dhatu
And though
s^V
hence the necessity of these
imaginary affixes, in order to raise certain roots bodily, withdut
affix.
2.
Here the
Here the
to a Pratipadika the
these imaginary affixes are after
way
all
lies
any change, to
only through an
totally elided, yet
by
Elision of
io;o
I.
j%, fa
and 5
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
6S
mark behind, namely the derivative

Thus f%?r words are adverbs (Gati) and
62, they leave their characteristic
1.
word becomes a nominal stem &c.

lndeclinables.
^fcfa, g,
3tt^*>
fa,
fcr,
After a consonant there
68.
nominative-affix *t and
long vowels and
after the
there
3TT5.),
The
and fa (when
) being consonants; and so also
of the feminine (affix #r and
the
reduced to the form of ^ and
tense-affix
sr
stt
is
But
only after a consonant and hence we have translated
srf^r^rr,
W^
TT^^T
^rfr
sonants
of
: as,
a consonant
after
After a ^r
I'
The
Il
4.
VII.
4:
BTH^TS^r
is
elided
(f*T +
by
q^+^ iMH.
as, ^rcrft,
im,
VI.
4. 8 )
+ O = *T5TT,
66 and
I.
51
i.
II
+ ^+m^=sr+^+>^ +
So
II
the Imperfect has been elided.
and f% are elided

As examples
as above.
^=3T+ i + i+q[(Vl.
,
)=3? + >T+^ +
?j[
VII.
4.
1.
10)
6o) = 3T + ar
54) = 3T + f^ + ^ + ?i (VII.
84 ) = 3TR^+ q;= srft^
it
f?r
After 3tpt
Wffrft
^|T>
elision of fa and r% takes place only after con-
arfsrvpfar^ (^
ar + *Tt + I+-<*
+ ^ + * (VIII.
II
After a word ending in a conmeans

when a long vowel, the affixes 5, fa and
when reduced
sutra translated literally
to a single consonant affix (bt^Rt;^) are elided.
rTSTT, 3*5rT$nt>
r%
the elision of the nominative affix *T
sonant, or #t, or srrr
of the elision
the elision of the
is
^+
fa
UI
4. 76) = sr + r? + vTi+q:
(VII. 3.
anrnr^wjll In both these cases ^ of
The îs elided in the following: 3TPT%S?r,
Tne is changed into by VIII. 2. 75 and
also
this rule).
Why
do we say "after a consonant, or a feminine affix $ and srr"?

%^RT H Why do we say after a long* vowelled feminine
Observe pr^w^r, 9*ra^ where the feminine affixes have been
affix " ?
" ?
shortened. Why do we say "when followed by 5, fa and
Observe sr%Observe
Tirâfp,
<
The
being read along with
fa, does not include rh* but refers to

Why do we say when reduced to a single letter' ? Observe f*RF<7,
f%ti only.
Why do we say the consonant .is elided ? Observe
f^TT%
ttffq; u
'
'
II
Here the aprikta

titute of
used
fir is
affix sr of the Perfect is
like fa,
in the sutra.
'
not elided
and ought to have been
elided,
fa^,
though
it
PT^?
\\
being the subs-
had the word
^ not been
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
Why
69
Elision of
fa, fa,
107
it
sr (ij),
(irTi) and 3. (fa?) been ordained
would of themselves have been dropped by VIII. 2. 23,
of a compound consonant? Then the forms *i*n\ r^tt could
has the elision of
rj[
after consonants, as they
being the.
finals
As
not be evolved.
by Rule VIII.
*T5F*+*T-*r5lPI +
*T
(VI.
the form would have
2. 23,
not have been elided by VIII.
2.
for
8) = *r5TT*S[ and by eliding
4.
become
it is
maxim
and the
*T3fPi,
opening of the Second chapter of the 8th Book, that
enunciated
so far as any preceding rule
effect,
concerned
is
as
is
if
could
the very
in
chapters
in the last three
of that Book (2nd, 3rd and 4th Books), a subsequent rule

taken
final JJ
had not
it
therefore, the rule
7 ordaining the elision of s^, does not find scope, since VIII. 2. 23
(ordaining elision of w) is considered as if it had not taken effect. So also in
VIII.
2.
the case of
and
3?srre?I
qtter<x
nasal being elided by VI.

elide
the
final
not by this
ct
we cannot change
the
Rule VIII.
is
+ a^+f^<T
III. 2.
76 = -^m + tf^r ( the
we
have
3*=rr^+ *t = ^rere*r
fj,
but by VIII. 2. 23, we have s^r^T, here
3??rr
now add
rule,
^ by VIII.
into
st
II
24);
4.
2.
72 for
ST
is
not final in a pada, for
effect.
So also in the
The word 3?fiR: is 2nd. Pers. sing, of the Imperfect of pri;
of Rudhadi class. Thus pr + ?jf + rpt = 3T + f*T^ + 5^*+ *r = 3? + pr^; + ^r = srf^TT
+ E[ (5 changed to * by VIII. 2. 75) = STP>5r^ll If we elide- the final sr of
23
2.
case of aTfspTrS^
considered as not to have taken
II
the cojunct by VIII.
into
to
23,
then in 8TpT?rr4 sr^,
form STfvRfSW by VI.
have not taken
Rule VIII.
by
2.
2.
CT^TTO (VIII.
2.
24),
fr%:
11
<*r<T
frit
<t^tt%
11
qr
in arfsnfrjr
11
by VIII.
2.
rnir
same
is
is
<%T
is
is
for *r#
sir
understood here also
as that of the nominative.
spjjl
*,
?jrrn
or a short vowel.
as well as 5W
srrar
1.
Now
11
The word
68 (though
affix
its
of Vocative
By
VII. 3. 108, the short vowel of the

the Vocative Singular affix follows.
for stp^T and ^rg
and by VII. 3. 107, a short
when
substituted for the long vowel % and 37 of the feminine
and
elided after
is
of the nominative-affix (g and

elided in the Vocative singular after a
replaced by a guna vowel
Thus we have sp% and

vowel
by
11
however is not to be read here, as its repetition in VI.

anuvritti was there from the preceding sCitra) indicates. The
the
*?^p,
restricted
t <jl*? % s^rcr^ra^Qr
ST|rK
is
is
23.
<f, t^rac, srsgt":
st^rict ^refsra%
nominal-stem enidng in ^ or
stem
sif^r
rule
The consonant
substitute sn*)
The word
considered as to
ct is
also in
i.
t%%, ?r^f%
69.
its
11
So
this rule.
would be no lopa even, for ^ffiTFcHPT

e. ^ only and no other consonant
therefore there will be no elision of
^^rrr^r.
the * would not be changed
113 since the ellision of
when applying
effect
24, there
1.
applying the present sutra, the affix
as qff
st is
and ro
elided after
10/2
$37
As "|
the above words.
all
AUGMENT.
BK. VI. CH.
I..
9%
The Vocative
^ ^ft % f^rj!, % ?rfl ?
thus formed.
By VII, I. 24, srr replaces *T
of 3?n. and the final 3? of ^^- coalesce into one sr by
?pr%
pf the nominative, the sr
!,
Singular of ^rg- a Neuter noun
'-,
is
Here by the rule that 'consonant' only is

$r which becomes a part of the word by
VI. I. 85, for it is considered both as the final of the word and the initial of
the affix). Now ^ is not an bt^ ?^ ff t s P art >f the affix 3T9., and its eli*
sion would not have taken place had we read the anuvritti of aprikta into this
Thus we have % p^
But in % ^frT^ there is not the elision of the
sutra.
VI.
which becomes <gxgn
107,
r.
we
to be elided,
elide
11
ônly (and not
II
is sr^ ( VII. 1. 25 ).
being f?<l causes the elision of the final 3? of 5ff^ (VI. 4. 143), and
have ^tt + 3T?i;, here we have not a pratipadika which ends in a short
of the affix bt^, the substitute of
This
we
the affix there
affix
vowel, but
word
fj for
in,
a consonant^ hence
gee also VII.
not elided,
is
25.
\.
The
used in the sutra in order to indicate that the guna substitution
is
Therefore
stronger than lopa.
then guna substituted for
\,
in fsrf^T-l-
but
!J,
there
first
the affix
is
guna
is
not elided
is
and
first
substitution and then the
affix is plicjed.
$nfc^fa ST3^
ff^T*
f^?T^
rcr
11
V9o
q^TT%
II
II
5T,
*?m f%q% ^nr *r?n%

In the Chhandas,
wgti
70.
ending *
II
^%^
3F^%,
II
11
the
elision
of the
case^
of the nominative and accusative plural neuter,
(f^r)
is
pptiqncil,
^ %^f or afTH %?rfpr, sf ^?tf or stpt srfr

5*rcr fai% sn% g^ \s?
t^TR ^^, farir,
rrnr &m
s*^ 3*tft% *rror
fr%:
Thus
11
11
11
the augment
s>r%,
g^
II
11
To
71.
11
<t*?tf
ii
a root ending in
(g*r)
when
a short vowel
a Krit-aff]x having
is
added
m indicatory
follqws.
Thus BTf^ + f^ + f^^^T^HTFi;,

3<T*3?T formed by the affix ?î
%%& and
vowel'
Observe
so also
11
$13^
Why
q^r and
Similarly
11
do we sayênding
in
a short
Why
do we say * having an indicatory qr " ?

Why
Observe firP*, frT*
do we say "a krit affix"? Observe T^:, q^J,
with the Taddhita-affixes **<* and tF^qr
In the compound ^f^r**, though
?
3TF**,
^PVm'
II
II
11
the root
is,
made
short, yet there
is
which the root has been shortened

an Antaranga one.' The maxim is
anga
is
which
is
no augment 5^,
is
3Tf%*j
regarded as not having taken
Antaranga
is
to take effect
in as
much
as the rule
by
a Ba4iiranga rule, and the present rule
ari^pranj
effect,
<
That which
or as not existing,
is
is
Bahir-
when
that;
Bk
VI. Ch.
^fed q
i
I.
74
\S*
II
The augment 3*
<T3T1%
II
II
%ft<mTT^
In the following
72.
words ^T%cn*TTO
clusive, the
II
upto VI.
stitras
157
1.
in-
an unbroken flow of speech
in
'
1073
11
',
should be supplied.
This
an adhikara or governing sutra, exerting
is
What
we
its
influence upto VI.
must be understood to apply to words which are in tfftrTr, that is, which are pronounced together with an uninterrupted voice, Thus ^m, *P^TW the f and 3 are changed
Otherto q and ^ when the two words are pronounced without any hiatus.
I.
158.
wise
we
shall
d^
ever
have $fa
II
shall say
%,
The augment
vowel also when ^
speech.
Thus f^fa, rpesfw
short vowel itself
is
that,
II
73.
short
preceding
ar^r, 1*J 3T^T M
T^rft
vss H
in the stitras
the
II
3TT*T*ft
The
?j
added to
is
3c
follows
an
in
changed to
is
(the thing to
preceding
uninterrupted
^ by VIII.
which the augment
4.
The
40.
added), and
is
not the word ending in that short vowel. Therefore in W^5^JJ, HTf%5:, the
augment is not to be considered as part of the Reduplicate fa, but of the short
f only and therefore it is not elided by ^j^: *^T (VII. 4, 60) rule applying to
;
reduplicates,
This follows on the
maxim nnvHT^QT-
*T3?TOre*rer *ref% "the part
of a part cannot be considered as a part of the whole".

the abhyasa syllable fa which
is itself
not considered as an abhyasa: or because
dered as part of f and not of fa of which $
srr^r^nsr
11
vs*
74,
the prohibitive
11
T^rft
11
Here
q[ is
a part of
a part of the verbal base, therefore
wr&,
yj
is
being an augment of f
is
fj is
consi-
the part.
*rr^f:,
11
The augment 3; is added to the particle 3tt and

particle jtt, when ^ follows in a continuous
text.
The
as a prefix
Particle STT has the four senses of
(f^Rrr:)
3.
the limit inceptive
I.
littleness
BTRrlrfa)
and
4.
(fsrw)
2.
with verbs,
the limit exclusive
3* necessarily, where by VI. 1. 76, itjvould have been

Thus f q^rar = srrsSTSr; 2. With verbs: as 34l^|^r^, 3 and 4- arpisSTOrar:,
So also the negative particle *rr, as, *rr%*r?t, **TM^? \ H The ^ m vn;^
^Tr^r^nr
fairer).
This sutra ordains
Optional.
ll
Rule^ or sandhi.
1074
and
shows that
*rrf;
when used
when used as a Gati and
3TT
as a negative particle are meant.
in the following:
Bk. VI. Ch.
may
? is
yy
*TT
not necessary
be optionally added in
The 3?r here has the force of recollection

The word %m is formed from the verbal root
by the ptefix and the affix 3T^ fill. 3. 106) with the feminine
and the word ending in 2tt has not the indicatory ^
*tf3F
I.
a Karmapravachaniya and
Therefore, the
sTroîl The ra;
3TT3T2Tr *TR3r%,
these as 3TT35TOT and ST>TP5^:

(Sâr); 3TT3T^r "Oh the shade".
sj"
affix 2-pr,
II
fr*r\
*\
qîfN"
11
Thus
g^
frim,
The augment
75.
followed by
11
added to a long vowel, when
3; is
continuous text.
in a
jjHsft, *33T%, 9TT3rre3T2W, ff^rr5^R%
II
The augment belongs
to the long vowel and not to the whole syllable ending in

<T3T?cTT3CT
\ 1%
11
II
VS^
q^Tfa
II
^fafa^gptit ^trf
*T g*TPT%T
srf%3re
11
W?r
^T?cTF^, ^T, epZ

^grcKrcKnwgfei
II
II
'Rrarrftafaror
*$& Hfoq ^r F&t
*m
11
nr^r^rfRr s^Rr^rr
final in
full
^r^*
3*TrT*TT ^r^rfrm
The augment
76.
vowel
that long vowel.
ii
added optionally to a long

word (Pada) when followed by & n
^,
This allows option where by the
is
last it
would have been compulsory
The augment is of the long vowel, and not of the word ending in
long vowel. Thus gftrHgrror or frarfew, fT?5Ngrar or a^terar
The âr augto add
it.
ll
ment here is added to the end of a pada, and this is therefore a padanta rule
and not a pada-vidhi. Therefore the two words need not be in construction
Thus f^^ jJHTfr'egN'
for the application of this rule; (sr*Tr T^fr) not applying.
SO-^-dHl, "let the girl stay. Take the umbrella of Devadatta". Here cgru% and
S^- are not in construction, but 337 is stll added optionally.
Vdrt
ferersre &c.
The augment
As,
v\ *mfe
arf%
11
rT
r^^nH^T* or
11
vs\9
11
<t^tt%
is
optional in the Chhandas, after the words
nm^s^, ^T^^T^ft a^pro* or ?r^rat jr^frwi u

II
srra
**?:, iun,
wmvnt *nn$ u
î^rro sr^ftfrrw^ ^mrWr ^^3:
\\
3tht virf fq^r
*rrr%3TO.
11
%?*
77.
"The semivowels
of the corresponding vowels
when followed by a
This sutra
is
%,
sr,
3",
11
^, r, s are
3 and
the substitutes
(long and short),
vowel.
rather too wide.
It
must be
namely the following vowel must not be of the same
restricted
by VI.
I.
101,
class as the preceding for
BK. VI.
Cli.
80
of this
application
the
K4r/:
THE SANDHl
Thus
rule.
^rv|
1.1
-f-
1.1
1075
sa
3^ = ^W,
*H|
+ a* * = T^f*,
5
This semivowel substitution of vowels takes place,
ceded by a prolated vowel, even to the supersession of VI.
Thus
lengthening.
The phrase when

'
ff%
r^
II
sp^TT \ f f?j=3Ttt
a vowel follows' exerts
*1"R~ Sf^r 'Krft
S^ 3T^ 3TT^
3TT* f
For the vowels
78.
TO
ftFR.
its
^%
3"
and
TO%
pre-
requiring
3*^,-3**^
VL
influence upto
sff
when
101
I.
3^*=<T*T
8?ftW 3*T!W*
$,
sc,
9^
108.
I.
are respectively
srr
and stt^t when a vowel follows.

Thus f^ + e^7 = % + BT?T = ^JRI, ^r + 3T?T = ^?r;% + ST^ = q-r?T^-, 3f + BTcf?
substituted
asnr
sre
3Tr*r,
=Rnrer:
So
11
fr%:
$iw^. **n%
11
w%3re.
tr|[tr
11
vs^
II
q^rr%
II
II
^t* n 3T^TfRr*r
11
The
i48)=^r + 3T?r=^3T:
2.
sr^
s^rfr
irera
<T*^rr
substitution of 3?^
3^
and
5TT*
also
come when an
substituted letters
146 and IV.
1.
with an
affix
initial
viz. st*
3?
follows.
11
It
srf
and
II
Of
the four
srând
(viz.
follows that the
Thus
+ ^x= arret + *I = 3T^P (VI.
3TT and afr
So also^pô^:, ^fis^r^, fq-^sar. sjnw *rrsqr(IV. 4. 91)5^:11
and 3TT^ "? Observe TCifcestfcT^tzinT, no change of q- be-
must be
II
105).
Why
for
3"
and srnMI
those which end in gr
substitutes taught in the preceding sutra,
**n%
11
those which end in *
^FrT are
11
II
also takes place before an affix beginning with
The
4.
(in.
srran, ft,
^rerilsr arfanroi st* sffanrrofnc. st
^fa
79.
srr
sim^fe, s + g^"
also *$?&, S8fa>,
R" srere
STFcTT
fore
do We say "ar*
Why do we say
3
affix " ?
Why do we say
Observed RHt, ÎFPl.
Vdtt
The word ift is changed before ar% in the Vedas. As ifr + ^r%
=fTsgr%, as 3?Rr Orer Wtf f%^l*mg$nT*UI Why do we say 'in the Vedas'?
11
an
Vart:
1 1
*Tf3i%:
II
This substitution takes place when referring to the measur
as, nsffrT
'TTW^R *Trf
II
vrrcfR^rF^Tr^lrar
*HiHrir
before ^"? Observe trpqpi, ?P*IPl.

I
Observe
"
This
II
to* t^t SRrfWt n^m
is
in the secularliterature,
\\
t^tt%
ii
of a road:
i&nth meani lg
^rnr:, crftrmTrer, t*s
gFftrgrni.il
II
11
For the final diphthongs sft and aft of a root,

substituted sre and 3rrr respectively, before an- affix begin80.
are
ning with
first
*r,
then only when such diphthong has been
evolved by that
affix.
itself
The Sandhi
io/6
rules.
VL
Bk.
Ch.
82'. )
The words ^psr:, *l-îr^[ JP3% are understood in this sutra. The word
^^r%TT means 'caused by that L e. caused or occasioned by that affix beginning with q
Thus ft forms its Future Passive Participle by ^(11 1. 1. 97), this
affix causes the guna of 37 by VII. 3. 84: Thus ^+?j = <% + 3f, which according
So also* <TT + 3 = ^5^11 w + onrj(III.i.i25)
to the present sutra becomes r^*t
^ + zf = 3^^j^f$afând3T^2(cri5^^li Why do we say'ofa root'? This rule should
'
11
For then, though
not apply to a nominal stem.

of *
4- 2?
where
=*
stt
3T9T + r = mqpQ
and
srf
it
are not caused
before the affixes
were added.
it
may
be
all
right in the case
not apply to cases like ifr 4- 3= tts^,
will
by the
% + 3 = TT^,
stem
do we say 'caused by that affix itself? The
When the change is not caused by that affix.
affix,but are integral parts of the
Why
substitution will not take place,
Thus the Passive of % with the upasarga stf is srr+% + 3^+%=Here by

Samprasarana(VI.i.is)3r becomes 3,as 3TT + S + * + lr; now by sandhi 3TT + 3; = STr
VI. I. 87), we have srr + *RT = afrÊT Since aff is not caused by 3, there is no ^\
So also 3TRET, ftRPfffc:, $T8Rn%: (IV. 1. 95). The word cjf in the
substitution.
II
aphorism has the force of limitation, with regard to roots. In the case of
roots, afr and art before q are changed then only to art. and 3TT* when q has
caused the production of aqrr and 3TT in case of nouns there is no such limita;
Here the substitution takes place whether the 3 has caused the production
of 8TT and aft or not.
tion.
In ^q* and spar there
81.
for
when the
only then
q;
sense
is
substitution of sr^
that of " to be possible
is
to do".
The roots fa and f$f before the affix

(III. r. 97) assume these
forms when meaning to be able to do the action denoted by the verb. As
Why do we say when meanTO** ST5=ST53 (fa + H = 3r + aO; so a so J^
:
ing
" to
that of necessity
'
JR^TOI^
II
82.
when the
saleable
:3
Observe
be possible to do"?
TH",
WT
f*W
Here the meaning
is
q^TTT^
II
In
sense
is
pfjssr
II
W., 3^f
there
that of
'
is
II
substitution
of st^ for
exposed or put # out for
GC
sale,
'.''**
The word w*Q
is
guna % being changed to n
derived from #V
II
The word
rT*4
with the affix uq[ the

to buy
means Tor the purpose of that
'
*,
Bk. VI. Ch.
e.,
i.
say
for the
we want
84
EkAdesa.
the sense
that of saleable
is
to purchase corn, but
n^ mpir ^ ^ftr ^
n
**i
*iifTj
11
jûtf 3ttt 3rw*33R*i
<rrn%
iTT
W&t' ^*3T*
Observe
=63
11
Why
do we
^f "^TfcrT
^t^m,
".
snp^-
*r*ar -
^3
sft
^, a^fci,
11
11
The forms
83.
'
not put out for sale
it is
11
1077
As w*zn
purpose of being bought.
when
'
and sr^TT are found
spar
in the
Chhandas.
The word ^3 is derived from *ft + 3?t, and
The gun a tt is changed to spa
Thus *TS3 PjFff*r#F
is
added
to
>fr
m&U
if
+ Q<1 N
sft
The
II
ar^
with the force of Ablative by virtue of the diversity allowed by
^q^fr^f^(III. 3. 113)
able".
The word ST ^-M
is
sn^JT from
^c^TrTft
II
II
always used
is
Why
the proper form.
Wl
Thus favft *r&VZ = v
II
do we say
'
in the
in the
"frightening
feminine
Vedas
'
or
fear-
in other places jfî
Observe H^P*
Jf%^
in
secular literature.
The
word IHiq should also be enumerated when referring to

=
is added by IV. 4. 1 10 (?f + 3The affix
As $> *r^T ?ft^r ^rr?:
Vdrt
water.
II
*** + *)
II
^4<l <4t :
*c*r.
II
^S^
II
From
84.
**^,
II
is
an adhikara
here upto VI.
ways to be supplied the phrase "

following one is substituted ".
This
sutra.
n7TP,
1.
for the
II
Ill inclusive
al-
is
preceding and the
In every sutra upto VI.
r.
112 (excluding
whatever we shall teach, there in the room of the two, namely, the
preceding and the succeeding, it should be understood, that the substitution
the
is
last),
one.
These form tne well known
ru'es of ekddesa,
one
letter or
form replac-
Thus VI. 1. 87 teaches 'There is guna

We must supply into that
by a vowel
sutra the phrase q^: <|fqw: L e. one guna is the substitute for the final s? or
btt and the initial vowel.
Thus ^<rr + f??: = WZ*Z'>
Here jj is the single subsing two consecutive letters &c.
substitution,
when
titute of the
both preceding
^ T*
that the substitute operates simultaneously on both.
at or stt
is
followed
'.
II
show
the substitute would have
come
and the succeeding
tetter %
ll
The words
Otherwise
in the place of one only or of each one separately.
*pn (3THT) = " after 3T or 3*r, there is guna, in a vowel ". Here 3TT^
the ablative, and by I. 1. 67 the guna operation would have taken place on
Thus
is in
letter 3*T
in 3TT^[
the letter following
it
so also sti%
is
in
the Locative and by
I.
I.
66 the
t
EkAdesa.
ro7$
Bk. VI. Ch.
8$.
gun a operation would have taken place on the preceding so jt is not clear of
what letter there should be guna substitution, of the preceding or the succeedThe
ing. But the present rale shows it must operate on both simultaneously.
single % shows that a separate or a different substitute does not
word
not be two separate
e. the substitute must be one, there should
operate:
;
'
i.
substitutes one for each sthani, such as
^^? T ^
ffignrr H'$
of the precediug
ijcfi
is
u?
:
is
>
Here ^
^").
11
*\
?T
taught as substitute both of
srer - srn%
rr
42
2.
^ and
= R^+5T = f^5r:
rac
this single substitute
the preceding (form), and the
final of
the sutra VIII.
(cfr>2tf
of nishtha, after * and
get two H, as f^T +
^n%
And
85.
find in
According to Mahabhashya the word
not the case here.
srerrf^ra
is
we
not used in the sutra,
is
we
the substitute of the
^,
is
f^fx is
^,
But
II
and
and as
this
redundant.
11
considered as the
initial
of the succeed-
ing (form).
taught in the last, is considered in the light of
and the initial of the succeeding. An adeSa
form
preceding
the final of the
ekadesa,
the sthani is indeterminate, or rather the
in
an
but
is like the sthani,
The
sthani
single substitute
Hence the
sum of
sutra.
The
or the
the collection
is
necessity of this
the preceding and
the succeeding.
sense of. this atidesa sutra
is this:
as
the beginning and the end of a thing are both included in the thing itself, and
therefore when the thing is mentioned, the beginning and the end are both
taken; so
add
37
is
Thus to the stem sr^T^j we

and now 3" f 37=37 (VI. 1. 101) e. arsi^j
a Nominal-stem (snmf^) and the affix 37 is a
the case with this single substitute.
the feminine affix (IV.
1.
66);
i.
Here &nvg is
non-pratipadika, and the single-substitute
+ ^ = 5rgj3r;vj
II
tipadika.
by virtue of
But for this
)adika
(I.
I.
46),
because
this
comes a
final
word would have rather ceased
feminine affix
Similarly for the final non-case-ending st of
considered as the
of the pra^
that
virtue of the feminine affix 3? the

ti
37 is
we can apply to the form sgr*^ the term pratipadika and

this designation we can add the case-end'ings to it by IV. 1. 1.
rule, we could not have added the case-endings to it, because by
So
single substitute 3*r
by VI.
I.
37 is
88, this
to be a pra-
not included in
and the case-ending
ekadesa
afr is
IV.
3fr,
considered
1.
1.
there
both
as a non-case affix and a case affix, that is, as the initial of the affix afr, and
gets the designation of Pada I. 4. 14 as it
the final of f ST and thus the word
f^
ends
in the <r affix
sfi
II
This awil^-ftl*! does not apply in rules relating to letters i. e. to rules

for their application on letters.
Thus isrg + sir - ^TJT II Here the
.depending
Bk. VI. Ch.
ekadesa
stt is
86
Ekadesa.
as the final 3T of
*3gj,
but not
of the rule which says that the fa*r
is
1079
purposes of the application
for the
changed to
a nominal-stem
after
ending in st, so the Instrumental plural of lg%[ will not end in q but will be jgr[So also in 3jsr?r II It is the Perfect 3rd per. sing, of^ or ^r ( VI. 1. 45 ).
f*r:
1
:,
II
and we have sjs^TT = sjyjsrr which by VI

This singler. 108 becomes 3jfr, the 3 being the single substitute of 3 and btt
substitute 3 should not be considered as^rr for the application of the rule VII. 1.
34 by which the Perfect affix on* (*T) is changed in 3TT after roots ending in a?r H
By
VI.
1.
53, the
changed
is
to 3,
II
Similarly in 3T^T + ^^3":
= 3T^T
3T*3" :
(the
v being
the Dative singular of ?^t in the Feminine with
is
added
q = 3TÎ
Here
cation of VI.
The
3TT
II
By
Dative with the shortening of the preceding
in the
II
by VIII.
elided
is
the single substitute for
q* is
109 the single substitute
I.
qr
3TT
and
it
it
3.
VII.
3TT
Here
bt^t
19).
3.
14 tot
as ST + TOT
should not be considered like
sthanf of the single-substitute (ekadesa)
is
the
for the appliq-
ll
sum of the preceding and
is replaced by one, and not any one of

For that which is replaced by another is called s'hani: as
replaces sr^the whole form sr*r is called sthani, and not st or *r separ-
the succeeding, both taken collectively
them
when
ately.
is
separately.
>t
The
made up
parts,
may
be called sthani only inferential ly, because the whole
The
of parts.
parts not being considered as sthani, the rule of
not apply to an ekadesa with regards to the parts, and

no operations dependant on such parts will be effected by such ekades*a. But
sthanfvad bhava
it is
will
intended that such operations should take place.
Nctig^kftor*
86.
considered
11
<\
The
as to
11
t^tt^
11
substitution
<*,
sn%gr:
of a single
have not taken
would have to bo changed to

is
<rer - g^t:,
Hence
or
this sutra.
adea
is
to
be
when otherwise ^
when the augment <* (g^)
effect,
to be added.
The word vtfwg means not-accomplished

e. the operation caused
having taken effect is not produced. The word asiddha always debars
i.
by
its
operations dependent upon the adesa, and gives scope to the operations dependent upon the general rule ( 3Tfa^^*r%^^^r^?rtf3^^^HrîT =q- 11
)
Thus ^rsRHTft here *T is not changed to q*

The equation is thus exhibited
+ 3Tf*rî;=^+3W2nt ( tne ^ changed to * by VIII. 2.66 ) =
+ 9Tf%^ (3being substituted for * by VI. 1. 1 13) =
+ 30%^ (ar-l-^ = afrVI. 1. 87) srtsfw^fi (3TH-3T = 3fr VI. I. 109). Now applies our sutra. By VIII. 3. 59, *r coming
II
after afr requiredto
be changed into
T,
but here the single-substitute
str is
con-
GUNA-EKADESA,
I080
sidered to be non-effective for this purpose. Similarly
Similarly in
3T*fr?T
there
is
the addition of
?j
BK. VI. CH.
by VI.
71,
87
%S**T, ^TSFT, Ifrs^r
sffTSTO,
1.
II
though actually pre-
ceded by a long vowel. That long vowel had resulted from the ekadesa of f for
and this ekades*a is considered as if non-effective for the purposes of
K-l-S,
augment
33?
Here
Similarly in JH-5H-g^-i-*i-^f.
also
= q-
sr-l-f
con-
is
sidered asiddha,
Vdrt
Prohibition must
Locative singular case-ending f^7
%\
Of
11
we have
before which there
flftr,
ing
vocalisation
3TF
108).
is
be stated
(?),
in
the following
the case of samprasarana, the
Atmanepada affix
=
^RTf^ ^TPJ, OFffe, then we add
and the
1st per. sing.
vocalisation of sr, this
3"
combining with
^r^T-l-f|^" = ^r^rs^TT-i-o
becomes ^ ekadesa; as
The Locative plural is formed by g
(VI.
1.
i5)
in
+ SR?f (VI.
5Pfft-l-g = 5P*rgl 'the
the follow1.
lengthening
Here ^ is changed to q the ekadesa 3 for sib?

+ f&% - TK + fjiT + 1^*=not being considered asiddha, So also qfcft^ (qrc +
Of the affix f^ we have: f$T-l-? = f%, add w%n, then the single
qrcf%, add 5)
taking place by VI.
4. 2).
II
substitute
q-
being considered not asiddha
we have fSfE^m
or f%s^ro
II
Of
the affix f? of 1st Pers, Atmanepada we have 3TT%-i-i^r JT-3rT-^-<^'T or 3?q%spj II In both these cases we optionally add gqp by VI. I. 75-76, by considering the ekadesa (VI. 1. 87; as to have taken effect, and making the finals
$y
or long,
Here the ek&deia
is
not asiddha and therefore
optinal
is
and
not compulsory.
s n ^gq n
II
*s
II
or
stt
the single substitute
of the final
fa or srn-a vowels guna).
The word
3TT,
is
II
of a preceding word and the simple vowel of the suc-
ceeding
T or
stf*, fpr.
The guna
87.
st
^n% H
and
srr^
is
understood here.
for the 3? or 3Tr
For the towel which follows an

in" the room of both these
which precedes a vowel,
preceding and succeeding vowels, there
is
the single substitute guna.
*^
Thus
^*r + *?**:
s^*r.= *nrr^*, *3%t + z?m= *srfr?^3, *& + *r** + ^^r^: = ^^^^^^r + ^^K = ^5^n: H B y analogy of I. 1. 51,
the guna substitute of ^ being 3? is always followed by ^, as that of ^ is folloThis universal rule is limited by the following aphorism.
wed by *
- *s%&,
^^v^
II
tf&l fk
'
II
II
<*?TPT
II
n%:, nr%
>
Bk. VI. Ch.
Vriddhi-EkAdesa.
89. ]
The Vriddhi
88.
srr
ed
substitute of
the single
is
of a preceding word and the
108 i
or
diphthong of the succeed-
initil
3TM-diphthong = vriddhi).
(ar or
For the diphthong which follows

in the room of
an st or arr,
and
diphthong,
or
succeeding
there
and
is a single
3T
3TT
preceding
both these
guna
taught
in
the
debars
last
This
Vriddhi."
sutra.
the
viz.
Thus
substitute
The word
and
3TT?t is
+ <ty3t = atrsw,
argi
q*r?P, ?cr?r
for
***
II
ff^ftfsr
i^n%
II
II
II
'
3T^T|rf?5T ffirfrfOT
^T
||
II
^To
||
ire
The Vriddhi
^T
II
II
t ^^^Tf^rnTfywRnT-
^ $ ^Sr rT^S? tRf ^T^rTST: ^T-
in qr%,
II
wr^by VI.
3tt?t
e.
"
sre-l-37?r
quired by VI.
t^,
and
not to VI.
1.
for st or gtf
4. 132).
are understood here.
when
87, the present sutra ordains
1.
rule.
95,
%rnr^ Âpavadas
that
and
The
the root f assumes the form
The q^r does
of
not qualify the
Thus 3^ + ^=3%!^, 3<T -f-irfq- = ^ft-, ^-ft; ^-l-ipTO

= JTfr?r In the last example, guna was the substitute re-
the Vriddhi was debarred
exception to that
to be
n&),
not a diphthong.
is
= ^fcT,%*?%;
<rr%
II
II
as that root always has an initial diphthong, nor does ij^ qualify gjr
urtj
for 3?
^fe^-rWH
ff^^^r
^"T^rraf
internal changes, then apples this Vriddhi rule.
root
<Jrrfara"*T!% STfa[
the single substitute for the
is
of the last sutra and
the last sutra qualifies the root?
by
SJt^T
(the substitute of ^r in
The whole
+ irf^-
3^5
and nsn%- (root
or 3?M-bc of qj^r (root f)
of
fs^r
fa$r*n*r
^T^fttw^fj^r^^^r
II
3T H
^ H^ +^ îTFTrefr ff^T^lT
89.
W^
i^lR^HIW* Stf*
<5TTo
-1-3?
^fa, <3^n%,
*k% snf^frr ^ hwi<^ u
STffTSr5*lt<^ ff^r^-rfi^l H
sr
s^+^f^n^T^-alim^nR-:,
II
TTrriR^rifW'^nTHT^ <P*
^TT%3P*
which precedes a diphthong,
^r + ir^n^^^^r*
+ ^HT^:=^|r m^:
m^yc^d^
5arfrr:
understood here.
for the 3T or 3TT
The
because
present sutra
maxim
the
1.
nearest
to
them,
In the case of
94, this sutra
is
an exception to VI.
is
SOTrmrsr
that precede the rules which teach
superseded by the apavada

stand
Vriddhi instead.
by VI.
WtKK
makes an
1.
94 and
lt*#r srm^r
operations that have
operations,
not
the
supersede only those rules

subsequent rules". Therefore
ST + STH-^^^-f q-?r = ^n?: (Here

though 5 is changed to if, the rule does not apply). Therefore the form 3*%i%
is wrong.
So also 3^-1-?^ = 37rP for here the root f has not assumed the form
the present rule does not apply
if,
here,:
therefore the rule does not apply, the
Vdtt:
ifoft, as
The Vriddhi
*T<trM*
*PTT
II
is
word
ifr^r
qualifies the root ?
when
st$j is
11
followed
by
Vriddhi-ekAdesa.
1082
Vdrt\
f* or
1.
The word
II
fc
is
The Vriddhi
*q
Cri.
90.
followed by
is
formed by the
affix
qi^
f^ = ^T the compounding takes place by
^r = ^rPTsrra^ % *reS5TcT with
is
Bk. VI.
when
to fîT^T(Ad. 8 fqqrproTOT
Another form
32.
is
or ff^fr thus ^r^, ^r^TT
"frf^r,
added
The Vriddhi
the affix farR (III.
2.
II.
78
).
when q is followed by gjf,

qsq:
The
word
as
qq",
ipw,
sfrft:,
qq:,
qrf
ffs
qq is derived from the
3>re,
&&,
root S3 to wish' (Tud. 59), f<* 'to go' (Div. 18), and fq; 'to repeat' (Kry. 53), by
adding the affix qi and the word %*q is derived form the same roots by addVdrt\
is
:,
ll
ing
q
?tfj[
q:
This Vartika ordains Vriddhi, while VI.
II
While the roots
ll
and
f*r 'to glean',
f<r 'to go'
1.
115 and 642), form fq and f^: with the above affixes
will be qqv and qcq: II
1
The Vriddhi
Vdrt
8T
followed by
is
^FT
s*t?P
$%*
- W^'-r
Observe
tal?
s^tt
Vdrt
q*q<f
II
is
3*trT :
The Vriddhi
m^m,
is
qâRT^ 'debt
Vdrt
debt.
S<T
'Compound'? See
debt of a
5R*ap*,
So also when
^f^PT^:

q^rq
As
ll
Tsrrfrff.
srrara*
**
II
90.
augment
3TT? is
The
in
<T3TR
Wh y in Instrumen-
when the word
the words q^T and f^r are followed
are:, ^r
II
sfcor
follows
q^rKf iq, 'the
of a blanket', qg-qp'H 'debt of a cloth'.
II
(Bh.
forms
II
jn^JT 'principal debt',
The word qt"Tr^ means a debt

The Dasarna is the name of a river and of a
and
q, their
when a word ending
= 5 ^nf but ^T
Why
q,
qjrtJTTt^w
and with
and forms an Instrumental Tatpurusha compound: as
the following:
steer',
94 would have caused
to injure, 'to show'.
The Vriddhi
by
qjon
as,
incurred to pay off a prior

country.
II
is
when the
followed by any vowel.
anuvritti of qfq- ceases
that of stht however,
vowel that
is
subsequent to the augment
to a vowel
in the
room of
and precedent, the Vriddhi
these two
is
i.
is
e.
the single substitute.
The
present.
and the srr^ which

the 3TT? and the vowel
air^,
is
precedent
subsequent
The augment 3?K is added
to the roots beginning with a vowel, in the Imperfect, Aorist
and Conditional
Thus qf!re,ÔT, ^rer^, sftffcfc $?&$*> ^T^^ from

(Tud. 32) and 5 ST *n$ft ( Tud 2 ) Acroots ts^R (Bhu. 641), ** 3r
cording to Siddhanta Kaumudi the 3rr* {s the augment which fr*j case-affixes
take after nadi-xtfords (VII. 3. 112). According to him the following are the
Tenses (VI.
4.
72 &c).
examples :^f^r-i-BTK.-i-3r =3Tf^^l (Dative Singular).

augment also in the Vedic Tense %?
ll
The
3TTC.
is
the
Bk. VI. Ch.
The
96 when
95,
^r
'and'
*ir#T
or
11
q^rft
11
that the r^^T
is
taught
rule,
when
in
VI.
1.
the preceding vowel
^roWta^, ^r%,
11
vrrrfr
11
of a preposition (upasarga)
3tt
1083
superseded,
arl*^. follow, is
The Vriddhi
91.
3T
the sutra shows
in
and
s*t, sfr
^MHîki%
VkiDDiii-EKAnESA.
92.]
1.
when the
followed by the short 35
is
of a verb.
The word
9TTft
understood here
1S
When
also.
ending
a preposition
by a root beginning with sp, the Vriddhi is the single

substitute for the precedent 3T or 3?r and the subsequent 5 H
This debars
the guna taught in VI. I. 87. Thus ^T + ^SjTrT^qi^JftT, JTT^fa, sqroffa
Why do we say after a preposition ? Observe ^st^rt, jfr^^frf, JT^FTfSP =
ffTru" sfFsSW sr^rn: ^n?l H Here the word it is not treated as an upasarga, hence
in st or TT
is
followed
II
'
'
does not apply.
sutra
this
follows'? Observe
that short
is
s<T-l ?rT
to be taken
is
It is
= ^rrr:
?
II
Why
a Gati here.
Why
do we say
have we used
after
Observe ^T + ^^nTr qRT = 3*ThkfaH
The
allowed here by the subsequent sutra.
is
?j[
^
II
when
'
indicating
No
option
used, in fact, for the sake
of the subsequent sutra in case of Denominative verbs, no ordinary verb can

begin wirh a long s^
Why have we employed the word srrg, when the word
ll
'upasarga' would have caused us to
infer its
order to prevent the application of the rule VI.

or non-sandhi of s^
II
bhava taught
' Dhatu.
prakriti
srr
ff%:
ii
^nfasns:
srrf^nr
is
VI.
*>*
11
repetition of
1.
129,
11
sit,
Dhatu shows
the case of the
in
^ft, srrfa^:
qrc nifrK i f r
According to the opinion of
used in
JTfirrPTrf:
that the alternative
'
y*ru*w%
It is
129 which causes
would not apply
q^Tft
^rrrftrW *r
1.
m of
ll
t^
sfWf?m$<mTfrc-
A piSali,
the Vri-
when the st or sir of a

followed by a Denominative Verb beginning
optionally the single substitute,
preposition
with 3T
in
sqîrcm
92.
ddhi
ll
The
correlative *rrg?
is
II
Thus ^rspsffam or ST*fttafa, 3T^Rr% or STRSfftftofrT

The qr and
homogenous letters, therefore the word m in the last sutra
The name of the Grammarian Apisali is mentioned for the
includes t* also.
sake of respect; the ^T itself was enough to make it an optional rule.
II
are considered as
STRTt -S*TO*ft:
II
II
q^TT%
II
3TT,
^fan, 3T^- S^ft:
II
Para-rupa-ekA&esA.
1084
For
and
93.
case-ending sra;
The word arm
=-TTJ
rr
Thus
II
or
*ri <T*ar,
qâr; as
3jr:
the
Nominal
of a
stem-i-a? of the
sth, the single substitute is

a
is
*TV
stt
[Bk. VI. Ch.
compound
<Tr.
word
II
of
STr
+ STlrT:
11
3TT
94
Accusative
I!
^ -3t*, = ^re,'TH-*r*J.
Thus
This debars the Vriddhi of VII.
rris also
1.
a nominal stem ending
I.
in arr U
90.
So
also
The Sarva-
namsthana affixes are ffcpj after this word also (see VII. 1. 90) which would
have caused Vriddhi, therefore, this 3TT debars the Vriddhi. The word st*K. here
means the affix of the Accusative Singular, as it is read in connection with the
and as the word
case-affix $Tf,
!|t
of the last sutra governs this also. Therefore
TW the verbal Tense-affix of the Imperfect
*T^m
^ttt:
we have
not meant: thus
aifa^*r,
qri ^ qw?5rf *ref?tii

t^t
%% ^rrR^t qr^t
srrcfrs%: *rer% ^r q^r ^fk^* u ^ro u q^fsrrfts ^rcr t*^ ^rffaitf
For the 3T or srr of the Preposition-!-** or aft of
94.
11
swu^nrfem ^1 3reqiRgTO u?grfrqT3t %S M<4t
5TTre^r
qrfrr**
^ro
is
II
^^
sr^^nTfs
ii
ii
^ffâcw n
^r<> n
ii
ii
a verbal root, the second vowel

The words
ing in ST or
3TT
sffifc
is
3WffFT#t are understood here.
followed by a root beginning with
and the single-substitute

Vriddhi taught
in
VI.
I.
is
tj
In an upasarga end-
or ^T, the vowels
the form of the second vowel (m.^4)
II
coalesce
This debars
Thus ^T?5*lrr, ff<TOT%, Prefer, m^f^'H Some read

by VI. I. 92, according to them the para-rupa
the case of Denominative roots. Thus *H^<*?iRf or
88.
into this sutra the option allowed

substitution
is
optional in
snnraifam, ^rr^rRrt or grer^ffora u
Vdrt:
&c.
The Para-rupa substitution
takes place in the caseofsraFg:
As^7-l-3T?^: = ^^^M^ + 3T^T = ^H?T, 3fa + ST?rP = tffarf
referring to
'hair',
Vdrt
the form
The
is *ffar*?T
'
'hair';
when not
Para-rupa substitution takes place when x& follows a
word, and the sense is not that of 'appointment*. Thus 53- 1-^= 5^; wrsH-^=
When the sense is that of fMfpr, the Vriddhi takes place: as ftw vr^,
T^
11
irs^^r
tt:
11
Vdrt :The Para-rupa substitution takes place optionally when ^t$J
and ^ra are compounded with another word: as **r& ^j^:=^^: or *tf%g!,
When not a compound, the Vriddhi is compulsory:
so also i%*tn#r or f%i$T#r U
T*3 'Stay Devadatta, see the
as flrg^rTrfte
Vdrt
&c. follow.
lip'.
In the Vedas, the para-rupa substitution takes place when
Thus
3TTT
^T
^^=5Tqt"^^
So
also 3TTT <^T 5*nr?r=3T7T
J^te
^nreMi
Hk. VI. Cn.
I.
61
PARARUPA.
For the
95.
st
or
srr
108s
+ sfr of
sfr^,
or + the
vowel of
the Preposition srr^, the second vowel is the single substitute.

The 3t)'?t is understood here. Thus ^r-i-^tr^^^r? zrr-i-B?r*r = 2iTS as
;
^r^r^ 4ftiCwi
<T?T
+ afrST =* <T fr^T
^T-i-^sr^rsr, then Br^-i-BTr<fr=B7^rsr, ^?r
= ^rer,
Thus this
i-sir?r
+ ^^ît^^T^n'^, then 3T^-l-3T^rr<t = BT5l^r?lll

and the lengthening (VI. I. o'S, and 101).
arr
ll
rule supersedes both the Vriddhi
For the
9(5.
Pada
is
+^
or full word)
sr
or
not standing at the end of a
of ott the Tense-aflix, the second vowel
The
understood here.
This debars the guna substitution

Tims f*r^H-*RT = R <2*, r%5^nr-l-^ = fs^'
3T^M-^t =
All these are examples 6f f*!$ (Potential;
**%', (Sjôf^) 3T2ir-l-^ = 3T3:
and af3P (Imperfect). Thus PT^ + ^r^+ffT (the zjr^r is added by III. 4. 103)=*
III. 4. io8) = f*r?^
(II.
re*! +- 3 + 3*T (^ replaced
ST^r + ra^+f|T = 3T^T +
11
BT + Etr + ftr = 3T + ^r+^?T (VI. 4.
4- no)=3T?r+?T=BT5-.
4-77) + *i
m) = 3T*3;: The ^st is also the substitute of f?T m f^ (Perfect) see III. 4.
taught
VI.
in
ls
3Trfl
I.
87.
?:
Ii
II
II
11
11
When
82.
the
preceding
vowel
is
not
3T or
Thus the 3rd per. pi. of the Perfect of gj is

The word
^t we have btt%h-I-^h = 3lfspT3:
affix 3*r
strictly
rule
this
does not apply.
xrfH-Stjr^êJ:
BTTfRffi^ 'not
II
pada' does
srr,
ll
So
being
speaking, serve no good purpose in this sutra.
can never be added to a Pada,
also
from
final
in a
For the
must always be added
it
that has not yet risen to the rank of a Pada.
If
3"*t,
to a stem,
however, be taken as the
syllable s?T (whether an affix or part of an affix or not), then the limitation of 3T<t-
becomes valid. Thus effr + SW = ?FR*r,

+ 3V*m = #KHT
Most likely
word has been read here for the sake of the subsequent sutra or because
syllable Is taken here and not merely the affix 3"?r
qFcTTfl
11
this
3TT
11
sicft
^n%:
11
3$
II
*ttit% H sro :, 3pr
It
sr^r^rffTcT ^?r%
97.
Pada,
is
Tt^&mwtit *rent
not being final in a
then in the room of both
srarr^rcrerripf m^r- ^Jqrran **tpt
Also when the short
followed by a
the precedent
11
Guna
letter,
and the 'subsequent
11
sr,
the single
subitstute
is
the form of the subsequent i. e. the Guna.

Thus q=^-l-^r'T-l-BTf% = T 5r-l-B7f?tT = T=qFrT so also 2rstf?cM This debars
lengthening of VI. I. 101. Tq- + = T%, ^ *T + <T = ^, here the Vriddhi is debarred
(VI. 1. 88\
Why do we say " after the short vowel 3T?" Observe ?rr l-3TFrr
Why do we say when followed by 'a Guna letter?' Observe
= nf^T, 3if?<T
*
<?"
ft
Pararupa.
1086
3TT^-i-f = 3?*?%, bt?t%

-
<P3
-l-3Tsr
= f ^ni*,
CT
eS5"S^rTOTf?#r
srrfrrera
ii
Cii.
I.
ioo
Pada, this rule does not apply
in a
final
Bk. VI.
as
znTPT*, 3JSI*HC
S^3P ^f^ tR^T^rWr *Hu1t

toss*
BT%^rr^ f^r
The
98.
(of a
When
II
II
ii
5 of %fe
is
the~single substitute for the
word denoting imitation of an
3T<*
inarticulate sound)-l-^cT
II
when some
The sound which is
that
sound, by
resemblance
to
has
some
one utters distinctly something which
Thus
tth-isome contrivance, it is called bt^Rot or imitation of that sound.
not distinct and clear,
^=
is
called stssr;;
?fiT = ^f^T, W^+ IRT = ?rf^T' 3^1+ 5frT = ^f*TF%

do we say 'imitation of an inarticulate sound'? Observe
5^ = ^1^111 Why do we say "of3Tr'? Observe *rc? + ff%'= TOfm
do we say when followed by %f$ ? Observe q<r^+3T^ = T^r U
qMcT, ^rC+
II
Why
II
*FT?l-l-
Why
explain the
This applies when the word consists of more than one

How do you.
the following:
does not apply
+ fRT =
Here the
the following: ^2fff% *TwftoT*fHftrcr
form qsf^ra
word
q*q;-l-fftf
syllable.
Vdrt:
Therefore
is
it
not
in
3 3T *A
II
sound-imitation word
tfcT,
II
II
<T^TT% II T,
STTwfi^T,
3T?3ref 3, ^T R
,
This substitution does not take place when a
99.
of
^rf%frT
but si^-l-ffcr H
^T^fer^T^^rcT
?i;-HC
^TnC
in
is
doubled, here, however, for the final
is
optionally % (the second
vowel).
Thus T??l52-ftl% or <T2Wl% ^Tn% (5*3^1 + ?RT = *&<& + f + f% = T**TOt)

The word is doubled by VIII. I. 4. The para-rupa substitution will take
place when the whole word so reduplicated denotes a sound imitation, thus
Here we apply the precedeing sutra. The amredita is the
qscTiff^ ^TOffi H
name of the second member of the doubled word (VIII. 1. 2).
II
f?rasrrirf^T
ff^r-
11
^M
^tt%
^"
100.
which the
final
sTcj;,
ii
ô
ii
re gret S5?re3!t
affix
q^rft
^r^nrir
n ft^rac,
1
m^r%^, ^n%
sr^rt ^rer%cr rrFCTratensqvfirgfchwgqr-
Of such a doubled sound-imitation word,

3TT
is
for the final
to
added which causes the elision of the

^ of the first member and the initial
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
Pukva-rupa-Ekadesa.
101]
1087
consonant of the second member, such subsequent consonant

is always the single substitute.
Thus
4. 57) is
added
VIII.
12: this
1.
to
there
^^,
is
^FTT^-I-^ (V. 4. 57) = T^^

When the affix ^pr (V.
II
really a Vartika.
doubling of the word by the Vartika under
is
doubling takes place before the
\o\\\
II
st^^Nt^" ^fa
11
57), ^T^TT ^TTrW
4.
Tnis sutra
3i^: njsrft ff:
*rr%3ra.
(V.
<T*<TT ^FTCTTrT
= V&t*T 0*+ <* = *)
<*frft
^r ^ttt
When
101.
II
final
*tf?:, *nraf, qftifc
^r^
^r
a simple vowel
is
ii
*rr>
elided.
btfjt is
ii
t*r%
11
ii
hom-
followed by a
ogenous vowel, the corresponding long vowel is the single

substitute for both the precedent and the subsequent vowels.
Thus
+ 3^=3^**^ 4- f?j: = *4tar:,m + 3?% = *T*?#T and %rf + 5ft*3
Why
do we say an st^t or simple vowel ? Observe 3T*?H -if = s?7
do we say 'by a homogenous vowel?' Observe ^fSr-i-3T3r = ^.;re

The word
srf% is understood here also. The word sppjr, therefore, qualifies the word 3THT
understood. The rule will not apply if a homogenous consonant follows. As
The f and srare homogenous, in spite of I. 1. 10 for that prohibiff*Trfr%%
tion does not apply to the long f and ^r, because the rule of classification and
51*332
II
'
'
Why
11
II
inclusion contained in BT^rf^T^PTfai ^TW^^r: (I.

tion at the time
portion of
is
when
^r$
the rule of
Therefore
definition
in ?rn&
( I.
I.
I.
1.
UW those 37^;
first
1.
69
) is
not brought into opera-
10) rule operates, because of
Therefore, so long as
q-?pfi rule.
not accomplished.
Therefore
?n"3 fr#r
its
being a
does not come into operation
it
the rule of ^ra
|f<fr
comes
it
into play, then
9 ) and then comes the sr?3rer?mR ( I. 1. 68 ).

only are taken which are not included in the
class of homogenous vowels

e. only the 9 vowels contained directly in sr^-,
and not the qtfft- vowels which I. 1. 68 would have denoted. Therefore
though short \ and ^r are not ^râx by I. 1. 10 the long f and ^r would be savarna.
i.
Vdrt
is
optional
two
one
is
m
is
\y2
or
t?
When 3 short
so also
with
by
followed
short, the
necessitated
is
long substitution
because
(1)
the
samvrita and the other vivrita, or (2) because their prosodial length
$$
and so the word
or fr53iTC
II
cannot be applied with consistency
Thus ftH%ch{<: =frrRtTrThe #* of 55 is 5
snurat: ^TOsHr:
ii
is
This vartika
II
the precedent and the subsequentare not homogenous, because
(3y=fH^ &c).
ffrr:
r5
sr^r fi% ??4 ff^
or ftf^T?;:,
in their
so also frg -i-^^r^:
case
= f cc^r
|
II
\\
^
ll
II
^rfa
II
srornfr:,
srTTr^rsfr f^TFFrctre"
^nft:,
II
^^^^rrr^^rftrWr^rfq- ire^f^r
Purvarupa-Ekadesa.
ioS8
Bk. VI.
ClI.
g T03
I.
For the simple vowel of a nominal-stem and

the vowel of the ease-affixes of the Nominative and the
102.
for
Accusative
numbers, there
in all
is
a long vowel corresponding to the

The words
here means the
here the
are both
^rsr:
i-
e.
vowel.
first
= ^n
snTTT
This sutra teaches the substitution of a T^q" or
fH-3?*r = f?aT
examples
last four
The word
understood here.
case or the Nominative, and includes
the 1st
long vowel corresponding to the
^rg-!-3fr
of these
f^Tnn
f%^rf?K also.
ftnffar
a homogenous
= BT*;fr
and
3T3T
Tfvppj
the single substitution of
:
>
first
vowel.
Thus
^m^ M
so also sstp, f$TP*,
STFT-l-sff
In the case
&c) the rule VI. 1. 97 would have

would have given the form ^-t-3T^r = ^r:,
(f$r-l-3T5T
caused para-rupa substitution
i.
e.
would have debarred the lengthening rule VI. 1. 101 on the

maxim apavadas that precede the rules which teach operations that have to
be superseded by the apavada operations, supersede those rules that stand
and that
rule
"
nearest to them
but not this t^pjtjt lengthening rule as
"
The word 337^" when a vowel

Thus ^H-st = ^t:, %w>
The word 3T5J7
nearest.
'
\\
here
Thus
also.
the antecedent
?'
qff-i-3ft
The
= TPfr
Why
substitute
The
or the subsequent vowel,
will
follows
'
it
the simple vowel'
do we say
not be one
^74 or 'long'
is
does not stand
understood
is
'
here
also.
understood
is
a vowel homogenous to
homogenous to the second
'
used
in
order to debar the
substitution of pluta vowel having 3 measures for a pluta vowel.
^m^^r *: jrcr
^rr%
II
n cT^rrci*, srer:, ?r:,
gr^r
II
After such a long vowel homogenous with
103,
?o?
II
substituted for the g; of the Accusative case affix

3TO; in the masculine.
Thus f^-i-^ = ^-i-3TJT:=fSTF7
So also 3T^fV^, w?,^^, fr*% t^^tr:
FgWl, ST^R, *r*n &c. All these are masculine nouns. Now the word ^r>^
lormed by the elision of gpj; meaning a figure like a ^(s^j (V. 3. 98), may refer
the
first,
is
11
to both the males and females.

referring to a male being
accusative plural of =q^r, the

^fsT^r: <T*3
first'?
Why
ll
The
do up say
rule will not
It will
See
however
^ 3^1
will
retain
S2?l% W*(H
we
f\.
say
by VI.
'of the
Why
I.
93.
Accusative
do we say
51
In forming the
).
Thus *r*rp
II
q*3j;
such a long vowel homogenous with the

the long vowel has resulted by being a single
'after
apply
Here ^
feminine form though
2.
not be changed into
if
substitute for the antecedent and the subsequent.

afr-l-B?
its
I.
will
Thus
not be replaced by
plural'?
Observe f^:,
c^p
is
3TF
as
x\\\
substituted for
cp*^
endings
"in the masculine?" Observe, %$:,

*gfr:
îfp
\\
in
Why
do
Norq
Bk. VI. Ch.
?m^fcr
I.
fi%:
107
?o
q^rn% *,
tfimMHf t *r^m
srrirffifa-
11
II
The
104.
with the
TuRVA-RurA.
sth*, rf^r
ll
11
substitution of a long vowel
when
does not take plaec
first,
10S9
or
st
homogenous
followed by
stt is
a vowel (other than a?) of the case-affixes of the Nominative
and the Accusative.

Thus fsjt, c?r$fr, ^>, ^r%
Here Rules VI. 1. 87 &c. apply. Why
do we say "after 3? or btt?" Observe ar^r U Why do we say "followed by an
||
5^ (a
vowel other than
^rsftsrfar
ffrP
11
fr^[55fT% ?N-
II
?o<\
"ST
ous with the
first,
1.
H^
<7^H*rfP*f
102 applies.
q^TTJT n freTc*, srftr,
11
TTrT:
The
105.
Observe ^n": here VI.
sr)"?
ll
II
homogen-
when a long vowel
docs not take place
is
followed by a nominative or accusative case-affix beginning
with a vowel (other than

Thus ^Hff,
m ?^r
^r%:
rersr, srgrcswit,
?^
11
jflqj'H^R faro
11
T^ri^r
srrer
ll
or
by the Nom.
vm*&%-
II
11
^ro
srr,
PI. affix sm;
^ f pt ^ T^r ^r ^*re<$Href t *t?ti%
In the Vedas, the long vowel
106.
ally
st)
11
may
option-
be the single substitute of both vowels in these cases last
mentioned.
Thus
*xm
f rrT:
11
^:
bt^ft
*rr^cfh
ll
f^r
ôvs
i
srr%
107.
vowel,
ending
when
zjtz
a*
fWh
or ire^r,
11
*t^7T7t
II
or
srro,
<ri<fr s^r:
^t^t?
There
is
.ft 53*1 :,
^:
**rr>r
srrcifr
or *rnrsiT
srMr
*#
n^Wr *r^rr%
11
the single substitution of the
simple vowel
is
or
followed by the
st
first
of the ease
II
The word 3T3T: is understood here. Thus ^r-|-sp=f$TT (VII. 1. 24)

^TT, STf^-l-BT*=srrT*r, *T3*U1 The word *% 'antecedent, first' in the sCitra
shows that the first vowel itself is substituted and not any of its homogenous
vowels. Otherwise in fiTOr + 3T*=frenfar the
f would have been of three matrAs
or measures, as it comes in the room of + sr, the aggregate
matras of which
f
are three.
In the Vedas, there
is
option, as îff or
q**
c.r
jink
3T*
is
the
PURVA-RUPA.
I09O
ending of the Accusative singular of

the Neuter
singular in
fr
fnr*.
(See VII.
23,
I.
24 and
ummn g ?* ^n% *T*srcrn;on7i;, ^

^ ttop **rrc *k qr^n%<ft *vn%
*$ tm snrarviKf*
There
vowel
is
the
single
109
28).
ii
substitution
vocalised semivowel
for the
I..
II
<re*T :
108.
first
ll
ll
ll
11
Cli.
genders and also of the nominative
all
in certain cases.
BK. VI.
of the
and the subsequent
vowel.
The word
is
$=:
vowel merging
in
(VI.
(tt-I-^F=S 3T3-l-?r),*T^+CT---=w3^-l-^ = ^fa
become
the vocalisation would
a vocalised semi-vowel
is
alone substituted, the subsequent
is
Thus ar^-^ = f3?:5M-Tfi
it.
When
understood here.
followed by a vowel, the vocalised vowel
1.
15) =fS^(f-i-3T
= ?); so ^THI
Had there not been this
II
either useless or the
merging,
two vowels would have
Thus in g-qr + rT=^rq^+rT, if the sr did

cause
sandhi,
would
and 3" would be changed to * by
then
it
in
merge
not
3,
again
assume
the
form ^<r
would
But this s^rrf^ would
word
the
and
fSKTSFffcr
been heard separately without sandhi.
ll
caues samprasarana
rule, the
rule non-effective,
hence
it
follows that but for the present
two vowels would have been heard separately as
gr
3TR
II
The rule of option in the Chhandas ( VI. 1. 106 ) applies here also.
Thus we have 3r5S*TT#r f*T^TWW or StSTRT H "When you have just said that the
two vowels will remain separate and there will be no Erorf^r when there is no
purvavad-bhava we do you form gwTT^; it ought to be f 3Tr^TrH;" ? We have
only said that vocalisation rule becomes useless
ing of the subsquent vowel; but where there
only an option
is
useless because
is
if
there was not this rule of merg-
and
become totally
&c, therefore when in the
this rule of purva-vad-bhava,
allowed, then the rule of vocalisation does not

it
finds
scope in cases like f^:
its
not applied, there gprf^r will take place naturally, and the ordinary rules of sandhi will apply. The merging, moreover, refers to the vowel
alternative
which
is
it is
same anga or base with the samprasarana. Thus ^rarpT ^ZTHT = 5T37^T
3Tr = ^*\ H Here 3U which is in the same 3?^ with f merges in to
forming the dual, we have 5F37?? + 3Tr H Here aft coming after the sam-
in the
4 f^qr = 5ren?
ll
But
in
prasarana
gj
sjiq- = ^r^j^l
does not merge therein, and

II
In fact
when
we have
subsequent vowels will produce their effect because

\ 3T
into js, the purva-rupa
fication,
but there
is
w^\
II
Similarly
is
fcT
no such
necessity,
<T^TF?T
II
II
in the
antaranga operation
ordained to save the samprasarana from modi-
when a Bahiranga operation
applied.
^: M^dl ^
3T373
once the para-purvatva has taken effect, then
II
U&:
T^T?cfm:, 3TT%
II
is
to
be
VI. Ch.
:k
I.
ii2
>f
room
In the
109.
:he short
Puknarupa-Sandiii.
which follows
<%,
the form of the
first (a;
it,
or
1091
a Pada, and
of
o:
is
substituted the single vowel
or
final in
aft
rt) n
= bt^s^", ^T%-i-*R" = ^fsw

This supersedes the subsWhy
do we say 'of <j or 3TT? Observe T*F*, !***
the
s
Here
Observe
=
Pada'?
'final
in
a
%-I-bt^T
say
N
do we
TH*, RT-lrypr Hf33.
do
Why
not
word.
and
at
word,
the
of
a
of
the
end
body
qor^r are in the
we say "when followed by a short sr'? Observe ^^-l-ff?r = ^raPJf?T, *PTH-fra =
Why do we say 'short'? Observe m*ff arTOu"? = sTTO^lTft
^Tffif^nT
Thus
titutes 3T^
3T T^-l-BT^r
and 3T*
II
Why
II
II
ll
^ftw^cter
w^fa
\\o
li
<^rf?r
^fer^sft:,
11
11
11
In the room ofo; or sfr (in the body of a

word),-l-3T of the case-affix 3^ of the Ablative and Genitive
Singular, the single substitute is the form of the precedent.
110.
The f and ^ of 3TFT and ^T3 are gunaThus 3TT%-l-^r^ = ^r 3% ^nft:

by VII. 3. III. This sutra applies when the q or sir are in the middle of
a word and not padanta, as in the last. Thus 3T*TOT%9f3r, TOinTTOf<r 3F%
II
ted
^*,
srrot:
^cr
*^*
ll
11
1\\
<*?tt%
11
spn,
ts;
11
In the room of 3f-l-3T of the case-affix
111.
the Ablative and Genitive singular, the single substitute

letter short
gr
of
3?^;
the
is
II
Thus fnr-l-BTCTzr^^C The ^ must always be followed by ^ I. I. 51

this s is not the substitute of 5^ only, but of 5^ + 3? conjointly: on the
maxim that a substitute which replaces two both shown in the genitive case,
though
as itrp
and 3T^n$3
tely as the son
him
may
in*
one of these separaand "mother B (though both conjointly produce
this sutra, gets the attributes of every
of a father
be called indifferently the son of
or the son of B.
So the
3"
be called the substitute of 5 or a?)

The final ct is then elided by VIII.
and we have fr3* = ^Tc[:
Thus ftîlM-^m, ft^J ^T*
II
II
^srerrcqRi^
SPOTfohlf
11
i\^
11
24
^T
of
II
<t^tt
ll
^r -
r^-,
% rfT^r T^l 3TO S=#C?T ^r^Rf^rr wlr

112.
may
2.
There
is
the
<rc^r
II
substitution of
3"
for
the
kuLES OF SANDHI.
1092
Bk. VI. ClI.
sth of the Ablative and Genitive singular, after ^rfe

when for the % of those two stems 5J is substituted.
I.
11^
aiid.<tfcT,
The phrase 3 %^r: and ^rqr are understood here also. The Wi means
to % and ?ar denotes fa and ?ff,
*?ft when the f is changed
to q
Thus *u%-l-BTH = ?jH5g: as *r*3g<T*r%T%, *T*?i *T* H
So also <T<*pj*T e3T%, <Tc*j: ^^t
The illustration of mt is ST^ which is derived
from the Denominative Verb thus *Tf*?PT 3^% = 9*3;, ^^f*T^f^ =^3H-*Fsp*
r
and includes f*?j and

the % being changed
II
II
8)=^p^r3 (VII. 4. 3). Now by adding fas <t to the denominative root
we
W3m get 1513V one who wishes for a friend'. The Ablative and Genitive
Singular of this word will be *reHt-l-3TW = ^5sr: also. Of sft we have the
(III.
I.
'
following example.
singular
of which
Nishtha,
is
F?I
in
^rFro-3TtT
is
= pft?st, add
sgJ,
also
the
considered like {^(VIII.
sutra, instead of saying
the
does not apply to words like
The word
3Tl%vfi%
applies only to
but
to
all
and
^r and
grfr
'
smr
<fr,
^^fafWTCtT
îrânr^
The phrase
3/tf-i-g
BT^ = f^r-l-BT^r (VI.
^t:
ll
??3
The ^
t,
of VIII.
3.
17, as it
(I. 4. 7),
:
,
and
the rule
indicates. that
where we have 3TRnH%
of
q;
peculiar exhibition of ?s^
%TPT3r
II
for that prohibition
in it, on the maxim

That which cannot possibly be anything
which ends with
I. I. 72) not denote that
"
(g^f^-;jfa = g^H-rlf<T)
'
<t^tr
II
^
(
1.
is
2.
^tct:,
n,
Thus ^53:, ^3: &c.
st^ps,
= îs=sr
3.
ll
1.
109)
srfrT
of VI.
I.
109,
66). f^*-l-sre = fff3-lThis ordains

so also c^s^
= f^r^= pre (VIII.

(VI.
not a
is
it.
2.
II
17, there would have been otherwise
depends upon ^ VIII. 2. 66)

have been by VIII. 2. I.
would
otherwise
(as
^^,
an w, which
66) when
understood here, as well as the word
1st singular )
87)
II
the substitute of ^ (the r substi-
is
VIII.
whereby VIII.
S
does not become asicldha
for
&c
both precedes and follows
Thus
The
2. 1).
According to Dr. Ballantyne this rule applies

one who loves pleasure' (g^sTPT^Sfrf = msfa-l-f|p*).
itself".
such as
tute of a final
in.
the Ablative and Genitive
directly ^fssfTRP'Sji
one who wishes a son
113.
pluta,
and not to a compound which ends
^ff^T
denotes only
it
of w^t being the substitute of
STRTCfffsI
but a Pratipadika does (contrary to

it,
= |pu"
fq in spite of the prohibition
is
^^qTrTT sJTOqT^T
f%f?r
it
*T
for the
and
this
purposes
Why
do we say 'after an B?'? Observe btf^ -3T^ = btf?TC^
Why do we use ^ with its
do say a short bt ? Observe cjW-l-Bni = f$Tr bt^
indicatory s, and not use the ^generally ? Observe ^^l-ST^ = *TOr, srrrTCH-BT^"
Here the final t is part of the words, and is not produced from ?r
m^m
Why
'
-I
'
II
II
11
ll
Bk. VI. Ch.
The word
115.
Non-modification.
understood here also from VI.
*rf?f is
1093
109.
I.
The * must he followThe subsequent *f

f?
*r, therefore, not here: <*rr-i-f5 = f$T

must be short, the rule does not apply here f^-l-BTTf^rT =f*T 3TTfa?T
Why do we say preceded by an apluta bt'? The rule will not apply if a
Pluta vowel precedes it. As, gWrfr ^ 3?^ c^rem (VIII. 2. 84), Why do we say
ed by a short
it
11
'
"when
Observe fag^ TO
followed by an apluta st"?
Here C53 being held asiddha, there would have been 3
BTT^^T ( V IH.
86).
2.
had not
substitution,
the phrase *T<^T been used in the aphorism.
*fa
^r
\\*
11
^rr%
11
II
kt%
**
II
The v is the substitute oft (the * substitute

66) when it is followed by a soft consonant and
114.
of
^ VIII.
2.
preceded by an apluta short

The
$3J"
pratyahara includes
st
II
all
sonants or soft consonants.
Thus
tj^qf
urf* or ^rf% or rcrfrT &c.

sr<STT
spsr-qr^ns^qt
The
115.
??*
qf^TT%
II
final
or
sfr
ir&i is
the nominative case and

ginal nature, cause'.
when
understood here, but

not in
The word
The word
rf*f>'
the
followed by
3T is
stf?f
also
is
T<rw<fr 3Twre^
3*r*(Rig IX
Why
51.
do we say
The word
and not
understood here.
Rrcr
;
wtvi*
5$r
to
*ftf:
the
Thus
VI.
inner half of a
means
q-gn^"
'
iit
ori-
the Locative
'the foot
of a verse'
verses of secular
^?t
sT 5
#*% ^^(Rig.
'in the
The word
spcTlis an Indeclinable, used in
to the Verses of the Vedas,
when
should be construed here
it
the Ablative.
case here and means 'in the middle'.
^*rnu
3?
il
||
The word
refers
^cf.-^rr^r^^R:
and the following
retain their original forms, except
or
st^tt,
ll
middle half of a foot of a Vedic verse,
the
occurring in
11
Sfa ar^ H I^ >sr^
(R. Veda, V. 79. 1)
poetry.
STflT^
srt*ra?
58. I),
foot of a verse
Observe
when g; or * does not follow
^TT *mt firf ^rrm i^TS^for Why do we say
ST?" Observe %s^r^ (Rig X. 109. 1), %S3W?ff
Why do we say <r or err ?
Observe aT^r^^^TPTsWa^ U Some read this sutra as vrrscP W^rsanx
According to them, this sutra supersedes the whole rule of juxtaposition or
?
'
"
II
II
tff??Tr
(VI.
1.
72).
Prakritibhava.
1094
?TT^
ffrrj
BTcT^g:, 3T2HT, 3?*H*, 3T^T5g, STEFFJf
3?^r^ Bresrox bt^s:
ii
or
nc
I.
118
II
bt^bt^ b?^^ ^^
btprt
The
11G.
[Bk. VI. Cn.
3^^&n:q*<*n?f T^ms^:
retain their original form in the
sfr
middle of a Vedic verse, when the following words come after

them (though the s? in these has a ând q- following it)
:
srs^rac, sTc^rr^, 3Tsrs?7g:, stcTcT,
Tims
(Rig VI I.
BTTOg:
*rnrr
btf?p sTreref*Rf
zwtz, st^ ?3,
sf^J
fowfr
BTspsrnt
Brssir?*
ii
27);%%
32.
(Not
BTefrTp
II
(Rig IV.
Bohtlirrgk gives the following examples from the Rig
ST^tH BTcTrfR (IX. 73.
(VI. 14.
3),
% 3T^?f
farT*:
is
(Not
in the
generally elided in the
TsFjjc.
ffrf:
\V*
11
^c? ^rsf q^;^r
Sffif
Veda
after
or arr)
q-
sr^r%, 3t:
11
^f*r R*R sf% ^^rr
In the
117.
BTjpRr^(IX. 73.
Rig Veda: according to
^n%
11
5),
mft
8).
^rf^rfr sp*
bt^^; (Rig
3T
ftr-
Prof.
Veda : *fter?fir
Bohtlingk the
Prof.
^TClStfTCTT
tt
4- *5)
the Rig Veda).
in
ST5RT*
itfSif:,
of srs^
III. 42. 9).
ii
Yajnr-Veda,
3^
the word
when
changed to 3rr, retains its original form when followed by a

short ST which is also retained.
Thus
s*t
*wfcr* (Yaj. Veda Vajasan. IV.

the word as
ending in
They take
as aj^rs^P U
case assumes the form
7).
Some
which
3-,
read the sutra
in
the Vocative
They
give the following example ?fr 3T?rTn^r ^ftfr II

VI. II, the text reads ^RSrrfWft
T' " In lhe Yajur
H
But in the Yajur Veda

Veda, there being no stanzas, the condition of bi^cP TTf does not apply
^r^g-TTorTfwr75rf5%r^psrr&^*^
%îx:,
^Trr:
sisjf*
11
stswt^, stt^%,
errors, 3?*%,
at^fr^r
Tf^#r
rr
btrt
3rr?r g^rrofr
<TCrr :
sr^r
vreFcr
35),
f^r
bt^tt^
and
1.8.
1.
here.
sift., ^ttut:,
ll
I.
also in
.(Yaj. IV. 2).
(Yaj. VII.
22
Bp%
and
3? is
retained
after s??% or sttstt^
II
V. S
4, 43, 2. 5. 5. 4)
3?finft
m^ 3*WI
BTlp-^l *PTfcr I?*
Sanhita has gf^sf^

(I.
v?[m
11
11
after sirrr, ^ttstt, ôft, ^f%B">
Y.
\\
^r *f% ??t% ^t bt*% bthti% %&m ^ $mfssr%r3Ts^*lf
when they stand before

BTpft
y$
\\t
In the Yajur Veda, the short
118.
Thus
11
The
btsstr
).
^rrfr bt^^TtSTO
?rfq% Bifa;TT% U
Yaj.
The Vajasaneyi
Taittariya Sanhita has ^fq% ajfa
^F^%
(V. S. 23. 18
where the reading
11
is
arf*^ s*^ri?5%) but Tait S. VII. 4. 19. 1, and Tait Br. III. 9. 6. 3 has 3T*ac
The words 3t% &c, though in the Vocative, do not shorten
their vowel by VII. 3. 107, because they have been so read here.
BT*%
3T*3T?srf*3%
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
Prakriti-bhava.
122.]
In the Yajur Veda, when the word gr^ is

the subsequent short 3T is retained, as well as
119.
followed by 3T^,
the preceding ^ or
Thus
fWrT:,
*7F
?r%:
%?$:
STFTT
sfr
||
3T^
3Tff
^: STTW 3?^ 3T^
^qt^
11
W*^,
smfV<**
^j:
Yaj.
^n% ^r^f^r^
3T3?r%
1095
3T^
*Tn>TT
3Tff
P^Nk*,
q*?* tfT% 3Ttf
6. 20).
<r*:<fr
rW* q^^^rr
^fq-
hî%
ii
In the Yajur Veda, when an anudatta st is

followed by a Guttural or a sr, the antecedent ^ or srt retains
120.
form, as well as this subsequent
its
st
II
Thus 3ni t 3TF^J (Yaj. 12. 47), bt^T ^t 3T^?:

Why do we say when
gravely accented ? Observe 3TOfs*r, here vfc has acute accent on the first
II
is
Why
syllable.
Observe
do we say "when followed by a Guttural
(fi)
or a ij"?
^tsarcf^T: srtfSw'll
3^<isiit%
f%q^<T3F ST^^TT
iri
11
WcT
of
3?
3T^?Trr%,
ll
ll
11
In the Yajur Veda, when the gravely ac-
121.
cented
t^fm
11
q or w, the vowels
follows
srarqsrrac
retain their
original form.
Thus ^t
perfect of
by VIII.
STFIP
I.
28.
Here
II
^%
When
3?
*t^ fkwm
%nr:
11
*r^r,
3T^T^r:
The word 3TWTP

Thus
is
2nd
3T-l-^-i-^<T-i-*rr*T
per.
11
Singular Im-
The
not gravely accented, the sr drops.

not grave by virtue of VIII. 1. 30.
is
*fr:
&;?m
ll
Atmanepada.
in the
q-qr
it is
II
II
q^rr%
*rrqrar =^rr% T*^f
II
sHbr,
3? is
grave
As S^gr
r%srr<rr, nfr: h
n^m *n?f?t Jwqr n
in^
After nT the subsequent 37 may optionally

be retained everywhere, in the Veclasas well as in the
secular
122.
'
literature.
Thus
ffs**r:
ifr
3^ TOtenTTOr
?T*'<
S3TT
*rrs* or
3T*
In the Vedas also
ll
3TTW W 3T^ *ft
11
11
3??frrrr
H^
11
mf rr^
II
?^
||
iT^TM
^h^^rwr
II
3T*f
srf*
tot
*%>*:
*WT^q\il
tr*
ffproroinTrfo ifenm.
09 6
Prakriti-bhAva
the substitution of
is
125.
According to the opinion of Sphotayana,
123.
there
Bk. VI. Ch.
s^
for the sft of
^ when
it is
followed by any vowel.
The
of stHt ceases, that of srnf manifests
anuvritti
sni = *r^ra*, so also it^rfspnr,

sw*r, ifrsnr^-rr, iTtfTf*,
pound
VI.
*TI*l
This accent
first syllable,
2.
Thus
).
I!
*T#rm
The
will
tthtt
im^,
Thus
itself.
or in the alternative
we have
fr
tT-
substitute 3T?^ is accutely accented on the

be the original accent in the Bahuvrihi com3T5re^ = rr^rq' II
In other places, however, this
accent will be superseded by the samasanta Udatta accent (VI, 1, 223) The
mention of Sphotayana is for the sake of respect, for the anuvritti of fairer
was already understood in it. This is a vyavasthita vibhasha, hence in fRW*
the Tf^ substitution
is
compulsory and not optional.
The substitution of srsr for the aft of *rtia

compulsory when a vowel to be found in* the word %r% fol124.
lows
it.
So
Thus tt>?j:
Mahabhashya.
also rr&j zr|p
11
The word
11
fSfaj is
not found in
some
|exts or in
^?T5rfiiTr srr%
\r\
11
^rfo
ii
^srrsnfq q^^r
II
^sni^r
3?r%,
ll
ffrr:
11
c^grr^
*r3T??r w
The Pluta ( VIII. 2. 82 etc, ) and Pragrihya

remain unaltered when followed by a vowel
vowels
(1. 1. 11 etc.)
( so far as the operation of that vowel is concerned).
125.
Thus f^rTT
prolated vowels.
3re
The
^%r
and the
(VIII. 2. I,
three chapters of Ashtadhyayi
purposes of previous
^Tfr^rTT
%Vi 3TFT3
prolation of vowels
sCitras
is
in
the tripadi or the last
tripadi are considered asiddha for the
This
).
the mention of pluta would be redundant.
vowels the following are the examples
Though
These are examples of
II
taught
Of
ar^ft
is
not the" case here, otherwise
the Excepted or Pragrihya

ff<T,
3T
f?rT, *sf| ffcT,
the anuvritti,of 3Tf^ was current in this sutra from VI.
tion here
is
for the
sake of ordaining
sj-fifrprre
That
is,
I.
77
HT% ffw H
its
repeti-
the pluta and the
pragrihya retain their original forms when such a vowel follows which would
have caused a substitution. Thus w$, s ^TTO, ^srr^ here in combining 3fr$ + 3 into
5Tr%, the 3T is no cause of lengthening, therefore, the lengthening will take place,
Isfow since
is
a pragrihya,
it
follows that *fr^ which ends
in
is
also a pra-
Bk. VI. Cn.
127.
grihya, and therefore
it
Prakrti-biiAva.
should not be changed before 3T of stri
*5*ff*rTr^\
WT^T tr
but by
5TT
in this sutra is necessary, in order to
enable us to give this peculiar meaning to
Otherwise, had the sutra been simply c^ronîr:,
the sutra.
Hence we
11
There may also be the form srrawf, not

(VIII. 3. 33). In fact, the repetition of 3THT
have the form ^rr^+STTO^STT^ST^
by
1097
it
would have been
"The Pluta and Pragrihya retain their form, when

ever a vowel follows". Therefore in in"^ * ^TW, since ^ is followed by a vowel,
it will retain its form, and will not coalesce with
the ^ of 3TT3
But this is
not intended. Hence the repetition of the word srf^T, and the peculiar explantranslated ordinaeily thus:
ll
ation given above, namely, Pluta and Pragrihya vowels retain their form before
a vowel which would otherwise have caused a substitution, but

prevent the operation of any other
^ will become lengthened, because 3T

the change of
sutra
3*
which of course
to %,
understood here
is
Therefore
rule.
in srnj
3T
The word
prevented.
is
II
\r%
*v%tt*
II
II
srr^:,
in
the s +
it
causes
fi&X of the last
These pluta and pragrihya always
also.
s^hikt^s^^to
3HH
not the cause of lengthening;
is
form and are not influenced by the rule of shortening given

srr^r
8TTO
would not
it
retain their
VI.
a^nifa*:,
I.
127.
&%m
II
s^Rim^^r w% ^ ^ st^^tt *rf?r

For the adverb srr, is substituted in the
Chhandas the nasalised sif, when a vowel follows it, and it
sr%:
ii
*tt#t sf*r T^srrfrTnrT *f^t% faro
11
126.
retains its original form.
Thus
Some
Ii).
here
9T*
3TT (Rig V. 48. i)
3TT
read the word
ar^
*pftT 3?r
into this sutra.
%*st *TfIPTm*:fI=3Tr 3Trrc?
3*3* fW^rT (Rig VIII. 67.

Hence there is coalescence
11
^T S^T^T *IIW4'er I^nST

5^, ^
||
^\S
q^TFT
||
**:, 3T*F*nf, *ll<t>4*<l 9
II
II
^fr['
11
r^f s^t* sf*
^rf%57^
*r
11
11
tttt^
*rar?3**r*T*** *fc{ n*ui *î%,
Rrfspwrr^r^r- srraFrofa^TT
fanrorfts, "-?%
ipgfawwT^
^fj^
*ttrs**
%wz
mn^x- PTPf **T%
It
11
ii
According to the opinion of S&kalya, the

simple vowels with the exception of st, when followed by a
nonhomogenous vowel, retain their original forms; and if the
127.
vowel
is
long,
it is
shortened.
In the alternative we
Thus
snr, T 3T*, ^*TTPt 3T*, minft 3T*
Why do we say the j* vowels i. e.
have ^*?r, T^HT, p4f, ftrcrr**
Why do we say
simple vowels with the exception of st ? Observe *&pf'<
ll
'
II
'
followed by a non-homogenous vowel
'
II
Observe
'
frcrCfar-* H
The name
of
Prakriti-biiava.
1098
akalya
of
mentioned
is
this sutra
This
Vart
ed by an
for the
clear from
is
sake of respect.
129
Because the alternative nature
very formation.
its
aka1ya
rule of
prohibited in the case of words form-
is
affix
Bk. VI. Ch.
and of words which form invariable
q;
Thus sra ^ zrrfN?f^ra:, *T*TT fc^PT SKf^P*. The

compounds (nitya samasa)
word %Mq is formed by a %?jr affix, namely by sj*t (V. 1. 106), added to 553
Before a |%^ affix the previous word is
and therefore the ^ is changed to ?
:
11
considered a pada
Vdrt:
9s<a<*> :
^1%:
^r*r
11
16
( I. 4.
which are so by
3*U*W*JL
Of nitya-compounds
In the Vedas
?v
II
f^T
**3TR
II
srrer^^ ^n*^cre3^4ra
<reire
wft
*rent
are %^r^CW, ^ft*^, s^TO^T,
18 &c.
II. 2.
&c
3TST-
W% ^
*&ffo
are found uncombined.
s^sip
f^
II
^m^^vr^k^ h^^\-
its'-
As,
M*^r *nn%,
11
According to the opinion of Sftkalya, the

simple vowel followed by 35 retains its original form, and
if the simple vowel is long, it is shortened.
128.
Thus
ed by
?=r?r sjt>aF,
Observe,
f^nf*
!$[&*$
'
sjt* 3^,
Why
II
SEW
ff<|
Why
ll
do we say
"
do we say when follow-
the simple vowels (3T^p)"?
Observe f^n^j: (f^t + ^^T) H This rule applies even when the vowels are
homogenous (which were excepted by the last rule), and it is not confined to
f37
vowels as the
last,
sp^regprft^
R[?rm
II
^^
is
The word
That
is
in
II
* 3*fRT
Before
3T
<TTTft
and
11
srr also.
>
îferit
II
II
the word %fe in the Padapatha, a
treated like an ordinary apluta vowel.
means the affixing of ffa in non-Rishi texts

e.
up into its various padas or words and f% is added.
Padapatha, the Pluta is treated like an ordinary vowel, and hence there
a Vedic text
when
II
STfJm HP*
129.
Pluta vowel
but applies to
STf^TrT
is
being no *$f?rw (VI.

5T?T = ^*T?$fa
i.
split
1.
125),
Why
there
is
sandhi.
Thus
have we used the word
*^r??n^
*f?T
like as
= g**5T%f?T,
instead of
saying "the Pluta becomes Apluta" why do we say "Pluta is treated like apluta"?
By not using ^, the whole Pluta itself would be changed into Apluta, and
agHfrftr
";
would give rise to the fcllowing incongruity. There is prakriti bhava in the case
of pluta and pragrihya. A vowel which is pluta need not be pragrihya, nor a praBut where a vowel is both a pluta and a pragrihya at one and
grihya, a pluta.
Bk. VI. Ch.
131
Prakkiti-ihiava.
1099
the samctimc, there will arise the difficulty. Thus in the dual BT*;ft or ?ff, the %
and 3R are pragrihya. They may be made pluta also a ar^TT ^ or ^* \ 11 Now
at all
if before *r?t the pluta became apluta, then we shall not hear the prolation
in
sr^
fl% ^rf
sfrT
is
?K
ffrT^
11
ijKfr *
heard
in
by the present
sr^
^ ^flm ^r
f $ sftt- c sj<fr
\\o
11
1.
fl^
and
this
is
retain
will
additon to that they will
in
Hence the
not intended.
II
q^rfa
125,
But
rule.
| fft,
For here the vowels
+?rW &c.
by being pragrihya by VI.
their form
lose their pluta,
pluta
formed by
II
^rnrafrw**
%,
sht qârreârerHTrfos
^f^nc^ra
II
11
According to the the opinion of Chakravai'mana, the pluta ^ followed by a vowel is treated like an
130.
ordinary vowel.
Thus 3T*3
name
ffHi3nrirr
of Chakravarmana
f^ fa XVI
The
used for the sake of making this an optional
rule.
f^sr^
or 3?*3 t|
is
11
f%5 fan or
This option applies to %ft rule (VI. 1. 129) as well as to words other than fft
In the case of ffa it allows sandhi optionally, when by the last rule there would
11
have been always sandhi. In the case of words other than fr%, it ordains
when there would have been always prakriti bhava
prakriti bhdva optionally,
by VI.
1.
This
125.
f 3* or ^%^nr
f^r sc*
ffrP
II
11
&\
as
11
^n^
11
l&i q^T^TTf rfr?TrT5'T^T
ft*, ^c
f^ ?frt
nT5^rTrt
,j
For the
131.
is
prapta and aprapta both.
3*TO5rre*TreT>
This apluta- vad-bhava applies to pluta vowels other than %
Ishti
mxi
a case of
is
final of the
when
the substitution of 3,
SHTrT Tf^jR
f5J% T W^J*,
^r^^^T?!
II
nominal-stem f^, there

(I. 4. 14 &c).
a Pada
it is
The portion q^ ofthe word q^T?^ must be read into this sutra from VI. I.
The word ff^r is here a nominal-stem and not a verbal-root. Thus f|f^ ^jr%
ZR^ = ^^ri *n*Tr^, f%T5*| ft^T, 5ra?P*. <gf*f U We have said that f%% is here a prati109.
padika and not a dhatu,
for as a
dhatu
dha and should have been read
as f^[
it
11
ought to have
there takes place the substitution of long 37 for *
we
shall
have
3q^3i*gr*t, 3T^T^pT
meant, and debars

will
be 5W*r,
sutra.
Why
TOwft:
^fvr:
II
The
^ sfrft
3F
with a
by VI.
anuban-
being used as a verb,

In that case
4. 19.
^ shows
that short
is
In the case of ^substitution the forms
377 also
comes because it is taught in a subsequent

tada ? Observe f%^ft, f^:
do we say when
'
The
servile letter
its
4. 19).
(VI.
373"
its
In the case of
it is
s^RTroT^TTTH ^fe
ll
'
ll
\\R
II
^tt%
II
*a<t
cr^:-,
PRAKRITM3HAVA.
IIOO
to ^T?rrr^
m* ?ra
*roFr tfrcr
w?r
After
132.
Bk. VI. Cu.
134.
ii
and
o^Tcjr
there
tf^r
elision
is
of the
case-affix s; (of the nominative singular), when a consonant

follows it, when these words are not combined with ^
(
V.
3.
71
and have not the Negative
Particle in
com-
position.
Why do we say
*T Vftfrt, <^W^> ^ 3S1*%
Observe ^r ^TRf,
^^% H Why do say "the case affix of
Why do we say 'without
the Nom. singular?" Observe q^r *TT#r *TCT
H
The
words %%% and n& with
ipT^Rf
*Hffr
Observe
f?n%
STRT,
3T'?
Thus w> +^TnT = *TT Wfo,
of
ffrTT
and
ll
II
the affix bt^v, which
and
rTC
without such
falls in
affix,
the middle, would be considered just like
and
in fact
would be included
in the
words
qtT?H
q^ and
hence the necessity of the prohibition. The general maxim is ?r^Rf?Trrany term that may be employed in Grammar denotes not
**T *T^*T *TS1%
^,
'
merely what
is
actually denoted
by
it,
but
it
denotes also whatever word-form
may result when something is inserted in that which is actually denoted by it".
Why do we say when not compounded with the negative particle " ?
Observe spr^r WRT> ^^ "R^ " In the c o m Pund with the negative particle
Why do
sp^, the second member is the principal and takes the case affixes.
*
followed by a consonant'? Observe i^Ssr, ^ts^
we say 'when
ff^r;
11
to f^RTTO
^f% ?fo t^t z&s r^rfr h^rt
II
ii
In the Chhandas, the case-affix of the nominative singular is diversely elided after ^j, when a consonant
133.
follows it.
Thus
3*T
to
^rrsfr
mvfa
R 'S
&wm
IX- 8 7> 4)
to TO% T^f %^ ^fa (

The ** means he
f^^K
5
'
apr TOT
?ett
*^r arr^sr *rrsrft (Rig IV. 40. 4),

Sometimes it does not take place as
sfcrntf
'.
I'
sf%
^cnri;-,
<sft
^Tân*
11
\\*
11
q^n%
*:, stt%, <sft,
%<*,
*nr-
il
134.
a vowel,
if
'
The
by such
case-affix of
elision
W*
'he',
is
elided before
the metre of the foot becomes
complete.
o).
Thus %s n^r *rofa ^"ffrPtCRig I. 32. 15 ) #rcr>fa3S*rer (Rig VIII. 43The case-ending being elided, the Sandhi takes place. Why do we say
Bk. vi. Ch.
'when by such
*Tfrt
135
elision the
The word
II
hoi
a* Augment.
metre of the
btN" in the sutra
is
line
is
for the
completed'
Observe
sake of distinctness
*r
sgrsir
for the pur-
poses of metre would not have been served by eliding the affix before a
consonant, for then the syllables would remain the same.
It is
by sandhi
and sandhi would take place only with a vowel.

Some explain the word qTf as 'a foot of a Sloka' also, and according to them
Thus we have: OT fntrcyt
this rule is not confined to Vedic metres only.
that a syllable
is
lessened
^ *n*&:
11
U^
Upto VI.
135.
sentence
is
added **"
This
is
11
g?,
1.
*ra;,
15:,
11
157 inclusive, the following
be supplied in every aphorism:
to
is
^tr
" before B
II
an adhikara sutra and extends upto VI.
I.
157.
Whatever we
augment !J? is placed before

^' should be supplied to complete the sense. Thus VI. I. 137
After OT., qft and TT when followed by the verb ^j, the sense being
shall teach hereafter, in all those, the phrase 'the
the letter
"
teaches
that of adorning".
complete the sense,

preceded by
Here the above phrase should be read into the sutra to

e. "the augment îs added before the 3> of g> when it is
and ;yq-, and the sense is that of adorning". Thus *Pl+S[
i.
^, qrc
+ 3; + < = H*3f?Tr, *r*3uf^, ^^^31.11 In the succeeding aphorisms it will be

comes only before those roots which begin with gj
seen that the augment
What
is
II
then the necessity of using the phrase
used to indicate that the
*t
remains unattached to
Thus though ^ becomes
^r^T
in this sutra ?
though
it
It is
stands before
should not be considered to be

a verb beginning with a conjunct (sanyoga) consonant: and therefore the
it.
*$, yet the latter
in VI I. .4. 10 (the root ending in s^ and preceded by a conjunct

guna before f^r) does not apply, nor do the rules like VII. 4. 29,
nor the rules ordainjng the addition of intermediate 5? (VII. 2. 43) by which
the f? would come in f^ and f%^ (Imperfect and Aorist) as,
*re$tfre and
and so also VII. 4. 29, does not apply as grf*3ps% the Passive Imper*PT*25?r
guna taught
letter,
takes
fect
(stf%f Rjjfl7 )
of
m~g
If so, then the
anudatta accent taught
28 would not take place, since the augment
non-Rrf -word
verb.
It
is
^ and
g? would
VIII.
1.
VIII.
r.
word ^qf%, thus ûnfa would have accent on the

wfHr "fSsT^ftsfTmiT in applying a rule relating to
the f%^;<r
maxim
'
accent the intervening consonants are considered as

therefore
in
intervene between the
if non-existent'and
does
not offer any intervention to the application of the rule
g?
28.
Uîs not to be taken as attached to 5jf, hgw do you explain
|? Augment.
102
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
137
the guna in the Perfect 3rd Per. Dual and Plural in *nrefRg: and *hre?7$:
which apparently is done by applying VII. 4. 10. Though that rule strictly
applies to roots beginning with a conjunct consonant,
roots like
guna
The
is
Sutra VIII.
is
for the
purpose of differentiating
it
from
the
in
70.
3.
îw^*rer$fa
11
apply also to
;
indicatory ? in
ff%:
will
it
&%> which have a conjunct consonant for their penultimate and the
done also on the maxim rr^^TRrr^T'*: ^f^T *I?T% (See VI. 1. 132).
11
\\\
srfsapn^ s^rô^r^f
11
irrft
stsstto
n **?>
^^r^?r w?r
s*rcr%, sift
ll
11
The augment îs placed before 97 even

augment sr? (VI. 4. 71) or the Reduplicate inter-
136.
when
the
venes (between the preposition and the verb).

Thus
^"^R
s^r^fTT
bt|-
snrejRtrj;
This sutra
II
^HR
ei^rqf^, ^tottc
(=sra+3T5tffr^),
is
not that of Panini, but
and
3T-j[râ[^R
II
= ^+^^r),
made out of two

The augmented root
<tr-
Vartikas
is
would
have given the form srajn: by VII. 4. 61, if ct be considered an integral part of
It
i, and no rule of Antaranga and Bahiranga be taken into consideration.
might be said where is the necessity then of

relating to a Dhatu and Upasarga is Antaranga,
the Upasarga, and
augment ^?
is
*TC^
is
it
sutra
this
i.
e.
a root
The
is first
operation
joined with
undergoes other operations afterwards. Therefore,
Thus
Now, we
the form to which 3T? and sr^RT operations are to be applied.
have said
in the
foregoing aphorism, that
is
considered as unattached to
and therefore, the augment st? may be added after this 7 and so also
Thus we may have the forms
plication may take place without it.
,
efftr?^
and ^^cfTR
But
II
this is
sutra teaching that even after

fore 37
and no where
**q|qw
3-
70.
like
*rt-
BTând
reduplicate, the fj*
must be placed be-
ll
^vs
ll
<*?n^
The augment 55
srac - <ift
is
^<n%:,
placed before
sr
^n&,
when
and the sense
is
The * of *p* is changed to anusvara

The 15 is changed to by
So also qfts^r TRî TR^rf^^
5.
So also with 37, as ^q^rTT, sqs^f* TT^ssw. Why do we say
Thus
VIII.
not desired, hence the necessity of the present
^H, qrc and ^q are followed by the verb

that of ornamenting.
3.
the redu-
else.
^><ft ^rfr
137.
by VIII.
the
first
added, and then the 3T? and 3T>qRT operations take place.
src^rlf, *reff*,
ST^<f *** "
11
<sr
13k VI. Ch.
I.
140
g^ Augment.
1103
'when meaning to ornament'? Observe 7TO> H Sometimes 7 comes

thus ^sf-rFreFU
after ^-q even when the sense is not that of ornamenting
1
*n&& ^
\\*
11
comes
3>
combining.
The word
W$t
^ g*
placed before
is
when
*j,
W%, qR and ^q, the sense being that of
after
*t*t^to
'
^:
?p* ^'
*r<si>rTr
<rrc-
'.
*r^r
11
*nrar3r,
means aggregation. Thus

T ST^cR"==STgfftTO that is we assembled there
tfScT*, rT^T
ff%:
The augment f
138.
the verb
^^
g^PrrcreprorfspRra far** ^r *rrePEira
TOT WttH
51 SRF^fr
the verb
comes
take pains
after
3"<T,
something,
for
srfassr
faf^^r %f>rR
**TPJ H
The augment ?
139.
srtffcr
placed before
is
when
*r,
and the sense is that of to

to prepare, and to supply an
'
ellipses in a discourse \
To
crease
take pains in imparting a
value, or to
its
keep
prepared or altered
which
is
ft$<T,
the affix
it
is
safe
new
quality to a thing In order to in-
from deterioration
called %?>rf
called JrfrT^
is
The word
II
%f>rT
To
is
alluded
'
II
'
When
II
we have
not having any one of the above
3T3Wl%
forcer
fT%:
'
II
it
to, is called the sror^rc of a sentence.

Thus in
we have ^qt^^TTf^^ (See I. 3. 32) ^jpTSTTTOPTIn the sense of altering by preparing we have
^T^rT *np#, 3"<T*I>tT
In the sense of 'supplying a thesis we have TT*?>rf 3T?qrfrT, T^fJrT-
of a sentence which
H*ft%
is
supply by distinct statement the sense
the sense of 'taking pains'
TB^f?T
11
being added without changing the sense, by considering
st<*
to belong to sn^rft class (V. 4. 38).
*^%
That
same as
the
^^
STriWT
*rfTHff*
II
five
senses (VI.
11
?o
11
q^rft
11
SHI^TRf^f^rfr *TRT
^S^^tR^:
farm,
^r%
?TOTPftr*
11
f^ 5FT*1^
HJPT
or split
3F
II
II
The augment ^j? is placed

comes after ^T and the sense
140.
the verb
137-139)
I.
before
is
when
5;,
that of
'
',
Thus ST^PC ?r^r
^TPrT, 3q*37TC sfT^4I^KT PTP>T -
f^F3 ^TRT
II
to cut
no4
^ Augment.
The
Vdrt
when
above augment takes place
is
I..
143
added to
the meaning
is
not
',
J41-
verb
tirg?*
When
the verb sr-fj, as shown in the above examples.

that of to cut the form is ?qT3ftf3
'
Bk. VI. Cn.
comes
37
T ne
after 3"q
augment ^^ is placed before % when the

and sjr%, and the sense is "to cause
suffering".
Thus sts^*^
Why
^r<TO
do we say when
fsn*
the sense
^r^=^m % s*r fw^r *gnr. i*n

to cause pain
is
'
Observe
qfrT-
II
n%^%
*psi%
or jtrt^ft ?nf
g?,
) n
11
^^rr^rg^ra^w^ fsR^r^ppr^tTM *^mm *

The augment qga: is placed before ^r, when
142.
after srq and the sense is the scraping of
comes
the verb 3F
earth by four-footed animals or birds \
sr
11
ii
'
Thus sttR^c^ irrr f? arrff^c^ i^fîr *$*ir$? srrfN^f **r 3Tpronrr-=

Why do we say 'four-footed animals or birds'? Observe
WTFTO3 f%f^TTT%
:
II
*rrf*rcra
\***p
Vdrt
11
This rule applies when the scraping
the sake of finding food, or

errf%tf?r **r
sfrf^fT^rrerrp
through pleasure &c, that
Tarasmaipada
ii
And
ll
t\\e
root
affixes will follow.
5*g*f6far *m%*.
fpf:
making a
fs*5*5tftf*
11
??
11
is
through pleasure, or for
resting place,
takes Atmanepada
See
I.
^n%
npfrt *rfsr%f*!%
3.
11
Therefore not here:
the above senses
in
is
it
affixes
of scraping
otherwise the
21. Vart.
s^gsfsfa, *m%:,
g*
11
11
The word $^3*35 is irregularly formed with

augment |jar and means a species of herb \
143.
the
so
'
The |tf3*?3 1S the name of coriander

The exhibition, of the word in the
called.
i.
e.
vn^RT
the seeds are also
sutra in the Neuter gender does
When not meaning coriis always Neuter.

not however show that the word
The word 5*5^ here means
ander, the form is 3*f* (ftf^rR 3*f5far)
the
fruit
of the ebony tree.
Bk. vi. Ch.
gr
I.
m^mj:
145
? Augment.
ftFi^rorrcT^
ment ^? when the
TO Ed
The
noun, CTKTTO
be
?r
of g*T
r$i
and
:
'
(2)
*ri^
11
formed by the aug-
is
of *pr
do y ou explain 333*, it ought to

rRT, on the strength of the
elided before a word ending in a kritya affix, the
is elided optionally before
and *resr the ? of
is
is
cfiPT
is
elided before Tr^7 or
HT^giPrS 8**^
T^*t
How
optionally elided before
the final 3T of vfa
tTrT,
(4) fft TT^
11
123)=^'^
i.
elided before
is
= 9TîTO^,
ff%:
(V.
The
m^
uninterrupted action \
that of
*n**rr
"The w nof 3re>3*T
SFrTFP*
Karika:
^kp
stmt
srq^<ro:, fe*rr
not meant,
str^t
VTTC:
is
11
M^fnT = ^RTrptf^grfT *T^g^T U When the contiwe have STTCTCP *TTOT *rs^fnT - 3TT\ <fr^ W&&
comes from *TrTrT, by adding ssrar to form the abstract
Thus 3TT**W:
is
sense
t^r
11
The word
144.
nuity of action
\w
11
1105
mHi ^&
" (3)
q^r
II
As
(1)
*RJî = tff^>
sjfifa*
rrrt=^rf3
II
II
^ f%<ra
3^ ^ ^r *rnnt s%pr%
The word 'Tr^ is formed by
*tt*T3T%W K^rararir
145.
3^*2-
visited or not visited
meaning a locality
means a quantity.
11
when
when it
^j?,
by cows, or
Thus T?t*TCr ^P = *nT' t*j% ^rer* %tr sr ^ttpt* %ferTr jsn n So also
The word ttkt? by itself does not mean not visited by
TiTr^T^rnirf%
Therefore the negative particle is added to give that sense. So also
cows
'
ll
'.
*TT5TTTr# ^N">
*fr*mt ft%^
Here the word has no reference to cow, but to
When
the quantity of land atid rain.
ifn^t=rfr q?*H
:
rfrCTTf
What
is
it
has not the above senses, the form is

word sfirftcr in the sutra, the word
the use of the
by adding the negative
will give 3rffr*re
*T>i compound
means "a man who is a Kshatrya &c. not
force of
is
a stone &c".
land but
grazing".
in
Therefore
3Tffr*re
it is
intended that
such possibility, hence 3T*TRrT

never enter, are called
stt^ gfigimn
Inr
'i
with
r>]rN
which cows do not graze, but
But
srn^smre
9}%^
ll
particle,
rfrtfT?
- 3Trrr*T?
that of *j|5T "like that but not that".
it
would mean "a place

in
The
srgrrgrar
Brahmana, but does not mean
which there
is*
like a pasture
a possibility of cows
should refer to a place where there
used.
Therefore, deep
forests,
is no
where cows can
srrer^, *msr*TP*,
'
qmm m^%*T f-tTr^ u
\*%
svj* stf^r
is
As
ll
i^rfir
ll
no6
5^ Augment.
The word
146.
meaning a place
The word J?f?TOT means

Thus smr^ 3T%?T
authority
'
Observe
3Tr
^TT^^rf^^
wra fr R<rra?rr^
ing something
The word
^T S^r^VrT
gr^%
'
meaning a
11
srf^r
srnsro**,
ll
formed by
srnsHr is
when mean-
fgs,
unusual \
3Tr*TO is
formed by adding the
and the augment
3TT,
sh^fc:
fj?
not having this sense,

11
f^lRTO^
5^^f^T *^<T
^tt%
ll
do we say when
II
The word
'
When
ll
when
fjsr
11
147.
the preposition
150
firm place, established position, rank, dignity,
Tfr^=3TrT^
?*^
ll
formed by
is
^P* Why
'.
'
srreq^
I.
or position \
'
place
Rk. VI. Ch.
?*
q^rr%
II
^H
sfni
3Tsre*PC.
ijsrnr,
^r^TÎ
3Tr^$
*lff
ll
ll
II
The word zm*$F:
148.
to the verb qr with
jqr
we have srr^R
sHh%,
II
affix
Thus 3Tn*$
II
formed with
is
mean-
fjs
ing "excrement''
That which has bad
To
ejected food.
the root
lustre
and irregularly the g*
spf
excreta
(the rectum)
lie
is
is
II
is
called
added the
Thus
*MHi
^f^Trf
affix 3T* (III.
3Tsre^rS5re?TO;
also so called.
When
II
It
ll
applies to the
3- 57J, the preposition

The place where the
not having this sense,
we have
sre^
^n% H aniwr., *ww*
smsFTt TwrgK ?**
3TT^rf*hCrlife?RR^'T f^TTrRrrt
3T<T*3Frc fm R^r^% **1T% %^fa
ff%:
The word srq^^T is formed with ^r meaning
149.
;
II
ll
ll
ll
II
II
the part of a chariot \

This word
affix
btt (III.
have
3T737* H
3-
is
57)
also derived
and fj^ augment.
with the preposition 3TT and the
fj
When
not haying this meaning,
we
f^^r: ^f*f%fopfr ^T
Verse
*ft ^Tfrf^r
150.
ally
from
II
\\o
11
q^
*W f^TCP >4îld
The word
when denoting
fafarc
II
firr^c
a kind
is
ll
fa**?r.,
ST^%:, fafcr., ^T
II
formed with
option-
of bird, the other form being
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
This word
is
preposition f% and
Though
specific
and nothing
form
this
affix
^ffiftf^fn"
(III.
3F
with the
also refers to birds
added from the Vartika
is
^^r
Thtis sft ^
135) to
i.
f^R
vt^r
$*fc*IW
faf^Kir:
would have given the optional form

the sutra indicates that
in
Otherwise
else.
1107
The word
11
sCitra.
the sutra f^r^^cr^r^^Y
mention of
*j<
The phrase
no part of the original
is
'bird'
augment
the
only, a kind of cock.
and
5* Augment.
is3l
f^raft
would have
always means
nfijRT
refferred
ftr^n:,
II
the
to
some thing
other than a bird.
ff%''
II
Wit *P^f^
In a Mantra, the 5^ is added to
^ff^Sf^TT^Tf ?f^T^: gr*T*t
151.
member
second
is
it
compound and
in
II
^^
when
preceded by a
is
short vowel.
Why do we say after a short vowel ? Observe
Thus fj^fff 5TT^
in a Mantra ? Observe, g*T?yr frfareft
say
Why
do
we
rorhf^wrf^T
The ^tRT^ can only be in a compound (samasa) as it is well-known to all
II
'
and
it
does not msan, 'the second word
Therefore the rule does not apply here
<rfe<^3Ta* *>$r:
the augment
%<yt
11
To
152.
11
the root
is
town to-day,
^ftn" is
srfaTTvT
153.
to go, to punish
151 in
added
xtrt,
the
srr
affix (III.
1.
134) to the
II
'.
Why
do we say
"to the
root
^f\^[" ?
fr
II
m\, and
y\\
II
not to a derivative word.
ttfr
II
?t^j^ ^r?sfr,
The words st^j^ and
I.
is
',
the preposition
II
the Mantra,
referring to Rishis,
here
it
we have j^t7^
refers to
S*P,
3s$r
II
^ftaar^ are formed
meaning the two Rishis of that name.

The word ^R^j
Thus JÎT ^ sjtR-:, ?K???? mfT-
g^r,
II
Thus mn*m JT^nfT H* % ^ ffrer^SP 'I shall

jrf^
The word JrfrpEKSP means " a
be thou my emissary
to the root
sr^^J^ftsr^sCTf
VI.
sjrer/
^&:
^CT^JTr^fiSTTS^ 'a horse guided by the whip'. Here though

yet the augment does not take place, because the
3751
derived from
augment comes
ll
trfcWiSn, ^,
formed by adding
messenger, a herald, an emissary".

.Observe
^rsf^ra" T?g-JTn?T
II
meaning might convey:
as the literal
II
word'jrf^s^^r
root, with adding the prefix
inspect the
q^rfa
',
when preceded by
fjar,
form being ^Pcro^r.

The
11
'
II
by
could be formed by
other than Mantras.
(?Ji<*j <TPT rHipTrf ?TC*?T^)
When
?R**ff TFTT^
not
(fft:
no8
* Augment.
<tfT2TT3rer*ff:
VI. Cu.
I.
bamboo
',
Sfc.
157
11
The word
154.
means
Jn=*Et
'
*IWK3( means a mendicant monk \

When not having these meanings, the
form
derived nominal stem, having no derivation,
to which fj?
and
'
This is an un*
added when 'a
addition, when a -mendicant is to be
is *t^t*
it
is
meant; and the affix ffa in

Why do we say "when mean-:
thus we have t^rt and TC^fist
and
expressed
mendicant
Observe
".
*ih<mr?: " an alligator ", ij^ff
ing a bamboo or a
word, being derived from
the
word
derivative
*$&is a
"an ocean". Some say
bamboo'
is
II
WW
'
to
do with the negative
particle
'
*rr
and the
fap^% ipr qT>rf%^^f% = T^fT^s 'a
long an being
affix ar^r, the
bamboo
by which the
So also by adding fpr in the sense of <rr*5i?3 to the root
we get H^K^M Thus m ^WiRT==*rercr "a
5 preceded by the upapada m;
monk, who has renounced all works". A mendicant always says "rr$3<T: 2f?*frm
Thus
shortened.
prohibition
is
OTf?<ft: ^reft''
*TT
or stick
made'.
"Do no works ye men,
qRTCdtarareg 5 ^ 5ftc
?Vi
11
peace
^rr^
11
The words
155.
for
is
your highest end".
m^rn*, snreg^, ^rft
II
tfirenr
11
and sr^rcg^ are names of
cities.
When
(3T5TW
not meaning
&vm)
cities,
we have
5f?Rffr*
(rr^ rftwO
and sr^ a r f*i
II
<T^TR *K^<:, f^:

^rrc^tr !$n
V<i\ H
^fa<tt*3%
ffrT
ZxK^t
ff%:
means a tree '.
The word ?T<
156.
This word is formed from sfnT + fifir (III. 2. 21)=^*^: n When
Some do not make this a separate
not meaning a tree, the form is 37R^::
II
II
^^KT
II
II
II
^<
'
II
sutra, but include
it
qncsronjcfTfa
^ftp*
ff%
11
in the
next aphorism.
^ %fran*
11
tvs
^rr%
m<w
ll
^ ^s^rrr** f^rrnF% srsrnir f^ra

157.. The words *TlT^vC &c are Names.
11
gfTTC^s
country called Paraskara'.

N. of a measure', f^f^*'4T
^7
^r,
ll
TrrejrorecftPr
These words are irregularly formed by adding
'
sr^frr%,
in the
similarly
compound
by
'
N. of a cave',
of <T^+^T, and eliding
inserting !J^
fj*
N. of a tree', totot
sr^
f|
ll
'a thief
fÊTfrT
'
',
Thus TJT^T'
11
N. of a river',
'
f^Scjj:
formed by inserting
N. of a Diety', formed
between ff^+q^r and eliding the
11
Why
do we
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.. 158
Accent.
1109
say when meaning a thief and a diety
?
Observe ^vfiv, f?cTTcr: U The words
and
are
used
in
the
Ganapatha
merely for the sake of diversity, the
^K
^TT
word g-fn would have connoted that s^ptf^ ift:
When the root g7 rJ*<T 'to
injure' is preceded by the preposition sr, there is added gr to JT, when the agent
-
11
of the verb
sira
*WTT%
gated
II
utgujft
II
do we say 'when the agent is cow' ?

g* is added to a finite verb, which
the
*T*$S*wi*T
*tP> JTCg^Trfr TPir, JT*<|*<Tf?cr *rm'*
WWW f%3,TCW
JSTaWM
qifrl**i
Why
a cow.
is
ff ^nW^r5R3^T
158.
sr^%:
if g
HaR g
an^TTRI% ^Th^H.
word
is,
ll
BT
This
is
Observe
is
s*r<j-
thus conju-
Thus
an akritigana.
II
with the exception of one
syll-
able, unaccented.
That
is,
only one syllable in a word
This
anudatta or unaccented.
is
a Paribhasha
is
accented,
or
maxim
all
the rest are
of interpretation
with regard to the laws of accent. Wherever an accent be it acute ( udatta )

is ordained with regard to a word, there this maxim
or a circumflex (svarita)
must be applied, to make all the other syllables of that word unaccented.
What is the one to be
The word ar^nr means having an anudatta vowel
excepted ? That one about which any particular accent has been taught in
the rules here-in-after given. Thus VI. 1. 162 teaches that a root has acute
c
'.
accent on the
final.
other syllables
Therefore, with the exception of the last syllable,
are unaccented.
The
the rest are unaccepted.
^nfcT has acute accent on

as
^tr:, has accent on
sFftrTCrncf*
^'
m
II
ll
Thus
root
in
Tr tTr5frT
accent
is
the acute accent
superseded by
?rr
is
all
on
the
all
accent, thus
The sit accent is superseded by cT?t accent,

The rf*r accent is superseded by srPI. accent, as
II
fohHW JT1%: IT^W

1*T*j ^TCHf ^J*r %^fTO Tf^T:
The
words 'with the exception of one syllable' show that the separate accent of
srpT*TW
II
an augment, or a preparative element, or a stem or an
when a
particular accent
is
I. 98 teaches
"srp* acutely accented is the
sarvanamsthana affix follows". Thus "**|fo SRjff:, here
10
affix
should cease
Thus as to (1) augment: yij

augment of ^g? and SFTg? when
taught for a word'.
fehe
augment-accent
mo
Accent.
^3* was
supersedes the accent of the stem, for

syllable, so also ST^fi?
thus derived
(^^tUn V.
3*^+3^+1%$
sr^r 5?Rr==
vocalisation of
of
158
acutely accented on the
first
these being formed by the affixes
Thus ^r+3T*=<%?:
tively.
^ VI.
1.
= 3T^Ji?
i5
Bk. VI. Ch.
3^
accent VI.
58,
and
3*^
197
I.
I.
respecis
3T?rf?
replaced by ^, and there is

This word is formed by a Krit affix
the
>
II
st is
with a karaka upapada, therefore, the second term will retain
original accent,
its
namely the final acute of a root. (VI. 1. 162 and VI. 2. 139 ) st^ct itself is
derived by adding the affix ( Un IV. 189 ) 3T!J^ which makes the word acutely
accented on the
cented when
a vowel
stem
sr*^
3TRT^(Un
I.
197).
stem taught
is
in
of the vikarana
irf^r
from
derived
is
an example of fr%K
1.
'a
foot has an accent on

28, 3),
makes n
acute. (4)
as ^rfoip^,
96) here VI.
1.
The determination
its final',
and
So
an anitya
rule,
^rpJJR;,
added
to
it
to
by
accent of the affix (III.

rule III.
*TPTr3
(VI.
1.
32
all.
162),
The
III.
1. 3),
1.
i.
test
is,
Thus
28, the
e.
VI.
way
gives
affix
162).
I.
and the sequence of those

a nitya rule superseding
what
*tr<TT3TnT
3J
guided by the
foil wing
another
(VI.
1.
(>*fij),
falls
rule',
finds
derived from
It is
I'
162).
When
*j<t
the
affix
3TR
is
a root.
Thus
and thus takes the accent of a dhatu
on 3
that except one special accent taught
and the accent

is
the remaining rule that
word becomes nrrra and it takes the

now falls on TT but now comes
which says that a word taking the
rule
is
the accent
II
syllables take anudtta. Therefore,

is
it,
rule,
rule, that in spite of
rule.
gets the designation of root

1.
3TT in 3TRT
which are formed by the
which as a root has accent on the syllable

is
affix
(
of the proper accent of a word depends upon con-
scope or activity, bars that former
affix 3TT3
first
supersedes the accent
185 debars the accent of the root (VI.
But another
applies after giving scope
root,
of the
first 3?
an antaranga superseding a bahiranga, an apavada rule super-
utsarga rule.
seding an
75
also the accent of the affix sup-
a latter rule (qr) superseding a prior
e. g.
1.
the accent of the
rrr<Trai%
the acute accent on
e.
i.
sidering the various rules that have gone to form

rules,
VII.
by adding the
3T*t
Similarly in
(3;
II
1.
162
srrsT (III.
ersedes that of the stem

1.
3Tf$f,
(Vikarana):
which makes the word accutely accented on the
to the root-accent which
SpaÎII.
3TC*T,
f^T-fnr
there shall be stt^ acutely ac-
supersede the acute accent of the
The word
VI.
and
any of the subsequent terminations beginning with
will
3??r
l
III. 154)
This
3TT**T, ^HT,
follows or
?r
This
".
as
Similarly as to
first syllable. (2).
teaches " instead of
where there
is
in a sutra the other
a conflict of rules, the accent
maxim: "q^W'rTCfflW^ ^5^**11 ^^fj^fsre^"
namely (1) the sequence, a succeeding rule setting aside a prior rule (2) a Nitya
rule is stronger ftien Anitya, ( 3 ) Antaranga stronger than Bahiranga, ( 4 ) the
Apavada
is
stronger then Utsarga.
illustrated above, then
we apply
quote the words of Kasika: ^T
When
all
these are exhausted, as
the rule of strtrts
f? 3fTO(.sn%
RT*3%
II
What
rT^f 3TTC3RT
is
we have
this rule
W%
"that
To
which
Bk. VI.
Cri.
I.
Accent.
158]
does remain and must
Thus
other".
by which the acute

(VI.
*?rg*^; v
last
1,
spite of the presence of another, debars such
in
here the ljrtKiHt-
in *fnrrar<t;
on the
is
192) by which the
formed with
addition of the
tne accent of the affix" (III.
of a dhatu
final
rule of
and
debars the
it
the case of deriva-
in
because even ofter the
^rfrTftre,
these words retain the designation of dhatu.
affix,
1.
an apavada to the
is
acute,
is
debarred
in its turn
is
by the
affixes,
"
syllable of the affix
first
dhatu-accent; but this affix-accent

tive verbs
iiiz
Similarly
^ffwrNKH g ^gp, "The son of him whose upper garment (uttarasanga) is of black
color the Son of Baladeva" the Bahuvrihi-accent(VI.2.i) being an apavada to
Samasa-accent (VI. 1.223), debars thesamasa-accent; but this Bahuvrihi-accent
is in its turn debarred by the rule of ^rreftlE when a further compound is formed
and the final word is a compound only and not a Bahuvrihi. Though the accent
of the Vikarana is a 5af%Rrg, yet it does not debar the Sarvadhatuka accent
in
VI.
1.
186
accent of
: .
^fa:, the accent of the vikarana
in
The
?fT-accent
the accent of
debarred by
;ft
docs not debar the
11
Vdrt:
btr^ here
Thus
).
<t*t
T^ accent
stronger than the case-affix accent.
is
2. 2,
in
VI. 1. 166) though smrerg is

Negative compounds are Tat-
vibhakti after ft*j
taught in VI.
Thus
for
purusha.
Vdrt:
The accent of
caused or occasioned by
in =qrcnr
is
Tfsr
this
stronger than the accent of that which
Thus STOW*'
occasioned because of the case-affix, for
a Sarvanama case-affix follows
But
is
a vibhakti.
udatta
Why
VII.
98
1.
II
it is
This
).
udatta
srf is
superseded by the accent of the Negative
is
do we say
'in
As
will retain its accent.
body of
the
||i|tT!
pada
VI.
98
1.
).
particle.
In a sentence, every
'?
is
Here the augment 3TPT

added only then when
word
*rr^nT ^pfr^r "O Devadatta, drive away the
The word qf^ is in fact used in this sutra in its secondary sense,
namely that which will get the designation of T^ when completed had it
meant the full ready made pada, this word would not have been repeated in
white cow".
tr^rfagnr sutra (VIII.
would
as belonging
its
belonging to
because
it is
Tftlft class,
first
affix to
by
2.
it
full
we
IV.
nn
is
adding the feminine
get ff^r, which will retain
trf
II
But
it is
syllable (Phit II. 15),
44, thus
'pada' been meant, the incongruity
^^
The word
not technically a
on the
formed from
Had
16, 17).
to n\mft class (Phit II. 15),
tta accent
2.
i.
arise in the following.
f^^rr R^fTR
rest syllables anudatta, just at the
would have taken
to
it
acute on the
by
first
so, the word ^rfr has anudaand hence we can apply the 3t*t
=^T^w
Similarly the word
It
II. 15),
with, the affix
*Tpfafr
sj^r
(V.
If here the affix fft being uoLatta causes all the
very
moment
of its application, without seeing
whether the word was a pada or not, then the word

3}*r
#rr
first
not
(belonging to Gramadi class Phit
115) and the feminine #[<* H
its
affix
and therefore
its
exception
is
rrpiofr
proper
being anudattadi
in
the PTSffl^ class
1 1
End-acute
12
(IV.
2.
38
But
).
Bk. VI. Ch.
remain acutely accented on the
^FtP
Sisft S?cT
and
first,
be useless.
*F*ferat
II
its
q^TT%
II
word
enumeration
*&,
II
would
*Tf$oft
38 would
in IV. 2.
S3T,
STcSTcT:,
3T?cT:,
II
159.
stem formed with the Krita-affix
the aeute accent on the end-syllable,
(^m)
^*
root
160
the anudatta-hood of the remaining syllables were to
if
follow after a word had got the designation of Tf, then the
3^TtT.
I.
or has a long
in
stt
if it is
ster
has
formed from the
it.
This is an exception to VI.

Thus.qE$*vlF$, *r& r tf&i ?TO :, >rf:
1. 197 by which affixes having an indicatory 3T have acute accent on the first
The word 3vT is used in the aphorism instead of ^r, to indicate that
syllable.
II
^jf of
Bhvadi gana
The word
by
affected
is
^^
STS^faf
II
\\o
II
^TT^
&\ fj^frf
and not
this rule,
derived from Tudadi
sJM:
^sgr^RnC,
II
first syllable.
II
The words sr^ &c. have
160.
of Tudadigana.
has acute accent on the
acute accent on
the last syllable.

Thus
1.
s>:,
2.
4. -3^^:
STxSF,
3-
*?re?:,
II
and would have taken acute-accent on the first.

spr affix (III. 3. 61) which being grave (III. I.
taken the accent of the dhatu (VI.
Some
read
also here.
5zr<J;
causing of guna
is
7.
î'
162),
1.
of a carriage'.
by
this
is
and has
on the
accent
syllable.
first
is
3iT:
'
poison
means
it
8. *Tf:
',
^11^5-^1%,
Sama Veda,
last
in
III. 3. 121.
word ItTP? occurring

:
other places^
it
end-acute when meaning
on the
on the
first.
first.
ed by
srsi,
H$T
otherwise
thus
3.Tr*3rrr?r vTRTTff^n't,
14.
tation of vrnrsrfr
^tH^tT^T
mto
tn * s a * sa
though a
in
Sama Veda
the
*5
^^ root
a part
formed
acute
is
;F
here qprf
11
first syllable.
stotra
*%% ^:, the
3-T*
means
has acute on the
affix
it
3?:
has
has acute
in other senses, the acute is
Î^^
^^ ^T*T F2Tr
;
12.
when formed by
*rr*3"', rrr?:,
e S- T*W->
*Hbr,
on the
falls
U.^tTR: ^Sf, the
has the accent on the middle.

'a cave',
'
',
is
11
e.g. VK*i^, TK|?t, 1^11
the
= (|slr)
in other senses, the
syllable.
the non-
affix,
a cycle of time
11
take the above accent, when denoting ^rn the accent

I0
srsi
first
These words
M: O^Sf:), and ^:, ^v{
When denoting instrument (sr^jt) they
9. %*t:, %ft,
by qrr by
are formed
when
would have
acute on the
and the word means
irregular,
In other senses, the form
sr<*,
these words
4),
from âr by
derived
is
5.
e.
i.
These are formed by ^Tl

6. spj: are formed by
*r<|:,
Some
(*pf^r)
ll
read the limi-
These are form*
Bk. VI. Ch.
161
I.
3sg\ 2
End-acute.
w&z, 4
vfrs&, 3
^TrT,
1113
5 ITT, 6 ?p* (ssre),
7 31T,
mt
0>*-
|I,
12 *** ^;, 13 CT**<rraT *rnc*T?far*, 14 s^^rTT#r(STT*rereTPT*n&tr) *t^t, is h^pt^-,
Hnnrwn!
wr^^m^P
An
161.
accent,
unaccented vowel gets also the acute
when on account
The word udatta

to
it,
the s|
is
elided (VI.
:
words
5^
&c, are
Why
when
148), the
Thus
fr^rl
is
elided.
+ f =ftfIRT
the unaccented (anudatta) #r<i
anudatta $ becomes udatta.
The
ll
is
added
So
I.
sfa^+g: = 5*T,
88),
also
ll
ll
'an anud&tta vowel gets
&c
'.
Observe FRT^:
H^=smT^P
II
Here though s^r^ is end-acute ( VI. 2. 144 formed by

q^ with gati ) it is followed by 3 which is svarita (VI. 1. 185), this svarita
causes the lopa of sr udatta: but it does not itself become uoatta. No, this is
not a proper counter-example. For by the general rule of accent VI. 1. 158,
when one syllable is ordained to be udatta or svarita, all the other syllables of
Therefore when ij is taught to be svarita, all the
that word become anudatta.
So there is no lopa of udatta
other syllables (like ) will become anudatta.
when i[ comes. The word ST^frT is used to indicate that the initial anudatta
becomes udatta. Had anudatta not been used, the sutra would have been
2RrerTT^nTr, which would mean 3{f^s?rS% mw, ^TTTr^pfcT rT^FrT ^Tr[\ *n?rrT, for
There would then be
the anuvritti of st^T would then be read from the last.
anomaly in the case of m ff ^TcTPT, and *irft $TT*TP*ll From the root &g we
have formed ^ncrprand^rm-JT in the Aorist Atmanepada,dual. ^s + ^r + STrtTPr
Here STrrTTI causes the elision of the udatta 3T
=^?H-ST (VII. 3. 72 ) + 3rrrTPT
of *r
Therefore the final of stiWpt would be udatta, which is not desired.
The augment sr is not added because of *rr, had it been added, the af would
( srrcrf
the preceding acute
The <TTC^ has

5f^+ sir = I*n
also ;si + f*T3<T = ^glj^(IV. 2. 87), d^, 55^
The
end-acute, and the affix TfJ (^) is anudatta (III. I. 4).
+ 5T*T = 5*f (VII.

So
acute on the last.
SrfSft
last,
I.
it
understood here.
is
word gpnr has acute on the
of
^^TrT I V. 4.
76
).
II
II
Had
f|
would have become anudatta
in
have been udatta

28
it
VI.
4.
71
).
not been given, then also the whole of
^n^rmr* because o fa^Tpr?: (VIII. 1.

See VIII. I. 34 (f| ^r). Why have we used the word 33" in the sutra? If
was not employed, then the subsequent anudatta may be such which would
*J$rrrrp*
).
not have caused the elision of the previous udatta; such udatta being elided by
some other
acute and this
and
still such anudatta would have become udatta. Thus

Here wrsr: is plural of m^:
The word Hi^hf is endacute (sror) was elided in the plural, before the affix *r*r was added.
operator,
in vn;*fcp, Hr*RT, **l?:
II
ll
End-acute.
1 1
The
here
elision
case,
had
not caused by sth, but
is
Therefore
f^ro).
is
*t^%
not been used. m*x
Observe nre + srsr
elided"?
a subject of sps (not
fqi^ri
but
iV.
104
1.
=%pj
*>
II
Why do
ll
1.
The gotra affix was

we say "when an uddtta
The feminine of this will
Tfr^^T^
Here f causes the

73=%%
unchanged.
remains
So also Irr ^F
and hence
beV^ + ^^CIV.
165.
does not become udatta, which would have been the
*r*r
elided prior to the adding of the case-ending.

is
Bk. VI. Ch.
of auudatta 3T of
elision
<?,
II
^cft:
ffrP
II
3TnT
II
\\\
%$H
*T3Tfr
II
^TTrfRnT
162.
The word 3T?rT
T%cT:
\$\
II
II
is
II
II
II
fecT,
(3T?cf:
t^ttt.)
^r,
II
II
stem (formed by an
substitute)
^TtT:)
^trtt:, (3T?cr:,
root has the acute on the end-syllable.

understood here. Thus ttTtT, qrfrT, ^Tfl%, *TPTrafcT, 3u%
T^n%
163.
II
ZWW W?T
acute
gets
augment
or
affix
or
on the end
syllable.
Thus
These are formed by
^lÛl,K%K^l'
"k*z&i,
5^ III.
2.
161.
^r^^TP by II, 4. 70 where the substitute <^r*"3^r^ is employed. To

added fPT in the sense of Tfi, then is added the feminine affix 3T* thus
also
The descendants
has middle-acute.
Gargadi
The
).
plural of
indicatory
affix in
the acute accent
but on the
So
base.
be formed by eliding
will
<rfe=T^T
II
prefixes.
3"g<T:
(V.
3.
last syllable of the
f^rT
fall
II
II
<9\
having an
taking the stem and the
The affix ^fr^ns one of those few affixes

The accent will not, therefore, fall on
whole word compounded of the prefix + the
\
It is
added
s^^r
(V.
in
3.
the middle of the word, but
71).
crf3C?T^T, (sFcT, 3^TtT.)
PTc^f^rRSPTT ^rt
164.
an indicatory
^TT%
II
final,
( by 3>t of
and substi-
II
68
on the end\ as
?$
%ZH
3r>J
In the cases of affixes
on the
falls
also with the affix sj^r^r.
the accent will
fT%:
Thus
an aggregate.
which are really
is
^f^sT^fr
cf Kundini will be c^rfo^^f:
Kaundinya
tuting cr^r^r for the remaining portion.

S3r
So
^s
vnrffi
II
II
stem formed with a Taddhita-affix having
has acute on the end syllable.
Thus ^rs^r?^*- formed by the
affix <tt<f*t (IV.
I.
98).
^>5T +
(^
<^-tt
being elided by II.

>3 = !7r>5rc2Ri: dual %T>^n*^r, pi. SFTSarnRP
thus giving scope to ^<Ft accent). In this affix there are two indicatory letters
and
tj
the
^ has only one function,
4.62, and
namely, regulating the accent according
has two functions, one to regulate accent by VI. 1. i97>JJid

another to cause Vriddhi by VII. 2. 117. Now arises the question, should the
to this rule, while
word get the accent of ^r or of*r
ll
The
present rule declares that
it
should get
Bk. VI. Ch.
the accent of
er
if 3j
167
End-acute.
and not of *T,
for the latter finds
was to regulate the accent,

fccr.
fr%:
II
II
\v\
^Tf^r
ll
rrf^TrT^^
r%cr:
II
T^frT
57,
Thus fTlT3^ formed by <?raf? (IV.

5T?rf^^s formed by y^r (IV. 4. 1).
r%^4t
ffrT:
II
<3rcn H
a function
left
to
it,
while
II
^Trfr
I.
wnftjHfr,
still
would have no scope.
11
A stem formed by a Tacldhita affix having

has acute accent on the end syllable.
165.
an indicatory
"^r
tTfcrJTO RhcTlnf
1115
T^Tfa
Rr^WT:,
II
faRvq TrRtn t*IM S^P^t T^PT
99),
3TCT.,
^rrrrarn:
Similarly
11
(aFcT, ^TtT:)
II
II
The Nominative
166.
so also
plural
of 1%^; has
(sra;)
acute accent on the last syllable.

Thus fkfifaBfa
The word r^w
2.4.
This debars the Svarita accent ordained by VIII.

of fir VII. 2. 99) meaning three is always
(feminine
'
'
There are no singular or dual cases of this numeral of the seven

plural cases, the accusative plural will have acute on the final by VI. 1. 174
plural.
the iemaining cases (Instrumental, Dative, Ablative, Genitive and
Locative)
have affixes beginning with a consonant, and by VI. 1. 179 they will be
Thus the only case not covered by any special rule is ^tct (nom. pi)
udatta.
which would have been Svarita, but

not provided
for,
rule applicable
then
merely saying
only,
to ifcr
why
for
this rule.
riff *W
has then
If
^pt be the only case
would have
it
sufficed to
bean employed
make
in the
the
sutra
done, in order that in compounds, where fan may come as a subordinate member, and where singular and dual endings will also be added, this rule
This
is
will not apply.
Had
*r*T
been not used
in tois sutra,
then
in the
case of simple
m*T there would be no harm, but when it is seconed member in a compound

there would be anomaly.
Thus 3Tftrm# would have become end-acnte. But
that is not desired.
It is svarita on the final by VIII. 2. 4.
^5^:: srftr
fT%:
II
^g*
11
\$*
ll
qr^rfc
STRT !*.$( S*tT 3ST?ff
167.
Thus
2.
99),
^*;:
^rg?:.,
^r% (stj^ttt:)
on the
tr^ the accent
ll
II
The word ^r, followed by
plural, has acute accent
(VII.
11
^frT
is
the
accusative
last syllable.
on 5
11
which has acrte accent* on the
The feminine of ^3^

first
(VII.
2.
accusative plural will not have accent on the last syllable,
is
^ct
90 Vart), and its

This is so, because
^g^has acute on the first, as formed by 3*^ affix. Its substitute ^rf^ will also
be so, by the rule of **nfT^?j;
The special enunciation of arr^Trr with regard
ll
to sTrTW in the Vartika
âq J rWt n^ TKH
3FfNl (VII.
2.
99*)
indicates that the
End-acute.
ii 16
present rule does not apply to

,
5[rT?|4-?T^= ^rer
+ ^C. H Now
Bk. VI. Ch.
Another reason fot
snr*[ H
comes the present Sutra;
169
this is as follows:
here, however, the
substitute of sr being sthanivat, will prevent the udatta formation of the st of
q nor
;
will
m be
considered as
final
and take the
no vo-
acute, as there exists
but a consonant ^ which cannot take an accent. As *qcrcr: T33

ProI have
fessor Bohtlingk places the accent thus q^J, Pro. Max Muller *rj*;:
followed Prof. Max Muller in interpreting this sutra; for Bohtlingk's interpre-
wel
il
11
tation
would make the ending
fir^rfe:
accented, and not the final of
Tg*
11
ll
^TtTT **!%
II
The
168.
case-affixes of the Instrumental
the cases that follow
have the acute accent,
it
and of
if the stem in
the Locative Plural is monosyllabic.

The word ^r (locative of 5) refers to the 5 of the Locative plural.
Why do we say in the
Thus irqt, ir^zfr*, lf*h, WW, 5Trff, 5H?#P, 3Tnf
Locative plural ? Observe ?mjr, *% U Why do we say monosyllabic '? ObWhy do we say 'the Instrumental and the rest' ?
serve |iw, f^ft^n", *r5T*J
Why do we say " the case-endings (ff>ri%: ) ? " Observe
Observe sfhlr, ifaThe plural of the Locative being taken in the sutra, the rule
#Ff^r, ^TtFTT
J
II
'
'
ll
II
II
does not apply to c^r and
cffa,
more than one
though
syllable,
as in the plural of the Locative they have

in
singular locative their stem has one
syllable.
aT^TTTTf Tr^TTT^^rcn^^nrfî^mm
<*,
3TMWIH,
SrKMÎdl,
ff^T:
11
vw*f
sfcr
trerarssrrn" *renr
STRSTCraTO
*m%, f rff^Tf^ftHFFKm
The same

final,
q^rfa
11
11
sT^cfr^TTrr-
Fter*^
^&t
*ft
ferrra^rcprr^p
*r-
11
169.
at the
\\\
11
II
if
case
the
endings
may
optionally
monosyllabic word stands
end of a compound, and has acute accent on the
when
The
the
compound can be
easily
unloosened.
The
phrases "ijehM:" anc^ SI*irftf#*Tfw are understood here also.
nitya or invariable
compounds
HOTT^ff, <T*?HrV or
5nf
According to VI.
223, the
1.
are excluded
by this rule. Thus htw^Ht or

So also WT<f^r or <?ref &c.
552^r: or "^pf:
compounds have acute accent on the
rule applies in the alternative
11
when
final
th*at
the case-affixes are not acute and gives us
Bk. VI. Ch.
171.
End-acute.
Why
the alternative forms.
Observe
the
2. 2.
^HTT,
B^rr^r,
gtftft
do we say is acutely accented on the final ?

These are Tatpurusha compounds and by VI.
'
II
term of the compound retains
first
in;
its
original accent.
Why
used the word 'standing at the end of a compound' when the word
indicated that the
compound was meant
the aphorism would have stood
<TCT?ft
compound having acute on

pound
the
srafn
M W 3l* qreFT5remrer
The word qwr will thus

second member of the compound, which
thus the rule will apply to $$i*i
compounds having more than one
'
In a looseif
(^r 3*^)
is
do we say
com-
intended.
and not to
loose com-
Ins. *jr5Tr, *rn?: &c,
Why
syllable.
the
qualify the
'.
fa?rcrerlf
not used the word StR-
the above affixes are acute,
final,
consists of a monosyllable
compound and not
And
the
as,
Had we
have we
in
These words form invariable (nitya)

Observe 3TP 2f^fnrr, *TR*frTr
compounds by II. 2. 19, and by VI. 2. 139, the second member retains its
original accent, which makes h* udatta.
pounds
'
II
3T%3^^y4Hi4mFn*
^Ttt:
11
?vs*
bt^t: <tu ssir^re^rreHFF^rTrr
11
^rf?r
11
>r?nir
11
iftoto,
5^% f^ra
&%m
s^brm-
In the Chhandas, the case-endings other

than the sarvan&masth&na, get the acute accent when coming
170.
after
T%
II
In the Vedas, a stem ending in the word
on the
affixes
previously mentioned, but on
sfsr^,
has the
acute not only
the accusative plural affix also.
I. 84, 13).
Here the word ^5- had accent on
by the present sutra, the accent falls on the case-affix 3T*[
Though the anuvrltti of " Instrumental and the rest " was understood here,
the word asarvanamasthana has been used here to include the ending 3^ also.
Thus
\ft
As
f??T f**l%T
by VI.
irrrrqf
5W1
1.
sftqw (Rig
222, but
11
*rft *ffir*if*%Pt.
11
II
The same (asarvan&masth&na) case-endings

have the acute accent, when the stem ends in 3TS\ also after
*^H after qf &c (upto f*ra VI. 1. 63), after sri, 5^ $ and
171.
foil
The
taught
8T$r?*
The
in
3;?
VI.
4.
is
19 &c)
Thus
?s|rf:,
derived by gjs substitution of
anuvritti of "a^^fTTrrft"
11
is
*r
5fr
of
gsfrfr,
(VI.
4.
but not
in
?*n?
in srsrft*
VI.
4.
I32)^nd not the
gjy
srdgfr (Ins. sing of
19 &c).
%^ BflMn*,,
iff*'-
unsderstood here, therefore, when the word
it
ENd-acut.
Bk. VI. Ch.
173
f is not end-acute, this rule will not apply. When, therefore, there is anvadesa
under II. 4. 32, the final being anudatta, this rule does not apply, as ar^T *fh^T
&c upto f^T^f in VI. 1. 63. Thus Rni*rcTjt
PHjar*rqTrT " The Tfrft words are q^,
st^ <t^, wfNf:, *n>5i, si*, 3**sfc, s^ V**, 5^ tfl TOr, *r*ik,
rC^ H As regards the other cases of ff* the accent is governed
The word 3?^ and those which follow it, in VI. 1. 63, are not
3>r?,
*r 1 w^rrnt,
*T?>T
>
f^ff,
1.
183.
r?f*
by VI.
governed by
anuvritti of
irsffpT
because they consist of more than one vowel, and the
understood here from VI.
is
when
course, anudatta, except
TOr
sTfa
1.
168.
When
these
the elision of 3T (penultimate), then the vibhakti will
The
161 even after these.
I.
this rule
monosyllable by
by VI.
**^
sraffo
sraFfr frsrfo; n
**
%*
f^?^
^Tir%
(I
be udatta
case endings after these words are of
these words
*$ft
become
become monosyllabic
As
iffarsi
"
sts*:,
fr^
The asarvanarnastMna case-endings after 3^

have acute accent, when it gets the form st^t
172.
eight
',
II
The word
follow
namely
it,
3^
3?CT
has two forms
and
3T2"
II
The
the long form 3TT and not after 3T

con.
arib-sp,
3T?r con
^^
II
The word
belongs to the class of ^rTTft words (Phit
in
the ace.
pi.
affixes of ace.
Thus
and the other cases that

pi.
&c
are udatta
after
opposed to 3?Ipt:, srir**:

has acute on the last syllable, as it
21); and by VI. 1. 180 the accent would
3T$T?>f:
^^
I.
have been on the penultimate syllable. This rule debars it. The use of #rr?T
indicates that the word 3T2^ has two forms, and the substitution of long sr
in VII. 2. 84, thus becomes optional, because of this indication. Otherwise
of the word frqtr[ would be useless, for by VII. 2. 84 which is
employment
the
taught
couched
in general
terms, srg^ would always end in a long vowel.
There
is
another use of the word ^hT?t> namely, it makes the word 3T?P3(. with long srr
(VII. 2. 84) to get also the designation of *nr n For if srer^ was not to be called a
q?, like 3T^, then there would be scope to the present sutra in the case of srep*
would be debarred in the case of 3*5-^ without lpng srr, by the subseto *r? word, and hence the employment
1. 180 which applies
of the word ^Nrc would become useless.
while
it
quent rule VI.
jp^:
ii
BT^T^Trrflr^
nf%3FT
II
to* 3?3*^
1
f ^Hf^fcTWTRW
173.
^ w&mvmvm^&m t# 3T^rf?fW%K3nRr-
II
After an oxytone Participle in ar^the femiand the case endings beginning with vowels
nine suffix i,(nadi)
BK. VI. CH.
III9
Vir.IIAKTI-ACCENT.
175.]
I. .
(with the exception of strong cases) have acute accent, when

the participial affix has not the augment *(i. e. is not 3T^).
an oxytoned word' is understood here. Thus
and ?**
3#, 33* 22*, 53* from Q$ti 3$t
Sftff ^#r
Why do we say " not having the augment 3^?" Observe ^%T, $jHere also by VI. 1. 186, after the root 5^ which has an indicatory sr,
The word
3?*r
Srft
11
$**f,
3T%?TTTr7T; 'after
(snj) is anuDhatupatha, being written 3?, the sarvadhatuka affix

I.
(VI.
of
udatta
162),
with
the
^.coalescing
3T
anudatta
This
datta.
$f
applicable
held
being
not
Rule
VIII.
2.
1
and
becomes udatta (VIII. 2. 5)
in the
(feminine
^%
say "a
&c.
i?*0">
Iw
ff*> T?*
11
as f^ft*
"
^n:^*r
the acute accent,
acutely accented final vowel of the stem, a
for the
semi-vowel
^ ^*wi
The same endings have
11
174.
when
f ) word and before vowel-endings?' Observe ^>3R.> 3foxytone, the rule does not apply. As
is not an
Here the accent is on the first syllable by VI. 1. 189.

The words ffrft" and *T$cfr should also be included
II
Vdrt
rrf%3f*
in
do we
If the participle
Z*qm
^W^ft
Why
gets the accent, and not the feminine affix.
here, the Participle
and which
substituted,
is
preceded by a
is
consonant.
Thus
n-f=^#f
^r
7
,
?^f
11
on the
final
Observe
(VI.
^Hft,
I.
^brf>
163J.
Why
i^T, I^T,
'
*fr,
?3T?lft,
sreff*
aciuely accented final vowel
'
2.
4) *|f% f%rT^f%
udatta on the
final
WffarTT, the
is
3T^^n"
by VI.
2.
is
11
irofiVr,
replaced
formed by r^ having acute on the
do we say preceded by a consonant
(VIII.
All these are <to ending words and hnve consequently acute accent
sroff^T
Why
'?
?i% STf^rff:
In
175.
replaced by \, but as
II
first
&c
'
syllable.
Observe ^gffi^f g|r rlf rr^fr &\$pm

This compound with *f gets
making the Instrumental singular of

this \ is preceded by a vowel, the affix
gets the svarita accent.
Vdrt
The
11
P^gff
the stem
ends
VTTcHft:
^ though
not in a
II
?\9t
II
||
3%
||
11
nine affix
(IV.
1.
66), or the final of a root.
After the semi-vowel substitutes of the udatta
udatta
in
II
v:^:
q^TT% *,
^#r srrem s s^tto^ ??x%*cTCrH<T*r s*n-sra^rc*^reftvTf^Tr?rTrr ^r^r%
175.
But not so, when the vowel is *of the femi*
5Tt^
ff%:
when
rule applies
semi-vowel, as ^RTgrr*
final
3: ( IV. 1. 66 ) or of the
vowels of the rogt, when preceded by a consonant, the weak case-
1 1
VlBHATI-ACCENT.
20
endings beginning
SgT?#, sjft?Mr,
udatta (III.
vowel
I.
3),
76
ggjirwfr,
The ^
2. 5).
substituted for
before the ending
3>
have become udatta by the

2.
sp-^from \ft*^J which has acute accent on g^, because |jj is

and the ekades*a of it, when it combines with the preceding
a semi-vowel substitute of an udatta (s'SHTS' !) the affix after
err, is
I.
Thus
vowel do not take the acute accent.
witfi a
also udatta (VIII.
is
[BK. VI. CH.
4 applies and makes
last sutra,
^-3*0
(
substitute of the vowel of a root
would
it
the general rule VIII,
so,
Let us take an example of a semi-vowel
svarita.
it
but not being
tgwi from *f??f

Wf^gT, ^%&*
formed by f^q affix, the second member of the compound retaining its
original accent, namely, the oxytone, the semi-vowel being substituted by VI.
:
*5F*t
4.
83 before the vowel case-endings.
frf%^
ii
c^rsfrw
*rgq-
ssttt^ ^^j^r*
11
*o* u
%*r
srftw
<raj:
11
The otherwise unaccented Jig; (<*) takes the

oxytoned. stem ends in a light vowel,
has before it the augment ^ (VIII. 2. 16).
176.
acute accent,
or the affix
when an
The word
So
9^fo, 5t*fc*
^T^r^rTTrfl is
!!
also
understood here
when J^g
takes 3?, as
Thus
also.
3Tjotcrr,
3Tf?mr^,
^Jg'TPJ,
Here by VII.
added 37 by VIII. 2,
^TÎtTr
word 3*?% takes 3T^ and becomes 3T*T^, then is

and we have 3T$T^*Tg<T The preceding îs elided. When the stem
pxytone (antodatta) this rule does not apply as f
The word
is
not
has
Un
I.
I.
76, the
*6,
I!
g^
acute on the
first syllable,
which
Un
as
it is
formed from
srw
11
with the affix 3
10)
9 ) so the ^5^ retains its anudatta here. So also in the case

pf*I^T^, the affix does not become acute, though the word
has acute on
is
nq-
I.
j^
the final as the intervening
^ makes
the
^ of ^ heavy when
maxim *^tM?T 5^5Fm?f'SlTR^ does not

that ^ is only taken as an exception, shows
the general
yery fact
Vdrt
The
STfoPI - tf^HSSlTCcf
of one, as ^
f,
affix
There
11
becomes acute
*f<j<T
then guna, *
is
^rT
addeds
heavy vowel of
"^
as
vocalisation of q of *fg, as ?;f ^ then substitution
11
after fa
as ref crRr^nj-
II
snuwrercwp*
TTr^re^rr ^1%
3^yw
177.
l*
*\svs
*t*tr
ll
q^TT%
*\k,
^^t^^^tk
11
11
After an
light vowel, the genitive
accent,
is
this.
after the
Vdrt .-The prohibition should be stated

ITPfST
the afiix
apply here, because the
oxytoned stem which ends
in a
ending *$% has optionally the acute
BK. VI. CH,
Thus
I.
It
54).
shown
in
179.
sprfffaj^ or ar^farw, ^ryjjx*
might be objected, that

the above
should also be read
light
crp*
examples, then
be read into this sutra
light vowel'
light
VlBHAKTI-ACCENT.
into this
rule will
apply to forms
or
^prri
anuvritti of
that the
meaning being
sutra, the
when followed by *jg<,

vowel may become heavy before
^Wr*
(see VII.
not preceded by a short vowel, as
is
how can the

The reply is
vowel
wise, this
or ^rf^r*,
II2I
cause the
will
"
?jpl
3^
anuvritti of j{^%
a stem which has a

acute,
though the
Other-
this ending, in its present form".
like
f^pfH
is
'short or
^rf qm iq; having light vowels
Why
before *rP and not to the forms above given.

do we read ?rr*T with the
âugment (VII. 1. 54) and not STTC? The rule will not apply to vp^rg $l<fi T
which get the acute on the
Why
do we say after a
stem ending in a light vowel ? Observe ^TTrf^TP*. (the word ^ftr is end-acute
by Un III. 138 and so is ijrffrT by VI. I. 161). Why do we say after an
pxy toned word ? Observe q-^rr^ MHI*( the words sr<j and ^|j have acute on
by VI.
final
1.
174.
'
'
the
first syllable.
178.
In the Chhandas,
the ending *rr^ has di-
versely the acute accent after the feminine affix %

Thus f^rcnTRr* arpTvrssRfftrqr, ^Rri f^crr
Sometimes
\\
ll
take place, as
HTO7K ^RfNr*^:
;
renrags^ sîjfc:
ffrr:
11
179.
ant,
11
sT^t^TTfrf^rTrlrf ttî
?\s^
11
qr^n%
**, ft, ^gsln,
^rfc:
11
11
The case-endings beginning with a conson-
have the acute accent
The
does not
^^^^f^^^fsRp-sr ^r <rer s^sif^HFRSfrTn" ^n%

after the
24), as well as after r% and ^jjt
words
it
Numerals called
^h* (I. 1.
||
anuvritti of sr^ftHTn; ceases, for the present lule applies even to
|^ and TOt which are
acute on the initial by Phit II. 5. Thus

V*rr*, tip?:, inHk T^nrri, irsrff*, faf? J, fir*#>, w*n*, ^^%f (See VII. 1.
Why do we sa)j 'before case-affixes beginning with consonants'? Observe
55).
<T^T (VI. I. 167 and VII. 2. 99).
like
%W
*y<^MMsre:
rfffi
*T
11
1*0
11
q^n%
wfe,
^vrzwn
I^TItTÎ
180.
ll
11
The above numerals, when taking a casebeginning with a w or

get the acute accent on the
penultimate syllable, when the said numerals assume a form
affix
consisting of three or
more
syllables.
Accent.
ii22
The numerals
with a
q"?
must be of three
Why
'the
feim
*q^J^
and
^r
penultimate syllable'
*TnT*TTH.
\*\
II
Thus
*?' ?
*TTrf^
II
||
<Hfp?
:
,
^tSptj,
r%**nr:, ^%f*r:
Observe, T^Ffr**, sgrWTO
Observe
Tff*?*, qir*3
WZ WK
f%*TT*T,
11
Why
II
In the Secular language this is optional.

181.
The Hiff case-affixes coming after the above numerals q?, fif and
may make the words so formed take the acute on the penultimate op-
tionally, in the
spoken ordinary language.
alternative VI.
1.
5T
179 applies.
So
11
*rr
^ f?W:
Thus
*HlfSp or
also mtpr- or *nri*?
*TM?c^T^*far^f ?^Hi
?T^, 3T^,
ffrr*.
182
syllables at least.
do we say 'beginning with
do we say
I..
when ending in a case-affix beginning

word (q ?), in such a word the penultimate
The very word penultimate shows that the
full
syllable gets the acute accent.

<Tf
Bk. VI. Ch.
HT and ^FJ*
consonant, form a
$r?
?^
II
:
,
^TT%
II
q^rpf
fa^PT: or
II
In the
II
m*jnf
11
^,^,^^,^3?^,
II
^srr^r ir sjn%3nr=5j% s^rWfcr *rf 3T^ t& wt ?Mr^r u^ <& vnn%

The foregoing rules from VI. 1. 168 down182.
11
wards have no applicability after *tt, and W3C and words

ending in them; nor after a stem which before the case ending
of the Nominative singular has
after a
stem ending
in 3T>^
s?
or
s?t,
nor after
nor as well as after
i**r
^s^ and
or
||
Here by VI. 1. 168, the case-endings would

is however prohibited.
So also tj^rr,
also iprr, %, sj^r*,
VI.
1. 169
is prohibited.
So
Here
H
and
U^r*
U?i%
T^^Tr, Vt*Wt and q^^^TI H The word 3T^rT (#r 3TW) means 'what has 3? or
(The
CTWJ-ftw, ?T%, T^^nTT
err before 3 (1st. sing.)" Thus ^5:, ^5:, %*&
Thus
4fT, *r%, TP*n*H
have got otherwise the accent, which
II
II
the prohibition applies to

srf = 3T3^+ffp*
word *r
is
not
(VI. 4. 30). Thus s?r>^r,
elided
nasal
the
wherein
word
this
that form of
must take the accent;
the
case-ending
there
elided,
is
nasal
Where the
(rs^qra
Thus
word.
formed
faff^
%3^TT, %>%, ^j^>qrr
is also a
as nr%, JJT6T HF*trP U
is
formed by
I'
2^
is
Why
derived from
has the word
jspt affix)
^
^
^
would have applied
'to do'
to
II
or from
'to cut'
by
f|pr; as
%^x % and Tîkr
II
when the rule

been especially mentioned in
e\en without such enumeration, because in the Nomithis sutra,
it
native Singular this woid assumes the form ^r and consequently it is *rr*rî: ?
The inclusion ojf*^ indicates that the elision of?T should not be considered
asiddha for the purposes of this
apply to words
after the elision
like
rule.
3 and fa which
ofôf 3TTf
in
(VII. 3-94)-
Therefore, the present rule will not
Norn.
Thus
Sing, end in
srr,
as nr
and fr^r
the Locative Singular of
3 will
BK,
VL
Of.
by VI.
be h?*
86
VlBHAKTI ACCENT.
168, this prohilition not applying,
I.
udatta after fan by VI.
^
m-
?f%:
\*\
11
is
|t^s
*|-qpT,
fr?^
SfRldWIH,
This debars VI.
II
consonant
l<&
'
Observe
T^TM
After
ff*P or ;#?:,
fa^ftdH
ii
ll
*T
II
^, ^,
Why
168, 171.
I.
f^rf, ftfa*
do we say
if
^-MdWIH
II
a case ending beginning with
or
11
^:,
sj^:,
t^tr
ll
^pr ^Hr
,
fe, Jjf
^rfen^,
fcrcj;,
But not so
II
6#,
\)
ll
m^^ftrlr *nrRr u
An
185.
i.
II
optionally unaccented.
Thus
fi%-
11
After 1%^ & case-ending beginning with
184.
*T is
h^
be debar-
will
unaccented.
beginning with a
5J
r^r:,
11
qrr sr^ft*rfTT^r?TTTr
Thus
'
q^n*
get
affix t^t will
i.
11
183.
or *T
and the
But rule VI. 1. 176

176 as fr?TPl H
the case of flr^T^ because ^r is a tfPTWll
red by the present in

fir^t
If2j
affix
is
svarita
has circumflex accent.
e.
Thus
H?l (III.
1.
HTffrd&r, p5rr*%,
This
124).
is
For exception to
adyudatta.
formed by
an exception to
(III.
ar<X
III.
this rule see VI.
1.
1.
1.
97).
Tt ^fa^TI"
all
with
affixes
213 &c.
crre^^WTf^^Tr^rrir^Tg^?T3^TTm^f^#r:
rTT^^t
sfnifa, 9r*nr
which makes
ll
\<%
T^n%
ll
ll
II
The Personal-endings and their substitutes

124-126) arc, when they are sarvadhatuka (III. 4.
186.
(III. 2.
113
&c),
unaccented,
phrastic future
the
after
characteristic
a root which in the
(cflTO), after
tha has an unaccented vowel or a
and
gf^
3C^?)
Thus
\fT<
as
rTIT%
^rP,
as after
what has a
Grammatical system of Instruction* (upade&i).
final 3* in the
Anudattet : as,
Dhatupd-
(with the exception of
letter, as well
as indicatory
of the Peri-
^w, ^^TRf, ^"^R
3^ Bir^r, **T i*%
|frT:,
4^cp, <fcp
II
II
this debars the affix accent
f?^ :
root
^= g%,
taking *TV
sfrf%%
(3*) is
(III.
H
1.
3).
a?^ ST-
considered as
1 1
Accent.
24
taught
upadesa
as
disregarded on the
^JTTTJ
plained
if
ending with an
maxim
The augment
II
in
TO?
as the indicatory letters
sr,
3T^?>^qiTOirr?TOf^r
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
added by 3TR
two ways; first, the augment TO?
TO?^
is
= af'TOJpr^ )
VII.
added
3T
3T,
when
137
and ? are
may
be ex-
to the final %T of the base
(ahga) when 9TTT (STR^&c) follows; or secondly, the the augment 59?
to the base (ariga) which ends in
Thus q^rm^
II
82 which
2.
I.
In the
STFf follows.
added
is
first
case to?
becomes part and parcel of ar and will be taken and included by the enuncia3T, and therefore sr^rtsr will mean and include an St having such|*,
tion of
on the maxim ^MlHKrT^^dlWiM^M *??!*% "That

added denotes, because the augment forms part of
denotes also whatever results from
fore to? will not prevent the verb
its
.TO?
augment
it,
secondly TO? be
3T,
But we get
intervenes.
is
yet fa"$ accent (VI.
"9",
karana >
do we say
1.
163)
rule.
Though
the affix
debarred by this
is
rule,
is f^vj; (I. 2.
after
Observe f%5#:
rTn% &c.
the purposes of preventing the
Therefore though
guna of the
*| is
prior term
considered so for the purposes of subsequent accent.
may
fq^#:
The
II
vi-
4) with regard to operations affecting the prior term, and
not those which affect the subsequent.
Why
&
But
subsequent,
Why
sutra
it
rid of this difficulty by considering

and therefore asiddha, when the Antaranga operato be performed. The augment TO? (*r ) in the last two examples
%SFV% has an indicatory
fir?! for
is
but
as Bahiranga
tion of accent
it is
itself,
then the ^^TT^rrT^T does not follow an
consequently does not prevent the application of the
as
which an augment
not merely
combination with that augment". There-
becoming STfT^r
taken as part of the base which ends in

st^T^T, because
to
Or
f%
considered as
it
not be
will
the word
ri^q; in
this
be taken as equal to fr^ff^T and not the aTTRrV^rar r^vt like $3
do we use the word upadesa?
So
that the rule
II
may apply to ?MN

^ in upadesa. though
:
which ends in
TTPP, but not to f $, f if: the dual of
Therefore ??: f?tp Why do we use
before cfST and sr^r it has assuned the form f
the word ?5 (Personal endings)? Observe STrfi^ ^THr formed by Wi'^ added
to* (1 1 1.2. 128), which not being a substitute of^, is not a personal ending like
11
11
5rm^
f$K U
BT>?J%
II
Why do we use the

Why do we say with
fij
Observe
ftfcn,
s^ and ^?
RT^R,
Rf-
Observe ZjTn,
*1T
II
187.
ally
word Sarvadhatuka
the exception of
In ftf^ Aorist, the
first syllable
may
option-
have the acute accent.
The word s^lrT

Irfam or *TT ft r5?f%#TL
is
11
Thus m f| #irsfo, TT
example the accent is on
understood here.
In the last
f? 3n?1.;
ft;
*tf
and the
k. VI. Ch.
reason
in
VI.
why
itf
and
f|
The
\6ii
1.
189
I. .
Verb-accent.
1125
are used in these illustrations, has already been explained
^ of
indicatory
fq^ shows
that
by VI.
1.
163 the acute
be on the otherwise unaccented augment f? when it takes this augment.

The Rr^ being a wff affix will take the augment %z ( VII. 2. 35 ), and it is a
will
general rule that augments are unaccented; so in the above the r^ would have
been unaccented, and the accent would have been on the

catory
of
fir**,
Vdrt:
which otherwise would find no scope.
An
affix
<i
final,[but for
Thus
when coming
( fq^; )
Aorist formed by repr without the augment ** (3TR* f*r*

tfdatta
in the other,
it is
non-acute
This vartika
).
in
is
the indi-
f^ gets acute.
an
after
one alternative
restricts the
scope of the
Thus we get the following two forms, which

otherwise would have one form only by dhatu-accent, namely, acute on the first,
Thus Jfrf| tfitf* or jft ff *l% U But when it takes the
for fax is anudatta.
augment,
there
are
two
forms (1st ) *rr ff $rf^r as a (%3=^t, (2nd.) m f$
j?
on
accent
(VI.
1.
When however the
163). but never *rr ff F5Tft<?3;
mzfa*
ft
is
the
accent
augment at
added,
falls on this augment (VI. 4. 71).
sutra with regard to fq-^ affixes.
II
^qrf^ft^*^t%
The
188.
Syllable
when
\&
II
qccrfa
ll
n-^qrf^, fen*, srfe,
acute accent
is
srftfir
optionally on the
11
first
a Personal-ending, being a Sarvadh&tuka tense
beginning with a vowel, provided that the vowel

augment ^, follows after ^<r &c, or after fej;
affix
is
not the
II
The phrase
mfof
falls
or
TOr,
FTOT*fqTg#T in the locative case is
*?tfRr or
*?#f??F,
by the accent of the
affix
the augment js
Thus
The accent on the middle
Why do we say 'before an affix
Why do we say 'not taking
fMNc
f|%RT or fl^FrT
III. 1.3.
beginning with a vowel'? Observe
Pfaffil,
understood here.
II
II
Observe **ft#: and sjflHf: U This rule applies to those

vowel-beginning affixes which are fivj; it does not apply to AqTR, f?#STf*T II
?
'
3TS*reiHmnT.
?!%:
11
w \<a>
^rar'sfpnrR' raftf*
11
q^TR
II
?refri vJT5% TCrr
stw^t^frc, s?n%:
srrff^r^r *nuir
\\
11
The acute accent falls on the first syllable

reduplicate verbs when followed by an 'affix beginning
189.
of the
with a vowel (the vowel being not $r) and being a sarvadhdtuka personal ending.
Thus
affixes:
s^fa
12
|^r%, f^g,
Before
|^r,
%^
ir^RT,
affixes
^^'
: s^h
II
^ffara, sffag:
Though
11
the
Before consonant
word
arrft
was
Verb-accent.
1126
understood here from the
last
Bk. VI. Ch.
aphorism, the repetition
for the
is
I.
158
sake of making
this an invariable rule and not an optio?ial rule as those in the foregoing.
3Tg3T%
II
?ô
^rftr
II
3*3^1%,
11
^r,
11
^ ?rerHrarg% nxm s*3rerFCTtff^?rHr vr^f%
^1%: w 3TRrrcPTftT%
Also when the unaccented endings of the
190.
in the singular follow, the first syllable of the
three persons
reduplicate has the acute.
The endings 1%*
and
f^rqr
are
r%<r
lr?[f%,
nffSrW,
l^rfrT,
Bahuvrihi
an
e.
i.
PSflrar
The word
which there
affix in
apply when a portion of the
mi$W fsTRfc
*r*w
*rrf%^
ii
and
w*
|>?THi>r
11
affix
is
This sutra
(III. 1.4).
to be
3Tg?rrr is
construed here as a
no udatta vowel, so that the
elided or a semivowel
is
rule may-
substituted
as
If
"*&&*
?*? n
*^r,
11
srfcro' s?r^r^^^r%
sttrs^
The
acute
191.
is
anudatta
do not begin with a vowel. Thus |^n%,
applies to those personal endings which
5ft
11
is
on the
first
syllable of srl
when
the case-endings follow.

Thus
Observe
it is
spr:, *r?rr :
mkv,
13
^ the acute
so taught in the Unadi
affix
Why
srtrT 1
sr^ and forms
^:
is
do we say when the case-endings follow ?

on# The word sp? has acute on the final, as
11
by ppTRP*
list
qraTO
f^K-
It thus being anudattadi takes the

II
This rule applies even when the case
affix is elided in spite of the prohibition of
VAtt: The
^r|^:
11
rule
Here the accent
^RTR^^f
sr
, I, *T,
63)
as iprc^fa: H
does not apply when the affix srsf^ris put in

on the final by f%nj accent (VI. 1. 163).
as
is
ftfTîTT^R^^^K^r3rm^f srerar^
^fap *WKm,
for%
11
^,
*ft,
(I. I.
TOrorac,
?v*
q^tfJr
fqr%
ll
$t, fr,
11
>TÎI
In *,
192.
in their reduplicates,
v&dh&tuka
singular,
unaccented
( fa^;
),
fr, >, j,
nf,
3^ ^,
the acute accent
endings
of
Jfr>
before
three
on the syllable which precedes the
This debars the accent on the beginning.
C^> *&^ ^
the
is,
'
Thus
an d ^pr,
the sar-
persons in
affix.
flrVit, fm$fa, ft^*r,
Here the root *r? has diversely taken in the Chhandas the
fe^TT
vikarana , though it belongs to Divadi class, ^rl^, $sjpr
The verb is here
^?or the Vedic Subjunctive, so also is the next example, <?*ff<t from *ft >rr%
:
II
11
Bk. VI. Cn.
I.
Verb-accent.
159
the f ofi% being elided
by
III.
III. 4. 94. ^fsfti, ^fdrfn, 5rrTrf%
4.
97,
1127
and the augment sr^ being added by
qr^
i.
the three singular endings), the accent will be on the
feRHI
The
193.
acute accent
affix that
3TTf^g^^cr^*rn*
^f
is
or %|<qsr
unaccented by VIII.
not accented,
<|
1.
sra: *r<rrftr
11
?v*
q^n%
11
tirgsr
as fRjf^
II
11
2.
&
II
HrftRhrWl and
54) accent on the fa and ft H
sirf^:,
I.
133),
nrgfo, 3T^<n:**TTO
may be
optionally acute
follows.
*TTnft
roots
vowel,
makes $i accented. When

by fo^ accent This rule is confined
present sutra
to reduplicated Absolutives (VIII.
sre:,
11
^-*rr%
which are exhibited
may
gr<ff3T is
is
I.
4).
11
in
Dh&tu-
optionally have the acute on
before the affixes of the Passive (t^j),
the sense of the verb
11
In the reduplicate form ^fn, the second part
The
namely
11
final
first syllable,
The word
II
3.
The
195.
patha with a
II
on the syllable im-
has an indicatory
(IV.
*TtK?3
will get the accent
to polysyllabic Absolutives,
the
falls
syllable
first
absolutive affix
Thus Fsf^T
is
\w
The
194.
f^rf^
endings other than

syllable
first
fMSrnfap, nfiftfar. with the affix *%* (III.
^Ml C vprKg with the affixes flnând
when the
e. all
q^Tfa llfefall
II
mediately preceding the

Thus
we have
In the case of other verbs
11
Before affixes which have not the indicatory
w hen
T
Reflexive.
understood here.
When
Thus
wqir or gifo
%^R' PTsRq"
on the first syl-
II
3TW S^fa"
on 3 (VI. 1. 186).. This rule applies to 5[^, ?cp^, and ^pj when
they get the form srn^, STTO^ and ^raft the long srr (VI. 4. 43) substitute is
considered as if these verbs were taught in the Dhatup&tha with long qtt
m\k%
lable,
or ^rW*T
it
the accent does not
fall
falls
II
Thus ^ra% or srrlfir *Wfr &ra% or %r^ S^Wf %T^ or î^ ^vpw M Why
do we say when ending in a vowel' ?* Observe pt% t^spft
Why do we say
" when the sense is Reflexive ( cjj ) " ? Observe fgifa %^RT %**%ffi
;
'
II
II
Verb-accent.
123
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
199
Before the ending
r of the
Perfect, second
person singular, when this ending takes the augment % the
acute accent falls either on the first syllable, or on this %, or
196.
pn the personal ending.

Thus
^Fjf^T,
we
may have
get the four forms given above.
may
fall
on any
When
syllable.
In short, with
the
*f is
5rfr^r%**p*
nrrlt ptkt
ii
ar
>t^
or
11
an indicatory
VI.
193
f^,
Thus
).
%q termination, the accent
not %?, the accent

1.
I.
193)
qqfif
N^r? *n%,
ft^rac
falls
on the root
II
II
derived with an affix having an
is
has the acute accent invariably on the
if,
syllable.
first
Thus *fMt with

This
loses
generally does by
37^,
have
III.
accent,
this
I.
1.
lost their
arofNTcTFT
II
I.
105), lrC^T^5,
When
1. 3.
e.
i.
ar^f:
the affixes
the affix does
are,
not leave
Therefore qlfr, fafv, M>-Jt
62.
with 5^ (IV.
its
mark behind,
having
98).
3.
however, elided, the
lost
as
Tjaj,
it
3?
accent also.
V<*
wfa ^mNd^, ^
II
II
The
198.
(IV.
3T5T
an exception to
is
word
and
T^rfa
11
Whatever
197.
indicatory
11
f^RiffîTTr
"sr
trw has
also the accent
and we have one form only by ra? accent (VI.
fr%;
As
and ^nrsr.
sfsff^r, sS^f^T,
the syllable preceding the affix
syllable
first
II
of a Vocative
gets
the
acute accent.
T
Thus ff^rT *$^r?T ^t^TrTP This debars the final accent ordained
by VI. 2. 148. Though the affix may be elided by a ^p* word (jg% <r or
As ^fqrrS), yet the effect of the affix remains behind in spite of I. 1. 63.
!,
T5S"
irer 'l-îrl
qfaJTsft: ^Hfcrnrwft
199.
qf^ftC
and
II
!,
and
II
?A
II
^t^t
II
qft,
The acute accent is on

when followed by a strong
*rsft:,
the
^^m^R
first
II
syllable of
13)
case-ending.
rnkpz
affix ffa, ( IV. 12.
Unadi
the
and
derived
by
JrRj-âre
The words qnr^
adyudatta
before strong
and are oxytone by III. 1. 3. They become
Before other cases we

felT%, ^TR:
The accent is on the final by VI. 1. 162, there being
The rule I. 1. 62, about the remaining effect of the
elision of the udatta fû
As rf*f fJfa', has acute on the final of the first
affix, does not apply here,
Thus %^n,
pases.
have:
qtfs
5"TT'Tr,
tr^,"^?: q^jj u
fTRJ,
h*rF !
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
203
word, by retaining
First-acute.
original accent.
its
3^^:
sr?cTsr cf%
Roo
II
The
200.
v^rfe
II
î^r:,
ll
Infinitive in
and on the
syllable
first
1129
^,
<rt,
has the acute on the
cf%
syllable at
last
a4|M <
one and the same
time.
Thus 5&ff
|^
This
II
also
it
which there can be only a single acute
The word
231.
iffTTf?
in a single
word.
^rqr
house, dwelling \
The word is formed by
H
syllable in the sense of
Thus
III. I. 3 by which q of fft"

countermands rule VI. I. 158 by
an exception to
is
ought to have got the accent, and
first
'
j^t^s^
affix (III.
1.
118)
and would have had accent on the affix (III. 1. 3). When not meaning a
7
house we have sHtf ?4m $*fprr* H The word is formed by sr^(III. 2. 31),
:
3PT.
ff^r:
*XWK
* ^
II
The
202.
of
q
^ft
accent falls on the first

whereby one attains victory \
the sense of
Thus lr%s^:, but otherwise
III.
118
1.
f<sr
11
argWMIHl
III, 2. 31 )
syllable
The former w*
is
by
11
^ffa INKMIH, ^,
>t^
The words f ? &c have the acute on the
II
II
II
ff^^Trfr^nrrf^TTfr
203.
^r ^^
the second by sr^r
INK M ÎU3
ffrr:
II
acute
3HT, in
affix,
^nVH^
3HT.,
II
-znmv ^TQT^r^ sir^mr ^f?r
11
11
first
syllable.
Thus
by bt^(III. 1.
it
II
1.
I?:,
^5:,
15. 3T5P, 16. j$r
and ^:,
20. s^pr:,
21.
3.
The word
134).
7. ?T5:, 8. rfr?:, 9. fT?:,
er^ numbers 8 to
5PT:
2.
if are
IO.
18. q?^:
ijq
srtf'',
is
1 1.
from
3T5
not in Kasika).
(formed by arf
3W,
f#T:, 4. q?:,
(formed by 3T^
III,
^,
These are formed
tr-*Tra%, irregularly
I2
CTf
III, 3. 104).
both formed by
fan, 6. ?r5: u
5.
it is
treated as
%I
?Tj H- *2 (formed by
is
formed by 3? (III. I. 135)
:
>
J 3-
WWW ^m STT<Tr TnRfi^TP :

134), 19- WRT formed by f^Tf,
17.
I.
22. 3TRT,
23. vynr, .24. ^r^T,
(all
three
formed by 9?^ III. 3. 104), 25. ^: = Tfr ^lf^ formed by t^ 26. sfFV'-, 27. qr?:
formed by q*T, which may either take tile accent indicated by tl\e affix or by VI.
1. 159, 28. *R:, 29. ^:
All words which are acutely accented
It is STT^ftTW
!
11
on the
first,
ll
should be considerd as belouging to this
not be accounted for by any other
rule,
class, if their
accent can-
First-acute.
30
Bk. VI. Ch.
206.
^K 4^J 5^:,
1 fsp, 2 5PT:, 3
12^:, 13 ^:, 14
stjt*:,
18
?rrf?rr:,
28
^sp,
15
afar:,
7^:,
tt^:,
8 ?rr**, 9
sMt
16 *prc*ft *faraf
*j^r,
19 *fw., 20 an*:, 21 arnr, 22 ^nr, 23 ^rrr, 24 ^.-, 25
29 3TFrlPT3T
10
*rrwi<rf:
***:*,
11
llm*:]
^7:, 26 q^: 27
q^:,
II
^NrnTTgqrn^t
*o
ll
The
204.
T^rfr
II
accent
acute
of that word with which
3 sfipi;, twrh
11
on the
falls
something
11
syllable
first
likened; provided that
is
a name.
it is
Thus ^>=qT, IfîT, ?m4<fl", 3T*fr

All these are 3WT words used as
names of the 3q%3 (the thing compared). The affix g^ (V. 3, 96) is elided here
by V. 3. 98. It might be asked when ff^ is elided, its mark, namely causing the
first syllable to be acute (VI. 1. 197), will remain behind by virtue of I. 1. 62,
ll
where
The formation
then the necessity of this sutra.
is
iMJB qqr rule
cates that the
is
of this
sutra indi-
not of universal application in the rules relat-
ing to accent.
When
the word
is
not a Name,
an upamana we havel^TrP
^ srsnrcrat
ftw
Thus
*WrP
3Tri
ll
Sp?Tf 2T
ffrr:
11
an
srr
stFsStpjH"^
II
When
is
it
not
q^rfa
11
frgr,^,^^
disyllabic Participle in
(NishtM), when
3"
but not
syllable,
first
snrrac H
if
the
first
II
i^
|nr:,
non-participles
*!T?F J ,
11
we have
148).
2.
syllable has
f%Rri?5,
\ \
205.
Name
11
(VI.
>
f^T
we have
if:,
Tni s debars the

tfr*r.
the Participle
Ro%
tr^TT%
||
srrftwa sm *%>
206.
not a
Name we
g^fr, ^jfr
II
u^ ^
Also
is
nurHUî
^^
and
accent (III.
polysyllabic
In
II
affix
In Participles having long srr in the
When
II
Participles
syllable,
first
have, $3*, ^J*r
I.
3).
In
we have
we have,
II
II
& top
\je
11
have acute on the
first
syllable.
These are non-Names.
wzi
*&& ô\s
q^rr%
snfercr:, ^fr
snRR^f: qF^r^t arms^r *r?rfrr h
snfcrcr:
%ftp
Thus ^.- and
11
207.
has acute on the
11
The word
11
srffacr
first syllable.
ll
ll
meaning
'
having eaten
Bk. VI. Cn.
212
First-acute.
Thus STrf^r^TrT:
The
active participle.
This debars
second
is ^ffifar
ft^"
ff*r-
11
=?*;
fkw^T
II
II
on the
q^Tl^
II
3rrft^r%
ft%, f^TFTT
II
*r^f?r
gsrftcr
or RrS?
ftrf;:
^t%
11
II
This debars VI.

*tttt%
11
Thus ^%: or sjf sffTrP or arfq-^

always on the last syllable (III. 1.
:
fac*f *r??r
II
**o
q^rft
II
II
fje
3).
II
in
the Mantra even
r??
11
q^rft
11
e. g.
The acute accent
sresrj in
?Vl,
<fo
PRM
rrr^T^TT^ RreTcn'
yiwf- ^î^ :^ ^ro
11
is
on the
T ^T^lfWr
II
11
first
syllable of
the Genitive Singular.
This applies when the forms are t& and

*T*T
srf%cf
first syllable.
ll
211.
and
srphr
In the secular literature the ac-
II
g^^nffc#r%
*p*rf
^ and
Some say that this rule applies only to

^Hr^ffrr fa*Jir*
in which option is allowed even in the Mantra
so that
srftrT
has acute on the last
it
11
first syllable.
fk&K, **%
have always the acute on the

Thus
^ s^rfa
In the Mantras, these words js and
210.
and not to
204 and 205.
1.
^^t, stfJ^,
11
have optionally the acute on the
5j
optionally the acute
In the Chhandas, the words
209.
is
II
11
first syllable.
Thus
cent
we have airfoil t^T%H

The former is vn% Ttf, the
'.
The word ft^ may have
208.
used as an
Participle
'
ftrfrcrst fa*rerr
Passive
In the
BYrf^TOI the eaten food
'.
it is
to 3?^[ preceded by 3TT, to form both Active

which by VI. 2. 144 would have taken acute on the
that.
eaten by Devadatta
Here
Devadatta, having eaten'.
added
rff is
and Passive Participles:

final.
'
1131
The word
gs*r;
and
3TCT5;
<nr,
and not
*T
and ^
11
are derived from gq- and
Thus
by
srST
affix *rf|^ (Un I. 139) gwrj + 3FH = 35^ f 3T^T ( VII. 1. 27) =rf?
+ 3TfT(VI. 2. 96) = rrf + lr^ (VII. 2. 9o) = rP* (VI. i. 97). Here by VIII.
5, ? would have been udatta, the present sutra makes ?f udatta.
So also
adding the
3TI
2.
with rm
11
^fa
^f%=
11
ll
11
q^rfr
^fa ^ll
% Swfkw
?f?r ^r
gCTr^frftfrr *j%, srrf^srT
212.
5^5 and wx%
The
acute
accent
is
q*$t
g^swretfWnrr
on the
in the Dative Singular.
first
>r?ri%
II
syllable of
First-acute.
1132
Thus
The making
cation of
fj**TO.
^qTWT
yushmad
and
Jfer*
the forms
of two separate sutras

rule
and asmad
in the Dative,
$ and
Bk. VI. Ch.
are not governed
"*t
by
21'g
this rule.
the sake of preventing the appli-
is for
Had
(I. 3. 10).
the s'utra been gwT*wrJj[ fS^HT?,
then
the Genitive alone would have taken
in
this accent.
'mtssrrsr:
\\\
11
<r?rfa
11
Whatever
213.
smra:
?ra:,
li
formed by the
is
a disyllabic word, the acute on the

exception of Sfrsq-: from sfr
The word gj^r is understood
first
affix
^% has, if it is
syllable,
with the
II
(III.
1.97); Ir^T^t, ^TTWl. (V.
1.
here from VI.
i.
Thus ^WL, sf 1*
265.
This rule debars the Svarita accent
6).
But ^t sn^^faii The rule does not apply to

by fsfqr (VI. 1. 185)
thus
syllables,
two
than
f^fp&fa:, <4<4'l<*)<i
words of more
required
11
iwwtfterjtf
^prt:
The
214.
^??, I
of If,
affix <nr<*
^^
II
*?a
I'l
qsprft
II
fe, srec, f, trer jsmc, *cr:
11
accent
acute
5f when
^ n(i
on the
is
first
II
syllable
they are followed by the
II
The'two letters tn and < being

*N**> 5Hfc, fef*, ff^JT 5:
of the last sutra. The accent
in
yat
included
not
nyat is
indicatory, the
however
is debarred by this rule.
The accent of ^
would be regulated by rl
Thus
Vb^PIL,
II
'
'
'
'
II
The %
kyap
in the stitra
See
affix.
is
%W
III.
^vrrft
109.
1.
ferarm rf^n**fr:
The
215.
syllable of *rg
11
and
of Kriyadi class
**%&
acute accent
^fR
11
the js of *mf class takes
fetfnfr,
is
%^, *asrR*fh
11
optionally on the
first
t
II
the word %^ is derived

fafk: or psffti
have acute
would
by the Unadi affix oj (III. 38), which being a PTFJ:
formed
by ^r^
is
the first This allows an option, The word f?>TR, if it
Thus~%: or^:
fwrFT' or
II
0/w^
on
have the accent on the final. If it is considered to be formed by *TR^, the

replaces udatta final of the root,
affix being a sarvadhatuka is anudatta, and as it
It
gets acute on the middle.
thus
and
pw*
I.
(VI.
161),
it becomes udatta
it
will
would never have acute on the
When ^j
is
used as
accented on the
first
first syllable,
the present rule ordains that also.
an upamana **jfcr^3o then
(VI.
I.
204).
it
is
i?ivariably acutely
Bk
VI. Ch.
^r%:
^rn
I.
219
Acute.
?
216.
trn srcr
^q-
The
f&fim
fw<srr sTriT*?mr **rra
acute accent
syllables of 31m, TFi, ^T*T,
1133
^f
optionally on the
is
affix
syllable also.
first
(III.
%?: or fff :,
<*?rr%
11
11
11
ftf5rT^r^rTnT3^TTt vr^f%
catory
ll
sfitf:
or
tfit
ordains acute on
this
final,
?:,
stfRnrn, ftft
11
rrc^
formed by an
is
formed by sh
J&q":
11
*r%T ^T^rrr*
having an indi-
affix
has acute on the penultimate syllable, the
consisting of more than two
full
word
syllables.
penultimate syllable can be only in a word consisting of three
Thus
syllables or more.
<T5STr!?3p, Spfrlfta
by
^3^Tcrc^nn:
ii
w:,
f^rerTfar^sgTTir
What
217.
ff%;
ll
13).
1.
^tw fa% *
ffrTJ
or
sjs":
first
These are formed by
Thus ^HT: or STpff:, ?pt:, tf^:, fr^t, fr^

and by VI. 1. 159 would take acute on the
:
the
1^
and
**5,
^s^r
11
r\*
(V.
The
3.
This debars
19).
q'^Tw
11
ssrrr^^r3TrrrT5^TTt
218.
by 3?%!^
^cqfaff and ^wffa* formed
:5ffrffa^
>t^
^rfe,
III.
I.
wqcir^rn;
(III.
may
acute accent
word consisting of more than two

HT r? sfNrSrf* or
96)
11
be optionally on the
penultimate syllable of the reduplicated Aorist in

Thus
I.
3.
stfirCrTPl.
the
sr^,
syllables.
The augment
ll
3T?
is
elided
by the
*TT,
4. 74
ff prevents the verb from becoming anudatta VIII.
The augmented form with ar?
1. 34 then comes the f%r<t accent of *^&
syllable
has acute always on the first
VI. 4. 71. When the word is of less
VI.
addition of
11
than three syllables, the rule does not apply,

TTcfr:
*t,
^brrt^rfrai ftron*
ferarac
% r%:
11
when
Thus
place by VI.
%%l
II
^Sn,
bit?*,
%frr*rr-
ll
*?i%
before the affix
name
in the
gs^r^ft, ^rrfrfr (IV.
^fc^nfr
is
tf*rr
Why
2.
**<*
has the acute
Feminine Gender.
85).
The lengthening
do we say 'the
arr'?
\Observe
takes
^*Trfl",
The words
Un. III. 157 and ?^ (V. 2. 108) are end-acute, so accent is
by VI. 1, 176. Why do we say when a name ? Observe %TCrfr M *$$l
formed by 3^ and has acute on the first (Un. I, 151). WJiy do we say in
SpT^lfr
is
120.
3?r
word
the
3T5T?nrrft,
3.
mffi *$**&*$ sftfojF
The
219.
on
as, JTrff
<T3rrr% n jrcft:,
11
11
tjtp <j} arairrc s?rTTr
accent,
11
T5<t
13
Accent.
1034
the Feminine Gender
Observe
*T??
3T?cft
rsrf$7ft
S^rqT:
Why
Observe srcPTP^N
Bk. VI. Ch.
I.
223
do we say when followed by
II
II
V^lfa
II
II
^m^TX:
ST^cT,
The Names ending
220.
It
have the acute
in srecft
accent on the last syllable.

Thus
arrsrr^r
W^M #f,
faltf,
^TR"7
^?
Il
These words being formed
by W(X would have been unaccented on the final (III. 1. 4). Why do we
use ar^rft and not ^rfr ? Then the rule would apply to trsrarfi also, for this
word is really cnr^rrTr ending in 9T?3rft, the subsequent elision of ^r is held to
be non-valid for the purposes of the application of this rule (VIII. 2. 2). But
the change of H into ^ (*T^="^)
considered asiddha for the purposes of
is
this rule.
bf^V
II
<TTTft H facqr., (
^TtT:
The Names ending
221.
II
have the acute on
in f[^fr
the last syllable.

Thus *#*#, stfN#f, S^ft^f
^
ffxr:
11
<r^Tr%
11
11
îf*?*s*falC'?*Kra *nqnr
11
qTfrr^
^Tf rrr2fcr?f?r
222.
Thus
<fht T**;
VArt:
(i
11
srs^sr
srs^r
the final
in the
weak
This
is
an ex-
As
?njHf:.
remains.
V^^T, **Sf%: T*^ 733, t|^T,

and VI. 2. 52.
This rule does not apply before a

11
mfo
rfr^'T^- $fr3Rr ?f r^r
1%
II
161, 170
1.
Here the accent
^jrr^r^r
ffrr-
word has the acute accent
^ of
cases in which only
ception to VI.
if
11
^pr^ u
In compound words ending in
of the preceding
vowel
rr>jrir:
is
T^rft
11
^rsttsprr ^fTTfr H^flr
223.
Taddhita
regulated by the affix (III.

11
^mrcns*,
^tttT
1.
affix.
3).
11
compound word has
the acute on the last
syllable.
Thus
*r?
jw
The consonants being

udatta
sonant.
will fall
37ir^f , 72?^, ^T^r^r, ^rsrif^ sn-grw?;* n

held to be non-existent for the purposes of accent, the
5rr$rJi*ir&,
on the vowel though
The exceptions
it
may
to this rule will be
not be
final,
mentioned
the final being a conin the
next chapter.
BOOK SIXTH.
Chapter Second,
î^t
^S^ftti" snFcsrr
trmft
II
In a Batmvrihi, the
I.
own
II
*5zft&
jts^tt,
member
first
h j m ^h
preserves
its
original accent.
The word $^q^r means here the accent whether udatta or swarita
is in the first member
i\Â means, retains its own nature, does not
become modified into an anudatta accent. By the rule VI. I. 223, the final
of a compound gets the accent, so that a>ll the preceding members lose their
which
accent and become anudatta,
except one. VI.

its
Thus
158.
I.
IfrsaftTRT^TJTi
11
zfn*v[ is
154) from ^tot a kind of antelope

'
syllable
first
ffT^sp
of a
compound
'
and has the
sxq-
derived from
is
in
5 by
f^ (Un
treated as
first
syllable (VI.
formed word as
the
133, VI.
Sutra V.
1.
is
84
being formed by
i.
^rrT^r
e.
is
first
I.
197)
i.
and the
III. 25)
e.
3.
on
also
27),
affix
is
is
syllable.
it is
So
also 3Teqracfi$r:, the
formed by
f3< affix (III.
tne ^rnra being enounced with an indicatory

(IV.
1.
IV.
udatta on the
sfrnfaspp,
affix stst
the word ag -qi R^ has a Kritand gets the acute on the final (VI. 2. 139). So
is derived by
(V. 4. 29) affix and has fa?j
also flfl^ l HT'THrefi^:
part,
accented on the middle as
193).
2.
word
197)
1.
word 3TS2HW
second
Thus
always udatta.
compound also. So
Unadi affix T (Un III.
(Un
and hence the word
So
197).
1.
its
also slrrrcff^, the
accent (VI.
III. 26),
are unaccented
nrqr accent (VI.
the
before which the vpwel becomes lengthened
is
Taddhita
derived by the
;
syllables
ail
of a Bahuvrihi would have lost
with the present sutra commences the
final
which the word preserves
word
the
member
first
accent and become anudatta
The word
one word
in
as"
the
exceptions to the rule that the
the
161) a
rlftC
first.
*T|S2farT,
affix is svarita (VI.
1.
the word
185),
r.
In
^5^
Accent.
136
The words udatta and

Therefore
if
d&tta, the accent falls
3^,
rprro,
fr^w'rT^t
?rrf%^
on
it
aphorism.
this
udatta on the
*T*wnT5, here
rule
by the
final
all anu-
w\ being
11
<j<fi*rr, *re*ft,
*r^
^wr^,
3ts*t*t,
^m\\
fecftar,
11
11
srsssr ^37Fnrrrrr*rrfaf?r
(i
will get
Thus
223.
I,
in
II. 2
purvapada are anudatta, the present
all the syllables of the
has no scope there, and such a compound

universal rule enunciated in VI.
understood
are
svarita
Bk. VI. Ch.
5^53*
11
In a Tatpurusha, the
2,
its original accent,
when
member
first
preserves
a word (1) meaning u a resem-
it is
an Instrumental or (3) a Locative or (4) a

word with which the second member is compared, (5) or an
blance
",
or
(2)
(6) an Accusative, or
Indeclinable, or
(7)
a Future Passive
Participle,
Thus (i)!?3%3M, i?wf?*r, tîfp*, si^jrp, st^rftrn, sfrsnui

Karmadharaya compounds formed under II, I. 68 and $pg being
These
on the first (VI. 1. 216). The word ^fr
is acutely accented
formed by
Vart),
and
has acute on the final (VI. 1. 197 and
is formed by f*?^ (HI. 2, 60
VI, 2. 139). So also *rfsr%r *fiwr??P, gf^PTSraUl Tne w rd STC^T is formed
are
by
ztra
When
added
to
197 the accent
I.
165 applies and
IV. 143), and
with the force of sj^, and thus the noun
it
final-acute,
is
to sr^[
formed by
the
(Un
fafci is
member
first
III, 65),
Ffr^ affix
(2)
?jr
is
udatta
and hence VI.
affix
formed by the Unadi
affix
1,
$ (Ua
% to
When
the
as
is
a word in the Locative case, as
The word
is
final
and
qr,
first
is
acute (III,
is
formed by the
is
acute on the
member
^[^mr,
sr$T
1,
3).
first
3j^j
affix
The word
(VI.
1.
193)
qpc
?*r
is
owing
a word with which the second
|i3^^fr,
Îr'T^T,
wrcn^TTftH'WI,
^ft-
These compounds arc formed by II. 1. 55. ^r#r is

'and is final-acute ^g? is formed by <% affix (^r *T*% = i^)
Vart and is acutely accented on the first, or by Phit sutra
formed by
3^
pee III.
5.
it
to
(4)
ERF^PTr, ^TTP^fft
1 1. 3
and
added
compared,
is
2.
139).
being treated as a f%?^ (Un. IV, 142) has udatta on the final.
accent,
f?yq>
a word formed by
is
?irg^r
^feâstfr^ro?:, so also ^Frerp^ll
member
2.
II
When
(3)
to the
on ? (VI.
the whole word
added
falls
first
CTT:, so also
is added the affix
or
and by VI.
z%
member is in the Instrumental case, as: sr^ aq r WT< =5T^$rTo the root ?*r
fisRWP (II, I. 30) *IffaT is derived from strfJ+r^r
the
'I
has acute on the
first.
is
formed by the Unadi
affix *r
added
to
s^
Bk. VI. Ch.
(Un
II 3
and
III. 62),
Samasa-accent.
accented (III.
finally
is
and $
1137
PTT?f?r ?s*TPT:
1. 3).
formed by
changed into ^ as Panini himself uses

The words fqfretFT,
CTCRr ? are Genitive Tatpurusha, and their second member has accent on the
first syllable (VI. 2. 135).
(5) When the first member is an Indeclinable, as,
8T^
(III.
this
form (VII.
1.
134),
5)
3.
irregularly
is
and
pr^tonf*^, R^m^rRr,
compounds have udatta on the first,
^rarsiT, ^fq^:, Iotspp, i*w
these Indeclinable
accented in the middle.
it is
11
Vdrt:
In cases of
All
Indeclinable compounds, the rule applies only to
those which are formed by the negative Particle
Though
(nipata).
one of the Nipatas,
?r>r is
that qrsj.-accent debars even the subsequent
does not apply here FT Mich ir
to
11
they are formed by
&c.
II. 2. 5
it
$frrer<j:, ^fcrrra:
Mayuravyhsakadi
When
(6)
the
the
is
and
first
on the
final
m$m
on the penultimate (VI.
^jtWH^^
%S T^^cf^q"
II
They
srarcfor:
Therefore,
II
final
and belongs
is
3frfg*3?,
II. 1. 29.
?=Hkr5T is
*|$
formed
finally accented.
member
is
a Kritya-formed word, as, irrgafa^m ^
(II. 1.68).
*r*q
i.
^rfa
*TTI% tffifa^t
last.
by
is
formed by
<^
and has
and ârra are formed by SRfaC. and are accented

e. on *\
185 and 217)
1.
II
are formed
*rnn*P, Tr^^rrT^, fC^ffa^*

svarita
as
as in the accusative case, as
Spftrih?f*Rr
affix 3T^r
When
^-accent
which has acute on the
member
first
belongs to qt$uft class and
(7)
Particles
class.
ffrfoWfa*, swlsjf^sfr,
by the samasanta
by ^, and by
3T,
separate mention indicates
its
>T^frT
II
^:,
11
sr*r,
3t%&
11
II
member of a Tatpurusha preserves its

original accent, when a word denoting color is compounded
with another color denoting word, but not when it is the
The
3.
word t&
first
Thus fW^nr^T,
?T3
affix
by the
I.
Un.
^rflrraTTjft,
?^*c*Tiq:, fFJrftrT^Trqn
II
&W
affix rpj
is
4 ) and has acute on the final (III. 1. 3). <7rft<T

added to
(Un. III. 94) and has accent on the
III.
formed by
is
formed
first
(VI.
197).
Why do we say 'color-denoting word ? Observe *reTjs<?: (VI. 1. 223).

do we say 'with another color denoting word '? Observe ^cornron (VI.
Why do we say 'but not when it is tr^r' ? Observe ^cttct, FfrfffN? H
1. 223).
The compounding takes place by II.i. 69.
,
Why
irrsrasmrott smtffr
11
11
iTcrrft n itt^t, re<Tpft:,
smr^T
ll
1 1
Samasa-accent.
38
The
4.
compound
the
Thus
member of a Tatpurusha
when the second term is ira or
much
may
salt as
e.
sha compounds.
acute on the
(III. 2. 184),
be given to a cow or a horse
?&%
formed by adding
is
(VI.
first
1.
197).
and
first
(VI,
(III.
1.
197).
I.
3): *fr is
affix f^r
is
'so
added
to
formed by ft(Un
II.
^^ affix added to sr^[ (Un.
The word
I.
JPTTT here denotes
The power
'quantity', 'measure', 'mass', 'limit', and not merely the length.
of denoting measure by these words
Samba
^T^^T*
These are Genitive Tatpuruto 5^ (Un. IV. 94), and has
'.
formed by
final sfr; bt** is
and has acute on the
fffcrcwi,
formed by the
is
arf^T
and has acute on the middle
68) and has acute on the

151),
preserves
ssspir,
water as low or fordable as a
of the depth of an oar or a pestle'.
i.
II. . 5
expresses a 'measure or mass'.
?rr*mT5?3T'r, sif^HllMgiqra.'
or an Aritra
Bk. VI. Ch.
first
original accent,
its
here indicated by and
is
dependent upon
accent.
When
not denoting jhttt
second member, the
its
tance preserves
Thus
*re*T*rHF*
and qwST^L
In a Tatpurusha compound, having the word
5.
^TOT^ as
we have
first
member denoting
inheri-
original accent.
its
tTTfrsir
fMlrfrar?:,
The word
ll
Rpsjr is
formed by the
^r*
affix
The word ^T is derived by adding

3. 99) which is udatta (III. 3. 96).
\*rsT
to
(Un. II. 81). Though the Unadi Sutra II. 81 ordains <*g after the
53
root *rr preceded by f?r, yet by 3-^7 (III. 3. 1) rule it comes after \*r also when
(III.
it is
not preceded by
f?r
and
spr
has acute on the
first (III. I. 3).
In the forms f%3OT?ranr> &c, what Genitive case has been taken
is
the Genitive case which the
the Vartika 3THT<T?Hr>TRr
The
pounding.
i.
e.
^f^ff &c.
why
T ^gf
?t
^ntf? requires
*T*T^% (II.
Genitive case there
a trfq^T Genitive case,
case, then
word
and not a
is
2.
by Rule
the other Geintive case
If
it
10 Vart), there can be no com-
the ordinary Genitive case of
J?f?r7^
then by
II. 3. 39,
Genitive.
taught
If
it is
a 5
fl
IJ
II. 3. 50.
Genitive
39 with regard to
That sutra only indicates the existence of the Locative case in the
alternative,
is
and does not pervent the Genitive.
been ordianed in that sutra,
this
In
particular case
in
II. 3.
had merely Locative

would have prevented the
fact,
Genitive on the"maxim that a particular rule debars the general. But the
employment of both terms Genitive and Locative in that sutra indicates the
alternative nature of the rule
&
JjfirTf
and shows that the Genitive case so taught
Genitive, but a general Genitive.
is
In short the Genitive taught in
not
II.
Bk. VI. Ch.
II 8.
Samasa-accent.
1139
3.
not an apurva-vidhi, the words naturally would have taken Genitive
is
39,
the taking of the Locative
Why
I.
223
the only
is
new thing taught
do we say when meaning inheritance

taking the final acute of a compound.
'
ferts^f*ft:
srfaqfc*
^55
q^ffa
II
there.
Observe
n srfirafa*, !%?:,
m*mm|
srs^fr:
11
member, the
as its second
first
member, when
denotes that which experiences an obstacle, preserves
it
VI.
In a Tatpurusha compound, having the words
6.
fet or
n $
'
its
original accent.
Thus $raf*ro
and
compound belongs
to
some
affix,
and have
either to the class of
an attribute and the thing
owing
qualified.
When
do we say which experiences a hinderance
'
'
II
II
preserves
word
its
The word
Sirffa^r
becomes
II
j-rj is
This
(II. I. 72),
or of
delayed
is
there
difficult,
II
is
Why
II
q^, srq^T
smr% tîs^^tt^ *%&t
II
n&fafrit
when
the
H*n^
11
member
second member is the
first
a pretext \
means a pretext
a contrivance \ Thus l^qtr
Gone on pretext of voiding urine or excreta.
derived by adding the affix 8^, to the root *^-, the 37
'
s*q%^r
Jrfl*rcf :
The word
*m
193).
I.
*wif*K or *i*h##
Observe gig^l,
tr?s^r
original accent,
denoting
q^"
II
The words
called
In a Tatpurusha compound the
7.
JTf^qrT:,
q^T
\9
sq^fr
spf^r ^rsrerrsrr*nt
11
11
accent (VI.
going to a place
defective arrangement or cause, or

is
q^
foq[
Mayura-vyansakadi
produced an obstacle or hinderance, and
ffrr
s^rlr^pt
*forsr^c., ^rfrtfrsrc* or
formed by eg*
ttn^rot are
'
',
sr?r of to, (Un. IV. 163), and has acute on the first (VI.
be a word formed by etsj to the root %ft 3R r
The word
being substituted for

I.
or
197)
SWTC
is
may
it
also
11
formed by
*rsj
and by VI.
2.
144 has acute on the final.

is an attributive compound.
compounding takes place by II. 1. 72 or it

Why do we say "when meaning a pretext ?" Observe
^J7fr
j^^=f^-
11
f?teRT sTTcnrr^
8.
preserves
its
word f^rcT
Thus
So
f^^n":
The
also
ll
<
ll
q^rft
erra-^
forr^,
ll
ll
In a Tatpurusha compound, the

original accent, wlien the
in the sense of
'
j*fa r%?T<T => ^ttfftnrcr
member
second member is the
first
a protection from wind \

'
a hut as the only shelter from the wind
#frR^m*, I^Premôr ^^TPrerrT*
ll
The word f^RT
is
'.
an Avyayi-
SAMASA- ACCENT.
If 40
[Bk. VI. Ch.
II. .
lO
bh^va compound = ?rm^ sprnr* (II. t. 6): or a Bahuvrihi = R^ctf srrarsf^t

The words <?rf^Trrc &c, are examples of compounds of two words in apposition,
sgif and 5Pft are formed by 3*Nl (IV. I. 41) and have acute on the last
ll
(III.
I.
3).
Some
say that
and treating
ff^gr
derived from
is
augment
araf
that
derived by the affix ^Tf? to
it is
Why
it
as
and the
fjf
do we say when meaning
fWrf ^STfa, IpsT
TT^PT^nT
= ne
'
'
wfa
11
11
a shelter from wind
it^ mro5r
with the
others hold
has the accent
affix
Fmm =
Here
j?j
;
'
Observe cnr-
<Tf *f
'
'
pleasant
is
or vicinity.
II
In a Tatpurusha compound the first member

original accent, when the second member is
9.
preserves
first
under the shelter of the king
lives
the shelter or the protection of the mother'.
sur^ ****%
by adding
is
f^Rrl,
its
the word s&TCT, having any other sense than that of
'
au-
tumnal'.
The word
3TrN"
means appertaining
to season (*G)
i.e.
when the
i^
Kq^HL
word 5TN3 does not refer to the season of m<l or autumn. Thus
So also s#^ SfftfT: *r*T^ the saktu flour fresh from the
fresh drawn water
i
'
'
'.
and it forms an invarinew

The word m*$ means here fresh
The word rssj is formed by s affix added to *[ (Un. I. 15),
the *T being elided. The affix 3 is treated as f?r^ (Un. I. 9) and the accent
The word ^qfo is formed by the augment
falls on the first syllable (VI. 1. 197).
mill
'
'
'
'.
able compound.
of the vowel of the root
q and shortening
(Un.
I.
131) and has accent on the
Why
'to tear*
final (III.
(STTnt),
and the
affix arft^
Observe
qTrsiTCf**,
I. 3).
do we say when not meaning autumnal

SrRSrrc?* the best autumnal grass &c'. (VI. I. 223).
'
'
In a Tatpurusha compound denoting a genus,
10.
member preserves its original

second member is the word st^ or ^<*T*T
the
first
accent,
when the
||
Thus rfNiF^,
3&3T^--,
genus or
s&HW^
kind
',
213).
Vri,
zfft* !ITtK
sjTTFnr
(IV.
3.
101),
and the
affix
comes from ?^rf^+ *** (IV.
II
These are Appositional comxr&l is formed by

5?T* is derived by sr* affix (III.
with a fixed meaning,
pounds denoting
and has accent on the first (VI, 1.
I. 34), and to it is added the Taddhita
'
affix PTPT (IV.
is
3-
3.
104), in the sense of
then elided by IV.
3.
107.
The word
108) in the sense of ^rrtTr vrti (IV.
3.
Bk. VI. Ch.
and
101),
(VI.
it
12
II. .
Tatpurusha-accent.
would have preserved
(See VI.
144
I.
Thus
vart).
also *rfr4a3rePW;,
The words ^PTT*? and
pounds.
to ^rc
meaning
a 'genus'
Observe,
K^
(VI.
final
final
this affix
be elided
So
(III. 1.3).
is
fftTft3?
165).
1.
<n7Tp:i:, q-Wfirn*
^ft
ll
(VI.
formed by
Why
z%> affix
do we say when
223).
I.
**TO, srfdVWt:, 13T&fr

??
s^m^t w<r
snra jtrt^t ^sirrcterrei^r: *rr^rerf^t <r*s^r *rm%
II
II
II
II
*w
11
In a Tatpurusha compound expressing
11.
emblance with some one or something, the

preserves
Wtt
will
These are Genitive comare Genitive compounds and have
The word
*TC5T5rf^T*ft:
fnr:
3*irs*T
223).
X.
fôf sfuSrrcr^
accent on the
g&nfn? gets
SHI^MîNI*4Ho ffarft^frer^
accent on the final (VI.
added
form without change before
its
164) but for a vartika which declares that the
4.
141
or xrfcf^r
res-
member
when the second member
original accent,
its
first
11
is
II
Thus H^qgAP *T fq $A
The words faf and HTf are formed by Unadi
affix ^r ( Un. II. 95) and are finally accented.
By II. I. 31, SOT forms
Instrumental Tatpurusha. That case, however, is governed by VI. 2. 2, which
,
provides for
As
I'
jrcir:
and
^zm,
it
Jjsrdrr
applies to cases
ttW
and the
case-affix gets the accent
So
fafqfaV4
also
The examples
Instrumental compounds.
Genitive Tatpurusha
elided.
Tprirra^P
:
,
II
Here
II
srcft
and
<jqrfr
Observe wrcrrf:, StPTCTÎ (VI, I. 223):

compound is that of honor and not resemblance
11
TOP*
11
?*
'
'
ll
q^TR
ll
flMi^-tUMf iprprofafSr <T*g^-
12.
sure or quantity
accent,
when the
Thus
TO, the
r%*ft, snrtfr
^*n%
ll
^nt sr^m^t
^t^Tct h
member preserves
second member is a Dvigu.
SrESTCTRtf *T:
affix *TPT^
'.
In a Tatpurusha compound denoting

',
the
and
first
^v*TTC*ni^*r.
The word
II
denoting 'measure' (V.
2.
37)
is
WWH'
or
first
II
JTT^T
has acute on the
or on the middle
*nrcTT :
'
first
while iTRjruT
So
is
'
mea-
original
= SHTOTP HWl2.
37 Vart)
also Trr?qfft-
either accented
as
belongs to the Kardamadi class ( Phit III.
do we say 'before a Dvigu'? Observe sftfareij H Why do we
when denoting measure ? Observe W I*HHH
it
Why
10).
say
|df|r:
its
elided (See V.
JTr^wnfr *nrcPT* = 5r^rcnrerc: "an Eastern seven-years old".
on the
not
here the sense of the
fscft
frfp
is
are finally acute,
when semivowel is substituted (VI. 1. 174),

Why do we say 'when meaning resem-
blance'?
'
are of
here given
where the case-ending
'
'ird<jqu<4 srrftrer n
14
\%
11
q^rfr
n tt^tt^t,
II
<rnni,
mfrnt
ll
Tatpurusha-accent.
142
Before the word
13.
member
of a Tatpurusha preserves
word specifying the place whither one has

in
which one
Thus
compounds.
on the
last (VI.
I.
e.
derived by
*T? is
Kardamadi
I.
^t
finally
is
and
'
ware
we have:
II.
'the
67)
is
acutely accented
class (VI.
109),
3.
or the second
first
dealer in cows',
3T**3rrfan5r:
has acute on the
3T^3"
and
The word *TR*TR belongs
Tffqrrfrrsn 'a
and
All these are Loca-
first
do we say the place whither one goes, or the goods

Observe qwifui^K STOTfMb U
is
(Un
II
in
which
3r<rerar,
art",
'
^r^tta^^r^ 5tj^%
ll
V*
msrfa
11
snrsrr,
it
swr,
11
The
14.
its
and
II, 13)
consequently acute on the
is
(Un
accented
Why
5T5H%
Madra &c'
(Un
affix
icar
to
or the second syllable.
first
class,
151) the affix being
one deals
to go, or the
m^Ffl belongs to Krshodaradi
165).
1.
by going
trade
(Phit III. 10) In the sense of qvq

&c.
it
Wfa*rrcfrfî=*T$rrp^ *r^r sspr^fcr
^jrftaîf&rerJ,
who
has acute either on the

to the
first
deals.
*rtkrfa*r:,
Mad ra- merchants

tive
when
accent,
its
14
II.
a trader \ the
'
enforsr
Bk> VI. Ch.
first
member
accent before the words
^W when
^wr, 3"W*T and
JTTsrr,
these words appear as neuter.

Thus nronrnr t
is
^rf?r sur^ncr, srslr^Hr
gfrsftrr
fepsR
The word
11
here synonymous withgrS, the phrase being = f*T$rrar*3^15rjTPjr, and
tive
compound.
(III.
3.
The word
it is
final (III.
a word denoting
TrppfrT^r^r^ s^cffî
sq*rr, as
pTST,
1.
by st^ affix from

V 3). The word
qf^
So
also with
snfiretfc? U
1% T**irf^r TFnTH U
(3%^
Phit sutra
I.
).
So
s^sp^ l55**^ sfrnr^g^ *J^m
formed by
g^Tf^f T^T ?
f>r affix
The word
qTPFT
has acute on the
^t^>jt, as aTT^rq^'t
All these are
jfrtr
a Geni-
by the feminine affix 3T

The word ^55" has also
(qf&Rrsrsap^ *nf&r^), and has acute on the
ssnfe being
197), so also
5
3).
'a sea',
All these are Genitive compounds.
II. 4. 21).
word
derived from
103),
acute on the final as
with
pt$TT is
is
WmV,
is
also
(see
derived
final, (III.
first
(VI
I.
?^?3PPF*I*,
Genitive compounds.
The
+ ^? + 3T affix added with the

force of sj>7, the qr being changed to ^ the word belonging to fsfr^rf^ class
(VI. 3. 109), and it has acute on the final by VI. 2. 144.
The word ^{fa is
formed by spfisjv and has acute on the penultimate ;fr owing to the indicatory ^
(VI. 1. 217). The word
HR has acute on the final by VI. 2. 172. The
word 7r?f is formed by 3^ (III. 1. 134). The Tatpurusha compounds ending
srrdr
s^rafar)
is
derived
from
3Tr
in 3T5TT
and
grqifre
are neuter
by
II. 4. 21.
So
also with srar,
as fS'OT'WL,
"
Bk. VI. Ch.
Tatpurusiia-accent.
17]
II. .
1143
The word f^[ is derived from $qr by 3" affix (Un I. 13), and it being
(Un I. 9) the acute falls on f the first syllable (VI. 1. 197).
The word st|*t has also acute on the first by Phit sutra II. 3. The compound
5*1*313*11
treated
is
as fa^
Tatpurusha
a Genitive
the
compound
is
\\
ll
<*?"%
II
The
when
accent,
^^,
II
Thus
JpTTf^FT,
Hfaq q;,
m jim
i
good
193
1.
).
'beneficial',
i.
of pleasure or delght.
Sfi^
\$
II
5^
is
or
and the sense
faro*,
So also |sch^PT U?<"I^SI5.r

These are appositional compounds. All the
11
affix
and have acute on the syllable preceding
Sft^r, <*
II
first
II
member
accent, the second term being
its
II
The words sukha and priya have the sense of f|rT or

e. when the thing denoted by the first term is the cause
When this is not the sense we have q^H^4i*t, T^fr^ H
The
16.
ft%
**qr? J^rlr^rt *rerf?t u
pleasure of going'.
fgaflr
^Tfa
II
mm
good'.
is
above words are formed by ?g?

the affix (VI.
When
II. 4. 22.
(II. 4. 25).
fsfcnifc,
the second term
ipFTfjTsPr 'the
f-c
Neuter by
it is
member
first
delight, or
is 'to feel
'well
and
si fas ?^rT^TT?:T^rffrmf^rR rT^^r
11
15.
its
&j?n
not a Neuter we have ^^njTOT
^=rfe*T*nf^
^rfi'
f^rr(\
of a Tatpnrusha preserves
^^
or
in the
fsrcr,
sense of
"agreeable to one, or desired".

Thus
fl
^JiH^
"the sweetmilk
<rra*T
^^^
by or agreeable
desired
&c. The words

*r^:
Brahmanas", ^mfrors^vsjra:
acute on the final being formed by the affixes 3ror and or (V.
\\
(III.
1.
^m
and
to or desired,
11
11
?\s
q^rfa
ll
^rprcrs^TTCTf
m^
When
final.
4.
62) respectively
not meaning agreeable
rTrj^qr *rer%
ll
^n^, ^rwr%
*^tht
*5<t?
ll
*r$ra^
*refa u
In a Tatpurusha compound, having the word
17.
^ qr
has svarita on the
to the
m%W and 5TW have
we have IM^JT ^carnT^!!
^r ^rrfm?ir
frrT:
11
as its second
member, the
first
term,
when
it
denotes
the thing possessed, retains its original accent.

Thus
Trrernfr, 3T3^rTHt,
%^rpft
already been mentioned before in VI.
word denoting
q3nW5r
possession,
11
\<
ll
we have
q^rft
ll
H
2\
The
14..
TCftqcn'
qrfr,
accents of
When
II
k*&%
ll
the
iff,
first
sre and
jnember
*FT
is
have
not a
Tatpurusha-accent.
144
Bk. VI. Ch.
In a Tatpurusha ending in qfo when
18.
II.
21
means
it
member preserves its original accent.

The word nîs formed by ^
TjfirrW:, %%<TRP, fofffir:, W^fofa'*
'master' or lord', the first
Thus
II
(III. I. 144) and has acute on the final (III.

vrihi (q"f
^T*t = %^0, and by VI. 2. 1 the
^T
The word ?R
acute on the
is
derived from *
first (III. 1. 4),
the word
? )
^SCT#*f^T3
5T
sf?r
mihai
11
miVX
*^rT
*T
trt?
?^
II
<T^TR
II
Observe
'lord' ?
its
accent.
and has
(See Phit
final
H|$i<itr
II.
^<ft<T?i? "a
:
^, fee*, %%$
*, *J,
II
a Bahu-
is
affix sr<r (III. 3. 57
has svarita on the
srr?^
Why

Brahmana, husband of a Sudra".
23
first
by the
'to lead'
The word "^Rr

member retains
1. 3).
II
^wnWt <P3^ spirt w *n$ f^ r$q% fWRrin sjim ft TOfar
II
The words q,
fe^ and f^ra^;, however,

do not preserve their original accent in a Tatpurusha when
coming before the word qfcT denoting lord
19.
^r*r,
>
This debars the accent taught by the last aphorism.

1
f^TfJ^TR
<THT.-,
fS^Tfrf
:,
accented by VI.
srr
ffTH
II
gsR**
All these are
Thus wrf?T:, *HGenitive compounds and are finally
223.
1.
^trt ^t, g^ra:

ifSTWSrKM? q^W^rf^ rT^S^" SPIRT *TPT^3f S^Tf ^T M$f3H<. H3TrT
20.
The word g^r may optionally keep its accent
11
*o
II
II
ii
in a Tatpurusha, before <tRt denoting
Thus ^?TTH^
80),
or
%^7R
ordains
comes
first
in the secular literature also, as
T^ *WrSR
STTCTfT*pl
II
STfJWS^Tf rT^^T?r% T$ft
Before
ber in a Tatpurusha
when
*Tf,
1.
197).
||
lord \
*j?r
II
formed by sr^.(Un.
II.
q^rRT
II.
80 (Unadi)
the theory of *jg$ (III.
^p^TTfrTUr^p
\\
is
Though Sutra
I.
3),
it
II
||
3TH[Tf 3TT 3P*,

,
^f^^,
II
21.
of a
(VI.
^^ after w in the Vedas only, yet on
*HTR%
ff%:
The word
'
II
3TRTf aTRT^T Vffasr f c^^rRT^ tRTWlfafll
srreTf
srrap*
compound
and ^^t^^, the
preserves
its
first
mem-
original accent,
treats about a supposition.

The word *THI*HHl= 3TR<R^rH*{r3: "the hesitation about the existence
thing
Thus TORftTg; ^% 'one fears the journey'; so also t^rrof s^^TTit
'.
&c.
Similarly $nftTCPl
*5fflT ==
TiR *\*m
*PT sf*TR*r% "it has stepped in as
Bk. VI. Ch.
II.
23
Tatpurusha-accent.
1145
So also ^hnTTWHT*, ^rlr^rWPT^ Similarly *PTCHqfat

s*iV^^: = T*refmT RSfiSWrf^ *P*T^ "the journey stands
an obstacle to journey".
i*R%ffa
r*,
directly before
Why
".
do we say when a supposition
meant
is
Observe m+^flq
All the above words are formed by fj^ affix and have fal accent.
(VI.
11
I.
193)-
H^ qrnj^
**
ll
The
22.
preserves
its
q^rfa
II
i$,
ll
member of a Tatpurusha compound

is the second
accent when the word
original
"this had been lately
is
Thus STR^t HÎ^ = *^1?
".
The compound
The compounding takes place by II. 1.
belongs to Mayura-vyansakadi class. So also ^fra^:, fjfrere*^
Why do we say when meaning had been lately \ Observe mx^:,
:
must be analysed
it
11
first
member, and the sense
57 or
^nj^
in the
"
formely had been rich
",
above way.
II
'
^P^
wmcn
vn-r^: then
it
should be analysed as <reTTOT
"f%rlr
becomes an example under the
In order therefore, to
make
this rule
IT
II
analysed as m$f
it is
and not a counter-example.

applicable we must know the sense of the
rule
compound.
?*firra^*TO^r^^^^3 NiV4
*&n, <î^,
*nrchc,
The
23.
preserves
*nfr>ar,
wm^
q^rfa
11
srfira,
ll
^fer,
member of a Tatpurusha compound

accent, when the second
member is
first
original
its
^3
11
11
^fte, ^rmf^,
'
and
*rerer,
?^r
in the sense of "
what can
be found in the vicinity thereof".

Thus
*ri*rfîT,
MjîRsrnn**, JfrnStarfw*
VL, 'dhrTCPl' and *TsfcrtTO

of these words have been
words
srnrc &c,
vicinity':
srs
f*^ra^*^=>^^wf*
&c
from
= *T7P,rt SNT^*
Observe
Observe ^r^TCPRfr
>
ll
before
in
So
also
and
Why
bounded
tIsrty*, T?Nr jroT-
cffntflT
Sutra
VI.
f^rar &c, but they
II
2.
all
The
12,
field
accents
The
13.
mean
TOIW *$% tpranf
"the
11
also with *TRCTR
taught
are derived
*n?*rrc>t
vicinity thereof?
So
'
in
the
in
the
\H(*l a field having boundary'.

'
of D'.
Why
tip
we say
$rfa>*
II
RumiKiR *pnr^rg
11
ll
^tr
ll
m*mu, ^Kifa-gnr^ftg
11
Tatpurusha-accent.
146
Bk. VI. Ch.
II 25.
The words ra^qre &c preserve their accent

when followed by an Adjective word in a compound,
24.
Thus f^TS <*i**l, NNr^Rf^fiiT s^RMi^** ff^TSP^T*, repT^FTOW, *^tRThe compounding takes place by II. 1.4, and it should be analysed
,
xWtil
thus
II
ft*<re
*S*"* &c.
The words
fi* Mg &c, are indeed here adjectives, and in conjunction

and therefore
with 375 &c, they denote an object possessing those qualities
not being in apposition, the compound is not a Karmadharaya.
;
The word
also acute on the
word
as fafsRP,
pfcte has acute on the

as
first
it
first
by VI.
2.
The word f^nr is

Some read the
acute.
The word ssfrR
49.
gets the accent of the Indeclinable.
which being a Bahuvrihi has also first

The remaining words of
first by VIII. 2. 4.
has svarita on the

STT#,
kg or
TF^S,
the final by VI.
(Un
fa<^
and
is
I.
9), it
2.
^f,
144;
f^q; affix
(Un
I.
quality "
qrre^j,
3Tr^T%, or
144, being
Observe
'of f%*7
Why
is
formed by
final
I.
(VI.
I.
106), *5rq^ being formed by a

1.
&c'
3Tcni
The word
and
has acute
having
when followed by a word expressing a
II
ll
toc (
the word qrq

Thus TriR^rg^r,
understood
f?rg<JT
"
*TT3T ),
V.
3.
preserves
first
its
mem-
original
60 ), 3*T ( V.
64), and before a form built from
accent before adjective forms built from

)
163), for f^rîs
106.
m affix added to yjj &c.

Observe f^!R^ StTT^^R both
ber consisting of a Verbal noun (
61
to the root q-T,
being formed by
In a Karmadharaya compound, the
25.
3.
^=jj
final
formed by
do we say
ft?<T?Br5Pr
srrmrc^
Un
ill from sutra Un.
I.
do we say
final.
*rfc,
cfTflr*
rtf
Tf*TrT
has accent on the
in), has acute on the
Unadi sutra Un.

on the final by VI. 2.
Why
144).
2.
3"
first.
class are
this
Of these, the word %T# has acute on

(Un I. 18), which being considered as
fatj^r.
formed by
^Tr^?5ri% = <^T^:,
in the
acute on the
is
has acute on the
finally acute (VI.
a krit affix
and
^TT<?
sr
V.
3.
II
T*rFre*r or irT*nirfta-
ll"
or
So
tpftw, ibFT53S*
also rre^PTrm?
F37 formed wot^s and hr.ve
f?y?
accent
i.
or
smhu*t;
frmnfor:
e. on the
ll
tt*tt***' ?ta*fiq*i*, frr-
All the
first
first syllable.
members
(VI.
1.
are
193
are substitutes which certain adjectives take in the

The words *sr, 5^ and
comparative and superlative degree, and the employment of these forms in the
sutra indicates that the comparative and superlative words having these ele-
Bk. VI. Ch.
II
27
Karmadharaya-accent.
147
ments should be taken as second members, and so also of qre, the comparative
and superlative are taken, for this is the meaning here of the word TPT^q;
Why do we say "** &c" ? Observe r*H{ii*RT
Why do we say 'a
Observe *T*FWf:, where the word itr is = n**rer S%T 'a carraige'.
verbal Noun'?
Why do we say 'a Karmadharaya compound'? Observe ire^r ^n:=ir*njVn:
11
ll
II
&m< r
ff^r:
11
r$
5hiimj
vm
zf&ww
standing as a
Thus fWr%^T,
the final as
it
II
first
^stfc,
srer%
The word
26.
when
thrift
II
II
sr^r^t w?r
$m<
11
preserves
member in
original accent
its
a Karmadharaya compound.
fttrc'WTr, fFTT?rrnT*ft
The word
ll
has acute on
grer?
derived from the root apmc s&CTqPl with the affix sr^ of
is
By II. 1. 70, it is ordained that ffflT is compounded with

Some commentators hold that the word flK must be followed by
They refer to the maxim
( II. 1. 70 ) to make this rule applicable.
T^rrf^
II
^ppf &c.
*to<jt
&c.
(REfanrn?-
?I^P irfjTTfTrfftare STf^rq, "whenever a term is employed which might denote

both something original and also something else resulting from a rule of
<T
grammar, or when a term is employed in a rule which might denote both

something formed by another rule in which the same individual term has been
emoloyed, and also something else formed by a general rule, such a term
should be taken to denote, in the former case, only that which is original, and
only that which
in the latter case,
is
formed by that rule
make any such

of^*TK
limitation, but
in
which the same
in-
Other Grammarians, however do not
dividual term has been employed."
apply the rule to
all
Kaimadharaya compounds
3ttt%:
s3rt%
WTOtffJjSrrfr
WrT
i^rft
ll
srrfc:,
*&*fa
II
ii
27.
followed by
li
In a KarmaclMrya
src^fa^;,
the acute
falls
compound
on the
of
Kumara
syllable of
first
Kum&ra.
The word JT^nr = irf^TcT ^^TT
The
word udatta
or
for the construction of the sutra requires
member
preserves
srf<T*Trf*PTr
*KQ
Thus
ll
its
it,
and the
anuvritti of the
accent' would be. inappropriate because
tiie
*
employed
here.
yb^Ftt&m
^qris<4Hi:
II
required to be read into the sutra to complete the sense:
is
II
^TR
II
qftj,
3TOcR3*n^
11
word
'
first
3TTr%' is
Karmadharaya-accent.
148
The
28.
tionally,
name
is
VI. Ch.
II
op-
acute
is
a word denoting
29
the
of a horde \
The word
Thus
also.
Bk
Kumara
of
syllable
first
or $Tr?<*r?^*Tr
^frSrT^TJ
Here
'
or
&c \ See V. 3. 1
So also
f^rr^m^:
a multitude, a collection
^KÎ^T
or
frcnFTRSffP
|HKÎ^f5TT:
II
means
*cr
(VI.
reTC%^rln
or
26),
2.
So
II
II
also with |wK4<4l4fiP,
W&r
and the affix S3 is added to

In the above
the Plural by II. 4. 62.
^Trf^f &c, are horde-names
them by V. 3. 112 which is elided in

examples when the word Kumara' is not accented on the first syllable, it
gets accent on the last by VI. 2. 26, when the srirrTfrrfi maxim is not applied
when that maxim is applied, the final of the compound takes the accent by
:
'
the general rule VI.
223.
1.
fH*d*W*MIJeWII#*TOl5
?pm, *KM!$, fen*
fl[TT
II
M^lPf
II
II
%*l*G,
*MW,
^T^,
II
WW* WU1 TO*
STtT H rtnT^TRTt *W<*l?lR
In a Dvigu compound, the
29.
serves
vowel, with the exception of

time, as well as before ^nrra,
Thus %>-^kQp
Dvigu
(II.
always
elided in
>^fr *<fr
vrr#r *T.
affix *<i
1.
(V.
So
88).
1.
i^rrefsP
W\T& and
Dvigu
This
80
(V.
is
82).
2.
3 Vart).
So
also
also a Taddhitartha
So
also ih^rcran*:,
also fcere fr
S
isranrns*,
by IV.
1.
Why do
q^rrf , ^TPi:
II
<d, MWKll*
When
pre-
srcre
word denoting
II
are examples of Taddhitartha
q>^HIH(-, farn-ap
Dvigu
&FP$
(II.
the affix
q>^vnTr^j, |^r>mR*,
These are also Taddhitartha Dvigu formed by

elided
member
first
before a
sj (*j),
The above
11
J&VI J?*ffiW
equal to <HKgK(: smiWHl, the sftft denoting-affix
52),
1.
tf*rfa
a stem ending in a simple
original accent, before
its
$^1%$ *T f|%
IV.
2. '16,
1.
52),
to
mw*
is
qr*^ H\HW,
formed by the
being elided (V.
5>^wn=,
lira 11 4* m
the affix srar
being
88.
Why
an frr^ stem &c
" ?
Observe TqpTO^tffa: =*
do we say "in a Dvigu Compound?" Observe q^T-
we say
" before
compounds, by case-modifications do not end in

fs^ vowel, but the vowel is replaced by a semivowel or Guna, the rule will still
This is done on the stren S tn of the
ThusJfcq-tt^T- or qsnrrera: u
apply.
maxim 3Tf*FZr arf^JpFcPCff. " That which is bahiranga is regarded as not having taken effect or as not existing, when that which is antaranga is to take
effect " because the substitution of semivowel or guna is a bahiranga opera:
these Dvigu
BK
VI. CH.
II. .
32
DVIGU-ACCENT.
Or
tionjn relation to accent.
II49
may
the substitutes
be considered as sthanivat
to the short-vowel which they replace.
HircrwHH
\o
q^rft
11
^5, 3rera?3?ra[
11
In a Dvigu compound, the word
30.
stem, or by a time-word, or by kap&la, bhag&la and

This allows option where the
Thus WRITS'
:
by the
affix fj
or ^f^Ttrf
(Un
the anudatta 3?
preserves
its
is
11
and
*TH*?T
Tsfcrfer
11
3*
WrT
ii
its
n fefe,
or Wf-
first
example,
first
member
Email ^
11
:,
members.
l>^RrlRrp or T*^Trrf^:
denoting words dishti and vitasti (V.
TS^fsfg-: or
sr^T^rrj;
may
when followed by the words
accent,
as second
crsatflf*!:,
The
II
II
q^Tft
II
2.
^ft,
ll
mw*
affix
37).
rers:,
3*9?,
ll
t^
twuHf ^rrt fas W%\
^^r ^\|TK A^*f?iw<

,
*re?cr srr
%?s&*ft s^ranr
11
32.
locative-ending word
note time, preserves
and
.^P,
Tjir
words
sa;;zkas*ya
sr^r in
III. 16 ) in
ftfrU^S
its
original accent,
when it does not dewhen followed byr%c,
a compound.
Thus ^T^r^ter^:
(
w&
ll
T%^^W^^*JF3T3;
3^5,
^p?t*
arf^rTr^, 3l|>T*Tr^
has acute on the final being formed
fWtn %^w^wwu%fii sm% s^pp^rt^t n%mwx mft u

31.
In a Dvigu compound, the first member
ffit
elided after the sprr^
*re>,
^ft'llr*' or
acccent. In the other alternative, the accent falls on the last syllable.
Thus
is
optionally preserve
f^nj
The word ^f
II
garfiva.
accent necessarily.
I. 29). When the 3 is changed to *, as in the

changed into svarita by VIII. 2. 4 when the
f^feftcrariNr
%Rap
last rule required the
or 5T||Tr%:, ^t*TT^ or 7gTTC3
^fsTCTf
>
op-
when followed by an ik-ending
tionally preserve its accent
WH*
may
Tf
or
srilrrafTO*, 3rrf*<r?irfTO or 37rr*??3rcre

:
and' kampilya have acute on the
the alternative the accent
^rfNjs^f: H
The word f^PT
is
falls
final,
on the middle
derived by
affix
s**j
11
The
and by Phit Sutra

also.
added
So
also
to R-srrsr
and has acute on the middle the word 3737 is formed from ^% root by the
affix 3737, and has acute on the final.
So also 'Irg'T^f ^?rq"g?:, cF^frT^j*
The words Kumbht and Kalas*i are formed by #r* affix and have acute on the
final
the word srrg is formed by %% affix, and has acute on the beginning.
So also ^5^r^: ^K*M* ^ U The word chakra has acute on the final, and
;
charaka being formed by f&has acute on the
15
first.
ll
1 1
DVANDVA-ACCENT.
50
Why
BK. VI. CH.
II.
33
do we say when not denoting time ? Observe ^^Tfarfsrlp,

The compounding takes place by II. 1. 41. The accent of the
STW?5Tra^
Locative Tatpurusha taught in VI. 2. 1 was debarrd by Krit-accent taught VI.
The present sutra debars this last rule regarding Krit accent, and re2. 144.
ordains the Locative Tatpurusha accent when the Krit- words are fag &c.
:
'
'
II
The
33.
particles
qft,
which
their accent before that word,
and night,
or a portion of day
pound
specifies
srqr
preserve
an exclusion,
an Avyayibhava com-
in
also).
Thus
(See
and
^q*
strt>
II. 1. 11
<?ftnr*r?T
and
^nrifppj, sferq?is?r*>
%%f
" I*
rained
So
also
By
1.
Phit Sutras IV. 12, and 13
So
first.
'pari'', 'prati' &c, as
rules already
11
all
and
Trigarta
".
|ffTIrq--
12).
Particles (Nipata) have acute
also upasargas with the exception of
have acute on the
in)
II
11
Rpm %tV, ^M**, ^T^Wr (II.

first syllable.
round (but not
all
So also
ffwhfk* TOSTpM *, TCt&TTI
Ssrrorei, t^F^pr*, I<ttt*tî*, It^ht*, #rr<mnr*
12).
3rfvr H
on the
Therefore qrc &c,
In a Tatpurusha and Bahuvrlhi compounds, these words
members would have
first
gone before
retained their accent by the
the present sutra, therefore,
extends the principle
The precf the preservation of the accent to Avyayibhava compounds also.

positions srq" and q-ft alone denote the limit exclusive or ^sfrr, and it is therefore with these
two prepositions only that the second member can denote the
With these prepositions 3T7 and
s<T H
thing excluded, and not with qrirT and

term if denoting a
qfc, the second
member
of day or night, are also taken
even as excluded, therefore no separate illustrations of those are given.
Why
and night
not
in
it',
'
do we say before a word which

'
Observe
the accent
n<M l **
falls
WWV
on the
rule, as well as all special rules
34.
The
TrTRT H
last
is
excluded, or
by VI.
2.
a part of a day
which debars
178,
which might
affect
member
of a
first
is
In JTr^nT* "air round the forest, but
^t
in a
this general
compound.
Dvandva compound,
formed of names denoting the Kshatriya
warrior
clans in
B K.
VI. CH. II
36
H51
DVANDA-ACCENT.
the plural number, retains
its
original accent
Andhaka
belongs to the clan of
when the warrior
or Vrishni.
The words Svaphalka and

Thus ^<T^#5ren\-, %w?S*fWT, n?T?reiwrr
Chaitraka are formed by sror affix (IV. 1. 114) and have acute on the last (I II. 1.
11
).
The word
Rrf^ has acute on the
Why
noting Patronymic.
first
do we say
'
in
syllable,
and does not change in de? Observe
denoting a Warrior clan'
Here %c^ is derived from $7 by the affix ^ (IV. 3. 10) =$rqr **T:j
S^lni^Hr
These names belong to Andhaka and Vrishni clans, but
%TT3ff: =%H^Tcq ^r U
are not the warrior-names.
The word ?J5PT here means those Kshatriyas who
11
belong to the family of annointed kings and warriors
srfHfqrtf^tf
these
(Dvaipya and Haimayana) do not belong to any such family. Why do we say
in the Plural number' ? Observe g^qor^nj^rf H
Why do we say in a Dvan4
'
dva compound'?
Observe
Andhaka and Vrishni

sresrr
3^
11
clans
^rR
^tjfpTf i jnTT:=ff^T^TT?P
II
Observe
'
^4^rrer:
Why
II
do we say 'of
II
^qrril
The Numeral word, standing as the

Dvandva compound, preserves its accent.
35.
member
of a
Thus
The word
q^rf^T, fr^T, %^r?^T or ^riff^r U
(Un
ij^f is
43) and has acute on the first (VI. 1.

the substitute of r% (VI. 3. 48) and has acute on the final.
t>y
3&1 affix
III.
sTT^pfr^r^^FcT^T^r
*ft, (
ffrrs
sr^f^rcq;
3Tr^r7^WîTO?ri
11
first
member
When
the scholar
is
^npaffrofcr., ^, st^w-
% f^rR^rTf sr^m^t *nrm
means a pupil' a boarding not a day scholar'.

named by an epithet derived from the name of his
Thus STrnrsri3THTr3f<TCrFT: or teacher-derived name.
3T%rr*it
is#
name
that
TTfrpffar:,
mm ^fa-Sftap,
IV.
<ren*R
s^ct
retains its accent.
teacher,
ll
The
197).
words denoting scholars are named

their teachers and are compounded into a Dvandva, the
The word
name
\%
derived from fi
When
36.
after
II
first
is
'
'
#iffcre?reT?5^TP
ll
of a Teacher or foundei of a school

1.
95
adding sr^
).
The
science
taught by him
affix to srrfTO^P (IV.
the Apisalam are also called
The son
3.
101
3Trfq^r*r:
is
and IV.
the
of Apisala
an acharya
2. 11).
affix
is
arrfq^n^ the
formed by 53* affix

called srrmHE> formed by
:
The
denoting
scholars
'
who study
to*tudy
'
is
elided
by (IV. 2. 59 and 64). Or the pupils of Apisali will be also called Apisalah.
Thus in both ways Apisalah is a scholar name derived from the name of a
teacher.
The word STPTrsfrT^^FT qualifies the whole Dvandva compound and
DVANDVA-ACCENT.
52
not the
member
first
That
only.
is,
compound
the whole
Bk. VI. CH.
II.
37
should
in all its parts
denote scholars, whose names are derived from those of their teachers.
There-
qTfMfa%T^T where though the first is a teacher-derived name,

not. Why do we say "names derived from the teacher's"? Observe
Why do we say "a Scholar"? Observe STrfq^tfMlfWl^ mw U
ST^^rarer^jrn
fore not here
the second
is
||
^r^nTTT^nsr
II
CT%*&*ra, stt^t:,
Those words of
from
II
first
retain their accent.

this list
which end
dual or plural
in a
The
so exhibited for the sake of distinctness.
words.
Also in the Dvandvas ^r^rsr^T &c, the
37.
members
^Tfa
3V3 H
II
following
is
afifix
have been
of these
list
^rr^-^r^r (formed by 3Tot IV. 1. 114 in the sense of Patronymic,

and ^TSTT these being Rishi names )
2. CT3f5rar o ^3i3r ( savarni is
1.
gjrT
11
formed by f>r Patron, affix and TT*f%3 by s-sk IV. 1. 1 19 ). 3. ^HÂ^-h f: The
word Avanti is end-acute, to which is added thePatron afifix nyan by IV. 1. 171,
which being a Tadraj is elided in the plural; ST^cfmr Ffaref ^T^sr^RT the
quadruple significant
descendent of Paila
elided
by
being elided.
3TT
Mt^3m0i3r:(Paila
4.
II. 4. 59.)
is
derived from Pila the son of Pila
be formed by adding
will
The word Syaparna belongs
female descendant will be 5yaparni
Syaparneya,
We
pound must,
which
therefore, be
always
1.
NH^
Saitikaksha by 3T^r, IV.
by
fsr
which
is
IV.
$^
is
We
I:
1.
by
elided
her yuvan descendant

sory.
is
Paila, the
which
yuvan
however,
is,
1.
descendant of her
compound should be
(Kapi has acute on the
107,
6. ttrerererr
156,
104, the
will
be
plural always
also.
Rffa3rr<rar
formed by 33^ IV.
I.
to Bidadi class IV.
the yuvan
not necessary that the
It is
have q^^rT^rlr
5-
IV.
fqrJ
is
final.
The son
however elided by
is
of Kapi will be
II. 4. 64.
This com-
in the plural.
(Sitikaksha
114, the
is
the
name
of a Rishi, his son will be
yuvan descendant of the
II. 4. 58.
latter will
Pafichala's female descendant
The
Pafichaleya.
plural
number here
is
is
be formed
Panchali,
not compul-
have%?rgF7r^Tr^T%tr also.)
7-
ch^î^n
1.
59,
which
is
or ehgehc||-^ten
>
(The son of Katuka
elided in the Plural
by
II. 4.
66.
will
be formed by
The son
of Varchala
Varchaleya).
(The son of Sakala is Sakalya, his pupils are Sakalalj

of Sunak will be Saunaka by ar^ IV. 1. 104,
which will beêlided in the Plural by II. 4. 64). Some read it as sra7?rerJT^P,
where the %tj affix after Sanaka is elided by II. 4. 66. So also 3J?ren*r%si H
8. *llh<43JTOiP
by
st<?t
IV.
2.
in.
The son
9.
SFHtf^nrer:
(Archavinah are
those
(the
son of
who study
Babhru
is
Babhrava).
10.
srr^rfWj^P
the work produced by Richava, the
afifix
BK. VI. CH.
DVANDVA-ACCENT.
II 47. ]
II53
added by IV. 3. 104. Mudgala belongs to Kanvadi class IV. 2.

This a
Maudgalah are pupils of the son of Mudgala). II. 3f?fT*J<.lgr
Dvandva of Kunti and Surashtra in the plural or of the country-names derived from them like Avanti. Kunti and Chinti have acute on the final. 12.
13. rFT^rTTP (Both belong to Pachadi class formed by
fNf?rT!pTgr: as the last.
3r?r III. r. 1 34, from rff? rri"*r Bhvadi 300, 1^4 is formed from the same root with
the prefix 33^, the aj being elided, and both have acute on the final: and are enum-
fart being
in
erated in the Gargadi
list
IV.
1.
105.
In the plural the patronymic affix q*i
is
irrr^p Here also srsi affix is elided II. 4. 64. 15. 3rf%TTT^TH^^r: or f^rr n Avimatta has acute on the first being formed by the ?r*i
particle.
Both the words lose fi patronymic by II. 4. 66.
elided
by
II. 4. 64.
16. srore Al
14.
He arers
Salanku or Salaftka of
PTR
of Babhru
99
is
is
Babhrava, and the son of
Salankayana.
takes f*i in the patronymic which
who
are those
104) being elided by IV.
3.
Kalapah, the
fôf kalapin
3T<3T
elid-
is
is
3.
read the work of Katha, the
Those who study the work

3. 108, which required
164 but by a Vartika under VI. 4.
107.
being added by IV.
be retained by VI.
to
144 the f^ portion
elided before
st^t
4.
11
Those who study the work of Kuthumin are ^rsprr formed

by VI. 4. 144 Vart already
19. ^T3W*pir:
by
Kathah
^y^RTTT:,
(IV.
of Kalapin are
the
I.
II. 4. 66.
18.
affix
IV.
amWH'e3?Tr Danchyuta
17-
ed by
The son
?F3Tf3
83 the 5^ being elided before 3T*

referred to above.
bt^t
IV.
1.
20. ^r*j*Trefr$Tp
Or
kshah.
the son of
Those who study the work of Lokaksha are LaukaLokaksha is Laukakshi, the pupils of latter are Lau-
kakshah.
21. *ftfflTTO
Stn has accent on the
ll
the son of
22. rn%cq-?$r^r:,
Maudah.
So
I.
is
final.
Maudi, the pupils of
latter
are
also Paippaladah.
23. ^T^far?*!^
VI.
Muda
The double reading
of this word indicates that Rule
223 also applies.

24.
sr^r*^ 0/ ^r3T**rP=^T+*n:fj;
25.
So
they take
bt*t
ll
Vatsa has acute on the
final.
The pupils of Susruta and Prithu are so called

^r^r, 27. q ^ I^nSr Yajya is formed by cr^,
also ^TT^rPTnT^P,
IV.
1.
83.
26.
added to q-a, the iff is not changed to a Guttural by VII. 3. 66. It has svarita
on the final by f%q[ accent (VI. 1. 185). Anuvakya is derived from anu +
vach + *g^
11
1 1
KARMADHARAYA- ACCENT.
54
The word
38.
the following
ffe,
*n?=r,
and
Thus
%f^*,
*i^ffc^
qf^n^trK
^jk %mr&,
>
flkf^
maxim
II. .
?rrca,
srnrre, ?rrc,
40
|r%-
II
Tfrsfrf?-, *ifNiif"i:, Tîrfg-:, jf^rrcr:,

:
BK. VI. Ch.
retains its accent before
*rî; (jt^t)
sfrft, srq^nr,
srf^c
The
*iffj[
i^^mw,
has acute on the
already mentioned under VI.
2.
^hh::,
(Un
final.
ifkm,
*r?!-
On
the
II.
26, this accent will
84)
apply to that
compound of Tfq[ which it forms under rule II. I. 61, for that is the particular
rule of Karmadharaya compounding relating to mahat (pratipadokta). This rule
Thus J^r arf? - Tfl^tfl^
therefore, will not apply to Genitive Tatpurusha.
'>
which has accent on the
final
by VI.
1.
223.
Q. The word Jff^T is a Participle formed by tF affix, and by rule VI.

2. 46, in a Karmadharaya compound, the first member will retain its original
What is then the necessity of reading this word in this sutra ?
accent.
maxim
Ans. That sutra VI. 2 46 applies, en the

special participles
ciple
and nouns mentioned
in
II. 1.
of pradipadokta, to
the
59 and not to every parti-
and noun.
^rasr 1*3^
39.
H 3*>
i^rft
II
W?*',
**,
%r$%
II
The words mahat and kshullaka
retain their
accent before the word VaisVadeva.
thus
Thus I^N^TC., and

PSlfrTîpr* to
word has udatta on the
3^: ^rf^rr**fr.
40.
1
sadi
'
and
'
^g^f^^
II
3? (V. 3.
kshullaka
73 &c)
is
derived
is
added
and the
final.
îfa
II
The word
vami
The word
II
which the Diminutive
'
II
^5:, *fff^, waft:
ushtra
'
retains
its
II
accent
before
^t^, *m%, *rrcfa,
sstfir
The word Sg is derived from

Thus i^^nf? and s^rre
by
(Un IV. 162) and has acute on the first (VI. 1. 197). This is either a
Karmadharaya or a Genitive compound. In some texts the above examples
II
affix
are given with a yisarga in the masculine, and not Neuter.

*tt:
^r^rrTOTcfai
ll
a?
ll
<t^tr
ll
*tp,
Bk. VI. Ch.
The word
41.
sadi
'
and
*,
formed from
Or from
is
*R[
retains
accent before 's&da',
its
STT^tfrT,
The
root.
and OTf^, the Samasa-accent VI.
I.
Krit-accent
223
II
'
3T?Trr5f^ft-
The
42.
following
Aglila-dridha-rup&
The
',
and
'
first
member
first
'
',
&c
'
',
ili g Htre,
(^^^rt iftf^)
has acute on the
Vdft\
formed by
',
Pan-
'.
first
two of these are exhibi-
ted without any case-ending, the renaining five are in nom.

is
Astita-jarati \
Taitila-kadrtih
seven words are compounds, the
Kuru
ii
WK'
%$fc
accent in the
its
Kikta-guru
Pare-vadabS, \
Dstsi-bh&ra
'
'
ctwN
<T**T3^reft
ffl%c$^r? WVftx**?!
retains
debarred
of
^, h$m4;chh
^refrorcrnrnj;,
iT^^^^TT TH^S^r
Kuru-g&rhapata
ya-kambalah
q^*^^:,
cricT^r^rsr:,
l^TlfTtT ft^?J3
is
in the case
fT^nrl^crf^fT^Î^^^Î^^^^ m^TOTT ^f^FST:

3^rr, MK^srr,
11
^r>i
from the same causative
forf^r
in the case of STS
ffrP
55
*tt arf*:=tr?rrffs, and flfsrncfa

snr
and forms a Genitive compound (tit: mÔwe get^TTCTTf: by adding sn* (III. 9*frerr#
*rr^fa=m%r^,
*tt
with the affix
the causative verb
formed by
>
'*ft
i i
s&rathi \
'
wmv or
Thus
is
Samasa-accent.
171. ]
affix
added
to
Singular.
^ Un
I.
Thus
24,)
and
final.
So also
jfit<U HrPfc,
<
the word Vriji has acute accent on the
first.
= R%^; or R|r^: for rikta has acute either on the first

or on the second (VI. I. 208). SoalsoST^r "STCrft = ^rTSTCrft, 3T^*T5W=^r'!?R
Asuta and asltld being formed by ttst particle have acute on the first
gg ^ iir
(VI. 2. 2). That which has ft is called 3rte, the affix w^ being added by its
changed to & by its belonging to kapilakadi
.belonging to Sidhmadi class, and
This is a samasa with the force of
class. So also qrtV^T, this is = qK3^lf H
case
ending.
of
the
The
word qrc belongs to Ghritadi
elisicrn
is
there
and
$3,
So
also f^fRT 33:
11
*;
and has acute on the final.

Titilin is Taitila formed by w*
class,
acute on the
first
(VI.
I.
%f?H7PTr
affix,
the son or pupil
=%fcT^Tf;:,
qozfti*affi : ,
panya ends
in
of
and has
213).
nas acute on the first only when it is a name. Otherthe accent will be on the final by the general
compound,
wise in qftrrrTî SFF^
being
frrmed by
affix (III. 1. 101) is acuteword
The
<T<^
rule VI. 1. 223.
u^*^
The
word
is as Name when it
q
ly accented on the first ( VI. I. 213 ).
Vdrt:
!3rejT3R:
means the market-blanket
i.
e.
a blanket of a well
known determinate
size
Samasa-accent.
.iiS6
and fixed
price,
when
compound means a
1.
the
If
223).
it
which
generally kept for sale

saleable blanket,
be objected what
formed by a kritya
we
is
^^g^Rs^T
44
But
blanket-sellers.
takes the samasa accent (VI.
by VI. 2. 2,
compounds
compound is by
accent in the Tatpurusha,
affix, will retain its
such as ordained by
it
by the
II. .
the use this Vartika, for the word qn^ being
is
^m used in VI. 2. 2
reply that the
[Bk. VI. Ch.
relates to pratipadokta kritya
34<rtld!ir II.
68, while here the
I.
and is a general compound. So alsoîw^nTJ^llffare: N

The words belonging to Dasi bharadi class are all those Tatpurusha compound
re%qnx fqrePBFT
II. I.
51
words, not governed^by any of the rules of accent, in which

first
member should
f^ftf^:
10).
retain
accent.
its
Vasu has acute on the
II
3TTTf^J =3fr^r^ft^S^n'^,
!
ed by
s^
has acute on the
Some
first
it is
desired that the
of them are"|lf3T|%;,^l*Tr^
being formed by a fa^
formed by f^
?^TrW
:
,
Un
affix
affix (III. 3. 93), gftT
I.
:
,
being form-
^-ju p is formed by 3?i% affix

added to the root *TT^*n% preceded by the upapada **&$ as, ^^ + + 3tct = ^f?(VI.
first
197).
I.
*TCT,
the affix being treated as
(Un
II. 13)
^tff <T^
II
%\
retains its
is
word
word
accent,
suited to
Thus
able, as
it is
f^rgo* is
acute on the
q3[TFT
II
43.
which
f^(Un
||
IV. 228), and ^??is formed by
*3 affix
final.
^3^, cT^, *$fNTO*
II
in the Dative case as the first

become the former.
member
expresses
that
|q^r^, P3$t$\u8W
The word
has accent on the first syllformed by q- (Un III. 27) treated as a r?j[ (Un III. 26). The
formed by ^7 affix which is treated as
(Un. I. 108) and has
ll
So
final.
also ?*I^PS,
WffT7
f^
II
Ratha
is
first-acute
formed by
(Un II. 2). Vallt has acute on the final formed by ^sr affix. (IV.
I. 41) Why do we say 'it being suited to the first' ? Observe
This
gj%^f?S
accent applies when the second member denoting the material is modified into
the first by workmanship. The composition takes place by II. 1. 36.
kthan
affix
3T^
II
^T!%
II
44.
II
3T^,
iT*Ri^<H
Before the word
'
II
II
artha
the
',
first
member
in the Dative retains its accent.
Thus
ftpt St
finally acute as
foq[
= ,TT5hfa, sf^r^/^frTwfall The words *rrf and fa?r are

(Un II. 95) ^rr being formed by
taught so in Unadi sutra
affix (V. 4. 27)
has acute on the middle

first.
srfrTnT is
formed by fpr^
affix
Bk. VI. Ch.
II
The
*
47
Samasa-accent.
between Q^b and
difference
wood', f^T7*!
'
gold
',
has not inherent
sr*f
in
1157
the
that
is
former,
like
$T5
the sense of adaptibility, while
it
means adapted
Some say that the making of two sutras, one with
and
other
with
the
3p} indicates, that the former rule is applicable only
^$
to that compound where the material itself is changed into the substanccTbf
'
sriS"
grass be suited for the horse
H *<\
q^rfo
ii
II
The
45.
Thus
fftlfrT*
The compounding
*,
^r,
M^fawH.
member
first
*%ffaar and
is
^r^nc^
ff%5
T^S^T*.
Dative case retains
in the
xf?
II
3?^%^*, rTPT^SRTrra SR*

The compound *rrtf$rrT means crr-
sJ^lf^l, *THT%TO,
takes place by
II. I. 36.
II
a sampradana Dative.
sftsr
*$
11
^tM
ll
ll
3i*hirc^, srftgr, srg RK
3?*reR^ *rei% ^RFcRTT^Tf sftsrer s^Tt
11
&c, though
&c.
'
accent before a Past Participle in
its
V^^H.
Therefore the rule does not apply to ST^^H?:,
the first
*
'.
Before a Past
46.
member, when
it itselfis
h^
Participle in
'
îH
11
kta \
the
not a Past Participle, retains
first
its ori-
Karmadh&raya compound.
ginal accent in a
This rule
w^Hi.
'
and the Nouns specificon the maxim of pratipadokta &c. Thus srforThe word ^fro has acute on the first as it is
^T ^f>^T 3v#cTP, fMrc^rTP
which is considered R^ (Un IV. 51 ). The word $tt is
formed by the affix
mentioned
ally
confined to the Past Participles
is
in
II. 1.
59
ll
>
formed by the
affix na* (Un I. 124).

The word *j3j is also
The word PTO=r has acute on the middle. Why do we
say in a Karmadharaya compound ? Observe ^jr %fi = ^H ffi fa
Why do we
say when it is a non-nishtha word ? Observe ^TT^rll.
Here the compound-
end-acute as
it
end-acute (VI.
is
32
2.
).
'
ing
is
by
II. I. 60.
3T^*
qifri***
fecfnrr
II
ll
*s
\\
ft^r^T^^frT
trrfa
^s^
Before
47.
*<ft.
fe$
mean
a Past
Participle
is
acute on the
16
its
in,* kta',
accent,
when
a word
it
does
a separation.
Thus
trilakala
II
ending in the Accusative case retains

not
ll
II
'
Kashta has acute on the end,

asya), and consequently
grama has acute on the first as it is formed by the faq[ affix
grlpsrrP,
f^l^WTfrfrr:,
a Bahuvrihi
first
*JT*iMrT:
compound
(trini
ll
Sakalani
S AMASA-ACCENT.
II 5 8
BK. VI. ClL
11
49
to *r*, the final being replaced by 3TT (Un I. 143)

Why do we say
'when not meaning separation' ? Observe cfMIUc|T^:, ^rsFTTrlfrP, because one
has taken himself beyond kantara and yojana.
This rule does not apply when the Past Participle has an
Vdrt
padded
11
upasarga attached
g^m:, ! *sOTri*
as
an exception to rule VI.
48.
2.
word ending
This
^tsfTrt* (VI. 4. 144).
in
is
an Instrumental ease re-
Past Participle in
before the
tains its accent
i<sil4'^,
144.
'
kta \ when
it
has a Passive meaning.

Thus 3Tf^r: or arftVr: sffrP, #35^, *^KM3rP, TOPTPT5TT, im^\\
The
with the proposition 3jr which is shortened,
word ahi is derived from
and the affix fur (Un IV. 138), and has acute on the final, according to others
affix (Un II. 22) added to
the acute is on the first Rudra is formed by
the causative flff Maharaja is formed by the Samasanta affixf^r; nakha
is formed by *3T affix added to ?T3 (Un V. 23) or it may be a Bahuvrihi jth^j
j^f^-j^cp, formed by ar^ (V. 4. 121), and has acute on the final Datra is
formed by g^(III. 2. 182). Why do we say when having a Passive signification ? Observe c^T 3Tcp = *^"3T^:, the kta' is added to a verb of motion with
an Active significance.
\\
'
nf?rc?ren;:
ft^
II
II
% ^rWfrlr ^%%
49.
q^ffr
II
^forHTR
word
n *Tr%, 3T*?cn:: (
Mîd^<^ )
^Tt JT*f%î ^ra
TFF*T3-TTC<f? *TfrI??T?rn;:
called Gati (I. 4. 60)
immediately before a Participle in 'kta
11
when standing
having a Passive
significance, retains its accent.
Here one of the following rules would have applied

Samasa end-acute IV. I. 223 (2) or the Indeclinable first member to retain its accent VI. 2. 2, (3) or the end acute by VI.
The present sutra debars all these. Why do we say 'imme2. 139 and 144.
Where the distant Gati words
diately?' Observe ST^^cr^ *rl^T 3^fcr
stpt and ^pr do not preserve their accent, but the immediately preceding Gati,
does retain its accent, though it is not the first member of the compound
as
word. Compare also VIII. 2. 70. But in ^T^+3*T*TrP (agata being governed
by this rule) wo have fu^m:, ('II. I. 39 and VI. 3. 2 ) where VI. 2. 144 has
= 3T*lm
II
case this
wlienever
maxim
it is-
applies
^qfor nm^R^'T^n^ *W*
"
"
Krit affix denotes
em-ployed, a word-form which begins with hat
to
which that
Bk. VI. Ch.
51
II.
Samasa-accent.
i 1
59
Krit affix has been added, and which ends with the Krit affix, but moreover
should a Gati or a noun such as denotes a case-relation have been prefixed to
that word-form, then the Krit affix must denote the same word-form together
may have been prefixed to it ". In the second

not applied, because scope should be given to the word
with the Gati or the noun which
example,
maxim
this
is
When
3JHtK in this aphorism.
the Participle has not a Passive significance,
the rule does not apply because the word mw*[
^rJ^^Tf:
JT>rT:
This sutra debars VI.
II
^ ftfe wî
cn^T
An
50.
beginning with
<J
^0
is
as,
ll
immediately preceding Gati retains

a word formed by
which has an indicatory
<*,
144.
^r^rfa n crr^r, ^r, fafa, ^r%, 3t-<tT
ll
accent before
original
fore
11
2.
its
a Krit-affix
but not be-
||
Thus
l^riT (with
3^) foff* (withggqr), v%ft:
sutra debars the Krit-affix accent (VI.
2.
Why
139).
with
fwO
This
II
do we say "before an
beginning with q;"? Observe sHfeTRr formed with the affix qr^FFI. (III.
155 ), and the Gati sr, the accent being governed by VI. 2. 139. Why do we
say 'which is f^'? Observe JT^rrf formed by th^ affix. When a Krit-affix
takes the augment f?, it does not lose its character of beginning with r on the
affix
2.
Vartika fjfqîr
not before
crl
" ?
=5TT?cTr
stÊ^to*
err
rTT^-ffa^fa
Observe
3TT3;
*
3Tr*T?f
\\
II
Thus
sfofq?rr, sfc5H<Jl.
with the Unadi affix
q^TR
II
II
cT% 5
Why do
11
5^
we say
"
but
ll
ST^:, *> 3*TO5fc
S^Htf
11
An
51.
immediately preceding Gati retains
its
original accent before an Infinitive in crir (III. 4. 14) but

whereby simultaneously the final has the acute as well.
Thus
acute on the
Su IV.
(VI.
2.
All upasargas have

toîft^f, qTCTT#f, 3TfH%^rl
except abhi
which therefore has acute on the final. ( Phit
sfr<rf,
first
II
'
'
which declares 3W*rr STFO^rrn' 3Tf*wW

139) and is an exception to the rule that
13
1 1
in
This debars $qr accent

a single
word,
a.
single
syllable only has acute.
srf^^rert
srsrc*re n
t&
ll
q^rf^r
ll
qfftatm, sn^rer,
*wm$,
(sr-
n6o
Samasa-accent.
An
52.
in $ or
II 55.
immediately preceding Gati not ending
srs^when an
retains its original accent before
3",
Bk. VI. Ch.
affix
having a ^follows.
Thus
sfr^,
srrs^, Sr*
But with
affix
VI.
*f' ?
member
Observe
vj
222 presents
I.
in % or
fq-^r:
I.
wraT
ii
some
is
qiMr
II
Why
here by VI. 2. 139

do we say before an
'
elided, then
is
rule
superseded when a Gati not ending
present rule
is
acute and
is
irST^, ^>"4"l, srer*^r:
the nasal of 'aftch'
texts, the reading
accent
i
original accent.
When
The
11
also TO"f, Î>^r, m< >-^ :, q*r*r,
Thus
subsequent.
is
H5* H H M< M3
The
II
I'
fcrsp
affix 3^ is like
and
fanj^
67),
11
xH srfa
<^
qrn%
11
f^tr
Thus
3**,
fa,
The
Gatis
*
II
and
f^r
anch
da?, ^r*#r, ^r>î
t^re^qr^
ll
<&
ffstf^ra
The
q^rft
ll
II
11
however, retain their
stRt,
followed by a -^ affix.
becomes
bt
&5*W, $yw., 4$^:,
^>=*fr,
*, (
w*m m^-. sr$f?rercr *r^r.
^rs^rtir
original accent before
3T^,
So
but that rule
itself;
53.
also
its
II
tfnNrr, iii>î
sfnjF,
6.
we have
in f,
retains
^-cH
or
2.
precedes, because the
In
11
&c, (VI.
*|r*T:
which ends
srf%
the second
by VIII.*
optionally svarita
II
svarita
WNt
IfN-:,
by VIII.
2. 4.
So
11
*n*, 3t?*T3rît, (
s^ftreroi
5 The word %^^ when first member

pound may optionally preserve its original accent.
) n
of a com-
Thus ^^r^KS or f<sr?fi3#, ftrtfaf<* or %q<ffi%$i

f$l has acute on
But in f^^T & c tne Krit-accent will necessarily take place (VI.
2. 139) no option being allowed; because the compounds to which the present
rule applies are, on the maxim of pratipadokta, those formed by ^q-^with nonll
the
final.
>
Krit words under
femTMft m
$frP
11
*ft
*Ft
ft*7^farr*nrrHT
55.
gold,
II. 2. 7.
retains
word sr
II
<tf|
^rf^T
II
WTi
T%^nr-MK44|U|H
^t ^T^rs^rxT^q^ s^rrwrf sj^^t mfa
The
first
optionally
(5T^l%^^m)ll
11
member, denoting the quantity of

accent,
original
its
the
before
II
Thus f^^r^PT or ftUT^fo.

fffJ^T?
II
^W
cf^
fi^pPT,
*I*T1
ll
This
II
It
may
is
Karmadharaya compound
also be treated as a Bahuvrihi
compound, then the accent will be of that compound, as fflfg^far or ff^^rWhy do we say gold ? Observe srere^ Why do we say quan\^j
tity ? Observe ^fHnr^PH
Why do we say *pr ? Observe r5K*tptt
11
'
ll
'
'
'
ll
'
ll
Bk. VI. Cm.
II. .
Samasa-accent.
58]
1161
3T5TOT
s^ kI^'utA
ll^ll
i^rf*
The word
56.
pound, retains optionally
ll
*nr :,^%r.,TW*<TrfT (snT^nrri;)ii
when standing
srqrr
when meaning
original accent
its
a com-
first in
a novice \
Thus SHPT^Pfn^T:
The word STprfPT^TfrT - STfMTT*^ or STPTT^TO
or spT f^TT *?W = *P?f*TS3ire?* T J*szKJ *% W* 'one who has recently commenced to
study Grammar \ The word jt*pt is derived from sr*J by 3T*r^ (Un V. 68) and
by f%<^ accent the acute falls on the last. Why do we say when meaning
1
II
'a
,J
Novice?' Observe
Grammarian
on the
ro<Hrareftqf:
W^^PTPTPar 5^r
Grammarian of the
first
rank
'.
^T
It will
H'>
W-
'the
first
always have acute
final.
fPW:
or a
3^515?: ^cRST^** S#73
57.
member
of a
Sfft*TP3[
used
S^rT^r J^frf^t Hlfa
The words cf^rc and s^cTO standing

compound retain optionally their
cent in a Karmadh&raya.
Thus $3$R* or SFTTO?!:,
dharaya
*PT1%
sfTri&K*!
for the sake of the
or SffrPT^
next sutra,
II
II
as the first
original ac-
The word Karma-
could have done

'katara'and 'katama' by the maxim of pratipadokta, form
only Karmadharaya compound by II. 1. 63.
without
is
this sutra
as
it,
^rt ^r^^^^'T3PTrn;<T^p ^nNrOi sr*n% s^rrî sw^r^ >rera

The word srrf" optionally retains its original
58.
^frf: u 3Tp5^rT
11
accent in a Karmadharaya, before the words sfTfrir and stttpc

Thus srr^r^T: or srrfer^, 3Tr%TP:: or 3TP%*rr?:
The word 3TP1
Why do we say Arya ?
is formed by "^ affix and has svarita on the final.
Observe qT*r3fisn5:, m^'ll?: U Why do we say before Brahmana and Kumara ? Observe BTTJRiTfW H Why Karmadharaya ? Observe BTRre^T aTgpjp
II
ll
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
=?wqax&$:
Bohtlingk
*T5Tr
II
According to the Accentuated Text the accent
Irrs;
Pro.
).
11
\\
11
TTif^
before the
ll
*T*rr,
ll
^^
The word
words Br&hmana
59.
dharaya.
is
<
'
retains optionally
and
'
Kuimira
its
in a
accent
Karma-
Samasa-accent.
*l62
Bk. VI. Ch.
Thus <Mai&"l or jjsrsrsrSp, ^rsT^TCP;: or *r*f$1lf:

The word ?t^fi
formed by the affix 5?Pf^ added to *tst (Un I. 156). But ^tj^t argnn = tTSTOTgF*:
:
i*s
61
II.
where the compound
11
is
not Karmadharaya.
The making
of this a separate
purpose of preventing the yathasankhya rule and also for

the sake of the subsequent sutra into which the anuvritti of *r5T^ runs and
aphorism
not of srHt
ssrc*
ifrP
51
II
for the
is
JT^nt
?&%
S^JrTCîrf%frr
WSnTt *im*i' i#T^
The word
60.
rajan
'
'
^H^^H S?*lrfl*!ir ^f^t
iT
ending
the
in
Genitive
ease optionally retains its aecent before the word sreFrf^

The words *r^L and 3T?2icrc*3iri. are understood here also. Thus ?r^:
The sign of the Genitive is not elided by VI. 3. 21. When
Tm^r- or *RT sr^ff
STpfPST is not meant we have, tRrsrenr or ?r*ro^P
Why do we say 'ending in
\\
ll
11
the Genitive'
Observe
61.
optionally
its
snrr
^^r
word having the sense of always
accent before a Past Participle in
Thus p^W^TrP
added
VI.
2,
its
(IV.
II.
104 Vart)
2.
1.
;
144.
If
it
28.
FT?*! is
These are
formed by ^<r
II
2.
49.
1.
3F?*rfoT xfi,
Why do we say
when
first,
The
4).
has acute on
ht^:,
be considered to have been formed by
cent will be on the beginning by VI.
retains
II
accent, the affix being anudatta (III.
being formed by tR affix with the force of
^frfrT
^fr
or nr<2rc?T%t:, *TrT#JT?i%rP or H^JT?l%i'
to the upasarga
the upasarga retaining
word
'
Accusative compounds formed under Rule

affix
no option.
tf*Rrw=*r5rJT^rc"P
final
by
then the acthe
first
term
means 'always'? Observe ifrnr^pfrr

In the case of rarcw^TOvP &c the samasa aecent VI. r. 223 was first set aside by the Accusative Tatpurusha accent
5
VI.
this in its turn
2, 2.
was
li
set aside
by
q^rft
srro:,
=qj
accent VI.
2.
144,
which
is
again
debarred by the present

srro:
*ztk)
fafeqft
ll
ll
ll
rof^rfr,
st^ctc^t**
srs>j%
11
ttw sra[cr?$3r sr^mprt >rera

The word vcm when first member of a com62.
pound, optionally retains its accent before a word denoting " a
f^r
ii
srmsrs?
professional
^re?
rerf?<rerfsr*
man
cr artisan
11
".
VI. ClI.
K.
64
II. .
Thus iWrrf^rp
acute on the
say'asilpi
SAMASA-ACCENT.
^W^ pr-
or
Why
first.
unRTTt^S
do we say "
*nV
or niH*"iR:
Observe
workman'? Observe
a professional
Il6j
The word vm
ll
q*7T?nfqr??
iftTCiqT
Why
11
where there
has
do we
no
is
option.
stjirt
fTrT:
^t**
) n
W^RTI*: ^crf
ri
f^R^RTf^T^TTW
The word
63.
ST^T^T^f
TWWRraT TO3W1T H&fawt
*T*n* followed
noting noun, optionally retains its accent, when

be expressed.
Thus ^r^nf'TrP or *T5Hrfq^, Im^r^- or *T5T3j^R
:
i.
barber or one
a skillful
e.
barber
II
elephant
praise
"
'
'
'
'.
phrase
II
V*
^rft
n srrf^:,
This
is
first
syllable
in
Ty
If
The
an adhikara aphorism.
2.
91 inclusive the
in the
word standing
(the
is to
>
the following aphorisms.
the acute in
^Ttt:,
In the following up to VI.
64.
u the
Nominative) has the acute
be always supplied.
first syllable of the f^T
In short, the phrase
'
should be supplied to complete the sense of the subsequent
very next sutra illustrates
That sutra
it.
Locative case or a word denoting the
first
word
To
Thus
syllable".
'the
3Tiff
sTT^rrm:
first
it
Locative
a tax,
name of
^fTOT<T:,
syllable
'
is
5^"
is
it is ^t*jt
II
2.
g&
The
sCitras.
a word
the
the receiver of a tax or
tri-
is
lawful, but
^Tj^rr^:,
understood upto VI.
governs upto VI.
2.
"
not before
has acute on the
W^^rfr
91, the
word
The
II
STTrT
has
137.
65.
The
case
or
first
member
of a compound,
if
in
the
denoting the name of the .Eeceiver of
has acute on the
member
SRHTTT'T,
"
will
adir udatta'
in
complete the sense we must supply the words
longer stretch
means
literally
denoting that which
before a word
bute, standing
".
be either
'
stikmi^
fîT
royal barber
may
It
to
is
Why
compound.
or a Genitive
'
'.
II
do we say '*r3p^' ? Observe

Why do we say when denoting praise'? Observe ^jsi^nTW king's
Why do we say a professional man ? Observe cr^^cft a royal
Karmadharaya
WHlfw
to serve the king even " &c.
fit
**f$t
by a profession -de-
a word denoting
first
*
when the second

lawful \ but not when
syllable,
what
is
n64
Samasa- accent.
The word
means
'
îft^ rneans
'
Bk. VI. Ch.
appropriates the dues or taxes
'
and ^r*4t
by the custom
the due or tax which has been determined
of the country, town, sect or family, that which one
is
6?
II.
or usage,
lawfully entitled to get'.
under IV. 4. 91 and 92 and has the sense of

The word t**4 is formed by
both.
Of Locative words we have the following examples
*q"-^rPT' t^-
^TrqfqTjpT
under
With
^-ftqf^ffr, f^-f^TfÎ, |qf^- |TT'^:
the
name
is
fcfHSEfTTf:
In
sacred
||
Tope
lawful'
some
the following
So
sacrificer'.
places the established usage
also
^^ W
^T
9 and
3.
irn^FrP^
'
IO.
the
*^3MiVJ !3*cfl', Ir^T^J,
to give a ^tpt coin in every
is
Why
&c, or to give a horse to a sacrificer &c.
Observe 3T*^:, ^H^K srf^fr ^rf&rOT
by VI.
not elided
is
we have
of a due^receiver ^fl
the customary due of the
horse which
is
and the sign of the Locative
II. 1. 44,
These compounds are formed
ll
5TTT
do we say
^ *%Wl
'
what
VfF& VT3^',
W$*T
Why do we say "but not before

riff?Rr,
^fe^TO ^1%, 3Trer
Observe 4K44W3. that which is given to a mare'. ^T is that customary
food which is given to a mare after she has been covored, in order to strengthen
her. The word ^r is a Krit-formed word, its exclusion here indicates that other
Krit-formed words however are governed by this rule when preceded by a
and thus this sutra supersedes the Krit accent enjoined
^rfr denoting word
ST
^t" ?
II
'
by VI.
Thus m^4<l4
139, so far.
2.
subsequent VI.
has acute on the
kept in order.
The word
gxK means 'he

i.
'
S^W
II
67.
when
e.
after
All these word 9?3t
ft^TT^T
this
rule,
the
first
on the first syllable,

by whom the things denoted by the
cowherd looking
by
member of a compound has acute

when the second member denotes that
The
66.
appointed duty
first
139 not applying.
2.
cow
Tf^fr?
VS
'
5
,
who
is
prompt
appointed
person
the
OT3: &c mean
qT?J^r:
The
acute
is
Thus
after.
IwfPT^
*n%?s3J:,
JTrg-g^:
'
iT^<s3:
a
U
'the protector &c.
*E[tfr H fajTRT, ST^TO, (
II
the discharge of his
in
to look
frasrs?:, 'ffnr'PT^ ',
are regulated or
first
optionally
STT^TtT^
on the
first
II
syllable
the word srsr^r follows.

Thus ^n^ftr
8T^PSl5r:
or
*T^dJ:
'
a superintendent of
cows
'
^^T2J^:
or
II
mq ^ f^rf^Ti^
ll
wft wm, ^r,ftrfeift

ll
(rW*r)(3TTf ^n)
ll
Bk. VI. Cn.
II 70.
First-acute.
1165
The word qnr has optionally

when followed by a word denoting
acute on the
68.
syllable
first
a professional
man.
Thus
qmnw, <TN*^:
^cR!T?rr: or
to the pratipadokta
54, when it is an
compound. Thus
samasa of
compound
appositional
MiMtJMrfTCÔTFTriqil:
#**^ î^îtih )
siTstfrg, ft, (
The
69.
of the
syllable-
first
it
taught
in II.
1.
forms a Genitive
II
first
member
of a
name
when a
before a Patronymic
before 44I"N and siraw,
meant.
Thus :#^r*rW = % SRRT'T ^RJffafcT
*CTc^
^^1^* fBra%, ^n^r^ ^^r^^sff^rfW
;rra^
This rule applies
II
or a scholar-name, as well as
is
<Tnr*rr*n*:
and not when
compound has the acute accent

reproach
or
ttt in the sense of censure as
:
,
mvfa
tT$r*rra
w>
W',
11
*& *A\*&\i\ m*m\'
*rafr^n
a de-
scendant of Susruta under the petticoat government of his wife'. The compounding takes place by the analogy of TOPrnSfai
tTOflflgfrq: (Brahmakrita
II
belongs to Subhradi
with scholar names.

i.
e.
who study
for the sake of
The above
class).
Daksha
the work of
w%
when followed by a
when reproach is meant
say
'
ST^lfa flT^
II
70.
V9
11
sake of marriage
the pupils of
and iff^qTr%ffap
f ?ftrtan,
frcffargror:,
'
q^TR
first
it
||
ST^rfa, fc$t, (
syllable of the
STTf^nrTR
word preceding
17
vs?
II
frc*T,
maireya prepared from treacle or molasses

\
Why
I'
11
II
denotes the ingredient of the same.
the wine
^TfiF^rerî
pftrmFHP
II
qîfir
II
*ran^rr:,
'.
do we say when denoting
an ingredient ? Observe totop Why do we say " before

Every sort of spirituous liquor except ct*t is called"?^
3*TTCri
:
Daksha
II
Jj^rarSFT:
Ihf^: 'the maireya prepared from honey

'
&c
|q^r argpp, ^5rrgr>r:
'
Observe
||
for the
= % *&r stw>
II. 1. 4 where no other rule applies.
Why do we
Gotra word ? Observe ^pfPsfffMh
Why do we say
The
when
gets the acute,

Thus ^rcap
Daksha
make themselves
or
*W-I KRFfltar:,
girls'.
= f^?msff*n% iprfr
Compounding by
^TTEKr H
4
'the pupils of
.*rtfter$n;:
Now
are examples of Gotra words.
"
Observe
II
^&% (au^grrerrO
II
u66
First-acute.
II. .
73
word denoting food gets the acute on the

when standing before a word which denotes a
71.
syllable,
first
[Bk. VI. Ch.
repository suited to contain that.

Thus N^TiiTSP, #rFcj^n, 55pinjrer;, ^r-4l^r:
The words like fa$TT, Vr*
&c, are names of food. Why do we say when denoting the name of food ?
Observe SFnwnTO: ( the word STTTCT = *T*TO5T is the name of an 'action' and
tadartheshu suited to contain
not of a substance ). Why do we say
ll
'
'
'
'
'
that'
Observe PT^TTW- which
on the
STT^ÎtIH
first
member
gets acute
72.
II
word denoting the object of comparison
gets the acute on the
f^ra, fî>
Thus
56, the words
and *{Ptm
^rR^
do we say
st*
The compounding
ll
The meaning
"
before
*fr,
takes place
by
II. 1.
Thus
when denoting the
3ftftn*n"2r
3T3?Wd3Urf
11
vs?
vrpîT^:
^re%?
:
,
Ir!g%*w, 5pt%?w m
? Observe qr*rf%f:
object of comparision "
T^rfa
11
is
compound must be given according to

means *T3T^3tTS3f^TrT ^TPT U So also
of the
prVrfsr^Tî, ir^'^fir^R;, forr%?
when standing
&c, being considered to belong to Vyaghradi class, which
usage and appropriateness.
ffV*m
syllable
first
11
>Ji^|c(:=qTai
iff
an Akritigana.
II
a Bahuvrihi, and the
final.
3T<T?TT%, (
ffrf:
is
$?%, sfrfir^T^, ( sti^^tto; )
TrRT^ ^flRÎW^t^
^1% I^MÎÎtT >T3T%
Why
ll
11
II
member of a compound has the

acute on the first syllable when the second member is a word
ending in the affix srer, and the compound expresses a calling
The
73.
by which one
Thus
4lRîT
first
gets his living.
l^T^fi
;
,
^h*^,
The compounding
ll
3T^r*3fprer,
takes place
by
fqtffcEffrefr
II. 2. 17.
Why
= <*d^ ?rrre Hr^rf

do we say when
All affixes which

means of living ? Observe % %^fe^\ % ^TT^ra'
become ar^f by taking substitutes, are called sr^f affixes. Thus <^$,
5^ &c are 3T37 affixes (VII. 1. 1). Why do we say "ending in the affix 3T37 " ?
Here the compounding takes place by II. 2. 17, and the
Observe wfiaicttrU
affix ^% is aOded in the sense of sport and not of livelihood.
meaning
'
ll
'
ultimately
ll
srr^f sfreFTFR
ll
vsa
11
q^TR
ll
stt^to,
^ftf*,
su^^ra**
Bk. VI. Ch.
II 77.
74.
1167
First-acute.
compound the second member
of which
is
and which denotes the sport of

the Eastern people, gets the the acute accent on the first
a word ending in
affix,
3Tc&
syllable.
Thus Iji^^H u fc^

mmmM ifiran', n**irîT^r, ^vrf^srerr These
by 03*5 affix (III. 3. 109), and the compounding takes place by II.
2. 17.
Why do we say 'of the Eastern Folk' ? Observe ^^q-Mll^r, which
Why do we say when denoting a sport ?
is a sport of the Western People.
&c,' which is formed by ^r (III. 3. in)
for
turn
Observe rr^TJTÎT^ 'thy
t,
11
are formed
'
'
and denotes rotation or turn

'
arm ^3^-
'.
qrrR
n vs^ n
ll
stfnr,
1%*,
(snfrren*)
ll
compound, the second member of which

and which denotes
is a word ending in the Krit-affix stot
syllable.
the
first
a functionary, gets the acute on
Why do we say when
Thus sbren;:, fjftaTC:, sfo^3*Tr, %n^R?
75.
ll
meaning a functionary
*
'
Observe 2firWN
*|itfM J H
>
VS$ H r%f^TR,
3T3?3T:, (^TOTO STT^TTtHI)
T%fcTl% ^T$3T.
RrfeT^rr^'f^ ^TT% SiRR'TT^'fl ^T^TT^T^ *TWI% ST %T5 WW T *T3TrT
ffrT:
II
II
76.
affix
And when
name
denotes the
the second term

the
II
II
first
^r
is
such a compound ending in
of a professional man, but not
(derived from
3>st ),
the acute
srur
when
is
on
syllable of the first word.
Here also the second term ends in 3^ affix. Thus gr ^m ap, gsr^Tsp,
Why do we say when denoting 'a work-man or professional person'?
t re ^R:
Observe 5rr u K AK^N H Why do we say but not when the affix bt<* comes
after ^' ? Observe ^**ran?:, 3T?TC5RTC;
II
'
:,
II
^srnrf =*
11
vsvs
77.
ing in arm
syllable
qTrre
11
11
*nnrare,
*st,
Oi^n stts^TtPt)
Also when such an upapada compound enddenotes a Name, the acute
affix
but not when the second term
Thus i^Fra: a kind of

'
But not so sn* with

iTdlPcWvf
xu%
ll
^
||
as tq3fi&
vs<T
||
insect,
l
the
qTTR
||
spider
name
*TT,
'.
of a
is
falls
^nr
4\MW
'
on the
first
II
the* hill
Brahmana
<TFcT, *TSP*, <TT&,
Valavaya
caste'
(sTr^nrTTR)
II
'.
First-acute.
ti68
The words nt> crf?cr and

syllable when followed by q^
78.
the
first
Bk. VI. Ch.
II. .
79
get the acute on
q^r
}j
Thus
v&lFV
IfrTF*, rFRTTrw,
The word ?n%
II
is
the ropewith which
f^Tlt + r%^ ) This applies to words not denoting a

Why do we say *tt &c ?
functionary, which would be governed by VI. 2. 75.
calves are tied.
Observe
$f?r
ii
sp?*rTT$
faFr^r^TT^'ff
79.
(
Why
rTf
do we say 'followed by
^T^rr^% h^Ttt
'
Observe *TiW
ii
compound ending
<rp3
in the Krit-affix
syllable of the first
first
furfur
mem-
ber.
Thus fsTfrR^, i^ft^, f^Vrt^
W^r-
^TiR^rm-
11
80.
*wi wre w&wfr m^fZrWF&uin^
first
tion
'.
it
word formed by
has acute
foTPT
affix,
a radical without any pre-
definite
sound
like so
and
so'.
The word 3<t*tpt means the object with which something is likened
means expressing a sound
sr^f^r means root, without any preposiThus %^rr%^, Îr^Rrf^, ^WlT^
The word 3TPTPT shows the scope
sutra as distinguished from the last.
So that, when the first term is an
'
'
II
of this
SWT word,
may
ii
denoted, then
word is
and means 'giving out a

'
^rs^nij-
is
before a
syllable,
only then, when such latter

position,
htt?T
When the first member of a compound express-
which resemblance
es that with
on the
11
be a
the preceding sutra will not apply, though the second

forpt
formed word.
sound, the rule will not apply.
When
the second term
is
not a word denoting
As f^ftf*^, 33^?^ which

,
member
retain krit accent
Why
do we say 'a radical word without any preposition'?

Here the second terms radically (i.e.
Observe *Tf^r^nf^, s&rffef*r 5 31?rf^
charin and harin ) do not denote sounds, but it is with the help of the
is
Prepositions sqr and srpr, re and arr that they mean sound.
The force of
(VI.
2.
139)
II
Such words get acute on the first syllable

only then, wheti the second member is a radical sound name. According to
Patanjali, the first syllable gets acute, whether it denotes 3<t*ir or not, when
the second word is a radical denoting sound. ( srs^rtf q^Jr EJTTFi" ^T^TTR ^TWthat the ttoft words are restricted.
^Trrf*T^
II
As g^Tirf^Ht
>
for
had
<r?r
not been used, the sutra would have run
k.
VI. Cn.
II 81
First-acute.
1169
"If the second member is a sound dethus: 3TTFT 5T5^r%fal>rTt and would mean:
noting radical word, then the upamana first member and no other will get the
But this is not what is intended because when the second member
acute".
:
a sound-denoting radical, the
is
member
first
will get the acute,
whether
it is
e. a first
upamana word or not. The word *r^ therefore restricts upamana;
member denoting 3TTHT will get the accent then only, when the second term
i.
a sound-denoting radical. If the second term
is
the
term denoting upamana
first
takes place by III.
3^r^rTT^^
The compounding
79.
*\
11
qTrf^r
11
II
^^TwrT^:,
^ (sttsttttTt:)
II
acute on
first syllable.
Thus
7
not a sound denoting radical,
The compounds ^rannJC &c, have
81.
the
2.
is
not get the accent.
will
3TT*TrTJT?tft
II
jrh K iji,2 lrr*nT%#, 3
These are formed by
!rrTrropfr,
forffi affix,
4 fu*r<H*^V, 5 ^ttt^t, 6 arnnr^fr,

and are illustrations of Rule VI.
Some say, these delare a restrictive rule with regard to the first and
second member of these terms. Thus frff^ &c must be preceded by grfi, &c and
Thus
^tTJ &c followed by tfft^. &c to make this rule VI. 2. 79 applicable.
2.
f
8
79.
wW^ though ending
pounds under Rule
II. 2. 9.
15 IffiTR: (*T*PHT-
16
),
first,
so gTRpstfrcf^
II
two are Genitive com-
last
MhUH:, 14 %5"HnT?rr,
All these are Genitive compounds. 17 jchR rer-
11 fn*PTI33>, 12 IrafsncPT:, 13
This
ll
The
10 IrptsftHriT H
Irtr:
qT?l=^ ^ nTfrr*TTfrs^r
is a Taddhitartha Samasa
:
does not take acute on the
in fuTFT
or cto, 9 IfkfTrrr,
3Tr*TrTT^3n"
II
is
(II.
The word
a Bahuvrihi of three terms.

1.
51),
Jchftlf cP
and being a Tatpurusha, required acute
This declares acute on the

is stronger.
have acute on the first,
would
word
Moreover by VI. 2. 29, this
1^%^:
first.
very
fact that this word is
But the
as it is a Dvigu ending in a simple vowel.
enumerated here, shows that other Dvigu compounds in njf^ are not governed
on the
as the Tatpurusha accent
final,
by VI.
2.
29,
q^WTTft
T
therefore ftftrnT TR; has acute on fa
further proves
f^ffrrre^T^f^c^T
stronger.
5r%^farT
&c
(
>
by
<HMîC
See Mahabhashya II. I. I.) The

(II- i 48) also belong to this class.
3Tr*TrT?TPft,
7 3rrTrrH^^: (3rnTrT*r^^),
12 irof^TPP, 13 s^fePTCHT, 14
tffarTP^W), 17 SPFTRi
ll
The enumeration
(
class of
4 3THI<H">n, 5
sfftfrrrr,
TT^
present
is
is
compounds known as
3TTTrff^t" (3TTTrR^),
9 *rpT?frw, 10
m^r^^,
15 IpffrerfitTTiL 16
*\m\V (^PTTROi
of the
fx^WTTft*^^
STf-
11 ar^f^RTW:
<TIW%rTrSW
(<Tr*-
II
'ft&CTsrg^sngsit
(STT^TTTTrR)
11
that the
accent for the application of which a case
I ^xFITtfi", 2 BHHWrfr, 3
r,
implication
St
11
<*
qrif^r
ll
tt, ^njr,
rj<r,
'w^,
^k,
^,
First-acute.
ii7o
When
82.
falls
on the
Thus
jkrsr:, #*fr*r:, WTCr3P, frsf:, $J%*t-
f**P
or
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
82
II.
a word ending in a
followed by
the
*T,
first syllable.
( 1 1 1. 2.
3f ^t
II
<\
97
qTTR
II
followed by
These are
for
med by
the
).
a word
In
83.
syllables,
g *,
1
is srrer,
to spj
ST^cSTTr^f
the
WQ
and
^ added
affix
member -is
first
3T5,
long vowel, or
acute
the
31,
ST^Tci;,
II
^K, ^W%
consisting
the acute
falls
faSTO* 0
II
more than two
of
on the
syllable before
last.
Thus sqyisp,
*r?f*;*p,
have upapadas ending
and not the last
^*TTTT
HOTTfa
).
and
srfa^fiTSP,
srârrsr:
Why
do we say
<&
^tttr
last
two words
governed by
this sutra
(though the
long vowel, the accent
in
is
" a Polysyllabic first
member "
Observe
II
5rmsf^reT?cr.
II
ll
ll
sror, arfsrareFcr:
Before m*r, the
84.
11
first syllable
of the
mem-
first
ber has acute, when thereby inhabitants are not meant.

Here *rr*r is equal to *r*[? an assemby
^
xnm = f^^rf^ H Why do we say 'when not meaning inhabitants'. Observe
^rf^rqrT. 'a village inhabited by the descendants of Daksha', qrffeh i uq
'a
village inhabited by Mahikas
Thus
JTgjsTFt-,
fpnnjpr:
II
'.
'.
^ <^ T^rft ^Nri%s,

MimRs "^nrcq^ ^TTînprTf t^rt
vfimftg
ff^Tt
11
11
(i^re^s stt^Ttto)
The
first
member
has acute on the
syl-
first
when followed by str &c.

Thus |n%%r,
frrcrf^r, fri%Hn^r,
^! ? H^V,
^r,
11
85.
lable
11
11
frrcra??*,
frrer^R-,
IrfsnsTr, frrercnw,
or
frrere'^T, fn%^?>r:,
( *sr:
fF^P** T SR5RJ, ll'Rf^r, |ri%fH-:

Of the above, those which denote
J
or <%??:
fiRfg*:, frrerr%r*v
Ir^fw,
frrer-
places of habitation, there the
first
),
irrcrraF<fr,
II
members though denoting inhabitants get the acute accent. Some do not read
the anuvritti of STPTT^Rf in this aphorism, others however read it.
:
1 %sr, 2 cK*
(spr),
9IT(tO lOwsrfaTW),
17*^
(sfSTT^; 3*T)
^r^TTTq-:
?m* (t^), 4
11^,
%$,
12^T^JT#,
ar^ft
13
fftrff,
8 Tjm,
15 f^ft,
16^,
(*^), 6 PTjp, 7
sr^r, 14*%
II
îi^nr
iiîi
tttt%
ll
^T5*inr*r., îryrcrrac, (srrasTrrr:)
ll
Bk
VI. Ch.
II. .
89
The words
86.
syllable
first
II. 4.
^fo
first
3 htft, 4
),
sf^T^pfr^nRrn
sr^r
ff^r:
^fo
II
in the
The
<^s
term
which have Vriddhi

1
cfrffi,
^r^T^f
II
**
when
is
not
iûui^T:
cfisfoj
&c
stf^r
But not
II
nor also
(*!#), 5
wsrft^rrir,
SfosreW:, flTWRrer. N
are treated as Vriddhi

1 TTr*r, 2
srfar
h^Vhih
sti^c**, s
gets the acute
of
in
*rfr,
cjtflT,
nf^-
&c.
7 cfF^F (*S5*0,
^ttt:)
(3ttt%:
jtt^t
fn%WP,
in
5ffcffPTC*r: *rftiref:
11
&c, gets the acute
srî follows.
Thus
^m,
This sutra applies even though the
In the words xr^ and
?[fraTT
first
the letters q and 3Tf
(I. 1. 75).
3 sfnrf (r*), 4 yr^r, 5
&m,
6^nrr,
7^*^,8^, o^r,
11
sm^rer
srcft
s^Nrni:
ll
*<<
II
î^t
ll
st, jt^j;,
?nn*, ?m^,
sr^f t-
ll
ii
îuis^tiw if?HTO3^fcf s^tw^rt

89.
The
?T3*,
nor when
first
word
lable before the
or
xi&
I)
11
first syllable
syllables are Vriddhi vowel.
^fTT-.
11
sn&r n
T&&, 4
^rft
II
The
88.
^jk
11
5 srnaf^, 6 sttr-, 7 irrre (*hf*0
in the first syllable
(l3t), 3
2 J^fr
123 which
2.
Thus ^TR^r^, q^H^lWH
qîf^r
II
Thus f^JTW, ^FZZW', iv&W,
10
thus superseding VI.
o^rftr,
or which
syallbla before
first
becomes Neuter, by
^TT^T
^WHi^m- *wft
member, which has not a Vriddhi
first
syllable,
first
on the
in
src*rai&HTR<rt ^^^ff|^r%rr^f^
11
87.
jftsp
II
11
Neuter Tatpurushas.
specifically applies to
1 ^rfsr, 2
25
first
there also in the case of these words, the acute
of the
syllable
srreT
compound ending
the Tatpurusha
the option allowed in
on the
Vf^W?7T, ^TTFSWST
SlMAIIrir,
Where
1171
&c, get acute on the
Srf*t
when followed by the word
Thus
falls
First-acute.
it
member
*r*rc,
*^rf?r
rr%5fr^t
?r
h^t
has acute on the
but not when
it' is
11
first
syl-
the word
jt^
refers to a eity in the lands of the
North-
ern People.
Why
Thus f^R^*) f^TOL, f^Vr^Tnîl But not in H?R*TC* and ?rwn;i,

do we say "but not of Northern People" ? Observe sir^tTTO[ ^TRffa^l
First-acute.
172
ff^r:
9T^n^TT^f|
11
grar
sg^ #??*!
Bk. VI. Ch.
rf*TTw*r
*nrf?r
II.
93
11
word of two or three syllables ending in st

(with the exception of JT^r and *rq), standing before the
or
word 3T?t has acute on the first syllable.
90.
sir
Thus
three syllables
Observe a^pfa.
Observe srressrare*
?T
fjrf
do we say
The words
II
*^^H,
(^rrf^Trrrr%)
II
^?
II
T^TR
91.
first syllable,
'
'
ending
in
consisting of two or
and 5R are to be read

and WTO.
II
II
*,
srf^F,
3JJT,
^T5fr^T,
II
9TÎ^4xiW ^THifrTTlfa W^T
II
The following words do not get acute on the

when standing before arma \ viz ^Jjr, srtfNr,
'
*k<am y **, st^r;
Thus
do we say
TfT
rule therefore does not apply to q^pfcr
3TF^r *T3ffa TsT ST^T^ cfi>*R> *<r|IR ^T^TR
rT
II
Why
II
^jnfy^sin^^^l^T^^^H
st^t,
*rsc,
'
The
here also.
Why
^rrnf^, ^ffrfo, i^spfrl, frasrrei. H
8? (long or short)'?
and
WrTr*fa,
^fi^ra
II
srfwrefa, srsfhny*,
T?R*, 3T^Tr\,
the sutra shows the compounding of those words in
*tfl**ll*H*
(because
madrasmam) 3j>^r*T
compounds have acute on the final by VI. I. 223.

V&tt
In the Vedas the words f^fr^T &c, have acute on the
syllable.
Thus ftfrflWT TTOrT, âr*rg ^^rq-
*.
All these
first
11
sren
II
*T^TR
II
is
3Tfw:
11
In the following sutras upto VI.
92.
sive,
II
This
is
syllable of the
member
no
of a
compound
gets acute on the
word
".
In the succeeding sutras, the last
first
next sutra the word

2.
110 inclu-
to be supplied the phrase " the last syllable in a
standing in the Nominative case has the acute
VI.
2.
gets the acute accent.
final.
Thus
in the
This adhikara extends upto
inclusive.
4
*nr
^frp
II
*pm^" ^? <t^th ^%^, ?pr, *zi?*?%

*rlw î U^*!^ îlHHJdKTrt *T^f%
ll
ll
standing as
'
11
II
The acute
first member
93.
sense of
11
on the final of the word *T#

before an attributive word, in the
is
whole, through and through
'.
Bk. VI. Ch.
96
II
End-acute first member.
1173
<
Thus
sr*nrT:,
flSfewp,
sfaWl
ll
Why
do
\vc
say
stf
Observe WT%rf:,
here the attribute of ^?r pervades through and through the object referred
but the accent
is
not on the final of q*T
Observe 3&uT&> golden
sion
but a flrafn^ra^
Observe
".
tffqt
In fact
it
is
Objection:
How do you form

1 1. 2. 1 1. ?
sjurpffar *rer*Tf
Prr^r^T^:
tfgref ft*ra Frit
11
f%^ra
The
94.
not
here at
prerrc*?2i
Moreover,
in
not that of "guna" but of "gunt", not of the
is
of the following Vartika
11
word
*j^: =^1^:, for it is prohibited by

srsror
attributive
'
which do not denote any attribute
',
not absolute, whiteness, the rule does not apply.
but of the 'substance*.
frtft
do we say
'
do we use the word Kartsnya or complete perva%cTcn;: = S^rT here the compounding takes place by
?r^ denoting comparison, and as it shows only compa-
ample, the "kartsnya"
^frr
II
silvery
'
Why
II
the elision of the affix

ritive,
3&!T3
state but modification.
in their original
all,
',
Why
v*
*RW,
^rf^r
11
s^raN^wsr
Ans.
such a compound ^faf
We do
it
on the strength
STJFJPW
ewrro;,
11
this ex-
'attribute',
s^r^nf
rr,
*r*rf?r
fronnft:
11
11
first member before

compound is a Name.
and f^T^T has the
when
acute,
the
Thus 3T>^r^n%ft:, *T>iRnTrft The finals of afijana and bhafijana are lengWhy do we
thened by VI. 3. 117. WTF#reffra SrNFf*rarrcp, r%Rfra:
T
say when it is a Name' ? Observe retfSrK
HTSTTprayr^h
:
ll
'
II
:,
fTTTT^
3W
II
II
îfa
II
SWTRft^,
^fa,
Ojjhl^* CT^nSR)il
The last syllable of the first member gets

95.
the acute when the word $?rrcr follows, the compound denoting age.
Thus f^rrft 'an old maid'. The compounding is by II. 1. 57. ^r ^h O
This compound is formed by II. 1. 49 with aTCcfr The words become masculine
by VI. 3. 42 in both examples. Q. The word rcrft was formed by #r* by IV.
be now applied to
I. 20 in denoting the prime of youth, how can this word
11
ll
"denote old age
by being coupled with \TgJor m$\; it is a contradiction in terms.

rarft has two senses; one denoting "a young maiden" and
Ans The word

;
second "unmarried
*rc<fr is
applied.
3-Sffc
ffr
ii
Why
S%cf^
II
the latter sense, that the attribute f^r or

the compound denotes age"? Observe
"when
do we say
virgin".
,$
II
It is in
T^TT%
denotes a
the acute.
ll
=3^,
3T,
%^,
(mS<44H
^dl^MH)
II
s^r^^nr h^ji
when the compound
word
Before the
96.
mixture, the last syllable of the first member has
sr%?rw Pre rrsn%fa *ptt%
18
^^^t^kJttw
^%
End-acute First term.
it/4
Thus iiiii^^
Bk. VI. Cn.
When we
or 1ir&\K> RrSf^fl. or ft'rtH* 1 * U
II.
99
have already
and c7 acute by
svarita accent may result opby the combination of the acute 3T of guda and tila and the subsequent
grave s of 1^, by Rule VIII. 2. 6. The word 3T%^5 means mixture. When
made
the
this rule, then the
5"
tionally,
mixture
fk*TT
^^
u ^vs n
qsfifa
fMr, w^r,
11
^s^lWl
3ffcfr?3ra.,
(^q^ atftft^rere)
11
the compound denotes

member has the acute.
^^^n?1^htt^: = mr^f fron &c Why do
Observe 3rfw*Hf* (*THPTM*Rf ffrT mfwrw)
when
Before a Dvigu,
97.
As
not meant, this rule does not apply.
is
sacrifice, the last syllable of the first
Thus
r%?FP, ^rre^prepp,
irfr
Dvigu compound?
which being formed by the Samasanta affix s? ^ ( V. 4. 87 ) has acute on the
Why do we say when denoting a sacrifice'? Observe
final (VI. 1, 163).
we say
'before a
'
*nrref srjRife
^f%
^rfa
^3^%, Ojbrî;
W*t
shttoto,
^rerf^srercr ^T^^r^rrr
sr?^;nTH:)il
11
when it is exhibited as
compound gets acute on the
Before the word ^rw
98.
Neuter, the
11
snsrrers^Tfrcf?
11
member
first
of the
last syllable.
Thus ifronwri,
we say
Neuter'
Rules
before *prr
'
tsjttSstvto.,
Observe sn^RT, srBWSTHT
II. 4.
23-24
by
is
final
Why
The word
do we say
^*rr
'
Why
when
maxim
of Pratipadokta
of the preceding term
becomes Neuter under
as, **njfterepi,
&c
the accent does not
here the word
^r
is
fall
neuter not
the force of any particular rules, but because the thing designated (stp?>to)
neuter.
5> sr^ra
ll
99.
T^rfir u 5*:, tfr^rc,
II
Before
the
word
(^q^Tfcf^rrTO)
5*:,
when
the
II
compound
denotes a city of the Eastern People, the final of the
member has
Thus
'
do
in the
therefore when the word ^ht does not become Neuter under
those rules, then by the
on the
m9î&rc3
tflfircPT*,
#r*pr*t.,
Observe STSPTOHl.
first
the acute.
t**I$3**, 37*^03**,
of the Eastern people
'
remgr*, SiTF?^*, *ft$&L
Observe
ifrestfT
11
Why
do we say
Bk. VI. Ch.
II. .
103
1175
!_
When
100.
the
member
first
Thus
we
BTn^jrc.,
the words srirs and
By
Tr i<H,
^c^q^^mT^P
?cTt^TrTn%)
3?:,
This
*$
II
the force of the word

*Tr3">jarT*:T
<T3TPT
II
<ft in
the aphorism,
i\
5f,
But when the words.
is
the acute does not

an exception to VI.
is *rr^T formed by
The son of
The S is elided by VI. 4. 147.
l^^W^^ re&
fall
99.
^fftcR, <K<3^, STr^TT,
qTiffr
11
r^r,
(31-
II
before fifa
'
f^rêr ^RT^^^^n^rR^FKTî
^M^5
final.
?rftrPT!P^,
f^T,
^p^t
word
\o\
^rr^r
have the
fW H
11
But not so here
*nf-
II
<?57t%
II
class.
T?r, ^tt^ti:, f^r^
and
Observe ^^tlT'fr
11
^37^3;, inTÎT*
*^r, ^r,
11
arffiFFr, ^**fa?FT, ^rrarnn?*

'
and *n^r
belonging to Subhradi
last syllable before the
acute on the
Thus ^??f3Rsr,
Why do we say
f*R*
^R^^7
^rre^r,
on their
Thus
the word
s^r,
*^
11
2,
The words
102.
5T*?^Tr?T,
first,
II
101.
precede
stand
has the acute on the final before the word
can apply the rule to 3TTT?fV^H?fc,
rfre
11
f^r^T:,srnisr-
11
Words
103.
time) have aeute on
expressing direction
the last syllable,
space or
( in
when followed by a
word denoting a village,or a country or a narrative,and before

the word ^trtts
Thus t^^rWHr, STÎ^R^nft or f% and spk' (VIII. 2. 6). The
||
compounding takes, place by II. 1.50. ^^^rrRTr, ST^s^rTT^rr

Country
^qo^r^P. ^TtCtsÎHT* H These are Karmadharaya compounds (II. 1.
Story name: prwiôi" ^f, ^graTrT*, ^Tr^T^*, STTfj^rrT^
58).
So
The employment of the term ste^ in the apalso <g^TR*T?*r, 3TT* ^PTO^
II
name
ll
II
horism shows that time-denoting

cluded.
The word
37rfW*PT
eriraft, (3T?^VrTTr:)
is
f^37
words as
in
^tf&ircT should also
derived from arfw*T JTfa?v^T
gj^f
^?^ (IV.
:
be
3.
in-
87).
11
176
The
104.
on the
direction
before the
final,
Bk. VI. Ch.
106
II
denoting words have acute
names of
when such names
scholars,
are derived from those of their teachers.
Compare
&m7*KI**W|i
their
Teachers'
from
names
of
derived
the
when
?
Why do we say
VI. 2. 36
Observe ^frer^n U Why do we say 'Scholar-names'? Observe ^TTFRTO *IPW3. H
Thus
3jTqrf 5 Ffar
STT^TrTTiftan, s^frrer$*STr
ll
'
^% ^
gxT?rr^^T
||
\o\
q^T S^-q^-f^, *3K ^

II
|)
Words denoting
II
and the word

have acute on the final, before a word which takes Vriddhi
in the first syllable of the second term by VII. 3. 12 and 13.
105.
By
the sutra StTCT^J VII.
ordained when
being u,
wq^
11
The word
the Vriddhi of the Uttarapada
3. 10. 12,
the Taddhita affixes having
^ and
direction
sr
or
or
takes Vriddhi, under the rule relating to uttarapada,
12 and
Thus
13.
*?<Tr3^rPTOjt,
3T<?6rfcTR37
follow, the
err
3rn;q?ff^r: therefore,
means
i.
gff*fl * ntfrff:
:
,
e.
II
that
is
Purvapada
word which
under rule VII.
3,
These are formed
125). Why do we say "which takes Vriddhi in the second

word StTCTS not been used, then the sutra would have run
thus f3fjr *ii T, and would have applied to cases like *re*TTCr:, srf^nw: where m^;
and ^rrc^r. are Vriddha words not by virtue of VII. 3. 12.
by
|3i affix (IV.
term
?"
Had
2.
the
^1^ fax* izmwt

f
rrTJ
11
sf
sftfr srrrsf
member
\o\
cent.
qqi\
II
in
s?*ffcnf vnrf?r
fMI*Tfr^ U
This
is
Why
Why
11
final,
an exception to VI.
being
2. 1
by
tE
acute on the
II
2.
first,
as
unrestricted scope jn
in fFrf^r, ffrflfW: U
final,
165 which supersedes
the succeeding sutras upto VI.

it is
2.
120 inclusive.
formed by the
affix
ppaw, f^ro^n and

-
:.
But
as they are governed
this.
in fa**rr%n
by the sub~
The word Bahuvrihi governs

The word f^p? is originally
5^ added .to f%5T
rule VI.
2.
11
This rule has
165 has unrestricted scope
and f^rrsffi: there
is
a conflict, as both these
would apply, therefore by the maxim of vipratishedha, VI,

this,
wmn
11
member in a Bahuvrihi would have retained its original acdo we say in a Bahuvrihi compound ? Observe ff% r^r = f^^'do we say when a name'? Observe f^W 3T?3 = ff *sfî
But
sequent rule VI,
sedes
^ri^Vd, f^rac,
first
f^jffNr? an d fwiTSRi have acute on the
rules
11
The word f^^ has acute on the

a Bahuvrlhi, when it is a Name.
Thus fMr^P, RptaRTP,

which the
q^rr%
f^^?: ^ts ^rai f^q^
JOB,
first
11
2,
165 super-
Bk. VI. Cn.
3^tt>^33
fi%:
11
ll
sg
3?* 3T^r
First term end-acuti<;.
109]
II. .
ô\s
^rft
11
The
words T3T> sr^ and
first
srwr,
wfe
member
%% 5
rWs ^<m*<fr?TTt
*r*f?r
11
before the
in a Bahuvrihi,
on the
Name.
77
*T?rar
S3, gets acute
compound denotes
Thus
t^t,
t^î^H Wl*ft&
107.
the
11
ii
final syllable,
when
iN^: and $*%'- This sutra

g
by which the first term would have retained its
The word f^f has acute on the first by Phit II. 7. The word
original aecent.
by
formed
is
*TPT^ affix (Un IV. 145) and is first acute; tit is also first acute
|pT
The word sfr^r if considered as an underived
as formed by f^(Un IV. 118).
primitive, has acute on the first by Phit II. 19.
If it be considered as derived
is
iXHTW, ?#*:, gbRr**:,
sptffa:,
also an exception to VI. 2
from ?i^ with the
then
affix sror
it is
already end-acute and would retain
its
accent even by VI. 2. 1. The first Bahuvrihi word gû? has acute on the final
by VI. 2. 172, the second Bahuvrihi compound ûijm has acute on <*r by VI.
:
2.
the third Bahuvrihi with f gets accent on

V. 2. 38. Its mention here appears redundant.
I,
by
$ft
??%:
11
II
l*
*T3TTft
II
$ft
II
A word
on the
vrihi gets acute
Thus
|f? has
cgrer^:, sot^:,
acute on the
first
as
*pn%
ststtot
before tst,
q$t[ is
end-acute
^ q ^Nrfr **(% h
and ^5 in a Bahu-
f%^
srasr
ffi
when reproach
final,
^^fW,
it is
The word
II
sft ittstcr TOrftsrntf? Jrgsftft
108.
II
meant.
is
^n^#P^-, aTFRTrf 5:, ^^r^f^:
a Neutei
name (Phit
II. 3),
and
it
The word
would have
11
retained this accent in the Bahuvrihi by VI. 2. 1. but for this sutra.
The word
qz is formed by ar=^( III. I. 134) and has acute on the final, and so it would
have retained this accent by VI. 2. 1. even with out this sutra. The
word
being formed by sp*(V. 3- 75) has acute on the first.
s formed by
the Nishta affix tFJ
The word 3Tf^TrrT being an avyayibhava, the first
member would have retained its original accent.
In this and the last sutra
m^
k^
II
all
acutes
*?<:
may
optionally be changed into svarita by VIII.
have acute on the
.final
by VI.
2.
172,
supersedes this present, so far as sr^ and

JTfr
^Tttj
11
3Pf ft
11
* pfrfr ^tt%
<TTrf7f n Trfr,
11
3R3?3Trc<ff scorer
the
But ssm?: and
which being a subsequent
sutra,
are concerned.
^fa
^Myw foiTf *nf<r u

i
2. 6.
In a Bahuvrihi, compound having the word

second member, the first member ending in the
109.
**3 as its
Feminine affix 5
syllable.
( *fr
word) has the acute on
its
final
FfRSt TERM END-ACUTE.
II 73
Thus
The words
VI.
BlC.
ClI.
g 112
1 1.
and |rr# are formed by

q>j ( IV. I. 105 ), and
adding #r<? (
)
this
first
acute.
VI.
2.
are
By
1
accent
would
have been retaitherefore, they
Why -do we say "a Nadi (Feminine in j)
ned, but for the present sutra.
word" ? Observe Ifgi^j:, the word st has acute on the first syllable as it is
*rrnf??<j:, fr^lffar 5
IV.
formed by
we
say " before
16
r.
(Un
ar?'cj
to
IV. 146) and
" ?
irfTT
and ?\<w ending
rrprsr
it
that accent
retains
Observe mtfrfw
in
(VI.
2.
1).
Why
do
In a Bahuvrihi compound, a Participle
110.
in
by a preposition, standing as the first member

of the compound, has optionally acute on the last syllable.
^r preceded
Thus
srerHg^P or ffwhrisf: (VI.
jnrrRlTrf: or shrrf^rTTIT
167 which
When
is
ll
When
the other alternative
or IHtrT5^ (VI. 2. 49 and

means
(mouth) then by VI.
3^
169),
the accent
an optional rule,
is
2.
the word
taken or
on the
falls
when
last
by a
preposition'
^TR^Trft:
II
Observe
sr (
VI.
u^ff^x which
<i*Tft
ll
?S:
2.
does not mean (mouth) then
it
by VI. 2. 49 the acute falls on if, which accent is retained

do we say "a Nishtha" ? Observe q^f^J^P which is acute
the krit accent being retained ofter
syllable
1)
(VI.
2.
in the
1).
Why
middle by
2. 139 ).
Why do we say 'preceded
has acute on the first by VI. 1. 206.
^n:, qsTfe:,
In the following
s^rra:
II
upto
VI. 2. 136
" the first
supplied
always
be
the
phrase
should
inclusive,
111.
syllable of the second
member
sutras,
has the acute
".
This is an adhikara aphorism and the word StTCT? exerts its influence
upto the end of the chapter, while the word srrf? has scope upto VI. 2. 187
exclusive.
ffrr-
^f^^^rcj;
*$sflf* snnsr
11
11
\\r
11
q^FR
11
^Trfsrcr ^^r^r^rf^-^^
**:, **r,
&wtm,
^^ST^T^r^rTt
(srrf tttto)
>T?ri%
il
11
In a Bahuvrihi compound, the word sjrdr

standing as second member, has acute on the first syllable, when it is preceded by a word denoting color or
112.
mark.
Thus with
5f^%^
^*^
color
we have
SJlî^:,
the lengthening of
3>s<jHjf<7t:,
and
and with mark-name, we have

takes place by VI. 3. 115.
^5
BK. VI. Ch.
SCGND TERM FIRST-ACUTE.
115
II.
The marks of scythe

and distinguish them.
'
mule on
'arrow' &c, arc
',
17^
mark
the ears of cattle to
such a 'mirk' which is mânt here, ti

the rule does not apply to *>JR7T*T:
Why do we say gfjaT ? Observe ^TTTTT
"^77
being formed by %T^((II. I. 34) is end-acute, and aj? being C>>farc^f: here
It
is
II
by
III.
cjr (
1.
Why
compound.
also end-acute an
) is
135
"
do we say
mark"? Observe ^r^RTlT where

end-acute and this accent
Name
first
i.
e. "
itfv&kw'',
II
??
Tr^rfsr- W
effF^fg':,
Resemblauce
blance frri^p,
<t^tr
11
^<*s,
".
^r,
rfNrr,
^sn^
^ (arrf-
Name
members
affair's-:
Resemblance
ifrqnr',
ar^^q:,
*&*Z y B"> ^t^T
3T^3ffa
irafrli^j
II
fr^5",
SHFsrr
Compan'sion ^dfp7^,
37*rpr:
Name
II
and
Name
II
?TF#rirfsr
com-
or
?r^f q:
final
^ by VI.
tl
115.
on
?ft
Resem-
or a Resemblance), the second
member *zg
5^%
:
,
sf!rs*OF
two inches
long.
Name :ItCZpfff:
Here the word
we say when denoting
'
age &c
'.
come
comparison
Observe *tfr$>Iff:
:
it
fallen
out, or
denotes the
become one or
Why do
TPJ^:, %*pjjf:
II
Name
gets acute on the
first syllable.
particular age of the cattle at which the horns
as
In a Bahuvrihi denoting age, (as well as a
Thus 3^TrT%:,
I?
jfr^qfh-.-,
ir
172, this ordains acute
2.
have
TgiW:
^rt^:,
The sutra ^p^'jg^rÎ^^ is in Neuter gender, and srar is shortened

Samahara Dvandva. In the case of fjsfr^ the accent would have
on the
has
denote resem-
<$Rch<JP
tr#rT: ,
In a Bahuvrihi expressing a
is
Names *
are
II
acute on the first syllable.

Thus Name fwrlir7 ^,
II
^rj-
when the compound denotes a
syllable,
parison, the second
^rsffa:
149; i
2.
11
114.
Name
(III.
the
1).
persons having ears like a cow or an ass
^3^5r?srnr^
^TrUR
2.
in
color or
or a Resemblance.
Thus gff^H^r:,
blance
being formed by g*z
sfpTT
retained (VI.
In a Bahuvrihi the second member
113.
acute on the
is
th ise ac rents are retains
when preceded by a word denoting
1 1
Second-term first-acute.
80
^sfr axflrffirepprr.
^TTrr:
Particle
on the
Thus
arire:, 3T?TC:, 3TfsRr:
when the
II
?m:,
srr, *tt,
II. 118.
*&v,
(for,
(stt-
After a Negative Particle, in a Bahuvrihi, the
falls
^rr%
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
) n
116.
acute
\\\
II
syllable of
first
Observe srsnTftsp
final gets
and
by VI.
the acute
Why
3T^rf: U
Why
3TT, *rc, ffrsr
do we say
2.
and
do we say
" 5ft
JjcT
II
after a
&c ".
Negative
Observe wrorf
172.
^WTOT ^WTTOl' %\*\\ vrfk *ft:, ^-sr^ft, sr <t*r, ^ft

^TT^r^RT'm^' ^ *f sfrfr smrsr stt^ftt *r^m ^r^sffassffa^rr
ff%:
II
II
II
11
11
After the adjective
117.
ending in
tr;
and
has acute on the
with the exception of
srer,
stem
in a Bahuvrihi, a
3m%
and
g-q^r;
first syllable.
g^
g^H
Thus 55^*%,
gff*m% ?3?t, ^fcrw, afrT*t so also 5#j and
and wfsr with the affix f#^
The final *T is changed to ^ by
From the root
VI 1 1. 2. 72. But this substitution is considered asiddha for the purposes of
II
and these words are taken as if still ending in stct

Why do we say
f^g^tf
Why
Observe
do
we
say
'ending
in
after U?'
^ftf^,
and
and
formed
by
the
affix
Observe ?TST^
fcT^ ?
^rT^
ctfR^ ( Un I. 156), and the
accent is on ^r and rT, but with g, the accent is thrown on the final by VI. 2. 172.
Why do we say with the exception of ^Pffi and 5*TrJ[? Observe <?rlpT and *rf?T
(VI. 2. 172). The follcwing maxim applies here btr^jt^ ?T?*TT^*Nrrr ^T^q%?T
tT^cff%P* snuSraPrT " whenever sp*, or f^ or 3T*t or T^, when they are employed
accent,
11
II
'
in
Grammar, denote by
*T^, there
(yc%
?**, 3T*t
I.
1.
and
72,
i&i)
something that ends with srôr 3^ or st*t or

represent these combinations of letters, both in
so far as they possess and also in so far as they are void

fore the jpj and 3T*t void of
meaning are
of,
a meaning". There-
Thus
included here.
also
vj
is
formed by jt^ (Un I. 140), but *fik*l is formed by *TR^ (Un. IV. 145), and stht^
Similarly 2RT*r
is formed by ?*rf?HT affix (V. 1. 122) in which *P^ 1S on ^y a part.
but in gsf^
is formed by *T^(Un IV. 191), and so also ^rrT*r(Un IV. 202)
;
(g^** from
is
Ecj*T
with the affix
here part of the root.
then the accent
falls
subsequent Riê VI.
*f^
11
f|K<J
III. 2. j6)
the rule applies also, though arw
But when the samasanta
affix 3TT
is
added (V.
on the syllable immediately preceding 3TT,

2.
173 supersedes the present rule: thus jg^r%:,
$*nw ^tk *55frfr s*rr% arr^rTir w^r
4.
54),
for there the
U^rlrW
Bk
VI. Ch.
121
II. .
first syllable
thus gk$:
sTT^rrra
After
118.
the
First-acute Second member.
^3
of
$f^, U^',
^l^ft^:, $fr$$:,
qî-oe^fe
ii
the acute
in a Bahuvrlhi,
&c.
ii
q^rft
ll
ii8i
^^
on
falls
stt^^tttr:,
5^,
&*%fe
II
In a Bahuvrlhi compound in the Chhandas,
119.
a word of two syllables with acute on the first syllable, when

preceded by g, gets acute on the first syllable.
In other words, such a word retains
Veda X.
5^!fr inraT (Rig
Thus
accent.
fw and g?*f
Here
76. 8).
its
s^RîT^" 5
and
*,
have acute on
3j
3?^ and to are formed by sp^ (Un L 15 1 )

have the ft^ accent (VI. 1. 197). Why
and
respectively
II.
and e$?j^ (Un
2)
syllable'
Observe stf *i*T%- *#1;?jrc5 (Rig
first
?
do we say 'having acute on the
Here ^rf has acute on the final (Un I. 27 formed by 3 affix and
II. 32. 7).
has the accent of the affix III. 1. 3). Why do we say having two syllables ?
This sutra is an exception to VI. 2. 172.
Observe fggTO<!> Uf^S:
which they had originally
for
also,
'
'
II
tffcrftfN
ffrr:
\\o
||
tt sMt
*ffc
ii
sffc,
sfpaft
s^rfr
*r*n%
II
II
s^fa
re<ra srr^srtr
*tt-
In a Bahuvrihi compound in the Chhandas,
120.
after g, the
q^TR
ll
*c *rsfr mi\ti< i
words
^frt
and #T^ have acute on the
syl-
first
lable.
Thus g^r%, g*ft# 3rflrarr (Rig IV. 17. 4) sîw^*w (Rig VIII. 13
The word sft4
where
36)
|f#} has acute on Cr H So also g%sft3 7<fa *3TT
acute
on the first.
would
have
is formed by ujj affix and by VI. i> 213, it
But its enumeration in this sutra shows that Rule VI. 1. 2ij does not apply
:
to
*ft4
The word
II
%\$ has svarita on the final in the Chhandas, by Phit IV.
In the secular literature
it is
ffrp
11
wk, 3T?^rm^
^ ^ 5^
rft?:
*irrar
11
?*?
II
<mi%
11
*$&, <fir,^, g^f,
11
3t^t *pt
^r^rft TFt^^ff^r 3T5^ff*rn"^"HRr3Tr^rTTrf%
ing second terms have acute on their

ÎT^T, 3TST
and ^TH
ThusTK%^, srf**,
first
syllable
we say
fK*
19
&c
'
frer, <frrf
sql^wtf**,^!^,
'
11
||
TR^fn^, ^tWt^,tk|?5w,
Tlfeff, sqfer*, ri^

g^TT*, M*T*, R<?H* and 5^***
four are to be found in Tishthadgu class of compounds (II. I,
Tft^ffa*;,
w%
In an AvyayibMva compound, the follow-
121.
3?, %&,
9.
adyudatta.
i^?^^^r^^TO^m%
5TR5T, sr^r,
ll
Observe 37^***
Why
do we say
" in
ll
17).
These
Why
last
do
an Avyayibhava
2 1
$2
compound?" Observe
and
the words
bt<T,
q^s^,
3*?*
g TtH*M *r
Bk. VI. Ch.
After the prepositions
11
&c would have become
present sutra supersedes VI.
accentless
and we have accent on
2. 3,3,
Tn^sjfrf, S*f
by VI.
fS*
&c
124
II.
2.
the
33,
not on*
arid
the Prepositions,
f^^
win:,
members
and
Compound
In a Dvigu
122.
get acute on their
the following second
syllable
first
3$, ir*ar
3R*c, TF*r,
sFTv^f r
Thus f^^p,
($r*gf
TOTOr
f^RTST, fi^T'., C the affix *3K V.

affix 3T3 V.
1.
we say
Dvigu
in a
26
is
elided
f%r<f :
19
by V.
elided
11
qrrre
?*3 R
The word
compound when
1.
28
fsqpar:, f^pfrar:, ft3?FT:,
is elided
by V.
f^T^p, %#??,
f^TT?
II
1..28)
(
the
Why do
II
123.
r^g^r, srrarsrrc, hj*A
if
end of a Tatpurusha
the Neuter has acute on the
at the
Sfrssr
exhibited in
syllable.
Thus 5U#uuiW, srnnrarr^

4. 25.
the affix fâ^ V. 1.25
is
Observe <T*H3>^, ^tH <s m *
cfcs^ srrapri 5T5^^r
first
*tffcp
1.
Why do we
The compound becomes Neuter by
ir
say "in a Tatpurusha"? Observe
gl^rtf sfrgrnîr
which
II,
is
compound and therefore first member retains its accent VI. 2, i r

first
member is a Nishtha word, it has acute on the final. Why
the
as
and
"
the
word *[rn7T ? " Observe STfTTOT^
say
we
Why do we say m the
do
Compare VI. 2. 86,
Neuter ? Observe aT^TOTFSr
a Bahuvrihi
'
II
'
II
s&rsjr
||
I?*
falls
||
s^sir,
^,
In a Neuter Tatpurusha ending in 5F*n, the
124.
acute
q^TT%
|1
on the
first
Thus ^trwr^tTH:, 3TTf:^r^, ^-c^tr^

descendant of ?pre:
( 5fPT*T:
^Rr g*^
srrgT
is
the verb Sg and the affix ^r ( fit. 1. 136)

These are Genitive compounds.
II. 4. 20.
we have
frfsp^qr
II
^f^ôpffan*
ll
q^rft
11
The word
?trcrro:
denotes the
formed by the preposition
The compound
When
srrfr:,
is
the word
is
f^rrfprn*
In a Neuter Tatpurusha ending

syllable of f%^r &c have the acute.
125.
first
II
||
member.
3?r
with
Neuter by
not Neuter
II
in *FTT,
the
Bk. VI. Ch.

..
128
II
183
As f^ u rfrw rq,
In this sutra,
though
fec^q-JT,
its
^SIRI*
The
word htt$
repetition of the
was present, indicates that the
anuvritti
first
The word f^fT is derived from

is formed by adding *p*(III.
gives
which
with
faTT
faând^T
foHHTr
D
=
is
irregular.
tne
elision
of
fs* H PTT ^'T
f^l"9 r
^
of the first member gets the acute.
syllable
the root
34) to
I. 1
"*
%^%?^5^^f?t^
l^fcjnl,
ff%
%^^2 *^ *l u ^
,
n^fcira
11
1^$
<
^ra,
%^, 5733? and ^p*^ at the end

syllable,
first
Thus 3nt^, *Trar%WT, TTFT^fsTT HMUsfer, (%*

,
^lh<W^
<T*Tre)
snfTSF^Tw
II
The
ing them to %?j &c.
T^fcrl^gefcU,
When
reproach
The reproach
is
be
tfkgwMH
ffrT-
11
?^ n
*pr *HiH
<rerra n ^fircn,
<JU|HIH, rTST
fS^T
*Ktl*i, rT^tJT SFSpft-
i-
^r^Fj
e.
$*'*i
and the
akjrti-
li
^wh h
sn^nt
syllable,
first
q<H^R>*T
at
>rera
it
the end of a Tatpurusha,
when something
is
compared
it.
ThussfW* 4ttfa~*V*ftt?|i <FHTKW,

1
re-
denoted of the sons &c by compar-
we have
The word ^K,
has acute on the
fPT
effp^RnT
56: the Vyaghradi class being an
1.
^s-h wJiT^r^rf'T rps^" *nn%
it
127.
with
II.
not meant,
is
^rWiW*
analysis will
compounding takes place under

gana.
when a
meant.
is
W^^ (S^T^T^)
w^n,
of a Tatpurusha have acute on the
^TTRfl
**,
$3HI^TR4<*lfa W^ls^^nn%*l^f Mi | l|HMI^Hrl<tiTilMH^fnril
The words
126.
proach
^, ^,
yrepft n
11
tl
when comparison
MddHHwq*
is
fira*
128.
the acute
meant
falls
11
Observe mn^Ck^
'
\^<c
qrri%
11
3? *rt-tf *%
Why
do we say
wy, ^t, tjfsk, fa&
In a Tatpurusha ending in "T^, *T and sthft

on the first syllable of these, when the com-
pound denotes a food mixed
or seasoned with something.
Thus aj^W frT?^W, frT*T Wr^FT^T:, frT^fcftH, 5*5ft%* = SJ%*T fW <R?*

&c. The compounding takes place by II. 1. 35. Why do we say 'when
meaning mixed or seasoned ? Observe mHMrW
:
II
'
$<A*t^gre*Kqrr: ^nih
U4NIHJI
SfrP
11
&?!
^ W*
^rf[
II
?R*
II
^n^-rKM^lR tT*^
^ri%
OTTCT
II
Mafll*li
^,
^",
s^rer,
m^:
foft STT^Hnft H^f^T
II
First-acute Seccnd member,
84
The words
on their first syllable, when
noting a Name.
129.
Thus
*?rf%|h?w,
formed by 3%* (IV.
1.
srrsrwssr*
Indeclinable taught in VI,
M ml ^sr
2.
acute on the
compound, which
of a Tatpurusha
ll
In a Karmadharaya
126 to 130
2. 2,
is
first syll-
ia
we have qrw^T^ll
superseded by the accent of the
though that rule stands
first
and
this,
subsequent*
11
< *q*i has
$rf^W52FT
accent taught in VI.
tl
when at the end

not a KarmadMraya.
As |r^H I^T^w
acute
end of a Tatpurusha de-
at the
able,
Thus
^ have
^?j& and
132
II.
STTf^f^,^!^;, *rr3%^, q "^w4i<ft m ^ fanhft, srf^

villages.
The feminine of ^p* is taken here,
When
not
a
name
we have q?;ifp7W
42).
The word
130.
The
^,
Bk. VI. Ch.
names of
All these are
|f^: u
fj^,
qsrft
\\
At
ll
^qr^r:,
*? 9 ( srrf^RTrr%
end of a non-Karmadh&raya Tatpurusha compound, the words ^nf &c have acute on the first
131.
the
syllable,
In a Karmadharaya
Thus ?rr#?W3 lli3%iqWi ^jnl'4 sr^PT^
The words 3*4 &c are no where exhibited as such the
we have q <*H'&
primitive words w, *?r, T^T &c sub-divisionof ft*TTtt ( I V, 3. 54 ) are here referred
:
-,
ll
ll
to, as
ending with nj
in a
II
affix,
<pr:, jw: ( srr^rcn )

<r^n?r
IVi
P#^l T*TOcT*5^ SPIRT 3U 44 STMT T^FrT
The word gsr coming after a Masculine noun
132.
3*: <jtw
ffrr
ll
II
II
II
5?T^M:
ll
Tatpurusha has acute on the

Thus sFPtf^P,
thi H KHl
^:
Why
qrpisir!*:, *rrrfrf^
do we say
'
after a
^T^r^r^f^^r^ThîMi^rw:
II
first syllable.
ll
Why
do we say 'a
masculine word
?33
II
<r^rfa
II
Observe
Observe
TPTf<j*r:
^,
stt^f^,
'
gsr'
*t*t,
55-
Bk. VI. Ch.
II 134.
The word
133.
has not acute on the
J^T
when preceded by a word which
syllable,
185
first
under the
falls
category of teachers, kings, priests, wife's relations, and agnates and cognates.
The word
ficing priest
',
&c: sjrfrT means
The word
srr^T^
'
&t$X''all
srnssn"
',
trsrr
prince, king
'
Htfaj*
',
> g| rich^
'
a sacri*
blood-relations'.
shows that the rule applies to the synonyms of
3*?, *nrr?;, iw$$'<,

|
'
kinsmen related through father and mother or
as well as to particular
^rarf^rffj,
means teacher
relations through the wife's side' as sot^T 'brother-in-law
'
teacher
*m$
'
5^^rrf
:
>
5TTnT^5, vrr5<^#*
last sutra
jpr
taught in the
by
the general rule VI.
1.
3THTra<Hfc, TTTOPTgir:,
ursHjr^:, fr^s**, (VI.
:,
VI.
'teacher'
23
3.
Here the
),
being prohibited, the accent
falls
5TWrHST-
^r^t
23)
3.
&c
special accent of
on the
last syllable-
2 23.
The words
134.
Thus
&c.
pound have acute on the
^ft"
&c, in a Tatpurusha com-
first
syllable,
when the preced-
ing word ends in a Genitive and does not denote a living

being.
Thus SJ^>?n,
T**nffT, but
being, and TTT^ni. where
it is
^ârofa where the first term is a living

Another reading of the sutra is
not Genitive.
word Traf being rhe ancient name of q# given by old
*rWr?*wrFf TOfT^, the
Grammarians,
1 *<*, 2 5*rrer,
10
^PTCft, 11
4 <nfepr, 5
^^R), 12 #n*
sfrftT,
*fW* (=^R
mw,
6 yp^r, 7 g^r, 8
ff^r), 9
**<?,
II
The word ôr is derived from the root ?rft sft ( Div 50 ) with the affix
^rf^ and 3rf*T are formed with the upapada zrft and the verbs
'to go*
and IT to protect respectively, and the affix 5j? ( ^jfarfcT = sbRt ) ( III. 2. )
>?K
'
'
^T^T
with the affix f^qr added diversely
gives
5^
srcff?
formed by the
?rr
yftft
the affix
with
this
with
the
cjfcr^
=?K
3T<3.(
^r?)
^
r^n
gives
(Un
II.
^^
56)
with
3T^ (Un
IV. 81)
gives
ST?* STCTR = jmTT ( Prishodaradi
the penultimate being lengthened the word
pg
;
is
affix
added to the root 5 with the upapada $ ( fj^fftif ^TWR
angment 5^ being added to ^
with
5^ ftfft$îr:
II
gives $37:, ^*t with 3T*T* forms -sr^, then
formed by sr^(
III.
1.
134
is
added
#^
^^
added to sffând reduplication.,6ft^pT^ = %?$t
fs
n86
First-acute Second-member.
^r hiu4i4iM
tl
?V*
The
^tr
ll
words
^f,
ll
Bk. VI. Chy
II. .
sn^rfrfa, fora ^TN
<gr,
137
R)
II
q^y, ^r, sirer and

grs* of Sutras VI. 2. 126-129, preceded by a non-living genitive word, have acute on the first syllable.
135.
As
%tt
ffr
six
*rrw?, ^re,
S^HHL, f^T^R*
?>T5KFT1, STC^Fn*?*;
In the last two examples
ll
not used as a comparision, that case being governed by VI.
is
^qVw
&Wrtll4k, %$%''
II
Here nw,
and
*rq-
*rre?
2.
127,
do not denote mixing,
is governed by VI. 2. 128.

^NTfk*, *T57f^*> here the compound does
not denote a Name, which would be the case under VI. 2, 129. Why these
which
*
six
'
only
Observe
grct sreq;
u*{*rr>
11
&% n tttr
11
s^?*, ^nr
The word ^ at
compound denoting 'a wood or
sTrsrTrrn* )
11
the end of a Tatpurusha
136.
has acute on the
forest',
first syllable.
The word
3Hi IJ ^ li
word
Why
II
P3"
est' also
fp*sr
means
WT1&K
II
its
?^V9
tl
^T^
The word
137.
preserves
'a
(1) a basin (2) a caste called
primarily and metaphorically.
U$><# T
by metaphor.
here denotes *a wood'
II
The
wood'
Some
kunda.
force here
WU&K,
U&<M\,
vwizs at the
Thus
^SjfT'l.,
Observe ? rl^ u ^H
is
say
it
II
The
means
'for-
that of ^gfiq,
ST*icH^<H
i.
e.
I!
end of a Tatpurusha,
original accent.
The synonyms of >titr are also included. As fP?fhi3i<4tJL> fpfarfnro,

^Tsfafp** u The words OTTO &c, have acute on the middle. Phit II. 9. The
word jt^T governs the subsequent
f^ft^r^î^revPET^
frf^, wrcn*,
ifrr
11
ftm^rcTf
s^ftrerm
f*Rfr
138.
original
accent,
sutras upto VI.

ll
\\*
2.
<r?rft
ll
143.
II
ftfir-, Gter,
^^f^r,
*r-
Wflg TO^sntfNf arf

After fsrfo, a word
when it is always
syllables, with, the exception of
sftfir
*r*n%
tT^f^ft
*T*re
11
retains in a Bahuvrihi its
mr^-H
of not
more than two
Bk. VI. Ch,
II
139
First- acute
Second member.
11
87
The word qrj belongs to f*rrf* class

RlSrer
ftrafe:
fiift fo
on
the
first,
and
has
acute
and
(VI. I. 203)
sto": and arte: being formed by
acute on the first (VI. I. 197),
affixes,
II.
have
(Un V. 21) and zp{ (Un
4)
Why do we say after ftrfa ? Observe $*?ft*Hlf which being formed by theWhyaffix spffa^ has acute on the penultimate syllable ;ft by VI. I. 217
Thus
ll
'
'
11
do we say always
'
Observe
nffesF^t;, for
an abbreviated form of 5&^, the
les, it is
though ^spC
finaj
3T
ls
nere of two syllab-
being elided
in
denoting
compounds other than those denoting age \

we have fir fa^f hence this word is not such which is always of two syllables.
The word fare has acute on the first syllable, by Phit II. 10, and retains this
accent in the Bahuvrlhi ( VI. 2. 1 ). Why do we say 'abahvach or not manyWhy do we say in a Bahuvrihi ? Observe
syllable ? Observe MfaFyFn^
Why
we
say 'with the exception of **Etfj'? Observe
do
r%% qT^-RTRTTr^
condition of
life (
V.
4. 146), in
'
:,
'
II
ll
ftfrePTCtfl,
This sutra
is
<ifo*K*frNM*u&
i^rf*
ll
ll
2. 1.
*rfo y
*rn^ y ^v^Tcj;, ^r,
*-
II
In a Tatpurusha, a word ending in a Krit-
139.
affix preserves
its
accent,
original
when preceded by an In-
noun standing in intimate relation to a verb (Karaka), or any word which gives
occasion for compounding (Upapada see III. 1. 92),
called Gati (I. 4. 60), or a
declinable
The above is according to Professor Bohtlingk. Thus srenr^f:,. jt^TT't,

The compounding is here by II, 2. 18. With karaka-word we
With upapada words, we
S^rJfa^T*. TrflwTrR:, ^*T^^RJ (IIL 3. it/).
JT^T^fi, JrftT* H
have
have
fT^*:, S^fc, gift:
accent
is
governed by VI.
II
1.
All these are formed by

193.
i.
e.
the word pT^T
so also with ^rrrR
is
f^
affixes
formed by ?g^
and the
%vq j^(
so also with g>c*T5T

( T^^TIT^ ^n"^% fa ST ^T: )
do we say "after a Gati, Karaka, or an Upapada
Here the Genitive in ^3T?r
word ? " Observe %^tT^^R^: = f^raiHSP
does not express a karaka relation. The genitive is here a TO^T'TT *V2T denoting a possessor and not a ^r^SFTr n e: for had it been latter, there would have
been no compounding at all, by II. 2. i(). see also II. 3. 65. The word
is
employed in the sutra for the sake of distinctness for a gati, karaka or upapada could not be followed by any other word than a krit-formed word, if
For two sorts of affixes come after a root ( dhatu )
there is to be a samasa.
A samasa can take place with krit-formed words, but
namely ftiF and %^
y&fa
fa )
(**TV
cfi?<r%
^T
*TJ*rffO
Why
II
II
n88
First-Acute Second-member.
not with
So
tirianta words.
that Without employing
have inferred that &i was meant.
Therefore,
it is
VI. Ch.
[Bit.
$^
said the
tne
'
sflttej
Krit
sake of distinctness. According to this view
in the sutra for the
accent in $pr3T%rNT*) JTT^RrWIff
by saying that
'
is
140
If, .
we could
employed
we explain
the
compounding takes place

with * and the words qHftdC and q^farl T ending in ftr3r and <rf*rand then 3TPT
is added and the accent of the whole word is regulated by srr* by the rule of
?=Tf*rnEfE (
see V.
and V.
3. 56.
4. II
).
first
According to others, the ^qr
is
taken in
compounds
this sutra, in order to prevent the gati accent applying to verbal
in
5T^l%1**:,or | M^ % ^ft^ ( V. 3. 67 ), or Irrrfn^T* ( V. 3. 66 ). The

accent of these will be governed by the rule of the Indeclinable first term retain-
words
like
ing
accent.
its
In qHMkf &c
140.
pound preserve
their original accent simultaneously.

and qf^T have acute on the first syllable, and fj^
Thus t^rew', both

augment comes by VI. 1.
The word
both members of the com-
157.
|^fm:
(2)
or ||^f?f
= f?HT
(VI.
TRT:
1.
157)
some say it has acute on the

first.
(3) ST^ffa: (Sachl being formed by &!%), some make Sachi acute on
the first #*fRfrp, by including it in Sarangrava class (IV. 1. 73). (4) rT*#<Tr?
(tanu being formed by 3J Un I. 80 has acute on the final, according to others
it
f|f{
has acute on the
acute on the
formed by
first).
st<t
first
first.
(7)
is
(5) ^rffer*
3.
viSva
is
first:
2.
*(T$Hv\i$\nv
'
first,
(6) fj?p ^n":
VI.
3.
21. Vart.
Sanda and
'
'
Marka
3.
137.
first,
f^
affix
f? %TTS^
(9)
3r*rfrnr^^W
106 has acute on the
'
3.
and ^? has acute on the
II
Bamba
3.
final.
a Bahuvrihi
137.
(10)
(8) f^rTreSSY
137.
is
as visVavayas
final,
is
and both 'have acute on the

being formed by sr*r have
),
is
II
The lengthening
sr^fr has acute on the final.
lengthening takes place as before by VI.
by
is
and has
to *& *raf?rr ( nara is

formed by qsi, the lengthe-
*r*tf*rr
Sahsa
f|}><*
or
the lengthening takes place by VI.
by VI.
by VI.
137).
not elided by
Trishna has acute on the

here also
*m
?r*2T^r both
acute on the
final,
and napat = na pati or na palayati with
ning takes place by VI.

the Genitive
on the
acutely accented
is
finally
acute,
a Bahuvrihi.
^f:
II
The words governed by
is
and
The
formed
this sutra
are those which wo"Uld not be included in the next two sutras.
%idia4t
tt
11
141.
ties,
the both
v*\
ll
<^rR
11
^rerr,
&&,
** n
In a Dvandva compound of names of Divini-
members
retain their original accent.
Bk. VI. Cn.
II
144
First-acute second member.
Thus f^n%f qt, WM*"H

(by nipatana), ^Tf
first
(VI.
1.
on the
iw
197),
first.
is
is
formed by
*^
'Un
f^R has two acutes by VI.
I.
do we say
140
2.
140,
do we say "names of divinities"

Dvandva? Observe srf^TOT:
'a
and
f?? has acute on the

lias
acute on the
first
and by VI. 1. 197 has acute

and Itidra-Brihaspati has three
III. 53;
Why
acutes.
The word
f^rn?f^T?ft H
formed by i^(Un
n8
Observe PARI*tPr
Why-
II
11
lu a Dvandva compound of the names of
142.
divinities,
both members of the compound simultaneously do not
retain their accent,
when
the
first syllable
of the second word
anudatta, with the exception of gjfartft, *, g%% ai d afeifo;

Thus f^ypift, f*?T^rf the words Agni and Vayu have acute on the
The word uttarapada is repeated in the sutra, in order that it should be
final.
is
II
by the word 'anudattadau', which latter would otherwise have qualified

Dvandva. The word "anudattadau" shows the scope of the prohibition and
Observe
the injunction. Why do we say with the exception of 'prthivl* &c ?
^rTr?f*rlJr or sqi dvyava has acute on the first, 'prithivi' being formed by 'nish',
qualified
Rudra is formed by rak' affix ( Un

f^PJsrnr, Pushan has acute on the end.
4
has acute on the
final, ^farlfcr,
has acute on the
final.
tne words Sukra and manthin have acute on the
W?ffPT?**fNf,
Wei:
II
\^
II
^TTT%
143.
II
#*
II. 22.
(
Un
I.
),
and
159
finaj.
II
In the following
sfitras
up
to the
end of the
chapter, should always be supplied the phrase "the last syllable
of the second member has the acute".

The application is given in the next sutra.
^rnro,
H^r%
srer ftp*:,
) n
11
144.
the acute, in the
The
second
verbal nouns ending in
sr, st*j.
member
lias
sp*. 5>,
T%
%^ and 3F7, when preceded by a Gati, a Karaka or an Upapada (VI. 2. 139).
sto,
20
End-acute second term.
190
Thus
this sutra,
?pi?tr:,
by VI.
3TTW
3T*r:
first,
ST5T JTh|:, gST^#,
III. 116).
and the
f?*r^ affix
would
gati 3TT
word dGra, but
(VI.
*frfJ:
135).
203).
$m
'
II, 2
and
146
II.
and but for
3),
formed by snt^ affix (Uri

^ f^mT#:, Here tR has the force of
stt^pJ*, 3<T^*F:
rs^f:
II
retain its accent
VI. 2. 49) therefore, srpTrT is first

when compounded with the karaka
acute: this accent would have been retained
the words
(Un
Bk. VI. Ch.
139 these words would have retained their original accent
2.
which was acute on the
gpT,
formed by
for this sutra. ft^gc^: 3TTrnU^: "
dwelling
',
and
^j
377j^:,
'
victory
IM-
ST''* (
3-
56
^r
sr?jf^fVr
JTCTO:,
STÎ^
on the
are acute otherwise
'
first
3*sK?f<t:
rar^r*
= *TT WrT, *sfCf ^TPT (III. 2. 5 Vart) *f?:, Hj|f:, (^f being added by III. 1.
has acute on the first as it belongs to f^rfl class (VI. I.
The word
When the preceding words are not Gati, Karaka or Upapada, this
1.
201, 202).
iraf:
11
rule does not apply
as *<pT
HW,
3TI%*<Jrt H^rTl",
where
fj
and
3Tf*r
being
Kar-
mapravachaniya, the words get the accent of the Indeclinable.
The
145.
Participle
when it is preceded by
member is compared.
Thus
5**.,
^TCTsFP*
sjfjf*, ipfrife)
>
f%?fW?i^
11
or
irftJf
in
has acute on the
rfr
final,
by a word with which the second

With Upamana words we have
,!
This debars VI.
a Gati, the rule does not apply, as 5J*3rfe H^cfr
2.
49 and
48.
f^ra-
When 5
is
not
II
The Participle in kta has acute on the

last syllable, when preceded by a Gati, or a Karaka or an Upapada, if the compound denotes a Name, but not in srrfecT &c.
This debars VI.
Thus wim *TTRT:, ^T|#: S M ^ TfrspvJ: s&rp^zj:
Here
VI.
2. 48 is debarred.
^r^ref^T *fa:
2. 49, vr^srencrT *& ^r**$rrl*
"
"
Why do we say when is not 3TTf*TrT &c Observe arrf^trf^; &c.
146.
'
*TTCt
>
'
II
:,
ll
it
MTPTrT, 2 quffqiT, 3 BTRqTfro, 4 crR^C^T.. 5 fa^J, 6 ffmq?r, 7 3TTf^?*, 8
*n=rr cr^Rfrsnr <rr n

*r?r 3
The word iu^rjr in the above list does not take acute on the
but when it denotes
the name of, anything else than a 'cow
*refa
'
it is
has acute on the
utmqfr ri
%nr
11
when
cow it
final,
'a
'
final.
li
Wvs
11
i^rft
irprr^H? "* wrT^TTrr^nTr^r^
11
srt^rfRrc, ^,
wit
an^st^rero
VL
Bk.
Ch.
r49
I J, .
1191
147.
The words JTf^r &c. ending in
acute on the final.
Thus $rf%
**
^fnr^rfj
when
3PTW,
not followed
with these words.
JP|
by
3fPT
Some
ffrf
ii
*F^P, ^V^Z^T^-, 3T3f?rT?

The words have acute on the
fqr*:, JHIttfJ:
^f^*:
&c, though
hold
words have acute on the
*T*fWr HOTS, 6
*f
an Akritigana.
It is
II
the
have
*r*TJ, *3*Tfinal,
even
Ganapatha they are read along
in connection
with
^R
&c
that these
This being an Akritigana we have g^T^c*^
^f^RrF,
in
only
it is
final.
s*n-grr*fa ^%7f tr ^rt
'kta'
3TJ?5f%Tor
terror ^q-ar Hfftlft
Tr^wr^^f R$rg*R3rt ^^?wr(f
The final of Part Participles ^r and ^t alone

148.
has acute, in a compound denoting a Name and a benediction,
the preceding word being a word standing in close relation to
an action
(k&raka).
Thus
%3T <FT?*r:
Why
do we
though a Name,
final, for
So
is
=>^:, R ^ fcl
STClTT
say "of ^rf and
g?r"?
VL
by
makes a
not governed
the present rule
that where a Participle in tS
is
2.
= f%OTJ J9$:
Observe %5qrforp (VI. 2. 48), which,

146, and does not take acute on the
restriction
with regard to that rule even.
preceded by a karaka, and the compound
donotes a benediction and a Name, the accent is not on the final, as required
by VI. 2. 146, but such a word is governed by VI. 2. 48, unless the Participle
be Datta and
Iruta,
when the present rule applies. The word ^fR^f indicates that
when a gati or upapada precedes. Why do we use *rf
the ru'e will not apply
{ahneft So
'Sruta'.
For the words 'Datta' and
nonkaraka word.
ction'?
%WfrTr
The
II
is
'Sruta' will
fa**$- H
Why
have acute on the
final
even after
do we say 'when denoting benedi-
where benediction is not meant. As "5%: ^TroT 33

Datta and Srutaaftera karaka- word, only when
It
therefore does not apply to
srrf^RW ??^T
which
is
^rT
governed by VI.
name of
'the
2.
48.
) n
The Participle in tP has

compound denotes 'done by one
149.
the
applies to
meant.
Arjuna's conch', as
^t^ttp*
As &$',
rule will not apply
This rule
benediction
when
that the restriction should apply to 'karaka', and not to 'Datta' and
acute on the
in
final,
such a condition'.
192
The word
^T^TTJT^fTrf?
This
is
note
Noun
means 'being
f<qr*[rT
ST^rT'Trrr'T
of Action
2.
When
48.
then by VI.
(*rj^,
Thus
such a condition'.
in
II 151
?jR!Ty?farT?
and Abstract verbal nouns.
I%T5r^?r as Adjectives
nn exception to VI.
Bk. VI. Cu.
the words sp^tto
&c
are used to de-
J44 they get of course acute on the
2.
final.
^t
^rsrerrfsre*:
\\
vrffr
II
II
^*:,}*re,^^*:,(^^ra*s)ll
After a karaka as mentioned in VI.
150.
the second
II
member ending
in the
affix
action in the Abstract or the object
(i.
148,
and denoting an
stst,
e,
2.
having the senses of
a Passive Adjective), lias acute on the final.
Thus mvtvrsrf
*spt, <roqrrf ?$r*
î^^jsriSto g?^
All these are
examples of nfl* or Abstract Verbal Nouns, {HRhRT: 5TPW, ll^r^l^rfpf 1TThese are formed by c*j?
<P[\m, are examples of ^raft^T or Passive Adjectives.
under III. 3. }i6. For the Sutra III, 3. 116 may be explained by saying that
(1) rUtf is applied when the Upapada is in the objective case and bhava is
meant,
ation
(2) as well as
when
object
is
When
to be expressed.
the
first
explan-
taken, the above are examples of Bhava; when the second explanation
is
Karma. Why do we say " ending in ?**."?

Observe, ^rr^reiTn*^ " Why do we say "when expressing an action in the
abstract (bhava), or an Object (karma)"?
Observe ^rTMMH^, here far* is added
Why do we say "after a karaka*'?
after an Instrumental karaka (III. 3. 117).
Observe R??R?; 3T3R*i?T?r
In all the counter-examples, the second members
js
taken, thev are examples pf
II
retain there original accent,
^f^^q-T^^r^^T^r^T^R^R^lT^ K aftm
\\l
o^T^^T^T,
5T^5T,
3TT^5T,
*W*,
^ftrTP
^TH^rf^,
H,
:
II
TTTft
II
II
JT^, ftr-
II
*nft
11
151.
The words ending
in twc or f^q; affixes,
the words ssrrwR, î^t, stt^t, *?u* and
and
as well as ^rsi^r
^rtcf
&c, have acute on the final, when at the end of a compound,

preceded by a k&raka word.
Thus
swipt
*$pro% w^-îi fo^^rfaRfjfsn, sTrfror^ra*:
11
srttsr^PsSRT, 5??ransqR*.
P'reR'* H PTTT
*tr**TRC,
compounds under
srcr
3FW1TTO
II. 2. 9,
jrarwMJw synrw3^,
11
II
tststojtt, frr#*T*T*re*
11
srrar^ u^msR^:,
srrsi-
OTiTOf^ words are those which form Genitive
and those compounds only are to be taken here; as
wtjjpi^st^:, $rnTOj-3r^:
11
*fcr fr^f^:
^s*e*f: h
This
is
an exception to VI. 2. 139. and in the case of ifffa, rule VI. 2. 48 is superseded.
Jhe words s^r^R'&c do not denote here *rf or %$, had they done so, rule
BK. VI. GH.
VI.
2.
SECOND TERM FIRST-ACUTK.
153]
When
149 would have covered them.
we have
^n?*
I!. .
stî?t
and
Tc?rrf^
JT??r
^,
lu
nf
IJ
nrw*w,
The word y<T has
152.
first
member
is
not a karaka,
it
8 ?*?fo, 9
the
Itgft
14 fpr,
12 if*****. IS qr?,
acute
preceded by a noun in the Locative case.

Thus sratfr ^Ft= ^rWTT , fe '^T^?. " The compounding
1
when
the final
011
15
takes place
by II. 1- 40 by the process of splitting the sutra ( yoga-vibhaga ), taking wft

Here by VI. 2. 2, the first
there as a full sutra, and siFT: another.
sutra supersedes that and
present
the
accent,
its
preserved
have
member would
by the Unadi affix Hfj
derived
is
word
The
$**
ordains acute on the final.
and thus
accent
natural
( VI. 1. 213 )
(Un V. 15) and would have retained its
we say
do
Why
VI.
2. 139 )
acute on the first syllable by krit-accent. (
get
Observe !fa $"* - tfT7**
'a locative case'?
The acute
falls
on the
final of
and of *r^, when they are second members

instrumental case.
a compound, preceded by a term in the
^,
the sense of
tl53.
in
words having
*mW
*r*3*$
Thus mini, *iwirfo< i rcfrnMH mriwfitom*
to VI, 2. 2
is an exception
This
II.
I.
31.
by
place
The compounding takes
the third case, would have retained
by which the first member being in
word
ft in the sutra means the word,
Some say that the
,
its
original accent.
formal
mean -"after an Instrumental case, the

in
acute on the final". The examples will be
so that the aphorism would
words **, *, and **? get

addition to the
above,:--4iF^:-HI^
CT
be taken and not
alone
reply that
will
*?
by the word
will
**
II
denote
By
its
sutra
>
^ this
be
so,
then the word-form
synonyms like ft** &C lo this we

synonyms also, by the fact of its being followed
1 1.
1.
its
1,
r* and *t T
Instru-
always take th 2
omitted the word wtfurar:, from this sutra, for

mental case so we could have
would have referred to the
by the maxim of pratipadokta &c, <?iri**
tertl1s nl> for
The mention of
II. I. 31-
compound ordained by
sake of clearness.
?**
'
iicjp.
The word
^rrTJRfqcf1*
>
means 'being
fîf^rT
JP^lTrr*
is
Noun
When
48.
2.
of Action (vjl, then by VI.
Bk. VI. Cu.
Thus
such a condition'.
in
II 151
?|WSRPTrp?f
PPTSTV^* as Adjectives
nn exception to VI,
This
note
the words
ifrSntrT
&c
are used to de-
144 they get of course acute on the
2.
final.
wroifcRrsr.
150.
the .second
ll
\\*
'T^rpr
II
11
^*:,}^,^^*:,(3Ty^rTro)ll
member ending
in the
affix
action in the Abstract or the object
(i.
148,
2.
and denoting an
3t*t,
having the senses of
e,
a Passive Adjective), lias acute on the final.
Thus arr^vrnpf W3f,
**WT*f *sT*
Î^roi^trif g?^
examples of vrr^ or Abstract Verbal Nouns.
ll
All these are
H^TÎfTltW ^Tformed by f$z

are
of
or
are
These
examples
Passive
Adjectives.
rrVr^T,
^T^T
saying that
by
explained
For
be
under III. 3. j 16.
the Sutra III, 3. 116 may
bhava is
and
case
r^7 is applied when the Upapada is in the objective
(
STHW-,
STSTvfrSFff:
meant,
(2) as well as
when
object
When
to be expressed.
is
the
first
explan-
when the second explanation

Why do we say " ending in a?^"?
js taken, they are examples of Karma.
Observe, ^*ri ^RITP*<1
Why do we say "when expressing an action in the
ation
taken, the above are examples of Bhava;
is
II
abstract (bhava), or an Object (karma)"?
karaka
after an Instrumental
Observe
frTJir^r,
fT^HSW
II
(III.
In
all
3.
Observe ^rT*n^k*, here fj?
Why
117).
do we say
is
added
"after a karaka"?
the counter-examples, the second
members
retain there original accent,
^r%?^T^^R^^T^TOR^^^rf^rm:
j,
ll
\\\
o*TT^T5T, 5TSR, 3TT^*, ^TT*, ^TnT^r^, ^RTT:
ft vr^frr
11
151.
The words ending
in
ll
^r^r
ll
*rc;,
ft*-
II
or
fe^
affixes,
and
the words s?tr?TR, ^T^T, 3TTHT, ^TT^T and sfra as well as *jnrer
&c, have acute on the
when
final,
at the
end of a compound,
preceded by a karaka word.

Thus ^-rCfTf^ SFK^-for fo^MlfaftfrTfM HftSH^fa^
11
^raft*
II
ÎW ^$%
compounds under
prsrw^'
SWIFT
3M$'!?? words are those which form Genitive

and those compounds only are to be taken here; as
3T S***TR*
II. 2. 9,
"
ll
Sff^ranrfK mrn^j^^, ottotcct: u tfto iTnEftr:, 3**=rfcR Tllis s

to VI. 2. 139. and in the case of jfffa, rule VI. 2. 48 is superseded.
exception
an
The words 53T^3R *&c do not denote here HPf or c??$, had they done so, rule
:
Bk. VI. Ch.
VI.
I i.
When
149 would have covered them.
2.
we have
!rf}R
T^r?^f
s^rf^r
^rTTPTT:
^Ftt:
Second term first-acutk.
53]
11
*"d
JT5?r
'
jv^nt
lu *r?.
sr?r,
\\\
II
^ft
11
II
Tlie
preceded by a 1101m
Thus ar^sTT
word y^T
in the
c^t*,
^TO*^:,
t^^^^**^*^
152.
first
member
is
not a karaka,
8 ?<faj, 9
^R^nTr^
the
trgfj
*r^f?r
12 qrTrT*re, 18
3*^
wx,
15
"?r?r,
II
11
acute on the final
lias
Locative case.
The compounding
f*^^ ^33^*3* ^?<Hfe
when
takes place
11
40 by the process of splitting the sutra ( yoga-vibhaga ), taking *nr*ft

Here by VI. 2. 2, the first
there as a full sutra, and STFT: another.
member would have preserved its accent, the present sutra supersedes that and
by
II.
1.
ordains acute on the
(Un
V. 15) and would have retained
get acute on the

'a
The word 5*3
final.
locative case?
syllable
first
Observe
by
3;*,
krit-accent.
S ^ = t^T^TCr
falls
derived by the Unadi affix
natural accent
17
The acute
153.
the sense of
%f?r
its
is
VI.
2.
VI.
1.
213
ijjj
and thus
Why
do we say
of words
having
139
).
II
on the
and of $Fr^, when
final
they are
second members
in a compound, preceded by a term in the instrumental case.
Thus jrr^r^T. ^n^ftTjfpp* iraM*<4H ^rtfrpiTîiiqt, ^m^^l ^r^?^f u

The compounding takes place by II. I. 31. This is an exception to VI, 2. 2
by which the first member being in the third case, would have retained
its original accent. Some say that the word v(q in the sutra means the word:
form 3T*J, so that the aphorism would mean "after an Instrumental case, the
get acute on the final". The examples will be in
words *&, *nj, and
above,:
the
WOTnif: = W*wi M If this be so, then the word-form
addition to
not its synonyms like f%=FS &c. To this we
3^T alone will be taken and
synonyms
also, by the fact of its being followed
reply, that 3JT will denote its
^^
by the word
-rpj
ij
By
sutra
II.
I.
3r, jfrr$'arid
^TJ always
take ths
Instru-
mental case, so we could have omitted the word JTcifaror:, from this sutra, for
by the maxim of pratipadokta &c, 3^r*r^? would have referred to the
compound ordained by II. I. 31. The mention of n%qj hercMs only for the
sake of clearness.
Sfxont term end-acute.
.1*94
Bk. VI. Ch.
II.
155
The word fira has acute on the final after an

when it is not joined with any Preposition
and does not mean a 'compact or alliance*.
154.
Instrumental
Thus
?Tr:
g?rrof:, f?T?7rW%rk
Why do
11
employment
case,
we say
sf^W
Why
do we say f*rsr? Observe

?
Observe grsrfaMlT:
having a Preposition'
'not
in this sutra of the
gr^TT-
The
II
phrase 'anupasargam' implies, that wherever
the word miira
is used, it includes misra with a preposition also.

Therewhere
the word r%V is used, we can form the Instrumental
31
compounds with fa * preceded by a preposition also. Why do we say 'not
denoting a compact? Observe srrsmfwr *nrr = srgiap ST? m%* ^rvfor<T5P
The
word ^rjsq' here means a contract formed by reciprocal promises, if you do this
thing for me, I will do this for you. Others say, it means close proximity,
else,
fore in II.
1.
11
without losing identity, and thus differs from
in
f*psr
which two things blend
Therefore though the King and the Brahmana
together into one.
may
be in
close proximity as regards space, they both retain their several individualities:
hence the counter-example ar^RpsnTnTT

While
there is no possibility of separating the two.
II
*mK,
srfaft^, *rqTT%, art, fer,

ff>T;
ii
srTrf? art
fa 3R* *m*m *
*i*HTMrwi% n^f^r
denoting
1. 63),
'
1. 101),
for that
(V.
'
(V. 1.
'
have acute on the
gative Particle ^st
when
the above mentioned

Thus
99),
1.
do we
!r>nrf?r*% *4irar*T-
1.
10 1)
it
that'
(V.
1.
:^rfrrclf: = *T
'?
(V.
'
'
(V.
when preceded by the Nemakes a negation with regard to
II
saj* 'after ^nr
deserving that
final,
II
'
affixes
capable to effect that
5),
Why
11
h ^ tk^ ?n% t^t
99):
The affix is ysr

)
f^K (
n&ffat =5&ft ^ (%?*TfR). The affix is 3:^
The
that' (V. I. 5)
3T5**fH[: -*T ^fr *:
to effect that' (V.
&c
attributes.
%<rrf? 'suited for
*tf %S3RTHlf *r*7Tf?
sj^favr:
The words formed with the Taddhita
fitted for that
good
rrf^rrr^TS
examples
11
155.
'
srsfr:, srfscrrr:,
in the
Observe
11
3T^rr^r%?f%fS 5*3r*
3?f 'deserving that'
(V.
1.
affix
tf<Trfa^:
64 and V.
is
II
5"
V.
The
I.
1.
= *T
V.
19). rf<T
I.
affix
*?ro?
63
I.
?Z):
'good for
3T?*W 'capable
is
ra
(V.
I.
18)
= TrfanSHT, f?r*TrWw^ where

the avyaya r? retains its accent by VI. 2.
trf>r^r*TfrW
is used and therefore

do we say 'negation of that attribute'? Observe mT*TCT*terr^: =
The word ip* here means the attribute denoted by the
TOripttPfap
Taddhita affix, and not any attribute in general. Thus sr^Frf^njPfi 3*3T '=*.
the negative ft
2.
Why
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
gfnf2W>*ir* T
Observe
*TTrft
ijrfal^l
"Taddhita
5*?^
Observe
added
is
Why
11
*M >tf*W = *TPR?*T
affixes"?
a krit affix
Second term end-acute.
158]
II.
TnrefteTCTT^
do we say 'in the sense of sampadi &c' ?

Why do we say
T <mRfa: = 3T<TTfMfa:
=
=
Here 3^
%T^fR **flNr*r, T #r*T 3T^T*T
II
9^
II
in the sense of 'deserving' (III.
\<\%
II
II
1195
T^Tf^
II
*,
*T<ffr,
3.
169).
^, 3T<T^
||
*PTfall
156.
q-
and *m when not denoting
'useful for that',
affixes
have acute on
the last syllable, after the particle srsr negativing the attribute.
Thus qrcrreisrs?:='*TOrn, *<Tr*3r:=3Trr^:, So also <h<*j4: ( IV. 2. 49);
=
^33, T $^ = 3Tf^J*. 3T3F3* (V. I. 6). Why do we say 'atadartha:
j^j
not useful for that'. Observe <?TsKr5?^= TT*J*, T TTsn*= SPTTO* ( V. 4, 25 ).
This rule does not apply when the affixes are not Taddhita, as vfapt formed
with the krit affix
There must be negation of the
attribute,
otherwise
one without any anubandha and

$5c3T^l^=3T^f*lt The affix | and n
the other with the anubandha ?j being specifically mentioned, excludes all other
affixes
having
*T
as their effective element, such as
^^-iprrôÛ
sT^rasrTfTt
See IV.
11
?vs
11
vîfk
A word
157.
IV.
2.
thus
9),
sf
srar, ^ft, st snffir n
jtst
ara and *>,

when the
affix
final,
= 3[
Tt T AiaClfrT, so also stopp, stt*:, srfarcpr, ^fcfc4 (III.

do we say when meaning 'not capable'? Observe 3T*rer
A ^Tr%rT and a TRpfH^ do not cook their food, not
TR5ir5T^:
3TT*?
Why
134&C).
tfr%rT:,
'not capable.'
is
Thus
I.
11
formed with the krit

has acute on the
preceded by the particle
meaning
â &c.
2. 9.
3TW
II
because they are physically incapable of cooking, but because by the vows of
their particular order they are prohibited from cooking.
srnftnft
II
Vv*
*T^rft
158.
11
3tt^t%,
11
word formed by the
krit-affixes gr^r or F,
preceded by the Negative particle, has acute on the

one abuses somebody by that word.
Thus
Here avarice
3TTqr? sq
is
when
rogue des not cook, though he can do so r .
indicated, the fellow wants more pay before he will cook
not his incapacity.
TOrara
5r|rT' 'this
final
?^
So
ll
also 3T<T3TS2[
q^n^
11
~S[\^H',
so also
^nrr**,
3rf%f$rJ:, 3?ffR*sj:
**& ^Ttjk
11
II
and
Second-term end-acute.
it96
*n*
Bk. VI. Cu.
II.
162.
159.
When abuse is meant, a word preceded by
acute on the final, in denoting a Name.
Tims sff^?^: No Devadatta, not deserving of this name sto^TCtK
lias
'
'
^>#r*g^rer^ra
1
q^TR
11
i^r, 3^, ftg^r, ^raf^r.,^r
II
11
After the Negative particle, the words formed
GO.
by the kritva
i\o
11
affixes
by sr% and sr^S^, and the
III. 1. 95),
words
^tps &c. have acute on the final.

Thus kritya: 3T5F%^, STSfirtfta*, TSfP ^T^TTS^, spTTr'ST^SF'r. fêr<wj ,^TR^r^rR:: H The affix f^J^ includes R5TO^C also: ^TSTHSIW^:, 3T?Jii
H rt-*
H*T*TPr*J
tion
11
^ &c:
3T?retf*n"?i;
).
3T*r|:, 3T*mf:,
double negation
STOfn^K *?f*W, BT^TJpiraJ

The words ^fare, ^W?F
),
IFÎH, "sfamw, and ^PTTTT preceded by

acute on the
&
final.
separately).
3Tf^JTC :
it
P>0
3?^?%: and Mft4tK3;P
ST^^fo ^T^T^f^:
3T?TW and
Vernacular they have the accent of
5fi
i.
(f^fiPC
bt^c^t srRranrorsr), 9
gf%^,
3T^TtTTrr:
161.
following
<%,
is
and ^^^r taken jointly

Vedas only. In the
the
udatta on the
^^^rofa^^j^^^rj^R^JTRp (rawr **rwt)

*r***?r (^rnrern:-
double nega-
^WT, ^fWI,
when denoting names have
3T?r|: in
e.
it?^, 10 nfr^r,
first.
8 f^nsrftr
*r*rniT*,
ssre=r
11 *nror*?tflr.
II
After the Negative particle, the final of the
optionally acute
and the words
srsr/rfrew,
a word formed
and gf^r
with the affix
II
Thus g* 3T^r or ST^rri 3T5T &c-SR^ or ^5PT, BTffMfaj or <AjN

The alternative accent is that of the Indeclinable.
ST^jf^ or K^f^T
;
^tt^,
(
VI.
%^k,
ll
2.
*/t?i;,
aSP^
162,
****>
act
"
is
meant.
fo^-1^ (*ww*nr.)
In a Bahuvrihi,
and <Tf, the last

Numeral, has the
; -
T^
syllable
acute,
after
the
11
words 5K,
*&<$
and of a proper Ordinal

when the number of times of an
of
!TO*T
Bk
VI. Ch.
Thus f$
or eating
frrra
165
II. .
qrnt
End-acute Second member.
*n& ^T = St 5WPt3:
*T*Ft
this
is
the
first
time of going
S^W,
^TTfrfr^:, TrHpfHf: rf<*pA, W3$$T% tT?t

f? fl&lk, fk ftfNh,
do we say in a Bahuvrihi? Observe 3T%?r JPT*T: = 5fjnT*T H Here
'.
Why
II
'
1197
'
'
accent by VI. 2. 2. Why do

idam &c". Observe ST^W =^sr*T*T <HT*, here the first term
retains its accent by VI. 2. I. Why do we say 'of prathama and the Ordinals'?
Observe rflFT *ff3re^=rfijf H Why do we say 'in counting an action'?
Here substances are counted and not action.
Observe sr* JT*PT T^T=rT?f snTTP
Why do we say in counting' ? Observe sr sr*r*T ^srr = ?f SPWP e. f% sn?FTP
and the word JPTT means here 'foremost', and is not a numeral.
When the
As %$
9jq; affix is added, the acute falls on the last syllable preceding 3&<r
the
member being
first
we say
in the third case retains its
" after
II
'
i.
II
11
WTO:
The Bahuvrihi governs
II
www *rr:
11%:
11
OTirar: q^:
l&
II
the subsequent sutras upto VI.
q^rf*
II
^rtpit:, *cPr.
II
^rosfr * aftttspriSnarsnffir **nt
la a Bahuvrihi,
the final.
on
has acute
Thus
Observe
?wq*rHr
fiRTrqT
snr
fftfnff,
"^^cHr
Why
do we say
^rfer
s"*^ faro
nr*cPrT,
??
II
3"fsftff
ll
<rerr%
II
^r*TT^r
^cnr^rsfr rearer sâtfrrfr *rera
a Numeral has acute on the
final.
or
ftffcHr,
*rvraf flr*rf*rc*ft:
^TtT. )
ll
^n%
ll
11
the Vedas, the stana after
^''^pff or "#3:*-^
KV\
ll
^rrara,
ll
ftnr, 3rr*R*fr:
(^cn-
II
rrf*ref* u
^rera^
faw
falls
11
In a Bahuvrihi, ending in Oft and
165.
acute
ll
a Numeral
ftrarer, sâffcr, ( 3Fd)4i-d: )
^s
so, in
Thus ft^rf
Numeral, the word
ll
Optionally
164.
II
Why do we say after

'wT? Observe fgftrcr:
II
^rorars
178.
11
after a
163.
i*cFr
2.
on the
last
srnr*,
the
when the compound denotes
syllable,
a Name.
As^rfMf:, srgtfMK fsffrn^:,
Name'?
Observe raqft*p>
Vatt
is
Prohibition must be stated
that of a Rishi.
As fÔT^p which
OTf*Rlr s*r*n
21
îfa$
11
$wrrftw:
11
Why
do we say
'a
H?rf*FT : U
\\\
11
is
<TTrnt
in the case
11
when
of f^r
governed by VI.
2.
106
^tfrj, *&x*
the
name
ll
srcr^rcra;
)\\
198
Bk. VI. Ch.
II.
In a Bahuvrihi ending in sp^nc, the acute

a word which denotes 'that which
166.
on the final,
between 7
169
falls
after
lies
Thus
4^*1 *3i*I
5?TO.=WWT?cTt
^wsrer
Observe
g%
'through an intervened cloth cr drapery

2JTO
&c Why do we say
3TTc*{FTn:q;= ^rrcJfr re>rrfrs?rHTS JAU<ftq
*&FgK
II
\^3
II
q^R
II
qrr^n,
^m^.
11
ipn*,
<HI#H
In a Bahuvrihi the acute
167.
',
'when meaning lying between'?
^rdl^lTlH
is
on the
II
when
final,
member is 3*3* meaning mouth i. e. the actual bodily

part of an animal and not used metaphorically.
Thus lrM<JK ^TSW* N Why do we say 'an actual part of a body r ?
Observe fH^rr WW Here 5^ means "entrance or door". The word ^rjf means
the second
ll
"a non liquid substance actually to be found in living beings &c". as explained
in III. 4. 54.
f^tr^,
ff%:
11
nt, *t^*,
3Ts*ra
ft^rs?
*^,
*tt i9?c
gfe, to. **%**:

*?* gfe
ig
*rer
s^w
<rt
^rjprrf^- arfpftft sptt%
In a Bahuvrihi, the acute does not fall on

denoting a real mouth, when it comes after an Inde168.
such
gw
and a name of a
clinable,
2$ and
sr^r
Thus:
direction, or after
*rt,
sr^,
The words ^T: and ?fr%: are finally acute

The word srr^ has acute on the
JTc^f3*sP
is
finally
&c
and
acute
*fnj*sr:
by
VI. 3. 139.
TOiF
52,
of
the
and
members
In these the first
^#5??r: n
Sf^F lippsT:
stssrj:
#*T5*5P, m^ftpgr* U
and
retain their accent,
first
by VI.
if^srHTW:,
ll
2,
FgSs*3
Bahuvrihi preserve their respective accents under Rule VI.
*T3T5*3P,
^J^r, Jjre,
ll
>
2. 1
and
in
the
compounds preceded by tit, %(% and ^^r, the optional rule taught in the
next sutra is also superseded by anticipation, though the words may denote
case of
comparison.
t%gt^?rcT?*raTFTrc
^rft ftsr, ^M *4Hi <t sry^n-n^rnsll
fa8Mi4HR?m%T*
5^
srfjfrfr sroraniuNr
^ws^wû^r
SPft169, In a Bahuvrihi, the word *pr denoting 'an
II
ll
ll
w%
ii
actual mouth', has optionally the acute on the final,
preceded by a participle in
is compared.
<T,
or
ii
when
by that wherewith something
Bk. VI. Ch.
Thus
on
zno applies which
VL
when
the final optionally, and
the
49
End-acute Second member,
JrertfFKTg^ or JTCTTfFraS^: or *$nT%33*Sr
Rule
acute, then
171
II
first
).
member
Thus
ft?9&
preserves
its
or fals^:,
first
that also does not
So
which
also with a
^Hvm^: or sqnhp?P
âiP^r., 3wr>K?rn^
the final
apply, then
acute
by VI.
that of the gati
is
not
is
member have
2. 1.
( VL
2.
word denoting comparison:
srrft^re^rf^ssft &Hi<4KHrac
<a\i*tor&,
When
makes the
original accent,
there are three forms.
1199
s^^rfirercrawr.
rift
11
3T3r<TfoRrsrfcrwT:
ffffc,
?\so n
qyrft
tt
11
After a word denoting a species (with the
170.
exception of a word for 'garment or covering' ), and after a

time-denoting word as well as after fpr &c. the Participle in
^ has acute on the
a Bahuvrihi, but not so
final, in
and srftw
participles are ^3, W<T
II
Thus ^rr^^:,T?ypiTf^|:,^r4ti:
&c:^T5TT#
[?*rr<r
cies, a
time or
II
*?!
|j?3
&c.
^^STST^, fjnrrf:
word"
placed after the word Putra.
Observe
Why do
when the
gjn*Trenirib, f9^ro#.v sre^'

Why do we say " after a Spe37 ), the participle being
not meaning a garment' ?
^r^TTrTs (II. 2.
we say 'when
with the affixes g^ and fjst respecObserve f m^3%:, fg^'sgvp from the root
Why do we say " when not $rT &c. " ? Observe re$<r rer53:
tively.
^fTJTfsrT^' ^"T is fi rst acute by Phit II. 3 being neuter. These three participles
t
do not stand
a compound
first in
contrary to
In the counter-examples, above given, the
accent
VI.
^<pr, 11
2. 1
5^,
*frs.
^r strt
The words ?^ &c
).
2 5:^, 3 5|h
(|ir rfrpr)
first
II. 2.
36
),
members
as this sutra implies.

retain their original
are given under III.
ffcj|, 5 are, 6 str**, 7
18.
jt^TT, 9 cjreor,
10
12 *\&{.
II
^ft
***
"W*i
After a species
171.
^^^
with the exception of gar-
ment) or a time denoting word, or
after *sr
&c. in a Bahuvrihi,
the word 5TRT has optionally acute on the final.

Thus ^r3rr& or f^^rrr, wr*rr#j or frrnrrrT*, ircrn^
wh
or
and
jrft are first-acute
%^^RTJ;
<?Tirrf or 5^T5Trrf:, 5:?!nfr|:

:
by Phit
or
5:^^:
II. 6; jjtct is first-acute
&c.
or ^rrenrnr, *r^re-
The words
by Phit'
I.
15,
qq H
E
is
*f?S?r^tf*t STJ^rTTO. "words ending in A^v, ^*r, f^

The words
are finally acute", as stfti:, ^*=f?:, snrf?:, f%%<fc *$% 11
finally-acute
by Phit
I. 7.
and *r
by Phit
|J*?r and 5:^ are end-acute
*T?l
1.
st^^ 8
I.
6.
120
^sT^prns
?w N
^ has
ôtto,
^dTsiTfH
II.
174
by the Negative particle

syllable of the compound.
W&
The acute here

W&fft, TPT!
completed compound so that the rule ap-r
3TTr<? ;
STpftf***,
syllable of the
last
srsr,
acute on the last
Thus srofffSP,
on the
rests
11
Bk. VI. Ch.
A Bahuvrihi formed
172.
9&t ov by
Tsrft
>
II
>
compounds which have fully developed themselves by taking the

Thus ^^f. ( formed by the samasanta affix af V. 4. 74 ).
Though the word ^rrm and StJTTS are both present here by context, yet the
plies to the
samasanta
affixes.
is performed on samasa.
This is to be inferred, because of the next
For had the present sutra meant that the final of the second member
(^tTCT?) preceded by sn^ and ^ gets the acute, then there would have been no
operation
sutra.
of the next sutra, for the present would have covered the case of
necessity
U^mfa? &c
frut
of the
because snr
is
not a part of the second tetm
compound (Samasa) ^<*hK1; and
sutra,
by saying
fallen
on f
uttarapada
f *nft
>
therefore, if we translated the present
that the end of second term gets acute, the accent wpuld have
even by this sutra.
in nagrofoff:
But
not intended, because
this is
of the accent of the samasanta words arf^P and afl"^:

There is necessity of
the next sutra, because a samasa includes not only the simple samasa, but one
II
ending with a samasanta
Therefore, had not the next sutra been
affjx.
the accent would have fallen pn
35
and not on
f, for the affix 35^
is
part of the samasa and not of the uttarapada spTrcTFcT ^rerereq^rearef
*?ft ijjSh;
II
?\s?
173.
in the affix
the
<shc
^MiM^
II
^r or ^ and ending
(Y. 4.153) has acute on the syllable preceding
the last sutra the accent would have fallen on qr*, this
%thf% F3fl*$$
*3T
sift,
Bahuvrihi formed by
on the vowel preceding
^f%:
11
affix.
By
fall
*><j,
<*ttf%
II
made
considered
ii
^ft S^t ***
<rt srfi sftfT
*rrr%
aftf
Thus
it.
BTfWrtfsfefop, STfq&far:,
q^rft p^r^r, a^sm*,

^Ptr^rcrs ^jtmt *r, ^Farrss^rrr
11
11
makes it
aTSW^^F:, 5^-
^(îtIh
to
^rfq- <re<fr
)ii
^35?
11
When the compound ends in a light vowel,

the syllable before such last, in a Bahuvrihi
on
the acute falls
and U to which *& is added.
preceded by
Thus sriTOi^r:, îfflf^ *Pi!w, U^fi n%r:, CTTO: The r e=
174.
>
petition of
in this
sutra,
though
its
anuvritti
was present from the
last.
Bk. VI. Ch.
II 184.
1201
shows, that in the last aphorism, the syllable preceding
3^
takes the acute,
while here the syllable preceding the short-vowel-ending
final
syllable has the
acute and
which
is,
not the syllable
two
at least, of
syllables
Therefore, in st^Nv and
VI.
2.
173, because
when
it
rer
175.
*n*,
fgtjJW:,
the acute
on the syllable preceding
is
3^ by
has here no antyat-purvam.
it
^^H^rR^^
as
This is possible with a word

not counting, of course, |f and zr or 3^ ).
preceding ^pr
11
\*\
<T3rft
11
<*ft: f
11
Bahuvrihi with
*rg,
^crfTRM^^ji^r
11
has the same accent
denotes muchness of the object expressed by
the second member.

In other words a Bahuvrthi with the word
is
governed by
all
as Rules VI.
Particle such
172 &c.
2.
when
as VI.
172.
2.
mg&W f^^
,
TfW
by VI.
Tf^J, WffiPPi
given by Dr. Bohtlingk.
Why
do we say
'
2.
the
Thus
4g4<tr%3T
gnlM 3i by VI.
:
116: these examples of VI.
uttara-pada-bhumni
denoted by the second member

(VI.
in
first
member,
the sense of multiety
this gives
of the objects denoted by the second member,
fah the same
*f
which apply to a Bahuvrihi with a Negative
those rules
is
when multeity
meant'? Observe *g$
jt^tt
*kftT
:
,
Tf-
arg^:,
2.
174.
2.
116 are not
of the objects
sto = arg*RT sra^
2. 1).
nm ^ Mi
^frT: u *j*rT^r
s^t^t:
on the
l*%
II
qrifa
II
T,
jû^
176.
fall
s^re^rf*r%*|rs* n: arg sftfT TRfHiTT
final
tort
:,
Brewr. (sf^TtTtO
11
In a Bahuvrihi, after ^5, the acute does not

of ?jnr &c. when they appear in the compound
as ingredient of something else.

Thus SfJjwip
W&K VW, *Te^**f *&*& ( VI. 2. I ). ^Trft is
an Akrtigana. Why do we say " when it denotes an avayava or ingredient " ?
r^
As ^^W^^:=3T^2WFr^rT^?nrnTf^rs5r?i^r:
1 ajar, 2 3T$TC,
3-trcmfr*
Tq^,
3*^3, 4
*TtK, 5
w# ^nrrg w
n *
3T?dKlTlH
^fr*rnr. STT^frFT'T.
w
q^n%
11
^<totH ^^to;,
srp*,
II
A word
denoting a part of the body, which

constant (and indispensable), with the exception of qg, has,
177.
after a Preposition in a
Jast syllable.
Bahuvrihi compound, the acute on the

.
End- acute Second-member.
1202
Thus
qr^:, JPÎ=;
srjf:,
say 'after a Preposition'
'?
II
'
II
Why do we say
sr snrrer \$<
11
%frP
ii
srercr*n%
33Pfta<*aT?:
II
mm,
11
'
is
used
Why
II
do we
'
is
the
?r
temporary and not perma-
Observe 1<m j
(
*rel<t
After a preposition,
compounds of every kind.

Thus srebf *SS3*, RfW irm>^t>m,
word samasa'
*mr&,
^fa^rTf^^5*sPTft<TCWi $1 *
178.
in
<nrrr%
W$3'-
with the exception of q%

11
*T
Cri. II. . 182
Why
Why
of cursing and not always, so the state of sgrf

nent.
W%
<jg
Bk. VI.
do we say part of the

do we say 'dhruva constant and indisHere the hand is raised up only at the time
Observe
Observe srerntr f$P

pensable' ? Observe ^grrf etffsnir
body
*m
*KH
flTrfrT
:,
3r?t^ren*
f%%fj:
(VI. 2.
1).
ll
11
g^r
has acute on the final
changed to
in the sutra to indicate that all
or
by VIII. 4. 5. The
compounds are
sorts of
meant, otherwise only Bahuvrihi would have been meant.
*pb:
?vW*
II
<T3Tfa
II
After
179.
Thus
when a
11
94*dîT
^p
ll
*wn
11
the acute falls on the final of r

is made in order to make
oxytoned,
3T?cTT
\\
This sutra
preposition (upasarga) does not precede.
srenST
II
?<So
q^TI%
II
II
3T?cT:,
II
^^^5fwr^^5^ÔTfrrf wlr n
The word ar?crr has acute on the
180.
preceded by a Preposition.
Sf^p
11
Thus
jt
ffrfJ
!jfJ
fafes*rro;
ii
:
>
T^
K*\
II
This
II
ll
<*ttr
a Bahuvrihi or a
is
?T,
ll
re, f^Rrrac, (
fa ft f^rrrorg'^rT^rsft ^r^renfr nsra
The word
181.
srrff
final
when
compound.
3T?^TtT:
II
11
antar has not acute on the
after the prepositions re and re

Thus rfccT s3cT> here the first member
final,
II
is
then substituted for the vowel
to svarita
by VIII.
11
ll
182.
After
^ft,
acute,
and semivowel
changed
is
*n5S, Has acute
on the
qreaRffo, <mrfr?<*,
or an Avyaylbhava.
If it is
ll
wz&k
1^:, srnrcr.-mfo,
ll
11
a word, which expresses some-
and that
thing, which has both this side
Thus
its
2. 4.
\<q
<rnre
q^ftrfpfTn^ *<i^ra;
^"^
î^nm mi*
f r>r: u Ml iqfo %*rppHre
word
retains
then the subsequent 'grave
f,
side, as
well as the
final.
Tfw*sS*
ll
This
is
a Bahuvrihi or jnff
an Avyayibhava, then rule VI.
2,
33
is
compound
superseded,
Bk
VI. Ch.
and the
II
86
member does
first
not retain
original accent.
its
1205
8rfa?f:
= 3>TOflf:
'on
both sides, srfw>TrfrSTOrfttT - arfa^prrri^ 'that which has both sides: namely
those things which have naturally two sides such as 'banks', 'shores' &c.
^TFm*
l<*<rfl*f
\ftT*
?<^
II
q^T^
II
After
183.
STTc*,
II
z^wM wtfz
JTr^rT^T^T^TJf^rN" *r;roi faro
II
*W&H
frqW H
I
II
II
a word, which does not denote a
sr,
when the compound
part of body, has acute on the final,
is
name.
Thus
II
^r
?<a*
11
11
11
q^rft
11
4IMV4l u 4'ril?rTnft
PU*<*M$rPr *T
ft^*>i<ftft
\\
*m%
w^ttTH
*, (
II
The words fn^^ &c, have acute on the finaL
184.
R^^, f^r^r &c.
Thus fa^fo,
Rwfoh
9 fastfbr, 10
S*srfta,
!hr^
jfc^T*,
rS^nrtfft
^frT:
Why do we say 'not denoting a body

Why do we say 'when a Name'? Observe mftgq
w<i*i, ifipifa, mil**.
Observe
part'?
11
R<,i^
These may he considered
12 stf^rc, 13
either as Jnft
M^m^î^sV
^mfin 14
,
W*W
or Bahuvrihi.
If
they
be considered as avyayi bhava compounds then they are end acute already by
VI. I. 223. The word fWtlrWP = f^FRF <*H<Klffc is a Pradi-samasa with the
The word id#<J is tnus formed: to the

ending in the affix cjj^
have
and
we
affix
the
added
?rft ( Un III. 158) sffa <m% = <TftT:;
root
i
word
to
The
RCTfrfi: ^ formed by adding the affix
$fc^<T ^r^TJ =55TdTJ H
word
3fn^
11
?r is
the Bahuvrihi
R^ft
final after
as,
<rft,
3T*rijp=n*
fTrTJ
II
II
The words
11
qif^:, TKTTf:,
?**
srfir
As, srf^pfb*
bhava, then
177, even
it
H^
II
It is
body even,
ll
\*\
as
II
<tf^tf|:
II
jpsn*, ( ar- d
K HH )
II
jpr has acute on the
a Bahuvrihi or a
5^ would have oxytone
snrpg11
sm:,
would have acute on the
not a Bahuvrihi, when
fr%
and
anb 3?% have acute on the
sfTST
final
when
II
the additional declaration that
part of
II
II
The word
185.
preceded by
<TTC#ftP,
<r^n%
II
3T^Tt|4sl^l^^T
s^T, TTf
it
after
3*3T is
srrR"
final
samasa.
by VI.
I.
If
223
^ri%
11
in
srqn*,
srwFFTt 5*?rc^t^ **n%
an Avyayi-
also.
By
VI.
2.
an upasarga, the present sutra makes
oxytone even when the compound
does not denote an indispensable
was the case
it is
VI.
=sr,
2.
177.
Thus
^dûm
pirt
3TPT5*hT ?XUft
) M
is
of body, or a
II
End-Acute Second-member.
1204
The word g^ has
186.
BK
VI, Ch.
acute on the
II.
190
after
final,
the preposition srtf

The compound is in orie case Avyayibhava
Thus srt^tft, 3fTidf
The separation of this from
also, when rule VI. 2. 33 will be superseded*
II
'
the last sutfa,

vritti
of
sfq-
for the
is
ii
sake of the subsequent aphorism, in which the anu-
only goes.
faM 4d ^farrsft^ $ f$**rffa^ r*r

1
*rr*T
3far, st^j, ^"^rac tf$t, ^ffc tUt, srm,
187.
final
?<s^
sfforr, 3rsr*r,
a plough
Mîft
Ii
Riwi,
ll
*jjt,
The words f^T, ^,
an d a word denoting
when preceded by 3*<T
smr^C
',
span*,
5%,
have acute on the
II
Thus arrrcqf^, srr$?3, 3TT#n^, mrs^:, sfmsfT ( This ordains acute on

the final where the compound apadhwa does not take the samasanta affix a^
by V. 4. 85, when it takes that affix, the acute will also fall on the final because
srr
is
This further shows that the samAsanta affixes are
f*T? affix. )
not compulsory.
(3TFT?Tsr ?JiraF?n)>
*T<T$ftr:, STTîfc
sTT3
j
,
3Tqr^S, WFtik
II
Some of these
ffif? compounds or Bahuvrihi or Avyayibhavas.
viz. ffm, *rT and rf^: will be end-acute by VI. 2. 177, also when they denote
parts of body and a permanent condition and the compound is a Bahuvrihi.
Here the compound must not be a Bahuvrihi, nor should these words denote
parts of body and permanent condition of these parts.
These are
*riteqR*
ffrTi
II
11
ST^tT^THSWHT
qarrft.ii
11
3T?rfr?TTt
W<T
^:,
s-qftwn,
a^d^NH )
11
188.
After 3TT%, that word, which denotes that
which
thing
overlaps or stands upon, has acute on the final.
Thus srf^f: =^H**ll

ther tooth'.
m ^TS^r^^r mvfa
srre^fap, sTf*T%^f
I'
These are
'a
tooth that grows over ano-
Jnf?
samasa or an appositional
compound in which the second member has been dropped. Why do we say
when meaning 'standing upon? Observe stfHfc'Pt. Here the acute is on ^j, the
krit-formed second member retaining its accent (VI. 2. 139).
anitaraR**lN#
(
3T"dt3lTrH
11
\#<
11
q^Tf^r
3R>:,
stspott,
hftmft,
189.
After
3Tj,
a word which
as well as sj^to^C has acute on the final.

The word 3TJp*FT means a word which stands
Thus sT3*T^r ^^=3T5^S 3T3*re?fr
in a compound.
;
not the Principal,
is
in
II
a dependant relation
These arc
snft
samasa
Bk
in
VI. Ch.
II. .
which the
llHad
ipjPT
1205
member is the principal or Pradhana. ST3T^: 3rftaP*.= 8T33r

second member is the Principal: the word *KH|4|*=r is taken as
first
here the
fofa,,
193
been non-pradhana,
it
it
would be covered by the
sutra,
and there would have been no necessity of
Why
do we
first
portion of the
separate enumeration.
Observe 3T3mt 5^g: = BT3*te:, where 5TO
"STiWt"?
say
its
Is
the Principal.
3^TTT^m%^J
means a man of
it
The word
1
M^lPr
II
SW-STSS*^:
arar^q^
after
\<<\
ll
After
191.
and the word

'
TTT:,
Observe
The*
Vdrt
has been elided.
falls
'
',
= ST3i^
II
st&j,
II
sr^^q^H
II
a word not formed by a krit-affix,
srfar,
on the last syllable.

Why do we
srfW%s^, STfcTT^sr^n-
q%, have acute
Thus 9T^f ?%
krit-word and T?
ti^tf*
II
3T^T5^tTfT% ^Th^
rrf%3T? H
II
on the final of 3**,

mention was already made.
whom
means
but 3T3m: SR*r
5^:, ^, ST^Tf^'.
or
of a secondary importance, inferior
having already been mentioned \
Thus ST^rffSf'-
sr*3Tf?
mentioned again
II
After snj, the acute
190.
when
?ô
II
rule
That
is,
is
II
say
'
non-
3Tf?r^n"C^: M
restricted
when
in
to those
analysing the
compounds in which a root

compound a verb like cF^ is
employed to complete the sense. Therefore it does not apply to intn^r

But it would apply to 3TJ%^TT^^*, which when analysed befruj^STrerTTO
to be
II
comes equal
to
fftf^ft
II
s?rcrgrr5rr : tffngt
192.
II
<TTTR
After
*!, 3TTTOT5t, (
II
r%,
the second
an^TTTrn
member
has the acute
when the sense is of not laying down \

=
word
not making manifest
The
Thus ftg**, rjBTOcffrarcr
fyn*PT
These are either Bahuvrihi or pradisamasa. In the case of
W,
their being Avyaytbhava, they would have acute on the final by VI. 1. 223.
Why do we say when meaning not laying down ? Observe PtaTgr = fttfoqro
on the
last syllable,
'
'
F^H
'.
II
'
as
Ftfntfqw
faT*?;
= f*fi\M4 u S:
srfrt^pTCcTcip^ 11^311
193.
&c
The
force of ft
q^rft 11^:,
is
that o5 ftsrpT here.
stsstf^t:,
^5^,
(st^ttTT:)
In a Tatpurusha compound, the words tg

final when preceded by siftr
have acute on the

22
'
II
i2o6
Bk. VI. Ch.
II.
196
Thus q^T^'', ^M^? sn^^T^sff

In the case of *J5F^ this rule applies
when the Samasanta affix tt is not added, when that affix is added, the
:
II
acute will also be on the

1 Big, 2
10
by virtue of
final
ki^% 4 sg, 5
37
I.
),
Why
srfine, 7 srrar,
106
III. 3.
do we say
11
III.
147
srij
^ added
+ bt^ (
ii
2%q
Tatpurusha*? Observe
st^ts^=q:^-
iifrr*Tcrr
II
the final
011
when preceded by
ffo,
FJ7,
r*r*,
6 rafr, 7
3<Trf5R1.
:,
fjCTT
But not so
ll
(ÔTTF) 8
3"% but
cff?srr,
in
9^(5^)
"in a Tatpurusha"? Observe TTTrP STTHTS^ = 3<TCu"*r u
g^n^STT^rt
sren^renr
rr^5^r
After
35,
the
in spite of the addition of
Thus 59
reproach or censure.
when repn
f^m^RS^
II
?^
^s^g^t rr^%
196.
it is
Why
meant
a^.h is
'
II
Ijwf*^
JSTfNST'ft,
verily denotes praise, but
II
111 +
I34) = sr$r; gr +
>ref?r r^q- ^nrr% ^Rr^Nira^r

Tatpurusha,
the words of two syllables
a
Iii
(%T) 3
195.
3TtT:
to srr = 3Tr?t
1.
wt 3t^<t%
second
the final in a Tatpurusha compound,
III.
<Tr3
Why
%Ftp
mg:
^^tt
have acute
iflT,
11
class
:,
cJ?F<T,
8 ,**fj*, 9 ^f^^r,
under the general
<|
with the augment
),
'in the
( STfcftgrTrTRC )
^rr^TTt ststtsft
3TBffi
the affix
not when they are *fn: and the rest.

Thus 3q*mr ^P = 3<nf 3<T?f S<TOtI:, TTfrf
w**m.', s^m* &c.
10
a f^Tj affix.
CT
),
194.
and
is
),
^=re%^cr + r%^=^fT3^(Un
fro
),
to
uw{ is formed by the affix efif?^ ( Un I. 156 3g by adding
(Un IV. 162 f^^ + I^=%?^ arfsfl; is formed by r%r^r (Un I.
53) 3Tr + ?r + 3Tl
11
which
"
'to burn'.
^T^r:,
arsf
^fr ( *nn?f
(srrw 3ttw0
The word irfj is formed by
11 g*
art*.
Un
*r, 3
*T*arei% u
member
which denotes
gf^TrTP-arf
has acute on
when reproach
is
meant,
praise.
The word g here
tjsrenfrarrMl
the sense of the whole sentence that indicates
do we say "after *j"? Observe
Observe
^fr*R!J
R-dr^=^br^
<?^7R irfirarsr,
fairer S^f S^tTF H^rfr
Why
II
srere^Trr: )
ll
ii
In a Tatpurusha,
optionally have acute on the final.
^2^#,
fgutflgw:
the
word
^^^3 may
Bfc VI; Cn.
II
198
1207
When this word

3**Frr: OTI=3*3^ or l^^j: (VI. 2. 2)
then
would always
it
from
affix
s^gf^fa^cîiRr,
the
ar^r
by
is derived
the
VI.
2.
sutra
ordains
final
by
present
option
the
on
144,
acute
have taken
non-Tatpurusha
as,
to
a
apply
not
there also. The rule does
T^^^="
Thus
II
z^
^5^-7*.
ffrP
H^rrt
It
ft Rr serrrrorgTf^ ttt
11
** s^sSf^reffs
^r srfsftft^r fa^rnrr s^r
^t^
11
In a Bahuvrihi, the words
197.
tjrf
and q;^
î;
and {%
have optionally acute on the final after
Thus fr <jr?mg = ftn?t or ftfat, nrch: or flftrs, rtH or Pf vi> nrlôr
is
ff^, ftfit or ft\*rf H The word <TF is TF? with its 3T elided, (V. 4. 140)
the substitute of fnT (V.
141) and
4.
w^ retains
\\
its
not allowing samasanta
This also indicates that the samasanta rule is not universal.

affix is added, then also the acute is on the final, for the
affix.
samasanta
the Bahuvrihi compound, and
Why
after ft
by Phit
II.
and
19 and this accent
f^rT*
ft?*rT*>
this
is
only a part of
Observe 3^frmqf here the
f%r?
Why
'
is
retained VI.
Bahuvrihi
'
2.
1.
the
here
Thus ft^:, f^pr^
it.
first
When
cjrrqt is
member
Why
'<TT^
Observe ^T*\3T = ft*#
is
It
middle acute
&c
'
Observe
II
( fir^TT^T ) H
The word ws&f has
198.
tionally,
inss
11
STcE*r is
the samasanta
jfrcsrenj: or $&P5*T*, *tS$-3rcr^h or

aiqt
and
>FS$3r
by
a word ending
by q^
13) a PT<^ affix-
(V.
4.
q^n%5c^?^ra
II
form of
s^&k
^T^r^TTTJT^:^
11
^35*r?raf:
(V.
both end-acute.
which
<T3TRt
?j^f?T
The word
^^rera^:
c?r^ (TJn III. 19) are
Observe
in ?$'?
^To
op-
when preceded by any word other than what ends
The word
5^rf?
acute on the final
11
is
113,).
Why
always oxytone as
<rof^:,
*^fn3trT ^*giWlR*
4.
11
Thus
being formed by
^^ftr,
'not after
it is
^^k
formed
\\
1208
The
199.
syllable
first
Bk. VI. Ch.
of the second
II.
199
member
is
diversely acute, in the Veda.

The word qx " the second member " refers to *rarcr, as well as to any
other word in general. Thus ajfr^ ^farefor, but <$m?iq<* qr; so also JT3*T5
In the non-Vedic literative these last two compounds will be
*RFTf^:, fa"<T*fa
final acute by VI. 1. 223, rule VI, 2. 18 not applying because of the prohibition
:
II
contained in VI.
The
first syllable
syllable
2. 19.
" In the Veda, the

is rather too restricted.
It ought to be
and the final syllable of the second member, as well as the final
rule
and the
first syllable of the preceding
acute accent, in supersession of
As
this
to
Vdrtika
where the
In
final
all
member
are seen to have the
the foregoing rules".
of the second terms takes the acute,
the Veda, f^TSfi
&c have
we have
acute on the final of the second
As f*r^r, f%3T*p<T, nrf rfrwr,

rc^r gref^rof
As to where the final of the preceding takes the acute, we have this
Vdrtika
The words H^ljj,^ &c in the Vedas have acute on the final of the
first term.
As Hî<j^ and fa^f
As to where the first syllable of the preceding takes the acute, we
have this Vdrtika
In the Veda, the words ft^nm &c have acute on the
first syllable of the first member.
As fi ^K i^rq *nHliq %
term.
11
11
II
II
BOOK SIXTH.
Chapter Third
îH<M%
3TT rl\R^*|W
V^lfe
H ? H
3T^S, ^tKM^
II
II
II
In the following upto VI. 3. 24 inclusive is

always to be supplied the phrase " the elision does not take
1.
member
place before the second
The words bt^^

member "
are to
'
there
point whence
that
sutra VI.
24, jointly
commences
',
and S^TCTf
"
while grrrw extends further upto
jurisdiction
the
before the second
Both these words
of
srjf
VI.4.
).
says "the affixes of the Ablative after 'stoka' &c".
3.
3.
elision
compound".
subsequent sutras.
in the
be supplied
govern the sutras upto VI.
no
is
of the
present sutra should be read
there to complete the sense,
e. g.
Thus
The
" the affixes
of
member of the
&c
".
=
Why
do
we say " becompound
Thus Wrm<l S*K* W 3W ^cMI***-*:
"?
Observe r*?fptj: ^rafrr?J=rT-*5frep
The maxim
fore the second member
are not elided before the second
the Ablative after stoka
II
11
of pratipadokta does not apply here.
T3RTT. ^*lf^>"^:
II
TÎR
II
II
TÊTr:, ^T^rf^F^:,
3T97
||
* firU*^8THT Hl*lffa'rr*3r T*TOT' <T>^"**ir î^ S^*T^T%

2.
The Ablative-ending after ^JN &c is not elid-
ff^T* H ^rhl Prf
II
ed before the second member of a compound.

Thus
?TTW :
^fefrrwf;:,
VBTrfW
compound
are elided.
is
II
By
I.
STFtCTSJiCT:,
2.
called pratipadika,
and by
Therefore, in forming the
ending required to be dropped.

^TT?K
&c
in
STfareTTTPT^.
46, a case-inflected
The
the dual and plural
this rule does not
apply to them.
words and not compounds,
for not
are
II. 4.
ST^gTT Î I ^M I rf
-,
gLWW
f%JT^CT-
word when forming part of a

71 the endings of a Pratipadika
compound of ^fr^n^
w^j:,
present sutra prevents that.
the ablative
The words
never compounded, and consequently
Thus
?sfi^rlt ***'-,
*<Tr%**r *?*: are
separate
being treated as compounds, these are not
Non-elision of case-affix.
t2io
one Pada
[Bk. VI, Ch.
one word, and do not have one accent,
fn^TT? ^ or
III. 5
for in one
word,
Thus while ^r^flrJW being one compound word will

have one acute (VI. 1. 158, VI. 2. 144), the word ^rTT^P-stf 5^ being treated as
two words, will have separate acute accents. The above compounding takes
place by II. I. 39.
Vdrt
The word OTSTTrs^flra; should be enumerated in this connection.
Here also the Ablative is not elided. Thus ^rgjoTT^f^ sraT<f = STgrrr-
there
only one acute.
is
*3gf*K
"
a kind of Ritvik priest
3TT3T.
^r.,
".
^|4.'44W4H*<idWn:
^ftptp
sr^p&
II
T^TR
II
II
STR^T, *H^T, 3TOTCT rm-
II
The Instrumental endings
3.
srora and cTJW are not elided before the
after
^H,
3rni%
second member
of a
compound.
Thus
STnTCTPUrT*, ^^TTfvrPT, 3TS*rcmFJrPT, rTTSr^rT*
3T>^FT also should be enumerated.

Vdrt The compounds ^l^pp and
Vdrt
srf*Trp
Thus^TT fg^TT^ = Jsrrîf

another name of *r?*T^ birth
ed.
is
Thus
should also be mention-
*t^ff f^rrs?^:=^5<?r?^:
3T>ircftlrnT "
The word
ll
5T3
'
jt^tct:
&4wm
'.
<T^rr?r h
11
After *r*t
4.
itto:, <h$nih,
sr^s
when the compound
the Instrumental endings are
not elided
before
ll
is
Name,
the second
member,
Thus
Observe
*r%?rrr,
srr^rpTR
fprT:
ii
*FRjiTrrr, sr^rerrgffr,
f TTSHT
Why
tttt%
ll
II
^Tin-farf*,
^,
^rr^rf^'STT^T^ *rst s^reTOrestfrarar 3W>ref?r
*T*re=r
st^k
II
11
Also before sTr^T^, the Instrumental endings
are not elided.
Thus T^nfrna^'^rcttss^ni sjrtto
3TT^T^
II
II
V5J&
II
11
3TT?**:,
% 1?*
The Instrumental endings

when an Ordinal Numeral follows.
6.
elided
do we say 'when a Name'?
11
^ Ml
5.
of
fTSTTOnwr
^^F
) N
after strip;
are not
Bk
vi. Cn. ill
1211
Thus 3TPH HN-^H srrc +H N^

The Instrumental case here takes place
under the Vartika {pffarfTCnT qârrforrffT^^H (II. 3- 18 Vart). And compounding takes place by II. i. 30, by separating r jHim of that aphorism and
; ,
II
making it a separate sutra or in this way: rnnnm %&'> <fî:*=3Jl<*MN^R:

How do you explain the form sTftH-^M" in 4Hlfc*t!4lcH Nd*i ^? It is a 13ahuvrlhi compound = 3Trc*ir *T$rqfsTO
The word ^1 is a later addition of the
II
>
>
II
Vartikakara.
*m*i)
11
7.
The Dative case ending is not elided after sttcjhc
when the compound is the name of a technical term of grammar.
Thus
34icHHM3i, 3TIc*R*rrerr
yoga-bibhaga of sutra
II.
36,
1.
The compounding
ll
and the
takes place by the
force of the Dative
here that of
is
tadartha.
q*w ^r
ff%:
tos
11
11
=*r
<
T^rft q^*r, ^r, ( st^sf

rT^r%*r^n:^r^*RT^Hw
11
) n
11
*r ^nj$f
11
8.
The Dative ending is not elided after *rc, when
compound is the name of a technical term of grammar.
Thus toWs, TO*r*rrqT
^^cTR*rcn*TP H^rroro n ^
q^rfa ^st^ctt^, *th**tt:, ^t3T^F
WK, (
the
11
11
*rrr%3Fi
11
^ratrV:
9.
ending
in a
11
11
The Locative ending
consonant or a short
st,
is
not elided after a stem
when the compound
is
Name.
Thus
nant, yet
it
gfvrft?;:,
retains
its
<3T%*nT
ireiS*
Though
ll
*?r
does not end
Locative ending by virtue of VIII.
3.
95
which shows by implication that *ti% is governed by this

ending words: as 3t?%%w-, si^Vrrrerr:, g%r%js&r:, 3R?flff*7:,
^RR^T f^Fnrein^P
:
bt"?
Observe
ll
Vdrt
f?R?P?:
II
*t^ )
11
So
rule.
also
?pfar?3r*rajp,
am-
^fr^F-
Why
do we say "after a word ending in a consonant or

= H^l[?>iîT, *3T 7OT-- = ]RTOrP
Why do we
Observe 3T^T:
spot jr^3g^gFir
say 'when a Name'?
conso-
in a
(Tf%f?R**T falT:)
The Locative ending
ll
II
is
not elided after g^ and'^g;
as
ff^^r,
Non-elision of caê-affix.
i2\2
The
10.
stem ending
Locative-case affix
consonant or a short
in a
of the Eastern people,
when
III. . 12
not elided after a
is
name
in the
sr,
the second
Bk. VI. Cn.
member
of a tax
begins with a
consonant.
All these are names of
Thus fw^, SWW*:, s^ffqf^FT, ?%i%Tf^T
and would have retained the Locative ending even by the last rule.
The present rule makes a niyama or restriction, which is threefold, namely (1)
when it is the name of a tax, and no other word, ( 2 ) when it belongs to the
II
taxes,
Eastern people and no other people,
and when the second member begins
with a consonant.
Why
sp*tffrTT15
do we say when
the
It is
name
say "of the Eastern people
'a
" ?
name
Observe sparr^TU *?
but not of a 'tax'. Why do we
Observe wlpT|j: = a^rT3J
Why do we say
the
it is
of
duty or
of a tax.
VI.
2.
11
II
'
65.
*s*n<f;sr
??
11
II
m&fa
ll
st^k
*rerr<*, ?jfr,
TÎ^tRHIM UH*3I ^rirTCTf

NlM*i* 3T5rTI%r% ^Jxfi^H. H
ffrT*
member beginning with a consonant ? Observe 3Tf%37 SOT =

So also Tîf ft^ = ?rfrfMl" U For accent of these words see
before a second
erfachiK^:
dues',
S^^TqTfrT
II
11
II
II
The Locative
11.
when g^
As, jf^kj^
Vdrt
3T?ET&, (
case-affix
is
not elided after
jtt
follows.
11
So also after
ST^F
3T*?T
as 3T^?J^J
II
II
The Locative
12.
case-affix
not elided after a
is
word denoting a part of the body (with the exception of

^hj^ and *T^T3f>), before every word other than ^mr
||
Thus
TOp
name
it
wz
^T^rs^ = ^^n^:, ^m^r*rr, ^^rfor:
5FT^rs^l-5^^TT!
II
of a part of the body,
apply when the
*ro
first
xr ftn*r*T
11
When
11
first
member does not denote the

as 3TS*WT
nor does
the rule does not apply
member does
the
t^tt%
But g^ransT, ^rT^r-
11
not end in a consonant or
11
*ro, ^, firmer,
3T,
sr^s
as ar^jf^FP,
) n
BK. VI. CH.
Ill 17
NON-BLISION OF CASE AFFIX.
The Locative
13.
ed after a word ending
in a
case-affix
121 3
optionally not elid-
is
consonant or
3T
before *fv
ll
Thus gfrH-9 or f^rar^:, ^JM- q* or ^^T?^: n This declares an option,

with regard to the last rule, in a Bahuvrihi when the first member is a ^rjf
word, and also it is an option to VI. 3. 19, when the compound is a Tat*
purusha, whether the
When
the
As
apply.
first
*jra*?q:
?f *3^q- 5ff*uiT
||
w.
a vowel (other than
in
is
formed word.
does not
the rule
sr),
ll
cTr^ %fo *$K

ff^ff 5
The word
be ^TT or not.
member ends
first
II
?*
iF&ft
II
cTc*
II
3^,
3JRT
*%&*,
3T^F
II
*W^TO *1H**U ^f^T^f>T^frT H
In a Tatpurusha compound, when the second

a word formed with a krit affix, the Locative end-
14.
member
ing
is
optionally preserved.
As **r^w, qtdHnr*, but also
is
$4rK:,
The Locative ending
15.
5R^, *ra and frf when

Thus mffiN
^frsr:,
;,
*r
fiwrr 353R3RCTJ3
^^?
ffrf:
*$
11
is
3iUM
?$
This sutra
ll
q^n%
11
ll
f^n^r,
W ^ SS^* TtTTOT:
*TRir 5T
3TC
sr^",
^rc,
Thus
11
but an extension
srl, *$*,
St^T? ft^r Sg*I^f<r
The Locative ending is

5TC, and ^: when gr follows.
srshr:
y*i<*dî
ffrp
is
^nj;,
src,
11
16.
after
retained after snf^,
follows.
:, Rfiî:
or amplification of the previous sutra.
TJpstt'.
or
^W:,
qnraffircr.
to9% srera w&m*i
ll
$TC*r:
?\s
or
11
<pnrera "^
II
optionally retained
TOP
TOP
srrsr., *re*r:
or ^T5T:,
q^rr%
*ra>, cr^f , ^nra sifep,
ll
sr,
top ctcctot sttctop
or
II
*nrir f^rorr
(sr^)
spî
II
The Locative ending is optionally retained after

a word denoting time ending in a consonant or st when cPO* or
17.
cnr^ or the
?
The
word zr&
affixes 5*
and 55 are
5,^> 3*3,** or S*nj,S*
Why
or the affix cHT follows.
do we say
^ :
II
called
sr (I.
^Tf.^flH or
1.
name
Thus q:
22).
^SRR*
II
rPT
^rj?
rf^
: ^frjcT%
or g^r-
or
^rj-
Observe 3J$?k, 3RE3%

The
condition that the preceding word should end in a consonant or 3j applies
here also.
Thus no option is allowed in *u%HTCT*
*p*
11
'
after a
time
'
ll
11
23
Non-elision of case afeix.
X214
Bk. VI.
Cii. III.
20
As a general maxim, an affix denotes whenever it is employed in

Grammar a word-form which begins with that to which that affix has been
added, and ends with the affix
ST^rjpjJ
Thus the word
tl
affix &c.
But
r,
2.
s^r?*;
*cTCf^
*T ptffrT
WS5
144 means a word ending
in tr
so far as the jurisdiction of >jtHH ? goes, an
this chapter,
in
Oîjfbf
itself
ar^ &c in VI.
affix does not denote a word-form ending in that affix, on the following
maxim STrcq^rfwft srBWrc?5r T rTf *4$<n*t ; on the contrary the affix denotes
Thus rf*;, rTT and rTT here do not denote a word ending in these
This rule we infer from the fact that in sutra VI. 3. 50, the author
affixes.
declares " %% is the substitute of ^f^ when the word ?m, and the affixes 3^,
Had the affix ar<* here meant the word-form ending
3Tot, and FSRT follow ".
own-form.
its
in
then there would have been no necessity of using the word
3T<*r,
sutra, as
%^
is
formed with the
means the word-form z$m
ar^r
See Sutra IV.
II
The word
affix.
3.
The Locative ending is

words ?m, wra" and mftrqc when
?j^r in
II
retained
optionally
the preceding word
do^s not denote time, and ends in a consonant or short

Thus
or
the
the aphorism
23 for the affix rpr
18.
before the
3^ in
sr
II
irmTCP or UFRTCP, qm^rr%^ or tTTT^rn%^ n After

After a vowel ending word (other than sr)
a time-name we have s^fjot*
drcra:,
ssrerg:,
II
we have
>rf*rcra
Vdrt:
or the
nq[
affix
The
sfyjr
Locative case-affix
added by treating
is
^Ttt*.
follows.
or it^*
3T<i
?5T^r flrarers? ss?rrar
11
Thus
is
retained
after
sn^pftpn, stosjj:, 3T^H*#
srewir
II
as belonging to the f^rff class
^ <T*rP
ar*
bt^t h^t%
(sr^
when
The
w,
IV.
?npr,
affix
3.
54).
11
The Locative ending is not preserved before

stem ending in ^, before the word j%^, and before a word
19.
derived from srro

Thus wF3<*4iifrat, srarr^trcrer:, ^rfcr^rcrer, ^w^'^Wy *h**w*
The compounding takes place by yoga-vibhaga of sutra II. 1. 40. Some use
II
11
the word ^ras*f as an illustration under this rule

s
The ^r ending
sp* of
III.
sutra
an exception to VI.
is
$r
ff^T:
II
1.
134-
^ m^ran*
W ^TtTW
20.
in the
11
HI TOT
11
3.
in
is
g-?qr
then
is
governed by VI.
derived by
3.
This
13.
14.
q^n%
11
d, ^,
SnTOT 3T^*H HTO"
sthjftps,
The Locative ending
spoken language.
) (
sr^^
11
II
is
not preserved before
Bk. VI. Ch.
Ill 22.
Thus m"*rpr
c^:
11
fi%'.
11
3TT5f7t^t
*r<>
11
Rl
I)
*rgrq^r
?rrn
^ptt fra f^nr
11
:
,
*%*IW
qc[n%
II
f**r*r
fi%
^r
compound
^g^r bt^t t?t^:
The
Vdrt
after
Vdrt
fT, an d
is
and
enumerated
9T3^
II
in
in the T3Tff class
The author of Siddhanta Kaumudi

not elided
devanam-priya
in
"
There
*t% has been
gf^jj,
(IV.
1.
in
is
99) and
takes
q^37
^TS^^S Tr^^STTS^Hran'
the
compound %^Hrf73:
is
II
that of a fool, the
no authority
Mahabhashya or the Kasika. This was the

monarch Asoka, who would not have adopted
?.
the following words arrg-
says "when the sense
in the
%f%
meant
is
the Genitive Singular of the
is
formed by f^ (V. 1. 133) u So also srnjssfrf^n" U

Vdrt
The Genitive affix is not elided
The phrase
insult
As, ^Nrgf^Fr, fûT'Y:,
II
not elided
affix is
is
hist
when the
not elided after qrsK when followed by
is
forming the Patronymic, BT5^rqîL=STTS531Pr3P>
is
retained
do we say when
a ft e r q-^r^ before 9*
Pronoun
affix
II
ii
Why
it
an d sTrg^Sfn^rr
II
The Genitive
3T$?r,
3T^^
aTHfirer, (
affront or insult \
'
3nrT:, STTSs^gf^RT
in
the Veda, as in ^'JTT^jt-
11
The Genitive
before
f$*r
in
11
Genitive case affix
expresses an
*ugjui$<4i|>
<T^:.
3t^*hî%
Thus WTOiTFTO., l^H^Î.

Observe
106.
3.
II
3rn$TC3
12 15
f^q^ntfr a fa>i ^Vi wrcRsawsPra^r
st^tRS*:
*reir
21.
But
by VIII.
3rr^rtr T*?rer% srreq% *rs*ir
*rrPforo n
*rr
5p???t
changed to
g- is
*WW
for this,
either
of the famous Budd-
title
it, had it
meant a fool
added by Bhattoji Dikshit through Brahmani'.
cal spite.
not elided
The Genitive
%q:, ^: ^5":, fjHRT^
not elided
Vdrt The Genitive
Vdrt
*nj^ follow
affix is
it
spf.
jlr
STtP
ii
s^rpc^t*
gw^B^TT^ff
is
11
rr
srr^rtt
ii
q^n^
t^tt^
not meant
sreir:
when
*%*
3%, ^wrcrcwni:,
and
^r
follows
as
) H
is
st^k
11
optionally retained
5^: or ?n=rf^T, f^^T- $*', or fsntfq^:
we have
II
But when
when
insult
srr3Ti?5^r: U
^Fft fesrahfororfiw \\R\w

(
s;*irr*s3f *resir 9Tsf**nrfa
The genitive affix

meant, when j^r follows.
Thus
is
g^
11
22.
insult
*j^ when %q,
after ft*
affix is
Wfarcp
after
II
ifuft
3?n, ftsrr,
*ftft,
*jT^?^r:,
Non-elision of the case-affix.
12 18
anomalous use there being no Dvandva compounding

3r?rcfr^:
\l
II
TTift
11
For 3^*r
31.
^ttht,
3W.,
here,
III. 34.
PTW 'jRHfr
sjrfr
$^Trse*t
substituted
is
Bk. VI. Ch.
II
^rerr in a devata-
dvandva.
Thus
mdiftcK
gqmiJ|1, ^RTRtFT
i
^MiH
is
?f^T:
^^ffani;,
formed by
sncjjr
^ ^*rfa
substitution of the
\\
5?^T f^TT^
farTCPTRtT ff?T
m of
*TT
The
II
II
<*?rfa
II
In the ordinary language
II
fanT,
niruftrrtr
is
is
valid.
is
The Vedic
added to the
3?r
m ir^rr farW-
11
^-tfifors^r^f, ^t^rtt%^^
feror.
fW^,
fW$%
II
the proper form.
derived
*rra*r^
Î%,
*TRTCT, ^T,
by adding sr^ to the first member, and Brr

second by VII. I. 39 and then Guna by VII. 3. no. Thus
is
other form
II
In the Vedas the form ft'cKiuicm
33.
form
11
11
ftcKWM<l
II
fonr,
<*TTfo H Tr^r,
a valid form.
JTrarrfcrcr is
is urarfarreir
According to the Northern Grammarians,
32.
This
11
II
r%*rorjT*jftfa*nf^[
ll
3*
II
11
11
In the room of a feminine word there
34.
tituted an equivalent
is
subs-
and uniform masculine form, when
it is
a word which has an actual corresponding masculine, and

does not end in the feminine affix 3^, and is followed by another feminine word in the relation of apposition with
not
when such subsequent word
ftnr
&c.
The words
nine word',
the
is
spoken
of
the mascul ine",
a feminine word.
i.
e.
i.
e.
but
an ordinal numeral, nor
of this sutra require a detailed analysis
$^ "like
room of
is
it;
fwrr:
'for
a femi-
a substitute like the masculine takes
*TI fa r| ^<^h I <t
= sfrfirayrregfa by which
a masculine
a word which has an equivalent masculine, the correspond-
Bk. VI. Cn.
III.
Masculisation.
34]
1219
ence must be
that
is
in the form (3TT?sr^) and the connotation ( anq H j of the two words;
the words are coextensive in their denotation, applying to
both
when
i
A word which has not the affix

That feminine word which does not end in 3^ and has a
corresponding masculine word, having the same form and connotation, ( of
the
same
3j|F is
objects, but of different genders.
called ar^^F
II
course, with the exception of affixes
word Hri^lt!^^ 2
Of such
form.
ls
vfTT Nr<HH\ l
a Bahuvrihi, the
called a Hil MftJ=M^< ^ffas?
is
fifth
affix
apposition with the
II
The
1^< feminine word, there is the substitution of a masculine

member is a ( SRT?rrfa3iTO ) e. a word in
Provided that, the second
tion of an Ordinal
not elided anomalously.
is
first,
i.
and (f%Rir*) of the feminine gender
numeral
^ror
with the excep-
and of fro &c.
Here *?fat*r is a feminine word

( =**MUir*(W? *TC*1 )
masculine
word
of
the
same form and force, namely,
corresponding
having a
in
the affix 3^, but in the affix
feminine
does
not
end
^nfcfcr:, moreover this
Thus S^rftwS:
by another feminine word *rntf which is in the same case with

nor included in the fw*irR class hence this
it, and which is not a Numeral
word f ^Wim is changed to the corresponding masculine word *%nfa II So also
Why do we say f%rar: 'for a feminine word'? Observe inTPI
qaWi ^m-^
fl fr^s p
Why do we say which has an appropriate maswrgT'T^y OTTOl = WfWUk'*
There is no corresponding masculine
culine ( MriHd^^Fr: ) ? Observe Q15POT&
Why do we say " of the same connotation and form *tHMI4im$;fr" ?
of TgT{
Observe frfiPTRTi the masculine word ypr has not the same significance as fftnfr H
The words *Tpf*rr3P, JTg<pTT2p, and snricrvrR: are anomalous. Why do we say
Why do we say 'both words being
not ending in 3j^? Observe sJgîJVTrsp
Observe ehr4I u 3Wldl = chr4lin the same case and referring to another person'?
Why do we say f&wz 'followed by a feminine
tjft^rrTT "the mother of Kalyani".
Here the second memword '? Observe ^j?^r^ft sreFRTT = 3^r"fbreRr: ( ?t)
ber srvrpr is a Neuter word. Why do we say 'not being an ordinal Numeral ?
Observe 3?3Fft q>^*ft 3TSTT rTP = %c*U<flr 7*"I*W<I*W, so also <fiem<iu^l*TT M The
Ordinal Numbers must be the Principal Ordinal and not the secondary DerivaSTT
it is
followed
t,
II
II
II
II
II
II
tive
Therefore the rule applies
Ordinals.
samasanta
affix snr
V.
4.
is
does not take
3T<r
Why
II
3 *&?mvft, 4
gwj,
^rr,
14
compound
3VTF?v
is
^1
11
II
The
^km,
6 *n%, 7 srf^rer,
wfu farer)
anomalous.
^ftr^rff jr^r^g^:
a Principal
mr^r, 10 ^rr^Tr, 11 *rrr, 12 ^r^r, 13
1 fsrar, 2 *Rr*rr,
is
and therefore the above compound

do we say not before f^T &c. Observe Qhf4M u flfi<4
used as a secondary word
and not what
here rfjRnWTS^pfNfT: RT
116) also applies to an Ordinal which
Va
^rfarrg^r^rerar t*w<t
^r
error, 16 ar^r
S
11
ii
*&&&
II
^r^rfirf acr^g^r.
,
11
&m > 9
11
The
Masculisation.
i22o
*nr
>rors
11
Bk. VI. Ch.
***w *it *^w* sMrrcr t?r5*:

feminine word not ending in the
srrersr i^nsrnfr
35.
to such masculine form, before the
affixes
3. 7 )
are the affixes before which the feminine
is
affix
gj^
changed
beginning with <T%ar
and ending with f*nr^ ( V. 4. 17

Thus rTTOT: W<WI|: = ?TrP STTOT = rT^, Ê^ft = 3^W ^TT = StfT
V.
36
11
and having an equivalent and uniform masculine,
&c
III.
)
II
The
changed to masculine:
is
*r
following
and
rT*r
fR,^ and fifa ft^

All other affixes do not affect the gender. Thus ^t Wt &c S<H?q <H r,
rfri%?5
#3tatmr, tt^, Mîtf)*ii, *fcftotf??r, s&fcretffar, ^rfra^rr, s^Mfaqrerr zmiFg&u
=^?*r* *ror w*^r = *wt, sttot ^srar = sr^r, *rft &c
^ri and %H*,
****, *rr<fcrc., Wi*V%, *53,
Wfal.5TOr <rr^,
,
*pr
II
11
F^r/:
Taddhita
The feminine of *g and
affix
Vdtt:
affixes *%
ctive'?
and
feminine Adjective
As
<rw H
i\ f *rre :
changed to masculine before the
is
= Tg^
II
cff^^r
The feminine word

except 3, when the word
changed to masculine before
=?n%^
Had
is
II
changed into masculine before the

or q^fr
Why do we say 'an adje-
Observe ^f^r HT^ =WpfF% or

Vdrt\
affixes,
3T?q" is
^: as *5*Nf ?ft=*f^frtfS; terror *ft = si*rat ff*

11
gets the designation of
*T
II
all
Taddhita
Thus
^favftrri
become masculine, then ff^cnft having lost

its f (VI. 4. 148), the word ^ of f^fr^ would not be elided be fore the Taddhta
affix, because the lopa-elision being sthanivat, would have prevented the application of the rule VI. 4. 144, ordaining the elision of the final syllable. So
the form would have been something like ?IT%f^f^ instead of frf^T^?*
Why
do we say 'with the exception of s'? Observe $iH^, uf?%3: the masculine being
The word 3TFTO: ( = sr^zft tTT 3T*3 ^Tn^TTT^^ ) is an excep^fcr and uf|sr
*Tf?
II
the word not
II
11
tion to this rule.
Vdrt:
As
(i
The
H^r
masculine-change takes place before the affixes ssf and
>^prr=*n^^fr:,
spr^nf^ffT^'ll \\
fTrP
II
ll
mftov
11
^tr spw
II
*rifMt:, ^r,
II
3W <M HIHH ^ fW3T HTnr^HK4^ j^^TW

A feminine word not ending in
36.
II
ing an equivalent and uniform masculine,
3J^ and hav-
changed into
and
the
affix n\faz
w^,
:
<?;ft<?wra%, *&%33^% irR^
?sftra*Tr*ft 3TCTTOT: " He
masculine before the Denominative
is
II
Thus from
esteems her as handsome ". W^prrf^fta'TTOr: (%Q* 3TTOP " She esteems her as
handsome
The word HJR*^ is employed for the sake of non-feminine and
non-appositional words. Thus non-feminine words: ^fafaf JRffi^fTTT 3*TfTrf=
'.
Bk
VI. Ch.
III. .
^rNtRT ^qi W
ITtT
Masculisation.
swsn
<r*raT*rr.
11
11
wft
11
37.
?T
t,
11
^m
T^ f^T^t
as, ^JsffaT
U5T-
*r, s-trorcr.,
11
II
^^m, u
% rrf^rr^^
5Rr<rwrr*rar
11
^TTOraP f^RT: g^sCr^T
II
qrrrrarc
122
For non-appositional words
II
T:
^TfT=#^RRri%^
39
Feminine word having a penultimate
does not assume the Masculine form.

Thus qrfww, sFrfafprri--, fnrrerprHr, iffamm,
K,
TfysraFTT, Hfg**>rg%
11
ffs^>R%, Tft^RTR^fr, fP^^rfatf, %%q^ (*fa3Trar ***$ ). This rule is an exception to all the previous rules VI. 3. 34 36 and not only to VI. 3. 34.
Vdrt\ The rule applies to the 3FT of the affix % and the Taddhita g?
and not
to every 3?
^ q ^qte
i
$f?r:
ii
ll
\<
Name
it is
rn ^r
3?^
Ts^ftHrf^^r
gHPrra:
TsMtTT*
vsrftarfMl-
39.
w3
is
<sr,
not changed to masculine,
^prrsrr
sspSnrra;
gRTTTOT
Ts^ftarerr
?rrraRr
?w<Trerr
s*ra%
i
*TmiTf*pft
Ts^tfrait
s*tfta%
11
ll
The feminine
is
not changed into Masculine,
formed by such a Taddhita
it is
Vriddhi of the
the
^jr^ft:,
*Ttrr,
11
*r
'action'.
or an Ordinal Numeral.
crf^r^, 3Rrbte*R,
when
<T^rft
11
means "young"; and^^fr means
*rnffr
The feminine
Thus ?rwm'-
^ H iH
The word
II
t^rrar sTa sr* rerar- s^rrfr
38.
when
Therefore the masculine transformation takes place
II
7RPTW, v^nTT^
here
syllable,
first
Taddhitas meaning
affix,
which causes the
with the exception however of
colored
therewith
',
and
'
made
there of.
Thus
and
4t#>tt$:,
*rg(toiR5ft
Why
?rgWb,
sreiffanTT, TrgCTinrr,
m$t*m,
irs*ta%,
In^mf^fr
ii
do we say
'
which causes Vriddhi
'
Observe
T^prvrnJ:
q*%
vrqj
= ^!PTr formed by the affix *{ IV. 3. 8 which does not canse Vriddhi). Why
do we say 'of a Taddhita' ? Observe 5ffrTt*PT*n"^ ($Wt f^rTW==3TF3?5T^r with
Why do we say when not meaning ôlored there
T5 (^W^t) and ^^
OTRT r^r = 3rrqT2ft, mwft f^frnffl" WH =>
with' or 'made thereof? Observe.
The word
f*mmtft $t# i*rr sra *T^=?fr^r ( I v. 3. 134
srnrrafsFrf^,
'
).
mw
).
ff^RFTTT^l should be explained as a Bahuvrihi, and not a Tatpurusha, i. e. a

taddhita affix, in which there is an element like <JT or s* or sft &e which causes
24
Masculisation.
1222
Therefore this exception does not apply to
Vriddhi.
Here the affix ^g<i V.

own force, but by VI. 3. 91.
s^q &c).
its
40.
word ^nf^C
Thus
but
39 added to
2.
feminine
part of body, does not
%tffair,
Bk. VI. Ch.
rTR^rSf: STPHtra
^ does not cause
II
?r$%^ft*rHi
Vriddhi by
become masculine, except when the
u$%*iptw, #*%#7renr, >?j^%#Tr^r, #l%tfta%,
><*$<*-
(qg not denoting any bodily member), 3T>ftPTR' (3T%3Tr
q^vrr^.-
11
(rTnTrft *Tt4t
follows.
3T*rrfaf%
II
5TRter
42
ending in the name of a
in f
The exception
not ending in long % ), and ^M^Tlf^'ft
added from the Vartika and is no part of the original sutra.
% frT:
III.
q^TT%
11
ll
^,
str*:,
W%^ f^TT T j^^^ STOTRR T^rT:
41.
( ?r
srorftfa )
ll
II
noun expressing a
feminine
>Trar,
has been
kind
class or
does not become masculine.

Thus efi*prra:, ssf^fare: ^2rfar^r, srf^ttt^t, ^ra%, ^f ^Nw
so when tttpti follows, as g^rf^, ^|^^rr^r
The exception does not apply to ^ritaf **$'< =^TflrT^R
11
But not
II
II
R^ sw^t ^53!
The feminine (unless
^4^>^rCpn 'T u ^
,
srif%3TO.
11
42.
ii
Karmadharava, and before

Thus
it
ends in
is
^TTcftar
enunciated as a
and ^fr*T
prohibition
Jt applies
crre^^rR^r, THT^frsrmrar, Tr^sfiHfar u

feminines which are ordinals in opposition to VI.
STrcftaT,
Srr^ffar,
position to VI.
to VI.
3.
40, as
<T^*Tf^foffr,
3-
39
T^*rsrrrrfar,
SHWûW,
ûigtsi^rfcfil}
opposition to VI.
3.
the
preceding sutras.
(VI.
ejj
even to
So
have'
gRT3%^fr^rr
37).
Thus
^TTf^lTOiT, StT-
applies
It
even in op-
also in opposition
^^l^^rrrrar and sânj^sffar

^^TRfar,
3.
Names and the
Thus
38,
lj
shrsffiffar, W?r?tftar U
as ^s^frrc^r,
The /eminine must
3.
T^tffar
in a
ll
to
even to words having a penultimate
applies
having an
sj),
uniform masculine, becomes masculine
equivalent and
This sutra
it
ll
So
also
in
11
corresponding masculine (*rrfad!i^)>
So the rule does not apply ^TTf^TftqpfT, as ?cj?r has no corresponding masculine.
The feminine should not end in 3j as agH-sîK^n"
;
Vdrt
The words
ÊFfJ^r
11
&c become masculine
before 3T CT3"
&c
as,
BK. VI. CH.
STPT.
may
Ill
44
This rule need
11
Masci lisation.
not be made, as the
Vdrt
When a word
member
first
common
denoting words of
be considered as class
formed by an
1223
affix
in
these
compounds
gender.
ig or
}
rK and <r*T &c ( VI. 3. 43 ) follow, the final long vowel of the first
term becomes short instead of its becoming masculine. As ^r^fTr^TR *T*3%
3rn?^TS*=?*rrfrW3ir (compare VI. 3. 66) ^TCpopTOr. qfjOT. TfJrHr, Tfg^r, TfJ^PTr,
the affixes
Tff^nr, flff^n'
We
rule does not
have said that the
apply to the feminines
in
The words fgf^, ^T, fT and sr%*j are names of countries denoting
gj
Kshatriya clans. The tadraja affix ( VI. 1. 168 and 170 ), is elided in forming
Thus we have the compouud ofsf^f^*
the feminine of these (IV. 1. 177).
When the first words become masculine, we have q T%3", ^NT, & c
ffTR^fr
II
ll
Thus qr^N^îK^r, ^rfsrsrf^fsn"
^<r 3^7 %fft f^

%&t *rcm
!Ttt: n *r
3?r*fr
Trr ?rr
saras "tot *m^T*f5KF<TU ^r sfrrararer^nreriSr-
11
Before the affixes
43.
(
fr?r
II
5>5<T,
before %sr
gg-, ifrsr, JTcT and â", a word ending

becomes
short, when the feminine
^r
of two or more syllables, and has an equivalent and
with the feminine in |
in the feminine
consists
ciT, ere, ^*r,
),
affix
uniform masculine.
Thus
qgrrgjPTrrcr, snwJTrprr sTrgnfot^r,
arernwfar, OTSlFTOrrr and grr^rfrr^r

are words as second
sr,
guna and
ending
in f
<r^r
(
Observe
is
formed by ar^
) ?
are
III.
anomalously.
affixes,
enrnnri^r
-ârcr
&c
134) added to
Why do we say
I.
Observe ^tHcRC gtrnrtr

Why do we say consisting of
Because words of one syllable optioiially become
?
ll
syllable
shortened by the next

line
a=f:
cjr?<T
*T,
substitution being prevented
#r
more than one
members;
srrgif3r%^,
srrgrfSr^rr,
and
^<T
ll
rule.
3TrT33RTcftr
Why
do we say having a corresponding mascu3TFT3lft and fre?ft have no equivalent
gj^frTT, v>nere
masculine forms.
tot: ^rronwrcrcwra;
ff%;
11
top %qrw
^ *&f\r%
7Tf%^
T^r ^fr *^fw

ll
ll
<ncrft
11
srtm,
siarrHssirer
crt
twrw, ar^rarwre,
srer ^ *?r to wvs
11
*w:
11
11
sprsir:
Jifimr
44.
Nad!
qrfts
I. 4.
In
^tK^
all
3 and 4
),
11
the remaining
words called
the substitution of short vowel under
the preceding circumstances
is
feminine
optional.
MASCULISATION.
1224
What
#r
),
long i but consist
III.
46
Those feminines which are not

and are called Nadi; and those feminines which endof one syllable. Thus srgT^'^rm or ff^grTCT ^TOn^-TO
are the %<* or the remnants
formed by long f
in
Bk. VI. Ch!
or frc^rrcr, fwrrer or ^facr, f^rmr or ^rrRr u
Vdrt: Nadt words formed by âffixes are excepted: as

formed by the Unadi affix f (Un III. 158, 160)
ârsr
11
t^rr%
11
a Taddhita-affix
The
rafsrrrT
is
&c
sr
T2rer?rr*T,
form
is
**ra?s*f
) (
tr'afatf
II
f (^r) added to a word formed
VI.
43
3.
55, is
affix
optionally
).
or ^cTCF, F^r^cT*! or
formed by the Taddhita
first is
one alternative, there
Or
or
%m\
having an indicatory ^ or
shortened before the

Thus
^fncT.,
The feminine
45.
by
11
<*$jfrrrcr>
ffgsfirTtf
or
fsî, and the second by
masculisation also
when we get the forms
^tHT
^ct
II
In
II
^ra^rffl
&c.
may
be considered to have been evolved from ^srist, to which

added the affixes denoting comparison, and then the feminine affix, in denotthis latter
ing a feminine.
^r^j3OT3Tn:q%
ff%:
11
^r> U
ST^TJ ^TTl^
srnrfa
^ srsro tt^t iî sr nt ifoT
*n*i%
11
^5^
Tf% T 3^; ZZ*{ 3TOQ3R

3T*
Sf^Sn^lPTO.
46.
For the final of jt^, is substituted
before a
II
II
word which
in apposition with
is
As ^m-, HârzW',
*r?rerf:>
i?nn*,
sttcj; ( srr
and before
it
T?r5jr<Tfa:
But
11
under that
q-f^r
in this
dokta,'the rule
taught under
the long
Vatt
In fact this
3TT is
As* T^^rr ^rcr
offering
meaning a
two words are
also the
the object of using the word
In
as the sense of
*Tf3;wrP5r??Tr
in
appo-
samanadhi-
= ^mi^ IfP*. WW<,
here secondary.
*r^? is
substituted for the final of
apposition.
Vdrt
when
The com-
This rule applies to compounds
h^
before qnj,
m^ and
flnsre,
may not be in
^srftftrs: = T?rftr%?:
being changed to masculine, though the words
*t?^t
crificial
61.
61 but not to Bahuvrihis.
not substituted
the feminine
is
1.
sutra.
Had it not been used, then by the maxim of pratipawould have applied only to the Tatpurasha compounds of mahat
II. 1.
3?r is
it
II.
Bahuvrihis,
rule, as well as to
sition, as in JT?r3Tf.
karana
takes place under
^rcfPT
s*:*r*<isr:
iifrr:
"the son of the great man": the two words are not in apposition.
pounding with
||
3Tr is
is
= TfRrsn, if ssp
^k-
- *??rett
>
11
when a sado we say when
substituted for the final of srg^ before ^"tr,
meant.
As
sacrificial offering
STS'PfFTn* ^re
R#7rT H
Why
Observe sts^'MW ar^T^^ M
Bk
VI. Ch. Ill
49
Some Substitutes.
1225
Vdrt
'
ing
'yoking'
substituted for the final of srs^ before
3TT is
vn*L
11
*rarf^ sr^s*
47.
sm*f*f SRrN
As,
The ^
not meant.
is
srrw*
of 'yoked'.
that
is
srr is
in 3THJ
is
follows, but
*rfWSr:,
Vdrt:
This rule
flNra*, fljETpw, sTssrrT*,
ir^T:
II
*<
As,
srs^rw*
For f%
ii
3PT^,
substituted
is
^srflrSPt
srafasr, TOlfarcrfa:,
^^Tft^rcsn^
fa and srs^),
But not
11
Thus
The above
is
optional,
Therefore
ll
it
com-
faftfT:,
not here,
snr^r
when another
ll
*<<
%m$v
a Bahuvrihi,
is
:
in
(the
II
t^tt^
^ft^f
second word
(II. 2.
not here, r^TrR
II
25) sqtfifw H
rrcr?TO
II
frwrr, ^c^rfer^
11
sre^fa f^taf
*j^?k rTf**rrar
substitution in the case of all (ft,
when
word ^grrftOTC and the

member.
the
are the second
crewnsr*, faTs^rrsr* or wtswf*, t?t3=^t^ or

as, ff STcP*. and srewX, frcra*
before hundred
rl^rsrrfara' or
This also
II
3^T C^^WMIâ
11
^tp*
numerals which follow
ff>T:
the
follows, but not in a Bahuvrihi or before snrfrft:
49.
c5T%3,
when
II
"^nf^srw m<5*ii*ii^ttw s?*gc?rsT*ft?it:
BTOT^srrwt
do we
followed by a
11
r^W
ffcp
Wnv
'
Observe ffTP,
follows'?
BTCTTTtf
which
not being a Numeral), nor in
This substitution takes place upto hundred
fe*T*r
a Bahuvrlhi or
Why do we say 'when

Why do we say 'not
"
upto one hundred.
applies
<nrrf* H *:,
II
48.
Numeral
not in
*n%^ srerfsr, srafW^:, srerftsr?*
Observe qs^f^T U
Observe $ ?rr<^> ST*Tr3*
a Bahuvrthi, or the word
is
where
srgrTOl.
3T*t#
for the sake of distinctness.
substituted for the fiual of T and stbt
say f$ and st^?
pound
when the mean-
11
Thus frro
Numeral'?
TT,
11
when another Numeral

before sreftfr
But
II
ô
II
^TTTR
II
f^TC*T, CTC,
II
***** sftsro'rivnt
^r% ^sr q* wm
*rm *m$
<n?r:
11
%*sT,
T^,
3TTJT,
Some Substitutes.
1226
55 is substituted
and sttjt and before sn^r
50.
affixes
*re;
5^
Thus
g8?T*T
sws
fror^= siren,
The word
by
derived
%*?r is
[Bk. VI, Ch.
III.
53
and the
for ^r^q-, before &*$r,

II
wwten=?T$r, %$wm
rara=s**i,
from
affix
srar
ra?sr
pxisi^
Before the word
II
does not take place, as f^WsT:

The
inclusion of fH3" in this sutra proves the existence of this maxim " ^rT^T^rSee VI. 3. 17.
f*r*nt sr?rm^r *r tT?53WPt" n
^H!T
formed by
^^^[dt3
^t
fffT:
*T3X affix,
Hrx
11
52T5i ^rr
this substitution
ll
q^Tfa
II
fsrenj q*<rr
51.
^t
srr, sffar, w^r,

^Rc^*nwr H^r%
ll
^3
11
11
optionally the substitute for CT*T,
is
^T
5W*r
II
when
the words *ri%, and ^pr or the affix **r^ follows.

Here sqw is added as
Thus %*$&;: or 5^mr^ STSTCTCL or 'ST^ST*
When
1. 124.
is
substituted there is
class
V.
Brahmanadi
to
belongs
f
U3H
Vriddhi of both the members 5 and 5 by VII. 3. 19. So also gfrrr: or ^rar:
ll
^HT:
have been got from 5^ which
All these forms could
11
generis, having
sutra
the
same meaning
TT^T q^TTRpfnT^^
^T^tf,
II
a full word sui
substitution taught in this
e#
II
q^TR
II
qi^q,
II
3W%,
q<*, STTHT,
*T,
II
tf?to 7?
11
fc^Tiw
52.
^q^
and
5^3:
is
rather unnecessary.
is
If^p
as
The
>r*n% Brrrsr arrFrr
is
*$r%ws?
*t s<r?rr
substituted
before snfa,
for qr^,
srrr^.
II
Thus
T^rnfr*.
formed by
for
changed
*ft
to
qf
from
=Tr^r^m^rf?r
srsr
and
q^rr%
(Un
3T?J[
though required by
= w^rrrrftr
II. 4.
56
before this
srrfsp
and srrRp are
and irregularly
IV. 131),
affix.
So
arsr
is
not
also q^T:=
TTf belongs to Vrishadi class ( VI. 1. 203 )

W**lf *re^f?T qfnw - qiwqftP
and has therefore acute on the first syllable, the q3[ substitute however has acute
ll
on the
final,
(VI.
48),
2.
only in the sq^n (VI.

-
and
have acute on the
q^rere^
?f^r:
11
^TfrRf^
171), therefore in qffqfrP,
final
(VI.
11
1.
While
final.
T^ retains
q^rfsp,
q^ri%
q^,
11
q^rr:
its
accent
and q^p
*rfa,
sttt^,
*nr?rcre3f
11
II
II
53.
q^
is
substituted for
trr^
before the
used in any sense other then that of "suited there

Thus
q^rf%
223 and krit-accent).
wto qf^ro*rrWr
t^ f% ^riqsrwT*
^ststo
II
ll
1.
becomes acute on the
it
<Trtrf^tf?rr
" suited there to "
= q;jjr:
ve have
Sjku-,
Tar
W&K'
qnE^=TT?r*r3*?r H
ll
When
(sec IV.
4.
affix
qr^
to.
^ has
83 and V.
the force of
4. 25).
Bk. VI. Ch.
Before the
Vart:
substituted for qr?; as

in this sutra
is
Some Substitutions.
III. 58]
means
walks there by
q$ is
by g^ affix. The word qr*
affix f^j, in the sense of 'he
*TO^ = qf^f:
qr?r*2lT
of V.
f?t
IV.
4.
10
',
a part of animal organism.
'the actual foot',
not substituted before the
denotes
1227
Therefore q^
because qr$ here
34, as f$qrPT, rqqpJJ*
I.
measure'.
,a
ftjT^rrn^g
54.
11
\H
q^r is
q^rft
11
^rf^, sfag,
ftjr,
11
<*, (
substituted for qr^ before
q?
11
Wf%3[ and
ffJT,
sfaii
Thus
sgrRj,
and
<rgfa'.
3T*;
= qTSra*fm) T^hlft*
(t^t^ &&t)
qfaprw,
= ^^^[^0
as in srq Tf^fTTt^
ll
q^Tr%
ll
^r^
II
*t H
q^ is the substitute for <n^ before the affix 5^,

when the meaning is that of a Hymn (Rik).
Thus q^t *TW^\ *rcn<t = Trt <TT5 ST^rST, the affix *n* being added by V. 4.
55.
Why
43.
srr
ff%:
II
do we say 'when meaning a
sfarfasrcn&'S
qfq
*rrf%3rc
\%
11
R*ir *T? f 9T^5
56.
Thus
q^^rq: or qr^rq:,
ss^rcrs^
11
^TfrT^H
^ Tf^WTT^ft H^rj"
qt^T'sr-
or qntftrep, q-*w: or
fqrsqfj:
as qf^T^R' or qrSPt*3T:
sr*rraT ftq$[
ll
^n%
^ ssTSTrWr
^raTSrrcqî 3**jtofw s^rWr
11
57.
is
II
is
^PTTT<*t S^TTO
qf
ll
11
II
qrS"
is
qr^^:
optional
ll
So also before
st^j^tt^ ^rT^T^:
^frr
Observe qr$*P
This substitution of q? for
msr and ^s^
F^r/:
^r, tr*, firsr, srsVg, (
11
TTC**
'
11
sftq,
before
q^fa
ll
%tT^TO
p**% %fa st^rs**
11
Hymn
ll
II
t^st^t, ^:,^rFTntOsTR^")ll
*nn1t ^tttt* qr^r;
11
^53*
for 3^q>, when
*rqrr?r%
substituted
11
the
compound
Name.
Thus sffrsp'a, person called Udamegha 3W9 "a person named Uda
The well-known Patronymics from these are afr$%ran and arr^nff H
Why do we say when it is a Name ? Observe ??efifrft:
Vdrt 3$ is the substitute for SS97 when it stands as the second member
of a compound and denotes a Name: as, %f??fr$-, 5ffalT, *ftfts
'
vahah."
'
'
ll
^m^T^rr^ ^
ffrr:
ii
qq
*rcf
II
v*
\\
q^nft
11
^, ^r^, srr^T,*fa3,
Wf re ?^%g Hro*q%3 %&&& ^ f^RRR^ft *rem
58.
and fa
11
^T
is
11
substituted for
*,
11
11
s^ before qq, *ra, stoh;,
Some substitutions.
1228
Thus
**WT
also
II
3m
formed by
fq^Tft
3*sff *fN%sf|rar
H<Nd4
c^âr^t
^r^cK^rm:,
01515
= 3*rsr
'
by
III.
Bk. VI. Ch.
III. . 61
38; Sferrcn-WTCircm',
4.
so
a water jar \
s^ren^m^ H <^
q*n%
11
hî^V,
H ***>,
gr^r^^,
il
59.
optionally substituted for
is
before
3*^5?,
a word biginning with a single consonant, and which expresses

that which is filled with water.
The word i?^?rcrfa means
Thus g^ffsvn, or gq^ yvr:, 3TTra*T or ^^m y^
The rule does not apply
a word beginning with a single simple consonant*.
to ^gftsjn** as the second member begins with a conjunct consonant
nor
II
to <KfrT3 fr
^s?
;
,
f*r?s,
TOflwui.
as the T^f:
3ffT*, ^T^,
or Tqqftre^:
^^K:
sffaW
*nr
faff
^#r
II
II
s^hr;
or ^5R>fa^:
<T^ri%
II
4^(1H:
Sffa^: or SfSfrf^
f^rSfcr s?*rr- or
11^?
ITTS
Sfsfrffar, sffaT: or
3^*3 f^?^:,
and
fTT, ^fan*,
irrf
V*'-,
sit
ST53
TO 3^*1
s^ &t(f%, 3f-
3S*ff *TT??T ffrT,
SW,
*W,
IV^V
or
'IIiiWW,
II
i^wi* M*ranre ft ?s*f t^tcJ TMK3iMrfei ^mrr^ra*^*

H
11
<*, n
or gr^^q"!
^37*3 ^N^T, 3*flw
f^rH^t nra^T
ST^TcIT^mi
ffri:
= 3f*TT
*TT:
f^t
filled.
optionally substituted for ^[*f, before
is
f^J, 3^, mr,
*$%T ST*< 3<W*3

to s*ro or **rto:
:
^K: or
be
to
is
II
Thus 3^%f
:
not a vessel which
w, **rc, sre, #hw, nftj,

60.
*Tr*J,
is
11
According to the opinion of G&lava, a short

vowel is substituted, in a compound, before the second member,
for the long $sr vowels (J, 3j, 35), unless it is the long vowel
61.
of the Feminine
affix
In other words, for

g;,
i (#r).
f,
when
it is
a short f and 5 are substituted in a
Thus UWrSlgq': or'wfi^:, jNji|M(gq:

Observe
tsrfraTC'*,
affix #t'?
THSPITf
II
Why
not the Feminine affix % (yr) and for

before the second member.
compound
or Brsmrogip
do we say
'
il
Why do we say $9^ vowels
not the long ^ of the Feminine
Observe irrtfg*:, *rafr3*P The name of Galava is mentioned pujartha

was present in this sutra. It is a limited option
for the anuvritti of 'optionally'
II
Bk. VI. Cn.
64
Ill
pujartha, (vyavasthita vibhasha), and does not apply to
&c which
ctfrtftrnsvftara
are governed by VI. 3. 139.

V6rt : \t does not apply to Avyayibhava compounds, nor to those
%A^ or
words which take
^^ augment in
Vart .It does however

say
* &c
ST is substituted for
***>
<rf^r
11
apply to $**{ &c, as g**r:, $ffr
and
as %J**r:
q^rfr
11
as ^ftf^l, 3p*t,
their declension,
li
Others
II
q^jf?:
crfe^,
<*, (
fw.
) (
srrcq^
ll
The short is substituted for the long of a^f,

before a Taddhita affix, and when a second member follows.
62.
^^r
As
3TT*Trr
fJSRTOF $fK = <J3RTR:*,
word
<{
w<i*i
<r*Fro*,
q^r^r *rpr.=<?3repr, q^rr
The shortening
q^rf*^!!
When
q^r, having the affix 3TT H
$<%
an adjective
is
So
11
also
takes place of the Feminine

(
^joTT^r
then the
above forms could be evolved by the help of the rules of masculation, such as
e. when q^f means the numeral one.
But when it means 'aione',
VI. 3. 35,
i.
then
The word
not apply.
those rules will
without any case-affix
as a
Chhandas
i^r
is
exhibited in the sutra
The examples given
irregularity.
are
feminine which alone can
be shortened, and not of (j^r whose

Nor can the rule of shortening be applied to q of q^,
final is already short.
for the rule applies to the final letter, aud not to a vowel situeated in the body
of qgn" in the
of a word.
^pJf *WT$*î$4<s*i $\\\ *r^Tft ^rnfr., ^r, *^<Hn, srj^rac, w

fPrf; s^âw^r^ *r ^j^rs^^nrfpj ?^t *nn^
63.
The short is diversely substituted for the
11
11
*.
11
11
feminine affixes % and
art
#T and
sttj )
in a
Name and
in the
Vedas.
As^rfrnj^C:,
?rr^ht5rn*
So
ll
crftf&nj^:, Htforg^r:
does not take place, as qTrcpftttwrrcit,

f^T?T, fSnrowr; sometimes there
So
also in the Vedas:
there
is
no shortening,
ct <*
ff^T-.
ii
II
yd
^xr?r^
as,
ûiS^MT
II
illustrations,
'25
snreftef?:
w^
The feminine
>rr?r
ll
STT'T
no shortening,
^Rt
^,
<%,
short, before the affix <^

Vedic
not, as TF$)T3ft
'
= ^Wi
no Names
^f?rT
J^TJ
11
:
,
Tr?^t%^T
:
,
sometimes the shortening

in Name:
^^HiKa ^qj
f^reRKTCtli Sometimes
ending words
as, ^PTqjnrrfiT,
3?*r$lf*T sjfmf, ^SfTO^rfqtff
OTtfrirffc %*?t
arsrrar
is
q^Tl%
II
<re<?r
64.
Thus
Sometimes
II
also in the Vedas, as arq r fifRr, JTSf%;
ll
II
affixes
and
arr
diversely
become
II
or
wrsrr**,
dftr*M" or ftftsftasil
can be formed
in **
II
These are
Shortening.
T230
%&K$V%\m&\n\ f%cKJ^TTfiT|
*tk,
ftrer, <sr, *rrftg,
$\
II
T^TT%
II
11
Bk. VI. Ch.
%z
^>r,
%^T
III.
^n",
67
m&\~
11
For the long vowel, a short is substituted, in

before fecr, in %<faft before 3^5, and in *nw before snroc H
65.
%%<$X
Thus f^HTrPI
by
this rule
as
11
first
by an
in
II
is
Thus
The
f&R &c
short
11
of tadanta
rule
are also governed
II
srs^^, ( ^^:
reifa,
11
always substituted for the
is
member, when the second member

affix
member
<*?rfa
11
66.
the
%$
^2ff
JTTc7*rrRofr
compounds ending
&*3*U<*ri*i> .3cH*ii^*UK u n ^ftr
T^^rf^TI,
f^^TJToq^ni^
and
f*ffa*j**
applies to fg^rr &c, so that the
is
final of
a word formed
but not when the
??r,
first
an Indeclinable.
fRfoTJj^nr
cfiifoqrdu,
shortening, had
done
it
so,
II
The augment g* does not prevent
the rule would have been unnecessary.
But
the
^r?T-
ff^R^nrnr where fr^Tandjt^T are Indeclinables there is no shortening.

The above words are formed by
(III. 2. 83).
The phrase anavyayasya
:
*T?^*Tf:,
indicates
maxim
by implication that the word
enunciated in VI.
Avyaya can never take
3.
%q;
refJ*^3TOW T[K
affix
VS
II
here means
fisnt
3ttWlfW*
17
n^^p, contrary
âf^fa3faEt
which are ordained only
T^Tft
II
W<HW$3i
II
3?W, f|[^,
to the
For an
II
after dhatus.
3T5T?^*T, g*t,
II
augment added immediately after

the final vowel, of srw, fir***, and of a stem ending in a
vowel, unless it is an Indeclinable, when a word formed by a
67.
g**
is
the
fe?^ affix follows.
Thus
*n$*T
and the
Why
3T^p?:, f|MHM
rf
*
f
3>l
fo*MH
&c
See
of f$S<l are dropped by VIII.
do we say
'
of
3TW &c
'
2.
III. 2. 35,
39, 83.
The ^
23.
Observe f%f^F?ir
ll
Why
do we say
Indeclinable'? Observe fr^TT^T?:, fc< *MK rnr: "

Why do
the word 3RrT in srerer, when merely saying 3T3" would have sufficed
*
not an
rule of tadanta-vidhi?
of
we
use
by the
This indicates that the shortening taught in the prece-
ding sOtra does not debar the gq; augment, nor does &{ debar the shortening.
So that .5^ is added after the shortening has taken place.
% =* U/*|xTHm4^*i
II
\*
ll
q^TR
||
^sr:,
q^tt*:, sn*,
y^^d^,
xT,
ll
Bk. VI. Ch.
Ill 70.
68.
than
>ther
3J,
gjT
123:
monosyllabic word, ending in any vowel

when followed by a word formed by a
affix,
m^
augment
eceives the
Augment.
which
sn*,
is
added
the same way as
in
the affix ant of the Accusative singular.

The word ar**. is to be repeated here thus,
qw^FS^, 3T 3M cqq? ^
Thus rfa^:, ^JTT?3:, or fczpro:, fWR^T:, **ff!
By force of the atide.sa
II
II
Brqw^^H^, the changes produced by the Accusative ending are caused by this
augment also viz the substitution of long 3TT, the substitution of a vowel
homogenous with the first, the guna, the substitutes %s^ and s^f; As btt *TT
*Tm: ( VI. 1. 93 ) $&nm as ^nro: ( VI. 1. 107 ); guna, as,^r^: (VII. 3. 1 10)
and jin^ and 3^, as fi|J|*W g^TO: (VI. 4. 81 &c ). Why do we say ending
:
in a
vowel other than
osyllable'
Observe
The
Why
II
do we say
mon-
'a
PHsfT* *RIT. H
affix are
is
siUT^pJ = fsraT^l. or
noun (VII.
elided after a Neuter
when
De elided
3th a i so
this
Observe c^ssmp
(fÔ?
3?
*ft
treated as Neuter
is
The second
fsr*T??n^?
is
23), therefore, will
1.
As
the valid form
fsniTTSTR
T^%
according to
Patanjali.
m^
$frr:
11
$*> 11
11
q^rft
;yojr
*tptot sts* f?r#r Fwi&ft n
44
^T^m
69.
Thus ?rrwr: 9TR%
The
shortening of
^r*T
srr%*m, a<r4<l ^,
,
^PC
40?^
sî^s^j
affix),
takes place by VI.
<H<UHI^T
II
ô
<I^Tfa
II
II
11
ii
2TTO
II
f*T?7 Sf*T?5TO
*TTo
||
S^^^P
?nr
^tr^:
2.
42).
II
II
II
(III.
4. 94.
^R, ^^T, 3T*T^^T,

^rr^Sf^TT^ ST3T 3T*Tf ^rTîHTW HÎ%
ffrP
3H^cmi ^q s?toi% q xh^ ^ u ^r h wto 5*n% ?uft
3iPri*i
3^^^
'w^raf s*^ 5* " ^r n ^^^
^T<>
SETT
ll
and ^tptk are irregularly formed.
III. 2.
and
11
5^tF^:
<xw
gyer-fKsg:
ST*
||
^5^
Pn#T% WrT
g^rqtfW^Rffsr %?
II
m îw
11
'
3-rll^ ^RhaI^*:I
ir^^rMr
11
70.
word ^nr
As
;=p* is
the
augment of stst and sm^ when the
follows.
q^hH :=3Erereftrnr
So
Vdrt : So
Vdrt
language wsjrrc:
or st^tosktt- n
also of 3T*3, as
9**3^
also
bwô
also in Vedas, of ?v% before 9?n::- e.
II
: Of V5 before *m, e. g.
Vdrt : Of ?far before to, e. g.
Vdrt
So
ii
vr^vr^T
m^m
II
II
g.
vftrarre,
in
secular
Mum
J232
Vdrt
but ^r?JFT^
Vdrt
Vdrt
3Tf*JT,
Vdrt
f*raf*r?s, e. g. ftffifJF^Ptt?:
^tit,
%^ precede
it e. g.
e. g.
grrsCr or
is
73
qj^r,
Thus
we say
*&:
q^rf*
11
^r,
ll
11
its
read
vs*
q^rft
ll
ft^\.
%Mm
Saran-
This
II
qrlr, r, n
See IV.
Why
2. 58.
*n%:, sn%, fswrqr, (
ll
or nsg?:
This
11
a krit-affix
JTS?:
vs^
II
II
q^rft
5^ )
do
ll
gn
before a
an aprapta-vibhasha.
is
*, ftq:, irer,
II
t^t ^rero ^r ^g^rcT?

T^r ''Rrcr s^rerq- rafST*ns*Ri.
11
??r,
As,
4 tH<A
) R
ii
srrfor*
it is
tpfjr
ii
JT^rqt
f nr:
in the
II
As ^riH^l: or ^pr^, m?P&The augment is compulsory before

aftnmp
5^
feminine
ll
*T%:
II
*pr,
3*C3*ft or 3*rf??rr, *nT5*ft
gq d4TWif f%*rnqT 5*PT% *T^|%

72.
The word ^jf^r optionally takes
word formed by krt-affix.
31%:
II
added.
affix 5^ is
Observe ^RqTrT:
firorrr
srfar
^TJÔT
when the words
Some
II
word has
this
^nrr<frs*qf ^r^rJrf = ^RTTrrr,

*f ?
ftfe*
the augment of the words ?^r and nte,
is
when the
before
also
is
%Fy$5rr H
e. g.
vs?
ll
gn
71.
before
Sr
trret
and then
),
seen in other places also,
s^rft^T
II
it
II
3**T 3R*T,
^^Rn,
or U^flrrr, HT^f^r or Hrsrgf|?n-, %5^5fr or %^ffrTT

1.
3TF?rf*Rqr:
substitute of f?$
is
IV.
74
II
takes gi* augment, unless
frrpy
II
ssur
garavadi class
Bk. VI. Cm. Ill
before f*>v, as *rg1%^:,
So also before
Of anc *? before
$sr^ optionally the
HHT, and
3*T, CT5T,
and
vrrg
A word before
Vdrt
FffTff^:,
Of sr^TO before f^ as ST^rwro:
Vdrt : Of
e. g.
augment.
ii
ii
The *r of the Negative particle

the first member of a compound.
Thus srgrrgnjp. 3Tf<sp*, *mw, vtmnr-
sr^r,
is
elided
when
11
Vdrt
meant
The ^ of
as, 3TT*TRr *
cWtt^f*
ffrf:
II
ll
?r^
is
S[W>, BTTOl%
vs*
ll
qrrft.ll
clWl^tHshHMSj: 5pTT*?f
74.
elided
before a verb also,
^ *&&'
ûra:, 3?, 3Ti%,
WW ST^l^TlTR'Tf
is
3rrcq^
II
II
above ^-elided
After the
when reproach
(i. e.
after sr) is
added the augment g, to a word beginning with a vowel.

Thus
3T?T3t:,
'jfw>, 3T5^2
11
Why
do we use
Otherwise 5? would have been the augment of
?njr,
rTSTrrt " after
such a ?rw"
and not of the subsequent
Hk. VI. Cn.
III.
for:
we have 3T^
ainst
ill
wi:
Nut augment.
I.
1.
Now
46).
sr^+aT^T:
cause the doubling of the
5^
tingency,
is
and not
srsrsT:
3 of sr^
Hence
âr?,
VIII.
to prevent this
member and
32
3.
con-
not with
îwr,
^H&<4H^HJM4>H%i4HHiH 4>$ st^tt vs^ n

^%^t,
igfc, **&, **&, Tj^r^, Tgnr, *m,
'iron*,
?TT*5, ST^^TT,
t*t* TTTfi
fnr:
STTsr: for
II
rui uim 1*144 Mi<ur

11
be
will
final
ordained with regard to the second
regard to ar or sja
qîra
1233
the sutra would have read thus 3T% H

Adding 5^ to ?nT or rather
(granting that 57 is not to be added before ar but after it,
word
to
8T,
77
II
II
11
wn ^rcpn" *nir% ?r^ to h^<*

The Negative
75.
44^,
5TOT3T, TTTr*,
5HK
and
5TT^
Upto
sutra, the
'rare
to
t^>
*?m
^r^r
*n*
remains unchanged in
particle
^r^^TT (dual), *gf%, *$*, 5^, 5*3*^, ^T^T,
II
the words
^RfcErr
are exhibited
in
exhibited in the Locative
rest are
the Nominative case in
the
^jr3T^ = T^T?, formed by f^x
= TTTrt formed by ^rf affix. fr^T = ^r, formed

by stu^h sr?u sTW = sreiP, ^ *r^: = 3T*rerp, *r 3isrerp==5rrcr?n"ui ? ^^fff =sr
gpsr, formed by r% affix (Unadi), m& ^^n% = ?r^:
^rÎ <*HRff=TO*
and
composition.
5*31
?r Trf^T
II
i^tT ^^=^5^^111 ?rw^^ff^ ^r=i^m^n
by t
?r^mfrr=5ra
affix.
?t
srfw* 3T3TC= ^rercu
q^T%^r^^ ^Tf^
II
VS^
II
The Negative
76.
a word which begins with
augment argy
Thus
compounds.
so.
that
^^1%:, ^, *z&&,
particle remains
and of
^7,
we have
^r,
3?^%
unchanged
^,
this
fNrR; = M*Mfatff<T trshisUtf^nJC H

The augment btt^^ is added to the
q%?r
there
is
11
in
the
These are Instrumental

of the first member,
?r
optionally two forms
snf&wwTcrnpnn
5T^s?*^rr ^nr
5T*ft
11
C 3*?)-
4. 45.
STtT:
q^TR
II
ij^rq;
qîf^r
11
fk^f^'
II
final
and
w.,
<rsfip*
srarfars,
nr*rf%
by VIII.
^?^^?:^ni:,
II
11
77.
unchanged
in
The Negative particle is optionally retained

it does* not mean a living animate
*r*T, when
being.
Thus
move
'.
The
^*U'.
or STfrn
affix
is
'
trees
added to
',
or
it*
ll
mountains
Why
',
literally
'
what do not
do we say when not referring
Some substitutes.
1234
Observe
to animate beings.
^qw
3Tt:
No
sft^T M
Bk. VI. Ch.
form
alternative
is
III. 80.
allow-
ed here.
*rî
fnr.-
^tt^t^:
*r.
q-
^r^rsfî
11
v9<^
11
q^nSr
11
t^recriwt *r^r%
78.
*t*rrai
5r^^t, w. 9
f^ra
substituted for
^T is
^tfttc
11
^,
in a
Name.
Why when it is a Name ? Observe

srrwr*
The word f has acute on the first syllable, because all
Particles have acute on the first syllable.
The substitute *r coming in the
room of the acute q- and the grave $, will have an accent mid- way between ^
Thus
*rre?*pr, *mv*ui4r,
STW^p^r, ST^*<tfl
II
II
acute and f grave, namely, it would have the svarita accent. But, as a matter
These are Bahuvrihi. In
of fact, it has the acute accent. As InpT, %*rr^
:
Avyayibhava, the samasa-accent
wworranfa*
79.
11
vs^
will prevail
q^rft
ll
ll
II
(VI.
I.
223
5r?nra, stto*,
the substitute for ^;,
^r is
),
^rq^pl^li
as%?g-,
ll
when
it
sense of 'upto the encV ( in connection with a literary
has the
work
),
or 'more'.
Thus
(ÔT^FSpO
^R
(II.
So also *rg|fo=( ifrTFrT^ )

*T %*T?
Avyayfbhava compounds by 3T?cfword, denoting time, is the second member,
*rerP5=2ffP5R3 5%rrrsr^r%
sjjr^"nrlV%
"
when
Therefore,
1. 6).
ll
These are
a
11
all
would not be changed to *T, because of the prohibition in VI. 3. 81. The
present sutra removes that prohibition by anticipation, with regard tc timeof the end of a book
denoting words even, when the meaning is that
ST?
When
TTTJ
the sense
is
that of
'
more
',
we have
*rgT<JTT?sflr(r>
'.
*TTTq:
^NTTW:
41 hi ))<#(%
II
fkafr ^n^qr^r
ffrP
ii
f$<ffa
ll
s^tp^t srsro
*r
fk$w,
vim h
q^rfa
ll
fcroiresfr
11
**,
sr^qpsq,
ctrtct.
11
^r is the substitute for ^5, when it is in conwhich refers to a second object, which
word
nection with a
latter however is not directly perceived.
80.
Of
principal
or
is
what
is
known
is
two things which are generally found co-existing, the nonThat which is perceived, observed
called the second or ftcffa H
the
is
called
wwm,
to be inferred.
the presence of the

1
'
'
first,
That
is
that which
is,
3T3TT "
Here the
fire,
their existence
is
not perceived
the second object
is
added to such second word.
a pigeon whicri points out that
srmrHTT
when
&c
to
is
3T3TTOC,
t.
e.
be inferred from
Thus
conflagration has taken place
^rrra
fatfta:)
some where
'.
srerereffajr STFST
a storm-wind which announces the Pilachas
the Pisacha or the Rakshasas are not directly perceived, but
".
is
inferred from the presence of the pigeon &c.
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
III. .
84
F3TS*T*ftTT% -c||*l5i
81.
*\
II
3T333tf*rf^ ^ ^jtrt
11
r:
Some substitutes.
M<*lA
II
II
s?ifrît^pw
3Tsq^fnTT%, ^T, 3T^T&,

*t?to
the substitute of
^r is
is
1235
*r^*TO".
>tî%
^,
an Avyaylbhava
in
11
not a word denoting time.

^rcvrffpni the second member being
Thus ST^^fl, T^t JTT5P, but

denoting
word (II. 1. 5).
time
sfrrcnfrrer
<^
11
82.
*ST
compound
the
is
q^T^
11
ll
srr,
ûj^srer
optionally
is
ll
fsrorrWr
11
the substitute
^%
of
when
a Bahuvrihi.
That compound in which all members are secondary 4W<j*H is a

*r#rcrsfT, and the Bahuvrihi is such a compound, because in it all the memThus *nr*T: or *T9S*
bers are secondary, the Principal being understood.
:
Why
do we say of a Bahuvrihi ? Observe *rfg*<n, *T?^r H

The substitution does not however take place in a Bahuvrihi like ^Tf^^fiT^: or
*rnr or <ftj-qffW
ll
The word
83.
*r^ retains its original
the sentence denotes benediction, except

or
^5
form when
when
it is ifr,
^r
II
Thus
wfa ffSTrra ^Tfi^ra,
^ssrr^rni, STSTinsrn*
ll
But optionally
wX ^^^m
here,
or 3ft?*rRt *T?^HT, or ^?tr

The phrase
pn%T *TC% S3*H or
sprnrar?^ is no part of the original sutra, but has been added by the Kaîka
from a Wrtika.
as
m^ ^*5,
ll
^^"^^^snjr^*!
Igki
ffrT
JHjfcT,
11
<&
i^rf*
ll
ll
smnrcr, ^F^ftr,
SWRW *T %?TW^TT WrT S??TCT f^ft 5^ JT^R Sf^ fZtrn^rW^ffa <fes|R|Uir
II
84.
but not before
the substitute of
*C is
snjfo
ij^ta;,
and
3^
M?I
in the
as
SPIRfaffr
mw,
II
Chhandas,
This substitution takes place
*TP*fa, SrWrffa:
&C
in secular
sinf^
literature
*T*TPT-
also,
^
5
11
*pTP?r
^TiTd^H m^ <n%rrwTnT nr'si ^<w m n 5m ^tÊRsr^jif

ffrr
II
II
Thus ST3*mT SPT>^, vt&sm tfaw, $Fr> ***&'> (See IV. 4. 114).
it$: 5m$: rHT
~sr*TO formed by 3* affix IV. 4. 1 14. But SR^T^,
fffrT^:,
st,
II
*nrT?
*n%
?ttpt Trcrai
*ra
^r
ll
<z\
11
qîft
ii
wr ^ *ro^ t*r *^s ^wsttttî *rf-
1236
Substitute.
sr
This substitution of
85.
before s*nr%**;
*mm^,
rtfk,
^r for
tr^,
^nfir,
Bk. VI. Ch.
*fhr,
$ 89
III.
quu< takes place

^r, ^tr
srur,
snra;,
^R and sf^j in the common language also.

Thus
ffrT:
II
*3TC% *Tl*IR
STW,
STWPTi,
11
tf^lK^TTW SWTTO
^1%
fSHFTflW
*T
II
substituted for *etor before BfR'^Tfci; when

persons engaged in fulfilling a common vow of
86.
it
KG*,
TOilffi:, *T5R<T?:, SHinT:, ST^rf*:, SFTPTT, STTPP,
*nrar, 5ett^t;, w&g'>
denotes
^T is
studying the Vedas.

Thus
S3HTrar = *Tagl^l(r
srenff
studying the Veda,
ance of that vow
also called
is
common
studying being
to both
^^t
ing to Bhattoji Dikshit
He who
Vedic study.
srî
agT^TK<
called
is
i.
ll
e.
in the
means the Vedas. The vow of

He who is engaged in the perform-
Sg?
ll
sutra
STglfa
means a
brahmchari.
<M ^
11
*$
q^fa
ll
^ is
87.
affix *Rt is
Thus
added
QTcfrut:
fe*rT%3[T
m%,
<HJ4H
<: )
smrrerc
Mg3
*\
<tHt
mm (IV.
4. 107).
R*rn*r,
ll
89.
the
q^rfr
11
s% %ra *R^*i
affix sr;
^:,
a fellow-student
'
smR^ra:
WTR
The
^5
affix
is
sfr ^*rirercmq
for
a%*
*r^
^R,
II
The
which give
II
$T is
affixes
as the
ii
S%
^>J and f|p^ are added to

Vdrt
3Ff and ^r
forms
formed- by
gj^r affix
II
under
III. 2. 60.
and
53T
?^r
under
So
also
Vartika.
taken for the sake of the subsequent sutra.

ll
h#
ii
optional
is
11
11
before
^fajfafapflr * H i^fft 5T*i, r%rft:, to, tfr,

s^cst^
sPff
%i fw^rT^rtr^T qft f?r#r 3*Trcm*rfNiT
*rrf%^* ?% ^fn *r;î. u
ii
^rcr^ )
) (
^, ^r, ^33, ( ctitoto:
substituted
':
as ^$r.
when the
II
Vdrt
before $T
11
*rr& u
ii
^T is
Thus *T% ^n^P

III. 2. 60.
a sa-
is
11
The substitution of ^f for

88.
before 3^; when the affix *RC is added to it.
Thus ^fai: or *ror%** (IV. 4. 108).
**;* *
a department of
^r^l" or
it.
q^TR
11
^,
Accord-
branch (charana)
substituted for cttr, before <fpl
to
= OTR
ll
11
prrTO^STsrSPTrft
common (samana)
has a
vow of
vow, the
to the
refers
STTPT
SPTR
ii
mjrasgs
II
Bk
VI. Ch.
III. .
90.
.e
words
92
Some Substitutes.
is
substituted
TO and -the
c*r,
Thus ft*, iw- and
affix
for
1237
f^n and
?rt
nro before
II
and flF^TT^
fa* and qfa* are
40 and the long f is elided by VI.
f^r*, stefv gftOT
changed to f + fr?C and eRT + ni'T by V.

and we get %n^ and rer^ "
4. 148
for
2.
II
Vdtt
*?r
So also before
^4hw
ll
ll
as ijM-
Off>
<TTif*r
11
*tt,
and zftm-
jiiti:, (
!l
^nî^31
II
*rf%i?*u w^t%iTf^HLii
91.
(I. 1.
substituted for the final of the Pronouns
3TT is
27) before these words to, i^t and the affix

Thus rn^v, ;itop. rfr^r^, ir$a?> *TnFSP, sjr^rrac.
Vdrt
So also before $r, as rny$'> and iircw
mi
\\
11
II
faM^<w hg d<iui^rfi
92.
^gr, is
11
In the room of the
sonant that follows
and
( arc ) grsrsi^
it,
substituted
q^rrft
11
f^ro,
^rcft: f
vowel with the conof a Pronoun and of the words favijK
srftr,
when
arsy
last
with the
affix
follows.
Thus fqMMvq fjT^reSfgfg, This form is thus evolved. T^ + f^^=+ 0=3T>^+5!:( VII. 1. 70 ) Then there is elision of the final conjunct
consonaut sv, then the final dental is changed to guttural because of the f^T^
s^ is changed to 3F and we have st? which with nwfc
affix (VIII. 2. 62 ), e.
gives the above form. Vâjf nm^, 321^
arrj? and *m* ( VI. 3. 95 ) have acute
on the final irregularly (nipatan) in order to prevent the krit-accent. and when $
Why do
is changed into *i the following vowel becomes svarita (VIII. 2. 4).
wesayoff^nand %^ ? Observe s^r^ft = 3TSPT3*Tra, the feminine sfri being
added by'IV. 1. 6 Vdrt. The 3T of snar is elided by VI. 4. 138. and the final of
ST** is lengthened by VI. 3. 138. Why 'when ars^ follows? Observe Rn y g<*
Why do we say 'when the affix ^ follows'? Observe fa^TS^?t The * is totally
**>**
i.
II
11
II
by VI. 1. 67. Another reading of the sutra is *\\\<u~n (3T o--<=HMH^q ).

It would give the same result, the meaning then being when no affix follows.
The word toetSi or 3T5TCR1 indicates by implication that in other places where
simply a verb is mentioned, it means a word-form beginning with that verb
which ends with some affix. For had STJpara not been used, then the rule would
have applied not only when anch followed, but when afichana ending in rg*
elided
also followed.
26
The maxim >m^^r
<T*TT?
PTPTTC^
is
illustrated in *nrc^rt
and
Some Substitutions.
1238
Bk. VI.
C11. III.
96
VIII. 3. 46 teaches that visarga is changed into s^when fj follows.

There the gj denotes not only the root 35 but a word derived from ^, therefore
which begins with >, such as ^jrC: and ^:
Therefore the rule applies to forms
3ra^TN;:; for
11
3T*rc^ which
like
3TO*?SP
In the
^ frTT^t T"
and then
11
but
thus in
3ff#W there
in
Then
II
is
this
added
is
ll
V*
before
for ^n*,
this
sr^f
11
<T3TT%
II
fclK
affix (or
II
affix) follows.
sras^f, ^^>=q
*rf*r,
94.
ftw:,
11
substituted
is
foft, raft,
II
before this srs^
for TcHST
provided that the
affix) follows,
st
%&%
of
not elided.
Thus f*mw, Rt^4li
sion
'
in the
(2)
*nr:, *rft,
II
substituted
is
(or
fawferSrrtr
when no
i^tM
II
^rfxr
affix
Thus
in ffJHTt,
derived from fsF^+srs^^rff + s*^
is
93.
when no
no substitution
is
like sr^peft H
*ro: srfo
is
as well as to forms like
Vedas, diversely before the feminine nouns
there
^fNr
substitution.
#T<j
II
Vdrt
"f^rqrsft
followed merely by the verb
is
i%?;wr,
sutra
ambiguous.
"Where
is
there
is
no
^TCBJ *rf& *A
:
ffrP
11
fq&
Observe
fcRS'sp
Here
The
I^Tft
lowed by no
Thus
affix (or
spsaptr,
snsara*.,
there
no
is
The word
eli-
3T^TT
where 3T is elided" or
meaning should be taken however.
^Tfk:,
ar
when
4. 138.
II
srsrer^^f*
substitute of ^rs,
the
is
^rBr
by VI.
'
elither (1) "
latter
H^T,
*%&m srrarc3raTrfr ^r^n^^r

95.
do we say
3T is elided
may mean
It
elision".
II
Why
II
before
%&%
fol-
affix).
^Twwt:
and
tftfh*:,
See VI.
srcfNru
3.
138
for long vowel.
*ra m^ritags^ftr
fTrr:
OT^f
11
s?tflr
and
f%^
*ir^ **r
96.
*re
ll
^n^
11
mw
f^Trr^Trrr^r:
snsr, *ttt,
*rer
substituted for
is
*ffr>
ssrawiw
^r%,
in the
ll
"
*r*rfir
Veda, when
^^r follow.
Thus ^Wft*I*
3^mr, sr^fnny srwfr
SFFcTOnEnhsft
I^FH'^rTr:, *Tvre*IT :
^3 (Rig
s<T
fe
ll
II
<^\s
11
I. 3.
Another example
7) ^*rrnF?rr ^rr srfaraL
q^rft
11
fie,
bt?cTt,
is
arr^T
f^r 9TOT
11
^TO%q:,
srq:, fee,
II
Bk. VI. CH.
III. .
99
After
97.
substitute of sn*
By
ST**T(t<r, *ft<T*,
F^r/
S^TiRI.
11
1.
I.
WIT and
fe,
1239
Prepositions, long $
is
the
Thus
5TT:,
II
% replaces the first-letter of
54,
#T*,
:
SOMl sri.sTITUTES.
tf*fri*
II
The samasanta
Prohibition should
btt.
only.
viz 31
added by V.
st is
be stated with regard to
4. 74.
WW\
^TTT*T
;TTH
long f substitution does

word upasarga strictly speaking denotes
Others say after a Preposition
in bt,
the
not take place. Thus JTTT^, qTFP* II The

adverbs, and cannot be applied to nouns like stj; here however, this word
used
in a loose
s^r^fr
II
sense in the sutra.
\<
<rrrf?r
II
ll
It
means
^, ^:,
is
&c.
it
^$r,
II
After srg, ^ is substituted for (the ar of ) sm,

when the sense is that of a locality.
Thus arijTr^:, but 3T5#T^when locality is not meant. The long 3? is
taught for the sake of showing how the word is to be analysed; as 3T3 3JT - 3T^q".
The form 3T^<T- could have been evolved with a short 3 also, as 3Tf + ^q = sr^T:
98.
11
ll
But
this analysis
is
not intended.
OTOT^fhn*rwrre* 5^r^ a^Tr^TftrcrTr^ît^T^*<i k^% iivui

q^rft n w*w, ^cj^r^^^^r, st^t^, 5^, srr^fr:, srrsrr, sttcsit, surrey,
*
3t^^t, 3rra, ^rc*F,
*i*t,
^5
11
^#rf rft^^R?
srrtffcrfts
^*
11
when not used in the Genitive or the

Instrumental, gets the augment <j?ir (5), before srrfsrac, srrsrr,
srrcsir, 3Tn%TcT, st^j ^ 3 n%, 3TC5? and ?:ft, as well as before the
99.
sTfq-,
affix
(t*r).
Thus sror
'"srrcftj
= srosreftj
ST^^R^TJ, 3T?% ?FT = 3T?^sTrT:

takes g- because it belongs to
:
II
So
sjan"
3Tr^r=3T^^rw
also with
T$rf! class
S",
IV.
2.
as
btt^tt
3T52TRT^
138.
arr^^T-srî^Twr,
W=
3T?2T$ta-
II
It
138)/ Why do we say

Observe 3T?3^r 3?T5ft. == BT^rsft:,
st?5FT 3TTf^rT = 3T^rTC-*Trn &c.
With regard to the word knst and the affix g-,
the 337 augment is universal, though 3T?Jf may be even in the Genitive case
The word
when not
375^
in Genitive
belongs to
or the
TTfriT class
(IV.
2.
Instrumental?.
&c
as ar?^?!
^rc^ = 3T*3ri;
HRIT3P*,
rence of two negatives in the
3TO^rc*= 3Tll?<mi
sCitra (awst"
and
arfrftar),
ll
The unusual
implies this.
occur-
Some Substitute.
1240
aro Bransrr
^n?r:
ii
ôo
II
q^rf^r n st$, ftnrrer,

STr^r T^nt h
t:
5*7
As it^*}:
or
*^q^
sf^r
when a word
member.
As
Observe
a vowel
" ?
ii
\o\
II
g 106
li
3TT** :
^KWl"
^HBpi
Why
ll
do we say
"
^
II
?*
T^TI%
II
102.
fjnr ^r
cfiytr:,
*tf&
l\
ll
II
<**3
II
8rpto
?o^
qft:,
^frg^, *rfe,
ll
Why do we say in a *,Tatpurusha ?

when the second member begins with
\*v
as 37TO =5f^^TTlR:
:
^^ft:, ^,
^f^wrrWr
T^rft
h^t%
II
II
ii
$:
But
II
<&,
before
**, srraV,
frf Sftd flr
*i^nft
ll
x& and
ll
^r,
fr,
when
wm* = iff*rrfa
*u%
sr^rot:,
?jor
<mw
ll
ll
qfsFJC
f*^-3T
ÎHWlt >r*nt
*r is
the substitution for :,
II
II
II
ii
when the meaning
ll
may
3.
begin
101
as
3^
11
* v<
106.
word 33^
andsis?
Ff: ^TT
ftror^r
also.
follows de-
Though the second member

As ^PTtj**, ^rn^rwr 3> *W4
with a vowel, yet this substitution takes place, in spite of VI.
^rwnsni
ll
the substitute of $;, before
q^TT%
f^^f *^RTTOI
ll
substituted for
is
*jr is
and
||
105.
a small \
T*T,
II
*PT
substituted for
ll
^ficj
104.
Thus
#r.
is
noting a species.
As eôrr 5TTT infer*
qwr^pft:
ii
when
***v
103.
II
q^nfa
ii
u?*t
is
*^K
to ** f^rT^rwn:q^r:
Thus
*pt
Observe fwrSTT:, $3*r

is substituted before
Vdrt
gqMqîgr
is
III.
substituted for ^ in a Tatpuxusha,

beginning with a vowel follows as the second
qftSP)
figr CHIT
'
(^^r^)
augment of
optionally the
is
r^W
101.
ff^T*.
Bk. VI. Ch.
8T$rer*?3Trc<f$ srarro fairer
100.
z{$ follows.
ff%r:
follows.
^r
11
is
v^rfa
ll
f^rr^r,
optionally
j^,
ll
substituted for
5:,
when the
Bk. VI Ch.
Irregular Compounds.
This
Thus ^T^TJ
of
little
or fjg^T! II
substitution
the
far',
107.
f:
when ^nr
*?T
is
In the sense
an aprapta-vibhasha.
compulsory
is
1241
as
rr*
2W-
ajjr
yi*r
II
and *s*âre optionally the substitutes of
follows.
As *wiwi*, ^^r. or *$wni H
This substitution of *>r, and *^ for $ takes

before <w
place in the Veda,
and 5W:
_
WW",
Thus *WW,
_^
^qftro,
t^t^t,
?o^
n
*v&
*irtfft
ftfrir t*% * Sift ntr*M
*
fSMnwrtftwn
n*nf**S
108.
II
^^
ll
**t^w
^ Jw*
*^T
11
ii
ii
ffSTfn
OTgPT
Pi
,
109
III. .
KaHH-^^m ******* 5T ^TW y*T**ilT*

The
09
1U
SL
treatises
m0 de
augment and mutation of let& c though not found taught in

v*. ."that extent and in the
elision,
^_.
ofTmê
01
as taught
t*tT
^ ^^^
of the ga
wmn^T- = TOT3P, here

Here there is
here *r has
TOH IW-I^WW'
9r:-*f>,
laces , of TO **,
by **
for
"TR IS re P laCed
and
TO
**
w;
replaces
here
elision of T
II
So
also
and ^ replaces ^
^"^tirhTreT-eTE^ affixicj" the
"""^
^^
^^n^^^
before
is
replaced bv ,*, and the
optionaUy
^ X-The
after
of
is
changed to
and J, is replaced
final
of
is
elided
a word denoting d.recfon, as
^"^
final
l^***"
locative,
ll. Hereto takes the
ifJSj fS2
<m
, before
become;
nr,
** as>
and
"T
* (meaning
Some substitutes.
1242
and the first letter of the second member

STTO = qT^; so <sft;g"5T qi[qT or qtsr 3^11
'location'):
Thus
q"?
?|??rr
The
The
number
putting of *frg in the plural
w%
= T>rr
and the
first
q? Wffi or
letters
of these are changed to their corresponding cerebrals.
of gt
3 =*f^TO
?TTO%, 5**RT
changed
is
v^franr
preceded by the upapada

Vdrt:
Vdtt:
5:,
f$*
f*TTCP,
'
Here
fî'
*TTO^t fr?r# (frfT^
The
wrarTprre.
to s, before
by
is
final
of
<ffatf
is
^TPST,
and
W5j
In the last (^>T) there
added the
^r when
Imperative
q^sr &c.
^T,
affix
3fj
is
to the root
III. I. 136.
is
qf^
the Vedas: as
is
the verb
^ follows in
Pers. Dual).
1st.
elided in the Vedas. as
ft%<r
qq-
3?^, arorcn^rnr,
*tft, <re*, ^Tf ft,
110.
st^j;
in the Locative
cedes
m has
has the
final
elision of the nasal also.
jtrt,
these:
it
The
5%^ ?T**%,
iqT ("E%)
In fact
II
is
11
Vdrt.
Thus
addition of ^
indicates that
many parts or ways" (^RTfasnCT).

The rule therefore does not apply to
here the meaning of "in

force of an affix here.
III. 112.
changed to ^ or 7
is
optional here.
Bk.VI. Ch.
may
be substituted for
optionally
when a Numeral,
singular,
or fk or
srf
^re pre-
it.
Thus fsfrcspfa^gj?
1
,
5?i3:
II
The Locative
singular of these are gjf|
So also gfs?, T*i1r

With nr sstfg, 5^1% or s^S
H
are
These
and this very sutra is an
traits,
*rnjT?R,
?HTfr|
îTTOPJra
^rm
indicator that ar?^ may be compounded with other words than a Numeral, or
Thus we have ^Tr}| = *TWTo'. (II. 2. 1). But <vH and arwf, only.
fa or ^rra
or gjfPT,
or 5?^f?r H
>stf|
II
:,
11
qraft
Ftt:
11
^^r srteft sor:
s^nf^nsfqT sf^*
s^ft, <re s^r^fr
*t
or t
^ and 3" a corresponding

Thus rft&l, tfte*, ST*TS*l
f^W, T^r
*5CT *TO
*rarr
tnre^:
for the elision of C see VIII.

it is
3. 14.
II
*frer H*rffi
is
ff%:
11
*rf? *tf|
But
3TP|SJ:,
ii^tt*
II
3?t
When f
for the sr or
3TF*T*
W=
II
the
is
is
formed with the
*n%, ^r:,
3.
3Tffc*T,
13,
and
not lengthened because
srta;,
ofarf ^
sr^Sr^,
qru
||
or t are elided, there
stt
preceding
For the elision of 5 see VIII.
it
I)
substituted.
is
*^-R^TK* = *fkTKT,
i&%*nww\*K arf^fr *nrr?r s%>
112.
tution of
II
^rir:, srnr.
11
for the
elided,
not included in the pratyahara 3T^ which
^fe^TH^rer
^^r,
f<?5ft,
Long vowel
II
q^rf?r
11
When ?
111.
ST,
\\\
11
of the verbs
?s?r
and
is
the substi-
II
Bk. VI. Ch.
Ill 115.
Thus
8T or 3TT
^TST,
Observe
also?
The
to btt
by Vriddhi
rule
ed only short
^ft^n
3ft-.,
Why
do we say
Why
il
do we say of
which includes long
3?==^
3? of
^ and
q%
*rr
changed
is
Tf^TI, 3?4re*l n Had merely 3? been read into the

coming after the ? of 3?^, it would have denot-
as
then
(mm Vi'-^WIK-
3?
1243
and ?t&ZFi
%'s 5*.
apply even when the short
3T^
W<k WT
ft'lft
W5^, ^T,
^P5*,
will
sutra, instead of
Some Substitutes.
<HltfM ftnfr
I.
II
I.
75)-
11$
q^r/ifc
II
^T^", ^TfT,
II
*TT3T,
ffir,
II
tfw-
ii
^rw
^r^r
*i%
srrcr
mzk,
113.
f^Ti^
f%<nfa
and ^t^t are
^rrfT
irregularly
formed
in the Vedas.
Thus 5IW smmfc

*ft
OTST
II
is
STTjr
ST^
formed by
h^ affix.
II
The
latter
is
formed by wit
In the other alternative w*tT
not taking place.
Tf substitution
^T
In the secular literature
the
affix,
changed to
and
are
is
^r
the proper forms.
^ferrer*
II
<T3TT% ll^fedMIH,,
II
II
upto the end of the

" In an unpada, are to be supplied the following words
'\
interrupted flow of speech
In the following
114.
sfttras
Thus
sutra VI.
3.
135
declares "*r at the end
of a two-syllabic in-
Thus ^rrfl^r SP^nr ^t rh^r*

The word ^f^rTnTT^ should be read into that sutra to complete the sense. So
that when the above words stand separately, we have FTO,f?, ^n/, fl"c*Tr%, *JT,*TRPIU
flected verb
becomes long
in
the
Hymns".
^t ^TnT^rf^^sq^^f^m^r^^f^^^^rnEcr^^^r H f ?mi q^rr%

*tff ^rt^t, 3T r%s, snj, q^, *rftr, fire, f^sr, fese, *&t, ^f^F^r (sft^r:) u
,
31%:
sr
11
^^rm ttt^ wwR-ft
^mrs^rf^TT
*hff >refir r?e
Before
long vowel for the
qsur,
there
final of the
notes a proprietorship
is
the
substitution of a
preceding word, when
it
de-
mark on the ears of cattle, but not when
the words are ft^, sjs^, <T^C, *rm,
fvrsT,
f^r,
'
1%^,
^ and
II
Thus sranfi*r
here means any
:
pj^Tjt
hfa r*r fssr ray spt ^tfrr-
11
115.
^ftd^
3re^ t*
11
on the ears of
The word
3^pwk*p
mark showing the proprietorship, put or made
Why do we say when it denotes such a mark ?"
rlnpTr^rn:, f%*joTrer*:. Kt3ttrarf:,
peculiar
animals.
11
i*44
Sanhita-changes
.Observe trTWWJT
Why
II
*f*r.
Tf* snr
11
fa*fi
119
do we say 'with the exception of faS&c'? Observe
^ft
*fetfasfas*fairf^^rfa5 ** "*
ftmuT
Bk. VI. Ch. Ill
*fk, *fa, ffa, rf*.
f wws fa* totot%$w%
tf*r rf^r *f*r *rff fff^r
s*wi #4t *ro?w ir-
11
116.
long vowel
substituted for the final
is
vowel of the preceding word, before the verbs i(W,

^^r, ^nr and ^[, when these roots take the affix fyr
f*r,
f?j f
II
(3<TPT^ Nom. S.), so also, qCNfl(, 'ft**, ^TTf^, (with vrt)

v
sh
with
) WT**, CWHT*, Mlf*H,(with vyadh) sft*, iT<faF% (with
f
JTTf^.^rf^, (
(with
sah)
The nasal is elided after ip* before
trffrRr (with tan).
ruch) qnftaki
Thus TTFT*
f% (VI. 4. 40), by an extension of that rule,

do we say when ffc follows ? Observe Mfl'JTfl*
sptfrrcf:
*mn;,
Hfw
f*rft
^mfligg tmCmm
fw>goJ*i^HiH,
^t**:,
1*
11
tfinwf
ll
elided after
it is
Why
also.
II
\V*
ll
q^rft
II
nr, foft:,
tf-
11
f^*frcapcTW^*n%*ni
tii*M^T^f flfJipwrrffTf *r
fNf warn ^rwit faro
11
For the final vowel of ifcK &c. a long vowel

substituted before ^r, and so also of ffcgprwr &c. before faft:,
117.
is
the compound is a Name.

Thus 3KT*T!T>tw, f%"tr3KT^jrw f**U<nHL, WRwrfPI
So also !%3pp|fTfitft:, T*-l*lll*lR:, &c
The ^ is changed to or in ar by VIII. 4. 4. But n f^lM^*! and
when
II
ffrft
as these
words do not belong to the above
1 cRter, 2 F*srer, 3 rerwar,
faaa*
7fff?
srrffore.
4 s*r
2 friFf
(f%ipwr),
ll
??*
ii
<^n%
n *ra, ( <jfo*r tftfh )
The
final
affix *FZ
Thus ingtftw, itfrW,
11
ffttîr.
ll
of the preceding word
is
leng-
II
WW
ll
These are'formed by the
affix *nrr
112).
Vdri : Not
terror)
far***?), 3 snr*, 4 ****, 5 wi*pr, 6
aTj^trr^win J"ih fir
thened before the

2.
(star), 5 *rrrc*
ll
118.
(V.
fwj-
classes.
^vron*
) n
so,
of **OTS,
W*
and ftw
as **frrj*w:, *rw*w:
and
foww
II
Bk. VI.
Cii. Ill 122
Samhita-lengthening.
124
The final vowel of a word consisting of more

119.
is lengthened before the affix jt^, when it is
syllables
two
than
a name, but not of the words stt%?: &c.
Thus
affix
do we say
'of
Why
^^rrerfr ^t^rr^fh Ss^Rrft,
s^n;r^rfr,
ed by the
(IV.
2.
85)
The
changed
is
These are formby VIII. 2. 1 1. Why
9T*rcPTrft
to f^,
11
a word consisting of more than two syllables
? Observe cftf^Trft
&c\ Observe srfire^ft, <JriWTcft, sfPFTOfr, ?^^7Rthe word is not a name, there is no lengthening,
II
'with the exception of 3TPtt
<T^t, ^nr^raf^ft
as 3r?^<ft
When
II
1 srr^rc, 2 *?rf^, 3 ^f^T.
srcnftar =*
^frr
II
11
'^
q^TT%
11
grr^T^
As
vimft, %*TPKft
The
ll
But not so
2. 11),
*t
^rerrr^ )
sroCRra:, ^,
11
^ H%t #TT WrT ^H^f f^TO

The final vowel
120.
when it is a Name.
OT^faT
fore jr*
(VIII.
?ô
^^^^.
fa:
of sre &c.
lengthened be-
is
is
&c
as these belong to
*rf9r,
7 3ft, 8 |jf^-, 9 53.
of
after pfrff
II
II
changed
Name
*nrrr% class
(VIII.
? because
to
it is
2.9).
1 w:, 2
3 **, 4
srer,
^t s^r^:
r*ft
srfrr^*
ii
ir\
11
^ri^
11
srft^rfRffafa ^rjsto.
121.
srft, 5 ?tfft
The
w*,
srir,
sfilret:
11
11
jand
final
the
3:
of a word, with the ex-
ception of cft, are lengthened before

Why do we say 'ending
Thus s^qr^*, sfrifa?*, g^ffa^C
||
ll
Observe fq^f*
Vdrt:
*re*?*
ffrf
II
Why
11
not of ffg? Observe <ft^f*
in js* vowels' ?
ll
should be stated "with the exception of 7^ and the
It
rest."
As
ii
S7tfTTO
^JtRtT^ S^^tf^W *% #ff
The
*3I%
II
vowel of a Preposition is diversely

lengthened, before a word formed by the krit-affix sr^, but
122.
final
not when the compound denotes a

Thus
It is
5ft?:, 3faRf:, STTPTrtf:
lengthened
J?r^>R5,
otherwise
nRlfn*5 or
before
5*rf?s
frfi^t?:
f*TOr?ri3i:
27
11
*rr?
and
and i^TR:
When human
S&n:,
ll
human
It .does
II
being.
not take place, as q%^:,
when building
Optionally
is
in %*[ &c. as
beings are meant, there
jf^-.
\\
meant, as rotT?: and

is
qfwT:
or
STrfV%^T: f
no lengthening, as
1246
f^r: *ft$t
?^
II
before
As
*ft*
\\
:,
w^x
CMi ren
do we say 'ending
end in %&
^ Ww
^:,
II
^rr,
A Preposition
123.
its final
<icprft
ll
III.
127
II
ending in
$,
^ lengthens
or
II
^Wcftr ^ t
formed by sr*
sfiTO is
II
Observe
3' ?
% or
in
f&x
Bk. VI. Ch.
(III.
1.
134)-
Why
where the Preposition does not
Ji^TO:
ll
fnr:
ii
sr
q^R
II
ll
its final
<T
say
'
is
^r
^t,
when
lengthens
the latter
is
changed
(VII.
sr^r:
II
11
ll
changed to
substitute of
<T
Observe
'
beginning with a
fT,
4. 46).
*iwlH
'
Rcfi^*
Why
II
Observe Uf tTt here
^3m%
II
i^NlH,
st^t:,
do we say fa
srm^r
the substitute
is
^: )
II
is
member, when the compound
3rm*f>:, STST^p::
'
II
before the second
Thus
<r
f^rffar^
^PST #*ff H^r%

long vowel
BTffH^lrl^'fn^
125.
3T^j[
See VII. 4. 47 for the change of ^r to rT II

T^tfr
where the prepositions do not end in f or ^
Why do we
Thus %tT*> #tT^,
fPT:
11
II
JHT^r, 3T^tT^,
*r
*?cf?r
II
Preposition ending in 5 or
vowel, before the verb
But
of
srwr^ )
^:, ft, ( 3ff: **&:
i^ <TO^^^wsr*re<T s^wtsptto tr3r

124.
to
II
But
3TS5^r:, 3TC*Tr4:
is
a name.
vvhere the
com-
pounds are not names.
W^ ^f^l
II
II
\R$
*$fa
\
*rf%^*
frf:
11
<nrc *r
3^"
V^lfo
*rrsrrarTE^T
^^ftr, ^,
II
S^ff tf 3f
S??T
T^r%
^3f
*t^t?i%
In the Veda
126.
( sfHt: )
also,
stt^*
11
the long vowel
for the final of st^j; before a second

the feminine
elided in a Bahuvrihi
Vdft
lar,
The
),
is
&&: ^rt
?^\9
\ f%:
NfrTOS^
the
affix *$;?
II
1.
8) of areqi^CV.
qrrj;
^cfii*i
^tt% ftm:,
TOr *Nf WrT
II
II
substituted
ffrrr g*icft
11
The form
138 the 3? of qTf being
4.
by VI.
of arsîs lengthened before
meant. Thus 3T5rFT^
3ffq"
127.
3^7 (IV.
T5I
final
when yoking
(I
in
is
member.
Thus srFwrereFTR f^î, srerf^w vwm, 3T5tt#

9T5T<TfT is
II
11
tr
4, 130.
even
in
the vernacu-
II
^ft,
^:
ll
11
The
filial
vowel of fefe
is
lengthened before
Bk
VI. Cii. Ill
133
Thus q^fMtap,
fexfw
sr^rrr.
Samhita-lkngtiieming.
f$r%?ffap,
ll
The
RrfMt'T
<rrift
II
1247
11
^,
fe****r,
ntr:,
^Nh
II
vowel of fir*ar is lengthened before

and ^7 (the form assumed by tt*t).
Thus nw^f RPJTÛ The rule applies to the ?x* form of ?r*T in
128.
^j
final
not when
the Nominative singular, and
f^rrsp
retains
it
MgN IH
?R
?^
II
**&$
II
II
ÔTTO,
5T^,
The final of f^
compound is a Name.
129.
when the
Thus
when
it is
ftit
ff%:
frar?rc:,
tt
sr^r,
ffrr*.
11
^n%
II
II
ft%, ^,
^,
?rc? *n*m
the
As f^rrmî
it is
'the
^,
*TCT
*^
lengthened before
is
frlr. ;
l\\
II
q^TFT
II
are lengthened
fa*HMUHWWIH
*mrarn, (
sffafa^TO
ffrf
II
^T,
*H%,
3TT,
TCBt ^?^t *rai%
when the
11
^ffar,
affix *Tg<r
3r*sr,
follows.
fTO^r^t
?jrir^fV, 3T**raft, srfspktt,
**%
II
In a Mantra, the final vowels of
f^r^T
first
II
i^fî ^nr 3r^r ?f^? f^ra^s* s^faqf Tg^^
*CT*5r
) H
fti%srer, *#r,
and
*Kh
sage Visvamitra'. But fr^TTO* a boy called ViSvamitra'.
^Rn^rfepifal^nCT TT^
Thus
II
11
The final of f%sgname of a Rishi.
131.
gft %qr
t^TRR: (the son of Vishvanara). But ff*TK: = ff%
%wf*ifo fw^r
f*r% #nreTf
JT5%
*(Nh
lengthened before
is
130.
when
form: as f^**Hft,
not a name.
ii
own
its
11
^TT%
II
II
3Tt^:,
*,
ft?F$r,
3TST-
) n
II
f%*HfraiPITnif TOT*
^Nf *nt%
II
In a Mantra, the final of sfnrRl is lengthened before the case-endings, but not in the Nominative.
132.
Thus
fore
sfns^rfarfPTrr^,
case-endings
'
W>
W>
"jn-n^
Observe STPTfwt
sfrawsT
Why
"
Why
do we say
do we say
'
'
be-
but not in the
Nominative
'
Observe fwfcrc*fc8*n*
^r% g^wgcr^s^sînirw
ar^, $*, grwuuin*,
^ra-
ll
11
II
l\\
ll
irrft
ii
^1%,
3, 3,
*rg,
1248
In the Rig-Veda the
133.
^ îe
3 3> ^>
3^\q- are
tense-affix cT^,
*T^:*TT
WP5RIII
rf
when
substitute of m",
^r% *3*
^ RTmr 5ra
nr.
11
the ending
sr
and the word
II
II
?T^
treated
it is
ff >*Rsr
qsrrR
II
R,'g IV 3 2 x ) 5?: ^f
: ^T ^rRPTOP* ( Rig X.
F? f^L (
TfPT5<pftjf?
here, ôfr^ srrfFT: (1.2. 4;.
ff^j
of the particles
finals
lengthened
o
Thus 5 :3TT 5
the
r,
[Bk. VI, Ch. III. I37
^jtito gftr
as fw<l, therefore
^sr^r
^fsr,
s*>:,
ll
<r*;rfr
*TP
*Fami
176. 2
^^
3<T
rT^ is
).
does not apply
it
3*<an" off*!
( qfNfc
II
II
fr*ff *rcrer u
In a Mantra, the finals of the preceding

member ending in % or ^ are lengthened before the particle
134.
Thus
The
*r is
3T>ft
changed
SpretafenF*.
II
*n#TT* (Rig- I V. 3 1.
by VIII. 3. 107: and
or:
to q
?V*
135.
^rf?f
II
tense
II
&4 3* ^t 33*
*T
changed to
sr*:, 3T3:, fa^:,
affix
ending in
or
st is
( Rig I. 36. 1 3
by VIII. 4. 27.
3T% sfHh
).
II
lengthened in
the Rig-veda, when the Verb consists of two syllables.

Thus ftot f?
*T*<Tlt fn: *rr;rr^&c. See Rig III. 42. 6, ffsr,* f?
<TTO
fa^TO
&c. But not here f^r *TTrT llT^R-, as the verb consists of more than two syllables:
not also here 3jr f%T^
3T3T âs the verbs do not end in 3?
faqTcn*r
%v*t'<
11
^ n ?^
rtht^ *
iif^<ra
136.
thened.
Thus
Sfirfel*
^rr%^f*r
11
^rr%
BrrWr
11
fa<rnrer,
w?r
^f%
) (
^Hh
) n
11
In the Rig Veda the final of a particle
X&\ %, 3?=^%,
sT^mfa ^^r%
*R
II
11
II
BT^T
??vs
II
gtflSK* f R.
<r^rfr
ll
I. 2.
is
leng-
).
sr^^rrq;. srPf,
c^^r,
sfHr:
II
II
3T*r
^'tr^^f^^r^^"'^
The elongation of the
11
137.
final
is
to be found
in other words also.

Here we must follow the usage of the Sishthas. Where the lengthening
by any of the rules of Grammar, but occurs in the writing of
ordained
is not
standard authors, there
we should
accept such lengthening as valid.
Thus
Samhita-lengtiieninc,.
B. K. VI. Ch. III. 139]
Vdrt:
^f,
The
T^>
=?*T?.
^ V
*
II
ffrf:
of *j^ is lengthened before the following ^r,
and *V as
V^rfo
II
*#r t^t:
11
fin.il
1249
II
**TW
^T,
^#Tfî tf^f ^f?T
*3T?%->, **&?%', *?rff*T,
<j^fT%:
^T^r?:,
^rT^, *XWV
II
^reis^%#re^r*re7rcT *m?r
11
^gr, ^pJr
11
The final vowej. of the preceding member

lengthened before 3^, when it assumes the form
having
138.
is
and the vowel.

Thus swfa: ***' ?**Nt> 3 ft% T^s 7**, l^rr, **%
The nasal of
is elided by VI. 4. 24, and the ar by VI. 4. 138. In sfa + ar^r the f is not
lost its nasal
>
8T*T
changed to
its
II
semivowel, though that
is
an antaranga
rule,
because the present
sutra ordains specifically long f and so also yft + *T^C and *n* +
,
VI.
3.
sr^
ll
See also
92.
^M^ KUl^
?^
II
II
T^T
II
WUHKUU:^,
^rRq^
fHt:
11
The vowel substituted for a semivowel is

when
it stands as the first member of a compound.
lengthened,
139.
As ^1*1*1?%^:, ^rfrspT^rrnt:, ^rs**iwft<Tfip u See. vi. 1. 13. sitfrqw*

T?^tS^=^qTf?^: {j oeing added as samasanta by V. 4. I36and 137). The optional shortening ordained by VI. 3. 61. does not apply here, for that option is a
definite
and
restricted option; moreover,
superseding a precedent/ rule VI.

rule VI.
3.
is
is
on the
61
61 can not be revived by the
formation of a particular form

rule
3.
is
maxim of q?c^, 'a subsequent
superseded by VI.
maxim
5^:
jrcrjf
n^r
3.
rule
139; and the
"occasional ly the
accounted for by the fact that a preceding
allowed to apply again, after
subsequent
rule. "
it had previously been superseded, by a

For here the following maxim will prevent the revival q $fl;n
f%sn<TO*Pl*rfarr TOPfcrfa' "
when
two
rules,
while they apply simultaneously,
mutually prohibit each other, that rule of the two which
is once superseded
superseded altogether, and cannot, therefore, apply again, after
the latter rule has taken effect.
by the
other,
is
BOOK SIXTH.
Chapter Fourth
ST^T
II
<T^TT%
II
3^*T,
II
Whatever
1.
II
be taught here after upto the
will
end of the Seventh Adhy&ya,
consequent upon the stem
is
(anga).
This
an adhikara
is
Thus
sutra.
ing of the vowel of a samprasarana
VI.
in
taught the lengthen-
4. 2 is
as |rp, ^fa:, Spffa:
That means that
II
the vowel preceded by a consonant belonging to the stem
Therefore in ftr + w>T + tR = ffi^T*, the vocalised vowel 3

f^c
is
So
upasarga and not stem.
thening of the
qÎ, as
f*r
and
*r
<TFFTr
'a female
forms
f%fif mri
having
and
must be the
or TPT^',
fjffjf
Similarly VI.
R*[
is
3? final
formed by
changed into 7tct
an anga or stem
in
^t^TPT^T^T, the fan does not follow an an ga. fn^T
means
-ff%i
4. 3,
affix
?r
As
II
lengthened.
is
not lengthened, as
teaches the leng-
But rafanTPJ T5$, Tr^RT

The stem is fîRTr and
ST^TP* H
Accusative Singular.
qr*RPl. are
ar,
^^
as STiftiri'
?rpqr,
the end-portions of a stem.
are not
teaches that after
the 3T
before
final
is
(V.
The
100).
2.
Similarly VII.
f%:, g%:
hence not here
means boiled
I.
There
II
also,
grrgwftrcCT,
rice
and
f*rer$r
II
The maxim of
3Ttrc<t*145i
srFpq^TO does not apply here
for
had
it
been so, there would have been no necessity of making this sutra. For example, in the sutra ?mH (VI. 4. 3), the affix ^r^ having a meaning would have
been meant, and pot any other ?TP
II
The word
3Tp3T must be read in the following sutras, otherwise there

would arise incongruity first; sutras teaching the lengthening of the vowel
:
when
or Samprasarana
follows, thus
of vowel before ^^, as nr^taf?T

of anga.
So
VI.
4.
but not here ?fa
also in Samprasarana, but not in
16 ordains the lengthening
û%
f?ts<T
&c
for \ of ^nr is not that
as
shown above.
BK. VI. CH. IV
2ndly
change of
jn ?! or
-
For
into
air
qf
LENGTHENING.
purposes of qc#
the
rrust refer to anga as
1251
sutra VI.
in
r^m\
The
4. 68.
or 'rTlWrt, but not
optional
here
f^raf-
f^^Tft, for here îs not part of the ariga, and so 3 cannot be consider-
ed a conjunct part of anga.

Jrdly
For the
change of 5
to
hot here
tsffa
phly
not here
For the substitution
fq& aud
of
For the sake of âugment
For
But not
And lastly
change of 5 into ?j
here, ^TTft
or
here
in Sanskrit
3T3fTO
I.
11
II
s??
*r
13 or-
II
48 ordains the
4.
anga, as 3Tf$:
It refers to
11
4.
the ahga-vowel,
^T = ^K|ch
Thus VII.
^!^^
W&?i
^rersrarari7
But the
may
II
2.
st,
Thus
in
II
**
force of Genitive
9%^, where
sr***>?: in
(VII.
3T<Tf PT*T q*T
f*W< Ijw
3T4VKI-dll WfiFZ
st^WS*
the whole of
in sutras like
3^T^Rr
^R^T (VII.
I.
1.
9) arjf
The Genitive
ll
*TT?:
Or
i).
is
replaced
(VI.
4- 89).
the Genitive
be changed into any other case, as already shown.
tT3Ti%
II
^r:,
sT^r^q^rg^r vgrft ^Jrern^r
half-vowel
before
require.
It has the force of
Thus VII.
rertt
should be read with proper case-affixes as the
it
may
has the force of RfaTrfHfar%
%&:
But not here
It refers to
II
or $m|f:
*r*jrcnrw
case has force of '^TR^'&i' in sutras like
ffrp
Therefore
4. 77.
1.
should be read in the ablative case
case in arjfTO
but
49 (BTR %*t), but of mere relation-ship.

be considered as a mere pratipadika, without any case-affix.
may
4. 36).
VI.
54.
1.
Genitive case.
in the
STjfTO is
exigencies of each sCitra
It
FTT^,
11
In the subsequent aphorisms,
(VI.
not ahga.
is
here not only that taught in
Or
^ ^^m
3?
substitution.
rf
in the case of st*
ST^rvnr:, for 3T<t
w$&&w&tf* jrarsnr
The word
in
3^3?
VII.
in
vowels before
3T<w
for rT^r
To sum up
is
^fMd or
the sake of shortening of vowels.
dains the shortening of
But not here
There also 5 must
35.
11
$t/ily
as H|R*I H
1.
5, therefore,
<^* H
^*fa and ^qir
6thly
VII.
in
rTT?i;
be portion of the ahga, and not the particle
3T^*t
The long vowel

% and
3"
#f
is
and
is
wx
3fr: )
II
substituted for a vocalised
at the end of a stem,
ed by a consonant which
Both the words
wmHKum;
rr^wps fm Wet
when
it
is
preced-
a portion of the stem.

from VI.
3.
Ill,
and
^PTcrrrr
from VI.
3.
Thus 5T from JgT, ^fa: from "5gr, tf^fcT: from sgr

Why do we say 'preceded by a consonant' ? Observe Srp and Srrep*. from %>ril
Why do we say that the preceding consonant should be a portion of the stem?
139 are understood here.
II
LENGTHENING.
1252
BK. VI.
ClI. IV. 5.
Observe Ft^T^ here is not an integral part of the stem, but a portion of the
upasarga R!^ and therefore 3 is not lengthened. Why do we say 'at the end
?;
Observe rt^ W^rf: from sajtJ and zq% here the vowel % is in the
middle of the stem. Why do we say *3T, \ and 3 substitutes of semivowels' ?
Here re has been vocalised into f % being substituted for ^
Observe ^<fN:
of a stem'
II
(V.
2.
of lengthening in H^fa
is
before the affix
sCitras like II.
11
The S
Or the absence
an irregularity countenanced by Panini himself in
55).
The word
30 &c.
1.
word
to qualify the
*rfa
<fra
srjf
should be repeated in this sutra,
and then to qualify the
$3;,
^rrfo, (
**?m%
T^rsre
^^ ^
srsnRjf*
The long vowel
3.
not be lengthened.
will
letters 3T,
:
$ and 3
first
11
% r>?rar^ ^wpcnt u
t
is
the stem before the Genitive Plural affix
jtph;
(having the aug-
ment
gs).
ceases.
Thus sr^frTT*, *TS*TO, 3F*T0TT*, ^pTP* H The anuvritti of 3T*J (VI. 3. 1 1 1

The augment ^(VI I. 1. 54)in^nîs for the sake of the subsequent sutra;
like
V I.4.7.
affix 3TPI.
anc the lengthening takes place

*
For
II
would be no occasion
5T
fa^^^
II
3^ which comes only after short stems.

JT, fa^, xT<^,
<nrrft
( mfa <p|: )
for
11
II
The
4.
after the addition of 5? to the genitive
the lengthening took place before the addition of 3*
if
and
finals of fcr^;
before TT^
As f^prp*, âûii^
^-^
there
11
are not lengthened
II
plication that the final

plural, VII.
2.
The very
II
fact of this
m of these words is not
100 notwithstanding.
In fact 3?
to that rule, and thus the preceding rule VII.
the subsequent rule VII.
s^^sgprarar
5.
11
2.
1.
is
^^rftr,
In the Veda, the
added before scope
In
some
wt
finals
*tt
3w
n * J
<j^h%
11
is
given
ii
of fcf^ and ^TrT^ are
mm
II
places they are seen as lengthened, in others not.

H
imf-
54 prevents the application of
found in both ways, before the Genitive plural

ipsqf^ or f%f TP* *T^F?%
by
* before a genitive
100.
q^rPi
prohibition proves
changed to
So
3:,
also
II
=^rT^T^Tr*lL
and ^rf JfoiTI
As fa^T
Bk
VI. Cn. IV.
10
Some Mles of ?r
1253
So also 3 before the Genitive Plural *TR
6.
leng-
is
thened optionally.
As
r^
^ goif -J?^
and
^T^",
?r*rf
srtarrarr: n \s n
ffrT:
q^rfa
TrerTOrgwrerar ^rfr
11
vMi
it^t
lengthened before the
h^Rt
affix ?rn*
some
( snftr *fHfc )
^, snrararn,
11
to
this option
extends to secular literature
it
is
con-
also.
11
:i
In a stem ending in
7.
7);
According
fined to the Vedas, according to others,
the preceding vowel
j,
is
II
Thus n?ep*+ ire (VII. 1. 55) = T^rraL+?pi(VI. 4. ;) = M>^Hig (VIII.

Why do we say 'ending in t( ? Observe
^ HMIfr., T^RT* SSIRr*
But not
in *q"*H<TP*.
^htt:
ffrr:
sflrtr:
11
affix is
<
not
q^TFf
ll
but sin? without
?rri
11
^tht^^r,
j?
ans*^
^r,
I!
11
3m-
II
srtTPremt
11
where the
î^r
q$umsi3
2.
^3^
ll
qrc<fr
s^f^r
^t<T*rrar
#S *^rft
In a stem ending
8.
in
11
the preceding vowel
is
lengthened in strong cases, with the exception of the Vocative

singular.
As
^HTT^, the
So also
tors, ^rsrr^ *nrrlr
was elided by VI. 1. 68, and 3^ by VIII. 2.
*njr, Tnrrfr.
*J
strong cases
'
Observe
*T3TT^
(Loc-Sing); CTlft (Loc.
Observe 9
'but not in the Vocative Singular'?

srr trjtfcq-
fHift n
9.
11
qîfa
ll
ll
3T,
The lengthening
r,
xr^fH
srFrrPr fêf?rir u jtsit
cTspj;
ijter, fa*T*r
11
of the penultimate vowel of a
stem ending in ^, before the affixes of the strong-case,

in the Veda, when * precedes such a vowel.
Thus
Why
tT$!TT.
is
optional
*r rr^r^r or rrer% fag^sT^

m^wi or smprarfa^
do we say 'in the Veda'? In the secular literature we have
1
11
?r^r, rTCTpfr
always.
^TRTJTW.
ffrr
was
Why do we say 'in

Sing).
Why do we say
7.
11
^#^T
II
\o
||
sranrRra ÔTf ar ^r tor:
qRTTft
II
*TFtT, *Tf<r., tf*rt*TOr, (
*r?tf*T rr*tr<r*rror
^Nf
wlr
#J:
^r^R tot
II
s^rfsrr n
In the strong cases with the exception of Vocasingular, the penultimate vowel is lengthened, in the case
10.
tive
of a stem ending in
and
of-*!V3
28
with
a Nasal consonant preceding
it
Lengthening.
rz$4
That
is,
a stem ending in the conjunct consonant ?H, elongates
timate vowel before the affixes of the

%*rrft,
T*m%,
T*,
*rcril%
ll
^^ ^^,
^f
**f ,
by VII.
inserted
is
SHJ,
But %
I*
12
penul-
its
*srif^, *5P*ntr, V[FEP,
*ra^,
% *m^
Vocative
in
70.
1.
<*>L
Thus
cases.
first five
T^*^P, W^r, *W&
The Nasal
Singular.
Bk. VI. Cn. IV.
snmôrro
11
In the strong cases, with the exception of the

Vocative Singular, the penultimate vowel is lengthened in
affixes, and in ^^, yp^,
WT, in stems formed by *g% and
11.
ancl srere^
^1, WPr tfo *&!
*?,
Thus
H^ls*M.lH
3TTI' fayfnf
II
The Samas&nta
ll
ft
Some would have
it
even, in
compound's; as ^rf^?
applied here, because
rule is not
it is
anitya.
If
it
be coosklered nitya^ then also there is lengthening, but without the addition
of the nasal . ^T SHRH^ ftfarft?* ffa îr^T5# H fam fa^HTH ^ 5^^c^T
f
ffem^
m$mh ^nTTT^rfrî ^rifc: f^t 3*rfrtr 552-^1 ^ttr: ^rnfr *ns?i, s^fc
*w *^r ^mti &m*'< Tcf thi t^wrfr *w ^| %srf %sr: ?^s: êto ?^R*.
*?V ^rfT^^T^
stt*
st^rtr
^rrtrc:
ftf
?trnfr
If the
V| &c.
words
then their enumeration
is
wnv <stf q??TKt $mrr.

fî^ sg^rfrnî faw^r*
f^f#fi ^"P^^f^rr^r
wiih\ #3f w *f$m f^ri^r fa<T*t ir&
JT^rRrTRs
*rar*
srsrrs*
srcff^Flrm r%^
jr^n^frrfV
t
*
t
q^^rnTn^^^t ^tf1
s^tt*
l^rcr
11
be considered as ^f%, not derived from any root,
here for the sake of Vidhi (injunction)
if
they be
considered as derivative words formed by Unadi affixes, then their enumeration is for the sake of
larly are not to
niyama
(restriction), so that other
be governed by
this rule.
As
fqrKT, W*t*',
do we say 'not in the Vocative Singular''? Observe f

above examples sr^ is substituted for sg by VII. 3. no.
^?TTT4*aTi
12.
sft
II
IR
*&ft
& VH, ^C,
<J*r
The penultimate vowel
is
words formed simiHl^T, m^K' U
^rf:,
^ *TO
ll
Why
In the
spftorf, zt, ( cfpj: )
||
lengthened before
the affix ra (Nominative and Accusative PL), when the stem

ends in s^, or %% or *%&*, or srq?^
According to the maxim (See VI. 4. 14 also) that "3T^, ?^, 3T3[> *\H
in this sutra
WlWWrtf ^TT^rT ^T rTSnT mrT Î^raPrT ", the employment of
includes and means "ôrds ending in the syllable f^"
As regards the rest
(f^&c. ), the affix ftr (Neuter PI.) is never added to them alone, but when
II
11
they are parts of a compound.
Thus f^
is
a noun formed by the addition of
Bk. VI. Cn. IV.
the affix
n^g
when
is
it
12
to the root
^;
and the
affix
preceded by another word like
Similarly the words

Plural affix
f^r
^qând
ara*n* are
1255
Kvip
"
added to
is
Brahma"
Though
result could
this
^g*"r?Tf*T
in
^g^
ffr
^^prrrSr
the special
4. 8,
Accusative and
Nom.
As fpT%,
lengthening does not take place in other strong cases.
Kdrikd :
have been obtained by VI.
mention of these words shows that except
the
PI.
gfarnt,
^T-
Regarding the rule of lengthening taught about f^ &c here,
the wise reader, after
making a
affixes in general,
f^T in
particular, (i e^
(Loc.
sin,)
2.
III. 2. 87.
They must be parts of a neuter comHence we have used words " when the stem ends
this affix.
f^ &c."
Thus *f fgfft and qg-^sftpr s^f^rf^r
namas th^na)
<5nly thea,
it
See
masculine and cannot take the Neuter
let
&c.
in their original state.
pound, to admit
in
Lengthening.
with regard to
restrictive rule
make again another
make a yoga-bibhaga).
By
g*
(sarva-
rule regarding the affix
so doing, the form
%nr^
of the Ach&rya, will not be found fault with,
(But
if
yoga-vibhaga be not made) then
rule that the anuvritti of
made with regard
fj* being dropped, let the rule be
to
fa
affix in general
Sarvanamasthana affix). And as the rule of

lengthening applies to penultimates, there would arise no fault, if the vowel
of
is lengthened before the demonstrative affix q (in words like
% ?TfR%=^r?l
(without regarding
it
as
%%
This refers toVII,
3TT^*nT,
3.
Or
if
4. 25).
the anuvritti of
g? (Sarvanamasthana) be taken
Sutra, because of the context, then the mention of
ftr
into this
(would be
in this Sutra,
Sarvanamasthana includes it, so far as the

would find scope and utility in preventing
the lengthening in those cases to which the context of Sarvanamasthana does
not apply. That is, the Sarvanamasthana will be restricted with regard to
redundant, because the word
strong cases are concerned) but
f^ &c
to the affix f%
Note
It it a
. ftT
is
and not to ^?
the
affix
Sarvanamasthana by
into this sutra
it
of the
I, 1,
42.
from the preceding VI.
affixes generally.
Nom. aud Ace. PI. in Neuter (VII. 1. 20.)

But the word Sarvanamasthana may be read
4. 8.
What
is
then the necessity of employing
The above karika answers this.

ending words, the subsequent rule VI. 4. 15,
In the case of
which required the lengthening of tfre penultimate vowel before an affix
having an indicatory ^ or sr, is however debarred by trie present restricHow do
Thus the Locative Singular (fw) is f^SH, and a^fa
tive rule.
you make this ? By splitting up the present sutra into two parts, the first
f^j
in this ?
II
part being ^^L^TT^wiri.i and the second being
II
It
would then mean
Lengthening.
1256
The penultimate vowel is lengthened, in strong

when the stem ends in 5^ or ?^ or in <rqr^ or
(1)
lengthened before the strong case
would debar
therefore,
f^r
all
and no where
But a
3^
yet this
anuvritti,
may
not only with regard to
which does not
re-
II
the sutra
into
be considered a Restrictive Rule in general, and

f^r
considered a Sarvanamasthana or a Neuter affix
the Sarvanamasthana affix of the Neuter
f^T is
rule
not debarred by this restriction, but does take
is
Thus f^rg%, ^f^ra^ denominative verbs in

Or even though the Sarvanamasthana may be read
effect.
by
else.
(2)
other rules of penultimate lengthening
which would otherwise have been applicable.

late to penultimate vowel,
no where
So also it is
These two restric-
cases only and
sr^rc^H
else,
tive rules
Bk. VI. Ch. IV. 14
which has no other Sarva-
namasthana, therefore, it is a general Niyama and not only a Sarvanamasthana or a Neuter niyama. Therefore in this niyama the word "^rj^Tcfft^
"
"
of the Neuter "
For
fH &c
not
is
to
be taken.
be taken, then the Sutra would mean, the neuter stems
if it
are lengthened
that in examples like
in
only and no where
f^r
^TfR ar?R^%
(loc.
The
else.
in
would be
result
there would be no lengthening
sin),
at all (i.e. we shall never have the form |[aTfrffi in loc. sin. by force of VI. 4. 15);
moreover, by so doing, there wou'd arise this anomaly also, that words other
thanJMeuter would also not be lengthened.
The
of the definition
force
also in certain cases, therefore,
any
namasthana would apply to Neuter
^T
^ ^
II
13.
%%
^C>
T^
<T^TT%
II
or
*ft,
II
of Sarvanamasthana applies to Neuter
rule (niyama)
^,
made with regard
<STOFTP
ifHt:
tl
The penultimate vowels of a stem ending in

swr * are lengthened before the affix g[ of the
5
Nominative Singular but not in Vocative Singular.

The ^ is elided by VIII.
Thus ^r, f^fr, I^T, 3T&TT
II
case-affix
by VI.
1.
68.
ii
3*3 3*^
l*
qcrrr^
II
II
srg,
Thus
and
vr^Pi (with ^Tg<i
2?^*rr^
70, after the
**fra
^,
$j?^<%
srvjRft:
II
11
penultimate vowel
lengthened in a stem ending, in st<j, and

nant (3^;) does not belong to a root.
vc\H\^
and the
In the Nominative Singular (with the excep-
the Vocative Singular) the
of
stsfcTPT,
s&w^ sRmr^Tvrror: ottoi^ t*^ iiw
14.
tion
II
2. 7,
we have % ^r%^, %
In the Vocative singular
3rero?cr^ ^PSRft:
fPf['<
to Sarva-
also.
(with
^g *
1
elongation has
ll
Un
I.
63 from
The 3*
fa)
taken place, for
sr^j;
when the conso-
to shine), ?i<T^ (with =?fr^)

added to the above by VII. 1.
vrr
is
is
if
added
befote elongation, the
Bk. vi. Cn. IV.
16
Lengthening.
vowel no longer being penultimate,
Why
not be lengthened at
will
do we say
1257
^n
all.
not belonging to a dhatu
as
Observe
STOP, srerp, QxtmThe
fan^T where ^ belongs to the root ?j?t (fa^t 1^%), so also ^rfo: (^ to)
wn^. having no significance as an affix &c is also included here, on the strength
of the maxim "whenever 3T^ or $^ or stct or *r^, when they are taught in
Grammar denote by I. I. 72, something that ends with these, there they rell
'
'
II
combination of
present these
The word
rT^rn^r^ R^raifaT) U
ST3 whether
when
iTPF*, ?
73:
sq^r
grammatical
this rule
they possess, and also

aT*hrrfr
^RsfarT
^r
),
such as ^^j, s?^g &c, or which

such as srg<i which in upadesa
inflection,
$rar*r
In Vocative singular
or application.
not applying there.
lengthened before the
is
far as
(srPRfHt tf^TR
The penultimate vowel of a
15.
a nasal,
in
but becomes arg in
in 3Tg<J,
we have 9
in so
the sutra indicates whatever ends in
BT'rf in
enunciated
first
assumes the form srg

ends
both
letters
are void of a meaning".
as they
in so far
affix r%,
stem, ending in
and before an
affix
having an indicatory a> or ^f, which begins with a consonant

other than a semivowel or a nasal.
Thus
and sraR from the roots SP* and rT? by VIII. 2. 64. So also
beginning with a ^w consonant (any consonant but a nasal
xreTPl
before an affix
As
and a semivowel).
and
SirrRT:
affixes
(with
^tPtT:
These are
(with Rf^).
we have OTRP and
jhaladi affix'
Observe
*T?cTr
5fP*HTR; (with
formed with
formed by
rR*T<j),
srr^r (with g^r),
As
f^q; affixes.
to
fi^
3rd Person Dual added to
<tct
Why do we say 'endrFT

*r*r is fi^r by I. 2. 4.
Observe srr^TT^, 7ff T^r^ll Why do we say 'before f%: and
Why do we say a fs^ or a f^^ affix ?
Observe *T*3%, 1*2?%
II
II
and
*?rTT
3T>^FTTTT *JT%
II
\$
II
II
1^
BT^rTRr^RT ffa*T*3T^
nHf^f^3lcT
^TfrTÎ.
ffrT;
all
tr?rTFcp
the Intensive roots ^n; and
ing in a Nasal'
xff),
II
^^1
II
16,
II
**% ^C, TOP*.
^T ^rfV
it ?T
Htf *&fe
*rfr, ( err
<$*:
II
II
II
The lengthening
the case of astern ending in
vowel takes place in

as well as of
and jjn,
of the
a vow.el,
when the Desidcrative affix ?^ being

augment âr) follows.
jhaladi
(i.
e.
not taking
the
Thus
T^Y^RT
(VII.
of roots
i.
100)
ending
of
in
vowel we have
5^ and *\% nrcmfcf, and
fNfafrT,
3Tfan*lTra%
3?5fiT,
ll
Rf^fr^R,
Lengthening.
2f 58
Vdrt
The rule
applies to
that *th which
Therefore, not here,
(II. 4. 48) 'to study'.
Bk.VI.
srf*T*T?H%
the substitute of
is
3^t
*TniT (cf.
VII.
In the
Veda we
is not,
therefore, the substitute of %%[, the lengthening takes place
VI.
137-
3,
Or
read ^rf rfr^
*r*Tf5T*irar,
where though
the word bt^t should not
be added
Cii. IV. 19.
*r?
means
'
to
go
and
'
by the
in the sutra at all
%"%
58
2.
rule
which
should be read as f^prar STR meaning " There is lengthening of the stem when
the Desiderative SH^ follows ". This would apply of course, to vowel-ending
stems, because the sentence would
This
of a consonant.
in a
vowel
mean
apply to n
will
that, for there
cannot be lengthening
way
this
also, in
"
stem ending
lengthened in the Desiderative, and so also of i\n which
is
substitute of the vowel-stem ?" u
In this way,
we may
is
no
see, that there is
necessity of the Vartika.
cwraf^srr
ll
<r^n%
ll
It
atfr^:, f^rr<*r
II
The lengthening of the stem of ^rq; is optional,

Desiderative ^, when it does not take the augment
17.
before the
oil
Thus raaTORT or f^snlr
îs added
sirro
sr^by VII.
to
r%
\t
It
Thus
=E?srr or mT*&n
r^spr
maxim sr^^^ft
in ftcTftTOT
no alternative
is
allowed, as
11
sir*:,
^fe
f%r, (
11
ed, before the

replaced by
But
The penultimate of ?&% is optionally lengthenwhen it is without the augment

affix
18.
is
q^n%
it
ll
49 Vart: optionally.
2.
but ^f%^r only, with
the rule does not apply
fMK *ft*ft^
^W^ H
as sr9TO>
II
But when sp?rr

This is on the
augment.
f<r
arnw a bahiranga substitution of &%* superc
sedes even antaranga rule".
^- ^3*u%* ** ^
II
For
19.
tuted
?t,
and
for
is
II
i^nft
fh, ^5, si-prfe^, ^, ( fegrat:
(including the
augment
II
g*r) is substi-
substituted 3^, before an affix beginning
with a Nasal, as well as before
fgj
and jhaMdife^ and fip^ affix-
es (VI. 4. 15).
Thus
jtct,
faST from
eg being replaced by
1
fa%+* (Un
III. 9).
^j H
sr^ and
f%e^,
with the affix sff
Similarly from the root
= RT + 3? + ?f = ^H-?r = ^R5
(VII.
to the stem prior to the scope being given to the
wise the
form would be fa* + ^=%* + ^ -**-- 3H
3.
fsr*
84).
guna
5!
we
III. 3.
90
the
have ^fa: thus:
Here the
rule of VII.
3; is
3.
added
86, other-
Having thus added
3>,
Bk. VI.
Lengthening.
20. ]
+ 3; = ^, because semivowel substitution
maxim
wider scope than guna, and the

"
here.
An
which
operation
taught
is
combination of
letters
(i.
is
J.
of ^T'ftfT^ 3Hf*ir
is
and of
has no scope
*T^fFF
the AngAdhikara, and
in
taught in a sandhi
the
affects
which concerns a
operation
rule)".
STafiTrsr formed with f|pr ( Un

no vocalisation of the semivowel *, and there
With r^ we have
there
we make sandhi of
86,
antaranga operation
is
force than an
possesses greater
anga or stem,
1259
be given to the guna rule VII.
scope could
before
IV
Cii.
II.
is
57 ) added to jiw,
lengthening of sj,
changed to 5T. So also *rrf%fT

Of the change of ^ into 3; we have the following : arerzn, f^qfi:
Here the 3; substitution is Bahiranga, and ^ + 3^ = 31,
(far + f|!J = ft + 3J = ^ )
the change of 5 into q is antaranga, therefore on the maxim of srfarer *f?*3fand
eg-
II
q?rvq$ (a
bahiranga
II
non-existent for the purposes of an antaranga), there should
is
be no change of f into 3, for 37 is non-existent. That maxim is however set

aside by srnTFFcft IHJf TO*nr " A bahiranga operation is not regarded as
bahiranga, and consequently asiddha, when an antaranga operation is to take
effect,
which depends on the immediate sequence of a vowel and something
else".
So
here
egr is
also before a jhaladi affix; as
changed to
Tby VIII.
So
5T,
changed to
is
Some do
II
>lace
IK,
ff
11
VIII.
indicatory
*T*U*
indicatory
rfrT;
16,
1.
and
fa^rr);
changed to
|J<reP*,
t%?,
^ran
II
the rule dees not apply: as srornr,
1.
36
2.
131
3"
the letter
5T is
and
short being substituted for ^ of ft^
I*
should not be taken, because
ordained to come every where
in
the
II
The
ftras like
[so
3T as, fi^:,
force of the present sutra,
of
by VI.
the anuvritti of f^nj and fwri into this sutra,
by VI.
sifa:
In "grsrr q-"
5"
Jr^ + ^^^B-:, $CTP*0^3), IfT
vocalisation
Môr
are not
not read
explain spsrj^ and
by the
is
2. 36.
also
When the affixes

sf>t:
there
2T
s^rr%%
in 375;
(VI.
1.
is
psrf%
sake of distinguishing this
m% 3J^
In the sutra
89).
20.
fogeft:
^^T
sre w*
%m% *r
%&imxH%m\
^Twf^
(VI.
4.
132)
3C
ir>
there is
II
?m*w 3<T>*raT*T
**n% 3jf^r^rft^r
*r^rr%
sir
11
In
mentioned affixes
Sct?:,
(ft^T,
^TrR,
aro,
and
*ra
before the above-
a Nasal or a jhaladi T%<T or r%^) there
the single substitution of

ing the final
the
for
11
^TSTRT:, ^,
sit ***
?r
consonant.
3*5. for
the
âud
the vowel preced-
Lengthening.
!26o
Thus
$?fOT,
^r, ^:, ^f%:

8^3;*, iir, 3?P,
ft*
II
371%:
II
g:,
t*t, ar*:, arf*r:
*T^: :, g!t,
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
22
S^g*
l%f*: $*, ^r,

grT^, gm? S^TCr
II
5*:, *rf :,
II
^m
s^ft h
toht<i w, fas*
In f^T and ^x.the 3J replaces 5 as well as the
*<rer
fa*,
^rfrf:
II
BT^r
and
?i*
it
Another reading
f fri:
11
3j
which follows^ and
replaces the s and the vowel f and

is
r%*
ar
in
which precede \
II
II
tot srsrfr ^fi7% ^ q^r? n

After t there is the elision of
wrsTTOirefp^hfr *t^r sir
2i.
and ^ before
'ffe and jhal&di T%^ and 't%^' affixes.

Thus from qm |T, ^r, g*:, *$: 33^, *f^:, the ^ of Nishtha is not
changed into ?t by VI I \. 2. 57. So also from gv&f we have jr, gfr, f*:, ofr:, gnSo also the ^ is elided, as from *3f : h^ gfr, 3*:, rrof:,
*T^: "
*rr^, |f%:
g : ^T, W-> * **!*> gr%
7
II
II
II
>
srfH^^TTSS
Frf:
ÎrJ:
||
3Tf^lf^ra*rf^?rrcr
*jrf%35* n
^T%
i^r^w
22.
||
q^TT^
^3^,
||
?rftrT 3v<piI^fTS3ir*T ^Tr
fsreh" *t?t<t
?fa
^s^
3HT, 3TTOr<*
aTÎ^TR^HmWl
The change, which
a stem will undergo by
the application of any of the rules from this

129,
any other rule of this very section VI.
to apply
This
is
an adhikara
rule.
The'above translation
upto VI. 4.
when we have
stitra
to be considered as not to have taken effect,
is
II
3Tfll^fsftrTS3* H
is
4.
23 to 129.
given according to
Bohtlingk. According to Kasika the 3TRF5Tfq; extends up to the end of
Prof.
Dr. Ballantyne translates
the chapter.
it
thus
"The
rules,
reckoning from
one to the end of the chapter, are called Abhiya, because the chapter ends
with a series of rules dependant on the aphorism 'bhasya' VI. 4. 129. When
this
that
(i. e.
one of the abhiya
same place
rules)
is
to be brought into operation, having the
coming into operation as another abhiya, which has already

that one which has taken effect, shall be regarded as not having
for
taken
effect,
taken
effect".
129. in which last

e. upto VI. 4.
3TPTr? means 'up to *'
e. in applying the rules taught upto VI. 4. 129.
word *T occurs
The word 3HT shows that the two rules must have the same 3?!^ or place of
operation, where their places of operation are different, they are not asiddha to
each other. The word 3Tl%3f shows that an utsarga or general rule must take
that an 'aclesa' or substitution
effect, as if existing in spite of a special rule, and
The word
sutra the
i.
i.
taught by another rule should not be considered to have taken effect in applyThus in forming qfa and W*J ( Imperative 2nd person)
ing the special rule.
BK. VI.
IV
ClI.
22
ABIliYA-RULES.
126
for ^H by VI. 4. 35
q is first substituted for 3T*T 'to be' by VI, 4. 1 19 and
and then is fa added by VI. 4. 101. The latter rule says that rSy is added in the
Imperative, only after those roots which end in a consonant of #?* class. Now snj
:
and
^rr^
end
jrr
end
present rule
tution of
taken
a jhal consonant, and can take
in
fa,
but
their substitute
and not a consonant and should not take fa

helps us here, and for the application of fa (VI. 4. 101) the
a vowel
in
for srsôr
^rf
from
The
(Vedic Imperative,
arrirf?
substi-
should be considered as asiddha or not to have
for *rr^
Similarly in
effect.
and
ff
II
and 9^, the nasal being elided
being elided by
*p*
in the
case of
1 1.
4.
73)
and ^rf?
4. 36
and sr being substituted for 5^ ( VI. 2. 36 ) we have the stems sircr and
But since
*T, which ending in st would require the elision of f| by VI. 4. 105.
the change of 5f &c is not regarded as having been accomplished, the elision
of
*TJT
VI.
it*,
does not take place.
ff
Why
do we say
STPTT?l
'
U P to VI.
129'?
4.
In applying
any other
rule
the changes ordained by abhiya rules would not be considered as asiddha.
Thus
sRlf^T
and
*rr:
from *rs^ and
have been elided by VI.
cs^T
Here the nasals of
\\
rafij
and
bhaflj
27-28 and 33 before the affixes q^r and fr* respechave the stems c*r, and *T3T to which rule VII. 2. 116
tively,
applies
4.
and we
and we have Vriddhi of 9? preceding the
consonant.
final
Had
the
been considered as non-effective for the purposes of VII.

could not have taken Vriddhi, as it would not then be 3<T*TT or
elision of the nasal
116, then sr
2.
penultimate.
Why
do we use the word spr
aphorism
in the
The
rules are asiddha
common place of operation and not otherwise.

Ace. PI = Ttt + tf + 8T3" ( VI. 4. 131 vocalisation
to each other with regard to a

'hus tt +
>f
q). If this
I.
4.
^fj
3"
64, then
+ st*t
).
substitute be considered as asiddha for the purposes of sutra
we cannot
elide the stt of
vowel (3 being non-existent

iing thus elided,
we have
).
qr,
3 however
because
is
srr is
not then followed by
not considered as asiddha, and
stt
+ ^+3T^=f*TfN"
qr5sr: qî
asiddha,
and
we apply rule
considered
not
T^sr: in
II
Similarly
f^r
Here also 3 is
Similarly w + ^+sth
I.
4. 82, and substitute q for 3 as fq^P T**l
=
considered
asiddha, and we
Here also 3 is not
^q:
fa + 3H + sr?T
the
above three cases,
:hange the 3J of $ into 3* by VI. 4. 77. In all
3*r
+8T3MI
II
II
the elision of
reference
to
srr,
^?t,
or of 3J to ^, takes place in
or change of % to
while the samprasararâ of^ takes place with reference
to the Accusative plural case-ending st^. which makes the stem Bha. So
they have not the same stpto II Nor does the maxim of srftrer ari^jpi^Jf
apply here, because the special maxim of Abhtya governs the sutras of this
cannot be the relation of Antaranga and Bahiranga among
these sutras, simultaneously with their being asiddha to each other.
section, so there
29
AbhIya-rules.
1262
Vdrt: The
*g*,
Thus
^^5: ^5:
VI.
4. 63.
%^
VI.
88
4.
and
in the case of fr^>
with
far,
and ^rf^fr,
art in STPTCl
srrensta:
11
11
11
seventh class
there
is
ll
After T,
23.
as
sqftShlRT, STf^fffeft with
3* of
addition of
3^,
has the force of limit inclusive, so that, the asiddha
q^rfit
^3
sprap^nFrcr t?i%
??rftm
4.
*r,
by
rule applies to the stitras governed
ffrr:
24
and 57
),
when 537 is added, there is not the

when 5? is added, there is not qorf^r H
In the case of
The
( VI. 4. 63 ) should howteaching

33^ and VI. 4.
77
substitution should not be applied simultaneously with them.
substitute
ever be considered as not asiddha, and rule VI.

$2, teaching
Bk. VI. CH. IV.
srr<*,
*t
ll
^rr:,
II
*w Wrf
added to the roots of the
srnra t^r^t
rTrr
which
is
a characteristic
(i.
the elision of the following
*r
11
the
e.
vikarana snj),
||
Thus ar^rrfj and vprfrR from srs^r to anoint and *rs*r to break
Thussn^r + l^+^caqR3^ + f^ (I. i. 47) Fn5+fa (VI. 4. 23) = sraf*IMl So
also f^r^cT from f|f% (ftsw) to injure \
Why do we say after n and not
merely after st', without the indicatory^? Observe SR^r*, araTFtt*, where
the 7T of ?rrT is not elided after the ?r of q^ and q^, the lengthening of st by
'.
'
',
ass
'
'
'
VII.
3.
102 being sthanivat would not have prevented the
In the
elision.
case of f^nrrs; and snTPTT* (formed by ft* + tot. and JT?T + ?rr*) also tne T of
qr* is not elided after ?r of ft?r II
For the ?r of the sutra is the technical *
>
not any combination of the letters ^r and ^

padokta maxim applies here. FKjTWff <T ?FK*U TRTTfTTf^ 1?^*
the vikarana, and
srft%ri
^fer%
m;:,
Iftr.
11
^5
3"<rareT:
^r%i%
ii
?M
ll
Mîft
ii
The
II
prati-
II
srMRdns, *&';
^rvrr-
ll
3Tntf?rrPTjFrei
s^hi^tpit hûw
^rcr
wW gsf^fa
*rera T^rr:
*if%ro u 3TRf|rrf 5f<*nr ?5îrw^r^^r^?rCireft^RtrÔT^ sR^m

^5%^- ^n:inr^q^5qr?r ^rârac. u ^ro u f^jftrr -et *>%^r^53r*r
err*
11
ii
11
24.
ceded by
5^,
having an indicatory % (VII. 1. 58) the

an affix having an indicatory ^ or ^ follows.
Thus from
^^%
CTfoTC3KT,
11
In a root-stem ending in a consonant prethis rr not being added to the root owing to
its
with q^,
3ffiszpi
?twt
and
^p^rP^
tne ^ ls
s^FST are
with
g; is
elided
when
formed ^cT: and rw. with t?J, ?f*q%, s^fa

the ?ft being added by VII. 4. 84. But
not elided, the root being written in the Dhaand 5TR*3ffi,

tupatha asTTirft^^r, and *r being added by VII. I. 58. Why do we say
ending in a consonant ? Observe 4faw, ^rtfaRf from ^r which has a penulti-
BK
VI. Cll. IV 28
ends
nasal, but
mate
mm, imim
with i3^
rw, SftfsT
in
Why
>
roots
penultimate'
'
or
Observe
Observe
*?
mean-
are exceptions where
* (m) and *(ft)
These, though
and 'a disease of the body'.
indicatory f are treated as exceptions

n the Dhatupatha with an
above
and***,:, when not havmg the
,
riof^:
leanings
leS
do we say
do we say having an indicatory
pain or difficulty'
no fee
libted
Why
a vowel.
11
Vdrt :-The
nr
12(3 3
ELISION OF NASAL.
*.M>*
we have Rr^TffrT and fW*TcT

w ._Theûsative of the root
II
to hunt deer'
as, onifft
***
closes
when meaning
nasal
its
m. mm*
'he hunts the deer', but
he
'
;olors the clothes
'.
<s* loses
Wr/
Krfr/.-*$*i
yfirt
i-Vip
its
The words
nasal before the affix

csntf.,
,,
as *nft U
from
wii.> anu ^^* a
elision of the nasal.
r^.
The nasal of *n,

** of the roots of
w
th vikarana
25.
fe
f0re
the
îsi
** .
- '. raRall
IS rûent
-^^TeSrate
speed'.
elided be-
^to , see
nasal of
it
""
**
is
elided before
expresses a state
or an
^ r^
Thus 3Tns^f
The îs added by
instrument.
Snores
,
S^^
rr^ndtiL^dr?b
^V
of
by
yvii.,
ff
52
*,,.-****.**;
^"^^rTheôTUTis formed
of
<
of the
^ ^Tr^' "1 -sr^qrar ,cKm* writ *rara
instrument.
ThUS
I
the 1st class.
also elided before

preced.ng
The separation of this from the
anuvnti of ranj only runs
sutras in which the
formed with
i when the word
is
^ yZZZZTZ
.
ft for
^^
and
ThIstrând *n* for the change
* .
T;
r^r,
by
**
in the
sense
Elision of Nasal.
1264
[Bk. VI,
This word"is derived from &&$, the nasal

Though the ardhadhatuka
elision of a
portion of the root, viz of
apply here.
That
here the Vriddhi
Vriddhi
is
rule prohibits
Guna and
and not governed by
I.
1. 4.
I.
The
Thus
?*
vowels,
prevention of this
ifft^:'
sr**^: meaning
^r^^: meaning
"cow-speed," "horse-speed." butl^g??:, and
here the
4 does not
1.
Vriddhi, only in case of

11
32
and the Vriddhi
affix Er?i causes
of W<, yet rule
prevented with regard to st
is
irregular
elided,
is
prohibited irregularly.
Cii. IV.|
"dripping of
or ghee".
oil
^^1%>lr^rsr^rrf|TTniT: irji
29.
*T^rft
ll
and
sr^t^, <ra> sfar, sisra,
formed by the elision of ?r

Thus 3^ srw + 'J 5 T + ^^ = 8T^tf
srsft^,^, srnr, s^ra, foreran

forer*j are irregularly
||
for
?ro +
!
J
^jrtr+
?TT^: 1*TPin*
ffa:
sts%:
11
s^ram^
is
by VII.
to honor.
Thus srf^RTT
2. 53.
When
"the water was
^TM
TStfrero
$wt t
The
30.
ing
?o
II
btto
ffrT:
II
tÎTO^
\\
II
ir*:,
the guna
irregularity).
3T5%:, ^TraTfl;,
is
irregular,
(Unadi mj.
So
jt
also f^psrcr:
II
II
11
is
not elided when the mean-
HKT ?%f$
The f* augment is added

we have ^Kg^r ^Tr?J
II
not that of 'honoring',
is
Here the f*
well."
fa>,
15ft
**F$ ^'i^H^hK^t'ft
^^?^ and
31.
H*rfcr
*J^T:, stfs^Rrfirar
drawn from the

II
?T,
nasal of 3T3J
the sense
% ^n^^^t:
T^ ^^
II
^=
3^ + *T^=3Tm
4 applied here, and prevented guna.

q^=jnjrtr: (The want of Vriddhi is the
I. 1.
*T
is
prohibited by VII.
**% ^^^,
*T^%
* sto
2.
15.
II
II
^qr?T retain their
nasal before the
affix i&r H
Thus **^r, and tot?^
or
considered as having an indicatory

is
no longer
for
no
r%<l
by
virtue of the rule
rule of elision
would apply
m*cM*af n7r*r
^H" in a root
11
The
32.
*3F*srr,
gj in
nasal
ending in
I. 2.
^r
18,
and
elision
When
when pp^
$?
place,
11
may
and
in
3rr?<r,
jtopi, finrr^T (
* sftq:
11
be optionally elided before
^r
||
11
1.
60
for the
II
11
11
is
added, ^F
would not take
Thus TSf&tt or *rRrr, H^rF^r or Ht^TT, ?TfT or ?r^r See VII.

When f? comes, we have ^r%^T
augment ^ in ?r^
^ri^ ^r^:, ^, f%f*r, ( Bram *
srsSter r%f*r
\\
11
is
in that case.
**&&
11
the $? being added
the dhatupatha.
11
sJfa: ) n
Bk. VI. Ch. IV.
36
Amiiiya-rules.
The
33.
nasal
may
1265
be optionally elided in
sr^r
before the third person Passive of the Aorist in fen^(

Thus sr>rrnT or aqnrf^sr
This is an aprapta vibhasha, and teaches
ll
the
time the elision of it
first
STf^sn
srra
ffrP
5TTCT 3<T*Trar
II
^rani
^riW
11
in a certain
3* H <*rn%
^JRlWt H^frT ^ffc
srrcr
?**
*T*nfrf%
contingency.
srra:, ct, hj, %&t:, ( *$r%ft
ll
ll
<FC3T
Thwm
11
f^ff ^ 9FjT>frT
*tt*
11
flp^r
jp^
ll
II
sftv^
<r*srf<T *T^rfrr1t
Before the Aorist in sr^ and before an affix
34.
beginning with a consonant having an indicatory

the substitution of % for the vowel of ^rr^r
Thus *TCT?ft(ft 3T?wsnTr* and ^T^ftn^; so also ftrs:: ( with
there
for
is
w;
or ^,
11
m%
tk
),
ra?3rai
T3 fir*T: ( with the tense-affixes <(: and it: which are rf^
by I. 2. 4 ). The *r is changed to q by VIII. 3. 60. Why do we say 'before the
affixes of ar Aorist and consonant affixes'? Observe srrcrra, STOr^Tg, sremj:
Vatt: There is the substitution of f for the vowel of *rr*J before the
with
?tf^j),
<fr
ll
As 3TR#: = 3Tr4r^ ^rrflrT

fa
OT^+f^ = ftr*T + o = ftrc+o = #:
affix
ed,
II
So alsofrrifr
II
II
The form
is
thus evolv-
(the short f being lengthened by VIII.
2. 76.
The root ^m^ is that root which takes 3T1F aorist; namely the second
Adadi sttct (^3T3T%tr),and notthe Bhvadi and the first Adadi 5TTCT (sn^smj
f^WR.)
Therefore not here STTOret, 3TRTTîtr:
II
Vdrt\ But before
Or
this is
VIII.
2.
5TT
0M-
11
fyq^, this ?orrâlso is
&
II
\\
^1%
II
srraT ft t^t- srr
5TT,
II
i&AHikvb
^,
*ret%
II
Before the Imperative
affix r%> 3JT is
word
is
^rr^
not f>q[
1.
11
for the
not here.
is
by VI.
(I. 2. 4).
Thus infa
is
when
also found in the
which can only be when fa
II
3$
II
*3Tr%
II
^:,
?nTC*?^r4 (<u4iR4tr *rent It
*r., (
<re<T:
11
4.
is
See VI
01.
room of
The anu-
substituted in the
penultimate vowel of ^rrw

Therefore,
11
this f? is treated as
Vedas
fqr<j
as'
t?^
Sarvadhatuka
having acute on
ftând consequently anudatta
4)
5r3:
lf%:
is
to fa
then too the substitution takes place, though a
first syllable,
(III.
and not only
of f%^[ and ft^ also
(III. 4. 88),
the
substituted
ll
The f| is changed
Thus srs^rrfa, srerrfa
The anuvritti of ST^RT: ls not here; so *rr
full
used in
11
ll
vritti
f%3refr :
104.
for stro;
the
srrftnfr, srrr%^r*ll
an irregular form indicated by the author in the word
35.
4. 22.
II
changed, as srriffc,
II
1266
Abhiya-rules.
36.
Thus
3rf?
3T is
m%^
substituted for
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
before
ff[
38]
II
11
^^^^^^f^^î^T^m^HiT^^îvri srfe ^T% n 3vs

T
fprT:
11
3Ti?rTffTf^RnT3f^rf *r%*cRr?rr#ff ^r^rflr^r^r *Rf*T sRrfr
The
37.
<*ttt*t
11
ll
^f^m srera 7^
11
nasal of those roots which in the
final
Dhatupatha have an unaccented root-vowel, as well as of gqand cR &c, is elided before an affix beginning with a consonant (except a semi-vowel or
catory 3^ or
Thus 215 ives
m^)
when
nasal),
these have an indi-
II
us *rar (with tRT), *&: (with
fff),
RraT^(with
^:
^^),^ %
r
Similarly *g gives us ^^t, *<?:, ^r^T^,

II
and
**, T* *T*
*I^ which end in a nasal are to be considered as unaccented roots, though taught
(with
as accented in the Dhatupatha.
nasal
is
not elided as ^r%;
So
VI.
also of
4.
39
^:
i.
e.
qfi:
withf^; with
and before other jhaladi
):
f%r?r the
affixes
3",
augment f^
The rTTrrf roots belong to
the eighth class. Thus ^^:, rnren* The Tanadi roots are ten in number,
Of these ^rqr takes long 3TT also
*Pl, ST*, r%^, ^t^, pr, fl., *R, Tând ît n
(VI. 4. 45). $r* $TcT:, ST^RU mi mt'-, 5*t<T^; $<* ^> **PTP*;
fcf:
retains qâs all those affixes take the
II
rT^T^;
**Wj
Why
^*prP*;
TrP,
TrT^
II
do we say before a r!^
these affixes are rf^
So
Observe
affix ?
^T^, not being anudatta in the Dhatupatha.

nasal, the rule does not apply, as in tr^:, q <fr
If the root does not
H^
l
not
f^rqr
f??j
the rule does not apply:
"anudatta by upadesa"
So
that the rule
as,
*isq<t,
?i?cn",
may
2.
I.
:
,
end
t 1
^r^T-
in
If the affix does not begin
11
with zjhal consonant, the rule does not apply: as

or
3TtKT, ST^TT: (
also not in *TRp, STRnTP*, <TFcP, rTr^P*, ?PrT
?&&
qôq^
apply to
Why
tjt
If the
11
affix is
do we say
root, as Tfrr,
but
STInMHLM For ?rnT is formed by f$&^ affix and is accented with

udatta on the first, but it is a secondary udatta and not of upadesa or dhatu-
not to
^r?r,
as
?rr; cT:
patha, and does not prevent the elision of
upadesa though
in srrer
it
has become
of Tq
btj*TtT: H
II
Similarly ^ni
is
udatta-
The former though taught
in
the Dhatupatha as udatta, has been specifically mentioned above as anudatta,
and
?Tjt is
taught as udatta in the Dhatupatha, and no where
else
taught as
anudatta.
srr
*rft
ll
\*w
33.
v^ri*
The
ll
5*rfa,
err,
of the above roots
nasal
and
ending in a nasal, and
^T
fore the Absolutive
5to
affix
I)
ll
(i. e.
cRT?^") is optionally
anud&tta
elided be-
BK. VI. CH.
This
is
42
AlilllYA-RULS.
1267
The option
a vyavasthita-vibhasha.
applies to roots ending in
w. In the case of roots ending in other nasals, the elision
H*m or wspq, JH3T or
%f% <frfer
*
trrP
11
f^nr
or inra,
src*3, jtoret
11
T*<?r s^fr-nt
II
<Tm
ferj, the
affix
is
Thus
compulsory.
but no option
5T, f^r^r, cft:,

mprft
iftî <rr tfw h **n%
11
wi
Before the
39.
3TTT?T 3TT*TI,
in arr^ST, JPT?T,
11
above roots neither
drop their nasal nor lengthen their root-vowel.

The above
rFTfft,
do
roots
anudattopadesa, ending in a nasal, and
e.
i.
nasal before
not lose their
f^FT^.
thening would have taken place by VI.

that also
*m:
^rrrNr
is
and
4.
prohibited.
wtr
11
3FT
Thus qf?#, rfN?, sf*^ H The leng15, when the nasal was not elided
11
^n%
roRfarftf<r *r?rî*
The
40.
Thus
F#7/
It
*rr<
11
nasal of
wrjfirq[, 5jrf%*T<|,
:
^^fa*^
tot:, ist, (
II
1*
**
s^ ^ *r^?rrf*n%^rFî* "
*rq[ is
spspT^f ?^J
should be stated of
*tw
always elided before

The qr is added by VI. 1. 71.
and the rest. The elision takes
II
place here also *f^, ^(fart H
F^r/
The nasal of
fef*rt^Tft{*î<t
41.
11
it* &c. is elided before
TfTR
11
stem ending
11
in
37^
as, 3T*T*rt,
STW
f^^: "*3 nfa*Jw

J
a nasal,
II
stt^
ii
and followed by
the affix fk* or ^, always substitutes long srr for its nasal.
Thus 3TS*rP, Tf5u-', sk^HTP, 3Tf?5Tr Tfm: (e. g. *w s*fr^rr 9rf% Rig V. ),
*I3UW, #nEP, WIT 3^rT3Tr*UI The affix fa? (which is totally
fjWST'-, Alri^l
The 3T of
elided) is added under III. 2. 67.
is changed to q- by VIII. 3.
With
the
affix
we have the following: f%5fr^T, arsnrrer
108. in *rrqr H
( III. 2. 75 ). The repetition of the word 3T3*ri%37 in this sutra shows that the
:
limitation of anudattopadesa &c.
which applied to the
3|$HIHfef cf sutra
VI.
4.
37 does not apply here.
*m*m<sMI <<):
ffrr?
11
^nr
^t^t ?5ft
42.
II
fdRtmgFff
II
tttt%
*tft irr*rfr
The long
sir is
II
r^r
5FT-H*-*?Rra; SP*rSn3t:, (srn*)

$F*rtt srera
<rerT arrern:
srff ^r *r^r%
substituted for the, final of
II
sn*,
and ^RC before the consonant beginning Desidcrative affix

^, and before any other affix beginning with a jhal consonant, which has an indicatory ^ or ^
*F*;
II
1268
AbhIya-rules
Thus 3TrrT:, ^TrRR, "3Tn%:,
STR:, STtPTP*,
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
*m%,
r%STOSrra; isTTrP,
^rf^T^
44.
îf^TMl
In -5^ and Jsn^the Desiderative does not begin with a consonant, but takes the
augment f? the ^
,
of the root sr*

fq^rfaqrf?T
(VII.
not therefore elided, as HnrRqfcT, fsnsrt^Tf^ II

In the case
%, so we have two forms f^rrcrra an d
is
the Desiderative takes

2.
The
49).
Desiderative has, therefore, been mentioned in the
aphorism, only for the sake of the root ^*H

If the phrase *r^%: be taken to mean 'the Desiderative beginning
with a consonant
',
then we should read the anuvritti of
from the pre-
frfo ^fsfrT
ceding sutras, to complete the sense of this and if the phrase means " when
the Desiderative of a jhaladi affix follows", then we should qualify the word
;
Or we may
Desiderative by the word jhal from the preceding sutras.
the sutra into two (1) Before a f^frôr ftnj jhaladi affix long
the sôf
tute of
'jan
'san
',
'
and 'khan'.
(2)
And
so
3?T is
when the
the case,
is
divide
the substi-
Desiderative affix follows, not having the augment f for then also the ^ of
jan ', ' san and khan is replaced by long wrr II
would have required elision by VI. 4. 37, beThe ^ of the root
,
'
'
cause this verb belongs to Tanadi
class,
the
still
3TT
substitution taught in
on the maxim of HHl5f%W Tt ^n^wUI. 4. 2).

In fact, though in this section of asiddha (VI. 4. 22) one rule is considered
as asiddha for the purposes of the operations of another rule, yet one rule
this sutra takes place,
vipratisedha.
That that maxim applies
be inferred from the employment of the term f^ in

which
supersedes
the lopa of 3TT taught in VI. 4. 64, and substitutes
66,
in this section
4.
also, is to
instead the long f
^
ffrr.
preference,
by the maxim of
supersedes another
VI.
by
II
firmer \v*\
11
srernrffr
ffra
43.
ll
^ q^rf?r
srarai <tc*tt
There
Thus
^, ftviraT,
sttohww
ariWr
h^
f^^rrer
stt<* )
II
optionally the substitution of long srr

*$P* before an affix beginning with
with an indicatory s? or ^
is
for the finals of snr, ^JC
^ and marked
11
*rwreHMi*K
and
II
snvfa or spOrt
with ufr') *4|*uq% or
^>^^H
with
**TO% or *RRf, CTCrrai', or *r*Ri%, mzfrt, or *sF3%, '*TOnrcf or sr^<jirg%
the vikarana
is
>^ of the
always substituted
<Hftfrfa
fTTp
ii
II
cMIHî* <mt
Fourth
for
II
q^
f%*rrqnr
II
which
class,
sr^by VII.
3.
79.
is
gRt^:, *!?%,
sthktc srf^rr
Wcr
f^rj
No
(
according to
option
is
So
I. 2.
also
Before
11
the
*rr
allowed there.
fiwm 3TR* )
II
44.
The long srr may be optionally substituted for
the final of cT^ before the Passive characteristic
Thus rltarar or rF3%; but no option is allowed in r r -H with
sr: f%f% ^tq^R^T^r^r^TT^

xT,
st^t, 3T?q<TC^W*,
fr%;
ii
ll
II
q^Tnr
II
II
*r:, fof%,
11
*Hra*ffTO fajrq- spare q*rr ^j\^k
arfssnr
H^m ^rr^r^r^^^ri
II
ftq:,
Bk
VI. Cii. IV.
final of
46
1269
Lengthening
The long 3?r is optionally substituted for the

45.
optionbefore the affix for*; and there is also elision
ally of the Nasal.

Thus we have
optionally' has been
three forms
employed
*n%\ f* and
afif: M
The word
*T^r^*
clearness only;
in the sutra for the sake of
by annvritti. Lest any

43 could have been read into it
ceased with the last aphorone should doubt, that the annvritti of fir*WT had
for the
f%W of
VI.
4.
word ^^d<^l*i
ism, this
is
employed
here.
ftOT,l
From this upto VI. 4. 68 inclusive, is always

46.
called ardhadMtuka ( III. 4.
to be supplied "before an affix
114 &c
)."
exclusive). In
an adhikara sutra and extends upto VI. 4. 69 (
an affix
"before
phrase
the
68 should be supplied
all the sutras upto VI. 4.
end of a
the
at
standing
a*
Thus VI. 4. 4 teaches "the
called ardhadhatuka".
This
verbal stem
is
is
dhatuka affix".
ardhatuka affix
sarvadhatuka
roots of
complete the sense we should add: "before an ardhabefore the

Thus the final * of the verbal stem fWft is elided
as
fe#t* but the final * is not elided before a
To
elided".
MM*
?,
affix, as
it# class,
the sr of
in *nn%,
implies that there
is
***:
The /^-elision
^r
never lopa of
of
**
after
II
by this sutra, i. e. an ardhatuka

changes (1) a^TlSTF The elision of 3T of a
affix causes the following special
*RW, The elision of by
stem, as shown above, in frftffer, fWWf*, (2)
The
following purposes are served
Wrf*ir,W*flm, irf^^from <ftii the

^5<n% (3) f^rw ff^ra^, The eliBefore Sarvadhatuka, we have %T*^%,
qroar (qrm + **+% = *P* + *+%), *n?*cr u
sion of pr by VI. 4. 51, as ^vm ?rc<*r
VI
4.
49,
Intensive stem.
50: as
11
In Sarvadhatuka,
VI 4. 64
The substitution
TTW, #. **> **
as TT^:, T3-.
of long
**3
i for
Sarvadhatuka^*, WIWH.
as
&m.
(7
Aorist Passive in ff*
T
'
**->
in
^ *^''>
the
In Sarvadhatuka, *rRT, *rr*r (5)
some
roots,
(6)^-The
VI.
4.
n of
eiis
r^-
ffiMMr
65 as
substitution of 7 for
w,
VI.
4.
in
;
68
This is confined to the

*3*ni;in Sarvadhatuka, wrar* 'arar*
the treatment of the Precative like
Precative'(asirlin).
)(WnwW
,
by VI.
4-
62. as ifrfe, *rf*fte U
^Sfcd :-Wt Wt S^* i***
30
*W
In
Sarvadhatuka,
Ardhadhatu-Changes
127a
Bk.VI. Ch. IV. 491
In the room of the t and the penultimate letter
47.
the root g-^r, there is optionally the substitute ***, whera

an &rdhadhgltuka affix follows.
The ^ and ^ cease to exist and r takes- their place* The substitute
having an indicatory ^ comes after the final vowel ( I. r. 49)*. Thus *re5T + 5 =
*T^ + t = *m the ^t being changed to 1$ by VIII. 2. 36, and ^ to z by VII
The other form will be ym; so also *3C&1 and h*t 3^33. and HessWU
4. 41.
; of
The
and ^srp* by VI. I. 16, in spite of this. rule.
word 3<f^r (VI. 4. 37). is understood here also. The rule therefore applies ten
the simple root bhrasj as originally taught in the Dhatupatha, and not to any
Derivative root from it. As the Intensive ( qw ) is ^hf^r
^^FR or >t^T^
But
11
^S":
11
The z* standing
an SrdhadMtuka affix.
48.
before
at the
end of a stem
is
elided
Thus fspfift^r, r3ra ffl gC, and ^refrf^rT^, from the Desiderative stem
So also f^5rT and ^Jjrr: from the roots f^* and %p%^ thus, re* + S (I I FJ
l%?tffcf
=
1
80) f%^+ sr + 3 ( 1 1 1 1 80 ) = fa* + T (ar being elided before the ardhatuka
*) 1%f5 tne 3 rcl Personal dual of it is f^cP It The addition of arby III. 1. 80
and its subsequent elision by the present sutra,. may appear a redundancy,
but the elided sr being sthanivat, prevents guna of fa
So also #uj<n:
>
ir
11
II
See sutra III. r. 80. Why do we say "the aqris elided' ? Observe ^TT, ^TrTT
here f and s have not been elided. Why do we say "3Trf with an"? The
long 3TF will not be elided as ^rTT, ?\m H Why do we say before arr Ardha:
'
dhatuka
'
Taddhita
?
:
Before a Sarvadhatuka there will be no
f$r*^ and
as
f^TrfT
elisiorr
of a* nor before a
Vdrt
The elision of such 3? takes prace even to the supersession of
the subsequent rules relating to Vriddhi and lengthening. As fa*l&*i
fM*
:
ifes*,
and
f^FTO W
nm ^jt:
fr%s
11
II
<*>
w* 3ttc*s
it
^1%
II
^^T^rskrf%
49.
verbal
n$ro%
When
stem, this
lis
II
q-^r,
3r$r
w&*
>r^m
It
a consonant
elided
also
precedes the final

before an
in
Srdhadhatuka
affix.
Thuslrprnrrn',
the sutra q&i

ters
3i
ll
is
By
^rf?<^, ^prftrT^ 1* from the Intensive stem %pt*j it

which is the Genitive singular of 3 namely of the
given,
the rule of 3^t^?rei
(I.
1.
52), the
3* of
3 ought
to
In
let-
be elided
Bk. VI. Cn. IV.
52
Ardiiadhatu changes
1271
and not ^ but that rule is evidently inapplicable here, since the elision of *r
would have taken place by the preceding rule the present rule therefore
teaches the elision of u (ya). Or the word $<*: may be considered as in the
ablative case, and then by I. I. 54, the first letter would be elided namely q
;
\\
Why
have we taken [the two
Observe
conjointly
(qqm )
letters
from the simple roots
{Ffewr, Tfarcrr, 3jr**rTC
w?
and fjâil Here
Why do
546).
viz.]
fs*, Jjs?r
q and
by *r, is not elided (see Bhvadi 541

we say * when preceded by a consonant ? Observe PjrafarTr, qr^fsrcrr
being followed
not
'
<**n?r
ftsrm
not
uû
q?n^
ww, fîr*r,
snlrenj*
II
The elision of *r of the Denominative stem

optional, when preceded by a consonant and followed
50.
(^t) is
by an ,rdhadh,tuka
The
denotes the affixes
spj
$qfRf or $qr?^T meaning
for, is
*$% and
sf*TW** fS??T
The * of the
51.
affix
affix.
Thus
and
4.1
do we say
guna, Vriddhi and the long
the
snfe^,
llflWRl>
cf,K^r,
wrr,
^rn^r
:
,
$TCK\
shortening of the stem of
for the
not having the augment
f^r ?'
the
Observe
II
<
11
52.
rR^rjj
WWf,
(see VII.
Why
srcfarTT
fogrnri %fa:
and
formed with the
fi
STSTrW^,
^FSrfsr
Aorists in these).
and
Thus <sf*rf^l*TT or srfafw,

f^r^Tm &c.
verbal stem
This debars f qy, the semi-vowel

substitutions.
^rrcf^TT
*rf%>*
elided before an ardhadh&tuka affix which does not
take the augment %z
^fra%,$rirar
m^ n
or
when
q^rfa
The
affix
Etewm
for is
these take the
^rc
before
elided
augment *f
the
affixes
rff
||
Why
Thus
do we say " before an

*kiR>th, ^rreni., iffaPli WflHWt. "
ardhadhatuka affix having the augment f*"? Observe *rfrf3rcp q^r:
This
11
is
the
part
By VI I.
2.
two
with VII.
15 read
in the Nishtha.
applies to
causative, the $ being the sign of the
participle of the
It
may
verbs of one
syllables
will
syllable
foj
49, SH;
is
in
The word
should take place.
which takes no f* augment
a root
15 preventing j^ augment
and the causative %fq being of
the Nishtha, and so it is useless to use
(VII.
always have f^
the word %fz in the sutra.

the elision of
2.
be objected that VII.
causative.
2.
2. 10),
%f* in the sutra fixes the time
Namely,
first there should
when
be added the
Ardhadhatu changes.
1272
augment j* and
we
have
shall
Bk. VI, Ch. IV.
should take place the elision of far
then, there
this difficulty ^nrc
+ W, here
let
us elide the
for
11
first
56
Otherwise
and we get
now we cannot add 5? to ^, for m* being a verb of one syllable will

not take f^ by VI I. 2. 10. Therefore, the reverse process must be adopted.
grr^+?T,
We
must
*n%
II
by the
gularly
ment *?
27.
2.
II
the word
iMa
elision of fa before the
mr ^rpr^r
in H'
an exception to VI.
i
<riMdl , *T??T
II
affix
formed
is
irre-
with the aug-
Thus
*ifad
<T^TT*
II
In a Mantra,
do.
s%
Otherwise oHUWI
11
11
qnft
^rftdr
is
*ifadi, *r%
literature.
It is
II
formed irregularly by the
an %* augmented
before
in secular
4. 51.
\H
11
54.
ror
For 9fq<r see also VII.
elide fT first.
srffRTT
affix,
when meaning
of
elision
a sacrificial
act.
Why
Thus ^pj
do we say
See Satpatha
fn?r
11
?n* : STPTrT
'
when
srra. aT^" srrqj 3TP2J
srrq:, st^t,
affixes
st**"
4 and
formed by
to a
referring
Br. III. 8. 3,
55.
It is
11
3tt,
sacrificial act
tpt r
is
?
'
src^rrtsfr *r*i$
for the
substituted
sn^r,
and
in the Vocative case.
^ ^:
See
qiH
^H
II
5.
t^ f5^ f^î
is
^r
^3, and **3
* of pr, before
the
II
Thus 4\\m\ -M*K, ?TTOT "M^K, rj ^3ri:, *FTS~t: ( formed by the Unadi
affix SPl- ?T = 3T^, added to the roots ttt and *rr) stt^
*^<h^ stt^, <-"J*3l^
Thus sutra could have been well
yti\W r"3 HIS*3'- U x**' qmfoug:
dispensed with; for the f of f^ would take gun a q which will be changed to
era by the rules of Sandhi, be fore these affixes. This substitution of era for f
i
is for
11
11
the sake of the subsequent sutra however, because there x could not be
changed to arc by any sandhi-rules.
^tr
n
c^Pi <*U1'^ C* n
ear? TTrfr ^^TiiHiiw
ffrr^
11
do.
Absolutive
affix
Thus !Wi<4
aw
is
Skfliitfr
11
**rfq,
5^m
np, *MlU|
preceding the f being long.
^m
for the
substituted
5^, when
5*5
( ft:
arc
11
* of fa, before
the vowel preceding the f
ir*:,
srVpTâi, H
Heie VI.
4.
51
mm
II
But
applies.
srqrsr ir?r.
The
the
is light.
the vowel
shortening, the
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
q and the
elision of
place of operation
ed by VI.
as asiddha, for
this elision
is
is
the Intensive
not considered as asiddha,
this stt
shorten-
is
not to be considered
is
is
by VI.
elided
4.
49,
were asiddha, the f of f*r would

irr which is a root which ends in
not considered as asiddha for similar
is
309),
root, its
if it
Similarly the elision of ar in
Dhatupatha Churadi
(see
This shortening
ll
*n*fa
asiddha, there being no laghu purva, the present rule would
if
not be laghu.
sr,
Thussru+pir^^^rrfa
not the same.
Similarly %nrl
not apply.
1273
should not be considered as asiddha, as their
elision of 3T
is
and we have
92,
4.
Ardiiadhatuka changes.
Co. ]
reasons.
f^TTTT, SST.
ffrT:
V*
II
<T^Tft
II
f^TTTT, 3TTq:,
II
3W* ^WlR qw f^TTTT S^TfflT *T^f%
STTT
It
57.
optionally
sr*ris
||
II
substituted
for
the * of
before the affix sq^, after the verb srfa h

This however does not apply
Thus q Mm or irn^r T<T
to the 3TT*
II
(VI.
substitute for f, as Bregra Tfl:
48, VII.
I.
3.
36).
for
The maxim of
Prati-
padokta applies here.
a^<ffcU*^fa
ffrT
II
In
58.
3-^5*:, fHfc, sf^t%,
Chhandas'
Observe
*r3?T,
m ^fl
srcrrr
qil^
II
ll
II
As
long
11
sr*ffa
iptffa,
Nm
ff
ll
substituted
is
for the
% of
long
rfr,
is
before
The
force of
ject (passive).
?fj
lengthened.
is
added
<j^
When
is
it
has not the sense of the future
II
to denote
condition (Impersonal action) and ob-
the Past Participle .has not the
Thus
)
i
% before
when
Passive Participle in *nr^
is
RrawiR. st-^t^, ( ^t:

rreri i%m #3t t^h
substituted for the ^ of
irrrft n
11
"^ s^rcsnff M ûft rrraiH^H *t fror

60.
The
the
11
50
11
the Participle in
of rt
say'in
II
ft a
inr;
do we
before
II
ll
59.
5*T*
Why
11
3-,
in the secular literature.
i^rf* %*:, @Hr: wfq)

%*:
FSTC' <TOP
H*mt
#3fr
faW
ff%
:
II
II
rer
s*ft)
R*A ^Hf H^frT

and c, long is substituted for
the Veda.
Thus 3 ^4 95 f&q
5*ni in
^T^
II
'gtWIsfawift qTcT*<}f<i
srreffar:,
to the Intransitive
JTCffar,
f$T
qfc^fNn
all
force of wjp^, the
used
to denote the agent
vowel
in the active
sense.
(III. 4. 72).
Thus
Here tU is used
JWT'TPT? ^f^T^ 'this is the spot where Devadatta perished
with a Locative force (III. 4. 76). Why do we say 'not. having the force of
'.
Ardiiadiiatuka changes.
1274
Bk. VI. Ch. IV. 62
Here *f is added with the force of condiObserve STr^Rf^TTroWP

and akshitam means 'imperishable'. The vowel not being lengthened
the sr is not changed to q- (VI I L 2. 46).
*%rl
II
'
tion,
ssta%?sr*ft: n $ ?
err
The long
61.
of
%,
before the Past
the Future Passive

i
imprecation 'or
When
^n%
11
'
11
is
m, 3TTstor4^ft:
(r%*r:
^Hr. fa*rr*r)
optionally substituted, for the j

not having the sense of
<3r,
Participle
when the word means
Participle vq^,
a miserable plight \
Thus facugefa or tfNrgftfa, raws* or ffws, fa^R wwft, sfNrs* rrr^r h

not having the sense of cursing or miserable condition, we have one
form only, as sat^r^:
f^snt, **,
<*,
11
11
Before the affixes s^ (First Future and Condi-
62.
tional), fag; (S-Aorist), *frg? (Benedictive)
rastic Future),
Passive
(*f*r)
and
<rrfe (the
when there are used in the Impersonal
Priph-
(srrer)
and
Voices, (1) the verbal stems endingin a vowel in
the Grammatical system of instruction ( mfo^ i), as well as the

verbs (2)
(3) srs and (4) sar are treated optionally in the
same way
and when
as in the third person of the Passive Aorist in

so treated, they have the
The augment f*
STrm'
is,
aphorism
They
of course, added to the affixes
What
and not to the stem.
augment *?
Kdrikd
f$WZ ffar*r
First
The Vriddhi
secondly, there
tuted
for the
is
and
this atidesa
11
takes place as in fer* (VII.
3. 54),
f%"^, sft^*
by
the addition of g*F augment (VII.
f of f^ (VII.
to,
T $%*r q**
ffo*rr*r WTf*HTrsR[STRft
:
II
are the special objects served
are given in the following verse
feijr,
fourthly,
the
3.
2.
116, VII.
33), thirdly
roots
is
3.
34),
substi-
having indicatory w
Bk. VJ. Ch. IV.
CniN-VAD-BriAVA
6$ }
(VL4.
their vowel
(Bhuadi 809 to 873) optionally lengthen
augment f^ being considered
addition of the
1275
95),.
and
the
lastly
as asiddha or not to have taken
by VI. 4. 22, the rule VI. 4. 51 applies and the causative affix for is
and this f? is added irrespective of the conditions and limitations of
elided
effect
VII.
r:
2.
35 &c.
Roots ending
(1)
r,
3T?TfîrT or
In
mn
in
a vowel
%^, areulMrl or
*TTT3lrr or
3T^2HT
the f*
class,
the sr
is
considered as asiddha
is
lengthened optionally by VI-
when not
are given
treated as
the
and
$f,
as,
wn
affix
pr
as,
*rfa*^ or
being a root of
The forms
4. 93.
f^r*r,
the causative
is
*r*lfa3j^
and
retained, the
r%^^Mlfa^fMIH.
With
affix tfrg^ *rn%fte or %fre, *ITO*fte or ytftz and write or W*nfte H
With
affix <jrf*T
The fan* aorist
"srrfarTr or %rfr, ^rnrrrr or ^rar, WfaW or SHIrtf
With the
4. 92.
aTfrfamrrP*, or ajfftiM TC,
3T%*TRrP*,
the
with
also
two wft^m or ^rf^T%, arqtfim d and

of the causative ending by VI. 4. 5* r in spite
penultimate being shortened by VI.

>r
So
II
augment which
mmfamd
Dhatupatha with the
there are three forms, the
being given by the elision

>f
the
in
3T-*(^H W
and
affix
STOTPrerrfPl or STOfaqjrfr*
II
lodel of these
(VI.
ll
roots
snrrfg,
is
^m
(VII.
3.
33)*
and srer%
VIL
3.
34) or
4. 93)-
f^ : Fut. niRtmm or ^t^%; Con. gr mnm rior <H*flH, Aor. ajqfHmrTIHl

ST^rWrfr^ and iT^rcrr* (II. 4. 44); Ben m-prsftg: or ?rfSpfte Per. Fut qfTHrTT or
(2)
>r
The f%oi model is arcrf% H

(3) *%' Fut. nrf^WRir or *$**& Con. Wfmfam
II
mn or 3i*r?tarrrr* (sraf^rrm)
or irf^TT
11
isarerT?
II
(4)
or sTSSFrar*
Is
sr^f%
The lengthening
$ takes
of
place by VII.
?T: Fut. ?f%tfr or j$m, Con.

;
Ben
or 3TO#oi<r; Aor.
Ben. infers: or (^f^fte)
STfffpajrT or
Îfafte or ftftsr; Per. Fut. fffmr or rer
am n?Mtmf%m
^rqte, Per. Fut.
?
2.
The f^* model
37.
3Ty^r Aor.
U The
;
(m) ?
ST^hlTrrr*
f^r?r
model
11
Why
? Observe ^Tfssrc, ^FfT^TH I*

Why an the
Observe %<*% and ^TTO% I* Why in Upadesa? The
rule applies to *rRM also, though ÎT (after guna change) ends in a consonant, but in its original ennuciation it ends with a vowel.
The atidesa
do we say before to &c
Impersonal and Passive
rule
being enunciated with regard to stems
titutions of
^ and
or 3T^rrol?T
11
The
and
?qr
Thus
it
substitutes
according to the Kasika,

s(t#r g^fir **feRT
when
\\
\\
ahga
),
prevents the subs-
fPTîT, qTfa<si%, q^% or 3rrfawtfr,
W m
or
(II. 4. 42,
43, 45, 50)'
these roots are treated as r^T*

11
qr^rft
rr
^:,
3s,
b^^RST
do not come
ll
~<x\% **fei%
\\
Ardiiadhatu Changes
1276
___*63.
dh&tuka
Thus
by
I.
after
of an
5fte,
ftrdha-
II
m^
TTf^fam and TTMrftrc II The Personal ending is

being in the Ablative case, the augment is applied to the affix.
^rfffra,
%w
2. 5.
augment
the
g?r is
66
beginning with a vowel and having an indica-
affix
^ or ^
tory
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
This augment, however,
not to be considered as asiddha (VI.
is
purposes of semi-vowel substitution under VI.
were allowed, the augment would become

having ^ or ^ ? Observe 3q$RH,
4. 82.
Why
useless.
22) for the
4.
If that substitution
before an affix
II
3tt*t 5?pt sfe
64.
ardhadh&tuka
V*
The
affix
<ttti%
11
final
3TT
smn,
ll
Jta:, %fz, <*,
of a root
with the augment
ll
as well as
se?
an
before
elided
is
when
begins with a vowel and has an indicatory a^ or ^

Here the affix has the f? augment.
Thus qf*r*T and zftim
it
ll
*TTsF,
ll
^J, HPT3
affix
*&Q
>
Here the
So
(III. 2. 3).
also
by
affixes are re?^
im
(fern;,
JTfT
(fern)
I. 2.
*frf:, cfiMr!f:
by 3T^
with the
III. 3- 106.
Before
Sarvalhatuka affixes, we have trfor, ^TfH *Q&i and sîsre II The two latter
are the Imperfect 1st Pers. Sing. Atm. of *r and ^r with the affix 1 (??) When
vowel, we have *$raSr, W$m H
it does not begin with a
ivfa
11
%\
<T3rft
\\
The
65.
fore the Krit-affix
Thus ^wl,
tO VII.
3.
84.
fee, *rf?r,
11
final
*T<*
of a stem
is
changed into $ be-
II
^RWLi 93*,
-
3?r
11
and *^re
_.
II
The Guna
takes place according

.
-,
ÔT^mnTrsT^mTCn" ^te
%\
11
11
<T3Tfa
ll
g,
*tt,
wr,
m,
qr,
-i*iid
form of ^T
^T
and vtt (3)> as well as for that of the roots m, *W, *TT,
there is substituted before an ardhadhsl(sreTRf) and ^TT (^t)<
tuka affix beginning with a consonant, which has an indicatory
66.
For the
final of the roots of the
*r
or
II
Thus $v&, $WR with ^^,
M^,
WNwr
with
II
%*torcr, sr^tfte, sr^tftorcn-*, ârfWrT,

*tfta^, altera, *fte^
The
Tt
'
to protect'
of Adadi (47)
is
So
also ft^r
<fot%,
not meant here,
Tfta%,
^^^
#*%,
become
the
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
vikarana *r*
tjT
is
So
taken here.
also
Its
1277
form
gr- faj i fl is
will
be
Bhvadi
It is
qrsfiT.
not to be taken here. Its
^ra%
is
Why
had
AniiiYA-RULES.
elided in roots of that class.
is
*to drink' that
form
69
Here
do we say 'before a consonant'? Observe ff^:, ^5:
srr of fr would be replaced by ? by the
11
not been used in the sutra, the
$?*
present sutra, even before a vowel-affix srg: o
for the lopa of 3TT
taught in
prevented by this subsequent sutra teaching f substitution. In fact,

4- 64
in the aphorism is a jnapaka that the rule of
the employment of the word
VI.
is
vipratishedha (I.4.2) applies in this section of asiddha (VI.
of
superseded by
is
3TT
and
**rar
before non-f^t and non
nj&
%frf:
%*
II
<*mft
II
flf<t affixes.
*:, feftf,
gUWHimi4l4lfltaM]rlii fefr
II
67.
f^,
Thus
mood
'iftirfj,
<ttrT
m^
lf^
^jr?l, WtT<t, t^?t, >3T?t
or the Precative
ardhadhatuka by
of the above
roots
mood
**refte H
;
By
f^
Before non-
11
is
here meant
the Personal endings of which
More-over by
III. 4. 116.
and st^^T*
the word
III. 4.
mood
are
Parasmaipada
104 the
does not apply
Atmanepada
to the
m TO wftmfr
( smr.
^rft*^ S?3TO
II
\*
i^rf*
ii
*rr,
^rer-%^T,
^:,
fefe
11
mentioned
in
<ji||lfeU<Mll-tiPt Sf
For the
68.
VI.
4*HlWl
final 3TT of
4. 66,
the Benedictive active,

.
II
stt
only of the Benedictive are ftg, so the present rule

affixes of the Precative.
affixes
ifrf:
<J*KlWt wt%
Active.
fa?l and non-f^t we nave Vft* anc*
the
II
substituted for the
is
in the Benedictive
and the lopa
4. 22),
the present rule substituting f instead. So also fren
<S
may
*T3fa fofl* T^T:
II
any other root than those
optionally be
substituted, in
when the root begins with a conjunct
.consonant.
The
ed by
this
**TT
was the only root of VI.
rule.
It
4. 66,
which could have been
affect-
has been, however, specially exempted by the word
Thus 3tanjor *7TOt?t, &SWI or mq&L, but only wirq[ (VI. 4. 66\
wtoto
and q q l (not commencing with a double consonant). The phrase f^TfT U
understood here and therefore the rule applies to Paras maqpad a affixes (III.
Thus *?*refrff in Atmanepada. The root considered as an anga, should
4. 104).
11
consist of a double consonant, therefore in Rre?3rq[ (from Rr*
be considered as a root having a double consonant, for
+ *r ), $ is not to
c is no part of the
ahga, but of the preposition.

51
*rfa
11
31
11
q^ri%
11
*t,
^tPt, 3*TTWTPTnîfdî*i
11
Augment
127S
f 1%:
ir
Rifa
^CT, IT,
^^
when the
<*T,
Thus
^T
and
^r, is
9Wc)ft4Krc**rraC ^
II
under rule VI.
stt
absolutive
may
Thus
4.
5^ follows 5
affix
M^lft
11
I.
1.
and ar^mi
W&:,
The
1*
affix
56.
^,
3i^d<W<IH,
*rft )
II
optionally be substituted for the sn of
ri
arqFTc^ or srrara
S^^îSTO:
by
a f^[ affix
II
before 5*m
WT, (*RlRr)
72
11
snra, iron*, jptto, *rc*rra, jftpt, *nra, *r?nr
70.
IV
Bk. VI. Ch.
537 R
the substitute of
F3<J as
ir
qrw ^TC^Tirprrwf^sri
rr?r
69.
The t substitution for
Jisrar
66, does not apply

JTT,
st
11
q^n%
vs? n
^, ^,
^,
aj,
^ttt:
(,if*v)i
71.
^Tff
acutely accented
the augment of the
is
verbal stem in the Aorist, Imperfect and the Conditional.

Thus STc&nffit, 3T?NT?fr ^f^^y **&*l and ^T^fÎ^, SH^R^
I*
aT
l^l^HIH H ^*
^FR
II
ffrP II.3TF3TW >T^nTT^rf
72.
3?nr
3TT?,
II
ST^KMIH, (^RrO
g^^cSf^
<TCrT
acutely
accented
S^TtT^
*T
T^
the
is
II
It
augment of a
verbal stem beginning with a vowel, in the Aorist, Imperfect
and the Conditional.

Thus
qr%s,
STT*>ft<t, 3TFvr?ft
The
srrsra
qsTrr,
^rer*^;
and srff**^
II
^rssffffc arrsît,
The Vriddhi
u <rf??, <&<t
and %fi
90.
I.
ând
Passive Imperfect (<*f) of ara,

^f? are ir*^, 3TRirr and
First, the affixes of the Imperfect are added
3TT* and not 3T? II
formed by
and then the Passive
characteristic qas
the vocalisation of the semi-vowels, and

(VI.
^n%5T^ft
takes place by VI.
I.
15).
is
which causes
3 c 3rT, and ssicF stems

which they begin with
ll
tion precedes the addition of augment.

âr,
the latter being
being nitya,
-so
which we can add

following
to these roots,
f"53<T,
The stems having now assumed a form in

The addition of tense-affixes being an antaranga opera3TT*
a vowel, take
the vikarana
added
we have
maxim
is
far
anitya; after
3^
3TT?
Why
is
11
After the affixes have been added,
added and precedes

srf?
addition the roots
reference to which a rule teaches something
would be
augment,
assume a form
in
considered anitya depends on the
^ww fT^P* ftraWr W?T
rule that applies simultaneously
in order the
"
when the word-form
after the taking effect of
different
that other rule hajd taken effect, then the former rule
from what
is
it
not nitya."
in
another
was before
IV
VI. Cii.
15k.
76
The Augment 3th
The
73.
is
found in the Veda
also.
found there before the roots beginning with a vowel as well as
It is
Thus 3TT*:, 3TFT3?, anc snS^ H *TO is the Aorist of

by II. 4. 80. ^M* from ?jst (II. 4. 80), and sTrgr^
before consonant roots.
fr, the afTix being elided

is
augment
3TTff
1279
the Imperfect of 3*^M
In connection with the prohibitive particle

m, the augment ars or srr? is not added in the Aorist, Imper74.
and the Conditional.
fect
m *rer^3Ttffc, it w*?rfffi, it w srcfci,
Thus
W^W, IT W
srfa
T^pftWT
H^nftfrT, TT *T
*n
*^,
**r
it **Ftfffs*rr,
II
II
There
75.
is
diversity in the
added even with

even when there is no *TT
sns
s^r or
is
Veda
augment
the
and sometimes not added
*rr,
II
Thus
the augment
^Ttt: n
II
the
^ izmw
augment
T^jft
II
s^fr%
rlr<Ts
76.
Thus
73.
is
is
4.
is
back to
is
first
**fn,
I.
53. 3)
?-,
votf;
*, (
*$$&%fa
fyr 3ttt:
(Rig X.
by VI.
4.
ffr**&r<i;
m is
added.
II
11
^ in the Veda.
mm
In f, the arr
qftfyr 11
the
substitution
being consid*
64,
82. s)
22) for the purposes of the elision of
added to
and
$r% qr^niP^^p^:,
as q**rrar fWF*tffcr
Sometimes
Here f?
thus becomes ^,
3TT
II
îwk
II
%^ roots and the affix

by this sutra, thus the* affix is brought
To show this repetition ^-i-^J^ the sutra
* after the
substituted again for this 5*

its
original condition.
has exhibited the word
srfe
11
*& t fsrwtîT ^rt
the substitution does not take place,
then ^
^m^r^ (Rig
no m
In m
diversely substituted for
* fa*$ to*
of qr is
ered as asiddha (VI.
is
not elided, though the particle
elided before the affix ft
augment
1),
not added though there
STf*TWJT : , IT 3TT^ : ,
srxt ^
(Rig X.
in offerer 3*:
is
?w
in the
33^3^ îK^f^#r
^^ ^^#t,
11
dual number.
11
vas
11
^fr
n srr%,
33, >sng, g^m:,
3^
fând
1280
îfrf^l
^^^*i"lc|5^r#ft 3^T% *g*i4OT3R
II
Before an
77.
3tJoW
II
beginning with a vowel, there
of g, the characteristic of the roots

for the final %> %, 3" and 3J of a root, as well
are substituted for the
of the
affix
Bk. VI. Ch. IV. So
it
fifth class,
g-
(for ^ or g^).
as for the 37 of H, the $;r (for % or %) and
Thus su^fa, cr3^f5^, 41f>44Rr> from roots of the 5th class. Nr{^
%$V* H*> * ^, *: and gfr and wr>

Why do we say before an affix beginning with a vowel ? Observe
Why " of *3 &c." ? Observe $[, <*w, ^, **r:
STT^nt, Sl grfr, *r^*r?*
Why "off and 3" ? Observe qiEj|:, ^: where the vowel is *t
F^rt: The Guna (VII. 3. 84) and Vriddhi (VII. 2. 115) however
as from f%rr^HT^ and ^|<W,
take place to the supersession of f^ and 3^
m?Z
II
'
>
'
II
ll
II
wpj^th and
with eg? and
ttf^j:,
<*ff$
II
In the Chhandas there is deversely the substitution of $*n?

Vdrt
&c. Thus <jr 3%*r or ^^ ^h
and T^rW in the case of
ft^c gq?r, ^*rf
**fa[:, g^T? <*fap, >3*^5R 3T5TFIf f^T^ 2T3TT*I?
ll
II
WUM*qimflr
q^Tf^H3TWTra^T,^,^^{
1)^11
11
and ^r^ are substituted for the % and

of a reduplicate, before a non-homogenous vowel.
78.
Thus 5^*, ^r<?, 5*tf%, ( VII. 4. 77

homogenous vowels and fmq and
before
ferer:
fRT:
^r^:
ll
^rr%
vs^ H
ftC^(3HU4U?r
II
^rf
79.
11
JT?T?I <T*<T:
is
but
and
^srg:
f^:,
supersedes this
ll
5^1^ W?T H
substituted for the | of
The making
rule.
3v$:
3^ before a non-vowel.
f&w, ( snfe ^^)
beginning with a vowel.

As ^r, fwf, fw*:; but wnTT* the ^ being added by
affix
3^3: and
g-
this a separate sutra
is
^r before an
a subsequent rule>
for the
sake of the
subsequent aphorisms.
srr
f Ptf
II
si*w:
ll
*o
3?ft STfa TtrT
\\
q^rft
f^^r fT
ll
err,
an*, êrot:
^T3TW H^
**r^ fenrr:
II
II
The
substitution of ^r^? for the fofstriis

optional before the accusative endings s?q[ and -rj^ (sra) II
Thus ^fif ?*q or f^j q^, ffr: T>3 or f^?: q^:
80^
II
fnft ^jt
||
fpcf u s^rr^s;
:
*\
||
q^rfif
||
wWr *tî% arre
q^ (
^jr :>
re<r:
^^
g? r
) u
Bk
VI. Ch.
IV
83
Semivowel Substitution.
For the % of the root
81.
1281
substituted
*s
(^Rr)
*Tff
a semivowel (q-), before an affix beginning with a vowel.

This supersedes f^ substitution, and is itself
Thus ?if?fT, 3^5, stri^
superseded by VII. 2. 115, and VII. 3. 84 which ordain Vriddhi and Guna
on the maxim qti( STOTCP **H f%*fK *P*%, ^rrnr?t H " Apavadas that are surII
rounded by the rules which teach operations that have to be superseded by

the apavada operations, supersede only those rules that precede, not those
follow
that
So we have
them."
m^4>M> s^ftn^^r
( VTRTt: ST^f ST3rc
ipirXrr h*t%
II
<R
3T*nP* anc*
*Wtt
<*?n%
II
II
^:,
sh*m:,
st
^4l*i
i4<r!4,
II
11
82.
semivowel
is
substituted before an affix be-
ginning with a vowel, for the final % or t of a root, not preceded
by a conjunct consonant forming part of the

stem is not a monosyllable.
The word
>rofr:
*s
root,
understood here, and the word sratT
is
when the
qualified
by
the f or f which is not preceded by conjunct consonant forming

Thus ftsTsJ:, f*F3 S??qt,
part of the root is called an asamyoga purva 5 II
that
i.
e.
All the above examples are of the soot
SFar, iTPF^T,
MR3
by the
prepositions ft and 3^, or a Karaka-upapada
gati
ll
;ft
preceded
The
irrf H
rule
word is neither a gati nor a

Karaka, but an adjective, as Witft, its dual and plural will be T in fa ^T and qcWhy do we say of % or f ? Observe ^^3 and 3^: from 3?
Hpra** by %n&
which ending in 37 takes s^< substitution. This is also shown in the next
sutra.
Why do we say the stem should be of more than one syllable ?
Why do we say
Observe ht; its dual and plural are fMft and fw by 53^
consonant
conjunct
Observe anft d.
preceded
by
a
?
be
the 5 or 5 should not
"
forming
part
of
Why
do
we
the root " ? So
say
qFVSf&n pi. sreraw by %qw
Here though f is preceded by a conjunct
that the rule may a Dply to 35ft a so
not apply however
will
if
the preceding
II
'
'
II
II
5^, yet the latter
is
not part of the root, one
^ being
part of the upasarga
The phrase 34<h4hi^4 should

and &*r>
qualifying the letter f, and not as qualifying the word 3?y
Thus we have
gpaft
II
in fact
be taken as
11
sft:
st^t)
H^ft
gfqf
II
*\
II
i^rft
11
aft:,
gfo, (*nq;,
>*r#r.,
smî^w,
stêpt.
II
11
83.
follows,
When
a case-affix, beginning with a vowel
then the semivowel
is
Semivowel Substitution
t285
[Bk. VI, Cm. IV.
87
stem containing more than one syllable, if the stem

ends with a verbal root ending in & not preceded by a conjunct consonant forming part of the root.
3; of a
As no
mentioned
so also
Thus j^*
in the translation.
and
sirrelr
^^'
and
end of a stem end
roots at the
and *r$?
*TrT^:,
before tense-affixes, (non
one syllable
and
only),
^??ff
member
is
w^tera
fm-.
11
II
<r
3f2nrfr,
3T?g^
^t^t
II
gfa
*ref f^rrrîr^rtr
^Tf%3P* 11
II
<rc^r
#r,
^:
(because
The
not a Gati or a Karaka word
**
'
dual Sffj^r and
junct consonant forming part of the root).

first
short s, the latter
in
a sweeper
'
as
d. igPF^r,
srs>FF?r:
is
But <$
II
(because consisting of
preceded by a con-
3; is
the
if
qrTsjtr and w<g4

^q *nir
mn *
not
tsr^:
pi.
rule does not apply
**:, <*, srf%
twwai *mft
II
ll
11
s^srrar^^T* u
84.
sr is
substituted for the
of ^fr w also,
when
a case-affix beginning with a vowel follows.
As
This
is
^f*T*
srsrp-ff,
*î
ll
what
'
born in the
is
kind of herb.'
rains, a
an exception 0 the subsequent rule.

Vdrt: The semi-vowel substitution takes place when
t^TT
precede
as ?*fr, 37*^, 3T#f, 3T*J:,
* qgftpft:
ffrf:
II
**
ll
q^TR
ll
The
85.
*,
11
^t f3TCT#$wNnr T H^ffT
5fiTC*tr (37TCT*fr)>
*& gfipft:,
ffrf:
II
S^fflT
fa*R
t$
*ft
tttt%
ll
gyre
and
II
ll
semivowel substitution
fore affixes beginning with a vowel.

Thus STHTHSTRnpt. *fa>pP >#TW,
ll
^,
(3JTCP*0
II
place in the case of stems ending in
^^3?ftot
^,
3?rw
ll
^rfo
^ret^TOSTT T5$% TO
does not take
or the word ^pft, be-
f*ra*
ll
VI.
4-
srnrar, Jjgftrar:
77ll
II
In the Chhandas, in the case of a stem in w

are found sometimes the 5W> 3^^ and sometimes
86.
and
gvir,
the semivowel substitution.

As fa*ro,fa3TCl** and ^faq.; *R$
:
I^t:
^T#*T3*
*par:, sr^rapf,
^^r.
87.
and
,
*V9
II
*rf^r
ll
II
^3TT?T
II
f**i fa**
fS3
The semi-vowel ^
for that of
is
W,
fair, fair
fa$**,
^TTTOTrJ
57,
^*f S^SH^T
ST^q*, 3?*-
substituted for the
g-
of
(the characteristic of the fifth class roots),
Bk. VI. Ch. IV.
89
Substitution.
before a sarvadhatuka affix
when the stem
vowel,
the
3T is
beginning with a
113)
(III. 4.
consists of
1283
more than one
syllable
and
not preceded by a conjunct consonant.
Thus g^f?T,
3?^^^, so also with 5 as g^fo, ^3, K^H< 1
"
Why do we say of f and 33 formed stems " ? Observe ^rg^Rr, OlMR, from
Intensive bases, by the elision of the *r; affix.
The
is elided in the secular
literature also, by the implication ( jnapaka ) of this aphorism, for no counterexample can be formed of a root consisting of more than one syllable and
ending in 3, not preceded by a conjunct consonant and followed by a Sarva-
^3
dhatuka
unless the Intensive roots with the elision of
affix,
be taken.
Nor
can we get examples from the Chhandas, for the preceding rule applies only
Why
to ardhadhatuka affixes.
^*3
^fl
:
>
(VI.
So
77)<
4-
do we say before a Sarvadhatuka? Observe

in siF^rfnT and *TC&4ftf as the T is
also not
preceded by a conjunct consonant.
gtr a'^fedl
ffrT:
H^T gMHTHt
II
II
*T^T%
<*
^Mf
88.
'TTrf^r
ll
gen,
it
f?fe ^Hlllr TCrf
the
gets
tense-affixes of the Aorist
f% ^f
ffc$i, ^f^r,
ll
II
augment
and the
Perfect,
(lf) before the
when beginning
with a vowel.
Thus 3T*^,
STJWPTT
*ftc. IKÎI
*^:, **f: H
T^n% 3J<*, ^rq^raT:,
3pJ?:,
II
For the penultimate
89.
jfr^(from
Wg%]
ger),
there
is
substituted
3>
nN;:,3Tl^T, 3Tf^,5TÎI
of the grtnated stem
art
before an affix beginning
with a vowel.
Thus
ft *?ft,
rule to cases
f^HWct
1
,
where
PT5?Jf
ll
It
Why do
any where
in the sutra to prohibit the application
as
asiddha (VI.
4.
^r^t
ffa:
of>
ll
say, the
ar^r
substitution of
nr before
56 not applied), the

22) would have brought
4.
having a light vowel for

tution, however,
Some
f^nrt^T, f^fr^,*^
as fn? in order to prohibit the
f%1?r (VI.
is
ô
ot vwmi
*T?r
of the
Therefore not here,

*j^ does not assume the form *?r? ll
This change will not take place before the affixes begin-
ning with a consonant

rSfT =
^m
that the substitution should not apply
RiT^:, ^njR'Tfi^, FTI?*, FT^Rf,
we say 'penultimate'? So
The form rt^ is taken
else.
its
penultimate.
3; substitution
in 3*21
*ts
word
?3<i
It
is
exhibited
As Rifn?
being considered as a word
According, to Kasika 'the
3; substi-
not asiddha, as their places of operation are different.

11
q^rfa
3^*rc srrWi
11
Ttr,
*w%
*i
oft,
i^
^qrwrr.
f-
being considered as
tt
Some Lengthening
1284
The
90.
causative far
Thus fq-qf^,
of ^r^
sfr
is
Bk. VI Ch\ VI.
replaced by
93
before the
3;
II
far,
we have
*tt
ff^r:
^rW
ftqT
II
ftrafas&ra^
frr
when
tional,
^?
in
q^TRT
II
I!
^T,
^reror nx ajsureMt
&
The
91.
Similar reasons as in
n
^psr
When
the sutra.
ifr^,
may
be given
not followed by
feRrfsTCm
11
^rf^T
fearer,
being exhibited as
for the root ^q-
the
f^T-f^Ft,
^mn *ft tot:
<y<reT*TT: oft,
substitution for the
sense
II
ii
3ft
of
^fhr is
op-
that of the disturbing of the
is
mind.
As
agitation
or
f%Trfr
f5*l% or ffTORr
Jf^rf
Otherwise
II
srr*Pf
frofrt
when mental
not meant.
is
twtm, i^:, *ft, ^ m mn t:,

ufavifamw&wtm ?*fr mft ^r <ro*
having
an indicatory **, retain
The roots
92.
their penultimate short vowel before the causative fir
firat
1?%:
ii
jw:
f^r
II
^Rrtr
q^T^r
II
mum
II
II
f^r 5*reTrfst 3
11
II
The
firl
Bhwadi (800 to 873), and all

Thus îfa, saiq^r,
Some read the anuvritti of the word optional-
roots are ^Tft a subdivision of
other roots that end in 3?* as ST* and tTH of Divadi class.
sprafa, rsranr,
ly'
from the
sTOrf^ U
sprofrir,
last
sura into
This
this.
will
then be a limited option only
The forms 3*W*llif and ^2fjprar?T are thus explained.

Optionally a long may be substituted for the
(vyavasthita-vibhasha).
93.
penultimate of the causative of 1^ roots, before the third

person of the Passive Aorist in
urg^ ( an* )
lutive affix
f^mpjig^rfrof
HT^rni,
vft, ftrcr:
Thus
The
rule
sm<:^r
does not
short only,
this difficulty
there would
tute of
5i
<rg;*
teach
of short,
so that there
optional
II
^rw
II
is
i.
Why
II
merely
we have
long.
e. it
when the
II
f^nff, uijj<*I*., ^rtr:,
ar^-
II
3T^Tf% or 3T*rrfa,3TrTft or 3T<rrfa
the alternative
siTTTfa,
||
^t^ptt:
?THrPTlor Hra<rml with
and before the Abso-
fer^r (%),
with
f^r<*
and 5PTOT*, and
*rr*rcrre
have we used the word fre
in the sutra ?
the
So
3T*rf*T
optional
and
in the
shortening.
other alternative
that
in
we have
For had frtr not been used, it would have taught

would be a êtf^ffeq-ftnr only, and there will be
causative of causative
is
not be lengthening in the alternative.
would be sthanivat
therefore, the fa
taken,
as in ^TTO^rT *T3^>>
Because the lopa substi-
which would be followed by
Bk
VI. Cm. IV.
93
Lengthening
1235
or org*, would not
have in it the faqr anga, because the first for intervenes

anga
the PT71 and org* affix, and that for which is precedand
wx
by a fa?j anga is not followed by fsrTr and org*, because the second for
e
(though elided) intervenes. Therefore, there would not be optional short here,
Prn
bit ween the

1
The
but compulsory short, by the preceding sutra and no lengthening.
For there
therefore, teaches the optional substitution of the long($\k).
rule,
arises
For taking this rule to be a frqfafa, the lopasubstitution of for would not be sthanivat, by the express prohibition contained in I. 1. 58, and so we can get forms of double causatives. But if we take
it a ^F^^TRP*, then the lopa-adesa of for being sthanivat, would prevent
no such anomaly
in this view.
Therefore the word f\
getting the alternative long form.
used in the sutra
is
Thus take the

by the labt sutra. Take its Intensive with
37, *TR + 37 which causes doubling by VI. 1. 9 = *TR 5TR + 37 ==?nriR + 37 (VII.
4, 60 ) = *r *n% + 37 ( 3^ or nasal being added to the abhyasa by VII. 4. 85)
= STCTR +- 37 = ism + 3 ( VI. 4. 51 ) = 5TCR3. Add fop** to this ie. make the causaThen the sr of 3 is elided by VI. 4. 48 = ^
tive of the Intensive. *reR+3+f "
Then 3 is elided by VI. 4. 49 = *rcR + ?=*rcrR
This *r*rR is
*P* + + f.
Now add f^!L or
the causative root of the Intensive of the causative 5P*
org* to this root; and we get two forms short and long sro'ftft or srsfsrrR with
to
make
this
causative of
a ^qRHT, and
rule
$T,
which
will
be
prevent sthanivat-bhava.
STT%
II
tl
r%ând ijwi or
The long forms
trSTRI. with org?$ H
obtained had this not been a
N Nre,
for
The
vat would have prevented the application of f\$ H
Divadi) ending in
VII.
The
The
34.
3.
udo
(the % of
BTSTFR or st^TR)
4.
otherwise the sutra could have been

'
optionally
JT?J7%
'
would have brought
is
(I. 1.
58)
made without
both
'
quiet,'
word, for the word

and long'. Thus in wppfr
we add for (the Causative sign.),
short
^4- 5
+ for
$sf implies as much,
this
'
'
(VI.
4.
51) = ^rrf^T, the
lopadesa
purposes of lengthening (?rVr?nr) the 3T of sp*

with f*T* we get bt^TR, and with orgs? we get
11
From
this
^R
But we cannot get the short forms, by taking the other
STR**. "
lopades*a will
$t4 in the sutra.

sative
srfa
*TR rR3R, option-
tT*Trt%,
not sthanivat for the
here
as the
in
make
he causes another to
to the Causative root ^wR, as
by
Thus
affixes.
mention of the word
In fact the
and org*
5i)
This rule applies
takes these affixes.
f^ror
^R + r^T^^R+f^ni
= qrrR or srre (with the augment 3T =
when the Causative of the Causative root
penultimate before these
II
being sthani-
roots spând *jh (both
apply to the simple roots.
therefore, does not
being elided by VI.
for
not have been

for^r
not ever lengthen the root vowel before
present sutra,
derivative causative roots of these, namely, sir
ally lengthen the
could
then the lopa-adesa of
(i.
e.
then be
Thus the
sthanivat.
fr*
alternative,
word
and org* forms of the Causative of the Cau-
the double Causative) of
5R
and from the form ^TCR3R> we have
32
Hence
the
necessity of the
are ststr or 3T5T1R
3T*r?tTR
5R5R**. or *tr*trh
or STSTOrR, ^ra/rcTCR*. or STSTR3T-
Causative shortening.
i?86
?IPT1
The
These
it
are from
latter
1^:
v*
II
^rrf?r
II
*$tt%, g***:,
II
The penultimate
94.
shortened before the

Thus ff5RTT
s^r^r Frgrcre;
>
affix
<?t?TT
v^
>
*?rsr
SW
if
Intensive root.
49) as shown above.
4.
grq^rw ^^q"
of the
tl
stem
Causative
is.
fl
See
^jxk
Bk. VI. Ch. IV. 5 97
the Causative stems of the
sign *fW of the Intensive has been elided (VI.

*srr%
it
III. 2.
29 and 41.
^np,
^twptp
fteiîp*, ( frer..
ST^r^T ) r
is
The penultimate of the Causative of

95.
shortened before the Participle affixes xff and rirag
Thus vgfT'M ^jprep*, but q-^rf^m before non-nishtha. The
when
also
into
two
This
ll
is
done by
splitting
$u%)
II
rule applies
up the aphorism
(1) stf; (2) r%gror*ui
giîf
h=f^ follows as ffgi%:
sg^q^rftw
ll
>$
II
^rfa
II
9?n%:, %,
s?
&^nmU<i,
faqrawr.
) K
The penultimate of the Chur&di ^r is shortened

v ( III. 3. 118), when not preceded by two
96.
before the affix

prepositions (or more).
As
(VI.
4.
W^Vt ^rT^ST H But ^5T^JTf with two prepositions.

preceded by more than two prepositions, as STSTTm'ST? II
of ssrff &c., by VI. 4. 51, should not be considered as asiddha
3R38T.,
The same when

The elision of for
22) or sthanivat
(I. 1. 57),
otherwise there would be no penultimate
to.
be shortened.
Vdrt:
The
prohibition
with regard to \% should be extended to
numbers more than two.
*w*af?53
*z
a$
we,
jt^,
The penultimate
*rac> ** and fifr
of
11
ll
<tttRt
11
^, t%3,
% \v
^rar^r;
w)il
97.
the affixes
Thus
are
Unadi
^5
^h
^nT
shortened before
is
II
^q.
(neuter), ^sr*,
affixes.
tto^sft^stctt 3it. ^fe^Fffe
ll
W^* and ?T*^
ll
^qrrrf^r
ll
II
to,
The
s*t,
first
three
*ft,
^t,
Bk. VI.
Cfi. IV.
101
Kit and nit changes,
The root-vowel
98.
of *ra:,-^,
1287
5F*,
elided before an affix beginning with a vowel,
^C, and
when
src^
has an
it
or ^; but not before the Aorist affix ^T^

indicatory
Thus Sf"^:, ^3: ITSTf W%1, ^|T, *r*TI%, *?jft ^3^, ^T*^, ^T^Tf:,
||
*T$:,
:,
*r*nr,
s*m
11
Why 'having indicatory as or ff

Why 'beginning with
3TT1?^, bt^Û
'?
See
ssre:
ffa:
ii
trf%
See
fTTfff,
a vowel,
Why
fTT^L H
See
and
*T*q\T
'not
$*rlt
elided before an affix
an indicatory
As
bt?
farrfsrc
or
WW,
II
srstrfi- RfryfSr sr?rr tot

root-vowel
of cP* and
In the Ohhandas, the
tRt f?hratsFtflr faT^ 3<rerar srfr *frW
99.
is
is
ii
beginning with a vowel, when
it
<T
has
ii
*T$TT t*
<TRtP n
In secular language rlwf%>, >ft*
qftnrchife ^ n?ooii q^rr% vm, info sfo, **, ( srfe *i%ft )

**fa hs ?^rr%^s"'?r% 3<rcrar 3rft *w?? ? *rfr**r% ^ f^fa vara tot*
100.
The root-vowel of si^; and sr^C is elided in
11
fr%;
ti
ii
whether beginning with a

vowel or a consonant, which has an indicatory ^ or ^
the Ohhandas, before any
affix,
||
f^
Thus m*q*$t *T#?fsr%, s^^rra fff **PTP ST***: is thus derived

is
added to the root 3TI then by II. 4. 39, ? is substituted for sr?; thus q^ +
= sra + f^ ( ^ being elided by the present sutra ) =s^ f icf ( w being elided by
Then
VIII. 2. 26), then rf is changed to tj, and *| to *r and we have f?*r:
changed to *r VI. 3. 84 ). The word srs-Trîs the Im*WPH F*:-af**s (
II
11
WR
perative of *w, thus *fr + *s$
+ <rrqi=H*T3+?Tr*=*
*CT + sr* (VI. 4. ioo)=>

This rule of elision being a nitya
and a subsequent rule ought to have operated first, but, as a Vedic anomaly,
WS + 3Mt(VIII.
2.
26)=*ar + >*r*=*rv:rr*.ll
first. See VII. 2. 67

do we read "before an affix beginning also with a consonant "?
Because the elision takes place before a vowel affix also, as %^ft = h^ + 5 +
(VIII. 4. 55).
+ Bm (VII. 1. 4) =
f|T = *
the reduplication takes place
Why
*^
Why
having an indicatory 8for f? Observe

has been added into the aphorism by the .Vartikakara.
Iflr:
straws;
f
Iprss^
ff^r
11
II
?o?
^*ri?cT
II
The
=er
'
II
qfrft
ll
J-*****:, fc,
far*,
^V^ttcto ^*f# *m% Rrc$& *r?rr%
101.
3T|t;t
II
After and after a consonant (with the ex-
Certain substitutes.
128S
Imperative
ment ^z
affix
sffofhi?
4.
Why do we
?T^ consonants
r^TT
f^sf^T? r^ 1%(d
Why *f| only' ?
113) not ending in consonants.
104.
As
by m<i (VII.
^f?ff,
S^riw
and because
while they apply
sjfrTPl
I*
does not begin
theruledoes
y?,
when ff is replaced
beause flT^ fe a later rule
^tfiq;, f*T?trr?
1.35) this substitution does not take place
rules,
f$
whenittakestheaugment
In the case of
rr
the order of Ashtadhyayi,
When two
e.
i.
^Mh%
But
If
Observe
When
read the anuvrittiof fi% into this sutra?
not apply.
"
$.
II
with a consonant, but with a vowel,
in
VI. Cu. IV.
Bit.
nt when the latter does not take the aug-
Thus g *lfa;
(VI.
f%fff^r% ?flt^t *rfrr%tf*HF
*ri sftr
simultaneously mutually prohibit each
two which is once superseded by the other, is superseded

is added by V. 3. 71, f% substitution takes place, as
The maxim 5^: J?^rf WsBrrcnt faWl applies here : OccafWrar, fe?^r%
sionally the formation of a particular form is accounted for by the fact that
a preceding rule is allowed to apply again, after it had been previously superother, that rule of the
When sr^r
altogether".
'*
II
seded by a subsequent
rule."
*Pihsiot^*i%
% f%5
II
^?
*,
^ and
As
In
VI.
ra
f
?iwy,
^^r, the f|
ing takes place by VI.
*jj*fr,
is
3.
being added diversely by

11
\o\
not nF<^ by
Why
irregularly
fa
gf% s^^*rcf5 fa and
i*\v,
The forms
137.
III.
is
not nf?
^r<j
I.
III. 4.
88
it
other than
^t^-^t:, ^, ^?%r.
11
*5R
11
was
required
The
it.
substituted for
fit,
by
lengthen-
are irreûlir;
and then elided diversely by ar^S^r%
85,
1.
f? is also fqr^ in
Thus
2. 4.
II.
$r<*
4.73
II
when the
it
11
vmr* vl
is
P**l
11
^
h
gsijfq'
not fl^'?
is
tense-affix
and when
The
^ is not
ST<* is
elided
Observe
elided,
:
^H^fcl
n
II
fxror:,
jfruftrl?
^,and
by VI.
4.
^, srew*i a
fafj,. ft
^r*TUtf^
crcfa? is
the red 11 pi i-
37 as the affix
and g^fa from 3
ti
q^rft
is
it
in the following
the ^tt being replaced by
from qn, the
^
^ 3^3 q^^W
feuft
Vedas
the
ari^ and
(rcf^W,
do we say 'when
Parasmaipada of
being replaced by
II
srerfre,
as
^r,
aphorism specifically mentions
catejengthenedoas a Vedic form.

is
Vedas, after w,
r%ci; n
Under
is
in the
not elided after the 3 of
q^Tft
11
103.
not
is
fi
&W
II
^*fr
srr%<ra
^far,
$-*aK3-s-^-s-*r.,
11
substituted for
is
106, since the present
4.
tr^rft
it
TS 1 ^ f f*3h*3 ZrKW %fScRr?fr *TTT% Soffit

102.
*3
?or
ii
4tt%
),
the
Bk. VI. Cm. IV
10;
r%?f
and
changi.s,
i$tj
The personal-endings
104.
12^9
arc elided after
r%w,
the third person, singular Passive of the Aorist.

As Bj^jft, 3T^rT% *T*>rR, vmr*f
So also ^T^TRrHJI, 3*?m:?T*TP*, here the
l
Hsion of the personal affix

siddha, the affixes
be
?tc<t
and
<r
?t*t<t
(III.
60) of the Aorist being considered as
I.
1%^%
though
are not elided:
literally interpreted, every affix after f%r>T
the sutra were to
if
ought to be
elided.
Or
word
the
understood here; so that fe\ and fw?i affixes of f%rn are elided and
not every affix.
is
3Tcft fc:
\o\
II
q^rft
||
Thus
113, should
^<n*
*rrf%^*
11
in short st
cpq-, T5",
we say "short
affix, in
Observe
But
stt*t srswrf*?**
affix
elided after a
is
fi
\*\
II
^fsr %1t
stems ending
^f^, ^f? after
(^r
;tff?, <p?rf?
be considered asiddhd), here
sKq-qr^^^j;
II
II
T5i5, tjrc U
"
3T ?
106
ST^^T
%:,
The Imperative
105.
stem ending
3?cT. ?
II
-!-
rf,
^rft
*r?K*
II
Tcr:, **,
do
by VI.
not elided after the long
f$ is
II
Why
in s.
the f substitution
3TT
4.
II
3T*rom
u<?wr<i,
11
The Imperative
is
elided after the
g-
of an
the vikarana with which the Present-stem (special
conjugation)
is
made, provided that the ^
not preceded
is
by a conjunct consonant.
The
affix
3 with which the Present-stem
is
made
is
3 and 53
Thus
do we say " ^
11
after 3 ? Observe ^frf|, g^ffrf H

f^5 U3> f5 II
being part of the vikarana or affix " ? Observe ^f?, gff, here 3
Why
Why
'
'
is
part of the root
'not preceded
by a conjunct
and not of the vikarana. Why de we say

consonant, ? Observe srrcsf?, *r3f?, <T$*jf?
itself,
II
Vdrt
al in
the
*ren,
$ftp
The
Vedas
as
elision off? after the
sn^r?
3"
of the vikarana
^r^WT^T^, fa^rl? 3^71%*, 3PT
*TT
g-
and 53
^rf^R fjgf?
is
option-
II
II
11
sras^rcr
s^r^Tl^ri^r^ jmrararwra^r
107.
The
3T
?w mft
of the vikarana
3"
11
and i^, 'where not
preceded by a conjunct consonant, may be elided optionally

before a personal ending beginning with K or ^11
Thus *P
or 3=*:, Q*H-,
3*, ***,
<t^'>,
a*S rT^
The s must
be-
fet and
1290
long to the
*re#r
*Tf3?
:
,
ii
in g^:, g*p
II
'
indicates that the final
*ft<i
It is
of the whole
ClI. IV. lit.
do we say not preceded by a conjunct consonant'? Observe

only. Though the elision word g* was understood in this sutra,
the mention of
affix
BK.VI.
and should not be part of the root Therefore not
affix,
Why
f?t-C RANGES
maxim
a general
affix,
while
whole
lopa
'
will
'
is
only to be elided, and not the whole
that the words gar,
^ and
cause elision of the
we could
^qr
cause the elision
final letter
only of the
&c, Moreover, in tf
and tf formed by guna of ^, there would have been no guna, had the word
<3r been used, for L I. 63, would have prevented guna
but by using the word
If the
affix.
affix
be elided,
not get
fj?f:
firT
we have such guna
f frr
I.
I.
62.
3^rW3^ ^rc*T3rrcrtr jt^ mm ftii* mm wW

The elision of t is invariable before ând
108.
^rtsttcto
11
11
the case of ^ (
Thus ftf: and %m
** in
by
also
3FrCrr%
Thus $ + * + *:= $* + * + *: (VI. 4. 110) = ** +

o-f^ (VI. 4. 108). Now the lopa being not sthanivat, when a vowel is to be
lengthened (I. 1. 58), 3 of *> should be lengthened by VIII. 2. 77. This contingency is prevented by VIII. 2. 79.
II
^^
ff%n
^rft ^r, **, ^tr. fa***^: n

^^rrerffr ^ *&w mm qrcr%*Trerarcrron*re* pt^ mm *r^f?r
The affix ^ of the stem 5^ is always elided
109.
?^
11
11
11
before a personal ending beginning with a *T

The augment ?KfJ*
Thusf:^- spfcTTând frg:
||
ll
an
affix,
and
it
beginning with
stct
makes the personal ending

*\
to
which
it
is
is
treated here as
added, as an affix
II
TcHT^rg^
??o
<r^rr%
ll
stcp,
^,
Before a Sarvadhatuka
110.
ory Ror ^, short
gunated.
11
3T is
substituted for the
^rrferg
affix
sf
of
$r,
srfeft
ll
with an indicat3>
(^+^) when
= ^T + ^frr^(VII. 3.84)-^+^ + rT^=^rT5 (VI. 4.1 10)

Thusfj + ^ +
Why do we say before a
The h*t is ft^ by I. 2. 4. So also $3|f2$, ?;$
Sarvadhatuka ? So that the rule may apply to what was once a Sarvadhatuka,
though no longer existent. Thus ^5 where the personal ending f| is elided,
shows that this s is not to be
but it leaves its effect behind. The ? in
gunated by VII. 3. 86. When the affix is not RT^ or r^ we have 9fCnw, ^r^
'
ll
'
and ^rfc
(I. 2. 4),
*roNfr*s
bi%j
\\\\\\\
?ren^rsrra?r3
T^rft
II
*T-w=ft:,
*Etr$m:9 Cfl$qi3% ^ffcft
mm *ret srrwg% wiTt mm
II
BK. VI. Ch. IV
114]
of
and
and
itself.
arffrT
291
fqôr
fg:^ affix, the
st*t is elided.
the characteristic of the roots of the Rudhadi class, while 3?^
5?T is
root
AND f^t CHANGES.
Before a Sftrvudhfttuka
111.
53?
r%?T
Thus
Prp, fn^rT; So also of st*t
^vj:; âqftf,
non rândnon
before
we have ^sr
instead of that
The
^:,
^+
fsTj affixes.
in the sutra.
ar*T
the
is
But f*RPT
ought to be ^pr,
*tf<t
11
<T^<r single substitution
an
is
irregularity.
sRn*T*crsfteRr:
3* ^t%t%
??*
ll
q^Tfa
II
Before a SsUwadh&tuka
ginning with a vowel, the long

Thus
Why do we say
Why 'of long sir'?
srfar
Observe
ar^TT?!,
$ ^rsft:
'
9TT%I%)
arw?l
H\
II
'
Observe
R^ft
firsRr
11
Why
f,
II
'before ft?^ and fy^'?
sr-^t (tptt v4^w1<m :
5^,
Before a S&rvadMtuka
re*r%,
wfift>
J,
fT*ffc>,
WW
Observe $w>,
ll
stt
or
fift<j
mJM g
I
J^frq"!,
^n#%,
S^HT and 5^7%
^nrr?r%,
be-
affix
fsFrj;
of srr and of the reduplicate
except when the root
^ftr:,
g^fa;,
gyffrr:,
ginning with a consonant'

of 5
elided.
replaced by
Thus
we have
is
ginning with a consonant, the

is
be-
affix
feci;
II
113.
stems
or
f^jrj;
m*m, f*m<rr*, srfaTrr, ^r#, ^nj^ri. and

of ^r and the reduplicates ? Observe sjtt^T,
st^t?t
^Tfrr^,
*nr,
ll
11
^TT^T-
of vt (the vikarana of the
stt
and of the reduplicate stems
class)
^PTT^T
S1TCT:, 3TCT.
11
112.
9th
^rr-3T^^cnu:,
ll
^f^fh%
ll
is
ll
Why
^x or
Of
>*t
(^)
||
reduplicates
do we say
'
be-
Observe $^for, f*nm

Why with the exception
So also ^rrf^ and sr?Tra before non-f^>q[ and notill
fy affixes.
wft^w
Kdrikd
*jr*
11
?r
ll
IV*
src?rs%
3TSKr?*ir
%ft
Thus
(VI.
4.
TO, fftac**, (^^rr%rrg%^fiF^r)
substituted
ffej or fe?<j affix
ffcyrfrf
ll
11
is
^K\jr[:, srcftr^,
112) and
<w frc?r*r ** ^?r
^pss.
114.
S&rvadMtuka
*?*{*
for the ^r of
beginning with a consonant.
*ftf|* J . ^f?*T:
.before a
$f<%T before a
non-f^
11
affix.
But
fftsftr
before a
vowel
affix
1292
PJ^r
AND
CHANGES.
f^T*
BK. VI. CH. IV
Il8
Vdrt: The final of ?jxyr is elided before an Ardhadhatuka affix.

Vdtt: And this elision should be considered as siddha, in applying rules
Thus sfryr by loosing 3?r becomes $f*y, and we should
relating to affixes.
apply those affixes which would come after a form like
daridr
and not
what would have come after a form like 'daridra
Thus or comes after roots
'
',
'.
ending
long
in
srr (III.
141)
I.
the general affix st^t (III.
but this affix
Thus
134).
1.
would not be applied
?R?rf?T
= $fty:
here, but
11
The elision does not take place in the forms frryr^ and
Kdrikd
the
Desiderative
and
may be either ffsreffrcrfrT or ff?ftf?qfrr
Sidiftzm,
dhanta Kaumudi gives the following rule "srr of ^ftyr should be considered
as elided when applying an ardhadhatuka affix, but optionally so before 1P
(Aorist), and not at all before g^ (Desiderative), <*f?5 and eg?"
:
II
II
Vdrt
^^yr^Yqr
The form
tfty
Optionally
The
|l
$rc3F*l
the Aorist (adyatana-past)
so in
latter
form
is
in the
sutra
is
evolved by VII.
as, BTff^ftrj
or
73 and elision of f%=^ 11

Vedic, the root being shortened from ^fcyr to
2.
11
ftrft s?*ra?^Tro;
II
\V\
^ft
II
ll
fir*:,
^Hhrrg %)
51% tfr s^^ff^^^rrwrer?*fr w?r ?^tr
st^^^tto, (f$^&
s^fa
ll
^flFft srrt*rr3%
ii
1.15.
is
<rerr
11
optionally substituted for the $ of
*ft
before a Sarvadhatuka affix beginning with a consonant and

or ^
Thus ftpw
But
and
or
II
f**fr<r:, farPT^T:
or fatffa:, f*f*t*n or
frvffa:;
frrw
or f*tfre
ll
f^sffa before a vowel-beginning affix and f^nf^ before a non-|?q[ affix

vfrair
before an ardhadhatuka
sr^râj
\l$
<r^n%
11
11
affix.
st^t^,
*%,
(%
^fe st^t^^tr; ^%faHHc-
VTT3%)II
\(w
11
^%w nrrcftsfr *t^ht ar^rrc^r ?^rtr ^fî% ^^3% TCrP
(5T^TI%)
116.
% is optionally substituted for the stt of ^T
before a Sarvadhatuka feft. or fe^ affix beginning with
a consonant.
Thus ^f?<r:
or
*rCr<T:
and
sref^ before a
vowel
fW3% before
an ardhadhatuka.
is for
affix,
11
^^
\V*
^rft
ircnftrarrrwRtTf *Jr
117.
stt
for the final of the

ft:
11
(VI.
4.
ir?TrrT
The
113)
^q":
or
^q": (VI.
4. 113).
But
before a non-ri^ affix, and $fa% and
last,
the sake of subsequent aphorisms.
3tt
? r%
11
ll
srr, ^r,
^t, (%
ww *^wr^rrî
arwrcrcwro)
?r <T*rr
ll
as well as % may optionally be substituted

^T before the Imperative ending
stem of
Bk. VI. Ch. IV
Thus
ft<Tt
^f%:
affix
ii
3T?rf?,
fa
3T3T
q Substitution
swm
??*
II
or *t$f% (VI.
TTTT%
II
w*mH
The
118.
>rem
^,
1293
13).
(&*?& SrHbjTg^ s^feft)
3rw3% 3*3:
|)
stem of ^t
final of the
is
elided before an
being a S&rvadh&tuka f%^ or r%<*
q-
3n3T?, srSTTrTPt
M4Hi<!<N
4.
&\T., ft,
II
^fer>r
r|r
beginning with
Thus
Jhr.,
120
^m^M^
and
srsj:
affix.
II
q^rfa
11
3-3^:,
11
qac,
^, srs^ra-
11
a^^Hi TgfHPff%y <r?rrciw 3313 $ 3*3r s*3ra3T3*r

For the final vowel of the roots ^j and vir
119.
(g), and for the *T of st^, is substituted ^ before the Imperative ending fe; and thereby the reduplicated syllable of ^t
and >*T is elided.
ff^f:
11
ii
^,
Thus
sutra,
and
and
^, of 5, and
being elided by VI.
3?
of
ijfa
3?sr,
the
being elided by this
This <33 of the present sutra should
4. Ill,
be considered as having an indicatory sr so that the whole of the reduplicated

final letter of the abhyasa (I. 1. 55) is elided.
and not only the
3RT 1***311^ SSH^îT^fd
SHI^tfR:,
ffrf:
3r?%3i*
||
U*KlWl
3*3
ftf?
II
?Ro
q^n%
II
3Tf^5T
^-s^,
STcP,
II
JTW,
33ft3*3rp3 33%. 3*3 g3Tf?3S3, 3T<î qqifr?rfo3[
33f3, a^zn^r^rT^T f3f Sjf^frT 3*3:
3*3**3 3=3^3*
II
II
II
Kf^ftftT333
II
3f SchKW*3
3T*
fi&fe
gr^ft^K^ftR
120.
||
3TO3*3f*f3^*3 3r|^33L
zrf^Tcrc^
3T
*P3 3tKS33
3T
II
II
II
||
substituted
is
II
11
for
the
short
3T
standing
o
between two simple consonants of a verbal stem, before the

personal endings of the Perfect which have an indicatory
provided that, at the beginning of the root, in

no other consonant has been substi-
(I. 2. 5),
the
reduplication,
tuted
and when
this
<*
is
substituted,
the reduplicate
is
elided.
Thus
*org:,
the f
serve **T3, **r*33, **33*
sonants
for
by
'
I.
Observe
2. 5,
consonant.
**$rg;:,
not replaced.
is
Why
II
^t, ^:
Why 'for
Why do we say short 3* ?
3^, T3g:, q^:,
*^:, Sing:,
WW-
Observe ftft^,
**^:
II
11
following
is
then
more appropriate
Why
do we say 'which has no substituted consonant

Observe =33i<3 *33i^, ^3^3 ^13^*, 33'3g:, 33*T
,
33
'
'
the Perfect affixes are not for* here, as they
The
sr'?
Obdo we say standing between two simple conSome say this example is not appropriate,
'
II
come
after a
3*3*3:
in
conjunct
and 3*33:
11
the reduplicate'?
294
<J
The
Substitution
Bit.
IV
VI. Ch.
121
must be caused by the affixes of the

5? and %?r%,*CT^: though
and q^ are changed to ^ and *r ll The substi-
substitution referred to here
Perfect, therefore, the rule will apply to %T3*', %5*>,
urn an d
are the roots,
and
<jt
^consonant
tution of *nr consonant or a
here considered asiddha (VIII.
in the reduplicate,
should not be
That substitution
sutra and will make
read with VIII.
4. 54,
2. 1).
be considered a substitution for the purposes of this

stem
the
srfÊrrft:, as is indicated by the special exception made in favor of
If the form of the letter is not changed in the
vt;h
(VI. 4. 122).
<K?5 and
will
by substitution, then such substitution will not make the stem

letter (% *, % 3?, q, *r, q-, ^) is substiThus by VIII. 4. 54, a
STf^rrfc H
tuted for a consonant (other than a nasal and a semi-vowel) in the reduplicate.
Thus in q^ the reduplicate is qq^r, the first q is also a substitute, for the
Such substitutes, however, are not meant here.
=qr substitute of q will be qreduplicate,
11
This we learn from the implication

exception
is
made
different letter,
When
qTsr, si?
tts
jnapaka
then the reduplicate becomes adesadi
t%^ or fw^ the
the affixes are not
thus
q-
is
substituted
S*^, %*j: H
considered asiddha by VI.
:
of sutra VI.
126 where
4.
Therefore, where the substitute
II
is
otherwise not.
rule does not apply
as 3ff
11
Vdrt:
tances
in case of 5T^ and
Vdrt
hence
4. 22,
the 3? of
elision
11
As
3T^r**,
*m?n
under
f**r
similar circums-
of the nasal by VI.
would be
4. 24,
this vartika.
substituted for the 3? of
q- is
than those of i%?
for
The
II
t^ and
3T?ftT* is
before affixes other
the Aorist in
of ^?r
3?|F
which belongs to Pushadi roots (III. 1. 55). *R3n" is formed by %^ (III.

1. 150). Padamanjari gives 3?%^^ ( 3 rd PI. ), and quotes ap rcifl*3fa<P
In the Vedas, q- is substituted for the st of srn and q ^ before
Vd)t\
II
affixes other than those of the Perfect, as s^TP!*, (f%
ment 35* being dropped);

shortening
is
also a
forms.
ffri:
3m
+ ^R^T
instead of q"%^, the Imperfect of
the aug-
T*ar
The
11
irregularity.
So also of 3:3 and *pr,as arr^Sr and srnrq the Imperfect Vedic
3?r? being added by VI. 4. 7$.
augment
The
Vdrt:
*5TW
qf%^
Vedic
II
TIT*
^M* <T*^T STrW^SF^l q^^^Tm^nr
**TH 1&iK 3Tf^fr
Wrf
3T>2ff?T-
II
121.
n; is
substituted for
sr,
of a verbal stem stand-
ing between two simple consonants, the stem not having

any different letter substituted in the reduplicate, when the
1
ending
r$r
of the Perfect having the
thereby, the reduplicate
is
elided.
augment ?
follows,
and
IV
VI. Cn.
I3k.
Thus
123
? Substitution.
But TT^T before an it
*n%*r M
qf^ni",
1295
*I
the vowel be-
ft ?f%*r,
ing f and not bt rTrTrcr*T, **%**, the ar not standing between two simple consonants and ^jfbr*r, **TnT*T, the reduplicate having the substitutes ^ and *
;
from
different
r%^; and *rw
and
*r
This sutra applies even when the
11
ending can take
êxcept
rTT^vnT^T^
\\\
fect
ffrr:
11
^rfTr^ni' u
II
wi
<k?j >rer
ir*5.
^^rw î^wl
Thus
tp&rcftsf*
<r
126, in <s*$and
is
*mw, 3T*3m#r*r,
(3?<T
for*
for the st of 3,
substituted
t^ is
when the
elided,
is
9: (or
^ augment follows.
3*5:,
In the case of
reduplicate,
not
<w kw%
^f^r^
Tt?r**TP*
it
and the reduplicate

with the
*, <K5S, 3T3T, ^rqt,
II
Perfect having an indicatory

sjo*
is
^TTR
II
s^rrejfrcprar
122.
3TT,
affix
read in the sutra only for the sake of clearness, no non-kit Per-
is
%Sm %TC*T, %^t, %:,
q^,
^qr5r
affixes of the
when
follow, as well as
^)
*tf%*T, **nrg,
>^
Hf5T*r,
%7, %TI%,
by Guna, contrary
the rule applies to the sr obtained
and
*R
to VI. 4.
the rule, that no different substitute should be in the
*T5?
not adhered
to,
and
in
wt the
s?
does not stand between two
simple consonants.
V&rt:
%:
It
should be stated that the rule opplies to **&* also:-as, ^rg:,
?p*fr
ftsrprn*
11
123.
meaning
before
'
to hurt
the affixes
is
Thus
<j,
3T<f*vrg:,
'
hurting
**%$*
*ror
',
*rr
when
of ?ra
srr
is
elided,
^r (or
3T<T^, 3T<roW, but WW&, fXFg'-, KtWW in any other sense

In this sutra the long 3TT of xw is to be replaced by
'.
4.
120)
way
"
in,
is
3TT
therefore not appropriate here.
<*TTft
w,
*j,
we should
from VI.
4. 112,
or
whatever
starids
between two
replaced by q".
^ygmm v&
11
the
%i^with the f? augment.
read the word its^^ft^ in this

is
for
and the reduplicate
should either read the annuvritti of
simple consonants
ferrm*
of the Perfect having an indicatory
the anuvritti of short sr (sr: VI.
We
substituted
some one
*^), as well as before
than that of
srg,
^r*,
11
1296
Substitution.
q-
Bk. VI. Ch. IV. 126
^ is optionally substituted for the ar of the

H^ and sr^, and the reduplicate is thereby elid-
124.
stems
3TT (3|\
the affixes of the Perfect having an indicatory *:
ed, before
(or ^), as well as before the
Thus %^:,
am?:,
S5fftT, *TCTg:,
%^:,
Tsrspc^:,
with the augment %^\\
11
125.
q^xrr,
and the reduplicate
11
^wm,
^va
?T3r,
^, *?HRn*,
** ^:,
11
and s?T
*&n% ^TO and ^pj
^n?r,
or
II
optionally substituted for the
is
seven roots
q^n%
11
W*W,
1T5^:, STlTftsr, "%%$'', *W->
%:, %r%*r, or ^STg:, SHTm r^T?^
<w ^ smrem:
of the
or
:rrc?r,
srer
3?
elided thereby, before the affixes of the
is
Perfect having an indicatory
^( or ^)
as well as before the
sr
with the %z augment.

Thus qr^:, %oj:, %fw?T or TK^, t*^:, TOT^T; ***&> *^ **T> or *T3I3
imwr, %%, srsnrr, *Ns, or sw%, ^^rirr%, sn^rnn:; *fr, ^ren%, *rarc, or srara,
^srerr%, ^wtRit; ^r, *%srfrr, *?5TCrc, or ^^1%, ^r^r^rr^, ^srrerc; ^*rf ^3:, ^f*nr, or
:
>
>
kt^';
:,
srews:,
'seven"
5ETÎ5
^fw;
'
Observe,
#*S $3*,
^rfqpT,
^^5:, ^f*ttT
sf5Tg:,
or iEremg:, STC^:, *reire*r,

H
The Phanadi
is
Why
of
a subdivision of
Bhuadi (873-879)
^ TrucKdiRfjoTRra
(
3RT
i^\
11
<W I^^S^SH^fefe
Wr 1 *refcr, ^^r^%7^
126.
11
q^rf^
*, stct,
ll
^,
^rf^,
gmRrc,
11
11
not substituted for the
** is
a?
of
5FFT,
^,
or
of roots beginning with a ^, or of such verbal stems in which

the
3*
results
^3:,
f^rcrafar,
fsrercr^,
*lr>
to*T*T
.^f%^
5?re*r
^r%,
fW^^n%q-, *&,
Of roots where
II
11
3T
is
*#**,
Of
roots beginning
the result of Guna, rarcrcg:,
3^*irrHfat^3Pas^fe?n$3i ^^t^h: ?nr
11
The
??r*
f^rsrera;:, faralifr
g;:-cr?Rg:,
5TR(N^%
to
or the set
the reduplicate elided.
is
Thus
with
f^ follow,
the Perfect being r%^ or
affixes of
nor
through the substitution of Guna, though the
or of
3T of
Guna may
3 changed to
areansrara^n*:
II
sfr
?*v*
result
either from
again changed to
11
q^n%
ll
the
^% as
guna of
$3
snjor:, 3, snlr,
m as $ changed
11
wot,
BK. VI
VI.
ClI.
RlIA RULES
130
I2Q7
in the strong
is changed to
and forms the feminine in fc unaccented) is substituted
the final of the stem srehd except in the Nominative
127.
(which
<|
cases,
for
when the word
or
singular
with
joined
is
Negative
the
>article.
The
real substitute is
aftan sT^rT*, 3T^#r,

3T^T
Li
?r,
the
so that in sarvanamasthana cases
[,
II
But
3?^,
^r%rfr,
1.
srHrrr*
11
an
Thus
70.
3T*rrfaf?T
fa*, 3T*nfrwT, 3pnfap, ST*T*PT f^T*T T??f5^l II

in the Nominative Sing
and STT^fhrir, srrefan, sr?refa
srstf
TOcTT Sff
%$A
&K
\\<
II
imfl^roTSfTO
11
srârr*,
3T#rr:, srtrrr,
this affix
3T5T3T ffrT
JFjf^T^H with the Negative Particle
ffrr:
is for the sake of making

we have 5^ augment VII.
128.
sngr
q^rr%
||
II
11
jtsfST,
^4^H,
( <Z )
f < <m wifon t^Rc

is diversely substituted
**<*
^[
II
11
for
the final of
JTsnncll
As *mp*,
?p*,
*r
11
^ h^rt,
iprer*
i^nft,
*rer
II
npptr,
*Wri*, w**n, twt-,
*m**"f{:,
*mm, rw#r, *iwr:, tw^p*, Tremr,
*m*rr, m<ft,
tt^-
*tcfp, rafar, *m*sir*, *mf*r:
11
?V*>
II
q^Tfa
II
*rer
II
^T^^f^^r^r *$tt rfsfacRro

taught in the following
should
Adhy&ya,
be understood to applyupto the end of the
ff^r:
wrerainreipr,
11
Whatever
129.
Thus
sutra
q^; is
substituted
ffT?
qâr,
ftq^r
VI.
4.
130 says 'q^
for qr$:
when
but
ftqxfr,
$TO
11
will be
nominal stems called Bha
to the
^**raqft*rere:, rf^r
srr
is
(I.
4. 18, 19).
the substitute of qr^'
the latter gets the designation
ffW- where
It
11
of
*f
II
means
Thus
the affixes are those of Sarva-
namasthana.
qr?: 13;
[f%:
11
qrftfa
^r H^m
11
i\o
qr?:,
qr^sfr ^m^rror
^srir
II
r^^^rjf^
*rro
qf^Rf^fr
*refsr
sr
^ qi^s*-
11
130.
For qr?
is
substituted
q? when the former
is
Bha.
the
The substitute replaces the whole form qT?; and

maxim RffczTTFTTOftOT *Jff*<T ''substitutes take the
actually enunciated in a
(V.
4.
\ PtT:
1),
II
f^qf^t
s^RT^
??Tf?T>
rule. "
^JTsTOP
>TC3 ^SI^R'JT
*Rfa
II
II
II
Thus
ffq^:
not only the
final,
place of that which
q^*T, ffq^r,
f*q%,
on
is
ffTiW ^TT%
Vocalisation of ?
1298
11
[Bk. VI, Ch. IV.
of the
affix
The semi-vowel
a Bha stem.
131.
vocalised to ^ in
Thus f^T: <T3*i,
q^T
fa^rr, f%I%,
purposes ofthe elision ofarr (VI.
4. 64),
<T>*,
to; (#**)
is
^T?
V^TT, q^T,
4. 22).
=Tqr4-^?r = iTT + ^^+^r^(VI.
1.
4.
133
<?**
Thus
qrr-t-^TfJ
Now
108).
if
III. 2.
4. 64,
which requires the
elision of
we can not
but the samprasarana
3TT,
107
3 were to be con-
sidered as asiddha, then the affix does not begin with a vowel, and
apply VI.
For the
II
vocalisation under the present sutra
should not be considered as asiddha (VI.

131, VI.
is
not
we have tt + ^w 4- arw = q^q*: q^j

In the nominative, where the stem is not *r, we have <rrr + ^[ + ^= Tft + ^c+^r (VI. 4. 66 )
=rfhn* (VII. 1. 70, VI. 4. 10, VI. 1. 68 and VIII. 2. 23). The affix <& is
considered assiddha, and
II
included in ^35 for the purposes of samprasarana.

STTS
%Tw-
3^
^5
11
II
\\*
^TT% STT^:, &$

s^ % ^tototto *ref?r
II
II
II
s^nprarei ***
Theîn^rf is
132.
the compound stem
The word
is
11
vocalised to
when
(g^r),
3>
Bha.
3Tîs a f&^ formed stem
by
III. 2. 64.
It
can never stand
alone, but, must be preceded by an upapada: hence we have used the word
By VI. 1. 108, gj + 3Tr
"compound." Thus viw, jrgfcr, srlf?,f^St?:, faster, ft*fr|
II
(of^r)=3j ;and then
JTg
+ 3^=sret3
the Vriddhi being substituted by VI.
1.
89.
This form could have been evolved by simple samprasarana thus: !jg4-^S +
*TH = J?g + T? + 3T^r (VI. 1. io8) = ire + 3Tr? + 3T*T (the affix f^ III.
duce guna) = JT^: (VI. 1. 88). In fact f*f is never added to
unless the preceding
produce
member ends
in
and that
ar
ar
2.
will pro-
64,
+ art of 3T
(III. 2.
will
64)
always
The making of this special samprasarana in &z, indicates the

and the samprasarana being
of following maxim arf% ^fTtgprertjf
aft
existence
considered as asiddha for the purposes of guna which
a bahiranga operation, is
is an antaranga operation
3^^Jrat5TCJTcrfec^
133.
lised,
\\$
The ^
II
we can never
'TTTfa
of 35^,
II
W,
get the form arr$
*pr,
3^^ and
II
TORRC, ^Tcrf^
Jrsre^
II
becomes voca-
affix.
But
^m, u%, &r>, FTr, 3%, tvjft., ji^t, *i$ft
WFfaraP with Taddhita affixes. ^t*r is formed by
154) and aft being added by VII. 3. 4 as *j?j belongs dvaradi
fpr:.
sfpFf ^f% HT^PR*

3.
therefore,
but not before a Taddhita

Thus
(IV.
II
11
*rM
arsi
%
affix
class.
This vocalisation takes place of the nouns ending in ^, but not when
they become feminine or do not end in ^, as 3^: q>^, w-TrT, *rq^r, *m%m 11
The word ar*T of the next sutra, in a way, qualifies this sutra also.
Bk. VI. Cb. IV.
138
st
EusroN.
1299
Of a Bha stem ending
134.
in
the
*ni,
st
is
elided.
As
rjjfr:
qâr, cr^rr, cr^r,
rrvn q^r, rryrr and 3$**
11
F^^r:
place of a stem which actually ends in ^, therefore,
it
The
elision takes
does not take place
here, tnftfcra. H
^^ârcRrroftr \$\ q^rfa *r <=r, ^;, ^<kiih, ^m

tofc*^ *r s^ s% ^rr?r^r rr^r^rrwft n^f%
ff^n
135.
Of a Bha stem ending in 3^ with a precedand *crcnrab the a* is elided before the
of
well
as
qr,
as
ing
11
11
11
11
11
11
affix
3TT!^
II
But *rrJH:,%R
Why do we say.
^ " Why do we say preceded by a ^' ?
before the affix 3T"T ? Observe
and
here
Rra^ formed with the affix stot
Observe *rr*Ff: and %*m'< from stpt^
Thus
sfrt^
*WP,
%Nff*, qT&T*n
II
ll
grrer7
'
neither the 3T of
1^ nor
the final syllable
keeps these words in their primitive state so

f^ror^r
few:
11
^^
11
ll
elided, since
btjj is
far.
fa*T^> fti
VI.
(*#<ftw)
167
4.
11
In a stem ending in ar^, the ar is optionally elided before the Locative ending 5 and before the
ending sfr (t) of the Nominative and Accusative Dual
136.
Neuter.
As *n%
&tf)
or snTfa, grf^r or ^rcft, srrfr or srr*Rr (VII.
stem ends in
The a?
^[ or
Thus
'
in
ST5*
not elided when the
is
with
consonant
Bha
preceding
11
qrlorr,
T#r, sriTTr,
ceded by a consonant
say
19).
II
137.
or
1.
stems
3?=*:
II
in
^ and
II
'
snr^r,
Observe
*r^' ?
^n%
Observe
II
^rW
and
^r^
11
?ftr$C3f, RTrTfr^t, ^T^Tr,
sre:,
rT^Tr,
and ûj
(*TW
qfejtaO
11
II
Why
*rr*JT
do we say
II
Why
'pre-
do we
Elision of
1300
The
138.
Bha
VI.
[Bk VI. Ch. IV
ii
of sr* (^>^)
sr
elided at the
is
142
end of
stem.
Thus ?4H: *$%
of the
3?
member
first
^tf^r, S*fr%,
T^-' W*>
takes place by VI.
The lengthening
*P*T, T*J% H
and qôf
138:
3.
ar>^r is elided
by
4. 24.
fen
*>
II
<l*Tft
II
SRp,
II
(STÔ
fee,
II
Long $ is substituted for

word ^j; when the stem is Bha.
139.
after the
As 3fHp,
sTRft WcfT:
?s
II
of sr^ (srsj),
3?
11
<*?rfir
II
The
140.
a root,
s?r%
^Crrr,
the
strt:,
II
^cft
(*^ ?ta:)
Bha
final stt of
II
when
stem,
ends in
it
elided.
is
Thus
3?for3T: T53
gffcwrr, ^ffrfisfa, fpfan 7*^, 5IM, and |j^ from
Why
do
we say the an of a root' ? Observe ??rjjT: p%
and
"
spror
q ftdlrtm
sutra
should
This
be
divided into two(i) stft? (2) m^ji so that the
HW* 7*3 H
long an in general may be elided. For Panini himself has declined WfT and
:
'
OT by
the elision of
3TT,
F$t4l<4|T\<l<Ui!:
$f%:
*F%^ 3Trf
II
see VII.
?* ?
II
7*rT BTTrJR
sin?
is
Vdrt
III.
T?%3, 3TT%,
1.
3TT^:,
$frP
II
name of the Instrumental

Thus **ftt Ifv-W, WTT ^T^ H
in the
singular affix, given
Why
Instrumental Singular
The elision of
firsrafsfa
11
?*
11
W fNntf*rT*T5?TO fefit
142.
3TT
of
'
atman
'
is
in the
zftr^FT
found
ftsRh,
^ft
WW ^m WI ^f?f
Observe
V.
vmm
It
II
3m*H
is
in
2.
48),
q^mp
by ancient
Mantras
&m *n%T
Observe
II
other cases also, but

II
refit, (*rer, sshr.)
II
II
Blii
fir is
Thus fcRPforair **Wth" affix
fir,
11
Of the
ing an indicatory ^, the

with
3TT3W
II
11
not so frequently as in the Instrumental, as ?*T?qTO5>*uT T5P*

fir
83, (*5p *m^sr)
the affix of the Instrumental Singular follows.
Why
11
and
II
the
Grammarians.
3TH*r% ?kT1
^T^T
II
^f^TT H^T
tO
In the Mantras, the beginning of
141.
when
(rF%
37,
*w $33%
*rf%?tf* n ari#F5f^rfT s^rer
elided,
1.
II
stem
firsrfir,
before an affix hav-
elided.
(with
ff*
Why
V.
I.
24), fH*Trr*,(fo*KT:
I^f
r%
;
,
do we say 'having an indicatory '?
k. VI. Ch. IV
k:
II
144.
vrf*
II
$3flft, 5Tf?t
with
^f^ of V.
must be
(fef?r,
**rf^T
5")
II
II
sûr:
^r
11
ar^nr
f^T
<TTTR
II
"^
(IV.
2.
Thus
11
So
87).
rule applies even
it, is
to
^, the
elided.
wm-
also f=T*nTT
non-bha bases,
STtfrsr, *T^C5T (III.
for
2.
97
cTT^,
*:,
II
(3IFT, ^:, &*:)
II
sragmft'J) 4 u fa * ^ rf^jm^faf^^rftrM &fcRi <4 foftusrf^frj
^TO^ffTI
cffRT
that follows
11
tt^s ^n*
^To
The
24.
11
if any,
and **5TWJ with

1.
1301
affix
given to the indicatory
with the krit affix
rrf3rap*n
elision of aiîi
with the consonant,
Thus
= f9Rr?f>:
h,
II
Before an
143.
last vowel,
effect
The
W*. ^^fr ^ 3<T^S3FTl M

5
*T
II
II
^snf^*ro5<Twirc*ui
Of the stem bha, the final
144.
^ with
the vowel
that precedes it, is elided, before a Taddhita affix.

Thus 3TTf$rof$r:, afri%f*r.-, ^r^rnr from atfii^wt, a^ro?*, and ^n^rî
with the Taddhita affix y^ (IV. 1. 96). Why do we say 'ending in ^' ?
:
Observe
*rr^rT
Vdrt
a Taddhita
before a Taddhita affix
'
final
IV.
3.
120
tigfa*i%w (IV.
3.
101),
IV.
59
2.
7.
),
rtfjffr*^
elide the
there with
'
3.
its
is
*^
of
The
sTfWt^r
II
^rrn^r
II
ar?f!ra-rT*2T
11
sr^
34
120
2. <ft*-
),
*l<*|r5|:,
Rli^ f"^
9.
<AUSI U I
IO.
meaning
'
prepared
II
elided
elided
is
^r^:
Indeclinables
like
arm
when meaning
a sheath or purse
'
'
in the
<*?"%
n
>
*nwi^v &c
arrcTrffa:, srreirfaj:
case of WSTS'R?,
11
sift, *,
7?tr?^ T^fTf^rtfr H^rrr
^^ *Hi nnm-
when the sense
is
'
to contract
',
as
II
^rreffrP (formed
not before the affixes wi and *r^, as
^TtT:
3.
ll
arr^W
120), otherwise
II
II
dropped before
134), otherwise qr*or:
shown the exception,

*TT**rT*
IV.
ar^ before a Taddhita affix
as ^nfarRrep, $ft: 3TC3P,
spfarr, spr^t
it, is
In the above those which end in $^,

164, and those in a?^ contradict VI. 4. 167.
Vdit:
elision
RTSTf^.
8.
(IV.
3.
Observe
srsrgHTITCJ* *rr5rgT*rreP
1.
otherwise
F^ The a?^
W^
^yrfq^m*m'< ( IV. 3. 108 and IV. 2. 59 ), 4.

%^f^%m^r: ( IV. 3. 116 ), 6. ^rsrf^srrrop
Of ^^l, the 3T^
^m-. s^reP (IV.
WR:
q%smr:
3T3H^ loses
as, arr^T,
Vdrt
as,
5.
spite of VI, 4.
fîn
Vdrt
), 3.
t^l^l*,
^FffJST^1*-tfNiC SHIP, 11.
'
with the vowel that precedes
the following
in
srnHWqf
Why
II
The
by using
^:,
II
are formed
by
**r IV.
by the faBut
3. 11).
Panini himself has
II
it
in II. 4. 9.
So
also
Elision of f and
J02*
The
145.
? and
affixes
Thus %
^jfr ht^t
?$r
sr^q;
^m^r = gj?:, 5?Tf:

s^r: ( witn *sr V. i.
13
is
rr
Bk. VI. Ch: IV
'
148-
only Before the
elided
||
3T??ft
?rr=s$fa:,
V&rt
of
3rg[
st
added to 3??^
is
(V.
4.
91 with r*).
aTfffr r^frer
when
f#
87).
in the
nm
sense of
?f^
referring
S^ ^3: =srffa: (IV. 42).

Though the 3T^ of 3^ would have been elided by the last aphorism'
to a sacrifice.
2.
the affixes z and ^, the present sutra
also, before
sr^
3*gr
does not lose
its final
ST^ alone
sftgor:
II
ll
V*t
infer r
in
VI.
I!
3ft:,
^k
II
is
for
v.
3^ faf-
thus
the sake of
its final
4, 169.
gnr:
II
OTT T^RT rTf% ^rP H

For 3" or 3? of a
146.
^TW^rt^
'only'
restrictive rule
affix,
5$^ before r and TsT, other stemsfrom the exception made in the caseo
does not lose
This we
also do the same.
tman and adhvan, before *3F,
\ frT
The word v&
with 2^1 V. 1.79).
^^=3TrfJ^>1
perspicuity.
makes a
st^ before any other Taddhita
*TC3
bha stem, there
substi-
is
tuted Guna, before a Taddhita affix.

Thus roTO: from ^, wê** from q^f, 515^ wm (from *ETfO, fq^paj;
(from
fa^) spiF^sr *fri?fiT ( from <%w*z* ), tot****:, affan^:, ^rT^f: &c
cjrrTra*,
Instead of making the sutra simpler by saying arra^ 'let
the employment of the technical phrase |jop
for ^ or 3J
',
maxim
indicates the existence of the
following
when
that which
is
not universally valid,
nical
term
The
".
present sutra
is,
*t<Tt
ii
SFararn
II
to s^ftNcTTO
affix
^^far
ff^T:
II
3T
or
30
4.
SRPFSfcST,
II
?w
ll
f^^rT^rîrfrr^T
<nfrf*r
11
of a bha
The
*rer, ffar,
qr*
aphorism
fiftrfSrai:
"
rule
denoted by a tech-
it, is
and we have forms
like
*f^TT:
II
ii
'
stem
rTf^T
is
elided
^?r<^^T
WWJfit U
% (*rer, afe^r,
^r<TT
before
Katrft \
&%*$*!, 5tf*W, m?1VW>, tut
^ *TC3 faff*
be substituted
in the
also.
H S", *5T<T:, 3T,
(V), but not of the stem
u&
Thus
<T37ft
II
H^r5F^rr %<fr h^rt
The
147.
the
V**
taught in
therefore, anitya,
C3TO?3?: from ^ro* without guna. See VII.
%fxr
is
*$$m
^frr
3TT
^T^
?tt.)
II
II
and 3? (both long and short), of

a bha stem, are elided before a Taddhita affix and before the
148.
feminine
affix f
Thus
^rtft,
final 5
ll
srcft ,*reft
from
srfa,
srf^T
and
tffa with the feminine affix $
BK. VI.
(IV.
1.
ClI. IV. J.
149
ELISON OF
The above forms could

srf$T + { = $r$ft
65)
rules of sandhi, as
necessity of eliding f
-samasanta affix ?*r
is
1303
II
by the simple
in the
difficulty
forms like
srf?T
^T
tfssft
=
ST
might be asked, where was then the
There would arise

formed by
11
'
AND
also have been evolved

It
11
From the word

^f&
compound ^^*?f%^FcT
BTfcTSmsr,
the final
under IV. 1. 62, wejform the

becoming short by I. 2. 48 ( the
not added here as required by V.
91, that rule apply-
4.
ing to the masculine form gfgr and not to the feminine î$ft ). Now if in
forming *rf^r + f - W3T, had we not elided the letter f of fa, then the long
f being the single substitute for both f + f, would be considered as like the
by VI.
final f of srfer
form fq
Ablative and Genitive
feminine
f,
The
srr
I. 4.
-fa,
singular.
7,
short f
*T
ll
is
is
the word
1.
18),
the
5ft -f^t,
qpy-^r^tep,
- ^TTft, *TPC - ^t%, *rrjfa - m%K^T H

:
Taddhita :^ - ?rf$P, g^-Slf^ ^-^rf?J,
fjJTTC

I.
the
85, should not apply.
elided before Taddhita affixes
substitute of aft (VII.
would be conexcluded
STfrTSTCT
has been specifically
we cannot have the form 9rRre: in

Hence the necessity of eliding f before
elided before f as
are elided before the
y&rt
so,
for srfo
so that the ekadesa rule VI.
*Tf?T - srr%*:
*T and
by
Not being a
class.
That being
85.
1.
sidered a non fa word
in the case of f (
), when it is the
being the case-affix of the nom. and ace. dual in
the neuter, and of certain feminine in long srr H Before this f, the preceding
vowel, f and st are not elided. The stem before this f is also bha by I. 4. 18
Neuter nouns.
in the case of
Thus sffFT+f = 3*F; gf^T

by VI. 4- *49)- It is owing
would have beeen elided

we have inserted the word * feminine
may
IH
'
in the
+ f = #ra (the
to this Vartika,
translation of the sutra.
done by reading the anuvritti of **i (VI.
also be
*fra
ll
4-
3 6 )>
that
This
and * (VI.
4.
137) into this sutra.
7^
when they would apply simultaneously with this lopa. Thus W% and 3*y have unimpeded scope in vft or
Lopa has unimpeded scope in
"^+*orsT^(sr*r), asfw, fa*:, ftr, **'
But in TO<ft + *3j (IV.
si IV. I. 135), and *THW
(with
^T*-5GPTT%*
y&rt
fqw and
are superseded,
ll
II
VL 4. 77 and VI. 4. 148, present themselves. The

I. 135), both the rules
we have ^r^TW ( TO jffarRr = *?*rift.-, r^NTST ) so
and
superseded,
is
former
* affix, this word belonging to Subhradi class
the
with
also *>m*'
;
-^fW
(IV.
1.
121).
T, ^TcWTTTH, V, ^T^HTT:,
(*fo, rTfe[%, ?TT.) H^
?frT:
*ra rai nw?r n^n i&n*n ssrnss
****** ^
^WhpTu pww
ii
toW*
ll
3<r**rar
hto %fr
^fr9W^
**"
*ro ifn
to *
vxtKnVzn
Elision of *
1304
*rr
?R
11
fro
rrr>^ n
11
^rf^f?
ar^RR
^tfî*
sr*
11
11
Bk.VI. Ch. IV.
149.
11
Of the bha stems ^q-, f^q*, sitt^T and Tfv&T,

(and their derivatives when they are Bha) the penultimate ^
is also elided before the long * and a Taddhita affix.
+ bt[ under IV, 3, 112 -=^5, then f of #^=
Thus ^HffT^^ *rrft
149.
So
1.
imm
as ^rft
?fr(r),
m^
also
114), 3TPT*rffa:
(IV.
1.
So
Irq^r?:,
also
words
mean
mrrsprr
Irsfr ^crnr-
^m
If the
40).
sutra would
11
raf &c,
*R*ft
So
with
^ a sri^
(IV,
belongs to Gauradi
class
also sTT^sresrnra
as
#rar
it
were to be qualified by the word
Hsr^r
"
of
mr
when they
&c,
w, then the
get the designa-
would be, that the rule would

^t = srm^jfr &c, only, where the
and there
their derivatives, as ^m &c
forms raj
because, here the word raj is
would not have been the forms like srrrj ^t^t^rt
not Bha before the affix f, but the word *rra is Bha. Hence we have introduced the words " and their derivatives " in the translation, so as to cover the
tion of >t"
and the
result of this interpretation
* <= wft,
&c, are Bha, and not to
apply to cases
like
wjfc*
9TT*T*$rca[
cases like
*frcr
*Ftf^r
!!
In the last example,
which says that
22,
we again have an
illustration,
purposes of asiddha the
for
3TP9TSf
of the rule VI.
4,
must be the same.
Thus sfHf + f = *?r* + 3T lopa -If = *fNr II But #aj itself was formed by the elision of 3T of raj before the affix 3tt, thus, raj + 9T"T = m*l+ + ST"* (last sutra)
= ^mj
But
II
if
be considered as asiddha by VI.
this lopa
4. 22,
we have
then
the following equation CT3.+ + 3T (of SPJO + J =*Mt+ * + * (ar of st*jt being
Here ^ cannot be elided, as it is not upadha or
elided by VI. 4. 148) + f
II
penultimate
because the
first
lopa
is
considered asiddha,
But
it is
not to be
Hence we have the elision

of ar by this s&tra. It should not be objected that the n here is not penultimate, but ultimate: as *M + f = ^T + o + f (ar elided by the last sutra ), and'
Here, however, rule VI. 4. 22, applies. This elision of
thus * is ultimate.
so considered, as their scopes (3TPSR) are different.
ST will
be considered asiddha for the purposes of the elision of
So being considered
being the same.

of upadha and
that
we could
poses of
ajpjpT,
Why
is
still
retains
3,
its
their scope
designation
elided by the present sutra.
It should be remembered here,

take help of the rule of sthanivat-bhava, because for pur-
that rule
is
set aside.
See
I.
1.
58.
do we say the penultimate v? Observe *r^2T*Tft

The affix *ffz is added to Jjrtfr by V. 3. 53,
Then the *j??fr becomes masculine q<fq by VI.
thus formed.
wl *gtW
is
nofc
asihdha,
This word
in the
sense of
4. 35,
and we
Rk. VI. Cn. IV.
have
not elided, because
is
been enough
this sutra
it
not
is
it is
limited
enumerate the conditions under which the
Vart
The q
TÎ^
of
mm
*Tfcr=Tr*TO1
Of
The
penultimate.
:
STJnin
have
rule contained
by the following
in
which
vartikas,
elision takes place.
elided before the feminine % only
is
been
lias
it
would
alone
The
purposes of this aphorism.
for the
rather too general
is
1305
by IV. I. 15, because it is formed

Thus *Trrr?; + f, and the word is h,
11
the sake of the subsequent sutras
for
not here
#frq;
having an indicatory ?
affix
but the 3
read
Elision of
This word takes
JTc^"qT
by an
151
therefore
II
and arn^T before the affixes , and f (of the femiBut not here ${$
as mffa'-, $m, STPTCrffa:, 3TTT*fft H
nine)
fMr??, smitm
I.
(IV.
Patronymic
ar*
with
the
114)
formed
and $53 when referring to asterisms, as, frT^T *ftfiw
Of
Vdrt
Vdrt
*vk
JJtR
f^
^jra:=^q- *Kr (IV.
Vdrt Of arf^f before
2. 3).
has acute on the

Vdrt:
first
Before
T5rR: or ST^rf*:, in
Vdrt:
Vdrt
found
is
the affix
^Fnr
as,
the affix
aqtf
The
second member
this
syllable
rpr, it
^ % 3TFW
of
elision
a*
?jrcr,
The elision
n
8TFrTrf%
*r?l
(V.
rcjcff
(arf5rT% *&-,
11
and the word
4. 45).
as well as
with the affix
**, afscrro, (t
as
jj,
IV.
^ww
4.
3.
106)
arFrT^?,
no).
frr. *t%)ii
II
The 7 of a Taddhita when preceded by
150.
as
35,
place diversely, before the
changed to *rby VIII.
II
msonant, and penultimate in a stem,
minine
elided,
II
Issrecrars'W
%?S 3tT^ rTr^rT^ÎT^ ^T^TTST ffrT T^r ^"TT ^frf
tT:
is
takes place also before the affix
^ft
11
?r
3TW?m
of arf?^ takes
Atharva-Veda,
*X
aj?
loses the syllable
also, as arfor% tfr?fcr=3TPrnrqt (*T
in the
the
in arforrff
is
elided before the
II
The anuvritti of "taddhita" ceases, because of its mention in the next

sutra.
Hence this sCitra applies to feminine f only. As Tnrfr, a;r^ft from TF^
Why do we say when preceded by a consonant ? Observe
and ajâ:
Why do we say of a Taddhita Observe %wi *TTrr=%3ft H
ajjrfctr^ H
'
'
11
'.
'
( ssro: )
%V*i'
ii
11
arragasTC^
151.
%*s
zrp&n rrfe%
The
*r,
ceded by a consonant,
does not begin witb an
ar^r^nrfir ^rfr *rerfa
11
belonging to a Patronymic
is
elided
srr n
before a
affix,
pre-
Taddhita, when
it
Elision of Penultimate.
1306
Bk. VI. Cu. IV.
153,
Thus *rfmf ^r^: = TTrT^rt from nr***, ^r?^T^>r from *n?m (IV. 2. 37-40)do we say 'a Patronymic *' ? Observe ^rNn^W, ÊTf^^T^^r^": (IV. 2. 80).
The repetition of the word Taddhita indicates that the elision takes
Why
place some-times of the non-patronymic q also, as ^pfr ^f^
ll
Why do
we say 'not beginning with a longnrr'? Observe fn^^^t,

The q should be preceded by a consonant, otherwise we have
^r<*qiaR
wfâresn^r = ffTfT%fa: H Why do we say 'when followed by a Taddhita
affix
'
I'
Observe
vre33T
*TT*2NfP,
and Locative dual
Genitive
before the
affixes).
The ^belonging
152.
ceded by a consonant,
and the adverbial
*TO,
Thus
^TrT:
But
11
and not
?m$ffafa or
Patronymic
affix,
pre-
elided before the Denominative affix
affix
3J
f^
II
*TmTOf?T, or *TPffair
<ll<tfKWr
(where
qrfchre ni qfr
also in
is
to a
is
II
not Patronymic)
the
Sfnfc%3Rlf?r> hrRh*frpp,
So
also fTRf^r:, *T?*ft-
and so also
^t5Fr^4t^?T:
nant.
n<H*iROT&CT
ff%s
11
*rarff3
^*>
nr^rî t*!^
The
153.
II
?X3
11
*r?r#ri
affix
t^tft
ll
ll
PhH^ -gfrftw, ^ft,
3^^ u% q&m iH
fr
&
3 not being preceded by a conso-
f^Pf^rf^t *nrreT%>*
of the bha stems fasÊ
&c
is
elided before a Taddhita affix.

The far?r &c are a subdivision of Nadadi class (IV. 2. 91), and the
augment g? is added to them by IV. 2. 91. After these words, with the augment 5ff, the affix is elided. Thus f^rr ?itot *rfcr=f^cKtar: sr^f *nr. (IV.
Similarly %^pTn^j^n, %wtar,%3n??p, %arerafitan,%<rerafn,
3. 53)=%?^7r
There is
ganstar:, anfenF f^^tar-,*^*, ^re^Nrr:, sfrre^rr?, sfFTRrafcrr:, grnfrrrerrof
the
Vartika
final
by
j*rr
^*^r ?*?Rt T ^s^Rfan, #i>^37r:
shortening of the
;
11
II
II
3wro>rpr *Rr
The
l^Tfq
faHfa
affix 5"
is
w^^ sre%<fr w ran ^n:*iprei tt v^
mentioned
and not the augment
specifically
in
it
order to show that the affix
Otherwise fr would also

srR*r*TTOEPTr*TOrrer<TI^ (or
have been elided on the strength, of the maxim
" When of the two things which are taught to(or
TTRfO>
wfaafaPP
er*Tr%)
only should be elided
37
II
gether,
one disappears, then the other disappears likewise ".

and not merely of n II
The
cates the elision of the whole affix fn,
gftlfarcg
11
?x*
ll
<?rrf*
SB, %*, fcreg,
(3t<r.)
ll
5K indi-
Bk
VT. Ch. IV.
156
g.
Som-e Substitutions
The
154.
affix <z
CTfr* and fc^j;

Thus sfrrcs:, Ante, 1$#,
before the affixes ra^Ci
elided
is
1307
11
Otherwise only the
by
elided
vowel
last
(f%)
^tftasft
The
the following rules.
$3
The whole
'
affix
is
elided,.
with the following consonant would have been

anuvjritti
of
of the last aphorism*
$J3?
had the elision taken place by fj*; then themark of the affix would also have disappeared likewise (T. 1. 63), and there
would have remained no guna in fMiW and gfrfre
See V. r. 122, and V.
affix
has
into this aphorism- for
for
these
affixes.
The
been
read
%*fi
5.59;
the sake of the subsequent sutra, there being no example of H followed by
should not be read into
this, for
II
t| is
f>p^;
i:
TTo
II
followed by fgrand fn*r by V.
*TTTfr
II
TCMiy *HM II^M RHR3
II
II
h-:,
3..
59.
(vvmrdfo; s&frr^) *
3^r^*raR>5r^^f^^ ? HÎ^**H^?^
11
The last vowel, with consonant, if any, that

follows it, is elided when the affixes &, %&% and sf^TOC follow.
Thus <tfg:,
and q ffi K from Tf, and s^fte, wfw and wsffar*
155.
<rfe>ir;
from 5
3The
F^rrf
the changes,,
changes are
(1)
3. 35,
4. 161.
affix fg: followed
II
'
f^TT: as,
change of
m to
*,
as <J$TH* - W^fa, a?3f?r, see
T5JTT^% = T^f?r,: ?**rafa
the application of Rule VI.
4.
156,. as,.
by
ofmt,
for
**J?FTr^=*^Rfrr
^JRT^'sit => ^nmr, see V.
3^ and btpt (V.
substitution^ as required
3.
64)
by VI.
3.
65.
(6)
11
*?* *c
5^
?^ rem
156.
4.
157
as,
II
g'afoOr rasg TOP;

Ssrac
and
vowel, a
and
II!
Guna
substituted, in ^^fJ, $T,
(7)
II
*WT
I*
VkXIX
the la^t semi-vowel with that which follows

first
e,
the-
firwsre= JTPraRr
Before the affixes %B r
i.
(5)
as fjrpmp^r or sr^TTÎr - ^TOfrT
sp" *3ra*f 8wrf?re
is
According to
VT.
f^T^nl^ as w+i<n>^qf%f^ the substitution

:
^^T^^^^^T^ri ^TanRrqt'^^' ^ ?pn

ff^;
(4) awtflT**
this sutra,
school of Bharadvaja, three more purposes are served

*rrq% = tf3rorlir,
all
Those-
it.
the feminine noun becomes masculine: as, qFTfflrîe

%& belongs to IfftHlf? affixes and' causes mascuiation by
g4<AI3 :
(2) *>rre: the
(3)
f% undergoes
Pratipadika followed by the causative
would have undergone, had the
as- it
"iT^rf^) A4d*lf%
VI.
11
tttt%
*&*
fera;,
it,
*$*>
^r *rnr *rcf?r
is
and
3^
11
i>
elided
for the
g^,
f\TST
*38
That
^r^H,;
JJW,
*inre,
is
m,
^.,
K,
and
T, t,
in
k. VI. Ch. IV.
Thus
C are elided.
n^rart; ?r%g:, s'tftaH, 3T%*r;
and ^f are read
r$TO",
^
Some Substitutes.
^^Nt^r^
*qf*8f:,
srfrg:, $r<frar^,
srmr
159
?ft#:
The words
11
Prithvadi class and take 'iman* affix (V.
Why
1.
122),
do we say ft in ^rfrf^qt e. 'the last semivowel ? The first semivowel of %^\ and ^7 e. 3 of 5 and of gf should not
be elided. The word tgi is employed for the sake of distinctness.
*ftffS :
^rffTT
ffT?T3Pi,
11
i.
'
i.
t^^rom*,
snr:
f*ra f*rc
11
?s,
sr,
fro
^,
^,
^r,
3*
arf?*
fsr
*t*;,
?;
?*,
rrr,
srrfir,
tn* s-fr*ar ??j%q-r
f^r:,
Before the affixes %g XTtK an(l

sr for fsnr ;
lowing substitutions take place
157.
for f^Kt,
?jqr,
^T
*g?jffap
it5
ran*
*rr,
:
,
for
f?4*
rcqr, **ts
sc^raMt
*j^
srtr:
ll
?V
The
(V.
3"fr :
viz.
1.
<HTi%
II
for rg
being
f or
122)
II
is
ffrv:
ii
artr^TT^^
11
and ^replaces
for
3*, *i%:,
read in Prithvadi class
^t:,
sfcr:, *j, ^r, snt:
in
the Ablative, the

II
*f belongs
repetition of arsn
II
>t is
^rft
to be substituted
ra^r
>r^f?f artr^
^ %
wlw >tî%
first letter
and
sake of pointing out
otherwise
of the suc-
to Prithvadi class
for the
is
After *J, the augment

srg
11
w would have
^ 1^ ^
:
11
ftrf
is
added to ra,
II
This augment fa^ debars the lopa substitution, of the last

The % in RK is for tiie sake of pronunciation, the
the case of
As
sutra, in
fgw f^TR%
159.
**
for *5C,
11
replaced these affixes.

<*
^K
fart, *%s-, *+>*u*i
substituted
f; in this case.
The
the sthani, for which the word
re^r fa*
w for nrc,
In the case of $$, the following rule 159 will apply.
w*P*., wrr U
54 and 67,
ceeding term is elided,
I.
takes mî affix.
the fol-
*Nr*C
S and f of these affixes (*SRC and &TO;)
and
are elided after ^5,
Thus
II
*Tt*ft rr
122), others do not.
1.
158.
I.
sift*^)
II
^Sran*, ^^rr
for 35,
nt
srfj,
*wnr$ <t*fw, sfraqrrerR^. t H^rftrcr ^r?if?^

Of the above, priya, uru, guru and bahula are
and take fT^(V.
Under
for
and I??
j^st for 3{Nf,
Thus
*%
for 3^,
**r *<* *fârf?
it
wf^g:
11
&
II
Bk
VI. Gh.
IV
162
Substitution
1309
augment being a
Or fg may be taken to have
sutra, and to the g, the augment fa may be added.
II
ffrTJ
11
5^5^** fan
stf^tc srr>*fr
160.
after
&t
w?r
lost its f
11
substituted for the
tt is
by the foregoing
of
letter
first
*TCt,
\\
AsRjrar^|j
substituted for jrcmi
^rj is
by V. 3.61.
'Lopa' being
shut out by the intervening fa^ VI. 4. 159, the stt^ is read in this sutra.
If
the anuvjritti of 'lopa' were present here, then the sr of ~$q would be lengthen-
ed before n*r by VII.

construction
liar
maxim
*TJf^% STfrTreftfa*
dhikara (VI.
4,
endVII.
the afigadhikara
is
to take place."
In VII.
4,
'
the existence
indicates
when an operation which
4. 25,
however, f^Wrt
is
ii?*?ii
<*?tr
11
?i s<* :
>
Kdrikd
<
33
^ %&
Before the affixes
161.
: consonant, and
is
not allowed
>
>
Oe&fcreg)
11
sr
**P^
?nj,
when
ubstituted for the sg in a stem,
^ ^
^,
^ %&&
&ix
is
understood, and lengthening
w% ^jrrero ssrîfttws Wrt-
toi? arfnfr
following
taught in the anga-
is
subsequently applicable, this latter operation
* ^*r c3T^&ft:
11
the
of
end) has taken place, and another operation of
could not have taken place by that rule.
f 1%:
The pecu-
and we would get the form sgrqraiU
4. 25,
of this sutra
and
this 3 is
<
^rg[,
is
preceded by
not prosodially long (on account of being
followed by a double consonant).

Thus JTfag:, Jrcffarând srfSrcr from <J$ (V. I. 1 22), Sfts:, g^far^ and *f?*Tr
Why do we say the sr ? Observe Tfeg: &c Why do we say preceded by a
consonant'? Observe SEHffg:, ^^TTÎI Why do we say 'when prosodially
short ? Observe fifing:, s>wffap*, %fcuim
The following are the six words
'
'
'
II
'
to which this rule applies and to none else

therefore, does not
ff%
11
*t^
apply to words
sstctto ^t^r
162.
9^|
may
As
**n% rearer
like
^k
35
and
<J*J,
*jr<|,
srf^ff H*rra
Before the affixes
mfm
^T,
optionally be changed to
cr%gj
*,
*i3T,
in cfsig*r% twitto,
*, qftfs
?%^re <tct>^t% f^ra
^^[ and S*r^, the

in the Chhandas.
$5*,
*:,
353T,
SPf, &c, as SPTr*TC =
^nre:
II
It
firTOf?r,
11
of
*3fO
Prakriti-bhava.
^rf%3P?
s% mi*iiî^m:
J^?rr
ii
163.
VL
Bk.
Ch. IV. 166
ii
monosyllabic bha stem retains
its
origi-
nal form, without undergoing any change, before the affixes

%3, S*^,
and
Thus
^f^?:,
II
U4HI3 from
^rsffarai,
the f^t being elided by V. j.
wfcn*.,
65, the stem thus becoming monosyllabic. snrafrT
on
155.
l^faK and
Why do we say 'a mono*rafrT from g^?l, the *Tgr being elided as before.
syllabic stem ? Observe srcre: from Sff*tfj
This rule is an exception tq
VL 4.
the model of %E by the Vartika under
Vdrt
*i"5Tar,
before the affix st^F
the elision of
(V.
II
As,
<J
*C*
II
164.
retain
m$
*HIMT
by VI.
required
fSFrOTTTc^PT
5^
13*3 and
II
133), in supersession of
S5PRTTO&
f|%:
also f^re
155.
4.
1.
So
II
'
VI.
the causative, formed
is
VI.
4. 151.
form unchanged,
original
1
srfor, T
II
?*%'- SPfJSTT
The
their
= tT*!^* *, *TT3<*P?raLll This debars

So 3% *QV = ^faPrer: with 5^ affix
4. 144.
T^TR SflC,
W*T
II
rfq^, (
*%RU
If
II
final
^ of a bha stem remains
ed before the non-Patronymic
unalter-
snff affix.
Thus gf^m, srfcrfTTS, grmrf^FP* (III. 3- 44 and V. 4. 15). These are

formed by the Krit-affix f&i (III. 3. 44), and then stop is added in ^nfr by V.
So also tfu?sj"P* from sf*spUl Why 'when an* follows'? Observe
4. 15.
Why do we say noaIt is formed by 3T5T (IV. 2. 44).
jfwî îf =$F33l
'
11
Patronymic'? Observe *nrrmrsT?T
nrf^f^:f^%ftrnforqfoT^^
trPfar-,
ffrTJ u
( srforsJf^CT )
II
=W^
l*\
II
q^
II
II
farfk, %ftr, nfrr,
*rrfa,
II
mi^f^^îi^nfa^f^ssrct ^tm jt^ct H^fcrt

165.
JTTf^[, ^R^[, tfti^K, nfaq; and
11
remain
irfofac
unchanged before the Patronymic snâlso.

Thus infiRTS^T = tmRv%ff^T:,
litftFT> Trf*FT:,
and
applies to Patronymics.
^^rmf^sj
^ptf: U SWm*W
11
?w
II
T^rfjT u
^ftn-
3Tii%:,
^,
qrfcFT:
II
s?far
This sutra
srîr
ll
S^fa *f^r H^Rl U
166.
The
syllable
remains unchanged before

precedes it.
Thus ^Trt^^-^TTflT:,
srw,
%% of a stem ending
in
1^
when a conjunct consonant
wr, m\wv
Bk. VI,
31*,
ifrf!
IV. 171
Cri.
\t&
II
Prakriti-bhava
q^Tft
II
The
167-
N 3?5*, ( srfor ST^^TT ) H
^T?T^TTm xr^TT *Î% STT^ "*IMMi ^"
II
131
remains unchanged, before
II
stem ending
st* of a
syllable
st*
in
whether Patronymic or
snff affix,
otherwise.
As
srnrrc:,
I>rj, ^twr:, %***:, from srpn*, %n*,
^ ^rm^Fôfr:
^<*H
ff*T
?^
11
q^rft
11
11
^,
^, srcra,
^frifr:,
11
?rf^
at*
11
^ rrf^" S>TmA%**NclT^ JT^TT *T^

The syllable st* of
168.
qfiK(jt
II
spi and fsr^
II
a stem ending in
arc;,
remains unchanged before a Taddhita beginning with q-, when

it does not denote existence in abstract or the avocation of
some one.
Thus
*TTO?f *rnj:
= STFI*r:,
WTJT^J
belongs to Purohitadi class and takes
smirrerRt
ff%:
11
& M*
11
**ift
arr^ ar^sj; $?raT *r <re<T:

169.
The
But
and
srerrsr*
The
fT^T:
5FT^f st?&
II
T*fr
170.
,the
qTrff S<T^*f
srfr*,
sr^rr^, ^,
*nPJ,
11
9),
stems stt^t* and src^*

11
WW^fpft
(V.
l6) = 8T>:*;ffa:
2.
q^rft II*, *,^,*^,rlfo^

* ST^STT *T*RT
11
(atfur)
|)
II
In a stem in
exception of
*T - CHRWL
formed by the samasanta affix rc added

and the latter by sr* (V. 4. 85).
S^nr: IKvsoll
S^ 3TW"frf*T
stff
first is
to the avyayibhava (V. 4. 108),
affix
I.
ii
of the
finals
tf^T *TTf
128).
1.
H sttst,
^rf = 3TTWfN: (V.
iffe?*. H
(V.
*wp
s<$<ur
remain unchanged before the

Thus 8TPPH
But
II
qfjr
srq;
with a preceding
the ending
**,
with
does not remain un-
changed before the patronymic affix arur n

Thus ^r*%STO = *fhrra:, *Tr^PT: from ^^pp*
Why do we say
do we use Patronymic'? Observe ^jpfr TK#r W-TO*, the a?* not being changed by VI.
4.
Why do we say 'with the exception of wt'? Observe q^^forrST^
167.
preceded by *'
= '^rnfi^'T'T:
Observe gfc*:, preceded by
*r
11
Why
II
II
Vdrt
aT^fr
'
: Optionally
^rtt
II
*\s?
II
so in f^Rr*R, as fcffTRTSTCr =
?Rr*T:
qr^rfa
II
mw',
srarar,
II
or%^rR:
11
Prakriti-ehava.
1312
171.
not meaning
j&ti.'
This sutra should be divided into two
when the
elided,
is
any other
(2)
of
3T"5rr<TT,
argretis
When
of
but not
is
Thus
it.
when
expressed, but
As
elided.
srrgjr
mfc,
affix
3t<jt
3*01
as
^rd
an occupation or
This
is
a^rsTST = srrgW:
is
irregularly
formed from
zf%, when the sense

prompt therein V
formed by
(IV.
uf affix
is
The
in the sense of tachchhilika are considered as
would have prevented the
same operations which

3FT< is
1.
that
140,
is
Observe
cfpfa:
ii
11
as
=#r^l"
Why do
f^= mfal
fact
is,
by VI.
that oând 3T<w affixes,
and therefore VI.
one,
<rre&rre%
^5"l
167,
4.
In fact this proves
^TR
by the addition of the
*WrT
affix
II
"The
take
sror,
rTPT'at
we
say,
The
&c.
taught in V.
u\
2.
101,
and
having the sense of accustomed to
II
?vs^
<T3TR
11
^r^m^RT^rfor f?<w ftqT??%
From
a descendant.
As arret T^^but
4-
by the
snl^,
accustomed to such
added in the sense of one accustomed to that."

added, to 3??r - formed words, it is also added to w-formed
173.
by VI.
II
3^
affix or is
excepted.
art^ro^q^
ffrr-
maxim:
are occasioned
words, in the feminine:

III.
'
elision of the final sr^ syllable.
the existence of the following
Thus though
TIT^
'a Brahmana'.
If this is the case, then
4. 62),
regularly evolved.
Eftf% is
place, whenever the
srfiJTf
wrsff aftsPf: H
172.
the form
for then the
has not the force of the Patronymic, the sr^
elision of the final
4. 144,
srrgFTWl
5rrg[ ?f%:,
the Patronymic denotes a jati
not elided before the
jati is
5^
after
so,
(1) srgf:, the final st^ of 3T5PJ,
with the force of the Patronymic, as well as with
3T"r affix
comes
force,
174
when
formed from ph^,
sr^r is irregularly
a kind or
'
Bk. VI Ch. VI.
11
3ft$PC> *t
^^
II
11
formed
st^pi; is
BTRtJT:=3^ rJ?r 5
t^T, the
gfr^,
when not meanings
st is elided in
the latter example
I3
^Tf^rcîft^n^*p:refa^^
^^%*rft^*ru%
^fw,
^Tt%5TT^rf^,
?vw
ii
17,4.
ll
T^rf*
11
#forf ^r, tnrer,
srf*^r^ srfaHrsnr
f?^3 f^?rrR RTr^rT
?vtt'.
%%3
11
^Tftwro*, ^rfcrraraR, srr^far^,
wm, nsRrr% *re*F, ^mmx^,
btpt^^ wftFta
^rrer^refr
4r*r^
%=rer
m*a
II
?w*
11
The
following
are
irregularly
formed
1.
Prakriti-biiava.
Bk. VI. Cii. IV. 174
D&ndin&yana,
Hftstin&yana,
2.
1313
Atharvanika,
3.
4.
Jaihmft-
G.Bhraunahatya, 7.Dhaivatya. 8.S&rava,

Aikshvaka, 10. Maitreya and 11. Hiranmaya.
fiiueya, 5. Vilsinftyani,
9.
These words are thus derived
to
and tfl^ belonging to

not belong to that class, the
( 1
and
The
class.
2) q t ft^
^ and 4ifaMI<M from ^r^
affix is <**> (IV. 2. 91).
added irregularly
affix is
If they
do
^HISTÎlFMHIAH:
The final F* is not elided. (3) st*tH belongs to Vasantadi class (IV.
The science or work of Atharvan Rishi is also called Atharvan. He
2. 63).
who studies that work is called Atharvanika the final is not elided before the
f^ affix. (4 and 5) The descendants of nrsnTRT^ an d ^rfsRLare Jaihmasineya
&c.
and Vasinayani, the former with the affix sar of the Subhradi class (IV. 1.
The finals of the stems
123), and the latter with the affix fasi of IV. 1. 157.
These
and
are
dropped.
derived
from
not
Sf^ and vffa^ with the
are
(6
7)
affix ssrsi,
and
being replaced by
fined to affixes
which come
fore,
an irregularity.
the
final
is
^TT^:,
<fc*t *TR:
srjorffr,
^fe
and not to Taddhita

II
The
sr
in
W=*rreT3f^
elided, or f^rg^
^ takes
That
affixes.
Bhraunhatya
is
there-
from ^tqr with the affix stot the final 3T being

(9) The son of ^^Tfi, with stsj. affix (IV. I. 168),
(8) gfT^ is
II
II
or si
after roots only,
rule does not apply to cases like
elided, ^r^rf
ssrsr
= ^raTE^t
by VII. 3. 32: it might be said q

by that rule. That rule is, however, con-
before affixes having an indicatory
would be added to "t^ before
^t
or
SM14|
*T^:
= q^rrsF:
with
arur
affix (IV. 2. 132).
Accent on the first or the final. The irregularity consists in the elision of
As one word is *^rr^: and the other q^rr^:, the sutra ought to have
final 3
II
The
read this word twice, strictly speaking.
on the ground, that the sutra gives

consequently includes both (ij^Hgnr
single reading
^^r^ without any

&i *t#?tpO
may
be
justified
accent (eka-s7uti), and
II
(10) %$q is from fasrg of Grishtyadi class IV. r. 136, and takes **r as
^, here VI. 4. 146, requires Guna, but VI. 4. 146, prevents it, and requires
topa of 3, but VII. 3. 2, required the substitution of fq for ?j
The irregularity consists in eliding 5 altogether as jt^st, the 3? of f^rsr cannot be elided
by VI. 4. 148, befor ^, as the lopa of 3 is considered asiddha VI. 4. 22 how-
f%T3 +
11
ever the result
the same, for bt + ^=^
is
being the form of the subsequent.

plural of
PHTf
plural (II. 4. 63).

It
as
it
by VI. 1.97; the
The
plural of fpfa will be prsr^: (the
belongs of Yaskadi class and
Another form of
might be objected that had
this
m^ been
single substitute
word
is
loses,
read in
the affix in the
formed under VII. 3.

Bidadi class (IV. I. 104),
IHifq^r
2.
it
and the form j^R would have been evolved

This would have
regularly: as fasrg + bt ** = f^T + fit (VII. 3. 2) + 3T=tw
prevented also the necessity of including this word in the Yaskadi class (II. 4.
would have taken the
affix 3T*i
II
Prakriti-bhtva
1314
Bk. VI. Cn. IV. 175
by IL 4. 63, sr*r formed words would lose the affix in the plural
and we would have got the form fw^: in the plural. So far it would have
been all right, but if ipra were to be formed with sr>3?. affix, as proposed, then
the ot derivative of this word would have required to be formed with st^
63), for then
affix
as
under IV.
*fa:
*r%3Rff:
ff^r:
11
and not with founder IV. 3. 126; but we require 5^,

(n) f^TO from j%T?n with ra? with the elision of 3, f$r*W*
127,
^ ^
ft<^qifo^fa
ftw*i fi sF^far,
m&* *rc^ m& w&t f^ra %$tmft fkmfc
t fr*HI<
m*M
3.
II
f|l
sfrccsr,
m,
II
*TO:
TCOT with
II
3pS*T,
irregularly-
and Hiranyaya.
w from q&g with the

WT ***= sres** *im
11
the affix n*
in the feminine, as ims^hf: ft;*3ft%ft: U

*r
q^fft
s?*fa ftq% u
The word ^t&^ is derived from gj^, and qm

s^ H**=5*TsaW,
* being changed to *
irn^, the
II
11
Ritvya, Vastvya V&stva, M&dhvi,
from ^j, as nk^lA

T<jr
In the Veda the following are
175.
formed
J ||l4 l
wrsft,
ll
ffT**W[ is
affix
"
m^t
from
*[%
from fopq with the
being elided.
Printed by Freeman
&
Co., Ld., at the
is
with the affix
Tara Printing Works, Benares.
affix
BOOK
VII.
THE
ASHTADHYAYI OF
PANINI.
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
BY
SRISA
CHANDRA VASU,
B. A.,
Provincial Civil Service, N. W. Pi
Published by Sindhu Charan Bose,

at the Panini
Office,
1897.
(All Bights Reserved.)
TO
jj on'Me îr Joint
<Sttgc,
ft.
$.
.,
LATE CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES
THIS
WORK
is,

AND
IN

JUSTICE
AND OF EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
g tYxvxttb
BY HIS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT
THE TRANSLATOR
BOOK SEVENTH.
Chapter First.
gsfftJTT^
thr
11
ii
fwrerrcfHN'
Kdrikd
II
cr^T
II
II
3-%:,
3TT-3T^T
?*^reêft%Tn%^rr%^*fp sparrow^
*w
wr%
r:
^^t^^ti^ *r
ffc^prf# ff^ 3*3 sm^TrT
3%%T
^3pnT^
3T*T
For 3 and 5 (nasalised)

tuted respectively sr?r and sre> n
5 and 3
are taken here as stripped of
all
t^^TO
5?f*T
an
in
1.
affix,
mm.
(III.
8T
So
II
133), as
I.
#W
replaces 3
3T5?
also
^ and
11
ag^ (IV.
Thus F3
as
23),
3.
$ + 3^=3?refi:, W3i
(III.
other indicatory
1.
I34) = 3T?T, as
SfTOrR'., f%rt<nT:
So
also
3^
II
(IV.
letters,
The
?f?f -i-?g
3 we
3.
are substi-
the semi-vowels are also to be understood to have been nasalised.

places g, and
bt^?
find
and
3T?f re-
= ?[;^:
in
o^
98) as *rr^Pff:,
II
Why
I
~re the
do we say nasalised 3 and f ? Observe S^far 3*t (V. 2. 123)

not replaced by 3TT, and we have 3^3:
So also in *jf5pj|*3t
Here the 3 of 33R and sgar (Un III. 21) are not replaced by 3TT as
is
II
3**3^r
In the affixes above mentioned, the semi-vowel is not con*pg: and ^3: u
sidered to have the nasal.
There are no visible marks of nasality on any
11
maxim is srfriyr^lf^PRlT: qrfMNlP

The word 3^: is the Genitive Singular of 35 considered as a single
word,
e. a Samahara Dvandva compound in the singular, and such compounds are always neuter (II. 4. 17), The Genitive Singular of 35 is therefore
3^T: the augment being added by VII. I. 73. The anomalous form 3%: shows
affixes,
but the
II
i.
the existence of the

ly valid
maxim
Dvandva, and then
it
that a rule ordaining an
augment
II
If,
however,
3^ be
3> is
elided,
considered an itaretara-yoga
then us Genitive dual will be 3sfr

or the
not universal-
II
the usage of the people settles the gender of a word

f3jf*q)
is
Or the 35 may be considered as masculine

proves the maxim that the gender need not be taught,
3TR?reT*PrerrcFTiO
one 5
is
elided as a
f^rrero,
?farpsrc^2rP$r
Dvandva compound,
Chhandas
irregularity,
and we have the 39 + 3fp=3pfp an anomalous dual.
Some Substitutes.
1316
Kdtikd
(
i.
e.
gs^fp
how
If g*r
if it is
is
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
taken as a dual, then there ought to be a semi-vowel
considered as Aggregate Singular, then
it
ought to be
(To this we answer), if it be taken as

if it be taken as singular
dual g* then there is elision of the vwi^X ( e. *;)
gf, then the augment 5^. which comes in the Genitive Singular of Neuters,
does not come here, proving that the rule of 5^ augment is Anitya (not of
universal application).
Or the word 33 is taken as masculine, because the
Gender depends upon usage.
neuter,
then gtf: masculine
is
i.
2.
frq^for
srprq;,
for
<*>,
u, are substituted,
beginning of an
^?i for
f, sN[ for
when
^r fq; for
3f,
and
these consonants stand in the
affix.
Thus <tf3r (IV. i. 99) = *4Tra*r, as q^ + qjafir-snrraT, sm;ra[T H %* (IV.

I. i2o) = *jg as ^h^T, *R%^
^ (IV. I. 139) f^r, as 3Tr3SJ^fa:, %fff%*lJK'ft P u
^ (IV. 1. 138) = **, as *rfro
gr (IV. 2. 114) = ^, as irrtffa-', ^tffa;
Why do we say 'of an affix' ? Observe cp^r, fr?fi%, m^jrf, %Tm and
^T^, where these consonants are in the beginning of a root. Why do we say
in the beginning' ? Observe d^ v HL srr^SP*, where ^ is in the midd/e of the
t
II
ll
II
'
and remains consequently unchanged.

These stf^ft &c, substitutions should be understood to have taken
place at the very time the affixes <fi37 &c, are taught, and these substitutions
being made, the rule of accent, which makes an affix acute on the first syllable,
affix
Thus
applies.
4.
^ is
not acute, but f of %^ substituted for it. Similarly in IV.

is st^ with an indicatory ^r, showing that the final of
117, the affix taught
the affix
$s[ will
be acute (VI.
acute by the general rule

In
sfir
(Un.
I.
163),
1.
and not of
q,
99), 3T%
(Un
I:
unchanged, and we have sps:, and *rep

of ^Tr^r 3rf?TO (III. 3. 1). In the stitra
5J1F,
^ would have been
102), the affixes s
ll
This
is
^fr^ (III.
been taught and not
for
affix.
this
shows that the
and
*?r
explained on the
I.
29),
remain
maxim
the affix fsrf has
rule of substitution herein taught
Thus q-%: ^^
T^^f^r^nh* ^5i (III. 3. 16). Here the *?r and q are not be replaced by %^ and 53
In fact, they cannot be regarded as affixes, but only as
letters.
servile
or
By
I. 3. 8,
the gutturals are f^[ except in Taddhita
f?t
therefore, the substitutions take place in Taddhita affixes, where the 13 and ^
does not apply to the affixes to be added to the verbal roots.
(III. 2. 28),
ll
are not ? q-
11
The
servile
^ in arnsRC. and %*{ should not, however, be considered as

though
they be final consonants. This we infer from the sutra
{Vt)
final
Bk. VII.
Cii.
Some Substitutions.
5. ]
13*7
Here the ^ of n^; is indicatory, showing the position

of the accent. But <tf is replaced by arpi*, SO if the * of btto^ were also to be
indicatory (f?j) there would have been no necessity of adding ^ in fa^ll
Hence the fact of this ^ in fq^ shows that the ^ in ^raând %n are not f^
JTT*TRf 3rr?r
r%^
*^*
ll
ll
5TT s?ct:
11
3
The word
becomes
srf^FT
q^rft
11
aud
11
substituted for the
st?3[ is
^r
of an
affix.
understood here, but not so the word
3T<*ra is
becomes
%f
rer,
H ^r:,
3t?<t ( III. 4.
78
).
As
3TTIT
ffff?^, ?|3fFT
Thus
II
f^r
and f^^rer,
#f Thus tfr + $? = *ft + *T^+ 3Tr? + $r (III. 4- 54) =

+ ^+3rr+|r(llI. 4. 79) = ?nt + ^q;+3Tr+%(III. 4 96) = + ^+3tt + 3T'% (VII.
=,
srari 3)
^ r + ^Tr + 3T^r = ^rar-% ( after guna ): as ?m s$x pnrmwrrTP qmfvr:
% So also in the Unacli affix ( Un III. 126): as ^ + $P=*Wt# %*F*P
This substitution does not take place when $T is not part of an affix: as 3f^T?Tr>
Here also the accent falls on the substitute, according as
3f3$T3*, srsSTcrsara
it is f%qr or otherwise.
Thus the substitute lr?rT of ^r is first-acute by the rule
so also^lT^r, the%? of
ll
>
II
II
>
11
III.
1.
(VI.
but the substitute
3;
1.
3^ of
$T!*" is
final
acute because of the indicatory^"
763) H
3TT5*r^rr*
11
4.
q^Tf^r
3T^, snpregrrac,
substitute for
is
Bicj;
11
ll
^r after
a reduplicated verbal
stem.
As
This 3T^ is replaced

^3, %y^, ^^ s^fa, ^^^; -^m% rsrnr^
firstsyllable of the
on
the
Here also the accent will be
substitute.
Thus lrr%, bt?T, sfrT, Irg, Iran*, in the subsequent sutras. The accent
of the reduplicates, however, is governed by VI. 1. 189, (3T^rrRr*m^)
by
sjsr,
fsfa,
ll
as bt^:, *X^'
ll
ll
WcflZKftUMd:
fixr
ii
Brr^R^
sr
st^
5.
anepada, when
in
si
II
||
<t*tr
||
3IR91^T^[,
3T
*cT,
is
it is
^H )
sr^^^R^n^r^r^^^srwWr wtf%
II
11
^r
in the
Atm-
not preceded by a verbal stem ending
||
Thus fr'4%, frRWW, STPT^rT; ^T%, ^FTrTPJo BT^TrT H Why in the Atmanepada ? Observe f%;^rf, ^f^rT
Why "when not preceded by an bt " ?
ll
Observe eq^r, c^%,
in
the form e^^ and *gr
when the Vikarana^cr
first,
case
because
may
be.
it is
nitya
which, though the roots are *g and
The word
is
added
and then the substitution of B^r or

SRrf: qualifies
$-,
the
eg,
they assume
the vikarana
BTrT for
is
added
gj,
as the
should be immediately preced-
ed by a stem ending in a non-B? if some other letter intervenes, the rule will
not apply. Thus from #r 3TOr?lr, here between tft and fr, intervenes the augment 3rr?, therefore $r is not preceded by a stem ending in nonsr, but by BTKll
;
Some Substitutions.
13 18
tff#r
II
q^rf*
II
The
6.
after the root sft
rfr^:,
Bk. VII. Ch.
11
substitute of
stcj;
augment
gets the
sr,
^r,
II
Thus î:%, 5ftrTP, ST^rT H The augment t^ is added at the beginning

of the affix, making 3t?j=^
Had tms 1 Deen an augment of $r, then like
the 3TT? augment in sraRT, it would have intervened between the tft and $r, and
'
5T
not immediately following a non-a* stem,
tuted for
|T
and not of u
at
all.
Therefore r?
The
root
Intensive affix
read in
ît is
order to indicate, that there
As
nor any Guna.
srfF,
no
is
would not have been substiaugment of the substitute 3T?r,

the sutra with its anubandha <f in
augment when there is elision of the
made
is
s^f^r
3T<|
the
%?&%
a general rule that an operation applying to a root which
It is
same root
hibited with an anubandha, will not apply to the
The
luk form.
f^rTTr
"These
4.
73
shown
H^^ rc
arvreT
49
is
4.
roots (III.
1.
69
2.
10.
That
II
in
a rule, as
3^
ll
%^t:,
The
3Tci;
or srf%?%
f%*r*r
VII.
VII.
in
2.
îw ^rt
a sutra.
As VII.
11
stem f^r
^f^rrr* or
in
to their Intensives.
11
substitute of
after the verbal
As ^f%#
in
taught after Divadi-
is
where the word ^^TH* is used

and not
^%*Jfr^THS*l STTlSTTOl^t fairer
7.
vr
apply to simple roots of Divadi gana, and not to
q^n%
vs n
ll
augment ^2
is
exhibited with ^pr, as the root
is
rule will apply to ij^rW simple roots
^&f%*rnrT
fPfT:
Lastly,
5.
apply to Intensive-yafi-luk
is
mentioned
is
It will
).
f? after the Desiderative of simple root but not

a simple root is exhibited with an anubhandha, as #1F
a gana
their Intensive.
exhibited in the sutra with f^l^ as
is
the root
There
When
3.
Where
35*r
to simple
In Intensive, the perfect will be srre^Tsi^rn: an d not
11
Where
as
in Intensive.
here.
the simple root
as vmffi
"
shown
is
fares'
ex-
sorts of operations will not
five
When
I.
srer^'^
is
in its Intensive-yafi-
when operations applying
following verse shows
roots will not apply to their Intensive forms
forms
srf%y<rr*
optionally gets the
(itf^r)
;
II
=r^frr or
wwsr
11
The f^
the Adadi root here, and does not apply to f^rf, f%Î%, f%^%, which belongs
to the
Rudhadi
There
<*!<
class
is
ft^
f^m^t )
no augment
s^ftr
ll
ll
ll
in ariFjjj^ here also, as ssrfrT^f^t
<r^ft
ll
î^n, s^fa,
ll
II
Bk. VII. Cn.
I.
Some Substitutes.
The augment
8.
is
1319
the
diversely applied in
Veda.
Here ar^" is the Imperfect (

n?w 3TOWT *T&
)
Thus ^+5T-5^+^=9T5?, the ^ being elided by VII. 1. 4r.
Sometimes, the augment does not take place, as bt^tT H Owing to the word
the augment * is added to other affixes also, than $r
As
diversely
*gfjy,
sr^ni in ar^RTO %cT^ H This is the aorist in arif of the root *r by III. 1. 57,
the guna ordained by VII. 4. 16, does not 'diversely' take place.
Thus
f^r 3T5?
ll
plural of 311
11
',
Kdrikd
fim
sTcft
|l
II
5.
<J3Tft
II
srt:,
II
f*H% T^^r%^T "^^ Hftîm
m^:,
II
SR^^ HIH^ll?^ ftSTCFTOr Sr??r
After a nominal stem ending in
9.
tituted for the case-ending
f^
sr, fcj; is
subs-
II
Why
do we say ending in ar? Observe

The adhikara of
Why 'short a?' ? Observe *gr[TW:, m^n^;
STf^TPT:, *rrgf*P
"3T5T:" ('after a short ar'), extends up to VII. 1. 17.
The form 3rfrT*n:iT illustrates some important principles of grammar.
The word
artlr + W^mTTr^fn^rO aTTrT^rc; (ar being shortened by I. 2. 48).
Thus arftnrc+^r
STR"5TC ends in 3T, and therefore forms its Ins. pi. by^w
As
3%:,
3TfrnR%:
gtr:,
II
ll
ll
II
11
Now we
apply VII.
2.
10 1, which says for
beginning case-endings.
ordained for
irrj
It
and not
Rf^T^RRTT
q%
and that
substituted
5tc*t
before vowel-
should not be objected, that the substitution
ar
ar of *rc
which had given occasion to
should not be destroyed, on the
maxim
rT f%^rrT^T, for this
is
maxim q^fCTt^tMrq^ *RT% (a tail-less

Having made this substitution, we get arnnnsN
for the
"ST*;
dog is still a dog) applies here.

Nor should you object that it was the
the existence of
"srer is
is
maxim ^TRTTrr^T^r
not uni versal, as Panini himself shows
employing the form ^rOT (III. I. 14), in which it of the Dative is changed
into n by VII. 1. 13, and then this very 3 causes the destruction of sr and
in
.makes
it a^r
(See VII.
1.
13 also).
fvr^
Kdtikd : If there be substitution of it for the final sr before the affix

by the subsequent sutra VII. 3. 103, where will then the present sutra,
causing the substitution of ^r^ for ptct after stems ending in

(because there will be no stem
into
it,
you change the
left
ending
in ax
f*T^ into ^ft^, because the
) ?
it
If
ar,
find
its
scope,
even after changing
was once
ar
sr
ifrrf^n"^ )
becomes a nitya rule, because it takes

effect even after the application of rule VII. 3. 103, and being nitya it debars
Here the subsequent rule VII. 3. 103, requires
Thus f$r + fa**.
that rule.
then the rule of changing
f*T*r
into
"ir^
II
the sr to be changed into
apply because there
is
no
it
11
Thus f% + nr: Now the present
3T^^T stem.
However,
if
rule
considering that
cannot
\ once
Soms Substitutes.
1320
was
we change
BTfnT,
to
pt:
then the rule becomes a nitya
qrsr
a nitya rule and debars the application of VII.
it is
VII.
tion,
w^
^1^
ffrT:
II
103, finds its
3.
1*
11
scope
in
t^tr
11
Bk. VI. Ch.
fST + *j = ^Tfij
11
srfsre,
fact,
jurisdic-
its
II
^*?t%,
5^f% fW$ ^fi^fRl *T^

10.
In the Veda the
In
rule.
within
103,
3.
II. 12.
( 9:^: )
11
II
takes
substitution
place
diversely.
That
short
as
st;
is
is substituted for f*r^ even after stems which do not end in

and some times the substitution does not take place even after
qir
?ri:;
stems ending
in short st, as,
^%%:
sf$T>:
*TtK*
WlW>T*;rTT<t (Rig
II
3T^
^T*fa:^r:
ffrf
II
q^rfa II *, $*,
\\i\\\
5?W 3T^^ f^rT^T^rtSTPfo q^T mft
*> ^:,
Veda
( f*n?r
I. 1.
4).
) n
II
This substitution ofS^ does not take place

and 3T3[*T, except when they end in F
As irpT:, ar*frpT:, but fH%t, 3T5%: By VII. 2. 102, 3? is substiuted for
final ofjjfi*, as $f + 3T = ?S (VI. 1. 97).
By VII. 2. 113, the ^ is elided
11.
after %%rz
II
II
the
before pt^, and the only portion
For the
103.
8T
= 3?f (VI.
be
srffwr*.,
1.
may
noted by
thing
is
made
exception
but
it
in
denotes
2.
80,
*r
according to VII.
3.
and s?f +
Ins.pl. would
102, 3T substituted,
sutra, the
and
it
to f
form
in
by VIII.
ending
81.
2.
in
shows
cf>,
maxim rr^^frTfTCrn^T^T 51% " Any term

Grammar denotes not merely what is actually dealso whatever word-form may result when some-
inserted in that which
The
2.
with regard to these forms
following
be employed
it,
which becomes
by VII.
changed to i by VIII.
is
the existence of the

that
left is 3T,
simlarly
IS
and according to our present
97),
but
The
of arf^
final
is
actually denoted
by
it.
has not been made as ^pr?3fr: ^n"?J, for had it been so conwould have applied to the zr ending f%*i and 3?^ and to
no other 5|f ending pronoun, and we could not get the forms *HNff:, f^j%:
Moreover such a construction would have made qr^ applicable to f^ and st^st
structed the
sutra
rule
II
also in
their simple
states
i.
e.
we could not have got
Therefore the negative construction ^

to prevent the rule of contrariety.
fif*P H
STîf: is
the forms
used
qf*r:
in sutra in
or sr-
order
T^fa^mir*RFTr: n
sr, ^r%, &m*t, %*, srnr, **r: H
<tttt%
ar^nr^r^f T^qr arefa^p^ stf?* m ssr% ^fî H^r^r ^qrreres*
3f?r
12.
After a stem, ending in st, are substituted ^r
for the Instrumental ending
srr srn* for the Ablative ending
s?^;
and
for
the
Genitive
ending
sns;,
11
II
11
ii
II
Thus f%^r and gôr ,f^T?j[ and 5^rr?t and f$rei and g^^j
stems not ending in 3T we have the original ending, as T^rr, ^3T
;
11
II
After
Some
Bk. VII. Cn.
15
I. .
Some
would have the forms
sfrRnrcnT^T
SBijstitutions.
and STf^^nsn^ from
1321
sif?T"irc
This
11
is
on the
analogy of 3TnT5TW: [ See Sutra 9 ante]. Thus 3TRT + Û = STfrT^TC (I. 2.48).
Then by VII. 2. 101, srew is substituted for *rc before the vowel -affixes.
These forms are not supported however by

forms
be either srf^nTCT, stfsnrcni, or
will
STCRR and
Mh
3TnT5TCCT<t
\\
11
qr
Dative ending
for the
Thus
maxim
fc:,
ll
m,
sn^
( *rcr.
After a stem ending in
13.
and BTTCrTOP but never an%-
arfasrcsrr
'>
<T^n%
II
According to him the
Patanjali.
n;
the a*
f$TRT, 8STPI,
is
II
st,
there
is
substituted
II
lengthended by VII.
is
^HTTrT^rofr ftfa tf^PTTT* tT^freTrTTO
the application of which
"
ll
3.
That which
102, in spite of the

is
taught
in
a rule
occasioned by the combination of two things, does
not become the cause of the destruction of that combination ". Thus q is
substituted here, because the preceding word ends in a short 3T, thus this
short 3T occasioned the existence of
truction of ar
But that however

is replaced by 3TT
ll
the preceding ar
is
^:
II
this
that
*j,
II
14.
As
in 3T
*re#r,
1#r,
arfT is
^^ <TW
we have
preceding word ends in
we
W,
( 3TcT:
II
form
infer that
st,
is
ll
But *3% where the Pronoun does not

4. 32) in anvadeSa sentences,
3T^T ?^+ir = 3T^ 3T + *t = ar^rM- IT, here
substituted for %î (II.
the
Therefore
*HrTO:,
s^ra^nw >r^
^ of the Dative.
then
the
II
the affix of the Locative singular.
After a Pronominal stem ending in
HTWT,
When
II
^^T
I'
rF
Srrcra ^j *%
substituted for the
end
3 cannot occasion the des-
on account of
^T V*
BT^nr^r^^rra
*HbTT5T:
ri
this
it is
is
taken as the Genitive singular of
ii
it
does, for
this
the anomalous genitive case of the Dative ending #
exhibited without any vibhakti in VII. 1. 28. The #: should not be
The
affix
% therefore
3T**r
II
srr
But
in
and we could not have
replaced by
if
^r
11
^ being an antaranga operation should be substituted
first, and the sandhi afterward and we get 3T^r**T

The change of
change of
TT & c mto **> T & c )-
(See VII.
II
depends upon one word, while the f^ffft^T

an operation depending upon two words.
it
*r
l n g ^TT is
into
is
102 for the

antaranga as
2.
bahiranga because
it is
3Ffaît: WTrtfwft
*HffiT5T. )
%rfi>
ii
II
?H
||
q^rft
II
3TO, WZt:,
*TTTc*,
%T*TT, (
3TcT:
II
sw f^ f$r^n^ni5TTr^?Trw zwnr>
15.
Frr^f^f^rrnrmrr
After a Pronominal
^w
stem ending
11
in
3T,
^tic*
Some Substitutes.
1322
is
Ablative ending
for the
substituted
Bk. VII. Ch.
and
st*t
Locative ending %
Thus m?m<i f^3w?r i^mi,
fan
I.
18.
for the
II
?re*rni and eR^nr^

crafty, f^fars*
But H^rP and vrefrT from *rc?j ending in a non-3T,
non-pronouns. See VII. 2. 102 for
cT &c.
ii
stf*T^,
and
and
and 3%
*Tf*T^
f^rrq;
3T??irc*T^ H
in
^fr^K* *mt*it st ?
5TT5T: ^fo^fp ^TTcj; f%TT5TT )
ll
16.
ûk
II
q^-srntro:,
toot, m,
( **Hr-
II
^rrq; and fer^ are optionally substituted for

and Locative endings, after
and the eight
the Ablative
that follow it (I. 1. 34).

Thus gjfcmior <pfaj, ^TCT* or *> T**Tr?l or <renj, rnWior q*, ST^FTTfl, or
ST^*, STOTC !* or ST**, ?f$rT*TT<l or ^fa^, tfSPlfFr^ or iffem, ^^^Trl, or
StT^, 3^*1^, or 3tTC, 3TTOTn, or snn<, 3T7*TWt, or ST<ft, aT^^Tr^, or ar^R^,
s*Wl*n*, or ^Wt STOn*, or ^T?J, *ifa% or *f, afT?<fl$jTr?j; or 3T5?rcni, a^TCfw* or
1
8T5rn:
II
W3
S^TT?*, Srfl'F*
SfrT f^T^,
Why
do we say
'
II
nine only
'
Observe
cSTCHTiJ.
and 3rfw*, no option
is
allowed here.
3TCT. 5ft
II
?V9
TTTf^r
II
II
3TCT,
5ft,
II
17.
substituted for the nominative plural st^;

Though
Thus
(sri + f), f%%, \ %, % H
ar,
is
II
given
*r^,
the long
^3^
srW stft:
*r3*ft,
fPrP
is
m+
f would have also
taken for the sake of subsequent sutras, in forming
ii
ii
II
1*
<T5rrfr
II
flr^
^V,
srfe*-,
ll
srre'rTr^rsTnsarte: tfteSTRSfT
fasjrs 'npff STire
Wit
II
^f 2^^rTrn
f^^TTfrfr
After a stem ending in the feminine affix

substituted for the dual endings sfr of the Nominative
18.
3H,
is
and Accusative.
Thus m% fas^,
is for
*s%
^ras,
ar^nr
IV
* x 3)i
*>ritaR^ u
The ^
no such
in sfr^
the purposes of included sfr* also. There is,

The following Karika raises this question and
in fact,
affix as afr^
taught by Panini any where.

certain doubts in the
first
verse and then answers
them
in the second.
Bk. VII. Ch.
Kdrikd
an indicatory
20.
In
of sutra construction
term
two
for the
this?
is
f^^THf
ment
letter
I.
The
A?is
you
say, the use of
bJt
{F is
What sort
common
to form a
by so doing, fe\ operations must

of yours, and this is an error,
[w replac-
this ^ft
11
be considered here as merely indicating the
should
frf,
so that whatever will apply to the letter
apply to any form beginning with it, by the

Or 3?rfF may be considered as merely the letter
and
is
and as not an
gffr,
the letter B?r has been enunciated with
with a ^, taught any where.
be considered as x&\, ^& being f\, it will take the augand the form will be ^ra and not rV ]
13
3,
will
by VI
sir?
37T
If
tft,
1323
affixes atr an<^ sfr?, then
be performed with regard to

ing
about
this rule
we have no
but
fa Substitution,
added only
being merely a
sake of
for the
facility
include
will
letter,
3TT will
maxim
afr
qfcntflft ?t^PP* *t?ot

and not any particular affix,
it
of pronounciation, like ^ in 5^Tri

having the letter 3tt as their
all affixes
and thus the sn^ not being a fs^ affix the rule VII. 3. 113, will
and so there is no anomaly. Or the form sfriF may be considered
of the dual, for Nominative and Accusative in the terminology ot
significant part:
not apply
as the affix
Ancient Grammarians, and will not produce ft7^ effects, because the anubandhas of the Ancients do not produce their effects in this Grammar of
Panini:
the rules regarding anubandhas
i.e.
made by Panini
refer to the
anubandhas made by him and not by older authors.
Hj^^l^
smrreni.
11
?*-
II
^T^TR
II
^ ( S*W: 5TT
sfriw *n?^
After a neutral stem,
53T
II
11
119.
nom. and
4g<4l<i,
II
ace. dual
Thus T:
be elided by VI.
Vart:
rcresn,
sfr
fre V*V
Prohibition
Therefore the 3T
is,
fFS + f = W^>
tne
T of ^T
required to
however, not done by the following
should be stated in the case of the affix
tfr
not elided.
is
Similarly
substituted for the
II
This
4. 148.
?f*tfr,
*npfr,
*$$> %$$
The augment *
is
added by
VII. 1.73.
zKzmv
ran
II
II
wft
II
^rflo srcfr, rer.,
II
After a neutral stem, * is substituted for

the endings of the Nominative and Accusative -Plural
20.
(^
and SHcO
II
Thus f^3TR
îs by VII.
'2
1.
72,
fmm
fP^Tfr
The word
<m S^lft, *n*fa> **fa. ^^ M
5T*t in
The augment
the sutra being read along with
Elision of
1324
and
sr*
11
Bk. VII. Cn.
denotes the Accusative Plural ending ^ht and not the Taddhita affix
43)
as fre^fr $Tn, *&q[i JTi%5n%
sr^
VII.
84),
2.
(the form
sr^r
23.
(V.
4.
assumed by
the endings of the
substituted for
is
arr^tf
*r*T
After the stem
21.
I.
Nominative and Accusative Plural.

As
3TST RfSfnTi ^TWr
Observe
8T?
3TS"
f^r%,
sutra (3TCT*3P instead of
3T^
Why
T^l
3T?T:
This sutra
optional.
is
T^T
3T5"
q^
by
not, however, barred
whether
The
the form 3TST here
3?
q^fiâr
<rerft
this rule
Nom. and
II
i.
Thus
in fsRrS"R
e. it
has not lost
3T51pP, SRwrih
when
the Numerals
As q?
f%gf^T,
its
q? T*^>
bts
11
at the
is
end of a compound,
II
Ace. Plural endings are elided
The rule applies even to

wrq?, TrPiq?, but the shash
only a secondary member of the compound,
T>^r,
^,
STCT,
if it is
:
as
fqajqq.-,
?3T H
as
'
f^TTS^R:
For the
"
elision
of
see
2. 7,
II
^ 3T*?^*R5^r^WW%
The nom. and
23.
II
after a
and snâre elided

As
7PZ
called <rw (I. 1. 24).
should be the principal

the rule will not apply
^T:
II. 4. 71, is
ll
compounds ending with 'shash' words:
VIII.
by
does not come, as arenas not assumed
3TT
<rew:, 5^,
II
of
the elision taught therein will take place,
But
Ace. endings are elided after
elision of case-endings taught
s^^sT^r^Wrf h
The Nom. and
22.
ii
after
The
present rule applies even

ll
and not
moreover, an exception by anticipation, to the
this rule applies or not.
as q^Trlr, STRrff
ffrP
II
srST
indicates, that the air substitution for the
is,
following sutra, by which the plural

the numerals called
have we taken the form
This peculiar construction of the present
II
^fa
STO^l^l
fasfrT,
?fa
the word
rT^
T^,
ace.
singular
case-endings
35
Neutral stem.
*fl
Rgm,
has lost
its
*Vg
nom.
T^T
ll
sing,
So
also
^5 and
ending by
this
-^j
rule,
ll
In
which
has thus superseded the subsequent rule VII. 2. 102, by anticipation, by which
Or this luk rule of the present sutra is a Nitya
sj replaces the final of rFZ
How can this be a nitya rule when it is
102.
VII.
2.
with
rule compared
II
set aîde
by the next
rule
3TMS^
11
We
still call
this rule nitya,
on the
maxim
Bk. VII. Ch.
*l3 ^r
i.
25
bt?? Substitute.
OTWraCT mît re?^ T
rrTfacsri.
1325
(an operation) the cause of which
would, (after the taking' effect of another operation that applies simultaneously;, be
as)
removed by another
For
not nitya".
(third rule),
the cause
Jiere
not, (on that
is
which
luk-elision,
is
account regarded
is
removed by the
which ordains an 3T1 instead of luk and not by

of rule VII. 2. 102, the necessary condition
application
the
VII. 2. 102. For
But when the case-affix itself is
a case-affix should follow r^ &c.
is that
cannot take place.
sutra
that
in
taught
substitution
luk-elided, the
aphorism
following
STcfr
SH
II
V*
^TrTrs^
q^Tft
II
II
3TrT., 3T**,
II
After a Neutral stem in
24.
for
st,
and z*K the endings of the nom. and
^ht^
substituted
is
ace. sing.
Why do we not say

<fry*
^t TS3
would
be
lengthening if only
thus
there
"*is substituted'? ^re + ^freRL,
single
(the
while
substitution of
re + ar*=re*
was taught (VII. 3. 101),
As cpt
frTSRT,
So
II
also
spre;,
II
jjt
by VI.
the form of the antecedent
fff ^Rrf^w. <T2^: H ^H
1.
107).
^m
sif^, ^rrr fi[W.,
11
and sn*
after the five
stems formed with the

stems
^?R, 4. st?*
3.
These are the

read
s^ =
affixes
and
Pronouns ^cTC &c. (i. e. the

1. ^cTC, and 2. ^ni, and the
5. sfr<n:).
pronouns, which in the
five
list
of Sarvanamans are
Thus
together GSeeT..i. 27)': VW,OT, IW, 3T*r and 3T?S?TC
as ^7rT^ R(?fcr, ^TrT^ 753
elided by ^)
eFTreqr (the 3T of katara
II
bt?^
do we make
also**RPfil, f<T^, sr^RTCl and

SwfifgfScT, %*T
<RS
Why
Nom. and Ace. singular
25. srqîs substituted for the
endings
q^w:
II
Why
the
II
So
Observe
have an indicatory^? In
after these
affix
only
^^ +
five
order to prevent the lengthening of the vowel in the nominative singular

+ 3T ^= ^rru?t by VI. i. 102. In the case of the accusative, art being
as
:
^^
and give us eff^ by VI. I. 107 even

and not gRIf it would give
Why
without ^
Sandhi
of
rule
any
? The simple ?j would
the application of
cjTrre?r &c without
would
have
been elided in the
not give us the Vocative f^rt^, The final
sthanivat,
the substitute of 3T^ will be

II
not make
Vocative, as being an aprikta.
Kdrikd : If
'aprkta', then there
in
st* will
the affix merely
See however VI.
in the sutra
is
fault
not be elided, ?
fj[
VI.
1.
f^*
will
1.
69, there
with regard to
<jt*
is
69.
the anuvritti
(i. e.
of the word
the vocative of
members
be the form required and not ? 50*)
if
Some Substitutions.
1326
however, the anuvritti of aprkta ceases, there

to pronouns
Therefore,
&c
^TrT^
by reading the
we get out of
ar^f,
&c m
^TrTC<T
we
(i. e.
tne vocative
3T* with an
affix
nor
is
of
and
In the Veda,
As
^fTOTL,
?<TC?l
(VII.
1.
f rTCRrrw^gTrsrrarr
f^5T*
24),
Had
II
we could have made
Veda
the
ending
3^*;,
Thus
whole of the
2.
*PT for
1.
after
rre
and
as
is
not the substitute
Why
in
the
s^
II
Vedas?
See
fgrej
we should
divide
it
the present
into two, to include
As
Language.
J&xrfi
^cTt
Rrsfa,
*\s
q^-rfa
ii
55),
is
g^Tf and srerf

?t*t
is
The
II
and the
11
g^^^rm;,
^*n,
stct
11
substituted for the Genitive

II
indicatory
to be replaced
of the affix
st
of
3T?r
otherwise
affix
shows that by
it
I.
r.
55, the
would have replaced only
not being a substitute-affix, rule
97-
11
ii
The
is substituted for gwj;, and
89, would not be applicable to it.
STW y VII. 2.96; and cnr + 3T (arsr), and jpT + 3T = rpr and *f* by
# ar*pffc**
Fttj
sst
st^t (I. 1.
affix 3T**
first letter
VII.
it
^).
simpler by saying trK -gg^fc r
it
Common
or in the
27.
VI.
e reading
II
g^nr^R?^rf ^sfr
the
i.
not the elision of 3T* in
In the case of *^rTC, the arTf substitution does not take place,
other cases.
<T3*T
is
been placed immediately after arms*
this sutra
position of the sutra indicates that
either in
indicatory
Sg. endings, after
TOhrRcTOH
be anomaly with regard
will
(or srj
STrj
Nom. and Ace.
3T*t
28.
there lengthening of the vowel (5RtRr*> which
would have been the form had there been no
26.
not have the form ? ^ft* but f ttfK)
shall
dilemma, and so there
this
Bk. VII. Ch.
i7
II
v^tfa
II
II
#, srcnrih,
snr,
II
s^r^f^r pt^t & f&ir&Q wrarw fwwn *îfs3r^r|s*^^r3 HWs
tf^wWr H^r%
ii
28.
3th; is
substituted for the Dative ending
for the endings of the nom. and ace. in
all
t*
and
numbers, after
the stems g**T? and 3^5

The $ the ending of the Dative
ij
is exibited anomalously in the sutra

without any case ending (compare VII. 1. 13, #:) ttqijqr. means 'of the first
and second cases.' Thus gw^; + ^ = 5^5 + # (VII. 2. 95) = 3** + # (VII. 1. 102)
^*
(VI. 1. 107 or 97); similarly to* H

-g^ + aro (VII. 1. 28) =
So also
3WiT + g=**S + 9 (VII. 2. 94) = ^T + 5 (VII. 2. 94)"^ + 5 (VII. 2. i02) =
+ 3T1
Bk. VII. Ch.
(VII.
1.
I.
30
^Substitution of case-affix
28) = *** (VI.
1.
97 or
92 and VI.
2.
88
by VII.
2.
^r*and
j^ by
*rcft
VII.
V.
II
<wft
29.
arcntand îp* by VII.
97 and VII.
2.
II
II
II
II
W^P,
>*m?rwWr
*?rcfr
93 and VI.
1.
97 or 107,
3TPn*t as before.
of sth; the affix of
and swr^
**TO
*rerct:
II
and lengthening by VII.
90,
2.
*mm m*f\'>
3rr* i??m%
II
11
the Dative ^ra; after
srsan* is substituted for
30.
*
q^Tfa
II
2.
II
3rr* wr&nfh
So also g^p*and STRT1
II
and g*r* and
by VII.
3T**TRt( elided
awiiw.*Mijiuw
11
3*^
gsJTT^srrsiaTrcu 3TOTP* srrsprp*
5#
ffrr
87
substituted for the
q[ is
As fWTPând
2.
5TCT., t,
the Accusative Plural after
2. 87).
Similarly st**
107).
1327
yushmad and asmad.'

'
'
As gsjp-ând
As
3T*pspUI
the sutra
is
constructed
(*qm l0
it
is
hw, then we
have two cases, (1) eliding the final ^ of yushmad and asmad, by VII. 2. 90,
and adding >*T* '2) eliding 3*3; of yushmad and asmad by VII. 2. 90, and adding
*g*ll
It will be shown hereafter that VII. 2. 90, is capable of two explananot easy to say whether the substitute
we have
Similarly with sp-spi
acr^ H
yushma + bhyam,
as
(4)
yushm + abhyam.
equal to
55%^^ by VII.
by
is
in
3.
it
also
two cases
103: this
first
STJffrf
If
it is
^ only, and by another

Thus we have four cases,
yushma + abhyam,
( 3 )
(yushma + bhyam) we can get
objected that
<r
11
their
yushm + bhyam,
may be
maxim
force of the
taught
In the case of the
the proper form, though
which
or 3T**!*
one by which yushmad and asmad lose
tions,
ever,
is >api
yushma + bhyam should be

howwhen an operation
substitution will not take place,
^JTf
re rere HTtFlrrfro "
the angadhikara has taken place, and another operation
of the angadhikara
is
is
not
allowed to take place."
The second case is an impossibility, namely, yushm + bhyam can give

The third case yushma + abhyam will give us the proper form
5P*Pl (3 + 3T = 3j by VI. 1.97). Moreover the accent also will be on the
middle g^sr* by VI. 1. 161, the udatta St of yushma being elided by the
us no form.
anudatta
sr of 3T*?i*, the acute will
objected that in VI.
accent will be on the

fall
The
on the
sriff
I.
final.
be on the anudatta st
word
161, the
We
3T=r of VI.
have shown
yushm + abhyam
is
159
is
It
should not be
understood, and the
in that sutra, that the
{beginnitig) of the anudatta
fourth alternative
1.
free
udatta will
term which causes the elision
from
all
objections,
i3 28
aft
q^pwr
fnr:
bt<*
V,
11
31.
3Tri;
arid st^jt^t
As
ing
gs*^,
and
*afw,
35*t
number
and
c^
*T
st<*
Bk. VII Ch.
I.
34.
11
wr^rr *nrm
BTrl?
substituted
The ^
3*
II
11
for the Ablative
^^TPT
II
by VII.
elided
is
VI.
1.
w^,
after
II
2.
95,
before the case end-
97.
q*CTCTCT,
This substitution of
and
II
made in the singuyushmad and asmad.
sr^; is
For the substitution of

+ 3T?t=c^[ and
by VI. 1. 97.
II
and
*r
see
VII.
2.
97
*ftjr
*rro srrerc
33
33.
^rf?r
3tt^R[ is
*rnr. srrerc
substituted
ii
for the
the affix srrT of the Genitive plural with the
is
Genitive plural
yushmad, and asmad.
affix ?3TTz (VII. 1. 52), after

^TP
also of the ablative, after
As
is
3*^=35^ by
32.
and
i^fst,
11
rr
II
3T**T<X.
^^^J^T ^
lar
wrfk
11
T^sqrr **ot 3^*4*1 -swrgrrc^
11
5^^
Substitute of
augment
Thus
g- H
^TT^m: and btwÎ H Why is it read *rr*l and not an"**, when there is no *t
at the time when the substitution is ordained ? It is read as gri. in order to
augment ?r, for otherwise 'yushma' and

by VII. 2. 90, end in sr, and so by VII. I. 52,
would cause the genitive affix to get the augment u the present sutra removes that also. The substitute is exhibited with a long srr, in order to make
ST + 3jr = 3Tf in 5^T + 3Tr^7t, had it been shorter, then there would have been
no lengthening but bt + bt = 3T by VI. 1. 97. If you say the very fact that
3T3T1 was taught and not ^j,, would prevent para-rupa and cause lengthening ';
we reply, that the 3T ofsr^l. would find its scope in preventing q- substitution.
(VI I. 3. 103).
For without 3T, we should have 5^+ 37* =
that arr^f^ will not
indicate
'
asma having
'
get the
lost their 'd'
'
^^
strt vtt
fr>r: u
*r^
ll
sTr^r^RTR^r^TR^
34.
<iTrfo
sir is
II
sftarcrNt
long
3tt
Thus
form qqr
is
11
wlr
substituted for
nrsr
the affix of the
first
f the perfect, after roots ending
and third person singular

in
siren, 3?r, ire:
II
<rqr, <rer,
spdly
thus evolved,
*?*?r,
qr+^ =
from
TT + 3T
The
pn, *% (*3r) and *% (t*t)
Here three operations simultanenamely; 1. Reduplication, 2. Leng-
trr,
ll
ously present themselves for application,
11
13k.
VII. Cli.
thening
The
I.
35
rTlW SUBSTITUTl
by the single substitution of one long vowel
substitution of 3TT for 3Tr by
then the single substitution of
airr.
sthanivat,
3Tr
+ 3T had taken place
for srr
is
take place
treated
and
rfTcTf is
tnen treating
an<J
by
I.
rule
is
for
substitution,
1.59, and
take place
first
3TT
Thus we have
first.
as
it
3U
substitution of
qr
it
(i. e. arr-l btT
subsequent to the
BTT
causes
^3TT)
latter.
optionally substituted for the affixes
when benediction
of the Imperative,
fir
arr
as sthanivat
and then the reduplication, because the former
35.
the single
if
The vriddhi-ekadeâ should
reduplication.
for 3Tr f 3T
Mid 3.
what order should
then there would be no scope for
first,
substitution, should
vriddhi-ekaderia,
this
=^r;
aft
In
First the affix 3T should be replaced

3ft
For
and then reduplication.
therefore the
btt,
the present sutra.
these operations be then performed?
by
l$2g
is
meant.
As sfnranr *^, 4fotft c^*, ^t^5 *r^p*, sffa &W

The f prevents
Guna and Vriddhi, (I. 1. 4), and the substitute replaces the whole affix (I.
The substitute is not sthanivat rTtf, though it re1.
53 notwithstanding).
places a ftq affix, because it has its own indicatory letter ^, and rV?j does not
11
become
and consequently in ^mrl i is not added to the affix, by VII.

being
added only to frf* affixes after is
3. 93, f
When not denoting benediction, we have not this substitution
as qpj w*W$ vr^Pôr it^ST STPTI
faq[
II
The
affix
ctr^ being
propounded with regard
to
f$,
will
that after stems ending in short

rirrTf
should also be elided.
srr^l
11
II
a substitu e of
apply to
st,
the f%
Therefore
This objection, however,
is
f|,
like ff, and, therefore, rules
is
w^w
also.
we cannot
is futile
Thus VI.
4.
105 says
elided: therefore, after such
get the form
for, in
the sutra
^sffarnrT
ar%%
(VI.
words
c^r for
4. 105),
$ from sutra VI. 4. 101 (5 fH^r % rg:) So that

%
should be construed as meaning "there is the elision of f| when it is of
the
form ft, and not when it assumes the form rfR^ "
there is'the anuvritti of
11
3^
II
The object of ^ in <rr<13; is, as we have said above, for the sake of
preventing Guna and Vriddhi. It should not be said that the object of & in
^3*
the sake of
by the application of sutra fu (I. 1. 53), just as the

93 and 94 ) apply to the finals. For by so doing,
?mr^ would replace only the* of 3 and theôf ff, which is not desired. And the
is for
substitutes
case of
3T?<stf%fa:
sr^ &c
mw^ is
VI I.
i.
to be distinguished from ar?T?, for in
object but to prevent sarvadesa; but in
namely, the prevention of
wm^we
Guna and Vriddhi and

;
3T^
see that
^ having thus found scopej

^tfr* f^ ^^ L
the rTKTf substitute will be governed by the general rule

1.
55
the ^ has no other

^ hasanother object,
I330
SUBSTITUTE.
Fnr
The Karika
Kdrikd:
I.
53
In STpT^the îs
( ^r^T = JiCImWRTW
we say it is not so.
should be elided, by VI.
If
II
the express
does not apply to

it
37.
If
be
said,
is
it
you say that
105 read with
4.
employment off?
rfTrT^ H
The
in
I.
ending
after roots
56,
1.
we
VI.
short
in
I.
3T, rU<l
when theanuvrtti
reply):
105 from sntra VI.
4.
indicates that the lopa rule
4. 105,
STIrT^, it
The
final).
its
Vri-
sake of srezttfr^ by
for the
lopa-rulenot applying to
replaces the whole of f| and not only
Guna and
sake of preventing
for the
it
11
or adhikara of ff was already existent in the sutra VI.

4. 101,
I.
given below raises these points.
W^^ %tfw*r rwrlr 5 frrr^r?

ddhi
HK. VII. Ch.
<?
in
follows that
<ntT^ finds
its
Guna and Vriddhi, therefore, it is not for the sake of antyaThe fSF^ in ar^ &c has no other scope, therefore, these subs-
scope in preventing
vidhi
(I. 1. 53).
titutes replace the final only.
<Ud^S
ftT-
\*
^%
36.
'TTTR
f^5*r (n.
s.
and form
their feminine
indicatory m, therefore
indicatory
VI.
3f*T?^
f%fra"
add a
Of*Tt)
The words formed with
II
in their
substitute
both *r and
above mentioned
^[H
of 3 in
tpsffng^vq^CT^dr
ll
we have f%^,
Some
is
not
absolutely
^j
f%??#r, f^T?<T
^JTTH WTH^t
37.
t5?T
sutra,
formed with
<&\
\\
^N9
^j
if
with one
H*r*;
indicatory letters,
on the
was no necessity
optionally into this
and
srf (see V. 4. 38).

II
In a compound, the
an Indeclinable but not
Nor can we ob-
indicatory letter being
that were so, there
<J^TM
II
70),
necessary for the
should be included.
the anuvritti of the word

:
I.
an affix having an
so written, in order that in the sutra q^ft
SJ^^WTO for
read
is
affixes
(VII.
strong cases
would also be considered as having an
^?j therefore
is
II
taken, cannot include an affix like 3Tg having two
maxim
II
'.
with unaccented f
operations, ^fj
4. 131. ),
ject that in the
its
3 of
the
s^,
of
purposes
^rsmROT
?fc
know
to
ftfpO, resmr,
having an indicatory 3 or
^:
substituted for the Present Participle
is
affix 5TH after the root fir?
Thus
ft%:, 5Tg:,
II
&fj
is
HW^T, SR3T
first
^jf
member
tR".
&1\
of which
substituted for
WT
II
is
II
compounding is by
Thus q^^r, JTf?T The tva is
Is
added
tva
by III. 4. 61. and
II. 2. 18, and 5^ by VI. 1. 7i.TP&P$3T, The
compounding is by II. 2. 22. trt$?T; f?^r^?T The tva is added by III. 4. 62.
Why do we say' in a compound ? Observe fj^r f^r Here the counter examadded by
11
'
III. 4. 21, the
Bk. vii. Cu.
38
?** Substitution.
1331
preceded by an Indeclinable
fSc^r, but as it is not compounddo we say 'not preceded by ?rsj' ? Observe

The word 3T7r?T means 'other than mij, and
ST$?*r, 3Tf^, TTO^r, *TT*Tf>^r M
means words of the same class as snj, e. Indeclinables and does not mean
words which are not Indeclinables. The compounds like FH^rerre^T contained
in the class of ffjtezrcnff &c (II. i. 72.), do not take f^t anomalously.
Or the
word sr*n% is in the Locative with the force of specification and means those
compounds which are specifically formed with x^ff and not any compound in
pie
i|?^r,which
is
ed, there
is
Why
no substitution.
is
i-
general.
Now by
72,
ktva would denote a form ending with ktva;
and would include the case of a
compound ending in ktva. But this general

*T?^ 3W?T ST f%f|?f *rT?Tf*rrerTi tt^jp^ "an
rule
is
the rule
maxim ir^r
modified by the
whenever
affix denotes,
1.
I.
it is
employed
grammar, a word-form which begins
in
with that to which that affix has been added and ends with the affix
itself."
But the affix ktva is never ordained after a compound. Therefore, the case
of compounds ending in ktva, would not be covered by the mere employment
of ktva. Then comes the maxim fîffar *Tiw ^TTCFT "rt^rrq st^T 'a krit affix
denotes whenever it is employed in grammar, a word-form which begins with
that to which that krit affix has been added and which ends with the krit affix,
but moreover should a
a noun such as denotes a case-relation
have
must denote the same
word-form together with the gati or the noun which may have been prefixed
to it."
By this a compound also may end in ktva. This maxim will cover cases
gati, or
been prefixed to that word-form, then the
affix
krit
^^ but not 3%: fjssr &c because 3^r: is neither a gati nor a kaHence the employment of the word ^PT1% in the sutra, and also of the
like !?fK3i, TH^RT:
raka.
word sr^r^f,
for ?ri
is
In the case of
*f?*ft
?2*T
^r
What
rule".
"
neither a Gati nor a Karaka.
tfft^
(4)
(2) ^M"
q-fc^r
II
(3)
for
maxim
*rr
(VII.
sreqni
f* (VII.
(9)
4. 42).
applies:
STnTCjfRfcr f^^rt*
II
2.
38.
substituted for
4.
42
as
as
igjv(T,
^?rr,
ll
ll
q-frs^
stfq-,
*r^f?r
II
s^fa
ll
^fq^rsfr^^fq-
also,
vr^fri
s^rer
as well as
an Indeelinable compound
than one preceded by the Negative crsr
after
II
11
II
In the Veda the ^c^T

r^Tl",
jt^
q-<cfsr
by VI. 4. 66, as qffaf but q^ro (6) %$&

(7) %\ by VI. 4. 19, as gj^r but arnr5
U(8)
56)-3T%<?rr but
11
but
q^rm and
($) fr*
^ro y; q^rft ^r,

mm s^îi ^r?^rr^^r^ra*nWr
11
by the substitute Rjq;? (1)

Thus f^^j but spjni and not
for ^r (VII. 4. 46)
3tf^ as required by VI.
as *rr^r but snr*?T
*pfa
inp
11
f?
the substitution of ^
II
fr* as K*nfr but
by VI. 4. 15,
3J* as q^r
this
are these antaranga rules superseded
ft?* the substitution of

and not
and q^*TR
q-^fr^
a Bahiranga substitution of ?q* supersedes even antaranga
m%
û,
is
other
Vedic case-affixes
1332
Thus
Fapr
gjsor
as ^T?T
merely
^[?rf?r
S^RT
3T
totr Tf^jrTf^r, sr^ry^TO
?pt
The
ll
Bk. VII. Ch.
srer*fRc3T
So
11
made
sutra could have been
I.
39
we have
by saying
also
shorter
not doing so indicates that conditions and limitations are
set aside in the Vedas in applying this affix. Therefore ^<r is applied even
The word g^ra" governs
when there is no compound, as, sfdj rff^ ^pîr^:
II
the following sutras upto VII.
^fcnrir,
*Pff^
w,
stt^, ^t,
sir,
50, inclusive.
1.
m%,
st, i*tt,
arra:
11
II
*nf%37*
ii
sit *nn% f f?r to^p*
t?f
The
39.
snfrpjr*
11
ra^r fsr^r *r^cfh% ^=^31. u
11
following irregular endings are substi-
Veda
tuted for the various case endings in the
Nom.
Sg. for
endings,
srej;
of the Plural r
(1)
of the
the Z?/&-elision of the case-
(2)
the single substitution of the homogeneous long
(3)
end vowel of the stem, (4) stt, (5) 3TT?*, (6) q; (st)
for the ending of the Nom. Plural, (7) srr, (8) srr ( r ), with
the elision of the last vowel and the consonant, if any, that
vowel
for the
follows
Thus
(1)
Vdrt:
promiscuously,
Vdrt
(2)
as,
^R
^T%<TraP (for ^rufnrc^Rig
for
rrerfa
: As
for r^rr%)
Lengthening :xfrft,
(4)
srr^=fr ismft
(6) trT g*% (

Rig IV. 49. 4,
Vedic usage.
(8)
(9)
Rig Veda X.
I,
rr
it
85. 23.
164. 9).
Rig
I.
for
for rTf^r^)
^hm
^f^TR
^ S^TRf,
TOT and $%pn
&TWWK f^rf%
for <Tr*
5^^
I?
fro) *P3W5W, Rig VIII. 68. 19. 3T^ ( for qtf) fyyrfthe 3TCf and 33 substitution has not taken place as a
for
..
r^[
II
qft, gg?ft for sffcr,
^^r
personal ending in the
162. 6.
sir? =T*fo, r?rf?% =epN. for
if*** and
(3)
(7)
Tîr: (for q?*rre:)
One personal ending replaces another
(5) 3TTlT rfrT
^Tcft
(accent of ^)
srr
should be stated that case-endings replace case-endings
^-elision
(
?fr
(^rr) with the similar shorten-
(srrÔ and
3T^m *TW ^5
It
Vedas ^r*n*H 3T^f7n?
STiPTW^r?
in the stem, (9)
it
ing of the stem (10)
^^^TT, >soj3r for
3Tvrrnr (
^rrsr^r
3W and
for ?rpTr) jf*natr:

;
52Tmrrr?t
fc> r
>j<ôtt
Rig
I.
ii
143. 4.
sT^s^r Ait Br.
(10) ^r'CT ^rr^ for *mj, there
II. 6. 15.
was required the
elision of
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
Vdrt:
it,
Vedic Substitutions.
3TT5 ^frr
( i i )
{b)
43
^T3r?r
for
The following substitutes
with elision of the final
f^TH*
and (c) long ?
U^rar
^r%
As
ll
should also be enumerated, (a) wr,
vowel and the consonant,
if
any, that follows
(a) sffor Tfr-TPT*, for ^"ir, so also yrffor for ijt^t n (b)
and
for ^rnrorr,
1333
for
jTrRrar
^nrsrTr
sr ^ sr^
(c)
11
*rafr srarai for
(fi)
Vdrt\ So also (a) arrf,

srar^ and (V) 3?^: as Jnrrf^r for rerfTT,
prw w* %?r* for ^-^, (r) rcr^for inror for ?rr^T h
The word 3TT% in the sutra is compounded of three words 3TT + 3TT?I+*r
the word arn^su' + srnj
srm *ct
f f%:
11
So
II
II
q^TFT
11
3T* f rt pnrffcro *tsrt
II
3nr:, ?tst n
twstt
*t*s s^tflr faqra
**rfsr n
For the Personal ending sn* of the First

Person Singular (in the Aorist) T (I. 1.55) is substituted
in the Veda.
40.
The sphere is the substitution of f*pr, and not the accusative singular
The sr^
As **ff f^T* ( for sr*m*) Rig I. 165. 8 sftffa $$tto Siren*.
augment is diversely elided (VI. 4. 75). The indicatory si of T5T shows that
the whole of the affix ar* is to be replaced. The substitution of * for * is to
affix.
prevent the change of
^ into
11
anusvara as
in
VIII.
3.
11
*\
11
ll
11
arrsFTTts re?rarr^(T^ ^?rar Rrora
41.
25.
st<t:, ar, an^RR^s

^^tPt
%tt t*rt
In the Veda the <r of the Atmanepada
sftror afTSRRni^s
\ nr*.
II
ii
Per-
sonal ending is elided.

As \m BTf^ and nssraf src*rcf 3T^ for anr^ (see VII. 1. 8) g^r* (for
5*^1*0 3TW*f T^T 3T^W1 H Rig I. 164. 27. ?f$pRT: STO for SHT Owing to the anu;
ll
vritti
of B?fr from VII.
srr?*rnT*P|^!reiT
f f%:
11
&??r
I'
Why
f%<ra v^rcr
sonal ending
^^
As sr^^cjTPr
^r^Wirfa
ii
srsfsffa^r^T
43.
38, this substitution
Atmanepada
v^rrft^spnw
In the Veda,
42.
f r%;
I.
in the
11
*r^frT
sometimes does not take place;
Observe
sf^r
Iff^
37^31
^gTWFSI
as:
II
11
s^rat
is
substituted
for the Per-
*TOits*nj for
11
^rere"
q^rfir
11
ti
Ait Br.
*n^lr?ro;
II. 6. 14.
^fcr,
11
^re^rew^r OTwrfr f^<Ti^% ^nr^f ^r ^rc>^r% mar

qînTO is irregularly formed in the Veda for
The word tnps^ff followed by <t?tjt loses its

TO$T RppPTP (Rig VIII. 2. 17). The Kasfka adds
11
final
*r
in the
Veda.
As
that eris also

irregularly
Vedic Substitutes
1334
changed into^": the form would then be

mistake as pointed out by Bhattoji Dikshit.
<t**t ^nsc
11
t^tt%
11
?ror, ^rr^
11
For the ending
44.
srsHsi'T*
Bk. VII. Ch.
II
This
is,
I.
48.
however, a
11
<r
PL Im-
of the 2nd Pers.
perative is substituted cfr^ in the Veda.

As JT& *n3RTOT ^T l^rT^ (for fjajrT), and g^ssf ?frf TrPTt *3FRTrq[ (for
WINST *f*pmr^ ( = STWSRT) ^J^WTrTn* ( = WRt).
?5pTrT) Ait Br. II. 6. 15, 16.
,
^PT^snrnsr
^r
strengthened, or
tituted for the
This
g-^ (for 3jq"*T)
3f^3"rT
%^$t
^r
*pTTrT
*nrfa
11
<rr
<r*
qnn,
<t?t,
nm
11
^f
weak not shortened), cto and *re are subsof the 2nd Pers. PL Imperative in the Veda.
m?W-
(for *jajrT),
indicatory
11
if
gsfar
= 3*0, sraOT
the slu vikarana being added as a Vedic
The
li
<tttr
11
Also h and to (before both, on account of the

the preceding vowel of the verbal stem is
45.
indicatory
*z
11
\9
makes 3* and
q^Tr%
11
<ft<t
wsn, ufa
ll
fSFTrPT (for ^tT),
irregularity
non-f^qr affixes
(I. 2.
^>
srffgr for
4).
II
11
The Personal ending
46.
OT% ending with an %

Thus g^^rr
jtcj;
becomes
in the
Veda
\\
ffqr^Rr% (for tfroro:)
m* Tssramrer
(for ***repr:),
^ra
trf%
^rrsranrfgr for ^rr^rrr*i : u
w^ w
II
fr%;
ii
ll
q^rr%
rprr fOnrrcs q*TrT*fr
II
In the Veda,
47.
the end, the augment q

Thus fr^-R 5E?f%rrr f^T^fi
after VII.
there
1.
no
is
11
the Absolutive affix
wn
gets at
\\
^r)-
(for
This sutra
is
not read immediately
samasa
is
understood, while
such anuvritti here.

II
e.
II
T^TR
II
% gR**, %fa,
II
<ffafprfterftrar h
48.
In the Veda, the Absolutive fgRq;
gularly formed for fgr
To
Sfto* 1*FK
forms
II
38, as in that sutra, the anuvritti of
?gW?T ^
*nf%37i
t^:, 'ra
w^ s^flr fâr
the root ?jw

for f^r
is
%^r^
irre-
II
added
The
tSRT,
in
like this, as cft^fhr ^ for ffarr H

3
is
and the
final 3?r is
the sutra
replaced by ^rr
indicates that
ll
As
there are other
Bk. VI. I Cn.
I.
52
Vedtc Substitutions.
1335
49.
^^TrgT &c. are irregularly formed in the Veda.
The word
Thus srr^ ^n%, for crr^r tffc^ sr*re*r *rrf *t for ft^r
'et cetera' means "of the form of", namely words having form like mr&ft,
11
3TlY!
as
<ffc?fr
&c.
arrarcfcg^ll
ffrr:
V(o
q^rf*
II
sT^^rf^r^r^TT^?
ii
airac, are*:,
II
*rarTrTiTr *nrrSr
^^r%
^t^S
re<ra
After a stem ending in
50.
II
11
sr
or
the affix
srr,
sth;
of the Norn. PI. gets, in the Veda, the augment

(arg^)
at the end.
Thus srnmrcr: ft**'' <fim M for grigjuu: and ^rir:
Rig VI. 75. 10.
and ?<?*
So also 3?rrcp (R. I. 3. 4) Why3 *^mt * STTTCr (Rig X. 15. 2) for
is not, after the adding of the augment 3T?J% the *r?r changed to ?[ft in the last
example, as required by VII. 1. 17, and on the maxim rpt'- srerjf: f^TRTrl? No,
the maxim that applies here is sr^; T#r ftqraft% ^ît^t, trgTr^m
:
II
II
11
TiTTTr jfrcfr
s^rrn'Tr
w*ffa
*r?rr%
srrf%^T n
ll
11
sr^f^^^T^Rm^rer ^s*w
3T*ar ?
^r
11
The same augment
51.
words
11
^fr?:,
ff and
*cror
^?c^^^T^^Rrr%W ^s*w
srf^f
before
added
is
the
after
the Denominative
affix
srt^t, when the delight of the subject in these things is to

be expressed.
The anuvritti of g-;ff% does not extend to this sutra or any further.
Thus 3T*ff*arfar *r^r, $fk**ri% *rn>prap, f*rs*?r^ *tr F^roreîg:
are + arw + 3 f f^ =
delight
'when
the
of
the
Why
subject
1.
is meant'? ObBT^WcT (VI.
97).
:
11
\ qfaf?r and ?7^nTRm

After bt** and spr, the force of the augment is that of desirVdrt
After $fft and pût it has the force of ardentVdrt
connection.
ing sexual
intense
thirsting
after the thing.
e. an
ly wishing for,
The augment is not
serve
3T*taf?r> sfftfafcT,
II
i.
added, though the sense
Others say Vdrt
ings.
when
the sense
SgrW &c.
**rirr,
is
may
if it
has not the above mean-
should be added after every nominal stem
yearning after that thing
that of intense
Others say Vdtt
T^fa
be that of delight,
3T?|37
That the augment
|j*
as ^sre^nT,
&c.
srrftf *rir?rrer:
g?
11
x*
ll
*ktt*
jp-^-
should be' added, as ^pT-
sm&, *Hkrcn,
5?
Âugment.
J336
the beginning.
The word 3rr?f
of the last sutra
mmw,
mm*
3?
55
or
i?r,
at
Thus *JWP1, ft%-
understood here.
is
I.
augment
of the Genitive Plural gets the
affix srrqr
mm,
Bk. VII. Ch.
52.
the
^^
But *?m* of
The srr* f the
sutra is the Genitive Plural ending 3TT*, and not the 3TPT of the Locative
Singular ordained by VII. 3. 116; for that 3TR. takes the augments sir?, 3Tr?
^rm,
or
^tpt,
^r? (VII.
3.
1 1
2-
nama
11
11
Nor the 3TT*

4\ while the present srr^ takes g? or 5^
I. 35 &c),
because that refers to verb and Sarvall
of the Perfect Tense
urnx^,
(III.
nor the sire of V.
4.
same
the
for
1 1,
The word
reason.
3rrf*r
is
exhibited in the sutra in the locative case, for the sake of the subsequent
sutra VII.
as
if it
1.
was
For the purposes of the present
53.
Genitive case (str: *rabrr3
in the
sutra,
^),
it
should be construed,
because *r^rm being
in the
Ablative case, the augment j^ will be added at the beginning of the affix
following it, on the maxim rT^Rrrf^T^^f
II
%^*r.
frm
ii
X3
II
f^s^rT^
i^fa
ll
srrfa
53.
PL
II
^* ssrairWr w<r n
is substituted for nr before the Genitive
affix.
As
spCTTR.
\ f*n
11
5r?oTR.
\l
^Rsjnif 57
11
however appears
qr^TR
11
^^FcTr5ra?rrr?r^5r7riTrTr^2n-%
ending
3TT**,
after
stems called Nadi

the Feminine affix
As
f^rr^R,
"rr*, *uTprr^,
11
g^sr,
s^r^mr
The augment ^
54.
PI.
<ft
^q-
^r:, 'srcr:
ll
11
added before the Genitive
II
^^tr,
^rsn^r*, 5Fr^T^^r?rnT
The lengthening of
3^
^T^ST^Tri. H
ll
3 &c), and after the stems ending in
srernrr*, 3T#n*r*r
^Tr^r^r*,
w%
is
Veda: as sftaRPT
<r, srn:,
stems ending in a short vowel, after
(I. 4.
srr
in the
^tpt s^r*
,
11
^sp^:frcrcfar*,
srgre^r*, ir^<Tr*ii 3tprit<i: *=ri[r?TT*,
rarcrfft-
ir^nrri,,
11
TOSHpFfer
II
55.
pi.
ending
II
the short final vowel takes place by VI.
^TR
stto after
in
<Tf ,
The augment
^Qth,
II
added before the Genitive

the Numerals called ^shash', and after
~As ôrrJT, Ts^TRrw, (VI.
meral ending
II
4. 3.
4. 7),
3; is
srHTWr, T^rrer*, totttw,
cjs not 'shash', hence the specific mention
*r&m%
of^T
II
11
nu-
VII. Cn.
k.
I.
58
3* Augment.
1337
This rule applies to compounds ending with these numerals, when

ITT^'f^fa but
secondary
(upasarjana).
Numerals
are
where
the
nr^^^rff
f^Sfpf, rff^T^r^,
these latter are the principal member, as <n?PT "7n?, qr^TT^PTT?
r
f frr:
wlr
In the Veda after the words
uppft f^TrT^r>3^?Rr firm 3TRr i^tthi"
*ft
11
56.
Gen.
W*
PI.
We
jjft
always Nadi
is
HTTqreoffar*
1.
make
54
The
^rrm %
II
II
X^
As
maxim,
<TTTPT
II
*ff:,
*TT^t
^-HHMI^TT^Rr
Genitive
As
else.
regards
of which by VII.
PI.
arise if the
compound be
II
gSMW H^frT
when standing
*ft,
II
at the
before the Gen.
|l<riHr;
All rules have
but
*t^T
exceptions
PL
end of a Kik
stt**
II
fr^3'?^r Outfit in the beginning

the Vedas " is an established
in
so at the end of a Pada, sometimes this rule does not apply, as ^rrt
f^r*r mvfa *rerw 11
W*
sf^ft -$k ^rtt:

f f^TJ
the
in
II
^TRT
f%?nf? ^n"
"
11
\f
w?r
q^nft
11
11
fff^r *rmri*iprmr
11
ir%<r, 3**,
wm:
11
11
added
vowel of the root,

root which has an indicatory ^ in the Dh&tup&tha.
58.
sj;
is
after the
W^^l
Thus from ^f ^f*f,

its
in
ff*S3*,
from fc--gn^, gr>^r,
where 5 is not f^
The ^ is added to the root
very inception, and they must be considered to have got a ?t, for the
^f^rT^^&c
from
the
"
augment * comes
of a Pad a.
Nadi
^^7^ = ^5TPTP*r, the Genitive
After
57.
*r*nri
^rTT
f^rT^HIi'^MIÎnf
verse, the
sn*rffr,
This sutra could be
II
optionally a
necessity of this sutra will, however,
MKIrd
*ff
and
Veda, and optionally every where
in the
*TPT21^ HriqRZi:
TTt:
fTrp
*jft is
sfr
II
3T^r? grRPTifRr*
4. 5.
I.
11
the option of that sutra a vyavasthita-vibhasha, by saying
we have
by
be grrwrtrffar*
will
^tfrp*
vf^Tjfr
with
well dispensed
plural.
augment ^
gets the
As stfarrgW
But
T=qfrT, q-^frT
11
purposes of the application of the grammatical

that
3TT is
rules.
Thus III. 3. 103 says
the feminine to a root which ends in a consonant and has
long vowel. The root ^re must be considered to be such a
added
a prosodially
in
and f*3T, f*3T are thus formed. Similarly though the roots in the
Dhatupatha are fare and ^f%, in applying affixes we must consider them as
fqt% and >?*, as the author himself has indicated in III. 1. 80.
In short in
root
adding
affixes, these
roots should
the root {dJiatn) should have
(Future) and
fw%
(Aorist)
f,
be considered as having a
and not the stem
when added
Moreover
^
The affixes ?jn%
not make those roots
(ariga).
to roots, will
ll
5* Augment.
133^
for the f in rfn% and f^r?*

not to be considered as fq;
?f??
is
should
is
merely
be considered as non-nasalised.
be considered as
If
Bk. Vtl. Ch.
I.
60
the sake of pronunciation, and
for
in the strict
sense of the word

you say that "the f in
in
fact
it
should
rer^r
being f^, the qôf T^ is not elided by

^ is not elided, because sutra ft'
f^f^r I. 2. 14 makes ra^ a rer?j after f^ only, the result of which is that
on ty
loses its ^by VI. 4. 37, and no other root".
= ^+?Tri% + 3T = JT'* + ^+
In
VI.
24
4.
y<j, for
sWrn ", we
-
in
because of
its
reply, " not so, the
^r
(the STT*r
3TT
s^,
4. 143,
3TI"**
and VI.
VI. 4. 143 ). For the purposes of the elision of

would be considered as asiddha (VI. 4. 22), for both VI.
In>^r,
37, requiring the elision of ^ are abhiya sutras.
elided
is
the elided
4.
%^rrr from prf%r and fgfft the whole combination f* is ??t, and not % and ^separately, and hence ^w is not added.
But even if these roots be considered as
the syllable f* having an f, yet they will not get the $* augment, because the word 3T?cT of Tf^n% (VII. 1. 57) is understood herein this sutra
iff^,
also, so that the roots
g^rRfhrrac
si"
*rrrrr*r*
îf
(i
"
%rfjr,
**?=?*,
of the
5f
fas^fa, ^^r^,
^tF.s^
Wn y
,!
"
of
m^m,
5^
&c
ffanir
" ?
11
Ob-
II
The
rT^ &c should be also enumerated.
following roots of Tudadi
fNrar*,
11
the vowel of the root.
f?j*<ifrr,
for the application of this rule.
11
the ^ is placed after

3^s5^"fa, *TfrT, f^rct,
serve g^fa, 3?frT
g**r,
f^
In g^r &c, before the characteristic
before sr"? Observe
Vdrt
as
, g^rrnrn*
11
class,
Thus
Why
^rft
11
^rCmrs^^R^Tf^JT
59.
TudMi
must have a final \
X*-
11
^r
28.
^,
(7),
class
29. *<*
24.
?rq-
9^$,
25. cJ^r-
(^),
?nfr,
30. ^t<* (re<s),
These are the

26.
<j<t
gPT, 27. gqr
s^** (rwr), ftsrrspr,
Of these, those which

augment by the present
Thus i|*<FnT,
rule, which being specifically ordained, cannot be again dropped.
ic
as *<tffw>
conjugated
Those
have
no
nasal,
are
&c
which
3*fif?T, 3 TTW, C^frf
31. 57T, 3*<tf
have a
3<*m
32.
nasal, lose
CTrf?r
ii
3* 3?*
by VI.
%<W,
tpfjt
JTfsr
11
11
33. SPT, 3J**T
4. 24,
^%1^, ^TT% and ^pTRT
*r%3R5frfe
ffrr:
it
^fRr^
and then get the
ll
pr
II
^rfa
Trfer, ^rer:, srfe
11
s^Frattf ?fr|nw *Tcra
3*rrT*fr *r^f?r
11
11
The augment
g** is added after the vowel of

an affix, beginning with any
before
^st,
consonant, other than a semi-vowel or a nasal.
As T^rKT, *rc?r + ?r^(no SI by VII. 2. 10), add **.= *T1 5* ;* + , elide sr by
VIII. 2. 29, change sr to av, and ^ to anusvara, which then becomes ^
TsFTfw,
60.
the root in
*t^ and
ll
T^tRs^H,
*IST:
and
*rer,
srsr^T^,
order that
it
the
3*
is
But *rsptw and
and *t?t (VI.

supposed to be placed the last consonant
*Tfi.and sresg*
ma, get elded.
ll
^RTrrr,
4. 32).
in
In
iâ, in
Bk. VII. Cn.
64.
^Rnnft?f%
%\
11
in
^7,
11
^r^ft:,
3?f%
1339
11
The augment 31
61.
vowel
3* Augment.
and *n*
added after the rootbeginning with a con-
is
before affixes
sonant.
Thus
5CT
STO*
t?W ifa
*?*njp, OTS*ft,
Though
II
Why
augment.
TOT,
^%
3P*Tf
^T^,
the ff^r rule
do we say before an
II
5TT3T%,
subsequent,
is
WWW-,
beginning with a vowel
affix
ZR
II
<r^n%
II
*,
II
sfa:, st
%fe, ra:
affix
The augment gn is not added

beginning with the augment j?s, except
As
?[fw, *fagpT,
ttfiW
to
Tni foS. fa?l
I.
2. 5),
sr of the
When 3*
and therefore the

Perfect
is
added
^ is
then the
is
elided, the 3?
pt is elided
in the Perfect.
it
are not
not elided by VI.
the affix being expressly taught with an indicatory

reduplicate
changed into
q",
by the expressly taught
then f?
before
affixes,
and
becomes a root ending
we have M^** Nom.
added,
is
^,
but *?sftw, *r^'< before Anit
tfsffi^rw,
the Perfect.
in
a conjunct consonant, and therefore the faz affixes after

the affix
Observe
II
62.
**CRre,
'
II
%^r%ft ^r:
an
SmpT^ft, ***-
superseded by the
it is
is
3?
f^7?l
in
snrat-
But when
Here
4. 24.
Sg. Kft^Fl "
the
^ is
The
elided.
added, then
|w
and
f^ffj u
Why
was not the sutra made as frcr RT

when by so doing, the
augment 3H. would have been added only in the Perfect when it had 5? and
no where else ? This form of sutra would have also meant that 31. would be
added in that Perfect which took f^ and in no other Perfect, while cases other
than Perfect might take it. That being so, there would be no |* in **5^,
while
*farT!"
would require 3^
wsrforcf:
Wft'>
11
wjfTO
ll
t\
\\
See, however, the
II
qrrfa
II
kSt, 3? 5PT, fesft
*T*if$i% surfr q-^m T^fr
63.
Mahabhashya
The augment
3*^% >refrr
gq;
is
added
for the contra.
11
11
after the
vowel of
the root ^w before an affix beginning with a vowel, but not

before the vikarana ^pr or the affixes of the Perfect.
Thus
*T% in
But 3mSTTWTTWEr, Sirwr tS%

and smsqr before an affix beginning with a con
3T!T*TOnt, 3TRIVT^:, ^TT^T^HT,
and 3m^"
fpr,
in fo^,
sonant.
<3HST
4
II
&
II
^TT%
||
<*5n,
II
3* Augment.
1340
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
67.
So also of srw, before an affix: beginning with

a vowel, with the exception of st* and fe, there is the aug64.
ment
j*t
II
As
r?*vraf^,
3**tsj?:,
f^w**
srni^tfr,
***t
^^
But <*h% with
11
5PT,
and %>t in the Perfect, and ^*^r before an affix beginning with a consonant.
The
from the
separation of this
last,
the sake of the subsequent
for
is
aphorisms.
srr#r
far
11
<T3Tft
II
The augment
65.
srr,
stt^:,
II
far
11
3*t
is
before an affix beginning with
As
The
STFTrofr TP U
and by so doing
becomes
?*w
II
added before the addition of the
5JT is
fjwt
added to sw preceded by
**
and thus
loses its character of
affix,
having a
sr, and therefore by III. 1. 124, we shall have cr^qr affix, and not
by III. 1. 98. Had the 5^ been added after the addition of the affix,
would be added by III. 1. 98. Though in both cases the form will
penultimate
zrj affix
then ?rj
be aTO**3r, the difference

acute on the
thus instead of
STRrarf
Why
explain
srraro
3rHI**?T
fa\ svar
may
(by VI.
I.
accent
the
in
would throw the
3j?j
while the word has svarita on the
213 and VI.
2.
which
139),
gives,
final;
we have
).
do we say
srrcrepr
be
will
syllable (^rs^R":
first
3TR*^:
'
How do
you
All rules are optionally applied in the Vedas.
Or
when preceded by stt
'
Observe
p$*sr
II
be explained by saying that the fw having been added,
is
again
dropped.
^TTrMVl^NIH
ffrp
11
sttsttot
II
ZZ
<T3TPt
II
?s*p srarcrrar
66.
by ^T, before
II
*rereFTRT
^<TTc*, SHn^r^T^
^^Rrflsr^^q^ ^pimt
II
*r?rfrr
11
The augment 3** is added to sw preceded

when the reference is to something praise*T
?
worthy.
As
These words are formed by

STtWffR ^RFR
and have svarita on the final. Why do we say 'when referring to something praise worthy'? Observe sqwprcTRC I*n*r?* l%r%^, this is formed with the
3TO*>qr *WTr Rsjr,
ll
ogjj
affix (III.
1.
93).
^roWNrcsraft:
fprr-
11
11
*\s
II
q^rft
3"<t *Fifa;,
t^t 3*rr*prr *^fcr
II
TT^rnffTn^c Got mzFrfT'
67.
The augment g*
a Preposition, before the affixes
*$r*r
srsfr:
11
11
is
to
added, to
(III. 3.
^w
preceded by
126) and *5r
II
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
Thus
1* Augment.
70]
scope of VII.
rule,
and
trsi,
the root ppt gets the
restricts the
Qip&fi $&RSVFttK
5T
11
1.
This
m?7**r: H
II
64.
Niyama
and
137*
preceded by a
it is
**PTT ^T?T H
fq^SW,
T^rft
II
is
Before the vowel affixes
II
^, 3FTTH, êST?^
mot ihitht ?t *r^
not added to sw before
?T,
II
5f^^Hr-2Tr%^p-^rT%'T^r'kf?rrr-^ri'T^w ^^wq^fr.-
The augment gqc is

when g or 5: alone (without another
68.
^55 and
augment 3* only then when
Preposition, and not otherwise, as
ffrr
JRT
fq-^Tr^r:, ^TrT^T:, 5*JR**T:,
1341
>*s^
11
Preposition
along with them) precede the root.

Thus ?WT,
%sp*
used
is
3&T*T,
r*r>rr>
the sutra because
in
But
^f*T!
II
g^sr
is
g!FJ*>T:,
in the
%WrW.
The word
II
Instrumental case and not in
Had
it been in the Ablative, there would have been no necesword %^7, for the rule would not have applied, when a
preposition intervened between these and the root.
In arfalpPT*, the word
when 3?RT is used as an
3TT% is not an Upasarga but a Karmapravachaniya
the Ablative.
sity of using the
If the words fj^sfa. be construed as Ablative,

Upasarga, we have 3Tf%^F>T:
then also the use of %^?$ is for a purpose similar to that as above.
II
fawnrr r%*o5g<fr:
qfrf*
f^r vw* f ^Rrarflfarer ^rjp^^ftr
ff%;
11
11
II
ft *rm,
feK>
*QS&t-
II
11
ii
The
69.
g?j
is
optionally added to 55W not pre-
ceded by a Preposition,
Absolutive nrgs*
Thus
the
raw Aorist and the
II
or sraf**,
3Tr5TPT
before
?*r*Tr*PT*
or
^^h't
allowed where there
II
This
a Vj/avasthita-
is
no Preposition along with the

root; and no option is allowed but 3* must be added, when a Preposition
precedes: as srn#H, !T3WT
vibhasha, the option
is
is
II
JCTPlr, si
ff%5
II
vimr:
ll
SfTTrTPTffRr
vrr^f^TrTTfms^^^
ST^R^R T^r^TTT% *T^R
Whatever has an indicatory
70.
(with the exception of a root), and the stem

the
augment 3^
Thus
it is
*Tcfg
declined as
t^,
TsrnTT,
Why
Observe
5^,
in the
t^t
11
*re?#t,
**FrP
II
3T>^r-srr^,
s<sr|r,
s*r^
3^,
35
and
(srsjfcr)
by the Unadi
affix
;g^pr,
qg^ 5^,
WTT^T,
$&m.
Similarly
m^r,
ht^t:
do we say having an indicatory

*
g-
55
get
strong cases.
has an indicatory 3, formed
*mn,
II
and
;
11
%zs vowel or the
stem 3j^
'
3* Augment.
i34 2
Bk. VII. Ch.
Why
73.
stot
do we say in strong cases ? Observe *rerp T*3, WTCP <T*3
gets
root is mentioned for the sake of niyama,
e. of the roots, only 3T>^
*r
and no other root. Therefore SSsTTSTrj;, <T<fcsR[ formed from the roots $RJ and t^fj
having indicatory 3 U (See III. 2. 76, IV. 1. 6, VIII. 2. 72). For the lengthening in
&c, see VI. 4. 10, 14: the îs elided in vn& by VIII. 2. 23,
and ^ becomes IF by VIII. 2. 62 and rj in
by VI II. 2. 72.
Why do we say 'with the exception of a root when by the mere fact of
II
i.
w*
'
including one root ar^
other roots would have been excluded from the
all
The
mention of st^rt shows that the prohibition

and not to those roots which are derived from nouns.
Here itrst is a derivative root,
Thus MH Tt lH-ga r% = *Tr*rerfrT formed by 33^
in its primitive state it was a noun. The prohibition of 3T*TRP will not apply to
scope of this sutra
specific
applies to original roots,
ll
and
this root
by VI.
will
|it
4.
we have TRR
Thus
be added.
48) = irr*R^+
(the
*tr?t +
elided
is
f|^= fre^ +
by VI.
(the a*
Now
4. 50).
is
dropped
is
added 3^ and
^rftr
3^:, *x *t*tt
3ft3i*r *l
*ir*Rr
*reR
toV
st^trwr
u
^NSRrsr
fT%-The nominal stem gsr gets before the strong
71.
ll
ll
ll
ll
11
when it does not stand in a compound.

cases the augment
Thus 3^ (VIII. 2. 23, 62) 3*^, 53^:; but srag^, 3T*3rg^r, aro^sr:
The root 5^ CTTPlt (Divadi 68) is not to be taken here
in a compound.
But nr* 3Tt (Rudhadi 7) is to be taker..
H
therefore not here ^FrnrsTT
;
^^
srjppu^r ir^sr:
ff%: u ^Jsprpi
^rf%3?*
11
II
^rs^s
Tt^ jtr%^t
72.
*3^r, ?rw, sra:

<TTn%
s^trwr q^r 3*r*Rr h^tr
srr* u ar^r^ 3*R^f=5^f?ar
II
II
^rrranRTW
^r
11
The augment 3^
stem ending
or a semivowel), or ending
in a
to a Neuter
Thus
(VI.
**fafar, srfiFrr
II
11
is
added
11
in the strong cases
consonant (other than a nasal
in a vowel.
4.
10) arerh%,
t^rt
ttr, ^tfr
(VI.
4. 8),
Why of a Neuter ? Observe 3TP?ri^ WT3PT

Why do we
*RJR
say not ending in a semivowel or a nasal ? Observe *ggrc, *$ft, Epraftf*,
A neuter having an indicatory 3^ vowel gets 3*
c^^rR, 3T?rR (VII. I. 98).
surfa,
'
II
'
ll
'
by
'
this sutra
and not by VII.
I.
70, as that
is
superseded by
As %m%, *m%
subsequent.
Vdrt
Prohibition
ll
f^t sf%
faWr
11
vs3 H
being the
ll
Some would have ^ added between ^ and

arePTf^fa
See I. 4. 13.
ar|T>*T aTSTTf^rR
>
this, this
g^far fi^f^T 5rrgI<T^TR

should be stated with regard to *gffr
q^fffti
11
w:,
srfe, forafr
as ^?Sr
of this word, as
ll
Bk. VII.
Cii.
!.
73
3* Augment.
3^ ^r^
3 *? f%
fenrfr ?ft
The augment gn
73.
ending
3ttct$
a simple vowel, except
in
1343
11
added to a Neuter-stem
is
before a case-affix begin-
sr,
ning with a vowel.

Thus
of ?"
Why " with the ex^5%, gxf$9r

The phrase "before an affix beginning
^gur,
3*!Soft,
srgift,
srgrjfr,
11
Observe p^, <fr%"

with a vowel " is employed here for the sake of the subsequent sutras like
VII. 1. 75. Here we could have dispensed with it for before affixes beginnception
II
ing
with a consonant,
that
it
here
serves
is
would be elided by VIII.
$jt
we can form ^
that
srqt
or
The only
2. 7.
sjtj
in the
object
Vocative sin-
For had we sr^ + sr in the vocative, the form would have been 1
^ would not be elided here, see VIII. 2. 8.
gular.
^^
like"! CTSFjt, for
If
be objected that by the sutra ^ &H 3 Tfr<;q
it
elided in the Vocative,
is
it
will leave
when the
63)
(I. 1
affix
no trace behind, and there being no
We
not be added in the Vocative.

reply that this very
word
this
sutra
indicates
of
the
srîn
(jnapaka) that the rule
employment
affix at all, <pi will
prohibiting the effect of an affix
though the
affix
is
elided,
have the guna of the vowel
Why
Observe
it
1.
63) does not apply here.
produces
its effect in
spite of
I.
1.
Therefore,
63,
asf =^r !>y VII. 3. 108.

the word ftHTfir when a case-affix
in the
have we used
g*f*/|
(I.
and we
Vocative,
'
*gW> where the taddhita
affix ajsîs
added
to
follows
5x5^ by IV.
'
3.
139.
The employment of the words ^: srr% in the sutra shows

come when the affix begins with a consonant, as ^ftp-atf, ^Rgq:
says, the employment of 3TT^ in the sutra is useless for $n may
Kdrikcc
that^nj will not
An
objector
II
be added even before an

it, it
will
affix
beginning with a consonant, for having added
be elided by ^ ârfftprifcftra (VIII. 2. 7). We reply, yes it can be

how will you then manage the accent ? For in q^r^psrf, if>*nrsf*r:,
so done, but
the accent
pound, the
ends
in
not end
an
is
regulated by the rule VI.
first
member
far vowel.
in 5 sf
but
in
not elided the accent

:
is
its
2.
29 which says that in a Dvigu com-
original accent
if
the second
member
But if there was a 31*, then the second member would

^: and the elision of this ^ by VII. 2. 7. .is asiddha for
the purposes of accent.
or q->xr^5^
preserves
by VI.
is
2.
To
this the objector answers,
governed by VI.
29,
why
should
objection about accent has no strength.
2.
it
that even where ^ is

namely the accent of 7*^3%
not be so when ^ is elided. So the
29,
3* Augment.
1344
Well
if
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
74.
* be added even before consonant-affix, then there will arise
+ ^f = 3rfaft^+
by adding s?*). Here rule VII. 2. 85

ft and ^, therefore % of ft is not
changed to 3TT, and therefore we cannot get the proper from srrercrat Moreover in f^n^ + ^T, the nr cannot be changed to f?r*j if there be *n*, and so we
anomaly:
cannot apply
arfrfR
this
because
*3T
^ intervenes between
cannot get the form ntai^pqi 3rgpnff?nTW

To this it is answered, the change of 5 into 3?T in the case of ft,
and the substitution of psr^ for f% will take place even when the 3* intervenes,
II
And
on the maxim f^FR%srH?5TraT 8TCR?cr3[ crq[ rPTPsffa?r ^ ^f^m^J^^TWH.
3?fff ft + *3T, and frarW + >*lT, here 3^ is superseded by
this is done in this way
the subsequent rule requiring 3TT and m|T respectively.
If this be so, then the employment of 3?^ in the sutra is for the sake
II
3* by 37 (VII. 1. 54). Thus 5? has unrestricted scope

and
But in
3* has unrestricted scope in ^5% and
in sr^mt, sfHprr,
ire and
present themselves. Here however irq is
both
*r* a ri , and 5r?pTre,
superseded by *re by purva-vipratishedha and so there is lengthening of the
of the supersession of
5^
l.
II
is indicated by the employment of 3?^r,

and
of
equal force, had there been no 3?% *H
for ire and .3* being both anitya
would have come and not ire
But this is also not valid, for ire would have to be added, even if there
had been no *f%\n the sutra.
vowel by VI.
4. 3.
This supersession
11
The employment of ar^r is for the sake of the subsequent sutra VII.
The only object that ar^ serves in this sutra, is in forming the vocative
75.
^rqr as
shown above.
^rmfgri srrfacTj^
ffrT:
II
H^Tfl^
3^1^^
ft*TFfi*T5TrR3 ^rf^T^^fifJ
vs*
11
ll
q<nfa
*T3iTrS5fPT*r?<T
ll
*rforf^,
?rrft<T
*Tn^*3PTRfo Jîf *^TI%
neuter stem ending in a vowel, except st,

of which there exists an equivalent, uniform masculine, is
treated like the masculine, in the opinion of Galava, beforethe vowel beginning affixes of the Instrumental and the cases
74.
that follow it.

As in the Masculine there is no shortening, nor the addition of 3*,
As qr*PTT is the equivalent, uniform masculine of the neuter
so here also.
form *TPTT% we have either Ins. STRFPTT or iTwqr wrgPT^r, the Ins. Sg. of
sfPifaT n.
Similarly Dat. sn^rt^T or
"mwq
srrsim^Miai
Abl.
?rr*iPTJfr
or
mwqf
Gen. Du. OT*lfHW$l!&<**r:

grgju^jTFj-, Gen. Sg. ?TPTf*Hr or tnwqt HISM$?sra,
mzm^mw h Loc. iiwfapr or ^re^
Gen. Pi. npr#ri or
or m*vnv
or
Similarly Ins. fjflRT (same form in mas. and neu.), Dat.
mwm
WIZWW*
Du.
3jfq%; Abl. and Gen. ^j%: orfjf%FP Gen.
3^
^j^p orfjfw: Loc. sjvfr or uf^firil
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
76
3tt^ Substitution.
1345
Why
do we say after the 3rd case and the rest ? Observe trr^Tfapft
and ^jp^fr Norn. dual. Why do we say having an appropriate masculine
of the same form and meaning? Observe srjjor, *T<JJT
Why have we only one
form <ft^T ^^ra, when qtTgtsT: and qr<5q^ show that qr^j has a masculine form
also.
The word qr^ is masculine when it applies to trees and qrg is neuter
H!4J"l$^,
11
',
when
so this word qf cannot be said to be vnftlf$Hff the

not having the same meaning as the neuter q>^
See VI. 3. 34.
refers to
it
masculine
qrjjj
fruits
'
11
Why do we say "ending in a vowel except sr"? Observe ^frf^qr

and ^r<*req STST'Tl^ the Ins. &c of gfoRqr will not be the Ins. &c of
The latter will have only one form cfiRFSqJT arrsw^FR' &c.
c^c^wq
Before case affixes beginning with a consonant we have one form
grrgPP
II
II
only, as srpriV^T
<ar
a"!$fllqPT
II
srft^fir^^^TnRf ^ttt:
miK, 3T^, ^^TtT
ffrr:
^ft
11
sm*? sfa
*refrr, *r
f^^ri
sr^rqr 3?Rt
^rîrfr >TÎ%
II
<ittr
^fcr,
?*v&x, ^fa,
II
sr-
5rq*rerct
f errant* T*rrr?s fwrRS
s^fl^^r-
q*rfr
II
The
75.
vsx
II
sr^
acutely accented
(sTrns?)
substi-
is
tuted for the finals of asthi, dadhi, sakthi and akshi, before
the affixes of the Instrumental and the cases that follow
it,
which begin with a vowel.

Thus
&c have
3THJT,
acute on
3T^f
the
*w
SOT,
anudatta, but for this sutra.

the 3T (VI.
4.
134), the
!, *T^f,
udatta
&c
asthi
OTgPPT,
'
The words sn%r

3T^f
would have been also
ll
3^^
The stem
a?
getting the designation >t, we elide

being thus elided, the case-ending, which was
anudatta before, now becomes udatta (VI.

1
3T*orr,
syllable, the substitute
first
The stems ending with

this rule.
As PHTTCOT
161).
1.
and though not neuter, are governed by
fq^^T
II
Why
Observe srfît, ^f^ft

8Tf**ror*, ivz^vz
'before the affixes of the Instrumental

II
and the rest?'
Before affixes beginning with a consonant,
we have
11
^"Flfa
fT%:
II
TW%
VSS
II
*T3Tfr
3TR?TffaST3Ul$0TPFn *fW(Pf
sakthi
'
and
'
ll
33%
In the Veda
76.
1
II
5^r,
I
3TFq,
^*T&
11
R" faff^rT^rJ^^Tfq $5$r{
also, the
stems
akshi \ are found to take the
II
asthi',
'
'
dadhi \
substitute
3?^,
before endings other than those mentioned above.

Thus the
substitute
Veda it comes
V$J S>fNt 3T**Tf>Ti, Hj
vowel.
In the
the Instrumental &c.

3T**?rR in
is
ordained before endings
WW'
II
The
substitute
In the Vedic literature
3T**TTp^T sjfrre
ll
beginning with a
before affixes beginning with a consonant.
The
substitute
it is
is
ordained to
found
in the
comes before
come
Ace. &c.
As
after
As
c,ase-endings (vi-
3* Augment.
1346
Vedic
bhakti), in the
literature
ings, as 3TWrf?Tr ^tj^r,
f
ff%:
^ fiîf
VSVS
11
See VI.
f ^, fi^ra%
,
II
*nrt%,
acutely accented $
and akshi,
final of asthi, dadhi, sakthi
. 80.
I.
which are not case-end-
affixes
II
swtffanfoRraWr
f?pra
The
77.
comes before
^rft
||
T^r^^fRT
ff^^-%
11
it
sreHfot *^*TT fa*ri%
Hk. VII. Ch.
176.
1.
II
sNfanr:
11
substituted for the
is
in the
Veda, when the
case-affixes of the dual follow.
As
ment
VII.
jjJT is
I.
73,
In arsft the aug3r|ft % TOftff^ 5n^fa

srlirap* % Tu^fiT^r*
not added to the stem before the vowel-beginning ending, because
ll
which ordained 3*,
once superseded,
ff%:
11
superseded by the present sutra, and being
is
superseded for good. (^^^
it is
TORrei^g:
11
11
iparcrrr^rf ttcto
ll
*x*&*
The
78.
T^rfff
^nt
11
r\$\ fafifift
*, awrccfrac, srg-
qgJVli 95?f*m%*)
II
11
11
sri (^T^r 3**^),
Participial-affix
does not
take the augment gp* after a reduplicate stem.

Thus ?^, f^lr, ***:, 3wrq[, 3f^, :*rcrcT:, ^nn^, ^r*mr, sjpw
This
11
is
and applies of course to sarvanamasthana or

strong cases. The 3H is to be read into this sutra from VII. 1. 70 for the
negation of this sutra cannot apply to f taught in the preceding sutra, for %
an exception to VII.
1.
70,
is
never ordained after
vene, yet 3t
is
ffrf
II
augment 3^
ii
80.
affix
the
3T
or
f^TI^; f^f?T or
fttfsrrfrarffi,
Neuter nouns.
W^T
<T3Tfa H *XFl, *ft *vft',
II
^^f 3tpt% wW
When
srr, it
neutral
or
*rctf?cT J^rfa,
Sim*
the affix
may
tfprof: <rc-r
5T<z
comes
optionally
case-ending
sft
3**
it
after a verbal
stem
take the augment gn,
and before the feminine
II
Thus g^fr
*mft
II
3Tf^rrrfyriTT^^
before
ôptionally takes the
Participial-affix
?3f5rT,
II
This of course applies to sarvanamasthana or strong cases.
l^Trf^ll
ending in
inter-
11
ii
after a reduplicate stem, in
<^ or
STT^fa^b*
fnr:
though several other operations
jt^tr err, ^rg^rera

^ ^Tf^^^rT^TÎ ^STÎ 3T ^TTW *T^
The
79.
or SuTf^T
therefore,
n vss. n
3**3*31 1ftlTHI
Thus
to be read here.
m 5*3^*^
:
satri
srrsr>ft,
f^s or g^cft $%,
g^rfr
WRrejF^w^r #r
5*r5rtfr,
5^ stt^, armf
^rc^rfr f%, ^rf^^m- f**, ^frorfr

^q ^f^rw^r^r?* 3,-h ito *rffu% *r
*r?<ft srrgntft,
f^,
arsKt ^ft^^y
*r-?ft
srrgroft n
3^ 3^*, zwz ^tpto
Bk. VII. Ch.
8i
The form
added by
is
5^?fr the 3T
III.
3* Augment
gfcft is thus evolved,
i.
77,
&
+ 3T becoming
#T?;by IV.
3T
by the
in 3T,
and therefore
The vikarana 5f
g? f 5T + 5T* + ^T<
This is equal to ST + st + st^+S =
II
6.
I.
rule of
qwr
now
there
ekades"a operation being antaranga,
stem ending
1347
ekado'a (VI.
is
no
sutra will not apply.
this
i.
This
97).
coming after a
If you say the
^Tf affix
by VI. 1. 85, we reply, that the

antachvadbhava of that sutra will not apply when simultaneous operations
are to be performed, for 3? cannot be said at one and the same time as the
final of 5^ and the beginning of sp* ( STf ). If you say the maxim 5rnn%sjrRr%
grrxf Tf^f: (when a word cannot denote something which actually is what is
expressed by the word} it must be understood to denote something which
formerly was what is expressed by it), will apply here, and that 5? will be
considered to end in 3T because it formerly did end in the affix 3? of ^; we
ekadesa will be considered as the final of ?
reply that then the present rule should apply to forms like
here also
in
3T,
we have
because
The maxim
To
means
it
3??
+ *r*
had the
^r
affix
after
though
it,
some
solve these objections,
in 3T, to the portion
r[
^rf,
3* is added
to a
say, that the
of the affix ^rf there
stem ending
in
^ft
and
?rfr
when
in
5ft
sr.
Why
is
added
here.
was afterwards
elided.
word
in
or
?r<fr
is
this
'after
sutra
a stein
added jf*r.' Others say,

*rf and the sutra means
;
affixes follow after a
considered to
come
stem
after the
do we say "after st"? Observe &<fr and ?^r, no optional

3*
Why do we say "tfr and ^fr following"? Observe nfrTR and
5Rjpreh$STO
81.
II
^?
II
When
T^Tft
*z;
11
si?,
the affix
ending in the vikaranas sn?
augment
is
and not
Therefore in g^fr the affix f

8T of g$, the intervening F not debarring it.
ending
it
such as *' and the sutra means
the word arr^ in the sutra qualifies

"
For
&c.
quoted, therefore, proves too much.
'a portion of the affix
ending
sr^fl" st<tt
^fT + 5T| + #pr; and 3TS should be considered to end
^Rt:,
srcj
wifl
fiftro
comes
*PF*;,
it
I)
after a verbal
stem
invariably takes the
before the neutral case-ending
3ft (f),
and the
feminine ending $ (Nadl).

WT^^ft
II
Thus v^Rft fw, T^rstfl- wwft <Nnft

The word pt?T stops the anuvritti
5
#, il&Fft mm*ft, tfhspft 5%,

of ^r (VII.
1.
79).
sfarcft
3* Augment.
1348
fj
of the
Nom.
By
VII.
augment
sr^T^f gets the
82.
1.
Sg. (and Vocative).

98 SRfS gets the augment
and
3T in
By
the present sutra
Vocative Singular (VII.
1.
I. .
85
gq; before the ending
3Tr after
in
the strong cases,
thus becomes snr^n? and 3FT^3ji
It
99).
Bk. VII. Ch.
The case-ending is
and 3T
by VI. 1. 68, and the final s by VIII. 2. 23. Thus we have 3Rfn*
Nominative Singular and sttc^. in the Vocative Singular. The augments
8TPT and 3T*t (VII. 1.98,99), do not supersede |w, nor are they superseded
by 3* u
added
is
after this 3TT
II
elided
some read the
In this sutra,
annvritti of
sflTt
from VII.
80; and by
I.
so doing they add
to that form of ST^fS where there is

3TT or 3T,
namely, after the word has taken the augment 3TPI in the nominative singular
by VII.
1.
and
98,
not debar arr* or

is
tance,
or 3T*
in the
nor
3?*r,
though one
9TTr (
3T*r
an
is
Vocative by VII.
a general rule and the other

)
1.
is
Therefore, the
99.
debarred by arnr or
it
3t*t
II
*nr
does
Others hold that
a particular rule, yet in this ins-
and ^w are applied simultaneously, one not debarring the
is no relationship of 3T*2T and ^r^"^ among them, just as in

f^ffant the rule of lengthening (VI. 4. 16) and reduplication are applied
other, there
simultaneously, one not debarring the other.

first
3TP because
maxim
of g?p
subsequent, and them
it is
&c
*reT3fm?TPT
by VII.
I.
we add
72 on the
II
sÊ^rosÊrrof ^?^r%
^r%
^^f fff anETTfWn^,
In
we add
ii
qr^rft
11
11
*$,
*^h
^srenrara:,
11
^5T
83.
before the affix 13
^^^
and ^cree; take the augment 3^

(Nominative and Vocative Singular) in
the Veda.
Thus fcf
III. 2. 60),
The lengthening
i%3r a*R*
ffrr*.
ii
WW>
II
in
(Nom.
The ^ of f^T
*W* ^P, ^mr^
2. 23
and ^ substituted for ^ by
II
VIII.
2.
62.
substituted for the final of fâ before
nr^TR
11
f^p,
sfrft^raTi^tfr
3?r is
(formed by
11
^rerând ^rTTTîs through VI.
flfa^rc* r <rwr
84.
*tt$W>
by VIII.
elided
is
w*t
4. 14.
11
11
Sg. and Voc. Sg).
As
There is a nominal-stem ff* which

indicatory letters, annexed to it.
The root f%\ is not
*Sv
11
is
to
taken here.
It
has no
be taken here, as
it
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
89
Substitution.
3T3;
has the indicatory letter 3 and
is
exhibited
in
nominal-stem derived from f$f does not take

is 93: as 3T^s (See VI. 4. 19, and VI. 1. 131).
,
85.
(srr)
srra;
'mathm' and
the Nom. Sg).
thin
As
T?*TT:,
^^T:, SE?j$Tp
yet the substitute

q-
see VII.
sr*rTRT *t^jt
1.
**
3TT is
"
>
but
3T,
the
the sthanin here
is
The
ll
Sg. of which
ending
the
before
a nasal
letter
is
which
not to be taken on the
'
is
pa(of
( i.e. sj),
For
maxim vnWTRT
taught in a rule does not denote the
it.'
^
%W,
T^TT%
Ttsr^^TTH^r^ wft srr^rmw *htr
5mcH3HW*SIT%
fr%:
nasal 3?r
homogeneous with
letters
srf,
Nom.
not to be nasalised, but to be pronounced purely.
The
87.
*^T
Though
11
the Dhatupatha as fz%
is
rbhukshin
<
'
1349
II
II
II
STc*,
^^TT^^T^
II
11
ii
86.
sr is
and rbhukshin,'
Thus
substituted for the % of
^g^TR^W
q;?rr:, <t?*trt,
^T q"foj
Though
pathin, mathin
in the strong cases.
vvm-,
<t?*tr*,
^h^ ^W^r, ^gw^, ^w^*
*rTr#r,
'
R*R?R
fr^f^7?T-
<t?*trt,
t?*tt:,
t^^trt,
*ns<rHfra sttTsr
*t?*ir:, qstrR'T,
3tRR s*tofr Î^w*,
11
was here, tne separate mention of^rqîs

9: by which in the case of s^^flR, we have two forms,
the anuvritti of
for the sake of VI. 4.
>
scg^rr'T and se^^jt

srr?r. 11 *^s 11
q^rft
3n;r
it
ll
jsp,
thin in the strong cases.

As q;?rr:, *t??trt, <t?*tr:,
ffan
II
II
n^x., T??rr#r i?*tr:
q^TR
II
11
*reT, :, ^rtq:
^r*RT?rw h^tr
88.
The last vowel,
Tvsr^RT
ii
lows
^STT.
ll
?îs substituted for the sôf pathin and ma-
87.
*re*T
st?t:
||
11
dropped
with the consonant that
fol-
mathin and rbhukshin, before

a weak case-ending beginning with a vowel (before which the
stem is called Bha I. 4. 18).
As q*T:, q-^r, ^, TO, TOT, TO, gigf:, ssgsrr, s&g%
The anuvritti of
it,
is
in pathin,
II
sarvanamastharia, of course,
is
inappropriate here
current as will be seen in the next sutra.
2
3frT-
*ft
ii
s~^ n
3*r ?<*r^[
^rf>
II
3^r:,
arg^
II
st^trtor m$\ sfi^*RTrWr *^r
ii
though
its
anuvritti
is
N*
1350
89.
sr^ff (TO;)
Bk. VII. Ch.
I. .
91.
substituted for the final of ja;
is
strong cases.
in; the
The word
tj?r is
derived from qr (to protect) + f*u^(Un IV.
being changed to anusvara.
form
Operations.
$JiCT
the
after ar (VII.
3"
of BTfpF indicates that
70), so
1.
^ of Jct
So when
we have
gqr^,
TOrf^r^rn"'
be added
^ should
3?ct
in the
-178),
we
strong cases
in
incipient stage before the
its
otherwise the accent will be wrong.
the *
get the
sprrsr, 3*ifcr- H
This substitution must take place

affixes are added,
replaced by
is
The
compounds have acute on the final, (VI. 1. 223), therefore, <t**T5*t has acute on 5.
and in the Nominative Singular qr*np?r^ the acute will remain on g, but it is
The simple word tpir^ of
intended that it should be on *rr, thus T^^f^
II
course, has accent on

ttrtt f&rac
II
5-0
90.
after
jtt
As
II
<T^Tft
II
II
trTt, ftns
The endings
of
II
strong cases are
the
fSrac
II
That
&c.
these affixes produce
is,
alp, 'Trtr, Tr^:
to the form
*Tf,
Why have
ll
and not when
all
the fn^ operations
we added a
fj[
assumes the form
it
after
*fr ?
such as Vriddhi
The
rule applies
5, as in npnj:, ?T^3j:
How
II
do you explain the forms % f^npTf, ? OT<**TO ? This is done on

i^f^PTHrfa Rfeara, (when an operation which is taught in
the Angadhikara VI. 4. VII. 4. has taken place, and another operation of
the Angadhikara is subsequently applicable, this latter operation is not allowed to take place). For when Guna once takes place before the Vocative and
the Nominative Plural affix by VII. 3. 108-109, the p^f operation of this rule
the
maxim 3T^f%
will not again take place.
Or
in the sutra'
iffa:
may be
Sasthi (a Genitive denoting a general
bandha-lakshana
meaning will be " that sarvanamasthana
affix,
construed as
relation):
Sam-
and the
denoting singular, dual, plural,
which refers to the meaning of i?r or cow.' While in f%nnj, the sarvanamasthana affix does not refer to cow but to another object, namely to a 'person
'
'
'
'
who
possesses brindled cows.
Some
as 33P
read the sutra as
sjrft, s*re
?j[
in
ifr?!
in this
arrrT: faffc
view
is
for specification only.
so that the rule will apply to
If the reading be taken
rrrcP,
then
we extend
sft
also:
this rule to
by taking rf as merely illustrative of all words ending in a?r and this

in ifr^, for the m& rule applies to letters, and not to
is done by the letter ^
and includes ifr and words ending in aft H
means
words, so that *TR:
ijjr
also,
OT^THTt ST
II
>?
II
^Tf^
II
<JTH
^WT,
^r
II
Bk. VI. I Ch.
I.
95
Some Substitutions.
The ending
91.
fect optionally acts as
The Vriddhi
*n^w^
II
^TT^r
ll
After ^Pa
92.
of the First Pers. Sg. in the Per-
optional, as sr^ *t*K or q^T, 3T? TTr^T or
is
**
11
fi^
1351
w wt%^x
*^j:,
11
qr^
the endings of the strong cases,
with the exception of the Vocative singular, are far^

That is, they cause Vriddhi. As mgtm, *m*', but> *r% n
Bnr^^lr
fnr:
ll
ll
w^,
sfr
mm snfeswn^xx ^nr
93.
before
t^ttH
ll
^rTsrsrs^ tr
11
II
sT^tf (sr^)
11
st
%?g*rs*: ^rf r^rf
substituted
is
II
of the Nominative Singular,
*nrf?r
11
for the
$ of
^f^
(but not in the Voca-
tive Singular).
As
?ff
13m, but
^r%
jsrcsptsn^tf
^rrffore.
11
11
^riifiair
qrrr*
^mSiîwts^ ? s^%
ssftcp
*rra
ftrw
ajar
Anan
94.
ll
sbc^,
tstto;
^ ftîsrircft
i3rroi%Snfrn" TOfczft
f^r ?T5sr% s*irsrT?f ^te
(arq;)
is
3^^: bt^ht^ ^
11
11
substituted
for
the
final
of
the stems ending in
?, as well as for the final of uganas,

purudanSas, and anehas, in the Nominative Singular ( but
not in the Vocative Singular).

As cffrrr, frrr, *rrrr, fr<rr, *r?rr, s^nrr, ssfsrr,
have? =?<?:,% *rrrT:, Hrf: gfhP, T^: and SSR
3T%?r
11
In the Voc. Sg.
we
II
3TT^
Vdrt
as%S3PT*, the
g^H"
Thus
final
it
and f 3*ra
Kdrikd
!
is
^ not
being elided (See VIII.
gr^FTtr in
has three forms in the Vocative Singular
the Voc. Sg. also
Otherwise we have
2. 8).
:
as ?
^rft, ? s^re,
11
In the vocative, the word sâr has three forms,
(1)
ending
when sr^ is not added, (2) ending in ^, when * is not elided, (3) ending
This is the opinion of the Acharya Madhyandini.
in 3T when ^ is elided.
So also according to the Acharya Vaiyaghrapadya, (the best of the Vyaghrapadas), there is Guna in the Neuter of the stems ending in. 5^7 vowels
as
in
ct
^r
11
The ^
^^r^rf
in
11
%^ is
.*
11
for the
q^rfa
sake of distinctness.
II
<r*î,
^tf
II
11
^ Augment.
1352
The word
95.
a jackal
sjfre
Bk. VII.
strong cases (with the exception of Vocative

it
ended
in <j^ (^)
The word set? is
WIEKT
sFTsfc:, SRfrBfaf,
Singular.
The
acute on the
I.
97
if
II
in
weak
The word
irg
is
is
mm
and f
cases,
accent in the strong cases
final.
Singular) as
As
declined like cRts in the strong cases.
But ipfg^
II
I.
treated in the
is
'
Cii.
ireT,
in the
^f^Kr,
Vocative
also that of the ?|^ affix,
formed by the
affix
g^(Un
i.
e.
f^faiTfa &c,
69).
ctttt* n f^qf ^ n
f^ri ^ 5.^
3re^*^Rrw***n f^ri ^r sfire*rs?TO ws*&*i%
The word sftts is treated as
96.
11
\frT:
11^
11
11
if it
ended
in
*[%,
in the feminine, before all case-endings.

This sutra
is
commenced
In strong cases, whether

plies
for the
sake of cases other than strong ones.
of masculine or feminine, tha
but in the feminine, in other cases also there
is
former
sCitra
ap-
Thus
trich-treatment.
Some read the word stfr? in the Gauradi class (IV.

^Tgrf*n H
and they treat it is a ?r^ ending word before the feminine affix srfa", as
^fgT u According to them, in forming the Taddhitartha compounds like
<n^F*r: SFr^TPT: *r%: = T>^rf>fr W, we could not get the form T5?3rirff*r:, be^rffr, stfrffp-sr*,
I.
41),
cause when the affix
z&
is
elided
by V.
1.
feminine
28, the
is
also elided
by
no T^r^", because
I. 2. 49, and the #1^ being thus luk-elided, there would be
behind
trace
I.
1.
get
out
the
difficulty, we can
no
To
of
63.
the affix leaves
only say, that the form is so, in spite of the apparent inconsistency.
Those who do not read zft? in the Gauradi class, they explain this
by saying that the word (%gf indicates the sense, namely, ^fg is treated
sutra
like a
fr^word, when
And
med by
it
denotes a female, wherever
because ?pre
is
treated as
if it
was
apr?,
it
may
occur.
the feminine will be for
and the form spr^ will be end-acute by VI.

So that whether %\gt be formed by #ftr under Gauradi class, or by
1. 174.
#rcr under IV. 1. 5, the accent remains the same: while under this second view,
we have
the affix #r<*
by IV.
1. 5,
not to face any such difficulty as in the
^mqif^fer
firmer
97.
sfTrf
11
t\s
^TTift
11
may
11
first.
finTnrr, 3/?rarii%f ,
srfe
optionally be treated as Kroshtr,
before the endings beginning with a vowel, in the Instru-
mental and the cases that follow

As
^r^t: U
ning
iffrgT
or spre^r, s^ftf or
^5%,
But 3Ffg^ in the Accusative
affixes.
it.
#! or erep,
Plural,
sfctCTC
or
5Frtr,
frgf: or
and cFr^^f before consonant-begin-
Bk. VII. Cm.
I.
101
3 Substitution.
1353
Vdrt: *gn and 57 augments come in supersession of the Trich-vadbhava ordained by the preceding sutras. Thus the Dative of the Neuter
noun f^Ftf will be fTO^FPpT sr^gra, f?<T*PpT fsR^^nT, and not ^nV
Simi11
larly with 5?, as JfJff^TR.
^"3^lCrng^ra:
*rrf%^*
3T^rf?:
11
srr
11
^sp;,
sri^:,
srrq;,
^ren
11
11
and sr^mr get the acutely accented aug-
^rgr
srn?;
<tttr
11
^s^*
*n%
rfsr^rf
98.
ment
11
after the
in the strong cases.
The rule applies to

Thus rafctj 3TTfr^, 3TTff|r, 3T^fT?:, 3TTff?l
compounds ending with ^când sr^s, as faanmr^, fq^^îfr, fa^^rc:, fsrarII
Vdrt:
or 3T?qjTfr
In the case of
This would be
3T**rg^r
tgTrV
11
11
sr^rf? there is option in the feminine,
^rf^r
11
because
so,
^g^ and
99.
as 3Rffr,
occurs in Gauradi class IV.
wt%^
^k,
ll
ix%[ <re?T3r3R!frc*Tr*T>Tr *rer%
it
I.
41.
ll
11
sT^fir get
the augment
a?
after the
3"
in the Vocative Singular.

This debars the previous
sr;^
?r%:
ii
%^jm:
?oo
II
substituted **
As
^,
For the
(I. 1.
to scatter
ii
5j
II
11
long 55 of a root, there
is
51).
will
*t
of the Tudadi class.
77.
Why do
we say
apply to Derivative roots
11
??
v^fa
11
ttstrtt.,
s<rerar% se^hs^ ^T^r^rt^fr *refa
101.
long
siTcft:
II
STTCffcfl.
of a root?
N^cfWi*
Observe
also,
as f^3?r^R
from
'.
3-<rarsrnr
ff^T;
*%
(a Bahuvrihi), f fw^H^Hl
11
This substitution
'
final
PTCR from a& and

by VIII. 2.
f%rcf?t,
% nr^c^:
$PlcT:,
II
h^
the lengthening
fafrr*, *rP|TR
a?
^TR
II
sR^r^rr^ ^rr^rc^^ ?^tt^^t
100.
from
rule, as
is
11
substituted
also
for the penultimate
of a root.
As
cRT&ircf,
s^ssnjf^
cfrhfw,
?o^
11
^f
fofap
q^rr%
11
from
ll
^c*, sfasar,
Lengthening by VIII.
^^
11
2.
77.
5 Substitution.
1354
st
102.
when
a root,
Bk. VII. Ch.
I.
103
substituted
for the final long

of
preceded by a labial consonant belonging
it is
is
to the root.
2.
As <t<t and g<T^rl? from

The rule applies when
77.
from 1
so also qr^f^RT
apply, for*?
Vdrt:
The
'to go'
is
and ^substitution.
15^ ^?r%
11
103.
is
Thus 3Tr^T"P* and

|,
preceded by
\o%
11
q^rft
11
3TTCc!K3v
*T
srpro,
In the Yeda, the
by VI II.
the rule will not
*tjt,
1.
do take place
RiT^q:, HTTCSis from
is
as ^r^f% SEr^sp^
consonant must be the consonant
labial
The Guna and Vriddhi
fiF&m, PFTR3P from
That
The lengthening
II
not part of the root: as ^pftoT^by VII.
is
Toot-stem
so also QKjife
the dento-labial ^ precedes
3^^
Therefore when
of the root.
*,
from
100.
in
supersession of ff
*<
with cg and
<*?*),
11
^fsr
^rr
II
substitution
forsôfa
diverse.
is, it
takes place even
when the preceding letter is not labial, and

is labial.
Thus ffRT 3^T rTgfc,
does not take place even when the letter
SJ^r
Wt,
?TITC>
^^R
TfarFPt (no change), and t^r:, from 3.
and
TW
are formed
by the
affix
i|
f^(III.
and |
1.
171),
II
All these words
BOOK SEVENTH.
Chapter Second.
Before the Aorist-characteristic ^r (ftr^), Vrid-
1.
dhi
is
substituted in the Parasmaipada, for the final of a stem
ending in
%, *,
The word
^ (long or short,
?*
I. 1. 3).
to be read into this sutra
is
^Nf*,
ar^S
by
virtue of
I.
i.
3.
As
96 and VIII. 2. 28
The antaranga guna substitution is superseded by the express mention of VriIf the antaranga guna is superseded by this vriddhi, why is not the
ddhi.
sr%sft?i,
3T^ft*> vmftii,
antaranga
The Vriddhi being

in
belong to
11
q[Faw
Observe
*Fpft
II
rr^rcr *ror wtivt

:
2.
it is
II
??TRr class, after
thus superseded,
the Parasmaipada
sTcfr
ff%:
(VII.
3^ also superseded in PT3#^, artj^hj?
place, as these roots
say
srcrtff**,
II
we have
Vriddhi
is
The Vriddhi does
which
s^
srssfre, STgre
arprnFT
stct:,
^z&ojfz ar?r <pt **tr
3.
this affix
is
substitution.
final
(I. 2. 1).
Why
do we
st,
when
II
II
^h^t
ii
substituted for the short
immediately followed by the
fen
not take
t or 5^ of a root, before
the Parasmaipada s-Aorist.

This
^3-3î<%> sps-stsctî
'shorts'? Observe wrerncfcr *rcM?J
The
Why do we say "ending in for "? Observe tt wreftt, *tt wtffct
=
sentence
as
the
'proximity',
in
here
*T?p
means
44411*3
3t*u*fr<T
word 3T?rT
Therefore the rule
The 3r must be in the proximity of the and *
Iftf;
As
^-^roncfrt,
sn;-3T$mfa;,
debars the option of VII.
2. 7.
11
Why
!l
II
?;
II
does not apply
to ar^frfl, 3T^gfr?j, for
stem, yet are not in the proximity of sr
er^znngsFaw^n
6
II
II
*W$ "
though
and
<*
are here final of the
11
^T
sparer, w:
II
Aorist Vriddhi.
1S $6
In the Parasmaipacla
3.
of the
s- Aorist
Bk. VII. Ch.
there
is
II
Vriddhi
of 35, JRT, and of any vowel, without distinction, of
3T
the stems ending in a consonant.
As
This debars the option
3T5rr5ftT "
3TÎ#t>
which would have otherwise obtained by VII.
ending
in
consonants
as
STTr^ftrC,
two
in the case of these
roots,
So
2. 7.
ST^fftl. 3T^^fi?f, 3T*T^r??J
By
II
stems
also of
the split-
ting up of the sutra (yoga-vibhaga) these forms could be evolved without
using the word f^?rT
*f and
there
there
5f"3
If the
VII.
2.
and
1,
still
(2) ar^":
".
The
Vriddhi".
is
chapters.
and
Vriddhi
is
Thus
the sutra.
in
word
if in
"stem"
as
Had
" In the
understood
is
throughout
these
the middle of the stem, then the verb ends with a consonant,
there will be Vriddhi
end
In the
vowel be at the end of the stem, there would be Vriddhi by
by our
The use of the word ^r^ in the

when more than one consonant even is
rule.
sutra indicates that the rule applies

at the
room of the sr of
room of the vowel of the stem
(1) ^ff5T5^f
"
surf $fr?|
aTHr^sftrl
II
word ^cf^f not been used in the sutra, then the following
maxim would have applied "pt ^n^m^T tR S3?rf^sf7 TspTJTTHF^rit" H The rule
would have applied where only one consonant intervened between the vowel
and the affix, but not when more than one consonant intervened. But it is
the
intended that the rule should apply to such cases also.
The form 3W$P*

second Person singular.
rule on the
one
is
To
thus evolved.
the root
Now
Thus 35 + fvrraLN
^ we
add r^
and the rule requiring the change of 9 to y
side;
the
in
there appears the Vriddhi

(
VIII.
2.
31
)'
w ( VIII. 2. 26), the rule requiring the change

40 ), then the rule requiring the change of q into z, and
of one s ( VIII. 3. 13 ) on the other. What rule is to be appli-
the rule requiring the elision of
of
rT
into
*r (
VIII.
2.
then the elision

ed first the Vriddhi or the other rules?
The Vriddhi
first,
because the other rules are considered as asiddha
that
we apply
the other rules
change the Vriddhi

like
13
into a?r
VI.
3.
The equation
112).
2.
)*n-
*cTPl(
26) = 3T + >*TS(VIII. 2. 8o) = ?rRr + srar(VIII.

= ^rP* (VI. 3. 112). This with the upasarga
2.
II
Similar
4.
Vriddhied the
*r3
into
^,
would have been vriddhi of
11
air,
41
there
is
no Vriddhi of
2.
3?r
but applied the vriddhi rule
aft,
has not taken place vriddhi
elsion of ?,
will
VIII.
be applied
and after
1 ):
we
be something
31
= srrs + m*
= *r + *r*
the
VIII.
augment
aqr
Once
Had we not
the evolution of ^??r^l with trPl H
is
the aj has been Vriddhied into
= <tp?n%^:
2.
^ and
becomes T^tTSR.
first
to
is
and afterwards on account of the
this: ^+^ri = qr? + ^R( VII.
(VIII.
3.
air
rule
VIII.
as tr^P^
first,
which
there
3tr
is
is
wrong.
II
last,
then there
In fact where there
vriddhied,
as
= ^r^TH^m^
Bit.
VII. Cii.
$xk
II
II .
AORIST VRIDDHI;
5. ]
q^rft
II
11
%fc
;t,
1357
11
The vowel of a stem, ending in a consonant,

4.
does not get Vriddhi, when the rera takes the augment %x
II
As
3TRT#l, but ^Rr^T?| where the root ends
3T%#J, 3T^ftff?t,
in
a vowel. Will not w by taking Guna (which is an antaranga operation) and the
substitution of are, become a root ending in a consonant? No, though Guna
is antaranga, it is superseded by the express Vriddhi.
sffsft^
^5T?crÛ|^^<ril^nJ|ô^dlH
^dlH
fw, f^",
^TT^Z,
ffinr <rewre <rc?r ff^r^
II
II
*rwm
the vowel
the roots
$nff,
Dh&tupsttha.
Thus u^'tocatch'snr^l, mn,
Wf
-gSH, 'to vomit' BT^pftri,
awake'
3T*rr*T#r, fa,
t^rff*,
**f 'to
f%nr f%:
3^
'to hurt'
(churadi)
cover' 3T*T?^.
srrar, *rr
5fr%,
fa^^ll^WlR^frTP^^
>ni^PT^r^TT<^
Pi
sr^^
*Tr<F*
11
by
III.
1.
This
51.
are concerned.
is
There
indicatory
v*h
'to
?r,
^tt
%?; in
far,
the
in
the
st^^,
expend'
&p%rcft<l, itpt 'to
*T
*WT 3T^T
^r^?^
f ^rnirr-
t%**fa
II
lTP*r
r>*nftf?r ffg" *[>*%, rf^T r^TT^T
3*^^
^rrK*irfi^^rrT
f?TR ff^r
the above examples, the

2.
no option allowed here.
^f
*nrra-,
is
pro-
so far as stems in ^,
In
case of
tlê
-stttt,
Nor can
it
be said,
its
in
the case of these roots, that "they will take
ts
fbr-
and p*, the Vriddhi would have taken place by VII. 1. i and VII. 1.
could not have debarred Vriddhi, hence the special mention of these roots.
roots,
guna, on account of
be
%<&ftq, f%, 3T***ft^H
mfa mr*
g<*r
T f^FrT*TO?mil 3T*T
I'
'to
or
q;
II
is
breathe'
i* 'to send'
* spars src^r
!Î# RrCniit
mfa*Tnr fRwiwft,
an
'to lose' gâffa,
In the case of roots 3;^ and
q"
augment s-Aorist
sound' 3T*aRr?, s*W,
'to
3T$T"ft?,
^ %?h% t jtrtr^^,
f^-yui^c^" 5RT"5TFRf^r
and
following
a stem formed with
sg^, mi**,
and the roots having
root f*^,
hibited
of the
Parasmaipada; namely the stems ending in
in the
>TTO
^r, ^na;
^, K, %, ST^cT,
stems, does not take place before the
*t,
II
It
The Vriddhi of
5.
T^lft
4,
first
being an Antaranga operation", because, then the rule
of Vriddhi ordained by VII.
1.
will
find
no scope.
Moreover,
if
the
guna
Aorist Vriddhi.
J358
took place
Bk. VII.
and then Vriddhi, the mention of rot-roots and
first
For
would be redundant.
and
in 3rT3??[
3T^5^ff|;,
Cii. II. . 6.
f^
the sutra
in
having gunated the roots
3^
and then substituting 3T^ ( which is also antaranga ) for

Now these are roots which end
ij before f?j, we have 37T?r + f\ and **3i + f?J[
in w and would be covered by the first portion of the present sutra, viz, "h-my-anta", so the especial mention of pr-roots and f% would be superfluous, if guna
and
and
f*j to 37%
3[%,
II
was
The very mention of for-roots and f% in

maxim ?r Rrr% 3T?rJT^*n%T
have we used the root 5rr*r in the sutra, when the
to take place
first.
a jnapaka (indicator) of the following
Why
VII.
85 will cause
3.
guna by superseding Vriddhi
in
Vriddhi rule VII.
115
2.
is
Ans. No,
2. 1.
supersede the vriddhi rule VII.
comes
In *
this
that
VII.
in
second vriddhi
apply after guna
by saying
guna
so.
rule VII.
in "Sfrir^ra there is
5rrg+r% = 5rnTl+fw
not
No
doubt VII.
and we have guna, as
2. I
85 takes
3.
This
115); for as
2.
so will the present
5rr*T!
it is
85 does
3.
Then
+ f?tll
a root ending
You
prohibited by the present sutra.
is
fact that the
every future Vriddhi, as
116
this is
3. 85,
which would cause vriddhi, because now
2. 2,
by the very
superseded by VII.
special sutra
the case of sn^T
supersession will take place on the analogy of srqrs^rfarrW (VII.

this vriddhi rule VII.
sutra, is
this
II
can say,
effect, will
prevent
no penultimate vriddhi by VII.
2.
85) = ^rrTTrT the rule VII. 2. 116 does not

You can, of course, say so, and there is no answer to this but
(
VII.
3.
that the mention ofrrT
only for the sake of distinctness.
is
In case the reading of ^rri in the sutra be held necessary, then the
operations which it undergoes, are shown below
:
5TT*X
change of
+ S*r + f?t
^ into *
Now
II
appears (1) the rule VI. I. 77. requiring the

This ûrrw s however, debarred by the rule VII. 3.
'
84 which causes guna of the finals of verbal stems before all sarvadhatuka and
f
ardhadhatuka affixes, because this guna rule is an apavada to U -n î
3 )
<
But
this
guna
in its turn is
debarred by the rule VII.
2.
'
II
requiring the vriddhi.
(4) But this vriddhi is, however, superseded by VII. 3. 85, which causes the
guna of the final of t5rr*T
Now having gunated it, we get this form
Now appears VII. 2. 3 which requires vriddhi, be5Tr*TT+fST + fq[
cause it is a root ending in a consonant. ( 2 ) But that vriddhi is superseded by
VII. 2. 4 because the affix f^r has taken the f? augment. ( 3 ) Then appears
the rule VII. 2. 7 requiring optional vriddhi, (4) But that optional vriddhi is
:
II
11
superseded by the compulsory vriddhi requirred by VII.

root ending in
11
5 )
And
this last vriddhi is prohibited
2.
2,
because
it is
by the present sutra
VII. 2. 5
These nine stages through which the form 3T5rr*r?rq[ is evolved, is
abbreviated in the following mnemonic verse
Jjnfr f f^ *j% fJ^F Jffif^ret R<h<^ :
*r*
11
3T ife R^frs^r
3^freT%rrcrr
*frp
11
II
3w<t3t: snrar
3^r?rfr%f>
II
q^fa
*&
11
11
ôttrt:,
fe?w*\
Twmt <ror ftrrer ^fe^w?r
II
Bk. VII. Cn.
II.
maipada, there
As
or
JTpjfe'ffj
guna nor
77\
3T<TT
tfW>
II
^T^sfc
^9
II
optionally fe^,
is
vriddhi;
^
q^NR
||
II
we have
3TcT.,
when
^*
^r^:,
c?sfr:
7.
maipada, the short
f ^Tl'r f*THT
Observe 3Tf#t,
of the root gets optionally Vriddhi,
sr
3T is
Besides this patent objection, there
3T%rt u
we had not taken
of every voivcl (st^P VII.
3T?T:,
not debar such Vriddhi, for the
Therefore
Vriddhi, which
*H>
*TS*fa;
is
??rfa
is
'
f^fa
(I. I.
would be an 3T^
Therefore fwn affixes

5), debars only f*Prerorr
which f*H* is fwrl (I. 2. 1), will get

Therefore we have only one form of sr^r
roots
after
not desired.
II
do we say 'beginning with a consonant'? Observe

Why do we say prosodially short
>reRft from 3T^r and 3T?
'
II
QTrrMtfC,
of 3T
another, not
Why
TT
when
prosodially
the sutra would have ordained Vriddhi
the Vriddhi so ordained
2. 3),
pertaining Vriddhi, and not an f^-pertaining Vriddhi.
Vriddhi.
VI.
II
short by being followed by a simple consonant.

Thus srôfrri; or 3T=wfr?i:, sproffa or awffa U Why do we sny
will
fe^,
(
begins with a consonant, and the
so manifest. If
not
is
it is
^^ substitution, as su^ffrl
#W
II
6)
(I. 2.
T^T mrqT ff^^T **fa

Before an ^-beginning s-Aorist of the Paras-
tWlfttq r^r^TWT
the stem
^3
This option applies when the fsn*
II
after 3^3, fa 5*
But
there being neither

4-
optional Vriddhi of the vowel of
is
sfnJTnft?l
fe^
1359
Before an ^-beginning s-Aorist of the Paras-
6.
treated as
Aorist Vriddhi.
m WH5ft*t,
?
Observe
3T#?i: H
But why does not vriddhi take place
The
(Ad. 65)?
M^dsfa
R JiHl u
^ =5
tervenes between
In
intervene.
in 3i-^<*j*u?^
vriddhi does not take place on the

^lT?J[
it
for the rule applies to short 3?
and the
'qranrr
affix,
from the root ^fr i^
maxim
zpT IT
s^ÎPt^T
only when a consonant in-
and not when both consonants and vowels
not only the consonants
37
and
ct
intervene but also the
Hence the e is no vriddhi. Moreover, the sar^R can be by one

letter and not by more than one letter.
Therefore, applying this maxim, the
word ?*%: might have been omitted from the sutra without any detriment. In
that case, the form srrreffa from the root r^r ( Bhu 685 ) will be explained by
vowel
3rr
II
saying that rule VII.
vene between
word
bt
2.
^qr: in the sutra
aorist.
7 does not apply to
and the
is
affix.
for the
it,
because two consonants inter-
In this view of the case, the
employment of the
sake of distinctness only.
The word 5? is understood in this sutra, so that the rule applies to %?

The rule therefore, does not apply to A nit aorist, as arqrsff?! n
The form 3Tfa<Tr3"<fr?j the aorist of the Desiderative root, is explained
'
by saying
tnat the long srr of vriddhi
is
elided
by VI.
4. 64.
^ Augment.
3 6
ffra
^r^f
11
^tttt
11
11
*, *?,
^ra, i^r
The augment
8.
Bk. VII. Cn.
II. .
11
not added to a ky it-affix
is
beginning with a sonant consonant (wsr praty&hftra).

The
pratayahara
^?t
affixes beginning with

letter of
fW,
Thus
?% class.
(III.
but not
^, * (?*)
*r
and
^r,
rule really applies to Kritaffix
begins with any other
fftr^ non-vas letters get the augment, but not

fimi, ffpr^but not ^np*( III. 2. 167
Hr%WT, HÎ*
(III. 2.75. nfa%) qfarU,
The Vartika
and no
ff^mr,
175) so also
2.
vr^T,
The
rather vague.
is
2TR51 but
not 3ST (III.
3.
90 srf
more definite form. Of

course, in the Unadi Krit-affixes, there is diversity.
There we get the affix ;?,
for example, which of course does not take the augment, as 3*1+^ = 3*3:
(Un
I.
ypf ^r^nrrfr
Why
113).
î% gives the rule
do we say
affixes
in
Observe
^T,
^f^T
II
Here by VII. 2. 76 the Sarvadhatuka affixes beginning with a ^3 consonant take f? augment after the roots ^; &c but this f? will also be prohibited by the present Sutra, if the word gjfa be not read in the sutra.
So that
rule VII. 2. j6 would find scope before those cFflrt affixes only which do not
In some texts of Kasika the counter-exambegin with a 3^ letter; as ^ffrT
;
ple
is
WfT m
tne Perfect.
&c. (VII.
This sutra
wrong, according to Padamnjari

in
2.
The
35.
(zfftftR-
the Perfect except after the root
so the counter-example from the Perfect
13):
2.
is
is
because fr always comes
jrpjH^-^-: r%3r^r?)
35
II
This
Tense
is
not valid.
Krit-affixes beginning
with
by Panini are the following: ^(^PT"T, %&%, $lfil%)t 3T (^r^

and grc*), ^*t (ffg), * (fO, &* OîrO, *^ (TR^)> *K (Sir*) T (f^, *nO, *%
This list will show the truth of the above vartika.
(*ri%f), 5 (5f) H
letters as given
firg^RTOfa^cî
ff%:
11
m5^
*rrf%^*ti
<t *r rer
ra^g
II
5 *rc ^7 ?r
3ra?r?Rre.fr?r
s.
11
s^rt^
tfr^*
q^TT%
fa, g,
%m ?3t*t% ^ T?n%
sr, <t, *r,
t%, 5, *rc,
11
The %z augment
9.
II
is
not taken by the following
r%, 3, 'sr, cr, r, ra, ^, *rc, ^ and ^r n

Thus(i) f^;^-tTRf: butrTRHr, <ri%3*r, f^-Crfa: but
Krit-affixes
frnrrTT, frf^^n
(HI.
but
2.
(Un
I.
182)it but
*rr%3*
70)^^:
^r%rrr,
(3)
g*
(2) 5^
(Un
from
as
(Un
also
Unadi
IV.
so
^11
158),
rêR
(4)
TmrTr, TR^*,
%n
forming
S,
from
so
also
but
III. 86)3^:
*, >jff
#3:, qf?r-, *frf
?r%rTr, ?r%3*
%? r^MrTi, TftrTr, **ffcrr H The rT affix mentioned in the sutra refers to this
Unadi rf (Un III. 86), and not to the ^ (xf?) of Nishtha, for the Nishtha ?f
takes the augment, as fRR*
(5) afirR (Un II. 2)
<fjg*r but #fa?rr, ^ffSrjJ*,
^rgqr but sfrrftreff, c&n%3*n
(6) ^r% (Un III. 155), as %ffa: but <riw, îRr^
(8) ^r^ (Un III. 70)3T^w,
%? but trfsrrrr, ^3*
(7) ^(Un I II. '157)
11
II
11
Bk. VII.
Cii. II.
io
Augment.
re
(ro) *
(Un III. 43)^?^: but srforrr, ^3*
arftnTr, btRi^
(9)
(Un in. 62)^^: but rf^rr, *ft3*
The affix fa, 5 and f% take f% augment after ir? and words of
p#rt
but
ii
11
11
similar formations
as
ffTT:
sqw
11
we have
3 q-^r^ >rr^3^TTT^
$?, as
rTf*Trftr*Tfr
The augment 5?
10.
which
^TfRf^fcP, RfiF^ffT
f%T#tf?r : ,
Before oon-krit fa &c,
IHSI1I9: "
irftfa,
*r^fa
wrfa
11
not added to that
is
affix
joined to a root, which in the Grammatical system of
is
Instruction (i.e. in the Dhatupatha)
of one syllable, and
is
is
without accent (anudatta).
list
of such roots has been collected by the Anit
Kdrikd.
They
are given below.
Kdrikd : 3Tf^TH^RT^T
*T3cftfa
^frTrfaHT^ %?: ST^RT
rTTff
iT^?T^Srrg?Tf =t **3#r ^^qT*Trfa*i*fr 3<s$*r^
ffa
As
long
gj
*WtU
a general rule
fai^P ST5l%rTr^Trfr
all
?f
The
II
following are the exceptions
'
All roots ending in short 3? are Udatta and take fs
(2)
(3)
All roots
ending
in
to attend
'
to fly'
(II. 24,
'
(I.
tt
rfftrrr or
number
in
11
f are Artit, except f*J
945), as ^T^rTr, ^f^rfr
(I.
1059),
to
'
grow
and
'
II
All roots in long % are Anit, except tf]^ 'to rest' (II. 22),
1017. IV. 27), as sifarTr, *$sRm
(I.
All monosyllabic roots in short 3 are Anit, except,
in
long
3;
are
1008), *$ 'to flow' (II. 29),
^'
as
to
rsfarrr, crftrrr
sound'
'to praise' (II. 26), $ar 'to sharpen', (II. *)
though consisting of more than one

ii
Of the
and
II
^r
(7)
v%)
II
rT^frrr
All roots
poses of
31^2"
as
3TR? except f*f (IX. 38 the

the Dhatupathaj and fsx (V. 8, X.'
(6)
I.
%f, %f,
^pjf,
short s% are
as falftrrr or fa#(faf, snrcrrr or sector
All roots in short
3T,
All roots ending in long sc are %?, as
(5)
r&
as
(1)
(4)
f*j>i
II
monosyllabic roots ending in a vowel except
references are to the class and

:
^nTRf^ STflwnW
and long s^ are anudatta, and do not take f^ augment
^fr|, 3f,
271)
Thus
syllable,
tf%?rr, *rerf%rrr, srfarrr,
roots ending in consonants,
(II. 27),
and *;yra
is
'
ôTrerrr
to
'
11
to
mix'
and
sound
(II.
for
23)
the pur-
jn^Rrrrr
are r? except the following
^\^^ vx\^% ^m. s^rcwr ji

tw*3 *rr%^?r Vj% ^r^rr^m^pf^rf*; u
?rfai*S 9fr%^re%3fi f<afa
<r
^f
to cover' (II. 30,
treated like-
vrm, ^rrr,
all
from 3 and
11
Augment.
*?
1362
?ifafo%^K"^r ?**r
*tr*r,*jt
?fro
st
^w are 33R qsq% *ir;
<?>=**%
ftf?|f?%f?Kr?rft
wrf?*?j
t*r,
^f% *!%
rst ^ OT^rRR?*
%h
*rer ??r*?t*it
tr^ s?r
Tar'?*
<rt
11
*r5* 3ftf%rrr
rcfa sfsr srcrf?R?H
^romr
*sR?r rt*cr:
^r^rrr f^r
ww-
Rf?:
C11. II. . 10
trw *re: str^whrr
sR?r?Ti% g^gr^Rr
frrlr ?fkr fftre 'tt
Bk. VII.
11
ftfro
^ctcr
rcnsiRR %<fc
11
fafr rr us^rssw f^fqrr r?sr gs^TRf^rft fffai

f *tt??%%Tft^?THr% v!r *Rts ^HFfjR^Rrft
rrer
rr ^rfRsr ^rt pir rr ^r ?piR ?*3rT *jfr
tif=r
*?*<* 3'r^R ^rfr
gf? *ft
gR faR
^^rRnRfw*fR*r
Jmrr?
11
11
f^rf^r f*sr st^tti^ *Rrr?f*r T>=5r ^rR*;
11
qf%r ^f% f^ftf^^"srr^cfR faf% r%f% 5RT*RT>TR"5P?WrfRx

sgrsr
(I.)
( 2 .)
dwell'
meant
here,
1029),
and not
*- Three
SfS'-jr,
(4 .)
'
The
t0 cover' (II. 13),
<**
^r-Four
'
(I.
1024),
roots,
*R
j^-Two
The Divadi
***
(6.)
f-
t^r; R*'
(I.
roots
'
II
'to bite'
126),
7 .)
(I.
1041)**, S3
The
rf,
'
(I.
1033), 3RTT
3TTCS>*r,
3*
coir e (I.
**' to play
1031) *Rff
'
**' to
kill
'
906)
(I.
11
(II. 2),
II
(I.
1038),
VI. 127).
in
it
'to
burn'
exception of
and
(I.
1041)
lick'
belongs to the class of OJTR (VII.
2.
45)
root-collections, hence the Karika uses the
'to
show' (VI.
131),^
'to see'
(I.
1037),
'to touch' (VI. 128), ft* (VI.
f*H
3),
'to enter' (VI. 130), fi^L'to^
or ?**'
BTWCT or 3Tr ^'
dhatupatha,
short, which are anudatta in the
As
?^r,R*' to
905, IV. 20), 5* (IV. 89), ft? (VI. 23),

takes ôptionally before affixes
'to rub' (VI.
penultimate
4).
** 'to carry*
**
(VI. 126) both xTieaning 'to hurt',

70,
912)^;
*W)
so also 3? because
? )
'to grow'
II
roots with a
with th
1023), as,
**(L
enumerated; of these
^r-Ten roots:ft*
be small' (IV.
15, is
>
the other two are not founcf (
(I.
also
words ?|tF^3R:
^*'to
1.
does not vocalise, as ?rfSRr
to think' (IV. 67), Tnff,
In other collections
beginning with
should be taken, otherwise *TR*rr from *R -RJT (VIII. 9).

S*' to milk' (II.
Eight roots:ft*' to smear' (II. 5),
to sprinkle.' (I.
?m
^(?), are
wr
?55*rr
to cease
i053}*T*r,*w'to bind' (IV. 57)
(II. G)
which
?Rrr, T*^ 'to go' (I.
*r'
as,
11
2. 52).
roots: C*t 'to desire'
to take
'
**n, *R'to bow' (I.867, 1030)

5.
r^sirsr'rl
?rw which takes Samprasarana by VI.
^gnaTR, but SHR: from ?u 'to dwell' (VII.

(3.)
^rfiTfrfsrT5fr
3?-^ 'to be able' (IV. 78, V. 15). SPrKT, 3R3R

^_^<to eat' (I. 747, and also substitute of 3Tj,
1054), as ^^TT H
(I.
gnr
^rt gRfsnrsrf^srT^rrfR
z%
%*r, *ct,
take optionally the augment ** (VI.
I.
59),
Bk. VII. Ch.
II. . ii ]
ij-Ten
(8.)
accomplish'
'to
1022
( I.
*?w
),
*>TW, 3|W
be hungry'
'to
IV. 83
W H
vgoi vikarana
the Fourth
WW
otw
IV. 64
***
);
*j>ar
bind'
SFi'to be pure' ( IV. 82 ) tfrw, f^ 'to

IV. 72 ) *ror fa* 'to be accomplished'
and
therefore g*r
and crnttTT
and Rrf^m
(rw
'to
be angry' (IV. 80)
'to
f5^
^r;
roots f^J and 1%^ are exhibited in the above
fgn%, T%5n^
fftftT
'to fight'
'to pierce'
as qrfarn
*tw S*
IV. 81
3TW *qv
The
we have
to HOT,
1363
îwith sr^/to love'.^'toobstiuct' (IV.65)
accomplish' (V. 17
Stf* 'to
be aware' (IV. 63)

(
roots:
IV. 71, V. 16
Augment.
i*
fin* take
Karika with
ganas than
in other
$<*
There being want of prohibition with regard
H
11
Ten. faq; 'to distinguish' (VII, 14) *rer;fra; 'to pound'

(9.) qr-roots.
(VII. 15 )>ct, SR'to become dry' (IV. 74)
5"* 'to be nourished' (IV. 73),
qfcrr, f?f^'to shine' ( I. 1050 ) *tsr, N 'to pervade, to sprinkle' ( I. 729, III. 13,
^m
^r
IX. 54 )%sr, R^qr'to embrace' ( I. 734. IV. 77 )

) *tCT, 5*: 'to be sinful' ( IV. 76 ) fm. ?r**rlr, ft*
75
$*
'to
draw'
wr
*WT;
385
I.
'to sleep' ( II.
TOlf^ class
Tudadi
2.
*mr
1026
'to cut' (
908, VI. 134
The
%*
*T*ff,
root
is
is
Fourth
and takes
$<r
II
t^
VII. 12 )%tTT, 5T
62
%tTT
The
II
^T
fawn
ft?; is
'to go' (
(VII.
54)
^Tfjr,
II
^Tr
rfffr,
?%
srrwr;
VI. 139
\jgf
IV.
\&fr,
cT<**I%,
sow'
'to
^r;
( I.
m STHr; ST* 'to curse'

f$r<r
two roots
augment
?*
The 3* and |* belonging
1032)
i<r (I.
( I.
is
VI.
),
Trrr
)
fT*
$-One
f^
^rrr
exhibited
r^r?f,
iv. 14 ) $ntr
void excrement'
11
VII. 2
HtW, f3
perish'
'to
( I.
'
^1", **** to sweat'
in
: t^ 'to
'to
IV. 61, VI. 142,
VI. 2
The Adadi
11
I.
w; f%I (IV.
187
separate'
root sj^ 'to ask' (VI. 120
(^frT
f^,
there-
and Tudadi
11
<TtFT,
m^T
(VII. 5)
sprinkle' (VI. 140 ) sr^r;
<to
impel'
the karika, as front and
Wrrre^*
cook'
be troubled'
'to
and i*wf! f%T
as %ftrrr ffsirt*,
4)^W, RT^ 'to

(13.)
anoint'
VI. 125
IV. 60
'to strike'
( IV. 79 )
exhibited as fagffi in the above karika, showing that the
to be taken, and not the Bhuadi ( I. 780 ), which is udatta
(12.) ^-six roots
(II.
1034, IV. 51)
(I.
X. 295
14,
or
*flf
pound'
*HC 'to sink'
root f%^
%*
( I.
'to
fore, the rule applies to ff^rft

(
burn'
roots. 9T^[ 'to eat'
'to leap'
^Tfr;
class root
^tTC U
sake of indicating that these roots take
touch'
'to
to
Udatta and
^T
?TTr;
VII.
satisfied'
II.
II
*?mr; fo<r 'to
or
g*
roots <r and fq; optionally take f*

The special mention of these
45, Divadi 84-91 ).
(11.) ^-Fifteen
( I.
3*
rrffcrr; ***!">
or
<rat,
8TT3??
obtain'
'to
59
for the
is
class, are
1049
I.
and
be
'to
The
11
VII.
the karika,
as *nrr or
emr,/*^
'to break', ^rHT
in
srrerer
^-Thirteen roots
(10.)
distil' (
),
3^
Bhuadi and Tudadi are taken, as the karika
1059, VI. 6 both
I.
uses the two forms
'to hate'
<t**IH
fr*
5^ (VI.
) ffST,
'to
136)
q>?n%
II
o speak'
make empty'
'to loose'
%tW
II
1364
^-Fifteen roots
(14.)
cleanse' (III. 11) r^tRt,

(
Augment.
s*
VII. 16
H^rfir;
gsr 'to sacrifice'
*th
( I.
â
^?l%
181
'to fry' (I.
105
colour'
'to
vps'to honor'
q&, %&
^ptt
'to join'
or
(
Bk. VII. Ch.
865. 1048
( I.
1047
( I.
*Tgf;
?3^
K^rft; f*T^ 'to
^^r; ^s-s
'to quit' (
IV. 68, VII. 7
II. . 13.
I.
3jîr;
break'
'to
1035
optf;
'to
break'
VI. 123 )%rRr; *r>^ 'to adhere' (I. 1036) g-^Tfir, h*zi to be immersed' (VI. 122)
T^FT; 5 'to bend' ( VI. 124) 'to enjoy' (VII. 17 ). *tJtKT> ww 'to embrace' ( I.
(
1025
(I.
qft-^Tfrr; ^pf 'to emit' 'to create'
269,
II. 57), *rrsf, rf^Trrr
The
ll
IV. 69, VI. 121 ) srer; ra 'to cleanse'

exhibited in the Dhatupatha with
root
*rir is
along indicatory 37, e-s, *ra fj^n" (11.57). It, therefore, optionally would
Nor does this root take 3T* augment. The inclusion of this root in
list is, therefore, questionable. Others read f^r instead of *pr
The
e. ft*r 'to separate' the f^r of Rudhadi
R^rrft root f^sr is Anit ( III. 12 )
take f^
the above
II
II
i.
takes f?
11
Why
is
do we say "a monosyllabic
taught as TO with a
we say
"in upades*a or
The
evolution
with f?
i.
when taking
sjw- t%rt
ffrf:
II
Dhatupatha"
42
II
3frrr
ll
II
II
II
The
root
Why do
prevent vriddhi.
which have become anudatta during
we have
Therefore,
3^5
q^rrft
3T3T*ftq[
affixes.
3?*^,
Observe
root"?
in order to
rule will not apply to roots
e.
but not here,
final st (II. 4.
<tN"G3I7T
and
F$r?*3j^
11
ft,
^:,
fcr%
II
fa flrr^rT5rTRf *t f3TT% IT^ TO f^TT% T Wlr

Kdrikd .3^3 ^^f^^rfr *^srfsrfar: Jrarsre* suw ^f^rwri%8FmriTO9ntH
I
The augment 5? is not added to an affix

having an indicatory q?, when it comes after the root fir, or
after a monosyllabic root ending in ^ &, gg or 5JC in the
11.
Dhatupatha.
As
fa&n,
Why
far{-,
ftRTSPt
ll
So
also with foots ending in
'ra and 337 ending roots only'?
Observe
>![
an indicatory 3j? Observe ajfaf, srfag*,

sutra and would apply it to the indicatory
*t
f%j|rr: H
Some
II
33? vowels
also, as vtotj
Why
read two
(HI.
2.
3?'s
as
having
in the
139).
This rule applies to those roots, which have not been enumerated above.
3 the Nishtha will not take 57 even by VII. 2. 49 read with
In the case of
VII.
2.
15.
When two
3f
are read in the sutra, one standing for
little difficulty of combination.
Thus
require that the visarga be changed to
(VIII.
4.
ya by VIII.
coming
3 by VI.
1.
114.
55) then also, the visarga required to be

3-
37- If the
change of tt into
a?
t;
there arises a
after the visarga of 33?:
(VIII.
If
would
n be changed
to
changed into upadhmani-
4.
55) be considered asiddha
Bk. VII. Ch.
(VIII.
II . 13
Augment
f?
1365
then also the visarga must be changed to 3 (VI.
2. 1.),
sutra should be ^n^fn%f^
This, however,
11
1.
and the
114),
not done as an anomaly allow-
is
able in sutra construction. According to Kasika, this difficulty would not at

arise, if in
pounded
the sutra
into
*3TrSrcr*r3ffl35
HI-
2.
139
),
the *in +
all
be taken as com-
arr
so that that rule would apply to that **n which ends in
*trr;
WT whose
srr,
changed to f so that the form *vr\*: is

evolved without anomaly and the affix will be r%f^ (^^5) and not frr^ (*t*3).
The affix being fer^, the above sandhi difficulty will not arise at all.
and not
to that
final
is
The word
understood here
3qf|5T is
that the rule will apply to
also, so
roots which end in ^sf vowel, in their original states
ed base before the

^Tl,
before the Nishtha
saying, that
2.
41,
and
Thus
affix.
w ends
<T
The
II
in long s^
therefore,
its
is
say, the rule of sthanivad
forms
one vowel.
is
is
^rRTTOr:
Kdrikd
applied,
arr*r is
*rr%
governed by
Thus
:
apply
will
an sr^fafa
be
we
is
3jf
12.
ll
Vt
and ^riTRrT^r^
To
The
If
not
is
and we
we should
srrrr,
explain this
The
root
3;*tj,
however
this rule, in spite of its consisting of
is
an
more than
qtofrT^r^ M
treated as
v?ift
II
?(;
root.
Therefore, the word 3"q^T should
II
was
when
if
it
is
to be debarred.
srft,
3,
*w, 3^:,
Desiderative affix
the affix n?p
but also after tfK and *jf

As nrffSTfrf, sparer, WTfrT, Wgtfa
is
to
be
11
does not get the
not only after roots ending in T,
*?,
you object
that that rule
say,
the rule ought to apply to
so,
to be prohibited, or f?
*fsj^ter
augment
and
qr^JrP
If
II
no longer a s^-ending
f, it is
also read the anuvritti of q^r^r into this sutra.
exception and
<fpft:
41 applies to roots ending in long
2.
bhava
If this
this sutra.
Id not get the
as
its
changed to
applicable to sr$ f^fa, and this
cou
it,
Desiderative optionally takes f? by VII.

Nishtha will always take no fsr by VII. 2. 15. we
but when the root vowel
be read into
and not to the transformwhich is transformed to
root,
apply to
rule will
and
reply, that the option taught in VII.
you
^-ending
?t is
55 and
3,
sic,
II
into this sutra, as option
allowed regarding
is
ways get f*, 3^(1. 944) being

taken
*<r
f%qrby
(VII.
2.
Tne
anuvritti of fsr is not drawn

by VII. 2. 49. 1^ would althe Dhatupatha), would have optionally
u
3tf^[ (in
it
44)
The forms f^f^rt and ^^n% are thus evolved

8 ) = r* + *p*(VI. 1. 16 ) = $$+** (VIII. 2.
I. 2.
2.
41 )=>f^npTffi
I.
2. 10.
VIII.
2.
37
).
So
if* 4-*p*(
31
the affix
)=rr^+^
also with *j &&$[, the
is
is
(VIII.
f^ h ere
^y
f^ Augment.
1366
fr%:
g 1 f * 1 ^ ^%^rf fafc ***&
?>
11
Bk. VII. Ch.
*TPT*r
*r
mft
II. .
15
The Personal endings of the Perfect do not

13.
get the augment jar, after 5, ^, ^, f ?g, 7, 5^, sr n
Thus $-?t<pt, *??;*; *t,
**h; ^, *^, spj*t; f3j, sppr, frfT ^,
,
^^
These roots with the exception of ^ are Anit by rule VII.

special mention here
for the sake of
is
in the Perfect, other roots are all
fg^ftT
form
The
11
VII.
Hpr*T in
2.
f and f
,
5^nr,
w^r
fa
The
f frTJ
that f ?
f^
is
Perfect gets
By
does.
it
VII.
also prohibited
added when
is
rule VII.
*rawOf?rT*T
II
^ of the
affix
their
fomffo g gjRq
farfaf^,
63,
2.
f^ after f , as the irregular

*T does not get Rafter irs^,
the *j would have got f* after
by the present
11
Vdrt
11
Thus
the Perfect.
in
64, indicates that in the Veda,
but in the secular literature

fg,
10
All anudatta roots of the Dhatupatha are to be understood, by this
??
to get j*
rule,
Set
2.
niyama, namely, these roots alone are Anit
^ takes
the
sutra.
^ augment
63, applies here also, as 3N<ftifcr
2.
RSRu^TR^r T
The
>T^|%
as
As
gsfar,
gHH R
i
q-,
ffT*T,
*T*TW-
I*
II
and cT^ (kta and

ktavatu), do not get the $5 augment after f^, and after the
root which has an indicatory r
14.
As
*t?t:,
The
qTÎI
among sfrf^
roots,
^-change (VIII.
indicates that the Nishtha
it
45)
2.
In the Dhatupatha,
fra^ll
frff:,
and
as,
sgR
following sutras upto VII.
2. 35.
fe*rm
^rft
*re*r
^f%:
11
cT
^toft; srtaift (VI. 10), r*sr, tot^; srrfasft (VI. 9), sfs?r:, sreprSo
st is changed to qr because of the indicatory sfr (VIII. 2. 45).
also #ft (IV. 42),
for
Participial affixes
Vi
wrrfrff HT<?r
II
11
^Nfti^j^rw
s^brer^
is
(IV. 27),
anit after
it
is
classed
and
air is
The word Rgrap* governs
II
*re*r,
f^rr^rr
fSreret
t^
the
ll
*3ri% t
t^
11
The Participial-affixes do not take sr?, after

15.
those roots, to which another suffix can optionally be added,
with or without this augment *
That
is,
a root which
is
||
optionally Set before other affixes, is invariably
Thus by VII. 2. 44, ^m consonant beginning affixes are

Rafter the roots ** &c. The Nishtha after ** &c, will be invariably
Thus f^Jrp, f^rcr* ttt-, *Ts?rr;j;
By VII. 2. 56, the roots having an
anit before Nishtha.
optionally
anit.
ll
indicatory 3, optionally are followed

roots will invariably be anit
as
^:,
by Set
fqg-^T^
\\
^jr H
The Nishtha
after sffa
Bk. VII. Ch.
By
18
II. .
the vartika wft
VII.
2.
roots <t^,
Though
49).
the Desiderative, yet
in
f^
1367
fT?*^^^* the
<rft
optional fz'm the Desiderative

optionally takes
Augment.
??
its
Nishtha
m and
qq[ is
is
jpcyr
take
a root which thus
always
^,
for
Panini
himself has employed the word <rrWrF in Sutra II. 1. 24,38. According to
Padamanjari this rule of g*g nrvrTTT is anitya and not of universal application.
Because had
this rule
been of universal application then the root
$rf
which
is
by VII. 2. 57, would be universally anit by the present sutra

and there would be no necessity of reading it with a long i in the Dhatupatlja,
optionally anit
as
$rff&?% (VI. 141) to make

srrf^Tsr
?^
ll
The
16.
11
suf^r-, ^,
ll
The
2.
14.
II
do not get %z augment
Participial-affixes
after a root
fit^R
q^rft
ll
nishtha anit under VII.
its
II
implies that other roots not enumerated are to be also in-
"^
cluded, as 3TP9^Tm ^Tnf H

This and the sutra following
:
The
srrf^T^ ft*TfqT ^Tncrf^JpHi"* U
the rule of q$q
(VII.
fa^rreT
of the rule ordaining
'
2.
option
',
15),
i.
it
could have been
separate
e.,
making of two
made
into one, as
sutras indicates that
applies with the restrictions and limitations
the prohibition of
jar
augment, with regard
is limited by the same conditions, which apply to the

employment of ^before other affixes in the f^vrr^T rules ( sj^rqft^TreT,
Thus VII. 2. 68 ordains ? optionally to the affix ^j after
rT^T^ JTfasirep )
the roots ith, ^, j%^ and f^r
The root fa% there is the Tudadi root meaning 'to acquire'. The rule 3^ f%*T?^T will apply to this f^[ with thfs meaning:
and not to f%a; meaning 'to know', the Past Participles of whichare faftrT.ffftrT^Pi;!!
to the participial-affixes
optional
II
ll
The
17.
indicator}^
affixes
srr,
may
affixes after
optionally take the
roots having an
augment
$z,
when the
have an Impersonal sense, or denote the beginning
of an action.
Thus fi^ n
make
participial
sT
or ^rTRq^r,
srfffa-:,
JT^ftrT
II
The Saunagas
optionally
when the affix has aPassive significance

even, as ^fff^f *T2": ^fl. or ^T^T ^" ^tJIH
Not so, when the affix-lias Impersonal
force, as ?CTtt;*R^ "
The root st*t 'to throw (sr^fa), is followed by %7
Nishtha, when the sense is Impersonal
as srracTT^T but not when the beginthe Nishtha set after the root 5^,
:
'
ning of action
is
meant, as
3^:
cfipj!
ll
re Augment.
1368
5TT*TT*n^T5
\*
II
T^TT%
II
II
%W, ^T^, Wtt
The
augment
^j;
churning
<a
them
effort or
note or tone',
'a
by an easy
process',
19
q^3,
made without
and
?[?
stick-, 2. ^^T^r: 'the
mind',
'indistinct
darkness', 4. ^wr: 'attached', 5. fere:

gible', 6. fiff^r.
II. .
TO, fgpj, ft-RS^T,
following words are
in the senses given against
1.
Bk. VII. Ch.
^rc, st^t^to, ^srg u
srreifa, *t?*t, *&-, to:, *Kff> arrears,
18.
3.
^j^:
or unintelli-
^r^: 'made without an
7.
8. *Tr^ 'excessive'.
the words have not the above sense, we have 1. jfarT 'disturbed
The phrase ^ssfr fnfa or ?rfr is a metaphorical use of the word.
2. ^RrT as *cfFRT ij^:, ^RrT *mW W
3- *f*mt *&$ or 6lf^ ^f^T H
4- **f*R,
sound
from^
to
or
from
(
6.
=
Rftf*R
ftpr
7.
f?KR*t
5- ^f5^,
3T<PTTT*r)
W^rT ITF* is a decoction, prepared without much trouble, by simply slightly
When
or agitated \
'
',
II
II
heating the substance with some water, without powdering or pasting
it.
any disease
^5JrRfa ^ ^n^S^^ffrnTPi; fa^^SRRôTT )
^: or essence, ^r?^: paste or powder, 5R:
be administered in five forms
decoction or extract, ^tr: cold extract prepared by throwing pounded drugs
a
may
into cold water,
drunk
in the
immediate
and keeping that
morning,
use,
when
after purification
ffrr.
11
fa3R*3
is
*rret
19.
roots
after the
and
is
for
all
night to soak.
so called. ^j-n?
is
This watery extract, to be
a similar hot preparation, but for
the drugs are put in boiling water and the decoction
ready
for use as a drink. 8.
%3T?n* sTr*r?*3*Tpp?Rrrr
srrf%cT
^<sr
from
'
to strive
'.
^s^rrarROT2nf*rer*Rr ^
vr^f% a
The Participial affix does not get %z augment,

sp and sth, when meaning 'bold, impudent
arrogant'.
As v&,
fSRTCrP
The
II
be impudent' (V.
would be 3TR? by VII.
2 2),
'to
2.
The
niyama
root
and as
16.
has an indicatory 3 by VII.

Anit.
medicine
^
2.
it
is
56.
is
exhibited in the Dhatupatha as fsr^qT
has an indicatory
st in the
srr, its
Dhatupatha
read with VII.
2.
( I.
15, its
past participle
763
),
and
Nishtha
is
as
it
also
mention of these roots here, is for the sake of making a

namely, 3TR* only then when meaning 'impudent', and %? in other
special
rule:
OTrT, R^rr^R* "w never forms past participle with the force of vth"
(Impersonal action) or srrf^R (beginning of action), and therefore VII. 2.
According to Bhattoji Dikshit who
17 cannot apply to it" This is Kalika.
senses
as
Bk. VII. Cm.
21
II. .
Irregular Participles.
quotes Haradatta and Madhava,

option
allowed,
is
as,
w: ^WoWl:
fpTf:
11
s*
and
It is
II
frcr f^rqT?r%
^re
srrfcr, *T**S
II
<TTrfa
ap^fcr qrcf
or srwfcp not
II
in
those senses,
when
meaning 'impudent*.
W-, *&&, RWt:,
II
11
'strong'.
derived from * with ^j
CffrTI or ^fttf*
forms participles
srsr
The irregularly formed Past Participle s^ means
20.
'stout'
or
1369
affix.
There are two roots one
I'
In other senses, the forms are

( I. 769) without nasal, and the
77 ) with tne nasal. * can be derived from any one of these by

the nasal, and changing ^ to *, and not adding the augment %z
and
eliding 9,
between *?$ and sre is that a man may be stout or rasj
difference
The
other t
( !
11
^TPO
without being strong
equal to vj*? in
the word
fact,
and
The word
The
vice versa.
i& is formed by
sr^r affix.
in
the sutra
is
irregularity in the
formation of |* consists in the absence of 5^ and the elision of
and of ^
3. (
if
This irregular elision of

the root t? be taken ) and the change of <r into v II
3 is for the sake of preventing the application of the rule *?hrn%3"* (VIII. 2. 1).
:
The form could have been obtained in the regular way by the elision of y,
thus:^+rT = ?^+rT (VIII. 2. 31 ) =^+*r = ^+S = + S ( VIII. 3. 13 ) = ^y
But then when g is elided, the rule ^nto[ will apply, and the forms yfw,
||
fftffar^, y^sfrf
when
laghu or
it is
For
could not be obtained.

light,
5^
is
changed
to *
by VI.
but g-lopa being considered asiddha, the
4.
161 onjy
m would
be
heavy as standing before a conjunct consonant. So also the form qnT^grsTrT:

could not be obtained for the for would not be changed to sr^ before ?^tr when
:
the^
is
not light or laghu
daughter of Paridr$ha
or heavy, the affix
II
VI.
4.
56
).
could not be formed.
53^ would have come
snrt <rftf *: n \\
\ frT:
T^nfa
II
II
in
So also, qKSS^rq^ = qrfefi' ( the

For s^ being considered guru
the feminine
snft, qftss":
IV.
I.
78
).
II
7Rf3 ffa RTr?T% SRS^fi%

The irregularly formed qrcfsr
21.
II
means 'Lord\
is formed, like S, from fôr fg

When not having the sense
we have TRfr?rT* and Tftf f|rTi
The g is elided first as an anomaly. By so doing we can get the forms
The form <trpT^ is formed by f^t
like qK5T33frr, TnOTâjinTi Trftf^T?^
Though the full noun is qRfar and \w\ is added to such a
instead of ktva
noun, yet for the purposes of ktva it is considered as a compound verb, having
This
II
of 'Lord',
II
II
II
added to ary, and the root becomes prir, and

and then there is compounding of trft with this
word ending in ktva, and then by the regular process the ktva is replaced by
The general rule is that Derivative roots formed from nouns, like Tftf*
?3*
SrJTRCT, *t^ &c which have an upasarga as one of their formative elements,
qft as upasarga.
then ktva
II
is
In
added
fact, far^n's
to this root,
re Augment.
1370
are treated as
result of this
that though the
3T in the
i^rasT u
The
The
and
3?*T*jpa*
upasarga
II
^*
Imperfect
rule
is
^TOTOHHT^rt
it
qfifcrss*,
*N
is
compound
to this rule
it,
as *3PFTra<T, S*-
^3F faq%
and not x^r, as fjT^rs^
the noun *PTPT, in which the
*rr3*r*nw*r%
The only exception
Thus the
verbs.
and not before
is
JTSSR HT3itT%
11
therefore with rpt

is
member in the Derivative verb.

Tft5r*3i%;the portion tR is treated as an upasarga,
rule, in
as the verb,*and
changed to *q\ by VII.
ct:
t:
ll
The
22.
As
ctfCT
fir-,
e. it is difficult to
fire;and difficult
impervious
'T^tr
II
^sf
T^pft:,
*OT>,
when the
participle
TO'BiraOT, rrms fqr TOTOflTOTTTfa
forests.'
II
<rerTP
sfiST:
*$
*rar*,
II
ritual
ll
means
"Difficult
is
'difficult'
Fire-sacrifice
connected with the worship of
Grammar, but the Samans are worst of air.TOn^ sffirfa
is
When
T^Tft
II
The
23.
*ar,
37.
II
completely master the
enough
^reftST**^
I.
Participial affix does not take the aug-
ment %z after the root

and 'impenetrable'.
ment
*gkvi
not considered as a separate
is
frvayms
i.
after
The
^*{1*i, yet in the derivative verb,
ordinary
in
added
is
23
its accent is governed by f^^ frff (VIII. 1. 28 )

becomes altogether unaccented and qft retains its accent. So also
where is <rft is compounded with the Participial form ai^^T, and then
pr2ffW
e.
I.
is
noun
form of these words
This being the general
and
full
an upasarga, as
will^be treated as
augment
Participial
II. .
they were compound verbs having those upasargas.
if
is,
Bk. VII. Ch.
II
3T%:,
not havig these senses,
effort
we have
II
Participial affix does not take the aug-
after the root
5^ in
any sense other than that of
'proclaimed'.
As
$CT
^:,
affirmation, agreement'.
qrlt
but 9T^fR
^fa^srRrTOFt
is
*nwn*
Bhvadi
H fr*I**T
( I.
683
=
),
sjfasTm. 'assertion,
and gfarf^TS^r
is
Churadi (X. 187), both of these are referred to in the sutra. The prohibition of
the fan* added to the root in the
f%$[S^T in the sutra, indicates by jnapaka that
Churadi
class in the sense of faSTSFT
becomes valid:~as
nflroW
is
^T ^33
anitya.
So the following construction
S^WTOT: "expressed
their
opinions in
words".
In short the vn%ls optionally added to the 5?^ of the Churadi class.
say the Churadi pf* is anitya generally and not only after gfa^
Some
(
sift^l
qjsiT*
^rTP^r^T.)
X. 2
This
in this class.
is
The
inferred from the mention
of the root f^frT
indicatory % in f^fcf shows that the
augment
Bk. VII. Ch.
g*r will
pJT^r
and
throughout
Augment.
f?
be added to the root, which
retained
the
27
II. .
thus become f^PrT and this
will
dropped.
never
1371
VII.
48
1.
been nitya, then the root ought to have been taught as
q-
added.
churadi
f^r^ri^r,
be-
was
f^%* &c.
^
II R II
T^rft II ^:, *n*,
%zfem ZTKwi%ftmm&c*mw t H*rftr
fr re
after the root
As
ft, ftn*r:
II
11
24.
Why
far^r
The enunciation of the root as nfl%, therefore, indicates that the

fw^ is anitya, and thus we get the forms like f^rf^TtT, f^sttij, f^^rf,
3?f: ^f^rf^^r:
S^n
had
fq^rT tgnqrv
cause no rule would have caused the elision of the sjof f^<T when
be
will
Now
).
The Participial affix does not take the ,

when it is preceded by ^f, ft or ft
plagued *%$:, &tfi: H Why of srf ? Observe *r%f*RT:
khw.,
'SR,l%or
II
'
'
'
f%
The
25.
'
II
Observe 3TR?T Ml
Participial affix does not take the
sar,
after 9^ preceded by srfir, when the meaning is that of 'near'.

As ST^nif *Rr, anr*^ 5TC<| H Why when meaning near ? See spatftm'
'
'
fT^: ^TT^T meaning <frf%rT:ll rf ft means 'remote,' that which is not remote is srftbeing non-remote is ^rrf%|S^'non-remote-ness.' The
j[ 'non-remote,' the state of
affix 337 is
added
irregularly, in spite of the prohibition contained in
drcÔTt frro
11
q^rft
11
H &n, *rarair,
The word cTtT
26.
g^, in the sense of
'
frr^
ll
|tT
TH:r^^%ff
The
121.
formed from the causative of
is
studied through or read.'

sign.
'
^Tfs^sRfatwO
have sTTTTrPtll
1.
11
There is absence of $7 and luk-elision of the causative

Devadatta has read or gone through Guna.' ( jor
SJW^T^T
V.
When
the sense
is
:.
qr^:
As
sTtTT
T^BR^rTr
not that of 'read',
we
and becomes Transitive when

employed in the Causative. The participle is formed from this Transitive
causative verb, otherwise it could not have governed an object as shown above.
"
The
affix tK is
using this form

f?r|Tf
the
sit
word
root *j{
is
intransitive,
added with a Passive force

in f^f tT* in
could also
|tT:
IV.
^r?^r?3^^T^re^5r^n
^ct, ^re, ^fst, ^rnr:,

I^F otffers^ Vk
I
11
to
f^[,
as
we
find the author himself
68, and V. 1. 79; on the analogy of

been
formed
have
without this suTra."
sutras
2.
iftvsn
q^rft
ll
err,
^Fcr,
5tt?<t,
15,
ll
W S# ^
STCl 55
^^ %$$ft\ *nm *TFTfar *f3R$ ftTT?^
\\
1372
The
27.
from the causative

sn^cr,
T^r> ^ra>
JF*">
|rnrrT :
may
^r> ^h
%frT
*T%%
3T*T
after
^,
As ^;or ^farF
therefore
by VII.
anit; hence
is
^f%rT
srrerT
:,
q^TR
:,
$*&,
^rr%rr :,*Trftrrr
*,
OT^rft
of r5f(Causative),and
^jt, au^cMrn,
rS^f T *T^f%
^fa, snr, ^r?:,
11
?c^*TT faSTST ^r
&g%
and
a*ren;
By VI 1. 2, 48, the affixes
after
II
It
may
Participial affix
zm; ^k,
2. 15,
optionally get %z
II
âre optionally
5^, and
the Nishtha after this verb would have been always
optional
this
vii
11
*H ^fT STrPTC
The
28.
augment,
*;WiK
^r?cT,
By VII. 2. 49 fpi optionally is ^? and, therefore,

would have been always 3*f^> hence, this sutra
Participle
^mc3K^ ^m
29
either from the causative base or from the pri-
The words ^rfrT&c.are formed by the luk-elision
II
II. .
optionally take %e, namely,
other forms are
not taking the f^ Augment.
II
Bk. VII. Ch.
11
The
by VII. 2. 15, its

makes an option.
ffrT?
following irregularly formed Participles,
roots,
These words are formed

roots ^r &c.
mary
and
Augment.
S?
rule.
3T*3FcT:
exhibited in the Dhatupatha as nr^ST
or
(I.
sraRcT ^t or
:
812)
i.
e.
ctfttr
'
II
The
with an indicatory long
r^
stt,
and hence by VII. 2. 16. would have been anit always, this rule makes it opSo also, ?=rfr <rrfr, or ^ffq-^r Trfr, *fs& or I*rfr%T ?tprfk^ *rsfr or
tionally anit.
gq- preceded by ^p* will be optionally anit, even when having any
Sfgrq^V ^tqi
11
sense other than that of 'proclaimed', as this subsequent sutra supersedes VII.
FF*
So also 3Tre^r?rr: or 3TT^R#r f^T:, STTCSraW. or STIWH** iff:
2. 23 so far.
when preceded by 3TT, though denoting 'mind,' is optionally anit, in spite of
VII. 2. 18, that rule being superseded so far by this subsequent rule.
II
C^SHT^
II
V.
29.
g<*
*H, 3?fa^,
II
II
Participial affix optionally takes %z, after

?f*re:
or its
synonym
is
in construction
it.
As
or %tf
The
the word
when
with
T^rm
II
'
ssrfa
f$
^rmrWorfiwR
'to lie'
( I.
741
is
<?r*ni%;
^P
#for. or
^rp
#ctp;^j or
exhibited with an indicatory
^fq-rlr
in the
Wt-
Dhatu-
patha,and would have been consequently always anit.inthe Nishtha(VII.2. 15)

fr 'to
it was optionally anit before ktva ( VII. 2. 56 ) hence this rule,
The option
be delighted' (IV. 119) is also included here, this verb is %*
because
II
means the hair of the body as

The sense
as in the sentence <wrc$r ^r #** ^k^H. U
well as of the head
Why do
up,
horipillation.
bristling
of
in
connection
that
with %P* will be
of %$
appertains to both these verbs.

:
The word
?*m
Bk. VII. Ch.
II. .
33
Augment.
5?
we say "in connection with ^pt?" Observe

Deva Datta' and f*l% ( Divadi) f^rP 'the
Vdrt: The option is allowed also
gr (bhuadi) f^frr:
qifr|* li
II
929 )
The
II
^st or ^fam
'.
?nfT? 'the
And
H srqferen,
^,
11
II
has also a second form with the
srqf^cr
li
The word
( I.
i^rf*
II
30.
^ri
'
fo?R Mc^fHllr ^FR^W
augment %
of 'astonished' and
in the senses
^f^r ^rT the astonished
teeth'.
srrf^ra
'the deceived
delighted Devadatta.
'beaten back', as fix or
bent or destroyed
1373
'to
sr^HTrT
is
formed with the preposition 8TT added to the root

^rrsr changed irregularly to f^r before
honor, to fear, to see' and
other form
STH^lRrT:, as st<THT<tt or 3TT^rfimr s%?RJ^: 'the teacher
is
by him'. This example is given when the sense is that of 'fear'; when the
word means 'honor', then the participle must govern the genitive case, as required by III. 2. 188.
is
feared
Vdrt
destruction,
it
Before fcj^
showing
^ra
affix,
is
The
reverence'.
See
as belonging to the class of stpt &c.
take the affix 3? by III.
I
ffrr:
^m^m
11
11
^Wrarftsrar
31.
137ft
11
is
added
III. 3.
f%
as 3T7f%ri%: 'Loss,
by considering
94 Vdrt. Otherwise it would
to
qr3J,
103.
3.
11
s^r f fsra*irf
always changed to
affix f%j^ is
ifr,
stt
*rera
^^%
11
substituted for |t (I. 978) in
the Veda,
before the Participial-affix.
As
ipr**
Tnprc* *,
BiijrWflr
?mrc*
Vaj San.
I.
).
But
^^
in
secular literature.
wrftffmaar
32.
in the
11
The word
'
11
*qf^gar:,
<sr
aparihvritst
II
is
irregularly
formed
Veda.
The jr
As
q^rr%
3^
sTqrcfrTP
substitution required
sott
^ro ftot:
II
stst*
33
33.
Rig
<*?n*
ffer
is
m h.
^t^r
1 ffcfr,
last sutra,
**w> ffar-
does not take place here.
formed from 5 in the Veda,

augment, when it refers to Soma.
irregularly
by guna substitution and

As
by the
100. 19).
I.
faufareTO. u
K Augment.
'374
ssirocr,
^Rtct, ^Trnrcr, ^tt, r^f?^,
^n^, tox, sn^n, s^grfefcr,
sjrcRr,
firer*<z,
$ffm%,
Bk. VII. Ch.
5&&,
^Tm%
5rre<i,
II.
<re<i,
3rror%, ^rt,
34.
<re;<z,
11
In the Veda, the following irregular forms are
34.
and some without the augment %z

grasita, 2 skabhita, 3 stabhita, 4 uttabhita, 5 chatta, 6 vikasta,
7 vigastri, 8 ganstri, 9 &stri, 10 tarutri, 11 tarutri, 12 varutri,
13 variitri, 14 vartitrih, 15 ujjvaliti, 16 kshariti, 17 kshamiti,
18 vamiti and 19 amiti.
some
found,
Of
with,
the above nineteen words,
swallow' (I. 661) *^j
1,
2,
3,
and 4 are from roots
414) and
qfg,
to
having an
413)
^TO
and therefore by VII. 2. 56 read with VII. 2. 15, their Nishtha
would not have taken ?
Thus ?n^t ( ver. 5^3- ) m ^rT^ *TTH*3
refff*T?fr
The
apy ssrerf^pi ( =wssp0> ^^TrrRrTr *r*P ( =^xisw: )
ST^TC ( = f^sv*: )
Irregularity is only with the preposition ^, with other prepositions, the form
Similarly ( 5 ) ^xrr (-srrarerr) ^fa i%^from ^% qrc*ni
ScTPTrT is not employed.
(6)3rTRRr f?3 31 f^Fe<WL( =--R3?r%rT0 The forms, 7 8, and 9 are from the roots
*g#r, and ^rg ST^f^fr with the affix ând no augment; as
5T IWRff* and
indicatory
'to stop' (I.
(I.
all
s,
11
ll
II
TO^gwrorfasrerF
The forms
10,
with the affix
=f^^r%rrr
),
3<r
mm gfaip
= trf%rrrr )
srerrerrr (
= srcrrf*RPOn
and 14 are from the roots 3 and f (^ and f^),

As cT^crrt cr sresnt WT%%, and the augment s? and 37?
11,
12,
13
11
(=*rrare* or *rtfanrcO, totr* or tosto ottp*. ( = wrc* or ^farr**);

^^ftrjr 'Wtf^Nf^Rrft
*T^ft is exhibited in this form of Norn. pi. of the
feminine sf^ft merely for the sake of showing one form in which it is found
Here the plural is formed irregularly, by
another form is srtrcrcndr %^5r3:
qrre.
ll
ll
taking
the
word
as
^Rj
The feminine form could have been
11
obtained from TO?[, by adding
#jcr,
the special mention
is
explanatory.
easily
The
and 19 are from ^-^w, tt $n^, spi, and ST**, formed with
the vikarana sflpJ and the affix of the 3rd Per Sing nT<r, ^ being substituted for
As srf^^LW^T ( = *sr of *pr, or î is elided and the augment ?* is added
=5rere), a^Fffir
^T^frO, *%r* sifafrr (=$r*mt), ^r^r srrcm (=$rcRr), ** *tpt
(
rest 15, 16, 17, 18
11
to
*l^j[:
(=a*uprrW)
ll
Sometimes we have
sTT^^rg^^f ^:
11
3X
II
sp-wra", as tprczpffra
^rff
ll
sTric^r^*,
ll
%*,
mm*.
\\
Bk. VII. Cn.
36
II .
An
35.
f?
Augment
irdhadhfttuka
1375
114 &c) begin-
affix (III. 4.
ning with a consonant ( except ^), gets the augment *f
( in
these rules ).
Thus rtf^rr, rtf^r rtftrT^, q^rTT, <rf^*, qftrT^
Why 'ardhadhatuka' ?
Observe srr*?T,
The niyama rule of VII. 2. 76 ordaining ??
augment to sarvadhatuka affixes of Rudadi verbs, would prevent \\ augment before sarvadhatuka affixes when coming after other roots. The
employment of ardhadhatuka here can be dispensed with. Why before affixes
beginning with a ^-consonant ? Observe r^q;, T^**, pMfal, <T^fora. Though
II
II
II
the anuvritti of f^ was understood here, its repetition

ting the prohibition of the foregoing sutras like VII.
^^*rc*rr*%^tm%
"rt
*rtws
\z
11
^r%
II
II
^3,
is
for the
sake of preven-
2. 8.
5&*ft:,
aRrar^fafa*
II
*rrf%^*
11
iffreg
^%4h*>*?rf ^âtr^w &ft Wrikw ^tf^:
The augment
11
added to drdhadMtuka
val&di affixes after ^j and spre;, only then when they do not occasion the taking of the Personal endings of the Atmanepada.
36.
is
far
augment naturally, the

The restriction is that when the roots
sutra makes a restriction or niyama.
themselves occasion atmanepada affixes, then they do not take %*, otherwise
The
they
roots *$
and
-55*
are udatta, and will get f?
will.
When
atmanepada
3. 38-43, teach us when *&* takes Atmanepada affixes. Thus

Why do we say
S^ftr^*, W^lHm, SJW^T sra>f*RTsarar.
occasion of getting the Atmanepada affixes' ? Observe, qwrhT,
Sutras
senses.
HMM3I
do roots give occasion to Atmanepada affixes ? The roots occasion

when employed in the Impersonal, Passive, and Intensive
affixes
I.
STFrfasJ*,
'when not the
11
and
jtrT^, sre^%, ^3f^^%, srfa^fa^ U In all these examples
3s^ have become the causes of taking the Atmanepada affixes. The Desiderative is also Atmanepadi because of I. 3. 62.
JH**fts:,
Why
have we used the word f^Rrr in the sutra ? Would it not have
This form of sutra would have indicated
been simpler to say *g4i<4IHIfH<ft ?

that whenever an
ment.
Now
atmanepada
the rule
is
that
affix followed,
all
then there would be no f? augin the Locative case in this
words exhibited
Grammar, have the force of qr*nrft, e. when that word follows. Therefore
uWPTf would mean when an atmanependa affix followed. If then this "atmanepada" be taken as qualifying *j and ?>* then it must follow immediately
but we would not get the forms
after those roots, as in s^TPfe and sr^te
the atmanepada and the
intervenes
between
becanse
jf^fr^ and sraftq?r,
i-
f^ Augment.
1376
affix.
On
II. . 38.
"atmanepada" be taken to qualify the word "ardha-
if
viz, if the sutra ment *f^f^ff TT^tforg^TOr^lV

then the forms s^rr^^r and j^fj^j% would be valid, but we should not get
dhatuka
S?T?crc
the other hand
Bk. VII. Ch.
affix" understood,
the forms j^Wre" and
because the augment
q-^ftH",
#5?
is
a portion of the
and there is no ardhdhatuka affix here. If the sutra be

taken to have both the above senses, then we could not get the form sriêprers^
in the Desiderative, because here the atmanepada does not follow immediately
atmanepada
a'ffix,
affix that follows st*

Therefore, the word faprrT
For by so doing, there takes place prohibition with regard
to m*gz &c, and also with regard to that after which comes the atmanepada,
as the to in xrr^Ff^TrT, and also with regard to that which precedes the latter,
after the
sarvadhatuka
11
should be taken.
g^ affix
as the
in the above.
In
occasioned the atmanepada

this sutra
the root * has not

but the affix ^rg*, hence the prohibition of
does not apply.
Prohibition of f? augment should be stated with regard to
Vdrt
when an
jjHNtt Orerf^mmw),
affix,
Krit-affix, with active force, follows not in the
w*
atmanepada, though
in
was subject of Atmanepada. When ifju. takes

no upasargas, we have according to one view two forms g^fr and ^RrTT (I. 3- 43)
because the atmanepada here is optional. According to the other view there
But with q- and 3* we have vfw^n and
will be only one form, as etmw
the Active
voice such
II
Why
do we say
the Krit-affix should have an active force
? Obswas
subject
of
Atmaerve JT^mrT^W,
âugment
for
by
Observe
I.
nepada" ?
H^ffmrfr
3. 42, *n
is subject of atmanepada, when the upasargas sr and s<T precede, but not
3Mch*d r
II
'
Why
^tfcfarTsarc H
do we say
Here there is
II
"
when
'
it
otherwise.
flfffj
With regard to ^5, it will take no f? in the Desiderative, and before

by virtue of VII. 2. 11 and 12. Therefore, we have the forms
affix,
5T^t sfeft frlr:
affixes,
II
3*
*3Tft
II
srf:, st fere, sfr:
II
The augment %z added to vaMdi &rdhadMtuka

37.
becomes lengthened, except in the Personal endings
of the Perfect, after the root sng; n

Why not in the Perfect ? Observe ^nf^
As sr^mr, ivfan, *%%***L
takes
place
lengthening
of the f? taught in VII. 2. 35, and does
The
5[*ij%H
II
II
not refer to the f^T*^?; f* of VI.
<pr ^t
II
38.
and
after roots
^rf^
The
11
62
f<r: srr
Sir is
ending
4.
as
m&tt,
stff^lr H
11
optionally lengthened after f^F, fir
in long 3*, except in the Perfect.
Bk. VII. Ch.
f *T f fa HF*
f and long
TTCrTfoTT M
say
'after
do we say except
*t
41
II. .
fore
?RTT^
3rft**irlr
ending
i^rft
II
*, feftF
*r*ft*T
Observe
Observe
1377
3Tfo#^
roots'
in the Perfect
h 3*.
Augment.
f?
sfrfasncT
and %far
*^ft*r
Why
%ft*T H
and ?Rir%
do we
Why
II
II
The *? is not lengthened after the same roots

39.
ending
roots, in the endings of the Benedictive.
f and as
,
As
^ TOifo$3
fafcr
ff%:
ii
faîtqte, STTCftft?* STT^rTIT^te, fo^f^rS" H
^W^
II
q^rft
11
faN" f*r s^rero s*r frcf
The
fore,
11
>r?rm
^r,
M<*&<4$5
11
not lengthened after f and

roots, in the s-Aorist of the Parasmaipada.
40.
As
*rfa
*rr
tf
11
is
ending
srprfrg-
<r*rrfa
11
The
41.
(which
srrsrfre,
optionally lengthened also) after the said f and
farrfcrfa
frfrtftafrt
STrRwffrT
?**" fr
^1% T H^frT
The f^ was
hence
this stitra
prohibited
when $*
'
to
will
not
is
do and |
'
here, though the short
thening
ira:
as:
tstp$:
srrfrTCcrftafa
f^^tffafer
^Ki>qtt
is
not valid,
*TR iffSf^m f^rfrl%%
w*
f^^m s^rcwfw'crer^
11
The augment f^ however

formed from
%fa
nErafWSr sm%*n!faft
This Parasmaipada form
jnffqTlr
according to Padamanjari. aTTm^fn^rnr
w frrw fcfm*
f^T^^r^l f
optionaly take
roots.
1
II
H may
Desiderative
As ff<5fi% f^Rq% fatfaz

frrrft^frt
Atmanepada.
in the
**, ^TR, *T
11
ending
sic
from WUIlWll: II aTTCcm%P*> STT^mt^:,
JTPTrf^:, 3TmTCCT*,
XTPTTTCSP*,
from *>i 3TTS3T^; but
%^
|[? is
make
of the word upadela
sjt
is
is
by VII.
added,
2.
It
12,
in
may
case of the Desideratives,
be lengthened by VII.
not added in Ncfit^T and

'to lose \
Hr[^t4r%, as
which do not take %^ at all. Because

Wl by VI. 4. 16, yet such leng-
Because the anuvritti

sfc ending roots.
understood here from VII. 2. 10, so that the rule
the roots long

is
Dhatupatha end
and not those whose m is lengthened by some Grammatical rule.
the long 5ft in ^ and 5 is temporary only, as it is replaced by long f
lengthening).
lengthen
its
38.
lengthened before
applies to those roots only which in 'upadesa' or
4. 16, for
2.
they are
vowel (VII.
The
2.
Desiderative of
75).
*k
f^fuWrr,
in
long *
Moreover,
11
(See VI.
however, does not
R: Augment.
1378
The *3r is optionally added

the Atmanepada Benedictive and s-Aorist,
42.
ending
fefiR
Bk. VII. Ch.
II. .
44
to the endings of
f and
after the
sj
roots.
As
rr,
fsfte or srftqfc, siT^fr? (I. 2. 12
BTf rr, st^rs,
ar^rtte,
snf <r, jtptRs,
no guna)
srefts-,
Jrr^frs:, sr^rftsfte, srr^fWfs-
11
arreft^ srreTRs^Tr^teii rn^qf|.
Why in the Atmanepada ? Observe JTHTrRST*, JTT^rre^: H No counterexamples of Benedictive Parasmaipadi are given, as the affixes not being ^?yrf?,
the 5? can never be added to them.
spra
*TsfmT^:
II
%\
^T^rr%
II
3pn, ^,
11
*PitiTT%:
The f? is optionally added

the Atmanepada Benedictive and S-Aorist,
43.
ends in short
As sftfte
or
ST^rf^TTrTr'ill
SfcrT ffrT
Why
Why
OTfrT
sg,
which
or v^ftfrs
ending
is
Why
'
in the
to the endings of
which
after a root,
preceded by a conjunct consonant.
^qre, or ^rfttf?
f%* ^r^Sf,
grsfte;
Observe
in short s& ?
Atmanepada'
srvsprrrp*, or aEjwrftqT?ro
ST^TS,
'beginning with a conjunct consonant
II
II
'
STgTg"
II
Sifafte,
?
Observe
3T?^rmr%
ST?*Frf?rcfcr f^TÎ ^sfrS,
sresfre,
Observe
snarrtffa,
griffs'
$*?rg,
and
STMTS'
wft%, ^TfJrT
3TOl<sf?<t
In
II
ffrS ;
II
and
sfc$*ffer
and *pk$3 there is not f? first because *% (the form assumed by $ with fp; augthe word upades*a VII. 2. io,
ment) is not so enunciated in the Dhatupatha
,
is
understood here
so that the rule applies to those roots only which in the
Dhatupatha are 3 ending and preceded by conjunct consonant and secondly'

U* augment is considered as not attached to the root (VI. I. 135), and there;
fore
*> is
not considered a root beginning with a conjunct consonant.
*^n^#r^r%^f^ft m
3rff r:,
inr:
11
^t
11
q^rft
ssncfa, ^fcr,
11
^tt%, ^jt,
II
surfer
ff^
^n% i&ziPfo** *(%&**fcswt ^f^re^r^s ^ s^rw
A Val&di-&rdhadhatuka
44.
affix optionally
w%
takes
two roots ^ (sfiti and sfiyati), after

>^, and after a root which has an indicatory long sj
As ^ftrrr or ^rtf u srarrTr, jref^rr u *jji??r, wr, ^fam u ra qftrr, *rf^ h
%s, after svji,
after the
II
atftw
*3^fq-
*rrs
f%*usr, fanrf^rr
s<, *fmr,
'trnrrrr u
%fa Trfar%
s^fa^ forfa-
Bk. VII. Cil
II. .
wami ri t^^f:
ft v
Though
47
rc
**Rr^
srftrrr
Augment.
R?RrRr>faf?T
1379
^^wTs^'Trs^Rp
*2T?^rT$-
employment of^t
and the S-Aorist. The roots ^ of
be taken, as the special forms itr and
the anuvritti of ^r was current, the second
to stop the anuvritti of the Benedictive
is
Adadi
and Divadi (24) are to

and not the w of the Tudadi (115)
with the anubandha ar, in. order to exclude
*T3R
In
21
indicate,
case of these
the
Vrfarrr
The
ll
f* augment
the
latter
invariably f?
root *f takes
the subsequent superseding rule VII.

affixes, the prior rule
îrr^nsr
f
FtT:
ll
VII.
2.
ll
?Rr,
v^, ?r%r;
Some
fp*n*,
sfrsr,
*f<~rr, *r^rr,
sutra so
is
^r
II
11
hold that the
cqrrf?
(VIII.
2.
33
(Div&di. 84 to 91).
it
?rt,
yri%m;
(VI.
far.
far.
srar:
11
r*
59 aurcO
*ntf>
roots optionally take f ff in the Perfect

2.
13,
Tense
debars that
will always take f? in the Perfect,

stronger than the present, in as much as
Others hold that the *$\x% roots
a prohibitory
%\w>
1.
hrt, %f?crr; ^sr,
%F*rr,
because the present sutra being subsequent to VII.
because the former rule VII.

that
Rv
before
*rr
also,
of
virtue
And
ll
).
and
ll
105
w ft^r^r^STrR^*Trft*3T s?p*i 3th:to ^?nw^>Tr^x^^ s3T*t*t t^r

A val&di-ftrdhadh&tuka affix optionally takes
45.
ii
and the seven roots that follow

5? after
As tfw or vgt ?tct,(VIL 1.603*) *ftrar;
srfar
by
Future,
f^Rt^R
^vt-stt^-^t:, ^r
invariable, as STRrn"
invariably debars 5*, as
11,
<r?rf*
ll
2.
70, as
exhibited
is
*j
of Tudadi
rw;r
is
the
in
The
class.
>j
ll
t*c
rule.
fac,
ll
fSnr^frnj?* sthss
46.
is
So they form
<TTrft
ll
13
2.
*3T*^r
$<*:
and ixfiqH
II
ll
^nw&^rr^TO
?rr
?^rr%
vrr
valadi-ftrdhadk&tuka affix gets optionally
the augment r^, after r* when it is preceded by f^r

As Rs^rST or R<s^T?Rr fa<^fiT|* or f^^rf^w R^r?*** or R^rR^*
But only cfitRRr, ^TR"^, ^facT^* without RÛ The exhibition of rt instead
II
11
of r*t indicates the existence of a separateand distinct preposition RT, besides
r<t
It is the Tôf this
11
for the fôf
sfarenm*
f frT:
II
R*
3?r
gr
As
for the
is
changed to w by VIII.
and
r? regnirR
11
RBRrRJT'Tifr *Wfa
cTcr^;,
RSfjf^rTnx,
after ;*
19, in RFS^TR,;
added
preceded by r%*
The
is
to the Participial
II
special mention of f? in the sutra is

addition invariable, otherwise it would have been
PT^rf^Trr: U
its
2.
II
The augment f?
sake of making
9
T^rft
n \s n
47.
affixes
r* which
rct being asiddha could not be changed to
1380
??
optional, or debarred
becomes again
by VII.
fftn
II
An
48.
optionally take the

or
IT2T
qffqrTT
q^n%
*<r n
rnRKrfr^r^wrc[% 53 sr?
As
II.
19
the subsequent sutra, the addition
In
2. 15.
Bk. VII. Ch.
optional.
^fr^f^wbr:
ii
Augment.
s*r
S*, ^,
fzxmt *r^
ft^:
fa, V*, <TO,
II
ftsr.t^tMr ?t
ardhadhatuka
II
affix
begin ning with a
<T
may
after the roots f<* ?*r^, ^ft*, ^* and f^rjl

The f^ to wish ( VI. 59 ) is taken here, and not
sea:,
'
'
II
the f<r (IV. 19. IX. 53) of the Divadi and Kryadi class. Of the Divadi fsr to
and the fsr to repeat
send, to go we have invariably 'SjT^rr, ^TOg "sTf^RT 5 ^
of the Kryadi is governed also by this rule and has the same forms. Therefore
'
some read
the anuvritti of sftfj into this sutra.
f^rs^r
d^T
S<*
Observe
?r' ?
5%
srcsr,
f ht:
11
'
'
Crf^RTF
R"^
TCT
*f^TT
ST^r ^T fJTPTrTr
*r? ter
do we say 'beginning with a
I
Why
ll
qfqsatfst H
W,
^sr, fa,
f^rrr^TR *rr^r*
mv,
3> 3^3, *rc ?
5^5
s3
sre^r
fsr
*f
sftto:
11
*rc ^tFt
f^<srf
^ SH?rrf^rer
wlri
The
49.
after a root
^g
S* and
*J>
Thus
fa^r^w,
f^R,
The
3T*
and
root
47) nhwnt, (VIII.

(VII. 4. 56) srrerrt,
4-
of the Bhuadi class
sutra indicates. f^^Rq-ffT,
2.
Some add
17) fTtf^TRf or
UT^ri%
II
m^TR
is
fwjrcir,
will
Why
rT^, <T?t
II
is
sTTC",
The
f^ to reduplicate,
By VII. 55, the ^
mr&fa
sr^srroqrfa, sf^sftornT
far,
*r,
11
?*g. fts-
*f Rrc^rr^,
sr$ qt^rr^fr, ^r^Rqfer, Rr^rrlr,
11
11
nfr^TT^W, 3T c*rrH
mrrf^Tr^,
II
*rc
with ^pr
in
VIII.
?
2.
29.
VII.
4.
ftcrrcrnr,
is
II
ftTfcprar,
(VI.
58) ft?ftfff*Rt or fffft-
Observe %mr, *2T
Desiderative root
the
3% Rr^TRTR, rcrTCnW
mrrerr%,
also, as fflRTfTOrcr or RrasrfrT or f?pTr*n%,
4- 54,
do we say 'Desiderative'
thus evolved.
*<Er,
^, srfff^rf^, f r&fa u ***,
rcr*rt^nrf?t,
to be taken, as the form
and ^R5T
(VII.
fqr?t*l%
H
3. 86 before
be reduplicated by VI.
by VII.
36 and 41)
f%
%f^^>rwr^f^Hqi%?f^r^rf*n% T3T%,
4-
^sr,
erTg, fa,
II
3> rirerWrr, (VII. 4- 8o)g*srr%,
11
optionally take
after ac^j,
fffrf *rf?r or 5^rf?r, f*r%nrafa, g***rra n
(VI.
fa^r%,
Î^frT
sp*
may
clesiderative *t
ending in
3Tl%r, the
II
sfc
The form
3?ff-
being gunated
Now we
I. 2.
reduplicate it, and the second syllable fa*T

and the r?? is not duplicated by VI. 1. 3: so we
changed to ?
The form f^rt is thus evolved.
and q is
changed to long f, which is followed by f by I. 1. 57.
4.
Thus we have fwas root, and e*r is reduplicated, and the reduplicate is elided
(VII. 4. 58). The forms fwft and fcftc^f arc similarly formed.
get
is
11
Bk. VII. Cn.
II. .
54
%5T. ^Tr^Tf:
The
50.
take
%^
53; after
As
II
Augment.
f?
*&&*
II
II
%5n,
t^T, ftg^ft:
II
*o
II
^ and tI7^3, may optionally
ktv&,
affixes
i3Sr
II
fa?fr or f$i%^rr, f$s: or f^ftnr:,
fs^r^
or f$r*r?RP*
11
f|^j (ix. 50)
having an indicatory 3; would have optionally taken f? before ktva by VII. 2.

44, but then the Nishtha affixes by VII. 2. 15 would never have taken the
augment.
f|?fT
(Divadi 52)
being anudatta would always have taken

this rule ordains option with regard
STtTf't,
Hence
f? before ktva and Nishtha.

to ktva.
q^r
II
X?
<TTTR
I!
The
51.
after
tj
II
^:, ^
II
affixes ktv&, tE
and
TiT^rg
optionally get %z
II
As ^rr
or Tr?^T, ^t%T%^T:, ^rerrrTTTCrT: gCITO* or
option where by VII.
^feng^rftf
2.
x*
11
11 there
11
The
52.
T^FT^
<flprftr
11
toi<t,
affix ktvd,
^fn, *?
fr
shows that the rule
sutra does not affect
* <j?T*rn^
ffrf:
II
3T>^:
ll
augment f?
I. 2.
22.
kta and ktavatu always receive
II
The
roots.
stct
of the
The
repeti-
the 'optionally' of the preceding
invariable,
it.
r5rraPT*f
II
*TrT%
II
W^rpre%fcSTT*r
The
53.
is
This allows
the augment %$ after ?rc? (w^mr) and g H

As sfa^T, STOW* and sftr?r*P*> gfirat, qftgi. gf^Trffnt
Adadi class will get f? as it is enumerated in the list of $?
tion of
II
would have been prohibition. See
**#:,
H^t
affixes ktva,
after the root sjs^r,
î^tk
II
kta and ktavatu take the
when meaning
'to
honor or do
VI.
4. 30, II. 3.
something to show honor'.

As srf^r^r
^5 ^n% arffc^rr 3T*g jz&:
(III. 2. 188,
6;)
By VII. 2. 56 T3^ would optionally have caused f? to come before ktva, and
hence by VII. 2. 15 never before the Nishtha. This sutra ordains invariable
addition of this augment. Why do we say when meaning 'to honor'? Observe
3fTOfCfj<Tr?fc 'the water is raised from the well'.
^rt firmer
y*
11
<T3Tft n
w*., fotfr^
kta and ktavatu take ^r after

(Tud. 22) when meaning 'entangled or confused'.
54.
the root
The
affixes ktvsi,
f^ Augment.
1382
Bk. VII. Ch.
58
II. .
As gr^rr and 5rf rar, ftgpw. %w=, fagfw m*^-., riTwr <mf%
=
By VII. 2. 48 ^pr would have optionally caused f? to
f%%f?T 3Tr^f^r?:aT
come before ktva, and then by VII. 2. 15 the Nishtha would never have been
%?ll Hence this sutra. Why do we say when meaning 'to entangle'? See
gssj: <p&: =#%?r 4lf3<T:,
* 'to be greedy' ( Div. 128 ) is not governed by this
As ^s^T or <5rftc3T and ^fqrerr (I. 2. 26)
rule, but by VII. 2. 48.
11
ll
II
r%
sprafr:
ffrT:
II
II
XX
sTfa f^Rr^T:
55.
and sr^J
II
^TT^
3|, a*ft:,
tWJTTO f^TT^r T^
The
affix
II
II
ktva takes the augment
%z, after *|
11
As
or stfr^r, (VII. 2. 38) and arareir H *r was prohibited by

and 5T^ would have been optionally g ?, as it has an indicatory long
Hence this rule. The special mention of ktva, stops the
gj, by VII. 2. 44.
anuvritti of kta and ktavatu.
tsTr^rr
VII.
2.
11.
gf^fr
stt
11
xs
56.
^r%
11
The $s
sf^cn,
11
is
*rr
11
optionally the
augment of ktvS,
which has an indicatory short 3As 313 ^f*rerr or ^rr?^r; rri <rf^?rr or m^mi *s sro^r or^y^r
srar%
X^
*M* H sri%r%, 1kt,
after a root
||
11
^^
sp*,
^Pfa^^^n
11
11
^,
An &rdhadh&tuka affix beginning with a st

57.
(except p^the characteristic of the s-Aorist) may optionally
take the augment far, after the verbs ^^, (Tud 141, Rudh. 11)
(Div. 9).
(Tud. 35) 33 (Kudh. 8) <j? (Tud. 9) and
As 3F$3m> 3T3re$?t, nr$*srfrr ^rf%^f?r, stî^fi f^r%*ft ^%> ^n^rer
^4nr 8TOFt& pt^stsTCc^fci, nrf ^rm, ^nrafa sr^frr^, pr^r%srra
'
Why
Observe
do we say 'beginning with a
**/ ?
Observe ^r%rTF
nih,
*f qrc^q^s
II
Why
aif%f^?
ar^Tffil. U
ir&fta:
q^T^S
V=
II
t^tt^t
II
An
drdhadhatuka affix beginning with a

gets the %z augment, after irq; in the Parasmaipada.
58.
As
*Tfasqfa, 3Tl?*rl<fc
fsTTiwW
repetition of 5* shows that the rule
Observe
fc*ircfrs;
is
ll
Why
of *T*? Observe %5jff^
invariable.
11
The
Why 'in the Parasmaipada?
sritfto *t*t^, srWrcrW, srfwflr^Kf, 3Tf^nTra%, wrrenpriflrirt u
Bk. VII.
Cii. II
The lengthening
p^(II.
4.
48
59.
I'.
by VI 4 16 when
takes place
Why
Aorist Vriddhi.
1383
*rn. is
the substitute of the root
w ? Observe T^m%, "WTIW^ *T*tm
before
augment is not desired of the root *m standing in the

same pada with an atmanepada affix. But it occurs every where else. As
nr*Trwrarr ? ^ sTPTCra = nnTRr^^?^5r, here there is *? augment, because atmanepada affix is not in the same pada with t*t, but is bahiranga. Compare VII. 2. 36
vatt. It occurs before krit affixes, and even where is luk-elsion ofParasmaipada
affix, and where therefore the affix generally would have left no trace behind
by I. 1. 63. As ^r^TTf^fTrrr and arnrniFTPTfarTr ^^wi" S also nrn%
Ishti: This f^
^sr, here there
luk-elision of the
is
Imperative
affix ff
The opinion
11
of the
employment of the term Parsmaipada in

He explains it by saying: ^%q%$ 3ft UR^Frf^T **the sutra is illustrative.
According to him we have the forms ^nrTr%?rr
WTri *T^rcrf?TWg3*3 f? W?r
and 3Tf^nrtr%rTr tot^t**
author of Padaseshakara
that the
is
11
* 15OTST39V.
II
q^T
II
*,
f^T, ^3*^,
*t
three roots that follow
affixes be*<%
and the
it.
Thus f?t^?4r%, srrofo re^w f ^ reafirW 3T*n*% fa?^srrlr *i

3T$f*H ftPiÊrra' *^? *3'?sn% st^^f*
The frrrfl roots are four f^, <px, >* and *^ ( Bhu. 795-798 ). In the
1
w*$ft
II
The Parasmaipada ardhadhatuka

do not get the augment SJ after
59.
ginning with
<**.
II
examples, the Parasmaipada forms are shown, because these roots are optionally
Parasmaipadi by
Obj
sutra.
1.
3.
The word
92 before to and
=*Tg4:
reference to the
may
11
conveniently have been omitted from the
Dhatupatha
will
show
that the frrrff roots form a
subdivision of ^rfrff roots, and stand at the end of Dyutadi class.
So that the
would have been enough, and there would have been no uncertainty or vagueness about it, for the word frrrf? would mean 'the roots ffj &c.
with which the Dyutadi class ends'. Thus we shall get the five roots 795 <|<t
sutra
?r
Z*-W-
#rR 796 \% f#r, 797

the last root
j<r
and ff &c
11
shall find
applies to this root also.

first,
and 557 m*V%

As regards
from the next sutra, that the present sutra
Or we can change the order of the roots, putting ^r
^PJ TOTfjiaarnir*; 79 TO?*sn?r^r
we
it,
so that f^rf? will mean four roots only. Whether
mean the/zWor the four roots, the word '^g: is redundant.
The word *&?$'. is used in order that the prohibition contained
after
vritadi be taken to
Ans
in this sutra
because of
may
its
debar the 'option' which the root to would have taken
indicatory long
operation, because
it
of the present sutra
3>
(VII.
2.
44).
For
this 'option'
applies to tf//ardhadhatuka affixes
is
a bahiranga, because
it
is
an antaranga
while the 'prohibition'
applies to those affixes only which
13S4
*r
begin with
So
Augment.
Bk. VII. Cn.
II. .
61
would not have debarred

44: and in the Parasmaipada **f? would have had two
forms; which, however, is not the case because of the word ^rcjWi: by which the
'prohibiton' is extjnded to ^rj also.
Thus in the Parasmaipada, we have only
one form, as, TO^^m; but in the Atmanepada we have two forms *3i?f*^ or
u
that the 'prohibition' of this sutra
the 'option' of VII.
W$*%
2.
II
The word 'Parsmaipada'

bition does not apply to
understood
in this sutra,
affixes: as
so that the prohi-
3T^ft^, v&Moreover, with regard to Atmanepada also, the

added to these roots when they stand in the same 'pada* with the
ft**Kr, raf3*tfte or
5?
is
atmanepada
is
WrvRz
^"f%qff5T,
^rTfafisr,
II
But when the Atmanepada affixes are added not to the roots Vrit &c'
but to the roots which are derived from the nominal bases formed from Vrit
affixes.
&c', then the 'roof
is
not in the same pada with the
of this sutra will apply.
have
said, to the affixes
As f^ff^pfN?
standing
in
affix,
and the prohibition
Moreover, the rule applies, as we

the same 'pada' with the 'roots'; therefore
H
apply to Desiderative roots, as ftf ttrrer, though ^rr here intervenes between the ardhadhatuka affix ând the Parasmaipada rW<r so also, an ekadesa though sthanivat and therefore an intervention, will not be considered so
it
will
for the purposes of this rule, as ftfr%c3(rt; so
ftf^znW U The prohiand where there is luk-elision of Parand ftf c*r rf n where the Imperative f| is lukalso in
bition, moreover, applies to $?g affixes,
asmaipada affixes. As rcfRftCT;

elided, and being so elided, the force of Parasmaipada does not here remain by
T ^KTrjfTO (I. 1. 63); hence the above Ishti.
crrr% ^r
^q:
ll
*o
<T^rft
11
11
cm%,
^r,
^7:
ll
The Parasmaipada ardhadMtuka
60.
beg-
affixes
inning with ^, and the affix <rre; ( the sign of the Periphrastic
Future ) do not get the augment %w after the root
^*
Thus
cffrffr,
q%, ^T^rf?T^cT,
SRglHlfo 3T^^2J?i:,
In the case of
the Atmanepada,
there
is
affixes,
thus:
fNWTqRT
in the
FttKifa
But
^rf?Trrr%, 5fff?T$te,
3n%-
Atmanepada.
^t also, the f?
when the
11
II
is
added to the ardhadhatuka
same pada with the
root stands in the
prohibition everywhere else.
So
also there
is
affixes in
affixes
and
prohibition before krit-
and the luk-elision of Parasmaipada. As I%*c5r%?rr, precFSr *i ll

According to Padamanjari, these two sutras could have been shortened
(1) ?f f3>n: TS^s:, (2) <{u% ^r; and "*c<T " could well have been omitted.
:
rfr^ comes only after 5c*qr and not after other roots of Vritadi class, in
Parasmaipada [I. 3. 92 and 93]. Therefore, there is no fear that the prohibi-
The
tion ?nra
will
apply to the other roots of vritadi, but only to
'klip',
because
BK. VIII.
the word
Cil. II
q^qirf
Parasmaipada
ftAUGMEim
62]
I3S5
understood here; and as no roots of vritadi class take

'klip', there is no fear of any
is
the Periphrastic Future except
in
ambiguity.
After a root, which ends in a vowel, and after
61.
which the Per. Fat.

spr
(after
mm
like
affix t&si is
such a root)
does not also get the augment $5
Those vowel-ending roots

before the affix
As
*rar
Why
fore
'*F?
),
Observe
Observe
the
Future
Peri.
mm
(Per),
but
),
II
are also anit before the Perfect ending
Why
^^, ^RR
II
^TrTT,
is fts*rf%qr
fa%*T;
'like rTrw ?
The word
then the tR* will
anit,
||
Dhatupatha which are invariably
in
^r, r%^T,
HtTT, fsprf^T
ajrrTr
be optionally
rTfTT
f^HTrrr
rrrtf (
Peri-Fut.
in a vowel'
always devoid of the augment
the personal ending of the Perfect,
*T<s
be%?
II
R<Jr qualifies 3rf%^,
always.
As
Why 'ending
^fn*
Observe Wt^r but
ftrTr
anit
rjr*r
g^rftr,
there-
if
f%^rnrr
or
11
Similarly "Er^fatr, for f>w

Here
is optional before ?rr*T by VII. 2. 44.
atmanepada, and %^. in Parasmaipada. In fact, whereever there is
want of $^, whether by complete prohibition or optional prohibition, all that
But anthis is the view adopted by the Kasika.
is regulated by VII. 2. 13
is
anit in
other view
is
that the prohibition of this sutra applies to the $? of VII.
l^5*fto
and
f%5*rft*T
srctffcrCVii.
2.
11
This view
2.
13
44; so they have two forms

applied by them to VII. 2. 46, as srcîf or
only, but does not debar the option of VII.

is
2.
44).
Why
Tne f rce of *1 is tnat tne

in rtf^r^?
root should have a form in ?rr^ and then be anit; and if a root has no Periphrastic Future form, and thus its rTr*T is anit,, such a root is not governed by this
*
Here the roots q* and â the substitutes of

and 3*fttr
Future form, and hence this rule
Periphrastic
st and %w respectively have no
does not apply to them.
sutra.
As
*rqflr*r
Srq^rSccTcr: H
II
q^rfr
II
<FI^5t, STc^rf:
II
After a root which possesses a short 3? as its

root-vowel in the original enunciation (the DlilUup&tha), and
after which the Peri-Fut. <ma; is always devoid of the augment ($
62.
*T*r
the
the Personal ending of the Perfect, like m^, } does not get
augment
*ar
11
1336
As
Fut. T^T, Per. ?T^?f,
is
the result of
Observe Fut
nm
Per
guna
r%*rr?q,
[Bk. VIII. Cn.
jqs, ^^j,
a^Tf,
Observe Fut.
the Original Enunciation'?

'karsh'
Augment.
m&W M Why
Why
substitution.
here the root-vowel
do we say
which the
Per. ^nifrafq in
zifcf
II. .
65
'in
3T
of
do we say 'having an 3r' ?

Why do we say "short
%
is
11
Observe Fut. vt^\ Per. nnrqq from *m the root-vowel being long srr
The word m^\ is understood here also. Therefore we have f^r^rr%, fsrqff q
st"
Here the root q^

be anit before
anit before *r^ (VII.
is
The words R<q
II
12)
2.
and not before
takes optionally \\ before <rr^ (VII.
2.
3,
it is
$?c5
The
11
Therefore
only after
and after which the Peri-Fnt.
Wrftt *TSTq, TO?, *s?q
also,
like
||
by VII. 2.61
roots are covered
s^t
the specification of these roots makes a restriction, so that all other roots,
not
anit,
waja,
though the Peri-Fut
we have forms
II
not
II
augment % that
mf> does not take the augment
As
will
For the root sr>-s (VII. 21)

44) as 3Tr>5ftn" and 3TlFTtfr
always devoid of the
<ttc* is
it
4. 71, 72).
In the opinion of Bharadvaja,
a root which ends in short
so
3TR?: are also understood here.
the rule does not apply to aTPrfs'srq (VII.
63.
rtf**
II
are
rTr*r be anit.
So that according to Bharad^q", 7HTq, 5u%q
Thus this sutra makes the
in
like qfqq,
II
preceding two sutras optional, except so far as short s^-ending roots are
concerned.
As
a general rule,
sutra mentions short
Had
words.
niyama because
so
if
the present
niyama
so, this rule
rule VII.
stitra
2.
11
its
therefore, the
application to long S ending
would have been a vidhi rule and not a
61 does not apply to long = ending roots, and
were to include long
also,
could not be called a
it
(restriction) of VII. 2. 61.
^g*TTcTci5^nrjjw^^#9" ft*m
1Ftt
long = are %?
roots ending in
order to debar
3^, in
not been
it
all
^*q
3rr?TrT?q
64.
As
$M
qfrRr
ll
ll
*g*r, sttcTct^, snzro
î** **$ f c>rfrf% Pr<rnq% faq^qq

In the Veda are found the
spew and
*nj5, 3mrcr?r,
11
snpj
irregular
forms
11
q*q (=q*nrq;
( = arffrftq )
*Pg**t
- ^ftq ). See VI I. 2. 1 3. This
is also a niyama rule with regard tof for by VI 1.2. 13 the root
f was already anit,
anditsPerfectwouldhavebeen qqqbythat rule. The special mention of this form
shows that in secular literature this root is always %? before q of th^ Perfect.
* f|
% ff^TFT^ ^cT*
frrrr
qq^r
= *^ff!|
q^r^rcs^rcTrTsq
^q <q f| *qn%qr
Bk. VII. Ch.
f^r^TT^T
II
^^ft:
^f%
11
srf%
sarar?r
it
ZZ
II
3T?.
5^ and s^ll
(VI.
I.
T^TT%
II
See VI.
II
II
affix $1^ gets
and sffa^fW
srrf^T, BTrt^T,
By
46) in the Perfect.
VII.
11
1.
11
58 for sr* augment.
3Tr%-^r8-o^PT^Rr^
*5T,
f c3f%q-f *n#3T*T?r *nr1%
The
66.
As
^cfa-^nt:
55^ and ^st
%" after
or *mfPT, S?g or f?r%r
^T^f%5*T3TcfRP*
lf%:
form,
11
augment
ally gets the
As srere
z\
11
1337
q-^the Personal ending of the Perfect, option-
65.
Âugment.
67]
always the augment 5? after
The
root
s^r
have run into
it
from the
Therefore, this sutra
sr*%^nrrf srern*
11
makes an
11
sake of clearness,
not
was an optional sutra, the enuthey were already provided for by VII. 2.
for if
meration of 3??; and s^ was useless, as

63.
for the
for the anuvritti of 'optionally' could
it,
last sutra:
&n
and saj would have

the present sutra makes the $? aug-
the rule could have stood without
not changed to
is
63, the roots 3T
2.
%^, and sft never therefore,

ment compulsory. The %^ is repeated in the aphorism
optionally been
II
it
invariable rule.
^rft
11
^5, ^T^-srnT-srm"*?;
11
The Participial affix

(3^0 gets the augment
only then when the reduplicated root before it consists of
one syllable, or when it comes after a root ending in long
67.
3*T,
and
after sr^;
Thus
II
STTf^TPt,
3tn%^r^,
reduplicate stems $1FI and 3THJ

3T 3TT
and
changed
ending
3T3T5T
1
to q
in
taken the
>f^T^, %?%^Pt
become of one
In the
II
syllable
In T^r and %3 the reduplicate
II
is
two of these, the
elided and the vowel 3T
and thus the reduplicate has become of one
syllable.
Of roots
This
would have
3TF we have, stfaffip^, riff ^T^., of q"H STf^rp*.
^t
general
rule
of
increment,
the
the
present
sutra
augment by
makes
II
a niyama, so that the roots which are not monosyllabic

are anit
first
by the coalescence of
as
fÔT., f^rf^SPt, JsiW^, fsifw^
11
in their reduplicate
The niyama
is
form
made with
regard to the roots which would have taken f? generally, as notbeing governed
by the
prohibition in
than one syllable
in
VI 1.2. 13. The
enumeration: as a matter of
syllabic ultimately
fact,
by losing
rule, for its Perfect will
10
roots ending in long 3TT
their reduplicate form, as qT3T
may consist of more
+ 3rcr, hence
their separate
however, these reduplicates also become mono-
their STT
II
The
root frc^r
be formed periphrastically by
is
III.
not governed by this

1.
3J
Vart, because
1338
it
f?
more than one
consists of
added, there also *Rgl loses
Augment.
syllable
final
its
[Bk. VII. Ch.
as ^r??f^^R
srr
And when
II. .
m%
is
69
not
before ardhadhatuka affixes by the
vartika under VI.
So the srr being elided before the adding of any

4. 114.
becomes a root which no longer ends in 3TT, and so the cause of adding %& under this sutra no longer exists, and so no ?<r is added. Thus
we have fff??^, for before ardhadhatuka affixes fftgT loses its 3TT (VI.
4. 114 Vart), and this elision being considered as siddha, (VI. 4. 114 Vart), no
affix, this
occasion remains for the augment f?
form
stem of one
(a
by VI.
reduplication, because VI. 4. 100,
reduplication (VI.
The ^becomes
II
but had
it
sr$T in its
The
14 &c).
1.
is
subsequent
3?
reduplicate
not been separately mentioned, then
penultimate 3? of qsr would have been elided
100, the
4.
syllable),
first,
in order to the rule
being elided,
we should have
which not having any vowel, could not be reduplicated.
By
its
before
ordaining
*jh only,
separate enu-
meration here, the augment f? being ordained by a subsequent rule (VII. 2.

Having, therefore, first
67), prevents even the rule of elision (VI. 4. 100).
added f^, we then elide the penultimate 3T by VI. 4. 98, this elided 3?, however, becomes sthanivat for the purposes of reduplication only by I. 1. 59.
Thus q^+f^?r = "E7^+f^H (VI. 4. 98)=W + ?^=^f$rePi;il
ff?p
11
t*t
^m
fsrsr
The
68.
*TO,
^C, fir?
?^*ri wr^rr tot fairer
and
fe'CT
affix
?w
?^ (^)
*rera
optionally takes
after
II
^-^fg( 1 changed to ^ by VIII. 2. 64 );

and
55)f%T-f^ffôr PO%R0 f^T- f%fWpTF^ or r%r>
^Tôr ^rq^r^, (VII. 2. 54
The root f^[ to acquire belongs to the Tudadi class, as it is read here
v^T^
As
rr^-^fFJ^TJl or *T*T^P*.
'
'
II
with the Tudadi

f^r^fT^ because
f r%5
11
fw
The
f^
'to
know'
(II. 55.
IV. 62), forms invariably
atmanepadi and cannot take $? augment before
it is
Vdtt
The
*TTO
snmr w^v
root
root ?T should also
be enumerated.
^fa^fa^r*ircf?r ntTi^r
The form ^THR^f^H; with ^fk
69.
*"jaffix.
As si%^Pi and
is
irregularly
formed.
This
is
The augment
derived from
is
of the reduplicate before ^ct
by ^f%1
This
^%RT
added, there
11
As 3Tfs*TcW
or SRI"^ root.
is
The
form TOffi^RTH
no change of
other form
is
Vedic,
bt of
is
%??ht*ti.
in
secular
STPT
JT^rmra"*
II
to q, nor the elision
when not preceded

literature we have
Bk. VII. Ch.
74.
&
S^JTT:
ff^T:
II
augment $?
it
Similarly
and
in short 3
after
II
ll
?TcEftiij[
II
BTfre^
vs?
3ra(Rudh.
As
st%:, refer
II
The
BTrr^THT^, aTIi^ST^
72.
Parasmaipada
But
II
f<r
after
ST^rTn- or srf^rrr in tenses
root having an indicatory long
^gs^srw: ^c^rî
The
Trrm
II
II
sg, g, ^sror:,
and
after the roots ^g, 5;
But
srwrerrtti
Exception to VII.
TO^q^g
^rer
11
11
arcfrs:,
II
srore> arore or
srvn%
vs^
in
10 and 44.
2.
q^n% *m, *st, to, aranc, ^, ^

w t*t f ^qT^r^T^TT^KT^Trrfrf ^ snn*rTr *m% l^ft rcrnr frmr^
^nrorcwraf *r^sr
other
optionally takes f? (VII.
ftps of the s-Aorist gets the %* in the
As3T^cfrrri, amnfni;,
3*1
\\
of the s-Aorist always takes the
2.44.)
Atmanepada.
II
21).
STT^^frft
than Aorist.
ar^T^ &c
The ^
71.
11
II
ending
after a root
njk ftn%
ffrf:
n^ra
The root *f takes always f? before *?r,

tfi fi
iH? ffînr, WftânH
does so optionally before other affixes (see VII. 2. 44) as ^ft^ra H
As
though
SftcT-^ft:,
II
&?w w terror
1389
^1 the sign of the Future and Conditional gets
70.
the
V^rik
v9o H
II
ss^rRr^PTT ^r^rf
11
f^ Augment.
11
11
ll
11
The ftr^ of the Aorist in the Parasmaipada

takes the augment f s after *ro;, =o*, ?&*?; and roots ending in
long 3tt, and ^ (^f;) is added at the end of these stems.
73.
Thus
is
argfsr^
araraff^, sTsrcrer*,
Parasmaipadi when preceded by
Brr^nrFnPTpr
srraf^sra
argrtffct
TORT^f^n"
ararfsfCT^
1
^rJi^T
11
3T3n%5
3rt*rr
The root *n
^renj;
arWrr[ ST^f^ST'* STTOnj:
ssrfcfrii sarcflrepT
fa or 3?r (I.
:
3.
83).
swNfar
ar*rccr
11
II
??*5cr
w^rr
%w mm m %^-frr
11
3* &c. ordained by VII. 2. 3, does not take

The root sp* is atmaneplace by VII. 2. 4. In the Atmanepada we have STT^r
padi, as it is preceded by an (I. 3. 7$) 3TWT, ST^rf (III. 1. 85). Exception to VII.
The
Vricldhi in the case of
ll
2. 10,
44.
&M^+i.4(?4*li ^TR
ffrT:
II
f^Tl;
II
^ m 3?>^3Tf
\W
II
fîpTT
T^TT%
II
ft*T,
*Tr?TTT *=tfterT%
^F, 3*
W?T
3T53,
ST^^R
The Desiderative ^C gets the augment

the roots t%t^, ^, 5, ^T^ and sr^ n
74.
II
II
^ after
?*
1390
Augment.
Bk. VII. Ch.
Thus fa*wj%, f^TR^ (VII.4.80) srnresrfa, srfcsrrw^ (VI.

The root >i is not governed by this rule, as S^qf^
and 3TflTRr^r%
II
(V. 18) of Suadi class
\\
is
,
and
3)
The 3TO
11
the latter always has f?

optionally
1.
78
II. .
taken here, and not 3T^(IX. 51) of Kryadi class, for

while the former having an indicatory long 3; has
II
The desiderative
takes
four roots that follow it (Tud. 116-120)
75.
Thus
f%rerfWtr, fsnrf^rfrr, ffsf^r,
roots J7and
it
and the
after ^r
farcer, fasTf^rft
The
fln?$n<T not included in the five.

got f? in the desiderative by VII.
But
fa*
( I. 2.
VI.
8;
1.
16
).
would have optionally
2. 41, which would have been optionally

here being specifically ordained, does not
But
the
2.
VII.
by
5?
38.
lengthened
VII.
2.
38.
get lengthened by
^rf^w
^RT:
II
snshng*
^rr>3? 3tTC^ *3fc
76.
nant other than a
\ss n
11
<*rnra n
sarvadh&tuka
^r,
^t^f*t:, ^rrlrv^g%
STrW^^ f^TTr% h^Rt

gets the
affix
beginning with a conso-
augment %*
and the four that follow it (Ad. 58-62)

Thus nf^r%, ^mW, **!%%, srrPTRT, 5Tf$Tlrr
ll
the
five,
ning
and ^nr before ardhadhatuka
affixes,
11
after the
But
5Tr*Tr?f
root
which
is
beyond
and ^f^f before a vowel begin-
affix.
iw &
f H{'>
II
11
vsvs
11
f 3T 3tTTO1
*v$m wm$ ^
^^T^^sr f3T*T% >T^T
11
11
f^cTTO
II
The s&rvadhatuka affix ^ (the ending of the

second Person Present and Imperative Atmanepada) gets the
augment Rafter 1st; (Ad. 10)
As fra^r and fr?P^ *r becomes ^ by III. 4. 91 and 80. The% is exhi77.
II
bited in the sutra without
f^rRTii ^
ff^FT:
II
II
vsc:
||
any case-ending.
T^rfr
II
If,
*T?ft:,
v^,
11
fc 3PT ^cTT^ST^^ s> f^H^ ST f 3RTTO ^ ^r^^Tf^^ ?TPT% *T^fa

The s&rvadh&tuka affix ^ and ^$, (the endings
78.
II
of the Present and Imperative
Atmanepadi
get the
augment
%z after the roots |^ (Ad. 9) and 3PJC

Thus fnr^r, ff^P*, ff^T, ff^, oTRb% SfFT^T, srfaq-, srf^
Tne Vikarana ^^has been elided in
^fr (IV. 41 ) is taken nere
||
ll
as a
Yedic
irregularity,
and so also there
is
The
this
root
case,
not elision of the penultimate.
Bk. VII. Ch.
So
II. .
In the secular literature the form
The
ways.
swsrf?^,
For
here for
some read the
this purpose,
having
is
also to be included, thus
karma
s^PTiTf^r**. in
Parasmaipadi. * takes %z after 55^
is
1391
Here the ^ would prohibit f?
UFTCT H
is
5T^ f tne third class (III. 24)
swsrf^PT- ^r^5Tfi^r,
root
Augment.
f?
{r*RP
sutra as
this
II
trf
Locative dropped, and therefore the
its
Otherwise
vyatihara.
also, as freiTO
al-
we have
=sr;
and
stands
ft
force of ^r in the
according to this reading,
is to draw in the anuvritti of far from the

Those who do not follow this reading, draw the whole of the
sutra by force of ^
From these it may be asked, what is then the
sutra,
previous sutra.
last
II
necessity of two sutras
answer than
this r^r%^r f|
The form
fe^:
^Hf),
which
fnr?
vss.
not final
is
the
^rf?r
II
the
(i.e.
^r
which
?:,
^r:
II
ô
is
augment
96
<?%?,
is
Why
i.
e.
Potential
),
of the augments qr^; and
||
of the augments
*t
*Tr?pr,?j2"
^ftîn
the Benedictive.
q^Tf^T
STcT,
II
*TT, %*T>
II
%^m sHrergsirei % * fsremWr
>ref?r u
(i.e.
for the
fr
is
of the
Potential).
T^rTPând q%g:
prevented.
Why
The
II
1.
66.
of fa
is
elided
before affixes
In the case ofq=Erg:, the pararupa
'ending in a short 3?'?
Observe vxm\
'short'?
*rr
st,
Why
Observe r%3^r^,
Observe
sarvadhatuka?
ii
The
s?
II
11
m^ of the
Thus
nr#<afr?t
of
pta,
beginning with a consonant by VI.
U33r?t
v-^jt
fe^:, *r, 5fa:, st?t?=^*t

arr^si ?T3?r^*T ?w h^rt
The
not final?
substituted for the s&rvadhatuka
apply to the
After a Present stem ending in short
80.
1.
will
11
^frTTI, :, ^FrT,
$$0*11 Why 'not the
Why in the Sarvadhatuka? Observe ra&raro,
frar U
3T^rn:r5rfr^riTR^ *u
of VI.
no better valid
11
?a;
tfr?C,
^tan&cTPl*
rararrg:, ????,
11
II
But f?
II
^"^f^firre^PT'^c^T^
In the sarvadhatuka Lin
is
Thus
Observe
3T<ft
is
II
elided.
is
*ftg*ll
final'?
maxim
s^f^t^t
*T^t<fr
What
and
<Trfa?n
f^f^STTf^f^TJ, have
this there
$% being taken in the sutra, the rule will not apply to the
79.
the
^3 ^>
srrt^r^ffrr sr%, ^rtqrg^ sr f^w <tw
11
To
(Imperfect): which will not take f^
the Imperative on the
fnf;
sutra, like this,
being shorter and more general?
sufficed, as
ssr. of
Could not one
under VI.
objector
48,
4.
sarvadhatuka
may
say, the
and so there
in this
case of ardhadhatuka
sutra; for
stf
is
f%r^T*3?f will be so by the elision of

no necessity of reading the anuvrtti of
form
when
ar
is
elided
by ar^r^FP VI.
the present rule cannot apply, as there
is
4.
48, in the
no base
left
1392
re.
which ends
case of
T%rq[
3T of
the
in a?
q-=^r
To
II
we
this
and 5%?j
would require
also,
Augment.
reply, this
debars the lengthening of VII.

if
3.
101, so
3.
*jf*T
(VII.
3.
101) would apply,
But that
is
not
so.
Therfore, as this
iof.
it
81
II. .
not a good reason: for then in the
to be lengthened.
that the present sutra debars rule VII.
Therefore,
is
the rule 3T^r Cl%
Bk. VII. Ch.
The
f*i
and
fact
is
substitute
would debar the lopa of VI.
4. 48.
the anuvritti of sarvadhatuka be not read into this sutra, the
f^
would apply to ardhadhatuka also, and the lopa-elision VI. 4. 48
would not help, as that would be superseded by this special rule. Therefore
substitute
the aunvritti of "sarvadhatuka" should be read into this sutra.
The above
But
stated on general grounds.
is
if
the
maxim
T^sq^r^T:
^Hf^K^^
^rriTR (Apavadas that are surrounded by the rules which teach

operations that have to be superseded by the apavada operations, supersede
only those rules that precede, not those that follow them) be applied here, then
the present sutra would supersede only the preceding sutra VI.
the following sutra VII.
3.
101 which would not be superseded
In this view also, the lopa being superseded at
sutra.
of 'Sarvadhatuka' must be read into
all
4. 48 and not
by the present
events, the anuvritti
this sutra.
3. 101, the word 'sarvadhatuka' is understood from

But according to some, the word far!7 of VII. 3. 88 is also understood there, so that they would lengthen the 3T, before a sarvadhatuka personal
termination (mfO only, and not before every sarvadhatuka affix in general.
In the
VII.
3.
rule VII.
95.
According to
3.
fr4r
this view, the present sutra will
101) and not the lopa rule (VI.
The word
\q>
4. 48),
the sutra
in
is
debar only the dirgha rule (VII.
on the
maxim
formed by
sir
^?r ^r STfHT
+ 5^:; and
&c.
exhibited
air is
without any case-termination. Others say, the word is aj: the sixth case of ^r
formed on the analogy of f%*?T by the elision of sir (VI. 4. 140). Then w- +
:
fq: = 2j + f2p (VIII. 3. 19) after this elision, there ordinarily would take place
no sandhi; as this elision is considered asiddha (VIII. 2. 1) for the purposes of
VI. 1. 87. Contrary to this general rule, however, the sandhi takes place here
and we have 33: by VI.

only.
The
real substitute
Some
not
2?r,
and
STTcft
1.
The
87.
is
f^
a? in f^: is for the
ll
read the sutra as 3THT *m%H' M
zroftra: is
fecT.
II
81.
a genitive
*\
II
Personal ending which
||
3TRT:, fecT.
that the sthani
is
m& and
||
being a portion of a sarvadhatuka

%<* ( i.e. am*, STT^", amrro and srrsrn* ),
sjt
is
coming after a Verbal stem ending

tuted CT
II
So
compound.
q^Tfa
For the
sake of pronunciation
in short
sr,
there
is
substi-
Bk
vii. Cm.
82
ii. .
Thus
Augment.
if
W,
7%3r, T^Tnrt, 1%*Tr*, qVcT,
<T%?t,
1393
SW* PW< W^l
The
II
a of ftf drops by VI. I. 66. Why do we say "the long 3rr"? Observe q^PrT, 3*1RT,
Why do we say 'a fr$ affix*? Observe TO*fc <T^m% (I. 2. 4). Why
q=^%, ?ra%
do we say 'ending in shorter'? Observe N^TT%, fj5?rr%ii Why 'short'? Observe
ii
All sarvadhatuka affixes which have not an indicatory

I.
Now ^nNrg^fart
2. 4.
stood from
two sutras
2.
I.
2.
I.
I. 2.
>
tne roots
*rr
&c
f??
had
the word X&%^
treated
are
f^jj
equal to
is
when
the *t^
affix,
and so there
added to
^,
the root
no guna. But
is
derative root ^f^f^sr
being a f&rl
STjf^rTTT^rT 3Trc*PT7^r
I.
3.
12
^r
fiTT ?3"
offs^'il
The
s^^fcqfrr
the
was
For
"like
treated as
is
same way as
But in the
the
in
affix followed.
so explained in order to evolve the form
is
under-
is
But the grammatical construction of the word fg^ in the

and I. 2. 4 is not the same. In the first sutra, it means
2. 4,
I.
1. is
fe^ by
are
r^
a sutra in which the word
is
4)
have been treated,
second sutra
sutra
M^^
=
they would
f^frT f ^
1.
(I. 2.
ll
if
itself
In the case, however, of sarvadhatuka-apit-
).
themselves become like i^q;, and are treated as f^q;
affixes, the affixes
f^
had become f^<j then the Desiroot would require atmanepada affixes by
if
affixes,
own
not only with regard to the stem preceding them, but with regard to their
we
selves also, as
3TI% gfr
ffrT:
11
3tr
see in the present sutra.
II
^Tft
I!
<TC<frf*3r^r 3*TR>rr
II
ii
in short
Thus q^ryp,
This 37
h^r
Before the Participial ending

st, gets the augment g^
82.
stem ending
g*T
3?T^,
II
is
stft,
a verbal
II
^nTHFT' H
part and parcel of 3T only, and not of the anga.
be considered as part of the anga, then
it
For
the anga end in a consonant and so there will be anomaly in accent.
VI.
1.
186, the
w sarvadhatuka
affix
is
anudatta after a stem ending
be considered part of the anga, the stem no longer ends
be considered as a portion of bt only, then the ariga
So the accent of
T^R
and
if
still
in 3T
but
For by
in
fl
$*?
make
be an intervention, and
will
n; so
but
if
if it
remains ST^T^ (VI.
I.
governed by VI. 1. 186.

186).
An objector may say, "if this be so, then the stem q^T*r is still considered as ending in 3T, and therefore in q=q"T + 3TR, we should apply the previous sutra VII.
2.
not be so; for the

is
?jr
to be taken, but
the rule VII.
The
objector:
2.
81,
and change
in st?
(VII.
when
37
is
3? into fsr "
"If
this
is
so,
11
To
this
added, this
3T
it
reply, 'no,
means the
For there the word ST^ST
is
3?
it
con-
mdtfd
becmes one maira and half, so

applies only to 3? of one mdtrd"
then the anudatta of VI.

3T?
we
80) shows that the 3? consistipg of one
81 will not apply; because
hold good, for there also the

objection.
2.
?T3T*TPT' is
1.
of one matra."
186
will
This
is
not also
no
valid
taken, so that a stem which at the time
1394
f?
of upadosa or
that rule;
matra.
after the enunciation, the short 3T
may
is
Cii. II.
86
governed by
be lengthened
reason that the rule VI. 1.186 applies to
It is for this
though the short
Bk. VII.
enunciation, ends in a short 3? of one matra,
first
though
Augment.
cpsrr^:
and
in
its
T3TFT:
by VI I. 3. 101.
Or the sutra may have been made as stttot 5^, and the augment tf
would then be added to srffi and not to the verbal stem. All the above difficulties would be removed by this view.
But then the final 3T of t^sr &c would
require to be lengthened before jtpt by VII. 3. 101.
This objection, however,
is not insuperable, for one view of VII. 3. 101 is that the word mf^ is undersubsequently lengthened before
3T is
?r
and
r;
stood there, so that the lengthening would take place only before a f^W affix
beginning with a
fcnW
1 Ftp
11
I!
srrcr
vowel
arsr
<T^rft
II
and not before any other
fo,
II
3TTCT.
w%
stt^r^ ?^rcr?r
affix.
II
11
substituted for the 3?r of str after stt^;

f
Thus 3Tr^r^t S*f%
(See I. I. 54 by which the fits t letter of the
83.
is
II
II
second term after ^\W- which is exhibited in the Ablative is taken here ). The
str which is in the 7th case in the last aphorism, should be taken in the 6th
case in
this.
sm*
srr
firWt
84.
*w
11
srr is
T^rfar
ll
stst,
11
stt,
fira^
II
substituted for the final of srg^ before a
case-ending.
Thus
Observe 3T5c^,
amrni, 3TRJ
3TST^:,
srsrm*.,
The
3TS"rTr H
in the alternative STSPT:, 3TS>3
letter
3rr>
and not
srr
rule of this sutra

:
II
sfe
11
^\
85.
nant,
sit is
an optional one, and
3TT
II
For the generic
also, and as the letter replaced (3T^)
also nasal
we have
the sutra indicates the individual
3*t,
but
it is
not
so.
is
3Tr
a nasal,
See VI.
I.
172
when the word stands at the end of a

(VII. 1. 22). The word !%*rf?R governs the
or
frsirft:
2.
114.
<7Trfa n tpt:,
11
ffe
11
Before a case-ending beginning with a conso-
substituted for the final of ^
As wire.,
Why
srr in
'before a case-ending }
rule applies also
subsequent sutras upto VII.
^pfr
The
is
belonging to the general class
would include the nasalised 3TT

the substitute would have been
and VII. 1. 22. This

compound, as fforenr:
Why
*ff^,
ll
'a case ending'?
g^^T^TT^tr
ll
But *jm, w> before

Observe t*3H, X1
II
affixes
ll
ll
<i^rf?r
ll
g?T, sr^ft:, srcr|d
II
Bk. VII. Ch.
89
II. .
86.
Pronouns.
3TT is
1395
not a substitute.
The substitute
siWfJ
sr*rrf*n, g**T?J,
case-endings are given in VII.
Why
do we say 'when
Thus
27 &c.
1.
not a substitute'
it is
3T^*Tf
when
case-ending, beginning with a consonant,
before a
and
substituted for the final ofg**T?
it is
gs*nT$:
Observe
and 3TWJ (VII. 131). The anuvritti of %fo need not be read into this siltra
for if that were so, the mention of ST^f^r would become
redundant, because as a matter of fact no substitute case-ending begins with a
3*Tqr
from the preceding,
consonant. However, reading this sutra with VII.

fefTTT^f
is
II
2.
89,
we
MÎW
II
II
flCî^r^TH,
II
87.
stt is substituted for the final of
before the endings of the Accusative.
As
s^n*, *TT^, 5^frw
3TTCT*r
*g3\\\
and ST^TPt
ings which are even substitutes, otherwise the
See VII.
cient.
srsmrcrnsr
hinwih
2.
find thafrthe scope
before consonant beginning affixes.
and VII.
28, 29,
far** wniîh
11
would have been
suffi-
97.
t^tr
11
^TOT^"
This rule applies to end-
last rule
92 and
2.
II
and
JJ**4f
11
srsmnrn,
fe*M3,
^r,
11
substituted for the final of 3^T? and 3TOTS[

before the ending of the Norn. Da. in the Secular literature.
88.
3TT is
As g^p*,
in the
3*
Dual
^rwrfar
ttwr
*Tu%
11
STPrPtll
Observe ^,
w*t
Why
Observe
g^ft:,
ST1W
W hy in the secular literature

T
in the
qîftr
II
of the nomnative
st?, vjl, qft
11
Veda, so also
*r.,
II
stf%
srrei.
Why
Observe
II
11
89.
*T is substituted for the final of g*JT? and arorf
before a case-ending, which is not a substitute, and which
begins with a vowel.
Thus c^r,
TOT, cTfa,
*nfc,
5^%:,
a vowel'? Observe 3^T*3PT, smrropr

anuvritti of
^,
we need not
arMf
Why do we say
If in the sutra VII.
II
and the sutra VII.
this,
sonant, where
3TT will
si
*r^m,
explanatory.
*r^
*t5T%
11
11
2.
86,
will
we read
For then
the
this
before all non-substi-
be considered an exception
with regard to those case-endings which begin with a con-
(apavada) to
here
'beginning with
86,
use stpT in the present sutra.
sutra will be a general (utsarga) aphorism, ordaining

tute case-endings
2.
be ordained.
Why
'
when
In this view of the case, the use of srfer

the ending
is
not a substitute
'
Observe **T
Pronouns.
1396
\o
<srq: n
qc(TR
\\
substituted) there
is
Thus
gwT*^, 3T*TOi,
3^*1 3TW*, rPT,
are included
which
cases
iloka gives the
The word
To
employed
ST?
2.
in the sutra for
is
The
To
89).
%q"
^1, TO*,
The
II
following
the sake of clearness.
This
is
For
the general
this
confusion, the
why
elision,
?ri
there
latter,
an exception
is
case-endings beginning with a consonant,
non-substitute
srsntfi" ?
word
in the
Wl,
*Wl,
ST^nra.
the exception that before non-substitute case-affixes
is
pective scopes.
When there
5^^. sr?*,
3Tnfiil,
universally before all case-affixes.
Thus without any
comes.
OTSnifr
is
*HT,
>
(VII.
be
before
that
^q"
elision
this there
will
there
II
the Singular and Plural of the Ablative,
in
and the Nominative.
c^?j;, JTr^r
rule.
91
II. .
( srr or *r is not
the
final
of
elision
of yushmad and asmad.
This elision finds scope
there will be
Bk. VII. Ch.
In the remaining cases where
90.
Dative, Genitive,
$t^, frr:
II
is
arr,
and the lopa
3TT
find their res-
not sti added in the Feminine; in
maxim
not added on the
is
the
nf^j^RrT
combination, does not become
srfsnTTrT
<WOTT
^fg^Kj^q 'a rule which is occasioned by a certain

the cause of the destruction of that combination.'
as?r^
and
?pi
then
ar**?^
Because the ending in aj of

was occasioned by vibhakti combination, if this latter occasion
will destroy its own fruit.

the words 5"T^ and 3TW
it
Or
may
be taken to have no gender, and
equally applicable to both masculine and feminine.
In order to avoid
3TT (or fs portion) of %**{%
next sutra VII.
T^ anc
1 of
(
%q-)
is 3T1;,
2.
art*n;
about
difficulty
under
91, the portions 'yushm'
this sutra.
and
'asm',
some would elide

They argue that by
2T<i
the
the
namely the portions upto
by substitutes. The portion that remains

which is to be elided.
**&%. are replaced
and
Why
this
all
and
is
pronouns have
it is
this
ar
this a??;
'lopa'
taught
again,
when by VII.
substituted for their finals
before
102,
2.
case-endngs
all *2j?rf|
;
and so
would yushmad and asmad, lose their finals and become yushma and asma
by that rule ? That rule does not apply to yushmad and asmad, because
by an ishti that rule is restricted to tyadadi pronouns upto Tf thus excluding
55^, 3TWT *TO3 and f^
,
II
roMrCT.ii
.*
11
t*?rfa
11
<parerer
11
The substitutions taught hereafter upto YII.2.

with regard to the portions of 3^T? and sr^T?
the substitutes replace g**S and *W%
91.
98
upto
take effect
H.,
i.
e.
II
Bk. VII. Ch. II
92
Pronouns.
1397
Thus VII. 2. 92 teaches that g*r and srr* are substituted for yushmad
and asmad in the dual. The substitutes replace gs^ and st*h. Thus g^PI.,
The 5R (V. 3. 71), is* not
Why upto n ? Observe g^fjr*> 3TTC3TO
srnrr*
replaced.
Similarly VII. 2. 97 teaches that m and T replace yushmad and
asmad in the singular by this sutra yushm and asm are only replaced.
Thus mm, H2ir, the 37?" portion remains for which q is substituted by VII.
'
'
11
II
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Had
2. 89.
Why
In the
first
cluding
is
VII.
2.
the word trf^r
is
m and *T would have~been

and given us undesired forms like &m and qr
employed in the sutra and not the word 3t*tT, as jtptTTO?
the whole been replaced, then the st of
replaced by q
89
place the word
*^,or
3T*<T is
ambiguous,
^ and including ^
ending with
used to indicate the
11
),
limit,
11
may mean ending
it
nbut exword qabtT

The word m<ff
with
In the second place, the
or portion taken out of the whole.
Now
would have meant, that form of yusmad and asmad which ends with n
these words have a form which ends in n, as gHTFTnHf or ST^rpTrsTS' = gsT% or bt^R%
formed by ftr^ (the f% portion 3T is elided by VII. 4. 155, vdrtikd). Now a
noun formed from this derivative root gfwr and ari%r by fipi affix will be gs*
II
and 3T*H
These are the two forms of yusmad and asmad which are complete words ending in h
The present sutra does not apply to these words.
In declining these nouns gwând a^n, we shall apply the rules VII.
2. 89 and 86, thus
11
11
Dual.
Sing.
Nom.
3^
g*
Ins.
g^
gsarr^r
gqrPT
Abl.
3**
gq-roi
gsr?jr
Loc.
afs*
a^St:
^^Tg
Ssrnft fw?&ft
TOP
fHRTRIT^r
CnqHftr
Ace.
gsri"
g^r
Dat.
3*Jf
g^rr-??T
Gen.
?pr
g^r-
^tt%
H
11
3^r,
mit,
fjg&^ft
In the Dual, 3^
3^ and
substituted for
is
srrer
This substitution
g^ror*, srrerorq., g^rar, srr^n
duality
where
sense
of
is prominent, if
compounds,
the
substitute like VII.
11
2.
94 &c. does not intervene. As
3Tf^T^ 9^5.) Similarly 3Tf%^n%Mi (stf*ft>T3*f)
g^r) BTcJrr^r^r
But where
g*i>3
11
3rf?T5Fr?rT
(3rm^r% g^r) sTernrra srmgsrrg, 3rmsf>r%g g^f btot^t^ 11

are to be substituted, there those will be substituted, as arf^P*
sT^g^ra
&c
g^pr=
au^g^r and
araprrf*:, STRfgW*,
so also 3Tc3im*; srfrrsprr^, ^T^r^r^ (=3rm^TffTni,g^rH &c.
( =
3^
g^
(Padamanjari).
g^rr*, sjnrrw,
takes place even in
some other
,
11
Plural.
II
Thus
sTPTg^pr
**
Dual.
II
92.
for 3T^q;
11
Sing.
Plural.
= srf^^rfr g^r*0, srer?* arra^* srfrore srfacpsi. btRtto* arfwrpr, sn%*ro

This substitution does not take place when yushmad and asmad denote
one or many ( more than two ), though the compound may denote a duality: as
'
11
'
'
Pronouns.
I39S
Bk. VII. Ch.
II.
55.95
compound, the words yushmad and asmad are employed
If in a
in
compound as a whole may have a singular or

plural number, for the number of a compound does not depend upon the
number of the words composing it, yet even in such a compound the 5^ and
srre substitution should be made for the dual-significant yushmad and asmad:
unless such substitution is debarred by some other substitutes like ^ and sr^
(VII. 2. 94 &c). Thus aTRr^F?T 3*ri = 3TPt^rr*> similarly 3?f?r-3TPrPi The
dual signification, though the
whole declension
given lelow
is
Sing.
PI.
Sing.
arra^r*
arf^pr:,
srarer*
sn^rer^
sranrar
srorerw
PI.
8?^*
Nom.
Ace.
STf^STI.
Ins.
srfaa^r
Date.
STTrT^^
stri^
srfsRSP*
srartra
Abl.
STfag^t
arfrrw^^
TW**l
ST^r^
Gen.
sTrlm
Loc.
,nbt
arirrs^ra
STRT^HS
STOrefa
3n3PTT
But when the words yushmad and asmad denote singular or plural
the compound denotes a dual, then the yuva and ava substitutions do not
As arm^tr
take place.
also st^WTP^
^wft
So on
I'
*ri%
n 8.^
As
rFRl *?
That
Wl ^
35*11
oETTifr Sft
II
*jq\ splr, ST^T
Nom. PL to is
W13PT qi*H3
,
rule applies
so
11
substituted for 3^:
II
*-*
and
II
3.
r*,
The Tadanta-vidhi
maxim srgfrrwft
angadhikara on the
In 32RT and sr^w
10.
^+
ffcjand
<*?"%
II
arRt^Rr arfa^T*
in this
See also VII.
II
by VII. 2. 90, and we have

1. 97 and 107).
31
+ 31* (VII.
3T^,
1.
the final
^8) = W!^T
^ is elided
and ^jw (VI.
II
5wrw#w*?iw trr <re ** 3T? ?<arrrrer?#r *^r?r

In the Nominative Singular
94.
for 2^: and sr^ for st^j;
ff%5
5^^= STnracqp*
3TfrfifT?<fr
II
^*Pi, 3Riw,
applies here.
q^TT%
11
In the
93.
*&[ for 3T^q;
<3rT*=3Tf^rT*, so also
in other cases.
11
ii
is
substituted
II
Thus ^r* and

VI.
1.
97 and
gvm^r ^ft
95.
*pK and
As
3T?*r
<tw?PT
WTT?*
and vizr*
3Tra**w
11
See VI I.
1.
28,
107.
*m
II
ll
3^,
*ri?r,
^rt
ll
In the Dative Singular gyq-
for st^h;
^W
q^TR
*-* n
is
substituted for
II
TO*, qwg^l, <TWTWS>
*Tf?T3*2T*T
^faTO*
II
Bk. VII. Ch.
II
98
dw ^fa
n *-*
ft
and *m
As
90,
and
for st^h;
qwr*, <T*WT,
*i*r + 3l + 3T (VII.
3 Wi3M** fr n
t s^rrnnw *tw
**vs
arf?ra*,
I.
tutions
before
jpr
is
by VI.
^ft
I.
elided
and
<W>
*T
for 3T^c
*rar,^q[, T<t,
in
s^rfar,
II
And
place.
Tfa
The compounds also take this
ll
3T^^
sr^^Ymq^fng-
98.
11
c^
w
is
11
is
As
h lx?l
<
and
one,
substi-
and srr?
by the rule of
as regards different substitutes, like c^
already been given above, others are
*wfa
ll
i&m, 3trcq?&:,
substituted for 3^:
and
gr fi
fl
^qw
HW, afrfTOF^, 3TT%?^r-
3?f?r^rt
jt
they signify a single individual, even when an

a word
3T
yushmad and asmad denote
or many, thereeven the
also with asmad. Similarly
So
is
II
a compound, the words
Some examples have

II
2.
97.
as srictoi "HW r* = 3TT%^r
compound may denote two
srfarpr
by VII.
&c, those prior taught substitutes debar this latter
^H"JTRT%>*:
STRTg*aiw
<rc is substituted for
In the remaining cases of the Singular, ^r
s^tr, TPT
must take
and
csmr, qtr
11
substitution according to the sense
though the
11
The
3TmPT H
27) =
^rf?r
11
substituted for g^:
When
sro
*nft,
ii
97.
As
<=nr,
11
II
<PT, *pt,
and
rT^r
t^
11
1399
In the Genitive Singular
96.
3*q;
Pronouns.
ll
for sr^q,
when
affix follows, or
in composition.
sstCr:, *{%*:,
with the affix
g-
(IV.
2.
14,
I.
1.
74) ?^rR:
=3TmWT
Similarly when
V*&m ( = wraHTO), *TO%
( = 'E^rf^STtT ), *T3n%
),
a second member of the compound follows. As ?T^ SW; = *^pP,*T?cnf: n *i
When more than one individual is signified, the
RPTrsTO = ^?rr*P, HsTHT:
substitution does not take place, as gT<ffa ( = 3WTR7Rf), 3T*Tfr3; S^Tr^S^ (=
*%
Wt[f; r^SjfrT
II
ll
S^P* 3*0, 3TWO*: "

The sutra VII.
2. 97 referred to the vibhaktis or case-endings, as that

word from VII. 2. 84 governs these sutras, the present sutra refers to other affixes,and to compounds. It might be objected, that even before other affixes and compounds these words had in them vibhaktis, though those vibhaktis were elided
when these affixes were added or when the words became part of a compound;
Pronouns.
1400
Bk. VII. Ch.
II.
100
and thathaving inthem suppressed vibhaktis, the substitutions would take place
This objection is not valid, for there the vibhaktis have
in spite of this sutra.
been elided.
process; and
But
not elision a Bahiranga and the substitute an antaranga
is
should not, therefore,
vibhakti elided
The
come
the substitute
substitution specially taught in
ari^Sffr^TP^
bahiranga substitution of
'a
sutra
maxim
a jnapaka and proves the existence of the following
is,
therefore,
supersedes
$53^
and then the
first
this
snrrejfffifq" f^sfp*
even antaranga
Thus O H 3, fsr^rs^f = *fpTfg'sRT'> here the antaranga ;jjt augment is superThis sutra further indicates, that all other subsseded by the bahiranga ^^
rules'.
11
'yushmad' and 'asmad' which take place
titutes of
*PT,
g>3,
do not take
*T5T, <^> 3T?>
but that &t and
fcT^r^r^;
frrg*rf% ^n^roi
11
the singular, such as
in
II
sa
^rf?r
II
^shct&ir qf^nt
11
ftr,
II
Asâf ff^^n^W,
^rg^f :, fepTTO, ra^[
^sr^f^frrr
^t h
fcTQ is substituted for r%.
99-
?r^,
before general affixes or in compounds,
are the only substitutes there even.
*r
f^rjnf^RT
^rfrRR
effect,
and
fstrrcpr
^rcT^;
for
if^rtli
^^;
^ras^ra
II
11
^g^ in
the feminine, when a case-ending follows.

Thus nr^r:, 'qr^*., f^PT:, ^rr^f^r-'
Why 'in the Feminine' ? Observe
The word f^rar^ qualifies fir and ^5^ and not the
*&., ^r?*ir, 'sftf^T, ^wft: H
word arjf 'stem' which is of course understood here. Therefore, the substitution
will take place even where the anga refers to a Masculine, or a Neuter; when
II
Feminine; as
nr and -*g* refer to a
(VII.i.94)fsRRT^r nWrI?r
5
by VII.
2.
ll
100 ordaining *
11
fran%# srrgF^rs^
The guna of VII.

franm 3*r5TTf^,
3.
no is
5TTgrTTO=rrare*rr HTSW-
debarred
ro?RT*pfr,
in anticipation
frai%Sf*r
Similarly
II
The samasanta affix cfftr (V.

^rrqtfh ^rT^PT
fWT<rcrr.
added
in
the
above,
because
not
&c arebahirangasubstihowever
is
f%g
4. 153)
^rTW ^RW
>
tfteTOC^.
tutions. Conversely, the
ahga
II
may
be feminine, but iffsrand q'g* refer to
Masculine or Neuter nouns, the substitution

or
fsrarfiir
sftr% ^T
STOT
dual, fqttft:, fqtpra*
Vdri:
as
m^rr
= fsmf^J
The substitution of
^tt upt*
Vdrt:
'a
will
not take place: as
Brahmanl
to
whom
Similarly fq^T^p, faq^^rCr, ffira^rsm*
II
frT^ for
reran?<^%S*3n":
three are
beloved.'
II
f% takes place before the affix
effsft
^^g has
does not apply. But
ftTCR
dI53 a 3l
acute on the
"snr^cfrw
first,
as
according to VI.
^w1.
q^r
ll
179: the
Rule VI.
frTrft
1. 167
debars the
accent.
srf^-r ?: sfccr: n
^00
100.
II
is
q^ri%
II
srf^r,
tl&&\
\\
substituted for the gg of fcT^ and ^Tcf^
before case-affixes beginning with a vowel.
Bk. VII. Cn.
II. .
Pronouns.
Thus
fa?r, (in mffftrTBnrT,
3tr^;
frofw
faspTrTtf
supersedes VI.
the
101
first),
VI.
1.
few
fasrsRW
The
last rule
fa^ms stpto,
11
fira^rffi R^ffr
of^for^t), and VII. 3. 1 10

3. no, though subsequent in
Trr*|f>T:
VII.
Why
ever superseded by this rule-
Observe R*rr^,
?>*) ^TrmfwyRf, *f*w- <rs*
**p* M ffirarmS fa*rf^,
This
11
102 (ordaining the single long substitution of the form of
ill (substitution
1.
tion of guna).
t^w,
1401
The
ll
(the substituorder,
how-
is
'before the affixes beginning with a vowel?'
fc?T:
of the sutra refers to the s^ of feft and
and had it not been used in the

would have stood thus stN^ "îs substituted for the final of
the words above-mentioned before an affix beginning with a vowel." So *
would have been substituted for the final of fa and ** also.
q-rrg-
and not
to a s
ending stem
in general:
sutra, the latter
101.
snrsc
may be
substituted for 5HT
optionally
before a case-affix beginning with a vowel.

As aiw or wrr in srcsrr or sT^r^crr: tfr^cr u *rcr% or src% (*r% or *rcr%
But only STCP-^TO., 5Njfa: before an affix biginning with a
^r qT??^0
consonant. The Sftsr substitution takes place in the Neuter plural, when
In 3TH5Rq OTgmgjrj
the augment w is added: as 3TfrT5NTI% Hlgiuifitfll^
q^j the affix is not elided. The form is thus evolved: arfifinc 3T^
Here
,
ll
II
11
three rules present themselves simultaneously;

*pr
by VII.
:sn;*T
VII.
for
1.
1,
23, (2)
by
*n:
24 which
this
is
luk-elision
first,
then the 3T* substitution by VII.
Of
rule.
^^-elision
these
an exception to VII. I. 23; and

sutra. *TC*r being substituted for
1.
24, (3)
of the affix
and
thirdly,
superseded by
is
in its turn 3tt is
st*t
of
replaced
this
*rc we have STm^ncw
now
elision
as
it
has
cause
already lost the opporand
again
appear
cannot
luk
In the Nom. Sg.
tunity: and we are left with 3T^ alone, and have srfrTSTCST
by the *n^ of
ll
we have
and
and
Ins. PI
The
reason being ^f^llrpraroTT
arfrTSTC
3Tf?r^::
according to the opinion of Gonardiya.
rrft^TtT^ that which is taught in a

occasioned by the combination of two things,
does not become the cause of the destruction of that combination \ Because
ST* was added to srfinrc because it ended in a* (VII. 1. 24), and similarly fa: was
rule the application of which
replaced by
(VII.
I.
therefore, these latter affixes,

to be substituted for 5TC
truction of the producer.
by
is
Now
9).
'
f%f*TCfaf*TTt
has caused the production of 3T* and

qq;,
though beginning with a vowel will not cause
3T
^w
then the produced will cause the desOthers hold that the above maxim is* anitya, and we
this rule, for
have Nom. Sg. 3Tfr?5rc*r, and Ins. PI. 3Tftr*rc%:

The form 3TT%*reTr% is thus evolved srfa*re + f
Here if the 3* augment be added first, it will be a portion of the ariga, and will not be an intervention to anything which is to be added or operated upon the ariga. But this
II
11
Pronouns.
1402
Bk. VII. Ch.
104
II. .
augment will be an intervention with regard to *nr which is but a portion of the
So that an operation applicable to 3RT will not take effect,
word 3TfrT*rc
this
of
because
3* intervention. And though tadantaviddhi applies in these
II
chapters (T^r^rf^Fft rT^T ^T
rff^rTTO
maxim
*), yet the
is
that the substitutes only
replace those which are specifically exlibited in a rule (ntff^WTTO ufftw
WX
therefore src^ would not replace

STRTSTC
the
*r
this
Even
ll
of sn;^
the substitution does take place, the
if
Therefore, the
ll
-s^ct
srfwsrcst is
3TCT
are considered as one).

24, teaching 3?*
9T^r#rm:
1*1
ll
We
thus evolved.
^rr^ 3T^3^r^, we
maxim
1.
would be found
made
first,
after
because
3^ should be added
the
so,
W^T),
word
full
after-
72.
I.
the
?^f^ni
|*r
substitution should be
a subsequent rule; and having done
is
wards under VII.

The form
VII.
which forms only a portion of a
substitute
have
Here on
and
23 ordaining the luk of 3T*r and
*re*T
Then appears VII 1.

The latter rule is preferred
ll
^ft
ll
^T*fr?TTO,3T:
ll
STftTaft
+ s?3
ll
for *re also, (for sre
for the reasons
given above.
ll
For the final of 9Tf and the rest, there

substituted sr, when an affix, called vibhakti, follows.
Thus sts m-y &t, w ztw., zt, %; *r *> %t> *; ^r?: tt:, <r<rh
102.
ii
j^s^, fir, $*; 3Tf1 3T^T, 3T$

upto ft ,in the
list
srfr;ft, fr,
STOTW
"
^r;
The tyadadi words extend
of the pronouns, for the purposes of this sr substitution. There-
the substitution does not take place here in
fore,
is
vr^ which forms
>r^r^,
word 3^ &c are employed as names, or as a secondary member

in a compound, the substitution does not take place, as 3^, ?rfr, 3H-> atfrl^l
See also I. I. 27 commentary. But when they form
srirf?Ttr 3Tt%c!Tf:
the principal member of a compound, the substitution takes place, as tort:,
TCTOT, T*T^ H F r case affix (vibhakti) see V. 3. 1. also. Those affixes are also
When
the
called vibhakti
and cause these
fa*: <$: h ^3
r%* %&zw ?\
ff%:
||
ii
103.
As
ST3P*
is
3?:,
^T,
!%*:,
%U
II
<rc*
substituted for VEK before a vibhakti affix.

The substitution takes place even when the augment
37 is
ll
is here 3
and not 3T which latter
For w of f^T being replaced by 3? (VII. 2.
which would be replaced by 3T, had the stitra been
sufficient for f%*
II
f would be left,
and the forms would have been the same
102), the
V.
II
H^m favm
Therefore, the substitute
added.
would have been

fapffsq;
*TT?fa
ssroif^fr
substitutions.
3. 1,
13 &c.
$ ftnfr.
ll
\o*
<T5rn%
ll
5, f^r:,
11
(ar
+ ar + sr^^f VI.
1.
97).
See
Bk. VII.
Cii. II
104.
affix
: is
3TTT%
II
^TT^
105.
(V,
w is
or a
<T
f^:, ^r, fT? (V.
*X
1403
substituted for fem.
beginning with a
Thus
Pronouns.
107]
II
U,
II
The
13, 7).
3.
a vibhakti
before
$ in ra means beginning with a
r{
II
II
substituted for
f^: before the vibhakti
3. 13).
As
fR niH
m fa,
f{?
Hf$31W
II
The
before
substitute ^p of the last rule,
the
affix 3T would have become ^, but that it would have caused guna, hence this
Had the sutra been Hfflrsjpt it would not have included
separate substitute.
the
sarar*
augmented
fa?**
II
For the non-final <* and ? of 31? &e. there is

substituted H in the Nominative Singular.
Asws+s-sr+st+scvii. 2. io2)-+sr+5(vn. 2. i66)=m: (vi.
as <m g = <?* + st -3 (VII. 2. 102)
Similarly tf: from tft,<r*: from
1.97).
Soat^r from sf^tf by the following
=
i. 97)(VI.
2.
106)
(VII.
^:
+
*
+
BT
=<jtf
106.
-1
-I-
<r<T<
Had not this word

Why do we say 'non-final' ? Observe % %,
been used, the case-affix would not be elided in the vocative, as then there
would have been no short vowel, as required by VI. 1. 69.
sutra.
jfnr:
11
^ 5*w
3f^
thrift
^ntsr ?otf
*ft*r
^r*r wit
*tw ^r top ttw& ^r^mt^fr *rtfil
sr^r
sft
Ucgsiwro sfirfW
107,
*8prrc*r
^
affix ^ is
For the
whereby the Norn,

As ^fT + 5 = BTf + 3?r+g
11
11
II
srcr^t
II
11
of sr^j; there
is
substituted
sff,
elided.
(VII.
2.
io7)=3T*r + 3Tr (VII.
added, the
2.
106)
*&
11
is op-When the augment ffe!*

after ^, as srg^: or SR$& H
tional, and in that alternative f is added
When ?Tt &c form second members of a compound, the above
r/ ;
mentioned substitutions take place before the application of sandhi: asqrc?^,
is
VArt:
3fr substitution
The form m&R'

present sutra
12
is
is
thus evolved -BTS/tf* + g>
prohibited; therefore,
now
3?r
substitution of the
the 37 substitution of VII.
2.
102 takes
Pronouns.
1404
place,
and the ?
changed to
<TCirr?*r
g-
is
changed to
by VII.
ST
2.
106,
Bk. VII. Ch.
and the
3?
io#
II. .
of 3T^=^ after
*r is
The following observations may be made with regard to the forms

&c A substitute would be a bahirariga with regard to a case-affix that
should be added to a compound.
ekadesa should be
made
first,
and
Therefore, being an antaranga rule, the
this
ekadela being considered as the beginn-
^^
we should get erroneous forms like *TC*Tfr

Hence the necessity of the above vartika.
Kdrikd: Let the sutra be 3Tf*r aft without the words gr^nr* H The
word ^t is understood here from the preceding aphorism. The word 3*^p is in
ing of the subsequent word,
instead of
T^r?*
an<^ T^rn? &c.
the ablative case, the word
m*
into the 6th case
3%
is
to 9T
is in
the 7th case, should be changed here
mean 3Tf*r Sriw* SuTRfRr *T^ffT

Then the final 3T*r of 3Tf sr is changed
changed to by VII. 2. 106, and we have 3TQT (I
sutra would then
substituted for the 5- after 3Tf*r h
by VII.
So where
102,
2.
and %
ls
the necessity of using the words ggCTTO in the sutra,
is
Obj
by VI.
:
elided
will
which
snr
The
If air
be substituted for
69, as
I.
comes
it
not be elided by VI.
I.
nantal affix only, the word
ceding sutra VI.
1.
fj,
then in the vocative this
after a short
vowel
3T of
VII.
2.
sfr
should be
Ans.
102.
afr
69, for that rule refers to the elision of a conso-
being understood in that sutra, from the pre-
68.
Obj If this be so, then in the Feminine Vocative we have 3TOT + 3TFr
and by the rule VII. 3. 106, the 3?f should be changed to tr before this afr
Ans. No, this will not be so, for the it substitution takes place only before a
:
II
5T^ beginning affix,
from the sutra VII.
Obj
the word 5fo
for
understood in the sutra VII.
is
3.
106
103.
3.
If this be so, then
the fern inn ine with 3T^^,
we
have, arsro-f
and requires the 3? of ^r to be changed

to f (sTRT^r) before the sffof an affix.
Ans, That rule VII. 3. 44 applies where
the feminine affix 3jr is audible and remains unchanged, but here it is changed
3ft,
and here
to 3TT
rule VII.
(Vrddhi
Obj
by VII.
I.
srr
f^jft
\
+ 3TT=
Ans.
4+ shows
3?r) in
in
3W +
Hence the words
tne
3TT,
^ would
is
common name
;
*%<?*
11
11
11
require to be changed to
partial only, for 3rr^ in VII.
given
moreover,
may
^ri% v$w-, *
ot iwr i^FRnarWr wit
*r.
f vr-
This objection
some, to be the
1^
itself
3T^^
of Dual; and not to this 3ir
can apply.
%f*r*
But then
18,
explained by
the
3?
3.
I.
18
tffr
is
by ancient grammarians to
in the
masculine no objection
well be omitted.
:
108.
*t is
Nominative Singular.
of
K^K
in
the
Bk. VII. Ch.
As
II. .
y*re
titution of VII.
by VII.
3^T
113
sni*
II
102.
2.
1405
The substitution of it for * is to prevent the 3? subsThe case-ending is elided by VI. 1.68, and u substituted
no.
2.
tr^TR
*o. H
II
rA
ll
And
109.
Pronouns.
5 of 3^ before
substituted for the
** is
case-affix.
Asf^T, *>,***,*%, f*PUI Thus ffw + ST*r*3T + 3T* (VII.

fTO + 3TW(VII. 2 I09)=fiTW (VI. 1. 97, 107).
102) =
2.
*:
*fr n
??
<r?n%
11
110.
ll
lates to the masculine;
5 of %%K
substituted for the
*r is
Sg. in the feminine.

As fqx This is
*r.,*rr, H
11
in the
Nom.
confined to the Feminine, as the following sutra
and
in the Neuter, the
is 37 elided
by
*f*fpT<j*nfTT?j
re-
and
so leaves no trace behind.
s^ts* gftr
II
t\t
TTTPT
II
sni
111.
is
II
^:,3nr,31%
II
substituted for the 55 of sc^qc in the
Nom.
Sg. masculine.
As
3TCPT
snrnaro:
In the Feminine f^%
II
\&
ll
tttt*
II
ll
ll
As
3?^ srSTT:,
sre, srrft, are;:,
and
snjT'jft
11
ll
substituted for the %% of *^C in the

Instrumental singular and the cases that follow, provided
3W
112.
that the
As
is
augment akach
sptt, 3TTOf:
Observe f*reR,
ST?ff%:
formed with the
^ra nr:
ll
ll
ll
of zr
3ir
\\\
ll
not added.
is
Why
do we say " not when ^ is added by V. 3. 71"?

The word 3TTt ( arrfa ) in the sutra is a pratyahara,
PI ).
( Ins. Sg ), and UT*,
and
<Tft:>
for
(VII.
I.
1) <?**:
3t + 3T = 3T by
substitute replaces only the final

*Kf*ff?
3T%stoh^J
ll
VI.
TOX*
97.
I.
letter,
For no purpose
is
<T3
The
For S
rule
I.
is
substituted s?
1.
does not apply here, on the
served by
by
52 by which a
maxim
eliding merely the final
Taddhita Vriddhi.
1406
[Bk. VII. Ch.
II. .
117
Hence
is elided.
Or it may be said that the siltra does not
of fî H
of
elision
but
of
teach the
3T^ which was substituted for f by the precedf %,
,
ing sutra.
qfflk- n??
% ftp
11
^tttm
ft% tr.
Rh-wWI
which
stem
(55) of the
As
this
*rref,
tfe:
The Vriddhi
114.
vowel
^:,
wp* T^r frarwlr
11
11
srlr
is
substituted for the root
before an affix.
The
here is a root, and the affixes before
are those which come after roots, and not which
*J5T
*n&l, *llSWl >
Vriddhi takes place
^mm^-afT*,
come after Pratipadikas. Therefore, not before the affixes **n &c, as
The anuvritti of the word vibhakti has ceased. This
*gp{\
gunaof VII. 3- 84-
sutra debars
11
^nr:
ii
* *M*flr
Before the affixes having an indicatory
snRrrif^ f^m fafa
115.
ur
Vriddhi
is
11
sr
or
substituted for the end-vowel of a stem.
Thus ircK^f^PT^ra:,
it-i *Tlfr *rre:, ^5TrSr,
WSW
(III. 3- 20)
ft srqfttfrrlt,^:
where the case-endings are
and f^: ( with spar);

by VII. 1. 90, 92.
fSr^
#sr* with the Unadi jsror from f> and 311 e%^: with gr^ and means
It is an obsolete Vedic word.
'strength'.
|pjw
mmw
^tr nin f 3-qrarar.

H W* n
nqfri faRr ^f *?ra ifafof?r
st^r^
wt
ffrT*.
In a stem ending in a consonant with an sr
116.
immediately preceding it, the Vriddhi is substituted for such
3^r
ii
$T,
r-
11
ll
sr^n^^rar
when an
11
affix
sr
or
tq;
follows.
with the causative for, qprar: with

As qra*:,
055 11
Observe
with guna only from r%T where $"is
*rw*r,
'bt'?
*t^:
say
Why do we
Why do we say 'penultimate'? Observe ^cfrreTOR,
penultimate and not 3T
Wis,
q\T{:
with
t*j, qrfer
ll
TO*--
??v
gf^r%^r^rm^:
trf*c% f^r nn%
fPrr.
ll
ii
117.
of the stem,
tt
<r?rfr
ll
ll
<rf3c, aran*, i%:
* srera <re^Fir^pn^r*:wnr ffttffft

The Vriddhi is substituted for
11
11
when
the
first
a Taddhita-affix having an indicatory
vowel
st
or
follows.
+ qsgr, so also ^5:

sr%: (w + f), grrer:, arrow
&c
Tm
s debars the Vriddhi of VII. 2.
wr**
from
#n
TT3)>
115 and
(with
As HF& from
irfr
11
'
jx6. as ^Tf.
from
^,
and
*rrTrT:
from
^T^
ll
Bk. VII. Ch.
fcm ^
II .
11
u*
nS.
r^n%
11
Vriddiii
11
fafa,
^r,
1407
ll
The Vriddhi is substituted for the first vowel

when a Taddhita affix with an indicatory f follows.
118.
of the stem,
As
f^P
with
stttto. with <*?*, so also *rrcwr (IV.
arar (
IV.
4.
1).
I.
99),
and
STTf^tf:
and
^TtTT-
3*>
V*
BOOK SEVENTH.
Chapter Third.
|f^fa*Ni fî<^&ra^<HMK
^fer, srtctto, stt^
f^rer*,
ff%:
*rof%
5M*T f*tTW
ff?T^r? fr^^^T
nrr% farm r%f% rn%rr t^t:
1.
igr
or
II
II
<r?ifa
II
^f^r,
firercr,
ll
follows,
When
sit is
Wt^ f^qTTJfnTnT^mftr^:
WR
f%3T^
S<|<hlft
ii
a Taddhita-affix having an indicatory
substituted instead of Vriddhi for the
ar,
first
vowels of the following: devikd, simsap&, dityav&t, dirghasatra,
and
sreyas.
Thus ^rR^w ( =lf^>rat *** in srrf^s^* mfatt$Mn *rnra: ( =1^5T^

*T^t:), ^tw%^: from u^Reh f 'the name of a village of the Eastern people'.
Here the vriddhi of the second member ordained by VII. 3. 14, becomes an
The word belongs to the Palasadi
Similarly ^reFTWTCT ( => fwrraif^TTCO "
class ( IV. 3. 141 ), and takes st<jt or arsi the difference being in accent.
So
'the name of a
also SThprrwsn (^rifaPTremwOf and g&ifcrq- from
;
11
q^:
See VII. 3. 14. Similarly

(fRST^ Tt) and sn^RC* (Wtr *t)
village'
*H^ from ft*W5.> (ft^N ft)
and ST^PT*
II
Vdrt: The Vriddhi of mffa* under similar circumstances is with an

Some say the original word itself
as if * was f%-, as er$TOqnT?3 s %3frft II
taddhita
is regular.
its
derivative
ftfpTC (f^HfrcO and so
3>i><4fftcaijyu&<iMi
5T-sct^:, f*:,
?f%:
11
*n^for-
II
ll
q^Tfa
ll
%^r, f^rg,
^
is
sresqT^rn*,
II
^tm fÊ **& f sra^r *ranrcflfor f^RRWt *^r rrfeir i^ti^ faft f%r% *r t^
ii
Bk. VII. Cm.
III.
When
2.
or ^follows, ^r
Tff
and Zftw
is
V.
in that sutra
Gotra
Rishi
is
^ f%^
1.
or
iSrspj
5>
kkm-
168): similarly
cmrarriN:
rTf^r
t^t:
= iHq
<jH ifr).
q^rft
11
11
*,
As yfc^f^
terrene, *11
w^; m*w 3 4hk4<iniraf ^44^rr-
11
Before a Taddhita affix having an indicatory
3.
'jjff
vwr% fepr
srssTOHf
11
of %^T,
m*K
called Gotra. Similarly ffPTOg
fsrra f*nif ftrf?r
T.
134) in
apÔTTTCPîsTmar aT^rrerfr^ weft if&A
11
nkt ^<tt
T and g
substituted for the
sr,
the sentence ^ta^rsrr

The word
11
1 34 means a Rishi name, for in ordinary parlance the
1.
* tî^j q^Rrrwf
ffrr:
a Taddhita affix with an indicatory
%#fa: (="%^"^WI5r), With the affix 3Tj (IV.
formed with f^r (V.
name of a
l4Qg
II
As
TAnnniTA changes.
the Yriddhi
is
word ending
first
vowel
* but
compound, when
$ and sft are respectively placed before the semi-vowels.
As 3*KH*r from
That is ^ is placed before a, and 3ft before %
in a
it
follows a
in q; or
II
ssrcpf
^)
Wôr:
from s^sfrcw ( sqiîom

sfcr>^: from &c*?: (^^JPTc*) II
Why after 3 or * only? Observe ^nT*!*: son of *(Xf:
Why do we say Q or
\ final of a pada or word'' ? Observe *ntt\-- from H\t', (n: WIHTO ) IV. 4. 59
(s?TCI% *rir)
II
3RTI"
from 3nT (ara*&HTP or
and
TTs^f^T, for
no
?lrT
f% 3T^T:)
II
The
rule does not apply to
rule ordains the Vriddhi of
ij
^najr%
or v%, and so no occasion
rule arises.
These are Patronyms formed by fr
and *T^T (^f? frois%niTO &c). The present rule applies
to that Vriddhi also which takes place in the second member of the compound
by VII. 3. 10 &c. As $4431 ft*?: from *i>3?r^f (u<t>4T<4^ *?'-) But this
prohibition does not apply where the ^ or % are not the parts of the second
for the prohibition of this
(IV.
1.
95) from
member,
fnr:
11
sre fsrefrfrer
4.
or
11
3T5T?rft
tth%
II
*$\, Wrfr
vrH ^r )
rc, srrrfan*,
^rip*^Trrcrar^Tfr?w
H
âr,
11
wp* fRpf
^^f% $fr
rfr*2Tr%in-T^r
11
nrôr *r
*r
(=\
as gjnrft^JT
aKiqWr
*rw
sww
r,
Before a Taddhita-affix with an indicatory
the Vriddhi
but ^ and
is
afr
first
sr,
vowel after
are respectively placed before these semi-
vowels in g[rc &c.

As $rc R3^*. = ffarT?37:,
itakMI?** from
fkTR
II
The Tadadi
rule applies
%r^: from ^X*TOfa3*2TfKTr*TT )il So alsoiSfaftstaire:, ^r^ tfff**?:!! %2T^r^:

from s^r^^r, (5^^??t w-) cNftiftp from ^frT, O^ftm ^rrf) ^R: from *^* fcpfa:)ii
here.
Peculiar Vriddhl
1410
Vart
Tlie
with the consonant,
last vowel,
elided in the Indeclinables
as <#faft^rp
if
- *^f *FT*Tr?)
Bk
VII. Cn.
III. . 7
any, which follows
it,
is
II
Some read the word Wîra also in this list, but it is unnecessary, as it
would be governed by the last rule, because it is a compound of SJ + sp^Rf (srrVT%S3fp!t )> of it may be a compound of t? + ST%9Rf, then also it is unnecessary,
is separately mentioned, in this list, and therefore when
begins a word
as
&
it
would get
this peculiar substitution then also. Similarly ^qr^^rT
from WSfirT
*CT5?S> sNh* from *&i the prakriti-bhava is by (VI. 4. 167)

^rÎ^t
while ^fr^from t^ where there is no prakritibhava (by sr^ IV. 3. 154) ^r^rfr
= ^w) CTCTTffi^r: from <emm with

affix srsr (3T^rcTl%r^. *^0This sutra is made because the ^ and ^ here
not finals of a <T$ or word, as they were in the preceding sutra. The
^?: (*n??qr
the
are
following
w).
is
Similarly
list
^n^from
**
of Dvaradi words.
5R, 2 **rc, 3 ^pbir, 4 s^r^r, 5

9 j^*, 10 *&i 11 ^r
1
&$&,
**^(w),
^^^,
^1^5,
11
^ ^re^sr X q^n% anrtarcr, % S^rarer,

ssmh^nsf^ m<m wmtfmmnmftx: <*n% ff>srf *?n% crww t^^r 3tr4t
wnfm^r
Srt;
11
*ii
11
11
11
11
5.
Vriddhi,
is
placed before the
of ?*nfh*,
instead
of
when the word stands alone, and is not a member of

is followed by a Taddhita affix with the
a compound, and
indicatory
or
st, ot
||
As ^m^^W: ( = y^nrhqr^f f^fTR:). Why do we say 'when it is alone' ?

Observe 5*nin^ w: 5rr^: = m^r:
If ?nfr^ is a derivative word (from
^%f^ = 'fr%mr Tnt^t), then it would have been governed by VII. 3. 3, this
ll
separate, sutra
is
then for the sake of making a restrictive rule (niyama)

with
If it is a primary word, then this sutra makes
a Vidhi
regard to this word.
The word
rule.
section.
5T
inr
%îs
See VII.
ô^rftfTT
11
^Rsgrer?R
3. 3,
||
n^
qTrT%
||
rr?r
>rera
5T>
||
qafeqfa^ft
11
11
The
prohibition and the augment, ordained by

do not apply to a word which expresses the reci6.
VII.
a jfiapaka that the rule of Tadadi applies in this
3. 8, also.
procity of an action.
As
sqpntfrefr,
-wmmkhi ^
11
sgr^ft, ^r^rff, s*R??sfi

vs
11
q^n%
11
ll
See
III. 3.
^rr*T<r, arrftarc;, ^r, n
43 and V.
4. 14.
Bk. VII. Ch.
10
III. .
Vriddhi.
The
7.
1411
augment taught
prohibition and
in
VII.
3 does not apply also to ^MHicf &c.
3.
As WtH fi Efr,
= ^^TrTmm
3TT?) ^T^ft^J, ( = STOC* *Ptf?T) ^mt

*mf$'and
=
Vyada).
and
Vyanga
s^r^rf^Tprnfrra:
*^t
(
6nrr%:
reciprocity
sq?^
mean
of
action,
does
not
for
then
word
The
it
Wg') H
last
sutra'.
being
by
the
a
governed
compound
with
would have been
^TrT
(
>
(sons of Svanga,
*?r,
would have been governed by VII.
hence
specific
its
^r^rcftr
^frT:
>^f^^^T
II
rrf%^*
11
II
The
mention here.
^T^rfa
ll
S^R
ff^T T^^T
f^rof^Tfr %&&*
8.
by the Taddhita
ll
rT5T
r,
3.
4 as
it is
following
w%:, st%
H3TrT
is
Thus
3^
$rri5rerra*fa
affix far, is
list,
of svagatadi words.
II
11
not governed by the prohibition,

is
3.
3. 4.
^^TPrfw:, s0 a ^ so
of Dvaradi words VII.
list
VII.
plies that the rule
list
compound beginning with **% and followed
the descendant of s^>T^(
included in the
the
II
nor takes the augment, taught in VII.

is
included in the Dvaradi
4 applies not only
3,
4.,
^nwf*
The word
II
the present sCitra im-
to those words, but to
compounds
beginning with those words.
This rule applies
when any Taddhita affix beginning with \

(IV. 4. 11).
^r^re^
follows; as jsrSr -TOl^wrfSftP,
when
other
Taddhita affixes follow such a
applies,
The prohibition
beginning
with
affix
f): as from ^PTTW we have
word ending with f^r (an
Vdrt\
3^T*T^*
WHllRi)
II
q^cH^^cR^T**
^HP
II
>^n^3
II
*.
<T3Tft
II
TS*IS?RTWrarWST
9.
The
V&H
II
rT5T
T3T?cT^T, 3T?^<FC**Tn*
^frT
rule VII. 3. 4.
followed by <*?
As ^m#?? - wre* or
is
II
II
optionally applied to
*src
II
^TO^r
^PTTTJ'T
^rf^
11
Upto VII.
II
sttc <t^t
ll
31 inclusive, the substitution of

Vriddhi will take place, for the first vowel of the second mem10.
3.
ber in a compound.
This
32 exclusive.
10o
is
an adhikara sutra, and exerts governing influence upto VII. 3,

The phrase " of the second member of the compound" should
Vridmi.
14*2
be supplied
BK. VII. Ch. If I.
As
In those sutras, where the
f^rrrTtf,
Thus in VII. 3. 11, the

aT'TCm^*, ^tw*, 3FTt?*Fr*
word denoting the
hibited in the Ablative case r as in VII.
3.
member
first
is
not ex-
18, 19, 20, 21, the present sutra is
absolutely necessary for causing the ^vriddhi of the second member.
VII.
member
first
11 (3TWft?t)> there this sutra
3.
12
complete the sense.
in all those sutras, to
word 3tT*7^ should be supplied.
those sutras, where the
is
But
in
exhibited in the ablative case, as in
is
only explanatory (and not absolutely
necessary), and serves also the purpose of placing such vjiddhis under the
This peculiar vriddhi
category of 'uttarapada-vriddhi'.
rules of accent, as in VI.
in those sCitras also,
SWWSdh
cjfrr:
11
II
where the word
11
ur
II
3T5T3mn%?r 3tkto 5?t^rrr%T
or sf
is
exhibited in the
3TSpnffi, ^cft?
Vriddhi
liable to certain
fifth case.
II
^tr^wi^rR^
Before a Taddhita
11.
5T
<T^Tf*
II
is
Hence the importance of the present aphorism
105.
2.
?fe>fcn%
rtfsfr
fs?re farfr
affix
first vowel of a
preceded by a word denot-
substituted for the
is
word denoting season, when
it is
ing a part.
^
srq,
As 3W%r*T
and 9*qr &c takes
and 3F*
as a general
after
rule,
The composition with
<rt*PT^, 3mi4itfefc?, Tre|R*ll
place
by
II. 2. 1.
and then by IV.
with the elision of
f*T*rT
5 by
IV.
3. 22.
does not apply to compounds, so that
to a particular word, will not apply to a
3.
18 there
is
z& after
The Tadanta-viddhi,
a rule made applicable
compound which ends with
that
word: but tadanta-viddhi applies to a word denoting season when it takes an

We
affix causing Vriddhi, and is preceded by a word denoting a portion.
draw
this rule
from the present sutra,
vriddhi-causing affix (IV.
when
it is
member of a compound,
the second
notes a part. (sErfrffS irf^nprawr^
Why
with si (IV.
for %Ft
The
be applied to %*RT even

member of which deMahabhashya).
I.
1.
the
7 2 Vart.
do we say 'denoting a portion'?

3. 11).
being formed from %*&$ by a
22), the affixsr^ will
3.
first
Observe sn% 3"<$TfJ *T% fr^fforo.
tadanta-vidhi applies only
when
the
first
member
denotes a portion.
^rirnT33T5TT^
12.
name
ll
?R
After 5,
q^rfa
^ and
^, J$k, wzfo,
sro,
of a country gets the Vriddhi,
an indicatory ^,
<*
or
*>
follows.
the
when
first
sfftt^
vowel of the
a Taddhita affix with
Bk. VII. Cm.
III. . 14
Vriddiii
As gn>^"R3:, ^qr>^T^^f: and

This sutra also gives
rise to
1413
srw>'*rpftr:, formed with f>i
tadantavidhi applies to words denoting country, when the

*re, a?**
(I
V.2.125).
"The
the following rule gOTrcnpfi *T5>*r "STTTT^
As shown
or a direction-denoting word".
member
(I. 1.
5,
72 Vart. Mahabhashya).
After a word denoting direction, the
13.
is
the above examples, and for
in
direction denoting words see the following sutra.
first
first
vowel of the name of a country, with the exception of T3T, gets

Vriddhi before a Taddhita-afiix having an indicatory >f, m,
or
*f H
As îHiflv,
107, 108. VI.
preceding sutra.
S^H^**, r&
*iy:
sTTrrrs^R^:, jHwhj*^!***! gr^rrr^^T^r: (IV.
105 accent).
2.
The Tadanta-vidhi
125,
2.
shown
in
the
Why do we say 'denoting direction' ? Observe *%: qs'arnSRT =

With *ry we have fpfajT, sjrcTC= ^T* 5fr^r:, 3n<TTT>^T?TOj:
:
*T^r:,
applies here, as
with srsr (IV.
II
The
108).
2.
separation of this sutra from the last
is
for the
the
first
sake of the subsequent sutra.

srr^f sTrtf^prcrnrrq;
11
^n%
II
sirsrrac,
xm,
*RRrnrr*i;
After a word denoting direction,
14.
11
vowel of the name of a village or city in the land of the eastern people, gets the Vriddhi before a Taddhita affix having
an indicatory
S[
or
II
Thus S^prmPT:, ajM^MiTC Rt,

These are
The word
'the eastern
t Jj &^ iimiT
by IV.
ls
2.
JTPTT in
2.
107).
by
is
^ 15*1^
" The compounding

Then the affix 3j is added to it, in the sense of cRfr *rf:
Though
In <gj qKfoaw the affix f>i is added by IV. 2. 123.
the name of one city, Purva-pataliputra means the Eastern por-
tnus f rmeai ^ft **
107.
Pataliputra
(IV.
aTq^TTfR^r^: SWajflM:, ^'TCfiP^ssr: rt

this sutra, as well as in VII. 3. 24, does not here mean
grammarians', but 'the eastern countries', because of the context.
takes place
3^**^%^, 3TT^Profel%^:
^MidH^*:,
village names.
^Pfnwft
II. 1. 50.
tion of the city Pataliputra.
That place
is
called 'grama',
a 'grama' in this sense.
where people
reside,
and a 'nagara'
Therefore, the rules which good
men
is
also
observe with
regard to 'grama', are obsered by them in 'nagara' also. Thus the rule is
bt^% *TPTf?lf*:, therefore, the Jem* cock is also not eaten. So also qr% W&WH
is
applied to nagara also.
In this
grammar
also,
we
see that 'grama' includes
Vriddhi
14T4
Niagara' also, as in IV.
2.
109,
17,
VI.
Bk. VII. Ch.
103. Therefore,
2.
of employing the word ^tik separately in this aphorism
where
III.
the necessity
is
The two words
16
are
separately used, in order to indicate the separate nature and relation of the
The full word
two kinds of words.

and not the portion
name of the
of StJTT^
f^^TTT^'TT
siitra,
there
name
the
is
^npr*T3Tft
in ffir reft^ the
In the present
'nagara'.
We
But
II
of a 'grama',
word qr^f^T
itself is
the
the adhikara of 3Tjf*^ and
is
nameThis
we
could
not
have
and
ly srprnr%?rri. ^r^rero
;r*rcrrf^RPi. 3tk<^rpt
in
words
the
Therefore,
in
case
sutra.
the
of
done without employing these
'grama' word, the vriddhi takes place in that portion of it which follows a direcWhile a
tion denoting word (wrerf^r^PTm^l^l f^rs^TTWi fTCTWrr).
?iaga?n word itself gets vriddhi when it is preceded by a direction denoting
II
apply these separately to these two classes of words
11
word
(f*fn Srftsrf 1TO*Tr<)
?i%:
11
w&tmT tttctsw
Vnft RifrT
^ T^rT:
s^FriW takes
In ^pjjPTCTT:, the vriddhi of
II
and then the combination by sandhi.
first,
*h^wto
See on
this point
sr^sirsT^PTf^:
wh
VII.
5 fearer
3.
place
22.
rrTsfsr
rqf?r
II
After a Numeral, the
15.
first
vowel of ^3737?; anc^
of a Numeral, gets the Vriddhi, before a Taddhita having an

indicatory
fn,
3*
or
II
Thus ff ^rf^^ft^: = fr sroreprtftsr itif *$ or *n4t (V.

80), f%srN?*fa?:,
iwwiw u The words ff yf\ &c when
fsqrfg^p = % *rer si^rer *?<fr w^t mii m
i
ii
applied to
qf
(VII.
3.
16)
and Numerals give
The
rise to the affixes
taught under
mention of ^rstc here, (though this is

kaladhikara (V.
78-97).
a qKHrr word and would have been included in the sutra VII. 3. 17) implies
that the word Tf^PT m that sutra does not mean the measure of time, but a
measure of any other thing than time. Therefore, with other time-words than
1.
special
samvatsara, the Vriddhi takes place

Similarly in sutra IV.
1.
22,
in
the regular
the word
jr?TT<T
way
does not
as %^^r^:,%^m^:
mean the measure of
11
In short, the word qnwr in these

time or numerals, as nr^srr. ff^qf Tlsrf^T U
sutias(and elsewhere III. 2. 23, II. 3. 46 &c. ) means "mass or bulk", and
riot a
measure
in general.
pf**TT?TT$**n%
^nr:
ii
11
\t
11
^tt*
11
isi&nm .tttcto ^Ri^^n^rnr^rfr
16.
erfer,
when the
affix
n
sr
V?r-
vowel of 3"% gets the

having an indicatory sr, m or
After a numeral, the
Vriddhi, before a Taddhita affix

9?,
^-^f^*n%,
tfH^rro%nrm fafafarY^'rcrr,
first
does not refer to a Future time.
Rk. VII. Cm.
III. . 19
As fr*T
we
future time,
the sentence
Vriddtii.
^rtfrifr
?rr=fs^rr3N?:,
*?fr
1415
f*iTftw-
arej
%?rpHr
But when denoting

two or three years" as in
11
havejfctffar:, VlftaP "calculated to last
qw rt??t ^frfs srfa^rfafsnnrr
rr^?Trr ir('*<tiftr
*t *rr*r
The word 3THf%<^ does not qualify the words 3T vfter and *ft (V. I.
îsjtpt >TT^t)80), the sense of futurity is there denoted by the sentence and not by the
taddhita-affix: as
^ ^îir
*i?rr
^ ^R^Trf =
^r
f^rrnfcfir
After a numeral, the
17.
denoting mass in
its
first
Tr|^:
11
vowel of a word
widest sense (with the exception of
srpjr)
gets the Vriddhi before a Taddhita affix having an indicatory

sr,
tit
(V.
V.
1.
1.
5;, when the word so formed does not mean a Name.

As tri^tr ranrw* = f* ^f%^ (V. 1. 109) sroi îraf to-f^ref'far*
The taddhita affix is optionally elided, see vartika to
37), fTOtaf^Rr*
or
II
29.^
When
the affix
Similarly ft^f^fi^T*
Observe
Tr s^rftRT^w
The whole word
is
ajar
?Ttt:
*rff?f wrm^f ftfam
TO^r^TOpsrrTO^r ire^fa
11
= T*^Hlf??^:
(V.
or
it
efi-qrSrpT
35
and
qjWSRTO
Some
36).
^rrf^?rr faff rr^flT^
fstf?r
rq
Jiqi
11
not a name'?
is
I.
V.
1.
30)
Observe
?[rrar?
read the sutra as

(V.
f^rfrr
f%nr
1.
55%fff^r
^ t^tj
*rs-
11
In stt^T and
18.
'when
also excepted, as%^r%fsnjr:
is
Why
30).
Why
here.
^5T
its
synonyms, the
first
vowel of
member
gets the Vriddhi, before a Taddhita affix

'born in that time*, and having an indicatory sr,
the second
meaning
1.
Tr>=^fi<TrR^
Name
%tfr^*.%3TrT Jl formed with

3T^r^P*iEF^5TRrc; so that
or
there can be no Vriddhi, as
elided
is
fsRF*>3w (V.
II
The word ^ means

terism' are
meant
there to
also called
is
STrS7?T W?r-
that time'?
here. qrg<T*
= ^raw
sfrg<T?
is
name of an
the
(the affix
TnTrer:
Observe *aj
number rsHHf
the affixes denoting 'born under that

as-
'born',
(with
ajor
frs<Tfr*T^
indicates that the
3T<JT
IV.
asterism, the time appertaining
of IV.
3.
3.
16).
3,
is
Why
by IV. 2. 4).
do we say 'born in
elided
= Jfrer<RTg w) wfarfSfttffir
synonyms of *rSTf such as
11
The
^r*
plural
are also
to be included.
f fan
fafe
** vt Rfs |#ffl$$
T^:
II
*^%^T^r^rer^rr ?f^r%
<rfWr f>rr% fafir
Vriddhi.
14*6
The Vriddhi
19.
of both (the
with f^,
first
and
?t*t,
is
Bk. VII. Cn.
substituted for the
III. . 20.
vowels
first
and second) members in a compound ending

m^, before a Taddhita affix having an in-
dicatory 3T
or fF
As ^rc^=sTgrt*, tr>TF??^, It^fs* #r>Trr*T;ra: ( = gwror sttc^), ftfrRfThe words 5g*Tirr and ^îtt occur in the Kalyanadi class (IV.
5^: (IV. 1. 126).
,
I.
and the
126),
class (V.
1.
II
and
affix S3
âugment
are added,
uw also occurs in Udgatri
That word, however, does not get the Vriddhi
129).
member, As *^% st^TR
This
11
is
in the second
a Vedic anomaly. Similarly from *rrfu%?v^:
(^^Jrerrr. f%prO we have OTx&lr-W ( = ^^JRF^H^0 so also trr^*:

The
The word f%* occurs in Kachchhadi class, and %?>re is formed by st^
Tadanta-rule applies to words formed there-under.
ll
The words
and ^^ are anomalously formed by V.

is
gfHW^jH so the word hridaya
sjf
reading adopted by Kasika
by VI.
hrid
3.
II
50 or VI.
3.
51.
The word sindhu means
'a
4. 1 50.
But the
changed to
is
country', 'a river' or
'an ocean'.
sT^Rnirnffaf
f*rr3 far* fara *r'<rer
srrfo?*
11
11
ô
Tj^rfa
11
11
anj^TTSrwrr^?^,
11
^wa[r3pnf*RfTfrrc^ u
Before a Taddhita
20.
affix
^, the Vriddhi is substituted for the

both members of the compounds 3?35n%^ &c.
sr,
iff
or
Thus
(
= 3^%*
ll
(1) 3Tr5?rrr^fqr
^CTrT
I V.4.8).
vowel of
first
(=3Tf^n%^^^)V.i.2i and IV.3.I20;(2)
(3) 3TT3tfm<P*
- 3*i*Hl5r fp^T
V.
I.
96). (4)
arrgffrre fri
BTT3mTOf**
to from ar^**^^ ^PT^) (5) srmrelorer: (son of 3TJfTC%5T).

Some read this word as 3TTO?c?i; this will also
(6) 3Tn%?r^H:( = ^f^^ *$)
take 3r?r as belonging to ftg^FTTf class. As srreifrnr. (=3Tra^^5?rsfaT5TW*sflcT)
Others read this as 3tpW^-', as STrafcrcrer: ( = 3TW|r%: JT%ir*Ito). The word airo
(IV.
3.
60 formed by
i
in these is treated like a Pratipadika, its

(
= ^^TiT^3rT^).
This belongs to Bahvadi class.

Gargadi
rf: belongs to
(10) fi
s^PT.
(f^n^F^ **0
case-affix
belongs to Bidadi
ll
The
class.
(9) 3TT5?RrT
class.
affix
5^
Its
is
not elided.
is
(8)
(7)^ratT*
3*TOrfrsro = tfcsRwrft:
from ar*?*^
partonymic
1 1
is
The same
^m
r
as above.
(11) ^r^TT-
not added here, because SRTfSTSSrat
fi2)af^*rrf3r: (son of sf^fq?:) ll (13, 14) Wrr%^:, Tn^tf^T:, from

(15)
s*r in the sense of <pr >nr: (r%rTT<C*T^ t) H
ftftt- and qrofti: by adding
by TO under V. I, 44. (16) *rtwr* from *#S^: in the
from
driSlfti*:
w^fx'
Bk. Vll. Cu.
sense of
j^^:
III. . 22
(IV.
m^ro: ( = ^^tf^
1417
*rar^ or ssrrar *r
w, R^nriwrm^^siRsnw)
(<pr
jrrrfT^:
by***
(17,
Vriddhi.
1.41)11
(18)
(19; <refi ircirTOr. formed
126),
i.
Why do we
So also of *r3T<JW before the affix ssrsx, as enrolls*
formed
by
=
w?^
Observe
tnr33Wqfo:;
f<^ (IV.
only ?
tr5r33TO(TTO
say before
(20)
II
157).
I.
(21) sirffFH
from
^rffclf:
<tt?t
This
w-
(22) gr*?Trf = fHTCTPirTO
II
<KW*H
(21 b)
we have forms
like these, ariPT-
m Ni) h
arrN*f^* (*tf>mw), iifM4lft4; îtffo*; (*m*

The affix ilf is added in svartha.
1 3T3^rf?r5F, 2 3T3?r?, 3 ar^^:^ (ar^^^), 4 st^^^t. 5 arjfr^j,
m*f*?: (aTretmi#T),
ar^*,
(arei?m), 7 ar^rw, 8 ?n^T 9 j'sî^n:, 10

f
14 ff^RT, 15
*rf^ 22
g^s
28
^rerrsFt
j5^Tr*, 13
19 st%*t, 20 <r^r, 21
sr#*f*r,
25 aTft% 26
arf^f^
ti*^
irag^nj
^mstt, 27 5^*5*
11
*l
11
îM
11
^rcfT-g^,
11
\mv% *( yfrwifcwvm <Trwn*w
ff%-
i^r^, 12
1 1
atf^,
arrism*, 23 arrwr, 24
29 <re^
*lrTff*H
16 *r#r^, 17 sr^sr, 18
<re?*pj?,
m*-
II
class; therefore,
an Akritigana
is
from
SIHT^r**:, (21 a) ^reroraR^f:
Before a Taddhita
21.
=* n
*m* ?rer^r%
affix
<rra% nrr% far% fsum
the Vriddhi
or
sr,
is substituted for the first vowels of
both members a Dvanda compound of the names of Devas.
As STFTTT^rft in arPTTretf *Hf *TR*T<t
arrFTHTSrT ^H
The rule
sr,
iff
applies to
Dvandas
not here, ^fT^T^lHsjr
fore,
ji*by
*>n
from
rf\
II
hymns (?efu) and

^%S^ = ^n??rwr^;
relating to
srgUTiinTrft
See VI.
11
3.
II
sacrificial offerings (9ft).
(IV.
2.
So
24).
There-
also gr &H*uq -
26.
The short f
compound relates to
a sukta, which worships a deva through hymns; and that
by which a
determined,
'havis* is
^3T*T <TC^T
fHT:
II
pSTTO***
when
it
**
II
is
q^rfa
II
*I^R
<TCTO
22.
the 9Tn*T in arrf**mrw, m1cr^nr
in
rf5T
^fa
a compound relating to
?T,
II
f*3g, q^*T
But the Vriddhi of the
member
stands as the second
tory
As
or
*>
is
sttot, 3TTR??5
elided
3.
28.
sacrificial offering.
II
first
of a
vowel of Indra,
Dvanda compound,
affix
having an indica-
11
II
by VI.
4.
Why
"when it stands as the subsequent member"?

There are two vowels in the word
$?y,
^ r^
Observe qr??p^ *iÂl*MR

and when a Taddhita affix
vowel
by VI.
II
does not take place before a Taddhita

sr,
is
is
148,
II
added, then one of these
and the other
(i.
e.
the
|,
i.
e.
the ar or the last
coalesces with the last
Vriddhi.
4 i8
vowel of the
no vowel
term, as
first
when
of %zg
is left
maxim
Hm + ?^ + 3T^ = tfm + ??y + 3T = %m +

it
gets the form
^T^^l^^rqfa $#^*Jrs^5CT**&r ^
antaranga, not take
maxim
initial
3.
2$
Now,
ll
the necessity of the
is
words
<T^r^f7r?5P or in other
member
compound
of a
of the compound".
&c
14)
member
vowel of the second
first
+ 3T
does,
place previously to an operation which
that the forms 'T^npTFTOT (VII.
being the
?jir
III.
substitution of one vowel for the
member
or the second
first
WrT,
sffR
of the second
and the
even when
concerns the
so what
vg,
"The
final of the first

it is
<$
arf^Jrfq- rWr-*reTf3P
Bk. VII. Ch.
This prohibition indicates the existence of the
present prohibitory rule?

following
(f
It is
on this
are constructed, otherwise
of f^ having merged in vk),
would have been vriddhied.

^rahff
sjwft
is
q^rft
11
11
sfNfac,
^ ôrcr
affix
ii
Dvandva compound of god-names, the vriddhi

not substituted for the first vowel of ^5% when a long vowel
or
3>,
in a
precedes it.
As fFSR^T*:
W^nrn
from
when a
compound word
STrP^PTrWr^Rgrft ff?W^
in
is
Before a Taddhita
23.
sr,
11
derived from the
by VI.
3.
But
27.
in
sort HHhd
ii
II
or
97,
II
28,
3.
vrffo
11
and
3.
26).
precedes
therefore,
But anfPIT^fhl
This word
it.
stt^sito,
it
**m$[
cannot be said that a
ll
^^w^r^ref^r sf^rlt m^ f^m
Before a Taddhita
24.
$r,
V*
*r*f %ir fmsajjf
(VI.
vowel
short
3T*4fa3<% the % of srf^r being lengthened

forming a Taddhita-derivative from this word, the
long f is shortened by VI.

long vowel precedes âf n
sfar
f^^r &c
the Vriddhi
is
affix
i%tf? *r
substituted for the
both members of the compound, which
fafit
the
first
vowels of
name
of a city
of the Eastern People, and which ends in the word prc
As ^rgrenrc: ( = 5R*rl: **:), ftuj frHm:
"Why do we say 'of the Easis
||
ll
Observe
tern people'?
^ri^v^cr^^
fa*.lKW rTf^% fsiRT
25.
st
or 97
*jrcFT*rc:,
from
jtjfto*:
^^ ^nf^rRH:
Prf?T fatfrT ^r <TOP
ll
ll
q^rr%
*rg&,
%, snssr,
Before a Tahhita
the Vriddhi
the city of the Northern people.
*x
is
affix
substituted for the
first
vowel
of-
Bk. VII. Ch.
III.
Vriddhi.
compound ending
the
As
sr^,
in
rg
1419
and
wnr,
vowel of these second members
for the first
3,
28
<r^5rjpy*T
^renrf^^^^wôrV^^w,
or
and optionally
also.
ottgrrip or
^^rit
11
^th
rrf^r^ rsrnr
fafa
rarf?r
^r <t*sp
26.
5T, u, or q^
the Vriddhi
substituted for the
is
the second member, denoting a mass in

the word
of sra
As
5TRT:
fnr
<UrP
widest sense,
but optionally for the
it,
vowel of
when
vowel
first
II
11
or arnffrfonff*
snUtforsfifl;
Why
18).
precedes
sreir
its
first
3T*Mrerfeff*; or BTrwrarft^r*
do we say when denoting a mass? Observe
<i^*t
II
tT^rfa
II
T^qs^3 3
*, w:,
II
arcrrsT^ TR*rr^^n[^T ffe^
isftr,
with
3Tnre5rr%3Fr^
s^
only
(V.
r.
( = 3?^-
II
*refa, crfar% fsrfrr f^rfrr
*rr
ftrrrr
*r
11
When
27.
preceded by
vowel of the second member,

and denoting mass is short st, the Vriddhi is
st>*
the
not substituted for this
first
before a Taddhita affix having an
sr,
indicatory 5T,Tffor; and optionally so for the
the
member
first
(i.
e. vcH)
first
vowel of
II
Thus snrof^njp or srrostf*tnfi: (V. I. 18) 3?^%^. or 3TrTOr%5fr: Why

do we say when it is a short 3? ? Observe arrwr^f^f:
Why 'short st ?
Observed *3WJ1 *HT = BTwrfr U Here Vriddhi is substituted for the arr ofÔ",
and though the form remains the same, the power of this word is changed. For
STWrcr being formed by a Taddhita affix causing Vriddhi, in forming a Bahuvrihi compound, this word will retain its feminine form and will not
be
11
11
'
II
'
'
changed into masculine under VI. 3. 39. as aTTOTcNr^ ( = 3TWrtf*rr2ff*rcar)( <|f^=qrri%fTf9 &c. ) Whereever Vriddhi is prohibited with regard to a Tad-
RnrrT*3
dhita
an
affix,
affix
that
will
affix
cannot be called
become masculine
male person, %?rr^:ofr
vrrar
14
11
*ff3n%PTTT,
jfrjfa
and a word formed with such
compound* referring to a
The word %8tra?**r is formed by
Bahuvrihi
3T*3 =%STT3ft<T>TO H
prohibition of Vriddhi. See VII.
sr^T^^ %
in
3. 3.
s^TT^nr^r,
11
Bk. VII. Ch.
Vriddhi.
1420
Before the
28.
tuted for the
first
the Vriddhi
5" (***r),
affix
vowel of the second member of
is
III.
30]
substi-
srerûr,
but
optionally so for the first vowel of the first member (i. e. sr) H
Thus rr^rfTT^TrTcJt = jn^r?^ or wnn*m* n The affix ff? IV. i. 123, is
added, similarly n^r?^r *TraTS*a?=5rers3rar*Trq: (VI. 3. 39, masculation prohibited).
Or we may translate the sutra as " Before the affix *, the vowel of jy
in
SR!?W optionally gets Vriddhi
still
be prohibited by VI.
sraraw^r
11
catory
in
41, (sifrj
q^rft
there
*>,
new
ll
derivative
affix
from this stem

having an indi-
vriddhi substitution for the
is
will
II
n cTrsrsrcrer, *r
so in a
The masculation
rest.
formed with a Taddhita
s",
lor
sr,
3.
11
Even
29.
ending
v.
and omit the
",
first
vowel of the second member, and optionally for the first

vowel of the first member, in srer^nPT and srraT^FT
As jrer?^^Tsr=JTPrrs%fa: or Jren^fa:, m or sr-^r^mgFnL
srsr. g^r^^^^r^^T^mjnrPTTH:
5fsr., gfe, f **r,
\*
qîfa
II
11
11
*f^fri rif^r% f%rf% f^rfrr f%f?r
ur
or
^r,
<tc<t:
Before a Taddhita
30.
ct
^r
the Vriddhi
of 5jr%, f ssn:,
qjrsfw,
gative particle,
11
11
is
affix
^ra and
ftg?r
first
vowel
when preceded by the Ne-
but this substitution
is
optional for the vowel
of the Negative particle.
As arcta*
*H*
or 8rr#r^r^1,
negative particle
or 3rr#r*T*,
ar^ST*
is
sr%wi or
or 3Tr%gtrr*
vth"
3rft*^fa
Some
srftessrar.
r stphwi*, sr^r
say the optional vriddhi of the
an aprapta-vibhasha, no other rule would have caused
vriddhi had this rule not existed.
denoting
11
are prohibited after a
particle; therefore, the
words
^jf^r
its
They argue that by V. 1. 121, all affixes

Tatpurusha compound with the negative
&c, should be
first
developed by the addition
compounded with the negative particle,

which may be optionally vriddhied by this rule, which would apply to it,
of HPT-affixes, and then they should be
though
it is
not an anga, because the rule teaches vriddhi.
this opinion,
come
after
and hold that other
Others controvert
affixes causing vriddhi than *TR-affixes, also
negative-Tatpurusha compounds,
such as affixes denoting des-
Vriddhi.
Bk. VII. Ch.
Ill
cendant &c
and HHr-affixes are added to Bahuviihi negative compounds also,

arjf, which is understood up to the end
32
14^1
therefore, the force of the anuvritti of
of the Seventh
Adhyaya
(VI.
1.
1),
and a fortiori
in this sutra also,
not be set aside as the above interpretation would do.
Taddhita compounds
and
STsrTsT
should
Moreover the
3T?ffa^ are read in the
list
of
full
Brahmanadi
words (V. 1. 124), and as such they take the *rre affix 3j; which would have
always caused the vriddhi of 8?, but for this sutra which makes it optional.
Therefore
it is
a prapta-vibhasha.
^r^rorry;*?r: qsrfaor
fMn
*r <re?r
tj^
of the
*ronr*r, snrpjTîr:, <t^?tot
il
\\
11
31.
5T
i^rf*
113*11
or
^F,
the words srq-smm and
vowel of their
first
member,
first
3T*T*inj*:
may have
vriddhi
member, or that of the second
in alternation.
That is, when the Negative particle gets the vriddhi, the words
remain unchanged; and when these words are vriddhied, the negative particle
remains unaltered.
The words
As
srrorrcrura or wrarorauw,
WWTSsp*. or srsrrqT^n
ji
awTTrT*r and STSTOTg* should be considered to belong, as negative
Brahmanadi class (V. 1. 124): and take ssrsr

In the sutra
the compounds imr<TO and 3TOTS* are exhibited and are Avyaylbhavas (II.
compounds,
1. 7),
to
11
and being neuters, the
Patanjali this sutra
is
srr
of
superfluous
and ^r are shortened.
rT*TT
When
According to
the negative particle takes Vriddhi,
compound should be analysed as, ^ ^sTr^^T = 3T^*rrtnir, s^Tra^r *n?r-* = srrcrcrWhen the second member gets the vriddhi, the compound should
be analysed as, ?rera*n ?m =3T*rrrM, * *n?WWW.= 3T3r*lTrrt3re
the
*Tli H
II
'<
^T*3r sf^nur^t:
32.
\R
II
T^TT*
II
^r.,
II
rT., 3T,
fenr ur^t:
II
substituted for the
q; of the root f^ besrorm, which causes also

the penultimate sr, but the augment is not
<* is
fore an affix with an indicatory
the vriddhi of
added before the Aorist-sign fen^, nor before the Personal

ending orôf the Perfect.
The
anuvyitti of
which causes Vriddhi

Thus *mr- ( with qnj,
*m<*m* with
orgw U
in
'Taddhita'
ceases,
Taddhita only.
tr^ntf*
with fo^r
But Jmifa and
),
iwm
and with
The fa^ and

s?nT^
with
with
r^l and
it
that of ftp; also
fsflj
),
*rw
11
do govein
srnjsjrf^
still.
th f,,
This sutra has
422
Vriddhi.
[Bk. VII. Ch.
reference to roots, and refers to those affixes only which

ithrt), therefore not herjenNhr: from f^qjl
g^m^cTr:
strtt
33.
33
11
q^ftr
II
srrer:,
root-stem ending in
come
fk%
3^,
III. .
34
after roots far^-
^cft:
II
^ receives the augment
before the Aoristsign fern, and before a krit-affix with

an indicatory sr or ^r, which causes also the Vriddhi of the
(v),
3fr
root-vowel.
As
3T?rfa, 3T^rre
with
Why'f^rqT and krit only'?
with $i a Taddhita
r%*r, fr^J
Observe
affix (IV.
I.
3T*JP*&
*rr<>
ii
?ro^:,
#, ^r
So
96).
iftfram^T^T *Tr?<rerR^m:
?cTC3T,
and
II
tTT*:, vrrarer:
in the Perfect,
y*
also acTr^rTT
qîfa
II
3FF2T
and
with
or
and
-trfe:, *TFjrr%:
= *T:
II
^TTfrq^^^r,
n *,
sr-
11
3^r^fa^f*mfarf*Tfrr ^trs^^ u
The Vriddhi
34.
Aorist
is
not substituted before the
or a krit-affix with indicatory
fîjr
of that root which ends in
*T
and
is
st
or
iff
vowel
for the
acutely accented in
original enunciation (Dhatup&tha), but not so in ^q- after
The
116), that vriddhi
2.
roots ending in
92, 93.
stt
vriddhi of the penultimate *r takes place before for^ and
affixes (VII.
ij
II
Thus
Similarly with
does not take place
st^TR, STrTl^,
affixes,
as
and s^fa
WW-,
in
in
f^m
tprsff:, ^ppff:,
its
II
fsr?t
the case of udatta

II
^*r,
Compare VI.
rHT:
V*-
4.
Why
II
do we say 'acutely accented' ? Observe, 3R3J:, KT^f\How do you exThese are irregular forms exhibited by Panini himself
plain 3SR and 3qr*T?
Why do we use
in the Dhatupatha ares^ (Bhu. 380), 3T ^T^ (Bhu. 1033)
So that the rule may apply to ^r*fr
"in the original enunciation or upades*a"?
Here to the root spr, rT*r and $*r is added the
*tff, tRI", but not to 3CT*m:, *m?fi:
II
II
The words ^TR^&c.
get the affix-accent, namely acute

root-vowel
becomes
the
anudatta.
Though the root now becomes
thus
and
|;
anudatta, yet because in its upadesa it was udatta, the present sCitra will apply
affix
fa^(III.
2.
141).
and prevent vriddhi. The roots ^jt, *ff are anudatta in upadesa, but in sitop,
*r*rer- they become udatta by w>\ accent. This accent is a secondary accent and
not the 'original' accent; and hence the present rule does not apply and there
is
vriddhi.
Why
the exception of
Vdrt
and
*R., as
do we say ending in n? Observe *w&\srr^? Observe srr*TPT^:
?rr*T:,
^W' and
Trar^T.
II
Why
with
11
vrnTPTJ
II
in the case
In the case of
gj*r,
of the roots irr-^nT,

the affix
-%>*
is
3T 1*.
added
Bk. VII. Ch.
III
36.
3* Augment.
when
in that alternative,
1423
the root does not take the affix foMF (III.
It
31).
1.
thus gets vriddhi.
The word
is
3TPT:
for^ gets Vriddhi, because
by
this rule.
you say
If
shortened by VI.
The fan
No
4.
rr,
is
which with the
we reply
a fan root",
it is
enumerated
Bhuadi
in
class,
affix
not therefore governed
be vriddhi of PT^r, but
"let there
92 because
roots are those
doubt, there
form ed from the Churadi

fopar is not a krit-affix, and
be
this vriddhi will
"this root
is
not fan"
But
and not
said that the roots ending in 3T* are fan (in awrrrw).
it is
is reg arded fan only with regard to the Causative for^

with regard to that f&par of the Churadi class where the sense of the causative
a root
affix,
not involved
The
we say
ffrr
in
Therefore this root
it.
phrases frSfrropn' fa: and
'fcr^ and krit only'
Observe
*fa {$crarftpr >fa
*rfa
11
not fan (VI. 4. 93).

others like it are incorrect.
is
is
^1^
rrsr
Why
do
^TR "
^ptfPT, ^T*T,
*r "^f^rf^r
The Vriddhi
35.
11
subdivision *mrt'> (800).
>refa
not substituted for the vowels
is
of 5p^ and 3T before the Aorist-sign f%T^ and the krit-affixes

with an indicatory 3^ and H
||
As
*vp
substitute of
^n
W*M
De
from fn
two
refers to the separate
II
This we see
^R^P
syllables 'badha',
The
42).
f^,
ststr and sr^re with
This rule
11
the line
in
*rejr^r*r?T
distinct root
f%*KT ?rwrsfa
Moreover the substitute
"
and as such
it
also does not
*t
fasfa
ends with
3?
admit Vriddhi.
II
i.
The form
of
e. it is
(See
II.
11
^r%|t^M^ft^TF^rTf
sTrcrn*,
3*Trfar *r^fa *rr
3^,
t^
36.
ofr
sôft
11
3$
3*?%, fr,
ll
soft,
tf,
^sfV,
11
The augment
gt, s?t $r, sjjq-, s*rr*r,
affix
and *q*G: (with 0595), jnpT--,

^>$r and not to the
iRcff:
prohibition refers to f^'n and krit-affixes, therefore not here, as 3T5TR
*t$ *rffrrefa???*
$m$r,
and
and the
added to the roots gj,

and to a root ending in long srr, when the
jsf (^)
is
m (the Causative) follows.

As
arfafa, STOfa,
every word other than
srjp
s%<ror?r,
(VI.
4.
CTOfa, ifcmfa,
1.)
ceases.
WTOfa
The 3
ll
The
anuvritti
of^rci and
$*rra
of
drops
The guna takes place by VII. 3. 86. Of the roots ending in

1. 66.
long an, we have wmii, *TPTOfa
The root ^r (Bhu. 983) *rfa!TPT<Jmp, and
are
(Juhotyadi 16) r^r
both meant here. Similarly ft includes ft^ snT^r (DiAadi 30). and ft *Tm^T^r (Kryadi 30). The augment is added at the end of
by VI.
ll
1324
Augment.
3T*
the preceding stem of root, and not to the
becomes part of the root-stem, and

stems,
vowel before
the
have Aorist
^T^f^q"^
ff%:
w ^r
11
Wn
SIT,
The word
but not
<r
were not the
Thus from
?rrai%
we
<rr
VS
II
*tffr
II
OT,
II
W,
*T, $T, &U,
T3i%srr*T$Rr g*Tprr% **i% $t <mr:
qnt,
rrc* tos*-. u
*r*
11
11
11
wsrrarafa ^Rraflr, sr^rarerw, irwfa, and qpraftu
R*rr*rai%, 3TT^r?rar%,
The
(Bhu 972) <f 'to dry* (Bhu 968).

<rr 'to drink'.
(Ad. 47): because the latter looses the
vikarana.
root <rr 'to protect' takes the augment 5^ before r% as
The
roots gii
TT includes the root
qr 'to protect'
Vdrt
Vdrt:
S^rafa,
If
1.
4.
it
Aorist of such
g^ tfrsfi^^wt:
The augment 59? (^r) is added tothe verbal stems
37.
fr, % and qr before the affix nr (Causative).
^1T,
As
s*r>
*rr jfr
^Trn^r^
11
38
II
^^SmTfT^TTtqt 2fT
*rfi&3*
III. .
Being added to the root
affix.
forming the reduplicate
in
shortened by VII.
is
would not be shortened.
<i
part of the stem, that vowel
Bk. VII Ch.
sftrotf?*
and
jftsi
take the augment 33? before
far,
Ail these augments are added to the roots, in order that VII.
should cause the shortening of the vowel preceding these.

the above are: aqrcitawj,
The
as
11
roots
qjr,
3T<fr<TWt, aTf^Tft, 3T<tffa<Tr[
gT,
g-r,
T, szrr
and
m are
4. r.
Thus the Aorist of
II
exhibited as ending in long in
Dhatupatha forms are % *rr, 5T, %, f, , *Q and %

This indicates that
these roots would have taken gar by the last sutra, the word srni 'ending in
long arr' means the roots which actually end in long btt, as well as those which
their
II
This also indicates, that in this subdivision or section, the maxim of lakshana protipadokta &c does not apply.
Therefore when
the roots $ with an<T, and nfr assume the form sqfrcr-8n anc^ *"" before the affix
get long
r5r
srr
by VI.
sft
%fr{-
11
1.
by VI.
48, the
ft^
*rr
45-
augment
11
\*
II
$3>
is
added to them, thus srwrafrf,
^rnr
err
ll
*:,
ft^, g^
m <top
^murr *rara
gets the augment
*^ctto faff^S" *r<fareTO
38.
fa
1.
5rrTOI<?
11
ê
(?) before the
affix
when
the Causative has the sense of 'shaking'.

As q^rmrsrare U But arr *PTOr% %srr^ when the sense
is not that of
This form could have been obtained from the root rw 'to move',
(Bhu 271) with the affix for in the ordinary way without any augment.
shaking.
The
it
special
augment
3[ to ^r
indicates that this root will not
would have otherwise done by the
969
["*ft
OT
II
last sutra.
The
take
ars^,
which
root *r belongs to Bhu.
Bk. VII. Ch.
III.
42
n Substitute.
The
39.
1425
roots ^r and 5yr get optionally 3*? and ^*
augment respectively, before the affix fcr, when the causative

means 'the melting of a fatty substance'.
As
is
added
the
rfrmm, fa
fa
to
?ft
augment
rsnTOfrT,
when the
is
The augment 55^

rwrm* %%K
and that also optionally. When
fa ^f^TOftr, or fa
root ends in long
f,
II
not added, the regular causative
ftrqqf<t
is
formed.
But when
The root
by VI. I. 51, it does not take the augment 5^
*ft
of
Kryadi
Divadi
The
and
root
and
includes
rfts*
both
includes
?ft
<*r
tft
?yr 'to
give' (adadi 49), and PR the form assumed by <% under VI. I. 51. When ^R" is not
added to pjt, 337 is added by VII. 3.36. Why do we say when meaning
'to melt fat' ? Observe only $j% fa^TT^, srsTWPSPTOrT (I. 3. 70).
gets the form
firor
ffar
^3^ 3?
fnraw
>ft
11
it
fjt
11
*o
mft
11
f^HiisSf stpt% **f?r
11
far*:,
<rer*
53**,
5^
11
11
The augment F*r is added to the root $t before

when fear is caused immediately owing to the
40.
the affix
for,
agent of the Causative.

As
employed
form
will
>ft,
frjt tftasiw,
but when
come
sffaw
*ft<wlr
11
See
as
yrr
it
3.68. Herealso *ft with long f being

added then only, when the root has the
I.
in the sutia, indicates that 53? is
*TT by VI. 1. 56, the proper augment jajr

do we say 'when the agent of the causative is
Observe $f^*rari& rr^m, for here jrf^fnr
assumes the form
*TTT*l%
Why
II
himself the direct cause of
fear' ?
The
causes fear and not the agent of the verb.
is
vriddhied and art* subs-
tituted.
^Rnn
*r.
ll
41.
TTffr
11
For the
*<kt*t:, *r:
11
final of
11
the stem
*ror*r is
substituted
in the causative.
As
Rrprofir
sr^cn&
<r:
II
42.
a*
II
*&rf*
For the
II
sr|:, sr
nr
<r:
II
final of the St? is substituted
the Causative, when it does not mean 'to drive'.

As swrrfar wrefa, <s^rfa w?rrt?t but tp ^r^r^ *fr7R*p
11
<*,
in
H26
t Substitution,
43.
ot^K
may
*T
Bk. VII. Ch.
III. .
44
optionally be substituted for the final
in the Causative.
As m#*^TT*l[% or *T?3i% According to Padamanjari this sQtra could

be dispensed with. The form UT^f^r could be obtained from the root 5*1 of
11
Divadi class
which though meaning %?T may be taken
sr^^^R^R^^Tcr tfTraijT.
^q-, si<r:, *<*, sufa, st^t.
11
tr^rfa
11
to
mean
'grow' also;
snsnr^rcj;,
11
sprat,
II
*rr%^* h
sTcET^pfq'^r
sra^r^rT wire*
44.
is
which stands before

when the Feminine-ending stt
substituted for the
belonging to an
follows, provided that,
when such a word in
the
affix,
a?
does not come after a case-affix (i.e.

3T* does not stand at the end of a
it
Bahuvrihi).
That which stands m an affix is called ip^q*, e. sb must be the part
The 3TS? is changed into ?5R- in the feminine in srr
As srf?from
So also
+ ar^+ arr^
f?*^r, sfr^rr, 3fa?fr, ^frr^r, *nRm, fn%Fr
^rT^ + srr* H The f is then replaced by 3? (VII. 2. 102). The a* must belong
i.
of the
affix.
to the
affix, therefore,
not in
sake of distinctness, there
is
therefore, not to^^rr, KWtt H

S7,
and not the
by short
3T,
takes place
37
II
The
3T
^T from ^37 5NFrr%

no
affix
37
is
37,
as
37
nor
in
The
srr
11
which precedes
II
(^q)
must be preceded
3>
The substitution
The word srrrr qualifies
*T3?r, *rr3fr
3TT follows, therefore, not in 3?rt3fr
should be followed by
11
for the 3T
<T737T, ^<[3tf H
*Tf3tt, 5?T3?f,
II
in sr?TO**T is for the

The
The rule applies to gj,
II
only
The ? is substituted
which follows
therefore, not here
when
which
^m
11
II
37nw from sjfreff + 3Tr,

When ^r + 3Tr=3Tr there
Obj. But in
3j
is
not directly followed by 3U", but bysr? Ans.
ekadesa, the 3j is followed by 3TT, there being no third letter intervening then.
is
Obj. But an ekadesa
is
sthanivat to what
be applied, therefore there
still
it
replaces
text of this sutra will remove the intervention.
Obj.
a purva-vidhi
is
to
Ans. The express
Then f should be
subs-
These words are formed by the affixes sfi^r^

(IV.
2.
51) and itff*rof*T_*rpW (III. I. 9)=WK*I
wpfi *n5F,
Here also before the 37, of the affix, the T should be replaced
tituted in ro^T^n*
and ckt*^, as
and T$l3fJ H
when
exists the intervention.
and iT^r'Stf
II
Bk. VII. Ch.
by
when
f,
and
a?
lit. .
45
f of Feminine.
the feminine affix
added: for there
3TT is
no
is
when
intervention,
which even does not actually
*Mm
it
the
3Tpr
Why
do we say
Here
3TfT
comes
after
3? of it is
exerts
it still
as
y,
a*
not
is
many
letters are
Aeardas intervening between
btct*:
'provided that the feminine affix 3TT* does not
T^f HTT - sr^n'sn' ^T^rr T9FTU

the noun vgqKefisrer which ends in a case-affix, and
after a case-affix'?
and
not take
II
come
hence the
consists of only one letter,
the sense above expressed) by 3THL, as WfiaUT and
(in
because in these actually
i,
and
ar
no intervention between
you say). Ans. We
but only through the fiction of sthanivat.
exist,
Therefore, the feminine of the above words will
followed immediately
l
is
(the intermediate letters being non-existent, as
3TT
say that intervention
1427
Observe
ST??*:
not changed to f
its
by
influence
qfCpTHHin" 3Tf3T
II
I.
I.
The
case-affix
62.
The word
by
elided
is
II. 4. yt,
a JTCTjÎ f?K v?
3T*jT : is
(a simple prohibition of the particular matter specified without mentioning

what is different from it): and not a T^^TCP or exception. Had it been a
Paryudasa, C^'frsHit^^T^cf:) then 3Trq^ coming after a full word not having a
would have caused the f substitution in the last example. Nor
case-affix,
should
been
be explained as that
3TU<t:
so,
then in *ff5T
Vdrt:
Hl
WZi and
in
which there exists no
case-affix.
should be enumerated, for the
*TC3f
Had
it
^^f*fcrr no f ought to be added.
^F33T -
ar
of these
not
is
Here HH^ is substituted for *T*r before the

The word HH^ takes long f
affix WT (IV. 3. 3;, to which is then added Tpr
in the feminine only when it is a N ime or in the Vedas (IV. 1. 30): therefore
part of the affix: as TlT%?r, ^ft^jr
II
11
though
w% ends
TnâjjrarR
Vdrt
(IV.
in
sr^,
does not take
it
3 ^^ formed with the

:
The
affix
rule applies to the
The word
m<l the
in the sutra is
#r<r
1
1.
(IV.
1.
15) but
3.
in
^37 (IV.
5F;
we
the final 3T in 3T3T^
find in fa^retf, TSF*K%,
mean
ffrr*.
^?T%
ending in the consonant
11
gr
*rr
fârarrt^rrfWr
^nTOTwri
?no
11
sTn%fa
^ro
ii
f^Tarrfr^f ^fnrcrespr*
^To
II
?v\iftf
*r
11
tTTW
11
?i
*r*w
^r o
11
11
II
ii
^rcT
therefore,
rrrcarr
98) and
in
sr
czpr
^rqtr*g*iFPt
11
^ssttopr n
*P> ^rT^T *Tftfr JTT^TgT^ra^R^
wTOr^*jr^r^wrgTOPTFT*
11
II
then the
srsfnT (srar)
is
11
^rrc*?^
11
2.
and not a portion of the
II
*rr "
11
3TOWT1
st^^t fqfl^r
15
*r
5FT
only,
The word
4),
II
II
euphony
I.
46.
be the condition, that the affix must end in ka 3? and not

Because here the augment is
rule will not apply to qfrf^
f r
(IV.
As srrePTrfî.T- ref&PCT
fifth case of pending in 3?
If then
VII.
this
]S
<t<t
2. 3).
words ending
104) in spite of the prohibition in
2.
3?
f?
with
affix,
construed
as
to
1428
of Feminine.
The % is not substituted

augment ST, when the feminine
for the st of
45.
with the
As
n^r.
prohibition
may
The
^r^frr
is
zp^rnt:
bition applies in every case, as
and
<*),
h?:
The
T^W?
^rrsjf ?irrr%^
affix ?*re7^(V.
Or
II
*r 7
n% and
and the
m and OT
H^,
The
sutra.
tfttfcftffT^fol
(i.
prohie.
m^
rr)
34) should be enumerated also along with
3.
11
As
fâ^^jj; u^2j
secular literature.
t^^:,
So
Vdrt:
^<th; i^r,
vfttff
Vdrt
*?
^TOTO,
wct
also
11
See
III.
^^frf^r
<w nw>)
(sR-srrfr *r it^rer
:
^^^r H
: <tN3JT
ijtot, gror,
F^/-/
ffinifa
is
II
benediction; as iftarTr^ 3fcnETr
in
is
elided in a
is
compound:
elided, the fuller forms being
See V.
formed when
it
means
formed when
it
means
^r%37T,
83 Vart.
3.
&c should be enumerated
f$TT3i
take f for st
qrfcKT:, srerHftOT: in
150.
1.
?tT
But
&c.
sfcsreff:
member
Vdrt
Veda does not
in the
^ used
also in the affix
So
*m
as^gFTf, g*R7T, the second
from
for
would have been a better
As STr^r, srf^w^r H
V&rti The feminine of qre^T &c
and
Q and
46
follows.
3TT
simply stand
sffirPT^fr^, fT^TT
cr^r? rt3>r*<T=3T*f? (i. e.
F^r/:
U?fc
III. $.
not confined to the nominative case only, as the forms
lead one to think.
nrai
and
in
Bk. VII. Cm.
this
in
'stars',
but
prohibition
cTTf^TT'a
as ftrTOr,
maid-servant'
11
Vdrt
^tfan" 1S
expounder': as
Vdrt
qfî^rr
HrÔ
^ra%
3%5ffr 'a bird'
'Bhaguri
is
'a
mantle or mask', but
^ffofff 'art
commentary of Lokayata'
according to the Eastern grammarians, but sfS^RT

Why do we say 'when meaning a bird'?
according to the Northern authorities.
Observe ^f%^T *HJ#

Vdrt
ceremony
former
II
STg^ vvhen meaning a fafN"**? ceremony, but sjfem m\fj
related to Pitridevata
derived from the root
is
the other
is
called Pitridaivatya, the affix
is
3TiT
with the affix r&Ft (3T^rr%
derived from the numeral
Vdrt
Sf%5fTT,
?^JrT3rrra
3T2"
by the
Optionally ^r^r, S^RiF and
and 3[r^5FT
affix
f^TCcffr,
3^(V.
is
q?j
11
The
The
awn 3THpreTOT),
I.
22).
the other forms are Qittm,
II
^tara.sr. ^srr*
^4^
far-
II
u\
ll
^rft
11
^fr^m,
^rt:, **ir>,
l^rr *t*f% u
*Fffa?*
11
*rari^%
>?r<*F?Ttfra%^:
11
46. According to the opinion
marians. %
is
not substituted for that
3T
of Northern gram-
which
is
obtained by
Bk. VII. Cu. in.
47
Ti:e Feminine *
shortening the long
3TT
of the feminine (under rule VII.
before the affix *>\ which
The mention
As
furcrr or
v*mr,
1429
is
preceded by a
^ or
4.
II
of 'northern grammarians' makes this an optional

tff^rerr or itpitow.
^^nm
or *fzfam,
13
rule.
^fata^r
*fq-^r^nr,
"
Why
do we say preceded by v or ar ? Observe spqr^-srf^^T only (from sT^jr'Ji

The word n^Tqfai is exhibited in the feminine, in order to indicate that the
rule applies
here
^*nw
when
from
m (see
the root
Vdrt:
When
the
contained
w
in
the feminine affix
So
^rvruT (ip? qrft)-
*rr is
shortened to bt
also âfasffr from
ww,
btt is
preceding this
st,
is
sft
being
finals
do we say
'of
long
stt'?
of a root.
the final of the root, the prohibition
the sutra, does not apply.- as g*fl44tr, sprnrerr, fjqrr%^n\ and
Why
part of
III. 2. 74).
Prohibition must be stated of the ând
or
Therefore not
ii
where
Observe
*fhrr*!
ST^rrf^T^Tii
**r = STMrf^KT
11
The
word %^rr**l is formed from flcfirer by the affix g (^^rr^t r%f tT) H Then is
added the affix fir (IV. 2. 121). Here there is no shortening of a long TT\
and hence no option is allowed. But in %*v&n or |@MF the long srr has been
Because this word is thus derived: *HT?rer = S*ST (^F^Tfîr**: V. I.
shortened.
To this 9T is added, and the long stt is shortened.
66).
Why
the word ftrFT used in the sCitra, when by the general rule srsV
word would be understood here? The special mention is for the
sake of pointing out that the T which takes the place of s?r is intended here:
this short ar; but had the word **rr5r not been used in the
i. e. the % replaces
f*TR
*ir*Ti
is
this
sutra the % would have replaced the long srr U
5T,
^t,
^wmnr, arm
srw,
II
According to the opinion of Northern gramnot substituted for that sr which is obtained by
47.
marians, %
is
shortening the
STT, 3CT
(VII.
srr
(before f by VII. 4. 13), of W^T, n^r, snrr,
2. 102),
and ^T; even not then when the negative
particle precedes them.
As Hw^r
WW
or Hr%5Frr, 3T*r^Fr or sr*n%re?r,
or f^Frr, sr^rerr or
arf*renr,
s%
or rf%,
s^r
w*n
or
w^m,
srsr^rr
or f^^rr, arererr or
or
sro^r
srflrerr,
11
Of
and ff there are no examples with the negative particle. For if the compounding with ?rsj takes place after the addition of the sT3?^r, or on the contrary, if first 3T^ be added and then the srsi compounding takes place, in both
alternatives, the case-affixes must be added in order to substitute ST for the
fyqr
final
by VII.
2.
102:
and
it
is
only when this
a? is
substituted that the fe-
The Feminine
1430
Bk. VII. Ch.
III.
|.
49
So that the case-affix is the principal ingredient, and

and therefore by the prohibition ofsrffT: in VII. 3. 44,
2T<i comes after sjt
Therefore ff^W^Tr and
there can arise no occasion for the substitution of f
minine
srpi
can come.
,
ll
forms of these words with the negative
8T$37 are the invariable
particle.
meaning agnates and property, takes the negative particle, wm is a word

which has no corresponding masculine form, and as such, by the following rule
VII. 3. 48 it would not have taken %; its special mention here indicates that
as BTf%srcrar *T^Tr
it should be the secondary member of the compound here
Here first the
^2jr = 3THwr, the Diminutive of which is cT?fRRf or 3T*rf5RFT"M
*TWr is shortened as it is a secondary member (upasarjana), then when the
Bahuvrihi is made, the feminine affix gyv is added to this HTPfî^T word, then
this sir is shortened before *$ by VII. 4. 13. This short 3? (VII. 4. 13) does not
come in the room of the srr which is ordained to come after a word having no
:
corresponding masculine.
The
force of
f^RT or
srf H5T5KT
Note
Changed
shows that the
sjftjf
rule applies,
and even when no words precede.
also precede,
when words other than
?rsr
R^f^r^ff or FnfeRtf, 3"f *-
II
The
3%
5%
form
to 3T (v^ra^r),
substituted for
As
from the word $ r%, dual number, the final %

feminine STT (z\q) is added (f^jr), and then sfff
is
^ nen
ê
is
is
ll
According to the opinion of Northern Grammarians, % is not substituted for an sj obtained from the shortening of the Feminine srr (VII. 4. 13), when to the feminine
in long srr there is no equivalent masculine, even when the
48,
Negative particle precedes.

As 13&K
or
before the affix %i\
?srf|^rr,
sr^f!^
the stem
is
or 3rcr^r, <rcrap>r or ^r^r|^r
11
When
shortened in a Bahuvrihi, this rule will apply
There also, the st must be substituted for the srr'af a feminine

word which has no corresponding masculine. But this rule does not apply
(VII.
when
4- 15)-
the negative
compound
sT^n UMlf-^jrf^lf
<i!fasf|*T
is
Similarly
I!
the synthesis of STHTOTrer *ggr
arm^r^rr
^r* = 3TIW|r,
3T?T[
3TTOT:
* *TO*T,
3Tm^?T =
ll
Note;
The word igz\
snî^FTfnrmc
ll
a*,
ll
is
always feminine and has no corresponding masculine.
airac,
3Tr3T*arf<TTO
ll
Bk. VII. Cn.
Ill- - 5*
* -nrii
43i
According to the opinion of other Teachers,

substituted for the st which arose from the shortening of
49.
rr is
the feminine
of a word which has no corresponding mas-
3rr
culine form.
As
isziw, srsrsrerr or <r?c*T^r*mi
Note:
The "Teachers"
Northern Grammarians, or
xo
11
<*?ri%
II
For z
50.
there
is
3TT%^:, *in*rr%^:
T*! &c,
es z*i,
if
here also the sr
(sr
in
+ sr)
is
4.
II
(s^ IV. 4. 1), arcfbrar: (r^ IV. 4.

the consonant 7, and 3T is only
same
52).
In the affix-
for
euphony, then
on the contrary, the aggregate

the case here.
This rule does not apply
is
if
^%5ry:=^^: (Un
always, as
(-TO VOTra
148 the 3T
taught
3j as
affix
I.
103), for theie is
diversity
Unadi.
IITOfasfP
by
II
II
pronunciation only: but
for
aflfixes
fal<*) in tne
(VI*
is
Br^sTf^, ansrff^r, and ar^r^TT
beginning of a Taddhita
in the
the affix, then the
is
Unadi
the affix
zm, vk:
ll
substituted 537
As
refer to the Teacher of Panini, the plural being
Thus there are three forms
for the sake of respect.
s^*r;
referred to here are either those other than the
may
it
dropped),
is
in the
IV.
4.
Now
51)
is
thus formed iRnr + 7ft = JTr^ + f^f
arises the doubt,
next aphorism VII.
51, as
it
substitution, however, does not take place, because
it
and now
elision of 5Ti
destruction of
5^
T (VI. 4. 148)
qr
which became
final
producer (sn?TTrrr^$r%
its
may
3.
by such
faf^TR^
should 53? be replaced
after a^n
This
was %& which caused the
comes
elision
cannot cause the
?rff sjTOPr).
Or the
elided
be considered as sthanivat, and would thus prevent
8jr
substitution.
There are two views about

only
is
the sthani, and the sr
hold that
z,
is
this
11
Some
The
the consonant and the vowel are sthani in the aggregate.
view, the rule would apply to the consonant
first
say that the consonant s
only for the sake of pronunciation.
^ at
In the
the end of roots like
other view the rule would apply to the affix 373^
in Tfsrfr, vfeQ', in the
rrf%^*
ii
ftT
^,
or
3;, sic
ii
to, <to, t^,
<t,
ircrret,
qr.,
11
11
11
substituted for z after a stem ending in
*r is
and
<T^r%
x*
sq^^rr*
51.
ii
q^
in fra?:il
Hence, the commentary uses the word, that y must be the cause of ar^
*!PI*n*<rR*r.
others
||
^,
GUTTURALLSATION
1432
ttfR'-,
The word
to
by
q-
srrfqr3>
ôf. <*
S37 of fww'ri ll%Tr^&f>ff:

^trrrsi
^r: 5
ffan
(VIII.
(IV.
vu
II
îH
2.
is
by
3*^ &$
W$t H ^v,
II
(IV.
II
rr
CT
by
flR^f:
fIV.
*r
is
w^^
is
by
II
3TST
of
fR
9TrR
4. 12).
**cft: f
?, fin*,
aiR *r jhsr <tr:
and
51)
4.
s^T
zz; of
^rr^: by to of srfs
19)
*r?R
*fr
11
<t?*3 qo^,
hr/j^:
39).
3.
III. 53
^s^rr *reR) n
(^-niû^)
&c by ysj of *T^TfT^
nra**Tcffr:
^^rrc^fw^r:
11
as fan,
#r*T,
formed by yg: of
is
z*
^r?r*^: by
11
after
BK. VII. Ol.
are the affixes of that name, therefore
^cr), slrr^r
sTrfsrsrr
So also
ydrti
changed
^ and ^
The
irr^T^f: W
5Tr?v*r
not here, *Trnn%*7:
II
11
52.
For the final
or 5T of a root, there is substituted a corresponding guttural, before an affix having an
indicatory q^, and before <rej^
As tt^f ?2CT*t:, *r: with
and ^rr^^ni, ?mw*i and ^F^ with ^ u
II
Compare VII. 3. 59.

?*r^rffaf =* ^3
q^n% ?*t^ $r, sn^tara,
Ufa ***$ taftwrftl f ^*tf? tfr H^f?T
11
11
11
11
11
11
The
guttural is substituted in r^f and the rest.

3T>^ + 7; So also h^jj:
(1) By the sfttra ?tr^%: (Un I. 17), the affix qr is added to the root
ST>^ preceded by r
(2) 1^33 is formed by adding 3 to the root wa 'Un I. 7)
the
affix ^ added to the root *ctit, the *r is elided, and
formed
by
is
(3) *Z*Z
53.
Thus
*q^c$: from
-!-
11
11
is
(Un
vocalised
qnqrff class,
The seventh
^w^RT H
(7
and
HfSf!
third
and
81 ?re;
Un
the affix tsq

(IO)
and
(4
II
^5
(161 SfTTRTRP
is
ffTRj:
(9)
II
of
Others read these as

the affix
tfiRRfr,
added
3"
rf>^T
IRTRiT
irregularly.
and ^3^ with
from sjtrtsTR with T^rft *T^
II
^4) WRF (15) TRTTr^:

formed
by the affix 3T7T with an
fr*3"TRT
upapada. (19) 3R: when it denotes a name
(12) STOT
S^TRf:
ar^r affix
The vriddhi is by nipatana.

compound words by VI. 3. 14.
TWfP, by
s^RT^ formed
(18
"
(13)
TO*-
II
II
accusative word in construction as
formed from the root 3T^ with the affix qJ

When
not a name, the form is 3rf
( 20 and 21 ) 3RfR: and r^r:, when they
meaning
it is
These are formed from the roots
ll
II. 13).
Cl7)
qjRqRT formed by the
^ctrj:,
read by some.
is
reading
(II) ST^PT:
"
5)
^ T52R *WTf,
not elided in these
is
This word
28).
case-affix
(6)
with ttt
I.
( = $5 TR ^TO^,
'price'.
This
is
II
II
names meaning "Summer or Hot
season".
These are formed from the
But when they are not names, the forms are
preceded by ?^3> and by
(22) hrr! formed from the root
snr?r? RfT?J
Formed from
adding the T^rff? sr^ M The ST is changed to q
(23) Cr?J
are
root ^g preceded by
;
3R and
II
ll
11
5^ with
r and
the affix R^<r, and ? changed to
1 *T3;f, 2
^?5TT1, 11
rfiff,
12
qg, 3 *fJj, 4
^gff,
WRf
13 sSRSTJf, 14
II
ll
1R7R7, 6 qroiTRv
5T3^,
J9 ^fTTT^, 20 ^TT?rtTRf, 21 TW^Tr^, 22
15 3T^^TT,
saRr^siR and
mr?*TR
11
qRTr^T, 9 fRRj, 10
16 3<m*f, 17 ^<TR7, 18 Wiref,
7 ^Tr^7r, 8
^qf ^Rfr^rffT^Rr:
*R
23nfr^, 24 ?fR^[
I!
bk.
vii. Cm.
(
K. VII.
fr^TnfsrsPf
ifr
^TtT:
ltl. 5.
xy
11
affix
*tfT:
fanr
guttural
is
with
*TSi,
forr*
T^r T^r> *r
substituted for the
^frTî:
jt;*to
With <*!*
11
11
or
sj.
ST^, and
SrT^rT,
t+$j
Ft, ??n, r^nnr, ?rj,
11
Nfa
As ^PT^fW with
WS'S,
ttit*
11
f^^rc^ 3Fr*mr?*tr h^pt
11
54.
an
Gutturausation.
56
qr
,
*r
in
and before ^
before
II
SWJ^ r%^ with IV, ^l^mnw with

Why do we specify *?
H,
arfr^ before
ll
?
Observe
Otherwise the substitute would replace the final letter. Why of
ff^n::, JTSIT5&:
% and si qualify the affixes, and H_ means the ^ of f^ which becomes joined with ^ when the intermediate 3T is dropped. This ^ comes in
immediate contact with 9, because it is heard in pronouncing, and in writing.
II
If the elided ST be cons'd red as sthanivat, then S

for there will exist the intervention of this latent
can never be followed by
ST,
sj,
but by virtue of the special
text of this sutra, such an elided 3T should not be considered as an intervention.

And if si, tir and s* be all considered as qualifying the f of 9^, still on the
maxim n ^ sn^WT ?T?r nref^SH" V&wmr*tt<l therefore or or si are considered

But not so here,
to come after ^ though a portion of the root intervenes.
Denominative
this
root,
and
to
add
we
have ?T?rnre>:
f?s
^Rl^^nr fT'folf'T.
II
55.
a reduplication
As
Guttural
substituted for the
is
fsrarafa,
srSFsrafrT,
3T? *p*pt
^^f^*^*=nr^tfa*rf?r
\Z
wfa
ff^R^^rc^r^^^rfnT^
^rjsrfe
f f%:
11
II
ll
(TKîfa)
II
56.
after
in 53; after
also.
The
11
rule applies
when such an
follows which causes the reduplication of the stem (anga)
here
^,
affix
therefore not
"
|:, st, ^rfe,
n^r%
sfîfrt^r
guttural
is
II
^^f
11
substituted
for
the
5 of
ft
a reduplication, but not in the Reduplicated
Aorist.
As nr#?fa,iT irefaft, srfsnrrar; but Jrrsfte^ f^TT in the simple Aorist Obi.
The word ar^rfr could be dispensed with from the sutra, in as much as ^ry
can never come after the simple root f|, but after the causative of fy, and the
causative stem of f? is a different verb than,
Ans. The fact of this word
f|f.
ST^rl being employed in the sutra indicates the existence

7
maxim
in
JT^f?T
q^T
"SjfWqF^snfq' T?PP*"
Grammar, not only
may
result
that radical
from the addition to
we have irfsr^fÛ^
"
radical denotes
itself,
it
but
it
the following
of'
whenever
it is
employed
denotes also whatever stem
of the causative affix for"
ll
Therefore
CxUTTURALISATION
1434
The word
VII. Ch.
BlC.
III.
tne Aorist of the causative of ff with *T^, the

elision of p*, the shortening of the penultimate the reduplication, guttural
change by fr^f.
^rRc^ri:
5CT*tf?3<t
v^tfo
ll
57.
^pror
lengthening by
an<^
V^
ll
ii
guttural
ll
fÛ fc,
<&*,
substituted for the
is
snn
after
fsf
a reduplication before the Desiderative affix ^P*, and in the

Perfect.
As
Observe
rsfjftafa,
srsfolff H
(VI.
lisation
I.
ft*r*r *n
f^Wra
Though
6, 17)
the root
yet that nr
^^T^r
n *'
58.
Why
ll
the
*m
also
guttural
is
is
assumes the form
not to be taken here,
ftrom,
11
Desiderative and Perfect only?
in
%^
ftr
That
by vocawill
form
in the Desiderative and Perfect.

of f^ after a reduplication
But %qfa?r in other cases.
As f^rrqf% or fsrertafrr, fV^ro or ftftift
11
59.
5T
guttural
is
not substituted for the final
guttural, before an affix havof a root which begins with a
<i^
ing an indicatory * and before
*T3J
$W, sr^: and U^: with *^
As f5T-, TO and fflf) with
II
This
is
3.
52.
3TT%^par to n t^n%
atf* SIT^T S &**** ^^?r T
11
ll
II
II
II
60.
or
srfir, srcsfn,
^frT
of
5T
before
This
^^j^îi
is
and snr before an
3T5T
**^
guttural
not substituted for the final
affix
having an indicatory * and
II
is
There
is
no example
3-
5*
Thus
** W*, TOSH*
:
and
>
of 3T^ with the affix <**, because
by
II. 4.
^r and st* II The

all ardhadhatuka affixes except
56 r replaces 3T* before
also not mentioned,
roots
implies that the rule applies to other
*r of the sutra
as *rtP, ?r&Fl from
$f%:
ii
5* 55^1
f^rift
11
*F#
f*rcr$%
wiww: Trowrft *
11
BK. VII. CH.
III.
61.
64
GUTTURAI.TSATION
*jST
anarm\ and
<
before srs^
any change of
their
The word *J3Tt = vp^s^t, with q*i (III. 3. 121). The irregularity conthe absence of Guna, as well as of gutturalisation. 5gfsst?jp ^T^sppft^
sists in
=r^sr from
:
HR: ^5^n:
?
The
the root îir sriff (Tudadi 20).
non-changing of
*T
When
II
not meaning
an arm
'
irregularity consists in the
and
'
'
a disease
',
we have
II
sr^T<ar3^r5n'
^^THTfr f^TT^m
m$ #
i
tR
11
ll
qîft
and
3T3*TT3T
snrnr, sr^rnn", *nr,
II
3^,
ii
II
62.
^5^,
kind of bodily
'a
?g^3[
disease \ are irregularly formed, without

3r
I435
sr^rr^r
are irregularly formed with
when meaning a portion of a

These words are derived from
srsr
with
sacrificial offering.
Ef>r
without the guttural subs-
But wnu:
sranrPi srsr^nrr, ?w*r srersrRr <T*rr<t *t g^r^
and ST^TT: when not referring to portions of a sacrifice. The snirsr and
as
titution;
<?*=*?
11
The
T3^|JT are illustrative only.
guttural change
other prepositions &c. also, as TraCT-*, STJU^rsp,

tences ^?r?#<rar5Tr:, tttu ^ra^Rni arsmt, srer
*r%fnfr
II
II
63.
^s^
TTri%
^%:,
guttural
*T<ft,
is
im
does not take place with
sfarsTJ,
s^gnr,
as in
the sen-
^rerar w*tt, u^^rst ?*r%
ii
II
not substituted for the palatal
going \
but *rf^ ^m= ^fc* H Why is T^r used, when
we kn w from the Dhatupatha (Bhuadi 204) that V% means 'to go'? The speciother than those
fication shows that the roots possess many meanings
of
in the sense of
As
*T*5^ ^srfJrT ^f^nff:,
assigned to them in the Dhatupatha.
afar
t^:
11
64.
q^rfa
II
srr^
is
II
sfter:,
irregularly
3^:,
II
formed from the root s^r
with the affix * (3T)

The change of ^ into 3?, and the Guna are the irregularities As *?&'
Thesis added
'a bird, a tree'. The affix 3 is added under III. 1. 135.
with the force of sjsr the Karaka relation being that of Location &c. The
II
sr>i affix
would have given the form regularly, but then the word would have
been acutely accented on the

should
be on
1G
the
last.
first syllable,
The words f^Nrcr,
but
it
is
W%*fi^;
desired that the acute
&c
are
also
irregular,
Gutturalisation
I43 6
formed with the Unadi
sr^the ^
affix
Bk. VII. Ch.
* as
III. .
6g
an Unadj
diversity (bahulam).
<rq-3TTSF^
ff^f:
II
eX
65.
the
before
VFQ&
II
T,
II
SCR^fe,
% ^ST^^f^T* T^ ^^P
BTPJ^%S*f
II
guttural
vq,
affix
when
WrT
II
not substituted- for the
is
it
II
means
palatal,
do as absolute neces-
to
'
sity \
sr^ qr^ro,
As
the sense
spre^ *r*3*, spTSWes*, but ttsr, ?V&k and
qrcrarra^rsr^RHEr
*rf%3F*
ii
Rfoq%
qfrr
As
by
when
qr^rft
ll
^r,
sr^r^r, gpsr., =*,
not substituted
is
for the
final
II
III.
no
I.
would have taken
sfg*,
it
takes
shows that the present sOtra applies to

word or speech', and the prohibition of VII. 3. 67 does not
force of this
means
*t*t, srrsr,
guttural
and therefore by
sit
II
qr^r, 5% -*?, and ^pr before the affix trcrc* h

Though q^* has a
w&tH, ^WL, JT^TÎ, and sr^fo
*73r,
qrszra,
penultimate
es
II
^^T^ra^m^
66.
palatals of
3rjr
h&
not that of necessity.
is
sutra. stt**
it-,
though
it
apply,
the name of a particular book.

Others say that the prohibition
^ônly when it is preceded by jj, and does not mean word or speech
67) and not when it is preceded by any other preposition. As srf^resr-
'a
srsrreai is
applies to
(VII.
*T?f*nT
3.
Tsfaf
This even
II
Vdrt
oq?f
?T5f
very restricted sense, namely on the tenth day
in a
of the Das"aratra ceremony.
In other places
srfrc.vq
II
connection
this
i.
e.
before
the "^ remains unaltered, as OTSZPIII
^rs^T^rqTO
!Ftt
11
II
*^
VRjfo
II
^fW *$$ ^ros^f^ra?
q-^r
before
As
II
sre:, 3T,
<*9fa <TCrr: 3rc*Tf
5T^, %^nTTO
The guttural is
*rq^;, when it does not mean
^r^fir?, sprrraprrs, but ar^f^rf irarcr*
If
*r^n%
not substituted
67.
of
we have
should he enumerated in
for the final
a word or speech \
11
X$T5nf$Hte$t ^T^^T^f
V^jft snTt3*T, fa*ffc*n, STW, 3TO,
ffrr:
rs^to ^ g*r RafT^ r^cts* s&rfr ^rsfir ^rer*f R<rrR
68.
srcte*r and f^fts^ preserve their palatal in the
11
II
^m
II
II
II
11
sense of capable to do this '.

As ziwsq: = s^r^SR: fror?q: ^nrairgtfW, but
'
sftfr*2T
other senses.
v*&
11
s,
11
q^rfa
ff^v n $ts* faqran **$f**w
II
tffcRTO, *re*T,
II
5^Rf s^rcpft rt^r
si^Rr^f
11
and R3TO
in
Bk. VII. Ch. Ill
72.
69.
'
x*
preserves
sfrRj
M37
Affix.
palatal
its
the
in
sense
of
able
As
eatable \
The word
4
iqf-saj
91TTT?
eatable rice
anything which
vrsm
',
vso
II
'
3HT*t:
q^
II
The
70.
^H
with
When
in the
also ?i?fT*TTil ffT?t H
when
Rig
the final of fr
is
mz
II
*T**?rnT
Rig X.
35. 8.
The form
ffr<j,
elided,
then by the 8TT? augment (III.
The word
for
'.
and ^r (3 roots) may op-
?[T
I.
srsj^
'
H$* here means

sense, we have
'.
not having this
tionally be elided in the Subjunctive (â;)
As ^^srr
sense of
*f:, frr., *fe, *rr,
II
final of
"^
eatable barley-gruel
being eaten.
for
is fit
*tefWt &fe st
from
derived
is
sfror
may
however,
85. 41.
But
deduced even
also be
4.
9 1) we get
employed in the sutra only for the sake

of distinctness, for the sutra without ^r would have also given the above
forms, as we have shown.
Or the ^r is used to remove the doubt which one
may entertain to this effect " *$rq[ is the form which may be deduced by the
form.
this
general
rule,
since
never appear
will
is
is
rTTT
the
excluded altogether and
taught, this form will be
is
$>*?f
elided (III.
We
thus evolved.
4. 97).
add pnr
fr^ = *nreRR ^srrf^îr^
the form of the root with the
ing
therefore
".
The form
of fa
is
sr
SPFT affix, f^qr is
to the root
11
*tt; then the 5

Others say, the ^?jr s
i
from the root ^p?
11
Some say that ^r is jnapaka and indicates the existence of the followmaxim STRc^RH^r^**. " tne ru e about augments is anitya". So that
augment snr being anitya, we could not have got the form ^r?
Hence
^
11
the employment of the word ^r

sffcT:
\ frT:
II
^TFT
V*?
II
II
^fa,
HWR
stem ending in art loses
<T3Tfa
3-U^rrPrT^rffTO 3$ft T^fr
71.
II
II
Jfcp,
t?PTT
II
II
its final
before the
Present characteristic ^ni; of the DivMi class.

As m*?tf?r from w, m^mfa from m, 9TTOR from $r, and sp^^r from
in sfrqr is for the sake of euphony or ease of pronunciation.
The
*TT
<l
II
According to Padamanjari, the sutra should have been
sqirf:
ren%,
and
thereby there would be the saving of half a matra, and also there would be no
necessity of repeating the word f^rfar in VII. 3. 75.
.
9r*rerrr%
?P<t
11
vsr
11
^r^nrrlr
72.
ed before an
11
*rara
q^rfa
*w >t^r
The
affix
3T
11
q^rer,
srfer,
11
11
of the Aorist characteristic
is
elid-
Lengthening.
438
As
ST^Wr, **QW
smSTTrTTO,
elided before
9TrrTT1.
according to VII.
Observe 3T*J^,
2.
and
81.
Bk. VII Ch.
from the root 5?
Had
II
Ill; J.
75
the ar not been
BTT1T1, then f& must have been substituted for it

Why do we say before an affix beginning with a vowel ?
Why
srgSTrTPl "
do we say
93-
and not only
So
ST?
that
the elision should not take place here, as ôt, Z*&1, *^fr> TOTP., fTOt, nEP H
W*n
j^^fe^j^wRn^
f&K, 35TO. 3TTrJT^T%, ##,

fr% 5? f& fo? 33^ ^?m^rrRm> s^rfr
11
\$3
q^rR
11
ll
s* m, 55, frs,
,
II
ti
73.
The whole
<top ^=r^T *r *r*rafa "
of the affix q^r
is
elided optionally
Atmanepada beginning
before the personal endings of the
with a dental, after 5^, f^fr %?r and *jf

As st^t^ or ST-^^rf, *T5*3P or snpPTT:, 3T5*3*
II
or srgsre*,
3*1^1
or
srfwr, sr^rs or strsttt, snjs or *nj$Trr

Why 5^ &c. only ? Observe sêst^^t H Why in the Atmanepada ?
Observe st^^TO only. Why before an affix beginning with a dental ? Observe
snprref?, *tf$*w or
11
Though the anuvritti of $PT was understood in this sutra; the

employment of the term ^3? indicates that the whole of the affix is to be
STsjWfft only.
But even with

For &ft would have elided only the final a? of sr
we would have got all the above forms, except those
elided.
II
the elision of sr alone
For 3? being elided, we have *r between ^ (a consonant of fr^ class)

and a dental (which is also a letter of $p$ class). This ^ situate between two
in ^f|
II
by VIII. 2. 26.
by VTCrflrc VIII.
Nor can
5T^ will be elided

sthanivat, for
Though
*r
is
been meant
the sutra.
a dento-labial, yet
it is
it
See
III.
1.
11
Had
included in the word dental.
vw*
i^ffa
ll
snfa
<re?n
class)
?r
it
not
would have been taken
in
Before the
11
stop*, stsrto, <Kr., s*rfa, U
ii
Present
substituted for the root-vowel in
character
^n
3^,
a long
and the seven roots
that follow it.

As *ttort,
rrrwf^r, sr^rfrr, J5rr*mr> *p*rfa> $rrar% ssrom and *rnnra

of these eight only? Observe srraRr H Why before 5^? Observe %ptf?r
being optional after this root by III. 1. 70.
ft^rrwr r%%
fr>r: u tf4 sfa fSr% u r%i
75.
3? is
45, for this Aorist-affix.
CTrnremi *fHr: vtfa

wftinreHf ^r3t *rer1t
74.
be objected that the elided
such an elision cannot be sthanivat.
1,
to be so included, #r (letters of
%frr u
is
2.
ll
*x
ll
^fa
^larr^r^f^rTr
ll
fef,
Crqf
>t^
^g, st^hto,
i%f%
4&1
fsrac,
fofa,
the
*^
ll
11
Before any other Present character
root vowel of r%5,
Why
ti
and ^rr-^^ is lengthened.
(fifr*),
the
Cn.
As
ill
78
Some Substitutes.
gfaft. SRflfa,
and
sir
^riR
II
1439
5R* lengthens
vowel before
its
^ by
the last rule, the present rule produces this change before .'the affix *pi also,
which
gets
it
by
III.
therefore not here
I.
70.
T^
fr^fa
pffir,
^tt frf% in the original
lengthens its vowel only
text
or Strefa
of Panini
The
when
sutra
it is
preceded by
s?r;
exhibited as fef$3
the present form, owes its existence
II
is
to the insertion of 8TT from the vartika ^hfcfJTrf^ *W>
^n:^&^5 vse n t^tM sct:, <rcwi^3,

#k ?f^r *$5r *w "TW"mt fare <rc^r #?f ^m
?ot:
Sprr
11
II
II
II
11
11
The long
76.
substituted in ire, before a
is
fo^
the Parasmaipada.
affix, in
Why in the Parasmaipada? Observe siren^

the
lengthening in 3*9>PT and sjifpt (Imperative
you
explain
do
*TTT>3T:
by ^^, (VI. 4. 105) then by I. 1. 63, the affix
is
elided
when
?
For
2nd Per. Sg.)
ff
produce no effect and so there ought to
it
would
^-elision,
being dropped by a
is
no
valid
objection.
This
The prohibition of I. 1.
lengthening?
have been no
which
the
affix
is
after
elided.
Here
stem
is not a stem
63, applies to the arjf
As
arraft, 2FTTrP, ^mf^rT U
How
ll
or anga with regard to

Therefore, though f%
(jTCratWOTiO
ii
it is
elided, the
II
fwrlr =*%
77.
S3
<*TTR
ll
rft
II
*3> Tfa,
w ?^#Tr ram
As
srero
*mr^,
as 3iq
*rqr-f f?
I.
1.
11
62,
The
?^gf?r, Te^frT, ?f53T% H
ll
Tc^s^Rrlrû- **n%
|5 is
before a Present-character (r%<0
(Tud.
^,
lengthening will take place by
II
sgmfcmf ^:
$f?T:
but
f?,
is
a stem with regard to
^,
ii
and
*ro;
*nc
II
f ^ with the indicatory
is
taken here,
There we
Those who do not read the sutra as 55
furtTW &c, read the anuvritti of the word arpT from VII. 3. 72 into
e. a Rrq[ affix which
so that the Rrq; is qualified by the word sr^,
and not
59),
*<*
of Divadi (19) class or of Kryadi class (53;.
have ?*gf% and swufrT respectively.

&c, but as
this sutra
is
i.
merely a vowel, and has no consonant in
begins with a vowel).
vowel, yet as
as
(III.
?rpjr.
Katyayana
The
it
is
1.
Therefore though 5IFP*
contains a consonant, the

83)
5<srm*raHT
The
II
II
(and not a
faq; affix
which
a r^t affix beginning with a
substitution does not take place,
reading of the text according to Patanjali and
^, and hence the necessity of the above explanation.
reading f$, though convenient,
*rcft^T:
sr
is
it
^rf^
II
^TT, 5TT,
sn?re, f^r, fasr, >ot, fts, **,
is
not arsha.
^r,
**JT,
i^, i^
ST, ^TET, ST%, 3?f%, *rf%,
^ *r>
^T5
tffa>
^ft^
5^
Shortening.
1440
^rfrr:
ii
m wu wt m w* n& arft srre sr? *r* f^m^t fa*
<tt
Before a Present-character
78.
substitutions take place

for
ra^
>*T
for
*r* for
qesrr,
^;,
fq^r%, f^refa,
sit,
wlr,
is
taught
in
the angadhikara
to take
is
wise by VI.
I.
tff
is
we have
*tt "spt
vs*.
w when
srat.
mr%, tbotW, T^cRr,
for
35^?
*rarf?ir,
of fa by VII.
JpTf Trrefafa!
*Rif*r
f^rf^r^rrf ?fr
**i%
is
"
w*r,
ism",
for gj,
86,
3.
tffcra'
and
however
it
when an operation
be on the
the sense
II
last faj
Then when
11
in fail*,
which
is
and
;
is
other-
there
is
not desired.
move quickly
to run,
'
ar,
first
'
in
any
II
$rr,
3Rh,
ftrft <?*<?:
%^
Before a
is
not allowed
is
one which ends with
be on the middle
qsreft, 3T<S*rcft
11
79.
and
for ^ct
must be acutely accented on the
It
first.
162, the acute will
II
q^
m, vw
II
Guna of the f
maxim srjff %
5PT, the acute will
irnRtsft
Sfrp u
*ftf for *Tf
the substitute fa*
substituted for
other sense,
( ^tw ),
ts*
*tsf
the following
<ftr^[),
ekadesa with
for
TT,
ras tt
f*r?r ***
nrfT for
III. .8o
the angadhikara, has taken place, and another operation of
Or
place".
prf for
f?rsf?r,
f*F + JTO + ft* required
does not take place on the
which
and
^5
STto for
As
tfNf?T H
[Bk. VII. Ch.
*rr,
ll
11
affix,
^rr
substituted for ?n
is
II
As
and ^rra%
The 3f* here belongs to Divadi class, meaning
and not *r* of the Juhotyadi class. Why srr (long) and not
to be produced
1ST, for this sr would assume the form srr by
VII. 3. 101 ? This long s?r of sn
STFTrft
'
ll
',
maxim
indicates the existence of the
been the substitute, VII.

*TT#T*f
$ht:
11
f^r:
II
^0
3.
II
<T3Tft
* sreTr?RT %*?i **ft f^ft
80.
given above in VII.
101, could not
short
is
1, 3TT#Tn*, f^:,
II
<re*
have lengthened
3.
78
and had
it.
II
11
substituted for
^ &c,
before a
%<*
affix.
with
The Pvadi roots form a subdivision of the Kryadi class, beginning

ro q*% (2) and ending with Srft mr (32). The ?^rf* roots (VIII. 2. 44)
are a portion of
Kryadi
c^
(nos 13 to 32).
class are Pvadi.
Thus
g^rrft,
Others hold that upto the end of the
^Tu%, t^Trft
ll
Those who hold that
Pvadi roots are upto the end of the Class, explain the non- shortening of
HRfft (forj^T would also then become Pvadi), by saying that the express
VH.
fik.
Cii. Itl.
VI I.
text of
GUN'A.
84]
long
79, substituting
3.
1441
They
prevents the shortening.
irr
say-
had 5TT been also shortened, then merely 3T substitute would have been enough
and not 3rr and this :*T would have been lengthened in the case of 3T^ by VII.
;
3.
01, to
form
UKrvft
jfRTcrf^Trr
*Ftp
11
*\
11
As
to Kas"ika)
11
vom
11
rfRr^r:, nrntr,
fm*im*
?err H^rra
<T*rTr
In the Veda
11
shortened before a
jfr is
rcrc* affix.
The ?r becomes or (srw<Jir*rT according

JrfaTfcT pMUH Rig. X. 10. 5.
by VIII. 4. 15. Why in the Veda? Observe q #nrr%
II
fa^^^rr
5rr *nrr% fara
For *
82.
q^n^
11
fhn?R3fw fafcr
81.
$r*p
11
in
*&m
t'rt
there
fir^r,
is
substituted a
guna before
ftrac affix.
As W?r, %RT
The
f^
,*rrf5cT
will get
guna before
spr
not have got guna before

of this sutra. Before non
5JRT ^T
^3
II
only?
Observe
rerofor, fi
As bt^^:,
2. 4,
I.
is
II
the Divadi m^ would

3. 86, but
f&n (I. 2. 4) hence the necessity
no guna, as fifj^'qiTOKT
:
II
II
^
5, t,
(3^) of the
3", 3?, 5JC",
and
This Personal ending is

arPTW, 3T3ttrn5:
and would not have caused guna (I. t. 5), but for
qrf|3L,
II
RF?t
this
As pT*f
:,
*|j: w
^rr^rrg^T^vrrg^T:
srrwg%
108)
sjst (III. 4.
read into the sutra from
11
^,
Mjfe r
comes in the p*F also. There, however, it

Here there are two f^fj affixes, the
and the sarvadhatuka 3f*7 and the 3jrfj? prevents guna. The
The ending
augment
%iw
^%,
II
is
aTHTH^:,
does not cause guna.
is
affixes there
is
The Bhvadi
of the stem.
according to
sutra.
r^Trt
virtue of VII.
as this affix
Before the personal-ending
Imperfect, guna
9, 5?
by
3^,
<T5TT%
II
83.
f^
Why mt
il
root nfft^T belongs both to the Bhvadi and the Divadi classes.
3rrsn*r<j%
84.
I.
o*
1.
3.
q^rm
11
^rronpr, smîrgsror:,
^ jpw <nsr fiRrairjfw 5% **fli
The Guna
is
11
11
substituted for the final *r vowel
of a stem before the affixes called sarvaclhatuka and Srdhadha-
tuka (III.
4.
113 &c).
GUNA,
*442
As mi*,
dhatuka
fsiTrT,
only
*3%;
^ff
%f
Observe
*ZUf,
BK. VII. CH.
Why
II
^*
III.
85]
sarvadhatuka and ardha-
Brfs^r*^
For had the sutra

been *rnr then the rule would have applied to affixes like qr^ cft wi-q &c which
includes all affixes beginning with ^f?f and
go to form Denominative verbs.
affixes
aTr* 5
II
ending with Hf?^
If the
II
applied to the affixes
like
sutra had been *&&, then the rule would have
To
&c.
?^*.
exclude these cases, the two words
sarvadhatuka and ardhadhatuka are used.
srmtsf^ôr^c^
ff%:
11
qfrr%
11
except before the
ll
arm:,
^mf^î^^
The Guna
85.
3ffij,
5rrn faRre*rjf** g*rr *nrr?r
For exceptions See
is
affix
**<(>
st,
fk% few
,
I.
1.
uns,
4, 5, 6.
ferg
11
11
substituted for the qj of the stem
ft",
before the Aorist-character f^r^,
before the Personal ending, or^ of the Perfect, and before an

affix
with an indicatory
As
II
(with 03^) smj:sTrnft, arpri
ifHiuufr, with for*, srpna?:
m* ii
\
(with
STPTCt *iwf (with spi), -mmta- (with ^j), 5rPTfaT?rP* (with ^^5) 11 This is an
exception to the Vriddhi rule of VII. 2. 115, and to the prohibition in I. I. 5.
op|<*
this guna is substituted, there does not take effect that rule, which causes
Vriddhi of the penultimate shorts? of *rrm; (snr ^T^rnff: VII. 2. 116). Had
that been the case, then the guna substitution would become simply useless,
When
and the prohibition with regard to f^rn and op* superfluous. Why do we say
not before fa, rôr and op* and fer^? Observe 5TPT|%: (with the affix f^ Unadi)
srsrrmft with pq-or which causes Vriddhi, and 3T*rrnrc with op$ and w^cp and
,
^rrircp
with a
f|r<^ (I. 2.
4) affix.
Some
hold that the f in r>
is
for the
sake
of pronunciation only, and the prohibition applies to all affixes beginning with
In 3T3irTS: with ^*t the
a *, such as arg, as srstrrcrp*, here there is no guna.
though
is a fw<l affix also, the
it
for
VII.
3- 83
guna takes place by virtue of
:
it.
Similarly 3T? ^nrr^TC with or?*
f%^ of this sutra does not
prohibited
by the op* of this sutra.
the optional guna VII. 1. 91 is also not
affect
prohibition
In fact the phrase 3Tf%T%or op* f&rTg is a Paryudasa prohibition for had it been
a prasayya-pratishedha, then the guna before 3JST and the 1st Pers. op$ would
:
before every
latter
affix,
guna of ^rn
by any other rule these
In short this sutra positively ordains
also have been prohibited.
other than
f%, f*ror,
would cause guna, that guna
op*
and f^r, and
is
if
not prohibited.
That
is
the result of
Paryudasa negation.
But
apply the
if
the sutra be construed as a Prasayyapratishedha, then we shall

The prohibition is therefore
*ptrt JjftfiWT ^r
maxim sr^rp;^ PffW
stated with regard to
But the
"STrif
in
II
connection with the affixes n\ f%^r, op* and fg\
Guna ordained by VII.
3-
8 4> 8 3
is
not prohibited.
ll
k. VII. Ch.
III.
86
q^foy^T^^r
^r
GUNA.
11
*z
q^Tft
11
1443
3*? srer, 5^ 3-<ro^,
ll
qw^vqt spit HtJ^ fsrofa

fro^r pj^twr^ ?k*t $ far^ &*tfx
Kdrikd-.ttnft
t%3<T:
fcrmtsrear zffr^rf^r **z$t rT*?T
an ftrdhadh&tuka
is
11
11
*%<*
*3*rer s*f*r .%** frrr^ wrsRrspr
Guna
II
*nwrrf^4?W fae^w t
86.
^r,
11
substituted before a s&rvadh&tuka and
affix, for
the
**
vowels of the Causative stems
which take the augment a (VII. 3. 36), and for the short penultimate vowel of a root which ends in a single consonant.
As
s&rofa,
'fcroraf,
vowel should be laghu or
tfrroft,
caused by the addition of the

^4-sr = ^f causes the f to
1*W, ^ri,
>^rr, enrf
light, before the addition

affix, will
become heavy,
11
of the affix
not prevent guna.
Thus
Of
;
course the
the heaviness
f^ + f,
though
that will not prevent guna: for fas^qrar
WîffPUl Obj: If this be so, why the forms ftf^TfT, ff^3"f are riot incorrect,
for in them also the vowel is laghu (the roots are fPf and T), and the augment
^ is added afterwards by a Vidhi rule ? Ans. The augment H^ is added to
the root, and becomes upadesivat. (See VII. i. 58). Obj. If so, how do you
cause Vriddhi in ?[3^, as in *TT* with *f3i; as *# + ^n=rH + ^(the 3i being
dropped by VI. 4. 27), for it is after the elision of 31 that the st of becomes
penultimate and can admit of Vriddhi by VII. 2. 116? Ans. The exceptional
forms to?: from to^ + ^*t, and *srir: from >sf?t + ^3T, taught in VI. 4. 28, 29
teach by implication that roots of this form take Vriddhi as a general rule.
Obj. If the ftsqTO maxim is not of universal application: though by VI* 4. 134,
,
is elided in bha stems, like *t"3T^ thus tffTT; yet the $r shoud not
you be consistent* in 3T*n? augment added by VII. 1.75 to ^fsr, srrc*f
&c. Moreover though there
In fact, you could not get the forms fw
the 3T of 3?^ &e.
be elided
&c.
if
^w
can be the lengthening of the penultimate
Nom.
PI),
yet not in the case of
from
|j F#i fi
in
re
?rm^ ttffiff?*
for here
(before Rr affix
^ is added by
another
you say, the maxim is not of universal application, then

guna
Ans. The guna takes place in
no
can
be
off in &F to form *nr
there
rule VII.
1.
72.
If
tl
forms like >t| &c, because the prohibition of the following rule VII. 3. 87,
with regard to the affixes beginning with a vowel, proves by implication that
before affixes beginning with a consonant, as , the guna also takes place. Obj.
The prohibiton in the case of vowel beginning affixes is for the sake of RfF, to
This is derived from f^Sf* (Juhotyadi 1 1), in the Imperfect, as

form 3T%%3
T + f*rw + *Tqr*sJ, + f?r* then reduplication (VI. 1. 10}, then guna of the reduplill
17
GUNA.
1444
(VII.
cate,
?>TR3r +
4.
*l
(VII.
which had become q[ in the Imperfect,

Thus STRSr + ^+^sr + nrf^ + i* (VI. 1. io)
75) = sr%Ra (VI. 1. 98) = 3T*ref. The elided ^ produces its
68.
I.
4.
III. . 87]
then fa*
75),
by VI.
elided
is
Bk. VII. Ch.
guna by VII. 3. 86. This is why ar^ is taken in sutra VII. 3. 87,
namely srsrrf? affixes do not cause guna, the frtlf<| affixes like ?j cause guna.
the
effect,
You cannot
therefore say that a^pcr in VII.
rr%nnr?T%%%:
this
3 had
roots,
show
87
q^
(Desiderative)
that words like
this
The
(VI.
4. 24).
The
sutra
to *r^ &c, as ^v-3:; if
*f &c
re>q[
of
?=rîs for
Ans. Let
The "upadha
it
a far^?
affix
rani a ^ter roots
is
ending
Similarly
These
make
the root vowel heavy.
the sake of the elision of the nasal, in fqroi%,
be
10
I. 2.
in consonants.
get guna, and the final consonant of the root
plus the initial consonant of the affix, does not
Obj:
a jfiapaka. Ans.
is
not tended to cause the guna of the penultimate vowels of these
what was the necessity of making
teaches that
rules
3.
140) teaches the addition of
: (III. 2.
so. still
the RT^ of
^5
is
enough
>ftc*rft
for us.
must be the vowels of the f^ pratyahara. Therefore in f*RfrT, the penultimate is short st ( of >^^) and it does not take guna.
In fact, the word penultimate qualifies the word ja: understood. Others
explain it by saying that ^Tr^ is to be analysed by gfo*l<^ "in the vicinity of
short"
The word ar^T means ^rpt, and means the f* vowel in the proximity of
The word rssrq^r should be analysed as 7&$[ sqqfTand is a Karmadharaya
compound, and means "a short or light penultimate". The word îtHmjq is
<i"
II
33*
II
Samahara Dvandva.
*
w*m*m*mw& wfT^rfTrf* fqf*r *tt$**T3% s<*r t >t*r
Ftrt, CT^rarg
FtT:
rrf%sfHL.ii
*f?*
^t^*
The guna
^stfrR
87.
mate
11
11
not substituted for the penulti-
is
vowel in the reduplicated form of a root, before

a S&rvadhatuka affix beginning with a vowel and having an
light $*:
indicatory
*i
\\
As %r?r5Tn^, 3RRSR
Observe %frfa
is
11
<rft
Vmrfa, Trer^*
Why beginning with
a vowel
11
Why of a
read here for the sake of the subsequent sutras like VII.
cases other than j%H
Why
guna
a sarvadhatuka affix?
ardhadhatuka-
(III.
The word
11
3.
92.
fqrq[
For here
in
be prevented by fg^ because of srrfNI^tfHl'^

Observe sr^t in the Perfect, the affixes of which are
will
115).
4.
reduplicated root?
Observe SrYtE
ll
Why
Observe sj^rrR, 3T3j??R

Vart There is diversity
do we say a penultimate
light
vowel?
II
The forms
in
t^tstr, 'WTOfttj
the Vedas.
?re*ft<ft:
As sj^Rfj
the
are irregular. ??$ +
^? of *pr
?*?
S<?fT
11
STr^-l-
Bk. VII. Ch.
III.
GUNA
89]
The above forms
are thus evolved.
1445
1. ?r
fT3fn%
is
(Imperative 1st
Per Sing), the fa is changed to r, the augment stt? is added which is rr?t (*TT1rm?q fTO HI. 4- 92), *sj is substituted for jpi, then there is reduplication, then
guna by VII.
4.
75.
2.
SRTTO*
Pers. Sing. Imperative of rr
P&, the fn%
is
Wm*f>
4.
II
is
is
changed to st*
3. ~?rfTTsr is
11
1st
3rd Person singular of the Present.
which is ardhadhtuka III. 4. 1 15. 6. jtstt^h is

the %ôf ^fr qi faqwft (Tudadi 8), in the Parasmaipada, the f of fa* is elided (III. 4. 97), then is added the augment sr* (III. 4.94) then tfi is irregularly
5.
f^nr
is
the Perfect with
oft*
replaced by
then reduplication.
*fj,
In the woids
*rwn%
&c. the reduplicate has been shortened, as a Vedic
form, in the Intensive 2j^^îl ^Treroft^
and
âugment by ^#r *r(VII.

^f
**^>
(1T^>)>
'
^T an d
*F*
3.
e. it is
i-
from^ypjtntr there
is
94). ^r^ftnft:
In these two
qnrofra "
above forms
and to
may
*rrfT
and
from
the Accusative
Present Participle from the Intensive root of

is
is
qr^r
^Tfr
II
is
(3^ <?J3r
plural
of the
The reading
?*^
faT
>
the Intensive
3TC*j3Vfr, in
in
Feminine
the Kasika
Or the
the roots have been shortened.
be derived regularly, without shortening, from the roots
?jto
11
qaftfidfo
II
l^rf*
II
II
^,
^:,
ftfe
II
^ and ^ get
no guna before an immediately

following Personal ending which is SarvadMtuka.
88.
As
The *r refers to the Adldi

3*$^, spf;, *T$**; *, *T^, *r*Tf 11
is dropped, and does not refer to Div-
root (21) in which the Present character
adi (24) or Tudadi (115) roots, because there the Present character >*R[ and
and the
st
and moreover the

affixes ?iând *T are HF?l(I- 2. 4) and would not cause guna.
Why do we
say before nr^ ? Observe H*t% where the guna takes place before spx
Why
intervene between the Personal endings (f^w)
root:
11
before a sarvadhatuka affix
Observe <wn%
vrf%tfte,
where the Benedictive
is
and the augment is of course considered as

a portion of the personal ending. Why the guna is not prohibited in frwrW
is dropped, and the Personal ending is added directly to
when the Intensive
not a Sarvadhatuka (III.
4. 116),
Because the form *r*?$

except
guna takes place in
the root.
H^^
But of
|T
we have
Intensive, because there
is
The forms % &c
^r tftrî% ffe
89.
11
in
VII.
4.
in
%r*3
II
65
indicates
by implication that
wr^r?nt where guna has been prohibited in the
no jftapaka with regard to
are the 1st Per.
11
^tfa
11
it.
Imperative of
3?t:, fftr*.,
11
^fa, wf&
root ending in shorty, which has no Present
Guna
1446
characteristic
the vikarana
e.
i.
gets vriddhi, before a
consonant, but not

Thus
in
gas
affix
fact,
prevents
g^rfq-, fpfffa
Observe 3^:,
farj
action in
aarffi
into the sutra from VII.

ffhfrnr
Here there
11
3?tff%finir*r
11
is
^:
dropped by luk
elision
),
reduplicated.
Why ending
*rm, ^m%, *<mq\ *<frft
do we say whose vikarana is elided by
îf*r,
Why
$T* U
is
ii
Why
11
beginning
the First Person of the Imperative
r^rPT, ^rr5t,
the stem
;
<r|%, ijrt,
Observe *pfn%,
if
is
III. 92.
Sir vadMtuka affix beginning with a
rm #mr,
snfw, rfa,
Observe
3?
fa<j;
Bk. VII. Ch.
is
f^ by
with a 9^?
III. 4.92.
Observe
Why
before
The augment *r*K being f|F^(III. 4. 103),

The phrase syr*?^^ should be read
*^r?t H?R1
II
II
8 7 therefore Vriddhi does not take place here qfarc^

luk-elision of zj^ II
3-
-0
^n%
11
^j^rf^r^r
fem^r
sjuff^:,
I)
ll
frar^m
Before a fqgc SHrvadhatuka affix beginning
90.
with a consonant, the final ^ of ^5 gets optionally vriddhi.
As ^rdrrfa or srofrfcT, ^r^Rr or tfpjfffq, qt^tPT or sfptfr* but ^t^n% before
SfrT:
11
f^rtr fai% srr#>*r3^
11
an
affix
fpfts^%px.
11
ll
s.*
q^n%
II
ar>firaraffnc2% %fo fare
91.
sr^r
!pr:,
Before a
single consonant,
As
II
*rr^*r3%
II
g% ^frr
fq^;
11
S&rvadhgttuka affix which
Guna
jfroT??f, jfr^ff:
is substituted for the final of

3^J
Though the anuvritti of %\ was understood
If
sutra from the last aphorism, the
employment of the term
maxim
stf^T^
is
11
in this
3TtR implies the
*?qr " when a term

which denotes a letter is exhibited in a rule, in the form of a Locative case,
and qualifies something else which likewise stands in the Locative case, that
which is qualified by it must be regarded as beginning with the letter which
Is denoted by the terrrj in question, and not as ending with it ".
existence of the following
?jn^
frfc
11
f^rre
^rsnns
<5<ir^:, TO
V^rft
**
f^re^r^ im*\HT mffi %f& rem *rr#>rr3%
Before a T%* S&rvadh&tuka
92.
%K
^Tf
II
II
II
II
11
affix
beginning
with a consonant, % is added after ar of the verbal stem <ju^r

In the last example though the affix
As ?rari^, f^rfST, ^fji, 3T^^
II
II
vanishes altogether, yet
it
produces
Why
its
effect.
Why
beginning with a con-
âffix? Observe
The
arc; with 93
Observe ^t^rrH
with
vikarana
and
(Rudhadi)
the
is
root
so
n%
fg
stem 3<TO is formed from the
added
that
the
augment
is
after
f*
exhibited in the sutra in order to indicate
sonant?
11
the vikarana fn^has been added, and that the root

to be taken.
f3 of Tudadi
11
class
is
not
VII. Ch. Ill
]Bk.
95
&
The above forms
Augment.
are thus derived
1447
^+^R + ^=f^+?^ + fH = f^ff +f^ = f%? + (%

(VIII.
3i)=ftjr + f^ ^VIII.
2.
40) = j^JTf + lt (VIII.
The form
one 9 (VIII. 3. 13).

41, the ^ being changed to
elision of
9r before
Rt<t
87)=^ro-i-r%
1.
= ^%*
41)
similarly formed
fdrrcr is
f% of
(VI.
4.
11
sr^bry
is
the
fj^f
with the
by VIII. 2.
2nd and 3rd
Per. Sing.
HST
V^
iz 5.5
q^rft g*:, fc
? f ^W^tTÎ s^ff Mr srr^rg??** fTRT^r *T*I%
Before a fal Sarvadhatuka
93.
II
II
II
II
II
beginning
affix
with a consonant, the augment 7 is placed after a

But wqiW before such an
As fr^fm. >NW, Brcftm, STsnftrt
II
II
ginning with a vowel, and

*ct
ff%:
11
11
*.
11
W?r
T^rfSt
11
before an affix which
^:,
stt,
33* srrera s^fr far. *rrf ^^rei
The
94.
far*
is
not
fafj
affix
be-
II
11
i^mft
>r*rr%
S&rvadh&tuka
?r
11
beginning with
affixes,
a consonant, optionally get the augment f? in the Intensive.

As r*r?5ifii% in ^rr^m^r ^tff^, so also 555fyrfrofftr, Rr^r^r fr^r crnrft^
*W3^l*reft BTrf^V^T
are
all
11
(Rig. IV. 58.
examples of the
retains ar?, there can be

after
it,
Also
3).
no
fqf^
*$f% grând ??(%
the elision
Sarvadhatuka
will intervene
because then ^P*
not, as
Intensive with
affix
of
q^
ll
When
These
the stem
beginning with a consonant
between the
affix
and the stem. Hence
no examples of the same can be given.
g^ptw*:
95.
^rrirarg*
11
-X
q^rr%
11
A sarvadh&tuka
11
g, ^, ^g, srm,
affix,
3m:
^rrirarrj
beginning with a con-
sonant, optionally gets f? augment, after the roots 5, ^, ^j,
$n* and 3TJ^ M

The root g (Adadi
a sound
',
*3 (Adadi 34)
According to KaSika 3
'
25)
means 'to
to praise
is
',
*n*
increase',
'
^ (Adadi 24) 'to make

and ar* to go
to be satisfied
a Sautra dhatu.
Thus 3tTu%
'
',
'.
or ^Tf^h%, gqi hir or
ottIi or 3<rccnr?rt, ffrara* or $4N*, 3T>**rf?r or ar^*lfrW H m. and 8T*

can then be followed by a consonant beginning sarvadhatuka affix, when they
lose their Present character ( vikarana ) as a Vedic anomaly ( bahulam
<r<T?ftrlr,
chhandasi).
The
will
Apisalas read
then become a refa rule for the
exhibited in the feminine.
3^&**PT ^^r3^ni e^^%

Vedic forms. The word sn+rcasn"
the sutra as
This
11
is
here
11
fc Augment.
*448
The
repetition of
s&rvadhatuka
'
though
',
Bk. VII Ch.
anuvritti
its
III.
98
was present
is
for the sake of
stopping the anuvritti of fa^, and this rule applies to arfa*

as fr^fcr, *pfh^1 ll
affixes also,
3T^<Tftr*S^
ffrr:
te
I!
<T3TR
II
sT^ffr* flrrarm <r<rar*K*
11
*Tf%?ini
imr^:
arffsg^Ttffc
11
96.
II
srftcT,
r%^:,
3T,
^rî^^ t*rw h^ht
2*
II
11
11
consonantal s&rvadMtuka
single"
affix gets
the augment *?, after aw; (stf^t) and after the Aorist character ftr^
As
II
arrcfr^,
sonant affix
Vdtt:
fe
amr^
ar^rtfffi,
(III. 4. 84),
and *
mt+Rr^=*n^+^
wpy
do we say a single-con-
w^m
11
(III. 4.
^vs
84)=*^+^
t^t
ll
11
stated
when m
augment
for ar*r (II. 4. 52), before the
Therefore not here arm*" and ar*?l
II
Why
ll
3TT%T, arorrfo "
Prohibition of the sthanivad-bh^va must be
substituted for
is
*n#*
Observe
The word
(VIII.
srrwr
is
2.35)=^^+^
*$&k, ^^ftr
thus formed.
(VIII.
4.
55)
11
In the Veda, a single consonantal S&rvadhd-
97.
tuka affix gets diversely the augment ff after stb; and fax
Here arp is used instead of arrsftfj but also
As am q%t OT?FJ frfw
II
II
aTffcrrtffa *n*T :
IX. 107.
though
9),
(See Maitr. S.
sm^Î^r: (Rig X.
added (VI.
*?t is
I. 5.
Compare VIII.
4. 75).
12).
28. 4).
So
And
and
vim',
also with s- Aorist, as ifrfawr (Rig

ar?i^rcf 3*nG, the a??: is
ararr:
are
not elided
examples of fa^ without
f*.
2.73.
arn is the fW of ar*T, there is added fall, then fr* is elided,

changed to ^, and it is turned to visarjaniya. The words arajr: and
WOi: are derived from the roots *j* (spfft) and **r^ (OTPTOt), in the Aorist, the
far is elided (VI. I. 68), the r%^ is elided by VIII. 2. 24, and the f of the roots
The word
then
is
?gr
is
The augment f*
changed to visarga.
^ qssarw
II
**
II
*wft
II
not added as a Vedic irregularity.
is
% '^W.
^:,
II
After ^f and the four roots that follow 'it,

comes the augment ** to a s&rvadhatuka affix consisting of a
98.
single consonant.
r^n?i an ^ *ra^ ara#?t, ar^ft irnft^ irpft, arsrtfnj:,
Why of these five only? Observe ar*HTl **T* Why an aprikta
?**#: u
Observe qfa^ni The word ***. is singular, though it ought to have
affix?
As
rofni,
sftrft:,
>
.-,
ll
been plural
Bk. VII. Ch.
Ill
102.
<hîh4 j ii<*i4V.
11
Lengthening.
*A
^tpt
11
1449
^, jtp^*,
11
Tra^fr.
11
According to the opinon of Gargva, and

Galatva, the augment ar? comes before a Satrvadhatuka affix consisting of a single consonant, after the above five roots
&c.
As srCr?*, srd*' ******* *****:> ar^wfi *fw, *r<!i upr, srw*, *^w
99.
11
The names of Gargya and Galava are mentioned for honoris causa.
The mention of these names is not for the sake of "option" (f^f^Tpfa;).
Because the very injunction about 9*?, would make the f^ of the preceding
sutra optional. The mention of more than one Acharya in the sutra is also
for this
very reason.
^N
3T3".
II
<T3[Tfa
II
After arf
100.
II
3T3T:,
'to
m3nI*1
comes the augment
eat',
anr*
before a S&rvadhatuka affix consisting of a single consonant,
according to the opinion of all grammarians.

As an** anc* *W' M Before a non-aprikta we have
word
makes
^ft^Pl.
3T<ft
^hft
*tfsr
rf%, Tf*ST
a necessary rule and not optional, like the
it
%o\
||
q^r
11
11
skt.,
^:,
**fa
The
II
last.
||
wfr ^nrrtr ^rrt^r^ *w

The long stt is substituted for the final ar of
101.
a Tense-stem, before a S&rvadh&tuka affix beginning with ôr
H (lit.a consonant of T^r praty&hara).
ffrr*.
11
^^Ki'rfwrjfPi <Nt
As
11
T*nf*, <F*T*:, **TPP,
<T**lTf*,
*%*T*:,
WPT:
II
Why
'for
the ST only'
Why before a sra consonant (semivowels, nasals and

Observe ft3*:, f%3*
Why a 'Sarvadhatuka'? Observe
Observe
T^ff::, T^T:
only?
and
H)
ST
anuvritti
of
into this sutra, from VII. 3. 88 so
the
read
Some
faf
U
erjprr, %*T*:
:
II
II
that the lengthening takes place only before Personal-endings.
them
^5
before
there
is
no lengthening, as H*ren*
The word >mr* is
To w
thus formed.
is
According to
II
added g^, then comes
^pt,
treating kvasu as a sarvadhatuka under III. 4. 117; the reduplication of the

is prevented, because the word dhatu is used in VI. 1.8
root ending in
of a toot only, and not of a root plus a vikarana
reduplication
which ordains
f^
Those who do not read the anuviitti of

form ** (*-i-*T*J
in
word
the
of
only
OT#>*ni,%, they explain the form H^P* as a
this sutra, but
Vedic anomaly.
like the
^fa
II
?*
11
q^rfa
gfa,
II
Shortening.
1450
[Bk. VII. Ch.
Before a case-ending beginning with
102.
a consonant of q-sr Praty&h&ra), the final
(lit
stem
is
f *rr**Pl, ^STT^ri.
cf^tto
where
ii
*f
tlie affix
final sr of
As
q^rp-^ri
II
or
Nominal-
STrft ^Hf 3f3T is understood here.

Thus
But btf^T^R. where the stem ends inland
does not begin with a
wr SFsrtr fa <rem S3*m*<rerrp2t
<pRrctt*fr >nffr
fWir* ( tlie
consonant), in the Plural,
wor^
substituted for the
is
a Nominal stem.
f$ps?
*w*r, fSHJ,
cr^J
Why
in
the Plural
Observe fOTOPI.
?
Observe
Observe
?
before a case-affix beginning with a $p?x consonant

lengthening here is by VI. 4. 3).
a case-affix
Why
Before the case-ending
104.
for the final 3? of
As
f^W
11
Why
ll
fttfraf*
consonant.
?i*r
Before a case-ending beginning with
103.
(lit.
of the phrase
e^TT^,
'
of a
sr
also lengthened.
The whole
ffw
III. 105.
affac,
is
substituted
a Nominal-stem.
fsrar (Gen. dual) ^, **mfti &h, fti^s (Loc. dual) as f*rqrf$qft,
snfe ^T^
\o\
II
q<^|fa
II
STTT^, if, 3TTT:
II
Before the case-endings sft^ and before stt of

the Instrumental, 3 is substituted for the final f? of the
105.
Feminine-affix.
STTS* is
grammarians.
As
name
ll
Where
mean the long forms j and

here, sTfa*sf|H
OTfF*^*T
The word
2.
74).
given to the affix
3TT,
is employed in Grammar, they

and not when they are shortened, therefore, not
ever #t or 3TT*
derived from
only been used in the sutra,

titution in the case ofstfteRTr
in sft?WT:
sritarft fifafrf
with the affix f%^r (III.
by VI. 4. 140. Had therefore,

instead of 3TPJ there would have been q- subsalso; for the rfrqr rule VI. 4/ 140 would find
In the Ins. Sing, the final 3TT
scope
the Ins. Sg. by the ancient
ll
ctfftftStfT is
sir
its
*r,
m%$t, *rnw, ^g^p, tr^t, sfgcrsrar, ^rfPTfTârr, *gtnrrf:, znthe 3TT of the Feminine affix only ? Observe qfrffiTOr W1W&F1
Why
mzWW*n
ifai\v*v&i[:
tfteTPm:
the
is
elided
153 &c, and would be debarred here by the present
sutra.
Bk. VII. Ch,
The maxim
maxim
108
III.
GunA
tr^s^r^Tfni
sâr*
Feminine
in
1451
necessary, because Otherwise on the
is
Sft and arr^t would also be

sthanivad bhSva, we find this
of sth&nivadbhava, the short substitutes of

In
included.
the
fact, in
"A
vartika &q\% il?rs#5:
prohibiting
stitra
short (not long) substitute of yr and stt*
is
not
sthanivat".
*r jap*
11
?*
<TTrfa
11
106.
<* is
^r^^rt,
11
of a Feminine
3fr
stem, in the Vocative Singular.

As t ^j|, * *f*r3T, ? ?irrftaiT?v% a
\o\s
wrnfrrsfri^:
<^n% h strtpJ, ftfh, ^r:
*rf OTftff *3% swrofarTjFRT TEFiTprf ?**r *r^f?r, ^f^r <m'.
\\
ll
ff^r:
11
*rf%3f*
TPj^tfM"
11
*firTNf*
%& sw^ft
&*$$&
11
smiw ?r&w>
107.
for the
m%% j^rr^T^
a?**
and %
3T*r
where the
3TSf
Vdrt:
aqrri%,
sirs
ft
^,
and
Optionally so
? tPWT
P^f/:
substituted in the Voc. Sg.
f wR ^ tfrjftr?
!
3T?^%
ft
sr
II
#$**$
3***r?s
*M*g
or
3?,
as
}$
3T**IT
9 3T?**3?
But ?
are conjunct.
in the
Veda: as % 3?*snr or 9 sr**re ? 3Trra or

J
11
A feminine stem formed with the
This shortening takes place

Vdrt\
in
affix ^ft optionally
As f^f tff: or^rTRri"

the Veda only.
In a Bahuvrlhi compound ending with
*rr,
*tfr?r*
there
is
becomes
f^rf! or
substituted
Voc. Sg. when the word means a son worthy of such a

This debars the
3^
9 m*Tfam = TPtt S8R"^r#% SSjWtfNtftC
for rrf in the
mother.
*?<J
11
long vowel of the Feminines called
short before the Loc. Sg< and Voc. Sg<
*tTCT
11
11
Prohibition must be stated when the endearing terms denoting
mother have an uncombined
ff^lf
is
sâw
(L 4. 3 &c).
Vdrt:
nr^^r
;tfq %f*r
11
of the feminine, in the sense of 'mother, mother-
asrr
As %
T*f
^ro
short vowel
dear', as well as for the
Nadi
11
As
The
53.
of
*nq^ makes the
final acute,
%*%?* 3<n". l*t

^f*ft H ^srer, ?pr.,
^^rr^m 3tt % s^rrrorjf** gorr w% srf^rr !**->
11
tfrr
11
guna
11
11
108.
11
5BT:
affix of V. 4.
For short S and
3"
final in
a nominal-stem, a
is substituted in the Vocative Singular.

As 5 3T^r, f ^r. ? T?V
But there is no guna
11
because
an1 g?
li
were shortened
ecifically,
in
% awR,
and to substitute guna
#*^
fo:
them
Guna of Feminine.
1452
would make
intended
**%
ff^r:
q t fri^ML
is
ii
^tr
?. n
n srftr, <*
s^rFwroiffra sprf **i%
srerrfls
ii
it
case of these nadl words, the sutra would have been 5K**f*TRn&**Pt
stfsr <rc?Tr
ii
III. .
shortening a useless operation. Moreover, had guna been
their
in the
Bk. VII. Ch.
*sm ^nr^ Jn^^r
il
it
regrtsmsr
w& f&wmi
ii
Before the affix 3Tfl[ of the Nom. PL, Guna

109.
substituted for the final short vowel of a nominal stem.
As
3?m:,
Vdrt
*rra?p,
T^ ^T
The forms
sr
and
$tT could
tional use of #psr ftgrf^yra^FffirO H
jnf ^ff or **n
or st*,
T^ **:, foRh'^tal
or
it
upto the end of this chapter are of optional
As sp%
application in the Veda.
^rT^r^,
wp, %$&
<fhp,
All these rules
or ftifttfRRr
s#f, spfl" 3ia5>*q:
or
II
have been regularly obtained by the opformed by adding 3?^ to qitf*><| with-
tltl SB*** is
The rule of lengthening the prior

out guna of 3, and 3 being changed to %
vowel (VI. I. 102) which would have otherwise come, in the absence of guna
does not take place, as a Vedic option (VI. I. 106). f%T%3feir is the InstrumenII
the sn of VII.
tal singular,
3-
vgit
f&BhmexFriii
Un
^n%
II
long
*TmR, farrft *mrc,
in ^trrrar
and
3>rrfa:
formed
^4hwûm4 IMI
v&a:, fe,
II
substituted for the final sg of a stem,
is
and in the Strong

m$R muti, f^rfr, Wfr&,
in the Locative singular
As
fttfrftftft is
IV. 56).
??
II
Guna
110.
The word
120 does not come.
by Unadi nipatan ($fa^far &c
see VI.
The
4. II.
qîn
cases.
qmft,
s^ is
For the
srafc m
for the
sake of facility
of utterance.
Because before
fir
and strong
cases,
it is
impossible for a stem to end
in a long vowel * nor a dhatu noun can so come, since

would be changed to $c by VII. I. 100, and in forms like
fi?fa
^Ttj:
11
Guna
3Il
f^RT
zzw
&:, fefir,
q^fffcf
there
is
51^ H
11
ii
case ending
ifi, fi^?r-
The word
though
VI.
no
1.
(fjfr) is
).
Why
AbL and
of fa stems
Observe
Loc. only? Observe 3T?T
understood here also, as the counter-ex-
II
qjr
it is
is
formed by adding
and
which
iwTl
though ST**
(wHrg^f^l), and moreover
for
wnfo,
in the Singulars of the Dat.
The word
example:
11
<rofr sjtr >r^frr
3T*?TO, 3ia[%, 3?*%*,
Why
amples are
case-affix,
*?n%
that case, long ^
111.
For the f and t of the stems called r (1.4.3.)
substituted in Dative, Ablative and Genitive Singular.
is
T3T H
11
etrercqrffTO
As
WW,
11
in
is
is
3*?<t to T (IV. I. 44). 3*^ is not a

added to Tg which is fa ^3: is no proper
added to <fo is fl^, it is only so by atidesa
$1? is
II
not
|j
Bk. VII. Ch.
III. . 116]
3TT<jttot:
fftp
II
11
\\^
11
f^tT:
1453
II
II
The augment
112.
Augment.
stt^, tot:,
q^nft
*WWUIMTt *T^T1%
11
Hl^l^f^?|
tt*
added to the case-endings of the Dat. Abl. and Gen. Sg. after the stem called Nadl
&c.
4. 3.
( I.
*rrenr.
iftr
11
<*^n%
11
^t?,
11
sttt:,
srrrerrfjsTfTT^ f^?r: q?r^??i *pyrTTr
11
H^r
11
The augment
113.
and Gen. Sg.
is
).
n\
11
3TT^
after a
*TTC is added to the Dat. Abl.

Feminine stem ending in srr
II
As m%m< *f*T3rra, 9n#?*r?s3Tr%, orgrap, *fr*nfr2TP, 9r#PT?vairap But in

compound str^, ( from ^gr^rasprer ), this rule does not apply, on the
maxim yor* *r$nrs^fc?: as the srr has been shortened here. Even when the
(
the
word
wf?fCT5
assumes the form
arRr^frr in the Dative
by VII.
3.
the affix
102,
does not take the augment rK, because this long srr is a lakshanika
while the 3TT of the sutra is a pratipadokta ( ôTqfcTTfRrar: TRTfW)
srr
only,
II
*Hbrro:
ffa:
11
^rrf^^
W*
mrft ^*TC:, **tt*, g^r. ^,

few ir?nre* ssrerw ?^*r *r*rra
After a Pronominal stem ending in long
II
II
II
11
sr^rra 3rr^?rTTf ^tt^î
114.
11
srr
of the Feminine, the Dat, Abl, and Gen. Sg, receive the augment
^rrsr and the srr of the stem is shortened.
As *4&, fw&, n&, <r&, ?*&, **Sr, ***<*p, sr&*r:, f^R^r', *tc*p, mm.,
q&u., *T?*&
3T5*TC*IP
But srgl where the stem does not end
finrrn fecftar^tfr^^r*
11
??X
in
<*^ft
long
rr
of the Feminine.
fa*rr*r,
fairer,
fjrfNrr-
x*ww f%*rr<rr ?jmrrT^r *?rr?r

After fe^rarr and *j3rarr the Dat. Abl. and
115.
get the augment **TT? before which
optionally
Gen. Sg. may
fi%:
the
11
f*?ltar <?r*r
srr is
As
or
fr<ft$rar
11
f&tr-
11
shortened.
rltffawr or rltftarlp
?rata& or *mfa, f$<fow. or
Rt^rrn-:,
tffa&m.
11
^srsrrefrw:
*ftp
f^rTTOrs^ra
ll
if*
^^
11
%*',
sto, *fr,
TO^r?r*^r^rreTTOHreTO i^rftsraTrWr rn%
arr*,
jftw,
11
11
For the ending % of the Loc. Sg. there is

3TTO, after a stem calk 1 Nadi (I. 4. 3. &e), after
the Feminines in 3TT, and after *ft
116.
substituted
II
Ghi Declension.
1454
The word
is
changed to
VI.
11
fTTôfi' is
by
formed by
added under
fa>"iaffix
tniP^lT^ and the
st*t
Bk. VII. Ch.
qv\ substitute in
III.
119
III. 2. 61, the
the Locative
is
^
by
4- 82.
II7.*
and
3F
short,
srre;
After the Feminine nadi words ending in f

is substituted for the f of the Loc. Sg.
See I. 4. 6.
As $cqr3, ^3T*
is
word
understood
here
The
I'
really separate sfitra, because
it is
Obj. If this
also.
included in the
last,
fre
sp,
ijt
is
not a
and these forms could
so that we ought to make only one sutra of 117

f^qpifai! Ans. We could not have done so, for then in the
qase of fjRr and ^3, the afr would have come and not srr, in this way. The 3TPI would
r
bave found scope in nadi words like f>qi q pt, the sty would have undisputed
when getting the designation
scope in ym and *r*#r; but in the case of
the aft would have come, being subsequently taught, and the form would
be obtained by the
and
sutra
last
Ii8, as
have been fj^T instead of $?3P*
^H^H
Sf?r
11
T^Rll3?ftO
ssws^s ffr^rerWr
***rra n
After a stem ending
118.
is
11
not a Nadi or a.Ghi,

As jrar, <r*!r
srr is
in $ or
g-
short,
and which
substituted for the f of the Loc. Sg.
11
In the case of
pf
fir
words
aft
jffr
words btpus taught by the previous
preceded by
ar substitution of pi letters
will
sutras; in the case
be taught
in
the
next sutra, so by the rule of exclusion, the present sutra applies to words other
than nadi and
ghi,
W&: *
II
II
119.
pr T,
s!V is
q^Tft
II
3*^, ^, *:,
After a Ghi
4. 7)
stem ending
substituted for the % of the Loc. Sg. and
tituted for the final of such
As
(I.
II
r*#r,
SRT, $^t, ^#r,
<tt
in short
3T is
subs-
Ghi stem.
II
The
short bt
is
substituted, in order to
Those who read 118 and 119 combined as sto*i%: translate it thus: V After every other* stem ending in % and 3
(i. e. which is not a Nadi;, aft is substituted for the Locative Singular
f, whereby
for the final of Ghi stems, *r is substituted". They do so on the analogy of the
prevent the zj* affix in the Feminine.
sfttra 5fj|: srtsf *T?*T<T* (III
I.
11).
Bk. VII. Ch.
3TT^> HTSfepTTO
ff%:
ii
Ghi Declension.
III. . 120]
>r^Tr^rr#r
II
*Tr>rr#r
^TT^T
*nn% stF^t*
IR
II
II
H55
3TT^:, *T, 3T
feÎR
II
ii
120.
5ff is substituted for the ending srr of the Instrumental singular, after the Ghi stems, when they are not
Feminine.
As
srffcrcr, *rg*rr,
V&n
li
mental
also, as
%|U||,
u<prr
11
Why
do we .not say 3TT^t *T 51% ?rr is subsAns. In order to form the neuter InstruObj. These can be formed by the augment 3*r
tituted for 3TT in the Masculine'
under rule VII. I. 73, a nd not by the srr of this sutra. Ans. But ars^r
Because 5 substituted for
will not be so formed as BTfTT aram$% H
of 3T*w
VIII.
of
tl>e
considered as asiddha or non-existent (VI 1 1.2. 1) for the purposes

application of VII. 1. 73, and as 3?3 cannot take 3*, it will take *rr by
2.
this rule.
80
is
Why
do we say
"
not in the Feminine?"
Observe ^TT, "^r
II
BOOK SEVENTH.
Chapter Fourth.
<m%*>*
ii
3<tw*^ ^f^sT^wnr^
1.
short
substituted for the vowel, standing
is
in a penultimate position, in the Causative stem,
when the
affix
^r^ (sign of the Eeduplicate Aorist of the Causatives) follows.

As srfhff?<{. snffcil, ar??h^q;, ST^T*?!
Here the rules of reduplica,!
and shortening of the penultimate both present themselves simultaneously.

The rule about shortening, being subsequent in order, is applied first, and then
tion
the reduplication takes place.
Thus
50=^ + ^( shortenin g VII.
grrft
+ ar^^^rr^+ST^Cfdr being elided VI.
i)-^?! + t?j(VI. i. ii) = f*ras* + *m(VII,

The necessity of maintaining this order will
4- 93, 79)=**taffil(VII. 4- 94)appear from the following considerations. The Causative stem of sr? is srrf
the Aorist of which is 3TT^ + ^f 4-^=3^+3?^ ( VI. 4. 51).
Now if reduplica-
4-
4.
first we shall have srr^7 + STq[(I. I. 59 the elided f will be present

purposes of reduplication) and as the penultimate is short already, the
form will be 3Tr?*??t, which with the augment s? will be 3? + vnfe&i = STr^fq;
tion took place

for the
11
This
is
a correct form, so far as
it
goes; but
when the augment
connection with the negative m, the form will be
form however
is
*T3T3. *Tl5?il
with a short
st,
m *rers* smî
is
elided in
tne correct
which can be formed
if
we
and then reduplicate, as STT^+3T^~ST^+ST^=STf^+*T^=stfar^,

which with the augment s?, will be sn?q[ H In fact, though the reduplication
of the second syllable (VI. I. 2) is a nitya rule, because it applies even where
a penultimate is shortened and where not, yet the rule about shortening takes
effect first, because the author has himself indicated this, by making the root
shorten
first
Bk. VII. Ch. IV
Aorist Shortening.
i]
1457
have an indicatory m In the Dhatupatha (See VII. 4. 2 about i^flft verbs).

For had the reduplication taken place first in the case of arn* (Bhu. 482), as
^tfan* there would be no long vowel to be shortened, and there would be no
frof
necessity of the prohibition (VII.
Why
Obj:
do we say
Causatives only (See
f%
U>
and
>j<t
ar) d fa"
which
Had
none of which have any vowel
The
substitute
not *T^q[
substitute,
But that
instead.
Similarly,
II
the penultimate and
in
is
cf&L
would have meant,
it
we have
is 3;,
tS
There-
+ for + ^nM-q^w + f +.
which would be shortened,
and there
not the case.
have come the
would
We
have
Aorist of the Causative of
the
in
formed of
should be shortened'.
-qiF follows,
Aorist of the Causative of,
srrf.
is
sutra *(W* T>rr*ir %& would have been
proposed, then
the sutra been, as
debarring Vriddhi and
Aorist
only exceptions being the simple roots
here the penultimate with regard to *nF
SS^
The *t^
the Causative'?
penultimate when
is
the
fore in
?q[
'in
48), the
I.
have already short upadha.
enough. Ans.
'that
III.
4. 2).
s*{#r?wq;
$r,
and
we
shall
have $r + f + *T^, and grrr being shortened we have * + f + sr?T, so that we

cannot add the augment 5^ (VII. 3. 36), and form 3T^fa<T<t " And the
forms like srftT*r?fc (<T^+ \ -i-rq[) would not at all admit of shortening.
Why do we say when ^F follows ? Observe ^nwlt, 9H3ir^ where there

no shortening in the Present Tense. Why do we say of the penultimate?
Observe ST*T3>nFST?J from g?nrar and {qq|**ff<l from ^rsg-, where the penultimate
being a consonant, there can be no shortening. Had the word penultimate
been not used, the vowels of these would be shortened. And the word 'upadha'
is
is
4,
also absolutely necessary for the sake of the subsequent sutras like
and
taken
it
on the maxim *m Hl*M*TR %T
place,
qualifies
I.
The
Aorist of the
Thus
even.
snffaSft
prevent
(sT T^frn?0,
it
rule of shortening of
STOTr^mnO
( = ^TlWFrf
shortening,
will
11
Here
11
the
T^rfr
*rr
when
4.
H[Hl q r<l
which
penultimate applies to the

e.
11
to the double Causative
<m^%T
*ft"ri
has
present vartika
*r,
sro,
Otherwise
II
the elided %
being
lost
makes
sfrfa, stt^,
^gqqrar ?^t t mft
affix, in
it is
i.
the stem
The
The shortening
before the causative
take place,
+ 3T^
or because
sTjfrf^rmjfFrr *n%sfcr?rTf
2.
not be shortened.
5TTjTrfa5rre*i%rro
ff%:
^FT
s^Prf^rsfa
Causative of the Causative
+ f + Wt=*r + f + 3T?t=?rnC +
will
1 1.
67.
I.
Vdrt\
T3?
prevents shortening in the above case, which would have otherwise
*rft
sthanivat,
simple-vowel
it
so however.
3j%tto
ii
11
of the penultimate of the stem,
the reduplicated-Aorist, does not
a (Denominative) stem, which
has lost
AorIst Shortening.
1458
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
a simple (end vowel of the Nominal-stem), before the Causative
and also not, when

has an indicatory 55
sign
it is
verb 5TO;, or a root which
the
11
The word sr*^rf^ means literally a

pratyahara
stem, in which a simple vowel
or a portion containing an 3?a^ vowel has been dropped.
st3(
As
the
vowels of Denominative stems are so elided before the Causative sign
final
pr, the sutra has
*U<H*IU^> 3TcMUr3f^ = STSTTTH R|
*TTrT*?t
a simple
vowel alone
sra*
TMW W<t; STT=

Where
V&SffSWl F5PTT*l3*S^F^
Thus
been translated accordingly.

*> I
'rT^r
So
not apply
is
dropped, as
in
fTUând
HT^, and sr^Nf?r from
frf?
See
(I
But where an
r^pr^, there
1.
21
and
*nr *ra *r*
ST^cRWH
?pt sfcr *ffo <tfr faRrsrreffPri
The shortening
3.
bhntj,
As
vowel plus
(I
bhsls,
*ff**3fit or
ftq?l or srff^TfC
25.
II
q^n%
II
*m
W5T,
H
<*r
*rf3<rerar
n&t
^^pm^niu
of the penultimate of the Cau-
sative stem, in the reduplicated Aorist,
ing:
3T^?
the sthanivad-bhava does
III.
^^WÎ^M<fiNdV<AMl^W^d<l;<J|4i
3TP*, 3ta, *ffa, tfte, JlvSIH,
ff*r. h
not being then
*rr
I. 1. 57 ), hence the necessity of employing the term

srn^rfq^ in
Similarly *T*reTTtf^ with
and st*SPT?t from *f?> T*Rir*r?l from
m*
the sutra.
of
that SRsrf^l could be spared from the sutra, since
the sthanivad-bhava would prevent shortening.
a consonant
srr
the elided srf
there
elided, as in the case of *rn*f,
is
being sthanivat, would prevent the shortening, the

considered penultimate.
3f*T*rR?j=
is
optional in the follow-
bh&sh, dip, jiv, mil and pid.

3W*r*?|, Tsft*W or swrrar^, srfYw* or
sTsftf^nr?!:
ww*,
r#or arnr^taq; 3T*ftfa^ or 3rmfn7q[ srftftTfi or srfrfr?^ 11

,
The Dhatupatha
is
reads *r^r ( Bhu. 194 ) and ^Hf ( Bh. 655 ).

The indicatory
unnecessary and not countenanced by Panini, as shown in this sutra. Had
they been m&n, they would have been governed by the
Vdtt
r^r^r^r ot
flftw*
:-The words
sjttpt,
STSfhW*?!*
STHT?^,
II
II
ti^fft
The penultimate
of^rr 'to drink' is
*rercrn*<i or
$Tr<T<l or 3TfT<l[
frr. fasf%Trer$*Tren?qr
4.
srffctjrqr,
II
is
srftrv^,
*?**nri or
II
sht*, nfaV., |^,
^r, sr yfr i
m^r
II
vowel, in the Causative stem
elided in the Aorist,
Reduplicate there
aphorism.
should be enumerated: as
^rffy HT%, %fr, <*fft
*r*fNr<*?i ^tott?* or
last
and
substituted long
II
for the
vowel of the
Bk. VII. Ch. IV
SHOrt
. 8. ]
^ SUBSTITUTE.
As<n + f*T + 8T?J=<TrS + f + BT?l(VII.

Tf|( VII.
)~T^+3T*(
4.
When
cqfrrr, ST *fluHi H
3-
the penultimate
is
wrr
VII.
4.
elided,
4).
there remains
cannot be reduplicated as having no vowel, but the elided

sthanivat and thus qr
is
Sutra VII.
reduplicated.
cation the principle that the substitutes caused

*-t-fbr
= vrrft;
*Tr=$
by sthainvad-bhava.
Short %
4.
by
3TT
is
q^
which
considered as
80 establishes by implir6r
are sthanivat.
not be reduplicated, but g, as
in reduplicating, this HT will
5.
4- 5* ) = ** +
Thus info**, *Ttft-
37) = TTa + Tl( VI.
59)-4Nl*(
1.
I.
1459
Thus
fvrrfr,
substituted for the penultimate vowel
is
of the Causative stem of îr in the Aorist.

The form is thus evolved.
Thus 3rmf9<Ti, TOireKH*, and srmfg^
=
VII.
wt + wj; ( VI. 4. 51 ) = farartT*
+ ^+3??*=*^+* + 3T<* (
3. 36 )
II
(VII.
4- 5 )
= mr&cTfi
faa Wi
11
11
q^rR
11
firem:,
11
err
11
Short * is optionally substituted for the penultimate vowel of the Causative stem of STT in the Aorist.
As arf^rfSTTft or 3rf3TST<Tft srntf^TrTPI. or STf^TSTTrTr* STf^ffH^ or arf^T^
ThusWT + f^ + 9Tfj;=irr^+f + 3T?t( VII. 3. 36 J-fav + f + Wl (VII. 4. 6 ) = flr*+
When f is not substituted,3rris shortened by VI 1.4.1.
T?J(VI.4. Si)=ftrflw?l
6.
II
II
ts<*
ffrr.
ii
vs
II
<*m%
II
<% ^fTT^rar
s:,
II
Short 5
7.
^pt
II
*R*m **tt% ^r TOtraw *r*n%

is
11
optionally substituted for the penul-
timate 5 and 3C of a Causative stem, in the reduplicated

Aorist.
sn(VII. 3. 86), and sn^(VII. 2. 114)

srf^f^^from |?^(Chur in): s^^qr (VII. 3. 86), or 3T#|rr?l STWnfct (VII. 2. 1 14) or spftrsnt
Though the
$ 9*^ and srr^ substitutes are antaranga operations, they are prohibited by
This debars the f? (VII.

substitutes. Thus stnT^rrfft (VI I.
101),
3.
101) or
r.
11
the express text of this sutra.
^:
the
of
sjt?t
shows
that,
The
short ^t
is
substituted
as in r*ft?sr<t (VIII.
2. 77).
even
In
for
a long
fact, this
substitute does not take place after the operations of f^, srr^ and sr^ substi-
tutions have taken
of
all
effect,
but
it
is
form which suspends' the operation
those rules.
fam 3^fer
19
11
<
11
q^rft
11
fasm,
^fa
Guna.
1460
Short 35
8.
j.
u]
invariably substituted in the Veda,
is
penultimate 3 or
for the
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
of a Causative stem, in the Redu-
9FT
plicated Aorist.
As srCrf^,
âfeftr fefe
Sfan
9.
As
ion)
are
by
ftiteraTroff
T^:?fr
is
ftfh
f^,
and arfrf^
<^rft
ll
^>
*ro%
fcfri feft
substituted for
are ft**T?r,
to be taken, and not
is
Perfect
f%fT
ll
TOftaf^ for*
ii
*T*tf *mr*
The
ST*C f^farc H
^ (^q^),
root
the Perfect.
in
to protect
(Bhu.
'
'to give' (Bhu. 510), for that root forms
arri (Periphrastic Perfect) as taught in III.
The
37.
I.
its
substitute
debars reduplication.
sEcnsr
ffrr:
11
^r^mrôr:
sjt^rrereresrjfra
10.
?o
11
q^n%
<resr:
11
11
root ending in short 55, and preceded by
a conjunct consonant, gets
As
^cr;, ^, *pfftT-3Tr^:, ^nr:
II
Wrrrtofr >rem for*
from
Guna
S*^,
in the Perfect.
*^
from f, sreresj:, *PSP&: from *% tl

Observe fsrrera^, f%rerg:
Why do we say
This sutra ordains
beginning with a conjunct consonant'? Observe qreFg:, *T^
Guna where there was prohibition by I. 2. 5 read with I. 1. 5. But this does
not debar the Vriddhi caused by 0^ (VII. 1. 115),. In fact, that prior rule
Why
srre*3-, *Tre$:
do we say ending
*f,
in
ll
supersedes this posterior
rule, as *rreiT,
Sm,
STCTTC
ll
The word
II
supplied in the sutra, the rule does not apply to Nishtha &c, as
Vtirt\
is
in the
%^^13-, STT^TC: HSee VI.

a root
is first
develop
is
to be
For the sake of &a, the guna should be stated even where
double-consonant
1
fafc
^:, ^TCP*
penultimate position and not

I.
135.
On the maxim
*rrg:
in the
beginning.
OTFPTg*^
As
<PST5<rata
developed fully and then the preposition is added to it'; we

by reduplication, which gives us
+ arg*T then
in the Perfect
the
first
we
add the preposition as ^^-f-arj:, then we add g^ though the reduplicate

intervenes, by VI. 1. 136 and 137, as ^rcfH-arg now the root assumes a form
in which the penultimate begins with a double consonant, and applying the
vartika we make guna, and get ^H*g:
:,
ll
It is
by
this consideration
that in $T*$*ffc, Wfjtsfter, the
g? augment
being Bahiranga and consequently considered as non-existent (asiddha), there

is no {* augment added by VII. 2. 43.
Mi^K*J6 dm;
fT%:
II
11
5fc5%?3fTO
ll
Î^TTO
irn%
ll
gpî?r, 55, gprn*
*RTFTf ** f%ft 'TOT
QW
11
H^rt
II
VII. Ch. IV.
13
Shortening.
1461
IBk.
There
11.
guna
is
m^,
R ^R?*:, R 1R*3:, fa ir*T5:
^Rtt<|:,
in the penultimate,
ordains
and
it
mt:, *TR: fi'om m, Mid

^bqt not having a light vowel
srre,
ii
^ never received guna, but |T
The Vfiddhi of VII.
guna.
would not have received guna by VII.
roots in long
it;
from
sirs? %*$i
n *T
l f f
*rr
TcrrM
11
R ^SRPC
In
may
to protect' (IX. 19) the vowel
sutra
own
its
juris-
it
11
injure' (IX. 18)
51, 'to
this
?j, t, srn*, g*<r:, *rr,
11
^tr^r* fafa Tc?fr *r gstr >tcr
12.
?*
11
86,
3.
substitution; this ordains
115 supersedes this rule, within
2.
diction, a prior superseding the posterior: as f*rRiTC,
f far
of 95^5, zs and
in the Perfect
roots ending in long 3*.

As STTT^, 3TR S^: 3?r$: from
(IX. 23) and
'to tear'
optionally be shortened
in the Perfect.
As
by shortening or
pr'sps^f:
abhyasalopa (VI.
by guna, which prevents
fa WETC^:,
fj
and
126) fa *Pf: or RsreUv, faf*: or fa*^:, fa?*: or fa***;

or R<TT*$r:, RTg: or fa q^: II
is the word 'short' made optional
4.
Why
ppTJTrj:
and not the word
in the sutra,
'guna'; for in the absence of guna, the long
would have become * before 9T<J: by ipirror and we would have got the forms
The word 'short' is used in the
fa^pSR/-, RSRT: by the regular rules of Gandhi'?
:>
sutra, in order to
Jlf
fafs*!J
and ^T
examples would have been with
above forms
'
tsn
to cook
VIII.
2.
77) as FTlJ^:
&c
like fa 5PSg:, fatf^p,
and
JT 'to abuse',
',
jit
senses, besides those assigned to

SIT
with the
*T
meanings of
will give the
affix |R?j
is
this sutra
is
unnecessary.
can be regularly obtained from
to
fill
'
them in
and 9 "
"5fT
101) as ftir%*rj:
1.
the
The
roots
and as the roots have many other

the Dhatupatha, the roots srr, yr and
If that
11
were
so,
the form
fawj^R
we shoutd have either faSTCHR from

but never fa^P^R
So the rule about shorten-
nom
W root
it
necessary.
ftsun
f nrs
5T, *,
'
Some say
II
the sutra been
fT (VII.
could not be formed, for
root or frcrRRR.
ing
Had
debar the $r and ^r alternatives.
^r"the alternative
^rr%
11
11
srt,
ft,
% *r?R <rewr s% ^fr w?r
ii
Before the
13.
it
affix 5T,
the preceding
arr,
% and 3?
are shortened.
As
Observe
SHUT,
*TR{T,
(VII.
$im
3.
diversity, with the affix

sutra,
that
the
ztfi
is
rule
47)
sj
does not
governed by
tyayana would
i^n^T, f^frrRff,
The words *n?ff, mm

added to
this
and
*r
apply
rule,
to
Un
1 1 1.
affix
^pr
*rr (
the
though
confine this rule to the
Br5I^?5^r H
Why wr,
f and
are irregular being formed
it
Taddhita
40
ByHhe
3;
only?
by Unadi
following
therefore
implies
has the anubandha
n H Ka-
^>,
it
and not the
krit
of the
Shortening.
1462
Unadi, as
I
fr%!
but Unadi words are not derivatives (TTT^rs&gtTOflft
an d hence no necessity of reading Taddhita into the
^^
frfllfH )i
3T
*ren", **raH;
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
ii
II
^TR
*, *>fa,
II
*rera <r*^r s*fr s*#r
t *rm
17.
ffrf^T-
sutra.
II
11
But before the sam&santa affix FT^ coming

Bahuvrihi compounds, the ariir vowels are not shortened.
14.
after
As
by
1.2.
For had there been upasarjana shortening

would be
present sutra would not be useless, for it will

no shortening of the upasarjana by I. 2. 48: namely
is
before non-feminine affixes, as jj^nq irr^r
feminine
The
Ans.
affixes.
48), the present sutra
The
Obj.
where there
find scope
(I. 2.
Therefore, the very existence of this sutra debars every
useless.
sort of shortening.
Because the
affix.
The shortening ordained
^ffirrffar:, *5t*ttf*:,JrfTi9i:, jgdlHfi*"
48 even does not operate when ^jt follows.
shortening of
affix 37^ will first
I.
but there should be shortening in

2.
48
not take place before
will
member
be added to the second
in
sir^
the
sense of the compound, and then the word so ending in s^r will be compound-
ed with the
feminine
now
first
one ending
aireM<H
II
affix
are given.
sr^f,
is
H*m
<TC*r ^fr
Guna
st^tchc^t**
affix.
11
is
not short-
is
*g*in*ref:
II
II
substituted for the vowel of the root,
in the roots
*rewi f Jjs^rsgrc^
ending
in
sgor
sir,
* j *rors*tt w., vimn >*mi> srwi
r^ means the Aorist-character

It also is
the krit-affix
The word ar^q:

3TSK?*
as well as
||
As
The
^frq:,
^5^5^:, Y^ma*: or
^"frrTRT %*T stf^
before the affix
in
11
a|<5|*|*: or
16.
in
11
Optionally the feminine stem in
*rgr
which ends
left
48, does not apply, because the pratipadika
<Trrft
ll
11
15.
fprT-
I. 2.
no pr&tipadika
is
the affix srv and not in a feminine
in
WH w
ened before
As
So there
and therefore
affix,
left is
member.
from
fr
3***%*H*f
is
?vs n
III. 3.
104
).
of which
3?^ Aorist formed from
(III. 1..56).
ll
sr^ by VI.
^rft
1.
57.
s^q%:, 5^,
sr^rani, st?*t^
11
which the above examples
a?^. of
||
fi
by
we have
III.
1.
59.
^ srcr
ll
The word
Bk. VII. CH. IV.
22
OT7JI
3T^ (anwSO gets the
The stem
17.
before this Aorist srf
11
See
The
18.
III.
wren, *:
<ttt^t
11
46 3
augment
II
As srrw^, sm^r*. sttwl
wmr.
52.
i.
11
3T is
in the
fig-
sr^ Aorist.
As 3T^t,
affix,
there
%k
q^r:
ff%:
ii
II
<nrcff$*
?^
q^r
ll
w.,
II
3ttt% ^resn^ tto:
3**
stem and the
sr of the
by VI.
2.
97.
See
III.
1.
bt
of the
58.
II
11
The augment
19.
the root
As
For the
sp^ll
3T^rrr^,
the single substitute of the last
is
is
<r
added
vowel of
after the
in the st^- Aorist.
qra;
sm* 9TTJKTPI STTTF* Tne TO takes

indicatory m in the Dhatupatha (III.
55).
stwrc r n q?rrft H *^ ^*
,
ll
the 9T^ Aorist as
it
has an
1.
11
^TtT:
II
11
?r%T$f^ BTf^
<T*<T
WW
înT%
II
The augment T
20.
is
added
after the 3T of
in
the a^F- Aorist.
As
tfte:
fvrv
ii
spfhrgr, 3TfrsnTr*
Hrirarg%
##rsj^
^rr^rrg%
II
See
î^hl
*?
q^rfsr H sfw:, *rren*rg#r,
<re<fr
ll
*?mt
g*fr
sfr,
(I. 4. 5;,
in the sutra
apply to
ff*r
52.
gon
ll
there
is
substituted guna,
(I. 2.
4)
affix (I II. 4. 115).
and would not have caused

The word tfr^ is read
they do so by virtue of the present sutra.
with the anubardha
nw W$
3TW
11
1.
a Sarvadh&tuka affix follows.

As %%, *tRlT%, ?m, but ftj^t before the ardhadhatuka
Though these sarvadhatuka affixes were fyw

guna
III.
11
For the vowel of
21.
when
?jar:
as
Wrr, snwm
ft ^fefir
^rcrit
^;flrf?r
ll
rot
F,
in
q^nft
ll
order to indicate that the rule does not
"
ll
snrf
fa,
^fefa,
*ft#rjf**raf^^rWr >rem
<rcr:
ll
11
Before an affix beginning with
*r and having
an indicatory fF or y, there is substituted snr for the $ of sft
As q&fa with n^, sirspwra with n^, roc* and TTO1 with wjj which
22.
||
being the substitute of 9OT
where the
affix
is
is
f^?H
II
s^r (neither f^ffitor
^q^mf^r^ 3^r.
II
*3
But
f&Z)
i^r
fa*ii
where the
affix
is
ff,
^ ^mht, sw,
3;^%.
11
and
%H*
Lengthening.
1464
The
23.
short
a Preposition precedes
is
Bk. VII Ch. IV.
substituted for the
and an
it,
3;
of
^ when
beginning with
affix
26
sr
with
an indicatory q? or ^ follows.
As *rgsi%, *n35J%, ST5T, 3TJ?I%,
But 3^% without Preposition.

3T*35T H
do we say of 3J3? Observe *pfh?T%
Why do we say 'before q'? Observe
Why do we say having indicatory a? or ^ ? Observe 3T*-ff?T: witn
*T*rrfrT'Tn
Why
arq[
II
Of course
II
the shortening takes place of
being understood here from VII.

as
3TT
37SI%
ti
II
R**
TTTFT
II
II
fr^Fwrenrfs'TO* fafw
The
24.
stem 5
short
by which a long would have been

4.
3T^r^r%ârrg^Tff:
11
BT^rarn: BTsnwg^sjrrc:
25.
sf:
or
^, when
Thus
according to
and
cfrgjEKT
III. 4.
16).
'RTrirer,
III.
11
long
^x vifa
I.
But
This
also.
But
f^Tcr. without
Therefore
and
this
fpep
11
a Preposition.
of 5
not
will
11
$\h,
11
11
substituted for the final vowel of
is
*r
having an indica-
and ^^r^rT with the Denominative affix cRl^

^freft and *%*&{ with the Passive 337, ^^raw
18.
subsequent
1.
form
11
11
sârjrr in
And
71).
the antecedent
rule,
f*H|3?n
of the Potential are sarvadhatuka.

sutra, so there
l*
not either a Krit or a Sarwadh&fcuka affix.
it is
H*5ira%,
12
when
an exception to the following sutra
is
substituted.
the Benedictive (See
sjfjcsjand jjgsu where tne affix Harris krit, and
been debarred (VI.
^r
sn\
11
in the Benedictive,
with the Intensive v&, and ^farând
lengthened by
formed by
vowel, the word bt^t
assumes the form
<^n% zf&i, ^vrrgw:,

^ a&rrfrr Tiwrsr^riwjFTO ii*ft *m%
^x
II
<rc?fr
the stem, before an affix beginning with a

tory
^m
it
substituted for the vowel of the
understood here
is
13)
is
be shortened, as STT-l-n!R[=ipir^, STTOT^
ff^r:
(or
II
^fefa
augment m^
(*!%) before the
sp5 (VII.
RT%
<*&:,
ssKrcrft
a Preposition precedes it.

As sf^rrT, srre3r<T,3Tf^rarrr
The
and not when
^r$j%, OTftft H
Q^T&fe
ff^r:
4. 13),
and
g^nr
The phrase
had the vowel been
5^ augment
would have
where the Personal endings
eRf^frT
is
understood
in
this
no lengtl. erring before non-kit and non-hit affixes,as,SW, WJ3r,

under VII. 1. 39.
is
H t \%
f^rsra
11
<*?nft
TOr^Rrror^
26.
^r,
ll
11
H$\ H^rW
long
is
substituted for the final vowel of the
stem, before the Adverbial affix ff (V.
4.
50).
Bk. VII. CH. IV.
As &ft
GUNA.
29]
nw% sH'r
^rrr
u=*ft
^fa,
14^5
<?
3*um, i rh*,
ti^rt
The
draws in the anuvritti of the phrase 'non-krit, and non-sarvadhatuka' from the
which though not
last sutra,
for the
sake
of
*te3pr:
II
any
<>f
See VII.
subsequent ones.
*v3
q^TI%
||
27.
direct use in
3^:
tf^,
II
4.
aphorism,
this
is
32 for words ending
necessary
in 3?
II
II
substituted for the final short 55 of a
r is
stem, before an affix beginning with
when
not a Krit
nor a Sarvadhatuka affix, and before the adverbial affix fat
The anuvritti off^rfar is, however, not understood in this sutra that
*r,
it is
II
of
and ^fj^wnj^TOf:
-eft
(III.
f%^
1.
11
(IV.
3.
by VI.
8), *THft3>r,
The
f^7?l
79),
which
and
I. II-
nrsftafrT
^,
> ^zfctf with
with <&**
iipfhcr:
farJ*T*rrT
with
= fq^n
II
^5
q^rft
11
For the
Observe %5ffr^, from

from f and rr n
Passive-character
$ f%^nr, with q^,
fasffaeSMf
fi^,
II
sr,
*T% f^f
final short sg of
sr
is
sub-
before the
(sr)>
and before the augment
zt,
II
a root, there
before the Present-character
ft,
and
understood here, we have
do we say short
and ff^T lengthening.
28.
(III.
rnfraf?r
thus formed f7f-i-?rq;=f^fr + ^ = f^r-! -^ (f being elided
is
rif 5r*rn%<^j
stituted
^^
fir^ not being
Why
4. 148).
5C?TTT *TTWr
Wr^
Thus
present.
is
with
*ro;
in
the
Benedictive.
The word
*jrg% U
Lin
fafe in the aphorism
affix
is
by the phrase q^ Hjfr ar^rfnot a Sarvadhatuka, is neces-
qualified
which begins with a 3 and
is
augment c^sr of the Benedictive. Thus ^j ajr fys[% and 3TT f%f^ (the a[
comes by VI. 4. 77). qar-fanrcr, f^?%
This short
R^-firarfi and n^r?I
R debars the long ft of the last. The word non-Sarvadhatuka being undersarily the
II
stood, the rule does

4.
22)
not apply to the Potential, as flrwT n The fa (VII.

also, therefore when the Benedictive affix does not
understood here
is
begin with ^, the rule does not apply, as

gaftfrr^ftiTral-:
ff%:
sfaf
11
^t%
<rc<fr,
11
2rf% f^fr
fofe
root 3
II
w*
*%
w^
qîf*
II
11
Guna
(srfrr),
and
is
in
*jur:,
^sft-g-
11
3rf%, ^fnTr^t:
?&s c^r^srraT^^r u
^ ^^Rr^T^^T^rpFi
29.
II
%tf\z,
jpu
h^tt
II
sranTrfr^rr^FnTrJrTRr
substituted for the final 55 in the
those roots ending in
55,
in
which
Guna
1466
the
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
30.
preceded by a conjunct consonant, when the

or the Benedictive augment qT^ follows.
TO1
rter *t*t
The words 3tT.
?ifo
and far? are understood
Thus
impossible.
^r as its anuvritti is
stIr, srapj;.
here.
r^
Not so the word
and ftWt^
This
ll
is
an exception to I. r. 5. In *j f***R and sn^RTT^ (VI. I. 135), there is no

Guna, either because in *$ the augment w is considered as Bahiranga and
therefore asiddha, or because it is considered as no part of (or non-attached
to] 5, and therefore w$ is not a root beginning with a conjunct consonant.
See however VII. 4. 10, where in forming -^f*<^:, *%> is considered as a root
beginning with a conjunct consonant. See also Mahabhashya on VI. 1. 135.
The
fa
with
(VIL
22 ,
4-
is
therefore not here tftfs, sftffe
the Benedictive affix must begin
The word non-sarvadhatuka
is
also
understood here, the rule does not apply to the Potential, as ff^, there is lu
substitution of sap, reduplication, then there is f substitution in the reduplicate
by VII.
ffrT:
i!
4. 77,
sfr
m? by VI.
then
t T^fr ^r#
the vowel
is
*r?f?r
11
substituted
for the final ?
of the
and
in those roots, ending in short sg, in which

preceded by a conjunct consonant, when the
(ri%)
3jr
*romf?w 3% *pn
Guna
30.
root
4. 78.
is
Intensive character
*T3?
follows.
The root s^ takes Gf according to

<*ut*H flW'W, sp^r, ÛH*M
we have 3^-1-31 = 3?$
with
Guna
III.
Sutra
1.22,
under
By VI.
a Vartika
reduplicated,
is
in
spite
member
of
the
prohibition
in VI. 1.
1. 2, the second
As
11
11
3,
for
according to Patanjali ? followed by 3
is
not governed by that prohibi-
So we have w&, and according to VII.

we have sr^, and by VII. 4. 83, we get sm4
tion.
I.
1.
the
4. 60,
This
^
is
is
dropped, and
an exception to
5.
Vdrt
In the Intensive of S^'to
kill',
Eft
is
substituted for
9^ as %tfrara
11
with a long f had it been with a short f, that might also have
The
been lengthened by VII. 4. 25. Not doing so, however, indicates the existence
substitute
of the
maxim
is
q'î
is
taught
is
formed from
in jt is
M^ft v^ ^WNH "A
rule
is
not universally valid,
denoted by a technical term
*=ro*[
place here before the
".
is
anitya,
through
when
that which
this that
*^to^:
Guna taught by VI. 4. 146, does not take

Taddhita affix aer^, in as much as that rule VI. 4. 146, is
because the
taught by employing the technical term rp\that rule
It is
and we have IT?
11
in
sfnTT instead of 3TKt^, hence

:
15k.
VII. Ch. IV.
Why
means
f
35
Long
i u
1467
to kill
'
m*m:
11
\\
roots
and
srr
As
^rf?r
11
Long
31.
\3tt
3^T ^T
3*
II
11
by VII.
f ar,
11
>aft:,
II
substituted
is
The long f
4. 25,
<TTn%
II
Long
32.
As
*fti%
11
3T*T, 'ft,
II
is
is
for the
II
for the final
substituted
affix
^ w*r
or
and
^r ^ni u
q<^Nildwi^w i*NiWi
*renr
11
Long
^r^tnf^T,
*rfare,
*\\$mfa
This
ll
separating of this aphorism from
is
the preceding,
is
for the
of the subsequent aphorism.
sra^nir^T^HTr sgsnftmuHii's
ii
of
srr
11
Asg^rfare,
*t*ptt:,
of
stt
fe^ (V. 4. 50).

<srjt ^r^rfrr
I is substituted for the final st or

stem, before the Denominative affix ^q^;
a Nominal
The
ll
11
11
srram
vowel of the
the
sake of the subsequent sutra,
u# ^rerm, sj$" *^nr, SI# ff< h ^^ nui*f,

^ 33 n ^rft ^rr%, ^,
33.
4. 25.
for
given the same forms also.
a Nominal stem, before the Adverbial
ff^r:
it
in the Intensive.
Vsrraw, %e*?ra%
short f would have,
^%*.
Observe ^ffM ^rT where
'
to do.
g3^T, fq^ror,
^^r vrara s srcrrre R'n?^
*i%;%,
ll
ll
^rf^
ll
srsprnr,
sake
^^
11
srcrrra
f^prr fqrrmr *t
fir^n^
11
The Denominative roots sumw, t^t and

irregularly formed, when they respectively mean to
34.
vnrnr are
be hungry
',
'
to be thirsty \ 'to be greedy*.
Thus sr^TTrarer from sr^PT-l-^r^, 3TT instead of f the other form being
T3R?3T<f who is not hungry at the time, but wishes to get food for some future
occasion, and therefore when not meaning 'to be hungry'; ^*nfiir 'he is thirsty',
3*^ being substituted for sf^f in any other sense we have grf^fam, who wants
water for purposes of bathing &c. spTTCffiT be is greedy'; in any other sense,
*FTn?f*r who is poor, and therefore wishes to get riches.
;
'
sr^^Tq^rer
ffrr:
11
^TfrRrH
gr^fsr frra
II
II
3X
q^rft
II
S*WfiWWT|#*JWI^
3T^n^HTRnT
*T,
^TO,
3T,
<?|*4|
||
wN 13^ *& ^^
^rfPlWL H
In the Veda, the above rules causing lengthening, or the substitution of long I for the final vowel of
the stem, do not apply, except in the case of 3^r
35.
II
20
Kyach
146S
Thus
affix.
wm-
*mW', %^X f^TTft
FfcT^,
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
But
s^rfanT.,
gsm?
(Rig
39
55.
VI L
96. 4).
Vdrt\
See
should be rather stated 3^ and the rest:

the affix 3 H
It
III. 2. 170, for
^Êtr%or^f <Wh f^TRT

***jfa", ft<T<rcrfcr,
ll
\*
q^rfo
II
It
as
^RfanTrs^:
11
5^3:, stf^*^:, %-
II
la the Veda 5^3,
36.
scfoureg,
fq*qfa and
ft^njfir
are irregularly formed.
As
I^
arfNnrr
(yfWmnT, here
JTf^^r^
substituted for f*r
sr^rr^^n^
* isT^frr with
*q% added
ll
sro,
for ffe
(f^prs
11
ll
In the Yeda, long
and
to gs), yf^nn^ ff<r*rar
fT^f?T=l^M^
Rq^^=Ref^R ftT* substituted

t^t^ aw, ststft, srn*,
3^
ll
11
the affix
substituted for jftv\ similarly).
II
37.
final of 3?*^
is
sjt
is
substituted for the
before the Denominative
^r^
||
As ST^ra^r T^^. (Rig
VII. 32. 23), *TT **TT fSJT 3T^T^ 1%^ 11 This

words do not lengthen their vowel in the Veda before
VII. 4. 35. See Vartika to III. 1. 8. The word srerj
also indicates that other
*VF*
as taught in
occurs in Rig
120. 7,
I.
^r^srer%r%
27
Long
38.
3.
3F;re%
\*
11
<r^rr*
it
3?t is
11
^r*fr:, *^fa,
to%,
ll
and
giT before the Denominative ^q-în Yajush Kathaka.

As ^raJtfr S^TTr:
^rf^sprra M&%'>
<srr.
?^m1
gffHRTT
do we say
in
the
Why
in
Kathaka ?
the Yajus ? Observe

Observe uasR^TTSnri if
II
ITtT: u s&ft 3T*rc
^^TT
Why
ll
is
h^
sRf^r Rr^ ir
^fr
Veda, the final of mfk, sreix
<j^r s&îrcjjrci *rht
<re<?r
In the Rig
39.
dropped before the Denominative srt^
As
efjssFrr:
the Rig Veda).
U*R*r:
(not in the
jrT.3rctHtfaf?cr
and
t)
Rig Veda), st^M^: (not
in
this case
(not in this connection in the Rig. Veda).
ire
The
examples given above are of Kas*ika according to Pro. Bohtlingk none

of them are from the Rig Veda. The following are given by Bhattoji Dikshita
in his Siddhanta Kaumudi:^ o-for Fff%ST ^RrnSt* (Rig I. 96. 2).3rarJ?rT ItJTFnns.
:
(Rig X. 41.
3),
ym*ti $r^3*
11
Bk. VII. Cn. IV.
^frfi
11
42]
and
s^^jfRrft^rprWr *pift rT^nr^r r%T% ff?ro <re?r h

Short j is substituted for the final of
:
before a f%?f affix
PjffrPJP*; ST*rf*PT
ot
snr
ttpW* u
^^J
Observe
iiiakwrereqro
11
affix
with tr and
f^TrPTP*., all
beginning with
11
11
with
tr^rf*
11
and
Why
sro^Pjrr
s^^'^^fre^nrrWr
11
h^t%
$*lr?w spr ptciptpt TOarat

Kdrikdi^pmrw *P?r tt?
8T?n%rPrP*, fKT
and
PTcTSPt;
Observe srefra
before q[?
ffcTtf:
Why
II
aiwrenr^TO
top
sit, ^t:,
rranrrft fafipj JTsra
II
11
11
fairer
Short %
41.
and ^r
3TT (5ft)
(^r),
As
fsrftRT
^STrt, STT^rcPJPJ.
ifairnt "^ srffcfa:
pj>rr3;% *nrrep
an
The
The
beginning with
affix
s^F*?r, sTCfesTSP*. or r*-
always takes the f when it means a vow

as *ff$n?T
rule of this sutra thus becomes a vyavasthita vibha-
$TT
WPJT>P
^RPTSPP
sha.
Other examples of such vyavasthita vibhasha are to be found
where
srPJT
and
past participles are formed with
srror
cnly employed in names as ?rcr<P &c, and never
both forms are valid:
^ and
37 H
or ptopjpl ptpjpttp* or ptstppjp*
II
^ftpRTJ
optionally substituted for the final of
is
before
2. 56,
^f, *ft,
and having an
II
As m$r{ and
*tjtp
an
^rr, before
indicatory
and
1469
ri% t*rnt Tr *?tt
40.
jtt
Substitution.
f*
similarly
by VIII.
2.
^m,
rT
or
or,
in
VIII.
but
n"cT is
while in denoting action
21, ira
and
it?:
are both formed,
when poison is
indicated
optionally both when an action is meant.
Similarly by III. 1. 143,
iTPj and it? are formed, but rr?: is only used when
a crocodile' is meant, and
planet is indicated. Similarly the addition
*T?: alone is employed when a
but
it?*
alone
is
used when
neck
'
is
meant, and
it
alone
'
'
'
of the Present Participle affix
when
ff?T is
added, as ^PrT
?frT
ET
T^R%,
and STPT^ under

pfrfrt% STPTfcT
In
II
III. 2. 126, is
all
debarred
the above examples,
the option though taught generically, should be limited to specific cases

also in the examples
T?rreP
'a window', and nrsSTI. 'cow's eye '(VI.
1.
as
123)
and 3ftRT3RP
In short, we should limit a general vibhasha to a vyavasthitavibhasha, on the maxim ^trafcrarwrar f^TPTP* f%SP*
II
II
*>*&ft:
ff^r:
11
*\
^wrwjfw
x&tfk
\\
II
*p*r&:, fe :
$?npnw w?r q*hKilr rait% jtcto top
42.
beginning with
ft
is
substituted for
^ and having an
vir
(^rfcr) before an
indicatory
s>
II
affix
Gnu Declension.
i'47o
As
f^p, ftswt, fl^r
5T^T%^ for
II
II
3T^RT:, <*, fe>
f^tn
f|c?rr
ft is substituted for ^r (3TCT%) before sp^rr

The rule does not apply to
crss ^?Tr TTrr
f|m *rgfrr
44.
ft
TT^r% BFtftr f%q% ^TJTSra <THP
v*
11
3T?RftffS* f^TPTr
II
11
^fa
fimrNT
ff%:
II
There we have ?r^r
II
46
II
43.
As
11
^fa
II
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
II
for %j before p5TT
substituted
iu the Chhandas.
As
The long
or fr^TT also.
ff?^r srfft STrP^r,
f of VI.
4.
62 does not take
place also as a Vedic irregularity.
^f^^r^^^%crf^î%^nT
j?to<t, ftnsr, fireta,
gfacr, *^fe<r,
Of these
the affix
Sg. of
sjr,
there
Atmanepada
q^rre
ll
fforfarar,
gfor, sngfa<r, %-
II
are formed from the root
sprfatT
As
II
irir jtrtt
^rrw (-^rrem)
%TT*raT
fa<TO.
fa^
no reduplication, as f^s^ otpc>tc?
is
ll
Vedic forms are irregularly formed,

t%* and fe#r
five, gr%<T,
^ffa ( = *Slf^r)>
fT*%
%\
five
^gfarT and
preceded by 5,
and %*T
t?j,
II
11
These
45.
^r
1st Per. Sg.
of
**r,
1^
the regular form being
with
vjt
a 5fm)> TST^T-
Imperative 2nd Per,
is
fvj^frfl is
11
tjrcffa
Benedictive
ll
T-, W, ^
T5 *' H *
sr f^r^ 5^ff^f7^ tftsrarrît wW tT^rnrtf ferra Jrafo tctp
ff%j
For ^T, when it is a Ghu (I. 1. 20), there
46.
is substituted ^5 before a fi^ affix beginning with ^
ft
II
ll
ll
11
ii
II
As
^tHR,
and the long f is by VI.
î
in
to cut
'
*r,
^T:,
and a^^nr
',
tfrP
II
4. 66.
3*3T
Why of ^r?
Why when it
from %<i
Observe
is
" to cleanse
a
'.
\ft*P,
^TrT^T^
Ghu ? Observe
The substitute
according to an Ishtu
Kdrikd: rTT^f fPTt fn*% &N% ^r#T fr^T f*TS?T TO*
*trt frer to JmH** *rr%s *r* *ftw?i sn^tr* 11
If the substitute be $* ending in *, then it would
from
$nr
is
arf|
ij*;
from
3^ ending
lengthening taught in VI.

as
'
in
<j',
in
order to
make
(N. B.
124.
the vowel of the Preposition
ends
is
3-
is
The
sCitra sf^T
require
lengthened before a substitute of
this objection
applicable,
fr
which
That sutra however
capable of another interpretation).
If the substitute be
ending in 5;
would
changed
be
to ^ by VIII. 2. 42: as in f*r^ + cT =
^
the substitute be ?ti ending in vj, then by VIII. 2. 40; the
would be changed to tf
Hence the substitute is *?r
If
then the Nishtha

fas?
ll
Nishtha
If
*T
the
should be interpreted
ll
11
Bk. VII. Cm. IV.
Ghu Declension.
48]
however, the sutra VI.
3.
may
substitute
be
124,
is
interpreted as "the vowel of a preposition
substitute of $r which begins with
lengthened before a
is
1471
Even
any harm.
also without
then
",
the apprehended sând ^substitutions will not take place, on the
$vj,
The
and r^tT
following are exceptions to VII.
Or
II
The word
f%rf, JTrt
sra ttottttP
uarfft^rf^sr
11
vs
II
is
beginning with
affix
precedes
**
I.
4. 57.
shows that
also are valid.
q^n%
II
aw:, ^*rcmr^,
ll
former
s3r<rcrtf?r
47.
&c
See
The word
pradatta only.
BTlff^refar qualifies
maxim
47, sr^? tT, f*JrT, W*1, 9*^T, ^T^FHT
the words sn" &c, here are not Upasargas.
regular forms bt^tT,
<m%^*
4.
the
the substitute be f or
if
<r:
II
11
ghu ^r before a far**

when a Preposition ending in a vowel
substituted for the

cT,
it.
The examples under the present sutra are q-^t, 3t?tT, s^tT, qfor
For the lengthening see VI. 3. 124. Why do we say 'ending in a vowel'?
Observe Rfa*5fro H Why after an Upasarga only"? Observe *fa TO*
'
HJ ^rfl
II
Why
the ?r called
67, the substitute
r.
Ghu
The word aîrr*
Ob/.
I.
'
replace the whole
q[
in
'
Observe ST^rt
the sutra
is
&s
from
$tr n
the Ablative case, and
in
should replace only the first letter of
*r,
by
how does
it
Ans The word st^T- is to be repeated in the sutra, one srq-: being
the Ablative case and qualifying TreTm*, a "d the other
st*P being in the
Genitive case, showing the sthanin to be 3TT, as "after an Upasarga
ending in
a vowel, q[ is substituted for the vowel of <jr ". Or the word
srw may be read
into this sutra from VII. 4. 32. Or
*q*pTfaT consists of three tfs, the substitute
being tT, and being a substitute of more than one letter, it replaces the whole
of
In the following sutra srcrnr, the srqr: in the Ablative
ST (I. 1. 55).
case is
understood, and therefore fj[ replaces only ^ 11
in
Vdrt : After a Preposition ending
when $ would have been
(ft
),
As
STTrni, sTtT* ^ftf?t

3T<ffr
frT?
ii
fir
II
and
?fhf *fNr
1
q^r
ll
3T ?^rf^rjfî H^nrft
48.
is
II
in a vowel,
substituted otherwise for
is
substituted for $r
its final
by VII.
4. 40.
II
artr:,
m:
II
sp^ 'tot^t ?wro*TrWr
*rert
11
substituted for the final of the stem T^
before a case-ending beginning with
II
r 472
Elision.
As sr^gfR,
3TRT:, 3T^?:
Veda,
the
In
Why
II
beginning with a
substituted
is
?j
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
before
becomes
HPET
by VI.
HIST
49.
the
sr<rg
of
final
meaning
<j
s^r, srstf^rrwr:
s^sh"
53
11
m*l,
pr
rrft
The
63.
1.
substituted
is
Observe
*??
for
m*w from the root
from ^-hst^+st^; meaning *TTWT%nrorf

*rsrr
*rr*r and *q-*T, as wqftr:, ^rPrf^:, irf^frer
word
*r,
the final
for
of a root
before an Ardhadh&tuka affix beginning with ** n

As ?rcTOfrr, sr^ûrf, f%^?^rf%, fspsr^rer H Why do we say 'when ending
Why do we say 'beginning with *r'? Observe qrq-:,
in g-'? Observe ^^f?T
ll
qm'.
1
Why
11
to cover
trreresfT^fr.
SfrT
11
Observe
arret, 3re%,
ô
II
^t^r^
<rr%^rr
q^rfa
ll
srstfrcrtr
The
50.
srara
rrrc^^fr.,
11
final
As
?g;
not changed to
II
%
q-
The
As
it is
?mc (See VI. 4. in).

be no example of st*t
II
ft,
^fir n
11
X^
srcrcsfr:
and $w
11
of the
elided before an affix
is
1 1
i,and
In
4. 111.
the sr and
^ by the present
is
a finite verb
sutra,so
hence the
in.
3.
II
sr^; is
dropped before an
II
T^WR:
there that a
The w
II
^ beginning
of s?^
affix
'
to be
'
is
can follow
elided
it.
in
Thus
According to the reading of Padamanjari, there can

11
8jrc3t3* o r
^ft
11
T JT^ffn-T,
*:, *tfar
^rcrWr
For the
sr*K**(
52.
11
(the character
See VI.
ll
^ of ^rra; and
5J7tTk:, ar^^rrm",
Sffrfrcr,
the Perfect, because
^frT:
See VIII.
beginning with a t
affix
',
remains, which however here
<T3TT%
II
51.
*T
both of st*t have been elided, the sr by VI. 4.
ft <%
sit'
ll
SRtTu%, 3TtmT, **fl%, s^fa
that the mere suffix
sfrr:
of ^tb;
'
*T, is
'to
*rera u
r*r<fr
second Future) and that of 3T^ to ê
beginning with
fT
from srnr
both Adadi roots.
'
an ardhadhatuka
*nrra
?ac
^f^WWr^
11
<?rlr
im-
11
of cTR* and sr^ there
before the personal-ending
*s
is
substituted
II
See VI. 4. in. The $ substitution

does not take place before the Personal ending q^ (III. 4. 8), as injrarfr
The reason of this is that the q referred to in this sutra, is that <r which can
As
come
after
wffi%,
*tt*J.
and
^m%
from sr^
and that very q should also come
after srar
11
The q
that can
Bk. VII. Cn. IV
come
after rrnr
Long
55l
the 1st Person singular
is
Others say,
Person singular.
tfT^T^tft^T^^ft:
beginning with
Thus
>Bnf
TfTOTI. H
w,
*rr%?rra
The long
srer,
11
*ft
andvMfr
to, t^t K,
Why
before
is
k^V
fP^t,
falls
II
before an affix
and rrasn^ before 3 srr#f*FJ, *n~f or f ? Observe srnrpaR* and

11
sr,
a sutra%fsrw, for n^TOT: would have been enough.
is
wn,
to;
mt fkmw* fprw
TO;
of the Perfect 3rd
q-
srfctq nr*, 3Tr^t^r%,
i in ^r
this
|WTO:,
fir,
II
final of $v4t
11
and not
ll
V*
^n%
li
*rft,
*fr,
*r,
3,
jft,
KTf
substituted for the root-vowel of
when the Desiderative

(S), ***, arc, she, q^ and
beginning with ^ (i. e. not taking the augment %) follows.
and
and
tt
H73
11
even sarvadhatuka, and therefore not here
q^TFT
II
% or $
STpnftrT
54,
5T
this
rfmT^vr^vr^T^qcr^m^r to;
*rfa
**r,
5j
srnfttar
srnfNfa and
X3
II
The
53.
>3rr
The
( Kryadi 4 ), and f*Rn%

( fa of Svadi 4 ) for ft
by VI. 4. 16 Thus ft*cn<t, srnr^rRr
The *rr denotes all
which assume the form m, on the maxim Tr*trfF sf3<j|sff%%q-; " The
TT or fr when they are employed in Grammar denote both the original
*ft
includes ifNnH
assumes the form

the roots
terms
nr,
roots nr, Tr and $r
ift
ll
and also the roots which are changed to
rr,
and ^r" U
Thus frore, 3TT fro^ " 5 I?^n%, faThey are m and ms JflR, and ?HF JTHTfR"
rRr;^*r-nRÔT,^-snf^rr, *r** fimfa, <r?t fcrarftr, qgrnfro^ u in the
1
ll
roots that end in a vowel, the
of ?*îs changed to
the roots that end in a consonant, this
The
reduplication falls by VII.
Why
*t is
and in
q[ by VII. 4. 49,
dropped, according to VIII. 2. 29.
4. 58.
do we say 'when the Desiderative follows'?
here from
is understood
The word
when the Desiderative takes
VII.
4.
49,
the augment ??, as
SO'
qTrm%
jt
tionally takes f under the vartika rTRqf^f^r^rg<T^3r?Pl
Vdrt
The \
when the sense

the sense
is
is
?r
comes
sTT^^f^mfac
'
ll
X^
ll
'
^rârfrT
If
ll
Here
qjj
op-
ll
after the root-vowel of *ni in the Desiderative,
that of to injure.
that of to injure
Observe
the rule will not apply-
As
srfa
Observe srrK
*nnfir n stt*,
K^frf
trarrcr
fr*r,
ll
Why
11
f^vrni, fee
ll
do we say when
Reduplicate Elision
H74
For the vowel of the
55.
there
is
when
it
cation
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
roots
58
and 55^
stpt, g"fa
substituted long before the ^j[ of the Desiderative,
begins with *T
Thus sn<3( iim% ?PT tft**rf?r, se*f*srrar
II
dropped by VII.
(I.
I.
In the Causative stem
The
*.>
redupli-
two
dropped by purva-vipratishedha (the prior debarring the
subsequent) according to VI. 4. 51, and f substituted for 9T according to the
present sutra. The word *r^ is to be read into the sutra, otherwise srnrctfq'
is
vowels, the f
pr
4. 58.
there are
j^fq-
is
II
The
*r^
^ i.e*
must begin with
wrfffasffa
The
II
should not take the f? augment, as in
m\
roots %fi and
Hr*TTf2|<?fw,
by
are optionally %<r in the Desiderative
VII. 2.49.
*TWT %*Z
^Ttt*.
II
q^rf^
II
*rc* s^reiw
11
II
3T*:, TO,
w% "ron^ta str
II
tot
the
For
vowel of the root %vn there
56.
sffirerfr
11
is
substi-
tuted % as well as before the ^r: of the Desiderative, when it

begins with ^
As vft^rref or factf fa
But n$T*H$rrT before the %?^
The redupliII
II
11
falls off
cation
by VII.
g^Ts^sF^r
ffxr:
g*fr
s*fts?R*forcu
ii
57.
Guna
is
4. 58.
err
II
fjtnr ^rr *reiT
q^rft
II
srfa
When g^
g^r:, srafo^sr, g*r: *r.
ll
^routf t^-'
II
11
has an Intransitive signification,
vowel before the anit
its
^R[ of the Desiderative.
By
I. 2.
10, after
The
does not cause Guna.

33STCT %<&'*
S^rf:
11
when
it
*TOW
II
present sutra ordains
In the Transitive there
becomes Intransitive when
5^
The
expresses a mere action.
are
^rthRraw
58.
tances
VII.
a root ending in a consonant, the
ll
X^
The
mentioned
ll
1371%
ll
spj.
is
optionally.
like
fcfiri
As
tffeT%
or
has a Reflexive significance, or
snr, ^tq:,
is
elided
by VII.
arwrcro
4. 58.
11
dropped under the circumsthe foregoing sutras VII. 4. 54 to

is
4. 57.
The' examples are given under the above-mentioned sutras.
word
and
one form only, as gg$n% ?*$
reduplication
reduplicate
in
it
is
it
'
of the reduplicate
sutras upto the
'
STORT^
end of the chapter.
to be substituted',
is
The
to be supplied in all the subsequent
Thus
SCitra
we must supply the words
VII.
'
4. 59,
says
'a short
for the reduplicate
'
to
is
com-
&k. VI
Ch. IV
I.
plete the sense
60.
as |frf^lW,
that the reduplication
not actually
Reduplicate.
M3
Thus ^-Aorist
11
The word ar*T in the sutra

when an affix is treated like
not to be elided,
is
is
14 /
treated like
reduplication will not be dropped there
*p*by VII.
^teT^
as srePTq ^,
word
st^t here indicates that the whole of the reduplicate
only
its final
not valid, where what
5W
? far
is
VUL
q^TT%
^fr H?r?ram*3
II
II
93
*PJ.but
;
Some
is
but the
say the
dropped, and not
"The
11
place of only the final letter of that which

is
indicates
Others elide the whole of the reduplicate on the maxim

rule I. 1. 52, by which a substitute should take the
letter.
*?R*farrs%rS5?TfaFvT:
is
4.
is
exhibited in the Genitive case,
exhibited in the Genitive

||
|^r:
meaningless
is
'\
||
11
11
*rrf%^*
mik^H.
sr^r^sFTHT
^n* qfa **Ni
11
11
**rft
11
59.
*r
&m**r< ^rorcre* 1
short
is
f*r
^3*
11
substituted for the long vowel of
the reduplicate.
As ffrf^ra, &*tf**Wi ifr%, f#r*r, sriftari, srfnjf<i:
Vdrt
The shortening takes place before affixes other than shr
ii
i.
134).
Before sr^r, the roots
augment st^ added
when added
cause this
*fj,
is
not to be shortened by this rule
and be-
not to be shortened, also indicates that the consonants of the
reduplicate Other than the
first
are also not dropped
So
ZsSTfc $ft:
^tr ^srrf^ Sir.
$ftT 3?>?TRr^ S^rff: Rl^% STTuW^
II
||
II
II
as wsre:, *rar^W,
*Trfr-
II
11
Of the consonants of the
60.
the
(lit*
and % are reduplicated, and the

See VI. 1. 12 Vart. This augment
t?|[
to the reduplicate.
to the reduplicate,
is
er^,
first is
As
only
retained, the remainders are dropped.
3T*t|f,
Jfj^r,
TTr^T, 1<tTS, atr*,
retention of the initial consonant,

reduplicate*
reduplicate,
if
8tT*3s
This rule ordains the
li
any, and elision of the nori-initials in the
vowel as
If thd root begins with a
consonant, in sf< ST*
*!\%>
at^.,
there being no initial
The word $r*rf^: should

among the consonants for
the * will be elided of course.
not be construed as a Genitive Tatpurusha
then in ST$t-r-n**>ST?T
'
first
',
^ only would be elided, and a? retained.

The word
or fa&m here means STTCTTO^
is retained
The word
For had it been a compound, then if it is a KarmaSrsrff: is not a compound.
dharaya, the word snff should stand first if it be a Genitive cpmpound then
the first among compound consonants would be retined and we could not get
the form 3TPTST from srsf. The word abhyasa is to be taken in the sense of jati or
3T5T,
the
'
',
kind,
stands
i.e.
in
first in
21
the jati which
is
collectively called abhyasa, the
respect to abhyasa,
is
retained,*
consonant that
and not the consonant standing
Reduplicate.
1476
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
g.
62
any other portion of it. So that all consonants, where ever they may be
body of an abhyasa, whether in tfee begnning or middle or
end, are dropped, except one with which the abhyasa begins. Thus if the'
abhyasa begins with a simple consonant, it is retained
if it begins with a
and if the consonant or conconjunct consonant, the first is only retained
situate in the
sonants are not in the beginning they are
Others say, the word

of others".
sation
%t*fi
here
appears to be the principal word

secondary, because the injunction
regard
rule
"
the
59 and 60,
sutras
becomes
retained
may
dropped.
means "retention along with the cesliterally the

word Jq": or retention
though
Therefore,
The
to cessation.
Drop every consonant but
all
in
is
is
this sutra,
Or
(2)
(3)
'
(1)
'
the sutras
"
not
first, if
Retain the
there be a
short vowel
The
The
is
consonant "
consonant
f^jS^Sf
"
srrf^ra*
be divided thus
The
"
first
".
but
Or the
The abhyasa
consonant
is>
substituted in the abhyasa*.
consonants of abhy&sa are

first is
first
first
be combined and read thus
may
fact, it is
not with regard to retention, but with
short and also without consonant",

".
yet as a matter of
all
elided
'.
retained.
The sutras 59 and 60 must be joined by sandhi " g$#rs$ttf|3ra<: ", and
then we shall be able to read an elided sr between g^ and f<5, as if it was
compound of *3" and 3T??$ u
:
srsrr:
w.
II
II
Of a
61.
rate
s?
^n%
It
5Tjfr r
reduplicate,
^m
\\
the hard consonants (aspi-
and imaspirate) when preceded by a
sibilant, are
only re-
tained, the other consonants are elided.
As ^r^rfaqfa, from
fchyutir ksharane, frorCTtf,
we say when preceded by a

'
consonants
VArt\
Observe
^rsT
sibilant'?
Observe
qm^
\i
rorfS^T H Why do
Why do we say hard
11
should be said rather, a hard consonant preceded by a
It
hard consonant or a sibilant
is
only retained
and the ?^r consonants are
^HTf^rRr, here 33T becomes 3*^ by the augment ^ (3); in

the reduplicate the *sr should be elided, and ^ retained out of 8r; and not
for the ** represents %, and if this were retained, it
retained and ^ elided
would be qând not sr that would be heard for by VIII. 2. 1, the change of
elided
as in
11
to
is
asiddha
sines:
for the
**
11
purposes of this
q^rfa
it
$#,
%:
rule.
it
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
6$
Reduplicate.
For the Guttural and f of a reduplicate there
62.
substituted a Palatal.
As sr^rc, ^^FT, SW^, ^TTTC, ^F, f^Wl%, srjr
* ractT% 3
<T^nft
*, stsrt:, ^T%
is
II
II
II
The
63.
to
As stfT^rcr *,
make sound (Ad.
have
Why
^ftfrci% H
^*^fer
5f*r
1*
11
^rf^% igV
33, sftfir), nor
do we say
The
64.
As
m*
11
The
^sr^TT:
(Bhu. 999), and not $

(Tud. 108, fra??r)
Of those two, we
^f
^f
II
^,
3*?fa
*r*?r% *$f%
f^rcrerer
?fa
*reft
is
not substituted for the Gut-
in the
11
Veda, when
stttôt^,
sam
bobhfttu,
5 tetikte,
sanishyadat. 9 karikrat,
The word
jrg^
10 kanikradat, 11 bhari-
14 taritratah, 15
drawn
in to this sutra,
is
n^ 3^
this,
by
slu,
with
no
^w augment
irregularity.
force of
q-
of the abhyasa.
fr*Trj is
sari-
ganiganti.
The form
11
II
sj^fjja?, there is
),
ei
sr^n^r or fr m ***
lengthening of the abhyasa and elision of for
the form in
jr^
be a form of
including
there
^^,
is
is
either from the Causative of the root
also
sive
s^%
& panipha-
6 alarshi, 7
srpatam, 16 varivrjat, 17 marmrjya and 18
or
srrc^?* ^f%s5*q;
forms : 1 d&dharti, 2 dardharti, 3
bhrat, 12 davidhvatah, 13 davidyutat,
*raf*r ^r-
In the Veda are found the following eighteen
darclharshi,
is
in the Intensive.
f5*fta* "
#g5 %m=% sr^ arr^^f* %*rm^?t
irregularly reduplicated
qntf%,
II
11
65.
$at, 8
^%
11
otherwise <q#$uft
is
^r vjf%, ^sff%, T^ft, ^njg, aftr%, arsffr,
11
11
grcrsroir
in the Intensive.
here
the Intensive? Observe
Palatal
tural of the reduplicate of
f m:
in
^ri%
11
not substituted for the Gut-
$ (^3%)
$^*sf5?1% f^'ro 3r> Twr*irerei
11
iTn%
is
II
'
II
Palatal
tural of the reduplicate of

1
1477
from
(4)
Imperative, irregularly without guna. Q. There
is
vr
the
in
^>J^f
in the
if
So
it
Inten-
no necessity of
because there would be no guna regularly even under VII.
3.
Reduplicate.
1478
88
Ans. The inclusion of afrwg
the guna
is
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV. 67,
a jfiapaka, indicating that in every other case,
is
not prohibited in the Intensive (nw <g^), as frrWfTST, 3TH?ftf?r (? with

(5 )%f?T^J is from f^s* in the Intensive yan luk, atmanepada is
f? VII. 3-94)
irregular.
Q.
The
read with
12, the ?T3;<$ja7 will
and therefore by pratyaya lakshana rule (I, 1. 62)

be atmanepadi, where is the necessity of
reading this nip.atan ? Ans. The atmanepada nipa\tan is a jfiapaka, that in the
Intensive yan luk the atmanepada affixes are not employed. (6) sr^f$ 1S from
the root s^ ( fqf^ ), in Present, 2nd Person, the ^ pf abhyasa is not elided,
though required by VII. 4. 60, and this f^ is changed to pj irregularly. This
form is found in the 3rd Person also, as w&rfrl
( 7 ) TT T^fTS^ is from
I.
3.
srf^ is
f|r?j[
tfior
with
augment, and
ffl"
5T* affix
is
added to
II
raP,sjaff,
and
in
the
reduplicate
from ^?^ with the Preposition 3^, in the Inten(

) eef%^^
?ft is added.
affix,
being
added in the abhyasa, the root *? is changed
with
luk,
yan
sive
pr
*r
is
q"
not
absolutely
necessary, with other Prepositions
Preposition
The
to
8
is
II
we have
also
this form, as srr *Tft**IT? h
gjfopfj is
from
$ ( mufc
),
in
the
Intensive yan luk, with ^th, in the abhyasa there is no palatal change(VII. 4.62),
and ft is a^ded to the reduplicate. ( 10 ) ^jftrfFjfj from pr*$ in the Aorist with
r^, reduplication,'there is no chutva ( VII. 4. 62 ) of the reduplicate, and the

(11) wffaugment ft is added. In the secular literature, the form is sr^s?^
II
from ^ (f^rfcf) in yan luk with ^w, without % of VII. 4. 76, without jas*tva,
the yan
and ft is added to the reduplicate. (12) vfrtTO* from
( v^*;% ) in
The fa is added to the reduplicate, the
luk, satr, plural number Nominative.
jq[
elided, 5T%vrrr \^rî
w^
from dyut, yan luk with

( 13 ) sf^g*P* is
no vocalisation of the reduplicate, with s? change and ft augment.
(14) rrftWrP from f (^Rr) with glu, satr, genitive singular: and ft added to
abhyasa. ( 15 ) *rfhT?l from *w with slu, s*atr, Accusative with ft added to
E
is
11
Satr, there is
abhyasa.
from
^w
16
with
zmd there
*NTf5T^ from fâ with
f^
Perfect
) ojF5,
s*lu,
5 added
satr
( 17) *{ym
fr augment.
and n added to the root,
and
to abhyasa,
no vfiddhi, because there is no short penultimate now. In fact

VII. 2. 114 is to be qualified by the words s^r from VII. 3. 86. (18) srr T^ftno
Tft?r is from *T* with the Preposition tt, in the Perfect, with s*lu, there is
62
VII.
and
augment
chutva (
4.
?ft is added,
),
iT^rnfttf ?&% H
The word fft in the aphprism indicates that other forms, similar \q
is
p^î
{hese, are also to
be included.
$* n v^xfe ?:, arc*

^^ffrT^r^r^^^r^rWr w?r
sre<* n
tnrt
ii
11
66.
?*? (I. 1.
pf the reduplicate.
As 5jf%, ff^, ^W,
Jn,
the Inten sives VII,
4.
11
11
51)
is
substituted for
pff%, *rft*tf% tTpt?%
The *js
the
elided
or g
by VII.
4- 60.
90 &c, are applied, by which after the substitution of STl,
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
by the present
xim
Rkduplicate.
1479
we apply those sutras and add c[*> ^. f*5R &c: for the maBTq^r ^r^Tifatf%>Jr^*r>Nt "so far as the changes of a redupliconcerned special (apavada) rules do not supersede the
sfltra,
BT^rafa^Tftg
is
syllable are
cative
70
general (utsarga) rules".
^r%^rr*n:, %sT^rn^rq
67.
reduplicate of
itf^rRr
11
root
^r
The
Desiderative of
be vocalised
Quere
verb
cfarafcifrr
26) fa%*J3i%
11
wrer is
which causes reduplica-
affix
^r^ + ^r9r =
*srpTcrfta,
reduplicate
fwj by
2. 8,
I.
D y VI.
the Intensive also by VI.
in
prrf^-^^r-
11
the vocalisation takes place
will get vocalised in its
reduplicate of ct^ will be vocalised before

will
^m hiîh
11
immediately followed by an
it is
in the Perfect.
S3T<J
^1%: ^raft:,
The simple
of
II
There is vocalisation" of the half- vowel of the

and ^jvi (Causative of ^rr)
Therefore not here, ^rfT + ?I^=^rqr5Ki
tion.
^rft
As ft if^rTil, fa ff^rfasKt, fa f^fam, (I. 2.

The Causative of f^ is taken here, and
then only, when
*^
11
15.
I.
^TOffo
by VI.
I.
15,
and therefore the
The
reduplicate
19.
1.
Does the reduplicate of the Desiderative of the Denominative
get vocalised or not.
writ F%fe
*^
II
There
68.
reduplicate of
As f^r^\
<T3TT%
II
wn^
II
WW,
feft
II
vocalisation of the half- vowel of the
is
in the Perfect.
This ordains the vocalisation of r, which
ftsqtrft, ftsqfift H
otherwise would have been elided as being a non-initial consonant (VII.

4. 60).
The
Perfect
frlr
fnr-
11
vocalisation of
Observe qrsgw^
**n r%T%
es.
11
11
is
prevented by VI.
q^
11
*t3r:,
s<%^ %>*ircr?rTTO ^f v^x &;\%

69.
pf the root 5
(qfa),
1.
37.
w, fofa
fofc <rcr
Why
do we say
in the
II
11
long vowel is substituted in the reduplicate

before a Personal ending of the Perfect,
These are thus formed f + *T3?r = sr + Br5: (^ substituted for % by VI. 4. 81). Then there is reduplication, the a becomes sthanivat
to % by I. 1. 59, and we have f ^ + *r?|: and then by the present rule %q:
Why do we say before a f^[ affix ? Observe fqm, ^firtj
As &$;,
igs
II
11
II
3^T sriVff%:
II
II
WffSTOlt*^**
i^rft
%w
II
*reffi
nr., stt^:,
fafc
II
1480
Reduplicate.
70.
for the initial
long vowel
Bk. VII Ch. IV
substituted in
is
74
the Perfect
of a reduplicate.
This debars the single substitute of the form of the subsequent or-
dained by VI.
Observe
I,
qw*
Thus
97.
and
<rrr*
is
Thus
3T* +
ar<|:
After such a lengthened
71.
there
Why do we say 'the initial'}

= aTf.3T^ l-STg!=3T *^ + **3 ^r **!
9?r? :, arr^J U
3rr?,
II
added the augment 3?
srr
of the reduplicate,
to the short
(j[)
of the root
st
which ends
in a double consonant.
As from ars^ TT 3T3^= arrears**, which with the affixes of the Perfect gives us, sfR^T, BTRJff 3rrc^J'.
From *f$3TRS*r, VRTsrg:, TR5^:
Why do we say containing two consonants ? Observe srr<r, BTT^ ^T^ H
:
II
II
'
'
With regard to 5? augment, s$ is considered like ^, as STPfq^:, 3*F$g'

This proceeds on a vartika to be found under the Pratyahara sutra q* sffa^
The examples of
The vartika is sfprfa ttf^T RTPTI^ sfc?fire srnrftqnro
II
II
mftn are tt*., ScSHWP*

mfircter
fi%:
ii
11
Brfl?^
vs^
q^rre
ll
btr*t!
II
(See VIII.
ll
*njtfhf
11
and of f^RPT are
18)
2.
trarft:,
"st
am (arafrra), comes
the augment
5^
and
*rorr*
ll
ll
^^fr^rrîRrr^^^w 3rr*ror
After the lengthened
72.
sfiSorrn.
(=*;)
srr
1%
11
of the reduplicate of
before the short
st
of the
root in the Perfect.

This applies to a case where the root does not contain a double con-
Thus sq^T, sWTOnr,
sonant
and not to
3T5T
*re%r.
^frr:
11
ll
(Kryadi
q^m
cate of
în
As
*^;,
ii
11
the Perfect.
and wr***"
The word t^j
is
:
.i
T^f
shown
Why
in the
do we say
*T^T%
U ffg*
in the Perfect
ft*T&
V*
11
VS*
II
q^TM
T^TO
ftTOft f*[f$fc
11
'
Observe
sutra in the Active Voice, therefore
This opinion of Kasika, however,
11
not apply to Passive and Reflexive forms
marians
^'
*:
substituted for the vowel of the redupli-
st is
***, srw^ji, *3
the rule will
$%^
11
18)
II
*wwrare*reFrrcfHr *t*ht fof iwr:
73.
gvr^TrT
The rule applies to m.(Svadi

we have srre, STf^:, srrST
*Rfire M
51); there
is
as T3f >^r W*$l ^*"

not endorsed by later Gram-
^*, *r%, RW
iTTT% SÎRTO
II
*tt*l ft<TT?T%
II
VI
fck.
Ch. IV.
I.
Reduplicate.
79
In the Veda S^f'
74.
irregularly
is
formed
4 8f
in
the
Rig.
Perfect.
derived from
It is
IV. 18
*r
Thus
il
fatfttR* otherwise *f*
*?*|* t^fa*
io.
#'*'
This word
f^f^rf
^rpjri
might well have been included
^fr
*j<jt.
vs^
11
Guna
75.
q^rrr%
11
in sutr'a
VH.
f^*** swrnro, ?pn,
11
4.
65,
^$r
11
substituted for the vowel of the re-
is
duplicate, in the Reduplicated Present form
(^)of R^r, fetand
fir ?;
11
Thus %%f%, %^FK. V%f

this sutra, as these three roots
The word
11
sfaprf could
have been spared in
stand at the end of a subdivision, and Rff would
have denoted these three without the word tray&fiam. The word is however
Used here for the sake of the subsequent sutra. Why do we say in the reduplicated Present form
yirftfr
tfrr.
11
11
vss
q^n%
*f*tk,
11
^tt^rt TORPT^rcrC^Tcritft
^(JTTfO an(i
*j,
*t*tr
in
the Perfect.
re
11
sn%
11
In the Reduplicated Present-form of the three
76.
roots
Observe W^Sf
11
(*fa^?X *
is
substituted for the
vowel of the reduplicate.

As
(VI.
fSr*r?%, Ptftn,
here, therefore not in stTff^
Present system
11
a*f%
cate of s$
$r
II
11
and %
As fm%
^frT:
13) ft***
II
The word
II
The
rule
^nr
therefore not in
'
three
'
is
understood
applies in the Reduplicated
II
qirf* n 3t%-nmt41:, ^ II
u
frrfrr f$rrr^nîiKRw h*f%
77.
H is substituted for the vowel of the redupli-
3rf%fWitej
tf%
only
4.
ST^rR
(VI.
^f^t%
11
vsv9
ll
in the
4.
vs*
Reduplicated Present-form.
78) >T*, r%f?f STR*

11
q^n%
11
*i<4H,
S^fo f%q% S^f^TO *& VQkAÛUM^

diversely
II
3^%
*T*r%
ir
Veda, for
the vowel of the reduplicate, in the Reduplicated Present5
78.
is
substituted
in the
form.
Asq-oftfori^ (from ^r), srRrr fW*?> (from **),
(
from
?ep*
),
and f^TR &*?
"5T*RR?j *TRr 3$rc f*R *jRer
f ht-
also
^tr, stsrh, **R?t
ll
vs^
II
11
fcsr
as in
itrt f%r^f?
f*R?$* gRr^
All these three roots belong to Juhotyadi class.
q^n% *?fr, 3RT.

wvfi
^r^r^ror^f^rciWr
*tr
*r*ra:
if
But
11
11
U82
kEDUPLICATE;
79.
substituted for the final short
is
reduplicate in the Desiderative.

As fTT$rr%, fowfe* (VIII. 2; 36* 41)
in the
Desiderative? Observe
&*rcrf?r
ll
Why
'
tfnt ffOT <tt*P
<*
ll
sntfre ^r^T f
11
'
we say
sr
8i.
of the
Why 6a we
say
Observe
"for the st"?
Observe <TT<rNq% the Desiderative of the
II
gqn^ppft
aft:
?frr
a*
msrsrrlr, frrrsfir
Why do
"
qrTHsr
do we say short
Intensive TrT^îr
Hk. VII. CH. IV.
q^rft
ll
Wr ^r
11
art;, j-srtjT-ftf-sti^:
II
Trm^f r>inErfq t^t
*ito ifcnt
11
wow
<rcf
rtfrcfWt *?nft
11
t i$ substituted for the final 3 or 35 of a reduplicate, before a labial, a semivowel and before 3T when
80.
*r
or an follows these consonants, in the Desiderative.
The word f -ar* -f^f is the Locative

compound of those three words* ijijt and
,
4.
106
singular of the samahara dvandvat
The samSsanta affix ^( V^

The word bt - <j{ means
ll
does not come, as these affixes are anitya.
that after which
Thus
is
the letter sr
11
mmr%,
fqmqftwfrf, far*rreroqftf
2. Semi-vowel hra^raRwnr
3nrirr^Rqfrr from the root ^ 11
ftraftrafrcr* ra^fafsrefo fStf*cfi*rcr,
which
from
gets
is
augment in *f*( VII. 2. 74),
**
The word r^WrT
^
substitutions,
but
these
latter being sthanivat
then there is gufla, and Sfi
:
1.
Labial
for reduplication (I.
of
59),
f^qnT^Ûf
present sutra.
qff^f is
1.
is
is
doubled
and
the Desiderative of the Causative of

'to mix',
which
is
for gj there
is
substited f
the Desiderative of the Causative of
^ by
the Causative of this root.

derative of the Causatives of
VII.
2.
The words
&R and
49.
Rrareref^
11
RPH^raqfsr
ft*ref3*FFT
is
is
11
by the
Rnrrefa-
the Desiderative
the Desiderative of
and im\1 fatffa are the Desi-
^TrfrT H
maxim:srff^^T ftfa%"though not the cause of reduplication, the substitute whiGh
This sutra indicates the existence of the following

SffiftJTT
WTPT'ft
*ref?r,
becomes like the original", Thus in HrHrer*reftt we

+
have vrrf^ + *T< from ^+pr ^, here the srnc substitute caused by fa is sthanivat
to gj, otherwise there would be no 3 in the reduplicate to be operated upon
by the present stiitra, See VI. t. 31 also. Why do we say " for the * or 3? " ?
Observe qrT's^, the Desiderative of which will be <rr<TN"<*nT H Why do we say
takes place wlien
"
followed
by a
Padamanjari
vve'say
*
follows,
labial,
it is
when
for
semi-vowel or
sre 5^T
5f
'
wm% from the
Observe Si*
sautra root
these consonants are followed
3?rrefaqfrT,
11
according to
^ffrtffiwft
II
Why do
by an bt'? Observe fwrfa
^^^qft% ^MfdM^Ma^rci^ ^fhrf m
fcr-^^r-î^-^ft-^^^î
ll
*l
ll
q^
^^r-5OTT-
Bk. vii. Cn. iv.
81.
followed by
Thus
or f?rr^fii^f%
^^r^^frf
^, 5\
sr,
or
sr
s^Rrm
fasrMHmM
or ^jsrprpsrrR
mrefajrrr or
letter like
the preceding
3"
R,
*r,
In the preceding aphorism, the semi-vowel
The
The word
therefore, an aprapta-vibhasha.
option of the present

is
3T<f*
understood here
t f*T7f[wwimq n*n H^m n

82.
Guna is substituted for the 5 and g- (with their
a reduplicate, when the Intensive character q^? follows
when it is elided.
nfe 3^f??r
ii
long) of
also
Thus
added in the
and 87).
11
^r^r
^ftalr,
latter
sfhftfrrr.
^fw>
f^rr^TnT
therefore not in fg^TCT, ^J^fflT H
f nrs
and
N^refa'srfrT or
^ &c, intervenes between the semi-vowel and
followed immediately after the 3 of the reduplicate.
also
of the reduplicate, yet the substitution takes place owing to
the express text of this sutra.
is,
3^jw?t
All these are Desideratives of the Causatives of the above roots.
Here though a
sutra
of
c^ and ^j when the semi-vowel
sr,
fatfprfa^fa or fprnrfsrafrr
or
3"
in the Desiderative.
sit
faffreftrsrnT
1483
optionally substituted for the final
is
the reduplicate of
is
Reduplicate.
81]
II
with srf
by VII.
3.
^Tfk
II
94.
II
BTf^rorsrei ^f^f *rera *iw
83.
and W?frf*T with
So
$h,
also qtsgtfrrlr
**{*&:
v^fa "* t^
long vowel
from
37
II
3.
is
94
II
substituted for the
is
The f *
(VII.
st
of the
reduplicate in the Intensive (with expressed or elided 3"^),
when the
catory
sutras.
when
5K
reduplicate receives no
augment having an
indi-
||
The reduplicate receives augments like ;ftf>, 5^ by the following

Why do we say
Thus TTT^rr, and qpHtfrT, SfRTS^ and graÂra
ll
it
gets no
Obj
augment
When
a consonant, and as
lengthening
Ans.
'
Observe 33*3%, wftfrf,
the ^ augment
it
is
<aW*i, i&ftfrl
does not end in a vowel, there will be no occasion for
hence the employment of the term atf^rT
The
ll
added, the reduplicate will end in
employment of
existence of the following
maxim
this
:
is
useless.^
term by the Acharya indicates the
aT^rafW^TrS! 'msrrK fa*TP* *HT%
" so
changes of a reduplicative syllable are concerned, rules which teach

those changes do not supersede one another ". What is the necessity of this
far as
22
Reduplicate.
1484
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
85
indication (jnapaka)? Observe îitcRffi, here the rule of lengthening of this
does not supersede, though
siltra,
VII.
4.
59
so the diphthong
srr is
subsequent,
it is
shortened to
Secondly observe wNtTOfc,

plicate by VII. 4. 79 plus 93, and then
VII.
here ?
4. 82.
this
the rule of shortening in
and
s,
then gunated by
is
it
substituted in the redu-
is
lengthened by VII.
is
4.
94, the
Thirdly observe *ffafa% &c, where in ir^+

ST5* (III. 1.6), the reduplicate is lengthened, but that does not prevent the f
Fourthly observe ST^fmT^, where the f substitute (VII. 4. 97)
of VII. 4. 79.
latter not
superseding the former.
does not supersede the sutra VII.
of the Intensive
following
?r?rfa^%
f5?n^ro?rn; Mtercarar
srcfrr%
The
q5ftaarar
nasal
^rf%^1
II
is
and
and
or
of T^t
is
*sfhfcftfsr,
sr^,
T^rnera"
and
elided in one alternative
q<*, q<z
*r?fte^% and
(*?ftere?RT
^)
and **Ff
^r^frfa
and ^fNrenfsr
T^rnfrfir
by VI.
elided.
added to the reduplicate
rfrar is
**?, sprr,
and ?$t? >=^rm
<i;fr<T?fn%,
T^PrrrefrT
by which the
(with the expressed or elided
sot, #th,
Thus
60,
The augment
84.
4.
),
8^*^%
in the
II
^fr^^r and
^^fter*^ and
-epft
and ersfraRftft
4. 24.
St^*
The augment gw (*)
II
added after the short

of a reduplicate in the Intensive (with or without q"^), when
the root ends in a Nasal.
85.
is
st
As
and
tc4tf%
and rPrpfrrcr ^Jp^m and *lf ?ftfa, qp&Rt and

The augment ^ here should be considered as
rT5rT*J%
II
cause an adesa
is
it
*TrT*frf?T,
is
word,.
unchanged, as
This
iK**m
&c,
it
been
See VIII.
by VIII.
4.
derived by the following
q^,
3.
so,
VIII.
4.
it
is
JX*S%
anusvara, bereplaced; and
could not have been
24).
In 3Srr*m &c, the
58; the other forms <TcPT%

:
anusvara should be treated as
That being
if it
59 applies, and
was
at the
we have
end of a
the anusvara
in rfrRi% &c.
Why
do we say " after a short sr " ? Observe %m*T% M The ^ in *T<*

augment will not be added to a reduplicate which once was
but became short by VII. 4. 59 as from *m 'to be angry', is
*PTTft.
indicates that the

TT
afa*j%,
changed to ^,
Vdrt:
long
in
sfrTORT, "sfanfrfa are
Pada or
Had
remains anusvara.
changed to anusvara
anusvara
by the nature of the sthanin which
indicated
therefore in 33*T%,
?ro*frr%
Bk. VII. CH. IV.
89
REDUPLK
by VII.
(the second lengthening takes place

in a nasal
WTO%
Observe
cates of
3TO, T^ f^T,
3T<t,
without *r^
Thus
and
$?3irf%
that even in
and
q<T>3T?r
and
The
root
and
rostra
^r and
W, and
^snftfsr
is
comes
gsr
'TO
do we say ending
after the redupli-
the Intensive (with or-
II
*v
<E5r
irfifo
q^r,
Similarly *vT3q?t and
nasal.
imfa
showing
WH'iftftr,
last is a sautra root.
q^rrf*
II
fÔT and
exhibited in the sutra as
it is
loses its
This
II
^T^ and snpTTfa
but
$st,
<g%, the root

rq"#f?f
II
^rt-qfi^T:,
The augment
87.
of
Why
4. 83).
)ll
sraretit
II
1485
The augment
86.
vi
11
g*: comes after the reduplicate
without
in the Intensive (with or
Thus T^t% and ^"^TR ''the lengthening ofg>

See the following sutra.
and qtr?rj%
is
q-^r)
by VIII.
II
2.
77) qtppn%
11
'WTK&mi
ffrTJ
II
<T3Tfa
II
^T^R^r^rc^^rrr
11
II
^,
q^q",
rorrcfttft *r?n%
STcT:
a^fu^
II
<rer:
11
For the subsequent 3T (i. e. for the st of the

88.
of
reduplicate), there is substituted g- in the
the
and
not
root
Intensive (with or without *r^) of ^t and <E^||
The examples have been given above, as q- sr?tft, %ps*[n% and q^TR?^ q^jrWhy do we say 'the 3T which stands subsequent to the reduplicate'? The
F5ft%
substitute does not replace the st of the reduplicate.
Why do we say of bt ?
The substitute should not replace the final letter, which it otherwise would
have done by I. I. 52. The q[ in ^f| debars guna (VII. 3. 86) in ^^fir and
,
II
'
'
^^tnr,
is
for
though s
is
lengthened by VIII.
2.
77, in *Tff^, yet that
considered as non-existent or asiddha (VIII.
(VII.
3.
Quere. If the
86).
thening also of VIII.
fa
II
II
2.
yj
UTTfa
89.
g* is
?jr
in
debars guna,
*g:
1) for
lengthening
the purposes of
why should
it
Guna
not debar leng-
II
fa,
II
substituted for the vowel of
before an affix beginning with

Thus
2.
*r
^r and
q&s
II
- -sreat or s^n:), JT^W and
fN?fa*TOW does not apply here, though present.
j^rgjr:
11
The
See VIII.
anuvritti of
2. 55.
q^
Reduplicate.
i486
<c>ZTra^
*rrf%3i*
11
5.0
II
tfq^ sfa
^trs**
The
90.
v^rfa
ll
11
Bk. VII. Cn. IV.
?9w, *nt-;?qvrcr, <*
reduplicate of a root, which has a 5$ in
without q^)
As ?rrf^ and
Vih't:
when
It
q^ follows,
*r#f#rnr, ^ftfgl%
this
vocalisation,
and not penultimate
11
^ î%
11
srirrej*
11
*&&&
in
srftf^^ and
q&
the
taken
and
srfcrfS.
^ and
?ffer,
ll
92.
the
ct^tr
The
is
ft
of
ft*r
come
is
sipr:,
II
after the
only
elided.
?tffam; **f8, *ft*TO,
augment
is
qrftafft
11
The s
in
^w
is
for
II
These have
not elided here.
II
3T lift
reduplicate of a root, which ends in short
3, gets, in the Intensive
and
is
11
in the penultimate,
ltdriMx f%*!% ^"^rTrJrT T^rfrSHT
5[,
*''
Hi^% and HiwTPTrsr: should also be enumerated.
11
*?ttwirui
of the Intensive
âugment, though
spra
where the
the sake of pronunciation, the
Vdrt:
^(V^?ftf?r "
11
The augments
Thus ^fa,
and
*tfrf*frfrr
ll
reduplicate of a root which has a 3
when
t(^%
'a root
^-fc&, <*, r%
qrrr%
^m^rT^? 5fa*Hri% H^^nrtfK
*iT5?PTRrar
91.
?rrf*ftfa,
also.
11
ar^nf? scsT^rjfTO
in the Inten-
which contains a ^':

be of upades*a, or obtained by samprasarana,
augment may come
^finKf
and
should be rather stated
whether
II
so that the
3 F%5
11
11
the penultimate position, gets the augment

sive (with or
92
$.
without
w,
the above augments
rr,
II
Thus
*sf4\f$, *tl*z6lk,
we say which ends

'
and
in a short
m'
and ^rfr?m
Why do
The rule does not apply to roots ending
^tfsjrft, "5T?m, 3Tre?f?f

?
11
The word s^rf: qualifies the

"*rnjrf^, ^rraMr:, ^"ri%d% from
f
word si]f and not the word 3P-3TO", for an abhyasa is always short, so the ? in
1&1 would become meaningless if the word qualified reduplicate. Therefore |
ending in long does not get ft, * and r augments in the reduplicate.
in long q as,
Kdrtkd:
II
He who can conjugate,
in
the Present
tense,
the yan-luk
and of other roots ending in long s^, is considered by me to be

a person who has attained to the right knowledge of the employment of the
Intensive of
Bk. VII. Ch. IV
augments
fr, ft
in
long
rtcRt in the Karika

11
^%*trT
by ancient grammarians.
q-^rr^ is
^frrs
11
Reduplicate.
1487
&c: and he has obtained the right use of words.
The word
ending
93
is
the
is
illustrative of all roots like |
name given
^gKrar^rT
to the
(fe?;f?r)
^^^ form of the Intensive,
means, therefore, a form ending.in yah-luk.
illustrative of ?*? or Present tense.
rssft *m*rert q*#r
^r^^^r^r^ T^re wr
<r*rr-
^'fta 9fro
R**ro
*njf?r
11
In the reduplicated Aorist of the Causative,
93.
when
the reduplicate adapts itself to that of the Desiderative,

the vowel of the root is.light, and the root has not
end-vowel before the Causative affix.
The words
word CTITC means
of this sutra require a
5^
T^ Aorist
of the Causative.
"like unto
treated, so should the
little
or Desiderative";
lost
its
The
detailed explanation.
e.
i.
as the Desiderative
The words
?*i%
and
is
"îff*
are both in the Locative case, but not in apposition with each other, but refer
^q- means
to different objects,
that reduplicate which
is
'when a light
vowel
be performed on such a reduplicate,
in the
erSF
follows',
The
followed by the light root-vowel.
namely
operations to
Aorist, after the fa are the same,
as on the reduplicate of the Desiderative. ST^-3T3x:%q "provided that a simple

read the word 'causavowel of the Pratyahara BT3T has not beed elided ".
We
tive' into this sutra, because there can be no other root which will form
Aorist. Causatives form such Aorist. (III. 1. 48), as well as the simple roots
fKT, ff
is
and W
11
The words sr^'ft qualifies the word srjf understood: that stem which
"^; therefore, it refers to the Causative stem, and not to the
The light vowel, therefore refers, to the light
sri, dru and sru.
followed by
simple roots
7
vowel of the Causative stem before -^s
The word
I.
30).=*T?Kro + * +
=srr3rc+STfl(VI.
ST*rt!?rr% is
ST<l(III.
1.
I-
in
11
apposition with
sC3F<f*;
48) = TSFPl+TH(VI.
ii) = srr^cfTO+3T?t(VII.4.
11
4. 5
Thus siro + fa^ (III.

= ST*?*+ 3T* (VII.4.1)
79 read with VII.
4.
93)
= T^ft-
P*H(VII.4-94>
Thus VII.
of the
of the
4.
79 teaches the substitution of j
for
aq-
The same substitution will take place

Desiderative.
Thus by VII. 4. 80, f
Aorist: as sHta^, srqtT*T?t
the s of the reduplicate
II
in
the Desiderative, the same
reduplicate of the Aorist, as ST*fm?t and sTrsfa^T, and
will
the reduplicate
in
in
the reduplicate
is
substituted
be the case
ajtsfisf^q;
II
in
for
the
Thus by VII.
f is optionally substituted for 3 in the Desiderative reduplicate off &c,

the same will hold good in the Aorist-reduplicate, as Brfaaôr 3T5Pr?f STfture^
4. 81,
Reduplicate.
1488
or
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
93
vr^m^, arfty^
BT^s*T*T^
or srgî, 3Tft333[ or 3*3*^, STFlSfôr 3*33*$, STrîprfl or

do we say 'having a light vowel' ? Observe ar*Trr$nt, BTOSnt,
Why
II
Some
say, that in STfTSfPTt^
san-vat rule would apply

reduplicate
the syllable
light,
cr is
and
therefore, the
vowel no where immediately follows a
for a li^ht
though a long syllable nr intervenes, yet the rule will

This reasoning is wrong. The maxim
therefore,
apply, because of the express text.

iFT snssrctTPT HTwrsrf^sfq' srsRSTPTr^rft
It
cannot be extended to cases
when the intervention

Obj. If so, how do you form
applies only
than one.
consists
like
this.
of one letter and not of
more
arfa-srirrj for
here two letters
intervene between the reduplicate and the light vowel.
($j)
by implication in VII.
had it not been
indicates
reduplicate; for
4.
Ans.
Wand
qr
The author
*t<jt do take f in the

what was the necessity of making an ex-
95 that these roots like
so,
arc, **, *q*T in VII. 4. 95.

So that a conjunct
an intervention for the purposes of this rule.
Therefore, ^f &c would have taken f in the reduplicate by VII. 4. 79, read
with the present sutra, and so the Acharya enjoins ar instead in VII. 4.95 with
ception
in favor
consonant
of roots like **,
not considered
is
regard to these.
Why
use the word
follows without
Why
ftrr,
by"?
follows'?
The
II
rule
do we say 'when an stw vowel has not been dropped'? Observe

gj*i which ends in ST, and this *T is elided by
from the Churadi root
rpcr5ff*ni
VI.
Observe 3Tf <n^

Why do we
would not apply when *%v^ alone
as sro^Pttl where zrh has taken er^ under the vartika fi*T5-
do we say 'when ^r^
m "followed
Obj. This lopa being considered sthanivat, will prevent the appli-
4. 48.
Ans.
cation of the present rule, as there will be an intervention.
We
shall
Here forsr is added to $^

give another example, st^^ from f^lPSarrrrer^
and
the
portion
is elided by y g ^ y rq;, here
fnr
under the Vartika *rqjE?Or%?T^r%,
II
a vowel and a consonant have been elided, and so the lopa
is
not sthanivat.
In the double causative Aorist si#fa?<t the present rule applies, though
one
one
for
for
Mfa?<l - *nfScr^rT snw-STrPTPt

when followed by another for is not considered
has been elided.
refers to the elision of
fNi qfarr$#^
The
ift,
&c
In fact, the elision
II
any other vowel than r"T

Therefore we have spfn^
tns exception rests on the following vartika crcqr^W*II
I" fact
>
lopa of the reduplicate which takes place before
VII.
4.
54
of
as an ak-lopa; the latter
does not, however, take place
alogy does not extend so
far.
In
fact,
the
in
qiF
of the roots
Aorist.
present sutra teaches
The
an-
a ^TTTCPNT,
Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
96
1489
Reduplicate.
namely thefotm which a reduplicate has in Desiderative, will be the form in

But as *ft, *ff &c have no reduplicate form in the Desiderative, the
the Aorist.
analogy stops. Therefore, we shall have 3T*ffa<T?* Moreover the word
^^
Now
^11
here means the operations that depend
of the reduplicate by VII. 4. 54 does not depend upon qâlone, but upon the
augment f$ also of VII. 4. 54. But as there gan be no f*r in the Aorist, so
solely
on
the
total
elision
In fact, an atidesa should be confined to general
there will be no elision also.

cases and not to particulars.
5fpft <ssit:
v*
II
94.
short vowel
Causative,
is
II
<T3TT%
II
#&,
^*V.
II
In the reduplicative syllable, a prosodially
lengthened
in the
Reduplicated Aorist of the
when the vowel of the root
has not lost
its
and the root
is light,
end-vowel before the Causative
fur
II
Thus ST^ffa^, the f( VII. 4. 79) is lengthened. Similarly srsffa:^,

Why do we say which is prosodially light? Observe 3TWWhy do we say when the vowel of the root is light ? Observe STrTrr^Tfj,
Why do we say in the reduplicated Aorist? Observe st$ TT^ H The
H
BTrSto^t) 3TT?T^fl "

srr?j
II
T*T$T?t
word qr
is
sT'TO'Kt H
understood here
also, so the rule will
The words 'anaglope' are to be read
3Tr^yg ^ UTOr^^rerra:
95.
Short
3?
ll
is
V^
not apply to simple roots as
here, therefore not so in 3rqcfi*rq;il
<*?ft%
11
11
sm, ^-^-ctc-sto-srt,
substituted for the vowel of the
reduplicate in the Reduplicated Aorist of the Causative, of the

roots smri, dri, tvar, prath, mracl, stri
and
spaS,
Thus STOW*?*, 3T^?t, 3T<T^?t, STOPT^, 3T*TS??*, 3TrT^T^, 3T7FTST?* H

This debars the f which would have come under VII. 4. 93. The 'short ar
indicates that it is not to be lengthened by VII. 4. 94, as 3Tff^
ll
ftwrr %f%^5fr:
96.
ll
*>*
Short
ll
*i^tt%
a?
is
ll
r%*rr*r, ^ffe,
optionally
%^r:
11
substituted
for
the
vowel of the reduplicate in shj and =#? in the Reduplicated

Aorist of the Causative.
Reduplicate.
1490
Thus
3T^S"q[ or
11
is
shortening of the reduplicate (VII.
there
is
3? substituted in
*t<jt:
ll
^vs
97.
is
ll
.97
In one alternative
srf^g^, acpT^SfJ and 3Tf%%srq;
4. 59), and after such shortening,
there
[Bk. VII. Ch. IV.
the other alternative.
q^TT%
t, ^r, tot:
II
11
In the Reduplicated Aorist of the Causative,
substituted optionally for the vowel of the reduplicate
in nmjl
As
snftTTft or BTWTJj;
11
toi is
a root which ends in
T,
and
this
*t
being elided by VI. 4. 48 before the Causative for, the rule VII. 4. 93, does not
apply to it, because there is an ak-lopa here, so in the other alternative, it has
its
natural sr
ll
Printed at the Tara Printing Works, Benares City.
BOOK
VIII.
THE
ASHTADHYAYI OF
PANINI.
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH,
BY
SRISA
CHANDRA VASU,
B. A.,
Provincial Civil Service, N. W. P.
Published by Sindhu ChAran Bose,

at the Panini
Office,
1898.
(All Eights Reserved.)
TO
on'ble
îr John
<S(tjp,
Jt
<3J.,
LATE CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES
THIS
WORK
is,

AND
IN

JUSTICE
AND OF EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
f tbxtztth
BY HIS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT
THE TRANSLATOR.
3?r^
3T*T
STSTT^TRFT S[SR:
TO
BOOK EIGHTH.
Chapter First.
^3rer
n I H
^tr
From
1.
ii
*r#w,
ii
here up to VIII.
1.
15 inclusive,
supplied always the phrase "the whole word

This
q^j
is
an adhikara sutra.
Whatever
will
is
is
to be
repeated".
be taught hereafter upto
comThus VIII. r. 4. teaches "when the sense is that of 'always',

and 'each'." Here the phrase 'the whole word is repeated' should be supplied
to complete the sense.
sense is
e. "The whole word is repeated when the
that of always and each". What is to be repeated ? That which is most appropriate in sound and sense both. Thus one T^rnr becomes two, as q^n-% T^TH 'he
always cooks'. Similarly 5n% 3Tr% wffas 'every village is beautiful'.
(VIII.
I.
6) exclusive, there the phrase 3T^TO% should be supplied to
plete the sense.
1*.
The
things
Wst
is
no scope.
will find
(ffsaj:)
not be confounded as meaning 'the
sutra 'sarvasya dve', should
word-form sarva
doubled'.
The word
For then
rules likes
as sfororrcf, (2) the totality of
*r$nir^; (3)
is
99,
and VI.
I.
100
modes
(st^TR:)
^faNTPTg: = *%mil-
force of the genitive case.in sarvasya,
e. in the room of the whole of the words like qfc &c there is
So one meaning of the sutra is, that in the room of the one word,
substituted.
In making such substitution, we must have regard to the
that of sthana,
doubling.
two are
1.
In the present
the totality of'members (^pf:), as ^|: qst?*^: H
namely all the members of a word
word sarva has this last sense

are doubled, no portion *is omitted.
The
sutra, the
VI.
sarva has several meanings: (1) the totality of
rule of nearness.
i.
Doubling.
i49 2
Another meaning of the sutra however

titution but repetition or
one word
is
employed twice.
e. is
i.
it
The very word-form,
does not teach subs-
In this sense, of course, there
sarvasya
is
employed
may double
Otherwise, one
srars?rrear,
that
I.
is
That
is
no room
T^rfw &c,
is
to say,
left for
employed
repeated twice or pronounced twice.
The word
only.
is,
employment, not adesa, but prayoga.
finding out the proper substitute.

twice,
Bk. VIII. Ch.
though that rule
only the
last letter of a
sake of distinctness
word by the
rule of
not, strictly speaking, applicable to such cases.
is
The word 7^3 should be employed in the sutra, in order to preSamasa (compound), to taddhitas, and to
vakyas (sentences). Thus *nTTTfs?nT^ H Here there is the sense of vipsa with
regard to seven leaves, and does not mean a tree having seven leaves. There
ought to have been doubling; but it would not take place, if we take the word
Obj.
vent the application of the rule to
padasya
vipsa,
in the
aphorism.
Similarly ff qft^tf ^rr%, here also the sense
is
that of
and there ought to have been doubling, before the affixing of the taddhita
So also in 37% TR" TRftra. the sentence ?rr% TFffa* is not doubled, if we
employ padasya. So the word padasya, should be employed in the sutra.
Moreover, it would prevent our employing the word padasya again in VIII.
affix.
1.
16.
We
could not employ the word padasya in this sutra, for then
become very much restricted. Moreover in the above examples,
there can be no doubling; for ^FTT^ means 'that whose every twig bears seven
Ans.
the rule would
^JWTTR
leaves f^for TO^t

in
the
3TTO/. so that
word sapta or parna.
the sense of vipsa
is
not here inherent
In the case of the taddhita example, there
would be no doubling, because the force of vipsa is there denoted by the

taddhita affix itself, and so doubling is not necessaty. Moreover, a sentence
can never be doubled, because vipsa can take place with regard to a word,
Therefore the word *m$q should not be employed
and not a sentence.
the
in
sutra.
On
the contrary,
if
we employ
the
word padasya
in the sutra,
it
would
We
could not have JTT^tW HMÎ^ f r

upasarga being considered as a separate pada, only Tsrrer would be doubled,
give rise to the following anomalies.
and
jt
added
would
not.
So
to the root 5"^,
we have two forms
also,
and f
the other alternative there
is
is
ft T ^TT
optionally changed to
u
As q and S
and
fteT
II
q by VIII.
Here
h^
is
2.
and
in
77,
are both asiddha (VIII.
doubling would take place without making this
q-
or % substitution.
2.
1),
So
having first doubled the word ( something as ffljTT $ft$j ) then optional
3 change will take place, and we shall get wrong forms, like fr*^ 5t*T, srrsr
in doubling.
While the correct forms are
hybrid doubling as given above. Hence
lf^?! (See VIII.
2.
3 last vartika).
T
fr*T fter, or fr ^T
ft***!",
the
that
or
5t*I^r
and not the
the necessity of the vartika <Hn%vfa*T-
Bk. VIII. Cn.
Doubling of Words
4]
'.
I.
1493
Or the word q% may be considered to be formed by ar^ affix of srtf

meaning
That is, all operations
zftfq ari^flcT ffff^ SPT, rTTO f *nR:
laving been Jitst performed, then the word is doubled; so that a word in its
orrcr**;,
inchoate state
11
not doubled.
is
tT^T <TOTIWcTTt
is
Thus
99, VIII.
in
1.
The
avayava.
cf^T,
II
is
%*
#re
\,
Km
In
VIII.
57,
2.
f^?5 ** \
is pluta.
mw
become
cented.
Thus
That
is
So
denoted.
that the sentences like
valid.
word has become pluta by VIII.
That which
is
called Amredita
is
2.
95.
gravely ac-
g^# g^# tst^j^

;
is, all
the vowels of the amredita
^ becomes
endings are anudatta by VI.
186
the af of this
is
The word TU
f^fr^nft:
11
4.
1.
elided by VI.
udatta-nivrtti-svara (VI.
anudatta.
the
and the word q^: denotes the

by implication, that a Genitive case is
In the above examples, the root
**T,
srraf^T occurs in Sutras VI.
95, VIII. 10. 3 &c.
this sutra indicates
fact,
3.
II
^TrTf^s^R &U, ar^fil^rPT
The word
here denotes avayava-shashthi
In the above examples, the
by
aTT^feaq
twice uttered, the latter word-
**%
employed, when a member (avayava)

*% th
to,
called ftmredita (repeated).
second word being amredita

1.
q^rfr
11
Of that which
2.
form
II
II
is
1.
or accentless.
66: the Personal

1.
and thus >|^r becomes finally acute

The amredita bhunkte becomes wholly
4. Ill,
161).
11
I. 3.
the vikarana ^Ri^gets the acute by III.
formed by the
TTTfa
become anudatta
atmanepadi by
affix 3?
faar, *<*rcfc
The whole word
is
and
is
finally acute.
11
repeated when the sense
is
of 'always' and 'each'.
What words
express 'always'?
words, formed by krit affixes.
What
The
'always'
and the Indeclinable

meant here ? The word 'nitya'
finite verbs,
is
here means 'again and again', and this idea of 'repetition' is the quality of an
action. That action which the agent does principally, without cessation, is called
"nitya".
So
that nitya refers to an action (See III.
cooks continually'.
^<?ffif *i?qRi
4. 22).
'he talks incessantly',
Thus
<r?rrt
T^l%
'he
ig&zi igrvn cnri% or
Doubling of Words.
1494
Bk. VIII Ch.
^nr 5T5n^ 'each one, when he has eaten goes away.' See III. 4. 22.
The affixes ktva and namul formed
S^ftf! ^T??rcrersr ^rrftT (See III. 4. 2).
words and the Imperative mood express the idea of 'again and again', only
Tr"5T
when they
While the words formed with the
are repeated.
sive) express this
idea
Thus
ipr: qj?r
T^frT
by the inherent
TrT3
And when
intensive action
this
done, then this word also should 'be repeated; as qiT5
^ qrT ^
examples have been given of
by
as
nitya,
illustrated
Indeclinable krit words like tj^t, and like nr5T
% 3T
words the
verbs (f%3F
found
is
? It
found
is
nouns
in
express nitya, so inflected nouns
qw
affix
(Inten-
force of the affix, without repetition.
finite
Now
II
continually
is
In the above,
II
verbs like q^frf,
for'^p^rr
In what
11
As
(gq; formed words).
gqQ
express vipsa or a
finite
distri-
What is meant by the word vipsa? It is the wish of the agent

(vyaptum ichchha) an object through and through with a certain
That is, \v\12n many objects are wished to be pervaded by
quality or action.
butive sense.
to pervade
a particular attribute or action simultaneously,
the speaker, with
Thus
wihl
?rr% ^T'fr
3W 3W f^g^RT
When
also wish to
T^farTUqr
'every village
But
beautiful'.
is
So
also
ww%
it is
vipsa.
wffa*
*T*(qft
11
a finite verb
add
is
repeated owing to the idea of nityata
and we
to such a verb the affix denoting comparative or superlative
must be added
degree, such affix

ii
the
after
of a noun, which
in the case
word has been repeated, asjr^r^

is repeated owing to vipsa, the
whole superlative or comparative word should be repeated, as BTr^rRTT^JrT^Tr^^ll
qÂ^
ffar
11
srrfrreT*:
II
<*TTfa
II
qfr^rî ^rc*f 5
11
<rc:,
II
h^f
*%
II
11
r*Wrcs*refa %rt *R*s?nr.
The word
11
repeated when employed in the

sense of 'with the exception or exclusion of.
5.
As
qft
qR
fsr*T%*%
qft: is
ftr^p
(I. 4-
88 and
II. 3.
10) 'It rained
round about
(but with the exclusion of) Trigarta'. Similarly qft<rf* nfn>2T, qrc qft srfe^TMi
do we say when meaning exclusion ? Observe srr^T qfi fo >-4l% H
Why
Vdrt:
Optionally qR, meaning 'exclusion',
not in a compound,
is
no repetition
as,
as qf* qft
r^T^
Tftf^n^ fr^r
of exclusion only here; in
fact,
of exclusion, and not the word
The word qR
fifth
case
by
is
II. 3. II.
3^3^
<TTTiTiJt
or
q-ft
II
occurs
In a compound, there
compound word denotes here
here a Karmapravachaniya
it
the idea
alone.
In qftfq>=erf^ the
II
II
repeated when
because the word qrc has not the meaning
the whole
q-ft
|%*icfc(:
is
q^Tl%
II
word
ST,
is
*3K,
(I. 4.
88),
and governs the
an upasarga.
W,
3**.,
VF$
^TW
II
Bk. VIII. Ch.
I.
6.
Doubling of Words
^C,
rr.
and
1495
are repeated,
doubling, the foot of a verse is completed.

As Jf JTF^r^^rT^ *X^ (Rig VII. 8.4), ^fc^ST
<tcpt^ rossr (Rig
say when
'a
126. 7),
I.
f%
foot of a verse
^53
R,'g
so
9 I 0
-
Why do we
j^^jt PTOr
9).
Observe
verses, for .there alone the Preposition
In
verb.
its
f<sp*ll
IV. 21.
completed thereby'?
is
This rule applies only to the Vedic

be used separate from
**fr sm^rrar (Rig
when by
may
the secular literature, this rule has
no
applicability, as Prepositions are never so used.
3"<?ft, ^tRt,
7.
and
presses uninterrupted nearness.

The word samipya means 'proximity* whether
sTiTft
%-m%
or 3<rgqTC itpts, arwifa
*rrer,
sr^r^r
in
when
it
ex-
time or space.
As
are repeated,
arsre*
tt^ Why do we sa y
'mean-
Why the word is not repeated here

Observe 37K ^^r
*& wrraTrT The relation expressed here is not that of nearness, but
that of above and below.
ing near'?
3<tR RRsfr
Here the doubling
is
in the
sense of vipsa.
R%
3TT^:,
tnr:
11
ll
11
3TnrfNRTOr, 3T^TT, ^TWTRT, 3ffp?, 1^??,

<T3?r*r: <T^*fr *pri*
wri^roreww t top 3T^r
i
8.
II
*=refa ^r<?
^^r **&T?ar-
Vocative, at the beginning of a sentence,
repeated, when envy, praise, anger, blame, or threat
is
is
meant
by the speaker.
collocation of words, expressing one idea,
is
called a
sentence or
Thus (1) envy

m^l^t \ W^tt ^Fh^W ^ srfWT^ ftrfi ?r srrfwcare
*TPTW ^ trr^ 3TPT5;<T^r ^ STPTSCT^ ^fr^TH: *3^r% (3)anger :
(2) praise
ir^T^r 9 *imm srf^ftrr^r 5 srfHhrer ?^r? ?tiw% w&t n (4) blame
rff^t ^
*n%^ atrl?% 3 *fg#? ft^r % ?rr%: (5) Threat^h: %ftr 1 f*n* fq?yf ^ ^f^rre
The first word becomes pluta as well as gets svarita accent,
<3T, SF^f^^rr^ ?^r
by VIII. 2. 103, in the case of the first four; in the case of 'threat', the second
word or the amredita becomes pluta by VIII. 2. 95. Why do v;e say "at the
vakya.
II
ll
11
11
beginning of a sentence"?
is
The Vocative
in the
not to be repeated, as #*;? ^sF^T TPTOJJ
Observe 33rcf33?TP
II
Why
II
middle or the end of a sentence

do we say of a Vocative ?
Why
do we say 'when meaning envy &c\ Observe "^rttT
Doubling of Words.
149 6
some books, the vakya
In
one
finite
II
',
qsfi
P^rT 55
9.
defined as
is
qw^T q^T*ff m*Q )
*3*forac
<**
ffrP
verb
5-
11
q^Tf^
11
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
In the
II
first
example, 37^
*&&:, î^tr%,
11
^^? f^K ^f pfrf^^frt

When 0^7 is repeated,
10.
of words having
collocation
'a
I.
added.
is
g^ n
it is
mem-
treated like a
ber a of Bahuvrihi compound.

The making it a Bahuvrihi is for the sake of eliding the case- affix,
and treating the word as a masculine, even when it refers to a feminine. Thus
q%3tf$Tt TsnT
not qchHcK*
regulated by VI.
by VI.
3.
2.
^ÎfSTT
),
*j?fl%
the case-affix
1.
elided
is
not iM&hqr
by
).
II. 4. 71,
The
accent
This double word TgttR should not however be treated like a
34.
Bahuvrihi for the purposes of the application of the following three
The
sutra
rules,
compound.
bers of a Bahuvrihi
The word
however
qffr^j
( 1 )
mem-
29 by which pronouns are not declined as pronouns when
1.
I.
is
and masculinising
declined like a
is
For sutra I. 1. 29 applies to a compound which is really

Pronoun, as q%^?%
a Bahuvrihi, and not to a word-form which is treated like a Bahuvrihi. The
II
repetition of the
word Bahuvrihi
accent.
Thus by
affliction
the following sutra, a
over something
double-word
is
Here four
daining acute on the
final,
2nd VI.
rule VI.
sion of the other three.
(3)
1.
10
3n*T^r
*r*n%
by
or
?r
when a mental pain
3dr%,
^3*rrTf?T
2.
the
is
)
The
2. 1
first
I.
For
<*TTf*
11
its
w,
*r$,
affix
accent,
in superses-
third rule which does not apply to this
do not get the samasanta

n
retaining
not
223 or-
1.
by which the second member
however regulates the accent,
the rule of samasanta affixing.
member
or
This
II
gets acute on the final, but
172 already mentioned, 4th VIII.
vrihi -vat tr%3?
repeated
is
Thus ^ n
was under-
anuvritti
rules of accent present themselves 1st VI.
becomes anudatta, The
by VIII.
word
its
application of the rule of
treated like a Bahuvrihi, but not for the purposes of accent.
II
2.
(2) The
this.
expressed.
a Bahuvrihi preceded
by VI. 2. 172
so TT or gu
3rd VI.
is
though
in that sutra,
stood from the preceding one; indicates
Thus m^
3T by V. 4.
3^3?, *}
Bahu-
doubled
74.
11
11
word is repeated, an d is treated like a member of Bahuvrihi compound, when a mental distress over some10.
thing
is
expressed.
Thus
ri*\rp
masculine, and
'
T?TTrTr,
gone, gone to
my
affliction
?re^CT, TrfPTTtfnTT in
reasons given in the preceding aphorism
).
',
*{&*&,
the Feminine
The
accent
is
<TfrtqfrT<T* f
not
ifihinl
in
for
governed by VI.
the
the
2. 1.
VIII. Ch.
tK.
I.
12
qn&m^yd^s
S^Ml^rfTTrSSTPt
Doubling of Words.
??
II
t^tr
II
<mKh</j
II
In the following
71
),
to
make
the
the
^535! where the
:
,
member
first
final, for
when
a masculine term even
and to regulate the accent by VI.
42),
3.
to elide the case
is
I.
the
223.
is
affix
word
Thus
member
has lost the case-affix. TJTffr ^2*ft where

treated as a masculine, even when there is a 3 in the penul -
is
timate as ^r?J^^rr^r
the
member
first
refers to a feminine (VI.
T5T5
11
double-word
the
rules,
treated like a Karmadharaya compound.

The reason for making it a Karmadharaya
II. 4.
en*, grafts
II
11.
1497
first
rule re-instates VI.
1.
The word
223.
3. 37 and 42 ); q^qf
Tg7]ff> the accent falls on
223 was debarred by VIII. 1. 3, but the present
See VI.
the rule VI.
tne sake of distinctness, the
STri^f 1S f r
sutra being an adhikara one, would have applied to the subsequent aphorisms,
without even the word uttareshu.
snsft gunrsTFrer
ffrr
srcKrd"
ii
h^t.-
?R
ll
*? snr*3
:
w*f^ u
11 3rr3^
f >T^T fft
ern^ fH^rT fft 3=FJ^1*
II
*rr<>
11
^r
ii
*ffo
II
^ro
11
snirft,
II
<rfe? ^rs*ar
gar-troTO*
^sft
strict
Jrerrc
II
*^*htoi sft^rto
11
*Hfr{cti*
^To
îfa
ll
ô
II
^rr* u
||
^rnfr
3rTwrVrm%^r?^f vr^ ? ft n^f&n

f >T^rT fft ?Fff3T*
flffclRPTfaSR
II
?rr*
rr% f *m %ft ^=^3* u
% >t^t f r% 3^21*
r
?tjmT^rw rft^raf%^^r^r s^<t fft i^k&fi
ft ftT> VTPT f VT^ fft ^TffS^H
^rK^HH ^
3rnft$"ar
ii
ii
ii
I:
^^WW:
II
T^mr t *nrrr
sfixfeift re
An
12.
^^
fft ^T?^ti.*rr*rrcnrw
adjective
when
repeated,
is
11
meant
it is
to
express that the said attribute belongs to a thing only to a

limited degree, and the double
word
is
treated like a
Karma-
dharaya.
The word
'resemblance' here
sranT
:
i.
e.
means both
frT*TFÎ &c.
!
by the person. The

by this sutra. Thus
Why
and 'resemblance'.
',
thing expressing the attribute.

soft",
'difference'
the person or thing resembles but
The
Thus T^qf
sense
is
?,
that the attribute
^srftta*.
is
It
not fully
'tolerably sharp',
affix snrrfa^ (V. 3. 69) also

<T:*Tftta:,
is
^^f
means
like,
:
the
"pretty
not fully possessed
expressing i&m,
is
not debarred
ll
do we say prakare "when denoting somewhat like it"? Observe

Why do we say 'an attributive or adjective
<T5^tT:
'the clever Devadatta'.
word'?
Observe STr^PT^:, a
(
fiery boy',
*rr $rr<tai: 'a
cow-like Bahika'.
Here
Doubling of Words.
i49 8
'agni'
and
Bk. VIII. Ch.
I.
though employed here
'gau' are not naturally adjective words,
12
like
adjectives.
Vdtt:
An
adjective
when denoting
repeated
is
persons
that
things possessing that attribute are to be taken in their due order.
A word denoting more than one
Vdrt:
when
sense,
*T^[qf
i,
e.
TW tf?
*Tr^"
is
repeated without change of
Thus 3TTOJ 3>rT7<mfc?

karshapana to you two':
denotes the limit or extent of the thing.
it
'give a
give only two
masha, a masha out of
masha one
to each.
out of them, the extent of gift
this
karshapana contains
limited to two only.
is
or
Thus g%
many mashas,
This therefore
is
dist-
The words Trfr Tr^ \^ = frWhy do we say when it ex%f|; the *TT^r does not take the dual case here.
Observe 3T**Tr<j ^Prfa^rfc? *s$ym ^p*^ tff ftTr'ff \\%, ?r?*^T
presses the limit' ?
inguishable from the distributive double (vlpsa).
TreT^ft. Here the word
words q^
^W &c. Why
ft,
Vdtt:
does not express
but the qualifying

one'?
Observe
11
In expressing perplexity or
The word ^tt^
limit,
do we say 'denoting more than
h^st htt^f ^f|
arwrj: ^rqT<T<rrfe?
twice.
itself
JTTq"
in the vartika
alarm, a
means
'a
word may be repeated
confused state of mind'.
As
3Wf l^J^r "a snake, a snake, beware, beware'. It is not a necessary

condition that the word should be repeated twice only, but as many times as
STfltffi
one
likes,
meaning
so long as his
Vdrt:
Vdrt:
as,
vr^T^^?Trf| ^Ttff
f^RT gTrfrT'll
In re-iteration the word
See
Vdrt:
As
not manifest.
When intensity or frequency of an action
uttered twice:
*rnr W*(fa
is
is
3rf|i 3Tff
'>
3Tf^-,
%^^(
denoted, the word
is
III. 4. 2.
is doubled; as, g^FT g^Ftf Pprfrf,

HHT
This has also been illustrated under VIII. 1. 4.
III. 4. 22.
The word
See
is
repeated
when
the affix
sr^ follows;
as, rftqzi
^r-
This doubling takes place when the word denotes an imitation

of an inarticulate sound ( V. 4. $7 ) Therefore, not here, fttffar ^TT^,
f 3tar
to plough
Because of this
cfrrjfW, where the affix ^r^ denotes
( V. 4. 58 ).
rlir,
<T<T?T3m
II
'
',
some read the vartika as, ^rf^T 3"i<TO.

The words
and ir?T*I are repeated when a comparative or
Vdrt:
superlative sense is to be denoted as v$ 25 S^RT, st*R srT*T Tsa[%
The com-
restriction,
II
II
parative and superlative affixes are not debarred hereby, as, vî;
T5^
igxqfzft, VfiWrfi
II
Vdrt:
The words ending
superlative), are
in the affixes
doubled when they
in determining or
y^ and ^rpT (comparative and
refer to feminine
nouns and are employed
pondering upon the relative condition of the superiority of
one out of two or many; as 3*Trft*Tr3Tstr, ^frTCr ^rTCT ST^rerssTrTC " Both these are
rich: let us ponder how much is their richness. " *r# 5% STrs^:, ^KfTr effrprr q^nrr-
Bk. VIII. Cn.
wmt
This
11
f.
found
is
Doubling of Words.
15]
in
words other than those ending
f%^ft iTJTSRTsqrTr
Trfrsafr, ft^sft
denoting condition
tfns^rft^HT:
Vdrt:
as sussicTr
Both these are
"
it is
not
in the
rich, let us see
See
I.
compound
treated like a
compound, then the
singular.
) is
also found
is
feminine
what
in
m and
3.
(I
as;snrrft-
as, ?vrrf%Trcr?3r, 3rTT. ^T-
their respective greatness."
is
27) when
I., 2.
<T*r;
where the abstract nouii
In denoting reciprocity of action, the Pronominal
and diversely
like a
This
ll
1499
is
it
is
doubled;
not treated
word is always exhibited in the 'nominative

Thus. 3jJHJR% srrgHTT HT3roi>tT
43, and V. 4. 127.
first
14, III. 3.
"these Brahmanas feed one another."
3Ta?rs;=qrwT
grr^r ^Prafirr
II
3T^tS*lTO
The word 3RT and m are never treated as

a compound, and frft is always so treated. The following are fronrTSiddhanta
Kaumudi:
sntrs^ft, ST^rs*^ *&t( S^rfScT, 3T*frs*rTOTt, ST^fS^rTT s^r3sr%
- 5 rTCrnr^ ^TTsrafirTJl
m^sri^r
SrFjJTr
Magh )
<T^7t
II
In the feminine and neuter, the augment arm.
Vdrt;
second term under the above circumstances,
ally to the
%**#, f^rTt 5H&W:

SWKP,
sTI^"^ *t*ra?f:
fr^ÔT
HmSrT,
m^TTl^
frlTrl^Pm
3T%Sat
*rp5T2m:,?r|Trrcr
^Si^^^^nâ^nH;
%Tw
11
rare
11
%\
%&*$l<*f^&H\ *?<{ 3T^^
is
added option-
spfr
3I^rsaff7*fa
II
sanwt aTSP^T
STr^T^
StSWWfo
II
îfa
11
as,
w^'i
r-|, ft*,
3*f& H
The words 'priya' and 'sukha'" are repeated opwhen they mean "easily, without any difficulty".
13.
tionally,
The word %?e% means

difficulty or sorrow,
SSrfa,
9R ^rRT =
i.
e.
'difficulty
pleasantly'.
a*fa?JlF*ft
pleasure, without feeling
it
*fc* TrarsN
as a trouble.
3T?^ means 'without

f^N^T ^rPf, g^S^R **tffr, or fif*<*
and sorrow',
Thus
mfit
Why
Observe fa: 5^: "beloved son". *#r
easily"?
?rere% ^^t?t^h:
T^^^rrr *f
y*
11
That is, he gives with

H
do we say "when meaning
<tttt n srrr *%, isjt *roq: n
i%Tr?T% u
14.
The word
t^rq-sro: is irregularly
formed
in the
sense of "respectively, fitly, properly".

What is one's own nature, and whatever is natural to one, that is called
In this sense is formed *tanHk tnere bein 2 doubling and neuter
t&m
As snCTS sft TO*tf WrW*=*qT***rr* "all obIt is an Indeclinable.
gender.
^?<?f 5 *wratf =
their respective nature".
to
according
known
been
ll
jects
have
Z*iZK,
r%&, wg&Q ^*,
^c^m,
m m^r **H ^nr *if%5
Doubling of Words.
1500
15.
sense of
in the
I.
17
The word "dvandvam" is irregularly formed,

'secret/, and when it expresses a 'limit', 'a
'employing in a sacrificial
separation*,
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
and 'mani-
vessel*,
festation*.
The word $?$ is formed from rf by doubling it, changing the first ^ inand the second f into 3?
The word 5^ itself means *$ro or secret;
while it marks 'limit' igffr &c only secondarily, by context of the sentence,
to 3jn,
11
Thus $?f T^SRT 'they are consulting some secret'. Limit or qzfrcieMW:, as,
err^jt^T^fr f?t f^^^r^%=rrrrr ^r*? fa^r wzsirt, fr%<3T, rrr^^%irrfr (See Maitr.
S. I. 7. 3 Sankh. Br. II L 97). Separation of sg***ivt:
S^gÊT^T- = rl^pfcrP^Ff
means
bheda
or
separation,
placing at a different
Vyutkramana
S*T*TfRqxTP
place.
Employment with regard to a sacrificial vessel (^gm^M^rn":) as
11
II
%?t ^"TPrrfor J^Ffr-frC-
The word
\t
II
I.
3.
64
11
^Tf^r
11
11
<rer^
Upto VIII.
16.
This
Thus VIII.
2.
sfitra, the phrase " of a
3.
55.
be understood to apply to a
23,
3rer*TT?TC3 <?TT : )
full
sanyoganta
final is elided.
do we say
'of
Thus
*%
Observe
a Pada'?
Whatever
'
pada or
'
is
is
<res#t,
eli-
f^l must
in
a con-
and snr?^
^^4) where the ?j though
<rq^, arsr^, from <T^J[
not elided, because the stem
is
word
teaches "there
what ends in a conjunct consonant ". The word

be supplied here to complete the sense viz, of a word which ends
Why
always
inclusive, should be
sion of the final of
junct consonant, the
f?
'*.
treat of here-after, should
a completed word.
connection with other senses also;
an adhikara sutra, and extends up to VIII.
is
as
3. 54,
or " to the whole of a word

shall
in
&c
supplied in every subsequent
we
3sf*fssr% or manifestation
found employed
f?f"is
Sftft *r^n;:, ^r^ %*&
as, f5fcgM*"*^%,
<r^r
See
II
no longer called pada. The force
7^2? must be construed according to the context, sometimes

" in the room of the whole pada "
i. e.
and sometimes as
sthana-shashthi
as
of the Genitive
in
avayava-shashthi
T^Tri:
11
?\s
i.
11
17.
e.
"
of a pada-of the portion of a pada
^\va
^t^
Upto VIII.
supplied the phrase
" after a
".
1.
68, inclusive should always
pada
".
be
Bk.
Cii.
\ 111
I.
18
AnudAtta
Whatever we
teach hereafter should be understood to apply to
shall
Thus
tint which comes after a pada.

M
nmantrita
The phrase
1501
the sOtra VIII.
must be supplied
TfTl,
1.
19,
teaches "of an
That
complete the sense.
to
of a pada, which is in the Vocative case, and which comes after another
pada, all vowels become anudatta". Thus T^f% fll^f " Cookest thou,
is, "
Why
Pevadatta".
Devadatta
is
do we say, "after a pada "? Observe ?^tT T^f%
not anudatta (VI.
sr^^n* ^smqirrfr
18.
the phrase
"
?^
I.
<TTift n
11
Here
II
198).
smj^mr, *Hk,
3t-<tft-3tt^ h
Upto VIII. 1. 74, inclusive is to be supplied

The whole is unaccented, if it does not stand at
the beginning of the foot of a verse ".

The three words anudattam " unaccented ", sarvam " the whole " and
apadadau " not in the beginning of a Pada of a verse ", should be understood
to exert a governing influence over all
upto
Whatever we
end.
its
wholly unaccented, provided
Thus VIII.
or stanza.
19,
1.
the subsequent sutras of this chapter,
shall treat of hereafter,
that,
it
says " of a Vocative
word of a hemistich
Why
*%
fstacT **rer
datta, as
it
do we say
here
E55
it,
Voca-
does not stand as the
it
at the beginning of a hemistich"?
^r though
the Vocative case,
in
is
Observe
not anu-
when
I.
and
21, teaches "^:
?r:
are the substitutes of %&?
The
present sutra must be read there to complete the

not at the beginning of a verse. Thus mmT- *#, snprff PI' *T* 11
at the beginning of a hemistich,
instead of ^: and
II
we must have
TTT in
f^%^t
gwrrsfi
and sremff
W ^TT^
epWrTT
11
Rik hymns, as well as to secular
Why do
forms
^r m**t >rT^R^Tr^ ^r^prfr

the sutra refers both to the hemistiches of the sacred
*r
The word
the
As,
^ff
Q.
and
stands at the beginning of a Pada.
SP5TT in the plural".

sense, viz,
when not
^r <*WfV^Hl,
Similarly VIII.
But
as q^fcr
";
"
".
first
"all the syllables of a
to be
word of a verse
The whole of this sutra
does not stand as the
should be read there to complete the sense, viz

tive are unaccented when a word precedes
first
must be understood
Slokas.
we employ the word
Ans, The word sarvam
is
qft in the sutra
used in the
word, which has not acute accent on the
order to indicate that a

syllable, should also become
sCitra, in
first
For the word q^nt (VIII. 1. 17) is in the ablative case, and shows
that the operation taught in any sutra governed by it, will be performed on
anudatta.
Anudatta
1502
maxim
the first syllable, according to the

1.
word ^T^, which
28, the
and
5TJ
Therefore,
by
jj.
l-S
rule VIII.
acutely accented on the first syllable, (because

are anudatta), will only lose its accent in ^tT: ttr; but not so the
ffifr
37*fi%
Bk. VIII. Ch. I
which
errtfi^
is
acutely accented
But by
ll
is
in the
force of the
middle
word q$
cjpfjnqf
by the vikarana accent)

also loses
its
accent.
Q. This cannot be the reason, for the author indicates by his prohibition
in
Sutra VIII.
I.
29, that a verb loses its
For there
is
no verb when conjugated
be.
accent, where ever that accent

in
^ which
may
has acute on the first
syllable.
Ans. The word 'sarvam'

for
if
where the rule
srf?:
7W3
will
used to prevent the operation of srFSfs^rf\%
initials to
28 would apply to ^;J: which
SFjHj, but not to
^tT
*RTft
is
there the other will apply: so that,
"sarvam" was not used, the rule would apply to the
where there were other than

I,
is
not apply
finals,
finally acute
and not to cases
Thus the
be operated upon.
by VI.
J.
j86,
in
rule VIII.
^TT^^ff
Q. No; this cannot be the reason of employing the word 'sarvam' in the
is not confined to the finals, by the
sutra, for the author indicates that the rule
prohibition he
conjugated
by VI.
1.
makes
in Lrit,
186.
in favor of t^ in
VIII.
which has acute on the
So the
1.
final.
51; for there
All Lrit
is
is
no verb, when
acute in the middle
3T^ts?c^[ rule does not apply.
Ans. The word 'sarvam'
is
used for this reason.
Had
'sarvam', not been,
used, then in those cases where there was no other rule to apply, like VIII.
r,
word would become anudatta. But in cases where another

rule also operated, there this anudatta rule would not apply, for then there
would be two different sentences. For a thing which is already in existence
19, there only the
can be made the subject of a rule ordering certain operations to be performed
on
it;
but not so a thing which
will
come
in
existence in future time.
Thus
yushmad and asmad by one

the words ^f and
sentence VIII. I. 2Q; while another sentence ordains their anudatta-hood. So
here there is separation of sentences (vakyarbheda): which is not desireable;
But by employing the
for a vakya bheda should be avoided, if possible.
#f are ordained as substitutes of
word
'sarvam', this
vakya-bheda
Another reason
for
is
made
employing
tolerable.
this
word
is
that the substitutes gf and #f
should come in the room of the whole declined forms of yushmad and asmad,
with their case-affixes. Had not this word (sarvam) been used, then ?\ and ^r
would have replaced only ,yushmad' and 'asmad'. Obj. Will not the anuvritti of
the word 'padasya', cause the whole declined ivord to be replaced by q\ and ^r,
not only the crude-forms yushmad and asmad? And there cannot be a full word
unless
it
takes case-affixes; so the whole of
ease-affixes will be replaced.
Where
is
yushmad and asmad with
the necessity
of using the word
their
'sar-
Hk. VIM.
<
H.
19
Amdatta.
apply to those cases where a Pada is a word

But the word 7f is a technical term also, and applies
Ans. This objection
vani'?
ending
in
a case-affix.
will
Thus
to crude forms before certain case-affixes.
word)
also called
is
Pada by
Thus
them the case
*rf%*re.
11
be pada before those
will
"yushmad" and "asmad"

^3%, ^rqrfr 4r fr^
iTpfr ^r
-
nominal stem (not ;\full
before non-sarvanamasthana case-affixes.
Dual, they will be called Pada
fore the affix of Dative
used, then only
17,
4.
I,
Therefore yu-hmad and asmad
affixes.
1503
will
II
Thus
affixes.
and had
cr$
be-
not been
be replaced and not their case-
Here
qf
and
would require
after
affix wif otherwise.
w\x* *rnw
19.
R^rrrT
%**&
FTfrf^rr
*&*&x-
11
All the syllables of a Vocative are unaccented

it, and it does not stand at the beginn-
when a word precedes
ing of a hemistich.
Thus <rsrr% \?TtL T B n% 5?ItI H The Vocative is acutely accented on
the first by VI. 1. 198, the present makes it all unaccented,
The rules relating to nighata ( by which all syllables of a word
Vtitt:
become unaccented, such as the present, and VIII. 1. 28 &c ) and to the substitutes of yushmad and asmad apply then only, when the preceding word
>
which would cause the nighata or the substitution,

with the
latter
Therefore not here;
word.
is
part of the
3t4 ^*T, ?*PT<T
II
same sentence
"This
the
is
staff.
Carry by means of it." Here f* does not lose its accent by VIII. I. 28, though
preceded by the Noun danda, because these are parts of two different sentences.
"Cook the food, it will be for thee.

That is the rice cooked by thee, will do both
Here the ^ and % substitutions have not taken place
for thyself and myself.
(VIII. I. 22) for yushmad and asmad, for the same reason.
Vishnumitra is here.
Another example is, vr^rff? f%OTrf*pfr,
Come back Devadatta. " Here Devadatta, though in the Vocative case, does
Nor can you say that ^qsf: q^ftfct will make this vartika
not lose its accent.
redundant. In all the above examples, the different sentences are connected
^r^T
Cook
*ftrt^ arr^T T^\ TT

the food, it will be for me."
T^T, rpT
*rn<*lf?r H
^^^g-
with each other in sense.

for
Thus
the last example, Devadatta was searching
in
Vishnumitra, when some one says to him, 'Here
the two sentences are samartha, yet there
apply here: ff S^tT

arr^T ^rcsrfa
I!
TRF % Zmnfa
is
is
V. come back D." Thus
no nighata.
^rftrTSfa (VIII.
But the
I.
28
<*$
rule will
I
^TR??lf
ft
In the last examples the Vocatives, the verbs and the substitutes
yushmad and asmad are not in syntactical construction with the words that
immediately precede them, and yet the nighata rule &c does apply: inspite
of
of the general maxim w: <refffa ( H. 1. I ), for rules relating to completed

words apply to such words only which are in construction.
:
Pronouns.
1504
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
not 5?^^tT.
yet
is
it
not
is
in syntactical
causes nighata of Devadatta.

in
construction with
the nighata of i%gf^
11
f%gf?f,
is
Similarly in JT^rflrr^nT ^5, the word
but with
Similarly ^rr^fRT
22
f^ R?TrTr Trar % ~^?tT, and

construction with flq-^rr and not^^rr,
In the last example, the construction
Thus f%
I.
fW msi%;
gp*, i.e. rf^f!
yet
it
*{?$}:
causes
not in construction with %, but with
is
Yet it causes % substitution of yushmad. Though

the preceding words are not samartha with regard to the words that follow
them, they cause the changes, because the words are in the same sentence.
*T3%,
i-
3^^
e. srrpffai
srrfT
?l^rf^
For the Genitive, Dative and Accusative Dual

of yushmad and asmad, are substituted ^tv^ and *i respectively,
when a word precedes, and these substitutes are anudsttta.
All the three sutras t^^ q^r?j; and sr^fTTT ^*TqTTrfr are applicable here,
20.
Thus
*rrer ^f
5R<rfr tr T^f?r
^<rer
^ mi m%
1
^f 3ta%
^Tfr
#r 3fa%
tptt ?\ <&.mH
11
These two 3TC. and #r come in the Dual only, because other substitutes
have been taught for the Singular and Plural in the two subsequent sutras.
Why do we say ''for the Genitive, Dative and Accusative"? In other
As, ijr%
cases there will be no substitution.

isutra indicates that
$3T-3rf
^?R
II
The word
*?T in
the
the case affixes must be express and not understood, for
the purposes of this substitution. Therefore, not here: %j$ ^^rj^f' though here
yushmat is preceded by a word in a sentence, and is in the Genitive case yet
^:
substitution (VIII.
11
21) does not take place, because the case-affix
STfîT^T,
iTTTft
*?
arfTSRRrarS^^Tfp ^g?^gfff redrew qVrereq
HTf^^reT
sTtt:
r.
sreren-
II
II
II
SRj;, 5TC?T
is
elided.
II
^^f^HKAJ
V *re<r
11
For (the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative)

plural of yushmad and asmad are substituted sra; anc 3*S respectively, (when a word precedes, and these substitutes are anudatta).
21.
Thus
%Z
q-
irnft t-
gr^^^T
m> ^^r3
II
^*; *mr
T^T#
II
&,
fr 3fafr, sprTfr
W,
133F7,
srr
ST^R^
3ta%;
mnt
$-
T^f?r
II
For the Genitive and Dative Singular (of

yushmad and asmad are substituted) ^ and ft respectively,
(when a word precedes and these are anud&tta).
22.
Bk. VIII. Cn.
24
I.
Thus *n*T# W*,
have been taught
r^rmt ficrfNtfrr
to
For the Accusa-
ll
the next sutra, hence
in
only in Genitive and Dative.
^ come
\ii
W^ #**, *Rt * #*Pt
% ^*,
*PTT
tive singular, other substitutes
and
1505
Pronouns.
^3
11
qrrf^
^r,
fifefarprr.
*fr,
11
For the Accusative Singular of yushmad and

substituted r^T and *TT respectively, under the same
23.
asm ad
are
circumstances.
The word qgn^SRTO
srerol^g*
5T
ffrr
there
^, 'and'
'oh!
^r, 'or' ^,
m*m? ^ m,
Thus
*,
11
<sr,
3^r
*t, ^, st^, q^r,
t *r*n%
*TPTT
IT
11
11
do not take place

connection with the pronouns any of these:
in
is
<tsttt>
11
qfH^T't gwpisTfmfcrrer^r
The above
24.
when
*vf
11
? st^
er *rr
ii
Thus kptc^T T^f%,
understood here.
is
sr^;
TT^T
substitutions
'wonderful', or Q3T 'only'.
TT
Wl
"<T
II
stw* * *** nro*g>* *r fatfr

*r fr
^ *fhft gs*T^ ^ ^fa% srsro
*ffa%
srr^ri ^ T^îfrr
gî
T^rfa
irpre^r ^ T^^frT
s^rra qî%
wi *rer *pt 3T m. g**hrf" ^r* sfnrafaf &n gw^
^r prenr
srwrsr q^m
^pfr *rsr m fr^FT
$fa?r
g^rpaif ^r sfa%
an^rît
3tw?k ^r *** irpwg**
ppi
3*3m
irr%
sr
*rst
*?r*
<i3%
ii
nt
*
*rr
*t?
^r *ta%
T^sra
t^pt
**pre*T ^r
t^rt
aTOr^rr q^?f?r
?rr%
tm^
stt*t*5*3TO
g^Tr^ T^frr
zn^w Cf^%
t^^pt
w?
1
^tw^?
gwp*^ t^^pt
1
The word
g^j^j
qr^^r?r
^r*fr
^
i
uraî
ar^p-^ ?
^^
rrTfgP>?r
^%
1
^tth.^ ^q:
Cr^^
srr*ir
T^^m
3tsthi7-
s^^pt^
arr^T^
^ri
gsrar^r
^N^
t^pt^
to
*mr^f ?
g^rr*r? T^??Rr
*t*t
irnrr
3T**rr??
3rrep*rm? ^f^%
gî ^r
*rr%
swrrîf tin
T^^rm
^1
^^
? <*ta%
T^m
3^r?f
2Tr?i%
>rrTf
srr^p^r?
3tpw<:?
f^p-^r*Tf
stw^pt^ ^h.
^^
5^^r^?
^rTrfr^rTf ^to<r
g^rr^PT^ fî
^r^r=5[rTq-f?rTT^l^
^rr*i^c^r^ T^^frr
arr^r^Pr^ fr*P>
^ri
? T^rlr
3TPTf
*r/H*cnr
T?5^frr
*rr% tt ^t T^rf%
gî ?
3TSP-3T? 4\z&
btt^^k^ ^p*
m*&
^1
^t ^trrtr
sir^ ^t
*n"*Twrr?
<r*3rlf
sro**
srr% tt ? T^f?i
bt
jfc
*rr
*** *rrc$f ppi grr* ? m. *tot* ?

gwpg * Stair
3TP*p*if ? Crpt
g^roi 3 ra%
^1
^^?t
g^ra
3Tpri ^r
g^ronf
fr^'rr
sr?
qîf?r
arr>23[f?T
<fr*m
q^frr
3**^
3rrer**f
*rr
*rr
^ 3hrer
TrTr
*rr
snrot* î.
gsrr*r
3^r
gwi^^^ fr^% sTW^m fr^ îfc^r%^ 7>2ir% *rr*rr

3Tnrr^ T^^rrW
3^rr%^ q^r%
bt^tt%^ t^^tpt
5=?^?^
1
qfrr^^fr
>r^f^r
stptst
^^
?PTt
^t.
employed in the sutra to indicate direct conjunction.

where the conjunction is not direct but intermediate the
?JtK is
There is, therefore,

employment of the shorter forms.
The
particles ^,
^T,
&
As ttfp^ % *#, ^*TT ^ % w^t H

denote conjunction, 'separation'
'wonder'
Pronouns,
i$o6
Where the sense of conjunction.

pronouns yushmad and asmad, and these
&c.
'
'
'
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
separation
q^r^r *^r*Tb
when
i.e.
the
to manifest-
In
r**rtfaTn5r*i%
^~
having the sense of " seeing
",
not denoted.
physical seeing
is
The word q^qr^P
equivalent to
is
irt
26
do not take place
substitutions
also in connection with verbs
prohibition.
^fr*rm*i srr^r^ ^gjf^re*
The above
25.
its
are inherent
employed
particles are
that sense, there the present sutra will apply
ûi
&c
'
I.
and $&i means
S'frfrqf'"*,
'knowledge',,
verbs denoting 'to know', sti^N'? means perception obtained through sight
opposed to metaphorical "seeing" = "knowing". The

and #r &c. for gttf and 3T9H; do not take place when these
pronouns are employed in connection with verbs denoting 'seeing' (metaphori-
i.e.
physi cal 'seeing'
substitutions of ^f
cally) but not 'looking'
Why
do we say when not meaning
Ishti:
With regard to verbs of "seeing
snf
^ mgiMF
^ aits^nr^r
which
itself is
substitutions
t*
ii
uf*ra7*3Frerf*ra
ii
*ri*r
TT q^^T'rT
11
to look
we have
h \*.
Observe
tfprewr
apply even
the rule should
",
T^f^,
already illustrated above.
^rr%
\\
'
*t
if
^fan,
jtûtt^t
11
Nomina-
preceded by another word, then the above
take place optionally.

TTf*t
3;ssF*cr^r*
ifa ^*3*>*g-q ^M<r
*w
srwr^r
do we say "which
itself is
grarc^r
'
the pronoun follows after a
qm 37*w<^% ^**.or
Thus
ifon
may
as,
ppsntt tos*:
When
26.
tive,
f%m*rr
m *# srftesrira;; iprei*^ ^ta*TR *pflw*frp,
*trt
not direct:
is
srr*rr*TT
^pjyifar.
11
).
srm^ & srefw*Tcr,
where the connection
*rr*
physically
Thus
<T**tt*cr
11
11
tpt
11
^^Rm^f**
srfa
w%
srR^s^rw
% Cr^ra ifa
&t m t**^
g*?R)r
i>3f*cr. u
11
11
3J*r^r if
11
*f*i
srr^r
11
Why
Why do
cjjs^r *rf*r*I Û'
we say
"after a
preceded by another word"?
Nominative"?
The option herein taught
y& r t:
not employed
in
anvadesa. But when there
is
is
Observe
restricted
to
Observe
sfi*^f **Th
gs^
*T*l,
and 3T*TI when
anvadeâ, then the substitution
is
Bk. VIII. Cm.
I.
Pronouns.
27]
compulsory and not optional.
This vartika
makes
it
there
anvadesa: 3T*fr itr ?fi*^%
is
a vyavastJiita vibhdshd.
Vdrt:
1507
restricts the
Therefore, there
m,
3T*fr
Others say, that the substitutes

Thus the
not.
3?***^T* *?H,
?tf,
&H,
3T*ff
all ?
then,
when
3T*Tr stpt
there
37**^?
i.e.
is
3Tfr
3F*r7#T
Why
TT^WI
3f*^r
the necessity of the present sutra at
sake of anvadesa:
^R
sff*^re
here,
where
II
&c are all optional, when
#f
is
preceded by another
As:
rules 20, 2r, 22, 23 are 'optional.
% *f* or
Observe
anvadesV'?
is
sffwrSr
no option
?TR ^*iRr%
not employed in anvadesa, whether the nominative
noun or
scope of the sutra, and
is
^J^^f
*5\, or
do we say "when not in

n% Q. If this is so, where
tl
Ans. The present sutra
for the
is
the option taught in the present sutra will take place only
anvadesa and not otherwise
*? q, 3T^r
?Tf*r
37*^% % *** or
,
thus
sr^fr str"
3T*fr
?rr%
^tcct ^^>
^^r r *f % n
or
In other
words, according to this vartika, rules 20, 21, 22 and 23 are

desa, but
by
compulsory where
a nominative which itself
is
is
all optionalm anvano anvadesa; but when the pronoun is preceded
preceded by another word, then the above rules
are not compulsory, even in'anvadesa: there also the option will apply.
f frTJ
11
Rfr^JriTcTOFr
nr^R" ^<<r 3Tr*fr^3 ^rrt ^trrir sr^rxTrR ^f%-
11
The words nnr &c, become unaccented after

when a contempt or a repetition is intended.
27.
finite verb,
Thus
food
q^"frr
%VL> ^^fa
^Tll,
when contempt
is
meant.
Here T*TR nf?T means 'he proclaims his Gotra &c, so that he may get
<r*R is from the root crfer sqf^Jlf:^ 'to make evident' (Bhu. 184).
&c\
Similarly
^"TR
married &c ".
Thr*l "
be repeatedly
Where contempt
is
utters,
not meant,
his descent &c, in order to get

it
has the force
of repetition,
bound to do, in marriage-rites &c.

i. e.
repetition or intensity is denoted.
when
And TqfcT T^rr% *&**k> ^<TR WTR" nf!W
word
The
H
g# is a noun derived from the
Similarly <r*R 1^1., T^R T^TR f
he repeatedly utters his Gotra as one
is
root
a by
the affix 37^, the
T*
substitution for
has not taken place, as an
anomaly.
1 *ft^, 2 a=r,
3 j^psR, 4 jt?^, 5lftr3?, 6 H3WT, 7 jtts^, 8 str, 9 ?3R, 10 *-
17 jr^h,
The word HR
first-acute.
Thus
optionally becomes anudatta
q^R
3T2 or q^TRi ?TR
II
in the
alternative,
it
is
Accent.
iSo8
Why
Why
is
[Bk. VIII. Cn.
do we say after a finite verb ? Observe n%<T

do we say " Gotra and the rest"? Observe tpsri%
'
'
*?r^r*
Wl.
I.
29
II
Here
II
qrt
an adverb
Why
*5ffiRT
do we say
*TPt ?r%?T ^<T
wnen contempt
"He
II
or repetition
The words 'contempt and
repetition' in the text qualify the
or sutra, and not the word fnrn^ nor the
word
that whereever the word
in this
nr^rft
used
is
RTf^fcT^:
II
precedes
Thus $5^TJ
Why
Observe
*T^Rf
<T3rfe
T%f
II
verb
finite
is
srfcrr:
Sffa,
araffr,
finite verb.
Why
do we say "a
11
cooking
|Î^
exists'
because
employed;
one
one
in
sentence
'successful
and
us conquer
redundant,
Observe
verb"?
finite
he conquers,
The word
fight".
57
I.
of one
finite
?fto3<<T
not a finite verb'?
is
Here the word
vreia" U
rules,
verb
its
So
accent.
thrives'.
is
srfcT"^:
sentence, two finite
simple
consists
sr^TOT
one sense
in
cannot be
But the very
verbs
only.
*wrer*3 does not apply to this

same sentence, for
so that the two words need not be portions of the
the application of this nighata
Other examples
4), lr*%
used in VIII.
II
= qr?fi fH*U
fact of this sutra indicates that the condition of
%nr:
find
unaccented, when a word
is
not a
vrtf^ <HiT<T 'the act of
also efforts
For we
always implies the
it
rfprrf^ is
do we say 'when the preceding word
%I5"^ffl^Txr "for
sutra
Chapter,
a finite verb, therefore the verb pachati does not lose
is
Observe
of contempt and repetition.
q^nfo
II
which
it,
is
28.
'
whole sentence
3T33TtT understood.
Thus the word
sense of 'contempt or repetition'.
and there also the sense
meant
is
digs a well having assembled the Gotra".
are
w7r^T ?
It
II
sqrfT^t
(Rv. V.
^
^ TiRr*^
ii
1.
TTlft
5TRre*r
1),
II
as
we have already explained
Wf^
(Rv.
irswrei Tfk
*,
arrc^
?
1
I.
I.
1).
^ 5?f3
in
VIII.
IF331jt
(Rv.
I.
19.
I.
I.
irrl u
^r f^w^ ^r^nr
psfa
it is
But the Periphrastic Future is not unaccented,

preceded by a word which is not a finite verb.
This
restricts the
29.
When
Thus
3f: cR^r,
^P
*Hlf&,
scope of the
*fl%:T
last
efilme: H
are anudatta after the affix rTn%
by VI.
udatta (III. 1.3) and where the
fz
sutra which
1.
186, the
portion
of m^r
elided before the affix ^t, there also the 3*r of r
udatta has been elided. See VI.
1.
161.
was rather too wide.
The Sarvadhatuka
whole
i.
e.
affixes ^T,
affix ??ra;
fr,
^r,
becomes
the syllable arr^,
is
becomes udatta, because the
VIII. Cn.
liK.
31
Accent.
^ fe*, ^, #<*,
ZfV$, ^?cT,
H3TW
I.
^tJT
1509
^fer^, ^T^, g^lTO
II
II
The
30.
verb retains
finite
with the particles mi, 'that',

'weir, fe|, 'not',
'0!', ffsn*,
implying
particle,
Thus
#3f*r,
%^,
hope' or
'I
*fe
T^rfrT,
its
'because*!
'if,
'if
hope
'I
#tn%
or
accent
<if
^^
rer t*tRt,
Soma
thou,
Other examples are
Tfi**ffi U
wiliest us to
live,
we
??r*
'also'!,
(interrogative
and
not)',
*nr 'where'.
^ f^
^ ^ ^ ^ ^^
^ Thus ^
3*>m,
^rm, Wfo* *> ^ f^rap^t ^^J 7rrrr ( Nir. I. 1 1 ), * %^

The particle *r* with the indicatory or has the force of
connection
^ ^
djfa - 3T3
in
l^rfrf,
zjq
il
jfft-
T ^R ^r l^fr sfter^ ^ ^ R^ jf
^ *r*?n^ f*T#^r ZW " if he
shall not die' 3fr
we will make friends with him. " 5*3** Wmft ^., *Hp T^rfq ?T^
makes us happy &c". Th'is rule does not apply to the ^ which is
^, SRpft^n
a conjunction meaning 'and'. So also:^f%r^ gf>K, ^rf%T BT$r%^,
Why do we say "with particles"? Observe q$$r? 5r^*=T=5??f}[
come
will
here,
" If Indra
to
g^
is not a particle, but the Present Participle of the root ?<jt

Here
Rule VIII. 1. 28
It means ir^ the car creaks while going'.
go'.
^f^H
1
II
'
applies here.
Particles like qf^ &c, so
it
should only be
read in connection with other

must be a Particle. How then can the Present
a Particle
is
the rule of Pratipadokta &c. that
Now by
Q.
taken, which
moreover
is
it
-This sutra indicates that the srffrat^S

Participle 3?t be taken at all? Ans.
Thus the word qr^ formed with
here.
apply
not
do
rule
rule and the
J^^
the affix ^<r (V.
Why
39)
2.
is
do we use the word 3=^
Other examples
protectest
qft sn^FTfr
:5tr%
'.
vr
*:
$f&
come
*$
let
'
up
qr^
of this sutra.
connection with
" in
<mf?flr
Rv.
I.
r. 4. )
".
Observe 3^
if I
this earth
am
".
a sorcerer
sr^r
^xmi
3?
'what offering thou
whither our fathers of old departed
the spot,
As
\ 3T^r
sfr*
?%*H[ ^frfr* f%^,

fafti 'if a Brahman
',
^r^r #qm *t STpfrrr that the sun may not burn thee
s^pt: fÎ srpw* 'will he come hither for our praises^ Whitney s
',
'
595).
^ TOiroSr
??
<i3Tft
II
*.
^^
^ fxfa^ &K vmK* * f^tT TT3^^ ^fit

T
II
me die on
on, let us share
Grammar, Para
fPrr:
q v&
are:
ftrT* <T*t
has grasped her hand

with his beam'
the word
also included in
Accent,
1510
The finite verb

when employed in
When
the
first
retains
its
accent, which
follows ST^qf^r (VI.
is
Another example
'when asseverative'?
by |%^ accent, ^t^

I34)> frerr
is first
Phit
and
II.
6)
srei srsr
11
is
acute, because
f^r%
3^
q^rfa
11
Here
^WTO"
anger or
is
it
jest.
Here ^rwr
becomes accentless
Why
pure negation. rTRT^
is
it
as
1.
it
3).
do we say,
in
is first
formed by 3T^ of cr^nr^
that
acute
(III.
1.
a Pronoun ending in st (^r^f^r^^Tr'Tr1!.
it is
anudatta by VIII.
is
?r?
^f'ffSFTH^fci "Verily
frfar?*
acute because
is final
as
?TfP^ra" 'No, you will study'.
for fee".
34
pratyarambha. Thus
w becomes udatta by the sparer; (III.
and
Observe r{%%
world they do not wish
eat"
will
acute on the middle, for
186),
I.
is
rejects the offer repeatedly, in
anger or jest says 'No, you
in
by another, then
rejected insultingly
is
tauntingly, with a negation,
says to B: "Eat this please".
Then
I.
the sense of forbidding.
something urged by one,
made by
the reply
Bk. VIII. Cn.
retains its accent in connec-
31.
tion with
1.
*t*to, sr
28.
11
3^ fâr ^3^ >ref?r sir

32.
The finite verb retains its accent in connection
with ^T when used in asking a question.
Thus *=r^ ^T^sfe 'Truly will you eat'? ÔT^pqlr Why do we say 'in
f frp
11
sr?TR?f?re
11
II
questioning'?
*Tc2U%fT
3"
Observe mi{ ^%m\H
13R?? *rT^5
STWTJTTm^li:^
33.
II
TT^ST
'I
shall
tell
the truth, not falsehood'.
II
33
T^Tfa
II
The
finite
II
3T1?,
STSTr^T^T^
verb retains
its
II
accent in connection
with 3^? when used in a friendly assertion.

to injure another
Anything done
In fact,
apratiloma, or friendliness.
it is
is
prati-loma, opposite of this
equal to anuloma.
Thus
is
st^T^t 'yes,
you may cook'. Here anga has the force of friendly permission. So also sr^
But when it has the force of pratiloma, we have: s?^ spr! % f*R f^T^ff
T3sinner
soon wilt thou learn, O coward". Here
5Jre3rct ^Tr?*T "Well, chuckle O
ST^ is used in the sense of censure, for chuckling is a thing not liked by the
11
II
person: and
ft"
11
is
pratiloma action: for pluta-vowel see VIII,
3\* n
34.
with
fir
q^TR
The
when used
II
r%,
finite
2.
96,
ll
verb retains
its
in a friendly assertion.
Bk.VIII.Ch.
Thus
Observe
*r ft
|.
ft
$1, *f|
f*f f <T^
^^^T^rTifqf
^ro:
i5"
Accent.
37]
I.
fo
*rf*
I*
Why
"
do we say
'in
friendly assertion'?
S*ntf *n*sr% *tf*t n
hpst^p*
t^tr
II
^fo, 3?*^, srfa, s?rar-
II
II
In the Veda, the finite verb retains its accent

(but not always), in connection with |%, when it stands in
correlation to another verb, even more than one.
35.
That
spj#
ff *T^t
sin will
f^JTIT<T
sometimes one verb, sometimes more than one verb retain
is
verb, we have the following example:

f ^n% 'Because the drunkard tells falsehood, therefore
make him impure: e. he does incur sin". Here both verbs î% and
retain their accent: and f| has the force of
'because'.
According to
their accent.
Thus
Ir^frTi
of
more than one
Tl^TC *pr rf
i.
Kaiyyata the meaning of
3"llT
is
i-
this
See Maitr. Sanhita
^PT^sfrs^SjjT?!^
force of f|
is
arî^rg" is first
is all
anudatta.
*TFra*iT??Tn*
ff^f:
frT*
I.
n.
6.
As
regards one verb in a
accent and the other losing it,we have:

first
retains
its
stf^rff
accent and the second not.
and its effect. So also: ststt fj H<g|R g

^STTCTO (Taittariya Samhita IV. 2. 10, 4). The
the augment 3?^ having the accent; while 3TT*3?l
to denote here cause
word
sresrer
its
Here the
II
nft?l(oriPTO OT *T !?235^
11
TrTrs^ft **fifc rTFTr^JrT^T
correlated sentence retaining
The
^P*
is
e a drunkard does not incur the sin of telling a falsehood, because he
not in his senses.
#g Wirt
sentenc
11
acute,
36.
11
3^
s^rrar
with qracj and q?K
i^rfo
11
sthts;, *Tsrrc*Tns
nt^% *rr^r% mfo
finite
II
11
verb retains
its
||
wk
Thus
g#?, wgfMs; OT^fftftranfftf,^?*: T^rfa *P!H,\*?*cs I^tW
meaning is that the verb retains its accent, even when sfr^ and
The
zj^TF
3*rr follow after it.
Another example is srqr r%<t ^P^rnrû The word srr^rT*
^^r\ ^rf^rs^fr^ris the Imperative (war) Second Person Dual of the root sr^
The verb BT^f: is Imperfect faw) Second Person singular of the root
otrt:
The accent, is on 3? (the augment).
t to scratch'.
II
II
ll
ijsrpri
ffrf:
11
^R?cn^
3np3*rr
II
ssmroT
37.
3\s
II
ûf^
II
i^nwro, *, sr*?cn^c
II
s^r^ fas^ s*rnn f%<ra ^ri^rrr ?r*^rnT f%rrff sts^tpt*
But not
so
when
these particles
immediately precede the verb and denote
*n^
'praise'.
and
11
q-srr
i s
Accent.
12
That
the verb loses
is,
Ci-i.
I.
40
Thus 31^
and becomes anudatta.
accent,
its
Bk. VIII.
Why
Why
do we say when denoting 'praise'? Observe n^ ^^f, *TOT H^^ "

do we say 'immediately'? Observe ^r^^^Tf: T^% ^ft*R, 3*TT
Here the verbs retain their accent by the last sutra.
^^rf: ^crrW ^r^
11
^Rr;
ii
g^ 1 qr^^q^ ^ Terror re*re ^r^nt w?r f% mf 3T3?rwr *rcf%

38.
A finite verb loses its accent when it denotes
^reswroi
'praise'
and
11
?r
joined immediately with
is
mâ
and
q'srr
through
the intervention of an upasarga or verbal-preposition.
The
taught that the verb loses
last sutra
preceded by sjr^ and
3*Tr
11
accent
its
when immediately
This qualifies the word 'immediately' and teaches
Thus
that the intervention of a Preposition does not debar immediateness.
The word
JT*H"frf, ^THJt, 3*IT
'immediately'
H"^ f%^
irerfrrit
understood here
is
^r$
Prof. Bohtlingk's Edition reads the sutra as sq%rT
gtnpmpTcnl: ^ftth:
'J3TPTP*
tnr:
11
cj,
^|^ 1%^
<tokt 3T?
has udatta accent.
II
q^n%
11
and
Thus spi^sa;
11
g, <i^, q^<r,
Observe, 1*3
^nfg
The
sr|:,
when meaning
1.
?r
^
Another example
nected with the general
40.
11
'praise'.
of VIII.
I.
of VIII.
is
q^rfa
q>^rf
mm^r gs%
meaning
praise
'
37,
for the îrrainof that sutra
word Tfrrar^here, though its anuvritti could have

shows that the negation of that sutra does not
repetition of the
^n
ll
of that sutra, and the
3T^r
3?^;,
its
f^ra
ll
been supplied from VIII.
extend here:
*nrr1t i*rr?iT
g^$ ^Tt>r^T^; ^'tr^t ^>k $t^,

Why do we say 'when
^Tr^TI
^^
*j*Tr
?rr5?r%
verb retains
finite
<t^T, tnpTcT,
*nr>TTO bt? Tr^HF^f
?f
3*>
vf
II
3 T5*
39.
with
11
Thus ?IRT^*^*
also.
The upasarga
sn^
n
finite
1.
is
connected with two negatives, the
29, but the ^rrqra.of this sutra
t?qrT3 sMrff^RlQ^
^r,
is
con-
29 only.
^r
ll
11
verb retains
its
nection with sr^t meaning praise \

Thus 3Tfr1WT= Nf*f ^Tw, 3Tff f%^rr^:
accent when in con-
'
^TfrT
^R
ll
The
separation
Bk. VIII. Cn.
I.
of this srfr from
Had
3T?r only.
43
Accent.
3 &c, of
srfr
1513
the last sutra, indicates that the next rule applies to
been joined with
which
&c,
applied to
is
&c, then Rule VIII.
<j
not desired.
would have
41,
1.
Hence the making of
a sepa-
it
rate sutra.
fo*rm
?iPt
41.
when
in
where
it
does not
or
5rr
11
is
'
the
mean
accent optionally
its
remaining cases
3R?r*Tfr
The
^JK^fH
^fa
means here senses other
or ^?rft f^?ra[
speech uttered in anger or envy and not in praise

*ra
Hhii%
(i. e.
praise).
Thus
11
in the
sr^fr
alluded to here?
tpsr
praise
$t^, finrFrr
verb retains
finite
connection with
What
than
q^rfr
11
^*rpj
This
il
^TT )
II
So
is
also
ii
The word
ness
for sutra
%q" is employed in the sutra simply for the sake of distinct40 applies to cases of puja, while this sutra will give option
in cases other than puja.
3*r
^ <tt^ptto
11
42.
finite
in connection with J^r
means before
'
The word
11
t^tr
ll
jtr,
% ^stftto;
verb retains
when
it
its
accent
means haste
i
11
'
(i. e.
optionally
when
3*3
').
fm or
quick \ Thus aqrefM n\m?G %t\ Rrata%

^r^f^S H The word g?T here expresses the future occurimminent or very near at hand.
It is against the rule of Dhar-
means
<TCn*rr
'
or 5^r ^prafcT
f^'nrjr,
rence which
is
masastras to study while
it
thunders of lightens.
Why
do we say 'when meaning haste '? Observe 5T^?r

Jtftfr?*
Here the word g*r expresses a past time that is, it means " long ago ". So
also âfar ST 3*T*fta%
See III. 2. 118 and 122, for the employment of 5^
11
ll
in the Past Tense,
and
ff%j
ii
^3 %zm 3^
43.
III. 3. 4, for the Present.
t^tr *ig, %t%, st^t, whtoth

*\
frr^nt Tr^nt *qfa 3T3ôrraf
h
*r%^3tsr<jrpTin;
ll
ll
11
mq
finite
verb retains
its
when with this Particle, permission is asked.

The word qqrurr means 'asking, praying'. The word W^TT means
'permission'.
The compound 3T*sfTT*n" means 'asking of permission
Thus
^f^YfavTP, "may I do it, sir"; ^3 *T%rfa HP 'can I go sir'. The sense is
with
;pj,
'.
give
me
permission to do or to go
'.
Accent.
14
Why
'
Here ^5 has the
force of an answering particle,

its
II
and not used
asking
in
accent.
q^ri%
II
ll
firo,
r%*rr-srar,
srg-
^s^rrf
ll
f%m^rrf^^rj?% vsi
11
45
'
fW*r^^JT^%r%c**
q^T-srafafa^ra
% Ftp
'
permission and hence the verb loses
f%
I.
do we say when asking for" permission ? Observe Zfmtft $\

%: Devadatta hast thou made the mat? Well, I am making
^tT? ^5 ^virffr
it'.
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
t$%
A finite
44.
rrsppT gtti
frr 5* ^tth ^T'ET'fT!?frrf^r^r
verb retains
its
*T3frr
TTO, when with this is asked a question relating to an

action, and when the verb is not preceded by a Preposition or
by a Negation.
with
Thus f%^rr. fafir, 3rrir r%r gf=#; u ft? ^tp

arr^t fcm>ffit*
Here some say, that the first verb ( T^trT or $1% ) being directly joined with ft?
W,
retains
accent, whilst the second verb
its
igf^
or 3T^r%
11
not being joined
with ft?, loses its accent by the general rule VIII. 1. 28. Others say, though the
word ft? is heard in connection with one verb only, yet as both verbs are objects
of doubt, therefore,
ft? is
logically connected with both of them,
Thus
their accents.
verbs retain
will
*JlfM
and so both
retain its accent according to
this view.
Why
rule will
ft?
do we say when the question
when
not apply,
t^rr 3tr4 T^fe
3Trfrfa-*tfi3fc
Why
"
Here
do we say
relates to a
*=rre?r
II
The
Thus
when a question
is
asked
"
Observe
fgff*r*ft^
used to express contempt, and not to ask a question.

Why do we say not preceded by a Preposition ? Observe
%^tP
\i
ft? is
q=^
3TTfTf^f?i
ST^n%
Why do
333^jY
or action
11
'
Sj
fk&tt
the question relates to an object or
'
ft?
\^w-
"
we say
not preceded by a negative particle
".
Observe,
ft?
tr*ft sTrfrfcF*^ 3?*h% "
<sft firoTTr n
When
45.
such a question, the
When
f^PH
^ttr
ll
is
11
sft,
finPrr
however
finite
verb
ftTO
may
ll
is
not added in asking
optionally retain
its
accent.
elided in asking a question relating to an action, the
verb which is not preceded by a Preposition or a Negative Particle,

optionally does not become anudatta. When is there the elision of this fg?n
because no rule of Panini has taught it? When the sense is that of an infinite
terrogation, but the
not mean
word
far*
is
not used.
In short, the word 'lopa' here does
the Grammatical substitute, but merely non-use.
As
^tP
*NrW (or
Bk. VIII. Oi.
5^rl
the
as
)3Tr^rr1f?t |*rFT(or
employment
it is
same
Accent.
47l
of
57^
f^*
Here the sentence
The
11
1515
option of this
connected with the sense of f^q,
is
interrogative, even without
sutra
is
Prapta-vibhasha,
The counter-examples
11
as in the last aphorism, but without Rff^li
HJk*F% *5tS
<3Sr
II
TTTHT
II
II
First Future that follows
The word
j^rcr
it,
5^,
ntff,
In connection with
46.
sr^r, *S^
^r%^ used
**TT prefer, Tf?
II
derisively, the
retains its accent.
e. derision, mockery, raillery,

means great laughter,
Thus ijft T*3 3Tr^ *TT$*S. *fi% *r*3ST, *f?R 3tsfrf$rf*P
3rTO%, aim^^ ft<rr U The word *jf| is the Imperative
i.
jeering, gibing, sneering.
qft
are the
second Person of the root
?qr
Why do we say
1 ^ H^^f, srcj ^ **r%
"
preceded by the preposition 3?r^
used derisively
'
Observe
<jff
II
II
JT?g% sffff >fr$3 % Irt
11
By
sutra VIII.
51, infra, after the
r.
Imperative qf| which
is
a verb
(n^q the following First Future ( ssO would have retained its
The present sutra makes a niyama or restriction, namely that in
accent.
connection with the Imperative qrf| *r%, the ^t is accented only then when
of 'motion'
iff!
is
),
meant and not otherwise. Thus the ?jr loses its accent here
The employment of the First Person in *rar in the sutra
*fr^
not intended to be taught: for by I. 4. io5, the verb *T^(?rar^) takes the
derision
'
is
*T*T% 3TITT
II
Person instead of the second, when
affix of the First
When
not otherwise.
Second Person
there also
by
The employment
Thus irf? *tkj%
this restrictive rule.
The above
to which
j^rST
employed.
is
iTfl *r*r
counter-example
counter example
fHr 3Tr*TfqTfR*T?T*^PI
is
qff
*far
STT^*^
fTr['
ii
II
ijf|
*9
T3%
II
*;TT
is
47.
this 5TT3
is
5f^f%
is
meant and
of the First Person ceases
II
II
But according to Mahabhashya, the

Hire 3!W% loses its accent. The
II
5TT3,
^f?
II
rule,
According to Kaiythe First
Person not
II
*V$*
%t f^ f^tf ?rr5^Tt
finite
'
given according to Kasika, according
11
**fa 3r*3rf%
T^Tf?T
5frs snr#ns(*Trei3
derision
3TTfT nr^f
meaning of the above is f$ *Q^ *rc*Rr ?fa 3Tf *T^,

yata, this would be an example also under the
being necessary:
'
not intended, the proper personal affix of the
is
verb retains
w%
its
11
accent after
not preceded by any other word.,
snrj,
when
*Si6
Accent.
Thus
186, as
I.
irrf
acute, as
first
it is
fôr
fegTKH
xr
48.
wt
50
gjfrarl
*irej
The word *&
It
is
end-acute as
it is
noun.
f%S ^
follows
it,
II
^rf*
ll
11
r%*frra:>
farjrrc:*;
11
form of fo^, when the particle

and when no other word precedes such form of
Also
after a
the finite verb retains
f%**,
affix
Why
a Nipata.
I.
Here % is anudatta by VI.

sFFT?flft
coming after an 3rajf3r; the word srrg is
do we say 'when not preceded by any
3T^s^, ^r^
ITKJ
Observe : =?
other word?
hT$%,
an sarvadhatuka
it is
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
accent.
its
The word reftfTf is a Genitive Tatpurusha meaning fe^rf tT

The
word f%*frt means any form of r%^ with its case-affixes, as well as the forms of
l%w when it takes the affixes ^?f^ and ^<{H
Thus gjfa* $3^, ^tf*^ HT^lfrr,
11
II
^f^
N% ferret, ^to^ ^fm, 3rairn?; h^S

Why do^we say 'followed by ^r? Observe e^f S^%
îfa^ #!fcr,
3?tft%,
The word
I frr
11
its
: %rarT.
f^rreptfcfasTr^T^t
11
r%r%?I rarer
sts^ptrt
11
u srrfr
^rfr
^rNî^far sfifprcnri re^tr
II
Also
49.
37Trft,
11
sr^f of the last sutra qualifies this also; therefore, the verb
loses its accent here
ff^TTt **!%
8kt
when
after
an immediately preceding
and
srr^t
these follow after no other word, the verb retains
accent.
The
prohibition of nighata or
so also there
is
Thus
preceding'?
the anuvritti of
3T<*^
*
want of accentuation
from the
arrfr or Srrrft Srt-^ 3rTT?r
raR
is
understood here,
last.
ll
Why
do we say 'immediately
when these particles
In the following sutra will be taught option,
do not immediately precede the
Why
or ^rrfr H%
verb.
do we say "when no word precedes them"?
Observe ^ra^T
^rrf T
T% ftsTPTT
?rt: h
srrfr
II
wrfr
$3rerr>*f
<T^Tft
II
rq-,
f^VTT^T
II
3^ rer^ ^rs^rrr \re f^nrrer H^rer
?K*r %*r shf^^cTCT?!;
When the above-mentioned Particles
srT^fr
and
do not immediately precede the verb, the verb
may
op-
50.
^cTT^t
II
tionally retain
its
accent.
it
Bk. VIII. Cn.
I.
5*
Accent.
Thus snfr^TFP
The
51.
or 5^1%
<T=?rr^
11
151;
swir "Nt*t fern or 55??

:
First Future retains
its
11
accent in connec-
tion with the Imperative of a verb denoting 'motion' ('to go,
come' to
but only in that case, when the subject

and object of both the verbs are not wholly different one from
'to
start' &c),
another.
Those verbs which have
are called Tîtf H
:
similar
The Imperative
meaning with the word
of the
tT?T*r
verbal roots,
is
'motion*
itpt
called nc^^-fîl
In connection with such an Imperative of verbs of 'motion', the First Futuie
does not become anudatta,
if
the karaka
is
not
all
The
different.
sense
is,
With whatever case-relation (karaka), whether the Subject or Object, the
employed, with the same karaka, the First Future must be
Imperative
is
employed.
e,
In connection with the
ubject
fiinte verb here, the word 3?rcî denotes the

and Object only, and not any other karaka, such as Instrument, &c.
IH^ta, 3ftq*iFrat 'Come O Devadatta to the village,

Here the subjects of both verbs aTR
and y^nfijr are the same,
and the objects of both verbs are also the same, namely qpr and ipr^ air is a
Preposition and is accented, irsg- and ht^tT both lose their accent by VIII. I.
Thus
3Tin2E
thou shalt see
it'.
11
and 28, qpr

19
9 ar
STFT,
is
formed by the Rq[ affix *p^

So also arri^
Devadatta! to the village, you will eat rice".
first-acute being
srr^T HT%3%
"Come,
11
Here the subjects of both verbs are the same, only the objects are different,
and so the rule still applies. arr?*: ^ti srnft^, 'Sj^tT Rffnt^l|#f
Here the
subjects are different, but the objects are the same, namely srntffc*
Similarly
11
II
TO^T ^r^r STTrTO:,
3*rT*tT *n%vp% "Let the rice be carried
by Devadatta, and
let
them be eaten by Yajnadatta."
Why do we say 'verbs of motion' ? Observe

Why do we say 'After the Imperative'?
y$5S5?fH
ii
Here the Potential mood
Why
T^T%
<ppr H
Why
is
'if
Observe aTPT^g^rf tT
*tpt,
used.
do we say the 'First Future'

Here the Present Tense is used.
do we say
t^" ^H<j-H bt rf?r, vfr*5% *FT*U
the karaka
is
^tT
Obseve 3rrT^
not wholly different'
*rm,
Observe
Accent.
I5i8
is
the Imperative of
Why
q*P*
Future retains
its
Bk. VIII. Ch.
I.
53
qrg 'to carry'.
do we use the word
^ 3T? ^ S^tTO
Here
II
Observe
*HJ 'wholly'?
also there
is
accent, for the subject of the Future
from that of the Imperative.
srr'H^'
%^tT
irm, ^r
prohibition of nighdta and the First
not wholly different
is
For here the subject of the Imperative
is
the
subject also of the Future, though only partly, in conjunction with another.
Moreover, the object here in both
Had
the same.
is
not been used in the
where the sentence would have remained the same, there the rule would
have applied, and not where the sentences became different.
sutra,
<f*
X*
II
<*TTf?r
II
^ta;,
II
Also an Imperative, following
52.
perative of verbs of 'motion', retains

ject or object of both the verbs,
Thus
f^rT
3TR=55"
But not here
UT*T
is
its
accent,
when
T^^^t SJ^^T* because
^ W^
the
H 3TT*TlrfT
Imperative
first
Nor
aTR^gr^Tf *rm T^?T^L because the
one of rsrf verb.
not Imperative but Potential.
here,
and object of both Imperatives are wholly
If the subject
Th us
rule will not apply.
By
ing:
The
STPT,
^ ^ l^lV
separation
sutra,
*PT
S^tT:
not
is
verb
is
different, the
II
by which the
53.
An
II
of this sutra from the last
is
for the
'option' is with regard to fjt^
firaif^ ^TOfagTrara;
and not
t^Ff 1W> TÎ3
first
^T^R
the force of the anuvritti of *Hf the rule will apply to the follow-
STIH^^tT
sequent
3TIT53r
the sub-
not wholly different.
STOP* f^jf^T
II
an Im-
after,
WHM
<*3m%
11
'
',
II
ftrofont, #w?ro, 2*3^***
\\
Imperative preceded by a Preposition,
in the First Person, following after
verbs of motion
sake of the sub-
and not
may
optionally retain
its
an Imperative of
accent,
when
the
is not wholly different.

The whole of the preceding sutra is understood here. This is a
prapta-vibhasha. Thus srnr^'^Tr *TPT jthHt or sfr!*I
sTm^l^r UPTSTOTfa
KAraka
II
or ?[?!% U
vin.*^
When
the verb
is
accented,
the
upasarga loses
its
accent
by
Uk. VIII. Cn.
Why
I.
55
Accent
1519
do we say Hf<TOT 'joined with a Preposition'? When there is no

is no option allowed, and the last rule will apply.
As btft^
Preposition, there
Why
^r? tt,
*tt
srfiwl
5*3
do we say s?^St^t
II
Trs^nt *r^m
may
'
Observe
stt
r^rr%
11
X*
^TT^
II
^T, ^,
II
11
An
54.
it,
not a First Person
'
Imperative, with a Preposition preceding
optionally retain
accent, in connection with
its
^r,
but not the First Person.

With the exception of
is
Thus ^f
lowed here
1.
r^T &c, the whole of the preceding sutra
*rar*f
u nderstood here.
30,
ij
^ ^,
f%5 or
as
it is
Î
!rf^f,
Slffa
where the
by VIII.
1st
But no option
II
not preceded by a preposition.
makes the accent compulsory
STSFTSTr**?,
or J^rrf^
Person
is
after
^tT
So
11
used, the verb retains
its
Here
is
al-
rule VIII.
also ^fT wgrfeir^, S^tT
accent compulsorily
1.30.
The word snfprsrrel is Imperative First Person, Dual of the root 5^

Atmane pada (I. 3. 66). The Personal ending ?% is anudatta by VI. I. 186,
because the verb is anudatta-it. The vikarana ?r therefore retains its accent.
in
Q^FcT^TUTF^cnRFcT^
3THT
f?3r<n*, 3T*f?cT%
II
XX
FW*
II
After sm*, but separated from
than one word, the Vocative retains

son addressed is not near.
3TT* T^rfa
VW*tt ^
second example, though *f
is
72, but
itself is
first
a Vocative,
becomes
when
accent,
the per-
The nighdta being hereby

by VI. 1. 198. In the
not considered to be non-
syllable
it is
by
effective
by not more
it
virtue of VIII.
1.
73,
as
it
in apposition with the Vocative that follows.
Why
by VIII.
1.
^ Why
do we say snu?
Observe ^1^ q qf%lH5

!
II
Here
it is
anudatta
19.
Why
jt
1.
its
^TP* ft **T*rT ^ "
prohibited, the vocative gets accent on the
existent by VIII.
<W-3FcTCH, 3THT-
3TTJT:,
II
55.
Thus
II
do we say q^RTC*
l^rir ^
do we say
'
separated only by one word
'
11
'
the Vocative
'
See 3TR, T^Rf f^xr
11
Observe
3TT**
Accent
1520
Why
some hold
do we say
that 3TTRT3T
3T5TPtT%
'
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
not near
equivalent to |*
is
'
'
See 3TPI
T*Tf*r
%^3tT
I.
Here
II
Therefore, according to
far off'.
Had it been
them, the prohibition applies to q^grcr as well as to front:
merely a prohibition of nigh&ta, then the sutra would become redundant, as
the nighata is precluded by the rule of eka-s*ruti (I. 2. 33). Thus arguing, they
II
hold that eka-s*ruti being asiddha, the pluta-udatta of VIII.

hibited
and so the
vowel
last
2.
is
84,
not pro-
prolated.
is
Others say that the word spTPrT^ means
that which
is
not far off ( |*
nor very near'. It does not mean f* only. For had it meant 3*, the author
could have used the word $* in the sutra. Therefore the rule of eka-sruti (I. 2.
33),
has no scope here at
for
all,
it
applies to $* vocatives.
plutodatta also should not be exhibited in the illustration;

2.
Not being
for
|*,
the
the rule VIII.
84, applies also to f* Vocatives.
In the example 3TT*
acute
the word nt
is
*ft
S^rT, the
word srr* being a Nipata
a shortened form of r^, (VIII.3.1. Vart). and
it is
is
first
accent-
by VIII. I. 19, being a Vocative case preceded by another word.f^frT would

become accentless by the same rule, this sutra prohibits it. The frorrT
prohibited by this sutra, two rules make themselves manifest now.
thus
being
less
also have
The one
for application.
monotony;
is
of
^T^r^^T^^r
(I. 2.
c^r^Tf^ by fjrr^T
other causing
the
33) causing ij^^r% or
(VIII.
2.
84).
The
opinions referred to above, relate to this doubt.
qfecgprt
ffcr.
11
&%fa
armf^rrnrerrT
56.
its
X*
11
q^rft
ilsm srr^Ti^
finite
ll
q^, fe g,
nrlrflrf%
^ranj*
11
verb followed by
<rn*, g?*lr
*f$k
f?<rt jrrt
II
^ rera^sr?^
or f% or
retains
accent in the Chhandas.
The
f^*
II
11
anuvritti of
Thus with
3j?J5t
amf*^ should not be taken in

have: m\ *TO5?ST^T TOjfc
vve
the Imperfect (J) 2nd person singular of

have,
The
of Tudadi class.
but that of
verb
3^3P
With
is
f? vve
I.
2.4). The verb 35Tf$rr is the Present (r*r)
The samprasarana takes place because it belongs
By the previous sutra VI 1 1.
With 3 we have, 3TN3*r*3irR 5 %
fMr ^T l^FrT ft
Plural of
|T^r
this sutra,
ll
Rig Ved.
of Adadi class.
to n?irrt class.
ll
would have retained its accent, so also in

I. 30 a verb in connection with
VIII.
I. 34, and in connection with 5 by VIII.
sutra
the
by
with
connection
f|
niyama rule. The verb retains its accent

and not any other. If any other
when
retain
not
its accent.
Thus tr *^T *J%m%
Particle follows, the verb need
+
HeretffHf is the 1st Person Dual of the Imperative of
I.
39: the present sutra
is,
therefore, a
these three Particles only follow
11
^(^+^+^=u?
Bk. VIII.
&TT?
The verb
Cii.
1 1 1.
t*f^f
I. .
Accent
58]
92 = rfaPT the
is
the 2nd Person Singular of the Imperative of the root f<^,
is
followed by the Particle
it
would have retained
n being elided, asltRr
have retained
its
3. 14,
accent.
But now
accent.
ing after a non f*r^ word &:
then the preceding
other reading
is
II
Because (J^ is a raj*f <7K (VIII. 1. 51),

it, and therefore, by VIII. 1. 52 it would
loses
accent because
its
visarga of
a Vedic anomaly, the visarga
It is
^faf^^MiRdfediM^ci'ic*: X^
vîft
II
II
57.
85 and 99).
it is a ^^follow&: is elided before ^by VIII.

lengthened and we have
(VI. 3. in). An-
it
The
II
3T is
*tT^r%f?
4.
1 1 1.
Here in K\$J? *jf? (=*r?re 3TTff9), the verb^T?T^

and does not retain its accent. But for this rule,
stt,
its
like
is
another <%în connection with
is
4.
preceded by the Particle 9TT^
\j%m
1521
verb retains
finite
not preceded by a Gati Particle
changed to
^R, fee*, *sr,
when
accent,
its
(I. 4.
II
is
sil
*Thr-
it is
60 &c), and when
it
followed by ^R, r%^, %, ^Tt^ &c, a Taddhita affix, or by its

own doubled form.
Thus ^tT: fofa <*n %^tT TTfa fNTt, ^TfrT: farfta
The list of
Gotradi words is given under sutra VIII. 1. 27. Thus^fxT T^TW *TiHR., $l<r\
f =qf?f a^, ^frT ?Nf^ JT^^Tl. &c. The Gotradi words, here also, denote cenis
II
sure and contempt.
With a Taddhita
^rT:
affix,
*&*% S^rT
<Nf?T
examples should be given with anudatta Taddhita

(V.
3.
65 and
Any
67).
the verb to lose
its
as
3.
(V.
The
like ^rq^r, ^f^T*
other Taddhita affix added to the verb would cause
accent, the
<T9rmî
With a doubled
Why do we say
TTfrT *S?T*UI
affixes,
Taddhita accent overpowers the verb accent
67).
verb, as
I^tP
fcrfrT
T^TW
(I
when not preceded by a Participle called Gati ?

The word irfa in this sutra as well as in *T*TT%ft
Observe ^^tP it i^frT ^pt
R^ (VIII. 1. 68) should be taken in its restricted sense, namely upasargas
'
'
11
treated as Gati, and not the extended definition
Therefore the verb retains
its
accent here
According to others, throughout
of Gati as given in
U^fffrfo
s^r,
^^
Book Eighth,
this
4.
6r.
^jpfrercrfrT,
3?t
I.
the word Gati
means, the Upasarga Gati.
^rfcl ^
^rf^ ^
ff%:
II
^
<T*rT
58.
its
^Tf>
ft^rTW:
II
xT,
<TC
STTT^g,
^fHT mfa
finite verb,
accent before the Particles
II
II
not preceded by a gati, retains
^, 3?^
and
xs^
VIII. 1. 24 ).
Accent
1522
The
^rff words are those mentioned in sutra VIII.
*Sr^f, and %^f rf: t^^HT ?lr^^
first
verb loses
its
verb retains
6t
Thus ^r^f
24.
we have f^Ff:
gati,
fl"
^rfa
^T
*T
J^refH
^H
accent by virtue of the next sutra, but the second
its
accent.
^rarnftft srsnrr
*^f?T
i.
I.
II
But when preceded by a
Here the
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
x*.
ll
qîfo
ll
^, m,
*fnt, sr*nrr n
11
The
59.
connection with
^r
first finite
and
srr
verb only retains
its
accent in
II
The anuvritti of acri^r*. which was drawn in the last sutra, does not run
Thus r%vrfr c&r^ft, w\ ^ irf^rt *rt*P^r îîm, ^r m ire?/?
into
this.
11
The word
verb
is
and
^r,
sutra,
2tt*T
meant, whether this
before the verb, or after the verb,
not so in the
11
mere connection with the

connection takes place by adding these words ^
in the sutra indicates that the
last
The word
).
is
immaterial for the purposes of this
snTTT
shows that the first verb
gov-
is
erned by this rule and not the second.
%WNIH
tfir
ffrr*.
11
II
when an
The word
or a fault
q^Tft
II
II
%*T*TO
^, ffa,
f%^ft*TFFrrf3srTTr *nrr% fsrersi
In connection with
60.
accent,
Co
\ 9Rf s^r stw
^,
the
offence against custom
fsrar
means an
is
II
TOwnrarc
first
11
verb retains
its
reprimanded.
error or mistake of duty, a breach of etiquette
against good breeding.
WT
He himself goes on a car,

Thus *sre ?
*9fsf |, TTI^P* T?rf% ^22^
^^ 5 arr^t ^fÎ \,
while he causes his Preceptor to trudge behind on foot
makes
the
preceptor
eats
rice,
and
eat the
Himself
the
^qr^ra ^r^^ Tr^^frT
'
'.
'
Here in both examples, the nighata of the

The verbs become svarita-pluta by VIII. 2. 104.
gruel
'.
3T^r% firfSWtft
ff^T-.
11
st?
^n
as
accent,
when
^tt%
11
^,
3T%, r% ft
verbs
$m,
is
prohibited.
\\
fî 3=^r *wfafr^f^rssrTrr wlr nrfwt ito*ipt ^5^ fsrarar ^

61.
its
11
first
when
In connection with
it
refers
The word f%prafT

The word ^ in
Thus
the
first
verb retains
to various commissions, ( as
a breach of good manners
missions.
3?^;,
is
condemned
11
well
).
means sending a person to perform several comthe sutra draws in the anuvritti of
& 3T? 5TR *re^, '** 3T? 3Tla3 T5^
So
also
f^rar also.
when
f^qr
is
meant,
bk. VIII. Ch.
mqq ut
I.
The
Accent.
64]
1523
prohibition of nigh&ta and prolation are as in the last apho-
rism.
-cn^N^^M^KUlH
VIKUIH
$^
||
q^T^T
xT,
II
^ft, q^,
3T^,
ffo,
3T^
When
62.
retains
accent,
its
=gr
when
and
sr^ are elided, the first
verb
still
with the force of limitation, takes
qgr
their place.
When
by the
does this rT take place
Where
the sense of
or sr?
q*
sentence, but these words are not directly employed, there
^ and sr*
elision of
There the force of ^r
II
that
is
connoted
is
is
then
of aggregation
the
H$%M
),
and of 3T? is that of only ( %^s ). The ^ is elided when the agent is the
same, and 3T$ is elided when the agents are several.
Thus where ^ is elided:f^rT <PT *THT fe$, f^ff
K" q T^3g = *TFT
'
'
So where
$m&, *R7^
fft<3
st?
is
elided:
as:^tT
^ ?TR
fresrg, ZGfR tT
v& 3*^3 ^T^J = *TPT
II
Why
do we say st^^T^T when limitation is meant ? See %^tT: 5^

The word
here has the sense of never 'an imTT%3j%
possibility
The first sentence means ^ ^P*T *fr$*ffi"
+ ij^ = ^^ by qr^:T
1.
Vart
VI.
).
(
94
Ht^r,
*TW
'
spHT
'
II
'
'
'.
II
first
When
and
sjt,
verb optionally retains
its
accent.
63.
xr,
st^
^T
are elided,
the
Thus with *r 3pT:3agr 5ft?3T ^RT or w?f??,

TT 3Tr5*ra pf^ "
Here *rer% optionally may either lose or retain its accent. So also when 3TT is
So also with the remaining.
elided, as
sftflfST tSfar or 5%f q% &%jy
:
ll
thrT%r% xt T^r^|%
s^mrar 3^r
tfrr "
Wr
64.
optionally,
in
1 srnr, sr%, ^t, a-q fa

m^nr^ff*rnrr Tr^nrr *rer% s-^flr f^r
Also in connection with % and ^TW,
11
s*
11
q^rr%
11
11
Jnrer
the
11
Chhandas,
the
first
verb
may
retain
its
accent.
^Thus^l^Rni^r^fiCorsTr^),
SdffrT arrcfhf (or
out the particle Y). 3T*
*rRr^n>TT*3Trcftfiii
STT^), *lÎH*Ni<lri (Taittariya Sanhita VI.
%S3 ^rtfa,
or sntffa
),
%<T* srrcft?*
II
fwfr^^r
4. 10, 1.
but with
r524
Accent.
%
fj%:
has the force of *$* and
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
and wr^ that of sy%Rf and t$?
srer,
I.
67
II
^7 5Tsr f&m**ti wwfrw g=?fir srsrcr frr^f^r*rf^ff *rnsrr m&jMr *wf?r 3T5fi% f^r%
65.
Also in connection with *f> and 3T?qr, optionally
11
11
Chhandas, the first verb retains its accent, when theê

words have the same meaning ( 'the one the other' ).
in the
mtPm fsikfa
Thus
ajf^
),
or f^wffr
Why
),
Veda
sPTST5rar 3TRrqr^?ftr% (Rig
I.
3>fwwf%
mm?*'- fqrctp% ^rff^r ( or
164. 20, Mundaka Upanishad III. 1).
II
do we say sreqf^ having the same meaning

Here *r?ff is a Numeral and has not the sense of sfst
The word w*r is used, in fact, to restrict the meaning of ij^j,
'
'
<nraBfJ[ H
meanings: while there

ff31%
%^ tTTT
II
JPTCr
^Rf^Sc^ SPSHTOT
STPTRar
^?f tTT%9I^
ffrfJ
C*
II
5^rft
II
q^TPT
^ ST5*1%
V<H,
II
frf tT, f^^rrTRfrR"^
^TfrPCTUI ZPTT^r%%f%
ZrfWl
S^T
its
3T*T
II
for
^ ^3-
one another \
'the
it
has various
ij^rsarrif
ir=ir%
'T
II
f tTT^, ftt^
II
II
11
In connection with 1? in
66.
verb retains
no ambiguity about the word
is
See
all
its
the
forms,
accent always.
The anuvritti of snTTT and z$fa ceases. The prohibition of nighata,

which commenced with st i$? ( VIII. 1. 29 ) is present here also. In what ever
sentence the word
occurs, that is called ai^f^r
The word f^r denotes here
the form of q% in
3-rFC
II
According to Kasika,
and ^TR are not included, according to Patanjali they should be included.
all its
declensions with case affixes.
See also the explanation of r%frf
in
VIII.
1.
X.
see
48.
Thus ql $^g, ?T nri^ra,

gî, g& ??n%, wt ^mr^ Î*T: ( Rig Veda
For the form 2f?q^
) q&f^ *U%$\m ( T. S. V. 5. 1. 1. )
qfg: f^%
VI. 3. 92. Though the sutra is in the Ablative ( 5^f tTT^ ) and therefore
121. 10
requires that the verb should im-mediately follow
11
it,
yet in
intervention of ^r: does not prevent the operation of this
^5^^ ^X%
rule,
^JfrT,
the
according to
the opinion of Patanjali.
soever'.
time or
<q^-*w
Optionally when the sense is that of wheresoever

The word ^TPlT^fr*^ means vfreg 'as one wishes', without
The nighdta is prohibited here also. As ?^f
space.
Vdrt:
'
tj^r
^*fcr
or when-
'
'
regard of
a
5r?r
zrsRT <TT
11
Hî^kîfiidnîTi qngrf^TO:
^Tf%î.ii^"rwii
11
evs
11
q^n%
11
ijsrera;,
4pwn, **&
Bk. VIII. Ch.
I.
Pronouns.
67]
After a word denoting praise
67.
the word whose praise
^rrgrr^ class,
This refers to compounds, the
The word
noting words.
Thus
csrgrf^:,
n should
final
first
belonging to
denoted, becomes aund&tta.

members of which are praise-deto the sutra from a Vartika.
srsTrwrev, ôrrfa^re?:
be elided
an adverb, and therefore
is
is
added
is
3refWT3i:, ^reif*^^:,
Vdtt\ The
word g^<*
1525
11
forming these words.
in
in the accusative case, like rr*rM?T
such a case, there can be no compounding: hence the elision of

This
the opinion of Vartika
is
kara Katyayana.
is
The
:
II
In
taught.
According to KaSika, there is

elided by the general rule of
compounding under irgr. szrcratfft rule, and so x^ is

This becoming of strffrrT takes place in the compound, and after
In fact, it is an exception to the general rule by which a comcomposition.
pound is finally acute ( VI. I. 223 ) But there is no elision in ^PSiPT^T^: &c.
samasa.
and there
no
is
the
is
is
where the case -affix
also denoted,
not heard, there the second
n is
no compounding, there
Though
By
of accent also of the second word.
loss
this further fact
is
the word
no
member becomes
is
the Vartika
When
anudatta.
elision of n,as ^r^TT^TW, fnTTTsSTT^P
5R would have
implied
its
'^pynrw',
not employed and so

there
II
correlative term vf^nr,
the specific mention of l%?T in the aphorism indicates, that the word denoting
follow immediately after the
qf^RT should
peculiar construction of the sutra,
:f?
ing rule
s^r^r
qsMr
is
word denoting
fr?r
ft^TSfa ^R^4*TBffat " In this subdivision or context,
though a word may be exhibited
in the
Ablative case,
it
does not follow that
there should be consecutiveness between the Ablative and the
by
This has been illustrated
it".
explaning forms like
Though
ment of
this
sjysilF
in
^F^rftT &c.
'
in
word indicated
the previous rule of 2R[f TTr^ R5TO., in
the anuvritti of anudatta
term
In fact, this
11
a jfiapaka of the existence of the follow-
'
was
current, the express
employ-
the sutra indicates that the prohibition (of anudatta)
which also was current, now ceases.
On
this
subject,
Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
will
the following extract from

give the view of later
the
Commentary on
The words
Grammarians
meaning wonderful, prodigious and are

words denoting praise. This is an aphorism appertaining to samasa subject.
In the examples the compounding takes place under the rule of Mayura-
Sire &c, are all
vyansakadi.
synonyms of
3T*[cr,
Accent.
1526
Vdrt:
The
elision
of
'
is
if,
The
natural.
69
elision of the case
affix, in
this
nothing new, but only
vaitika, therefore, teaches
This
repeats this general rule in a particular form.
I.
q *>mq, + sivsgrrep, in
should be mentioned.
making the compound of these two words, the

case
Bk. VIII. Ch.
the opinion of the
is
But according to Kayyata, the commentator on the Great

and the words î^'-TH &c, are
aphorism is not a samasa rule
authors of Kas*ika.
Bhashya,
this
words when
no authority for holding these] to] be
compounds under the Mayuravyansakadi class. Haradatta also says, had
this been intended to be a samasa rule, the word ^rr% would have been
used in the sutra and this is valid. There is no adhikara of samasa here, that
could have caused samasa and in this view, the vartika *n*t<TO also becomes
adverbs not admitting of samasa
they are not compounded.
effective
had
'frrg,
10 3T5^J, 11
it
been a samasa
12 qrc, 13
r%^
*FTf?n;fa
ll
and so the
There
rule,
2 ?re*r, 3 sT^rmr^, 4
*RT,
3*s[,
^rar,
is
the vartika would have been redundant.

ar^, 8
9 st^t,
3^,
5 sr^rrr, 6 srsirrfr, 7
14 tw, 15 5, 16
<T3Tfa *r,
II
rule applies to these
am 17 3T^PJT
:
f^
*ft.
"
(After such words denoting praise) the finite

praised) becomes anudatta, even along with the
any, that may precede it.
68.
verb (which
Gati, if
is
Whether a finite verb is compounded with a gati or stands single, both

compound and the simple verb lose their accent, when it is qualified by the
By VIII. 1. 28, the finite
adverbs sfirg &c. Thus ^qr^rra 2^3fi?> H\ mi$ 52^!S
the
11
verb would have lost
by VIII.
30
1.
in
its
accent after the word
connection with
^;
cfjrg,
but this loss was prohibited
the present sutra re-ordains the
loss,
by
setting aside the prohibition of VIII. 1. 30.

The word grrfgr 'along with its Gati', indicates that the Gati even loses
its
by
The word
accent.
3
wfti% ftstp*
ll
ii
therefore, does not

ll
Therefore not here
11
The word fifths used in the sutra to indicate

&c in the preceding sutra, were non 1$^ words
rule of
ff*n
is
u# ^ctfcr, ^ 3?r& ^*ft *<iRf
ii
i.
e.
words qualified
were substantives.
apply here.
^TTr%;n **Hr,
sriffTCfa faferlr *r3ra
that the
rt,
gft, smtsrn^r
f;^ ^ *%
ll
TnmW$rar top
*rr-
finite verb, along with its preceding Gati,

69.
any, becomes anud&tta, when a Noun, denoting the fault of
the action, follows, with the exception of nbr &c.
if
Bk. VIII. Cn.
The
sutra
70
I. .
Accent.
anuvritti of
<T*f?j
(VIII.
1527
But the anuvritti of the
17) ceases.
1.
Thus Q^rfn *f^, vmi5 !%, *fe fawiT 55^f? fatsjr

do we say $HH 'denoting the fault of the action'? See
current.
is
Why
last
11
q^rfa
ÊTt-
mil
Why do
Why do
we say |jft 'a noun'? Observe fcrfrT Rp^rrf%

we say with the exception of trnr &c. See fofrf
II
H^R, T^T% Jn^TH.

F^rA-
must be the
It
should be mentioned that the
mode
fault relating to the
The rule will not apply, if the z$m*1

Thus fclf^ 'f^K-H', ffT^rm gf% K
of this
is
Vdft;
word
It
word *I%
I.
it is
finally acute,
it
The
11
11
to the
effect
The
a word without a derivation. Therefore by JCTfarf^
it is
be end-acute. The vdrtika, therefore, indicates that when

of accent of the verb* then it is end-acute, but in other
According to Padamanjari,
acute on the beginning.
loses its accent, then qpf
jTT^f?5 *fif or !TTÎ^T %\H'

:
is
end-acute.
180),
its
<xfrf is
and
derived
is first
acute/
accent optionally
Thus
3^rf?5 Tftf:, or *T^rRT 5r<p,
fault
must
II
Kdrikd. The following noun denoting
The
*r
because of the indicatory
from by adding the Unadi affix f^r diversely (Un IV.

Vdrt: A finite verb in the plural number, loses
when
and not
to the agent
1) it will
<t% causes the loss

cases
refers
fa^ formed word, because it is not feminine, as we find it in

ffimHJ nor is it a word formed by r%*gr affix, because this is not
a ?^T word; therefore,

(Phit
is
sutra,
not a
sentences like
mentioned In the
should be stated that qf^ has an indicatory
that the
qt*t is
'fault'
of doing the action, denoted by the
action.
verb.
*TT*Pl,fora
II
refer to the action.
intended only in the case of non-verbs, because
H
it is so said
by those of old. The word *r% has an indicatory ^r, but it is optionally so
when the verb is plural. The elision of ^ mentioned above refers to the elision
of
elision of
^ in
is
^T^rpqr-spanTOj:
Jj3l*H*WK^r
= SPS^nwraP
*TT%fcfHl vs* n
ffrr
11
The words 3^pfa mean srr^TTWrafnnT-
II
II
nfrr^tr <r^f
70.
<*?rft
s^nft
II
**rfw
nft:,
*T*fr
II
11
Gati becomes unaccented, when followed
by another Gati.
Thus srwjsftfa, ?sfroif?r, arfwroif 3*f%
Why do we say irfa: " a Gati
becomes &c "? Observe V^StT: Jn^fa
Here %?n^r is a Pratipadika and does
not lose its accent. Why do we say when followed by a Gati ? Observe sfr
Here s?r is a Gati to the verb jnft, the complete
*Fkfcj SftPT aftf? HfC *mf*T:
verb is srrarf?
But as srr is not followed by a Gati, but by a Pratipadika
Had the word Tr not been used in the sutra, this
l?ff, it retains its accent.
would
have lost its accent, because the rule would have been too wide,
<m
without any restriction of what followed it.
ll
II
'
'
11
ll
1528
Accent.
^-Mtifrf
firftF
%f^.
rf?rrer%
11
*r^t
11
ftrf%,
II
^tttT^
^,
I.
71
II
11
Gati becomes anud&tta, when followed by
finite verb.
The word
Why
q^rfa
11
bk. VIII. Ch.
ms^ ^rpr^r q^r n^^rrfr >r^r%
71.
an accented
vs?
II
Thus
understood here.
TTfrf; is
have we used the word rms*
in
irj
5 TCnr,
the sutra?
V5TOT3
II
In order to restrict
the scope of the word ^TrrefrT

so that a Gati would not become accentless
before every udatta word, but only before udatta verbs. Thus srr does not
;
become anudatta before *%: in sfl *?NF fc? fTCPT
If it be said that the

word *rft is a particular name which the Particles get before verb only, and
therefore
*rf?r
like as the
would always
word father
refers to its coi relative
that, therefore, ^^TtT^rt
v&:
then also
we say
So
must
is
here
its
anudatta, but the f^r^^f form
^h%
II
if in
its
like
is
conjugated form (f^^^f )
Thus
accent.
in
jt
^RrfrT,
the root
udatta, hence the rule will apply
Obj
root.
in
a f^^rT, the designation of

If fare
is
ending forms,
is
this
JT
fact,
explained
iTf^f is
II
with regard to ^rg or verbal
used for this purpose, then the rule
like
but as a matter of
How
and
which would not have been the case had s^lrreRf not been qualified by
For the maxim is Hitra^^r STF?^
t JrfrT *fairepfa% *T*TrT:
Therefore
TPT
and not to a noun
sjtt?
employment of the term fafe is necessary, in

the verb must be a finite verb, and not a verbal root.
not udatta, the tt% will not lose
fafe
term son and not nephew
refer to the verb like
that though a verbal root be udatta, yet

is
and not to noun,
verb,
that the
order to indicate that
it
term
refer to its correlative
T^fw^ri and siq^f^mR,

we
find that
q-
are
notf^rf;
loses its accent, in these forms also.
Ans. Here there are two views
with the completed
not apply to an
will
for these
some compound the
form q^frraw
According to them, this jt
would get the accent, on the rule that an Indeclinable first member retains its
Gati
HT
3*r*rer
II
so that even if the word f^^ was not used in the sutra, the
2. 2)
form TermrKR being the second membei of a compound, became anudatta; and
so * being followed by an anudatta never loses its accent. According to
accent (VI.
its accent in ^q'qfdrH I &c.

Others compound the word ending in srm ( 1î%rTC ) with the Gati, and having formed
According to this view, the 3TP* accent
STT^ftnT?:, tnen add the affix srpi u
them, therefore, the Gati never loses
debars
(
SlfaT^re
other accents, on the
all
),
and so
it
is
maxim, 'the accent of the
anudatta, not by this rule, but by
According to them the word
last prevails'
sttTCHT'EfI
<TS*T^3
According to both of these views,

But there is a
this sutra is not necessary for the purposes of Jrremai &c.
There is
third view which makes this sutra necessary even for this purpose.
this
maxim
is
srrqf^rrcni
irfipRT^mSRPJ, Wt-
ST?
II
STTCT'^T
*TT^
I^T%
" It
should be
72
I .
stated that Gatis,
Accent.
1529
Karakas and Upapadas are compounded with bases that end
with Kfit-affixes, before a case-termination has been added to the latter".
maxim itself has been explained in two different ways, one saying that
compounding takes place with krit-formed words only before the addition
of case-affixes but with words formed by Taddhita affixes, the compounding
does not take place before a case affix has, been added. The other view
makes no such difference between krit-formed and non-krit formed words.
This
the
This
latter
view
view, the
Gati
So both
and
q-
not necessary for our purposes.
is
jt
q^rrerrnra.
Why
it is
first
not a fj^rT
ll
having different accents, the present sutra became
necessary to cause the loss of accent of
the verb loses
According to the
can never be compounded with t^TTCRTO as
sr
ll
have we used the word Ki-tufa ? See % T^rfrT,

its accent by VIII. I. 28, hence the Gati retains
s
tf
Here
3fn% H
its
accent.
ro^JI
72.
istent, (for the
and the
preceding Vocative
considered as non-ex-
purposes of the accent of the following! word,
forms of
enclitic
Such a Vocative
The
is
3^5
treated as
is
and
^TOTf).
not at
if
all
existing,
it is
simply ignored.
presence otherwise would have caused does not take

place, and that operation takes place which would have taken place had it not
operation which
existed.
existent?
What are the

They are (1)
vocative, which the
As "MMr
its
Wi\4t\
cative to lose
its
first,
particular purposes served
taken as a
Here the
first
accent, but
it
less-ness of the verb required
The
q^,
The
is
prevented, as
application
s^Tf tT
of VIII.
remains
by VIII.
fsrfxr
as non-
acute
first
1.
28
is
r^ (not %) vw1.
37 takes
away anything from
Particle from the verb: as,
^[^
f^rfrr
19.
1.
does not cause the second Vo-
by VI.
prevented:
PPl,
I.
198. (2)
as,
The accent
%^r T^T^
II
(3)
and aw?;, required by VIII.
t^r H*T (not %) m^' &H

spite of the
place, in
of the Vocative between the Particle and the verb

considered as taking
it
would have caused under VIII.
Vocative
substitution of the shorter forms of 3^3;
20-23
by considering
the absence of the accent-less-ness of the subsequent
II
I.
(4)
intervention
such intervention
is
not
the immediateness (bpr^cT^) of the
<T?Rt H
(5)
For the purposes of VIII.
1.
though a Vocative may precede *mf the latter is still considered as sr pju iira^f and VIII. 1. 47 applies, as^^r^Tf fcrfSTll (6) So also in the case of VIII.
1. 49, as 3TTff twr faft, 3*Trfr^T*r T^rer, no option is allowed here by VIII.
47,
1.
50.
Accent.
1530
Why
'altogether'
do we use the word

In other words,
instead of saying
istent",
vocative does produce
vocative Vt
is
"it
its
'as if
why do we
I. .
"it
considered as
is
particular effect.
considered as one word
73
or RJ in the sutra, instead of saying
say
if
non-ex-
considered altogether non-existent"?
is
own
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
Thus
(q^fPrr*:) for the
srpi ^r
in
f^r
The
!
the
purposes of separating
sn* from the vocative "^rT under VIII. 1. 55. This is the opinion of Patanjali; but the opinion of the author of Kasika is that Hr would have been considered as
srwrerc^ but
do we say
say
VIII.
for
Why
'a
1.
Vocative'
73.
Observe ^frT:
^ 'with regard to the subsequent word?
The
Why
|f?!ffr
vocative
itself will
do we
not be
considered as non-existent, for the application of rules that would apply to
Thus
vocative as such.
VI.
1.
193
In
also.
and the vocative
is
in fifrT
fact,
^^rT, the vocative ^frr gets
the word *% connotes
its
correlative
its
<re
accent by
'subsequent';
considered as non-existent, for the purposes of the opera-
tions to be performed on such subsequent term, whether such operation be caused

by the vocative itself, or by any other cause; but it is not to be considered non-
existent for the purposes of operations to be performed upon

in fSfSri
STC^RT
213%,
l^n%, Devadatta does get the accent of the vocative.
*nfffc
the
first
and, therefore,
vocative
q${
is
irjf is
itself.
In
Therefore
\i{
*r ifjf
35*T
considered as non-existent with regard to
considered as following immediately after the pada
and thus q&t becomes anudatta, not because of r|f, but because ofir; similarly fl^S and ^ry are anudatta, not because of the preceding Vocative,
but because of %
stop the action of %
73.
ral idea, is
In other words, the intervention of the vocatives does not
II
II
perceding vocative, when
not to be considered as
if
it
conveys a gene-
non-existent, for the
purposes of the subsequent Vocative, which stands in apposition

with the former.
This sutra prevents the operation of the
case
first.
last
sutra in the particular
when the two Vocatives are in apposition, and the second qualifies the
The first vocative being considered
Thus ire 5?!3, 5w*^Qd*|winrai
11
as existing, second vocative loses
Why
do we say
and
is
ffi5W*r ?
not in
accent.
Observe ^^tT 5^1% here

do we say 'standing in apposition or
Observe \^r ^F^rT 31^, here the word qf^d qualifies SRTfrr,
apposition with t^r, and hence it retains its accent.
the verb does not lose
*!HH
its
its
'the
vocative subsequent'?
accent.
Why
Bk. VIII. Cn.
Why do
74
Accent.
we say
3EPTr
*m-^ g
'which
1531
is
The
a generic word'?
rule will
not apply when the Vocatives are synonyms.

f^sSf
f^5^
qrm% ?T
henc
hence
all
3T^ ?rr*rrr%
retain
ll
All these
their accent of the
Padc
Padamanjari
the reading given
first is
ing the
first,
9TTSTO
^j^-^hh
According to
198).
I.
ft c^s [f^ src^r
HIWR
fir*
II
number,
^^rc^
ll
vs
ll
^ft
will apply.
ftvnforac,
11
f^r^r^r-
ll
When
74.
ral
Vocative (VI.
Taittariya Br. is:
and both are in the singular number, there the present rule
f^rffa^ fa$>N <A < fr

^r^r,
in
yiHI'SHÎI means 'a generic term'. When

a generic term, and the second is a Specific term, (R%q" T*TT) qualify-
TT$ f^Jrf, ijrnf^
the
Thus Ire^t Vr% ire^TR %\ 5fF^

Vocatives are synonyms of Saraswati, and
is
in
the Plu-
optionally considered as non-existent,
is
it
the preceding Vocative
the subsequent Vocative, in apposition with
it,
is
if
a specific
term.
This ordains option, where the
sideration of the
WVr s^sp
11
The
first
last sutra
would have made the con-
Thus ^%p 5?^:
vocative as existent compulsory.
in3rJTr%%5*rcoTT: or I^^s^T^1r?r^2^^
or
11
^TPTRIT^* is understood here the second vocative,

therefore, must be a Rr^TW^, as being the correlative of the former where
is then the necessity of employing the word f%%q-f=q-% in the sutra ?
This
word is used in the aphorism for the sake of precision only.
Why do we say 'in the plural number'? Observe $Tr<n^f 3rf|w3?
No
anuvritti of
11
option
is
allowed here, and the preceding vocative
is
always considered as
existent and so rule VIII. 1.73 applies.
The
sutras 73
and 74 as enunciated by Panini
3^;
74. *TRI**M!T f^rrfarT
with
it.
are:
73.
?TPn%% ^H H lfa -
f^tW*T*T (i. e. 73. The preceding Vocative is not

considered as non-existent, if the subsequent word is a Vocative in apposition
74.
Optionally
subsequent vocative
is
so, if
the preceding vocative
a particular term).
Patanjali
is
a general term and the
made
the
amendment by
adding srrei'^W^ to 73 also, and the author of Kas"ika has added ^^-mi to
74 from the commentary of Patanjali and has omitted STFTR*T'ER^ from it:
though he reads
its anuvritti.
BOOK EIGHTH.
Chapter Second.
^^rrfosre
f^saRL rTW
I
II
v^fa
? n
11
2RT *HI<2*IHI*>iUWtf3s*Rrr
Whatever
1.
end of the work,
is
^r,
sr-fsnseq;
II
^TOFT*! TrtFTt SESTET S^T^T
will
*T^
frT
3tK ^tTO-
be taught hereafter, npto the
to be considered as not taken effect, in
relation to the application of a preceding rule.

is an Adhikara or governing rule, and extends upto the end of the
Whatever we shall teach hereafter is to be understood as non-existent,
with regard to the preceding rule. With regard to whatever has been taught
in the preceding Seven Books and a quarter, the rules contained in these
This
Book.
And
three last chapters are considered as asiddha.

chapters, a subsequent rule
ceding rule
The
rule
is
concerned.
is
"as
effective rule".
if
is,
as if
it
had not taken
The word
non-effective, does not
further,
effect,
in these three
so far as any pre-
srf^rar*= TKHR*Mi^>
fo^r^t T Ûi%
li
produce the operation of a siddha or
This rule of non-effectiveness
is
for the
sake of prohibiting
the operation of an ades*a rule, and establishing the operation of an utsarga or

general rule.
Thus
sr^TT TO*; ST
ST'ST;
fT 3TFTO, STCTT arrff^:
II
In
all
these,
the
^ and f; by VIII. 3. 19, being considered as not to have taken effect,

no further sandhi, and srr + S does not give rise to guna, nor srr + ST a
elision of
there
srr
is
In
II
or the
fact, for
#|
taken effect at
2,
102 st
1.
101, the rule VIII.
3.
19
1.
87,
considered as not to have
is
all.
Similarly
(VII.
the purposes of the application of gn^&or: rule of VJ.
rule of VI.
STSs%, STS^TPfc
3T5f&T^ from *TO5
being substituted for the
final
II
Tnus ST^ + =snr + ^
^, which again merges
in the
BK. VIII. CH.
II. .
preceding 9T VI.
for
^ of
ASIDDIIA-RULE.
97) =3T5 +
I.
Now
*rs).
nouns ending
is
The
should not take place.
8o.
3 being
^jfaF^rr,
substituted for
533
and
*T,
takes place only after Pro-
a pronoun ending in
s,
so this
(VII.
|*r
I.
14)
present sutra helps us out of this difficulty, and
the change of st into 3 by VIII.

of the application of VII. 1. 14.
The forms
2.
the substitution of *% for
but ST5
in 3T;
^ (VIII.
2.
80
is
considered asiddha for the purposes
SJ*3v5^r> OTPRP*
sfrsre<t
and ^rf^TPi
illustrate
this rule excellently.

(1) Sjr^^TT "
(<T
changed to
Sjs=ffMl
Add
To
by VIII.
gj
the root
2.
we add
|j<t
5i) = U^Tii
to this the affix
sfj
(V.
Add
3.
the Nishtha
<r,
as
uf + <r = U* + 37
the feminine affix zj% and
70, 73), as
^jsfrr + 37 - W*Xtt,
we have
the femi-
nine of which with yr* will be ^js^^rr (the shortening taking place by VII.
Now
13).
st is
changed to $ by VII.
3.
44 and we have
^jr^r^jr
Now
ll
4.
rule
VII. 3. 46 makes this f substitution optional, when a 3? precedes the 3T, as is

But
the case here: and that rule would require the alternative form 3*3?^ ll
is no such alternative form, because the 3? of ^jsgjj was the substitute of
by VIII. 2. 51, which is considered as asiddha for the purposes of the appli-
there
?T
cation of VII.
3.
46.
Here ruIe VI. 3. 37 would have required the form to

(2) ^gs^sre^r
be fp*hi*t^ m like Tfjfarrar^qT; there being no pufi-vad-bhava when there is a
penultimate 3? II But the 37 in $*m being the result of VIII. 2. 51 is consill
dered as asiddha for the purposes of VI.

(3) snf*r*rp*
adding the
ll
This word
affix *rg<^ to the
may
3.
37.
be considered to have been formed by
Patronymic word
$rrf^ or to the
noun OTPP* [R-
The word w*T is formed by adding the

TOnrnHsTTR:, or OTTTSTOTCrrfffi = Wf^l
Nishtha <r to the root%, as tlr + S-OT + ST (VI. 1.45) = WT (the ^ being changed
ll
to
1 by VIII.
2.
53).
Now
this
poses of application of VIII.
*r
2. 9,
is
considered as non-effectual for the pur-
which requires the change of jt of t^ to
when Hrl is added to a word having a penultimate

we have OTTOTHt and not Sffl^T^
*T,
^r,
Therefore
as in wffarcc H
II
(4) srrsre?!
II
This
is
the Aorist third person singular of the Derivative
from the Past-Participle of ^11
root
sfrfs,
to
pt^r in the sense of 3THS3(l
it
formed by adding -q^
CHI.
1,
26):
Thus 73 + 3=3*? (VI.

and then form
its
1.
^f
15).
11
Add
The
which the stem is reduplicated (VI.

1. 11). In reduplicating, all the rules that went before in forming gj* are considered asiddha; viz. the rule by which 3 was changed to s (as 73 + 3 = 33 + 3 m 3$ +
is
9 VIII.
1.
31), the rule
(III.
1.
48), before
by which 3 was changed
to
*T
(3^+3 = 3?;+** VI I L
l.
ASIDDHA-RULE.
1534
[BK. VIII. CH.
II. .
by which q- was changed to 7 (VIII. 4. 41), and the rule by which

7 was elided (VIII. 3. 13 as ^+S = S + <J=3>* VI. 3. 1 11). The elision
40), the rule
the
first
of f* before f% being considered sthanivat,
+ <l=3^ft
(VII.
? added by VII.
the augment,
the affix
it
f^
4. 79,
is
The form
aflrir?*tU
2.
The
from 3f3 ending in
is
10;
formed by adding *rg^ to the word 33f%*,

Here also the *i of ^57 is not changed into
because the change of ^to^ (VIII. I. 3), and again
This
II
is
f^ Qn %7)
rules of interpretation, however, contained

this part also;
the previous part
in
because such rules connot be considered
'prior' or
they become operative then only when occasion requires to apply them.
*#; for
The maxim which governs such rules is cfirfro* f? ^TT Jrf*>TP$P

which are exhibited here
seventh case, as VIII.
2.
The
II
the sixth case such as VIII.
in
26, or the fifth case, as
preted in accordance with the sutras

3tTCTO
54).
are considered asiddha.
wilPapply to
fore,
^.
Thereisno
of VII. 4. 93. With
4.
3TTr^rqr
gfrnrtfl
as 3*337 +
11
formed by
^ by VIII.
of 5 to
because of the prohibition of
becomes
(5) SJTT^rn*.
which
we reduplicate^;
6o) = 3SST*^ (VII.4. 62)=3^rfl(VIII.
4.
sr#r
WR
VIII.
3Trr,
2.
27,
rules, there2.
or the
23,
should be inter-
crr^r^m Ptft% *%P?, tTC*m%W
II
But with regard to the paribhasha ft7f%^r Tt

For, by the very fact, that a subsequent
the above will not
37P$,
hold good.
rule in these chapters,
is
held to be asiddha, with regard to the prior, there cannot arise any conflict of
two
conflict, that
not/debarred by the
guna
rule VII.
3.
only where there
it is
This being
the above rule of interpretation applies.
f^jfrai, ar^frsfo formed

is
And
rules of equal force with regard to them.
such a
by
o^q- (III.
1.
124) the
is
so, in
guna ordained by VII. 3. 86

is no conflict between
rule VIII.2. 77, because there
86 and the dirgha-rule VIII.
2.
77, for the latter
is
simply
non-existent with regard to the former.
But though the

an apavada
rTSTTttftW rule
does not apply
an utsarga
rule here even, does over-ride
fore,
not considered asiddha.
by the apavada
%?tp
*$tT
faw^R:
*r*rm
11
i^rf^r
srorsTrgeRT
Thus the utsarga
rule 7T?qT<rr4 (VIII.
H^f% sf&rtfr &iftvt
2.
32),
sr*rrf%>lr
f7W7r%: ^q#r5#tfr^rr*RT
these chapters
rule ff5
rule
(VIII.
and thus we have
&*?h
**
yet
for otherwise, the
The apavada
enunciation of an apavada rule would be useless.
aside
in
rule,
2.
is
there-
31)
fr^TT,
is
set
Wî
win f%pro?ro j^tt-
sf5r4wRT
<tt
3 ^wrcrsr-
BK. VIII. CH.
The
2.
sidered as
ing rules;
ASIDDIIA-RULE.
II. 2 ]
^ (VIII.
elision of a final
not to have taken
if
1535
2.
7)
con-
is
applying the follow-
effect, in
rules regarding case-endings, (2) rules regarding
(1)
accents, (3) rules regarding
any technical term of Grammar,
and (4) rules regarding the augment ft, before a Krit-affix.

The word f^fa in the sutra applies to all the four words preceding it
The force of the Genitive compound in ^fafa, Mtflfafa
as Hfprfa, *Î%fa &c.
gfHfa is that of ordaining the existence of something e.g. when an accent is to
be given to a word, or a particular designation is to be given to it or when q[
The compound ijaf^fa means however, the
is to be added to it, ( Hnrcrr*H ) N
:
which would
rule relating to the case-endings themselves, as well as, the rule
apply to a word, when a case-ending follows
As
(^gp^)
II
Here the elision of ^ of *t3T^ and

So also cnrrrers^ being asiddha, the fvr*r is not changed to ij*t by VII. I. g.
Here the finals of ^rsr and rTCT are not lengthened
**m.> *T$P*li, *T5H|> cTsnj H
before vq\ by gr^T (VII. 3. 102) and nor changed to q before 5 by (VII. 3.
(i) uffafa:
103)
as in
?ro>3ii
and
wftw
(2)
end
but ^rft
in ^r^rfr
VS^Tsfr
first
frspTrft
Similarly in
11
member does
The word
56). ^rsRrfr is
T^pfo an<^
asiddha, the
by VI.
2.
2.
*T5Tîs first acute, as
formed by adding
^far
5*TpN.
first
elision of
is
being
considered not to
the elision of
2.
90.
member does
T being
Similarly
not retain
its
formed by the
affix q^f^(Un I.
jt^ ending word, by IV. 1.6.
50 of ts^-i-sr, and when ^ is elided,
it
is
to the
in st
and would require the accent
90.
(3)
TOTRfa: As TS *?
5
WWW;
^T HIJP*'
asiddha, the words
r^ and
3ftr
in
i.
Being called
q^
word
29.
q^pfois a compound under rule II. 1.

the first member becomes a word ending
of Vi.
II
For the
uspffTr U
not become ady-udatta by VI.
^ being
original accent as required
and not
220, does not apply, for the
1.
the elision of
ii
of the stem ending in 3T
7ft!j
As
asiddha, the rule VI.
asiddha, the
*r5rr*:, <reTPT:
(currntT^.1.
feminine (IV.
24).
are
still
called shash
q^.,
The
elision
of
being
though they no longer end
they do not take zj% in the
10).
1.
According to the Vartikakara, there
is
no necessity of using the word
g^r iTgoTR&Kf ^ ^Ptri^rranTW ), because the elision of ^ is

its having such a designation ( as q^ ).
Thus without
without
its having the name of q^ there would be no elision of *r^ and *r*T
such elision, there is no pada sahjfia of these words, and unless these words
TOT
in the sutra
caused by reason of
get Pada designation, there can be no elision of

designation, however, would not
q;
by VIII.
2. 7.
The shash
be retained by these words after taking
ASIDDHA-RULE
153^
BK. VIII. CH.
II.
when feminine affixes are to be added to them, but for this

The q*^^ and f^ ending in ^ would require #fr< in the feminine,
which is however prohibited, for when *r$ and ^ are elided, the words end in
plural affixes,
sutra.
3T
and require ?pt
How
Q.
wards upon
maxim
all,
taught.
it,
the one
),
'
other view
is
name
that the sanjna sutra
is
given to a
is
be read with every
to
and the sanjna given to the word
afresh, with every
is
to be applied.
This
is
with a
identified
embodied in the
by or unite
3iT&ffR ^rPTft^Trq"* " Sanjnas and Paribhasas are attracted
with the rules that enjoin certain operations. "

will
There are two views
that a particular
This view is embodied in the

and Paribhashas remain where they are
Sanjfia,
vidhi sutra, every time that a vidhi
maxim
is
In other words, the sanjna sutra becomes
operation.
by the
11
as occasions arise.
particular operative sutra,
new
its
prior to any operations; and operations are performed after-
^Rf^TrTH.
The
'
^rr
or with
it
3*jfpt
also prohibited, because,
is
designation of q ^
1
retains
still
can this be the purpose of this sutra
as regard definitions
thing once for
which
for their feminine,
present sutra the word
In the
first
be good throughout, both for the purposes of eliding
prohibiting
3T<r
Hence thus
11
other view, the sutra
is
sutra
is
For
necessary.
view, the
:st*t
and
q? sanjna
and for
But in the
^r*r
not necessary in that view.
the view be taken that a sanjna
if
is
to
be applied with regard to each operation, then that q? sanjfia which had taken
effect for the purposes of eliding
and
will no longer hold good for the
purposes of preventing the application of the feminine

g^n"
taken
is
in this sutra, to
sjfcrfa:
Thus f^stf,
5^ augment
fjfrT 3^ )
being asiddha, the

(
%&W faffT
Some
way:
There
taught
is
this
is
maxim
f?T?f*T:
srfsTTR
in a rule, the application of
Now
".
this elision
is,
?s$rJfr
which
account of the elision of
is
occasioned
by VI.
They argue
f^r%faf*TT ?rfiprcTTO "
^ of fsj-f^ took
cannot be the cause of adding
71.
1.
this
in
That which
is
by the combination
place because of the case affix
Or
the
3^
maxims above
The employment
referred to, are
-arf,
being a %f%t$ oper-
with regard to the antaranga elision of
however, not sound.
that the two
On
II
become the cause of the destruction of that combi-
the elision of
ation would be asiddha
opinion
Hence, the word
not added, though required
hold that 537 need not be read in the sutra.
of two things, does not
nation
affix.
prevent the application of the second view.
II
This
of g*r in this sutra indicates,
not of universal application
i.
e.
they are anijtya.
Here
Why do we say before

g^ is added by VI. 1. 73.
The
elision of
a Krt
^taught by VIII.
affix
2.
Observe
f^f-offg
f'sr^STOT
&c would be asiddha by the
VIII. ClI.
!K.
general rule VIII.
shows that
ASIDDIIA-RULE
II. . 3]
2.
1;
the specification of the four cases in which
niyama
is-a restrictive or
it
1537
That
rule.
the elision of
is,
sidered asiddha only with regard to these four rules, and no

asiddha' in *nft*%
tf-5T^+*^+^ = *r^ + *I+% = tnfrta%
it is
III.
It is
VII.
8,
con-
is
other.
I.
asiddha
4.
not
33).
There would not have been long f had the ^rT been asiddha. So also *T5TT3%
is lengthening, (VII. 4. 25) and kxw** there is ekadeaa (VI. 1. 101).
there
si
^To
*, 5,
**,
^n^r^TTnT^f fait *FR33j:

W<^N ?3H%% fait s&fW>
^rFr^RI
3T*
wfa
II
^nrre zrt&i *m%*ff*îtt
ffxr: u 3*rrfr
"
ftff
Rr^r T^r u
rrfi
ST*
II
f^STW: M^*N<M<Mft*ftfJf^ f& -irhÂ
II
II
II
II
II
i#
*I$I*TItTW
tf
5^ ^
*R>sg*.
^s*:
II
^r*
c^rT?^^R?5^tr^ foyjff IW&l

f^r 5^53
II
II
^r<
11
ffcW^ t^^^^c^
^T
II
Sr*rfa*H$iM*^^^*^TO *HI'ill<=ha ^ll^ fTOTf^T
flTv?
fsrcr
^r
II
3^3*
II
11
The
3.
tion of
for the
^rKS^f^T
^r
existence of 3
On
II
sutra VIII. 2. 80, teaching the substitu-
of the Pronoun 3T^C,
is
treated as asiddha in relation to the case-ending
The
9T>2TreT5^snT^ WsJcRt:
*T
added
f^ff
11
is
however not
*tt
II
not considered uneffected when there
the contrary,
it
is
considered as siddha or existing.
is
to be
Thus 3
7, and as
being considered as siddha, ST3 gets the designation of re by I. 4.

such, its Instrumental Singular is by VII. 3. 120, 3T5?TT
Had the 3 been
considered as non-effected, then the stem would not have been called ghiy
II
and there would have been no

the 3 being asiddha, 9T3
is
?rr
would require lengthening by
Inaxim
|jfq-
VII.
faRrcfaflRT rTft^nTTO
*ETr*nTrT?ren>Tr
tpplication of
But when
added.
which
is
?rr
had
been added, then
considered to be as 3T? ending in

"
3.
102:
but
that which
it is
3j,
and
this 3T
not done on the
taught in a rule the
is
occasioned by the combination of two things does not
>ecome the cause of the destruction of that combination
".
There being no
3 of 3?3 remains short. Or this sutra may be considered to be the
condensation of two sCitras (1) 3 is siddha when m is to be added, (2) 3 is
siddha when any operations, otherwise to be caused when m is added, areto
ong
3TT
the
Or
take place.
the sense of the
sutra
is ?r
Tt^T
JTPtfrfcT
rtfetH 3nfc% *>Trfr
Trf^: "the g is not non-effected in relation to any operation that would

otherwise be occasioned when *tx followed ". From this, it would follow by
implication that 3 must be considered valid for the purposes of TPTre
So 3 being always siddha,

Vdrt
accents of
1.
is
added
and there
That ekadesa accent which
What
as siddha.
?n
3T*,
2.
is
is
is
antaranga, should be considered
the necessity of this vartika
3TRI,
3.
itself.
no lengheningj
*Xt% substitutions of?,
In order to regulate the
% and
afr;
4.
the accent of
ASIDDHA RULE.
1538
ekadesa substitutes,
of rule VI.
and
7. for
1.
5.
the accent of the
by which
158,
^ formed
words,
6. for
II. . 3
the purposes
word are anudatta except one,

by which #// syllables become anudatta.
The
fs| is finally acute by Phit I. 1.
syllables of a
all
the purposes of VIII.
Thus
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
28,
1.
(1) let us take ST3;
first.
is fST + fg* (anudatta III. 1. 3) = ff (7 is udatta VIII. 2. 5).

combine f*f + ffq=f&3 + n? =3 f3F ffl
So also s$T %5H
The udatta
ekadesa q must be considered as siddha, so that the 3T^ substitute of ^ should
locative of this
Now
ll
II
As frerSF ffl H Here also stf is udatta for

(2) 3TT3
^TT# + # = fTCPft + 9jr + Q; (VII. 3. ii2) = rcr*+sir + ty=frcTl3.
+s$+Z (VI. 1. i74) = i^r^r+^ rVI. 2. oo) = fwflf (VIII. 2. 5). The * is
udatta and its STT^r substitute will also be udatta. How do you give this
example ? This example is then valid, when by VI. 1. 174, first the affix 3TT is
made udatta, then this stt (*Tr* VII. 3. 112) augment is added to w, and
But if the order
then (sTT + q") there is vriddhi qf and then fTr^+^f = ^TT^
be reversed and stt + <T be first combined into ^", and then this qr* be made
udatta by VI. I. 174, then there would be no necessity of this vartika for the
purposes of arTîl The word rer? is end-acute by Phit accent (Phit I. 1).
Add to it #t
(4)<J^*T
irrjf
is
^ s W^^t or SSrfNfe * f r the

= fM VIII. 2. fA + ra].
accent.
As *n% S^
Here
formed by
udatta by VIII.
ll
sttt
2. 5.
same reasons
as
above
5,
affix
ilRI
f ?*) and
This udatta accent
will
is
*TT3F
+ 5 = *TTf
end-acute.
remain
valid:
The word
The ekadesa tj is
so that when for
ll
+ BT there is purva-rupa-ekadeSa by VI. I. 109, this ekadeaa IJ will be

udatta by VIII. 2. 5, or it will be svarita by VIII. 2. 6. The word 3FSJT is a
Here by VI. 2. 2, the Indeclinable first
snft compound, srnftS3*Trr = ar^
term would have retained its accent: but the word is end-acute by VI. 2. 189.
q-
11
udatta,
5 ) STf
and
^rf
This ekadeSa
is
accent.
As g^rft, g#
Here in 5T + 5T-r-5T, the affix 5T
The ekadeSa sr will be udatta by VIII. 2.
ll
anudatta.
is
5.
udatta should be considered valid for the pur poses of the rule
VI. 1. 173 by which the feminine affix and the weak case -ending are udatta.
Thus gfqt+t'=3$ft 3?*+S=3^ The prohibition 3*3*: in VI. I. 173 is a
jfiapaka or indicator of the fact, that the ekades*a accent should be considered
siddha, in the accent of the *rg
no
Satri
ending word with

(
I.
qeKR3$T*r
186) the ekadesa 3T
is
gi
because without this ekadesa accent, there
which
accent.
As
is
antodatta.
sidered valid for the purposes of rule VI.

syllables
become
2. 5,
1.
f^Sr%
Here in
+ <q + 3rf* (VI.
and this ekades*a accent is con158, by which all the remaining
gsftr, Hftg^r
udatta by VIII.
anudatta, as gf f?5,
is
II
ll
BK. VIII.
ClI. II.
ASIDDHA RULK.
1539
As srrSFm^f?*, STip^r f^fr? ll Here the eka( 7 ) ^nfw^T: accent.

des'a-accent of g?r% and ft<ifa being valid, rule VIII. 1. 28 applies, and all
the syllables
become anudatta.
The word antaranga
is
used
in
the
vartika" to
indicate
that
the
Bahiranga ekades'a accent will not be siddha. Thus re$u5 and S m^ ^rt,
where the word ff^r is first acute, as it is an Indeclinable. And MHti?t
q^?W H The accent of T^Tm + sfrf^W^ft is* governed by VIII. 2. 5. This
<
ekades'a accent of long f has reference to external sandhi, and therefore naturally it is a bahiranga.
This bahiranga ekades'a accent is not siddha for the
Thus
purposes of the application of previous sutras.
sutra VIII.
that the gati should be unaccented before an accented verb

lose
its
accent, as q^ntfh%
not considered as an accented verb.
is
1.
but
71. requires
if
does not
In the second
example, the of tfj- is not considered as accented, therefore, it does not become anudatta by VIII. 1. 28.
Vdrt: The rule VIII. 2. 23 causing the elision of the final consonant
word ending with a conjunct consonant, should be valid for the purposes
of changing * into 3
What is the necessity of this vartika ? Observe
The word ^f: is formed by *Tg< affix fratSTO Su% = sft + Tq;
Sft^T %f^T *?r
Now by VIII. 2. 15 the 1 is changed to ^, as 5ft + ?<l or $fr*ffc; add 5 (Voc.Sg.
as ^q[ + 5, then add 3^ augment, as fft^j + g
Then there is elision of
in a
II
ll
ll
ll
the final consonant =$ren*
Now by
VIII.
3. 1. the final s* is changed to ^,

would
be
changed
to 3 by VI. 1. 114, if the elision of
^
the conjunct consonants be considered as siddha
for then this r^ is followed
by *T, a S^r letter. But if such elision be considered asiddha, then ^ is considered
and we have
II
ffre^, the
not to be followed by f*r

Vdrt:
When
sidered siddha or valid.
&
by
if? ( VIII. 2.
have dirgha single
STHPfol
letters,
ekadesa
As
but by the consonants which were elided.

is
to be done, the elision of fa**
and
is
to be con-
Here the fa* is elided

28. ) This elision is considered valid or siddha, and thus we
substitution off for \ + f as 3T^+* + tffc*=sr?$T3;+f + o + fq[
STt*pfr?*
srrpfrt
II
Vdtt:
The substitute of the Nishtha
affixes should
be considered as
valid or siddha for the purposes of the rules relating to the (1) changing of ^ to
*, (2) accent, (3) affix, and (4) f^ augment. As (1) fôf;, f^pr^r^ll The root is
^ra*^
(VI. 11) the indicatory sff shows that the nishtha
(VIII.
2.
45).
This nishtha substitute
'the final of the root
VIII.
is
is
changed to 3
considered as valid or siddha, and

not changed to *, as it otherwise would have been by
is
3 would have been still considered as 3 or a #3. letter. The

:
+ 3 = 1*^+3 ( VI ' l6 ) = f^+T (VIII. 2. 45)=.
T* + 3(VIII. 2. 29) = f^+3(VIII.2. 3o) = f^:(VIII. 4. 1) The *is changed to 5 by VIII. 2. 30, by considering 3 as asiddha and therefore equal to
3
or a SP3. letter. Thus it will be seen that this 3 is rra* for the purposes of
2.
equation
36: for
is
as follows
5^
Asiddha Rule.
1540
rule VIII.
2.
As
30,
only for the purposes of rule VIII.
sftar,
It is
Past Participle of the root
^tffaH-sr
(fffc
being elided, this
is
viz, accent,
them
will illustrate
variously explained.
is
It is the
is
it is fgr^j
regards the other three cases,
the one word
word
but
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
The
all.
2.
II. 3
36.
and f^ augment,
affix
irregular formation of this
formed by "nipatana" under VIII.

thus evolved $ft* + 5^+ <r
stfa;,
the anomaly)
= $for
considered as valid and siddha, and therefore,
Here the
II
fffa is
2.
55.
= $fa* + f + <t
elision of f^
considered as a word
of two syllables, for the purposes of accent, under rule prerq" spiRr^ (VI.
Had
1.205).
the lopadesa of
have been considered as
if
been considered asiddha, the word would
fq[
of three syllables, and that rule of accent would not
have applied.
Similarly $ft^T
tTtfrT
- lftr%3R" formed by g^ (IV.
4.
7)
which
affix
is
considered a word of two syllables, the elision of f q^ being

considered as valid for the purposes of IV. 4. 7.
added, because
it is
Similarly sffa
?j; as
$ft3r + rr a $fta[ + ST
may
"
be considered to have been formed by eliding the

n tms vi ew of
added, because the lopa of

poses of
^ augment.
q[
is
its
formation, the
augment ?*
considered as valid and siddha
In the opinion of Patanjali, the words ?? ffiq
be omitted from the vartika,
for 5* being a portion of
srera,
not
is
for the pur-
may
well
the word JTc^^f^r
would include ??-refa also.

Vdrt
The prolation modification of a vowel (pluta) should be considered as valid and siddha, for the purposes of the rule relating to goFT augment
Thus by VIII. 2. 107, the Vocative words 3T5T and qft
before the letter "
assume the forms arsrr^S and to^? U These f and 3 are pluta-vikaras.
As
:
11
SÔT*
Here the modification caused by VIII. 2. 107,

otherwise there would have been no compulsory ga augment as required by VI. 1. 73 but optional 3^ under VI. I. 76.
The ^ and palatal change should be considered siddha and
Vdrt
valid before ? (VIII. 3. 29A
The root s^ft^CTW (I. 41) is read as beginning
with a *r, which is changed to ^r because of the subsequent ^ by VIII. 4. 40.
This is not considered asiddha. Had it been so, there would come *J? augment by VIII. 3. 29, in ar? ^RfrT, t?3*qftrft
The words 3T5.and *? are
formed from the roots 3THfrr and ^ft by f^rqr^ H
STf and
Why is the root êgrer^ considered to begin with w and not with ^T as
we find it written? Because had it been a root beginning with ^[ originally, we
*T*Tr^ fsg'spU
is
<T*r$
II
considered as valid and siddha
11
could not get the form

is
thus evolved.
we form
Add
Thus
tj^ which would have been *T^

The form r^
=
From T^F^S^
by
adding
*nj îrrrW
f^r
T^^S^
II
II
a Derivative root in fdp^ in the sense of
again
f|^qrv to
have *fl|^^, then
this
^(
ning of a compound
Derivative root
which represents
*TS[f**,
and ^
is
^2r
the fdr^will be elided, and
sr) is elided
letter (VIII. 2. 29),
5 3tTHT s^"%= jr^^^frr H
because
it
is
we
at the begin-
elided, because
it
is
at
the
BK. VIII.
ClI. II
ASIDDIIA-RULE
and thus there remains

Had the root been
5^ (VIII. 2. 30) we have *{%tR
could not be elided, and so we should elide only the final
end of a conjunct letter

q%%, and îs changed to
then this
ST^nrrfc,
^ and ^ and
to
^r
a pada (VIII.
final in
2.
23),
11
the form would be *r^ which would be changed to
^^ which
and we should get
3^
154I
Vdrt:
The *r^
and then
not desired.
is
and q^ substitution of
letters
the
in
reduplicate
should be considered siddha and valid for the purposes of q change (VI.
Thus
120) and 53: augment.

to
and
q*r<JT<| :
q*roj:
Here the
11
srar
4.
change of *t,
the reduplicate should be considered as valid, otherwise this would be
in
^3:
SRTCSnf? root and the Perfect would be
and %^:
Similarly from f&x
11
we have nrf^^ffT, and from 3^3:, 3f^rf^*f?T

In the latter, the second syllable
f&^ of 3%** (Desiderative) is reduplicated by VI. 1. 2. Here had the reduplicate
11
substitute ^r for 5" been considered asiddha, there
ment by
5-
bt
Vdrt-.
(VI.
WS8PKH. H
anusvara
VIII.
^
is
change of
$j*7
aug-
&c
homogeneous with the subsequent
letter
As
purposes of doubling.
for the
srcq-cTT
would not have been
73)
The
and siddha
valid
1.
the w
ST^stoc
cr^sq^rr,
changed to anusvara by VIII.
is
3.
is
q^ffa?*,
23,
and the
then changed to a letter homogeneous with the subsequent by
Had
4. 58.
the qrofof change been asiddha, there would have been
doubling by VIII.
no
47.
4.
Vdrt: If there be the adhikara of the word 'pada' in those sutras

which ordain the following changes, then those changes are considered siddha
for doubling, namely, 1. w&i the change into <* (VIII. 2. 21), 2. s?q the change
into
5T
Tg
(VIII.
(VIII.
(VIII.
2.
31), 3.
2. 56), 5.
3. 85),
4. 45), 9.
the change in to
the change to
^*q the change to
As
1.
II
5.
r*r Tr*
3tTT
3tP
the sôf Rr^r
^ by VIII.
Tr^: *q*rr, 7-
is
elided
The
rrq^(wr
qr^q^* qrrq*r
The
3Tf*PTfsf*PT :
2.74.
<ssq
sidered asiddha,
^?^ the change to ^ (VIII.
7. ursr
f*T^,
raf*T*:
m%
?r is
Tm
*rf?
t*
(VIII.
*\n<rv
(VIII.
2.
I.
yrT ^r if^rr
6S,
the vikarana
rqrf*r
^^
*&*& qr^s^q*
all
we would have got
11
11
is
and the
or JTrq^TrnT
&c, changes being
4.
the change into

<*
imfm 4. 3sfr 3*: or

second
person singular of
95^
3.
final ?j
6. qrî
TmrTrnt
or
qr^qq
optional,
11
11
changed optionally to
**m
8.
*rrf
'
qri*
s^rr or
*rr3 : *TSTr,
m&n mw ^pn. or
qr^srqq n
had the changes been con-
the following double forms also
T{rre,
which are not desired.

All these can be explained by dividing the sutra
first
**q the change to
anunasika change (VIII.
4. 11), 8.
or arf^Rf 3TPTT<1 This
by VI.
6.
75),
4. 63).
2.
11
(VIII.2.33),
being q, and this negative will prohibit
all
qg q
into two.
The
asiddha-ness mentioned in the
Accent.
1542
The second
preceding vartikas.
in the anuvritti of
%frT5
11
^rRrraw
sfrTraT:
dsttta
vowel,
II.
11
when the
vowel
11
of an anu-
the substitute
is
follows after such a semi-vowel,
latter
which has replaced an ud&tta or a svarita vowel.

An unaccented vowel becomes svarita, when it comes after a ^qr
vowel), which
3PI.
and we would here draw
%,
<rerar3^rTrc3 *fre<T srf^fr n^frr
A svarita
4.
would be 5
sutra
Bk. VIII. Ch.
from the preceding.
?r
wfen, ST^TtT^T
TT*,
(semi-
has come in the room of a vowel which was acute or
itself
svarita once.
Let us
^Tr'4:
(^r^r) replaces sr of
room of
take the vowel
first
The word ^r?r
II
(VI.
fjffrrc
1.
3?f
final,
The semi-vowel ^
161).
anudatta
this acute *f ; the
following an udatta yan.
is
and
$r:
become
Thus
ffgrtff,
because the long f

is
substituted in the
svarita after such a
ll
Now to take an example of a svaritar yan. The words *r$$<| and

finally acute by krit-accent (VI. 2. 139).
are
The Locative singular of
^?jf
these words are *SR<T + f = ?$rafcf, and ST^fM by VI. 4. 83. This % is a semivowel which comes in the room of the acute 3;, therefore, it is udatta-yan.
After this udatta-yan, the anudatta ? of the Locative becomes svarita by the
first
Now when
part of this sutra.
bined by sandhi, this svarita 5
The unaccented
and
*r$3eîrcrr n
acute (Phit.
*ST3T^
is
Obj
by
I.
is
become
3?r will
The word
to
svarita,
after this svarita-yan.
is finally
Here an
may
objector
svarita
4. 83.
be considered as svarita-yan
Obj
This
If this
The a
is
is
be
so,
first-acute
svarita yan,
Vdrt
it is,
acute
therefore, a
are
com-
svarita-yan.
As
and consequently
JSRciajr^rr
not
srr is
say
is
How
that the
svarita
can then the
qqrprcr
then 3rfTTrr?3?nTTO
anudatta
the
To avoid
accent
on $
is
not
&{*&
^ substituted
(3TP$rcir?|
(VIII.
3?r after this
4.
for this
1%*^* )
fc
66) should also
For
4.
66.
should become svarita ac-
so.
we have the following.

" The u&i accent should be conf^gt ^rfisq:
this difficulty,
zprft*r
in
to be considered as asiddha for the
and we should have svarita in qvqwn &c also.

by Phit II. 3. Therefore fqf is svarita by VIII.
cording this view, but this
Ans
considered as siddha by as"raya.
is
be considered as siddha
the word ffa
18).
purposes of 3p*ades*a of VI.
+ snsrT and q^flv^ + stf^
changed
srrerr
this very sutra, this
Ans
??r*i^
II
sidered as valid, for the purposes of ^qr substitution
".
Bk. VIII. Ch.
Some
II.
Accent.
5]
that even
say,
1543
such cases as ^sitar the above rule applies,
in
and that the unaccented vowel becomes svarita, if it follows a svarita-yan

which is preceded by an acute vowel. They quote the following from Taittariya Sakha
sjrer f^jr: *rfavj: ^&n{, where the 3T of 3T*% is pronounced as
:
So
svarita.
also
in
Brahmana
the
portion
But according to Katyayana and

does not become svarita by this sutra, when
preceded by an acute vowel.
as svarita.
To
get rid of these anomalies, the
two of which
alternatives,
yan
an unaccented vowel becomes svarita
"
".
(2)
svarita,
pnr^PW
<tt*j
when following a
^^nwifa the an
is
read
it
follows a svarita-yan which
is
Mahabhashya proposes several

The first proposal is to
(1) 3<*MW <n$3 aT^xf 55 ?K<flf
when it follows after an udatta-
be mentioned here.
will
composite sutra into two parts:
divide this
*T3TCT
as
Patanjali, the unaccented vowel
srssnrei *iiim H3T3 " an unaccented vowel becomes

svarita
the anuvritti of udatta-yan
yan
"
and
in this
from the preceding
second sutra, we shall read
half.
So
that this half will
The
gr^T^T f^ 3T fafrT: &Rw> ?TTO
<H$3 ST^SHT^ ^KWT *nrf?T
svarita must have been obtained by the application of the first half of this
sutra and this svarita should be changed to zr?r, which would change the
anudatta into svarita. So that the ^rftrT W* means this particular svarita
obtained by the application of this very sutra.
mean:
The second
svarita in srf^pssifarr
proposal
is
II
not to read svarita into the sutra at
would then be explained by udatta-yanah
The
+
all.
rule. *=T?iF+$
Here % is udatta-yan. This will cause aqr

srrerr^S^^+^ + sTrerr
come svarita. The intervening svarita ^ is considered as not existent
11
to
be-
for the
purposes of accent ^fMrrsqv*H*iRl4HH3rj[ 11 Nor is this ^ to be considered

as sthani-vad to 5 by I. 1. 57, for in applying the rule of accent, such a substitute
is
not considered as sthanivat
by
I.
1.
58.
Why
do we say "of udatta and svarita"? Observe 1$?+3Trof =%irarr,

Here the semi-vowel replaces an unaccented f, and is
These words are first acute owing to ftj( accent (IV. 1. 73).
"
9T3SHT
Why do we say "an unaccented vowel becomes svarita" ? Observe
The word s^r is acutely accented on the first by (Sfcj accent.
frerfo, r%^fr^
so also srrj^ssjror U
ll
(VI.
1.
193).
<T*T%5T
fr%:
ii
^^T%%TtT:
3?r%?f
II
^sshtto 1 l^sn
5.
ud&tta vowel
The word
The
is
"
<TTTft
II
sr
II
^T^7[T:,
ssrtr *r*Rr
^T%*,
T^TtT:
II
11
single substitute of
an unaccented' with an
ud&tta.
of an anudatta
" is
understood here.
An
unaccented vowel,
Accent.
'544
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II.
which combined with the preceding udatta vowel remains as a single substitute,
becomes udatta. Thus for the udatta % of arf^ and for the case-ending aft
which is anudatta, there is always substituted long $ single by VI. I. 102. This
single substitute will be udatta according to the present sutra, as swift*
larly
<rr|,
i;s:
Why
do we say "with uddtta vowel"? Observe
^+TO+3TFrr = l^+3T + 3TFrT Here si* is anudatta by

VI. I. 186. The ekades*a of these two non-accented a?
I
forming
this
by VIII.
4.
para-rupa ekadesa by VI.
66
is
anudatta byVI 1 1.
cented on the
Simi-
1.
<rarer,
III. 1.4,
will
ssrsrf^rT
so also
II
Here
an% by
be anudatta.
In
97, the svarita of the a? of *r* caused
considered as invalid or asiddha.
Other examples are

*: is
11
11
first,
as
1.
21.
it is
5FT
%S*qrP (Rig. V. 61. 2)
read with VIII.
1.
18.
and sjn^ T^rp
The word a?^:
formed by adding ^T^to
ar^[
(Un.
I.
II
is
The word
acutely ac-
151).
The
ct
of
^^ is
aft
changed to ^ (VIII. 2. 66), which is again changed to s (VI. 1. 1 13). Thus

S^ Here ar becomes purva-rupa by VI. 1. 109, which is udatta. sp is formed
II
and VII. 2. 105) and is svarita (VI. 1. 185). The

acutely accented on the first by the Phit II. 6. The single long
from f^F^byar^
word
are*
substitute
is
is
udatta.
^rfcfr ^t
fTrr:
II
affix (V. 3. 12
S3^T% *v%i^
3T33J% Tajfr 33J%T
The
6.
ST?
<t^tr
^fen, ^r, sTjjîti,
$
*mkW K &K*t ^T T^ST^f ^T
II
II
ll
qî<t
11
II
single substitute of an unaccented vowel,
standing at the beginning of a word, with an ud&tta vowel,
may
optionally be svarita or uddtta.
or $f&tt fa + fefiT = ft%% or fft?%; ^Mm- + 3TT%

Here the word fj is a Karmapravachaniya by I. 4. 94,
when it is compounded by JTrfajfrercr with the Past Participle, the Avayayibhava
compound retains the accent of its first member (VI. 2. 2), and so it is acutely
accented on the first, and the rest are anudatta. Thus the udatta i of ^ is compounded with the anudatta ? of 3Tcir<r which stands at the beginning of a Pada,
and so the ekadesa is optionally svarita. In fr$T3T and ^gcfit srer also the verbs
f^% and arr^T lose all accent by VIII. 1. 28 and so f and a? become anudatta,
which when compounded with f^r and ^?pffr become optionally svarita.
Thus
=^^rsflf
+ zftq*: - fp*TrP
or ^fj^rrsra"
The word
ness, for the sutra
sutra,
ll
î?rT: is
employed
may have
in the sutra
the'udatta of the preceding sutra
second member
is
only for the sake of distinct-
well stood as ^TSf^r% Tfrfr
where there
will
In this form of the
Udatta being optional,

not be udatta, the svarita will be
a word beginning with anudatta.
in the other alternative,
II
would become optional when the
substituted by reason of the nearness in position.
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II. .
Accent.
1545
Why
do we say " anudatta beginning"? Observe ^r^?Trs^r Here faf

begins with udatta and not anudatta, and hence no option is allowed.
HW,
11
Why do we say " beginning of a word" ? Observe fffr:,

where anudatta case-endings are not beginnings of words.
According to Bhattoji Dikshita
There
this
is
$$p and
f^n":,
a vyavasthita-vibhasha; in this
be svarita (1) where a long f is the single substitute of (f + f) or of two short f, (2) where there is purva-rupa by the application
of q^H^|rHi^3Tf?T (VI. 1. 109). There will be udatta where a long vowel comes
wise.
in.
will necessarily
in f^ + ^^= ffe^ j n sft^ 3%%%?*, the long f is substituted for two short
This substitution of a long \ for two short f's is technically called jp^q" II
Thus
f 's.
Where
there
there
is
long { is necessarily svarita. Similarly

the peculiar sandhi taught in VI. 1. 109.
Pras'lesha, the
3TfHr%rT*rRj:
is
i.
e.
when
Thus
~#s^j, snwrpto^ H So also where there is%q\- gfSsp i.e. the substitution of a
semivowel in the room of an udatta or svarita vowel, as ar^r^
The above
rules about svarita are thus summarised in the Pratiaakhyas
Î<4
fl^frft
11
%JTrprr^n
*Û
But where a long f
(one of the
?'s
being long), there
(Rig.
1.
word
flflf
190. 4).
Locative singular
The
7.
Pada
wm i
tion
lost
As are? 3&r*T &W&

compounded into ff$fa% The
finally acute by VI. 1. 171. fs^f is from the
its accent by VIII. 1. 28.
it
must always be
acute.
are
II
end of a Nominal-stem, which
at the
'
of a Pada
tntf*!, ^nrar, OJRTC:,
understood
this sutra.
Thus f\w,
The Nominal stem tf^gets
the designa-
is
'
*r*W- H
of Pada, before these affixes, by
,
(I. 4. 17), is elided.
The word qa;^

li
sjc
is
substituted as a single substitute for \ + $
The words f^-l-f?>r
Divadi root f^n^r, and has
is
is
I.
in
17.
Why
ST3?rft*
do we say 'of a Pratipadika or Nominal stem'? Observe

Here **&L is a verb, the 3rd Per. Sg.Imperfect ( ot ) of the root
Why do we
say 'at the end
'?
If the
word
II
had not been used

in the sutra, then the sutra would have stood thus ^rFJnr: qn^Trw^l
and as
the word Ta;^ is understood here, the sutra would have meant, there is elision
ar^STTO
of ^, zvhere eve?
it
may
would also have required
be>
of a Pada called stem.
elision.
In
fact,
sthana shashthi, but viseshana shashthi, *I$PT
Q. But even
if
you use the word
So
that
the
T of ^rcpsiPl
the genitive case here in cra^T
areWT
ar^r in
with the word JnfcTTf^, and the sense of the
is
TajfaajflTTO f^WJren"?i
the sutra,
it is
not
II
compounded
sutra will be "^ which
is
at the
Accent.
1546
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
II. .
end of a pratipadika, which (pratipadika)- is a portion of a pada" &c. and not

"^ which~is at the end of a pada". So that the rule will not apply to 3T?5RT^t
but will apply to JTStpfr &c ? Ans. The word srrTrTqf^ff is not compounded,
with the word 3TrT in the sutra. It is used without any case-affix, on the
analogy of Chhandas usage. In fact, it is in the genitive case, the affix being
by VII.
elided
1.
39.
The prohibition must be stated with regard to the elision of

As 3Tf:, In 8T?C;the case-affix is luk-elided by VII. 1. 23, the
pratyaya-lakshana is prohibited by I. I. 63, and hence the ôf sr?f is changed
Vdrt
the
to
of
?r
STf^L U
by VIII.
*.
which the
For the
69. 3T?r^r^, STffP*: n
2.
rules VIII.
2.
68 and 69 by
of STîs changed to *, are asiddha with regard to this present
final
rule requiring elision of ^, hence this vartika.
no necessity of this vartika, for the subsequent rules VIII.

Ans. But ^ and * are considered asiddha for the purThe ^ and 1 would have debarred ^ elision, had they
poses of T elision.
otherwise found no scope. But they have their scope. Q. Where have they
There
Q.
2.
68
69,
will
is
debar
^m
11
their scope? Ans. In the penultimate 9T
The
shows that * does not replace srbut

Vocative,
will
(VI.
1.
i.
e.
in
the 3T preceding
very fact that the author has used the word
sr$^ where
be replaced by
1.
In f 3??^! the
68
2.
repeated as
by VIII.
and
2. 8,
^ s?^ and so also ^ fr^ff r
then * will find scope in the

it
will
be
this
J*
which
R^T
Jjîs
not elided by the option of the Vartika under
is
it
used
is
in
to be
The/ one indicates the exact form, showing that the

and by the second word the ^ is ordained for this final qf II
II
II
T^rfa
3rT3 ?r^ itf^rc*

,
ii
is
st^st^H
f^^l^fr:
^rffore.
these objections, they say, the word sr?^ which
in nominative singular without the elision of ^, and
gîs not elided

?T
so,
Q.
2. 8.
To remove
VIII.
^, as
retained
Ans. If
the ^11
the sutra VIII. 2 68
The word ffarîs a Bahuvrihi (II. 2. 24), the Vocative affix is elided
6S\ and the ^changed to * by VIII. 2. 68, and it is changed to 3 (VI.
114).
VIII.
^ is
II
srîn
8.
II
5T,
%, sr*3^:
*f^fr to**:
(But such
s*) is
*rr*
11
?n
II
*ri^Rrf*rra
*r
*&***
11
not elided in the Locative and
Vocative Singular.
This debars the
elision of
s^,
which otherwise would have taken place
The examples of non-elision of H in

As <Tf* %*?^(Rig- I. 164.
in
the Vedas.
found
be
by the preceding sutra.

singular are to
$rF?^ ^faui
1.
39.
Here the sign of the Locative,
In the Vocative Singular, the
j* is
namely, $ (fw)
is
the Locative
39), srfj *T^*,
elided
not elided as f *nT^, ?
by VII.
W*
Bk. VIII. Cn.
Q.
II. .
When
The
9]
or the Vocative
rf?
elision of *
is
1547
11
preceding stem
elided, the
a Pratipadika, and the stem does not get the designation of

but
hence where
is >T,
when the
singular,
elision of
by any
rule
The
Ans.
the necessity of
is
^ would
no longer
is
before the affix
making the present prohibitory
rule,
not have taken place in the Locative and Vocative
very fact of the prohibition of.the elision of ^, as contained in
by implication
this aphorism, indicates
(jiiapaka),
of pratipadika, though an affix has
designation
<Tf
though such elided
may
affix
produce
its effect
that
a word
been elided
45 read with
(I. 2.
the
retains
after
and
it
I.
I.
62).
Nor will such elided affix give the designation of Bha (*r) to such a stem.
Thus tflf: 3^q ;=CT5T5W here the ^ is elided by considering the word *r%X
,
in the
as a pratipadika, even after the elision of the Genitive affix
and
it is
Prohibition of the prohibition
Vdtt
word
cative
compound
fir??:
compound,
not a Bha, which would have required the elision of 3T by VI.
is
by another word
followed
a Locative Tatpurusha, the
is
in
134.
4.
must be stated, when the Loa compound. That is, when a
is
elided
as,
^wn ftm 3^3 =
II
In
^rsTf5^*?
the
member
first
JTsf^
does not retain
present sutra, because the whole compound, as such,
and not the word
*\*fi
Vdrt
JTrft:, r:, ar
In
II
analysis, will give the first
member
Optionally so
rorf?ro:
9.
there
is
substituted
or
of the affix
qc
(and
sr
in
sir)
for the
sfq*
its
As % =^^,1
=^*r
w of Tgq;
II
is
substituted
3",
if
or if these are in the pen-
and the
or having
or having
in 3T or 3TT,
3.
the
11
After a stem ending
stem ending
^ by
Vocative case,
as a Vocative word.
ultimate position; but not after

after a
in the
there can be no compound, which in
in the neuter nouns.
For the
the stem ends in
fact,
is
its
3.
as
these
its
rest.
penultimate
as
letters
its
letter,
and
penultimate,
First after stems ending
in
w, as
f^r(f%^T*0, *N*t(faTPO. Secondly * penultimate: as srtfar^, fn%*fkr* U

Thirdly a stem ending in STorsrr, as fsreTCC, SSrep*, *3grarcu ITOTfRUl Fourthly
as q^H^p*, 35T^r^, HF33PJ
ST or srr in the penultimate
:
II
Why
do we say "*T or 3T ending or T or 3T penultimate." ? Observe

Why do we say " with the exception Of &c " ? Observe
si^pfra^ sp^tp* n
er^PTT^,
3W*,
srrSFTF*.
The
8
ll
following
is
the
list
of
rcrft
words,
Matup.
1548
[Bk. VIII.
Ci-i.
II. .
12
l.m, 2. #*T, 3. 3TH 4.?^ 5-3^, 6.5S*TT, 7- ^TT, 8. gTSTT, p. PET^Tf

These words either end in ^ and a? or have these as their penultimate.
These are exceptions to VIII. 2. 15. 13. ?nr{,
10. tfrif, 11. ^HT, 12. gfVsr.
These are exceptions to VIII. 2. 10. 16. fj, 17. ^, 18. y*r,
14. ^Wi l S ^<t
These are exceptions to VIII. 2. 11.
19. T*3", 20. wr
This is an akritigana. Wherever in a word, the *. of *rg<T is not changed to sr, though the rules require it, that word should be classified under ^rff
class.
In the secondary word ?rpfci ( = ^TrT ft), the* change has not taken
II
,[
II
place, because the 3T
here a Bahiranga, the real vowel being
is
The word rrfi in the sutra is the Ablative

mahara Dvandva of these two letters.
\o
5RT.
q<*rft
5RT.
II
ffrT:
II
||
stem ending
fc^ HK ^T
H^ffa
e.
mM
of *+3T;
it is
a Sa-
II
The f is substituted
mute consonant.
10.
r, i.
II
II
IT^nfr^Tn:^! T<TT#
of
for the
qc
of *t^ after a
in a
^r: n
wsro
??%:
ii
11
ll
sharer ftsra
*mrf
so
formed
As 3i#mr,
ll
11
The
11.
word
^nft n w*tp*
f^^rWr *r^r%
substituted for
when the
of*?**,
Name.
is
sris
sjtffasfr, s^qtarfr,
^r^rfV n
For long vowel, see VI.
3.
srrcp^hfti;,
^g?ws^^^^grr^frjcrat
<Tfrfa
?^
w^t^j:, ^*t*^, ^fr^* H
3Tl*F^fal Î^^L ^^k?t ^#^1 W*?i <q-*Vrsr eft fr^Pf tf^rai f^Tf?^
3Trcr?<{j"ci
smrsn^,
11
11
11
"araJfcrac,
ffrf
II
120.
II
The
12.
Names
following
are irregularly formed
asandivat, ashthivat, chakrivat, kakshivat, rumanvat, charmanvati.
The change
of
to
% in
these was obtained from the last sutra.
irregularity consists in the substitutions of stems.

srrepT
As
which
is
here changed to 3Tl^fr
in the following sloka
II
As
arra^T^,
STTCFffar^
?rctra*Pi
^^t:
w
not a name,
distinct
lto
this
arreNtaâtflW* 1 *'*
we have
sTTCFPrr^ll
II
Others say, that there
is
a separate and
The change of
in the sentence slr^ft nsrrcNI" *nri%

word would take place regularly by the last sutra
stem 3TT^fr, as
% after
The
from the stem
srrcF#n% wr?srt stetf

sr^t s*r ^rirsf ?%>st
When
*TT*T : ,
is
here, according to these authors,
II
is
merely explanatory.
2.
its
3T$fa<l
mention
is
from
Kk. VIII. Cn.
II . is
Matup.
1549
As aT^T^Rthe name of a particular portion

3Tfw^R 3. ^T5F?^ is from =qr^5 which is changed to 'srcfft, as ws&ifi cr^rr
Otherwise we have ^to^tr âffarer *T?r?farmft *T?n% is a Vedic example. It means sttcfr ^H^TTR snfr ?R vTrtr, T #IPrr4ifatmft, trrR <r* mr sîrr* ^^jrjjrr^ w?*r
^rcffa* is from ^^, there is
vocalisation of sj and the lengthening is by VI, 4. 2. ^jstrr is the nameofa
Rishi. Otherwise we have, ^m^R
from WW which is changed to
5- fining is
Otherwise we have ttûHRU Others say, that there is a distinct word $sr,
3*P3
and the ^ is not elided, but changed to or
Or that the affix sr takes the
which
srrf?T
changed to
is
3Tgr H
of body; the knee-joints. Otherwise
11
11
11
11
II
11
11
augment
?re
change to
of a
<*
river.
from ^jr, there is non-elision of ^ and its

6.
^Hq?fr
Or
has taken 5^ augment. The Charmanvati is the name
is
II
Otherwise we have ^J^RT
^ ?^
q^TR ^^K> &?*, ^
3^tR*s?frw^ JRrf^Rf umzm ss>TR3f
rvw
si^rfcllgTgft
ff%*.
ii
II
II
II
II
||
^m
The word
13.
sense of
"a
It is
3rf?^rac is irregularly
formed, in the
sea".
derived from
3^j
3$^R is the name

command. It also
held, like rf2T^ &c.
The affix i% is
33; by VI. 3. 58, and thus we have
water' with the affix
'
of a Rishi, because he controlled the rains,
it
t?j
11
rained at his
means ocean or that in which water is

added by III. 3 93, and g^ff changed to
SfR H Why do we say " when meaning a sea " ? Observe 3f3f^R ^?: a pot
having water
Here the main idea is not that of "holding or containing", but
:
'
'.
simply the general fact of possessing water: a

water in the same way.
^riTrcrT^frcr^
ffrP
II
rnF^TRR
11
&
TWRP*
Also cr sr q^ T^
14.
*tst?^, *rfcre^
q^riSr n
11
R<TT?R, #1TR3
human being may
also possess
ll
II
when the
sense
is
of a good
government.
The kingdom whose king
The
affix rj* is
srac^rc:
ffrF
II
used here
?x
^^r% f^R
11
ll
is
good
in the sense
T^r
II
^fsr, f
f 3 oif'rirt^r^rwrrTCf^
is
called cnr^TRlSP, JTSF^ft "J*.^
of sr^mr or praise.
,
r.
Otherwise JCPRR
II
*rr<* *t^r
ii
In the Chhandas ^ is substituted for the

when the stem ends in % (or t) or t
15.
of
jhj,
from
II
To
h^r
II
11
?ftfr
take some examples of a stem ending in

*r
*r with
**
**r
aTfaTR
vocalisation).
f,
as fsRtfr OT5*W!3rar
îfa ^gtfR^R bttctrs *n fowl ( sttc^tr

As all rules have
*TC^RRR, Wtjfap*, S^ffafa**'
Srft
ll
J 55o
5^ augment.
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
II. .
17
optional force in the Chhandas,

^trffap*?r3
****
% ^TT^T'jnT^?*T%
3*
?5
II
Chhandas,
;
*;
q^Tfa
II
stjt:,
II
3?
11
16.
The affix jt^ gets the
after a stem ending in 3^
As sT^^^r:
fcrjf^r
we have no change here ^Hf^r^nr, ^tPspTP*,

Of stems ending in we have iftfrab >^f^ srfltfNH
II
^W
^rVfrft, *r5^fr
augment 3^,
in the
II
st***^ 3^<rrfrm%(Rig.
srerr*:;
I;
164. 4), aro^rrr
11
The word STSF^l
3TTCT + T^C = 3TS + 3T^ + T^ (btt^

by VII. 1. 76) - WTT^ (the Jîs elided by
VIII. 2. 7). Now we add the augment jpii If this augment is added to ^5^, as
wrgqr then it becomes a portion of JTg'i, and this ^ would be changed to * by
VIII. 3. 9 read with I. 1, 54, and not the letter ^, because întervenes. If we
add this augment to the end of the stem, then in arsF^Frr &c. we cannot change
it to ur because of the prohibition in VIII. 4. 37, and the augment being 5^,
the ^ would be changed to ^ by VIII. 3. 7 in ^rr^T: &c (VIII. 2. 17). The
first view, however, is the correct one and the difficulty in its acceptance is
obviated by ^frsrcrec^ rTTO ^ ^r *T *refa; ** T?3U 1 *m% as shown above.
The 5^ augment being considered as asiddha, is not changed to *r, but
the letter following it, is so changed. Thus 3T$T^( VII. 1. 76 ) + *T^=3rer + Tr|.
Add the augment 5^ now, and
(the ^ of the stem is elided by VIII. 2. 7).
augment
The
according
to
VIII, 2. 1, is asiddha, so that
we have srsr+^^H
is
1S
thus formed
substituted for the final of akshi
according to VIII.
been required by I.
?\s
?TT5 srer
It
is
2.
affixes
<*?ri%
11
^
The
(VIII.
augment
i*f&FHP:: (HI. 2 74, the affix

-
Vdrt
The word
by
5tt^,
11
srer
11
and rprâre called ^
rT?;<T
7)=qr^ +
F^r/ :
first
substituted for *, and not for ^, as would have
54.
the augment g?
The
(VIII.
1.
In the Chhandas, the

after a stem in
17.
ceive
2, 9,
elided
Long f
tfSfa is
is
is
2.
i7)=Tf*ren::
is
crf5^
to
II
11
re-
||
Thus Tfax+*TC = ^tf*r+src

So also 3WtT*
:
these affixes after *gft?CTl
as
affix fr^f in
by VI 1 1. 2. 7, and then
and
the substitute of the final of tf*fa before
formed by the
the sense of
jqjq;
II
were substituted
<nc
The
for the short % of *f*f the long f
If the long f
the present vartika,
added
affixes <n:
sj
is
for the final
and 3*
final
II
is
substituted
of *f*^
could not be compounded by
as ffqf + <TC, then this long f being asiddha, it

ekadesa with the preceding ? into f and the form would always remain cfqf rft
As uRfK'-, and nffcPT rtffapMl Q r * nis f mav ke considered to have come after
,
CT
in the sense of
11
BK. VIII.
3>*fr
firr
*rr*
ClI. II. 19
*t W.
îfa
II
The
consonant
TO *
1551
|l
fTCt, *:, 55:
II
11
it ^^r^rîrTffrT ^îw u
For the *; of the root î there
substituted
is
II
includes both the single

t, here merely indicates the sound, and
^ and
same consonant of the vowel
the
that for the single * there

substituted,
i.
e.
SE
substituted
is
becomes
t*
mzw-
3T?rt, **-Hi<r,
(! 3* 93)-
srirr^sWr
stffq^Kr^faT
18.
is
II
$q?ft?r ?*** ^^Rf^^r *rer%
11
11
\*
II
CHANGE OF
The word $rr
is
<$
and
for
^ when
Thus $t = *&,
II
So
"
also with
So
II
a portion of ^, the
as in the sutra gf*
^ ^?q:
^nr 4*4WiH n
:
by
jpq;
vocalisation, as
it
has
Bhidadi class (nfti ^p^nT^T T III. 3- io4)- Tne vocalised

root-form fjq is not to be taken here, as it is a lakshanika form.
&c, are also from suq;
Or
The words &w, $rior, $qfc,
Vdrt
by the Unadi diversity, the w change does not take place.
been enumerated
in
^K
Optionally
Vdrt
so of *p* &c.
*3, 3Tg*J or 3T^?j:, 3Tt** or 3?**

J7^ r /
..
Optionally
or *fqw*:, fafc q
^n
^f?T, 3J^> : Or |T^:, h*H *i,
swq
SFffqr^:
Some
say
'
and
performed with regard to
^SP^TR^
lf%:
ii
snmV
qrrT
As, *&-. or
or 3T3fgft.
so in the Vedas, or
or
f^q^l,
<*r*tfFT
*Wl or
get,
^5
or
when names, of 3 i q
>
or cfarfa,
f>r
&c, as
^Nl* or qi^F*, ^tf or
11
are one
?j
?j
'
and operations regarding
may
be
II
II
II
*TT-,
II
?*q^TR ^^nfer, 3TO^

ttî^ *f*K*<rei ?m* a*.qr ir h^tW
II
II
ii
19.
when
3Tf ?^:
11
55 is
substituted for the
?:
of a Preposition,
3T*re follows.
Thus qr*r*KT, gRRT

word ?;, or does
Here
the queston, does the word ar?n%

word Preposition. In the first view,
the sutra would mean, "the îmmediately followed by srsrW is changed to ?j"u
But as a matter of fact, ^ is never immediately followed by arofa M Thus in
The ekadefe
tf-f 3TOf<f or qrr + STOr?Ti the letter bt and 3?r intervene respectively.
l'
qualify the
sandhi of these, will
make
being sthanivat
prevent
will
maxirn^ susqwr 3^
useless.
it
immediately followed by srarW but the ekadesa,

This difficulty however, is overcome by the
it.
stzj%
ssprf^tsfq
For the same reasons,
between ând
arises
qualify the
sHTTOrer"^, for otherwise the rule

qft + arait = q^^rara", though here
In short, the intervention of one letter
II
is
ar
will
be
intervenes
considered as
no intervention.
In the secon
wed by ayat then
its
view, the sutra would
^ is chan jed to
<*,
mean when a
and none of these
Preposition
is follo-
difficulties will arise
1552
CHANGED TO 3
[BK. VII
II
ClI. II.
I.
21
But then would arise a fresh difficulty, for the

wouid also require to be changed into pû Some say, that qf% is
never followed by 3Tqr%; while others hold that the form grzuffi -ferret + *&R) is valid.
with regard to the above forms.
* ofqr?r
According to the
3*T
and rst
ir^^r ll The *t of the Prepositions

not changed to w, because it is asiddha:
view, the valid form
first
changed to
is
but this ^
is
is
RroT*, ^PPÛ ^ ut there is a preposition fa* also

the * of which is changed to w, as |%?to?to H
See VII. 2. 46. According to
the Siddhanta Kaumudi, there is a Preposition 5^ also, which gives gFjq^ II
we have
thus
the forms
*lfe
ift
fr%:
Ro
II
* f^rrî
11
q^rft
||
nrwi
*rnfr
20.
55 is
5r:,
II
*jfe
II
sf^ <t^ u
substituted for the
?ra?re arnr^rr >r^nr
of
?;
?t
the In-
in
tensive.
Thus
f%%f*TRi^, Rai R w^f, Rf%f*T?1^
sense of contempt
(III.
24). Tff^ f*T?jfr
I.
Some
117) and
= %f*Tr3%
say that
norrfrr
ll
The
root
takes inf,
when the
conveyed, with regard to the action denoted by the root,
is
II
of the sutra includes the two roots
it
Kry.
28).
pnj% Tud.
is
only taken
Others hold that the Tudadi grt
never takes the Intensive form, no

and not the Kryadi. The Kryadi
example of which is to be met in literature.
gri
affix
Why
q^ u
3ti%
^f%:
11
do we say
r%m*r
ar^rrtr
ll
st?^
*?
an
affix
As
is
is
In
hence
of gri
?:
fW*t
Passive
the
ll
^raw TfRr u
is
be-
or ftfrsfa, PT*n:*ni. or rit^t^, rttc^: or FPTTr*^
II
a vyavasthita-vibhasha, the optional forms have particular
meanings. Thus
always with
^rf^r,
ll
FrfrzKr with
f?rf?rcf*r
This
<r?rft
r *<kto f^rer
The
21.
fore
ll
7**fr
Observe
in the Intensive?
ir?j:
meaning
'
neck
'
always with &
is
while *TO
'
poison'
*.
pnn^
this option,
or htt?^, the elision of pt
though the actual
is
considered sthanivad, and
affix begins with
ll
Obj.
The sthani-
vad-bhava rule is invalid here by VIII. 2. 1. Ans. The rule tf^rrrcre? does
not hold good with regard to the rules of SRRrf^pT, &*% and or^ on the
maxim "st^^p w*uf^r<T<rer^ts"

Or
the ^will be first changed to
t^,
as being antaranga,
and then the
PT will be elided.
The forms
fMl,
f*ft !
are either from the Kryadi root gri, or /-change
has not taken place on the
maxim v^:
^pwf
5f
?fÔT
f^TFT^.
and as the
Bk. VIII. Cn.
and
affixes afr
added
24
II. .
Elision of final.
are not affixes which are ordained after a verb, but are affixes
st:
hence the & change has not taken place. In
to nouns,
beginning with a vowel'
affix
Nominative case of
<rcr srr^fr:
11
**
II
affix.
formed with the
*|
^fr
II
affix f^<j
^:,
ll
iwzm
The t of qft
%t ît
fact the
words
'an
means "a verbal affix beginning

These are the Dual and Plural of the
the sutra,
in
with a vowel," and not a noun
^fri^ri
1553
11
sj-sr^n:
^r,
II
11
22.
is
changed to
before gha and
anka.
As
form
is
q,
tit^: or qpj^p,
by q
Vdrt:
or q?MfrT:
So
W^RTÎ
also,
sppi&(VIII.
2.
is
<tr
As, qft^TT
1 1
For
is
it
a word ends in a double consonant, the
?rr^r^
*bw&
In
11
r
,
p^, the
rule,
5 though
because
it is
%^
debars the
*T5T
By
change.
VIII.
to a letter of *r^ class; $ prevents
2.
it.
39, the
final
As
W>
stcp,
re-
II
ordained even where the present ^rnT5rT^fT applies and where

Thus it is ordained in *T33 where the present sutra applies,
where
would
it
II
dropped.
thi s sutra
39) covers the whole ground
but
*fa:
Thus ^q^ + ^VsRT + sr (VII. 1. 70), = sra^r (VI. 1. 68)

(VIII. 2. 23) =
66) =
(VI. 4. 8). But th. -ugh the
does not apply.
latter
^HIMÎ,
II
II
does not prevent the operation of this
changed
as well as in toc
q^ffa
ll
H^
w*
2.
^r
*3
66).
does not debar lopa,

quired to be
II
When
in order,
asiddha (VIII.
existence,
The word q
II
and
stated,
*mn*, SkPTP* and
ifr*rr%
subsequent
^r, the
'
tTr
must be
it
T3TO *RT
consonant
As
it
T^f
II
23.
last
<~>r
ll
fc^TFTTirreT 5tTII
and not the technical q of
replaced
ITtT:
T%
o*"
does not apply.
^>
find no scope.
does not debar
hence
if *{S\t3
But the sr^f

rule
rule (VIII. 2.
were not debarred by
Therefore S^T debars 5r^C to justify
^SW^TT:
for
it still
has scope
left
to
it
its
else
wh ere.
In ysqft and
to
^ and
^^^ formed
from ^ft + 3HT and
pada, and so they require to be elided.

substitution
is
consequently,
*vg
+ 3nj, by changing f and
we have ^g; + 3T=T and T^+srsr, where a and
?,
is
a Bahiranga
It
is,
operation, as
it
5; are final in a
however, not done, because *?<*
depends upon two words and
considered asiddha for the purposes of this
rule,
on one word only.
Why
do we say
'of a Pada'?
Observe
*rpr?#r,
mn^-
11
which depends
^n
Elision of
1554
?Tr*T**
II
V*
24.
only
is
**Vfa
II
elided,
the following passages
So
Of HTf + 3?^
is
?;
See VII.
is
changed
3.
to s,
the final
II. g.
2$
a conjunct consonant,
in
after
and
?: ;
but any other con-
).
3Tc*rr^ the Aorist of $r*
Jren^JrerP
The
II
and
f*rc in*
not added as a
is
f*
97-
and fqg3
for *rrg*$
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II
not elided
for srsrr^
ftfa?5TP,
also ?ng;, f*3
Though
comes
if it
Thus 3T$m and spsrn

diversity.
Of a word ending
sonant coming after
Vedic
*T^ SHE*
II
which
is
II
Here by VI.
followed by
^by
I.
^ would have been elided even

^ shows,
the special mention of Rafter
that this
is
1.
I.
+ a*
Ill, the *t
51.
after
^by
VIII.
a niyama rule.
So
2.
23,
that
any other letter than ^following after ^will not be dropped. Thus 3^ from
gpij + f^nr (HI. 2. 177), here ^. is not elided, though final in a pada, but is changed to a guttural by VIII. 2. 30, and to ^ by VIII. 4. 56. Also srHTtfrom
in P5^ the Rp(q[) is elided by VI. I. 18; there is vriddhi by VII. 2. 114, the t
is changed to * by VIII. 2. 36, which is changed to ^ VIII. 4. 53 and finally
to
?;
(1$ H
fa ^r lux
ll
qsnft
Kdrikd:
25.
with
11
fa, ^r
11
fa ^fc Rrtr <*frT^Feffr% JTOT5RW
The
** is
dropped before an
affix
beginning
II
As mfttidi, 3I?rfa$*, RflWL STTftsi for 3T3f%*>^ and mf%*wpi

Had this ^(of faÔ not been elided then ?r would be first changed to ,
and then to a letter of 5T^ class (VIII. 4. 53;, * would never be heard even
11
optionally, though so required
with
s,
by VIII,
3.
79, but the
forms would be always
as 3Tr*lff!* &c. H
From an
ishti,
and not ta any other
T^
the elision of
5^
ll
Thus
îs confined
is
to the
*T
of the Aorist
not elided in ^gffrfe in "^TT^r
m%,
T^ fa*
It is the Imperative of <^m*l thesis

*H* 'srafffe *N^crf:).
(^ farchanged to f?, and f| to fa (VI. 4. 101), and *=[ to ^ by VIII. 4. 53. Similarly it
does not apply to vqn qntti> where " is changed to sand then to 3 (VI. 1. 114)
Bk. VIII. Cn.
= TOT
IT. .
The
*TPrra H
Elision of w
of
elision
the Imperative with
*t*t in
rrr^r
is
ranga
sr elision.
Obj.
If so,
not be elided
how do you form

Ans.
Obj.
The
1555
11
m*^: from
in
is
with fcjfy and
in srs^P?
the antaranga?$ debars this bahi-
<rar *TPrfrT
by the
STTsmNr,
elision of
^ of ^ttct;
not here elided but changed to
sr is
from
a Vedic diversity. But according to Patanjali
the proper form; while in
er^rt%
VIII.
25
may
for
w would
srqr letter,
by
always be changed to
letter, and there
is
no need of eliding it
in pronouncing,
it will make no difference,
whether you pronounce with one consonant or two, e. g. srr5TF3R or srrOT^
2. 39.
If so, *r
11
Moreover by so doing, you
will shorten the sutra
VIII.
3.
by omitting the
78,
word
For the forms like BTeafrf *, STgtfg*, will be evolved regusjjl" from it.
by changing ^ of rt^ to ^ and the *r after it will be changed to s, and
then < changed to f by *r^ (VIII. 4. 53). Ans. So far it will be all right,
larly
but
we
Aorist
in *r?
we may
shall never get the alternative forms
get the form 3T*7i%ff*(VIII.
3.
3T?sf^* &c, though
Therefore, the word ftp* should
79).
be taken.
Obj. -If ftp*
dropped, and
*
^rfrfrp*
we
and *sqi
*T,
confined to
is
to be taken here, then the
S(teFTT:
>r
Ans.
only.
ftr^C.
word derived from
*r*
^^:
forms
shall not get the
^ of s^ and
and ^ri
*T^ will not be
passages
in the
m**w
Therefore, the present sutra should not be
II
We
and so also
by saying, that
shall explain ^TF^J

3Tsqt
from the root
s?>*
it is
11
generally thus derived; 3T + ftfi^=qg;+fa(II.

[N. B. The word
Had the present rule been
^+ fir(V ioo) = * + ftr(VIII.
srfrr: is
4-
39) =
26).
2.
4.
I.
confined to ftr^, the ?^ could not have been elided by VIII.
2. 26.
See VI. 4.
two forms are developed]. Or we may explain these
forms as Vedic irregularity, by which letters are sometimes dropped, and so
That letters are sometimes dropped in the
qH and >t*1 have lost their ^
100,
where these
II
Chhandas, we see
S^t^t
for
passages like the following
in
$p*if^*p%
srwri
f r
n*
3rr*n
fcîrrfclfeft for
*^
srs^rrcpft
The above discussion is summarised in the following

KariM:fa^ntfc ftrqT<*PT*nfireftr1r JTtrsRH, "This rule
elision of the
^ of ftp* only,
arrant 3
by the
elision of
W? 51*^ QrhlKW HlflR

?t ?
*rf *ft srftrc

this
be
moreover
5T5T
then
so,
sake of preserving the
for the
let
The
3T is
tot^ |r
,
wrffir
fr*Kt
VIII.
3.
II
<T?l
"
in
^m%''
II
"How
g^rfa t
*3r **<*
*rf*
&m%
11
if
no difference in sound
word
by
omitting
the
from it. The
78
for there
cannot come every where, as the difficulty
ftf^rT, rT^TTfl ftr*l *?<*
confined to the
is
then do you form srrem^

not elided but changed to a *rcr letter".
sr^ come every where,
this will shorten
R^rrTfop^?;
^?w- or ars^-
The forms
*rf**r:
will
is
be
in
^? Aorist
".
^ftr
h^r
and ***f could not be formed
Elision of w
1556
from
sjg;
and
*t*t if
the elision of
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
28
II.
Hence f%^ should
were confined to rep*.
not be read into this sutra."
&M*ft l^mni
^T
W^tT^^: "
be explained as a Vedic anomaly, for
The
elision of sr in *rf*sp
letters are often
dropped
and
in
will
srs^f
Vedic forms,
as in fsgfjTTfor^f* instead of fa<Effrrh?p^ n"

srest
% F?T
sn%
Rt
11
q^rfa
11
?FS 3rTCTO STîTCTO %i*5
II
The
26.
11
snst, frc%
m$\ tPT
*T^r%
tl
II
when
*r is elided
it is
preceded by a jhal
consonant (any consonant except semi- vowels and
nasals),
and
followed by an affix beginning with 2^ jhal consonant.

Thus 3rf*HT for 3TPTc**T, 3TT*P?*TP for 3*PTfj^jT: H So also 3tt%tT, arf^trn,
The last example may also be explained by VII. 4. 49; the
st^TtTPJ. 3T^TtT
is
II
elision of the *T of f*t^ being considered as asiddha, the
ged to
Why
Why do
do we say
we say
The
As
of the root
is
chan-
<j[ II
st*pTgq[
st
'of
OTJ^ WFPl.
Here the
II
st
of
anR^rr:
Observe arf^TrTPl/ ^TPTc^f
of this sutra refers also to the
^TT
Observe 3TT^T and
a jhal consonant'?
followed by a jhal consonant
of f%^l no other
sr
Srffcrr and
*?rpT,
^j is
II
II
elided.
though preceded by
a jhal letter ^, could never be elided as they do not form portion of one word.
^s
q^rfr i^rni;, wgrn
^FtT^st^?**! ^^rrî^'fr *?fa %m <rer:
i^n^SF**
?Ftt:
11
11
11
11
11
11
The *îs elided, before an affix beginning with

consonant, when it is preceded by a stem ending in a
27.
a jhal
short vowel.
Why do we say after a short vowel stem ? Observe

do we say 'after a stem'? Observe sr^TT:, 3Tt*Tf^rST*, 3T<*rWhy do we say "before an affix beginning with a
ff!| ^MIM^P* and STTT^
jhal".
Observe a^ q m ri, ST^rT U
As
3T<mr* M
3TfJrT;
sp^re, srgre
Why
II
This lopa is also of the RT^, therefore not here fts*f, ft^TPUl Here
word ft is added the affix u^ (V. 4. 18), and then the comparative
This ST is not dropped.
affixes rF and wt with stp* (V. 4. 11).
to the
%Z $fc
II
V5
II
28.
l^rf*
The
II
^:, fe
^ is
II
dropped
after
after this ; the augment far follows.

Thus the Aorist-stem of w is 3T?OT^S[
Personal ending
gets the
augment fe by VII.
3.
augment s?
the
III-
I.
44; VII.
2.
35
),
if
the
96; and by the present
Bk. VII I.
sutra
Cfi. II
^ between
this
Guttural Change.
.30]
f and $
is
we have srar^
dropped, and
Why do we say after the augment f ^

when the augment f? follows ? Observe
'
Why
^r: ifriKjki%
The
29.
sonant,
is
A
^.
rj^q[
(VIII.
from
^rn%
II
or
9>
dropped, before a jhal
2.
1).
JT?3
affixes
of
^"
The
II
is
ST*rfr\|:,
which come
the
that in
ar
f$STT the rule
not apply.
^ s*re*T:
2.
VIII.
end of a word.
member, when coming

affix, loses its r or
r^^rer^ before the jhal
affix
?j
all
*r
of
(1
1 1.
1.5)
the krit affixes, and dhatu
and not the Taddhita or the Femi-
the preceding sutras of this sub-division
all
5T3
27 does not apply.
5ir83r3>rerc:
In
the ru ^ e VIII.
effrg^r^jTrrr
sr*
But according
ll
with
r%<i,
snOTfa fasra
m ^5 ^^?r w%%
fj by VIII.
required by VIII.
not elided before r? as
is
2.
sfire^rw: ^rs^r^R
there should not be the optional
In
ijlj:
Here
ll
2.
gq7|W the
29
(^
^ would
rule VIII.
non-applicable.
there
is
11
21.
In
2.
25.
In
2.
26 does
2.
In ^>-q the
i
not lengthening by
require to be elided as initial
formed by adding
formed no valid word
no such word can be formed as ^rre^T^mrir
to
fortiori,
is
79ft)
consonant, followed by a jhal consonant
from
at the
its first
thus includes
after a verb
30 does not apply.
Thus
2. 77.
f*re:
of arvrw
In
rule VIII.
to
a conjunct con-
a pratyahara formed with the

It
*rftlF ( III. 4. 78).
affixes
e.
So
and
II
should be rather stated that "before a jhal affix included in
It
Frets ^rfaiffetf
f|5[
and
affix,
11
of use in the following places.
is
in a
sr^rqfqr
considered asiddha for this purpose
is
q[
II
II
11
i.
for
nine affixes. This Vartika applies to
VIII.
initial in
or 3? as
pjnf:
STofflrffc
sr^rftfl,
So also CT333T at the end of a Pada. Similarly *t*;t: T*TOPg> **rg*rf;

So also with initial ^, as rj^from rjST; so also rfg"?, Fjg^p*, ÎrT^
the pratyahara
and the
we have
the root wir
the substitution of
Vdrt:
and
q-
so also,
wifci ^?m-3Tnit:, 3T%, ^r
II
when
conjunct consonant, having
Thus from
and
*s.
II
Observe
srarftsr* <M4lfig:
end of a Pada, or when followed by a jhal beginning
at the
II
1557
*r
ll
^frg^rar is
Patanjali, there can be
).
In ^reisfa, 3JFRrar*, the $ and ^ are not elided, because ar is a Bahiranga substitute and asiddha, and the word ^r^ <*i|hj are not considered as Pada,
ending in a conjunct consonant.
Why do
Why do
Why do
*: $:
we say
we say
we say
ll
"
of
^r
and
'
initial in
'
at the
q^rft
ll
^"
Observe
^ff%
?
Observe qij: 5^
Observe frf^TrTT, ffWR H
H^frr,
a conjunct consonant
end of a word
#:, 5:
ll
'
ll
'
II
155$
30.
a jhal
and
sTtRsÎ
In
is
^t?k
not
^3*
substituted for a Palatal, before
is
t^h, <TT*s2mand ^T^TT^ from tîi
the feminine in ?tt of ^**^"
Pntf^TrT^
^T, sr^,
Similarly
f^ ) by I V. 1. 4 list, the sâ palatal

it should be changed to a guttural.
because Panini himself uses this word, in this form, in sutra
so,
Or because
patha wr
a jhal letter, and therefore,
the rule
confined to
is
without * and with a penultimate
f^RH
32
II.
II
^>^t
III. 2. 59.
is
<TtET,
followed by
It is
Guttural
BK. VIII. CH.
II
or at the end of a word.
affix,
Thus
CHANGED TO q
efflr
ggqrgffi *rnr%:
before the
^^ affix
Bhu. 200
(VI.
s^,
g^
sqr
With the
).
we
as
find
^ by VI.
I.
we have
snff^
In
11
because
21,
2.
root
Dhatu-
in
of ^
elision
24) f^TrP in Past Part, and
4.
the optional i%?^ of the Nishtha by
we cannot have
Or the
affixes only.
and not
24 preceded on the basis of the

This elision of ^, will not make
the root 3q*rr for the purposes of the application of rule I. 2. 21, on the maxIn fact, one of the reasons on which this
im gr?TTrrr?rePfr fffa*RPTTr rT^Trr^r
the elision of the penultimate
4.
^^+^>=^ + ^
being r%t> tnus
affix
II
11
maxim
is
based,
33<T\*r for the
is
this
very
purposes of making the affix non-flvj
augment 57 under VII.

f3K* affix (III.
changed to
that the elision of
fact,
2.
^by
In this
The
not
make
affix
f^
The word ^îs formed from
(vart).
59): the final îs
2.
\ does
11
first
The
elided
by VIII.
2.
23,
the root
takes the
this root
and then
root kunch, because
2.
62.
so exhibited in III.
it is
is
rule VI. 4.
24 thus finds no scope here.

case
the
we
say
view of
ws^ is an irregular form of
VIII.
by
s^
2. 59.
this
There the anusvara and
parasavarna change of this ^ to s^ by VIII. 3. 24 being considered asiddha,

is no palatal ^, and hence there is no guttural change.
there
^r *:
11
\\
^n%
31.
11
r-i
F?T (III.
2.
63, VI. 3.137
and
11
substituted for
is
at the end of a word.

Thus ^tST, m^l, ^[&Wl
g^n? by
^,
II
The
fs. is
and VIII.
3.
5 before a jhal
not added by VII.
56) %rr, frf*
letter
2.
48,
and
^niT*
>
^3, sre^, ffsrer*
with the affixes *, g*,[rTs* and
f^ For theqr of
by VIII. 2. 40, and this ^ is changed to 3
by VIII. 4.41, before which is dropped the first s by VIII. 3. 13. For the * in j
jfg^r^ either îs substituted by VIII. 2. 39, or <r by VIII. 4. 56.
(III. 2. 64)
from
*rs
these affixes there
^p^cft^:
II
32.
substituted
is
$%
<rTTT%
Of a
II
11
*r
?-3rr|:, ^Tcfr:, w.
II
root beginning with ^, the
ted for ^, before a jhal letter or
when
final in
is
substitu-
a Pada.
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II. .
For the
33
final
As
circumstances.
CHANGED TO mi
of a ^-beginning
^j^t, ^rvjq, %* t^ss^r,
root,
^W*
1559
under similar
substituted
is
WW, ^P^l, If^s*!*
*Tn|^:
from
For the q[ of the affixes ^ &c. q is substituted by VIII. 2. 40,

For the sr in ^ tj? v< is substitubefore which, the q becomes it by VIII. 4. 53.
ted T by VIII. 2. 39, or a? by VIII. 4. 56, and ^ becomes ^ by VIII. 2. 37.
Sând
5^||
Why
The
do we say "of a root beginning with ^

force of the genitive case in vrr^r
with the word ^:, but

whole: so that
is
not to
Observe
make
it
pjst, ?*3*l,
apposition
in
has the force of denoting a part as related to the
it
means "the word which begins with ^ and forms
it
root, for the 9 of
The
" ?
such a part
substituted
is
What
sr."
part of a
does follow from
substituted in 3*%*t also, which begins with st
it ?
For without
the above explanation (qr%ft44|4) *tt <*lR*m*cft=l*WTO ^rr^l &c), the q would
have come in examples like m&q ^\% without the augment st, but not where
Moreover, that it is an aT^r^prr srSV will appear
there was the augment st
letter
*T is
11
II
necessary in sutra VIII.

If
in the
will
it
forms
2. 37.
how do you
has the force of denoting a 'portion or member',

frT>*r, fp'g1!, for
be explained on the
here no pottion
maxim
of
taken but the whole word
is
HTf:
sstTifSftP?;
"An
expla?
This
operation which affects
something on account of some special designation, which for certain reasons

attaches to the latter, affects likewise that which stands alone, and to which
therefore, just because the reasons for
^flTÔ
root which begins with in its
does not attach",

'that
Thus
(ssrqfrfhrs;
formed from
it
exist, that
Or we may explain
in original enunciation the root is
rivative root be
do not
it
special designation
the sutra, by saying
original enunciation in
f^
Dhatupatha* ?
not beginning with f
II
De-
If a
(SFTr^H*gl3 = f Prf$$rr^), it. is a root

Denominative root, however, will not be
like frifÊT
which begins with $ the f of this

changed to ^, for it is not a root of upades*a. Therefore, when we add r%T to
this root, we get fRI^by VIII. 2. 31, and not srHftasL
;
II
\frT:
II
*^J? fa*l *RT*t ^rfprt
"? 5f
33.
tionally
The 5
changed to
of a word.
Thus
!*:,
fftrr
The
it
optional.
of druh,
or ft*qT,
>
^\
T*KlHt
ftwg% mwg*,
ftifi
w*^*
??, s?%**rr,
^*r> ftr^
others would not have got
These roots belong
<TCtT:
to
T^T%
muh, shnuh, and shnih
root y? would have taken always
The
H^fif $ffa
before ajhal letter or at
V,
^^tt^t, zrfmziy *<&$$> 3<*3*
W\K\
fi^
q by
wm,
*T
is
II
op-
the end
^3^,
3*3?;, jr*,
Jl
the last
sutra',
this
makes
but for this sutra.
Radhadi sub-class of Divadi gana: and are
IS6o
taught there
in this
division, the f^.
but by
frg^
2.
BK. VIII.
ClI. II. .
belonging to Radhadi sub-
Instead of making the sutra
45).
36
afT
J?T3? TT*L
or fry?
*:
II
T^TT%
II
for if the roots
1. 6,
to q$^3
were taught not specifically
of
VT-
II
changed to
is
rTfr
vi
before
a jhal
end of a word.
letter or at the
^^r,
TO,
II
The ^
34.
As
See VI I.
11
then the rule would not apply to yari luk.
*T<T,
JT^T
By
very order (Div. 89-91).
optional (VII.
formation of the aphorism indicates that the rule applies
this longer
also; as
is
CHANGED TO mi
^53%
*vz*wi, TTPTfl, <rtmfj[
The %
II
of the affixes
&c,
is
changed to ^ by VIII. 2. 40; and for the preceding qr is substituted 5 by

VIII. 4. 53. 3<TFT?^ is formed by VIII. 2. 39, read with VIII. 4. 56. qflorffc
formed by f^<T as
belongs to
is by VI. 3. 1 16,
and or-change by VIII. 4. 14. It would have shortened the processes of transformation, had only 3 been ordained in the sutra, instead of qbut the
ordaining of ^ is for the purposes of VIII. 2. 40, by which there should be ^
is
it
*r*Tfrr% class, the
lengthening
for the participial

this
V^
^ &c
>
(VIII.
4. 53).
that there should not be the change of
TOTi anc
Nishtha 3 into ^ by VIII.
Thus
42.
2.
T9 +
But had the substitute been
cr^+w
^,
(VIII.
2.
we should have
40)=^-
erx +
^rTsr
by VIII. 2.42.
sTr^Gr:
ffrP
11
*rf%*r*
11
II
q^rfa
II
11
srrr.,
aw ?^r^ *n?jrcrWr w<r srfo
TCrr:
II
11
Ms^fe ?^rW ^fr^

For the ^ of the root
35.
wxst
11
sttf,
there
is
substituted
before a jhal letter.
As
Why
ffirpST,
^TnU"
The word 3TTWT becomes st^T by VIII. 4. 55.

q not been ordained here, for this *T
has the last mentioned substitute
change, as the *r is also changed to

have given the form 3Tr?*T by
H and by so doing there would have been only one sutra, instead of two i. e.
STT^^T >J would have been enough ? Making this separate substitute, is for the
sake of indicating that the rule VIII. 2.40, does not apply here. For had
VIII. 2. 40, still applied, the substitute *? of the last sutra would have been
would
also
enough.
vowel
The H substitute, however, would have been the best.

The word irfpy is understood here. Hence there is no change
affixes, as srrf, arr^J:, 3TTf J
Vdrt:
In the Chhandas,
*r is
\*m&
^^^^T^T^T^^^r^Hrsrsi^f
rf*re fc**Rt
nwjrnif
scrfa^t
jj5t, *nr, *X3T, ^rnr, ^, srro
before
II
*:
substituted for the 9 of % and
*fifit,
11
ar^res^ f*mrH**r
r:
II
3$
ll
^Trft
argil^T
ll
q^ Thus
arfrf^
wr,
II
11
srcsr, ^sr,
Hk. VIII. Cn.
II.
37
*w Chance
1561
For the final consonants of vrasch, bhrasj, srij

mrij, yaj, raj, and bhrstj, and for the final 3 and ?j, there is
substituted ^before & jhal letter, or at the end of a word.
Thus pt^t : crer, srg*, mwi *<*z ^^r *g* **s?ra **ptt^
fra^
Trs? Tr|i iifere. ^prfroL *nr *rer
*?*
srer
sf* ^re^^rac ^*p
36.
STS*
been changed
3re"S2JH
cn?.
by ordaining
ST is
elided
4. 56.
*T9TC:
q-
In
11
11
*TO5.
to ir^-letters
that
VIII.
fatr* ft^re;
ll
The
5T
^TPTPi^ there
is
ending words would have
and the others to Gutturals
^fând
this sutra
debars
by VI. I. 16, the

which becomes ^ by
vocalisation
by VIII. 2. 19, and q becomes sr^-letter ^,

The word tiifMK is formed by f^<, there
is
lengthening and
no vocalisation.
The
mentioned
and ^r^ are never followed by a jhal beginning affix,

always take 57 augment. These roots are, therefore,
the sake of the change of their ^to qr, when at the end of
roots *n^
because such affixes

here, for
will
Some, however, form nouns like *n%5, ^1"%: with frfi^ affix from these
roots by III. 3. 94, vart, and r. augment is prevented by VII. 2. 9.
a word.
Of roots endingin vs we have JT^sr

4. 19, g- is
irer,
*?, STE^l, îs^n?
ll
Accord-
should not be mentioned in this sutra: for by VI.

always changed to sr, and this ^r will be changed to q" by the present
ing to one view, the letter
g:
^ to *[r by VI. 4. 19 is confined before

and therefore the mention of & is necessary in this sutra;
Others hold, that the change of
sutra.
I%?1 or
f^?j[ affixes,
moreover the ^ substitution here, and the
5T
substitution in VI.
4. 19.
refer to
the conjunct letter ^5 ( with the augment <p ). For if it were not so, then
g" alone being changed to 5;, the if of 5^ would be changed to ?, and we should
have
<J7:
instead of
"jg
Of roots ending
5r*r-3T5^rer,
**,**t:
ll
in sr
we have
f^y^T:
%ST, %g*,
%srs2T*,
fo^;
f%?T
:-%sr,
II
For the letters *, *t, ^ or ^ in the beginning

of a monosyllable, and belonging to a root, and which ends
37.
in
sr, 3?,
sr,
5*
or
>*,
there
is
substituted
3T,
sr,
S"
or
vr
res-
pectively, before *r or s^, or at the end of a pada (word).

Thus from f *>tt^^, ars^n and *T*hs* from 5^ fa tft$q% ^Tf
!
T%^H ^becomes 5^ by
VIII.
2. 31,
and thus
it is
J1,
a root ending in jhash.
1562
^ CHANGE.
From * (which becomes 5^ by VIII.

So
2.
[BK. VIII. ClI.
and thus
32,
is
38
II. .
a jhash ending root)
we have 3T*ntf: the 2nd Person. Sing. Imperfect (<*$)

is guna of m, the *r (of fa* 2nd Pers. Sing.) is
elided (VI. 1. 68), and we have arcm^, and for the letter T of the monosyllabic root, q is substituted by the present aphorism,
Then the final
ann^
also from ipj
There
Intensive (yah luk).
II
changed to
is
*j
3T"5f^f
(VIII.
2. 39).
Then
is
changed
to {.by VIII.
Then the first ^ is elided snnft (VIII. 3. 14). Then

lengthening by VI. 3. Ill, and we have 3T*reb
The monosyllable should be such that it should begin with a
75.
^Tî
2.
there
is
II
end with a
In
root.
and should be a full root or the portion

word which we found necessary in VIII. 2. 32,
letter,
fnc
fact, this
necessary here, in order to explain forms like

it>TO,
by fe^r
Why
T*far.
ar^re
is
and
of a
absolutely
from the Denominative root
II
do we say
"a
monosyllable beginning with
^ and
ending with
Observe ^PTfo? from the Denominative root fTHfo$l H For had iH?rsp
not been employed in the sutra, the word sntTP (VIII. 2. 32; would have qualified TO'- and the sutra would have meant " in a root which ended in a jhash,
%[u} "
and which contained a ^r^ letter as its member; there is jhash substitution for
such ^T ", and the * of jtf?5? would be changed then.
Why do we say " for a *sr letter " ? Observe gr^SFWqRr here ^ is
not changed to
Why
before
Why
II
and
*r
do we say ending
Observe
sr^TT,
^TT3*i
in
Observe fr^frT
jhash?
II
afrcrsare.
Why have we taken mi and not merely >*? Observe ^Tf^T from ?*J in
the 31? % Imperative 2nd Per. singular, the nj being changed to fa (VI. 4.
The substitutes are four
% S and q, and their respective sthanins are
101).
*t,
also four,
of
fact,
no
i.
e.
t and ^
3T, *T,
so that
<?
is
the substitite of
5"
but, as a matter
never so stands at the beginning of a monosyllable, and so there
is
substitition.
sp^nEcrsmar
ll
\*
T*
^^ *n
:
For the ^ of ^t (the reduplicated form of
38.
sit) is
**rrft H
ll
substituted V, before the affixes beginning with
and before
v-^n
II
The word yq
is
taken in the sutra as the reduplicated form of
W^r of Bhuadi class, as ^r^ intervenes

S>*lfrT and not the root
Thus t^p,
By the word ^T we draw in the words *f and
W, *m> ^1
ll
*r
<r, qr,
By
*Tc*T-,
ll
the express injunction of this sutra, the elided 3T
*TT
there.
is
not
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II. .
The final
40]
The
considered as sthanivat.
reasons.
and
If
merely a substitute, and
is
does not end
1563
could not have applied to

letter, for
in
2ndly.
Hence the
See coutra, the vartika in Mahabhashya.

The word $rfr* is understood here, and so also ^NH^M
is
^T,
The form
a vowel sr.and though this it
yet the lopa would be sthanivat.
affixes,
two
$t* for
the real reduplicate
considered asiddha.
is
a jhash consonant, but
in
ed before these
of
last sutra
does not begin with a **r
1st. It
letters.
is
elid-
necessity
*T in this sutra.
be no
but begins with
affix,
or
<T
q*,
and there can
come after ^vr

Why do we
Had we not used these, the sutra
that can
11
employ then the words 'before rT and *r'?

would have referred to *T and ^ only, as being in immediate proximity,
and the *q draws them in. According to Padamanjari the words rT*ft* could
for before ^ and ^, the ^ change would have
have been dispensed with
:
taken place by the
last sutra,
have taken place before
come
that can
^r then
*r
this sutra, the
same change would

and such affixes
affixes,
or *r-beginning affixes.
Wfr
II
sraf 5rehr%
11
are
by
The word jhash is understood here also, therefore the rule applies to
only, when it assumes the form of ^, by the elision of srr and hence
not here
?f*T:
after
whilst
other ^-beginning
all
II
**&& ^rf, srcr:,

h^rt qwi% îriRrs.
3*. H
?r^t *rcr srrtsrr
II
w&
II
11
A corresponding 3f, *, ?t, y or ^ is substiconsonants (with the exception of semivowels

and nasals) at the end of a word.
As *nr *r*, **fof 3HT, ^f^nsf? are, ft&^ st*
The word *jf?fcr is
formed by changing the ^ of ft^ to * first, and then changing this * to 5*, a
39.
tuted for
all
11
jas-letter.
The word
ar^T
'
anuvritti of Qflf ceases.
2.
ar^cTT,
is
'
used in the sutra to indicate that the
^3*, TOKI
II
by VIII.
4. 56.
5T*^mr# s*
*T, sr,
end
Thus
The exceptions to this have been given in VIII. 2. 30 &c, and VIII.
At an avasana or Pause, a
consonant may be substituted for a 5F
66.
%r*f'<
at the
11
II
<T3Tfa
sre ^TT^r?rT5ffr^^n^r **rfH
or
^ we have
$t*tTs*ro, 3T5**T, 3T5**TT:

T
10
II
v^m
:,
arf^rr
cr-sft:,
^Rr
sm:
is
II
by VIII.
II
11
40.
V is substituted for cf or *i
(jhash), but not after the root vn
sr
Thus from
The >of ft**,
changed to
II
coming
(^r)
after
g*
II
?S5\srr, $$*, rts^^H, *&&(, 3T?ys^: u,

changed to * by VIII. 4. 53. From 5^: tr^r, fr*jn,
The f is changed to ^ by VIII. 2. 32, and then it is
4. 53.
NlSHTHA * CHANGE.
I564
From f%^:$3T, %q,

changed to 5 by VIII.
the preceding 3
is
2.
elided
31,
there
is
substituted *
II
ffrTJ
II
"
For the * of I**
4. 53.
qîf*
^r:,
II
sr.,
'TOT:
Observe
*rr" ?
r%
*TrT:,
*W*
II
II
substituted for
?u is
In %^>f &c, the B is

4. 41, before which
II
3T^T, ST33TP H
afro***,
^rcS3?TC2tP ^FfRff^fT H^FT ^^fTC
41.
^ or
3"
before
?=r
II
Thus for q of f^ we have faiqvft, aft**?*,. ftfr<afa

For 3 of f^
Z&&&1,
T*$-q?%,
we
have
2. 31)
reftfSr U
For the *r of the affix to &c, is substituted qr by VIII. 3. 59.
Why do we say " before ^ " ? Observe fcRfs, P5T*
II
VI 1 1.
43
changed to * by VIII.
but not after the root
II
II. .
3. 13.
<*?!*,
by VIII.
Why do we say
qn sr: fa a?
*f
by VIII.
From f^: after,
SRT3, 3T?ft*n
Pjssswt,
and
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
R*
II
T$jm faSTcfr *: t^T ^

<j^t, ^,
fjrr?
ii
?r
qstffiT
II
and
After
?:
a^Rj, there
*<*n* grnr^ft
and
is
vifa
substituted
& of the
3TI*ciW*l, fl^fWfa, fatffanr, ffiiffafa,
yet the
E,
*;
the consonant *
II
ll
But even
be taken a
if *
^change does not take
11
II
:,
The word
which would include
m also,
but
common sound-name including

$3 &c, because betneeen ^
place in
and the ^-sound, there intervenes vowel-sound f

pure *
3^^*
: f^5T:, ftsHl^, %5P, fe?rer^ from f*r and |^[

do we say " after and % " ? Observe
gm^
3;
K,
Participial
II
common sound
11
and the same substitu-
*t,
After
here does not denote the
^cktcto
After
Why
and
*?mRITO, ^TSTcr:, *:,
$jtei
for the
^,
tion takes place also for the preceding
II
11
Vkw^psits'tosi Pteuwiiw
42.
suffix
II
but ^+ a vowel sound.

Why do we say " of the Participial suffix
for s
is
sounded not
like
Observe cffrff, ^?
Observe ^RrTi, ?f^^
Here the ?r of
the Nishtha does not follow immediately after s, the augment întervenes.
Why
do we say
" for
Why
do we say
"
changed.
As ftsnr^PI,
the
<r
" ?
11
ll
of the preceding
fasrefoj
" ?
"?
The succeeding
^ will not be
11
In the word ^rf^: the descendant of $^: the <T of Nishtha is immediately
preceded by \j but no change has taken place, because the Vriddhi, by which
5; is changed to m\, is Bahiranga and consequently asiddha, and for the pur-
poses of ^ change, the ^so obtained
*wtnf^rat *RrHJ*a:
trrt:
II
II
is
II
invalid.
q^rr%
11
^j>t-3TT^:, strt:, ^Rft:,
BK. VIII.
ClI. II .
44
NlSIITIIA
7f
CHANGES.
156$
For the & of the NishtM there is substituted

a root ending in srr and commencing with a conjunct
43.
after
*r,
if the latter contain a semi-vowel.

Thus from $r we have sot*:, JnTF^P*
'^r:, ^t^p^ from
consonant,
*<n
II
end
These roots yr and
one of which is a semi-vowel
t^t
Why
in arr,
do we say
"
have a conjurfct consonant
and
<*
11
the beginning,
in
11
beginning with a double-consonant
"
Observe
2tnr ; f
sira^nui
Why
do we say "ending
in
an"?
Observe ^f:, ^tHTP*;
Why
cg$:
For the
do we say " after a root " ? Observe fSrafa:, fcftQroots here m and ^r do not begin with a conjunct consonont, and that which
is a conjunct i.e. ift and gf is not a root, hence the rule does not apply.
Why do we say "having a
or semi-vowel"?
Observe ctrt,
II
fFTTCHP*
II
ssnfaw
II
^ttH
II
ntem^** T^rr^w Wrr

*m%3rer
roots
11
II
^-srrf^w.
11
^Freesrfî: f^8i<Wrfrf?f sâr*
44.
The <T of Nishth&
and those that follow it.
These roots belong to Kryadi

13)
and end with f
Thus
by VI.
1.
iôf
is
*r
11
^tff^#r%
changed to
^k^w
ii
after the
*r,
and commence from ^sr^^r (IX.
class,
(IX. 32).
wt:, 3frcn*, ^T:, ^frerct
&n
^^P, *fprep* from
the vocalisation
is
16.
After a root ending m or ^ and
in
after a root of Luadi class, the
changed to ^, like as in Nishtha. Thus cftfafr:, rftftfr:, tftfSp,
These are from ^ (IX. 26), ^ (IX. 28), ^ (IX. 18), 5 and g^r
*Rt:
Vdrt: The vowel of the roots 5 it^T (Bhu. 991) and jj (Bhu. 997), are
Vdrt
of the affix Rfj^

:,
II
is
II
11
lengthened before the Nishtha which
Vdrt:
ing.
is
changed to ^
place after
11
As
sniff:,
fÎfP
II
'to destroy' (Bhu. 1015).
= f%?TCT:
But gjf *rr*T from ^r to purify (IX. 12).
Vdrt: The same change takes place after the root fa ^?q% of Svadi
(2) when used in a Reflexive sense of becoming a morsel fit for swallowAs fa^ff **rcr ?&$? i.|e. where a morsel by being mixed with curd, con-
As 3^
class
The H change takes
s^r:
'
II
diments &c, becomes rounded of
f^tf^rrJfr
*ref,
^r
^^n"|5q*^T
itself,
'
there this
?m 3^3^
form
smr<T*m
is
used.
^s*ra tocf
^*ptr:
u
But
NlSHTHA
1566
when not used
?T
CHANGE.
we have
in this sense,
if^n
11
srpKffcfr
11
q^
11
srtf^n,
ll
*n%r Sttwi ft8M*HHi
srr
in
The
11
<*rrft
11
11
when
The
Thus
ÎP
sfltjrp
of
ar
the root-vowel
3ff**p.,
3f*H<iR
*r,
after a root,
n afiî41
\yt
II
sn-
Thus,
1%*:, frafc* n
is
;
NishtM
sfW
lengthening of the vowel by VI.
The
H
9lM
3TT?ji:
sfN^TT^t
in
maxim
the root
long
is
lengthened
tR
in
'
Observe
f,
srfsTrPrf^r
and means
the sense of oq^, there is no
in the sense of *rre
4. 60.
s
As
far?:
siftraffft: SRf!?T 3Hira?rf:
in the sutra is the Genitive singular of the root-
and
will
denote the root
$ft
ending
in
long f accord-
an imitative name (as $ft here) is like its

JT^fw^f^T^T T^rer
)
What is then the necessity of employing the word
".
For had the root fa with short f been meant, the form
11
The dhatu imitative noun though
f^:, includes the dhatu ending

fa ending in short 5 is taken.
tative
is
$ffr
would have been p

Ans.
of fa
"
the sutra?
3fa?<^ in
The vowel
^ includes the two roots fa OT and fa fa*ro*i<5V
The form faq:
ending
ing to the
original
II
See also the commentary of Sayana on

Ri
S * 5- 9).
(
Obj
$ft
root
%,
4.
The Nishtha being added
'.
after
^,
lengthened.
II
imperishable
changed to
is
'
noun
**nr
is
60 and 61.
when the vowel
say
we
do
Why
The word 3Tf$r<T is formed with
TTWSP
lengthened by VI.
cfiTHt
irra
nw tTrarSfai^TO f^sm^n^ T^rcrew reit
ii
46.
46
Therefore not here
verb.
roots ?r^ irrf3nm% (Div. 24) &c. are considered as arn^[
%ft sftafa
ff%:
Moreover, the
changed to
the Dh&tupatha.
Thus 3?n*fsft w^'i MHmn,, arrnrsft
II. .
tsktcitoT
The a of NishtM
45.
^ft
TTCR
f^rTT
must be the object and not the subject of the

sfrfipra-
[BK. VIII. CH.
taking
jarfF
in short % also, as in sutra
VI.
(VI.
4.
4.
59,
77) as in
60 where
Q, If a root ending in short vowel may also be indicated by an iminame, declined with $rf augment, then why is the root rf exhibited
in sutra
I. 3.
19 as >: instead of
rm'< and not f%
w>3T %:
f*w
i.
e.
the sutra ought to have been pr
<rcp^ri
BK. VIII. CH.
50
II.
NlSIITIIA *
CHANGE
1567
Ans. Here the word fir is not used as a dhatu-imitative word, there is
no intention here to denote the verbal idea of the particular act connoted by
the root fir; on the contrary, it simply expresses the mere form fu
11
^ft **<*#
fr%:
11
U\9
||
q^fr>
||
II
^r<i%^rR?j RgrfrefTCTOrertf
^T:, 3T-*T$T
srerre
The Nishtha
47.
arfNrr H^rlr n
3.
of ^rr
is
changed to ^
*r is
not when the Participle denotes

Thus
II
after
*$-,
but
'cold'.
*V> tffar TOT; but

vocalised to f by VI. 1. 24.
*ft;f *** *fh?t
,
Ttffcr
*w%,
*ft<fr
*rg
flfaWK* The
The prohibition applies when the noun is an adjective and means 'cold'
and not when it means a disease. Therefore we have Jrfatffa: with ^r change.
cular
The word ^J is a gun a word formed by *ni, and denotes the partiguna or sensation to be sensed through the organ of touch. In^this
sense
is
it
ved from
derived from the root *j*r fegtfPf U
?j*r 3Trfft
Explanation
3T>xft
is
it is
II
q^Tfa
II
*W,
II
The Nishthd 3
48.
Thus
denotes a disease, deri-
meant
in the sutra.
*, after
3TS^> but
is
the only refuge here.
SHtTP^R
not when
There
II
It also
nothing to show, what
is
changed to
is
II
an Ablative
in connection with
= STfftr; rTW?l
SPTSRt *T$%: qrft
ST^-STqT^
to aran
case.
11
Why
do we say when not in construction with an Ablative case ?

Observe 3 <-^<^ f><TT?l = 3*f <T 'drawn out'.
The word s^tFTC is from the root 3?>it 53fnuTOT 3F?rfcT*Tffi!J, and not from
the root sr>^; and hence the Nishtha is not changed.
'
% f*r
11
f^r
^naq; re Hi<
sense
The word
means
"
gambling
f^jrcroft
The Nishtha
49.
when the
w wi
is
<r
is
11
changed to
after f^r
?r,
not that of play \

'
fifiH Rq r
means
" desire
of conquest or gain
",
but here
Thus ^pn^ = ^r?R^

:
^p*"<N:ll Why
^ ^%
II
do we say "when it
Here the throwing of dice
with the desire of winning or gaining victory (vijigisha) over the opponent.
WWt S*r%
*nrfir u
........
it
".
does not mean to play wj? Observe

is
h^rt 3Tf%fipftaRrT*f
II
X*
II
Vtfv*
II
fiftrf*T:,
3H*RT
II
NlSHTHA CHANGES
1568
The word
NishtM ^ to
50.
changing the
Ph!<ji
[BK. VIII. CH.
when the sense
5f,
54
formed by
irregularly
is
II. .
not that of
is
'wind'
The word
and the
=3<ttrP
fa^FT
is
Participial affix
Thus
with the preposition f^.
err,
sfT^STOrer-, fMfa*
fSniHr
JT^T:, fsftfat
fc$:
II
Why
Pt^Trr
formed from the root

II
î%f
do we say when not meaning
" the
wind
" ?
Observe
l5F ^Trf:,
11
In the sentences
fSrefor: inftrr ^T^T, f^faisffcrafor, the * change has

taken place, because the location of the verb 3T is in the i^q- and arfT, and
not in the ^r<r, which is merely an Instrument. Hence the above vritti uses
" if
the words
the sense of the verb *r does not govern srt in the loca-
".
tive case
5T?: *>:
*?
II
51.
root
g*
3JfeMK
3J55fi:,
r:
vk
II
root q^"
*>:
It
<r
after the
cT
after the
*r
after the
11
gr is
II
w.
sr.
II
substituted for the Nishtha"
II
As
<T*?P,
srnft *:
11
qr^^^RL
53.
$j
g*:,
substituted for the Nishtha
^Tf^r
52.
root
is
II
II
As
*Nt
T^T
II
<rTn%
II
*r is
II
ot*:, *:
substituted for the Nishtha
II
Thus ^R:, wmihui

sT^T^TcTT^rrq; *i\
sr^rt, sr?q<r <<^m
*&<* *c3Rm^n;^ Rgra^^rs^TOf *rerraWr *r*n^
ffxr?
II
II
q^r
II
11
II
ii
54.
it is
after the root ^q-
optionally substituted for the Nishtha
preceded by
sr
<r,
II
tive
Thus sreffa: or q-^ftrf:, MWlHî^ or srefVr^r^ H In the second alternawhen i does not come, we first vocalise the root f&x into *jft, and then
add
r{
II
Had Samprasarana
have been changed to ^
not taken place
after ^rr
by VIII.
first,
2. 43.
then the Nishtha
rT
would
But when sajnprasarana
is
BK. VIII.
ClI. II.
56
NlSHTHA CHANGES.
15^9
once made, the root no longer has a semi-vowel and so there remains no occaSee VI. 1. 23 for vocalisation.
sion for the application of VIII. 2. 43.
sgrar.
11
The
55.
;jg5TO
formed then
are
and
irregular Participles *g&, gfta, ^rr
when
only,
no
Preposition
pre-
cedes them.
The word $& is derived from the root fsfTOT f^rc^r the *r Is changed
The change of a? to * (VII. 4. 88) and the want of augment (VII. 2. 16)
The same change takes place before ^35 also, as $#4131
regular.
The affix ?j is elided after the roots sftw, &\ and ^H <*pi, and the
to
are
II
augment f^ is prohibited this is the irregularity in sfh*:, 3^: and zmwWhy do we say when not preceded by a Preposition ? Observe
;
JT^ftTrf:, ffrgjrfsm:
g*FTCP, JTSftfoP,
II
11
jt^5T:
In the case of <n\> prepositions other than
3?( are prohibited.
Or
the augment
See VIII.
Vdrt
2.
is
$5. is
added, and then
The forms Sr^gJJ and
changed to
from
$ftf%3:
ps,
should be enumerated.
tf^SJJ
&c.
Here
*T
though the root has taken a Preposition.
In the word <tfc3P, the word qft
not a Preposition with regard to
is
f^P = Tftf^P H So that

understood, hence we have the form ^1":
the verb $*r;
$?j is elided
3 vdrt.
<rft is
<TfiTrT:
upasarga of the verb
Ttr
II
gsfeqfrqpran^N*
m, tw, ^r^d<în:
fftp
11
3* f^
s^d<^m
11
x*
11
after 3^,
Thus
<H:
or
^HF
11
33:,
The NishtM * may

fk%> 3^, ^T, ar, ^
5?Ti
1%,
^sr,
srr,
11
3^ ^r srr ?fr %&mm zxrw faaitMiKw *m* arf^fr
56.
5T,
i^rf*
*nTrr st^jssipi.
11
II
or 3rP, f^W= or farF,
SJS5T:
or
SS^F/ ^TT or
:
^TCF, STPF or Jiffs,
II
#, the T change was not ordained by any rule, and so

With regards to others, the T change .would have
it is an aprapta-vibhasha.
always taken place by VIII. 2. 42 and 43, this makes it optional.
The root ffc frsTR^r of Rudhadi is to be taken here, and not the other
With regard
f^
roots.
to
Thus the following
Kdrikd
Nisiitha
1570
The Nishtha
Divadi class
f%rT: and f%?f:

by VIII. 2. 58.
are both
of
wr
II
*sqrr,
<J,
"F^lf*
The NishtM %
*3J^ and
Thus
X^
57.
JT3"
is
&U, WT,
5T,
II
not changed to 3 after
dfvfflb
is2nr : ,
3^
is
root
exhibited in the sutra in
*rf{ is
lengthened by VIII.
ftnrft tftmrercsft:
possessions
This
is
'
X^
II
The
58.
*
2.
and the
78,
<T^Tft
II
irregularly
s?j is
its
2.
II
ts^t,
s^ro
ttp,
42, 43.
lengthened form
h by VI.
elided before
f^TT*.,
II
?^
*? : , Sj^rab
This debars the ^ change prescribed by VIII.
The
qi%, JT^Hl
<|,
II
s^rhp*,
tainr:,
.6o
m JgqiyqftdiKlH,
II.
ftt-^1% of Adadi class is ftifrp (2) of f%T-ftfa of

(3) of ft of Tudadi is ftft.
(4) of f^[ of Rudhadi
The Tudadi f% has also the form f%^T: in the sense
of
only
is f%$r:
Bk. VIII. Ch.
#t, nwuft
formed Participle
the root
4. 21.
II
f%^T denotes
and renowned \
'
derived from ft^T
though so required by VIII.
of Tudadi
<SP*
class,
the
is
not changed to
42.
2.
RtIW arg = *r*tto ^f 'he has much riches'. Because riches

so they are called hpt or enjoyments par excellence.
( ^q%
Thus
enjoyed
'
),
we have
In the sense of 'renowned',
nowned
Why
ous
'
Here
or famous".
= jrafa:
f%TT:
11
fa^rs^ T5^5
!nTT$%=srera:
do we say when having the sense of
Observe
f^5f :
fira* sreran*
'
" this
man
is
re-
II
possessions
'
and
'
fam-
11
11
are
'
Mîfa
11
The word
59.
ftrrni;,
11
firrT is
sense of a fragment, a portion \

Thus f^nr mgfrf, farf JTTrTfcT
This
5i*3R
11
formed in the
irregularly
'
II
root-meaning of
fn^[
The
rudki word.
sûnnisnni^
to
II
It is
debt.
3T*it
synonymous with
under VIII.
is f*^"
q^Tfa
11
The word
2.
?pm, errsm^
il
Wt
is
it
may
*rej?j n
The
be taken as a
42.
II
irregularly
formed in the
derived from
pounded from
is
not very manifest in this word,
regular form
60.
sense of
is
*t,
m^t "he
the
who
is
in a
changed to
?T
II
The word arwtf is com-
debt transaction holds a lower position"
Bk. VIII. Ch.
i.e.
62
II. .
Guttural change.
1571
compounds may
a debtor. This nipatana shows that such irregular Locative
be formed;
here the
foi
The
member.
member
not
in
the Locative case, but the second
condition of being a debtor
is
fcrTW7^* or
first
is
then the word grwfr
"
indebtedness;
"
creditor' cannot be formed ?

This
For STW$T is illustrative only of something to be paid
hereafter, in consideration of something formely received; and thus includes
SrT*rdr also; which also has been so employed by the author himself in qrc^rprf:
If this
is
is
so,
'
no valid objection.
( I. 4-
35
The word sôr we use in sentences like

Why do we say when meaning debt
'
^fa
gT^TT MNTi ^Tiii^Tiî^Til fgr

i
ff%;
'
*s&h
s?
ll
$^n%,
W* t*TCaJft
Observe
q^Ti%
ll
ll
s^ ^nfa,
TPJrTI.
5TCtt,
ll
II
f^r,
W$ S^ %$ftvfi 3*? % f^t f^qr?n%

In the Chhandas we have the following irregu-
TOtt fa*^ s?3^ >nr#
11
61.
lar Participles:
nasatta,
nishatta, anutta,
praturtta,
siirtta,
gurtta.
The words TOtT and r^ft

and
and there
fa,
secular literature
secular literature.
is
not the
?r
change of VIII.
we have TOsT* H
The word 3TtT:
2.
ôr#,
as fffr^mf^T*( = *?r<frOll
by VI.
So
is
56 does not apply here.
of VIII.
is
are derived from the root tft preceded
4. 20;
irregularly,
%?5T55PT^T W-
*R
II
as
Thus
42.
?KTTre>3m
also ftqrP in the Vedas, but
from 3?$ with the negative
As vt^rfm 3
When
and when from 3% then VI.
changed to 3
2.
it is
4.
fTTrfau^:
W&
II
T<^
$r?ii
- 3T35T0
by H
In
ll
f^T7^:
in
The option
JT^^ is from
ll
derived from ?^then3îs added
21
is
applied.
= ^rr*Tre:
,(
5^
ffe*, S3I*nE*T,
$:
g%
ls
is
from
fr
m ?>
^, the
as
*Trtf
II
stem formed with the affix %^ under III. 2.

58 &c, substitutes, at the end of a word, a guttural for the
62.
final
consonant.
The word *&?$
is
understood here.
The word
f^H^
is
a Bahuvrihi
For the final consonant of such

a stem, a guttural is substituted. As 9rftf^( IH- 2 5$ ), 9^f^, ?^^^
The sutra could have been f|p: ff:; the word ST^T^T is used in the sutra
meaning
'that
stem which has kvin as
its affix.'
to
show the Bahuvrihi compound; so

Moreover this Bahuvrihi
a guttural.
the f|r^
affix,
11
change
that the
3;
of fg^r
11
may
not be changed
also indicates that the roots
their final to a guttural
before other affixes
to
which take
than
f^ u
Final changes.
1572
Thus the
The
and
roots spr
take
ffT
f^to
guttural change will take place
verbs: as,
*rn?t 3TtfT5ff jtt^t 3T3T37>
WR
form
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
and
even when
fa?
nouns by
these
II.
64
III. 2. 59, 60.
roots are
declined
where stor* and 3T3T3* are tne Aorist of
as
and
s^sr
The augment 3T? is not elided, though the *rr is added ( VI. 4. 75 ) as a
Vedic diversity. The f? augment also does not take place as a Vedic irreThe augment srîs added by VI. I. 58, and the vowel is lengthened
gularity.
by Vriddhi by VII. 2. 3. Thus s^+^w + fa^ + fir^sreRr (VI. 1. 58 ) = 3TOT3
$5T
II
(VII.
So
2.
and VIII.
Other wise
62).
2.
it
would have been
by VIII.
q-
2.
36.
changed to a guttural, though the noun ^r is a

noun
and
not
formed
by rap* and this is so, because the verb &f
formed
f|p^
also in gmrf,
the
f**T:,
?r is
does take f|p^

Obj.
the root
|rer
also.
be
If this
so,*there
In gutturalisation,
*by
rrroflr(
5RUri
?f%:
II
VIII.
S3
The word
is
t^s
tiP
The
*rr
*T,
and
?r
to
13,
from
not desired here.
which both become
II
^nrf^r mft
final of
<T^l
is
11
5?^ at the end of a word
understood here
or *rr% sfcRirffrp
to
in ^3j*Ff**li
is
op-
changed to a guttural.
tionally
13)
changed
in
56)
4.
ii
63.
I. 4.
sr is
<Rrrfa H *ft:,
iwfa ^rT5r
11
ought to be guttural change
Ans. The guttural change however
with f^r?
II
also.
As
*rr%
4M ^lrp
According to Pro. Bohtlingk
(Maitr. S.
this latter
form
not found in the Samhita.
Here the root to has taken

sidering
denoting 'condition orstate';by con-
f^snrjn
as belonging to tfq^rf^ class.
it
^fa*3 TRP =
*ft^Tf> or *ft?R*
II
The
gutturalisation optionally debars
change of VII I. 2. 36. When the q change takes place,

the
to 3; by VIII. 2. 39 and VIII. 4. 56.
q-
*trt
srfrpff*
>sirah
ii
II
sr^rf^^
64.
final
it
<^rft
II
11
*r.,
*:, ^r^t:
ftjSFspff tftrcnfHt^*
is
5T
substituted,
is
changed
II
11
at the
end of a word,
for the
of a root.
As
5PI.,
this
Jrerrab JTcTn*,
^ and fn
11
considered as asiddha
Why
Why
?3W
II
These are formed by adding
The lengthening
is
do we say
do we say
takes place by VI.
$&%
not elided.
"
of ^-ending roots
"
of a root
" ?
" ?
Observe faj, %<l
Observe %$*,
fare.
II
to the roots
The
4. 15.
II
sj,
being
Ch.
Bk. VIII.
The word
q
67]
II .
<t^j
Substitution
is
understood here
also.
1573
So we have
where
Jjrfret, ZrttH-
not at the end of a word.
is
^fra
*X
II
q^rfr
||
Go.
sfn,
**,
*T
and
sr
As 3TTWT, 3T*r?qT the Imperfect

The ^pr is elided as a Vedic
11
||
substituted, for the
beginning with
affixes
<TTTO
is
;j
II
of a root before the
*r
II
of
frij.,
as in the sentence stt^
diversity.
So
augment fîs not "added by the option allowed, owing

applies to those cases where the
if is
also
srn^Rt
to VII.
1.
^vith
68.
not at the end of a word, as
it
rT*ren
W5Q, the
This sutra
was
in the
last sutra.
M<H4<Ji s:
$*
II
sjqr
3Tfre^,
*rrg^
The 5
II
final
or 3 )
primary ^
So
11
f^ and
and
for the
of ?gr^T
<?
subs-
is
also ^feref*:, ST#%f*r
tfir^
is
derived
is
^, but
it
the preposition
should be distinguished from
This secondary
it.
11
h 3*
q^TR
|$S f^TTT^
st^tt: s^crer. s^crera

ff%:
II
3T^m *SrW
67.
final of the
3*F3T:
11
II
srrcr:, *%cnrn, s^ter,
11
II
The same
Nominatives of
substitution
sra^rn, *&<ran
takes place for the
and
jj^cren
II
The word srsrsir: is from srsr+sra:; *k*W from %?f +

and gfer: from
H
The affix f^ is added to the two latter by III. 2. 71. The word
is also formed by f*^ (I II. 2. 72).
Thus the three words %^rr^, <m-
+^
BT^n^r
^T?T
*j;
II
undergoes a distinct and separate Sandhi change from that of the
c^ (
5^tt
h, ^*t:, ^:
^3 which is changed to *r in
The lengthening takes place by VIII. 2. ?6. and the word means
with the affix
Bahuvrihi.
*ttfffa :
at the end of a word.
Thus
from
<r^r
For the
66.
tituted ^,
II
and 3TSRnx are formed.
These words take the affix ^w before the Pada2. 71).

After having taken 3^, the above
Nominative singular irregularly.
terminations (See Vartika to III.
forms 3TW: &c, are made
Why
is
in
this nipatana,
when ^ would have come by the
the lengthening would have taken place by VI.
4. 14,
^wand^r?^? They
for
Vocative singular
are so exhibited here,
also.
last sutra
of the words
3TWT,
making them long
For they could not have been lengthened
Vocative singular, because VI.
4.
14 does not apply to
it.
and
*y^-
in the
in
the
Thus f s^r:, i
s Substitution
1574
^ shows
The word
As 1
cluded here under.
3Tfm
^rfrr^^
11
S^
II
that other forms, not enumerated,
gr^rcrern
q^Tfa
II
II
68.
STfq;
70
also be in-
||
11
also ..substituted for the
55 is
may
II.
II
*mr ^Tcr^q^^T^R ^*m
3T?r
Bk. VIII. Ch.
3;
sr^
of
at the
end of a Pada.
Thus
ffi?TO
3TfT*irr,
3T#rf%
1 #^rfts#R
sutra exhibits the form sr?^ without the
As
II
to
Pada
is
Before the words
ning with i\ as
^sgft
11
in the
mn
^change takes place
this
3Tfr *Wti Tft *5TTft
it
^q", ?rRr
sjfftTOi srfftnr, STttWrT*
Others say, that
VIII.
69, because
2.
The Nominal stem
II
Vdrt
to
The
ll
See Vartika
ll
to ? in the sutra by VIII.
BT?^
of ^, in order to indicate that there
elision
q^TR
11
*:,
not elision of n
The ^ of sr?^ is
is
2. 7.
is
As
11
^farft,
not changed
intended to show the word-form
above examples by
and
jtfttc,
This
the
I. 4.
of 3??^
17.
is
changed
an exception to VIII.
is
universally before
all
2.
69.
words begin-
II
sr-^fq
II
When
no case -ending follows (i. e. at the end

of a Pada in the narrower sense), r is substituted for the ^ of
69.
3T^Cll
Thus 3T?f^rRr, 3T?^3i n Why do we say 'when no case-ending follows'?

Observe srfr^r^, srfffa:
Here ^-called ^replaced the final sôf sr^
The
difference between this ^-called
and the ordinary is illustrated in the above
II
11
?;
?;
The
set of examples.
is
is
changed to
>j
by VI.
In 3T?f^n% and 3T^j[lF% the case- ending
Obj.
so by Pratyaya
Ans.
This
?WiPr
*r *T^Ttt
of
^-called *
113, the ordinary *
1.
not so changed.
is
lakshana,
not
so,
The
II
* for the final of
this srg^
affix
apply to
elided
is
because of the following
11
is
elided after
a case
maxim
3t^
by using the word

11
3?^, and
ending here also
srff tf^fr
*TrTr
^R
JT9TT
rule of pratya lakshana does not apply to the substitution
As
f ^qffrs^r,
?ft7,
'lopa'
there the rule of Pratyaya
#rrft R^re. (VIII.
by VI.
vw&FsftxQWtw ^fe
s^t%
ffa;
is
ar?^ when the affix has been elided by g^r or ^r. Therefore,
by using the word
??^r^T,
that there
not considered to be followed by fjqôr case -affix.
elided
is
we may say
11
vso
1.
11
2. 7).
But where an
-
lakshana does
Here the
affix
is
68.
q^rft
ll
srsrw, g^rc^,
11
^t^ ws *m* %&m\ s^ft m^ swrr
>r^r^
11
3?^,
5ft
Bk. VIII. Cn.
*r
11
II. .
72
Final change.
T^rrssTwrR 3^531.
3*w^tai
1575
11
In the Chhandas, both ^ and?: are substituted

for the final of amnas, udhas, and avas.
Thus 3TS
or srs^r, 3?* if* or 3;m3; spr rr? or 3T^T
When ^ is subs70.
II
^ is replaced by ^ by. VIII. 3. 17, which

19. The word 3?^^ means 'a little', and st**t 'protection'.
Vdrt
^ andcboth replace the final of $r%tr*r before ktst^,
tituted for the finals, this
VIII.
3.
As sr^r *tst^(VIH.
as well as in the secular language.
The words sr?^ &c before
Vdft
the finals of
is,
ar??;
&c
3. 14,
is
elided
in the
VI.
3.
Vedic
in)
&c should be enumerated.
<tf^
are replaced by ^ or * before n% &c.
As.
sr^fflT-'
by
inr-
That
or srî?
or 3??: iffcj 3T?^:, 3T?x 5^:, sty 5^:, iftffa:, iff: qf%, ft <rf?r: <}r?f, $: qftt,
x qr%: 11
Here r is substituted for the final * of sr^r &c, which at first sight
qfrT:
g
may appear
11
final
it is
so ordained, in order to prevent the visarga
11
q^n% 3^:, w:, nanc%:

*ref?r
>pg; was* HimtftHMfti f#i
In the Chhandas, ^ and ?; may replace the
71.
of the word gsr^; when used as a mahft-vyahriti.
3*r ff*rnfnt&
ffan
But
superfluous.
change of this *
Thus
II
vs? n
33r?CTrrfTO* or
II
II
wn
11
The maha - vyahritis are three,

They denote respectively
ssTSflTOT* u
used generally before the famous Gayatri mantra.

the earth, the firmament and the heaven.
The
denoting the firmament.
5^
other two are
is
an Indeclinable and a Vyahriti
w and
:
11
Why
do we say when it is a maha- vyahriti ? Observe *jff f%%^ 3?TO

Here g^: is a verb, 2nd Pers. Singular, Imperfect ( ?s^ ) of the root
without guna of the root, and the 3?? augment is not added as a Vedic
qf&l:
*r
II
diversity.
sr^fr^rercf^r
sp
II
v^
II
t^tpt
ll
*g, ^g,
^g, ^f^n?;,
^:
substituted for the final e; of a word ending in the affix ^3;, and for the final of ^1$,
and 3?*^ at
72.
is
the end of a
The
3ct only,
Pada
anuvritti of
and not the
ends with
*r
(in the wider sense
such
rest.
is
ct
is
I. 4.
14, 17).
understood here from VIII.
That
is,
when
replaced by ^
2.
66.
It qualifies
the word formed by the affix ^st
For a word formed by ^n does not
1576
sometimes end
in *TV
always end
fc^T
VIII.
Thus fafl^r*,
*WH, S^sTT^fSn
thus
^*r
fas^^r
in
ct
cannot qualify
As ^^ and
2. 36).
^ of
it.
Trr^r%; with
f%STPr:, <?f^pp*ir*,
Rf!"^, Tnfar^ H
affix.
?t?t
*^*t qufc^qpfc
formed word does not end in

Here sr is not changed to ^
*t: 3*3^-
<r*s3Hj*T*
II
sr^f^
ct
the rule does not
II
^,
In the case of
itself;
not apply.
73
II
But when a
As
g and so
in
ClI. II.
no necessity of qualifying these by the
(VII. 1.70 and III.
II
SRI3?3ir*, 3T?TfTl^:
apply.
is
BK. VIII.
in those cases the rule will
there
*r,
aTTênds
66.
2.
and
in
CHANGE.
the ^
this 3
is
ordained, before any other rule manifests
debars ^;
why
so
should
relating to the elision of the final in f^$r^ also
does not, however, over-rule the
elision-rule,
not debar the rule
it
This rule sets aside
because
^,
but
it
not directly con-
is
it
nected with this change.
Why
ordained
not changed to ^
^ is
in ST^fFl. the
ra>7R-CTTutf<i
this
),
By
the very
not be changed to ^
^ will
fact,
that m. is
m rule
otherwise
would become superfluous;
for it would be easier to say let ^be changed to 3;,

and we should get the form snT^T^ by this rule without 5^
If this be so, that the 3**. is not changed to f, because of giving
Obj:
it a scope, then in SRfTCt 3*^> tms 3** should not be changed into ^ by
11
VIII.
9?
3.
Ans
No; the maxim
is
that that rule
a particular rule would become useless,

set aside
which
is
$ change, the
is
set aside,
with regard to which
not so over-ruled: but that rule
only an occasion for the application of another rule
^mfewr, *m 3
TTfws^sfer,
jtrt
if
vidhi
<t*t
is
f%^
PM?
u^m
tpSt
useless (anarthaka),
11
not
is
( q
r%(f
With regard
with regard to 3 change,
to
it is
merely an occasion.
The word
<tî
understood here
is
place in re^TST and ftqfcp
fairer:
ff^r:
11
rlrrr
II
TCrr
v$3
q^rft
II
sttot^to
73.
<rera
II
fail, 3rq;-3T^f:
change does not take
II
^r^^rt^rc arrWr H^re
11
is
^ of a
root, with
before the Personal ending r% fa),

stands at the end of a word.
the exception of sr^

it
also, so the
II
The
ending
and
is
^[T^[ll
*r
of a root can stand at the end of a word
dropped.
The
Thus 3?=^^
Personal affix
is
^T^r^,
elided
3T^5TTT
by VI.
1.
when
when the Personal-
*f> from tne roots ^* r 1

68, and thereby ct comes to
*T
stand at the end of a Pada.
Why
added to the
do we say
root.
'
before
frf*
'
Observe ^^rw formed by
f^F^r
affix
Bk. VIII. Oi.
Why
OT
Here
II
II. .
77
Penultimate Lengthening.
do we say with the exception of

'
added as a Vedic
See
sn*.' ?
stpt ff^t
the Imperfect 3rd Person singular of 3^11
3TT: is
See VII.
irregularity.
fafo vimr ^rr

74.
q^TT%
n vs
11
^ may
or
11
3.
1577
*TR^ *T^%
is not
The fe
93, 97.
ftrft, ^ricfr:, ^:, 3t:
11
optionally be substituted for the
of a root, before the Personal ending fe (^), when such *T

stands at the end of a Pada.
Thus ST^s&TSr ^* or 3?^^ ?s*i, ar??rcrrsr ^r* or'^^î ^
For the
35 is
first
substituted visarjaniya, which
The word
sutras
<^T
? frr:
II
VSX
*rmn
^:,
II
fsrfq- <rt<ff
or
may
35
^fcn% ^nrCt ^r
optionally be substituted for the
stands at the end of a Padp.

Thus 3Tf*R?l csr* or 3Tf*R^^R, srfe^nt
ffrT:
q^rft
11
iff:,
n, *:, 3Tr^fr=
roots ending in
sfr:,
Why
These are
II
examples
r,
Why do
srnrT^
may
we say
The word ^r%:

The word qî
ffe
II
\SVS
II
77.
3" is
will
11
all
examples of roots ending in

in the next sutra.
be given
'of
%^
is
irf^PTIL
ijffc^rlt
W^,
here
not to be lengthened.
vowels'?
So
that the 3? of * in the above
'of a root' is
exam-
understood here
understood here
is
<*3pR
Of a
II
also.
Therefore f and
3Tr*cfr*fa,
ending
in
^fe,
also, therefore,
not here,
f*Kf, X*K<
II
II
root ending in t or
f^ffr^k, f^fafa, sT^rofa:,
II
the penultimate
lengthened, before a consonantal beginning
Thus
TMfa,
arr^g^^TO
^<totot:, ^t:, **r.
not be lengthened.
are not lengthened in arm:, m%:
% or
or
c?r*
have we used the word 'penultimate? Observe
the % of the reduplicative syllable
ple
11
when such %
II
Of
II
vsc
11
ftr,
^F^RRR* STHTP T^^ TT^roT ft ^*ff Wlf

76.
A penultimate % or ^ is lengthened, when the
?" or
^ of a root can stand at the end of a Pada.
Thus
*r.
II
final
\\
11
sake of the subsequent
before the Personal-affix
of a root,
sfN<ronn ^Hr
sr
II
7^
75.
final
then changed to
11
q^TT%
II
s^jrererei
11
is employed
word ^
*ng:
so also the
is
all
ending
in f
affix.
11
So
also,
Penultimate Lengthening.
1573
[Bk. VIII.
Ca
II. 78.
The
phrase "of the root", is understood here also. Therefore not

and ^g^fa, which are derived from the ?wuns f%% and ^fi=rj e. f%^~
fa^fa - fs 53fa, and ^3* f^g% = ^g^rlf H
here, f^lfrr
i.
The phrase
Therefore not here,
"of the vowels $ or
$gfp
9T$ffir,
^T^1*
This rule applies to cases which are not
where ôr * are
^q^r^rr
in
understood here
is
also.
final in
a pada
but to cases
the middle of a pada or word.
n vs*
^rrf^r
11
The
78.
11
Ttrarcnr,
short c or
the verb has t or
when
gr"
^ as
11
of a root
penultimate
its
is
lengthened,
letter,
and
is fol-
lowed by a consonant.
The
anuvritti of %fa
and must have a ôr %
Thus
rule.
fsrft
|ôr
^must
be followed
we have nm<%nr,
g.Why
there
is
ft
abhyasa required lengthening, and

Ans.
In
a consonant,
II
Therefore not here
which however
*,
f^^TtfrT
not lengthening
forms derived from the roots
*, ^rTT
by a consonant.
are roots having a penultimate
Therefore
vowel.
must end
root
as preceding such consonant, for the application of this
f$f, %rtt, *gf, *frTT. ft?, ^ffrTr.
The
f^R,
The
current.
is
in
is
followed
as,
by a
II
f^g:, ft: or
fassg*.,
f%sg Perfect,
:
and eft n^r &c? Here the $ of the

would not be shortened, as it is asiddha.
*T#r
it
The ^substitute of 5 here by VI.
4. 82,
is
treated as sthani-
and therefore, the T or ^r is considered as not to be followed by a

Another reason is, that the 2T*
consonant, and hence there is no lengthening.
substitute is taught in angadhikara (VI. 4. 82), and depends upon the affix,
vat, to
and
consequently Bahiranga, with regard to this rule of lengthening which

Hence qoif^P is considered as asiddha. Therefore ând âre
is
is
antaranga.
not followed by a consonant (for
is
not considered as such for the above
reasons).
^f^f formed with ?n* affix from the Denominative (w&)

Here j^ is added before ?f* as ^T^ + ^ + f and then st is elided,
Here the elision of 3? is a Bahiranga process, and therefore, îs
q^ + f + f
penultimate, and so there is no lengthening of the vowel.
really
here
not
Similarly in
root srgi H
11
In
srir^farr
(Instrumental singular) there
To
the root irEf-ft*
this
is
134,
is
added
?r
and we get
is
(Instrumental
irfrj^fan'
II
affix),
is
lengthening by VIII.
2. yy
and we have J?mf|îl To
as Jlf?rf^* + STI", and 3? is elided by VI. 4.
added sjrm^ by
Un
The lengthening
I.
156,
takes place here, the elision of a?
not considered here as sthanivat, and so * becomes penultimate.
In
fact,
BK. VIII.
we apply
here
maxim
the
1579
that a lopa substitute of a vowel
when a
sidered as sthanivat
ST^ DECLENSION.
ClI. II. . 80]
rule of lengthening
not to be con-
is
be applied (See
to
is
I.
58),
Q.
Well,
depends upon a
let
not be sthanivat, but the elision
it
and
case-affix,
purposes of this rule which

lengthening
it is
antaranga
is
by VI.
134,
4.
Bahfcanga, and therefore asiddha for the
and so
therefore, there
would be no
Ans,
because
is
The maxim of 3rf^

an anitya
*f|tjpF3?3f should
not be applied here:
rule.
The word nifsr is formed by the Unadi affix fifr^ added to the root aj
^ being changed to ? (Un V. 49). So also fafft: and f*Tft* are formed by the Unadi affix fa added to |? and t (Un IV. 143). The Genitive
(fT&O, tne
There is no lengthening in fare:, fa^f and

Dual of which is fa^f: and Rr^f:
that
the
formed words are primitive words and not
maxim
Unadi
on
the
finif:,
and so the rules of etymological changes do not apply to them
Derivative
II
*
ffifrj
*r
11
$*|<m
<rrn%
11
^^ffrerercs *TTO
ff IL
11
*, *,
UK t^WÎ*
fti ipro
3h*f
T Wit
11
The lengthening of vowel does not tak3

place under VIII. 2. 77, when the Nominal stem ending
in t or îs called Bha (i. e. when a ^follows), and also not
79.
in ;t
and |g^
Thus $*:
II
(ft
^T%
IV.
4.
latter is Benedictive of f|^grf?T
77 or ift
m^)
II
Similarly rafa, gqfjj
II
The
II
Why have we qualified the word *r by saying that it must end in ^ or

Observe Jffir^rsrr, JTRTC& M For here the stem which ends in * is not Bha,
and the stem which is Bha does not end in * but in s*
%?
II
3*T*ft
ffrT
II
s%^?5 Tt
jt:
II
*o
q^rft
11
sr^:,
3T^TT syhHIr|W lW*M fT^T^l S^jfrwr T^RT 5SJTCW
80.
then there
is
^r^,
^ *ftilK'
% ftreapg w %sr% s%f$ &&%

When the pronoun srî; does
substituted
sr,
^:,
it:
II
II
11
for
3t-#:,
not end in ^,
or 3J for the vowel after 5,
and
**
II
Thus
srgl, 3T*
a case-ending by VII.
12
3T5^, 3T5^r,
2.
102,
^r^R,
which
in
II
3Tf
is
substituted for 3??w before
Feminine becomes
sr^T
II
By
the
3TB^ DECLENSION
I580
present sutra read with
3 which
50, arg
1.
I.
is
which replaces a two-matra vowel

1.
Bra;
be one-matra
g-
i.
and a?*
be a two-matra 3
will
Why
How
Obj.
do we
STâr before
Vdrt:
which has no
^^
The
II
as ending in
"not ending in *r"?
say,
Observe
^r,
WQ
the affix
not a pada
is
(I. 4.
15)?
or
or t
So
11
that the prohibition
may
visarjaniya being considered as asiddha, this
sfitra
thus
sfitra is a
sutra
aqr:
%*fef sffaWTCP,
Bahuvrihi, and
ara;*T,
Thus by
as ara:rsTqi%
=3T^?^ (VI.
apply to
word
but only sT; (3) none

68, VIII. 2. 23 and
5
STa^sr* ?*:
marises
II
ara;
^Tcrtc^T BT^rrc: fevft
that in which 3?
li
II
ara;*T
arfrs^r, ara*:
considered
is
some explain the
"The word
substituted for
is
derived by changing the
ara;
arftr: in
*r"
w into
the
The
by VII
11
a?
ajit by VI. 3. 92, how is this rule

We compound
3T>^ takes ffp^
a*s:^+3T3^ + f|^=aTa;-f arfg- + ars^- + f^ ( VI. 3. 92;
III. 2. 59, the root

11
Now
4. 24).
both changed to
srr? are
arggsj
arax takes the final-substitute
to be applied?
with
means
and not to any other
When
As
it
thus confined to the form
is
102:
rj
Ans. This indicates
not a pada.
3ra;*T is
= 3T?*31T<T
understood here,
is
should rather be stated that the rule applies to that
It
sqf,
when
fegrfa
ara:
In order to apply the prohibition to 3ft and * also,
it
The
arajf
80
..
and the 3
long 3v U See
e.
i.
can this be a valid example, as the word rÎ
that the 5 change takes place, even
2.
for
short
e.
II.
50.
1.
and
substituted for
replaces one-matra vowel will
VIII. Ch.
[Blv.
is
*t
there are three views, (1) the
by the present
sutra; (2), the first
a;
ar
of
is
ara;,
and j of
not changed,
Thus we have (1) arggsr^ (VII. 1. 70, VI. 1.

arg^s^r, argg^s^ " (2) Secondly, 3ra;ggf aTargqa^,
changed.
62),
Lastly ar^JWR, ST*5*l3^r,
(3)
11
^SW^T-
11
The above
verse
sum-
this:
"
Some
ordain that g should
double
come
separately for both adas and adri,
^faRîfr); others would have g only for the last portion

which stands in proximity to the final, ( i. e. for J ); while a third class would
have nowhere, because they explain at^r: of the sutra, by c< nfining it to: VII.
as there
is
102. "
The
(in
<*
class interpret ar<T:
by
" that
form of ara;sr which has no tf'j

and they do not apply the maxim BT^srit^ftsscTOfî 3&S **rf?t " when a
modification is ordained with regard to some thing which is not final, the
operation takes place on that only which is in proximity to the final. " The
2.
first
second class apply
proximity to the
way
altogether
final
Why
as not
this
final;
ar:
maxim and make g change only
for
g"
which stands
while the last class interpret the word ar%:
are* srsjjrTO
do we say er?j[
changed to 3
'
II
mî bt%:
for the
in
in
a different
II
vowel after
a:
'
Observe
arg^tf,
arg%:, the
Bk. VIII. Cn.
**<T
g4;r
82
II .
Sf^*
*=?
II
Pluta.
V^Tfa
II
II
1581
QirT:
fa,
S^r^
II
11
For the ^ coming after the ^ of sr^*;, there

substituted $, and 5 is changed to K, when plurality is to
81.
is
be expressed.
Thus
3T*ft
for 3T> (or 3T*)
HT^rra, *&ft% for 3TOJ H
no
number
<t
in st^
for sqf^:, stftarai for
&c.
does not mean the technical yg*M * f

the sutra have this sense " when the affixes of the
in the sutra
be denoted.
Upto the
82.
always to be supplied
This
is
an adhikara sutra.
of a sentence
",
of this chapter
close
All the three words
"pluta" and "acute"
are
to be
i.
ever we shall treat hereafter will

it
will get
says " In answer to a salutation,
We
the final
refer to
vowel
lengthening and acute accent.
the pluta
but not when
it is
e.
is
pluta
is
" the last
supplied
equent aphorisms to complete the sense, upto the end of
and
(Pada),
the last vowel of a sentence
".
and has the acute
(f?J
for sfffa:, 3J*fto :
In that case, we could not get the form 3T*ft where

Hence we have translated it, by saying when plura-
follow".
plural affix follows.
lity is to
changed to
is
would have made
for that
Plural
^^%
The word
3T*ftfvr:
this
in the
vowel
subs-
What-
Pada.
in a sentence,
(f?)
Thus VIII.
2.
83,
addressed to a Sudra".
must supply the present aphorism to complete the meaning
" In answer
becomes pluta and gets the acute
a Sudra". As srpnrTTO S^$tUS$ >Tf
:
to a salutation, the last vowel of a sentence
accent, but
not when
8TT3<WTRfa %*?r 1
addressed to
it is
11
One adhikara
sets aside
another adhikara, this
is
the general
maxim.
Will therefore the adhikara of the present aphorism set aside the adhikara
of the word
though
to
q^g
latent.
^ by VIII.
(VIII.
1.
Otherwise
3. 7.
But
16)? No, the adhikara
in
>r^#r &c. the
does not become
it
of q-f^ has not ceased,

would be required to be changed
so,
because
q%w
manifests itself
there.
The employment
of the word
"
vakya " would not debar the anuvritti
of qf, for the final vowel of a sentence, will a fortiori be the final vowel of a
word (pada), then what
is
the use of employing the word *rpRmq in this sCitra
Pluta.
1582
[Bk. VIII. C11.
II. .
83
The word ^TqpJ is employed in the sutra, so that a word which is not the last
word of a sentence, will not get the pluta and acute. Had the sutra been
nro>: &c. then all the words of a sentence would become pluta and acute in
the
final.
The word
pluta and
Had
acute,
f? is employed to indicate that the final vowel becomes

though the word may end in a consonant. As srfcTr#$?l "
not been used, the rule would have applied to words ending in vowels
and not to words ending
only,
M <afiNl% sqpt
ff%
'
11
srerfSrerff
*w$t wlr
*rt%ff*
*ftr-
v^n
11
<\
q^Tft
II
SSjfasnT, 3T-3&
II
TFT sKîRrenaTpfr swrcre **$w^ *n*ruflRMi isrî ^3r% <rcs * *$

:
'
11
f%Rrnrr? jrfciw
3Tf*nrr^nR
11
II
consonants.
in
*r<>
11
mfw>
^ ^rf%r tpt *N
Stctsri
11
<r
ftsir
argq% sft %i%?t srf<ftqi*N7?r
^r* h
11
^m
*rr
qwm
irenw* ^r^n%
11
u4*w
rt^w*
In answer to a salutation, but not when it

refers to a Stldra, the last vowel of a sentence becomes pluta
83.
and
The word
by an
arfvrei^r
from the
rising
1.
the formula of salutation
seat,
2.
touching of the
feet,
The word i^tfwfT means,
".
the superior or elder in answer to such salutation.
such blessing, the
last
that, such blessing
is
of a superior or elder
vowel of the
final
3.
of
It consists
sake of obtaining his blessing.
inferior or junior for the
three acts
" respectful salutation
means
the uttering of
the blessing given
In giving
by
utterance to
word gets udatta and acute, provided
not pronounced on a Sudra.
Thus arfwfii ^^frsf

says $t g unm e n *rfa S^rfr | ll
said
is
"
by Devadatta
Devadatta
The
to his Guru.
be thou long-lived
latter
".
Why
sfifs? is
do we say when not referring to a Sudra ? Observe srfvr^r^ gTOby a Sudra. In reply to this the Guru replies ^r srnj^F* *jfa
said
Vdrt
Prohibition must
by Gargt.
To
Some would
have
erf*rer^[ *K*%% is said
Vdrt
be stated with regard to

this the
Guru
replies
women
also.
As
ht arrgwnfr h^ttSt
II
where a detractor or an
arrogant person is addressed. So long as one's arrogance or ridicule does
not become manifest, there is prolation. But when one comes to know that
he is my detractor, and is really ridiculing me by a show of respect then
this
prohibition
the reply
is
uttered
is
not a blessing, but
by the detractor
be the Proper
Name
is,
in
fact,
a curse.
Thus
srfifaT^l <prrP3? *TP>
and the Guru understanding the word Sthalin to
of the person, replies scrS^rr5* qfa ytifal * U
Then the
Bk. VIII. Ch.
II.
Pluta.
85]
detractor says, Sthalin
is
my
not
Proper Name, but an adjective, like dandin,
he who has a pjp* or cooking
viz.
again replies, sngwrr^
my
The Guru,
pot.
prrfo^ but without
Proper Name".
this to be
true,
because the word
^ srcrRrcnFPliflr
and so gets angry and says srfrcrer^ ^^j ^

Here it is a curse, as well as a pun
WTF^!
at,
unto a cooking pot (sthalin =
e.
i.
II
like
believing
prolation,
is
The other then says "O Sir, it is not my epithet, it is

The Guru now comes to learn that he is being laughed
Proper Noun.
not a
<rfa
1583
"
burst thou,
ft*W V**
sinner
sthali-vat).
This prolation takes place there only, where the Proper Noun
Ishti
Gotra &c. with which the salutation was made,

the end of the sentence
employed by the Guru
is
and not where the position of the Proper
Therefore not here, ?^tT 3j5T?q% ^tT 3TT3*TPi

the word Devadatta is not used at the end of a sentence.
is different.
The
Vdrt
prolation
is
when
optional,
nere
such Proper
follows
ft:
f r
*flfo
at
Name &c
Name, or when the Person addressed is a Kshatriya or a Vaishya. As *rf

Reply (1) 3Tr3WTP* ?fa^HT hp ^ or (2) srrgwipj
STTHW* *^frs?
So also when a Kshatriya is addressed, as arre^T^ WM*hW >ft Reply
^t
Vaishya srftTTTO V%(I) ang < Wt F?w\ * or (2) arr^Hr^ W$ %*J1*h
Guru an3*Rft rernfeq 1 or arrgwrRre s^srrrf^f U
qr^tfrst hp
W WT
II
II
ii
%p^% ^r
ff:
II
ii
*raiTOn%
*&
Tm%
11
m *T*^WTt
f?r^ f%,
The final vowel

when used in calling
acute,
The word
ftfrj is
The word
'distance'
a person from a distance.
the Fifth case by

>fr
The
TPreir
is
The word gff

Thus there
may
not fixed at
its
prolation here also
This prolation
^tT WT^
ttsnfFt t^ft;
II
II
when a
voice
is
to be
That distance upto

pitch and without any special
for the
distance'*
I. 2.
purposes of this sutra.
STr^fr*^^,
Observe arT*^
takes place only then,
% mm*
when
q^rft
II
11
Therefore, there
I, I, sriW, I, **ft:
fsnrrT
the, noun in the
II
T?*nre* ^rfrCT*
33.
vocative case stands at the end of the sentence.

tion here:
Hf
here includes, 'addressing in general', and not only

is
do we say "from a
Ishti:
word frf means

TPHTS ^f^rn*
what distance there
35; the
arri^
reach the person.
This pluta sentence becomes eka-Sruti by
Why
11
prolation however takes place,
order that the sound
need not be considered as "distance"
'calling'.
II. 3.
1*?^
which the voice can be heard without raising

effort,
II
of a sentence becomes pluta
a relative term, and
is
should be prolation.
raised, in
in
Thus atPT^
'calling', 'addressing'.
11
**!*, rT^ 3T3 cgrT %<&fe
84.
and
II
is
no prola-
Pluta.
1534
When
85.
vr*z *$%
sTtt h tfirorit f?re?r
[Bk. VTII. Ch.
^^
%?*rc^ ^?fr
the words | and
II. .
86
jf
are employed, in ad-
dressing a person from a distance, there the | and
ft
alone get
the pluta and the accent.
As % ; ^tttt, ^tT% ^ U-? ^ *sr*r, S^tT % ^

The repetition of the words % and % in the sutra,
ii
cating, that the prolation takes place even
is
sake of indi-
for the
when % and ^ do not stand
at the
end of a sentence.
Ji<
i^^r?gT^TT^%^^
srr*rc
II
^rft
II
ll
3^:, sr^-^r:,
st-
In the room of a prosodially long vowel, (with

3fc) though it may not stand at the end, there
86.
the exception of
is
substituted a pluta for one at a time, under the above circum-
stances (VIII. 2.83-84), in the opinion of Eastern Grammarians.

This sutra indicates a special sthanin
VIII.
may
With the exception of ^,
83 to 84.
2.
not be the
or
^^
q and
^f ^ or "faf^Tl H
do we say
ajn:
it
also,
Similarly with I^j^tT, q*rf 3^T
"of a prosodially long vowel"?
Devadatta and Yajnadatta
Why
do we say
pft\, but never
The word
The word
not^^^r^
aTrg**n^ 3T*t I^tT
Commentary). Thus
in
II
Thus the present

is
one alternative, there
an authority
sn^refre^-m
frmx
sutra,
for
3T#5*: "
all rules relating to Prolation
the word sn^TI should be
without doing violence
short.
$coff*f ^T,
of Eastern Grammarians"
So
This also
:
Observe
is
^T-
II
jjt^TO "in the opinion
^ c^
that the sr of
shows that the prolation should not be simultaneous,
tr4N?*3j
84, optional sutras.
So
not be prolated, for this 3T
the sake of creating option.
Patanjali " *f|
may
3T^rT:"with the exception of 5^"?
#^r^r
but of one at a time;
As
vowel
pluta substitution, in the opinion of Eastern
is
or
final
II
Why
f[ in
V W^
Thus
by
every heavy vowel, though
vowel of the vocative word, and for the
final
but only one at a time, there
Grammarians.
the pluta vowel taught
for
for
read in
sahasa
optional pluta everywhere.
to
all
rules
the
is
is
used for
no prolation at alL
makes VIII.
2.
83 and
following dictum
Mahabhashya VIII.
become optional. In
2.
of
92.
short,
regarding prolation, and thus
grammatical authority, one
may have
vni. en.
rK.
89
ft. .
3fTTT^TT^T%
<?VS
II
pluta
<TTTft
II
3Tta,
II
The vowel
87.
1585
SWJ'KM
in 3TTO
||
pluta in the
is
beginning
of a sacred text.
The word sror?R means the commencement of a sacred mantra or
(Rig I. t\ 1).
Vedic text. Thus 3Tr** 3Tnr*t>~# |trRftf SWf^T^^
II
Why
do we say "in the beginning"? Observe 3TTfa?3^^*3#r^TRfcr

1. I).
Here aft^ is not used to indicate the com-
(Chhandogya Upanishad. I.
mencement of a Text or M
^
^T:
mrafar
q
II
?re:
;n(<TTO
tTTr^r
11
when
Observe q
3*rr*T? ffsr
^r^r,
the subject of
*ftm
comment.
11
II
becomes pluta
a sacrificial work.
of
in
q-
in
a sacred
Why
II
T>^TW*
"
do we say when employed in sacrificial work ?

Ye yajamahe consists of five syllables ". Here
simple recitation.
it is
Ishti:
The word
pluta before 3"5TPTf only.
is
\ \k\^[ f^&r'fwr (Rig. I. 1395roT^&:

.
sronn,
q^rfa
\frr a^r^fa %: jjoht srrWr h^rt
here
ll
II
II
Therefore not so
*l).
2".
II
11
11
In a
89.
the final
it,
itself
11
employed
it is
Thus ^qurT?
is
^,
The vowel
88.
text,
11
aRR^W c^rfr H^%
^ s^tr? f ?*%?iw^r y&fa
11
but
intra,
sacrificial
work, ^tVZ
vowel, with the consonant,
if
substituted for
is
any, that
may
follow
of a sentence.
The word 2^r^ff^T is understood here also. The word JPPT means
It is the name given to this syllable.
9TT^ll
This 3TP* is substituted for the
final letter (fe) of that word which stands either at the end of a Pada ofa sacred
hymns or at the end of a hemistich of such Rik. Thus for fTqf X^Tfa nP^R
T
(Rig. VIII. 44. 16), we may have 3TTT trrifa f%r^<ff
So also for ^T>r ft*
WfT f[3: (Rig. III. 27. 1), we may have >^n;sx fûTrT gs^*
ll
II
The word
VIII.
2.
82,
f? is
repeated in this aphorism
to indicate
Had
vowel and consonant.

S^q-^ the
replaced.
final letter
Thus
When
in
snt
f?
*rrifa
:
,
Thus
f^rfsr
not
only of the
g3g
ll
r?
in spite
whole
of
last
its
anuvritti from
syllable,
with
its
been repeated, then by the rule of 3T%portion of a sentence
would have been
the visarjaniya alone would have been replaced.
not employed
such substitution.
recite
that sffa replaces the
in
in
connection with
sacrificial
works, there
simple reading of the Vedas, we should
is
no
always
Pluta
1586
^rwr?^:
ff^r: n
3f**r jtr
ô
ii
<tttr
ij 2(rf 2n'^RT fT
Bk. VIII. Cm.
II.
93
$.
*tv&n, v&z: n
t*^ uttccT w?fr ^r%; h 33% atfrftffar h
vowel at the end of Mantras called

Yajya, when employed in sacrificial works, is pluta and has
the Acute.
The
90.
last
Thustfftffomw*
X.
(Rig. VIII.
"),
43-
fi i<
w)
îfr **rcr?r*l (Rig.
8. 6).
Why
do we say
'
at the
The
ing of several sentences.
become
pluta, in
end
hymn
fT%fr3T^fWcKH W i%:
In a
91.
W5,
ster, srtaf,
So
also in
is
But there
ii
prevent
at the
II
S.
it,
end of
is
I. 4-
the word
all,
^rfa
*-?
^fa^ and srre^
work,
is
II
II
S*
n),
sF^fta: ij^nFsft^w^ni. rrwf^s
"
is
used, so
pluta.
sn%, fr*r, srlr*?, r**,
the
first
WW *TFTOrR
of
syllable
q^tf*
or
*)
>*$*,
II
WTHPI
3TP*?
3T**T*, &***,
^r H^ <T3 *
a?^
so also 9T*3^>CT
aft,
forms sp?*, lt^, ^NT*, Iter*
in 3TT^? %3Fl
||
anta
pluta.
of the six
no prolation
"
becomes
fîraPT3^*rr on the analogy of

illustrative
3T*ftc&srft q?^^r t*
ff^r:
There are some Yajya hymns, consist(f?) of every sentence would have
sacrificial
Thus s^TOS^f^ (Maitr
The word ffa*
vowel
To
such a hymn.
that the final vowel of the
'
final
*tttT
^J
^^j *
II
W^,
II
ii
In an order given to Agnidhra priest, the

pluta.
syllable as well as the succeeding syllable is
92.
first
are four Adhvaryu, Udgata,

In a Yajfta, the principal priests (rtvij)
subordinate priests (rtvij) under
Hota, Brahma. Every one of these has three
them as shown below.
:
Names of
Subordinate.
Principal.
#.
i.
#-<
x<
Adhvaryu (Yajur)
Udgata (Saman)
Hota (Rig) VI. 4. 11.
Prastota
Nestha (VI.4.1 1) Unneta.

Subrahmanya.
Pratiharta
Maitra varuna
Achchhavak
Brahma (Atharvan)
Brahmanachhans'i Agnidhra
Pratiprasthata
Pota (VI.4
11).
Gravastuta.
III. 2. 177.
Bk. VIII. Cn.
II. .
94
Pluta.
1587
The duty of Agnidhra is to kindle the sacrificial fire.

(qr*) made by the Adhvaryu, who is the Director
or call
the Agnidhra to perform the functions of Agnidh, both syllable
The word
srnftfj
Thus
compound = srT^r:q-q-orij
is
TO
*TT ^ *T I TO, 3TT $ srr $
examples; therefore, not here, as
The
II
an optional
it
ST*?fts*qff^ ft?r
rule,
of fixed jurisdiction
" all pluta rules are optional "
say
3^R
Wg*, 3Tf*T^ ^ sTf*?*, there
The words
Vr
in
finrm susrf^n-re
;jf%:
11
pluta.
summon
*f *fofff
sCitra,
Some,
therefore,
and would
into this,
Others
).
srr^TPt'e^rn" ft^PTT f^fta:
In
diversity.
(
sn^tffa
are understood here
II
<*?tr
II
wm
*gm
ft^rm, ^-srf^r^:,
ll
it:
11
if
end of an answer to a question may
ft at the
93.
become
call or
viyavasthita vibhasha
^ c^
Vedic
is
>snTO
|:
^fa*^ fa*nrr%:
11
*r#
'relating to sacrificial work'
Therefore not
also.
pluta takes place only in these
read the aunvritti of the word frorqT from the next
have
"
"
Agnidhduty.
relating to
^TT
summons
In a
of ceremonies, to
optionally be pluta.
Thus Q.
qRlt *3?rr
sr^T^f:
Ans.
Why
Why
<rei ?j
II
II
w% renrer
when
pluta,
V*
R^?:
T^TR
II
ft
Q.
II
3T*>nft:
cf&
SRf^Rr
f|
II
W, ^3 *TFt, ^
Irretfres^TI
II
rT^T
II
^^3^
2J5TTO Irfvl
II
asserts
it
ft
II
3T33T*T*rTTO
II
The end
94.
is
8?^ fr** or arsffpf
II
11
^*TrTr^T5n^r
=3%
Ans.
or ft
fr%
do we say " in answer to a question " ? Observe

do we say %: " of ft " ? Observe ^rdi% ^3
ft^l^Ft ^
3HT
5F^tT
aTrtff^r
syllable of that sentence
is
optionally
something which has been refuted, and
employed by the victor by way of censure.

The word
frq?:
gerund, and means
means the
refutation of anothers opinion.
having refuted
proposition which has been refuted.
'
'.
f?r*j$r is a
the expression of the same
a person has demonstrated the
3T3%*T:
When
is
untenableness of anothers assertion, and then employs the said assertion by

way of taunt, reproach or reprimand, then the final syllable of such a sentence
pluta.
The sutra literally means "Having refuted (it) when asserting
"
same by way of censure ).
Thus an opponent asserts that " The word is not eternal. " (grfasr: 5^:).
Proving by arguments the untenableness of this position, and after refuting
it, the victor says by way of reprimand:
stf?^: srsf f*3Jl^r ^ or arf^ ^TSf fr^rrmi
* This
is not eternal'.
word
is then your assertion that the
Similarly arc? sjr-
becomes
the
Srfifîtf ^ or 3TO
13
srrerfT<3lK*T
II
3TWtt^r^^ff^T
or 3TOmr*rre%cqT?*T
some
In
example
5i fTi**i
ii
texts of Kasika,
w^
*.*
II
when
The end
threat
A Vocative is
becomes
syllable
qvtfqGBRfi
1ST,
an Amredita Vocative
syllable of
the anuvritti of the sutra VIII.
It
employed
is
Its final
I. 8).
also fqrs *&vn\
&c.
2.
82, is current
here, yet the
not pluta, but of the amredita.
be pluta by alternation.
ii
ll
may
Vdrt
ll
when threat is meant (VIII.

Thus %* #^ ^rfrr*3Tm **T
So
of the sentence
is
*rc^
reiterated
pluta.
Wl ^%^
Though
srrsrf^n*,
expressed.
is
final
is
97
according to Padamanjari, only the last
q^
ii
w% T^f^r^ ^rfj^w
95.
pluta,
II.
given.
is
srr&fegr
dita
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
Pluta.
1588
should be rather stated that any one of the repeated words
Thus #r^
=#tt
or %re
sfflTS
ll
The word amre-
the sutra as illustrative of the doubling, for threat
in
is
expressed by both words, so pluta may be of both words in turn: and not of the
second word only, though that is called technically amredita.
fctal*M^PC
3fffi^rh
ff^:
STJf^^T
II
3rf{
The
96.
II
*J^TR
II
arjf ^sff ^
3T^, grfTO, fd^l4I^^RC
when the word
demands another sentence

Thus
II
II
II
final syllable of a finite verb,
threat becomes pluta,

it
***
RS^TPRTl^ *?$% 83%
sr^
is
used as a
joined with
it,
and
to complete the conclusion.
v&ft *rren% srrer
srjf
11
*m$ h
ssrtf sreiftr srrer
^m
"
Why do we say a verb ? Observe argf ^tT fnuqj
"
"
calls
when
this
for
a
conclusion
say
?
Observe
we
do
Why
srjf T*
is a complete sentence and does not demand another to complete
'
'
ll
Here
it
the sense.
The word
not here,
(VIII.
1.
*re|% of the last sutra
arjf 3T*ftC,
a*T^
11
STPtrfa H
is
Here
understood here
srjf
also.
Therefore
has the force of solicitation.
33).
f^n&nnrRTO
ff^T:
<t
*^
97.
The
**&{*
11
nw ^^mOot fw^K'
?r^
11
f^3
ftrari-wufRrH
R"tihiTpri
ll
î4^Mf fc c^wr
end-syllable of those sentences
which denote acts of
reflection
*rei%
is
ii
pluta,
(or balancing between two
alternatives).
To
determine a thing by weighing
vichara or judgment.
form
sacrifice in the
Thus %m^k ^farTTO
all
*F?T
arguments pro and con
^5 q
house of an initiated person
".
is
called
$nreff$* " should one per-
Similarly
fifs[<Tr$s,
Qf&lfK
Bk. VIII.
J?T$f
i.
e.
11
Ch.
II .
ioo]
Here
also
it
Pluta.
being reflected upon whether
is
should the stake remain
f% wqflcre*, 1%
*<r
*rr
*sthr:
^ 3 wrrcm; v
11
alternative
first
upright or should
*trto<i
is
Vedic
only
Thus
'.
C$
or sr^ 3T3W*l
by the yajamana.
ii
The
restriction.
previous sutra,
'
Is it
a snake or a rope
'
thus con-
is
here has the force of
%t %\
Is
9T?nfr3
it
of course, depends upon employment.
priority,
II
speeuh, the end-vowel of the
and not to the vernacular.
^^JljS
clod of earth or a pigeon
The
flat
only pluta.
literature,
3rf|
^ nn
g,
<j<fa,
11
common
This makes a niyama or

fined to
f^^
irq
be put
it
11
^tTjt
11
In the
98.
1589
The
order of
words depends upon one's choice.
srf^rnr
ti
E.S.
11
qcrrft
11
II
srctentfr, ^r
The end-syllable of the sentence which express-
99.
es assent or promise or listening to,
The word
means
xrfrT'fl^^
" listening to
means
mise something to a petitioner,
11
qfsKrah
II
srfa
ff^r
11
3-
3T3f rxr: *zt
zsvz
is
also
It
".
Thus
**:,
it
has three senses,
1.
is
to pro-
acknowledge the truth of some proposi-
to
2.
words.
Thus
f^rrîf *
wfi tort srfa^rsrct
*TT
$f?
>fr:,
I.
^r %
TOfiT^
II
R?T:
2.
11
**
The end -vowel
100.
of a praise
pluta.
is
agreement, assent or promise
restrict its scope.
tion, 3. to listen to another's
*f%3^rlf *
"
All these senses are to be taken here, as there
".
nothing in the sutra to
*rfr
11
11
at the
end of a question or
pluta, but unaccented.
That which
is
employed
According to some,
at the
end of an interrogative sentence
is
called
does not ordain pluta, but only ordains

the anudatta-ness of those syllables which become pluta by the previous rules
5TOPtT:
II
VIII.
2.
84 &c.
this rule
The meaning of the sutra
then
is:
That pluta which comes at
the end of an Interrogative sentence or a sentence denoting admiration

anudatta.
Thus stt^v
WP vfa *trp*
#v**rm stBt^s
srf?rg% or
<r?f )
11
The words
or 3Ttfv
3TfJTv%,
*$f^ *ntf ** <r?r|T
and
<rrr
being
finals
is
i.
in
e.
J590
Pluta
Ch.IL
Bk. VIII.
103
become anudatta as well as pluta. The other words wr: &c beand pluta by VIII. 2. 105. See VIII. 2. 107.
As regards 3TPi*rsr% we have w** ê^rfa TPT^ $ u Here the final
of *rr"T3"3> becomes anudatta and pluta.
question,
come
svarita
STJS^TOR'
11
101.
The end-vowel at the end of a sentence
becomes anud&tta and pluta, when the particle f%^ is em-
ployed, denoting comparison.

The word sr^PrT is understood
Thus
1
may
may
srfsrHT^ *TT5T$rl
he shine as
fire
So
'.
<mR %
also
*rr3T^
be shine as a King'.
Why
f^T
This sutra ordains pluta as
here.
and not merely accent.
well
3?rf
II
do we say when the sense is that of comparison

Here f^ has the force of littleness or difficulty \
Observe
'?
^jif
'
Why
iF^^Rt
'
do we say ir^f ?pn% when expressly employed ? Observe srf*5!

Let the boy shine like fire \ Here f%rq; is understood, hence the
'
'
'
Hrcirq[
rule does not apply.
w^rrnfrf^r =*
11
?o^
q^rft
In ^rR: f^5
102.
II
srrcfr?
^rR-f^^-3rreFr?i:, sfa,
the end vowel
ll
anud&tta
is
and pluta.
The word anudatta
is
understood here
have been pluta here by VIII.
2.
97
The end-vowel would
also.
the present sutra really ordains accent-
lessness of this pluta.
Thus
tion STraffa
is
3T*: repjrcfU?*, TTft
f^Rft^
pluta and udatta by VIII.
(Rig X, 129.
2.
In the
5).
97, in the second
first
por-
anudatta by
it is
the present sutra.
^ft^TTT%flr^^mf^FTiTO^5
^ro
11
srmnft*
^r
?*& 3^33.
103.
II
l*>\
ll
q^rfa
11
qqfcr u ^^""
,
11
Of the two Vocatives
of the
same form
standing at the beginning of a sentence, the end-vowel of
becomes pluta and

or blame is expressed.
the
first
svarita,
when envy,
praise, anger,
The vocative is doubled by VIII. 1. 8. This sutra ordains

Thus Envy : WTTOit^ TP1TO, 3Tfirerorf$ 3TfWT% fo <T srfa^n
11
pluta there.
Praise
Bk. VIII. Ch.
sffMte^
srfspffa^r
Ftf/tf:
f^rtf
*nrafa sm*?
11
\o*
11
As
q^
11
this
&c
JTPnr^T M mq^ft
i
11
%*n,
Thus
sutra.
srnffr,
&*$, firf-
11
When
104.
an error against polite usage
when a benediction
sured, or
end
*?tc*f%
11
one alternative
svarita in
%*rnrir: ifag fa < n*miff rac
3n*i<F^n*
Anger : *rr^r^rf^ ttw*.

hlame : OTrffajf * *rr?tfta, *rteiT$
otht
srfH^rar
1591
The word "optionally" should be read into
no pluta and
is
Pluta.
hw**, sriwretf*
qrnr#^
there
105
II. .
syllable of a finite verb
or a bidding
is
becomes pluta and
cen-
is
intended, the
svarita,
if this
requires another sentence to complete the sense.

The word svarita " is understood here. The word fsfar means the
error in usage' or 'want of good breeding'. (VI 1 1. 1.60) str?T means 'benediction'.
'
'
%*r:
means order or commanding by words

Thus (1) to #t wir{\, siraini Tsrfa ttor
'
**%H TTWW
'
'
'.
In both these, the
complement, and hence there

Benediction
: g^fa
Order : 3R*
MMtf^t
is
^ *re
WRT
?^nt
sqraro
its
II
Fjctfter^ *ff "*
qriT
to btM 5f#^.
sentence requires the second as
first
S^N^rsftef^
fpftft'î
&*&&*
% *3
II
^^^ ft*
Why
do we say " when it requires another sentence as its comple"

ment ? Observe <ft % srr^5 a^*5^K f^ H There cannot be any counterexample of rerar, for there two sentences are absolutely necessary to express
the sense of censure.
nrerenffi
5nft:
irerreîR^fn
11
\o\
qîfa
\\
11
a^^^rer, *ft,
srsr,
wrmx-
II
105.
In a question or narration, the end-vowel of
a word, though
not final in a sentence, becomes svarita and
word which
pluta, as well as of the
is final
The word padasya is understood here and so also the word

The end-vowel of a word which is not the last word in a sentence,
as of the last word, becomes svarita and pluta, when a question is
'
'
svarita
as well
'.
asked, or a fact
svarita
is
narrated.
In
all the
fact,
II
words of a sentence become
and pluta hereby.
Thus in questioning we have

tttWv !$t\H. *TFrfv* **& ^\f or
Thus all words have become svarita and pluta. The final word
:
T?r^
in a sentence.
Pluta.
1592
would, in one alternative, become anudatta
under that
word
final
The
sutra.
of the word
force
and thus
also svarita,
this sutra
by VIII.
also,
srfq"
Bk. VIII. Ch.
makes VIII.
ioo, as
2.
the sutra,
in
is
2.
to
106
II. .
shown
make
the
ioo an optional
sutra with regard to question.
In
dkhydna or
there
narration,
is
no other
rule,
which
debarred by
is
Therefore there, all words become svarita and pluta necessarily, by
this.
Thus BT*Trr^^fîTmf^^:
the force of this sutra.
II
Another view of this sutra is that the word 3TPT applies only to
akhyana, so that in akhyana all words become svarita. But in pras*na, the
final word will not become svarita, but anudatta necessarily by VIII. 2. ioo.
According to this view, this sutra does not ordain option. This view is not
adopted by Kasika, or Padamanjari or Siddhanta Kaumudi.
<-<&di^ *3^t
II
aft,
q^TR
<^r,
and
their last element %
The
8p*:,
s$^r
In forming the pluta of the diphthongs
106.
and
?e
cfc
get the pluta.
84 &c. when applied to q or 3TI", cause

element of these diphthongs namely of 5 or 311 The
by VIII.
pluta ordained
the prolation of the last
3"
2.
word c^t in the sutra is Nominative dual of c^ and the aphorism

means " % and s are pluta of the diphthongs ^ and aft "
Thus qr^RTcfirasT, sttyTipr
t
literally
II
II
The
letters Ij
of 3T + f and 3T + S
both
The
II
and
In
sfr
are
compound
making the pluta of
letters or
diphthongs consisting
these, the question arises, should
3T and f (or s) be prolated, or only the last element, or the first only.
If in the analysis of these letters, a?
present sutra answers that doubt.
be taken as having one matra (or moras), and f and 3 one matra, then the
pluta ? and 3 will have two matras, so that the whole pluta ^ and afr will have
three matras.
In
fact,
the word
c^
is
used here as a Past Participle of eg,
and fgtr tt means f^#r SPl% e. ffe T^d i. e.

And \ and s are lengthened to that extent, so as to
\ and 3 are lengthened.
make qr and afr three matras. Thus when 3? + ? and ar + s each has one matra,
then the pluta of \ and 3 will have two matras as we have said before. But
when ar + f (<?) and ar + s (a?t) are considered to have ar half matra, and 5 and
having the force of a verb
i.
half, then f and 3" are made pluta, so as to have two and
a half (2^) matras each, thus the whole of q- and afr, has still three matras. In
3 one matra and a

fact,
the definition of pluta
that
we should
is,
that
it is
so prolate the vowel as to
a vowel which has three matras
make
it
so
have three matras.
But according to Patanjali, this pluta of 1* and aft has four matras.
Thus a? + 5 and a? + 3 each has one matra. The pluta of \ and 3 will have
BK. VIII.
ClI. II.
Thus
three matras.
PSUTA.
107]
ar
1593
+ ?$ and ar + 3^. or the whole has four matras.

may have /our matras also.
Accord-
ing to this view a vowel
TW
ilK*TT
qr>
11
II
srrT?N% s^f^r ^rif^Fnfra ^553:
In the diphthongs, which are not Pragrhya
107.
11 &c) and which become pluta under the circums-
(I. 1.
mentioned
tances
circumstance
the
11
is
a call from a distance (VIII.
there
first half,
83 &c, but not when that
in VIII. 2.
substituted the prolated
is
second portion 5 or 3"

The diphthongs or t[% are
for
84)
aud for the
2.
arr,
II
and
st +
When
II
the diphthong
and \ or
resolved
is
into
and
%, art
aft
II
Their elements are sr + f,
its
end of a word,
elements, the first portion s?
may be. This 5 and s, in fact,

or ^ or aft
which may be 5 or
added, as the case
g-
tutes of the second portion,
This rule
2.
q",
these diphthongs are to be prolated, at the
100, VIII.
2.
Vdrt
is
97, VIII.
2.
83,
The scope of
It
prolated,
ll
not of universal application, but applies to Rules VIII.
ing the rules to which
Vdrt
3",
is
are the substi-
and VIII.
2.
90 only, according to the
should be determined by enumerat-
this sutra
applies.
it
should be stated that
it
applies
to sutras VIII.
2.
100, 97,
83 and 90.
Thus VIII.
**jr
*T^f
VIII.
So
11
2.
90:
also
^f^
100: AsaTTPTr*:
2.
VIII.
2.
83,
iTTTT^ 3Tf5PT*r$f
This pluta
11
arr
is
udatta,
anudatta or
cular rule which has been applied,
and every where
do we
e.
at the
I. 3.
In
the
sutra
^rrTRsatffa ^rr
is
14. 7).
according to the parti-
svarita,
end of a question
The
else, udatta.
restrict this
Observe f%*51% f%^*%^

rules,
i.
because the anuvritti of udatta
Why
11
as.
II
udatta
or <r?r|f
11
3WII4 4 41 MR *TPTJS?ra ^*?%

(Tait. S.
*3T% PlwSTO^f
or svarita,
II
So also VIII. 2. 97: ffa^ 3H%<rei

as: STn^rr^ ^STRT^rT^f or q^f
So also
srfagHi^f or <r?r^f
TFnrerrs
srcrfa
it
is
anudatta
and s are of course, always
current here.
to the
aTPT^
HT
above-mentioned four rules

mw&R fa<^w%
II
the present sutra being confined to the above-mentioned four

words 3Tf5T**% in the sutra, are redundant and should not have
fact,
Pluta.
1594
Moreover the word T^RT should have been used
been used.
it
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
applies to diphthongs at the end of a pada.
^rflrW
Here
II
Why
do we say
This peculiar
Vdrt
Vocative case
by no other
when
not a Pragrhya
As
STJTT^ TSffar^
the Vocative would have
rule,
Kdrikd:fa 3
%f
not a Pada
'
cftXft
(I. 4. 17).
Observe #*nfr
*sr
modification of pluta vowel takes place in the
the Vedas.
in
is
it
fj is
108
in the sutra, for
Therefore, not here, *rj
before the sarvanamasthana affix
tr
II.
g<JTT
H^rftf
rwrw ^
flfi*
*Ernff**#tr
^R fa*
?^gr
tf|[f%*r
Here
become prolated
gr ftg dllfcil
F&W&t
q^Hi^r^r^ 3^3:
For these vowels % and 3" are substituted sr

when a vowel follows them in a samhita (in an un108.
and gr
broken flow of speech).
The word ^ffcnw*
Book,
will
is
and exerts
an adhikara
Whatever we
end of the Book.
its
influence
hereafter, upto
shall teach
upto the
the end of the
apply to words which are in Sanhita.
Thus
srarrsîrerr*
T*T!^rrr3T?n^f2Rrc,
T^m^ff*
11
Why do we say " when a vowel follows " Observe ?nrr95, <T2Tj^ H
Why do we say sfr^rran'* in an uninterrupted flow of speech ?
serve *r*?ru % PW% m\* *^* in Pada Patha.
?
Ob-
'
'
This sutra
is
made,
considered as asiddha (VIII.
because f and 3" being Pluta-modifications are

for the purposes of 5^r srrfa"
(VI. 1.77).
2. 1)
But supposing that some how or

still
the present rule
is
other, these f and s be considered siddha,

necessary to prevent their lengthening before a homo-
geneous vowel (VI. 1. 101), or their retaining their form unchanged by VI.
If it be said, that these rules VI. 1. 101, and VI. 1. 127, would not
I. 127.
apply, because of the Vartika %>%'> cgcfsfel *nn>?fhi arr*FTT*r *wrHf Tffjsij:
(Vartika to VI.
prevent
Kdrikd
VI.
1.
1.
77)
still
âccent (VIII.
:
Q.
77, that the
Ans.
If
the present sutra ought to be made, in order to
2. 4).
Could not
this
have been accomplished by the
Acharya has taught

you say that pluta
because of the jilapaka
in sutra
VI.
I.
this separate
is
1.
wttf
101,
still
of
^substitution?
siddha in the vowel sandhi
125, then
order to prevent the lengthening of VI.
ând
this rule
and the Sakala
is
rules,
necessary in
rule VI.
1.
127.
Bk. VIII. Cn.
Q.
II. .
But
108
Pluta
those two rules VI.
I.
1595
101,
and VI.
en debarred by the Vartika which ordains that
vowel following a pluta (See vartika to VI.

Ans.
of VIII.
1.
77),
I.
ajirrf ST
what
127,
is
then the necessity
The necessity of the present
sutra
is
to
prevent the qtir-accent
2. 4.
According to one view, the vartika under VI.
1.
77,
vowels which are not pluta-elements, like the present \ and

independent vowels following after a pluta vowel.
Here l
have already
takes place of such a
is
a Nipata.
14
As
Hr*
refers
s,
to those
but which are
* f ??="TH fipj
II
BOOK EIGHTH.
Chapter Third.
For the
1.
is
and ^j, there

Chhandas.
affixes TFi
substituted ^, in the Vocative singular, in the
The word
*T?t
final of the
or
changes
*rj,
is
snfrfnif
^ :f?^ ^?f
understood here.
final <j or
its
in the
into ^,
word ending
Chhandas,
in
in
the affix
the Vocative
#51 (Rig. III. 51. 7) Sfcfr W't ^F|i

and
Vocative
of
Sg.
Here jt^:
?ft^: of f r^, meaning " he who is
*?^?t
possessed of Maruts or Hari horses". The ?r of jt<j is changed to ? by VIII.
Thus
singular.
f? Trf|
is
2.
IO
affix
15.
The base TO
(nom.
the ^(of
3^
is
elided
VII.
1.
70)
srarsmar Sfcn (Rig.
With
I.
12, for
I.
by VI.
changed
is
1.
termination
68
to
the
by
rj is
is
Bha by
elided
this sutra.
2.
also j-g
m ft
So
^: ^fr^r?
<R*T* ^55 (Rig. II.

CT^R. with ar^
fr|Tt,
do we say
33. 14),
l*smw<
'
of
Tfj
'
11
The
affix
^ should
and qfâre both meant here.

Sg.
As jr^rrt *3TT
to the root 5
VI.
1.
71.
(for)
23,
The
and
^g^TR*
ffrrTR^s
also be
enumerated.
preceded by
See VI.
The
Why
Why do
affixes
do
we
&jp[\
changed to ^ in the Vocative

The word grafts is formed by adding spK
See III. 2. 75. The g^; is added by
Its final is also

ll
II
II
and ^w ? Observe srgr^ *#tWT

we say in the Vocative Singular ? Observe 3 itf f%fRf?TTT^%
say in the Chhandas ? Observe % ttpt^, 9 qrm^ H
Vdrt
4. 19.
I.
by VIII.
3- 6)-
the formation of
Why
before this
sg.)
W<
11
Bk. VIII.
Cii. III.
The
V&rt
ally
Nasal *
3]
words
changed to
is
Vedas and the Bhasha.

*r*T^
of
finals
sr^t%
"
arefr:
or
sfr
1597
HiT^ and srM^l
vp^?i,
the secular as well as
in
these
the sacred
This
11
is
are changed
and the
literature,
to
5,
syllable
option-
^\
of
a general rule, applying both in the
Thus vn\ 5 ht or % h^ H vr*T^% vrnt: or %

Or jthese words HP *mf: and ar^r: are so
1 3T^T^
:
II
formed by the acharya himself in VIII. 3. 17. These are found

numbers than the Vocative Singular, as ht ^^^rasH^riS HT <^1t1^ ^^tT
irregularly
other
in
fawjRTP
found
It is
II
connection with Feminine nouns
in
The adhikara of
influence
in this sutra.
where the change
in
word
the
It
sanhita or juxta-position, as in VIII.
$rcf:,
3. 7.
2.
anrnpTTftrer. *jshr
*rr
imi
<*^n$r
In the following
2.
always to be supplied
snr, srg Hifa* :,
II
upto VIII.
sfitras
" But
here
has been ordained

This
letter for
is
Thus
For the
an adhikara sutra.
Grammar, where ^
sutra VIII.
3. 5
5 when 57 augment follows

tefi^*, $re*?#aii
snll
3. 12, this
may
vowel after which
'\
letter
which ^ has been substituted, there
this division of
*$km g
a nasal vowel
optionally be substituted for the preceding

55
subsequent sutras,
3 (Vartika 2) by which the lopa is considered siddha in

otherwise there would have been no g- change in fR#T % &c.
See VIII.
is
in those
by another word on account of
occasioned
is
II
does not exert any apparent
*rf??rrar
however has influence
one word
also, as ^f OT3inT
".
which stands before that
substituted a nasal vowel, in
the subject of discussion.
is
says
is
"
In the place of the final of *p*, there
The vowel
sr of
^r becomes
nasal
is
as ^^ffTtr,
11
Why
in this
lave
ind
have we used the word 3TT in the sutra ? It means " here i. e.
division where ^ is the subject of discussion ".
Obj. This object would
been gained, without using the word
would apply
:herefore,
the rule
ar^T
since
it is
II
we could not have known the extent of the jurisdiction (adhikara)

and we might have applied the rule of nasality to those beyond
The employment of stT prevents
jurisdiction of ^, such as VIII. 3. 13.
>een used,
this nasal
the
lis
an adhikara sutra
Ans. No. Here 3 is taught in connection with nasal,

^
would not apply to any other context. For had sr^r not
to
doubt and shows that s and nasality are co-extensive.
srrant i^?qn:
11
11
q^rft
11
strt., srft,
i^m
11
Nasal*
1598
3.
vowel
nasal
Bk. VIII. Ch.
always substituted for
is
when it is followed by a
when it is followed by a vowel
before ^,
letter of sts
(i. e.
or ^,
Thus VIII.
9 teaches 3 substitution of
3.
would have been optionally

it
6.
Thus
necessarily so.
^T 3T^l|\i|ft
i).
Some
(i. e.
jfflf
by the
nas,al
III. g. 5
jf,
last sOtra.
arfa (Rig- III 46. 2)
stf
praty&hftra
or k).
q-, gr,
the long sjt
preceding
The
sfttra
n$ f^x
present
*T
it,
makes
(Rig. VIII.
arnrcrr
II
the Taittariyas) read
as
it
This
anusvara.
is
a Vedic
diversity.
Why
we
say
"
do we say " for a long arr" ? Observe q ^r ^TCTrfkS

Why do
when a vowel or 5, 3, ? or * follows " ? Observe *rera*lW, *ref*OT**Rr "
II
The word
The
R^q*
always
employed
is
'
for the
sake of distinctness only.
very fact of making a separate sutra, would give
a compulsory force,
it
even without the word nitya.
sg^nr:
3Tg*r fa*l<:M<)
II
TTfa
II
After what precedes
4.
ai^niftwdi
II
if
55,
^rgwrr.
1?::,
we omit
II
to substitute
the nasal, then anusv&ra shall be the augment.
The
substitution of nasal
we add an anusvara
substituted,
is
optionalhy VIII.
into the sutra to complete the sense,
than a nasal
i.
",
stands before *
e.
Thus VIII.
Similarly VIII.
i.
e.
is
say
Mc*^***
^nr:
anusvara
*rrf%^w
ii
not
"
a letter other
" the
3T*r:
will
word
T*:
in
from outside
".
of *p* an anusvara
be added here
û
Here
3.
6,
teaches 5
also, as,
^m
also an anusvara
means
3r*r and so we need not

They say 3T55n%^r?j: <rc* =bt^hiki^n^|:
alternative when there is no nasal.
That
the sutra
substitute.
It is
II
II
m WQm
ii
\W <*Tifa H wr:, gft

^WW ^fofa f? TOP ^f^rTr^ri" f%*T3
tf^fxi^
an augment and not a
^ft
Wf
CT
Similarly VIII.
II
teaches^ substitution of final
wwift
which precedes 5
fPT'- H
srgwfcranfl ^raft
teaches * substitution of the
sft^frft,
the anusvara takes place in that
anusvara
e.
is
which nasal has not been ordained, and which
* of g* H An
3. 7,
be added, as
supply the word
3. 5,
As
substitution of the
Some
i.
nasal
should be read
9T*T
II
would be added.
will
letter for
When
3. 2.
The word
to such vowel.
tp> h *nfr fr
II
<wr#?
an augment to the vowel
VI 1 1. Ch.
\k.
5.
aj
or
is
1 1 1
Nasal *
substituted for the
substituted
st is
for
sr)
**
599
of ^R[ (and thereby
when the augment
follows, in
a samhitft.
The augment g?
*fcej|l
is
added by VI.
to^H. jSWAwj* or
or
^ + 5Rrtf=^+^ + etfrtf
(VIII.
Thus
The word is
137 &c.
I.
*^?frfcirc
II
or ^^^rrf,
thus evolved:
ffctîTi?
m+
Here
3. 5).
rule VIII.
15 appears
3.
and requires
*to be changed to visarjannya. This visarga may optionally be retained

unchanged by VIII. 3. 36. This, however, is not done in the present instance but the visarga is always and necessarily changed to ^ by VIII. 3. 34.
:
In
of VIII.
the option
fact,
36
3.
a determinate option (vyavasthita
is
vibhasha) and does not apply to the present case.
Or even
is
say
*PP
^n
substituted for the iôf
Why
may
sutra
this
Thus, the sutra
well.
be so read as to teach the
*fjf*
do we say " for the

? Observe sr^ffrT
I"
*^fPJ "
3- 5),
For the
fact,
3* (VIII.
Vdrt
This V&rtika
finals
anomalies,
arise
two
of
6)
3* and ^r^
^ be
and *r* (VIII.
$VW%
SP?T ^r
II
mean,
always changed to
Observe sm^ti!
there
substituted.
according to this vartika, 5
3.
is
substitution as
will
ll
*t
Why
is
is
is
11
do we
always substituted
Thus ST^rrf,
*t u
garreTr^, 37T-
never substituted for ^jh (VIII.
3. 12).
Some would have the elision
of the
ct
after qij
not given in the Kasika, but the Padamanjari gives
is
"
"
II
of *p*,
if
qh"
and the sutra
fr,
before g^, and this ^
" before f|* "
Vdtt
There would
with
it,
II
and
so also the Mahabhashya.
According to Bhattoji Dikshita there

^fTrtf
Thus
II
as %^jTTr,
ST,
^FrlT
as Ir^gffrlf
for this
II
or sr^^rff
purpose.
get three
will be 108 forms of this word

and ^j^rf with the elision of *sr n Then with two w,
Then we apply VIII. 4. 47 to this latter, and have three
t^frfTT
From
II
The anusvara
more by doubling the
having anusvara,
also double
will
is
considered
the three nasal forms
staRrjr,
by the vartika ^}
their
anusvara
in
to be a
ste^
vowel (sr^)
and fre^^f, we
*3W'
The
ll
three forms
addition to g& doubling.
Thus we have 12 forms in anusvara: and six in nasal, altogether 18 forms.

Then the tf will be doubled and trebled and thus with one rf, two <r and
three <f, we have 3 x 18 = 54 forms.
This will be doubled (2 x 54= 108) when
:
is
nasalised.
w*wv$: $
3f^%TO ^htiZ
3*r.
ffrT:
II
11
6.
11
q^rft
3TVTC *3T$
is
ll
3*:,
WW
*srfc,
sm;-<re
ll
II
substituted for the
of
31*.
whereby the
Nasal
i6oo
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
$.
III. .
changed to If or 3") before a surd mute (*$nr) which

followed by a vowel, semivowel or a nasal (sni; praty&h&ra).
3"
is
is
Thus fetrmr or !HrtHr

?KF5 or $?*?$*; *?# or
f*S^ or 3*3^:
visarga
in
required
The
to
be
changed
optionally to * jihva5?^r*rr
gsnft
muliya by VIII. 3. 37, but it is not so done. It is changed always to ^r here
by VIII. 3. 34, also. The *r of g*r is dropped by VIII. 2. 23, and the preceding sound is j, which comes to light in forms like g*rT^ & c
F r tne sa ê of
distinctness, Panini has elected to exhibit the shorter form gn. when in the
;
11
beginning of a composition
tyahara includes
= ijHra-
affix ui
because this shorter form
3*1 is
t&\ pratyahara includes the ten hard
composition.
all
cfcH^rl
vowels, semivowels and nasals,
the real stem in
consonants, and
tj^rmr
is
pra-
srq:
formed by the
II
when we read the preceding
In that alternative
sutra as
*rr:3r?3f,
then
the anuvritti of this s^ will be current in the present sutra also, and so there
be no scope for the operation of VIII. 3. 37. And though the anuvritti
of 5 is also current, yet it will not apply here, because of its non-appropriate-
will
ness in that alternative.
Why
do we say before a surd mute ? Observe $%[$[' 5*t^ (V. 4. 92).

Why do we say followed by a vowel or semivowel or nasal'? Observe <j$ffa
Why do we use the word q* in the sutra ? Had we not used it, the
5^:
The n of ijn is so
sutra might have been open to this construction also.
changed before a â letter which has an arn. letter, (whether preceding it or
following it). So that the rule would have applied to g*rn33p, STr^TR*- H
'
'
'
II
si^trsrcmc
7.
exception
the
*J,
^,
z, ?t),
vowel and
is in
*ttit*
we
say
f^fTf%
sword, he
II
of a word,
jj
which
with
sj of s^TP*, before a
letter (^, 3,
followed by an g^; letter (vowel, semi-
is
3T*ft
is
be read into
to
do we say
'
Why
who
it
to
this sutra.
*T^rfsRrrlr
$^ letter
^
is
it, is
STsr^nx in
the
wre^nr
'
t^tM^
or
Observe H3T^ ^Rt

Why do
Observe jr^r* s?rS3f?r, JT5TP*
II
of s^TP*'?
do we say 'when sre follows

in
or
') ^fen:m or vr^f^rm
before a
dexterous
The word
has the force of Genitive.
T^f>^R^frT
'
with the exception of the
sTsrsrni;
of the
the Nominative case, but
Why
*, ^fo,
is
Thus ^>3T?*f?r or
*reitaKT, (fr m the roct ^r%
11
nasal).
The word
sutra
called ?SF^p
^'?
(
g^
See
V.
2.
vrsrpj,
64).
r^T^fr
II
*ST3 is
hk. viii. Ch. hi.
^wsr^j
11
10
Nasal *
v^rfa
11
spj
tsptot,
ll
1601
ll
In both ways, in the Rig verses.
8.
This ordains an option to the
by which the ^
last sutra,
substitution
^ followed by a letter of % class, which

itself is followed by 3T*, changes its final ^ to t, optionally in the Rig Veda.
Thus ^f^T^ ^\ f>rrf?r or rjf^ftr
Sometimes there is ^ and sometimes ^
was compulsory.
word ending
in
II
*t*rfrT
<T*t^tf*^
Why
II
do we say
sfHu^fd ^T^MMI^
^bfr^rTCTO T^rTTO
*>
II
ff*P
MTÎR
II
No
".
option
^r^fr^, stf?,
II
T^TITTO ^*T^lf qTrT^tf
II
the Rig verses
" in
%f^
allowed here ffif^
^mRTT%
t| i*^f^f%%
optionally substituted
is
is
II
*WMqff
TTrT:
that final
for
II
of a
word which is preceded by a long vowel, and is followed by

an 3^ letter (vowels and semi-vowels with the exception of
5r), when these (^ and star) come in contact with each other
in the same stanza of the Rig Veda.
The
T? of
VIII.
*THHHr$ means ^TTf,
Thus
the verse.
sregT^r*
3.
understood here
is
when both words
e.
<rW tf*T
*?f f *iT
Why
i.
(Rig. IX. 107. 19)
3TT"3RTr
do we say
and so also
are in one and

*r
vmw*
s^
the
The word
n
same Pada of
(Rig.
I.
?tf
2)
II
preceded by a long vowel ? Observe ar^srftl.

when followed by a vowel or % ^ or * ? Observe^^lTCC
do we say
when both words are in the same Pada of a
^RriR. H Why do we say
? Observe 3r$r*TFTni TTFJ^
The word S^TO^T of the preceding sutra is understood here also so
Why
'
II
'
"
'
'
'
II
at
an optional rule
it is
See VIII.
?nfsnsrnf|ii
*$*
ffrp
II
II
?0
||
TT^TR
<i
3T in
*T is
Why
also, as
aTTf^TT'J.
f^TH?
3. 3.
5T^[,
^STS?
||
TW
II
for the
*: xft^fH^ or
sftofrfl
f.
of
be-
sake of pronunciation only.
TTf^ also.
Thus
#: qtf% or ^:
11
do we say ^before*'?
anuvritti of 3*ra*TT
have
is
remains unchanged
11
The
<nf^
II
fPi^H^ f^lW? ^^f%

10.
fore
and
into this
sutra, so
The nominative
Observe^
that
case in
it
is
HTsreftril
Some
an optional one.
read the
Thus we
has the force of Genitive.
Elision of *
1602
êH
fTT!
-m4)
11
11
^rT^TH^RT^
II
The
1 1.
^^
As
by VII.
3R3s#r s^renO
ffrT
\R
ll
^rf^rTC*
of ^TdTI^
(Rig. IV.
11
II
changed to ^ before
is
The word
2. 6).
from g
derived
is
<r^rf*
ll
HcRR*?!
12.
f\fr
srraf%%
<srac,
11
*?ft 3Trtft% T^:
is
is ssrerew,
*(Fg
the 31*
is
with the affix 3T|j^
II
added
(**rerfr
sutra might have been
srraf^t shows, that where there
is
^rr^^rR
When
the second
when
of ^x^
it is fol-
but the use of the longer form
doubling
and the word gets the designa-
',
Thus
tion of amredita, then the rule applies.
or ^fccRP*. &c.
q[
an stmredita.
is
'
II
II
substituted for the
lowed by another ^RC which

The
qTrT
<Tr<*l5
III. . 13
II
^Hiafefr
II
5^*5
**h*ik, qpft
11
^WflT
5J[
The word
83.
1.
^rft
11
T37T*TO
[Bk. VIII. Cm.
îf^^m*.
STR^lW,
not an amredita,
3TPI. is
ÎW^ HISHlRr
we have^rr^^jp^
Here one is ftff asking question, and the other is used in the sense of
This word is read in the list of 3J*q*if? (VIII. 3. 48), and hence sutra
T^f?T?
contempt.
VIII.
3.
37,
Or
does not apply.
^ is enjoined
and that
here,
in the preceding sutras also
the
of *pn
here and not 3
^ should
*r||f?
It
II
(VIII.
3. 5), is
understood
should not be objected that
be enjoined and not ^
because in those
appropriate but not so here.
sutras
<TC3frT
Why do we say when an amredita 3Pt follows ? Observe 3fPl Bfin*

where one is interrogatory and the other denotes contempt (II. 1. 64).
is
'
3T
ffrT
5"
<m:
S^RTO
il
??
II
T^lft
II
WtT
S^fTC ^TTt
13.
Though
'
There
II
3".,
t,
l$r<r.
II
II
is
elision of
3T
when f
this sutra is read in the division of
Grammar which
ed by TfrfTOrc, yet this elision takes place only then
endofapada.
31,
and the
rT
Thus
is
when
the 3
is
is
govern-
not at the
The? is changed to * by VIII. 2.

from fi*f + rr
changed to q by VI 1 1. .2. 40, and then to * by VIII.
The first $.is elided by this sutra. Similarly tfrffn, ^T-
tffc
first
follows.
ll
Thus f^r + *
ts*u The change of W into 5 by VIII. 4. 41, should be consideied as valid
and siddha for the purposes of this rule, otherwise this rule will find no scope.
Obj: It will find scope before that * which is primary, as in 5#J +
4. 41.
ll
ifarct
where 3 of tr^T
Aps.
39) and
Nor
rft*
is
&c.
No.
is
primary.
Here the
first
n will be changed to
so there will be no occasion to elide
it.
^ by senile
The form
will
(VIII.
be Hjfo^ ffara
2.
ll
because it has
s <*frr; rule an apavada to *&&
For the *r^ rule depends upon one pada, and is antaranga, or being
this
rule,
its
scope
in
BK. VIII.
ClI. III. . IS
prior to this the lopa
place
is
Moreover
first.
though there
may
VlSARGA.
1603
asiddha with regard to
sr^
Therefore
it.
in f^r-f % there is similarity
of sounds
not be theoretical similarity (srr^Tf^r TFRra0
change of ^ into a by VIII.
41,
4.
But
considered asiddha.
is
take
will
^Mtt4*0;
^nrfirT
when the
this theoretical
removed by the express text of the present sutra.

neither similarity of sounds (sVuti krtamanantaryam)
technical dissimilarity will be
But
in
tjfof ffai% there
is
between ^ and \, nor similarity created by any technical rule therefore s **fq
has no scope here. It is Bahiranga as well as subsequent to sftT rule (VIII.
2. 39), and therefore doubly asiddha; and consequently it does not debar the
;
5t^
So when *
rule.
is
changed to
d ft
l*
II
Wfa
II
14.
The
and %:
Genitive of ^
including 3
w,
VI.
3.
Thus
II
sutra
force of f^rcrr*
39) in *afr*f then

,
s*astra.
is
is |f ft is
Genitive of *
the
the form which
t. ft
and *p would be the
gCrRl,
it is
W, V% WO-
(ar":
The lengthening
is
by
understood here, and the Genitive here has the

a quality, or avayava-shashthi i. e. when CTT is a portion
e.
i-
2.
not confined to 3 only, but to every în general

where it is simple c of f%* and g^ and
is
5fftrfre.,
The word T^f
in.
nor of
sruti
elided before a tji

and not *p ft
That
W where
$??
is
Thus
of the pada.
Had
is
rule (VIII.
5T^r
II
*: ft,
The
11
II
and
is
by
II
both assume,
ft will
STJft
5r
sutra
ft
*',
II
^KTO^ T^f 3pTf >T^
tfrT
:
q?
neither of
there remains no sort of anantarya
^ which
is
not at the end
of a pada
the Genitive been construed as sthana-shashthi,
then
is
*<K
also
elided.
would qualify
and the rule would mean
" ^ should be elided before a

^ when at the end
See VIII. I. 16. But we have the elision of the penultimate * in
srsHlt. the second person singular of the Imperfect of the Intensive, and we get
the form wsmv
See VIII. 2. 37. So alsosTTTCTP from *<nf in Intensive, Imper-
T^,
of a word."
II
II
fect.
The
elided
by VI.
ged to
^by
reduplicate
1.
is
lengthened by VII.
68, the final
VIII.
2.
is
4. 83,
the 5P
changed to by VIII.
2.
is
elided,
39,
and
and
this
The
II
?<*
**ufo
II
Visarjanlya
II
*snr,
srsrcrptfr:,
substituted
is
fro&fnr.
consonant or when there
in a
Tha word *: is understood. The visarga is the substitute of

Pada, before surd consonants and sibilants, or at a Pause,
Thus ssT*sr^fa (VIII.
3.
is
34,
a Pause.
VIII.
S^re^n:;, ssre^yn::, f$refcT%, arcre?te%, i$rfRr!cr,
^fjrfafa,
do we say
^JT^qfa,
15
?rr#9r;
"
before a
ft &*\
m&
for *, before a
Who
ftp* is
chan-
75.
<Mftf%srfcfar:
15.
4. 40), s$rasT?*f?r, f^rerefa,

gtfifererfcr
11
consonant or
mkm>
(frcrcra)
Pause:
at a
ll
f$r.-;
Pause
"
gsrercm
g^:
?
final
Observe
In these two
latter,
1604
AND *
[Bk. VIII. Ch. III. 17
the Vriddhi being considered as Bahiranga, and the
Bahiranga Vriddhi,
is
asiddha, and
^ being the
result of such
consequently not changed to visarga.
is
The word <t^j is understood here, and the genitive should be construed here as sthana-sashthi, so that for the final ^ of a Pada there is visarga,
and not
fo
r:
^ which
for that
t^tr
not
final.
*n, lift
11
and not any other
affix
11
Visarjaniya
16.
?:
is
substituted
is
for the
called
before the Locative Plural case-
?: ),
||
The word g<i is here the Locative Plural

Thus q*i:fj, *tf$T:, arerg
Though the * would have been changed to visarga by the last sutra
affix.
also the making of this a special sutra is for the sake of niyama.
That is,
Thus T?jf, *t*, when the ^ is
only ^ becomes visarga, and not any other ^
In q^q^&c, the ct becomes ^ by VIII. 2. 66.
not ^
II
II
11
3TT%II
fnr
11
*t
wr sref s^r^rro st^th^ t ft ^^ ^

17.
(vowels and
Thus
sfi*
h^rt
srftr rcr:
or
when
it
before an src^ letter
srr,
*ttT
îm, w$i
The a is elided by VIII.

S^rr ^fr?rf
the forms will be *rta<3r, vjift gH ar^RW
t,
11
consonants).
soft
^r sr^, *Tr are, arer are, ht ^tRt,
3TT#, srrgrrr
With
st
srefr,
shtt,
tft,
ifiKft
substituted for the ^ called
q^ is
preceded by
is
ffrfrT,
ssrra
3. 19,
ll
11
20,
^ amir,
22 &c.
II
Why do we say when preceded by *rr &c ? Observe arf^r^, Sr^C**

do we say when followed by a letter of ars^ pratyahara ? Observe f $r:,
No, this is no valid counter-example, because no other word follows
g$n
the visarga while some word must follow it because the word sanhita(VIII.
'
Why
ll
'
'
'
11
2.
108)
understood here.
is
Ans.
If
than 3?^ are

VIII.
3.
15
be
this
subsequent sutras.
3. 15,
22, the
word
^fr*
this
elision of
will
is
for the
must be
letter,
ll
is
the
in this sutra for
the sake of
For
letters other
superfluous.
will
be changed to visarga by
Thus sr^ serves no

Thus in VIII.
namely those conso-
sake of subsequent ones.
qualified
3TWT
ll
by the word
ar^r
Before any other consonant there will
Thus f $j \?*f% = fSTf*
ll
be f^nrera
here
of this rule will be considered as asiddha for the
nants only which are in the class
be no
employed
3T5T is
so there will necessarily be visarga.
purpose in this sutra, but

3.
then
Before a
11
and the
purposes of VIII.
so,
employment
Its
ll
The denominative verb from
secondary derivative from
this root,
with the affix
BK. VIII. CH.
bef^ras
fa^will
22, before
but
fi,
<?/.
^f% ^tm"
in
Here
II
not so because
it is
why
If so,
* AND * ELISION.
19]
III. .
is
the
word
would require
sr
arfar qualifies
??$
1605
used
ffo
by VIII.
elision
3.
11
in that sutra
VIII.
3.
22,
it
would
have been better to say ?f% srWqp* instead of ffo *nqr*i

Ans. The word 9^ is used in that sutra for the sake of the subsell
quent sutra VIII.

in
VIII.
3.
VIII.
Moreover
arrcT is
f^
efjirfa u
not apply to
23, %fa
3.
used
ând
end of a Pada
an
yatna
which
are
therefore not here jthtct, <ptt*
*r
in ^pfar
&c and
lighter
pronouncing which
is
is
wpt,
very light
is
called laghu-pra-
ând ôf
^,
3T*Tta*r,
In
5tT. 5TT5R5*ra*T
19.
II
?**
fact,
II
ll
II
The
II
from the relaxation of the muscles and

places of pronunciation are palate &c,
tongue with the various places

tara.
and
the organs are the root, the middle and the tip of the tongue.
utters
articulation
srw or <* arret, srerrgsr* or arw s^, st^t^tV STTTO
lighter articulation results
laghu prayatna
who
lighter
the organs employed in speech.
tact of the
at the
stt,
* and %'m
vnrfaL, arsfci or after an a? or an
heavy ^ and so the lighter n the heavy sr
will replace the

*farsr,
after a? or
a quality of the person
or ST^T 3TTft^:, fPfST or fT 3TO, *MIH*I or
The
ll
according to the opinion of S&kafetyana.
effort in
the cause of the utterance of a letter,
Thus
f|?T:
may
19
3. 18,
pronounced with a lighter articulation be-
are substituted for the final
The
that rules VIII.
in this sutra, so
Effort or articulation
tara.
is
st^t letter,
That the
-
been used
11
18.
fore
^ftr
ought to have been used.
This sutra applies to 3 called *
sptcshtcsito *rar
Had
which applies to all consonants.
23,
3.
22, then in
^ and ^ are
<TTTft
II
is
light,
When
the con-
the articulation
is
to be slurred over.
&IT-,
*ll*<^FT
ând ^preceded by
a pada, are elided before an
very
3T
sr^r letter,
or
sit
II
and
at the end of
according to the opi-
nion of Sakalya.
As
U ar*r,
sir
btt% or
ar^rnrTî: or
The name
where there
is
3F*irr, efTPfT
aTT% or S&nrar#,
3TOTT 3*[* or aTOTgsnr,
*P*T or
arscr arrf^^: u
of Sakalya
is
used to
make
not the lighter articulation of
it an optional rule. Therefore,

* and a by the last sutra, there
1606
AND *
*T
ELISION.
also in the other alternative the fuller sounds of
are three forms, heavy
\ and a
When ând âre
light
^ and
and a and
preceded by
air,
BK. VIII. CH.
then there
Thus
are heard.
elision of
is
% and
III. 21
there
11
by the next
elision
sutra compulsorily.
*tt*I^ **
^r^r^Tn:^ *&n*iw
sfRft
frr:
ii
20.
T^Tf^r
II
II
II
preceded by
**
*W**r
srta:,
w^ Ti^^nî^^?
$ror
II
*reft srrff <rcr:
according to the
elided,
sfr is
ii
opinion of G&rgya, before an sr^ letter.

There can be no % preceded by sfr, so only ^
the sutra. Thus *f 3T?r, *ifr 31% *fr 5?*, *rm %Vi H
The making
this
is
of
a separate sutra,
it
is
used simply honoris causa
which VIII.
3.
elided:
pujartha
The
).
and s^ra^
3 does come
As
also.
iff
rule.
elision
19 would have otherwise caused,
laghu pratyatnatara
ST^r sr^r
is
taken in explaining
sake of indicating that
for the
a necessary (nitya) rule and not a vibhasha
is
is
The name
of laghu
$wr,
So
srt or
that
*rifte*r,
11
^ q^ \\\\
a pada),
of Gargya
prayatna w
hereby prohibited.
are or
According to others every kind of \ ( whether heavy or

and HPPT is not valid in their opinion.
grfsr
q^rfa
II
n sfsr,
^ qf
light
is
to be
21.
^ and ^ ( preceded by sr or 9TT, at the end of
and followed by 3T, when it is a word, are elided neces-
sarily.
The particle 3
the word
is
pada or word.
full
and not the ss^ which

,
is
That
Particle
is
meant here by
a root obtained by the samprasarana
Thus *r s <?5fifMtTfer:, *T S ^rfa:

Why do we use the word q% "g- when it is a pada" ? So that the rule
may not apply to 33^ the form assumed by^s^by samprasarana as ^53 *$ = *(
Obj- 331 could never have meant the form assumed by %3i
for the
^5^*1.
of %3T
II
II
II
samprasarana of%sr
the
is s,
lakshana-pratipadokta &c, will

vocalisation,
when
Ans
like
VIII.
3.
there
is
So
that
merely indicatory.
a separate Particle
The word q%
32.
Moreover the maxim of

prevent the inclusion of this 3*^ resulting from
*j is
is
^33^
11
used here for the sake of the subsequent sutras
^5? may come
before a
word beginning with a
vowel,
and not before a vowel which is an affix. Thus there is no double ^ in 1**^*3^11
This is also a nitya rule, and not optional. Had it been optional, there would
have been no necessity of this aphorism, because VIII. 3. 19, would have
been enough.
Bk. VIII. Ch.
%fe
i&*m
22.
or
3TT,
v*
(
**sift
II
The
II
preceded by
q;
being final in a pada,

Thus *t êtRt,
Though the
^ only
taken
^fe, <j3nih
11
according to the opinion of

9CT%
1607
Nasal.
III. . 25]
anuvritti of
to the exclusion
a*
before a consonant,
Ach&ryas.
w ^m,
s^fa
all
sr^t
*tt ?*rre,
or by
arar,
*mr,
?fr,
elided
is
11
o(%
^ and a
both
Because
11
is
after
*nft
*mw
3T^r,
*tih,
fw
we have
there is a
present here, yet

lift,
*nTT
and 3T*r
and % can come only when preceded by 3? or btt the only

example of which given by Grammarians is fs$% 3?ftr% (VIII. 3. 17). Here %
is not elided, because the word srftr qualifies the word ^fc* of this sutra.
only, and never *
Q. But ^should be
There
Ans.
elided in f$nr ?*rf?r, because 3 is an 3T^ letter.

no such example to be found in any standard author.
his commentary on the Pratyahara sutra ft* says that
is
Moreover Patanjali in
no words can end in g, ^, ^,
^\
is
?r
or
So
11
The word sarvesham

and there
no
is
indicates that VIII.
***rfa *r:,3T3*srr<;:,
*3II
II
The Anusvara
23.
stood in this sutra.
end of pada
therefore not here
qwfo
II
II
Thus
II
mw%
ll
*ift
The word yfc is

The * must be
11
The Anusvara
with
*rfa ^m: t&

25.
II
all
s*
and
consonants, with the excep-
and semi- vowels.

îfa with ^(VII.
I.
72); and BTT*^ft,
ll
arrrc-
II
'
rfT
srfe
substituted for the
is
Why do we say not final in a Pada ? Observe

do we say before a
consonant ? See ***[%, T*3rT
'
underat the
11
<rorr%, *TClfr%> Stfffa,
?**%, BTfaf*l*mrft
*TC srrlr
ssrTO,
II
not final in a pada, before
tion of Nasals
11
q^TT* *:^r,3re 3 Trna,

R*
^T^rror^rerWr *rcr<t srra <rcrp
toitcto Torero
24.
sttfa
Therefore not here,
5T^T^"r?cr^T ^rfe
H,
even does not apply,
3. 18,
substituted for ^, at the end
is
of a word, before a consonant.

Thus îr SSffsr, *PT fSTlf, W*Z
ii
word
light articulation, but lopa there too.
St *3^rpc:
ff%;
that the existence of the very
doubtful.
'
'
is
II
qr^rfr n
:,
?trt, sw:,
substituted for the
word t;^ ending with the
affix
^^ gf$^
11
Why
II
f^w^
II
**
t&
of
ll
*rac,
before the
1608
Nasal.
Thus
STrSFr^w
sreT*,
The
II
Bk. VIII. Ch.
substitution of
preventing the anusvara change (cf VII.
it
for
is
*r
III. .
for the
28
sake of
Why
do we say 'before *r*'?

do we say 'of^'? Observe f% U? (V. 4.
40).
1.
See *&<i (VI. 4. 40 Vart). Why

Why do we say 'ending with fc^'P
70).
STCTrSRT^*
The
which
f^T*
5331 affix, as
t
ff%:
*<n:
11
added by
is
changed to ^
is
end of a word,
at the
belongs to Brahmanadi
it
îs changed
the
III. 2. 61,
in ^fffr?
11
stt
II
11
The
to
^ by
tfrSTf^
VIII.
is
2.
36,
formed by
11
11
optionally
is
followed by a
itself is
II
ll
11
*&<?*< ^r^r ^r
26.
which
skrrsrf*,
J^rnTrTr,
class.
qrsnfa
*$
t, *<ft, *tt
w*fc *zKW*t m$i htuksh m H*m srf^fr *m1t
^Tfrr^fi:
Observe
II
jt
substituted
n, before 5,
for
II
may
be changed to anusvara or remain unchanged before a

Thus r% or r%* BH^rT, 'what does be cause to
word beginning with gr
H.
11
shake
'
w&fa
sK*i
Vart:
or
?5
^,
ll
27.
followed by
'
'
gladdens'.
^rf*
ll
jrcft,
ll
*:,
ll
is
j[
after
'.
^m^^
or ^<*
it is
^; as
f^ ^^ or t% *3%
II
iF nft:,
^1
5^, 5^, 5TK
^r T^f:
added to a
is
II
II
final ^,
and the
to a final n^, before a sibilant, optionally.
augment f
Thus
II
when
<T3TT%
$^5*5 ^ft
g' ^Tim^l^r: ^fF?T^t: 1^ jft. ?
The augment *r
28.
II
for m,
it.
becomes ^ before a word beginning with

S3%
or
^Pn-
S^ ^%
s, the preceding
5T : or f%a?r:,
^ which has a
what withholds
II
n may be changed to 3, q
'what does it matter about yesterwhat does he cause to shake ? f% g^rf^f^r or
and
f% j^fTOR or f^ ^"?^RT
'
ff%:
$r,
Thus f%
^NÎM what
?m t:
'
^^SH^ft
Before
respectively.
day'?
r%
or
srrf3FT *i%, or srrf *1%;
%%
Wf ^ *T3
or src^ qg:, itff ^
ot
or JTTf ^rm w
II
are <?3 and g^ with an indicatory fr, showing that they

added to the end of the prior word (I. I. 46), and not to the beginning
of the second word. In sanhita reading, it would have made no difference
practically, whether these augments were added to the end of the first, or the
beginning of the second. But they are added to the end of the first in order
Thus we have snf &% also. This
to indicate that VIII. 4. 63, will take effect.
The augments
are to be
>
change of
*T
would not have taken place had the augment
been added to
Bk.
.
f^
Ch.
VIII.
of ^j%
Ill
Nasal.
30]
because in *rîf7 (VIII.
pada.
So
letter,
but
that
if
this $f* letter
a*
word, like ft*<T%* though
is
Thus
to 5- (VIII. 4. 63).
changed
4.
were added to
g; is
1609
63) the sr^ letter must be at the end of a

st
of
^,
too
as f%%, here
qj is
g*r
f^J
will not
be
the
body of a
f^fft f^jtoL "
f^^F^="
not changed to
letter.
follows a $ra
*r
not at the end of a pada, so

in
CT
^?^, formed with the Preposition fa added to the root ^r, with the Unadi
affix fof%
II
Moreover in $n; *rra> the *r is not changed to q by VIII. 3. 59. Had the
augment sf been added to sn^f, as a^n^T, the ?sr would have been changed to
q, as jjt^ $TTO, for then VIII. 3. in, would not have applied, as ?ET was no
longer at the beginning of a pada.
in 3"? *rra> the *| is not
Moreover
Had
tion of VIII. 4. 42.
have been the change of ^to
^ fa S^ "
:
q;
T^TT%
changed to q because of the prohibi-
? been the augment of *jra, as
by VIII.
II
:,
fa
then there would
?*Tra,
4. 41.
5^
II
After a word ending in ^, there may optionally be added the augment to a word beginning with ^; n
Thus ^f^fCTR or WJ? STR, *#** *m% or JTtgns? ^t
The word 5": is to be construed as Ablative singular, and not Genitive
singular of 3, because of the maxim THzffsf^r Tîft fHfyfit *<3taP|,
Q. Why it is 7 and not 5^, in other words, why is this augment
29.
II
II
added to the beginning of the second word and not to the end of the
Ans. This is done in order to prevent the 55 change by VIII.
But being
beginning of the second word, VIII.
at the
4.
first ?
4. 41.
42 would prevent
w^+^ra = ^fo^Tro, (VIII. 4. 41) but the correct form is

For the ? of *jf?*a is s substituted by VIII. 2. 31, which becomes
^n^Sflfa
f by VIII. 2. 39, for the *r of the augment, <r is substituted by VIII. 4. 55,
and for ^ there is ? by the same rule.
this change.
11
5HFsr
!f%:
11
II
30
q^rft
II
*rasrcRirsnrTRW
30.
the augment
II
*:,
II
*t3ftcto ^t ^3T*Tfr *ntfrr
11
After a word ending in
q;,
word beginning with ^ h

*%l\ T?T^ mm or ^j* q\\ n%Fl
to a
^?
optionally
is
Thus h^T^
The ^ of the
augment becomes ^ by VIII. 4. 55. This ?j is asiddha (VIII. 2. 1), and therefore ^ is not changed to 5 by VIII. 3. 7.
This is the reason why the augment
is exhibited as tj^ and not gr
In sutra VIII. 3. 29 5^ would have done as
11
II
well but
not so here.
by Padamanjari.
This view of the Kaaika, however,
The ^ can never be changed
to
is
not approved
here, because
q[ is
followed
Namut.
1610
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
by w which is not an a?* letter. The word 3?^

In fact, g? would have been a better augment.
ff^r:
T^r^^f tsfttto tot*
11
<nsfr
*rr juift
The augment
31.
a word ending
Thus *r^T^ %^f
in
*nrft
understood
The augment
ll
is
VIII.
3. 7.
be added to
optionally
when a word beginning with
in
32
11
may
?j
is
III.
added
to
$r follows.
the end of the preced-
ing word, and not to the beginning of the second word, in order to change
into
augment
In fact, the
\\
good as
gar,
namely both are
?r
tj
added to the second would have been as

but then g- change would not have taken
srar
;
place.
Obj.
If this
be
Arts.
This
then
so,
when
longer final in a pada,
gar
is
to be thus
is
why ^
is
added
to
not changed to
in frf*r
it,
The
explained.
^g%
sutra
since
no
it is
11
*?ff:
4. 40) should be divided into two parts, in order to prevent

the first part will be *% 3^TT, which will mean that *r and
(VIII.
Thus
followed by
change.
5^TT 5^
<T
*r
The next sQtra will be ^J,

and ^ will not cause the change of *r to T
which will mean that the preceding ^ and 5 are changed to %a and ^ respec11
tively.
$Rr.
&WW
^^w%5 ^rT^rTr?T^TT^^r^r3 5R'fr

r
11
HSfa
*t?rt ft**?*
vm^m
ottot
11
II
After a word ending in ^, irr or

preceded by a light vowel, the same consonant
32.
added invariably
at the
^ which
is
fôrq;
is
beginning of the next word, which
commences with a vowel.

The word
3^:
and
3^
itself qualifies
Though
tadanta-viddhi.
singular, yet
it
the Ablative singular here
in
-g*\: is
wm
11
of brevity, and of the subsequent

;
and so also ^5^
is
it is
exhibited
sutras.
1.
16)
is
in
is
the Genitive
its
3^
in the
7th case for the sake
a pratyahara meaning S7
is
<*
and
a pratyahara containing the three augments ^*, 55^
11
In other words
is
augment
in ^, as srcr^Tflft H
SSîs
after ^,
<$
after <*
and ^
after
or that
Thus ^? is the augment after a word

the augment after a word ending in % as
these letters are doubled practically.
ending
qualifies
Locative singular, but should be cons-
the
srf^T is in
trued as Genitive singular here
and 5?
and %&Trl
should be converted here into Ablative singular, because of
connection with
?f
q^[
q^| (VIII.
the word
understood, and thus there
the word
Bk. VIII. Cn.
*n*tjir^
ii
5^ is
Why
III. .
the
33
^ Substitution.
augment
word ending
after a
do we say 'ending
in W, T or ^'
in ^, as
Observe
sr*3^3ittfr
;f^re%, fJWfHTri;,
See ^Tr^%
'preceded by a light vowel? Observe qT3T*%, *H"Rrer H
ed by a vowel"?
i6ii
Why
Why do we say
do we say "follow-
II
The Mahabhashya thus comments on {his aphorism

Vdrt:wtfk qf ntt^T* "The 3^ augment is added
stands at the beginning of a word". So that in ^FT^+STT
not added to
because
not the beginning of a Pada.

vartika be held to be necessary ?
No, because the word
srr,
fj-
it is
to a vowel
which
5^ is
Then should this
(Ins.
Sing.),
q$r<j is
understood
come in sf&^ftr
But then it will come in TO$TS^| + 3TT H
Because it is a compound of two nouns, and though the case-affixes have been
elided, yet sfarîs here a Pada by reason ofprat}'ayalakshana; and hence there
should be 3^ here added to 8TT
Ans. This is no valid objection. %f&g*i is not
here a Pada, on the maxim SrT*q^ ^TT^rnf^^r^rfr gff sn^TOSn* *T writt "When
an affix has been elided by ^^ or ^r the pratyaya-lakshana rule will not
apply, when the object of it is to give the designation of Pada to the second
member of a compound, with the exception of the rule applying to the beginning of a Pada". Thus in WT^F^. the word tfi^n is not treated as a qf, because
But the second member of a comthe rule to be applied is to the end here.
pound is treated like a pada, when a rule is to be applied to the beginning of
a Pada. Thus in ^faq^r, the second member %^ is considered as a Pada for
the purposes of the rule sn^qfisir: (VIII. 3. 1 11), and the *j is not changed to^
This view proceeds upon the supposition that the word q^rq; governs this sutra.
But the anuvritti of q^r? ceased with VIII. 1. 27, as we stated before. How
Are we to make the above vartika
are we then to get out of this difficulty ?
here: so
5?
will
not
II
II
11
lecessary
>o
No: because the anuvritti of q$ from VIII.
3.
21 runs into this sutra.
3^
means anrrfr <Tt 5=5f *T^ft H "The augment

with which a Pada commences". Not therefore to the
that the sutra
'owel
is
added to a
case- affix arr in
II
wi
$frp
11
MS
^sft 4t *r
*m sttcto ssfr
33.
,
r
when
it
<rcprft
II
*rar:,
w, ^:, ^t
:
sibilants,
5 and
sr),and
is
by a vowel.
Thus
*T5 3T*3 %f^: 01 *T***jJ ^f|:,
fai**U4MWi U
The 5
is
3T 3
a Pragrihya by
3TTO ^T: or
I.
1.
14,
remained unchanged, this ordains * optionally.

iiddha, the
16
II
îs optionally the substitute of the Particle

preceded by a tpr consonant (all consonants
ith the exception of semivowels,
followed
w
is
m *nfrrcrc*fr vsffi btht t^t
* is
not changed to anusvara
in
flf^ \^:,
f^q-
8T
W MH^
and therefore would have

This ^ being considered
f^^jppH 1*,
STrcg &c,
by VIII.3.
23.
VlSARGA SANDHI.
I6l2
When
by
I.
I.
this
not a pragrihya, then

present sutra.
as ^?f^r% or
fog
forms with f fst
?frf
So
II
*r.
II
is
VIII.
tioned, the
ll
^tt%
$fa
ft^re^ftrer,
mw- u
be nasal
will
Thus we have
II
five
^r: n
11
*sft
when a hard
the substitute of a visarga,
is
understood
15,
3.
Thus
[here.
gSH^FHira, ?$*-
fsr^^r^rirT,
^^^5%,
gsre'faW, i$cKf%,
the * was changed to visarga before a hard consonant,
In the present sutra, no special cause being men-
*f
Pause
change would take place, not only before a hard consonant, but
also,
i.
in
e.
% sj:, g$r
This however,
also.
the word ^TfrTRTC. governs this sutra
so the
and not in Pause, moreover we read the

the ^ change in Pause.
srr^
firer^far:
ll
3X
The
35.
^$1
visarga
The word
srr
sn^,
II
change
is
not the case, because
will
^R
be
in
Sanhitl only,
here and so prevent
fesn?5?r*r:
ll
the substitute of visarga,
is
(*sTt)
which
when
itself is follow-
II
5ft?* is a Bahuvrihi,
when a
In other words,
st
anuvritti of
followed by a hard consonant
ed by a sibilant
sibilant
meaning that which
follows
is
followed by
11
a hard consonant, the preceding
3^
Thus SPffr: gw,

**> **W cSTrrP*> *U^- $fhr*>
^p, *rerw WHOT^4*rrl
Though the sutra could have been shortened by saying 51^ ?r yet
visarga remains unchanged.

5^r:
3?
11
By
it is
where the f
substitute,
isrererrc:, gsrererrc:, prf*rcrfir, g^rRrf*r,
or at the end of a Pause.
at the
(*&{) follows.
The word 13R

s$re3jn:
is anusvara by VIII. 3. 23, as

changed to ^ by the present sutra
it is
also with
fw^frcrei ?tîx arf^r *r^%
consonant
8$rc<rcrlr
II
remain unchanged, as fan
will
34.
srf::,
is
it
11
fTO&forer
11
36
ffa, and preceded by a *r* consonant, then

and it may be replaced by 3?
When it is
changed to ?r by ?T*nw (VI. 1. yy\ or to % by the
%*&
a Pragrihya, then
it is
as faTMffrT, or
firp
In the case of 3*rr^r ^, there
When
f%f%f% H
III.
followed by
is
optionally
17, it is
[BK. VIII. Ch.
II
used, in order to indicate that the jihvamuliya
the longer form
is
maniya changes
also
m srrc
*rtfrF** n
11
?s
<^ff*r n
isftM* ^r $pfr to**:
36.
visarga,
do not take
when a
The
place, in cases like srfo:
m,
srft
e *JRP*,
and upaclh-
^W
$frro. H
11
ii
visarga
is
sibilant follows.
optionally
the substitute of
BK. VIII.
ClI. III.
As
fSTC^rra
4. 40, 41, for
When the
Vdrt
^'
or fsr^ra,
VIII.
Cf.
II
$%
%$-.
VlSARGA SANDIII
38]
1613
*n^[
or
by a hard consonant, there
is
$)& or s$re%%, f$T:
^ and ^
sibilant
is
PT or f^wpr^,
f$T
II
followed
fW
As
optionally the elision of the preceding visarga.
WXZR- or
^TT*. PjffiTC :
or f^rrwrarc: u
5jrx^x^ ^
^*nre*fap
iTtTJ h
37.
the visarga,
11
<re^r
^\9
n ^^xqRXqfasr n
^mro^x^xq s^rrrercffr top
q^TR
11
rlrenHta^
and
q are optionally substituted for

when followed by a hard guttural or a hard
x 5?
labial.
Thus
f$r *
or
cffijfrr
*$.
^rfir,
% st
*3rcrrr
or f$p
^fa,
?$r * t*trt or
f*n
The 3? and <r in * 37 and x q are for the sake of

verfsr, f$T x *ttfa or ^r: ir^m II
pronunciation only. The substitutes are the Jihvamuliya and the Upadhmaniya
two
and
the rule VIII.
debar
will
srf^^TrP^
belonging to the class of
lost sibilants
When
that.
There
II
is
3.
34.
37
and
q-
respectively.
does not apply, then this sutra will apply
But VIII. 3. 35. will not be debarred. As ^m- STPT*,

no vipratishedha between VIII. 3. 35. and 37, because of
the asiddhahood of one with regard to the other.
(VIII.
2.
1).
In
fact,
every
by itself, and ignores the existence of the

35 would not have been debarred by VIII.
rule in these three chapters stands
subsequent
Hence VIII.
rule.
3.
3- 37-
To
is
some divide
get this,
two
this sutra into
"
(1) ffc^p
the substitute of visarga before a guttural or labial which
sibilant. " (2)
The jihvamuliya and upadhmaniya
g? xqpsr
a visarga before a guttural and a labial in every other case.
^ lMtl<fl
*p
mm
11
II
*3tf*
II
srftsfr *nrfa
W; 3T-^T^
?rtwi u
^^ qw:
n TTrr?ftoro
38
II
ftsnfcffa^ frfrcrsrap
f%?j?i n *CTT?r?rf^3!Frs*ra^rt
3?*
*rc?r
srerrc arf* sfr
STTfrtr
affix.
" in
is
possible only before the
V.
3.
47
<ro^frrtf?r,
sTO^^nr
Why
TO*^??*,
( II I.
do we say
qre
by a
are substitutes of
"
w *^* *gg n
i
>
trhf^
tfn% sr^ss*
Prcwrtf
toww. h
11
labial.
means "when the guttural and

other words, when they stand
This
TOPTRTW
visarga
the substitute of a visarga before an affix
^T is
beginning of a word,
The
followed
II
top
sirra
beginning with a hard guttural or

The word
is
i.
3TCT*Sfir<TW, (
affixes
V.
3.
qr^T,
67
),
labial are not
at
the
an
at the beginning of
sf^T, 3?>
TO**,
and
W&\*,
zk\t?h
(
V.
11
3.
Thus
70
).
when not at the beginning of a word ? Observe

to* 3rpto%, <ra*fq^fsr
Vdrt: Prohibition must be stated, when the visarga belongs to an
'
'
11
Indeclinable
as, sn<P **?<?*,
3*: ^?<TUl
i6h
Visarga Sandhi
Bk. VIII. Ch.
III.
'.
40
Vdrt
The visarga which comes from 35 is only changed to sr before
and not any other visarga. As q^^rwdrT, and 3^jr*3T% but not here,
:
zfnrq,
Upadhmaniya when followed by a

Upadhmaniya as its penultimate
3*^
though it is written in the Dhacupatha as 35^ the * only represents the
of
-t, and is not to be pronounced.
This *t is changed to q-, when the final w
is^changed to a guttural, as s w tt, and then this ^ is changed to , as in
Vdrt
The
guttural.
g- is
root
(srnre"
Tud
20) has
qr^
These words, however, may be derived from the root

and *p*3?l, by adding the affix g*
positions 3THT, 3"^,
%w.
<r.
II
q^TR
II
39.
<* is
II
*or:, qr:
the
preceded by ^ or ^ and
^<T>
ijrer,
Why
q^fw, wt^
here,
refir
*rffc*r,
37,
and
efir*g
do we say
The
substitute
is
II
'byan^'?
*^t
is
affixes
Observe
meant
%<*^1
frf
are the
3sFK?7*,
?rg- SftrRT,
arfSr: cfidfrT,
?*&'
should begin with a guttural or a
labial.
Therefore not
sutras, the
from this, are both current.
anuvritti of
The
in the preceding sutra,
5W^^Tte*ft:
11
11
q^n%
II
from VIII.
3.
39 and of
if
pre-
II
and not of visarga
g-
visarga will be changed to
ceded by f or s, otherwise it will be

According to some, this sutra ordains
11
The
here also.
Thus sFfarran, ÔTTO*,
g-
ffrf:
of that visarga, which
followed by an affix beginning with
ii
affix
In the succeeding
f ur: q:
with the Pre-
II
a hard guttural or a labial.

The word srq^rfr is understood
same
irqr
11
sr
in the
and so also
room of the
in the
*tto;-5*3tt:, ic*fr:
iispsr. f<^3Rrrm*n*raf fttf^toro
srejpcrssfr
wffi
sr
taught
following sutras.
II
ifjjt-.
top
11
For the visarga of ?ht^ and 5?^? there is

substituted ^before a hard guttural or a labial, when these
words are Gati (I. 4. 67 and 74).
40.
S^*
*w^*, ^re^^* jpFffrtf 3**37^>

**
do we say " when they are Gati " ? Observe ^ ^frfcr, 3*f îTTf^r,
Here 3*: is a noun, Accusative Plural of *:
cfifjRT
The anuvritti of
jJTîs Gati by I. 4. 74, and 5*^ is Gati by I. 4. 67.
Thus
^preFrrtf,
Why
5?::
II
?wm ceases.
II
,!
\K.
VIII. CH. Ill
VlSARGA SANDIII.
^rcr<re*3 ^nr^^f ft^^taro
ffrT: n *3>rfr<T*rei
41.
is
substituted,
visarga which
for the
labial,
42
not part of an
1615
re?n: ^rrf^fr *rera
?|p
tot
before a hard guttural
preceded by % or
is
or a
and
is
affix.
This applies to the visarga of far
f*
3fi%*
^^
srra*r,
and ut^t
II
Thus fas^^, fastfariT, ^rT*, S^rT*, *??, Sf^PT, *f^ftrTW, 9TT^, STFR^^,
srrft^rei, ^g^sr* ^SFrcre*, ^g*^*, ^r^wr, srr^^rw, sôffa*
Why do we say when not belonging to an affix ? Observe arf?r
>
'
^n%
'
How
do you explain m^-. ejrcrRr, f^3 ^rf?T ? For here in

^rfrf, ^Tf
w
affix
is elided by VIII. 2. 24, and the lôf fcrg^+*T is
the
of
the
&c,
fa$j:
is
not
the visarga of an affix, and ought to be changthis
changed to visarga
:
II
ed to
II
Ans.
3.
The
48) indicates
visarga in ro
may
(VI.
:
,
of the word
inclusion
by
implication, that
HXQ &c
*r
Sfrjjsgsn
in
Kaskadi
the only exception being wjj H

s
The
be that the visarga here does not follow a simple

1.
class (VIII.
change does not take place of
3,
this
reason of this
but an ekadesa
in).
Prohibition must be
Vdrt
3^ and
stated in the case of
fflrS^Frf ^ ^(yf^H, The visarga changed to

or 3 are vriddhied; as %sg?31> fr^c-^NL
Vdtt c^jnf mzj ^ The visarga
changed to
even
Vdrt
q-
is
3*t;
as
even when f
II
then before dentals as well as gutturals and
fa^ffa*, f$*l^* (VIII.
These
last
when f or ^
Thus
q-
is
11
are pluta, and
labials.
86 for pluta).
2.
two vartikas
may
^53^*:, *%\ZV
be dispensed with, because Vriddhi and
Pluta are Bahiranga change, and so the visarga will be changed to

cases also
by the
sutra itself; except so far as
filrc^Rrawro
ffrTJ
ii
\\*r
q^r^r
ll
The
changed to
^r
finrcr.,
^rerncf^rt *tct?t
$r
in these
concerned.
w^k^t*
ll
^$v *iw
visarga of the Gati fdTC**;
f^ft fasra^ftwu *iiiwt
42.
11
rf is
11
optionally
is
before a hard guttural or a labial.
Thus Rrci^r, f^^l, f^NS^T***, or ft*: ^<?tf, r%: ^t^ f^ tjrfstpi

The word tft: is understood here also. Therefore no option is allowed here,
fat: ^^rr ^F*3T W, where Redoes not mean 'disappearance'.
(I. 4. 72).
,
ftferogftfir
*r*rr^ srsurrepif fijjt:
^r^
qw
ii
ll
II
T^rfr
II
ftc:-Br:-^rgT *r%,
f
11
^t^
ll
Visarga Sandhi.
1616
[Bk. VIII. Cn.
q;is optionally the substitute of
43.
III. .
43
the visargas of
and ^rjT when they are used as Numeral adverbs,

(before a hard guttural and labial).
fg-^-
frp^
The
affix
n^ (sr)
added to the three words
is
the sense of krtvasuch by V.
As
fa:
fa:
Why
do we say
'
"q
41.
and hence VIII.
3.
41,
and
regard to
4. 18),
and hence VIII.
^Tg^
it
is
fa<sfidrlt,
^3 ^fa
or qg^rf?T,
T^rfr or "q^T^rf"*
-q-^:
II
Numeral
?^*, where q is compulsory by VIII.
This sutra is an example
16 and IV. 1. 88).
the sense of kritvasuch or
in
2.
With regard to ^5? the visarga is a non-affix visarga,

would have made q compulsory, this makes it optional.
With
fa*T
in
Tg^
(IV.
FTn5 ^T^rT:
of ubhayatra-vibhasha.
or
"*ftrf%
when used
adverbs'? Observe ^jJ^SHn^,

3.
and chatur
tri
4. 18.
cfiw% or fas^tffw, fa*
or fasq^rlr, fa: T^rfa or fa^rqfa,
T^^T
dvi,
3.
fqrr the
visarga
is
that of an affix
would not have applied.
41,
(nôrCT V.
Thus with regard
a Prapta-vibhasha, and with regard to fa^[ and fa;^
to
an Aprapta-
it is
vibhasha.
Why
have we used the words
answer: so that the rule

such (V.
4. 17) is
The
may
dvis,
sr
visarga
is
preceded
is
and chatur
cfRffrT,
'
Objector's
the visarga of kritva-
11
^ and 5
that the visarga must be preceded by 5 and

In q> qfj^: the
tris
qê^:
not apply to
not changed to
anuvritti of
'
by
3.
41
so
for the application of this rule.
and so there
st,
is
no applicability
of this rule.
In fact,
by reading the
anuvritti of
f^T^T
ing the visarga by the further epithet of

sense of kritvasuch
sutra.
'
we may dispense with
The simple
into this sutra,
and qualify-
belonging to a word that has the
'
the words fafw**grci% from the
sutra *%nf would have been enough.
For there are no
other Numerals that have a penultimate 5 or s, except these three.

objection to this view
is,
that in qg^the visarga
portion of the word (See V.

if this
4.
18):
is
not the affix
The
X>
chief
Dut a
so the rule would not apply to chatur,
word were not expressly mentioned.*
The
various objections and their solutions are given in the follow-
ing verses.
^^^
q*q
q<* fa^rqqr
rare sis
5T3?rW
^Tr^g^Tn*
^3 fat
faq% ^3*:
<rq- *%<jt
3srfa ^qr$f
^% $?diffa"tTOi fas%3Vqr fa
^ *tr f^rtf
31%
qr
11
faf^rr<jrc*qqq
11
11
f%
q?rq*r
fa Jt^T**: ?Jcfr^: SFfa^r'frr N
3?fa>qqr*r q?*i
fa^sRrq^r
fqtrwfa
11
11
Bk, VIII.Cii.
III.
T*
JT^rt
Kdrikd
43
Visarga Sandiii.
rT^rt rT^ri^T
fVWT ^R^
f>r^5Tif mk ^ffnt sjj^r^?
1617
II
Why
q^
does the author teach
when these words have the sense of Numeral-adverbs? In other words, why
the word ^^t^f is used at all in the sutra? There is no necessity of using it
at all, because fi^r, f%rw are clearly adverbs as they are formed by the affix
J
Ipsr
V.
4.
18
and
company
being read in their
"q-gr
will
also denote the
which fj^ has been elided (V. 4. 18). So that all these three
words are fpar-formed, and all g^-formed words have the sense of Krtvasuch,
adverb chatur,
One answer
^pfi^fcr*
Though
in
to this
(I.
1.6),
is
that the rule of
the words
does not always hold good, as in
'BTf'sHi
and
sffcfr
spfr
are verbs, while f*
is
an augment.
^5^ need
therefore f$sr and f%CT are krtvortha words, yet
not be so
and may be a simple Numeral. Ans. ^-g^TR *Tr TO PRrTOr *gl H The word
^?#ts2r is employed to indicate that there should be no optional q^ in
1
The q^ here is compulsory by VIII. 3. 41.

Tg^rrn*
Well this would be valid by the previous sutra (VIII. 3.
Q. *T3 RF3[ rPT f<T
ll
q^Ffps
also there be optional
VIII.
41 will apply to
3.
with regard to ^rgs^fFTR,
q^ ^rfr
we
shall
erg^TR and
as
q-?^,
^rg^R and
will
change
have always ^
&z$W, gfr WRkwffe V**Q f^T^TOT f|
That
41).
^g^TR
to q
ll
in
rule
so that
f^ sre f^%
Ans.
II
let
Now
H
-
this visarga
If VIII.
is,
'*($&
41 be considered
3.
when the affix j^ is elided after *qT, and

changed to visarga, then the adverb q^: also ends with a non-affix
visarga, and will come under the compulsory q-^ rule of VIII. 3. 41
for
as applying here (siddha), then
the c
is
though we
may have
optionally two forms as ^rg: ^Rirrf and qg'îtW,
present sutra, yet in the former the visarga would be changed to
Hence
41.
3.
say that the

2.
the necessity of employing the
* in
the adverb
66) = ^<j + * (the
changed to visarga,
to the adverb "snr^
VI.
3.
ill.
&
first fîs
will
11
^îs
elided
f>c*frs%f
by VIII.
II
^5^+$ =
^+^ (VIII.
14) = ^5^; and that this ^when
that of g^r, thus

3.
be an affix-visarga and so VIII.
41 will
3.
not apply
Ans. No. For 3 would require to be lengthened by
and the form would be

*rf%
word
by the
q- by VII
Q. But we
er?n"
R^r^ff ftl%wfffofrT f%
purpose served by using the words
11
sfiTsfa.
rt*[
If this
It
be
so,
then what
r%^5I?rW in the aphorism
sutra $c#fs*f would have been enough. Because
(sr?*frft
^T^PT
is
the
The simple
$?#T*f ^rfsfa^qff^)
:
there are no other numeral adverbs than these three which have a penultimate
f or
11
If we do not, use the words dvis,

word krtvorthe would qualify the word
would mean " the visarga of an affix which has the
stf^rcpr x%v[ fW^r^rnrernrr f%*[<%T

tris,
chaturiti in the sutra, then the
visarga,
and the
sCitra
sense of kritvasuch
is
changed optionally to
q:
"
11
The
result of this will
be
Visarga Sandhi.
1618
that
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
44
^5*r H rcpaift rrmr^^j fttf^Rpsfrf^ ) it will not apply to ^3: where the
is that of ^ and not of the affix fpr
visarga
II
Therefore by using dvis &c, the word
Ans.
353 Tf
rTfnt rf^rn", n%<spt
word krtvortha
dvis &c, the

*Tf
III. .
whose context runs here
q?^
$*rs5 will mean,
will
^^ would
Hr*^*
II
qualify BTg^ (rT^F*
Though we may not
use
not qualify visarga, but will qualify the word
and the rule of
$?fr?f TtflPTOl *T
rff^f will
fonfato,
apply
so that the sutra
nm srarra:
q^rfr *
"
ll
The
word which is employed in the sense of a Numeral adverb, is

optionally changed to g;or ^ before a guttural or a labial, provided that such
visarga is preceded by % or 3 ".
visarga of that
The above is the opinion of Patanjali, who considers the words dvis &c,
The Kaika however controverts this opinion. According to
as redundant.
him,
be
if
these words were not used in the sutra, then the mere sutra $*4TS* would
insufficient for the visarga of
compulsory by
^j
though used as an adverb, the q^"
will
be
VI 1 1. 3.41; for the present sutra will be considered as asiddha or
non-existent for the purposes of VIII.
3.
41, (See VIII.
2.
But
1).
this
how-
may
be answered by saying that the rule of $talfo3PV. applies in these

chapters, with this modification, one subject-matter is considered as asiddha
with regard to another subject-matter gone before but one aphorism is not
ever
considered asiddha with regard to a previous aphorism,
when belonging
same
Therefore the present
subject matter.
sutra VIII.
Or
s^Rdf
JRWPTfTO T
3r*T 3T*T: )
II
the present sutra
apavada
is
44.
,
never asiddha with regard to an utsarga.
C^pat: *rra*9
g-H
to the
would not be considered asiddha with regard to VIII. 3. 41.

may be considered as an apavada to VIII. 3. 41 and an
43,
3.
II
q^TR
11
to;-^:, *tot$
For the visarga of words ending
a hard guttural or labial, there
before
substituted
II
<*,
when the two words stand
in
in
is
5H and
optionally
correlation with
one another.
The
*T is
understood here.
Why
Thus
srffiwrffi'
or
*rffi:
5jtRT,
cfitfRT
or
do we say when the two words are correlated ? Observe fcTBg

STf$ N*r ^3$^ where ^fa: is not in construction with fq^r, but with njgg
The word OTTut here means sqftw or mutual relation of two words
and not "having the same meaning", or it may mean both. In fact srmtii is
equivalent to 3TT^T^^T e. the syntactical want of another word to complete the
sense. It does not here mean 'compound'. For it being a T^f^R: the word *pf*f: is
:
'
II
i.
VIII. ClI. III.
15K.
46
understood here (*re*T

here indicates that
not denote
<T3T%P* : II.
is
it
I.
Rc4 stot^ sgrr^^^q^q"
which
is
q^n%
a y<< n
fa^K,
11
The visarga'of an
in a
docs
sf 4hT* " the syntactical
compound, when
*mm,
3*3^:
^-ending word,
or
not preceded by any other word,
changed to *
*rPT*.
It
1.
compounds where
The samarthya here means vyapeksha,
11
45.
II. I.
the samarthya of
is
two or more words denote one object.

which is thus defined ?rRP|frqt:, TfHtST 4f Sisft 3%'rT, <Pff
union of two words expressing two different ideas ".
m<r<
of the word
The employment
1).
a different samarthya from that of
qm* which
or
qf^r^ff^CT^:
l6lQ
VlSARCA SANDHI.
invariably
is
followed by a hard gut-
tural or labial.
The words
*?*, srffitfTPPi,
Why
and
?*r
W*^
Thus *rr^r*3W,
understood here.
3*r are
tlgs^rrr-
*. 11
do we say when
wrerf$: irf^&r, qwr|:
gh'MldH.
it is
not preceded by another word
The
ii
option even of the last
apply to these examples.
The word
sCitra
Observe
does not
by adding the Unadi

affix
II. 117), therefore
Unadi
(Un
the
by
sflr
$RT (Un II. 109), and
would
denote
the
mere forms srf^r
word
on the maxim nÂWA^ &c, the
f^t:
then
what
is
the necessity of
and *3F and not forms like T^^rf^l &c
employing the word 3T3TreT^TTO in the sutra?
Q,
srf^=r is
*3j*r
affix
The very employment

is
of the word anuttara-pada-sthasya in this sutra,
an indicator (jfiapaka), that the restriction of the following
not apply
with regard to the affixes 5*^
*5TfJrTC* 3T?oiI."an affix
and
denotes, whenever
form which begins with that to which that

This
the affix itself".

^TrfrT
by the previous
g.
Why
previous sutra
is
maxim
sCitra
stf
it is
3.
a^rr^
srSTapR^r
employed
affix
not applying,
VIII.
in
maxim
does
^RTfGrammar, a word*T f^f?rT
has been added and ends with
we have
<rc*rcrffaRWPf or q?;wffi:
44.
not there option
in the case
of compounds also by the
Ans '.Because
the word STRWI there means s^mrr, and therefore does
not apply to compounds.

3T<!n
fT%
^w ap*
f^^ÎWÔT^^^^FT
^^tflTTCTO 3T^3f%tf^ftaTO
qre i^rr
17
%\tf>\
%&m$W'
II
?!
ST^S^'*^'^ fa?*
<*3Tft 3TcT : >
^^R?f^Tt >T^fa
5?"
$ Zfffi
Visarga Sandhi.
1620
For the visarga of
46.
pound, when a form of
g^T and
follow,
*fi<J?f
and
and the
a. word
the exception of an Indeclinable,
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
words
com-
word
^T,
*&*=T
47
with
in srer,
substituted in a
is
wiK, or the
first
ending
III.
TT^T,
not preceded by
is
another word.
Thus
3T3TCOT::, 73^7^ (III. 2. i) 373: 344** II:, T^^T^v ^:

fWVarafcfW 7*1*1W So also 3T3?ci3ft 73*1^, on the maxim
2>:
3T3re37*P, 73reJrep,
II
7rfa7rt^?% ^jff^r^^ntr srf<* w*f

<prr
3Tîr^rr,
T^^r
^*ni
to Kaskadi class (VIII.
Why
3T''?
3T?P " a visarga
Why
SHTRr
7WRI* SffPT:
The word
Q.
3TTC:,
5fiw\
"
maxim
u?rejfOT:
preceded by short
3T,
belongs
or the visarga
since
it is
'
is
with the exception of an Indeclinable
understood here
is
" ?
Therefore not here;
also.
also to be read in this.
Observe
rep ^j*tfcT
Therefore not here,
U
sr^t
need not have been taken, because

wi by adding the Unadi
derived from
62 Un)?
Ans.
ing
Twrtfr u
73re7rsr*> sra^THft,
The form
II
The word 3T3tTC7^TTO
the root
III. 2. 2.
do we say
The word
7*T73
T^^r
3T:" ?
See also
(VIII. 3.48).
mw*&mi*[%
Why do we say preceded

See tfh^R:. &qn*:
Observe ^Tr-c^^w u The form *nw^ belongs to Kaskadi class
of the word ending in
by short
ii
srg^tfft,
48).
3.
do we say
it is
a form of
affix
(III.
*r
The employment of indicates the existence of the followWords which end with T* &c. are
TTTrTTT^rR
3R3T
"
S<JTT^frs5jp75rrre
crude-forms that do not undergo or cause such operations as would depend
on
their etymological formation."
sra:
^frf:
II
f^R^T q% lltfvsil q^TM srer.-fercsfr,

to^ S^l^rlsr^ffaTO e^Tr^S^Tf^T^^^ ^cfTR 3TIW
ll
^^
II
*ntf?T
7S^ 7*rP
II
For the visarga of 3t>*h or fi[TC*T when not

47.
another
by
word, and followed by the word
in
preceded
composition with
it,
there
is
substituted
II
Thus WR* Rt?s7?it

3TW*7^, ftrc*73T
The word ^rcr% is understood in this, therefore not here 3T*T: 7^
The word aT3T?*;7SW3 is also understood here. Therefore not in the
11
11
ll
following 7*lftre: 7^w H
The word 3T*rw

kadi
class.
\
is
compound
formed under
Mayuravyansa-
BK. VIII.
ClI. Ill
^^^rfiri
II
VlSARGA SANDHI.
49]
*<
^rf^
II
*T or
48.
II
lC2I
^^FTr%^,
II
substituted for the visarga, before a
** is
hard guttural and labial in the .words qf^^ and the

This
and
S,
q[
is
an Apavada to Sutra VIII.
everywhere
W^^^T- (VI.
3-
buy with the

'
23)
3.
Thus 3^:,
3j?r^: (VI. 3. 21)
else.
4.
affix f^<r,
because
it
II.
&c
to VIII.
3.
^rfcr
The
counter-example then to VIII.
rest.
substituted after f or
2.
stRî^: (with arôf
5.
SFsrefiTr*:;
^f^frr^ (the
vi^^Mfr^
when
12. arff<w**,
word.
class.)
7.
is
by VIII.
1 3.
^<sTnT*U
Thus
45 will be
3.
fjTrT
armrT:).
wz&ft (from ?&
6.
there might
45, so that
preceded by another
are
is
belongs to Sampadadi
(from WQ*t in the sense of tpPfW P3
9 sffisffas^SRT, 10. *gsinTn*fc

words 9 to 13 are exceptions
37.
3.'
be
<ft?rcrff
'
to
qrsresE:
3.
12).
"The
q-,
even
^F^^rr
q**rqf*T. <K?5ff
II
"
II
This
But in the Mahabhashya, the counterthe opinion of the Parayanikas.

Another reason why these
example under VIII. 3. 45 is qrTCTf$: ffF^^n
words are listed here, is that q" change will take place, even where there is no
correlation or vyapeksha.
As f^rgg ^l^fiFî 3TR3
So also when there
Here ^rfqw is an incomplete word. The
is correlation, as f^ qffcarF^rar: M
q" change, will take place even where there is no compounding.
Where there is
no compounding, and there is complete want of correlation, even there the qwill invariably come.
And where there is correlation, but no compounding
there the q- would have been optional by VIII. 3. 44, but it becomes invariable
Thus we have these cases
here, on account of these words being so listed.
Without
correlation,
as
f^gsr
"
3nff&^|B4cfniH3
(1)
( 2 ) Where there is correlais
II
II
tion,
s
(4
as %% qffeffifrg cM qM
Where
there
W here there
is
(5)
these cases
15-
%^7'T ^
is
there
is
q-
3T*rre:
Every change of visarga

if
Where
invariably in
atf^rwr
ii
(3)
II
there
is
composition, as qfqsar ffrg^r
not governed by any other
case of these words.
3refrn% ys5*to
rule.
g-
or
q",
Thus
14. ar^re^TT^,
must be
this
is
referred to
Kaskadi
an Akrtigana.
name of ?t and sr which replace the visarga.

The Parayana is of two sorts, Dhatu-Par, and Nama-Par.
devote themselves in committing to memory and reciting these
is
II
no composition and no correlation even, as, in example (1).

In all
correlation but no compounding as in example (2).
class,
Upachara
the
Those who
are Paraya-
nikas.
&?m
tf*r
11
*rr
ssrr#fe^r:
s??i% f^qq Rrcrf*fta*g
49.
^t
II
*- n
^rr
may
t^tM
^^reresrr
II
*refrr
optionally
^r%,
*%c>
be
vm-
m,
sr-sr-3n#r%^fr:
II
ires* 8rrgi%?t ^rlrra^r u
substituted
for
the
Visarga Sandhi.
i622
[Bk. VIII. h. III. 51
visarga before a hard guttural and labial, in the ChhancPas

neither before
Thus
the
change
sr
option of the present sutra
is
If the
then the two sutras VIII.
3.
This
ll
an example of non-compounds.
is
compulsory by VIII.
asiddha there, and
is
other than compounds.
is
but
nor before a doubled word.
sr,
3?^: qrsp* or sTzreTPT*
In compounds,
maxim
it
J?^:% stîorhi^ ^
46 and VIII.
because the
46:
3.
finds
scope
its
in cases
be applied,
sftit *U*T'-
49 belong to the same st^tjt and one

Then we could give examples of combut then such compounds will also be governed
3.
not asiddha with regard to the other.
pounds also under this sutra

by VIII. 3. 46, and so the g" would be compulsory.
:
^ct
The word g^
Why
is
26.
"
not before x and
sw gw qft
1),
change has not taken place, as
3RC-ari^fc
ftqra
all
tjj:
is
^^
an Indeclinable and
Here
or sôr^n;: U
changed to
or
a doubled word
'
by VIII.
4. 27.
Observe
sifjr:
ll
^f^l|R%^: 3^r?l(Rig. X.
In
it.
is
BT55T^,
do we say
* fa*F*(Av, V.
5[
3.
46, does not apply to
and then the ^

a ^^ formed word.
substituted for
is
f^r
word
f%^<T*<TPT* or fspzQi qr^pr, here the
hence the rule VIII.
139.
sr
1),
qr^: (Rig.
I.
12. 10),
the
rules are optional in the Vedas.
II
11
The
50.
before
visarga
m^t m&i,
*r.,
SJTO
changed to *T in the Chhandas,

and %>& but not so the visarga
is
ofsrfirm'-H
Thus
4.
80
ft?a*3i:
the 5 Of
is
35":
II
is
1.
68
q^refftrer,
^n^re,
vikarana
is
Why
I.
we have eR^,
by
the
II.
q[ is
here fsfa
elided,
the change of
(Rig.
affix f%<r, thus
larly ft*79TC5ft$
maly,
the Aorist of $, the r% has been elided
gunated before the
and the augment sr? is not added by VI. 4. 75. SimiHere also c^ is the Aorist of $, with 3T^ by III. 1. 59.
here ^rcra is the rôf f;
is added instead of 3, as a Vedic ano-
by VI.
elided
and
is
cr3*$3*, here
.1
g>,
the
changed to fa by VI.
f|
or
^
do we say
to
the Imperative of
'
^pr
is
f^T
is
changed
See VIII.
4. 102.
Past Participle of
but not of 9Tf%m5
'
Observe
^tjr
<rasnar^
ll
vi?
ll
q^nft
qs^rcqr:,
<ret,
st^to
j%,
4. 27,
the
for
ll
43. 2).
<T2j*3rr:
to
BTf^frT:
TOt
.k.
VIII. Cm.
III. . 55
Visarga Sandiii.
The
51.
visarga of the Ablative case
meaning over
to st before qft
'
The word Chhandas

(Rig X. 45.
arf^Tffl^Tft
1)
1623
'.
understood here
is
n%wR
ftwft,
changed
is
Thus
also.
q^ ^
f^reqft
ll
Why do we say of the Ablative ? .Observe srf^rfTT *frT: T^f>T *Tfw

do we say "before qft"? See ipqrcr ^^T^^: JT^rnTRT *HfeFt " Wn y
do we say 'when qft means 'over'? See f^: qj^^: srersr s?*|rP^ (Rig. VI.
Here qft has the sense of " on all sides".
47. 27).
'
II
'
Why
TTcft
%fan
11
^ *%&k
^
qrtfr
II
<rt
^n%
ll
ll
qrar,
^t^t q*sr q*-^ 41 n sr^ffa^
^f^
^ may diversely
52.
^ qra;
srain: arf^fr
ll
h^rt
ar^rcr
faq3
11
be substituted for the visarga
of the Ablative before the verb qrg in the Chhandas.

Thus
as qRq^: TT*
f^rtqrg, *J*TCqr<I
II
qR-q^: q^r^-qt^s
fr%
ii
Sometimes, the change does not take place,
ll
11
q#iRtf^fa^^rottfr^%qTrT
53..
q?q^qr*r f^(%^ q^ 3-^rt
q^r<jg qre
For the visarga of the Genitive, there
raqi*
11
subs-
is
q^
tituted *T in the Vedas, before qft, 3^, ^, qrc, q^,

and qrq
Thus ^*qrt fq^^fror^ra, (Rig. x. 81. 7), fofgro gijk, ft^3% *re*iR
q<*Pl, SJ*T*T, ST^TO, f ^T> STPParcT, WJf
ff^T^:, Cr2^ffq- q*PTR$ qrT^
||
Why
scorer
iTtp
11
srr
do we say
11
'
q^rft
ll
f^rar qgrnrcr^farc* ^r
II
after a genitive case

ll
s^nrr:,
*rr
'
See *%:
*^r ST3 53T*r<l
II
ll
^^k arf^^fr h^Rt
q *qifc g q*<re^r% f^fa
optionally substituted for the visarga of

^Tqr:, before qfa &c, (VIII. 3. 53.) in the Chhandas.
54.
Thus ?zm?sh
f^sr-
Tf?P or f ^RRTm: frcr*STej:
f^rar *qn:5, f^ran

qr*re.
^rorcqr^
3Tq^T?cT^q
ff>r;
is
ii
tt^
f^rarwr
I :TOP SreT:
1
pngWgCT
^^T^r^r^s
f 3T3P
?^rap q^:
ii
wi*m
II
II
q^Tl%
II
3T-q^T?cT^T,
srqfPrT^rW g^hi sm%rreftf><j %ftrna<;
55.
%^mv q?*
Upto the end of
to be supplied the following
tuted always in the
room of
stand at the end of a word
".
"
*J*N:
3Trqr?qffcrnH:
the Pdda,
A
,
II
11
is
throughout
cerebral letter
when
is
substi-
this letter does
not
1624
Sandhi;
sr
Bk. VIII. Ch.
III.
57
Here ceases the Padadhikara which commenced with VIII. 1. 16.

not final in a pada and wg*f- cerebral exert a
3t<t$rt^
governing influence on all sutras upto the end of this chapter. Thus VIII.
The whole of the present sutra
3. 59, teaches " of an affix and a substitute ".
The two words
'
should be read there to complete the sense

tituted always in the
when
room of the
Why
vritti
of
for the
g-
q-
"
i.e.
a cerebral sound
of an affix and of the
does not stand at the end of a word
it
'
',
which
q-
Thus
rcr^,
is
subs-
a substitute,
is
fjs^TC,
arrcnj,
do we say not final ? See srfsr^T, ^crg^T^T H Though the anuwas understood here, yet the employment of the word 'cerebral is
'
'
'
sake of 5
as 3T^gn, ^rfe (VIII.
56.
3.
78).
substituted for the
it is
occurs in the form of ^rrf (*TTf )

Thus SRnsrr?, ^r^, "J^nqr? Hsrrsr
^^, when
in
this
II
derived from
is
(III. 2. 63), there is vriddhi of the penultimate, the ^

31). and the upapada is lengthened (VI. 3. 137).
ST$:
*r:
would have been enough,
^;
cept this derived from

is
3T
former
He in
another
^=
^riT:
11
Why
the form
that the
not derived
from
whose name there
do we say
'
in the
for there
then the word q%:
form of
is
The
2.
used
the letter
*TFf '?
to 5 (VIII.
no other form ^r^ exin the sutra? There
is
is
^^
Thus
11
changed
the affix f*j
is
3^3- = ^3-;,
called ^3"
as
^^
when
sr " ? So
rule will not apply
w%, as :sRrar?*, gTOTT?1 * H Why do we say *r: " for the

may not be changed to cerebral the ^ is already cerebral.
is
of ^rr^
srr
V**t-
why
is
^ by
II
T^TT%
II
II
From
57.
*m
^7t:
II
upto the end of the chapter,
this,
should be supplied in every sutra, the following
vowel (with the exception of
sr
or
u
:
when a
or a * or a guttural
srr),
precedes''.
The word
includes
is
only
all
efficient: so that
the 3j class.
Rm,
fir
a pratyahara formed with the second
is
vowels and semivowels except 3T and
Thus
jy&Rt'- is
<^rr, 3Tf?T3, ^rs,
Why
only
do we say
Here the affix ^ of

changed to q- h
is
taken
3?r
in the translation.
supplied in VIII.
3.
59, to
^3, %$$, mi *, *r$,

" when preceded by ft* or
^frf,
II
and the substitute
q-
in
Of
.
of ?v*
the semi-vowels
means the
It
letters of
complete the sense. Thus
11
37 " ?
3T*tt
Observe
(VII.
2.
srrafar, 3T*ffr U
106) are not
Bk. VIII. Cu.
III.
* Change.
59]
3fer^*ft^T^T^r^rfq
ll
<*pft
11
3**, fe
when the
occurs between the said
^ and
'
4.
(VIII.
36) (3)
3.
The
qc^ takes place, when 31*
Here there
fonffp
in the
is
follow immediately after
l%*ISIHFFft:
II
H^
59.
which
nr^ f%^T from

-
^T^T
II
is
1.
ft%
*j,
!|
II
when they
4. 91).
required that the
ST
should
the necessity of the present sutra for
II
STP^T,
MH4^4|
II
substituted for that st which
of a root in Dhatupatha by VI.
conditions (VIII.
the rootf%ST'to
it
VII.
3*5
letters.
(the portion of) an
is
&((&
qgy%,
intervene singly and not
Ablative case, and
Hence
it.
the intervention of certain
titute (of the
tffift,
the intervention of two, namely, j* and ^(III.
is
The word
&c
Therefore not here,
intervene collectively.
kiss.'
II
(2) When a visarjaniya intervenes, as *rf$$,

When a Sibilant intervenes, as srffcg, 3^!f ^55
10).
11
applies to every one of the
'
j*r,
72, VI.
-srererfr, arfa
or the
5; letters
The word sqqrq separation, intervention

&c. Thus (1) when 5^ intervenes, as
words
^^N
The substitution of ^ for stakes place then

augment ^ ( gq;), the visarjanlya or a sibilant
58.
also,
11
1625
3. 57,
affix,
is
a subs-
1.
64),
or
under the above mentioned
58), of being preceded by an V^L vowel
or a guttural.
The word
cerebral
'he sutra adesa-pratyayoh
however
first it is
that
^T
different in the
is
is
in the
which
is
an
ades*a,
in
and that
ST
The
Genitive case.
word adesa, from what
samanadhikarana-shashthi,
avayavayoga shashthi
is
is
in
in
is
it
3.
55, as well as *r
pratyaya.
If
affix.
we took
both places, then the sutra would mean "of that
it
is
as
^ which
a portion of a substitute, or of an affix," and there would arise the following
anomaly. In doubling a word by VIII.

in the
room of one (See VIII.
I.
1).
1.
one view
1,
Thus
fsrafsrer,
is
that
3^3*n*
two are substituted

Here^the
il
a portion of a substitute, and would be changed to 5,

slate the sutra as above.
these words,
If
is
In the
the latter avayava-yogashashthi. That
which belongs to an
11
force of the Genitive
is
we take
the other view, and translate the sutra as
a substitute or an affix",
have forms
like sjfr^rer
we land on
and smqfa, and not
"
of that
the following anomaly.

the. correct
forms
we
if
*t
in
which
We
3FJK*qf?r,
tran-
must
fwatfrf;
q Change.
1626
here
for
but a portion of an
affix,
Bk. VIII. Ch.
In
affix.
60
III. .
with regard to
fact,
the sCitra would be confined to those affixes only which consist of a
affixes,
single
not an
is
sf
such as
5g;,
The
aphorism).
That this is the proper

by the sutra VIII. 3. 60, (the next
Vedic subjunctive
flr in the
interpretation of the sutra
indicated
is
substitute q*T
II
If therefore, the force
taken in this sutra.
is
^mv
of Genitive in s^fî^ was = Sri^TCq q:
and not=3T^:
q:
ÎV,
then
there would have been no necessity of including the substitute q?r in the sutra,
would have covered the case of
for then the present sutra

if
= qcqq: q
the force of the Genitive in q?rq*q was
*renr:
(V.
a substitute.
m TOi;;
in ??#r
Q.
*r
now
shall
by VIII.
3.
11
can only be the
and bj^
Of an
First of that
which replaces the qôf a root
in
give illustrations.
we have
affix,
in sr^TT^qsnj:
^5
srfsr^, *rr$*j, sff^j ,
II
In the case of q$Tând qsr^, the ^
but the whole affix
is
not the portion of an
affix,
the present sutra should therefore not apply to
itself:
II
Ans.
Here we apply the maxim sq^^roq^ (j*Rh<
These words
f*Ti
we
this,
It
Thus rem, ^^TTJJ
Dhatupatha.
with
q*
it is
is
this s:
and not = Jr?rq*q
^fcRITi,
in, because
Having surmised
W?T
Similarly,
also.
*rrq[
not an affix consisting of a single letter
which
q^
then there would have been no necessity of excluding the affix

52) from the operation of the present rule
4.
the ?
fin*,
by
34
1.
1.
and then to a
elided
is
the
and
q$r?(
by
q$rq[
III.
^ of q^
is
4.'
II
are from the roots
97, the
augment
q^
and
in^s
qsr,
st* (HI. 4. 94), the affix
changed to a guttural, and the
of rw to q,
guttural.
The Unadi word *w$i (3T5T + STC Un III. 70) complies with this rule,
but not so the word ^Tt and *sre (Un HI. 73) formed with the same
affix src
qjrr
II
^rrf^r
ii
qRr qr% s^mqr
60.
when
takes
CT
q?iws3
preceded by an
Thus
a?5qr%q<t'
by s*^
fmmn
place
5^3:, *[&
(III.
by VI.
mate
3T is elided
This
is
1.
I.
56),
15
by VI.
the Aorist
is
qw
by
it
is
4. 98.
ST,
11
^ of srm,
3TT
tne
changed
erer
*^
and
Aorist of*TT^; the r%jis

to f
by VI.
4- 34-
So
also
sfqrTqPi, sfqcqT "

sfqq
belongs to yajadi class.
The Samprasarana
From q*3; we have
the substitute of 3TI (II.
4- 40),
So
also
the
II. 4. 80.
*qfcr
vowel or a guttural.
and the
as
form of
elided
*#qr
ST^n&q^, ST^q^,
in the Perfect,
Aorist sign
From q* we have
ll
*rq?re*q
substituted for the
it is
replaced
ftre:,
is
^5
q*
a*^ in
is
swStftq^rT
substituted
ffcTC
for 3T3;
the penulti-
(Rig-
(II. 4-
I.
82. 2).
37)
the
Bk. VIII. Cn.
.6i]
III.
This sutra
yet
titute,
STTfSrei
tute,
here
made
is
namely, where the
to cover
as
the
*r in rcr is
means
The
non-substitute
understood here
is
and
tfffer, *rcrf?r
mj
Therefore the rule would
also.
srorcr U
substituted
^r is
but only
^3 and in
in
begin with a
^ of
if
the
is
confined
is
applies to the
can be no such
Thus from
the last
sutra,
changed
to
Of
ftrÊrartf,
4.
q"
and of
to the Desideratives of *g
roots in the Causative, provided that the Desiderative sign
which replaces the
in the re-
g-
II
*J
This rule
for *T after % or
changed to ^
Causative of roots which in Dh&tup&tha
duplication of a Desiderative,
VII.
not to be taken
is
11
61.
rule
of a subs-
'.
The word y^h

not apply to
The
the
sutra,
last
st
seldom occurs.
it
arwrerrac
Though
by the preceding aphorism, because the word

the w which is a substitute
Here w is not a substi-
but a portion of a substitute.

:
governed by the
cases not
not an adesa.
ST is
1627
not governed
it is
there
Rule.
tpi
*r
beginning
*J
changed to q
of the substitute, and not to the affix

a reduplicate syllable.
after
<r
^r is
Therefore
ST
II
as there
*r
means
that
ST
of the roots.
we have
*jj
ggqfrf
II
and therefore so also
Here the
after the
of *p*
*r
is
reduplicate
changed
3,
the
5T
q by
to
of *g
is
11
the Causatives of roots beginning with
gs^rfaqfa
f*rfq^5ira*r*r,
In this
in
sr
Dhatupatha, we have
the *
last,
is
changed to 3 by
67.
Though
this
q"
change would have taken place by the previous sutra
(VIII. 3. 59), yet the separate enunciation of this rule indicates that this is a
niyama aphorism the q" change takes place only in these cases of *g and
Causatives of Desideratives under the conditions mentioned in this sutra, and
no where
root,
to have
Thus
else.
which
is
been
f%flrcmf
f%fq^T?rT
of the present sutra.
from
^r (Tud
what
is
If this
is
by VIII.
So
3.
59,
also mrqcT
but
from
it is
not
(Tud. 140).
This
is
therefore the form ought
so,
$X snf<TO*ft
a niyama rule by the very fact of
then the necessity of using the word
18
iq^r sn;5r
because of the niyama

(Div. 24)
and
UfrqtlT
115).
S*TWU*K; so that, the

q^ follows " ? and not "
.
from the root
exhibited in the Dhatupatha with a
sutra
if
may .'mean
" if
in
its
.separate enunciation,
the aphorism
*g and
*g and Causatives when qoi
Ans.
Causatives only,
only follows
".
&mwhen
In the
<^ Rule.
1628
we could
latter view,
not get the form genr
and the
Bk. VIII. Ch.
rule
III. .
61
would have applied
to farcremr also.
Why
do we say
not be any where
" in
the Desiderative
Had qpr
else.
q-
" ?
So
the niyama
that
may
not been used in the sutra, the restriction
would have been with regard to every affix, and the sutra would have meant
is occasion of q^T change after a reduplicate, it should take place
only in the case of $g and the Causatives ". Therefore ^ change would not
have taken place in rcrq^r, as it is not a Causative.
" if there
Q. ^r RpffiS^rjsp? Why have we used the word q^f with sr, and not the
word^pj? That is, what compulsion was there to exhibit the Desiderative affix
*P*,
sakhyas to
As
II
by VI.
I.
and
q-
Ans.
*p^
changed form
this
in
u[
fasRT is the
may
restrictive rule
The
II
For had
15.
The word
*p^
?=tr
is
here f^l by
been used
of^RTRremr where
in fj$e*r%, the
^ could
q-
not changed to q
sr is
Q .What
So
Therefore as there
or not.
q"
is
not apply to the stf^ra form of

I. 2.
8,
and there
As ^ffi q ?*?*
This
vocalisation
whether the *r^ was
in general,
so there would have been restriction
the necessity of exhibiting

q-
is
restriction of VIII. 3. 59, in the case
is
not have been changed to q^by VIII.
that the rule should not apply to
only.
given in the Prati-
the sutra, then the restriction would
in
have been with regard to all Desideratives
changed to
name
change.
So that the
SJ**rfSF
in general,
^faq
qw
Similarly
with the anubandha *?
but to the Desiderative affix
the Perfect of
is
3. 59.
m, the affix trRis
%, the affix is
added as Chhandas irregularity instead of m*
and
reduplication,
f^by I. 2. 5, and so there is vocalisation by VI. 1. 15, and
the augment $* is added by VII. 2. 13, the ? is changed to sra, as f^ftq^ ***,
the a is elided by VIII. 3. 19. Here after the reduplicate 5, the w is changed
;
to
q-,
5 by
in
not apply
in
the general rule VIII.
But had
this case.
q-
3.
in
for trrw there is
59, as the restriction of this sutra
does
general been taken, then g^faq has an
and there
q and therefore sutra VIII. 3. 59, would have been restricted,
is not a
as
it
reduplicate,
the
after
to
of
change
no
5
would have been

anubandha.
an
with
employed
qm
has
been
Hence
causative.
affix
Why
Ans,
do we say
So that
'
after a reduplicate
this restriction
may
'
apply to that
q which would have
been caused by the % or s of an abhyasa, and not to that which would have
been caused by an upasarga. As BrfafqmJRT, though without the Preposition,
the form
is
fafi$Tlr U
Q No,
%
sarga
is
this
cannot be the reason, because the
q*
caused by the upa-
considered as asiddha, and hence there would be no restriction.
Bk. VIII. Ch.
63
III.
KAns.
Then we
nd not any other abhyasa.

*nr,
is
1629
taken to be qualified by
is
if
a reduplication has been caused
Thus
root
is
qi^ft q q
of v by VI.
Q.
the
qw
of ^<i
is
qfrgq (VI.
with $7 augment, the elision of
No
this
Ans.
may
19),
may
not be a
the Desiderative of this
ar (VI. 4.
also cannot be the reason
employed superfluously
is
1.
48) of q, the elision
4. 49.
antaranga, while the restriction niyama
abhyasa
by
then the restriction of the present sutra will
it,
not apply, and q5* change will take place though the root
Causative &c.
*pj,
caused by 3^, would give occasion to this rule
Therefore
added to
is
abhyasa
say, the
amely that abhyasa which

and then qur
Change.
sp^
The woid abhyasa
because the qt^ change
Bahiranga.
is
is
Therefore, the word
in the sutra.
is
taken in the sutra, so that the restriction
q which might have been caused by the f or 3 of

the abhy&sa and not to that q which might be occasioned by the \ or s of a
dhdtu or verbal root. Thus irmfaqfrf, 9T>&rW^ Here the root \ in the
be with regard to that
;
turned to Desideiative with *p* and by VI. I. 2, the ^ is

by VII. 4. 79, the bt is changed to * 11 Thus^Rrcr; here
by the force of the % of the abhyasa f%, the *r is changed to q- as sfaq
(VIII. 3. 59) then as the restriction of this sutra does not apply, the root *
sense of
is
*ftrc,
,*
reduplicated, then
causes the q*r of the abhyasa, as tfqq- H

Had the word
not been used
in the sutra, the tf of abhyasa could not have been changed to
q-,
for then the
sutra would have meant "q- is substituted for ^r, only in the case of
* and
st*^
Causatives in the Desiderative
*n fNf^rf^fref
ff%
fNft **f*
tif$
62.
cate
of the
ind
and as
^faq-
is
not a Causative-Desidera-
?raqnr
qri^
<*
ll
e*
q^-rft
11
^ is
substituted
Desiderative
II
**:,
f^^-^^-H^rro^r
q^ S^^rfr^
qw*
fnc%qf ^rTPTT tfft
for the ^r
qffiTTOI
after the
of the Causatives
of
11
*F*TCfeflt
redupli-
f^,
^rar,
The
ieôf
qorj'
the restriction would have applied.
tive,
*r
substitute
these
roots
of
fr
debars the cerebral change.
remains unchanged.
As f^faqRT,
In other words,
fircroftrcft
and
11
srr^Tcrr^^^
63.
tereafter,
sfq n <q
(The
11
mrfk
substitution
will take place) for all
ll
srp*,r%^, **,
of
for
st,
s^t^,^
to be
11
taught
roots upto fa<* exclusive in
1630
qr
VIII.
the
*r
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
even when the augment
3. 70,
and the
The
Rule.
sr? intervenes
III.
.65
(between
efficient letter).
Thus VIII. 3. 65 teaches

So also when ar^ interfâirra
venes as sp*I^n*> <T%%1, s*S>ini, ?^TTfl H The force of arfa is that the
change takes place even when the augment st? does not come, e. in cases
q-
change
root r%^[ occurs in sutra
as srnT^rfrT,
VIII.
70.
3.
Tre^jwrfa, f%spfrf?r,
II
i.
other than the augment.
WITOW n
VIII.
^n &c
In
64.,
3. 70), this
q-
upto
exclusive (VIII. 3. 65 to
f^j;
the reduplicate intervenes, and the
changed
also
to
place then also,
substitution takes
sr
of the
when
reduplicate
is
II
The words srr^r flmnt are understood here also. The ^TnT roots are,
in VIII. 3. 65 and ending with %* in VIII. 3. 70.
The sutra
**1T, %TO &c
consists of two sentences
(1) The q-^ takes place in **n &c. even when a
reduplicate intervenes
(2) The ^ of the reduplicates of ^r &c. is changed
to q
The first is a vidhi rule, and the second is a niyama rule.
Thus qRttit where the abhyasa q intervenes. This applies even to
:
II
roots other
As
than those which have been taught with a
3TfHr%qJTfaqT%,
changed to
(by VIII.
3.
is
Tffiqfq^t
q-
II
^,
augment
the
by the niyama
changed by the
is
prohibition
we have said above.

As arfag^qfrT from q;
sake of niyama, as
for the
is
3T*ircTTO
of sqT &c. and of no other roots
qrot with
here the
II
The word
*j
Dhatupatha.
would not have been

Another
59) as it is not preceded by 5 or ^
As srfafqiqw,
that it prohibits q^ (VIII. 3. 61).
in st, as srfaflir
taison cTetu of this sutra
in the
This applies moreover
TrefqqTfaqRr (ST^T BTPTOrgfo^fcr).
which end
to reduplicates
q-
changed to q
debarred by VII. 2. 12
is
of VIII.
3.
61
II
the root
the reduplicate
^
*t
is
unchanged
remains un-
restriction of the present sutra.
65.
is
substituted
upasarga in the following
for
verbs
*r,
an f and 3" of an
r
(^m<r), ^ (g^r)>
after
Bk. VIII.
Cii. III.
(^fr VII.
66
3. 71),
r^
*g
(*jffir
Change.
VII.
1631
3. 89),
(Denominative), fevi (*rafir), ftr*, ^5^ and

Thus strûr, qir^^rTm, sto^r, ^^r^
II
s^R' ^R'FrR
11
rf*T*R
TOR, STRTOR, TftTOR, aTTOTOfJ, ifafff RTR 9TR2TR, *ft3tttT

RWrT, STfafNcT, TftSPR, 3TTOSPR- <RSRrTH TOT,BTRSTTOR TPCgrTOR, 3TTO
'RTRU
ST*3*PR>
ST^^jH
BR
^m
(*$nm), ^rr,
^rsrn
II
3TR*PRR, TfR^RR, awrTOff, TOTR?l B?fH

STR^RR,
qf^TR, aT^TCRrJ, <R*R?JII RT, STRR^R
firârfaWRT, qftffifrlTqqftll3W,
q^RS
3TRRRWT,
Tftf^mrm u sfs*t, strtor, qftqsiRr
sttors'sr,
<tRr3*tr,
^,
fSST, STRC^^re, TftS*R, 3T^<^^R
STRR^STR,
<TftR^$TR
ST*lnKfc <RT5R,
SR ff^^fs^Ôffs^tRT^^Rf^niTm^rf^
<T$5T5TrT, 3TRR*^R, *TftRr^R
3Tf*Trrfr,
<RST?fc
TfRtr
%=Tar,
II
II
II
II
rwr, *m f^r^^rm, friar h snRrr srerffcwtp %^^t *ir sr u tr r%^r3Tpr^r^tw?T^T^r *r %r srfa faaiRR: f% rrff srRstffa str u srPRragtfterar 3
5%R*re jtr f^^rarm t ^rr^mRra *re *ram h
?r
for**?
^t:
ii
The
debarring
f^
root
f*r>i-fln*TR
is
exhibited
in the sutra as
%>* with
II
^n*.
vikarana, thus
Why
do we say " after an upasarga " ? Observe

rts'^jr, *R, faz^m
Here r: is not
(VIII. 3. III). So R:%=5R?f ^T:=R^RT %^r^r 3TRn fSTR H
Similarly in srfTORSfiRR, the
an Upasarga to f*r^, but to the noun %^^r
II
upasarga
of
3rf*T is
(U%r).
not added
(|J%r), but to the third derivative

derive *TPRT with <^r*, and from ?=nw we
to the root fj
Namely, from
g we
form the Denominative root crrc^ra with ^T^r and to this Denominative root
The upasarga, however may be added to the root first, and
srfa is added.
;
then
So
and ^r^r added.
<n|r*
also with
the root
roots 5*1 3rf*R%
to Divadi class,
to indicate that the rule
&c.
1.
for
^r^
here the upasarga
5531 *g^r to
in
is
Adadi
the sutra in
Tudadi
class,
class
and 55^ ^r^, to Bhuadi

declined form in order
their
does not apply to their nr
g=*r,
to
jrot
as
3Tf*RR3TR
class,
II
On the other hand, the roots

in qw <jjaR also, as stprtsNtr
for this rule of f^rT* exhibited roots.
being not so exhibited, change their *r

The upasarga need not end with 5 and
II
added to
belongs to Svadi
^fSROTTO
Class. These have been shown
VII.
aTRTHRR,
and not to the causative form
The
As STRTR^RR
In that case, the rule will apply.
the Causative, as
g-
for the
purposes of this
Thus m^tJfrR, I^^rR, where the upasarga is r*t and 5^

q^rnr *f%:, srsrer:
ss
^rf^sftr.
^to arrWr *^tr
^T^RWrRRTfrfJR^TT^^
n
*to*to
ff%;
See
ftp*
II
rule.
II
11
66.
II
II
II
The
*J
of *tt
is
changed to
*T
ii
after
an Upa-
sarga having an 5 or gr, but not after sn%

The word *nT is in the first case, but has the force of genitive. Thus
The second *r remains unpTqRR Rq??R, witftol, ssntffH RTOIS. f^^^rr^
II
II
changed
in the Perfect
by VIII.
3.
118.
1632
Why
Hohtlingk
do we say
but not after
'
points out that the
sutra
commentary on Rig Veda VI.
his
Change.
*n^
is
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
jrffj
$vs
II
q^rft
11
The
67.
II
asarga, having an % or
Thus
srf*reTrfrr
The word arqrP

like : JTr^TrfW
3.
first
80.
changed into
is
after
q-
an np-
||
qfrewrrf?t
Prof.
ll
II
of ^p^r
g-
snqqfcrl!
given by Sayanacharya in
Panini, however, often uses the
13. 1.
*cracfr.
Observe
?ff^r%: as
case with the force of the Genitive, as in VIII.
*cr-$:
'
69
III. .
of the last sutra
spsrewrrcu <rfs*TT^
is
wr^swri
qftrT?**
Hence we have forms
not to be read here.
ITTOTPfc ff^l%rr8fTJI
srsrmrs^^rf^tfh
s*
The
\\
q^rft
^m%,
11
% aira^w-anfa^rtt
11
changed into q after the

the sense of support and contiguity '.
68.
of
**
is
^cT?vt
preposition 3T3" in
The word srrWRR means "support, refuge, that upon which any thing
depends or leans ". arrf^f^ means " the state of not being f^rf* or far off, e.
'
'
'
i.
to be contiguous \
Thus
So
He
"
3Tq*afre<t
SSSTT
mrl
See V.
ll
Why
Thus ^T^fT^r
The
13.
2.
do we say
f*n*
*R%T
11
ll
aro,
Thus
not ? or 3
II
<ncrr%
^fr^r^rr^f
wi%:
The
when the
69.
*r
afflicted
is
commenced
is
is
c^
^srspfMrenroBi
and
tne Sudra
present sutra
tsr ^nft *fra%

?r%:
when having the sense of support
"
'
while the preceding letter
J^
remains leaning upon a staff" &c, sr^^T RTER N

^T 'the army near at hand', b*^-
also in the sense of to be near, as 3T^s:s^r
is
in
with cold
order to
make
is
the
q"
change even
11
II
fc:,
^, *?vk, tfta*
giâiWr *r^ra
srarrcpi
" to
II
11
substituted for the
sense
or contiguity "
'.
of
^j,
smack while eating
frourRr, s^^pt^, f3**3Pr, snrrrer>
^r^T^, *m**n*
after
".
11
That
is,
he makes sound while eating, he eats with a smack.
Why
ftCTTH
3f?r.
11
ffjf*
"
do we say when making a smacking sound

'
tne
qft ft ft
*&n srtWr
drum sounds
%&fam 3rofoi
>r^rW
11
in eating"?
Observe
".
^tt^tt src r%<r
m %i m 5^
*3
w** %$&**: wzntm
Bk. VIII.
Cii. Ill
70.
and
ft
The
rax
Thus
T^ftft
T^fcnra
ar^r*
The
and
ft^rT
far*
serein*
T^^^Trr
SrJ,
fjf,
and ^5T,
fa<T, STT,|rST*
the prepositions qft,
after
nasal
The word
class.
the Past
is
f%?T
the noun derived from the same root with
is
'^f*5*
>
f^T% T$ts%
have been changed to

of subsequent sutra,
m%
twi*wMiPHli
by VI.
sqftsrcfr
sni
rafa:
sg^rfs^îSTiinfa
elided in sâr
is
qra^rr. f^nfr, ftfqw:
*^*fcr fire
Bhuadi
to
*pf
a Divadi root.
is
qre^PTCT
Rrfq^m^
1633
substituted for the ^; of *te,
%* belongs
root
the affix bt^
Rule.
II
Participle of fa*^ 5n^r%,
qfror
q^
q- IS
augment
the
ST^,
ft,
72
qftfq^farw
srfanRr
R^^%
Tf*rera ftHprr **rr
4. 25.
The
^r
^rr?t
faftr-
fwr
iRm4I fwtr,
fir*
fa*?nra
11
of sg and **33 would
by VIII. 3. 65 also. Their inclusion here is for the sake

by which the q" change is optiotial when the augment 3T*
q"
intervenes.
qrrf^^ftft
ftrerr^Nf
11
^l
11
<?^rft
11
fsr^r^HT*?;,
^r-srat-sqreft,
stPtii
srenwr
$3Mfr tî%
st
11
The ^-change may take
71.
fa^ and the rest (of the last

the augment st intervenes between the
in
or
the
fir
place
optionally
even when
sfttra),
prepositions qft, ft
and the verb.

The
ment ?
and ^3th
ra^rff are the four roots fir* *rf
This
II
it
is
an example
is
of
*g and &rsf, as well as the aug-
ubhayatra-vibhasha.
In the case of *g
prapta-vibhasha, in the case of others
is
it
The
aprapta.
examples have already been given under the preceding sutra, and so need
not be repeated here.
^fr^kmfti g
srgfoq^rft^:
ftw,
% f%;
11
*q*zfa: 9 ararfor^
srs ft <tR
3tt$t
72.
3*T?3,
is
q^rft
^^rwrrf^ i&m&i
optionally
the
after the prepositions 3T3, ft,
subject
11
3T3-ft-qft-3n%
11
11
fr ;rcra sttcto
q^ is
n vsr
^r
w^rWfr
substitute
*rft,
*rcrW
of the
WT and ft,
11
ST
of
when the
not a living being.
The root to** Jre**r is anudatta. Thus 3T3*3?s^

srfawFSS $s* RF5% 3T5W?% ft**re% <rfwi^
1
ft*S?f?t
<rfl3^
TO Change.
1634
Why
[Bk VIII. Ch.
Ill
75
do we say when the subject is not a living being ? Observe

The option of this sutra will apply, when the subject is
3?%
a compound of living and non-living beings. Thus BT5^|% or srgcq^t
The subject here is a Dvandva compound, and it is not in the
singular number because of II. 4, 6.
The word 3TJnPT is a Paryudasa and
3T3*3 ? ?*t
WW
'
*T*TO
'
11
not a Prasajya-piatishedha.
on the word
force will be
tf
living,
it
be the
and
latter sort of prohibition,
compound
in a
living and non-living beings, the prohibition will apply because
and so there
being
in
word
non-living,
be no ^*%
then the
consisting of
like Tc^sfrftr,
has a living
it
is on the
and because the compound contains a non-living being,
therefore the option will be applied, and the presence of the living being
it,
along with
The
So
will
it
will
In the other view, the force
11
be ignored.
anuvritti of qfl,
R and f%
is
3.
70.
these words could well have been omitted from the sutra, which might
have then been sr^fa^N" W^^CTTfas, and by the force of

in the anuvritti of
<rfc
%: ^f^cfirgrare
ffri: u
ll
vs3 n
The
root
is
qÊT
ii
II
do we say
VStf
||
74.
*&farrefr H
f^^ra*
-
*rr
%:,
*q^:,3rfagrqn*
>r*n% 3rf%srar*
II
q^:,
***$-< sre?rc*?i
is
11
11
for the
of Ê*?,
Thus
f^c^nTT
or ft*3ffiT,
cT
and
fa^g* or
ll
but not in the Mishtha
qqrft
TrcÊfr^rTrc^
we would draw
but not in the participles in
fir,
ot*?t Tn%
fTOrj|*> f^c^f^fo^^ or
Why
ll
*Ms optionally substituted
after the preposition
ifrr-
q^Tft
%5tWi ttcto *%*%'> ^nss wtm

73.
&c.
'
Observe
Rrccffvp
II
m gsrMt mfi
11
of ^q:?^
after the preposition qft every where.
Thus TR^rFr or T^^f^r, TR^f?fôr <Tft{3T*3<l, TR^?rI52llor Tf^frTSJT*

The word TR could well have been included in the last sutra as
The very fact that it has not been so included, indicates
f^Tf^CT *5JF?* &c.
that the prohibition of 34M8r*Ul does not apply to it.
Thus qrc^nop or
11
qft^FFT. ST^nprccT!
75.
change
II
vs^
ll
q^rft
ll
qfoq^:,
srrsqsrccrg
The word qftwFq* is used without
in the country of
Eastern Bharata.
ll
the cerebral
,.k. VIII. Cn.
This
The
is
78
III. .
The q- required by the last sutra is prohibited.

The word qf^l??? is formed by the affix sr^r or
<rf^r^:
being
elided.
The word *n^T qualifies the word m*Q
<j
is
II
a Nishtha, the
II
Bohtlingk translates
Eastern People and the Bharata
and IV.
II. 4. 66,
1635
an anomaly.
is
other form
Prof.
Cerebral Change.
it
He
".
seen
is
in
the
usage of the
bases his construction on the sutras
where nrq*K%5 means "the Eastern People
113,
2.
"q fiHr ?
and
Bharata".
^f^^WWcftw
fes*r.
q^TR
vs* n
11
11
s^fa,
*$<*<st:, fN*, ft,
II
76.
and ^55
optionally
is
after the prepositions
r^>
fa
^ of ^r
for the
substituted
and pr
II
f^^m
Thus
R^^frT or fr**^fa, faf&fa or fasgatft, f^$?ra,

f^$^frr, ft***jrsfnr, f^^fa, f^r^rtRi, Rt^rtRr, f^jrrtf^
*$?sfa,
11
q^rrft
%:, ^wra:, fitei
^tto wn%: ^rernss rear s^rrfsfr *nn%
îs always substituted for the
77.
%: ^srarerfSrerc
lf%:
ii
II
v9\9
11
II
II
11
after the preposition
fir
*ft
^&r,
of
II
Thus f%*3?m%, f^Ff**^,
^:
vj^fedi ^fri^
II
f^rf**T3l., f%*3?f**TrRWL
q^T^r
II
11
wv,
11
tftei
^fodm,
sr:,
sT^r^ll
The
78.
room
of the
sound
cerebral
a stem ending in
Aorist and the Perfect, after
than
>ther
'cerebral'
the
repetition of the
is
f?r
^T
do we say
Juhotyadi
of tftg?
is
elided
anga here
19
is <rf*% fatf,
of
that the
of
anuvritti
yet
or the
11
tffr>%
^^ and
f?s* " ?
Observe
*gts%,
ar*g>^;,
11
'
^ter a stem
There
by VII.
root f^r, and f>s^ the affix

for the
>*
STJfni
class.
here indicates
srefNpr
do we say " the

where the ^ is of ?*? and
the
Thus
11
word
Why
s^rtt of the
understood here from VIII. 3.55.
: 3T^T*, STtT^(VIII. 2. 25). Perfect *Tfj|

anuvritti of ^^f' was current here from VIII. 3. 57,
As qtfraq,
[uttural ceases.
Why
the
(a vowel
$or
Aorist
SfoftpiH
Though
le
in
st).
The word
[*ti
substituted
is
of <fT^t, and of the Personal-endings of the
2.
79,
is
'
Guna
Observe q7*%f^tow
and tftow here
therefore <sft^ here
and
i^w
is
the
from VFZl-
of the reduplicate by VII.
is
affix.
Is
made up of 'the
qr
4. 75,
of the
not after the anga qft% f^T,

This result could have been
Cerebral Change.
1636
obtained, without using the word

TPT'fefTO " a
combination of
STJ^
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
the sutra,
in
III.
by the maxim 3T*H^
*f?^T
capable of expressing a meaning, denotes
letters
that combination of letters in so far as
possesses that meaning,
it
but
it
does
not denote a combination void of meaning".
ftnrrer.
ii
The
79.
for the
fkm*r, %&*
^rerfr n
ii
cerebral sound
11
is
of Jpsro &nd of the Aorist and the Perfect after the
%z, when the stem ends in

Thus $+f? + fr^=BPT*fr^r* or ftfsnfrg*
augment
from *
Aorist
:3T<*PH^* or
11
so also <Tr%ftra or qreqTgn
:^Hf^
or nr|
word f?, so that
the stem should end in an f<i vowel which should be followed by the f*
augment and this letter should be followed by ^tsqn and the q- beginning
affixes of the Aorist and the Perfect.
If the stem does not end in an %rj^
11
The word
in the
Perfect
II
understood here and
for is
vowel, the rule will not apply
Then
arfsfagq
word
it
II
qualifies the
as snflpftssrqr from the root srrer *q%*nr H
7<Tf^$lft, will the cerebral
This
change not take place by
from the root fj^ $W in the Perand

(VII.
2.
(by
augment
VI. 4. 63 J. Some say that as
fect with the
g?
13.),
f?
the augment întervenes between the stem ending in % ( for vowel ), and the
augment %z, therefore this rule will not apply and there will not be the option-
the option of this sutra or otherwise
al
of
is
Others hold that the anuvritti of 3T^r^ has ceased, and the anuvritti
II
fîs only
will
and there
current, in this sutra,
be the optional change into s
is
no intervention
II
*nrm, st^j^:,
q^rft
*nrr%^*j%: *rf: ô
ffrr:
^s^r^R^rf 4j3* tiw s^Nftfrr *r^frr Nlr
ll
II
I)
W-
11
11
80.
word
and so there
tf is
araqj fe in a
substituted for the st of *ry after the
compound.
Thus STfiiGwfr
sr^jf^-fr Q^m
ar^jn^nff *TT: STPTCrlr U Why do
cr^
Observe
compound
?
we say in a
3TifJj% *rjf
The word ^rjf: is exhibited in the sutra in the nominative case. The
'
11
force
is
here that of Genitive
sfrch ^stpto
ffrP
II
11
11
i.
e.
q^q
<T3Tft
11
TORCfeRKW ^fKt^TH^ S^NlWr

81.
ceded by
*fre in
Thus
wise
<z\
tfrct
<r is
H3rftT
WRU
II
II
substituted for the ^; of ^rnr
when
pre-
a compound.
tfnssrc*
wr <r* u
11
tfrcT:,
11
The word compound
is
other-
qg^di mn mr:
3rft:
ff?:
3Ttf#ff?l
II
^PT^^
82.
^T*r
* Change.
85]
<T3fNr
ll
an*:, *g<*,
11
substituted for the
when preceded by
ll
lengthened f that the 13 of

So also srp^PJRt
j?[nra
sfrT is
changed
frrerp
(where
11
of *g<*, ^ft*T and
11
:,
of herb
*ffar:
a compound.
srfrT in
Thus STFTg q[, 3TFTSPT sP^qtT
The f of srFT is lengthened before
Ishti:
*sm,
II
is
<r
II
1637
'
*fpr
and
As srf>?T^mr
and soma a kind
agni
'
means
fire,
'
and the soma plant are here."

When there is no compounding we have 9T*% sfpT:
The word srf^Tf is formed by re^ the sacrifice in which Agni
"
the
such
after
is
it
to q, otherwise not.
fire
II
is
?j[
ed
division
STPTCPP
of the Soma-yaga.
so called.
( figsfa ) is
( *r?*rr )
also the
is
spitfqta:
is
name
of a
sacrifice:
prais-
the
first
a f^mr-S^: so where there
is
no Devata-Dvandva, the q" change will not take place. Thus where Agni and
Soma are names of two boys, or where they refer to physical fire and herb.
According to Asvalayana there is lengthening and q" change in the last case
also, as st^'Ntht srn^rpr
sîfa î^r.
ff?r
ii
*<ffar:
11
^3
ll
^rrf^f
^frpr srrg^ f^rTT*-îTT^^
The
83.
and srrg^
As
3*frft:, sirg*:, *<ffor.
II
^cfprerafns* s^Nftsfr **rfcr *prrcr
changed to
; of ^f*r. is
II
11
after 5*flfd
a compound.
but
5*ih%fa:, 3TPi?R:
sifrft:
*tPT^raPT where there
is
no com-
pounding.
JTT^faDRif 5^t^t
ffrT^
ii
rrf
The
84.
fq<j in
ll
iprfk
w*'KHi
ll
PTf jsrapsirsTTTOi
^ of
a compound.
As jrnprerr, faf^rr
See VI.
^fag^W^nre^n*
rrT^^rni
^&l
11
*\
ll
m<z, foz^rnt, *tot
*prr% ^^rr^^fr
is
*r^frr
changed to
ll
11
and
after *TFJ
3. 24.
q^rr%
11
11
m$:, %s*fn*,
st*i-
ll
The
85.
after jrrgr
and fagr
of *sra
5R
in a
is
optionally
changed to
*,
compound.
The word jflrtt and

m$ :*wr ffi^srr or fa^s^fr
changed to visarga (See VIII. 2. 24). In fact, the
word fag? is so exhibited in the sutra itself, with a ^, the word mî therefore,
by the rule of m%*TQ is also to be understood as a pending word.
Thus mg:*wr
fq^r
end
in ^,
which
Q. Well,
visarga changed to
if
or
ll
is
this
h by
be
so,
when
this
îs changed to a visarga, and

1
VIII.
3.
36,
then there would be no q change
the
q Change.
163a
Ans.
The
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
change would take place both
or sr-ending words, on the
III.
87
after the visarga-ending
maxim ^lAlRl^d^H^Î^ " That which
has under-
by no means, in consequence
of this change, something else than what it was before the change had taken
place".
Therefore, these words are taken to end in ^11
For if they were
taken to end in *, then the rule would not apply when they ended in a
gone a change
visarga.
the sutra
3r*r in
The word spn%

when the words
is
a visarga, then the form
in
understood here
is
is
fa$j4r*
with
hard to explain.
Therefore not here
also.
*rrg:
^m
are used separately in a sentence.
arfSrfro^TT. $.i*<*H$!Nm
OTTW
its parts,
they be supposed to end
If
a ^before
regard to one of
in
II
^z
Mîfa
II
II
arnr-f^n,
*cre:, srs^-
II
IHrararil
The
86.
^ of ^C is
the double preposition
name
the
ft^>
srfir
of a particular letter
when
(i. e.
after
<*
the word so formed
is
visarga).
As srpTPreFTT ^', sTPTprenft resr^fre: or arprf^Rt 3T* or Rrenfcfto

The compound preposition STPT-f^ causes this change, and not any one of
them separately. Thus Apastamba : gj^t *f&m *TT TTlfrtnwrfhft srefa"
RSPrT> ^ N 4 ^nT^tT^T^ a name (nama) should be such that it should consist
II
of two-syllables or four-syllables, that its first portion should be a noun

(nama-purva), and its second portion a verb (akhyata), that it should end
long vowel (dirgha) or a visarga (abhinishtana), that the first letter of such
a noun should be a ghosha or sonant letter ( ghosha-vad-adi), and a semivowel (antastha) should be in the body of it." Thus the names yfanftST, Î??HT
in a
fulfill
these conditions and are good names.

do we say " when it is the name of a particular
Why
STfaPTStRPT ^fjf:
II
The
anuvritti of sprrer ceases
^^fargsqW^fcir.
*r^*r-
*s
11
q^Tft
ll
Observe
^^ht, snfrofa,
arfen,
The
changed to
when
^; of the verb sr^f is
followed by a vowel or
^r
and
preceded by
is
upasarga having % or ^ in it.

The word ^3rqi: means 'followed by ôr
an Indeclinable,
meaning evidently
Thus arf^n%,
RWÎI
letter.' ?
this place.
11
87.
it is
11
from
'
f%*TRr,
sr^'
II
srr5 :
<?,
>
or an
The word
ht^: is
'.
fW^,
srri^^r
sTre^?*, fa*ni, rlr^?r,
mp1
Bk. VIII. Cm.
Why
Observe
Ill
88
do we say
1639
"
when preceded by an Upasarga having an f or s?

Why do we say 'of the verb atrqr'? Observe srf-
"
*T^TT^
^p-jwini,
* Change.
II
^<T*, faff** H
Q.
How
The context
is
any occasion for the application of the rule here?

*r, and the word
"upasarga" qualifies that *r, but
there
here relates to
here the upasarga
not applied to
is
no counter-example.
In
*f
but to the whole verb
what
fact,
is
the sutra: for even without
all in
verb which consists of
Nor
no other verb?
only
in
is
it, the word

'upasarga' would qualify that
and such a verb is 3T?^, with its st elided and
only,
ct
employment of 3T^ necessary
the
connection with the verbs
Ans.
w and
>,
All that you urge,
a*??
longs to Subhradi
by VI.
elided
class.
4. 147.
3faft$*
^RT, STOP
^frr:
11
is
upasarga,
fa
gfoqfNniT:
ll
comes
be
3Tr3*ra:
with
as
it
be-
it
is
affix
is
to this
so that had st*t not
also.
followed by a vowel or
s"? Observe
*;
m*,
jppi:, gft,
vptffo
5,
ll
fir,
II
5^*^**
fa*
^tt^t
fire wfar *pt
gf smn:^^.
g^rftiimsi sgnfti
The
88.
fir,
^ of
and jt
for
f&wti staffs*
fa^s^%
Scr<y,
w&mm *?rfa
11
11
faw *rnr JTrfasTrrr^Tre:
sT?re#r fa^sr: ifa^rTT
lisation.
it
11
&n$*r
after ,
and q^
would apply
do we say "when
m%m-
f^cr,
will
in the sutra, the rule
Why
f^r^T:,
for
= STTfw + tpi = 3TTj?t + qî h Here the

Thus 9T3^+
Now when 3; is elided, the q; is the only verb-
element that remains, 3T3
been taken
for jtt^,
II
the following counter-example
true, yet
is
should be given, as 3T3*r, the son of Anusu
3> is
therefore this
?r,
the necessity of using the word st*t at
is
<qr%,
gfa
11
and SOT
is
changed to
<*
||
The word gf? is exhibited in the sutra as

Thus 33*:, fa: g* %-. ^:
The word ^rW
11
the form of
is
with voca-
*?r<gr
f^ ending form of w
fa^ and 5
The
the
the rule applies to this form only, as gqf?h,
fa<|T%:,
vjfi.
word *m also means the noun ^H and not the verb w*

STT*, fa***, R <W*, 3 R*
!
Kdrikd
Why
rf^JT:
q<sr
and
^-
2.
taught with regard to the <J form of

nsr
172)11
change has not taken place
the reduplicate,
the
is
so that the
fa*^ (III.
cr
is
elided,
is
change should not take place
Thus
in
**qr?
Ans.
^r form, as
'For what. reason the

reduplicate ftgcrPT, for here also in
Q. fagwrtflt <frTT?
in the
the form g*, as r%qr^T, and then
and
II
ll
^: TO ^Wr <
&w \&$l
11
^W^^r^^rr* applies
by applying f^^PT
Ans.
??*rfa %<strl *r
rule,
fa:,
we
1640
<sr
reduplicate the form
Change.
Bk. VIII. Ch. HI.
92
f^prând then elide
*, as f^*^*, and then vocano form |J<t, there is no n* iifg- # srenTO, in

the*vocalisation takes place first, and then elision according to an ishti.
as
**r*,
as reg^TT so that there being
lise,
fact,
See VI
1.
elided.
Why is
^1 *^r,
Otherwise, in
17.
the
the rule Vf-II.
?rnr JTT^f^rTT^TTC: gfa,
as
3.
would also have been

by VI 1 1. 3. 64 ? **rrffaf proifr
elided, ?
< is
fag^TR" not changed to
^ of
q"
64 does not apply, because that
rule
is
confined only to verbs up to f^r in VIII. 3. 70, while fj<^ is after that verb.
Moreover the 1; of m*. being elided, the mere ?j is wfe?, and the maxim is
Q- If this maxim is applied, how do you form r%!J ?
ST*HT ?T^5t mîfew
Ans. sR^HfcffSST Sfajmfifceaw, nere the form $<r is doubled, and not gqr II
The root is first joined with the affix RT + ***> then there is vocalisation RgT,
11
then there
q change,
is
f^T, then reduplication, as itÎS;
as
being considered asiddha, the doubling should take place

have already shown that for the purposes of doubling, the
asiddha (VIII.
2.
^sr&
Thus
TEH
is
not
^ra^
^5^^
and
This
last
added to ^r preceded by the upapada
snft
faOTJTat
affix 3?
ll
Fncfu% ^ffajp
?TOT
II
Observe fa^rrp, ifteTRP
FTTtTJ )
II
.0
meaning a
Thus
we have
II
****, stfrPHJTRr*?;
II
15 %^rt
The word
srnrwiHf
sr%^rcT
is
^rw
II
11
irregularly
formed when
sutra.
JTratfJTTrp
fJTO i
= bathed
$n%FTr?T
^nbî
T^TR
II
u smprarrafrrer R<rrsT?r
90.
\frfi
change
fr, ?rfb-*rn*, strt:,
11
do we say when meaning dexterous?
^T srfrTOMH
f frr:
TO"
III. 2. 4.
Why
(
qîfa
II
is
35*3^
ROTTTrT:
formed by the
under sutra
Now
substituted for
of ^r after ft
u
so formed denotes
dexterous."
when the word

is
*;*.
11
The *
89.
word
q^
"
No, for we
3 Vart.)
fSR^TPrf sn%:
?T^T
first?
e.
^n.
'
pure
When
has not
it
this
meaning
'
'
*ft* n .?
^R5?7
II
<tttr
fffi
RTT?T% *rT*f?Wl
91.
The word
11
sfag<s:, firt
ll
II
^Hnjss
is
irregularly
formed denot-
ing the founder of a gotra of that name.

Thus the son'of Kapishthala will be effrfroi^:
The word gotra" here
mean the grammatical " gotra," but the popular term gotra denoting clans,' as described in the list of pravaras. Why do we say "when denoting the founder of a gotra " ? Observe ^rfaw^** The land of the monkeys.
II
does not
'
'
'
Bk. VIII. Cn.
III.
95
srgt OTrrrmi^r
II
II
* Change.
q^TM
II
The word
92.
1641
H srg:,
swiiwm
is
irregularly
*HJ
II
when
formed
denoting 'a chief' or 'one who goes in front'.

Thus srers^ meaning a 'best horse'. )Vhy do we say when meaning
4
going
in front
laya", iron
Observe
'
#T#TR
TOT^HWiFfrg*::
ffrf:
11
fm rttcr f%
nret
11
f|*R<r $% "
$rc*r
On
the sacred peak of the
Hima-
a measure of barley'.
'
q^TR
i)
stper"
The word
93.
f$r, srr^pft:, ft^r.
ll
^ *rr^
II
ri4*3 ^m%: *tr rttsr

fe^c is irregularly formed in the
11
sense of " tree M and " seat."

This word
by the preposition
is
affix
9T^to the root
preceded
Thus RS*r f &

Rs^r^RI.
Why do we say when meaning a tree or a seat ? Observe
See sutra III. 3. 33. by which 3?* is added here instead
5TRf<RI4*H:*l ftw-
II
11
II
'
'
'
'
II
of
w^
^Nrfsr
11
3Tw<
5Ti5%
11
rs*
rstc
s.y
II
?ft Rirsrcr
f^r
r^r
By
called RHrilfrF:
Why
^tan%, ^
II
^?Rrm
%3tf
Rf^ ?r rct s*rfa
11
form RraT
Sutra
II
RS5r?**r s ^rrmrermr:
Also when
94.
irregular
q^rft
11
is
it
of a metre, the
used.
34 the word RSTC
III. 3.
name
the
is
is
formed denoting a sort of metre
ll
do we say when denoting the name of a chhandas

'
'
Observe
makes unnecessary the sutra III. 3. 34. To avoid

some say that the sutra III. 3. 34 is not confined to the preposithat we can form Jr^rriT^Ffj: SreTTCT^RR
In fact this sutra

this difficulty,
tion r, so
II
ufagfawr
ffrT-.
ii
feir.
irRsnr^rsTF':^
Thus
*M
if%r?,
a consonant, yet
is
trt, ^fe^prn*, far.
^ of
r^sn;: is
ll
11
changed to
*r
after the
words
it
ST^rt*
II
The compounding
takes place by II. 1. 44. and

though
the word ft does not end in
3. 9.
Locative ending by virtue of this sutra.
not elided by VI.
retains
^^rftrqftw: *&&k
ii
11
II
the 7th case affix
tfrr:
^rfa
11
fw^rwr w*ri|*fr >rr
The
95.
nft and gra
ll
its
ll
>*
11
T^rfa
11
fir, 5;,
^rm, vfa&r.,
r i? str' <m jzfim ztkih wwrjtcto **nw >rr
11
mw
ll
q Change.
1642
96.
and TR
substituted
is
^ in
for
Bk. VIII. Ch.
^ra
after
III. .
fr, <,
98
^rw,
II
The word f%, ^f and qfc are

Thus f%g?**, ^8?Fl, Site** and qf*e?*1
compounded under II. 2. 18.; the word qffi forms a genitive by VI. 3. 63. In
the aphorism the word *rf*T is shown with a short %, indicating thereby that
II
when
the ?
^vs
II
not shortened, the cerebral change does not take place
is
WW,
<T3TPT srer,
11
*z*n,
3jpr,
*fr,
II
itr,
wfa, *t*t, are, rt, nr,
f^r and
3TP*
Thus
ST^JB,
5^T^
?ir>
and
Vart:
1
T^r#t
II
in the sutra
%!>, *l<$8*,
and means the
case,
first
TOT, for
change takes place
^rttr
is
11
in
TOT,
^mr% 3, ^
changed to
then the rule would
R^,
and
to;
II
As
<*
ll
in the
words
syrTSRC
rest.
hw*
2fif.<5rrer,
(faqfa:),
=^ft*r^T^
m* *re*
arqr
11
4^r:, 5 ft^r- (fa^nfO. 6 3 ^*

10 ^ (g^), 1L TO (TO). 12
:
g:<srmr,
9 ^:^rfa:,
Some
VIII.
sion in this
of the above words would

3.
list.
>
*^W
16g55PlWTO.(^5fa^^|^;
sfcrraproRi, 18 ffi^n, 19 Hsnrrsr, Crf?ftvp u
tion in
(I
in the
*RTf*W, H^RWTW. 15*%^WL (^TO)

qrlr
3TT&:, f$S:, fas, ft
SfftW-
11
11
The
Thus gsrmr
17
f^S:,
not the genitive case of
si^rer ^r^fa;
ig*rmr,
8ft:*rfa:
shown
is
it is
98.
and the
*(%3m ^T^:,
*re*B s > ^ff^:,
The same
smuifil
%%
is changed to Rafter sn^, srra,

sr^s sr^g, *rfsr 3%, <rcft, ^f^;,
*rftTOT?Pl. &c.
apply to *TfTOni.,
sr^rer:
^,
3T**g:, SJ|iy:, TTS:,
TfS5re:,
word-form
of ^sr
q^ afffw f|ft STTCT ?^-
II
The word to
13
The
97.
as ^pfr-
%, 5^f;,
an?, ft, fr, f;,
st^j, *t%, sfsr, 'Ksr, srft**, fefr, srfiiw., w. 11

*T** 3TT^ *TT *f*T 3TT ff fa ^ ffff ST^fJ 3T^J TfciT jf^f
ffi=T:
stoRr*
7 ^rfa-,
^T?TR,
î)
have been governed by the prohibi-
in, others would never have taken q, hence their incluThe word is here a karmapravachaniya (I. 4- 94) and r%i
with
connection
and 5* also are not upasargas, because they are so only in
preceded by FK
to
apply
%W
not
does
and tit so VIII. 3. 65
the verbs
The word
or
%*:
3^:
%*
and 3^-fi*P
H
The words
and
from
derived
be
it
if
ST* here is a ^r formed word, from flnnftar *kl#:
rc^
Bk. VIII. Ch.
III. ioi
then also, the word
fa^T icMIHL,
VIII.
cation of
is
changed
The word
q^
Samasanta
shortened by VI.
in
order to prevent the appli-
&c
^qfw v?;, 5:^5^:
are
derived
from qj
and ST*, and the affix fa (III. 3. 92) and the ^ of

The words ^5, 553 are Unadi formed words (Un. I. 25).
;
a Bahuvrihi, the
is
added (V.
is
here
1643
to qjl
ifrf^T^T:
included
is
The words
113.
3.
with the prepositions

STH
w* Change.
*r
The word
of srf^T
The long
4. 113).
changed to
is
{ of the
*r
and the
member
first
is
formed by adding the Preposition srfff to the root $rr, and the affix ar^ (HI. 3. 106), and we have srfrTSTT
with srj;; then ^ is added by V. 3. 73, and sn shortened (VII. 4. 13), and $
added by VII.
^^fHqT't
*tf<r
3.
also a
is
63.
3.
jrf^f^T^n' is
The word 4ft*rt is formed by adding *g* to f%^

?3^ formed word from %^fcT or ^t^rfrt
44.
11
II
usmuwmi A
11
<TTrfa
11
w*Trn,
qfa,
ll
smT<*
II
99 The ^followed by ^ and preceded by %$i or 5: is

changed to qr, when the word is a name, and when the ^f is not preceded by tt
||
Thus
5TT5T
Jft
Why
II
Vrc 9T^=?T*Tr:> <tf^t

do we say followed by
fro?
3tto=<tRt>p, so also ^t^t*,
^nrr
'
<J
'
Observe
Sl?g"fr*TH
Why
II
do
we say 'when a Name'? Observe *p& SPO" *K:^ ST = <S%'fr KFXl (VI. 3. 34).
Why do we say when the *r is not preceded by *J ? Observe (%*%*; %?r u
The phrase f^t*. is understood here also, so the rule does not apply to *ft*nr
'
'
II
JT^nracT
tfrT:
11
11
?oo
q^Tf?r
11
w^rrHTH; ^^tti^t
100
When
^srerac, ^t
11
*nffre*3 ^r
the preceding
mansion, the ^substitution for

stances
is
Thus
g^t H*rra
word
^ under
is the
name of a Lunar
the above mentioned circum-
But not here *rtH*fa%*r: M

These two sutras 99 and 100 are
the fJ^Tlrft Gana. The author of Kasika has
or f*f$fa*M5, *rcfa^T: or
ftf^faTT.
realy Gana-sutras, being read in
them
classified
under
g^raT^
11
short * or
when not
Sushamadi gana.
changes,
q-
this
crfeft
101.
20
is *t
to the rank of full sutras.
All cerebral
be
ii
*iyi^w*i*Hii
optional.
fa^3R %T: were the preceded letter
raised
q^frr
11
lol
is
ll
q^ft
referable to
any
specific rule, should
W^^ <n^h <*&*
substituted for a final
11
preceded by a
before a Taddhita affix beginning with
<T
II
1644
The
namely, m,
following are the affixes
*% $$.
Jreresrsffnro
Why
Q.
rPT,
srrq^^r^W
But
Ans.
plural
affixes
jrfrTq:w
valid,
is
do we say
because the
of a Taddhita
'
'
rst:
tot?*
rrf^r?r?fw
Observe *rfqwr-
11
?T
the
znr^?
\*\
ll
when
<* is
q^Ti%
ll
*m*w *^nwwrf
^T#r
the meaning
is
also not
tl
Potential
person
third
the Taddhita affix
is
r!T<T
4. 1 1.
ll
fro?, <rq#r,
q^prwM
substituted
is
*rffcr
verbs before Taddhita
finite
are
base
STf^TrftfrT
Prohibition must be stated with regard to
102.
cT^
of the
ct
Observe
must be stated of
and STPîs added by V.
56,
f^^*crnpmte?r
11
J^ra^r*;^
rTRe*TT
3.
Vart
rPT
this st
Prohibition
3.
^^^
beginning with
As f^T^^rT^ni f^"^cT*P H These

of f^; and fgj"^ with the augment
added by V.
verb
sn^fa
change takes place,
this
As rK gffe*
103
III. $.
would never have been changed to q- because of the

in, how can you then give this counter-example?
Though the *r of the affix *rnj[ is prohibited by VIII. 3. m,
Why
Vdrt
affixes.
Bk. VIII. Cn.
before which
11
*an*<T?rorr?rri
yet the counter-example
changed.
3?<j
<t*t,
do we say before
prohibition in VIII.
1?%;
Rule.
srer
g*r as j^STO
sw^r
5^
ll
ll
II
for the ^; of fro;
not that of
'
before the
repeatedly
making
red hot \
The word
making
it
3TJ%^T
means doing a thing repeatedly and here it means

Thus f^grqf^:
ST^ 3Tfp* *7?fai% e.
^^=
red-hot repeatedly.
he puts the gold into fire only once.

Why do we say when not meaning repeatedly.
In the sentences
f^TSTT *ST:, f^teHT
a Vedic irregularity or
either as
3T*TcR:
i.
Observe
ffr^rqfrT
the change has taken
because the sense of repeated ness
*TO
place
is
not
cTct^:
5,
implied here.
S^^Tid g:*TO:qnw
3T?cr:
qr^[
qrs *r^m
?3
<*uft
ll
3^t^,
cn*,
ii
103.
is
II
ll
The
^ standing m
changed to y before the
?T
the inner half of a stanza
of &&l &c. and
cT?
and
*Rl$piJI
.
Bk.
VIII.
Cii. Ill
The word
^rmrtfta
43- 9
107
gs*r?;
*T?f>
?t
of srnr^.
%, st^te fa**Tff3
11
STf^f^^r^rfrT, (Rig X.
stanza while
is
is
1645
here means the substitutes ^*, ^rqr
Why do we say
PMItHlfo ^^HT? ^rnmr
first
qrr Rule.
^t, Brf5T|r ^qfor*rf%
11
I'
the
in
rTrT^T,
4)
Here
II
the.
ar^p-
rpr,
inner half of a
frq-^fa:
at the
2.
11
rT
rTT.
srRrs^,
As
1*1^^^^: 3
stanza
word
arffrs,
Rig VIII.
STnT"
Observe SF^Trwrf
srftr; is
at the
end of the
beginning of the second stanza, therefore the
not in the middle of a stanza.
*T^%*P*
II
\o\Z
q^TT%
||
II
s^jfa, *&*tUl
II
In the opinion of some, the above change
107.
takes place in Yajurveda also.

Thus
3Tf%f^|^r or
srf%rfo^
8Tf%ffeT: or 9Tf%P%TrT^
The
105.
changed to *
srrcre*Tg;
or srfsrem*
3TWff?l or
stfJTCrfll
II
^ of ^r and
in the opinion of
^fnr, in
the Chhandas,
is
some.
Thus ft-ftcg^TO or faft^^, jfrfPT qt^f^T^ or rffctTPT ^STCPTCUl This

change would have taken place by the general rule contained in the next
sutra VIII. 3. 106, the special mention of
*$ and ^fnf here is a mere amplification.
The word ^fa of this sutra governs the subsequent sutra also.
^pi; \\\o$\\
!TtP
11
frrn%
11
^ki^t
&!<??^rf^rmrrr^TT?:^; *t3ttcto
106.
changed to
11
gîw ^Trr ^sr% f^ra q%qrTr^r^f^
In the Chhandas,
when
according to some,
t%^
*T is
stands
in the beginning of a second

^,
word, preceded by a word ending in % &c.
it
The words g^ff% and

or ffc^fw*,
f*Hft<T
or nrsrf^-
fr*rf^:
q=fiqf
;
are both understood here.
*?vjgr?TCr
or
^q-R^, f%$v&
Thus
f^R
ff^f*^:
or rysrrf^
II
The word #7^

well as the
f*r^ff**rTO
3T:
II
prior
here means the

word other than that
first
in
member
of a
a compound.
compound word
Thus repq ^SMiq
as
or
11
?VS
II
q^lfa
II
3T.
%Vff m ^nrf^r RTfcT ?? Tfj^ rTTO
sfrswrfaR^rsrora flrSfTWr
*rW s?*rer
fa5R
1646
Change.
tspf
[Bk. VIII. Cm.
109
III. .
The sr of the Particle ^ is changed to <q in

Chhandas, when preceded by another word having in it
107.
the
the change-effecting letter ? &c.

Thus
snfr
or srcffaPT (Rig. IV. 31. 3)
lengthening takes place by VI.
i kKgT.
Thus iftqr
by VI. 4.
Why
(Atharv. III.
The
II
and
134,
^r^:,
3T5T:
verb
the
^r of
3^ 3; 5
or:
changed to
sr
(Rig.
I.
36. 13^.
by VIII.
tjj
The
4. 27.
^,
when
it
loses its ^,
under the same circumstances.
q*,
elided
<T3Tft
II
108.
changed to
is
is
?^
II
3.
(Rig. IX.
So
41.
formed by the
2. 10),
also
Jjqr:
(III. 2. 67), the
affix ft*
s*
11
do we say when it
Here the affix
20. 10).
loses
is
^'
its
f^(III.
2.
Observe *mfk ^TgftaF*

See however iftqfW in
27).
Rig. VI. S3- 10-
Though
this
q change would have taken
the separate enumeration
is
for
however read the word iftaPp
place by VIII.
106
3.
the sake of niyama or restriction.
in the list
of
they hold that the proper counter-example
CRRTR words (VIII.

is rereT RRl MM
So
fl
3.
also,
Some
no), and
also
flrepft:
formed by adding fa^to the Derivative root faeprcf, thus faHHfr + f||re=rerefr^ (the 3? is elided by VI. 4. 48)4-0. add , KinPlH + **= RRrf%^+ o [w is
elided
takes
Now
^ (of the Desiderative affix ^) is liable

^ (^). The q being asiddha, the 5 change
place.] = RT?ETRi= f^nfr (the lengthening is by VII L 2. 76).
Here the
by VI.
1.
to be changed
68.
either to
Desiderative affix *p^
the final
or to
q;
is
n t changed
by VIII. 3. 61. This being the

in fa mmfaq fa in the Causative.
*Tt:
^dHTH 3*tf
II
?*>
The
109.
*r
to
hence
q/,
word
this
is
not governed
object of this sutra, there will
II
^TT^
of ?^;
is
II
*T%:
be
^RT-^TT^F^,
changed to
change
q-
xT
after
^rt and
sutra into
two; as (1;
The word
q/,
9FMI
Thus
'jcRrer?*, fafcWMWiJl
(2) <^TP!T?**lH'
ll
So
lengthened by VI.
Some divide this

may apply to
that the rule
qtsfi q ^ ; also.
and the q change takes place in

The word ^ and in the
sutra includes words other than those not mentioned in it.
The word ^?rq?
would be valid by this also.
qj^T
is
sanhita only.
3.
116, in sarihita
Otherwise the form
is
qtfrTSTS*
ll
'
'
Bk. VIII. Ch.
<M<lifiHfo
5T
fnr
'tfuw
112
III. .
*f*r pjrsr
The *
110.
the
Change.
^fel^fe<H ^Hl<(HIH
s'^nrra *|fa
follows the
qrr
U^
II
**&&
II
^ gi^t t
?jft srcqnffaf
**!*,
H *i
*n?rf
^r
^^, and
^>
does not take place
substitution
as well as in ^q-, ^3T,
**,
1647
in ^r^r
if
?:
and
rest.
Thus fa#^<*rar: ^Fi îffR II The word flM Wtt is formed by the
This word is from the root ^*g fvm%,
ofw (III. 3. 109), ft*&r. circrafsr
the fîs not added by VII. 2. 15 and the nasal is elided by VI. 4. 24. before
1S f rme d by tne a ^ x
The worc
the nisthha q
3*T f*** f*T* H
fn?
I
affix
ll
11
^5^ (III.
The
following
mft *&,
Rq^
: ?rn?r
*pr
4. 17),
is
list
of
rq:
*w
*j*r
f|
^^
:R^^r^ "
words
fef:), 6 3T3*TWT3ST*T*, 7 TTOf% TRlft$, 8 3T^raf^T^TnTW
the
list
9^^% ^^,
10
18 f%tf f%*n*
(forcr
^Tc^-nft:
fRT:
ii
srftfar
ll
sr*r,
m%,
fro*)* 19
ill
is
w 9% (g^
*),
3^ 3^?^ 20 nterfaw,
^^rf?r
ftrcr- (f%*q ifo

In some books this is
16
3), 12
^^ft gwc,
21 snsrcrf^
^rpif f?*r17 fro fa*p*>
11
tî^t *m*, <rrratt^t fr^rtsfr *

ll
ll
%*re* srlr
and
ll
m*m m^m, 11 3T^r^fi^r^'nT(3T^r^%

14
wW
The .^substitution does not take place
111.
affix ^rni;
: fNt*
3 ^t% ^r%, 4 sprcs^r sr^rs^r, 5 i%sr
2 gir ^r,
faspr:, 13 tn^rcrara*,
for that
in the
which stands at the beginning of
a word.
Thus
ot^[ here
is
Padadi
*r
and
which a
for
Thus
3Tf&*rrq[
fa^m
11
*T
TW^
The
59.
which
So
ll
and
it
would have
The
prevents that.
Dhatupatha are taught with a
in the
also
4. 52,
present sutra
This also
substituted.
tf^rr<t
<ife
ll
fw^r- ^ranroi
112.
the
is
3.
is
with Padadi
*T
as
tfv*
q,
3. 59.
faj^Rr,
*m
ll
fe^t
ff%j
refers to those verbs

*r
by V.
the affix ordained
been changed to q by VIII.
qjxrft
||
f^r:, Ufa
nfw qwt g4*qwrr 1 n*t%
The
q^
substitution
does not take place in
of fa^r of the Intensive.

Thus
Q.
itf^rer and STPT^RT'W
The
-
of the reduplicate should be changed into
q by 'VIII.
3.
65,
and the H of the root should be changed into q by VIII. 3. 64.

is one of the roots taught in VIII. 3. 6$, and
therefore, as this
in 9rf*T%f^3%,
Because fg ^
5T
II
1648
Change.
<rer
latter rule prevents the operation of
so
VIII.
would prevent also the operation of
it
Ans.
Tfrft
5T
of
The
VIII.
prohibition
is
Why
^rafcfr
Ill
3.
i.
Ill
Tfrrt ST so far as
e.
goes,
it
and the form ought
this rule
116
to
be
ordained by VIII. 3. 65 prevents only the operation of

in, and not the ^ of this rule. Therefore the present
q"
3.
of universal application.
do we say
\\\
II
113.
in the Intensive.
Observe STPTfqfwfa
t^ttSt n fcrefr:,
*r<fr
11
^ of the
The
when the meaning

Thus
[Bk VIII. Ch.
verb #sr
not changed to
is
**
that of moving.
is
3TPTSf*ram *TP>
tt
qf^nraffir
This
"
is
-3-65.
Why
do we say 'when meaning to drive'? Observe

Here the sense is that of preventing or prohibiting.
sprafa "
srf^sv:rf*rccT3>2ft
ffrr:
11
qfa*?T3*T fSrercKr
114.
IV*
to^
sifir^rwsr-ft^rs^,
s^tr gs^qfasrera faqrîr
The words
ftraieFRlfrqfir-
and
srfNcF^r
ano-
are
fiftassr
malous.
In these words the
*r
not changed to
is
though so required by
jq,
VIII. 3.67.
?&?:
fr^f:
IVi
II
II
*r?w^ rf g?rr
115.
changed to
As
*tr?:
The*?
of ^fte form of the root
do we say
'
11
is
not
This is an exception to VIII. 3. 70.

qMnssani
Observe qR;assumes
the form of ^fff'
*rf
ll
when
II
11
??e
11
*^ff*
11
sa^g-fai-Hsro,
fal ^? *ott*t ^rfr tot: *r?ttoi g^Nrtîr

^f*^ fa!^?t *t^ Twrfitfa
n *cT*$
*tf%*v
II
^Tgr%i^ ^t%
ffan
II
'jsre rr^ w^râf g^JNrWr * *r*fa
qft^f*:, qfrfftl*,
Why
<q#, f**TS%
<*;
^rf^
mm*
116.
*r *refll
The * change does not take
m by VIII.
root *cP>T required

3.
70.
Thus
<q
reduplicated Aorist of the roots *?r*w, fa* and
The
^fe
change by VIII.
q*rer**rqt, aq**ErecT**r<*
ii
3.
67,
place in the
*ns;
II
and the roots fa* and
fa* : q&ftfa**,
^rrf**fi
11
BK. VIII. Ch.
III. .
This prohibition
Vdrt
Upasarga and not

above example.
gsitffr:
TO Rulk.
119]
\\*
II
117.
change that is caused by afi

we have illustrated in the
q"
the reduplicate change, as
to
**ra?ft:
refers to the
1649
<T^n%
II
of
^r-^rt:
^fr&*.,
II
not changed to
(S^frf^r) is
the
in
<*
Future, Conditional and Desiderative.

Thus : srfwssrfa,
What example
Tfarraifa, 3T**rcft<aKl, <T$#1?*
will
you give under Desiderative ?
not a valid example, for by VIII.
Then we
here.
example,
for
shall give the
U*rqfrf
This
11
61, the reduplicate will not be
3.
example
governed by the
it is
II
3Tf*T|J*T*T*T
This
II
restrictive rule of
is
is
changed
not also a proper
Then
VIII. 3 64.
this is
the desiderative root STfaim^frr by

Here the desiderative affix *P^ is not changed to q" (VIII. 3. 61)
and therefore the second *r would have been changed to q- as it comes after a
the example STPT^H:, fafl^ derived from
the affix f^<T
ll
reduplicate.
Why
do we say before to and
^rf^rssfr: *rc^r
?frP
The
118.
in the Perfect
and qwsr
Thus
iso
arf^"T^"%
because
f%?j,
it
??^
*=r
when
^rf^
II
^5 and
**
ends
The word
in a
^-^3^:,
t*to g^Mir
qTrf: srerrcro
of
ll
*4zt
Tf^rSuT,
nasal of ?T5T
*rei%
reduplicate
||
first *r will
be changed to
R^R, f^ST!?, tR"5T^%5,
is
elided though here, the
compound vowel
(VI.
4. 24), (I. 2. 5
q",
^r 's,
s^fa
s^ftr
ll
u\
q^fhr
ll
ll
as
but not
Tf^R^rirT, TTC-
and
affix is
not
6).
*f *r does not occur in the sutra, but has been inserted in
fro^ms^Tfs^r^
srr,
*t3t%
q?^T,fef
i
after the
by the auther of Kasika from the following Vartika
^r^r^",
II
these words are reduplicated, there are two
3Tf**TfllT^,
The
II
Observe fjqTC
II
After a preposition, the
ll
the second.
sr^rfsrc,
II
not changed to
is
In the Perfect,
srcrrf
%ft
??m3fe?r3tf&f?
srf? *3T>5T
11
5T^
it
?rtr prf fffcW^ PT>*r
ft-i^-srftrc^r.,
srar-
119.
The
*[
is
optionally
Chhandas after the prepositions

ment 3T^ intervenes.
1%,
f^
and
substituted
srfir,
in
the
when the aug-
1650
r*c
Thus
The
fact,
Rule.
[Bk. VIII. Ch.
*psffol or *r*ft??t f^rTT *:; s^sffoqr; or 5*rcfte?t farr ?r,
anuvritti of ^Tf
and
*#sr
is
II
As
119
swsftat or
not to be read Into this sutra.
a general rule and applies to verbs other than these two.
STÎfa or iT^^fcr
III. .
It
s^rerffcj,
is,
in
?qgfci,
BOOK EIGHTH.
Chapter Fourth.
xwnFm
m\r{^^
ii
*r
totr^
tit:
^<m%rm
^sf&ti
n ?
q^n^r
II
^ttot*j,
?n, or:,
ii
After ^ and tx, the nr is the substitute of^,

when they occur as component letters of the same word.
1.
These
'occasion'
letters
f^T<^*, aTôfa
The
sutras
So
ii
letter
J?e
parts of the
also after
<sr
included in
sr is
^ will
for
must
same pada
or word, one being the
As
the application of the rule as regards the other.
for
3TnFcfMl,
^wruw, Suffer, 3**mtT

this aphorism for the sake of subsequent
as,
be changed into
II
when preceded by ^ by
or
rule 41 of this
Chapter, as well.
Why
do we say "when occurring
Vdrt
So also
This vartika
sutra
will
But
is
the
may
if
even
end.
and
this
be
so,
II
the
As
same word
perceive both
and the consonont
the letter
?"
ftTârrw, ^fl^'Jll^
well be dispensed with
common sounds which we
denote both the vowel
K.
Observe
TTf
W*
because the
in *
and
^t;
its first
part
r?f<Tr*H
in
the
and so the
See contra. VIII.
has three parts,
a^f^r-
is
2.
42. Obj.
a vowel,
in
^ sound of a quarter matra, and a vowel sound at the

This vowel-sound will intervene between the C-sound and the subsequent
the middle
T,
after the letter
in
will
is
the
prevent the application of the sutra, hence the vartika
is
valid
be no intervention, because, it will be

Obj. The vowel-sound at the
end of m is not a///// vowel of one matra, but is of half-matra, being only a
fragment of s^, and hence is not included in the pratyahara s*^, it has no separate
Ans. This vowel-sound
will
included in the exception srôf the next sutra.
21
1652
PUT
Change.
or
or
Hence
homogeneity with any vowel.
or
jrggr
[Bk. VIII. Cn. IV.
prevent the application of this
Ans. The
rule.
v\
exception,
implying that ^
is
Or we may take
interposition.
ut
In the kshubhnadi
4. 39.
change takes
letter,
or
as
we
there
list
generally changed to
we know from
^re*
find
after such a
as an
fragmentary
as a jriapaka, that after the letter
sf?TFT
will
% also the
place.
^SjrâwreF^fa
The
2.
a vowel, or
^,^,
position
or the
srr>
vowel-sound
change, however, does take
place in spite of such intervention of a fragment of a

the jn&paka of VIII.
this
II
^n*
ll
substitute
11
sT^-j-sTT^-wm-cssn^, ^fq
w takes the place
of j[, even
\\
when
or a guttural, or a labial, or the pre-
![
augment
3** intervenes, causing separation.
The pratyahara 3T? stands for vowels and the letters ?qî Thus
m*i% %wl, fofcnr, faftorr, f^rr, g^wr &c.
The ff means all the gutturals, e. g. 3?^% **#*, *T*for, st^N H
The 5 means all the labials, e. g. $qor, *<*<T, f$pjr, <5rwfar, îfor
The srriF means the particle 3?!": e. g. TOfalST1* from ^8 (VIII. 2. 34) fatfThe particle srr is a vowel and so included in sr? pratyaorî,(cf VIII. 4. 14).
11
Its specification in the sutra
hara.
letters occurring in the
shows that the
same word, does not apply
restriction of the rule to the

in the case of 3TI^, in
which
case the rule applies to letters separated by another word.
So
also
when
the anusv&ra separates the letters
fgvni.
e. g.
is*ffa* H
from the root fft^rr, the pi is added, because the root is \\^%
(VII. 1. 58) and ^changed to anusvSra by VIII. 3. 24. Q. Well the intervention is here by Anusvara and not w, why is then fpi taken in the sutra ?
It is
The word 5^ in
with
it.
the sutra refers to anusvara, and must be taken co-extensive
Otherwise the rule would not apply to words
Here the anusvara

anusvara.
is
Even where
there
is
an augment
The
rule will apply even
As
way, or occur singly.
come between
and T
when
3T5fc*,
See VIII.
II
|i,
but where
from hs*?
3^
it
is
these letters are combined
58 in the case of
q-
ir
not changed
%fi: ift*ft&:
here a guttural and a vowel

3.
f^rr*f
but an original
As"sr?*5TW,*Jr?33UEr from
into anusvara, the rule does not apply.
sible
like h^jt
not the substitute of the augment
in
i.
II
any pos-
e.
2 letters
11
^^n% <f<T37<*, h^ptto, sm:

^fosrafturemT. 3
^T^rTsrfaTnsTT?**
T5irrrefeuT
^kto *im\ srrfCr wlr sforsi fofa
\fa
3.
0 also, q[ is replaced by w, when the letter
II
11
11
11
11
occasioning the substitution, occurs in the

a compound, and the whole
that the
first
member
compound
is
first
member
of
Name, provided
does not end with the letter
*t R
k.
IV
VIII. Cn.
SI#W
As %vm>,
and IV.
or
4]
Change.
1653
^wr,
(a kind of antelope),
fni^Rjn'
See V.
II
4.
118
58.
1.
Why do we say "when a Name"?

Why do we say when 'not ending
Some
say, that this sutra
Observe, q^PTrf^?
the letter
in
Observe; setoff?
it"?
a fropr or a restrictive rule, and not a
is
or original enunciation, so that the substitution takes place, only
11
fai>?
when the
word is a Name, and not otherwise. A compound is one word or otpi<T7, though
composed of two or more words or q^ Therefore by VIII. 4. 11 the ^ will
always be changed into or when preceded by * or q\ But the present sutra
II
restricts its scope, to those
as not in
The
'srSftrfcefn'
^ occurs
when both
tnor
is a qjrqf,
in the 3rH:qs M
Name,
StT^
a relative term and connotes an
but there
But the
\\
affix sr^?r
So
term.
also
though
or
f^rT
?r
we cannot
in
into
?T
or,
Thus ??wq^rq^ = ^rRqi^ 'i2

(
call
*?req is
the Purvapada.
Hence
an uttara pada.
it
with
Similarly in
affix.
gFftorrqsr
:,
the Ptirvapada and are not affected by this
but by the general rule VIII.
prohibits the change of
words,
not an Appellative but a generic
tsftTiqur is
= *tf?>frinor:
both occur
II
equivalent to srqs*, and
not being a Pada,
*TTfHrTra
the words c and
is
rrf^rf
In the case of a Taddhita, there
II
no properly speaking 3rreq^
is
be changed into
will
does not apply to
It therefore,
the letters occur in the g^qf
(IV. 1.99). Here the affix ar^H"
rule,
is
gjrrf
present sutra therefore applies to those cases where the ^ or tfis in the
q^q^, and
?T
when the compound denotes
cases only,
The word
II
4.
1.
So
also the proviso relating to
it,
only
but does not prohibit the restrictive charac-
ter of this sutra.
According to
rule,
others, this sutra
and not a Niyama
equivalent to
f%csr
q^
e.
i.
rule.
is
They say
an original enunciation or a Vidhi

that the
The
In other words, SETTRqf means, a 'simple-word'.
enunciates a
new
rule for a
8tt:
otrtc or indivisible word. Hence this

The sutra should be thus divided
another.
regard to
it
So
that every rule relating to
fr%:
*r*TRqf in VIII.
we
4. 1 is
component words.
present sutra therefore
in
compound
or *ptrt,
cannot say that a compound
sutra
is
a f%T^
II
*r*TOlP5: one sutra, and

change would be debarred with
i-ojnrerH
or
intervention.
mspfiT- f^vr^r-^TTtT^T-*i d<i d s*r.

11
For
"compound-word".
there being a division of qjlqf and an Srrcqf,

is
word
a word integral and indivisible into
^qfr^rnrrmm
^tt%
3ttcto 3R3rrro( or^TTrWr *r^f%
4.
The
5T
ll
fwra flra^r
$%wj fow
s^tt
of ^r,
sirrwr
$teu
w f&tiw
qt<r>3
is
changed into
by the words puragft, mirak&,
sidhrakft,
or,
when preceded
garika,
kotard,
and
^ Change.
1654
as
agre,
members
first
compound
Bk. VIII. Co. IV.
of the compound, and the whole
a name.
is
The words ^stq^r?r and %^x^f^ of the last sutra, are to be read into this
Thus g^rro^., fa^PTJpr, fawf&ivt, *ia<M^ btspttw (II. 2. 31)
aphorism.
^rnt^fR^
the
The lengthening of the finals in the above is by VI. 3. 117. Though

word srW'T is not a Name, yet the rule VI. 3. 9, applies to it and the case-
affix
rule.
that
II
not elided, because
is
so read in Rajadantadi
it is
list (II. 2. 31).
The substitution of ^T for ?r would have taken place by the preceding

The separate enunciation of the rule with regard to the word *f, shows
this is a restrictive or faqn rule.
The ?r of
is changed into or, when
preceded by these words only and no other. Thus
^<<h
tcptkct*
RR^^:^^5^TH^n^^^^T^R?^FTrJTft
wsrefa
oistfrer^rr
*htr
compound
of g*r
is
replaced by
Name, when
not a
is
srftPTCCTffil
1^71%
II
II
The
5.
II
ikshu,
pra, nir, antar, 6ara,
it is
even when the
or,
preceded by the words
plaksha, &mra, k&rshya, khadira,
and piyukshsL
Thus
efrnsfaor*
jnr^r atCTt
^rf^^^rrn
The words
bhava
and
SH^t
arra^T*,
Rftjj are
irrr?:
The
compounds.
st*tT^w
an Avyayi-
is
compounds.
rest are Genitive
wttwht sn^M *TOr?r*rr% <T?wrf*mTnsTTWi ^f^rncw *t*m arrWr H*ra

11
sjw^raw *ft iwwi

Kdrika
ii
ffarrfw sraWr *m&i-
^r *R?<TR3r fW- 3^^^"
The ^
6.
*rr>
11
^Treir^r
art**?:
of
^r
is
?*rrr
3?rr*r
first
When
the purvapada
replaced
by
**T
tree,
11
This
a word denoting
is
and
it
is
?frw
11
member of
and which denotes a perrenial herb or a

denoting a ^rcqf% or a
r:
11
when
compound
optionally replaced by
the cause of change occurs in the
is
awr*,
*rfrrer
?rc
*$jrrat,
in the sense of a case-affix.
ff*r$ M
fairer
*wr*,
H^r"srt%^rWi ar^st,
and <fr3wnni
forest tree.
3rrqrfa
or a perenniel herb, or
has a change-producing
an optional
rule.
the
ur,
Thus
letter,
then the
?r
of
^rfaT* or TOtawi.
Bk. VIII. Cu. IV.
5^faT*or srsfPR*
nt
or rarctanrrw
Vdrt:
Cerebral Change.
Here
|*rr
and
*3#7<ir or *^fa;r
This
rrf\
names of
affafa
II
word
is
Similarly
rcrfta-
11
applies
rule
are
1655
when the
first
or
a dissyllabic
WT5WT
"
trisyllabic word. Therefore the change does not occur in 3*3TCCTi;
words
%jt^h
Vdrt: Prohibition should be stated with regard to the
As fR^r^r. faf^pR*
Though there is a distinction,
&c.
11
3WTfrT also
botanically speaking, between a
2T(nfca:-Technically speaking ^TfqfflT
without a flower, as a
and
fruit, sffafa is
fig tree
udumbara.
3Tf rs^?rrr^
11
sr^cf
II
a tree that bears fruit apparently
is
<[$r
is
a tree that bears both flower
an annual herb, that dies after the ripening of the
creepers and tubercles are called ^fcq:
ff^T;
^f and
yet in this sutra, the word ^TCqf^f includes f$T also.
\S
P^Tf
qgrjft
II
rr^?rrr%T^TTT5TTc^rfr tscttoj
The
7.
sr^, 3T^TT^
||
*r is
II
mnt
the substitute of
preceded by a word ending
in
and
fruit,
II
srffsfr >rera
when
of if^,
*t
having
3?,
in
it
it is
a letter capable
of producing the change.

Thus
^fsroT: "
Why
do we say
The word
used
Thus
fore-noon
3Tf
"
"
STTTST
in the sutra as
ending' in
^fqf^t 5TC? H
The word
after-noon
3T,
II
sr^ by
st^: in the sutra
is
the nominative case, and
in
should not be construed as the genitive of ar^, because

ted in Nominatives as,
ing takes place by
*sfr
(VII 1.
II. 2. 1,
then
".
Observe, Rq^:, 5*5:

V. 4. 88. The word 3T^ being
the rule does not apply to other words.
substituted for
is
"
in 3? " ?
ending
4. 4),
is
all
sthanins are exhibi-
*r$4 (VI 1 1.4.8),^ &c.
added the samasanta
The compound-
affix
r^
(V.
4.
91),
and 8TU substitution by V. 4. 88. The word fofffi is a Bahuvrihi compound

and not a Tatpurusha, and hence the affix ?^ does not apply to it. The
feminine sft^ is added by IV. 1. 28, there is elision of 3T of arf^ by VI. 4. 134.
srr^nrrftcrr^
1 frT:
11
11
8.
q^Tfa
11
3rrf?rr?rrHT ss<T^Tf
The
11
mw**,
rremfirRTTniTre^
if
of m^rf
compound, denoting the thing

Thus
hay-cart
$pr?<>TH
'a sugar-cart'.
first
*ptr
when
the
member
of a
ur,
carried.
*rc^jp* "a reed-cart".
?*far?"Pl
'a
'.
The
11
changed into
producing the change, occurs in the
letter,
thing which being placed on a cart
Why
vehicle
is
srrfecrici;
wr^toi mn* 3Tf?*fr
do we say
"
is
carried,
denoting the thing carried
belonging to Dakshi".
".
is
called srrf^rT H
Observe ^rf^r?"'^
" a
n Change.
1656
The word
penultimate
q*R 5:d
ffrT:
srrfT is
valid
is
11
formed by adding ?g? to
by the nipatana of
%H
qr^rft H qren*,
11
?n?
11
and lengthening of the
this sutra.
11
ttsrskfr* ^T^^rfTTRTTr^Tr^ ^rrf^^rpt T^re
11
Bk. VIII. Cm. IV.
*mm mfa
The 5T of qr* is changed into or, when it occurs

second member of a compound, the first member of
9.
as the
which contains a
pound denotes a country

The word
or a people.
formed by the
affix
?$z
III.
3.
Thus
113.
sffcTPTT
milk-drinking Usinaras'. ^rrrW: JTrîr: 'the wine-drinsfrfTCTroTT 3T?faff: "the sauvira-drinking Bahlikas".
g^r^r^r
king Prachyas'.
iTRmr
is
q-pT
^R^r: = ^fr^Tm^T'r
change; and the whole com-
letter causing
'the
&c.
Why
do we say "when denoting a country"?
Observe
$f$FTR the
drink of the Dakshis.

'1
medium
srr
fprf:
11
he words 35TR* and the
*nr
II
^rc^r
^RÔT
II
ll
II
frrcTOtfRrg'TCTCTR'l
II
Optionally when
10.
the
it is
a second
member
first
Thus
in
Similarly sffaTPT: of sffarR: ^r:
Optionally
^^R^rr
snf^^rî^^rfî^
srre^rr
II
vr^R
II
\?
11
3tR SURlf^*^ 3*fa*F&
*TR
&c
denotes a
is
'a
ur,
in
or SFSTRTnT*
are examples of >tr or condition.
vessel for
so in the case of fitfRst
or
^^rCr or *rzw%, ^raR<T**r
%\M:
of
drinking milk' This
is
an
or instrument.
example of tt*
:
q-
"drinking of milk" sffsrRqrR*
reqrtJR or $fft<TR*
'drinking of kashaya'. sj*nrrjp* or fpTTprx*
Vdrt
the .compound
changed into
*TFT
member, the cause of change occurring
a compound.
condition or an instrument, the
when
through the
?
vzffa 3T, sTTer-ânfr:
^^. tr^ts^'r^ t^jtcri irare 3rrWr h*t<t ^r ^T^^rflrmTTrf tTC**ii
msrarctinft:
^tRF*
rest are applied to persons also
of being country-names.
&c Thus
fiTfMft or
f*rft<Jl3t;
11
q^
11
JTrr%MK*ircr-3n-RrflfTf73,
11
^ % ?T^KR^ ^T^^rTff RrTr^TT^^ ?l ^^TC
*rrf%3?* u g*rr^RT
*RWr i****
"
Optionally
11.
nr
is
substituted for
?t
when
stands at the end of a Nominal-stem (Prsttipadika) or
augment
g?j or
occurs in the
is
first
is
it
the
(when the cause of change

member of the compound).
^ of a
case-affix,
Bk. VIII.
C'n. IV.
12]
ur^f^T^
Thus, to take the case a
irT^rr^'iriasha-sowing' formed by
To
effnf^TTTR
nom.
pfti%^f^^r
5*
pfti^lfrpr or
fa,
here added by VII.
is
added by VII.
3rffr sr*, the plural ftr is

'*
72 from
1.
20,
1.
and
case-termination,
f%*r^fj or
take the
irq^n^ or Himi^T, sjtr^r^T
11
The word
snftnTf|3?FrT
a pratipadika which
'final in
III. 2. 81.
11
To
or
irqr^rrqôr TTO?rMt from
first,
under
faffi
The. augment
neut.
pi.
31
1657
take the example of a ** augment *rp^r7rf*T orrmniT
qn*Pl^ T3Tf?<T = JTrw<T with

then
Change.
or
means
'final in
But here
a Pratipadika'.
a second member, of compound, the
is
it
means
mem-
first
ber containing the cause of change'. Therefore the change does not take place
= itfnTfTnft
in *T*frTi Hfitfr
derived from
T*f*TT:
meaning, "enjoying the share of Garga."
fft,
'fit
Hr*ffT-'
The word
*n^n"H'
01
ft
ed with bases that end with

affix
;ft
in
is
the word
if
to be understood to
krit-arfixes, before
affix is
is
the
final s^,
maxim
(II.
compound-
ars
fJflt : ST?
first
m^ f*<T%:
SPCT*H-R
II
with the word ending in
the krit affix, as ire^rfan. tat* + *Tfa0, a "d thus the second term
Pratipadika which ends in ^, and so the rule
*TTf-
a case termination or a feminine
has been added to the latter" TR*firc<l<m4Mi
Therefore the composition takes place
word
take place.
have a
and Upapadas
is
f^, feminine
will invariably
accordance with the following
"It should be stated that Gatis, Karakas,
19).
irT*lf*T<jft
In this case, like the
by a mother': the change
to be possessed
being added afterwards
affix
2.
But
"the sister of Garga".
'the share of Garga', with the adjectival affix
applied to
it,
when
^tf^
is
the feminine
added.
Similarly jjw
member
is
not considered as the
end portion
of
the second
of the compound, but as the end-portion of the full
compound word.
Prohibition must be stated of the words ^j &c.
Vdrt
As arra^r
133 vocalisation), STRra^Tr qwrnft is a gati-samas, ^farhjt m?*
(VI.
4.
11
iW4tK<A
TO
?*
^T^^rrsTfHTTr^T^^ ^^1^1
12.
is
I'
II
*Wft
or^frc
srrWr
II
^*fH*, ^tH!^,
*rer?r
nr:
||
In a compound, the second member of which
a monosyllable, there
is or
in the
room of ^ of
the second
member, provided that the ^ is at the end of a pratipadika,

or is the augment 3**
or occurs in a vibhakti and when the
;
first
member
Thus
milk'
and
contains a cause of change.
3^<n)r
and
sjtfTrfa 'drinkers
spRT
are
f^sTf*
'the Vritra-killer
of wine'
'.
sftrrrfa
being examples of
examples of case-terminations.
3*
"Drinkers of
VII.
3.
88, sfkpTT
Cerebral Change.
1658
Why
the letter
repeated in this sutra, while
is
or
understood from the context?
an optional
3T
'
optional
îrfir
*rent
11
<T^rft
ll
II
anuvritti
was
not
is
shows that the anuvritti of
11
In a compound, the second
13.
contains a guttural, there
is nr
anything which standing
in
to
it
14
further.
f;*rfa,
its
order to show that this
in
In fact,
rule.
and does not extend
ceases,
'
repeated
It is
but an obligatory
rule,
[Bk. VIII. Cu. IV.
cause
the change,
prsttipadika, or be the
room of *, that follows

the prior member is qualified
provided the T be at the end of a
augment
3**, or
occur in a vibhakti.
letter
of the class ^, the
As
obligatory, even though the second part be not monosyllabic.
is
srwgTn*rr,
of which
in the
second part of a compound contains a
If the
change
member
^wfmw,
^fc&rfatfrr, fsprrfa^lr
11
3* : *rw3*Trfa,
?src3Trfa u
ft*rr%
^W3T% ^g*T*T
The word ^w^f^r^t is a compound of q& with gf^ THL (the affix $fr is
added first to g*T and then the word so formed is compounded with vastra).
Thus the ^ becomes Jfrfrnff^fRT e. it becomes the final of a Nominal-stem,
which stands as a second member in a compound.
II
i.
fPfT:
II
T 3RW
STOT^T vtri&X:
Of a
14.
tion,
in
is
when
*fPTt?tITO
WOWR
root which has
comes
it
TOTC'
or
OT^TWrfSTftrn^'C^
tT^T
in its original enuncia-
a cause of such change standing
after
an upasarga, even though the word be not a sam&sa, the
changed into
trr
II
The word *fn^T means a root which

Thus wmfn he bows
with an initial ^
'
II
oTra^f:
53TT<t
'
do we say
regard to
*TrT
" after
enunciated
<TftoraRr,
in
the Dhatupatha
T^rra^:
See
I.
Observe
?
Here the word
an Upasarga"
a country without a leader'.
but a mere nipata.
4. 57,
58 and 59.
In fact,
understood, and not with regard to
Why
text,
is
'.
'
a leader
'
<rrc-
&c.
Why
W i
*r
ft
JT is
SRra??:
$T is
= WrU TR^fT
not an upasarga,
upasarga here with
II
do we say "even when it is not a compound ?" Because by conthe anuvritti of the word i^Tf which is current throughout this sub,
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
\7
vm Change.
would have been understood
division,
have applied to samasas only,

the word
this sutra also,
in
and the
we have purvapada.
only
for there
1659
rule
would
By
using
shown that the adhikara of purvapada ceases, and the

rule applies to non-compounds also where there is no ^fq^ u
Why do we say " having or in Upadesa " ? Observe JT^frT, iprff^,
For the root ^t is recited in Dhatupatha with ^
There are eight
jprf^f:
STCPTra"
is
it
ii
II
such roots ^f, *t*
figifrfr
?fff
f?5
11
11
ffar
?trx
TT^, Vf, ^*r, *,
^rfa
11
n ftg-rfiirr,
See VI.
The
when coming
after
of fi[g and
?r
65.
ll
5^^TO*reqTflrmTrriTTwi hî<^
15.
i.
orsKrcrofr *reft
jftsn"
is
changed into
an upasarga containing in
it
or,
a cause
of change.
Thus
The root f| belongs to Svadi

and takes the vikarana 5 technically 33 and the root
belongs
to Kry&di class which takes the vikarana
In the sutra the verbs are
Jôfrft', qf^rT:, jpfroTTfrr, JpSNTtT: M
class of verbs
ifi-
shown with the vikaranas
Under
affixed.
II
certain circumstances the forms of
changed from 3 to sff and ^r to ?fr, but the rule still applies,
because the substitute of an srôr vowel is like the principal. See I. I. 57.
the vikarana
is
3TTT% *t*
ff^f:
*nnt
II
?S
q^TR
II
swtfftm *&*
11
II
arpftsrcrro
3TTft,
#5
II
^rr^^^?Trr%3TnTn:ra st^to
orerreftsft
The
16.
?T
of
srrft,
the affix of the Imperative, 1st
changed into or when it follows a letter competent

to cause such a change standing in an Upasarga.
The word am^ is the termination of the Imperative. Thus Jreqn%, TPerson,
r^Tn%,
is
irarrw,
Why
if^m^
11
do we say
Observe JPTTn%
Here srrPf
TTCrrffi' H
means s?^T ^TT T3, rTTH'
According to Padamanjari, the employment of the word pht in the
sutra is redundant. For without it also 3TFPT would have meant the Imperative
affix, and not the Neuter termination, on the maxim of arsr^ 3T?<*r &c.
Moreover
is
'the Imperative'?
the neuter plural termination, and the word
noun spriTR,
in the
not an upasarga at
IT is
*w srm 'iftT-^TOT-'lRr *f**r
^15 ^
frrr*.
11
sfM mvz
II
?vsn
^tr
22
on the
maxim
3?f
f^rgTfiP jjt^-
11
ll%^^-^T-q^-q^-5-^r-^^-#^-^Tm-^Tf&-sTTT%-
Rr^rT^rr^^rr%iHTrr^TT?:^
^rrlr ?rfrr c *rrm
all,
II
^fa
^rto oT^nr^r H^rW *r? ^ TtT

rwr% *fa* %^% tkt:
*?ra ^r*3re
^g
*n"
totw
wz
i66o
The
17.
iff
is
Change.
[Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
18
the substitute of ^ of the prefix
j%,
following a cause for such change standing in an upasarga,
when
these terbs follow, gad 'to speak', nad 'to be happy',
pad 'to go*, the ghu verbs, ma 'to measure', sho

va 'to blow', dri 'to flee\
'to destroy', han 'to killVyft 'to go
psd 'to eat', vap 'to weave', vah 'to bear', Sam 'to be tranquil*,
chi 'to collect', and dih 'to anoint*.
pat
'to fall',
Thus
&,
*rfa^n%, qRf^^n^r, jrf*T^rnr, qflfa^rfa

Ishti
By
the word
taken and not the roots
VI.
i.
jfr
m in
the sutra, both verbs *rr^ and
^W
ire to
or fa or TT *&%, for they also take the form
iff
be
by
50,
The
qrrwirar
last five roots
belong to Adadi
stptototIt, TrefaromiRr
(Y6.
3.
class,
74)
The above change takes place even when the augment

As $pg*r^, qftaqiT?^
The roots mfcf &c, are exhibited in their declined form in the
Ishti:
venes..
3T? inter-
11
order to indicate that the rule does not apply to nlf

(VII. 1.6).
sr^rr?^,
^s^sr
W&
sutra, in
form of these roots
is
sq^mfrfa^Tms'Ms&rc^
ftHrer <wre srMfr
^r%
In the remaining verbs, optionally the 5f of

replaced by or, when it is preceded by an upasarga
18.
t% is
competent to cause the change; provided
that, in the original
enunciation, the ,verb has not an initial ^ or *sf, nor ends with <* R
The words ?r: and sisrnfa are understood in the sutra. The word
means verbs other than those mentioned last. Thus *ftw&fa or srftqw, *fa-
f*HfrT or stf?rf>FfRT
II-
Bk. VIII. Co. IV.
20
Change.
trr*
1661
do we say srîrir " not beginning with ^ or ^ " ? Observe jrfSf

Here there is no change.
qKM%, JTRTsTrcf?r
Why do we say bt<*PtT " not ending in V' ? Observe Jjfamfe H
Why do we say 3*ff*T " in original enunciation " ? So that the prohibiHere
tion may apply to forms like g Pre^K JTf^W?, JfPTO^RT (VIII. 2. 41).
v^n &c, do not begin with gy or ??r nor does ffr,^ end with ^ but with a (VIII.
begin with sf and *s* and
2. 41) but in the Dhatupatha the verb f> and
fa* ends with w and hence the rule will not apply. So also in jtN%ct and
Here though the verb now ends with q- by
5jnjT%$^nr from the root f%^
Why
ll
II
VIII.
36, yet in the original enunciation or Dhatupatha,
2.
ffrr:
ii
â^KwiwU^fsrfa^rreTO
ui*KK*f)r >ren*
The ?r
when preceded by
of the verb %v%
19.
Thus
2.
3T?cr:
II
sr+-B^frT=!Ti73n%
'
ends with
11
to breathe \
'
^r
is
chang-
an upasarga competent to
ed into nr,
produce the change.
see VII.
it
he breathes
<ronn%
'.
For f? augment,
76.
Ro
q^TTTT
||
st?ct:
||
The
||
changed into *jt, when it

an upasarga competent to produce the
is preceded by
change, provided it occurs at the end of a pada.
20.
of
*J
3F3C
is
'
As
which
is
final
srrqr
1 q*\%
în a pada
is
This rule
II
is
not changed into
or
11
to be understood to be equivalent to q^rnfJ,
word
is
The word
and the
ar^r-p
4.
37 sub, by
in
the sutra
rule applies
when the
in the vocative case.
According to some s^f: is taken to be a part of the last sutra, and

has the meaning of proximity
That is the ?r is changed to or, if the * is
not separated from the ^ by more than one letter. Therefore there is no
'
change
in qft
the sake of
'.
+ srfafa = T^nT%
final
q^,
in 9 5^01
II
In this view, another sr^T should be taken for
II
According to others the form

BT*a"'*
with the
Tstfafa
is
valid,
The word
jrrT is
a fsF^r formed word, and the
the Vocative Singular because of the prohibition of

place,
tion
when
is
and they do not connect
last sutra.
the îs padanta,
it
would be dropped
final
VI IK
2.
is
not elided in
in
every other
and therefore the
illustra-
given with Vocative singular, which alone satisfies the requirements of
this sutra.
1662
Rule.
oi?^
[Bk. VIII. Cii. IV.
23
^^m^rr^^^^^^r%^^rf^^^H^r^n^r^fr^: ariw *r?rft

21.
Both the * s are changed into or in the reduplicated forms of the verb 3T^[, when preceded by an upasarga
competent to cause the change.
ffrT:
ii
Thus
and so also
in the Desiderative. snfarf^rft
qtfPTFrsrft
If the
and the present
and Aorist of Jhe Causative
requires
siitra
made
rot applied here; then
+ *T + rw
snfanni,
jl
in, srrft
reduplication being
<T*rr5N?l
q^ rm 4ta*Tfi[T' R be
maxim
following dilemma
and
Here the
II
ur
affix
change of ^
we have
The
\\
we have
th$
requires reduplication,
being asiddha, the
rj\^
+ ST + ft,
and then the reduplicate

or intervenes between the cause sr and the root-^ of ft, and so this ^ would not
be changed to or
If however the above maxim be applied, we first apply the
first,
srrfSrft
ii
or^r rule, as qrfÎ
even without
If
where
is
+ *T + ft, and then reduplicate
we
And because
(See VIII. 2.
snfarfa*rft
it is
maxim
is
The
sutra
is
necessary in order
anitya or not of universal application.
anitya, that the form sri5re?|
is
evolved by reduplicating 9^
1).
^rcr<j^
ii
and we get the form
could get this form by the application of the above maxim,
the necessity of the present sutra?
to indicate that the above
ffrr:
fur;
this sutra.
arerressrN
22.
changed to
q^
**
wi^t^^r^
11
ur,
11
11
^\&sâm
ll
srofc*nf5jfaT[r3Trcra or^nc srfHr *?rft
The ?r, when preceded by sr, in the root f^;, is

when the verb is preceded by a preposition com-
petent to cause the change.

Thus sr^sft, qR^*ft, st?*r* <tR?<jpt*
Why do we say STq^TO 'when preceded by sr'? When sr is elided,
As srsrrer, qKSfRT(VI. 4. 98, and VIII. 3. 54).
the change does not take place.
Why do we say 3T<| "perceded by short 3t"? Observe qafarft an d snirft,
11
the Aorist of fs^by the affix f^nr (III. 1.60)

==
5J^tt^+ f^T?J
long
stt is
11
g^+re^s^^+fsr*
ii6) = !nttR 'he killed'.
2.
(VIII.
3.
54)
Here ^ being preceded by the
not changed.
srsft:, err
iîf*
^^RTîR^ri <r*r fr^^^gre^^rflrfaTn^jnsar
snfNfir
ffrf!
(VIII.
ll
ll
ll
23.
II
Optionally when
g*
or
*r
*rr
uichKft^tr *reft
follow,
the
of han
changed to or, when preceded by an upasarga competent

cause the change
is
to,
'.
Thus
sr^^:, trf^P, or jf^: and qftg^:, ST^T? or it??*?: tR^t: or qfi^T: II

This sutra enjoins an option in certain cases, where it would have
been obligatory by the
last rule.
Bk. VIII.
Cii. IV.
3T?rT^d
II
V*
<T^T
II
Rule.
or^
26]
3T?rTT, 3T^5T
II
1663
II
24.
The ^ preceded by short ar of the root
is
changed into or, when the root follows the upasarga sr?^, and
the word does not mean a country.
Thus 8*;^^% and srerrjoR

do we say "when not meaning
11
Why
%*p
a country sf^T?"
Observe ajH^^ft
W^TO "preceded
The phrase
read into this sutra
Why
upasarga
do we say
for the
"
short st
purposes of
by short
st^rt
Observe,
also.
"
st"
of sutra 22 ante,
See, 9T5TTTmf*T
II
The word
change, by the vartika under
or
is
to
be
antar
is
an
I.
4. 65; therefore,
The present sutra is

it would have caused the T change by VIII. 4. 22.
made, to show that the change takes place only then, when it does not mean
a country.
*nr
=*
II
3K
^tt*
II
The
25.
sRPin, <*
I!
of
5T
m^
is
II
changed to
when preceded
by the word st^t, and the word does not denote a country.
Thus
this special sutra
is
to 3T^ or for
$f%:
ll
Thia
"
for
or
tl
^?^T5T5T3M
II
Why do we say "not denoting a country"?

change would have taken place by VIII. 4. 29,
The word 3T2R is formed by fj? added
srf^r purposes.
3TnTTO3T sfRsni
Observe snrlwTr
rz
ll
II
q^rft
11
^^ftf, ^-snra^ni;
3R^RrrTI i *q$TS$f 1 31 %t{<W T^TTCTWr
Sfr%
frq%
ll
In the Chhandas,
26.
changed into
*nn%
or,
even when there

In the Veda,
is
^ of a second term is
when the prior term ends with a short 3g
an avagraha or hiatus between the two terms.
^becomes
<*,
after a
m, after which
in
Padapatha, the
word appertaining to it is divided. Thus in Pada-patha the words îrop &c,

The word 3T^pg% = Prfesrr <T5tl%, as in
are separated, and are read as 3, *PTP H
Pada-patha. se^pt^ means after a short ^ which is an avagraha
The s^
because ^ alone cannot be a
a word ending in m
here, of course, means
purvapada. The or?^ took place during sanhita, and in Pada reading this tif
*
'.
'
',
would not have remained, hence this sutra.

Why have we used the word avagraha in the sutra? Because we have
already said that the word sanhita governs all sutras of this chapter. So the
and the *t is retained, when
Sanhita state in these
?T is changed to ^ in the
>
1664
of the
The T
rule.
is
changed
of avagraha, as
it is
end of a word,
28
scope
capable of
is
which stands
it
change.
The word
into
or
is
u4h<| 1<1 is
Thus
or separation.
in the sutra indicates the
that 5 only, which
after
or
body of a word.
in the
is
to
at the end of a word (pada), and not

Thus in :jjror faf*JP,P*, the m is capable
but when it is not at the
at the end of a word ^ or fq^
can never, become avagraha, and will not produce the
avagraha, namely that

that which
[Bk VIII. Ch. IV
The word avagraha
in the state of avagraha.
qr
Change.
*r
fasr
**W-
*J
effected ordinarily then,
and the other
are in
w%m
it,
and
Here
II
when the
here, even
words
terms, one containing the cause,
For the
or conjunction.
rules like these can apply only to
exception to
The word tmn? means a hiatus

m is ar^TfT H The change of
understood here.
win,
in sanhita.
when the words
an actual hiatus between the two, the change

of VIII.
cff^rTT
ff%:
f%^
11
2.
The
T^ra
"r^rrarf^ft
*< 1
a*n
present rule
is
an
are not in *af|^r, but there

still
is
The word
takes place.
108, exerts regulating influence upto the
sin f3<it4 Torero
Sandhi and the
rules of
end of the Book.
fa farrr^rr^rî
iâi %i re
^^r%
In the Chhandas, the *T of (the Pronoun) *ro;

is changed into ur, when it comes after a root having aôri
and 5 (g)
or after the words
27.
Thus bt%
(Rig VII.
TOT**:
(Rig. VII. 32. 26) 'Teach us

srcfrrpi) Rig IV. 31.
The word
cases, of
3)-
5T?t is
stW (VIII.
1.
ll
this'.
*& 3^
15.
sn>:
3)
'O Agni
protect
^T*^ (Rig. VIII.
Ri - L
(
us',
75-
fror
% sTfar^
3T*TT*
")
36. 13).
here the pronoun ?m, which is the substitute, in certain

21) and does not mean here the ?tct substitute of îrer^TTil
In the next sutra, however, both qraâre taken. *rrg**r means 'that which exists
means the
The word
in a dhatu', namely ^ and sr when occurring in a root.
word-form 3^; and f means
sm
and
is
exhibited with q-change.
It
does not
*f33 ^
mean the affix 5 of the Locative Plural. Therefore, not here ?;fr
is by
lengthening
the
Imperative,
singular,
Person
2rd
the
is
word
The
wt
is 2nd Person
Veda.
in
the
of
sense
&yft
the
^Pf
has
root
The
rar^f
VI. 3. 135.
sg.
50.
Imperative of
In sr^TH there
^swtrsfro
28.
it
comes
after
(VI.
11
4. 102),
the visarga of*:
lengthening by VI.
is
*F
ll
The *
^n^
of
ll
3-
^wnihc,
is
is
changed to
*34: so also in
ft
by VIII.
*W* &c
:
3.
<*i^ H
changed diversely into
an upasarga having a cause of change.
or,
when
Bk. VIII. Cn. IV
Thus
place, as,
30
fry:;
ni 5>^rT*
q-
By
ot^ Rule.
im^:
force of the
word Wg&l the
not sometime take,
w^ 5^
II
The
this sutra.
word
In spnst S^ni, the
rule applies to secular literature also
Chhandaspr sacred Vedictext. Thus
word ^5^1% does not govern
4.
The change does
II
as distinguished from the
See V.
irar H
jt'TT
1665
is
means
the substitute for ^r^fJT and
'nose'.
119.
This is not the sutra as given by Panini. His sutra is 3W*rf <ji! <M<.:
:after an Upasarga, the ^ of *t$T when not preceded by or followed by an arr, is
changed into
two meanings:
that which
the
There being several objections
or''.
an amendment,
as
substituted
(1) s^rerrent
followed by
is
change would be required
case, the or
first
comes
there should be no
change
or
as well as ir:, so also
in JTon^pnNrTT
as well as iRt
JTrr
li
For.9rr?lTT:
is
In fact,
Hence the
In
objectionable.
in jpff g>^rr; in the

II
is
may have
after art; (2) arnfip;: TOS^TTil
In both cases, the rule
11
above rule
to this rule, the
the Mahabhashya.
that which
<T*:,
aft
in
we
second case,
Vedas
find in the
necessity of this
am-
ndment.
3>sre:
11
q^rft
11
29.
changed
into
or,
*r*
n stfar,
II
The ^ of a Krit affix, preceded by a vowel, is

when it follows an upasarga having the cause
of change.
The
following are the specific Krit affixes in which this change takes
place: 3?vr (3),

\ft
( ffiffi
III. 2.
*TFf
(WT^&c
78 &c
VII.
2.
82
),
<*#*,
III.
and the substitutes of ft%\
1.96)3^,
VIII.
2.
42
(III.
3.
in)
11
Thus
STT:
TOFT* qR*TFT*
bt^r
Jreifta*
fi%
H|U|t
qfrontfta*
<TR*irni
II
11
Tf^THWP*
*TR:
iTORRroTI
3tr
sTJRmor, 3T<?fom6f
II
11
totrh. H4iuwl ifanfSi* qrarf^n'

,
Long f by VI. 4. 66.

qreSr"^
Why do we say ar=er: preceded by a vowel ?' Observe ifgn:, tR^"
the Nishtha of *rsr
It is thus formed: *T? + Ttf = *T? + <T =* ST? + ^ ( VII. 2.
45,
the root ^^ is read as 33% ^rfrczi in the dhatupatha, having an indicatory a*t,
thus giving scope to the rule ). $pff + 5T = gr + sf ( VIII. 2. 30 ) = ^w
Vdrt: The word Ptf^T: should be enumerated in this place. As ftptfaSTCSP
n#K:
Tft^T:, JrCroRRC
11
'
11
II
"vium
*sptopt
11
orf%w?T
II
R?%%?*nT^r^T
30
11
q^rnr
11
II
ot:, f^r^rr^T
II
m*t Rule.
1666
The
30.
tive verb (
?j[
), is
itct?cT
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
g.
32
of a Krit- affix ordained after a causa-
when
iff,
it
comes
after
Thus 5rarW* or JTSTPT^l qfaKTir*. or <*R?tfq?P* JransRPT* or snaff^TRi

wsrTfar or 3Tw*hhm:, jrerfq^rr or jrarf^rr n
Why have we used the word f^l^T 'ordained' in explaining the sutra ?
,
irarvfoi'i or srarq^ra,
Because the change takes place, even where the 5^ affix does not follow directly
after the affix ft; where a third affix such as 33? intervenes.
As srapspTPJPl
II
The
72
<*:
being in the ablative, under the ordinary rule of interpretation
the krit
),
ti<*^ m st^to ^re^re
3rn:wnreifaTrf!rH-
A krit -affix, coming after a verb, which beand has a penultimate 5^ vowel, changconsonant
gins with a
es optionally its % which is preceded by a vowel, into iff when
31.
it
comes
after
The
phrase
or qf^TT^ni
qtjpi

3>?r*T: is
understood here.
Thus
JTcFPTOT* or
ffc^R*
TfotfN
II
Why
do we say %&: 'beginning with a consonant' ? Observe JtftJPl and

These are from ff
J^^TO. where the change is obligatory, under VIII. 4. 29.
%CT3ri and 3;? f%rT^
Why do we say f^RT?* having a penultimate f ^ vowel ? Observe
JT^TTO. and qf^q^Pl no option.
By the rule $?H*: the change was obligatory, this rule makes it op1
'
'
tional.
The *
be no change.
of the krit
See
The word
affix
must come
after a vowel, otherwise there
qR>$?T:
%W- in the sutra
should be interpreted as
II
have been useless had
*rtfH
^3*r.
meant
it
and not as
ends
it
the text would
^71%:,
For an f^T^r verb implies that
what ends in ?<$"

with a consonant, and so the employment of the word
ordinarily "after
53TTT.
will
%*>:
in
?rFrTr?i;
&
krit -affix ordained after a verb beginning
^Tft
II
VSTT;
*T3*T.
II
32.
with an
*^ vowel,
having the augment
3^
in
it,
and ending
Bk. VIII. Cn. IV.
34
Cerebral Change.
with a consonant, changes
an upasarga having in
The word &>>: of the
upon
the. construction put
its
it is
done so
in
II
%3PTO
generally
in
verbs.
it
We
72.
commence with
q^nsrorqr
from
fjig *T?nf:; the
*r*Hor* Tcr**^*
<TT?f0P,
In 3**
11
5^ is added
is
of the
here means the anusvara
VIII.
though the change would have been valid by the
4.
VIII.
Thus
because
$*.
4.
Jrejpre, qTCTJpPI
Rrffrf: in
krit-affix
from the root
affect rule
*rr*t
VIII.
explaining the sutra,
must be ordained
after
causative verbs, the krit-affix

the vowel
is
affix,
Wrf
ôt
4. 30,
II
relating to
in
order to indicate this
ordained after a vowel-ending
is
verbs,
cr^^r
for
Moreover, we have used

fact,
a consonant-ending verb.
elided after the adding of the affix.
So
that
the
that
In the case of
(
Ft
before
and
verb,
the
adding
the verb did not end in a consonant.
The
of rh T^sr and r?^ is changed to *T
when preceded by an upasarga having in it a cause
33.
optionally,
;jc
of change.
Thus
JTi^R^r or irfH^m *farcTPT or JTROT* irfaT?f^ or ffrc^T^ H

These verbs are written with or in the Dhatupatha, and therefore by
VIII. 4. 14 ante, the change of ^ into <T would have been obligatory. The
^r^r*
ii
it
optional.
The
root forfa
means
'to kiss', [%!%"
OtH, and
II
^qTflrf^TTr^Tn:^
*rf%^
present sutra makes

faff
part
it
29 ) this sutra makes a f%snr or restriction. That is,

the case of f^rrfl ^"3* verbs the change takes place, not in other fl^x*
the word
rule
because
*rar the nasal is
those verbs cannot be said to end with a consonant.
**fr
while to have
^;
apply to JFWI.
This rule does not
of the
rule will not
general rule,
only
here
the last aphorism would have been redundant.
The
root.
I.'i.
impossible for an %*ttfe root to
Thus ^nsjurn,
if^
But contrary to
means s^rrjr, by the
must interpret it so here,
understood here.
in the last sutra,
it
when preceded by
or,
the cause of change.
it
last sutra is
natural rule of construction as given in
because
into
1667
?5^y^ Torero ^^ftow *
"^rrrff TrfRrgTsresR
34.
The
?T
sr^w
*r*n%
of a krit-affix
though preceded by an upasarga having

23
is
not changed to
in it a
or,
cause of change,
1668
or
when
the affix
Change.
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
added to the following verbs:
is
mm
'to purify',
*l 'to be',
'to increase', %<r 'to shake'.
be
'to
*rr
'to shine',
is an exception to VIII. 4. 29. Thus

iptr*, qfw^rs; * jwt^, qrc>m*
* sm**, qT*q*T^
Ishtz:
The verb *>t 'is to be taken and not the verb
:
case of the latter the change
the
jr^r*
qft^qT*
*mm
wzxm^L,
qrcajraiff
of their
;f
11
JPTPPT'J,,
%mw
*tr
vtm*{*
%q
q%q^w,
In the
11
11
do not change
11
q; is
not changed
II
So
2. 14).
4.
the visarga
debarred.
is
q^cqrot
also
10
l^TRW
fasqpT'Jo
(II.
I.
The
32).
in these
( I. 4.
11
apply here,
17),
II
and thus
(*r) is
final
of a Pada: but
36.
iff
is
the
it is
not
in
rule,
= gsrfq ^
the word tj^rfqîs

final
fact,
not the substitute of the verb

in
îs changed
**
to
of a pre-
applies
to
TO
'
to
\\
<r
in 5t*t, the
The 5H ordained by VII.
qftTO:
5*7,
fprfqôr
srfq?**?
->.
when ending
When
^PR
II
II
II
*r
II.
and
45,
rule does not
member followed by another Pada. The

compounds, the ^ being final in the first term.
TTifr *tcp, TFcrer
TO*. qTRTCT H \\
^changed
41.
in
ceding
destroy \
two by VI 1 1.. 3.
Here the sf? is added by V. 4. 154.

The *r is by VIII. 3. 39. Before the affix
gq^c#r>r
(a Bahuvrihi).
a Pada
q- is
here by VIII. 3.
compound contra
qr
a genitive
Observe R<fa
a Pada'?
Observe fôrn%, S^rm H
or Locative" Tatpurusha
and does not
do we say "qni after a sr?"

do we say q^rrra/ 'final
The word q^RT is equivalent to q^ ST5<T

mean final of a Pada. Therefore the
(ins. sg.)
changed to
is
*rfqsqt?Ti. (is
debarred.
is
Why
Why
UTO,
qKu*H*
qftfq^
in the Causative,
qftHnrr*
11
l!
II
After a J final in a Pada, the
rule VIII. 4. 29
VIII.
As
krit-affix.
Thus
The
11
The above roots, even when
35.
to
obligatory, as, qqôif
is
sffftr
Vdrt\
36
brilliant', itht 'to go', <srrfa
This rule
5.
by VIII.
I.
qr
60,
of
?Ttf is
is
not changed.
by VI.
elided
4. 24,
Thus
and
2. 36.
The word QTnT is

Why do we say TOR*? Observe !TTOf?r, qfrr^fa
taken in order that the prohibition may apply to words like jpnf$sim\ which
did end with w though the q has been changed by other rules, and is no longer
For here the W of îs changed to w by VIII. 2. 36, and then this *
visible.
II
is
changed to
by VIII.
2.
41
and the 3*
is
added by VII.
I.
60.
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
q^T?cT^
svs
II
40
Of
11
fSTP*, g$TP*,
q^T^r^FT
trrfrT^'j
q^rft
11
37.
Thus
3q
II
of
?T
q^rerpr
ll
final in a
9T^,
flrfh*
<TTTR
II
1669
II
Pada,
not the substitute.
or is
11
q^S^r^, ^fa
II
q^^
T^qTr^f srrrecrsm
Change.
II
not changed to m when a Pada

g;
intervenes between the cause of the change and the word
containing the *
The word <T$sq?rq is a compound meaning q^ eqqra separated by a
Pada'. Thus qr^^^rq^, ^r<j?:j^r*t*r, JTrero*, qwrei, Jnrrsrapr-, qfdrfrariMi
The
38.
is
II
'
Here the Padas
s?^,
|T,
&c,
8T3"
intervening,
the change does not take
when
is
place.
Vdrt:
except
^Knrwr
should be stated
It
there
by a Pada,
separation
Prohibition does not apply to words like
a Taddhita.
in
STrjfifFTOsr,
Here iff takes the affix ra^ by IV. 3. 145, and the word iff is a
Pada by I. 4. 17, and it intervenes between *ra and the first word. The author
of Mahabhashya however does not approve of this Vartika. According to
him the word q^r^ra means q^ s^ra
11
11
3j**rrf^3 ^r
3*>
ll
11
q^ rr%
The m
39.
^^3, ^
11
11
not the substitute of
is
in the
words
kshubhna &c.
The not
of sutra 34
'
'
is
in gwftrP, $J>^fcr, the substitutes
So
of
sp^r
being like the principal
where the change was called
jpresf:
Thus
to be read into this.
by VIII.
for
j*?rfrH>
I.
I.
4. 3,
so also
57.
and VIII.
4. 26.
ff^t.,
name,
T'^T and
as, *ft?r?#,
and
ST15T
when second members
ff^fsr:, fanTTTO
The word
9*3.
*rrr*
^fa
^ when
as second terms in a
^^
which required change by VIII.
4. 3.
All these are
S*h$:
After the word srr^TO there

fftsfir, f%f*TC,
change
in the
?r
of
wftt, %jft*
?pt
and
is
^rc
^,
as,
strr^r% H
n^T, 5T?^, fa%3T,
compound.
wRWP,
TO^nrrsr, $rcrf?r,
a compound, denoting a
ll
taking the Intensive affix
also belongs to this class.
when used
in
So qrdr^PT contrary
when the compound
cfijfc
is
8TW
to VIII.
4.
14.
Names.
no change,
and
ft^TST,
As, qf^r&ro, qftn^R,
as,
srreRfhfft
:
,
STT^raFft U
followed .by s& do not cause
Name.
This
is
an
STrfJT^nJT:
II
Palatal Change.
1670
12 spfT, 13
14
f?r%^r,
*r srr^r4>T>ffa: (arrerahft). rr, 25
28
r^RT,
^s?pT?r, ft%*T,
TOrsrer.
f#,
sft^r,
^:
^ *Sh ^1*T
^^
^5,
%*, ?fl srek.
q^TR
IT
*nraf%, 17
trfar<friT,
41
18
^fai, 24 STT^r^rf^^
^^, 27
26 tou*, ?r;^-
^?Wr,
ffrffitf,
30 tfistitft *RrTrwrft
*Tf5R*r<*r.
*:, *^rr, ^5:
ll
||
and the dentals when coming in

changed to ^r and palatals
letters ^*
and the
Bk. VIII. Cu. IV.
TOfSpTTCn, 22 TOfa:, 23
3t^t, srr^vffifpr, 29
The
40.
contact with
arfsr,
sr*fk,
II
^^tH^R
15 srfa, 16 st^t,
fSfrrer,
qfaT^*, 19 <rf^T*, 20 ?[RR^:, 21
palatals, are
respectively.
5^rr
The rule of iftrrcfr&f does not apply

The sr in contact with ?T is changed
11
in contact with letters of
with
or a letter of
?r
sr
2nd.
3rd.
4th.
contact with
by
to
sr
VIII.
II
The
class.
changed to
w = f^T^%,
5T,
so also
^:as, f^$ M%%^ = fsrfsPTrtt,
rule of qtmnra,
and 5
to
e^p%^
11
<Wf*nfrr%, ?*T*OTII
$ttct
So
5th.
qnapTT
ST and 5
as, f$T?r
*r is
part *rff
first
changed when
coming in con fact
also so
VIII.
4. 53,
and ^ obtained by
2. 3.
it is
3 with sr: 3TF?Tr%?l + %% = 3TF^f% 52^T, so ^rT^5#^

5 with^: 3Tr^r%?t+r^^rrW = ^r^r^r ^t%'frt%, so also ^m^pq^rft,
5^^
here;
but
11
9TT^, W^HT^STn;:, ^mg^5reiTC

to
^r
are changed to
contact with w-
*f in
c^r^r^fgr
*snr,
to
Similarly letters of ?r class
class.
class,
however, applies to the substitutes, namely

1st. sr in
here with regard to
also from
q-?jrre
sffSf
ll
*r^[ rule
we have
followed by rHKK:
this
is
3- is
and
is
enough
is
changed
changed to a palatal
not considered asiddha here.
i.
e.
See
î^rfa U
as, ?T3r
+ ?r
(1
1 1. 3.
l=^
9o) = 1 :3r + 3
In fact the instrumental case $^rr shows that
with
Similarly t*h gij'es WS(fa, the
and then
^T^+T
the mere contact of
to induce the change, whether *g
is
followed
Other examples of mere contact are

by ^%, or ^f be followed by *$j
= 'i** + ST + ra (III.
into *r:as, sj^ +
changed
5th.(a) ^followed by îs
=
Similarly Jtfir
=
+ T%=(VIII. 4. 53)
I. 77, VI. 1. i6)-^F5T +
forms HSrm, 5T** forms \ vrfn
The aphorism ^TT^ ( VII I. 4. 44) which prohibits the change of 5 into
^ when following the letter 5T, indicates by implication that the rule of mutual
:
11
m
^^%
R ^^
ll
correspondence according to the order of enumeration
good
(I. 3.
10) does
not hold
here.
Had
the sutra been s^r
s*f:
^:
i.
e.
instead
of instrumental, had there
been the locative case, then the rule would not have applied to cases covered
by the
fifth clause.
|?rr 5: n
*\
T^rrft h ott,
11
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
The
41.
Palatal CHANGE.
43I
letters ^;
changed into
cerebrals, are
The word
q*
and dentals in contact with Vaud

and cerebrals respectively.
to be read into the sutra.
is
?^r:
1671
Here
also there
is
absence
of mutual correspondence according to the order of enumeration,

(i) ST with
(2)
with
(3
with
2nd per
fSTW + tq^-g-^sr^qT^;
as,
5, as,
q-
as
f^
^+
c^st^T
+ 3?fa% = f$Tfar?r,
= qCT,*<T?*,
^r
11
c^p?^
l^T^TMC:,
qg**,
11
(Atmane, Aorist
$tfteP
f>*fte,
and Cr^g^T*:
dual).
(4)
BTfm^Tf
q"
with
^fm^+^% = ^f^?fa%,
as,
5,
tfta, srnrprcfr^r, Brorf*r>nrarc,
The
^m?^to%, *im*tzzmt-,
^frous?^*:, trra3*tf*:, sfrâWtf, ^ff*r-
root sr?J* 9Tra*irc*nlMfP, and sr^T 3TPT*T*r,
are read in the Dhatuin

order
penultimate,
that
when
the affix f^pr is added
and
?J
elided
by
being
rule,
and
the
?
derivatives will be
T
*rar*TRT
to them, the final
Another reason is that the sutra VI. 1.3,
srq[ and a* ending in ?J and
patha with
II
should apply to their reduplicate.
STfTR and sr^TRT

?T
y 5 iirdire*pc
*rf%37*
11
In these roots the
q and *
are changed, as
"
11
T^rfa
11
11
*,
t^t^rc,
**:,
9T'u*^m ;T*rci'Trfam *Rfîw

After ,5 final in a Pada,
42.
vtmm
II
dental (sg) to a cerebral
the case of the affix
*fTt
the change
of a
does not take place, except in
(t|),
II
Thus ^^+srro=**?^TO *nfo*mSr, ^rr^?T^r, Tgf^rmlr

Why do we say q^RTTfl 'final in a Pada'? Observe j^+%f^+>
11
=fc*
II
Why
Why
do we say i\ 'after 5'? Observe *rf^r-r-rPT* = gf te*T^

do we say STTR except in the case of the affix nam
:
'
^+?ffw = qTiTafr*r
Vdrt:
11
It
This exception
is
should be stated rather that
r: fa
ff%?
11
II
and qomnrO six

'
T^rfr
II
?refai *rerre
*&* *&
when
II
afc, fa
Observe
ml{
and
sfirft
as well as
As, ôrr* 'of
m%
six',
'.
11
is
not a cerebral subs-
follows.
The word ^
farFFT
cities
In the room of g there
43.
titute,
ll
**f?r
very inadequate. Hence the following
are not prevented from undergoing the cerebral change.

qwjf^nf ninety-six,
n
'
is
to be read into the aphorism.
WIT'T, T?T^T
II
As,
srf?Tr%?i
4-
*rnr
*rfa-
Reduplication.
'6j2
srr^
**
11
wft
11
*rr
Thus,
4. 40.
47
there
is
not a palatal substi-
precedes.
5T
The words
VIII.
11
room of g
Id the
44.
when
tute,
^n*
[Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
and
?r
are understood here.
^r:
(HI.
JT53- u;t
9o)-JT?r +
3.
fr
This
(VI.
an exception to
is
i9)=snrs,
4.
fw &c
11
ff^T:
11
3*: q?r;rT^ri?Trr^% <TRr ^Trrcrerftsft
*rf%ira[
11
**ir
rst^r sjffigw
In the room of a qr letter (every consonant
in a Pada, when a Nasal follows, there is op-
3^3^11%% jtcr *rrt

45.
except 5
final)
tionally a Nasal substitute.
The word q^Rf is understood here. Thus ^ra? + rc*R = 3T SRR or rr^RR, STrRHH/RR or BTfRf^q-raR, fBfprvRR or faf5RR, ^RlfRR or
Why do we say 'final in a Pada'? Observe, % + R=%f*ni Here
W^R
there
When
Vdtt
is
So
no option.
is
s^rR
also
it is
II
a pratyaya or affix that follows, the nasalisation
Thus 3 r a + TT'R=^T1 *IR 1*,

R and *TR that the change is
obligatory in the secular language.
It
is,
however, only before the affixes
and not before every
affix
3?% T^r^f
it
11
RT^TRI
II
obligatory,
beginning with a nasal.*
<^ri%
11
There
46.
II
11
sr^r:,
*^n*rr,
reduplication of ^T
is
tl
i.
e. all
the con-
sonants except ^, after the letters T and 5 following a vowel.

The word 2*T of last sutra is understood here. According to others,
Thus srgf:, H&, w^RT,
the qr is also understood, and this is an optional rule.
Why
3T?n%
im:
*r
11*
11
bt=^
f%^*T
II
93T
II
do we say sr^
II
VS
3ttcr
II
arcr
following a vowel
'
qP3(TT%
II
% n^r s^n* tr:
W\ HW % >T?R fR ^=rfiS3R
TO* *SRr f >RrT f
47.
duplication
of
3?f%,
3T^[,
'
Observe 33%, gR*lR
R ?r*K^w
When a
vowel does not follow, there
**t
the
^To
(all
II
3R^R ^ *TC
5 *?R:
?R ^f^*
consonants except K),
vowel.
The words
II
II
srep and uj: are understood here.
is
re-
after a
BK. VIII. CH. IV
Kl DUPLICATION.
50]
Thus ffa + *T* = ?^+sp* (VI.

=
53) TOP*, so also *i^r
I.
77)
1673
^^+*^
*W+r*
(VIII.
4.
11
Why
do we say
F<??/:
ôfr TW $
pratyahara
w-
taking
after
Vdrt
1st
5 H^cP
This
11
** ?rer
is
% >TW
<pre*T
u ^rar ft rrfar: sift
11
fr^srf?
be interpreted
"
as genitive.
^^T,
The
"
The
sn^JfRf:
letters
in
two
of the
letters
Secondly
II
are reduplicated
also similarly explained in
is
two
after a sibilant for ^jr letters",
*jra letters,
reduplication of a sibilant (^letters), after
11
There
ll
q *?,
?\î, c*r^F,
These reduplications are
5m%5*n^
may
As
Observe RWdH., HRH,
11
reduplication of
is
?<*m: 3TC*rcn
Pause ensues.
^:
ablative.
^rccq?, *P>'nn*
3T^mr%
Vdrt:
and
and TO: as
Î^t
"There
letters, ss,
"
This Vartika
il
HTTrT. Secondly. 'There
**,qrsr,
JS\
As
m'
reduplicated after an* letters."
are
".
H^rT:
as ablative
as genitive,
letters
**?[
ways.
as
3^
First taking
ways.
sr^r " after a vowel
rfc^
reduplication of
is
jr
when a
&c.
curiosities, rather
q^rft
than practicalities.
sm^r,
srrefTsr,
j^^t
11
There is not reduplication of the letters of

'putra', when the word adini follows, the sense being that of
48.
reviling or cursing.
This debars the reduplication required by the
^rrff^r
word
^Rl Tr? " O
^nfl'ft
cribed,
place.
is
sinful
Thus g^rfHf
is
not used as an abuse or
5 3isfr
'
11
So
'.
11
is
followed by g^rft^t
Optionally so when the words
^W^t
Vdrt:
letters
the reduplication takes
II
As
<j^
%m\z j\ ^*rf%
also tprffarfHr n
Vdrt:
or jwfrft,
arn^f^T,
a kind of tigress, that eats up her young ones
Vdrt : So also when 3^

qft
last sutra.
Thus
own son ". Here the
But when a fact is des-
thou art eater of thy
used simply as an abusive epithet.
and the word
fîU*nffr ^reft
one
of
or gffîr
According
^^
and
5F>* follow.
As
*?tf:
to the
option
sibilant (a letter of
becomes
3^T?rft
II
of
Acharya
Paushkarasadi, the
pratyahara are replaced by the second letters of their
when followed by a
As
frf
sr*r*T:
class,
^pratyahara).
STSTC*
becomes sr^H and ar<T^ becomes
Softening
i6;4
5TC!T%
U
tfW'
(srr),
II
WHT
[Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
q^T% ST*:, 3TT%

f f TOP
Tli ere are not two in the
49.
**-
II
II
<?*??T
when
54
II
room of a
sibilant
a vowel follows.
The word ^r is to be read into the siitra. This debars the application
Thus s&$f?f, ^f?T, 3TRi<T 3T$mf:
Why do we say srf^r when a vowel follows ? Observe f^^^
of rule 46 ante.
II
>
II
'
fSmq/ fo g sipfsfr^t
11
^rrc
11
11
nrsP2T%$,
^rârr^^T
ll
According to the option of S&kat&yana, the

50.
doublirg does not take place when the conjunct consonants
are three or more in number.
As
fif:',
*FS-, 3g:, KX%H,
^k^ 3TT*?<arer
f f^P
II
^Pfi^âfel
*il
ll
*rg*
<jtti%
11
II
11
13k?, 3n<*4iCT
11
SOT f^^t T *T^

According to the opinion of Sakalya, there
*TrpT
51.
is
reduplication no where.
;frdr^'*rafrirra: u
ff^FT-.
ii
>T^f?T
11
frak;, anrcOTfarac
ll
opinio'n of all Teachers, there
no doubling after a long vowel.

As *tto, tht*, g**, 15*
srar
^frf:
of
According to the
52.
is
q^rfa
11
SN?s*TTOir*TrafaTi 'KPT
II
snw%
*%ift
ll
11
srant, mix,
%fa
ll
5F5T wft sr^nw >rem frrli ror:

In the room of ^r^ letters, there
53.
I
when
5TCT letters,
mute letter
sonant mute follows it.
This
is
npn#r
do we
î
11
54.
changed to a sonant non-aspirate mute, when a
wjwi*
say
V*
fjra,
11
JThe
'
ft**TT,
when a jhas
*TTft
^r
ft*!*,
is
fr*W*
follows
n anRrrc*,
*r,
'
*r
sir^r,
also the substitute
non
Ô
the substitute of a
Mute
letter.
Thus pp+
*&**%
11
^T:
II
11
of
5^
letters
srerjl
( *^0 as well as a surd

By applying the rule of
In a reduplicate syllable, a sonant non-aspirate

is
afr^*,
Observe ^rV, VW'-
occuring in a reduplicate syllable, as well as

aspirate
substitution
the well-known rule of softening the hard letters.
flr=pjs^, so also ass*,
Why
is
is
^hst letters follow.
BR. VIII.
IV
Cii.
'nearest in place
titute of
all
57
(I. i. 50),
become
aspirate letters
the sutra by the word
Thus
the 13
find that sonant non-aspirate
the substitute of
is
to
ftrrorRr,
the subs-
has been drawn into
sr^r
f%n^rRr, ffy^nr^Rr, RSTtffa,
As,
faTT^r^fsFTft,
11
*T^ (non-aspirate surd) in the original,
is
course unchanged.
fû%q%, RRfWsfr
f^pEftisrfrr,
it
will
remain of
The original *t^t also remains unchanged. Thus

Or to be more accurate a
is replaced by a
fsrsrfaqf^r, f^^r, ftr,
II
is
In other words
Here *p* (Desiderative), is added to the root ^,

by VII. 4. 62, and this, aspirate g* is now changed to
sy
ifh%*r%
If there
fs^T
The word
non-aspirate.
(*R[)
surds.
all
also
'
non-aspirate by the present sutra.
I ^Rr,
iCy$
f*n3f*TOft H
changed
is
we
and
sonants;
all
-^ CiiaX'.k.
and a
*f5T
by a
5TCT letter.
^11 XX
*srft
ff%:
<f^rr%
II
^rft,
II
^ <rem snri row *r*flr

In the room
55.
when *?T follows.
A sonant non-aspirate mute
11
^r,
^ft
11
of
is
there
^rar,
the substitute
is
when a surd
the substitute of a mute,
The words
and <m: are supplied from the last

Thus
+ ?rr = *tTT, ^Jr STrnsrer
sutra.
S3* + 3% = 33^1% STrre^* 3Trf^q%
is added by VII. 4. 54, in the room of 3T of ^t and ^w,
from or and fjw, the
and we have fo*H and fm^ then the first *T is elided by VIII. 2. 29.
mute
or a sibilant follows.
en^rer^
ffrf:
II
fHT
56.
The
may
VIII.
2.
39,
srr,
that occurs in a Pause.

The words *rai '^ is
By
stand as
Pause.
11
arofs
'TOW
>T^T^
understood
in the sutra.
a Pause
final in
m*
may
or qtn,, ?*3? or ^*t
sonant or a surd
x^
11
also stand as the final,
w*f
*xf?s^ or
v^jfa
The anun&sika
of an snu vowel
which occurs
f^TfT.
or
*rcfilr
in
This
there
is
^3^1%^:
11
optionally
is
when
f%rg;ir u
s^:, srenzfra,
3TO*5TO^h%pt ^%*n% ^r^rrcr^tfr

57.
?rer
but not an aspirate consonant.
a non-aspirate sonant can only stand in a final position.
wfonifre'ngsnftrar.
%tw-
II
optionally the substitute of a
is
ordains that a non-aspirate surd
Thus
snroft
STTOR TO^fTRT %&\ IT
<*rrr% H
ll
^ftfrT *TtT%
non-aspirate
x*
11
fT^f
Pause,
the
and
substitute
is
not a
Pragrihya.
T, f and s, short and long, may, when final in a Pause, be pronounced
as nasals, provided that they are not Pragrihya (I. I.
&c. ) The btw here
24
Semi-Vowel Change.
1676
Pratyahara with the
is
or frerft
first
q^
11
Thus
[Bk. VIII. Cji. IV.
or ffa,
sf>f
or
>rf
60
fFTtff
*nj,
II
Why
Why
do we say of an bt^t vowel ? " Observe, g>3, %

do we say which is not a pragrihya ? Observe
pragrihya
by I. 1. II.
are
'
'
In the room of anusvftra, when
58.
letter
11
'
Homogeneous with the
latter
is
Thus
sfssrrrr,
f^rrr,
srffrn",
are from roots
^fl^srfftT^,
33%,
*nr37 STfTOPS:, srfsS"
stt^t,
^r* which
follows, a
*r*r
substituted.
^?f^, ^1%
?f?rc
&c
These
Here 3^ is
zfifam
?rfc?rTr,
*r^jr,
*^%
II
added because they are gri%ft and tms 1 becomes anusvara by VIII. 3. 24,
and this anusvara is changed to 3* when followed by a guttural 3 &c, to 11
when followed by a palatal q- &c, and so on to 04, ^ and *
Why do we say when qa follows ? Observe srr^^[%, srrp?3F*3%
In ff^r%, f*n%, the * is not changed into <*, though required by VIII.
is
11
11
'
4. 2.
the
*{
Because the W% is asiddha, and therefore by the prior rule VIII. 3. 24,
That anusvara is again
is first changed into anusvara (VIII. 2. 1).
changed into H by the present

change again being
srf^RT as if
never substituted for *

err
T^T^*
ll
is
11
11
X*- H
substitution
q^rft
*rr,
11
tofcpct
11
in
final
of a letter homogeneous
with
a Pada,
the latter
optional.
Thus S
**T*gws^frqr
cftffe
II
5fi?T
follows,
f^TSt
^TJTPT
W**T 35*TS*tft<t
or rTf qT3^^Tô^^
II
^TM
II
fe
cff:,
II
In the room of g (a dental) when the
one homogeneous with the latter
is
letter
substituted.
srfaf^ft + ssrrt% = 3Tfap*^Frrfrr, <JiH^rfa

wnn+ gmfrr = h#sHere ?f has been changed to pure ?*, while the dento-nasal
TsN^nfa
Thus
sJ^TTfa,
R ^^:
11
60.
55
rule, * being homogeneous with ^

This
had never taken place (VIII. 2. 1), the or is
In the room of anusvara
59.
the
it
ll
H is changed
to a nasal
**: ^rew^ft: ^tft

SFrP U
^ TrTOt: WT
ll
ll
$?
ll
***** f^Trf^r:
q^rr%
ll
q^rWtWt
s*:,
v^r^
*=n*ft:,
qlrer
ll
Bk. VIII. Cn. IV.
64
Consonantal Change.
the prior
(See
stît^*,
Why
s^mssj*
So
may
form
WP$t
*trr
In the Vedas,
of *5F\ preceded by 3^
Vdrt
So
11
*Tnrr
(VIII.
4.
also with *cTt,
II
6s)^H-nmr (VIII. 4.
^fr^r, 3^**3* &c.
as,
54).
do we say of
Vdrt:
this
substituted for this ^")
is
of stha and
*r
a letter belonging to the class of
is
^ + **jTrrr=3T + *Trar=3T +
67 and
1.
I.
a dental
(i. e.
As
= îrrrrr,
55)
room of the
After ^5, in the
61.
stambha, the substitute
1677
and
Compare
^T*>t
As, sr^ $*3^P^5
when
also
means a
it
II
^m
II
As
*fF%,
Mute) there
is
ÛJ
SOT, *:, eTOcTCCTTO
II
optionally a
^r^FFT^RT
and not *^f?
In the room of the letter
62.
11
disease.
have been derived from the root
it*r&&UK
3rtrrrr
the above substitution takes place in the case
Or
II
H
II
after
^,
*l*r>
(a sonant
homogeneous with the
letter
prior.
The pratyahara
But practically sonant Mutes
51^ includes all Mutes.
are only taken here.
As qr* + ^rf^ - *T**rara

faf*
*srr%,
vr^ri%
Why
**mr
or ?rpT s*Tf%, vrffe igqfa or
or ^sfw, ott&s: to[1t or
do we say
^pj: 'after
#*?
TOrTWlTW
^rf% -ffi
:
11
II
there
is
or
a sonant Mute?'
Observe vn? ?OT3,
wj,
*nR5%
II
V; W;
&fe
^^*rftfrr
^frs**
In the room of
sr
optionally the letter
follows such
Though
The words
<T^Tft
II
63.
*5
II
-n"
$ra
means
all
Mutes, the
rule,
^pj and sr^TrTCPTT are to be read
or qft
11
preceded by a surd Mute,

when a vowel or q", ^ or *:
srfsrf^re^w or arnrf^Ji
srar,
however, applies to surd mutes.
**&%
*r% or 55%, ft? <t^ or tr%
It should rather be stated when a letter

The sutra only gives 9T? letters, the vartika adds
nasals.
Thus
**5rsfe^*F5, 5^r%^T, rT^*T^Tr
Vdrt:
11
*****
^ftr
$frr.
11
*&
11
q^rft
sw Trft^r 3tt gfa T^r ^ffr h^rt
11
the letters
s^:, *nrn^ *tm,
s-R3rrc*3R
^=i
11
of sr^ pratyahara
II
rT?J[
5^r
Thus qr^ +
the sutra.
into
follows.
^;f>r
^Mî tort
11
5l*#fe
the
^ft,
?^f?r
\w
II
*y,
and
Elision.
1678
nasal
follow
elided
is
The word
when the
optionally,
same
letters
Thus ^^ff or
arar^T^r* should be read into the sutra.
middle
being elided. In
ar
^rcsn"
there are two qs, one of the affix
and the second of ar^f7 (VII. 4. 22), and the third arises
99)
doubling (VIII. 4.47). arrT^cq (formed by doublings by the Vartika
(III.
33l<i
by
under 47
(IV.
1.
there
is
3.
ante), or arrf^T
85),
son of Aditi
'
and the second
Similarly
a third
Why
srrflST
both the middle
53^
65
it.
the
STcgr,
g.
After a consonant, the following semi-vowel
64.
or
Bk. VIII. Ch. IV.
^RTF 3TO?
as 3rr?3aai
Thus
3's.
do we say
*?rr?ft
Here
11
In arrival
'
<Trercar=aTTf^ssj:
we may
also
3rrf?9P or arrffcsg:
Then by VIII.
II
4.
47,
one middle n or
elide the
II
preceded by a consonant
^?j:
there are two qs one of 05^
by doubling.
arises
'
Observe
when
srspr
preceded by a vowel.
is
Why
where
*f is
do we say
not a 3* n
Why
followed by a
do we say
ii
^flf "
when
follows
spr
Observe
" ?
ST'Tr%:, te4it
Observe
srr^g;
here
(V.
25)
4.
not
is
11
$rcr srrc *renf n

trrr.-
sprr^ " of spr letters "
%v ZTtim ^tr
$x
65.
q^Tj%
m%
%tf$
Mute
^^r
inc., ^rft,
11
<re^r $ivt
w% ar^c^r^
11
'
or Sibilant (sjt) preceded
sonant and followed by a homogeneous mute or
by a consibilant, is
optionally elided.
The word
one
%&-. is
substituted for
rT
of 3 to
rf
4.
here are four ^s.
47) the word
Why
The
Jl
full
j^ being treated
do we say
The word
word
is
%%-.
as
fro<T5**3.
rT
fifa
stands
q^PT*^
change
fourth arises
may
by
be dropped.
rule,
rfj
4.
ll
'
Compare w^, here |F which is not a

by a 3^ letter. Why do we say ^R
follwed
is
namely,
^,
resulting from the
be added by doubling, and by this
elided.
of a jhar
it
the a?
q;
This
first in
and then this

ceded by a ^letter, and itself is
have
ST^ri* have three
second
*f^+^T + = T^+^-t-^ (VII.

an Upasarga (I. 4. 59, vart) = ^rTTT
followed by a jhar'? See fsRT^r*^:
T^PESJ
stc|jTt,
that of the affix.
is
may
fifth
them may be
not elided, though
is
third
Thus
47, the
4.
47) of these four, one or two middle ones
one, two or three of
by VII.
by <^| change, the
doubling (VIII.
T^lrT
understood.
3rr
the
is
is
elided
becomes a
a Bahuvrihi
compound under
and
is
compound = fsrar
II.
2.
35. {y&rtX
and we
134,
Here *^ is prefollowed by a homogeneous
by VI.
palatal s^
4.
11
Cii. IV.
Bk. VIII.
but as
letter 31,
3i
67
Accent.
not $tt, the
is
sidered sthanivat, and so ^r
is
is
1679
The
not elided.
elided or
is
not con-
considered to be immediately followed by
3J
11
Why
do we say w&l 'when a homogeneous jhar follows'? Observe

Hcj. rTH'T &c, where * and fj are not homogeneous.
By using the word snfnf, the rule of mutual correspondence (I. 3. 10)
is avoided.
Had the rule been fjfr fjft'the wle of mutual correspondence
according to order of enumeration would have applied, and the forms faf**
faf*? could not
have been evolved by the
Imperative 2nd Person Singular of
in
elision
of
commentary under
evolution of these forms see the
and
rercr
fa^r
11
before S
I.
The
sr
For the
These are the
58.
1.
of
11
is
*t*t
elided
by
changed to fa by VI. 4. 101, the q; is changed to ^ by

VIII. 4. 53, the sôf ?r*is changed to anusvara by VIII. 3. 24 this anusvara
the ^ is changed to s, and by the preis again changed to qr.by VIII. 4. 58
VI.
4.
the
f?
is
sent rule, the preceding
ff%:
ii
is
elided before this 3
^frrrr^TiT^r^rTT^ PrirrrrWr
The
66.
**rf?r
Svarita
is
II
the substitute of an Anudatta
vowel which follows an Udatta vowel.
&
Here f which was qt^TtT by rule VII 1. 1. 28,

- srfsHt%
Thus stt*P+
becomes svarita by the present rule, as it comes after the udatta f of agni.
Here qsj is added by IV. I. 105, and being fsyij
So also ^r^:, ?FW
the words are first acute. 1 he final is anudatta, which becomes svarita. So
II
II
an d ft^> tne *T* anc*
also <hfr%
of
^tt
becomes
The
because
are anudatta, the root
is
accented, the sr
svarita.
rule VI.
for the
1.
158, does not
purposes of that
not taken place (VIII.
2.
1).
change
rule, the
this svarita
present rule
is
Into an
Anudatta,
arftre, or as if it
had
Therefore both the udatta and the svarita
accent are heard.
$\%
JEFT
II
ti
wi <di
SSTtfr^:
^ unnrorwr' ir^Rin
= SfTTTT^
^vs
11
t^tt%
11
^,
g^rTr-
All prohibit the above substitution of svarita,
67
except the
11
AcMry&s Gargya, K&syapa and G&lava
when an
ud&tta or a svarita follows the amidst tta.

This debars the preceding
an Udatta
is
3^^:
or ^SHT^:
rule.
II
That anudatta which
The word x^q means
is
followed by
qr in the termino-
That anudatta which is followed by a svarita

These are Bahuviihi compounds. Thus ??nfr?q:
logy of ancient Grammarians.

is
called ^rc<rr^:
|i
-w*$-
l68
Accent.
^f, |r ^5
mJ
The word fa
is first
the q of these words does not
^?:
37
The word
II
is
fj
Why
do we say
formed by the
According
II
68
before this udatta,
So with
**rTCfr^: -itt*?: 3?
affix 3Tq[ (V. 3. ~\2)\
svarita.
the opinion of Gargya,
in
in**^
3t,
f%?[ accent,
svarita.
^ does not become
except
"
Galava"? Observe itp^:

change does take place.
acute by
become
svarita being-
before this svarita the preceding
[Bk VIII. Ch. IV
Kasyapa and
to their opinion,
the svarita
The employment
of the longer word *i& instead of the shorter word

sake of auspiciousness, for the Book has approached the end.
The
very utterance of the word 3?* is auspicious. All sacred works commence
with an auspicious word, have an auspicious word in the middle, and end with
<tt is
for the
an auspicious word. Thus Panini commences

Sfc: 'increase' (in Sutra
middle (IV.
4. 143),
and
The mention
I.
^j at
his sutra with the auspicious
has the word faq 'the well-wisher'
1):
1.
word
in the
the end.
of the names of those several Acharyas
is
for the
sake
of showing respect (pujartham).

3T 3T
%m
II
The
68.
(f^f<r) in all
trcCIT%
II
II
3T, 3T,
ST%
II
which was
s?
considered
the preceding operations of this
made
contracted (^ffcT)
The first qt is here frfrT or open
the second
The open sr is now changed to contracted st u " In
to
open
be
Grammar,
is
now
II
is
the enunciation of the short a?
contracted
is
but
^^
or contracted.
actual use the organ in
it is
considered to be open
when the vowel ar is in the state of

some operation of Grammar. The reason for this is, that if the
only, as in the case of the other vowels,
taking part
in
short 3? were held to differ from the long

ness mentioned in
operation of
debarred.
the
I.
1.
9,
rules
arr in this respect, the homogeneouswould not be found to exist between them, and the
depending upon that homogeneousness would be
In order to restore the short ar to
throughout the Ashtadhyayi,
aphorism gives the injunction

T
be held to have
natural rights, thus infringed
Panini with oracular brevity

ar ST
which
is
in
which
it
in
interpreted to signify
organ of utterance contracted,
its
ed the end of the work

wise".
its
was necessary
now
that
to regard
it
his closing
Let short
we have
reach-
as being other-
(Dr. Ballantyne).
In this Grammar, the a? is regarded open or vivrita,

Thus 3^p, g$T.
when operations are performed with it but in actual pronunciation it is contracted.
The long arr and the pluta air 3 are not meant to be included here in
therefore those two are not contracted by this rule.
Only
the open short a?
J
II
BK. VIII. Cn. IV. .68]
bt*t
1681
the short T consisting of one matra, with
taken here.
st. s+, If,
its
various modifications
In other words the six shorts st are only taken here,
$,
iqf
11
For these six short open
tracted corresponding
st's
See
1.
sts,
3**^311
10. 10. 98.
Printed by 1'reeman
&
to be
*f,
there are substituted six con-
1.9.
T^=Sr*fi*=^J
is
namely
J>-
Co., Ld., at the Tara Printing Works,
B enares.
THE
IDDfl^PTI
f TMJsWDI
OF
BHATTOJI DIKSHITA,
TRANSLATED AND EDITED INTO ENGLISH
BY
SRISA
CHANDRA YASU,
VOL.
VAIDIC
B. A,
III.
GRAMMAR
All rights reserved.
PUBLISHED BY
the: panini office,
bhuvaneshwari ashram,
38-40 Bahadurqanj, Allahabad.
ALLAHABAD
FAINTED AT THE MEDICAL HALL PRESS BRANCH.
1905
contents:Vaidic Grammar;
On
in
II.
III.
IV.
Pag*
Prepositions Vedas
Case
of Div
Optional Compounds
Irregular Aorists
Chapter I
...
affix
Vaidic
Vaidic
Vaidic
Vaidic
Vaidic
...
..
..
4
7
9
Forms
..
15
Diversity
..
Subjunctive
..
Infinitive
..
25
..
41
Rules
Accents.
Chapter
III.
The Phit
..
Root-accents
..
..
90
103
Sutras.
I. Phit Sutras
Chapter
Accents
Affix-accents
I.
II.
III.
Accents of Compounds
Accents of Veibs
,.
112
126
135
..
202
Affix-accents
,.
..,
On Rules
of Genders.
Chapter I. Feminine Gender
II.
Masculine Gender
Neuter Gender
Masculine and Feminine Genders
V. Masculine and Neuter Genders
VI. Common Gender
III.
IV.
,.
221
,.
226
,.
237
245
245
248
FOREWORD.
We
volume of
Kaumudi. We had hoped to send also the second
volume of the same along with it, if not earlier, but the press
to which we gave the work more than two years ago for printing, showed the utmost want of sense "of duty and businesslike
capacity, for they have not printed more than 80 pages during"
are glad to present our subscribers the third
the SiddhiU-ta
all
Now
this time.
that Messrs. E. J. Lazarus
&
Co.
have un-
dertaken to print also the second volume, after having so quickly
we hope to publish the remaining

work by the end of this year. Our thanks
due to the Manager, E. J. Lazarus & Co., Medical
printed
the
portion
of the
are specially
present,,
Hall Press, Allahabad Branch, for the great interest and trouble
he has taken in pushing the work through the press. We trust
the
remaining
portion of the work under his
management
be out soon.
Allahbad
The
1st
July, 1905.
S.
N. V.
will
THE SIDDHANTA RAUMUDJ.

VOLUME III.
*\
THE VAIDIC GRAMMAR.

CHAPTER
I.
In this volume Bhattoji Dikshita has collected together all the Butras of
He has arranged them in eight Adhyayas
Panini which are peculiar to the Vedas.
The first chapter contains
in the order as they are found in the Ashtadhyayi.
all those sutras which occur in the First Book of Panini.
mm tj^skj^g* S*% 3T $ra 3 fg^sR^s

In the Vedas, the two stars, Punarvasu, may option-
giiiSâ** en
3387.
ally
be singular, (and connote a dual).

In the Vedas, the star punarvasil which
the singular form and connote a dual
Jlfsfa^fiT
Similarly
The option
II
when
3388.
not
it
always dual in form, may'be In
As tRcTe;*^'
or
must be
the
fetSJUsIT
the
in
appellation
dual
as,
UT
of an asteriam
I^STW
fa*JT#
cTT
iTrnfcTcT feci:
but of
The word fqin^T
q^S*T
a man, there
is
Viâkha may option-
number.
in the dual
number
as
rule.
In
the Vedas,
found sometimes to have the singular form, denoting duality. Thus
feum
5^3**
secular
In the Vedas, the two stars
ally be in the singular
or
TJ^c7S[
As nêrg wrmcr^T.
no option.
tflicTrT
it is
is
meaning.
only allowed in the Vedas and not in the
is
In the latter,
literature.
is
v*^fk^li;ft
itecTT
II
ftTSJUslT
it
is
^<5fW
The Siddhanta Kaumudi.
nw^
fcW^q
Inn
qfflsjssf^sfH forest
^ffi:
m ^fSr^:5iRH
The word
3389.
.?R
in the sixth
<{
I
5H^mTi5i:
when used
pati
"
(or genitive) \case
I.
trfcRT wtjj "
sNfi
feuqs^fe
sr
Hrforfîîsfq
Writer "TCUOfcl" ^fr?
ending
win
ct
[Vol. III. Ch.
itafofsfiT:
^ if*
" clip
" ?frl Sl^lTJT
^^ffl"
IRgrsllH
in connection with a
noun
optionally, in the
ghi,
is
3389.
Chhandas (Veda).
The Word
eva
(I
4.
8.
pati
is
By that
This sutra makes
position.
may
This sutra
tion with a
an
the
in
sixth
case of this universal rule va
Note
case
'
3.
The
120.
two,
into
case.
word occurs in
this
pati
will
sutra
in connec-
the Chhandas there
in Panini
is
In
optional in the Vedas.
all rules
so often
(2)
The
when used
ghi
is
1.)
yuktaschhandasi
chhandasi.
of
In
(2)
option.
fact, the
would become but a special
chhandasi.
word gati being treated as
na
ghi, takes
the Instrumental
in
214.
S.
Note
: Svja^-pH
H(R5 or Ur5 W: salutation to the lord of the Kulunchas.
Why
do we say
when
3* c <
3R
Ufa H1J
And when
3389A.
vowel, being
one of the
follows, not being
called
an
noun
in the genitive
<l*
Observe STITSI
'
S.
231,
OrCT
purposes
the
for
of
certain
an
initial
with an
affix,
affixes,
initial
or
g and ending
in
then what precedes,
is
beginning with
Sarvanamasthana,
"Q
Bha.
The word
by the last Ydrl.
or ach
<l
with
connection
used in
Observe j*n\ aram 5i*fetrci;g:

Why do we say in the Chhandas
<
m%
of
is
in
Sutra
the
I.
1.
when n or *jjg follows,' and

'when an affix beginning .with ya
7th case .meaning

72,
it
means
ful'.ow.'
Y&iplca
the
shashthi
annuwitti
Here we repeat the sutra qfgww

viirtikas which apply to the Vedas.
SR,
when
that,
(1;
In the Chhandas the word
(1)
word
been ghi only in com-
tffrRT cliro (Rig Veda. IV. 57.
shill read the
Thus this second wile would make

bahulam chhandasi, which recurs
by VII.
would have
to
sutra patih samase
from the
sutra
this
exception
divided
be
In the latter we
then mean:
in
sutra, pati
Thus ihisi
the Vaidic literature.
vi.
understood
257).
S.
The
affix era (V.
1.
"like the Angiras."

into t which
it
words *VW,
115. S.
WîZR
*lfg-38
and
w?m
)778j follows. Thus

'like the man.'
would have been, had
it
should be treated as
TOCT|
'like
By being Bha,
ihe
been a pada (VIII.
2.
Bha when
the sky.' *fj?nfcfcT
H
66
is
S.
not changed
1C2.)
Vol. ILL
Cii.
I.
The word
jancrusi,
JT^Tff
by
being
bha, the sutra VIII

VtXrt
nm
and
treated
and
212
50. S.
3.
^ti^
3H
affix
is
applies,
and
treated as
Bha
would have been dropped before
Nor does the
sutra
VI.
4.
UnaJi sutra
the
of
The word
npplied tovljrsf.
115)
(II.
j^tj? being treated a8
changed
to n
Vedas when the words ciir
Here had the word vriahan been
tf is
in the
pada, the
^f
S. 23G.
an
diversely
Thus ûucro: 3a<n*9Ri w*.

R would not have been changed
follow.
as,
this
formed by the
is
The word
Pbepositionb in Vbdas.
3391.]
the
into
(VIII.
i.
by
vasu
affix
37. S.
198)
VIII,
2.
134. S. 23 A apply, because the word
is
7.
not
aiiga.
In secular language the forms are
^S^fa Hl^fa
SrJlfa
^?c7I5^3rc7mTcl:
^T
"
aifsRlJ
j tt d
m: and
WTJ^HTTTfvi^TTTSI^TmTI
aSfcfW
3390.
The words
Chhandas (Veda).
WcclTrT
HfTTgtf
WRIST WSZI*
5T5raf4VJT*T^T3T: ITCShffTlIT
TJ^rcTTcT
nTCci:
^fcHMTcT:
5TH3JJT
SlTVlTr?
" H IWTOT^T:
"
<TOT
cliff?-
*R fg^^rafd
"
ayasmaya^&c., are valid forms in the
like
These words being taught here in the topic relating to Pada and Bha
show that they have been properly formed in the Chhandas by the application
of the rules of Bha and Pada.
Thus we have
Vdrt
the following Vartika
should be stated that
It
some places
in
both
these
Pada and
Bha designations apply simultaneously. Thus in the word W^ri formed by ^gg
+ cfri the g is first changed into ^f by treating the word rich as a Pada. Then the
word
^RoR
Bha, and
treated as
is
For had
Qc\.
it
therefore the SR
been Pada, the form
is
not changed into
would have been
^jicTr?
irregularly formed words occur only in the
Chhandas or Vedic
H SpgWTH SR^rU WIR
(Rig Veda IV. 50. 5
Similarly in the sentence ?r* fg^r^rafcr
word onf^R
is
5^
formed from cTp3 +
(=cTT^f ^?T:
Vach being treated as a Pada, the ch
Thus
lord or master of speech').
changed to
is
These
literature.
(Rig Veda X. 71. 5) the
eTrfsRTT
before
i\
'lligvat.'
and then being
^^^WJ
Here
treated
made
^qH +
Here the word *aaH is treated as Bha and hence the *T is not changed
Thus sias*Ri cm iron-made coat of mail.' sRSSJUrM amfal iron vessels.'
as a Bha, the
is
not changed to a guttural. Similarly
'
of iron.'
iuto x.
'
'
The present form of this word

Now we repeat the sutra
is
siiimu*
4 80. S. 2230, for the
I.
purpose of showing
its
exception in the Veda?.
h stwht:
<t
co
3390A. The particles called gati and upasarga are to be

employed before the verbal root: (that is to say, thGy are prefixes).
3^1 ^sftr q?sfcr H 8
I
3391.
In the Chhandas (Veda) these gati and upasarga are
employed indifferently
after the verbal root, as well
as
before
it.
[Vol.
The Sipdhaota Kaumddi.
A
.
mgâ ^H
III'.
snoragnfewwj unfewT fwn =m
1 this we have^lilTsmc
come ye both quickly
the
to
heroe.,
33&I.
I.
1.2.6).
(R'g-
mm*
instead
Ch.
Soma
'Y4ya and thou Iudra, y

the worshipper by this smcere-
of
prayer.'
up&sarga are
In the Chhandas (Veda) these gati and
verb by intervening words.
also seen separated from the
3392.
As tfwii 1TOIW *T
Here
is
also in the sentence

<
India
end
W ^ *W
come (wr m?) ou horses
(*ft).
which are spirited (i|S(%!*tam*
color of peacock'** feather.'
33<<3
tf^r^mfrjwt
*TH OT
Sfa* fa* fq
'
'
<{\
TO**
^ WWlf
'
WW;
-p
S* *
'
the roots indh

or Perfect Tense affixes after
also are kit.
to kindle,' and bhu, to become/
These roots
of the Perfect are faf
After these two roots the terminations
compound
a
in
ending
root
the
fc
The Lit
3393.
<
WTUlfil ***:).
.
^
r
So.
the word ntf* by the intervening woru *T*.
1>
III.
Veda^
41
WJ* *** 0tig
rfbuf
(for
separated from
'
have
been especially mentioned, because

will not be governed by sutra
consonant
mentioned because
all
the
I.
&
5.
root
and the
2242,
Perfect are
terminations of the
feq after* no t
..
ex-
examês:-^
are ^lustrations
Thus the verbs *ft* and
fan terminations.
as in the following
of Perfect Tense^ from the root **?
WTOD:, ( Rl g Ved*i VI. lb. 14
and
16.
15),
VI.
g*
Veda
awwaiW. (Rig
cepting the
Hie thLdutl
of the root
awfa*
from the root W, we have awg,

This sutra
bhashya, who says we could have

application of Perfect affixes to
Patanjali
by
done without
is
eoular literature the Perfect will

Vaidic
conjugation would have been irregular, by
While
augment
this,
the author of Maha-
sfcm. Because the direct
only to the Ve
conned
be formed by
ahoays takes the
i| as
**T
license
(ill.
in the Perfect, fur after
las,
Wt
4.
bU
be not guoa. So there

invariably whether there be gun* or there
after these two roots,
of saying that the Perfect affixes are far?
CHAPTER
33*8
rtift:
3rfan
wHu
%fiT *
<
is
while
in.
so
the
its
117. S. 6i,o).
the
no
comes
necessity
II.
^ trc^fa 1^13131
tftai
U .Similarly
unnecessary
considered
is
T^
affix as
dropped by regarding the
is
hotot
iWri fpi
*^
Vou
Oh.
III.
II.
Cabb-affix of djv.
5396.]
In the Chhandas (Veda)., the object of the verb
3394.
takes the affix of the third case,
sacrifice.'
'
to
of the second as
arid
well.
This ordains the third
second
case-affix is also
Here
HcTT'ofT is in
case-affix
employed
sentences like
when
hotra
yavagu, offering
Note
2nd
In
case.
5T%i?Ff in this
refer to
it
in
it
used in this sense
The word
&c.
fire)
the
agnisacri-
is
oblation
QcfiiclT
called
is
3rd case and agnihotra in the
in
latter
II
this sittra
is
considered unnecessary by
sacrifice
agnihotra,
is
when meaning
poured" ovt " sacrificial

when the example is
to
But when
the
iftqraffT
seiiteaee
is.
" agni
or
fire."
analysed as "gq^
ifwj
" Agni in
fire."
HcTHSTT
means
Agni, juhoti
um*3T *nfa*
fire A is
him
As we
Pafcanjall According to
example means simply
used in the sentence upiifriî^f ne^farW
ssntence means
^fann^f
prinana
n he propitiates
qgin' ^fiîT^r
5ifJTffl,
then agnihotra
satisfaction.
or
with
fire
5T%Tf?T,
The whole
yavagii (barley)."
both words beiug
in
the
then agnihotra means havis or oblation, and juhoti means prakshepana,

" he throws the yavagu oblation (into the fire) " |. e.
he throws into the
t
case,
e.,
the materials of oblations called yavagu.
SWTQT
citoJjg:
3395.
or
the
the object of sacrifice.
is
find
an oblation." The sentence

the
',
word means nfg: or oblation.

The verb
connection means uf%uf?T
The whole sentence means " the ob r
Therefore,
fire
and
t?uh u that which
*jprzj
(into
example yavagu
the
this case
being equivalent
i.
'
honor of the deity."
In the above
The word
2nd
the shape of yavagu, he throws (into the
But
which
e. y
i.
means **he throws
the word agnihotra in the above

find it
it
we
fire)." Though the two words

and agnihotra are in different cases, yet they are syntactically one, and
one and the same object.
fefcion in
yavagu
should be analysed as
of for the sake of Agni
of,
SJlTfr* therefore
fall*'
oblation, " for
QFnfaiTOfffcfaflOTVHT'rasfrT
in this sense,
honor
ficed in
this:
of the wor<d
the Instrumental case, thtfugh
The word vfciiTO here means M the

in
and by force
as Q^nisjfi^%T? 5T%if?l
'
The
objeofc of the
verb feeT in
staking,' takes the second case-affix,
the
sense
the
in
of 'dealing
Brahmana
liter-
59. S. G20. Ex.
mwra
ature.
This debars
t\ZW>
smai
the
cfiezig:
Genitive
(Maitr. S.
case required
1.
6.
11)
verb feci takes the accusative, instead of the

fcT^ takes
an
upasarga, then
ll/3. 59 S. 620.
it
may
by
II. 3.
In the Vedic literature, the simple

genitive.
When, however,
optionally govern
the
the root
genitive also,
by
IRFlfawi ?rd^:
^cpffa
SBSlii
crranr
4-
m&w
nj
In the Chhandas the sixth
3396.
[Vol. III. Cn.
flslfa
IT.
?w *$tsh
case-affix
3396.
'
i
employed
is
diversely with the force o the fourth case-affix;
irsiwrag^WH:
Ex.
3TW VlZm
kalaka bird,
Vart
sixth
as
moon, a male
the
to
'
deer.' TTTCIT efi"R3RT
In
^^*T
or
SRTOtaTlJ. or ^rwfaui: to you lords of the forest, are

&c.'
So also SfTOTW 3HT W^rT (R. Ved. X. 136. 7).
Veda,
the
Tîui
the 4th case affkk
^JSlfcT cFFI tsieftsiTSH
is
employed
in the
lizardj
sense of the
whosoever woman, drinks* with a woman;
'
in her courses, gets herself in menstrual."
33<0
sire
3r3fa
3397.
Chhandas
swSf
WE\
I.g*T*
\&i
ÎfTFJ
sixth
Tli
H5I&
cIT
case-affix
employed
diversely
is
in denoting the instrument
VB
of the verb
the
in,
to
'
sacri-
fice/
Ex. ^rlSJ or ^h^t
^t
^*sn33j:
fitci
he sacrifices with butter/"
3080,
sign f^5I
and
II.
4.
But the form

the present sutra
"
w^ ^ro "
is
Tigfc
<sfa
irsmcn
diversely substituted
XVIII.
^SrTT*
340
4. 80. S.
It.
^313
supplied in this sutra from IL
be-
t.
^WPT
is
the Aorist form of
The augment vz
i.
could have been
*3
is
4.
36".
the Aorist
not added, be-
9),
is
not
^m
^JSrUJl
which
as *jre4rfai?J
from
W3
tfien
for
î^
Hence the other example
II
free
is
II. 4. 37. S.
2427 also,
The proper example, under
by
obtained
substitution
" eating." sfo: " companion in eating."

to the
74. S. 2228, read with the sngr* of this sutra.
for that sutra also ordains
S.
are
2427.
37. S.
4.
elided by
is
cause of VI.
Vaj
As ^mf snm r
The words *H3 arid ^^5T
S.
^f
^cri
In the Chhandas (Vedas), SK9f
3398.
for
H5m
this
It
is
is
objection.
replaced by
(Yajur Veda.
sfivj:
The word
^r
fHj:
*JJ3R*
affix frR^T (fa),
by the present sutra.
Then the penultimate w of îh is elided by VI. 4. 100. S. 3550,

+ fa
as^m + fa Then His elided by VIII 2. 2G. S. 2281. as *i + fa. Then ?T is
changed to vj by VI II. 2. 40. S. 2280. Thus *j r fa- Thenar is changed to ii by
VIII. 4. 53. S. 52.
The yj is considered here as immediately in contact with u
though technically speaking there is an elided *H. between g and \j n But this zero
Thus
^ff
ll
II
is
not sthanivat, because VIII.
vat for the purposes of

ST,
graifoi
4.
rule
a shortened form of HWT^T (VI.
grg:
^cfef^: iiFrrea
i
53,
(I.
3.
is
1.
a 5131 rule
and the zero adesi
58. S. 51).
Thus we get
84. S. 1012), gives us h?i\j:
farfini** iiRnrfsifjjtt
ii?Tuf
'
fiy:
is
not sthani-
which with
*feimfaw
sw;'
Vol
Ch.
III.
3105
Of
the
is
like
II.
3399.
the gender
Optional compounds.
compounds
that
hemaHtaisirau
'
of [the
word,
first
'
and
ahoratre
'
Chhandas.
in the
^Vedas).
This aphorism debars the general
Similarly though
be elided after the
roots
times not so elided
58oo
ajra*ra
given in "II.
rifle
vikarana tju
Sam"
,r
i
$3
is
2423, to
S.
is
some-
"
gtn*tfewte *h:
Vikarana
STq (III.
is
diversely the luk-
68).
1.
elision in other conjugations
even no elision
72
4.
In the Chhandas (Vedas) there
elision of the
26. S. 812.
II.
as taught in the next sutra.
" *ti 5t
3400.
4.
ordained hy
is
the Adadi clnss, yet by Vaidic .diversity it
of
^f &^Ta
There
the
than Adadi
and
there
^soaietimes
is
Adadi verbs. As**qlJ ^ffl ^t?^T the Vritra-Killer kills Vritta.'

^ + SHJ + frT = l^fa instead of ^fsrJ So also, *&tV. sjqcT 33"^ sf?I2Ji:, here warn
instead of sjh (Rig. Veda I. 32. 5.)
"The Dragon lies low on earth." In these
in
'
cases the Vikarana
sjij
has not been elided.
In some cases the sju

-3rP5rij
fa|p
3r 33T:
qsfiSl
wolf destroy us." instead of

Similarly
^^
is
The
to this also, there
is
II.
75. S. 2489, in
4.
fegH
"
IRTSnTTr
elision does not take place

3rTf? fnaTnir (instead of
VII. 42.
by
required
exception in the Vedas: as shown in
"
Wr
fclolTV
where orlained, and
ZZ iff?))
fiargW
even treasures that we love." See also Rig Veda

12
the
not
let
In the Chhandas there isglu-eliaion of 3TC diversely.
3401.
ordained.
than Adadi, as
=jTQ>'?rTW i
the following sutra.
31TH fumftn
iu conjugations other
29. a.) Protect us, God,
II.
elision of the vikarana is
But
.Juhotyaii class.
41
elided even
(Rig Veda
(Rig Veda
I.
takes
where uot
pi ice
'IV. 8.
65, 4; VI.
"he
3)
24.
gives
VII. 15.
4.
Similarly the
slu-el.'sion
with
its
accompanying reduplication takes
Thus
your wealth demands a
roots other than those of the Juhotyudi class.
ifin
faÎT " The God who gives
full libation
3T
place in
j'fa'TjrcT: tnnr fsf5TO?ir-
poured
him.''
to
It belongs
Here fagfe is from the si srar " to shine."
Veda VII 16. 11).
to the Adadi class, but takes slu elision. Hence era + sitr + ffl = 3 5T +
frT =
TO + o + fa (VI. 1. 10. S. 2490) = fqcrcj f fa (the * is changed to * by VII. 4.
76. S. 2490, read with the bahulam ofahandasi) ftr^ = fei (VIII. 2. 36 S. 291)
((Rig
*-
fewfts (VIII. 4
faftfrT
^:
41. S. 2G).
HT^T StTT
*WT ^'sK
Wlr?
W^
''
I
1ig3Tft*T35TT
f%
"
TO3T
The Siddhanta Kaumudi,
"
*rimi
w^snf aTwraismgsa^mw
Cn. Ill
3402.
sw." fcWTaT^H
*si
err
III.
In the Mantra portion of the Vedas there
3402.
" <Hâ
[Vol
*fs
is
luk-
elision of the sign of the Aorist (and Perfect), after the verbs
'
to eat,
Cover/
'
|TC
3[*T
to
The word
tHSI
'
go
and
'
name
the
fer is
in long
^rr,
to
'
choose,'
to avoid/
'
srer
to
'
gi
to
'
to be produced/
5ffa
to destroy/
'
burn/ verbs ending
to
'
make/ ifa
to be crooked,
'
grammarians to the
given by ancient
Perfect tense as well as the Aorist,;or
it
might be a common term for
affixes of the
all tense-affixes.
Thus from ^T the substitute of wz we have jjj^t in the sentence, m'^sttft' iT3^rTfti
"Well have they eaten and rejoiced." (Rig. I. 82. 2).
Note Thus in the Aofist of w, there comes tm (II. 4. 37. S. 2427)
the sign of the aorist is elided by this sutra.
The penultimate %( of gH is elided
by VI. 4 98. S. 23G3 /and ^ is changed to by VIII. 4. 55. S. 121* and S is
changed to n by VIII. 3. 60, S. 2410
thus we get g, then we add the augment
:
sjj^
which with the third person plural
From
Singular, of
is
by
From
THT^rcrmsi
slaught
nor is
fall
100.
r\ is
l^fT
on
Preserve
us:
The word q
in
us
the
Wrf^^lf^WHH^g
Guide us Saraswati
fa g:
ifgi^msm^gR
swTrT
includes both
*ra:
wr;
verse
(R'g.
g^'nnd
spin*
(Yajur veda 13.
Y1I.
3*.
84. S. ^2168
I.
HUTXi
*i*t
not a
let
18.
vjftf
mortal's on-
The
3.)
sj
of
431.
%*
^ST, as the
word r
Wen Sf \*^m
in
3UWT
the
n&
3).
S&srcafwsh' ^fcraSlT JTTqW^: TSST
glorious treasure
us from thee." (Rig. VI. 61.
The word
^îfgHt'
*!VJs?j as in
to
following
Brahmaimst-ati."
2. 63.
sutra
a'asr*
the
in
'Let not the foeman's curse,
by VIII.
From z* we have
'*
II
68. S. 242.
1.
T^jcR
Trn^TFUJ^^
changed to
gives us *h^H
FcW The WT^T is the aorist 3rd Pers.

o + fa (S. 3402) = gT + ?T (the elision of
The guni takes place by
elided by VI.
following sfgr' gf^T3f*
fgi3i:
fe f f?T = m%
2207).
S.
we have
*3T
l
Thus ^^ +
III. 4.
and then the
affix si^,
verb t&% we have tti^WtIPI
the
refuse
us not thy milk,
m* STTtlcF
nor spurn
14).
means verbs ending iu'long
w ctshitoitr:
*ht,
as
tTT
'
to be full." Thus,
fW
^rtft^ sp wtfptt amH*?<*g

(Rig I. 115. 1.) " The brilliant presence of the Gods hath risen, the eye of
U'jg
Mitra, Varuua and Agni.
The soul of all that moveth not or moveth; the Sun
hath filled thi> air and earth and heaven."
The root gg iîves us gq? as in the following verse
TU ^T ^TFT^WgTtf^ UTT
siafjT
*htut sjt^t qfacft
îf
WWam
8cm Hlfa
us not aside as one
Fiom
Veda
I.
sr
who
we hare
92. 2.)
5iq
(llig
bears a load
tqvh?\
VIII.
;
64.12).
" In this
great
snatch up the wealth and win
as in the following
Tne Dawns have brought
verse
battle
cast
it."
^fiâiirTSUpilfa &c. (Rig
distinct perception as before."
Vol.
On.
Ifl.
From
VI.
we have nm?\
TTO
FErcFa grrnoifHT
Irregular Aorists.
3403.]
Iff.
v*$m*\
tbe following verse
as in
ctot^
^rcjcmfrr* rfff ?%i<i
^RcT
u?t? cjTfw5ta=2m
stfssrm
fcrcqfrr
Veda
(Rig
1.3)/'
From 5is| we have Utt; as ^ff^H

Brahman literature, as the word jf^C
the
cIT
n&i
2fnTr:
io the
This
II
an exampie from
is
refers also to the
siitt'a
Brahman
literature.
But sometimes, the

is
him not
seized
Thus ^
'HTT^
fTT
Wraf
^t*
asf^TUTit^:
the augment
\vith
The
first
two
affix
which
*utw
is
added to
The
The
auxiliary
m*\
',
third
'
is
affix ?ai^,
of the Benedictive (sanrT
Benedictive of
fci,
fifth is
The
fejTrT
*nai^
is
follow
4.
the
*jjtw
first
four
and ^^x, the
words.
special
Aorist
sjiît
When
of g?
is
or
this
mood-affix
2238. The regular Causative Aorist
mSz. with
80. S. 3402)
which with the augment ?nz becomes
which
to
to collect,
of
'
of
is
purify.'
before the terminations
obtained, the
so
to
know,
of
e.,
to
which
the auxiliary
modern forms
are
aa
by
adding the prepositions
becomes 5T3QT, to which
'
Thus sn-fe +
to do."
= wt +
sjrei:
to
^1 into ?R
*HT*T
formed
is
i
'
to blow, to
form
their
SlihftfT, *Hfo*Tr?, tTTGlT^, ^Slfaria:
added *g&: the 3rd pers. Singular
with
of
The word ^grHTgwrai:

(II.
of facf
the Aorist,
W^SR??,
Wf ffel + c?-WT+o + ?j
S.
after the
wqg^ftlTCf?,
:
and
of the caus-
(g^)
the change
^TW
affix
These are the archaic forms
ahhi and ut to the Causative root gifs
all
and
employed.
Note
^3Rt, fipmrj,
root fal
the
the Aorist
is
tmj-
Chhandas
to sport;
'
the 3rd Person Singular Aorist of $
is
annexing the
last
*jt
added and the 3rd Person Plural
is
and
the Aorist of
and then using
f^f)
wiifsij:
in the
the Aorist
are
to be born,'
which
*H3r:;
The
these four.
all
by adding the causative
to
formed
and the auxiliary verbs
to sit
added.
feismeRq[
H5RSTOT5R:, fgsRtJTOSR:,
these and the fourth

'
fg^tirfjg5ta3
*sircftfgenii
UTsaifaw ^T#i
has been added after the reduplication
*!JTJJ
of the root.
is
fewnmsR:
mowifcFaTrf
tOTJJ,
of
H3
atives of the roots
*HTW
trtswifattJT^, fecTSJSi*J are irregularly
JTsR:,
the
m#3Rfew*i:
irekwc*
III.
The forms sgwjr^TCTTO*:,
3403.
2.
he had been born already."
warn*?:
(Rig Veda. V.
<fcc.
CHAPTER
fefrf
word " option "

Theso
4.)
elision does not tuke place, because the
understood in this sutra.
o + o
(VI.
This auxiliary
periphrastic
the Aorist
wajse^tterj
1.
is
frTO
68. S. 252):
*ffRt is
Aon'st *is
added
formed
elided by II. 4. 81,
(STOTTO* = TOtTO?). The
The Stddhanta Kaumfdi.
10
Causative v.jTz
*<gF
'Then applying VII.
60. S. 2179.
4.
to afe by VII. 4. 1. S. 2314.

This is reduplicated
by VI. 1. 11. S. 2315. Thus *re3
Then 3 is elided
shortened
is
before the Aorist affix
by VII.
[Vol. HI. Ch. TIT. 3404.
4. 93.
2316, read with VII.
S.
changed to 4. Thus we have miffe + g^ + a attre??

The word fatm?? is the Benedictive form of ^ to do.'
The vikarana 3
not added because of the prohibition III. 4. 116. S. 2215, and then there is
2317, the
79. S.
?n is
'
by VII
4.
is
Ti
28. S. 2367.
4.
5808
TTO^^fa
1IHO
After the verb im 'to protect/ ^fe
3404.
optionally the
is
substitute of f^f in the Chhandas.

This rule applies where the
As
28).
^JTtsj
3t fnTra^&T
3rjf
root
irtf
JTIT^
not take the
does
affix
HW
(II 2.
Varuna protected
and
Mitra
^JraJTUcTJT
these our houses.'
The other forms are ^tttjjw, *ihTTO*J or ^TrmrTacsw.

the secular literature, the latter three forms are usedj but not the first.
3405.
V8*
'
After the causatives of the verbs
to sound,'
to send
and
'
'to
the substitute of fer in the Chhandas.

Thus WTRJTSm Sffttj: SRW^pTift: (Rig Veda
it?**: (Rig Veda t. 162.15.)
Thus we have
also
^îfo,
and sjnferj.
See Rig Veda
3406.
and ^%
Vedas
swift: in the
$îrta and snaata

I.
rise,'
is
'
to|decrease
go or to beg'
I.
53.
3.)
Infarct in the
forms
not
is
CTTrclTforvSRate VJt
literature
classical
being
bo
slfea^rT, SfÎHff
*
53,
3, I.
After the verbs
to
their classical
3R
la
the
'
162. 15, and Pahini VII.
to
do,'
substitute
to die,'
'
of f^f
5,
2.
to
tear,'
when used
in
the
he
rose.
Chhandas,
Thus
The
sre?Tri
classical
Thus
'
he did
';
UTTtft
'
he died
Aorist of these verbs are
V W?TW W^rlH ?3 H*5T
ST^WT^SmSTOc^JT
*â fa* waTfsrfir
(Rig, Ved.
vva Twn
I.
';
siaRTiiffl
55K*
sw:
WT71 he
'
HHH,
'
tore
*nranftrT
';
*Jns^?T
and
'
?$i*grT.
(Rig. Ved. X. 85. 17).
UrSMT:
10. 2).
^33nrifrfe[qsn*T fas:
u?3
'
faWi fasdftfl
Vol. in. On.
3m
wtwit *nn:
s*qj
nrT
wq:
Vaidic Forms.
3 tOS.]
III.
udtu:
?r?QT
sqta:
^rqenfeq: qqq
fajqraqTq*
11
sfeiq:
*3Rqqqqm
*z?q:
^r^\g goaTS ^jt<it iteq^q-rq

*kt5qgicq^: qqq
saw?* ^ qfaqtso: ^fri c^nq?? gsTerraiiJ
tf^cqfl:
*
'
(*cia)
?fa qtJSJHi
fN*^ q^ SrRqt
\ HZ
pq#
qs ^
'
irregularly
mm, vm,
m^
which
is
(the root
'
i
'
'
sqqgrfaa^THqqSTqT*
^craaqssrciFqfl
'
!
is
waj,
srererrî,
extremely irregular and they are all
is
Thus
word fa cScH
the
the preposition fa^, and the
by
aff^x,
III,
transformed into
The above
ufawtei,
to cut,' with
the regular
ssf?
crioqqfa
m&%&,
the Vedic literature only.

'
q?qT
g S3: nfq qqcg
$T5R
clffisqw
vzi
'
the above words
of
form.;\ti >n
the root q&\
*i:
viw
mupssii
SrTTsa:
* f^qq ?fa
^tî tars^n,
SRT3J and ^q^TSj^
in,
MTsq:
isito:
In the Vedas the following words are found which

-firew, t^g**, W&M, 3^13, sfesj, STO,
3407.
met with
qqfl
^rEwnfaqqusrasr.
'
are formed
The
sm*^
Wci$:
^q^Tizjqsi?
'
wsj
'
'
*rs
'
t^î:
110* S. 2859
I.
fa:
from
derived
instead of qtjq,
mq + qqff = fa:
by transposition) = fa^qq.
?jqj
is
affix qq??*
+ qqi + q
As fassqq
faâtfj
apparently a guess-work etymology of the grammarians.
is formed by adding
to call 'or ^ to into the root gqn
qqq and the upapada i^q the vowel of the root is then lengthened and the augment n (VI. 1. 71), is not allowed, q + 1 or |j + qqq = f^q:
VJ5# cfT.3; ^^q (Rig. Ved. VII. 85. 2).
Thus
So also q + ri (to lead) + qqq
= qqjtq: 3cl + =TT + ^HU = 3^s:, 3c* + fajq-(to leave) + qq =^f^m& H (to die) + q<*
So also ^cil.q
the
voke,'
'
affix
'
?*q:
always feminine. *q (to bend) + q^= vqq: ;

*gq + qqa = tSTRi: j tt (God) + q^ (to sacrifice) + q?|
+ q^ = S7qT
it
is
(to dig) + qpj = TsTO:

= SiqqsqT
always used as feminine.
Thus in
WT + tj^ (to ask) + qqq = ^Tr^q: Thus ^-p^q*
;
107. 5).
qfa
tfte (to sew)
2854.)
qs?T +
Word
(to be).+
qjj follows
gold/
Tudali
qq^ =
^=3qni"I^.
:
form
the.
class
q*ro
qfaiftcq:
WT33:
V&j-t
is
3qijqq^?T
rgKII
come
This last word
The
sjs^req 353Tq
is
that of
root ijs
to please."
To
^cTTSd:
gold.'
read
is
this root
is
(Rig
(to speak)
formed
is
c
&z
word
then
it
qqci
cl^T-
106.
(o collect)
only
when the
mean
doe3 not
with
added tke
i%g
the
in
affix SR (III.
i.
135. S. 2897).
5WJ:
7i3Ti3qrjq<I
qqf qfe^q:
3408.
verbs
oR
agitate,'
'
'
^-rrJTrl
^xkx wmisi
'
jr^yfrfa*
'
rqT
^^qfa^'
gfc^^î^TiTm
to
honor
when the
'
^R
object
to
is
worship
'
3rT ^T rnqfui
fuq^
'
'
i
In the Vedic literature, the

T?3
affix
'
in composition.
^ comes'
to protect'
Ved VII.
(III. 1,
3q + fa
When
along
ifeq^qiq
qflFrq)
aTSqqfa
after this
(to praise) .+ qq?7
and when the sense
and means "
both qqq and qq?J
aisi:, in secular literature

S.
cover)
*?f (to
after the
and
"R
'
to
12
Thus
SWTcrfW* r^T
g*clm (Vaj. Sau. I. 17., V.

h ^T*t qf?rct (Rig. Ved.
12.,
Ved. VI. 53. 10), St
(Rig
mwT iferasfam
wga
to bear'
when
VI.
3)
3fl 3l mufti
^^T
X. 14. 11)
3W.
UTg*m-
(Rig. Ved. VII. 104. 21).
In the Chhandas, the affix
3409.
1
[Vol. III. Ch. ITI.
comes
fasr
in composition with a
it is
after the verb *TO
word ending
in
a case
H^> f<J5l
affix.
The words
upasarga
and 'supi' are understood here.
= qr?5rPFrng; nom. sing. ^^rciTS

cerebral u by VIII. 3. 5G, and
qrT*
is
IX. 8$.
lengthened by VI.
7,
'
mme
the
by
into
137. See Rig Veda..
3.
As
VIII.
ijrPT
The- dental
of Indra.'
The
31.
2.
changed
is
final
175. 2, III. 29. 9, VI.
I.
into,
of
19.. 7,.
X. 103. 7.
38H
STSSg
The affix fim comes after the verb 3^ to carry/ it*

3410.
the Chhandas, when a word ending with a case-affix is in composition with it.
<
As tns53TS 1st sing.

The division of this
trcsoTT^
sutras, into which the anuvritti of
Xnil.
Veda, XIV. 10,
in composition
it is
deceased ancestors,'
As cRSQen^q:
to the pitr%*
en?
'
only
'
of these words
"
tac^Ti:*:
3412.
The
'
fasces
carrier
is
and not
mama
affix 5*13
when
it
of
comes
^m
and VjXwi
'
29)
II.
water
'
fire
is
3
r?
<
cr^s^
comes
in
SS
'
in
'
so,
fgrU
of
^
subsequent
^.
See Yajur
after the verb
o^
oblation of food
to,
water.'
that
ijftocfSrTm'tt
formed by adding long
îlIH?r?:TTT3:W
to carry
affix 5*TC
fdHaJTJT (Yajur Ved.
*f^
carried
is
with the words
qtfor
Tjftssni*:
'
The feminine
38'lr
g^
;'
last is for the sake of the
26.
3411.
when
carrying a prashtka measure
from the
sutra
carries
(Yaj.
the
ohlation
Ved. XI. 14).
%fa ffots
'
^bctr^^st*: fa^T
*:
the Chhandas, after the verb
composition with the word
^3E?
'
an
to gods,' provided that, the word so formed does not

occur in the middle of a pada (fourth part of a stanza).
oblatioh
As 3lfi^^
I.
44. 2.)
loEHciTs^:
fire,
the carrier of
oblation to the
gods.'
(Rig Veda
Vol.
IIT.
form
is
Ph.
When
word occurs
this
^sgq
which
J^.
Vaidic Form*.
3414.]
III.
middle of a pada, or at the
the
in
derived by adding
is
the
^5q^nf*^*5.T: {vr\1 =T. the neveivde<aying Agni or

god's, is our father.'
(Rig Veda. III. 2. 2.)
'
fg*5Rx:
'
(*f c*}
The
3413..
in
affix
??iric<m
ending
^
in
'
to
dig,'
fez (the whole of which
'
jjtfjj
a case-affix
changed into long HT
ttwt ?*^tt
'
pace
to
and
'
TJJ
in composition,
is
be
to
'
5i*r
beginning, the
(antra
As
3-110).
that carries oblation to the-
fire
vtcmimmv.'t
the Chhandas after'the verbs
stow,'
fag
affix
'
*vt
'
born,'
'
*??
H^r*
<
corner
elided)
is
bo-
to
when a word
to go/
and the
*nf*?
final nasals are
The verb.
The words g^ftr 3HH1T and ^rftr are understood in this sutra.
so also 3 s? meana
meaning to be horn and 'to happen
both to give and to worship,'
Of the affix fore the tatters is indicatory, and is qualifying, as in VT.
nasal of ^T^f. Q?\ &c, is replaced by
41. S. 2982, by which ruje th# fiat
long *HT when the affix fq^ follows, and the whole affix ii elided by VI. I. 67.
5T^ includes two verbs
'
'
'
'
'
4'..
S. 375.
As WI + ^-t-fe='aTT: (Rig Ved. VII. 31. 16) 'born in water'

Qod '(ttig. Veda IV. 40,
msn: horn in the heaven i
41. S. 2982*
also from fr^
^^T5jqT
"sufn
'
'
<?.
tttoi:
'acquiring ox bestowing cows* (VIII.
|ndra
'
2.
of well.'
From srw
10).
hestower
From m*\
Veda IX.
SfiWr:
Yeda. IV. 38, 10 and 40.
In the
3414,
'
cows
of
thou
fgwT3T: 'digger
of
art
lotus
(Vr. 4.
5).
108. S. 3645)
3,
So
tttcit
mankind' (Rig
lover of
stalk
app^r: 'digger
;'
who gets milk as, *t sftlsfiT. SJcWT trsg ^B5r; (Rig

From 71 tf vu-tfil 3^rHUT the leader.''
'
5).
Mantra the
The above words contain both
affix
verb and
the
their being so given indicates tliat there
feR comes
is
some
the
after the
upapada
irregularity
in
words
the "fact fof
the
application
of the affix.
Thus the
as denoting
object
nn
affix
foq^ comes
agent,
As *d?n Q*'
while
cHgfr?T
after the verb cf^
the force
WrT^n^
of
nom.
preceded by the upapada ^dff
the while word so formed* denotes an

ing.
?3H3r:
(whom white horses carry). See VIII. 2. 67. S. 3416.

The i.ffix fqpl^ is applied to the verb ^j to praise
*a
'
name
when
of
Indra'j
preceded
by
flfB SlDBHANTA
^he won* 3^*1 as object op instrument
RAUMUDJ
and
then
[Vol. Ilf.
nasal
thje
As sramfa 3SR&ri TCrfff =- 33r3rcjm> pnv sing,

a reciter of hymns, the name of the sacrificer.'
?9. 1.)
ed.
is
IFF
Oil.
3*1*
irregularly dropp-
âqanjii
Veda
(Jfcg
II.
'
fq^
The
is,
changed into
is
a,ppjjed
STsqfcrT 5** = TnTgTSJ,
Vdrt
fada
Therefore
Thus
follow.
gnSU
?H
Instrumental, dual
its
The augment
HSfrmiST, *3rraTf5:
s^r
:
is
gada
is
'
to
2)
'"
before
The whole declension
<fec,
when
Plucah
^STflclTS:
Ace.
Ins,
sgmsT
TO3TIT?J
Do.
sirflemi
Gen.
*iH%fw:
*%*%wi:
Do.
D..
*%#TiT:
TOrJ^TSTW
Do.
fyoc.
^rl^Tf^
Voo.
^?rarr : or *fcra:
Aa
Do.
Do.
D>.
1,
"S^fT^T%T
*rTeTg:
the.
geRTTCOTO and terminations.

word is given below
this of
Dual.
Abl>.
TJH:
Sing.
Bat.
and;
tssifi^
^fiR^:
sgâisir
Nom.
As
'an offering/
terminations saif?mt becomes
^SJHSTWn-W, pL sitHefrfw:.
not applied
ijft,
denoting aA Qbieek
words sia^rg
the
to
by
preceded
give,'
*\v,or.dj
(Kig Veda III. 28.
added
is
before
3TO
whole.
the
of-
nom. sing v
-The. augment
affixes,
the verb
after
the force
*??!
In the Mantra the
3415.
xm
'to, sacrifice
'
when
"
As ^gsTST, nom.
'
pi>ies_t
in
included,
division of this
for the
is
sake
This word
only runs.
is
Veda
Thon
art the priest of
aphorism from
173. 12)
I.
the last
in,
subsequent sutras
of the
thus declined
:
:
'
Vnruna
which,
in wjiich
Dual,
wciac
the,
it
th,e
name, of a Vedic.
in the sacrifice/
t
could have been,
anuvriUi of Bra
Plural.
^sia:
^cjaiin
2nd.
sionJTaf
wcim^T
'bcT'.tst:
3rd.
^gqiî
11513 fwjf
Hcraif:.
WS
w^-mt %3mv.
The 3
3416.
for
the
and
xjCT^T^T
final
tot^t^
substitution of VIII. 2
gs
66 S.
1G2 takes place
of /the Nominatives and vocatives of 3ra^37, ^SfcWT^
giving the
They -are
also.
after the verb,
>;
(Rig
Sing.
1st.
comes
compositon with the word ^5T
sing. *hswt:
as P3 *J# g^ffRlTâT ^jfg
The
affix fefJ
irregular
so exhibited here, for
For they could not have been
forms ^trr:, #rl^T: and
mnking
them long
lengthened
ill
in
the
JJCT3T:
II
the Vocative singular
Vocative
singular, be-
Vol.
VXimc
ill. Oft. ITT. 3119.]
cause VI.
apply
14 Joes Ylot
4.
force of
the sutra.
in
The
3417.
affix
to
Thus %
it.
form asRHTOi:
ire
15
diversity.
TOreHj S gtttt:
4reiiri:,_%
l*y
also similarly.
V& when
feR comes after the verb
3XT pre-
cedes, in the Chhandas.
As STJU^Vw^viii
is
name
the
SreTRT
^vjtgT
snftaT
The
3418.
come
cref^f
'
they carry
up with the
it
Strira formulas.'
3U*r5!
of eleven formulas at a sacrifice.
wuanaT
affixes
^flutst
f^
fag
*T*nSrat:
Chhandas, after verbs which end in long

word or an upasarga is in composition.
in the
and fag
3fo<T (3R)
(JR), fifaq (3*),
when a
ÎT,
case-inflectecl
The
force of
'
and
'
66 - STvjtgR, 1st sing.

1st sing.
*ptaT
who gives
gvftclT
a good
(Rig. II. 27. 17) 'liberal;
The
sift*IT*HJTt
fog
affix
is
1*3
composition with
2> 87.
1st
3fT
3'r=TO
tive rule contained
**
it
afit^TTH
tit
f^ =
diversely comes after
affix ffjq
in
fgptj in
cases which
III. 2. 87> S.
mentioned in
those
'
so
are not governed by the
As
2998.
The Past
participle Nishtha
by the
affixes of
sometimes by the
'
StRW
'may
patricide.'
generally formed by H, but
is
restric-
RTsi tn%3jR
in the
the Perfect tense also, and the Perfect itself
affixes cRTsra
III. 2.
JTTrJ^T
also fafj^T
Diversely we find also wir^jtr: and fur^ra:
105 S.3093;
vnTSTcif
gheeidrinken*
other than
is
the matricide enter the seventh bell
formed
As
Bulg.
S> 2998.
This aphorism ordains
is
i.
gen + ^Frii = 'itg^

19)
(VI.
with the sense of past time, even when the
*?j
'
'
= *[fc3T3R,
word
III.
sing.
1st
nectar-drinker.'
'
the verb
to kill
+ wfaR = H^rasj,
+ gjfatr - H*lt +
*jyr
1st sing. ^riqierr (Yaj. VI.
vjrr

'
SJ3T
'
good understanding
having
\-rvto^
^T ^fa
3419.
in
liberally
also included in this aphorism.
(Rig. X. 91. 14)
38<K
drinker,*
'
Thus
to include fsra.
is
(Rig- VI. 20. 7) 'one
*T3Tm
Vedas,
is
it
formed
and pH as already taught in the sutras III. 2.

III, 2. 107 S. 3095.
They are repeated here
106 S. 3094;
again.
sg^fa fas 5
38K <*
*tr h t wto
mil sncirqfingT
i
3419 A.
'
In the
verb, with the force of
qou
*rmrira
'
i
Chhandas, the
Past
participle,
affix fere
comes after a
and Past tense in general^
tHE Siddhanta KaUMudi.
16
t^ snsmêft sm^m^
As
the word
'
stretched the heaven and the
3419 B. In the Chhai}das,;the arTx T&t
As
SfiT^
affix
i.e.,
fecKN^:
^tjst
^420.
III.
Here
earth.'
has the force of nishtha.
SlTflHT^r
by the
Hi. Ch.
[V'ol.
he
'
the
is
optionally replaced
has the force of the Perfect.
affix,
consecrated the
fire;
tm
'
*T]igun:
'
he pressed
thtt
'6oma juice.'
This
See
Hfpn* (Kg Veda
** siafvacRi* sra*grT
which take Atmanejpada terminations*
after those verbs only
comes
iiffix
1.4. 100.
3.
I.
'
'^jf* arear
aran^p sa:
'
G).
In the Chhandas the
3419 C.
mz
substitute of
'
'
iterw sfsfg: sir
affix 3RI
'
optionally the
is
the kvasu formed word has the force
..,
of the
Perfect.
As srfcg^
1st
sing.
on%5n*t
eaten
'
(Yaj. VIII.
'
wfiia^
19);
Thus am&T
in $t
^rnir
tfm
mJWJ?
(ftig
Veda VilT.
wfetsf ^13: (Rig Veda
Here the word 'HT^cjT^
7.
31).
formed from the root
is
'to give,'
n+^
By
S. III.
Vdrt
with the
added
is
self.
regard
2.
4. 37.
Vedas
Nom.
Sing,
to a noun in order to denote a

makes an exception hi the Vedas*
added after the word Sta, even when
is
added
S.
F3T
TTT
Sr*T+g
3231. the
120. 7.
*raTTWT f<33^.
Here
Thus *jra+gqg =
**rer
4TOTg
and
*rr
+U=
HV
170. S. 3150,
(VII. 4. 37. S. 3590.)
affix
^g is added
added even after roots
this affix is
^T
being added by III. 2.
See Rig Veda
170. S. 3150) =
Bysutralll. 3.56.
in the
gara
cfira is
As
to another.
formed by kyach,
by VII
Ht3 (HI.
affix
affix
Thus
The following vartika
In the Vedas, the affix
the with is with
WWI&:)
2657. the
8. S.
1.
wish for ones own
is
sing>
147. 4).
1.
The Negative Particle m is added.

5TO having the force of Perfect.
The
= *I
*-5lH = T
+ fc* (VII. 2. 67 S. 3096) = *fera.
$f|
"
^Tfteji^ "a miser, ail enemy
is ttTclT^ " a generous man."
(pi
1st
drunk.'
ufucTT^
in
The words
ending in
to roots
or 3i by
^ or
, hut
the following Vartika*
are formed by the affix ira and they occur

5Tcf and b<3
ajsnwg ir Scj:,' iasa Stferp, S3 (Rig Veda V. 82. 6.)
The form
These roots ^ and $r would have otherwise taken the affix nxx.
See^R'g. I.
would have been the same, but there would be difference of accent.
Vdrt:
in the Vedas.
As
112. 21, and Yaj. XI.
qcnfewr.fTfi^Tr?
2.
^t^tti:
4
i
^fTz for:'
'^fira*'
'
i
tjaTUrRteR'
'&
ft
Vol.
On.
ItT.
III.
In the Mantra
3420.
gender, denoting a mere action

1
man
'
The construction
put
in
the
raining
vrfa:
'
ablative
?fe:
'
j
being
';
'
VI. 70.
nominative
the
'
'
bhu
'
(to be),
ufa:
thinking
case.
'
fctf^:
being
Thus ^?gs:
knowing ';
'
giving \
'
fas: " (Rig Veda 11.
^ftrcsS (Rig Veda
know),
wish),
Instead of the bases
anomalous.*
is
TlF?T:
(to
'
(fco
(to # give).
'
'cooking
'; Trf?*?:
consuming
qfrsf
vid
'
feminine
the
in
vrish' (to rain), 'ish'
they are put in
wishing
eftfe?:
As <<* *T
r&
'
of this sutra
case,
'
forming words
(to think),
'
consume) and
vi '(to go, to
acutely accented
'ktin'
literature,
conies after the following roots,
'pach' (to cook),
17
Vaidic Forms.
342.3.]
6. 1).
4).
TOTFf atari (Rig Veda IV. 24. 7).

*c*ST Sfro (Rig Veda VIII. 74. 7).
^Hff^fr: (Rg Veda I. 161. 1).
w*%raif $ttm
sammsT*:
*THT
The
3421.
(Rig Ved. VI. 16. 10).
(Rig- Ved.
having the sense of

'
lightly
'
or
SS^tffa:
'
affix
^
I
3422.
The
affix
'
are in composition with such verbs.
'
127
of III. 3. 126,
See T. S.
3T^W?TSfq ttXft
'
'
',
fCfS^JWrrftg?*
38 rr
'
with difficulty
This debars the
20).
1,
yuch comes in the Chhandas, after roots

to go
when the word ishad &c. meaning
affix
'
VI 1.
yuch
'
S.
7. 5.
20.
H3
3305 and 3308.
i^r-
seen to come in the Vedas,
is
other
verbs also, than those meaning to go

Thus 5TS 5HW ^>#T^ S^H$ Tt; so also ic\ ^m
Veda X.
Thus
1.
'
after
'.
SSWTcf
W&W
*JT U
(Rig
112, 8).
3833
^fa
Jf STffos:
viTFauf^T -q*3 H^Tsrsira ctt^:
3423.
optionally
The
q qsns3 irum:
<sfe
^t
liFwTTmrn'i
In the Vedas, the Aorist, Imperfect and Perfect are
employed
words
saying 'optionally
Thus
in all tenses, in relation to verbs.
viicF?^**
',
and
3TOrU8lTig
other tense affixes
may
are
mi lerstood
here also.
By-
be similaily employed.
0 God Agni 'come hither with the

ifin iifTWJmR (Rig. I. 1. 5).
Here the Aorist *HTJTJTc[ has the force of the Imperative,
ii WHFJ H3HH
?3 RWtT5^ sm: ' I make salutation &c. <fec.' (Rig. X. 85. i7). Here m<%i is Aorist
(3F) and has the sense of the Present.
gods
'.
18
[Vol. III. Ch. III.
3423.
So also *afa*raa flTrmJT3*!]tcU<J 33WTT5 Here srgj is used instead of 5^

So also *jrcn TTHR = ^3I l*XUtf
Here fa^ s uae j instead of 5T^
Note:
because the root
'Jirm'R is formed with the affix ?q^ of the Aorist
1
I7*ra
his an indicatory
here
sjjSttJT
+ U3F +
^
VI
replaced by
is
Dhatupatha ani belongs
sg in the
is
fesi
Then there
W.
guru by
by sutra VII.
class.
Thus
13. S. 2293.
16 S. 2406. With the augment
4.
1.
Pushadi
to
2.
we
get *jjgiUT " I did."
from gsj
W^tffTrT
belongs to Kryadi
have
'to choose
Then
class.
add ^&, and
'
there
is
long
vikaruna because the root
ssrr
by VI.
2497.
Thus we
in the
Vedas,
4. 113. S.
5$!3*DTfl H
38^8
f^S
!te
TsronST igirpi^TcnirT
The
3424.
&
sn^^fa
vitri^s
'Let
affix
'
employed
optionally
is
wherever the Potential can be used.

The formation of ^z is shown in the subsequent
the vikarana
sometimes added
f^rij is
Secondly, the Personal-endings
becomes
themselves
sonal-endings and the root.
their
lose
thus
augment *z and
Thirdly, the word takes the
In the
sutras.
first
place,
between the Personal-endings and the root.

fff
becomes
f\,
fa
?&T3 between the Per-
vikarana sometimes causes Vrid-
Fourthly, the Tbvi
dhi also.
WS
fys^
3425.
*ftz
the
diversely
ftro is
58
of a verbal root
affix
when ^Z
follows.
38^$
Srrag
Sra ^toto?*
<$>
3426.
In the Parasmaipada affixes the
ed in the Subjunctive.
The
'
is
'
of the the preceding Ashtadhyayi sutra III. 4. 96.
5TT
optionally elidis
understood here
also.
38^S
3T5^tIt
$z: wz
inz
wiafa cufTUri'
'
'v
xu
?iiuw mig
'
^HTgiTT^T
'
<
e:i^g ftrm
snniQFRiffT ^Tfacrfe'
umff? fcism
'
'
i
The augments
3427.
fas: wzf
'
at
'
fw
and
'
'* ftresiTpf
'
i
srr
furgwot
*'
gfe
siiorsranisraTti sjsa'
fan
m*T wcm%
are added to the perat
'
'
sonal endings of the Vedic Subjunctive.

The augments mz and ?HT3
Thus sto + i^xj + w$
by turns.
4-
*13 + ?H=
Gcirfd; ?TcraiffT
are fufi and are not

4 cj
= irTfirafJ
See III.
1.
34
Vdrl i
The vikarana feu is treated
Thus from the root <J we have B TfttJ??,
to
ruf^rl,
be added at once,
JTlfâR
for the addition of
as ftnR
fsa x
similarly
fatr %
= HIT
4*
4-
and therefore causes Vriddhix
nn
in the above.
as <7 + frit* =rf + ftm 4- f?!U =

Thus VI in ^lfa rU- 1
fn * fc? = fTlftlJfl
Similarly snfw&fj from 5pt iftffreeRaTi ; as in *p^5fi*fa ifTfefa I
* ?EV +
but
H+?^
Vol.
III.
Cn
Similarly *NJT?3lIr? from T5T(sbclEiijT:, us
WT
SlFcrcresrerRTS USfl (Rig
Veda X.
iu the following
99. 7.)
But when there is no fern added, and the ?

we have forma like afiTfrl felrT au(*
Veda V. 37. 5 )
elided, then
In fact r^
as
shown below
is
19
Vaidio Subjunctive.
III. J 3427.]
of the Personal-endings
^ Wt
*sflTOT
and may be considered
a composite Mood,
to
I.
Present.
*T3
W^ffT
WctrT:
WoTTfrT
m^th:
wcrrfcrT
c(%
Worn:
WÎ
WcITfs
wsto:
wccra
III. HclTfw
wara:
vrerm:
MoITg
WclTW
I.
II.
//
I.
II.
III.
II.
Impe
fact.
wâ:
W5^
W9Tr?%
WcTTfT:
M^T^
mi
Wcra:
W^SI
^t:
McTTî:
W^TO
*Um
w^ra:
warn:
Mmcl
Hcrm
///.
I.
W^ftr?
WcTc?
Present Conditional.
ftwff|
wfsron:
wfatffcrT
wfamfH
ttfatnfl:
HfcTCTfrrl
wfctafs
wfcrosj:
H?cftl*I
wfcTOTfa
wfcrara:
wfatfTO
III. wfaUT?IT
I V.
wfaam:
wfgtuw:
wfodJTct
WfcTOTW
Imp
erfect
Con ditional.
wmurj
wforarT.
MfgaTfT
wfenara:
wfgaTf
II.
wfcrci:
wmaq:
wfa&si
wfoWT:
ttfaVTO
WtelllTO
III.
wfcTOTW
wfcTCT^:
fguTw:
fgu:sr
wfamw
I.
V.
I.
II.
Strong Present Conditional.
WTfaafc?
inferos
WTfsraftr?
WTjcnJfri:
MifgUTf^
WTTcnjfa
wrftniar;
wforaa
MTfcTaTf^T
inrcrara:
wrfciam
VI.
I.
fcr^^r
MTf^TJTTrT
III. WTfsrtlflT
Mlf^CfTcl:
wifsrum:
MlTgciTcf
wfaqm
Strong Imperfect Cendi'ionnl.
wfciarj
wife tier:
wifcfaTf?
WTfcTCTrT.
wfssi
WTfcmT^
is
not
'Jn^THodfrl (Kig
have
six tenses
20
II.
wTfcm:
wfcroroi:
vnfetra
mfcrar:
mfcraT^:
wTfaani
mfesTw
wifsrcrra:
WTforaw:
wifqsncr
wifsraw
III.
38^*
* irOT
The
3428.
Ch
[Vol. III.
'
of the
'
<<=
3427.
III.
person
first
optionally elided in the
is
Subjunctive.
As teller
or gjunci:, cFrtîn or cFtfcrm:
sutra to indicate that the
38^<
^TrT
wsrhbi
^<:
sna
O*
and
the
^fT^fT^ in
person
first
used in the
is
ma^
Fiwm
afw:
'
In the Subjunctive,
3429.
3ITHT3[
5*
The
not elided in any other person.
^r is
'
ai
the
is
'
snHTfuRnsRTt^Tr.
'
substitute of
and second person dual
first
fafvi-
'
'
of
the
of
Atmanepada.
Thus
$
into
oRT^
siîjft, srarirei, SRTft,
Why
is
not the augment
w^
changed
the rule enjoining sit^ would be superfluous, and the
Because otherwise
at once.
miz ought to have enjoined
CHfw HtraHT *Ti3S^ (Pig Veda IV. 41. 3). Here the affix *jnrWJ is chang
5H U The regular form ufl the *HT is changed to u by III. 4 79. S. 2233.
The sjjt of the augment s$j(^ is not changed to i? as we have already said
sutra enjoining
:
ed to
above, and here we have the forms
VIII.
z swkst $' sngT

'aiumi^
vwz ?5rw
'
',
'
Thus
*xm 5 (bb^)
shsht WissH'
In the Subjunctive,
4^1 &c,
sjlr,
in
Vm
JT33T Pel il
ITEJT^,
&
not elided by. III.

f
The ?
is
4.
fsstf
examples
fsrei
of th
It
'tispT*ft5
the
'
substitute
last sutra.
BCRTiSTfa
to
by
the
is
1st Pers. Sing, is
97. S. 32o, because
changed
And
2JQ,
in
W^?T5l
the alter-
sfsi ihtejq
maipada
^m&
W5S%cQ1*m ci: UTîq^T^

g H W^T H3W 3tfH3T?TW
Note
%ij from the root
Atmanepada Personal ending ^z
5?
Veda
(Kig
^f|
ai' is optionally
following
the
native we have simply u, as Q=3
is
SSTR
S5nffl
than those mentioned in the
in other places
tr^TStW,
ST
ifec.
'
'
'
'
3430of 'e
nana
31. 1).
HI.
that
4.
sutra
79. S.
The
1st Pers. Sing,
changed
is
to
This
confined to Paras-
2233, then 3 changed
to
by this sutra.
The q of the Passive is added, and then

The Personal ending takes the augment W\Z^
TTHTrl from tffg jn the Passive.

the 3rd Per?.
and becomes
the
Plural
*5nf:fr
of ^tTstI
is
II
'fa;
The
changed
by the present sutra.
or
W^ri
* of
to
$g
5 by
is
III.
changed
i.
79. S.
to tR
by VI.
1.
2233, and this Q
16. S.
is
2412, and
change
to
Oh, IN.
Vol. TTT
Where
3431.
Vaidic Subjunctive.
3 132.]
contingent
ment), or where apprehension
ployed after a root,

.The word
Bf3
means
^^'^ ^wfa
you.' Agreements like
W uwfoz
this to
U^raTTftij
round
the
This
II
pIT^
tr^f
5IT
Hf^ffWTH*rOT) nT5P rjrim
AH
the above examples
(Nir.
II
have
II
I.
you do
Ir*
called
Ru
is
Let the
find
By
consonants.
W*
the next sutra, snxra
âfa
*fcsjs3vsi?T^
g bê?
smrafs?
'
after roots
Ess w:
aphorism as spaTf
Vdrt;ln
Note
etc.
VL
Thus
105
is
the Chhandas,
*r3ra
TTHTq
<
ir**rnfrf
eivJTf
Thus
is
Vedas.
the
'^ma fegm *rg 'aw?

'msn aim*'
i
'iiwTinfw
the
17. 5.)
of ^{j
substitute
"take up the honey with
by force
*m
is
4.
and
substituted for
q^
of the
word api
in the
the
ig
of
^ and
w by
to
the
vartika
mv
(snsg) = irvna
+ *i = i7V? + ^T=nvj +
formed by sn^
a Ided to the root
415
S.
w * ^
the
Imperative
fs = &*{ +
al.ove
'
^^
21
ffi
Thus
II
33flTH5gf -tfT33^3en wsftq^ u

seize'; the ^ is vocalised by nrggQT
to
changed
affix
?S
is
to bind
'
the
elided by VI. 4,
^T + fg = 5Ta mn?f Tg
i
given.
take up thou.'
- 51^
min
+ a
bind or tether."
Other examples of the change of

below
is
in
Singular,
HTfavfciiTaftre,
derived from
is
elided by VI.
2202.
S.
5<*JTs?
1G S. 2412
mi*&
Kryadi roots ending
Pers.
'bind the beasts,'
iffflR
trt + tb *
jx^
Note
nasal
1.
II
ending in consonants, when f% follows.
Thus nwra fgrgm *J>|, (Rig Veda VIII.

The affix sjt^ is also employed
QittffT
SfFraf is also
the tongue."
Tiiifo
SITO^
(aqi) ?fa ^^wrrîrcr:
In the Chhandas,
3432.
(or.
which auuvritti
optionally the substitute in
is
98
III. 4.
STOficrTrT
optionally,
after the
'+ ^BiTws^sErfiEr *' iff?
'srfafernw
by
^fî^TTa^T
II
but the Subjunctive (Let)
Imperative 2nd
vikaiana ^RT,
solicited
souls, jivas tread-
elided
is
tf
fear.'
when he was
.--
the
in
the
for
Ira,
sense of Potential,
the
2557,
S.
83,
1.
Substituted
the last sutra.
III.
give
while guessing or in^
BcSJS^l^cT g m^TTJpQFfr
11. Bohilm-k)
fsr^TaiqN
necessarily in these senses and not
By
Thus
means " bound
vrsj
must be employed
sometimes
do.'
this for me, I will
apprehension or
'
was understood
in
em-
31fn<?T5
the reply of
is
The word
Samsara." ScUST
of
3428. H3III
are
'
called ^T3J|jT
is
by the Devas, to conquer Tripura.

S.
Let'
is
'
agreement, contracting to
5iraim
these
ferring the result from a cause
ing
agree-
reciprocal
(a
implied, the affix
reciprocal
'
WSIrT e^j
Thus ^SToI
promise
the Chhandas Literature.
in
<mfT*erre
is
21
fj
into
*?
Tl>nnTTr (Bg
Veda X.
85. 36).
wzrram*
by
tho above
vartika are given
22
Sl|5T &3rVq:
f^^TTXTT^Tt
'STCFT TTCR nTH:'

*
^^
faq*
'
ntdrtra:
<
^THST
cqrqqftrc^fH snsorgraqi smftr

aferffwr.'
mw^Tw^rcrt
3qq:
qq-r:'
afgmfqifoifrT
<?TOHT
itt <He?grT'
?qq^^qH
vzm%
'for*
fsrafq:
?g*q:'
Hgsrftf?? trr^
ftniT
H*JT
II
'qprtaERj ^fjrqvziTH'
rTgffr'
tdttj}
\<zzi
gqfafc?
fcreq^s
HTfl
*q
sq.
HgTT%?TT girrfefHTT GUtQu:
q^T q*ls3T3T*wr
jJT
'sim^forTvusQ^n^T
gq g
3iTTqmT*qT:
SFgSNBr.
W^T^Tq^m fqqqqs^
TO*aTffi
^t*t: sft^cttttt q?qq;
wggfsf?? wrg
*T^
fe^qjT
fWrftfr?
OTr%q*T
^srqfeqirfa t^t fasRuuT:
mvgqqra
"zm<z q
i
'
3433.
III.
srrasraN
fsrajff?
i
'g^gTfafffjnara'
fagqifsfci irrg
Ttrg
^q^TTS
^tVi3;qqfa^*TmT sKTsrusra^rteRfq^T g
<^f*
3TOUTO W3T>7
^?T ^njrj'
HT^fcf w^r fas?
^fc*
q^w
S^rr cranm
WPSS^fg
STt^
?^t
[Vol. III. Ch.
(aa*a)
'fsreqifajisqg;'
<efa
In the Chhandas there is diversely an interchange of

3433.
the various vikaranas Tjm and the rest, which have been ordained
n.
under special circumstances.

The word sqfqq means
transgression of
taking of two vikaranas at a time, and

stead of fw^TH from the root
^TU^T
of
Shushna"; so
Siq +
fks
fl)
also,
TW
sott
instead of fagqn
"He
11 )
Thus
(India)
X. 86.
qffl: (Rig.
here
Imperative (ifr^) of the root

instead of ^qfT =
word
ri^qfT
of the root
fa
<$
t-
here there
;ft 'to lead'
^m
+ Sjq + g);
3 + f^q + 3Tq + <&*?)
(=ft
and
formed by
is
there
is
following.
3rd
HSq*T
qsrw
the
cf^gT
;.
ST^f
of
the
and
sjq v
1).
The
(Rig. VII. 48.
classical
e.
So also
sing,
per.
Optative (fere?)
the 1st per. sing, of the
three vikaranas
ia
*r?3 = (H
class.
there are two vikaranas f^rj
qsiT
is
is sforf
eggs (children)
Tudadi
to the
frT
the Rudhadi class
there are two vikaranas at one and the same time, in the
$Vr1 'May Indra lead by this abode'
= fwar+Sjq +
breaks the
'il.);
root g belonging
the
to,
interchange
or
rule,
ihffrf
belonging
split',
'to
STOUTS! wsfrl (Rig VIII. 40.
the fixed
on.
s.o
form
bein g fR;R
*may we cross/
Kdrikd:
In the Vaidic literature
regard to the application
^qq? (Parasmaipada
of
(1)
wj
%
Atmanepada
or
we have many apparent
(case-afnxei), (2) fag;
(10) rules relating to ^rf and
af^lrT affixes
I.
22
and (12)
to
areexplained by the author by the word irgRTT

covers, but explain^ au
Ngtb
The
word
justifies all
3TT85i.HF$
I [I.
II
1.
with
of geuder, (5) person or (6)

vowels, (9) rules of accent
affixes), (4) rules
tense (7) rules of interchange of consonants, or (8) of
included in the pratyahara e? (III.
irregularities
(Personal-endings), (3)
rules relating
86).
In faot, the
All these
to
the affixes
irregularities
word bahulam not
only-
Vaidic anomalies
" science-maker,'' in
the-
above
karika refers to
Paruni.
Thus :-~
(1).
Irregular application q case. affixes:
\J?;t
^fgHTTqT: (Rig Veda
I.
164. 9.)
Vol.
On.
ITT.
343i.]
III.
Here
SffeNDraT: (Genitive)
(2).
Irregular
(Rig Vela
Here
Atmanepada
^63?^
used
is
Irregular
is
Neuter gender,
As
denoting
Thus
time.
from
It is
formed
affix
si (III.
with the
(7).
Irregular vowels
Irregular use of Accents.
use
Irregular
upapada
the
Thus
Thus
TOa +
^S + ^lf
TO3 +
TO3
+ ira =
(11).
The
aud the
These
class
fgxir of the Aorist.
'SRW
3, TRT,
FHrT
is
" to
4.
TOTti:
11.
9.
instead of
Tgivr.
word
affixes.
TO3g?J
Here 3
m^T saw
II
'
be
There
g^
is
6.
used.
Thus
in
one case
it
11
irregular
Ch
fnjg Causative and

5.
TO3{
the resuming form in both
different.
a Pr*tj-ahara formed with the
is
is,
in the Karika
means
qs?j
Thus from the root TO5 to
Here though
The
they will
82. S. 3101).
2.
?WT
2.
affix.
affixes
3107) and the Mood.
14. S.
as,
means the
used instead of
is
<srs
firrg;
7.
of
III. 1.
use of these affixes also
iradi class affix.
to and
mfc
3.
ugj
of the Future
TOTW of Perfect. 10. fc*r and fog, gg,
^?.
and to?
The vikaranas
-jja,
sim, ^R,
usr of the Passive, 12.
and the Benedictive to? The irregular use

the examples like w^ftr &a.
I
of these
has already
in
been illustrated
38*8
Person
the root
of
II
means Per-
2nd
Here
"
Mood
jtvj
m**l:
is
will he illustrated later on.
other TO3 + TOJTU
affixes are
affix.
form
compound is formed by adding the affix

But in the Vedas, affix TO3 is
<JHJT3:
Karika
ftra ot Let.
8.
tost,
iu the
yadi
Tense &c.
SI,
This
Kirakns.
in analysis
n^ Intensive
1.
and
of
us? in the
Here
fan* era
a*,
of TO? in III. 1. 86.

%
in tbe Tedas.
Here the word
jjtr in the Karika
*vgQ7|
is
W3 + ^3 = ^T^P
would be TO3 + *T3Ta,
Kandu
= TOS + TO;3 =
the same, yet
fagq'H
(ttt. 3.
and inoludes the Krit and Taddhita
eat' with
22,
of
of consonants
The proper form
Similarly
Karika
in the
Benedictive
srr^
affix
(8)
is
the
The word
(9).
(10).
n stead
is
classical
and the augment wsr (VII.
33. S. 2186),
1.
The
word qrn
*ijTJft^ ^TVJTWflTfa^
\TT
^sgjfH
II
Irregular interchange
not changed to
The
J
word
Irregular use of Tenses.
(6).
as, 2TFP3Tfr*TrfjT35^
II
fagST:
R^frT
II
Paraamaipada
declined as Masculine.
This
mix," with the prefix fa
cases
is
sb&fa
TOtfT Hsftr.
3rd Person.
used for
KarAka
wt <*$ d nnsraara
Genders, as mjT*H<?rr ?9Tfl3
of
Irregular use of Person.
(5).
son.
use
(4).
of
II
nsed instead of H^ftr?
instead
:
HrfttrjTO 3t *ra'<zffT instead of ITWG^
which
Personal-endings
of
frafrT is
3%*nwrw
of the Locative
in.ste.id
Irregular use of Paraamaipada and Atmanepadiis
(3).
Here
used
is
application
162. S).
I.
23
Viidic divkrsitt.
fsnpnftrcw
<*
3434.
The
affixes of the
affix IXg is
Benedictive
employed
in the
(^TTsftfîF) follow.
Chhandas when the
Siddhanta Kaumudl
24
The
This debars srcr

116.
4.
III.
22 15; but
S.
117. S
4.
The scope
31:35.
tive of the veibs Fir.
Ydrt
The
2406
16. S.
24.
'
1).
May
$5OTTzraT
and
as
?qrU
IIS
mirFriTgJribg fefo^T
ra;
ardhadhatuka
'
g fossa
ht
cjfwd^TT
'
'
B^*rT
'
^trj in
4,
(Rig^Veda
OT3RnV
rQl
^TWr.
ufcr:
'
afeiu:
<
of 'sarvadhatuka 'and
not always maintained, and the
is
the verb
after
^Sjtf tttfifr
TOTR
In the Vedas this distinction
3435.
OTOJjtnriw, .*T*T
KcHUi Bi^yTfT^T'aVITrTiTVI^?!:
3ffi:
see
Benedic.
would have caused guna by rule VII.
ordained
is
as 3tJâ*T
well;
as
confined to the
is
Chhandas
"the
in
it
rule
^^
ardhadhatuka by III
and the mother.'
see the father
\JTr37f\**T*
'
employed
is
there been va^,
to prevent this, tor
38-^
tor
affix
of the present
3435.
Cft. III.
sarvadhatuka
they are
itw, ara, <3Z SJ3j
ttt,
Had
the Benedictive.
Vedas
are
Benedictive
affixes of the
the
in
[Vol. III.
ordained
affixes
after roots are promiscuously employed.

In the Vedas, there
dhdtuka
Thus
drdhddhdtuka.
treated
2313
51. S.
4.
times drdhadhdtuka
f3T
and
fiEcTtf:
are treated
are
Here
there
form of
the proper
fam
consequently
affixes are treated like
f^
the affixes of the
f?^
the
a\Jn?
drdhddhdtuka and
as
rule VT.
no hard and fast rule about sdrvadhdtulca and d>dha-
is
Sometimes
affixes.
treated
as^
they were
if
the^ affixes of the

is
$TS fere
the elision of the fqjg by
word would be cîjJtT
this
sdrvadhdiuka
affixes
as sdrvadhdiuka and
there
so
as srfua^
is
Somehere
the Vikarfina
^*^
Thus, fa +
3
+ ^5: = fcf + SI + ^ + ^* (III. 1.
5* + 1* (VI. 4. 87. S. 2387.) = fatgfet
Similarly,
The f^s 'S sometimes treated in the Vedas both as drdhadhdtuka and
vfczLX
sdrvadhdtulca at one and the same time
as Hti^^TW 'SBRIIT S^^ff
Here, by
*g and the 3
changed into
is
2386.) = fa
74. S.
-f
*T
treating the
ffix
ns drdhadhdtuka, there
2211) and by treating
S.
S>i
also
in *&$>*{
stitution of
*r
the
it
again as
isffix
is
is
drdhadhdtuka
treated as
for *H<? as required by
It
4,
few
of ^r in the
elision
the
*7T of
S3JT
and
sdarv ulhdtuka
(VII.
2.
79.
changed into
is
there
ia
no sub-
52. S. 2470.
In this connection, we read here again the sutraÎII. 2. 171. S. 3151.
sa^y
3i
^Tfnsv^re:
fefin^T
fe^
3435. A. In the Chhandas, the affixes

sense pf 'the agent having such a habit*&c
fc
that end in long

'to go,'
ban
'
'a'
or short or long
to kill/
and jan
'to
'
ri
'
'
ki
^<i
'
and
come
'
kin in the
after the verbs
and after the!Verbs
gam
be produced,' ând theseaffixes
operate like 'Lit' causing reduplication of the root.
Vot.
Oh.
lit.
afacbjIiT (Rig Ved. VI. 23
cation because treated as fsi^
iwij
nfii:
ftfeffa
5rFTil5jT
(Rig Veda
mate
Simg
by VII.
"Now
and
20.
in the case
Veda.
'
would be
They
far?
fsRr?
without indicatory
it
gR,
*H+fa
and we have
(VII.
craft:
Similarly we get s*nf*:
i
*\S
'era rro:
tT^
cr?j
t?,m-*
faq\ZI
'
fTI
'
the
asen
yaiii
',
',
should
enunciated
affixes
order
prevent guna
to
m^
2383,
11, S.
of the
beiug
affixes
ferirj
zl ireusmfr. (Rig
have
i^
'
1
'
ncrrfaer
qg
5IriarT3
hy VII.
3g
3*;
get
by VII.
HT
?TC
3578.)
S.
But by
II
I.
59
1.
reduplication
after
It is
first.
103.
1.
(VII.
S.
sfttra
11
ht siffi
'
f^rnn
u\S
'
guna of
caused
it.
II
cHfe
iih
'
1
si^T^st
irifo
sjvzj
HrT^
'
fW?sar.
r?N
*?
*Tvipr:
9Rrli
*rfsF9T3T2reTa:
'
vjt:
nzi
vjuvg
jcttsqvzj
'
1
Wi&zm:
tra
'
snS^
'
ercai
In the Vedas the following affixes come after roots

force
of
the affix
kse
'
tumun
',
',
',
viz
'
'
of their indicatory
ing five affixes
are these
VII. 4.
in simple con-
or
2242). the affixes f*
Thus rf+f^= rT el + fa = flTcT + fa

2179). At thisUage wilf *apply
60.
In the Vaidic literature, the Infinitive
"jji\zj^,
vowel
5. S.
feirj i
replaced by
is
4.
when stripped
*\H,
2.
kasen \ adhyai
adhyai u
sadhyai ', gadhyain ', tavai', taveN
'
'
*T*|3ni
3436.
with
(I.
cthttw = HKcH
2).
prevents
gj
103. S. 3578. finds scope.
66. S. 2244.) =
g^
f^ = sifa:
in
by
for
2213, the 3T substitution does not take place
11,
sifa:
11
And we
reduplication.
is
1.
^ + f*^ =
From
why
would
being like faz
Then there
4.
penulti-
cTT^T: and 77 f^nw both ending in long 3g we

by the affix fofi
Had the affix been merely ^
2383; but the indicatow

Thus a + fa = <** + fa (the
VII.
The
T^fgsr
<R
anf*:
11. S.
1).
Here from the roots
that VII.
Redupli-
two examples.
get the forms Hr?fc: and
5.
fai^ = stfar.
The usefulness
II
fjrarasnn ?mft:w (Rig Veda. IV. 39.

108.
^
en
are real as
long 3?
in
after long
illustrated in the next
4.
5lfij:
^20).
From
fk$
?)
roots ending
of
61.
either
Ans.
affix is
q?
IX.
above roots
would not have been fsRa
Veda X.
= ufu:
fsj;
f*=3f3:
From nw +
1.)
by <nriSfrm^
therefore
with an indicatory
is
VII.
tn +
3T +
VII. 5. 20. 1.)
the
all
T3FT (the real
H5| + f* =
root
54. S. 358.
3.
5ifa:5jt=sm (T. S.
Q.
an
(Rig
Trnffrferim
to
sonants,
the
elided by VI. 4. 98. S. 2263.
is
Changed
From
From
),
>,
From
4).
,,
25
Vaidic Infinitive.
3436.]
III. $
gs\aj ;
(1)
3-
efiuj*,
%,
h^
*i\xr
is
letters, will
and g^T
11
and ^\a^
',
',
'
se
'
',
'
sen
kadhyai
an^
'
be found
(4; nil
to
(5)
',
kadh
affixes.
These,
consist of the follow
*SH,<5Sând
11
'
',
ase
'
',
taven.'
formed by the above 15
(2) ?a =
11
a^
ll
oi=o9; and
(3)
*viq=
cit^
The Siddhanta KauHudi.
26
__
The
3j
and
ory
The
made by
is
&
aud
forced of gj *j
. ,
S. 3686).
197)
accent on the
has accent of
11 and 12 Sarvadhatuka, and
and the
the root takei
going
Before
meant by
UT2I or
for the pratyayas or
'actiou';
signed in grammar, convey
Thus no
or Infinitive mood.
66. 3). from
\ T&
a^m
also Sifii
HtT WTTO
(1)#
and
(3
3r>5
added,
is
VM "<*
and 12)
'SJVZI,
3JV2I^
3*m mfa fas
(Rig.
X.
is
has been as-
they are added-
convey the mean-
denote the 'action* of the verb,
1(2) #sf
HT3W?
3JH 3R3I sftas
>*T:
C^T^TJJ (R'g. V.
(Rig. III. 36. 10),

l
is
*np*
on the
(Rig
last in
one case and on
VI. 60. 13). (10)
**^
the accent however
5);
sir imfnîa
wreqvzi (Rig. VI. 60 13). (13)
3785.)
explain what
(6)
(Rig VI. 27-
ficrsiva
syllable
iS.
accent
its class
here equivalent to
is
will
it
of
With nas^ the word will be gftgg (5)

5R*H TTg'rfwB f*QS (Rig. V. 59. 3).
197) which would have given us fwg (7 and
1.
v^S^ wst ^0J>i3 The

other. (9) urdi S^nsft
HW^,
throws
).
W Hfij=Tf*
to
*m:
HWt
*#*!
(Rig. X. 57.|4
'
from*, i
iivzr,
in the
syllable
first
2. 51.
us
affixes, let
will
it
e.
erg (from sre + S)
4)
It has not the fa?? accent (VI.
S)
i.
the
bases to which
of the
g?,
197.
1.
*^
3);
which no meaning
affixes, to
meaning
the
it
1.
*\,
indica-
makes the numbers
both on
The word ?pro
meaning having been attached
special
ing of the root to which
So
the
proper Vikarana
falls
these
'the sense of the affix gjy'
HST*J
(III.
200. S. 3o88. VI.
1.
examples of
give
to
affix
the
n, the acute
simultaneously (VI.
last syllable
the
of the ^rord; the indicatory <o
first syllable
before these affixes; while before
9H
letters, viz.
explained
word (VI.
of the
the
indicatory
four
have already beeu
makes the word take the udd'ta accent on the first syllable (VI.
Thus h is acute (III. 1. 3. S. 3701) i^ has acute on the first
q(
8437.
ill.
difference in the affixes
Ch
[Vol. III.
'
uirii
i*
hs^
(14)
184. 3). (15) j?g^=i7rig (Rig.
the
faq>5
is
first
(11
i^
on fu
mvm%
h *m
46. 7), suss (Rig.
I.
I.
85. 9); tsc& U
38^^
TO Ttftw
'SBarfsil*
<*o
3437.
The words 'prayai,' rohishyai,' and avyathishyai
are irregular Vaidic Infinitives.
Thus (1; sSjijiwjT w^t: (tig. I. 142. 6); n 4- QT + VV = TOTcTW (2) wcctirra>fr?i KTfgw
(3) ^ + q^ + îzj = *5af'ai2j= sa8i*^ + ?ij = '<if zw = TTfjnrm
'
'
W*
fS
fsf#
The words
3438.
drie
and
'
'
vikhye
are
'
anomalous
Vaidie Infinitives.
Thus
33J
383<s
fegm
fifa
(Rig.
*rfo Tim^siiT
r\H$
9TWTrn^qtr^
^:
3HT
50. 1)
I.
5
I
'
=t3R
<**
TSTWiof
fwm
cQl
unfa = fcR^nrTlJ
*TOaFr]
'
'
STOftf
^T^rFr1
'
feJWrff-
3439.
The affixes namul and 'kamul are added to roots
in the Chhandas to form Infinitives, when they are governed by
the verb gak (to be able.)
'
'
'
'
'
Vol.
Cn
III.
Of the
115); and
Vatdtc Infinitive.
tit. 3443.]
TUff^ the real affix
affix
regulates
the
*im
is
accent (VI.
27
the
letter n[ causes vriddhi (VII. 2.
So
6FW^ the
lettor sr
Thus mrni a iter fawr5T Tisiîa^ the Gods were not able
faw^ + *ffg^=fsw-ra=faWT3W So also nv<iq suWa^, instead
to divide
gum
prevents
and vriddhi substitution
193).
1.
(f.
also of
5.)
I.
'
A<mi.'
5880
1
iwh
|^? Hrg*^flT
fcraftm:
affixes
Chhandas,
tosun
'
MS
fafk*a:
form
to
aan
'
The
3440
in the
'
and
'
fg^fnf^fo^'
faaftrT
'
mv-
of
'
kasun
ar? aciod to roots
'
when the word
Infinitives,
'
i^vara
'
is
in composition.
Thus aqn5fKaT=*fara?TfTij
-faafctaw
388<l
1
atârem
*im
* *arfa$aa
'
to roots
warn?
'
The
3441.
added
isan fafoo: = ?afctf*a?p
isa^T fag^:
affixes
M8
l
i
'
wafers s^jt
'
i
'ken/ 'kenya' and
tavai,'
Chhandas,
the
in
fe^goa:
the
in
'
sense of the
tvan
'
'
are
Kritya-
affixes.'
The force of kritya

Thus î5gia=^n^rrajq
affixes
(Rig.
I.
5)=?3^fgHc2j
106.
The
VI.
200;
I.
388*
aud
'
action
here
in
th.it of
sutra
(*TTa) and
'
=TTam% =
^^qa:=^ftr?ToajT
was mentioned
uffix ?fa
of the Infinitive,
to denote
is
qfcvjTria=Ti^>JTrT5Bf?T
sRraw; (Rig.
4. 9, also
III.
object
10.
I.
there
it
For
Participle.
the Passive
=rraiTTfsr?g*JT
'
f 3TCT^().
f^rlrqq:
2)^^6n-q
had the
f )rce
its
accent, see
an anomalous
passive
2. 51.
i
**rg%
The word
3442.
'
qy
avachakshe
is
'
participle in the Vedas.
Thus ftgnn ?naa#
The
sutra
*gf>m:
II.
%\hv
(Rig.
213G,
5-4. S.
4.
'jrrafaar.
is
IV. 58.
5)=Tra*5aTrram
wmmfastfam: riwam
*jra
gg + xni=*aag
not applied here.
'
The affix 'tosun comes in the Vedas after the following verbs, when mere name of the action is indicated, viz
3443.
'
stha' (to stand),
char' (to walk),
'jan
'
hu
'
(to go),
'
'
'
krin
(to sacrifice),
'
'
make),
(to
tarn
'
(to*,
'
vad
grow
'
(to speak),
tired)
and
(to produce).
These
sutra.
'
The
are
aU
woid
>
Infinitives.
The phrase SR^Ta
Hra?I3aJ qualities
the
attune
of
is
not to he read into
the root (wTaT *J*qfl
tMs
ifcr\
28
[Vol. III. Ch. IV.
3443.
*f risrWlisii t3fn7=^Tf??TTTH:
an crwT^TJniT^HT: ere an asrfefn wi
(Gopatha Brahman*
*n*1\fta
4
nw
Thus, 3T
^tafcr?
g?5*
%i?ToaT:
^5fT
S. \l
5.
II.
1.
Br.
(Taitt.
flfrrmnsftfl
^fcn^T: srjs
wrerogqj ??^cj
gn
'
1.
3444
srip
'
Thus
g?ftau>xna:
'
fe?ja:
3WT3W
fcTsf^HT:
(Taitt.
name
an
'
'
an
grawr ^133:
'
1
kasun
'
comes after'the
'
injure), in the sense of In-
'
of action.
srtfi feâ: (Taj.
28.)
I.
*nq3:
These words are Indeclinable by
12).
1.
t! ^HT %7^TmWf?f?r?^m
1IT
fa*fni^
In the Vedas, the affix

(to creep) and trid (to
finitives indicating
VIII.
qs
fawn
astsa
?ffr
verbs
5).
3888
'
10)
2.
4. 2) sfsj
I.
OT an f aSJraHTTlSa:
g* an a^ftm-
a%ra3m
an mvm wq^:
Rig.
40. S. 450.
1.
I.
CHAPTER IV.
The
3445.
Chhandas, and
affix
in
ufa
id
as
the
in
literature, the feminine
Note:
comes
'
apply
the
is
case also the ^ttj
But how do
^fegrcnfefrT
ratri
'
in the
'
'
*jas
affix
3rd PJ.
TT^fa:, instead of rpjia:
irnffTT
IV.
45
1.
Htnfar^T
plural of the
In the classical
with acute on the
added, not
not
is
termination^; but
uH
(Rigveda X. 127.
all
in
other
final.
when
only
we
terminations
here in the accusative singular
>
not employed.
you
S^ftlSrnsg xjhu: ? This

foirned by the feminine
form n^n:
expla.n the
'latrva'
and
and the
the
in
nominative
the
is
nip
affix
adding gia or #fn are one
formed by Nish
^T#i
we have nsat, the legular
Katyayana, nip
Thus
also.
is
word
after the
n^n wet, n*ttw
formed by #ta
to
nominative plural
beginning with g^r
sjijajsTarfi'
Name, except when the
sentence
According
n^n
added.
is
mmzi^H,
n*sr>
35. 1.) but in the nominative plural
1. I.
av
afp
denoting
(nominative plural
Thus
5^%
^^fûa
nfasjsst^twrrj
not by
of
with
nHfanJe^TT-
which
'ratri'
The forms
nish.
same, except
has udatta accent on the final
following
p'.ural
regard to accent
the other has
it
is
evolved by
on the
that
initial.
word nf^ is formed by the krit affix feu (tfu. IV. 67), and therefore,
w<rd which is governed by IV. 1. 45 because it ia a word falling in
Bahuiadi c ass, by, virtue of the general subrule "a woid ending with the
'J
be
it is
Towel
of a krit
tilfjx,
other
that every word ending
in ?,
to
this class".
3885
Therefore
fart
faftf
<(
^tiy
the
not
^tq
to
Bahuvadi
force
of the
belongs
fffi^
has
it
takes
it
5^fa
s*||Tf3wr3^jfs fans
than
if
;u
'erglg
class
some say
affix rffi^
forming the feminine.

l
feen'
^rnct^wriiT^w
belongs
Vol.
Cn. IV.
III.
The
3446.
Thh Sidmianta K.umudi.
3449.]
affix
Nlsh
'
'
always employed
is
in the
bhu
of the word*
forming the feminine
literature, in
29
Vaidic
and
'
the
rest.
Tims *l|jtig ffSRIT tffijg^

The wot J f't-u 'always'
would have been
'nitya'
filrTnfafvi: fa\?:
388t
in
rtafQiri
s?^fa
3447.
The
affix
fsjt
nis
Thus
farwrt,
fJ[T
f^n^wj
formed by the
affix
in short
ablative case of
3"
*?
confined to sutras
YAH:
irregularly
1.
38w*
Chhandas
5).
lung
in
two
these
as
In fact the word 3f*: "
180.
33^
3^ while
words are
sifter
m;
The Wjrd
also.
3^
affix
treated as
a word
is
the
form bein"
this
augment vmw.
with the
if
ha
it
an
193 fa fa,.
sfrsrfcqjft
g^^fa
to
srsbtt^
(
1
'
y?c
indicatory
the
II
form
applied
to
it
Sftâ^t
in
the sentence
;
by
IV.
the
affix,
added
The
*r
take the acute
Rig Veda X. 120.
tongued'
loiig
is
2.)
the feminine
of Tt^3r>,
penultimate,
the feminine
'The
5t.
1.
irregularly
is
present
that the
so
word
is
necessary
used
and not
in
the
latter
has
in would not hive

enjoins ^tu
Thus
11
II
in
order to draw in the
dirjha-yihvi
feminine form dirgha-jihvi

is
affix
aphorism
g, and' in the aphorism
of SttJ
but as
Srîgt icTRT QfigT^
vr!t|ftr
last,
Moreover by using the

application
is
its
The word
^nn from
that the
short
188.
I.
ends
it
make the vowel preceding

Thus l&VX^ *J3*n=it ufaisft
consonant for
Mote
(Rig Ved.
in
3ct
b'iu.'
formed by the substitution of
affix is
is
The word ^rsratgt
woid
Because
^rogERuS
the Chhandas.
in
Conjunct
word
YlTroTOTH3C[T33(
loyed in the
44 governs this
Chhandas, the
and the
The
3448.
1.
w urd
the
<>nly.
m licatory ^
fu-ce of the
accent (VI
of siitra IV.
Iu the
to the word JT^sr
formed
m^t
1).
^tw:
III. 2.
of
^ (3)
for
^wwawri
*frT
em
always
Ved. V. 38.
Rig.
For
even without the
and nut optional
are feminine of foRT, Ao. ending
<fee.
ending
so in the case of
ii'it
the sake of
fur
re
sutra.
aphorism
forming the feminine, after the word

But why
this
for
is
'
than
uwn
of a herb.
aphorism,
the
the
necessary rule
nTn'Twfja^fRi insR*.
TCTC3
ami
tins,
name
the
cj|ft is
,\\
governs
it
not govern
does
'optionally'
usd
in
which
s&tm,
subsequent
the
Here
II
tie
always a
is
sutra,
optional,
as
it
is
Name.
indicated
was the case
in
the preceding A^htadhyayi sutras.
'*
'ôaqirQtr
0I w ^ 9! 9 q?iqi f
(qa^)
1
"^^
QtRsiij +'
mn^r:
jrg:
*:
ramfr:
]i
Siddhanta Kauuudi.
50
3449.
the words
Thus
*!|rs<3
do we
say
3?t:,
to* a
So
Ch. IV.
TT[.
Vedas
the
in
'kadru'
3449.
after
a water pot).
II
and urnn^r.
fqa
Witness
Vedas."
"in the
words
also after the
The
iruiT,
SFgf
and
3fiOTl"SH:
and UfUlT^
JJ\J, alcl
II
Thus irumu
II
the word
added to
is
in
*nfsre[
the Vedas.
As,
tufa'
11
In the
3450.
'
comes
'An'
Why
V&>t:
vqcft
affix
(tawny), and 'kamandalu'

i ^Cljf U WTFT9iWU^ ST^TU cTSITff
V&rt:
wai,
The feminine
[Vol.
Chhandas, the word
varsha
'
'
takes the affix
than' in the remaining senses.

debars
This
5*wra*i3
335.
arrfii^n^rr M
The form
The word ^?rf
have difference in accent.

means " month," i. e.
will
As
sftfsfi
Kabha and
here
Nabhasya are two rainy months.
aaus
ot^t^-i
35WTwe.fa
arrafsrisiTT
ô
In the Chhandas, the affix 'than
3451.
maining senses after the word

This debars
4
38 49
vtism
(IV.
ITCTT^
^njrutierre:
3.
*<*
maining senses, after the word

This debars WIT (IV.
ing of two separate Sutras
3.
and
the anuvritti of the wo/d fJUnT 0U ^J
Here we
cR
roust refer
i
STTOcl*5l
in
the re-
armfnTWigg
II
affix
3Tq!85fira
'
than
'
^^fa faw
'
comes
in the re-
hemanta.'
Thus *a STSS3TO %mnT*5T$rT
16).
of 20
comes
v tRRvjIqh ih*fa*:
infill
*TWS
Thus
16, S. 1387.)
I
'
vasanta.'
'
3452.
33^
The
mak^
the subsequent sutra, in which,
is for
21,
taken.
again to IV. 3,106. S. 1486.
trT^rfkwn^fa
<l<)$
A. The affix nini oomes in the sense of enounced by

3452.
him, after the words 'saunak'&c., in denoting the Chhandas
enounced by them.
'
'
Th
debars
Thus STTlfaw
and
umj H
by Saunaka."
" who
Similatly gTSTOsrfcsTJ
Chhandas enonnoe i
Why do we say ** in denoting oh handas ? " Observe
The affix here is $ (IV. 2. 114.
Orvbography of Smimka."
3HU3
5 3^^Sa[fa
study (IV.
2.
64) the
'
irfTOKtaT
3.
1337).
fctfgn
" the
Vol.
Oh. IV
III.
wa^
This ordains
Thus
1523.
S.
swnuw
ziroa:
sjr*ra:
r^yf^^H
^T
araTsjwnran^
affix
mayat
'
the words 'vardhra' and
ftsTtJiliTtta 9RT^:
By
ifcsi
the
menus the
TOt
iprF
'
in it
nor after
ijiq
STYlf
II
kef
W5jfa;
Blrauf7r!T
S^T
3fC or short n
^tovtfqtsiT
70).'
Ik
"*) :
(I.
(^'t-
therefore
ail(*
it
'
adyudatta
is
upa
in
^tn
which
(IV.
by
1.
Phit
19,
II.
as
15),
and therefore
''
cnvif
rope
made
sacrificial Victims are tied.
swtut a: (IV. 4. 105. S. 1657) the affix a is added to

But iu the Chhandas, the affix 3 is added under similar
,
affix
'
This debars n of the
HaWRtB
gfcri
not come in the Chhandas
short vowel
<*<>$
o!h
'
comes
3TQHTS?
'
4.
let
after the
word
Thus
105. S. 1657.
"
regard thereto.'
preceding sutra IV.
ettTT
Chhandas
in the
sabha,' in the sense 'of excellent with
CTTOTBI
Sssft su:
The
3455.
siuf tss:
fenRrcT
9m
sutra
ssiâftr
hw
134).
'skin
as taught below.
58VW
'
ienoting excellence.
conditions
does
a
the feminine being formed by
13.
bilwa.'
3.
The word g\j meaning

of leutber."
II
takes the universal %an (IV.
in
'
from 35* by
raj^tJW
The word 3R3r? means having

The word tt^t is .wly-udatta by
takes wn[
3.
aTgtfaffl,
MU9
having
after a dissyllabic word,
Thus W.&31
IV.
in
ow mvnot
following
syj
the
in
The
3454.
fajr
iftssi*
(isia)
'
a:
affix
'
the sacred literature in the sensedealt with
in
n?foja:,
3iht vrafa, sitwtiw ars warn
38U8
swim
the sense of
conies in
'
Chhandas, after a dissyllabic word, the

its product or part.'
In the
3463.
mayat
'
31
Vntfic biVKR.srrr.
845G.]'
ciiq; in
born
lefined, youthful hero be
to
this Baoriticer.'
$8U
9 &Z.W
sjjwrngenii ua
asa^^r
wifr Irrssofcr.
3456.
The
ihtjra
WO
f<ajHnq
htw^cj ir.âHw
affix
'
yat comes
'
'
w^*.
in
'
smixro
11
*ra?rrwTTO3r5TS?*isfiH:
alternative, there being
the words
38)
riiT
(IV. 3. 53).
fec.
much
Those
ll
the
All
the
sutras
the fourth chapter, are Vaidic sutras, the word

all.
The word h governs
all
hymu
following
the sutras
up
'
what stays
affixes also
latitude of grammatical
wmi and ralrtf in

vhq'm 9 fasFSTU ^
the Chhandas, after a word in
the locative case in construction, in the sense of

This debars wjt
sttt-
^faeR-rainsnirrePtaT
rules
of
iq the Vedos.
the
henceforward
553%
being
there.'
are employed in the
Yajur
up
end of
to the
understood
to IV. 4. 118. S. 34G4.
Thus
Ve\Ia (16.
in
them
32
Vaidtc Forms.
In tho
The
11
called
Soma
eater of
of
3WUS
as
rHT W^:,
from
the
in
IV.
3456.
JThtu
there
get the Derivative word
we
it
Oh
III.
employed.
will also be
fcc.,
Muiijavat
twj3
sentence
*h5l3cfW M^:
plant produced on Muiijavat Mountains.''
m^T^WJT^TOf
wtS
iiffixes
JTSSTcTT^
the sense
in
ffrssrarf:
rnatives the
silt,
mountain
is
[Vol
999
>.
'hjj
wi:
win
The
what stays
'
This debars
affix
3?T
W5
(Jyan
comes
'
pathas
in
mm'
W3: =
QT^jfa
R7SII
FJiSf
The
what stays there'
38^
and
'
wherby
nad!,'
'
elided-
is
watery, celestial,
so "also s*TSf:
'
hyms HJT^mT^T qm,' (Rig Ved,

fan W' (Rig Ved II. 35. 1). qisj: means firmathe following
srotas
II
an
'
The
'
the sense of
in
vesanta
'
995
what stays
'
'
II
come optionally
'
(Jya
'
'
^TT
%*T9fital:
i
and
'
<Jyat
Chhandas in the sense

and himavat.'
in the
^TlT
&win
affixes
words
Thus $Bn?Vi:
comes
'
after the
and before these
'
99^
&rsT'
felfapita:
wmj fmm
3459.
Chhandas
'
affix
This debars 3*
there,
in
as
'
the
word
after the
'
affixes the final syllable
of srotas
'
elided.
This debars q?? which comes
in' the
The anuban
185).
added the form
385
is
gTrTCti:
wra^:' (aoo)
wciii us(
34G0.
The
also
sive
words
a we
'
'
yan
get sjfHT
'
qmj
(see
STTrTO
II
When
VI.
3?? is
^g
'swaw
conies in
'
sagarbha,'
qFrp?i9TOa
s^S-Tô: 3rl 9T fer^f? thief
concealed
998
'in w.
f^m
T fearer:'
^fa^rro
(qoq-a)
'
'
the sense of
sayfttha
'*-$&%
^fa w-
Rig Veda
The word
mi
lit.
'a
'who stajs
II. 31. 9).
HWR
is
younger
1.
what stays
Thus "^TWcIi
llfwj
197).
friend'.
ill
From
'
and sanuta.'
'
the difference being in accent (VI.
younger brother'.
meaning
of
*H^
^T?sf: or
3 and
affix:
UH
of
(III.' 1.
II
srew q%m:
uHTstrofre:
This debars
'a
in the accent
the elision
^nmsassrihsfcr ^ttukut:
there,' after the
jRTTffl:
causes
HTO?*nicrg^T3R
irwtht snwr:
Hm
lha
As irmfafwei: =
alternative.
*]($ (Rig Ved. X. 10t. 8) the difference being
So
^sit
the Chhandas, in the sense
in
words
S*PttfOT32WrrW0i 8
'frarsrftwr.
3458.
1.
mm:
wer:
and water.
38**
is
Thus
Ah
II
<g ^r 3 vita
VI. 16. 15)
ment,
vrafo
with the consonant following,
of thi river, fluvial."
of*
fan w'
iisit
s'viIh
there,' after the
last vowel,
the
<crt
'
34 57.
of
mm %m
F3i
*pn" Hsrfcrf
a concealed place', sanuta

the
root
always changed into
jg
*|
with the
in the
Pas-
Chhandas
Vol.
III.
(VI.
3.
Ch. IV.
33
Tin? Siddhanta Kaumudi.
3466.]
All three are karmadharaya compounds, as
84).
enroll = snwJ:
3859
nmg*
gwwaref rofa=HW:
The
3461.
<m
comes in the* Chhandas

word tugra.
affix 'ghan'
in the
sense
of 'what stays there/ after the
This debars
Which assumes
*TH rTfaSTUTT
<TOQT$r (Rig
Veda
reading
is
The word ru means
II
3mT3ffR
The
3462.
fVm
'food,
Thus
suuk
in
As
the
SWR SUM
îioj:
in the
sense of
would
have come
110? The repetition is to show that

of the next sutra, which would have been the case,
after hjj by the general rule IV. 4-
debarred by
and
sutra not existed.
38S3
H^T g
^T3ifj
The
3463.
and
affixes 'ghach'
Thus *5m?T by
^)
(n?f), lift*"? (y
See R. V.
115.
4.
3858 ^m^THT?
Sj:
13.
1.
'chha'
come
word
this
^ScTO'TWa*"?
Chhandas
in the
'agra.'
And
anc* ifa**? (by Vx().
10
<H*
not
had
in the sense of 'what stays there', after the
*p\) from IV.
uf? is
vh w^Tinu; 'sqfiitr: - nvftm
Another
waters'.
firmament, sacrifice and varishta'.
comes in the Chhandas

the word 'agra.'
Why this separate rule, for ua
II
rS *TT $3-
rffas: as
fcugrya also.
affix 'yat'
Wci = *HHlw
iiVi
1^5
'what stays there', after

Thus
the form
Tugrya meaning
33. 15)
I.
anjaT^
38S^
which comes in the alternative.
Tift,
*faraw (by
II
'sw^t iroun wsftfww' 'ara^m *f*ro?tte 3tut:'

3464.
The affix 'gha' comes in the Chhandas
1
in the senses
of 'what stays there/ after the words 'samudra' and 'abhra.'

This debars U?J
and
lables
is
11
llfasWor
srragftT
5mju:
Thus
$Tur.
II
than 'samudra', ought to
an irregularity,
and
and ^rw^:.
as in *n-T?s[3T
WSRS1
WsftfcHBNT
The word 'abhra', being a word of fewer sylhave come first. Its coming as a second member
shows
the
that
rule
of
purva-nipata
is
not of uni-
versal application.
58SU
^ftm 2^9
nifc^rTTSlfSrScI
The
3465.
WM
'ajf^WiJ fsTfan fv&tf
comes
affix 'y at'
in
the Chhandas in the sense
of 'given/ after the word 'barhis' in the 7th case in construction.
The
anuvritti cf &* g: ceases.
33SS
gclTO flTOR&ift
HITTTSV:
3STO
Thus
I
siftgnhl farviij rn5i| H R.
Hx
V. 10. 15,
5.
The Stddhanta Kaumudi. [Vol
34
The
3466.
share' or
%mn
tTO <*n^ "SrOTJ
VI.
to
word
after the
of
sense
the
in
3466.
'its
The
3467.
work
the
or
accent
the
213,
1.
As
of a messenger.'
be
will
?gir
but
the
II
ra?ur<ret w^nft
H^ *^WT cR:'
'UT
of a messenger
share
'the
According
accented Text reads 3fa*? x
385$
Chhandas
in the
in construction,
case
IV.
duty.'
'its
Thus
comes
affix 'yat'
'duta' in the genitive
Oh
III.
<m
comes
affix 'yat'
Chhandas
the
in
of 'killer/ after the words 'rak*ha' and
'
yatu
the sense
in
in the sixth case in
'
construction.
That by which anything
meaning
i.e.
*^rrciT fi?.
3T(>
rl^f:
.-TT:
$%$*
Wi~*\
Th word
II
T^JST
killed
is
demons
'thai which kills the
'0 Agni
li
called
is
T9rftaimfcfe*nvr: tobj
XTSfafi 'JrWTr?
TcltUI^^T THre^l
The
3468.
mark
8
*iirQ*T
comes
at'
the words
'praising', after
bodies
thy
in the plural as a
is
Thus *g?g' and
II
^
^Wff
i
Chhandas,
in the sense of
and 'havishya'
'jagati'
'revaii,'
II l
of respect.
UTriSJ
c7
Rakshas.' So
are killers of
^ncBJT
the
in
"g^^TT
Rakshas and Yatus.' As ut
called
in
the
sixth casein construction.
The word
TT5IF3
means tniQR
'praising,
affix
ni7 to the root, with t,he force of
atid
<gf^KjJ? 'praising
thus formed
+ nr\
the
4.
V.*
final
ifgij
f?JrfT
^cf^rT*.
things
148 =
being elided by VI. 4.
'
formed by adding the Krit
Thus TsrrSir smttflT

The word JJY3EJ1T is
condition.'
Havishya.'
or
for offering
fit
mm* = sferaro
if^wMTir
4)
or
(igfsirar
^fajij
-f
zjf?
u?r
'
e.
i.
IV.
butter
q being
the
cfec.
(flfanr
I22=^fcrrar+q?f
4.
elided by VIII.
64)-
38$<
'
^mm mx
The
affix
vtwi %&?vnTu femora
3469.
of
lievati, Jagati
of
extolling,'
wra
'
1^3
'
i
comes in the Chhandas in the sense

word asura' in the 6th case in construc-
yat
property,' after the
'
'
'
tion.
This debars voq
5PrTff
to
Thus
ViVS EF533R^JH eKs?TSraifU?
the
TUT $
*mq
Asuras.'
'
belonging
this vessel
made on
1JW1JJT
ireftroifn
fersaiT
II
to
the Asuras.'
by
a wheel
See Maitr S.
I.
As W^q
5fr
potter belongs
8. 3.
So also *izt
il5RT: (Ishop. 3).
$%zo
m^ftmro
*n?|ft UTtrr
3470.
<K8
The
affix
'an
'
comes
in the
Chhandas
in
the sense of
glamour,' after the word 'asura' in the 6th case in construction.
Vol.
III.
Ch
IV.
This debars
wmYvj
*3*J*T
Vaidic Infinitive.
3472.]
*w*Sl
Ufl H
feminine
JniT=*WTg*:
lIigT*
As
II
*n*?ft m*JT
II
The
3471.
nal stem,
affix
the
in
'
yat
comes
'
Chhandas,
in the
is " this
nomiaffix
mantra of putting up,"
their
is
after a
ending with the
case in construction,
1st
matup,' when the sense
35
provided that, the things put up are bricks
And
the affix
matup
elided by luk.
is
This sutra requires analysis.

ing
'
having
WT8TW
c^r^ is formed by addiug iTrTTI to HST meannoun foimed by the affix WrHI
The word
plural fern, of ty^ meaniug
of them
the prunoun refers to
The word 3U*1T1 means putting up,' ani technically means
genitive
'8
T*<J*T
the force
The
whole
ara^l
Thus
'
(a?WH
crew?
un
up
of
affix
3fl
Inmv.
to other
Why do we
Why
here
^T?WSS^TTfW,
there
and not
we
do
'
*IH!W
no
be
'
be
no
affix.
are
the.se bricks
Why
affix.
when such
mutup is
II
affix
The
bricks put
be called
will
nein g e hde.l=r5Ri, fern.

bricks
i.
3Qf3*lTfr1
on which
e.
So an^lT:,
II
The
affix,
affix is
OTfwi^taqrawfw
g.
-serve CCB^gi^tTMTOT
the thing collected being p>taherds
The
'
i
affix
to
'
an
cones
'
in
the Chhandas, after
affix
matup
is
elided.
*IT?1W f^rmi
Thus whwPnraT^T
ffSfSwHTftUdqimT
vs
lb
thus formed, ^f*3m^ + ^q* HiT*3
OT the matup being
-I-
fl^ + Wff
bricks
VI.
at
4.
the
the
denote bricks put up with the Mantra contain-
ing the word Asvin, and the
uttered.
not to be added
sra^T^GfafT J&K *TWhy do we say Mantra ? tserve

collected with hand havii
e.
bricks.
words as vim an,
e.
used with
is
not to be added to the whole
is
'
do we say ?*J^T*|
no
tiT?ifT^TW, here there will be
3472.
i.
the
Mantra,
H5Tr
those used in praying etc.
as
there will
TO
will
rlgm ? The affix

^qvJM putting up
say
say,
Mantras such
*H7Tr*mTga\JT'Tl
is
So
'
ii
Mantra.
W^r
Varchasy
Note
here
added,
C'^'O
Thua sra[f?IT 3U3*JTi?T 'he collects

Varchasvau mantra has be*n pronounced'
ERJSJt)
is
recitation of ara?5lTT
the
w^f " sacred
'
yat
objects;
sacrificial
yat
affix
ko
ends with matup (tadvan),
word which
'
containing the word gg^r
the
- srero + Off
means " the ami
sutra
a Mantra
is
or oollected (^jvjtQfl) with
up
bricks, pots
sacrificial
and denotes a mantra used in putting

mantra refers to bricks: ani when this
elided.
'
'
genitive (awn), after
of
II
putting up of
the
in
bricks.'
to a
used as a Mantra
hymn"
refers
'
the word f*RT H
and
that,'
I(i4 =
ifi^
time
of
'BTrsel'ft:
The word
II
elided
V..
125=*-
Thus iW'sgft*ire <aTff* 'he collects Asvin bricks

collecting which Mantras containing 3ttTj|^ were
,
II
See Yajur Veda Tait S. 5.
3. 1.
I.
36
BQW^^H^ W^TMfT tr^WT^W
^gTITSTrwffl Sf*
wwt.hwtt mi
'
3qvjqm
affix
The
whole
word
there
word niurdha||end<ng
the
is
3473.
Wcpi^T ST
in the
Chhandas, to the
collected with the
The word
The
understood here.
is
construed
be
to
is
bstit:
Man-
vayas.'
'
sutra 3471
the
of
and
repeated,
" After
added
is
'
fa
'
inurdhanvat/ in expressing bricks
tra containing the
be
srasgcfotjayrffi
matup
'
STVZm
TlSFaWr?
'
The
3473.
word
H*f
[Vol. IV. Ch. IV.
the Ablative case.
in
matup,
in
i.
should
sutra
means
word murdhavat,
the
after
e.
*r?TT:
of the first matup when the

elision
The word 33&T means the bricks, the
which contain the word ac*j
The affix j*rTJJ debars Qr?
added a second^ matup, and there
Up^dhana mantras
of
contains
is
mantra."
bricks are collected with vayas
II
II
mautra
which
both
word
the
QSSST^ and
WY^T^
II
mantra, the
affix z<^
would have come by IV.
and
f^S^T^
II
Now
denoting
in
The present sutra ordains
3858
5RWTSOT
of matup,
so
after SJ^'^T^T
JPTfTiJ^
affix
yat
'
<^
ÎWT
comes
'
rPT:
in the
word in the first case

formed meaning a month or a body.
This debars
the
HW^
38S#
VT&n
E\IT5*
WTtftf:
affix
'
îTSBfa
^wwe: ^lafsfrr
I
The
3476.
38SS
na
'
force
in construction, the
word
of clouds
i.
e.
II
Thus
June-July.
7*0
force
madhu.'
and 'kh' come with the

when a day is meant.
'yat
?
'
comes with the

'
ojas,
= 311:
SJ&TS^Tt^T^lT
i
the sense of jjrTO

'
as well as 'yat'
Tt%T
or Crater*
srih s*r eras wn:
those having
month
the
'
affixes
matup, after the word

Thus $T5NRm
Rvs'^ri'lîX-
w^T^Ra: denote
ciT
Thus
ec^l^
Chhandas with the
of matup, in the Chhandas, after the word

Thus wi>act: or trasa:
$8t
up with such
the bodies full of vigor.'
'
r?*jr:
- wviot:
The
3475.
Wrm and
affix
ttt=siWCT:
Similarly "SHTSUST
loth
after a
5WTfe 1333^
II
The words gs^n: and
rl^rFT^^fH TWWI WT8:
The
3474.
put
125 after both these words
4.
is
176-
1.
iTO^'miHanr:
that Mantia
*r\j5f,
bricks
saciiticial
^yiffl 'he collects Muidbanvati bricks.'
the same object. See VI.
and
erfc^r
girwui:
'
'
the day
qihws:
8
i
'
lit.
full of heat.
<*VM
qinHnfa:
qifrtiifcf:
force of
Vol.
Oh IV
III.
The
3477.
affixes
yal
'
with the force of matup,

1
vesas
or
'
The
after
'
'
in the beginning.
'
Thus
accent
the
of asj sliows th.it
tjf
193).
1.
kh come in the Chhaudas,

the word bhaga, having the words
and
'
rule of yatha sankhya does not apply here.
The
(VI.
yasas
'
37
Vaidic Tnwnitivb.
3480.]
on the vowel preceding the
falls
g = Û,r^q:
QSJ
fasifl
enjivrirT
'Strong-fortune'
affix
also
so
The word gij means 'shength' wtt means fortune,

The won! cj^TWn: may ie t k en as a
desire, effort, greatness, virility and fame.'
The word SfirnT'Zj: would
Dvaniva compound of srtjf? force' and WJf; fortune.'
With or, SSJTwrit;?:, uin wnto:
possessed of power and fortune.'
then mean
irlrTW'S:
famous-fortune.'
'
'
'
Notb
Kasika does not read 01 into
The
3478.
subhaga
affix
kh
'
and 'yagobhaga,'
'
comes
also
'
is
more reasonable.
words
the
after
'
ve-
Chhandas, with the force of
the
in
That
this sutra.
matup.
Thus i^TîftT: and qshwnta:
Note
This sutra
according
to the
last in order to prevent
the
Kdri/cd
u^ would
a^*lfT, as
then the
affix
what
intended. Another reason for
is
the anuvritti of
38t
The affixes in
the sense of* made by them,'
3479.
'
and udjfm:
HB5
after
T3 to sijnJn': which
aphorism
distinct
of u^f
not
is
that
is
II
?h3t: sfarT:
and
'
it
n^fw:'
ya as well as
the word purva
'
'
into the sutra by force of the

3JH=Tjrf^(ir:
kh
'
'
'
come
in
(forefathers),
widened
by
the
by virtue
of
(rvg
I.
35.
3480.
sanctified/
TTCWttfw:
'
the anuvritti of 1T~5^

i.
e.
So also
road.
be
*ft?
or
^ffa:
The
n^f%:
(*3i). or
sfcgifiW
affix
after the
'
yat
'
will
M9D
comes
word apas
'
tjfol^
3rd
W&: (q)
8
in
reading of this
(fj),
[te
trf^fw:
tlfalfw:
Another
11).
The examples then
ll
as ufufw: nftlw:
38*o
Thus
forefathers."
the affixes then will
WrlfnfsTQTV:
word
ancestors
the
word trih in the plural means ndicjFij: " past cenerThege words occur generally in the plural, and mean ' roals
TloEifa:
S?f3rfT:
made by
'
The
II
ations, ancestor!."
iFiXV
Kaumudi,
affix
3.
(I.
Instrumental case in construction.
The ?g is read
Thus ire?:
ceases.
tja:
oociys in the SioMhanta
making
* ^
the
For had
runs in the next sutra, not so
13*
iroft^fw: afiafw: sfwafH:'
in the
it
from
separated
been
10).
andthe
apply to rhwT,
nU: gfftfflTOT
has
the application jof the TjBTHraj rule
been dihtHF *T3VnTT^
sutra
and
pi.
11
So
also,
s&tra
*a will be
is
$ ^
usf:
drawn
ufgf: (with
in
?^),
11
'
I
the Chhandas, in the sense of
'in the third case in
construction.
The Siddhanta Kauhudi.
38
wnz
Thus
86.
38*9
^%m
The
3481.
of
like,'
'
The
^TISTHq:
(Rig
*jfHT H:
like
Ved.
indicated in the sutra
is
91*
itself.
'gha' comes in the Chhandas, in the sense

word "sahasra/ in the third ease in construction.
'
indicated by the sutra.

Thus gffHUI fffiTHt
As in th.3 following vers?
*r?ma!HnST ^1W
The word gf?Tft means hî equal to.'
Some
construction
of
is
unto thousand.'
168.
3480.
affix
after the
c tse
'
of construction
As v&izwvi ^fg: (Rig Ved.
offering purified with water.'
The case
12).
[Vol. III. Ch. IV.
2).
read the word f;TfT instead of sf?w?T, but the meaning will be the same.
38^
3THT
^^nja3T^Rrgi
*i:
The
3481,
fit?!
affix
935
wemifrr
The
3483.
'
*i:
affix
9*s>
ya' comes
'
Chhandas, with the force
Soma,' in the second case
debars the
Tnia
in the
sahasra.'
'
As asfltiw frar$ = safi;ra:

and vm of V. 2. 102 and 103.
i
Slfan:
HTSSTJi**rreftfa
gha' comes
'
of matup, after the word
38*3
WrS^
affixes
fafa and ^Fl
the Chhandas, after the word
in
in construction,
when the sense
is
that
of 'who deserves that.'

Thus OTTHirff = ifrttit
ween
art
and u
38*8
affix
ya
'
n*
force
fsrannaog (TV.
will
*n^
the affix
of
3.
JTOT:
affix
in the
that
is
Thus
93<t
of
m*i
HrT. ^TTHrT: (IV.
madhu,' with the force of the

3&T:
W^? g
jnjwiT^
I
in
74 and 82).
construction
*TV|: H
'
Thus uvtott^ .mtwi^
3.
The c.ise
21).
km: fa^?JTl = r*UTa:
4.
'
e.
38<=
i.
difference bet-
Chhandas, after the word
wyn&wwai* 3RCTT!f maw: jtww ?am:

The affix yat comes in the Chhandas,
3485.
1
The
may at.
131 and 113) and VLHH (V.
vary according to th^ sense.
38c l4
deserves Soma''
sacrifices.
comes
'
Soma,' with the force of the

The
performing
of
accent.
in
The
3484.
1
is
*9 ^
"The Brahman* who
3|T3**!j:
honorable and learned, and worthy
affix
mayat.
n
I
980
after the
word
Vol.
Oh. IV.
TIT.
The
3486.
'vasu,'
when
Thus
The
B5im%
five
word
after ihe
without changing the sense, after the word
comes
'
made
Thus the word
to the collection of letter-.
"
3i<T33TrgT3^CT:
gâfpi:
W* fafcHT,"
usngfrTErin
^133, four; vbj& *imz. four;
^T
referred to being
The
TOTT *l#?lW
gHBQî=gFT:
38*5
affix
comes
u?j
STCjfueiBar:
I'lie
two;
U'Sf,
ft
Here
II
^tsRTg:
'srafewi: ^t^t'
after
383$:
witho
gjf?
equal to
is
changing V
.t
ggfw:
sense.
Similarly
As
*Kldij
ii
*zm
Chhandas
tin--
and ems two.
in
meant, as well as with the force of mayat.
is
yat
'
is
comes
'
'a collection.'
sentence:
here
Vdrt
affix
reference
letteis
yat
'
a collection
following
in the
17
when
{g^T^T
affix
g*T5cr. ^FfTf!:
Vdrt
39
Vaioic diversity.
3490.]
The
3447.
989
'gha' comes
affix
the Chhandas after
in
the
word 'nakshatra,' without altering the meaning.

The
aimvritti
^tbT'ST^to:
38
of
^ctt^t
^^Trnffr^T
The
3488.
words 'sarva
'
affix
and
'
(Rig Ved. X. 3:.
$8-<f
SKTrfifH
SFUC:
*JH3T ^?TT35fSTrT^'
tatil
'
word
'
siva,'
when the
'
comes
'
the
in
fsJS
affix
'
is
rsrerei
cfiT:
so also sjtqt
38<0
I.
he
ftogrmfl:
'
gfacTr ^: HoTr? sdrTT-
Ulfw: ^Pr7Trt>
6.
3).
W^^T 35T^'
comes, in the Chhandas,
'
does,'
as,
= fsjamfri:
112
20)
^ft^HTrra
w5 g
raicrrrawfr
the
equivalent to eRrifrT formed by
grc: is
WejSIT crcrsra' (Rig.
qiHRT
after
(Rig Ved IV.
arishta' in the sixth
'
has accusative force,
Thus
hymns:
'183
This shows that the construction must

it
Chhandas
in the
following
OTCTrftfirf
tatil
'
sam,' and
sense
The word
Word,
?igT%Wi:
The
3489.
98*
and Trafefarg smffimiqi:
14),
TI^T33^
ftl3SmfTO**I 5F?
Thus
extend to this sutra.
deva,' without altering the meaning.
As 33rnfri: and ifSmfW:
ffm
not
does
3TB
ii
wrs
HifrT:
be
So
ll
THHrfrT:
and
(Rig Ved. X. 60.
988
sai^^rs
^fci
(III-
1.
With
134).
a
krit-formed
II
^fTCSriTfri:
II
As quw: SJWcft
dual of 3J?fm%:, and .meaning
SIrUrrr being
genitive.
faerer srt: = foef 5finf<T
after the
case in construction
&m&
8.)
fares* wra: raramfcT:
^rTsfovnia:
SRnfcr.
*fTO?nfrf:
3490.
words
The
'siva,'
affix
'tatil'
'sam' and
'
comes
arishta,'
in
the
Chhandas, after the
being in the 6th case in con-
struction, the sense being that of condition.
40
Siddhanta Kaumudi.
Thus
MT3t ^
TSTcnra
'
f^TcTflTfrT:
happiness or peace,'
of
state
[Vol.
Ch. V.
III.
the condition of blissful ness.'
'flfirESHlfk:
II
8490.
3R?Tfff:
Here these words have
'
the
the force of
Verbal nouns.
CHAPTER
V.
'ssrTWTjjnRmsm'
T?r^TTffr?c^:
r?oFi sfunmw' (<ws) *f?? 'sm *f?r *
7joani?q5^5fHH3W nft*rr(iTfjif*ro arraj: *'
uiafiRT.$WTOT:
fafar*!
fgfsRTs^g: + gw^wst: 5T$?g wwra: *
wtht: '+ fg-i^^ffi gix^w +'
'air fcrataOTem:'
'f^TgrTt trRwm'
't fîgf v^j:'
i
'+
The
3491.
ing
^w xfikum
Thus
HXfT^ +
679) = *rrg
of Neuter nouns.
Vdrt:
"
when
the
in
the
mean-
II
"They
(V.
1.
seven seven-fold
the
create!
57 S. 1723) and
an
(V.
1.
60
S.
monarchies/
1726) are
under-
HTtrT
(the
*&5?
Plural in 5H^
is
fs
portion
elided
is
by VI.
4.
144
HTtRTfa by the ordinary rules of declension
The
affix T^fa comes in the Chhandas, after the words ending in an

n'e^fu^t^TTigT: "Half-months have a measure of 15 days". ftfT3I*fT
?j^, as
"Mouths
Vdrt
*JT5T
Its
II
WTfFT:
word saptan,
measure,
is its
here.
S.
and
the
after
sx?T S-ffllT^*!^
The phrase
1
comes
ail
that of a Varga.
is
As
stoo
affix
in the sense of " this
Chhandas,
are of thirty days'*.
So
word fVsjfa, as
also after the
fgrflr$T5f|fro:
"Angiraeas consist
of or oon> prise twenty Gotras."

Vdrt:
The
38<9
3492.
in the
^^fW g
The
Chhandas,
after
and TOT2
*IEJT^
in
denoting similarity.
rciT^T STCl:
affix
<*
yat
(ij)
(Kig Veda VI.
ss
21.
10).
Q^f
ferffW UTS??:
comes
in the sense
of 'deserving that'
after every pratipadika.
This debars 51 &c.

I.
comes
affix 3(cpJ
As 'Fgign: gT8|#fi ^
(Rig Veda I. 142. 2).
Thus
a?w:.
333*1T
5 W; TOTO:, Smi
if*j:
II
See VI.
213.
KlZ**fevm* (Rig.V?da.
I.
91. 20).
He who deserves a house is

The word 3T2T37 is derived from *T3f "house.'*
a trF3?3:
The lengthening takes place by VI. 3. 137 S. 3539. TsrS*! means 'sacrill
fices'
that which deserves a sacrifice
3493.
fold senses
The
affix
chha
taught in V.
1.
is
(iya)
faaTZlH
comes
II
Chhandas, in the fivestem ending with vatsara.
in the
79, 80, after a
Vol.
III.
Ch. V.
z&
This debars
15B:
Thus
ll
tfgrBtmr:
Thh Vaidic Rules.
3198.]
^jcSrftq:,
tfawftq:
^T^rsCta:
41
qf*3fS*W: qftar^ftq:
The affixes 'kha' (in) and 'chha (iya) come in the

3494.
Chhandas in the fivefold senses taught in V. 1. 79, 80, after the
word vatsara, when preceded by sam'and âri.
Thus FSrHftur: aud s^mq:, qfTOr^cUff: and qftsrsftq:
38^ $^ftl qtn 9 4 Hog
II
^R5T53lTf5FI VTTrrflTraS
'
WT7T <3Rffgq:
3495.
word
'
ritu
'
in the
4.
designation of
ghas
'
'
comes
(iya)
same sense of 'season has come
for
146, because
hence the guna rule which applies
UeJ,
after the
it.'
As NTH ^tf&m: (Rig Ved. I. 135. 3). Here there is no

gets the
by sutra I. 4 16, tRH before the affix
This debars utr.
Guna by VI.
'
affix
emim^
WrsrafaftHd ht>*5
?TOnirj
18) does not apply.
to *T (I. 4.
3^ m&
etfh:
ma
c
1
133?
fa^ci:
In the Chhandas, the affix vati' is added to an

3496.
sarga (Preposition), in the sense of a verbal root.
'
As the word
CH5HT
Upa-
35??: and fern: in the following Rik (X. 142. 4.)
" Wneu thou

gw?f q^Ttfq tiiTf^^^ i?n
(faeifl: = f^TTrTT^) trees &c.
foa?ft qtftf
11
Fire
goest burning high (35??: = S^fTT^) and low
The that is the augment of dat,' in the Chhandas,

after a Numeral ending in n and not preceded by another numeral: as well as the augment mat.'
3497.
'
'
'
'
'
Thus
qJ^t^THT
3497
or
strain
q*g*i:,
qsgnfafr^qwSJiqTqnsR
sj^:'
II
qsgir:, s<*m:
See V.
'^q?q qfaqfczwi
As
11
qigraqTfsT
q^snfcT
Weiftrr
and
2. 56.
'
1
m c3T
qftqftirrT fere*l
'
In the Chhandas, the words paripanthin and pari-
parin are anomalously formed by the affix iui (in) and Lave the
sense of " an antagonist."
WJrtf qftqfoisro (Rig Ved.
W1F3T qftqfa&T fas^
ttfaii fsrfcn 5QT?j
^sq^ri
4-
al^îffr
42. 3).
*qfasa 3h?rcfr'
srfioqj? +'
^J^cfoqT ^ SrRWT
6
I.
Ya J- Ved. IV. 34). See

(
+'
^m
3m:
'
l*fa$rf
1889.
^^Tm^rî^
Tif-^s^m?^^'
'+
S.
'
'
*tsi*h?RigqTwrc3rr-
vîrTT^roqâ
*p^?ftftq 3^:
'
I
'
HTOJWftwiI
'
1
'
42
3498.
ssn^ ft3ME3:{
&rt
3498 #
added diversely in
affix vini is
mat up.
the sense of
A*
[Vol. III. Ch. V.
Sometimes
ll
In the Chhandas,
optionally before fafrr
and
it
comes
it
not added, as ig$j gi33l5T
is
the
gu,
final ^r of
after
3W3 and
sjtost, *T<gIrT
II
^q
is
and ^sit also
lengthened
as 3rereft>
As rifiTSSWVfcnfcRjT ; srztct oQ^Tfj

wisRTsfo garish, 3W3Tcit, Mnfc âinsft
The word " ashtrl" is a Bynonym ol " daiishtra '' and means 'tooth.'
ii
fdrl
W o[q
Chhandas, the
In the
Thus i
ll
^wfuT, Tfaf:
38<
: wgcnsmtaii:
^ra come
Rig Ved. X. 167.
respectively after
rwiif^T g s^fa
rhil, in
the Chhandas, and also the
affixes.
The
r
fl
comes
ZT
nffix
S. 1949),
after
and f after
So also SST^W and
^jt
%
(VII.
102. S. 265)
2.
gwq'^fnfw^T giTTW vnq (Rig Veda VIII. 27. ll).

Note
=3JT + 31==r f 31 (?3?T is replaced by
3UOO
7jT %^ T g $^fg
jg
^
u
FaRir^jT
wram
The
manner
3500.
well as
'
The
wherefore
{
why
'),
for
mm
Jim *
3T OT(Rig Ved.
Note
fsRTT
because the
I.
in
3^
area
By
3J5T3JT (Rig
3VW
11
'
'
mm zmtt
'
H
'
also (as
how
'
77. 1).
+ sn =
SR
qt (f?FW
replaced by
is
a vibhakti as defined in V. 3.
fatnm
As irsivm
Veda X~149.
oR
1949).
ll
g, the word us^Tf*

fste
3. 3. S.
Thus Sfisrr
The former is an example of
manner/
second of ttsrk
As in the following senRig Ved. x. 146. 1. #fa %<pu jxm * i^sfe n mm
f, 5R7JT
'
u*a
s:
f<
Chhandas, having the force of
trs^
lysafg
'
'
i
$t
is
3).
1
also included.
VII.
2.
103. S. 342,
'
are
anomalous
in the
As
iK
ijn
ctirdl
5fT3H, trsra,
UW'
(Rig Veda X. 87. 21) trsireyq^wa-
^ T fT H*3T (Rig Ved.
by
S. 1947j.
astati.
yjmrzmj&imxq
HTT^f*
m
1.
?t tjstjt
The words pagcha and paseha
3501.
or
xTT^f
by V.
ll
comes in the sense of ' cause

the Chhandas, after the word kirn.
into the Sutra by force of ^
is read
what reason
yzsm
affix sjt is
*B3ts*n*riTfim
sf
a^T^W
Thus ^3T (V. 3. 3.

As %zj fe
ll
affix 'tha'
word jxmtl
?
jtsrtc
reason or cause', the
tences
as
After these two (nominal stems idam and tad), come
3499.
f|H
2.
ihn and *y:
ii
respectively the affixes da and
other
and gfaq come in the sense of

Rig Ved. X. 102. 2. *mf*ft-
affixes 4,
*ittW5T g$rT*) 7Tfgi33t (tstt:)
ft2 gvi: R'g Ved. X. 85. 33. qfa*

t
The affixes JJFJ and
IS ote
:
II. 27. 11).
Vol.
ITT.
Oh. V.
The affixes ishtan and iyasun come

Nominal stem ending in tri. S 2000.
A.
3,501
das after a
*refa* cfifbs: (Kig Ved. VII. 97.
ed by VI.
this
like
Thus
44.
*Him
l).
R*
as the
&c under
'
when
affix
TTHTT^ 5TQTt
9).
II
mn
in the class o2 Svaradi
ay og
*3t
The word
added
ffTt is
By
the
the
when
is
word
'
also
'
in
X. 45.
nq
are indeclinables, as they are include!
^fa
read
^fa:
excellence
to be
8i
'
is
tatil
come
after
denoted.
into
this
or ^SRmfa:,
Similarly ûsrttfa:
II. 34. 9).
when
saw in the Vedas,
affix
37. S. 447).
1.
Thus
11. S. 2004.
indeclinables,
of the
force
added
also is
II
'
iraferwraE
4.
and
verbs
SEKSRifa afi^w
$t 3*t ^fa:
In the Chhandas, the affix til and
66. S. 2021.
Veda V.
(llig
Thus tfcrea TTHTR (Rig Veda

HRC means KSTCftt
and
sjffjr
5ft
3504.
Veda.
(I.
amu (am)
affix
finite
3?,
^R^^Twit femffiiT g
vrik and jyeshtha

3.
in
II
included.
also
is
or TJrtfnj 331:
The words ending
V.
a* and
affixes
these words are used as adverbs.
the sutra, the
^~2(3W
SlffSCrer
&c.'
the word fow, words ending in
taking the comparative
154. 8, 2o06).
comes in the sense

and ima (idam).
similar conditions as in V.
4.
ancients, as the predecessors, as all creatures, and.
kirn
To
plOT fg^cI^TT^T 5S55R T fR
JXJStVl
the Chhan-
thai
affix
after pratna, purva,, visva,
men have worshipped
3503.
after
',
(Indra),
as these living
'
368 = 3rg+fq5j fa elided by VI.
88; S.
1.
in
Thus eRcj + *I5 = cKT f ?zs (?J elidThus imft + iaspj^mi + 4of
7)
vjg: u
irT^taet
3502.
'
2008)
154. S.
4,
(ta elided by VII.
of
43
Vaidic Rules.
3501.]
as,,
sutra.
iit^t
This also debars
nî
^mj
qsRRtfRWRi: (Rig
II
^T RT 5T^T ^5R%: (Rig Ved. IV. 41.
4). sqissHTfr?
clfefeR (Rig Ved. V. 44.
I).
iN^^HlfR
the
Chhandas,
tach comes after a TatIn
the
affix
3505.
purusha compound in the Neuter Gender ending in an' or as.'
Thus wm + *M = ITSRclWT as in ^R3JI sTHTfcT, SO al.*> SiSWHjfiftffsigfr?
RRJSn!3^Fnc^*TT$n?R:
'
gÎRUT WciTr'
'
'
'
11
So
also
0=3
Why
when
word ends
iu
sjjst
SSJc^Rw) *o also nûi ?S^glH

Why do we say" when ending in sh?i
do we say
''
iu the
Neuter
'
ifq^S^gif'T
as,
(33
1-
f&^S^ =
33
^^5[
II
or
vm "
Observe tprrffiUT
Observe
fsiôj^TS
^df 33T^16W
II
oT^TfcT
II
Thb Siddhanta Kaumudi.
44
Note
fore E^r
The
word
" optionally " should be read iuto the sutra.
cij
33^*3:
optionally aided, as SrgJBTW or B^TSTOTT,
is
The form bahuprajas
350G.
Thus Hp5iT fam fcfinferaw

ature, the form
is STATIST:;
JFrTST 3rJ~*3TfêjT%T
as
5Iâ#r
or
$n?*Tlff:
tt
164. 32.
I.
In
the classical
liter-
when
final
II
.U?rT TSTffTfrf'
substituted dat in the Vedas,
is
There-
39f^W
valid in the Vedas.
is
Kig Ved.
'SWUm^rT:
For danta
3507.
[Vol. III. Ch. T 3505.
in a Bahuviihi.
Thus traOTWISWrT, 3W*3fl
3Uoq
^RS^ftr
The
3508.
ing in short
Thus
SITSWcT or
M^
3?T. tffhTSUnfrT
11
not come after a Bahuvrmi end*
does
affix 'kap'
3WWT
I
in the Vedas.
'ri'
Sell
WTHISFI = ISWTrTT,
lr?*W,
IrlfTJftT,
^llcIT K
CHAPTER VL
3509. A.
In
the
room
single vowel, there are two.

Vdrt
the
fwnfiir
ii
the
miar sth
Vdrt:
mn\X
In
(or
Chhandas
and other
Perfect
The
root
grm
aarpm) Rig
iiud a
form.
*5
is
no
(should
(Rig Ved.
VI. 8. 3) or ^Tfff
\jt^ or 3>jTrj u
optionally reduplioated
H5ITM
bt cmstrued
list of
is
in the
As,
Perfect.
Thus
I
x*w?l
rjT^SlR:
substituttd.
verbs given any wheie.
word having a long vowel
ttTO'gm
firaifqi
Ved. X. 44. 14.
the roots 'tuj' &c, a long

therefore
containing a
reduplication of the root In
optionally
is
rerm aîi^
is
portion,
first
In the room of a short vowel of the reduplicate of
3509.
There
there
As sifrT
teuses.
or a^ng,
of the
S. 2175.
as
4<
verbs like
in the
mt +
m*W$
3TV2TC U: qfn&tjj Kig Ved.
lengthening only takes place
111.
2.
32. 8
in the Vedtvd before
in
we should consider
H5U
we
So that wherever
tuj.'*
duplicate,
HI.
The woid irfe
r
I
may
a val-d
it
I06gganw: Kg.
I.
w F fT]g Ki^ Ved.
94. 2. This
some
.-pôitil affiles.
J.
01.
12).
Yol.
Ch. VI.
III.
Rulm.
Taidic
3512.J
45
In the Chhandas, the semivowel of the root hve
3510.
is.
diversely vocalised.
Y&
ll
5HT
is
Thus t?q or gSTTJT, as *5arrrt[9 3;h* (Rig Vei. I. 111. 4>

*f *TOrff
The form ^9 is Atmanepada, Present tense, 1st Pers. sing, the vikarana
elided, then there is vocalisation and substitution of 3Srg?
So also gSTfjT"
II
USE- faiST*
g*UT
fawj t*^
So
ll
^g: as iratagq (Rig.
also
K)
2.
I.
'
hear
the invocation/
Vdrt
There
qR5, and there
1^ ufwj =
^rti.
Why
4. 74.
V.
Vdrt
2.
15)*H
?|#
WHS
affix
ns *fq + w?}
'
For chay
3511.
<i
3*
.wreaRfm
Thus FcTWI
fqfftsw:,
tara*rara:
atpKraoiT-iîs
s*
'
^ff îfdf*raini
 *nfs
itz&w
'
*rfe?<?o>T3i
*ta xxm fro mi w
'
'
wj
'
'
3512.
'
'
m\ni
In the Chhandas, the following irregular forms are
and ^TÂ;
The word $?3T8

is
'
fam 5t xit:
v*3 swt:
*ta â faena fassTui
wmicI *rafai:
i
met with : TOWim*, ^T^*,

SITTm*:
forms
substitution.
*?3 sF3rfa
'
faaifa
^:'i' wgrong:
g%
diversely substituted ki in the Chhandas.
is
ll
w*srf*r
'
3H of the Perfect. Sometimes there- is no

wrfnTWOl Thus gTn + g^=8^+39 = fâRt+^=f^:
M 35
WHW!
^fwg^R
'
affix
+ îa = gTai
by
ll
II
the
\l
of the semivowel of
diversely vocalisation
is
affix
Observe lawrfa
= ** + l*a = * nr+W?J=*+ + 3fl (VIII.

as, *t foi^H ^T fiwi:
Sometimes it does not take place, as tftKtt^
The *r here is not changed to g as required by VIII. 2. 15*.
^lanchra
i
ym mm ^
saw
9m
fa when followed by
As fav
of
of
do we say when referring to a metre
*fa followed by the
gfcSS^* 5*:
II
semivowel
3RW wh^n it refers to Metres.

The word ?jet takes the sanasaota
the tR
of
the
of
rocalisation
is
elision
is
^^'
fa^W,
fafSTST,
II
'STTriT:,
fart^
',
is
understood here.
From the
funned HIQ^cry^TW being tbe Imperfect (^ )'
2n ^
root WvS*
Pers.
Dual,
'
to challenge \
Atmanepada
there
lv.
is
As,
redui luation- of the root, vocal. sation
l^^fsHDr U^^J^gi^
uf
T,
(Rig Ved. VI. 69.
and the
;.
elision of
iriegulai-
lu the clussical language
46
the form
WX
HZ
?jnj5Q\j3T7
is
Some
II
the vocalisation of
say,
From hw and
mi
'to respect, to worship', are
Then
elision of *? irregularly.
the
lengthening
of
prasarana
The
II
The form
*^^Sl\^f-
The
elision of
addition of the
the
The
is
vr;, *I5^:
the Peifect
2nd
The regular form
the irregularity.
to
the root
^^
'to cook \
w irregularly.
from the same root
by
mi:
the word refers to
jyrjr,
Sometimes the word
Thus ufz
in the plural,
aTlTrl?!
is
19. 4).
'
II
the- Perfect of
is
The regular
form,
quTlfc?:.
aim
fez
'
jftihnff
fot^^fg
z$i
and
fecftr
nnd the non addition of

14),
the
?JT
and
In
II
the Nish'.ha
substitution of
when
faj
it
the
fact,
falH
As *n*TT
affix.
refers to
other than
HT*T
ll
word WflV* in
the
exhibition of
TTT*Y
other than
objects
to
^t
when
place
takes
sfr
affix,
also derived
is
not absolutely necessary.
taking the affixes
<Rig Ved. HI. 53.
is ^raifalir
II
seen in the singular, referring
The words ^TCPT and

sffc,
I.
The form
vowel with the same
the
Some say
sjirU is
tsttrt
derived ^THT before
is
As ^THTCT s^5Tm:
shortening
II
the plural in the sutra
^1^ and
the sam-
in
II
'HIvafarT, falHT =TT
#TJT
then
sjl^+BSf
there
^r& 'to go
augment ^< before
the irregularity.
is
II
form farOIS! as in " qf^FIcaTat " (R'g Ved. X. 71. 6),
From
changed
(Vli. 4. 70)
consists
per. sing, of the root
fam, the vocalisation of the reduplicate

HfUTST
^3 + 3*
irregularity
the reduplicate, and the non-addition of the

is
as
c,
Thus genu TO'tn^t (Rig Ved.
ll
and the
of *
augment
66) = *t +
(VII. 4.
classical forms will be
This
II
*n
and w;Kg:.
qn?3:
vocalisation
reduplication, then ^r changed to
is
3H=11+^ + OT
fggjir
is vocalisation of
affix
there
(VII. 4. 71)=?iiT5ig: U
with the
^|TOT^fj:
by
of this will be
derived
there being
pi. gra.
then
this w,
= '5R^+3*---^H+SR^ +
a=^T+^4-^R^ + 3^
is
with the preposition
^CT\jj'
and the non-prefixing of the augment
ll
in the Perfect before the 3rd per
the
derived from
is
*r,
The couiiter-example
in the Imperfect (VI. 4. 75).
SJTJJ
it
the elision of
T,
[Vol. III. Cm. VI. 3512.
*gra wt
'
in
i
i
Nishtha
the
Before
respectively.
wft%
i
mm
from the same root
are
rfi
(Rig
II
u^
fg^re
with the prefix
yfr,
these
irregular, As,
is
Ved. VIII. 2.
?sft
'.'
is
replaced
mfai
Z^
9.)
fg*iir<w.
There is optionally the substitution of k in the room

of the diphthong of the verb khid 'to suffer pain,' in the Chhan3513.
das.
The word FgWTUT
is
understood
the classical literature we have
W8
îTl^^fq
fajr.^j53*q
3514.
This word
Substitute of
sjH^
sjif?
The word
f^
is
another
in the
here.
farT* *T3qffl
<(
'sflWT
sirshan
form
of
50
5nT?T:
is
Thus
f^rt
fa^R
or
II
$&
'
found in the Chhandas-.
fare:
famZ
ll
and
Vedas, for both forms
means
are
found
head.'
is
not a
Thus-
^fatijT
This
therein.
Vol.
Cn
III.
(Rg
SfiTfr:
form
fsjr;
Tub Vaidic Rules.
VI. 3517.]
Ved. VII. 66.
In
15).
the
literature there
classical
one
only
is
II
The Sutras
VI.
104 aud 105
1.
first,
vowel other than
the case-affixes of
in of
"The
declare,
homogeneous with the
"The
47
when
does not take place
or
folbwed by a
is
*ht
Nominative and
the
Accusative.'*
the
homogeneous with the first, does not take

place when a long vowel is followed by a Nominative or Accusative case-affix
The folbeginning with a vowel other than ia or by the Norn. PI. affix 5W ll"
substitution
vowel
of a long
lowing SUtra makes an exception in the Vedas.
WU
ST âtfa
gTsnssraifar
tffticr
<!<>i
tion mentioned in VI.

Thus mrnr: or
'
WTgiftftaa
1.
declares.
vowel
is
sit
wrottt^h
or
fouir:
fasi:
'
i
contravention to
in
104 and VI.
1.
nvscn:,
ferar:
(Rig Ved. V.
'
followed by the
of
Thus snfTW
vowel for
this rule
wis
1.
the
is
108
the prohibi-
105,
1.
amit
fmra:,
gmii
or
3<JT*itft
or
S. 3).
the Accusative singular
HI
'
or HSP3ITT5T:
TTTTruUTW
'
I
'
so
1G2.
I.
the
of
vowel."
In the
'
I
the elision of case-ending
(Rg. Ved.
TTI^-UITTW
69. 12).
the nominative and accusative plural neuter,

Thus si R
this is optional
II
fcrniTRTXJ
rTTRT
In the Chhandas,
3516.
and the subsequent
vowel
^^mTT^t
sim
^xg ^fimTWor (Rig Ved. VIII.

"There is the single substitution
declares.
optional, as
But
''
sjjjt
orsrw;?:, and
vocalised semi
srer^gfia
^TTJ: FJlrJ
T.
'
sutras subsequent to this
Similarly VI.
Veda
in the Ashtadhyayi, namely VI. 1. 107

108 are also influenced by the present sutra.
Thus sutra VI. 1. 107
" There is the single substitution of the first vowel, when a simple
in the Vedas.
first
gttTftfr
ii
The two
and VI.
snnit
trqsaafu
iff?
single substitute of both vowels,
3m^T
sum
sit
tow*: usami:
Vedas, the long vowel may optionally be the
(23 o)
'
In the
3515.
trefersrc&aiiiT
HUHT'amâ
'
is
of
optional.
mm
19.)
(si)
ftTCTRTXf (Rig
Ved
162. 19).
Vd't:
follow.
In
Thus
W$>
the Vedas, the para- ru pa substitution
STOT rcIT
*m* =
SjTOîzr
TaWraWTr^frT MCJ:
fa*
WUR
*+^cjt
3517.
Chhandas.
Hirq*T
g
I
'HUT r^JI*
S^fa
&
TTcJOJT
II
takes place
So also ^qf
I
c3
rcfT
%1&&\
when
mm
llaf fai3?TR
.fro.
II
?fa famiRI faOTcimT
w iufH??^^
'^5%'
nm zv^T&nw
*'
wciT
3bjt *mr:
The forms bhayya and
wa ^rfa aa
pravayya" are
found in
the
um
The word
guna 5
to
[VoU
This Suddhanta Kaumudi.
48
changed
is
Stl^r (III. 3>
word VQCQT
As îZ W3T
Thus
wa fcfi*ft8lrT
we do say
'
The word
*
3HV
the feminine
the Vedas
ill
Î^JZZJT
^T^tHT *"tt
The
3518.
^câft
virtue of the
The
final
from ff+sft+tffT
ratcrr
The
The
added
qff is
diversity allowed by ÎfUt^T

" frightening or fearable."
The
other places
in
Observe iraw,
affix ucf is
or
'e'
'
3419,
tf&TCI
proper
the
is
tfia*J in
the
classi al
should also be enumerated when referring to water.
HlirHTWHIdLUdml
II
fW??T *rc*fr^*rni3
always used in
is
literature.
Vdrt
13)
Why
form.
Thus
II
the force of Ablative by
ri*.h
*ft
from wt+*?l, and toojt
derived
is
to an*
Ch. VI.
III.
*o'
added by IV.
9HU
4. 1
10
(^*3+3=^TC*+s)
II
and the following
when occurring
'a
in the middle half of a foot of a Vaidic verse, retain their original
when the
forms, except
The word
nominative
and
case
The
nature, cause.'
here and means
here, but
not in the
word
5$i?fTT
it
an
*y.' h
The word
Ablative.
is
or
should be construed here in the

tretfft
means
Indeclinable, used in the
The word m^:
in the middle.'
followed by
'a' is
understood
53-: is
the
foot of
original
Locative
case
a verse' refers to
the verses of the Vedas, and not to the verses of the classical poetry. The word
is
also understood here.
(Rig Veda. V. 79.
Why
$T
'
inner
in the
Ved.
ScTi^frrf (Rig
does not follow
^j ? "
a foot of
half of
I.
165. 1)
1.);
Some read
II
a verse
Why
11
Observe HSSTC^ (Rig. X. 109.
Observe *sgfi;!&asTlTmT*3lr1
74.
I.
Observe
WHT
n
Why do we say 5 or
as *v*r. VTZK&WX. H
7
"when n
do we say
1)
11
this sutra
According to them, this sutra supersedes the whole rule of juxtaposition or

(VI.
1.
or
HTfcrTT
72).
33<K
*cu
*oicy TargawtafHTxmgrrciQr^tr
'H
^t
wrf
stsw^tjor?
3519.
NANA
\J
w v&rw
313 sjqTsnjfrT
^st^tt:'
nam
?wfrT
*pn^ iTSofH^
1).
do we say
Ttm*
Wrft a?*
Thus smfQ^T *\^*W (Rig Ved.
'sjhott
'3*j[w?m'5aTfl'
?Ha jt%:'
fcnjTJTiiT
$r
tost?;'
ê^'
^rwr
HJ^fw:'
sT-tunnTa'
**jh:'
'$
*9
1
'tit
fsrariT
'whrsfiTHt âarw^:'
rafrrwraT *
mvji
crerfa
The 'e' or 'o' retain their original form in the middle of

when the following words come after them (though
a Vaidic verse,
the
'a
31 saw:,
in these
has a
and
^str, 3Pro, îcr^f
Thusj^ftsf: TTTimcrnfw^
ir *cK*g: (Rig VII. 32.27>
hngk
'y'
^rsrw
wnn
11
following it): 3IOTH,

11
frnrerlr ^f^siTfT (Rig IV. 4. 15),
h $T âm; (Not
gives the following examples from the
cag'm v%a\^
^1X. 73. 5),
3 *am^
3I33JTrJ
(IX. 73.
in
Veda
S),
tci
the Rig Veda). Prof.

:
fs&m-
Boht-
^TgJrft'narnT (VI. 14.
unmh wi
rfw>,
a 3i
v
.
*^,
Vol.
(Not
lit.
On. vr.
Rig Veda according
in the
Veda
elided in the
Though
in the
but
IVakriti-bhava,
and not
Note
ujg
W3SJTR
3.
H5TcRJT: is
There
v&ZX
5.
mrm
C.
*JjcR? is
7.
*crei:
Then 3
cra^m
is
from
is
is
bahulam
an express rule
i.
is
e.
no
as a
to this effect;
'to protect.'
mi
preceded by the Preposition
found
Som* read
*nggaiJT: (with
Rig Veda.
in the
351; the 3rd Per. Pi.
fa
is
replaced by *fl
80. S. 3102).
Imperative 3rd Per. PI. of
added by
is
?3W
and
q^
elided by II.
is
Ved. X.
(Rig
where there
II
the Perfect, 3rd Per. Plural of
narT is the Aorist of
(The Aorist sign
WH:
d-o.
Benedictive 3rd Per. Sing, of ^ra
is
generally
is
9).
here.
reduplication) in the text, but no such word

4.
^W^Fcr
88. 2)
1.
no reduplication as a Vaidic irregularity.
is
WsTStT
these are to be explained by
Ablative singular of
is
like
(Rig Ved.
of
(Rig IH. 42.
in the Pratis.ikhyas, there is
warn
1.
2.
WCTS:
examples
find
sandhi, yet
mere inference as
left to
gjrsjcRTHT
and F5S?nfw:
But
Vaidic diversity.
to Prof. Bohtlingk the
^ or *ht)
Rig Veda we
after
and HTJimUTTR
77. 8),
49
Vaidic Rules.
3521.]
'
*BoT
from sgcr+^^ = *H5TCr
a Noun,
and we get *H^pi:
III. 2, 170,
to protect.'
I
Then
ft
added gsra as
H&&
II
In the Yajur Veda, the word 'uras' when changed to

3520.
its original form when followed by a short
retains
a' which
'uro'
'
is
also retained.
Some read the sutra a3

Thus 3TT WririgJT (Yajur Veda Vajasan. IV. 7).
They take the word as 35 ending in 3, which in the Vocative case
They give the following example an *5rTf^f
assumes the form g*r U
f *
But in the Yajur Veda VI. 11, the text reads gTKSrrftg?? 13m:
USTortT:
II
II
II
In the Yajur Veda, there being no stanzas, the condition of

11 5. "does 'not
VI.
here,
n^rT, UT3 of VI. 1.

and hence the necessity of a separate sutra; otherwise
115, would have covered this case also.
1.
W9
*
apply
qwT
^tot
^risiwim
WE3TO -
'
I
^TRT, srcraT,
11
(I.
reading
is
1.
'
mvn nmj^ mm:
8.
'
srsi
^raisr
^l^T
In the Yajur Veda, the short
^T, afag, and also in and after
=T
1.
nva$i
9^
surniicr s^rt?*
'
1
'
'
'
is
arnbe
retained after
'
or
'
ambale
ambike.'
sr^ro^r?
V. 35), giain ^JT iwfer na:

saneyi Sanhita has afTOifa (V.
*fvj
crf^si%*5n%feiFtr1r
grass îfa ^ti^
they stand before
Thus
^mj
^
'
0^)
3521.
when
'
5TOT*0T
(Yaj.
S.
4, 43, 2. 5. 5. 4)
I.
w$
IV. 2).
(Yaj.
VII.
22).
*J33T*r,
*j<f *fei#S*5nfa) but Tait. S. VII.
gpnSrr
tottttotsi (Yaj.
The VajaThe Taittariya Sanhita has qfifiss
1).
srfchs
*fel*
*!jF*RT5R
(V. S. 23.
4. 19. 1,
and Tait.
11
18
lir.
where the
III. 9. 6.
3 has
insiTSsipsfif
*qsii
*f
W3T35fT
'
9Tcrtc
rrc-nfr
'
ssFtHi:
Thus
njffct&rr:,
tot *f
*f
is
followed
'o.'
wtw,
5^r: vnmi
*f *f
5^:
*l?*f *3hfainj
f*W
'5JR3F3'
'
a is retained, as well as the preced-
'
or
*ngfa
uttctn
STsffl
by ange' the subsequent short

'e'
Vocative, do not
in the
In the Yajur Veda, when the word 'ange'
3522.
ing
though
&c.
107, because they have been so read here.
3.
W|J WsfrfatRJ
*Hff
mz
The words
II
shorten their vowel by VII.
ttt^t
ÛTSU *'
5JlTJÎaar
i?^: ttt^t
*f
fastvaa, s=^: 33t3t
a Guttural or a
dh,
*T3J3TtI:
f^H
'^vwt'
the antecedent
well as this subsequent
n%
(Yaj. 6. 20).
'CTHtrflTOnT:'
In the Yajur Veda, when an anudatta
3523.
by
[Vol. III. Ch. VI. 3522,
50
*e'
or
followed
a is
retains
'o'
form, as
its
a.
Why do we say when it is

T wfa: (Yaj. 12. 47), sjtoht *n^?:
gravely accented ?
Observe miTJlF, here *r*j has an acute accent on the first syllaThus
sjii
Why
ble.
II
" when followed by a Guttural (qj)
do we say
^^tt
îsrttt^t *irairaT:TOr tre
n^m tz& racm
(aVi) ?fW^TrTrc|H
3IT3-' (Vis) ? fa^THT *
5ITV
'
frT^sfr?^:
'
<
W$Z1%
'
,s
1
foRH
or a
^"
Observe
5T^wt ârcren:' ^^TTa

1
'
QS^WITS^TJZIT;'
T>XTITOI-
In the Yajur Veda, when the gravely accented a of
3524.
avapathds follows e or
Thus
feet of
VIII.
Here
<3T|
1.
^rt
the
in
the vowels retain their original form.
'HoT'TOT:
II
Atmanepada.
When
'28.
si in
53WJT
it
is
The word ?H5msrr: is 2nd

Thus *H+gtr +3TU +UW
not gravely accented,
not grave by virtue of VIII.
3525.
nasalised
'
For the adverb

an when a vowel
'
'
the
per.
drops.
1.
30.
is
substituted in the
follows
it,
and
it
Singular Imper-
The ?r is grave by
As U^^WTScHTOT: H
Chhandas the
retains its
original
form.
Thus
w *T
VIII. 67. 11.)
WJ: (Rig Veda V. 48. ))
mfa ii 33q5
fsTEnW. (Rig Veda
Vol.
Cn. VI.
III.
Vdrt
vm;
OTT
In the
Vaidic Rules.
3528a.]
Vedas iaT
(Rig Ved. VI. 75. 3.)
*rTOI iT^fd: FJT^fk
is
Thus
3?t
wmi fgaW
WFJ
as
mi
rrcnufn
^3 im:
JT*pT
sft fcraftrf
member
'sut' is
compound and
in a
1).
of the nominative
a consonant follows
^fa^g
3\?t
iiterraf
(Rig Veda
In a Mantra, the
3527.
when
IX. 87,
The ^j means
II
As, ut *TOT,
case-affix
diversely elided after sya
IV. 40. 4),

not take place
a second
MT^:,'
3526.
singular
uncombined.
jai *ftns (Rig Vd. X. 26.
55Fl
(
l
found
are
lig: &c.
51
wtht>t
Sometimes
4).
does
it
he/
added to 'chandra,' when

is
it.
(Rig Veda
it is
preceded by a short vowel.
Thus *f\WT WSfpH: (Rig Ved. IX. 66. 26). *p*=f*T gOTPj
Why do
Why do we say in a
we say after a short vowel f Observe TCTT3?3?reTfe3
Mantra 1 Observe, *T^T $n5m8^
The 3tTC<I3 can only be in a compound
it
II
'
II
(samasa) as
the
it is
well-known to
3U^
farTCTWcTCT
fafareV
1
3,5^3
+ &zfts
ferof
derived by adding
39
By
'
sisfaft
';
'
33
the second
word,' as
here H3t*TT8
^TTgdftHwfri
m&
first
3528 A-
v:
wranftran 3
= OTTTÎ
In
the
mi:
'*
Vedas,
diversely before the feminine
EÎ^C
WB
The Vaidic form
form.
added
is
also valid.
second by
to the
As ^ HTrTrFann
^[
11
fefeoft
Chhandas, but not
in the
uterine brother.*'
nouns
finals
:
w^^t
of
fog
thus in "
there
is
this
II
âa^Ti: (Rig Ved. III. 6. 1.;
gg
and
fq*3T^ ^
Then is added
îfgt + *ff3
an exception to VI. 3. 92. S. 418.
ed from feRW+ligis
MUM
is
'
* \m^\ wf
(See VI. 3. 84. S. 1012.)
the
substitution in fersaTst, but in
This vartika
II
fa*3Tsft
*t th n^f fvrTCTOTrKT
Thus
110.
the substitute of
before srcb TOfff and 33C5R
*ht
'also', the converse is also valid.
*? is
Thus ^nwj:
proper
the
member, and
3.
'
Pitaramatara
'
5RTrnfarflTT is
to the
and then Guna by VII.
force of
Vdrt
faroiijciiittsntsi:
In the Vedas the form
3528.
1.
3
fviHUHIKl ^'
srrpw +
In the ordinary language

VII.
mean,
does not
Sssftsfr sura irasn:
is
it
Therefore the rule does not apply
i'wri u^t
553 fsnrm:
and
all;
meaning might convey.
literal
are replaced by vr&
^r?Tt
& institution,
^fa
m^
and
%
then
(Rig Ved.
";
there
î^^ft
I.
like
is
is
no
deriv-
srawft
164. 17).
I*
52
S^SJ OTTOT:
mdda and
3F3 fsrifwewn^
'
'
im: syîn
Chhandas when
I
substituted for sahz in the
is
stha follow.
Another example is siTFgT mi^X

saRT^FTT: &I&T:
wflf;^ SOTT3T &^*rl (Rig. III. 3. 7) Himsifo tcIT *fCT^ = VW*
sg raTfaTOMmt (Rig Ved. VIII. 2. 3).
Thus
BTST
FIT??
Sadhi
3529.
[Vol. III. Ch. VI. 3529.
^vuTT^ra^RJ
Il
g5!T?TT,
'
II
3U30
55^3
nfiu
3xmrt
jjfasjsa
The
3530.
5kt:
<{(>*
3
snasro 5R5rcw:-6RTtra:-$iro:
qra
substitution of ka and
/#z>j for
# takes place
in
the Chhandas before patha.

Thus
qiTTO: and sgiro:
ficrcra:,
3U3l
3W
siiimvzisercj
II
ST3? STEST sreFa faro
sr:
3w
3531.
f*g TnffnrTW fafin:
H SS
ÛffTSffT
'
^TFI
irre f
S^TOI
OTTO
HTT^ffi
II
'
?ffl
Sadhyai' 'sadhwa' and 'sadha are irregularly formed
in the Vedas.
Thus HT^J
formed by
first,
5i?
f?aT
added to
changed
is
\n
to
*TO
HTS3T
SWnTTrT,
t15IT affix
5^
the
The
11
The
II
third
word HTCT
In the classical literature HT3T and
wsfar
SfRTf HT^T
In the Pratisakhya
changed to
*r
Kdrt'kd
and a
The
$15 3T
so situated becomes
letter
is
formed by qsj
affix
added to
are the proper forms.
(Rig Ved. VII. 56. 23).
ordained that a
it is
HTCJ and &T33T are both

not taking place.
Iu the
words
substitution
3fr
between
falling
il^r
situated
between
As says the
11
has become
vowels
two
two vowels
is
luirika.
*j
in the
pronunciation of this Professor.
So also
i.
e.,
lh tji "
W*
TOS*
similarly
$^fa g
'
Thus ensure*
STCSUTfT (V. 4.
formrj by VI.
aaJTcffil'
is
pronounced
3
I
<^S
WZ\V(t
In the Chhandas
3532.
5r:
HTrg SJIgrltqS
for the final of
3VU3
situated
by him
an
as
Ushman
letter
11
ashtan
H
138 the
4,
'
also,
of
is
substituted
before a second member.
The form WeJUJfcV
the long vowel
m3 being
is
the
feminine in g)u^
(IV*.
1.
8) of
elided in a Bahuvrihi), irz being substituted
13G.
n$t ^wr^r^rtrft^ts^^T *mr g 3

WTO;* ^gigff imT3rT>n' ?F^T5n*Tf3*cW:
1
9V*
'faSeffiWHT fersa-
Vol.
Ch. VI.
III.
In a Mantra,
3533.
the
affix
Thus mcnsfft, ^'acd^f^ ^f^nrarft,
HTwg^w
fe^SRWQl
(Rig Ved.
matup
fcrsqirsqrafft
ff^J and
TOST,
follows.
'
it
97. 7.)
tg*355aT3rf?T (Rig Ved. X.* 170. A).
In a Mantra, the
3534.
vowels of TO,
final
Tg^gtai are lengthened when the

SH'ScIT^rTf
53
Vaidic Rules.
3537.]
of
final
oshadhi
'
lengthened be-
is
the case-endings, but not in the Nominative.
fore,
Thus
jft*Tf!
mrtt 5TTrltesW
'
ferî VWW*
aT^STSJ
cTfefa
'
H^S
3f
In the Rig Veda, the finals of the particles
3535.
ra
3nwrr. ^tfTr^rroîj
zre
the tense-affix <{&
the ending
R,
tra
^Tff
^ q
and the word ^raf are
'
lengthened.
Thus h
SUT^TTrJ
the
TO*.
II
substitute
?!
here,
^TH
3*wt
^T'^:
Note
and cTOU
).
Plural.
(VII.
it.
?T
of ?n,
The q
as
;
(Rigwh:X.
^r
11
3fl en tjt
176.
2). fl?- is
fefj, therefore it does
not apply-
5ITfTcf33W
wrw
sound
" the wife's brother."
nm
cr
wst
'
ircraTOiRT
and not
TJ
wirl
the
technical
^j (rTû
Imperative Second Person
is
Person Plural formed by the
the Imperative Second
is
affix
??n
fuR the present rule does not apply to

Imperative 2nd Per. Singular and is derived from the Kandwadi root
Since this
The
(*sac)
elided
is
after
3SW
55fwV^nr: s*?forRT
w*
affix is
'
*jft
The s
is
changed
4. 27.
S.
3649.
or
'
$ m:
to
'
by VI.
by VIII.
'
to:
'
The *
105. S. 2202.
4.
of
27. S. 3649.
4.
teeaa) ^fa
tr.
wît
ststj
In a Mantra, the
3536.
ending in
^ff?
fg
affix
changed to
is
^fia iVq *3ra
Thus
: WTcTT
treated
it is
4.)
(Rig IV. 32. 1)
rT^
in the sutra is the
FJ"R means
the Pronoun
'
II
ii
(formed by Ucr).
^trwr
^TH^
when
(I. 2..
irraTur:
^z^Trl
is
^3
Ttm^mwi
46. S. 3568).
1.
3*EI
3SW
WT
TO
'
finals
are lengthened before the particle
H*sft=n*T
v by VIII.
(Rig. IV.
3.
107
31. 3)
&&
f S.^3644,
and
member
preceding
of the
3J
'
su.'
guT 3fl* (Rig
changed
to qj
1.
36 13).
by
VIII.
54
A tense
3537.
ending in 'a
affix
Veda, when the Verb consists of two

Thus
fo!3fn
fl F3T Hr^fW
m^m
*K
'
[Vol.
III.
Ch.
VL
3537.
lengthened in the Rig
is
syllables.
See Rig. III. 42.
<feo.
6,
fewr
Wil
fis
But not here 331 W^H ST?5Tsf:, aa the verb consists of more than
&TM11 <c
two syllables: not also here ^jt Z^V\ clj% sfe ^ as the verbs do not end in m 11
Note: few
^cfi is
Present First Person Plural,
is
2nd Person Plural
In the Rig Veda the
3538.
Thus S3T fg
&
**sra,
ordained
not
replaces n: by
by any
standard authors,
3U8o
rules
a particle
(Rig Ved.
of the final
I. 2.
is
the &shthas.
of
Grammar,
of
to
s^w^nn
lengthened.
2).
be found in other
but
Where
occurs
'
So
7).
finals are optionally
gT uqite* fqrm
'
the Nigama,
'
not.
the Taittariyas read

i
<
or
do we say
in the
lengthened
As
\JTr7T
\HH-
it
with short 31 N
of the penultimate vowel of a stem
'
^wgjsrfa^w
1
of
Thus
when sh precedes such

*
writing
valid.
11
before the affixes of the strong-case,
Thus ^Rwgnir
Why
sjg,
The lengthening
3541.
ending in
and *?TO<DHT
also ^rTOlDTil
The Rig Vedins read with long
3U81
the
nam.'
In some places they are seen as lengthened, in others

(Rig Ved. X. 128.
lengthening
the
in
3540.
is
we should accept such lengthening as
there
before the Genitive plural
?ffTW
III. 4. 82.
also.
Here we must follow the usage

is
11
final of
ireajT sfacTT*:
The elongation
3539.
words
of the Perfect of ^
is
optional
in
a vowel.
11
Nigama
'?
In the classioal literature we have ?raT,
fi^l^T, ri^nn: always.
3542.
by the
In a Mantra, the word 'jauita' is formed irregularly

ni before the affix tri with the augment it.*
elision of
'
'
'
'
Vol.
III.
Cn
Tims fr *: fam
imfaHfTi:
(Rig Veda X. 82.
afafTT
Otherwise 5RfqflT in the
3.) n
an exception to VI. 4 51.
It is
classical literature.
55
Vaidio Rulbs.
VI. 3317.]
Samita is formed irregularly ly the "elision of ni

3543.
before an it' augmented affix, when meaning a sacrificial act.
It is formed by <ya and is in the Vocative case.
Thus szri fa: SjfarT.
'
'
'
II
Why
do we say 'when referring to a

Satpatha Br. III. 8. 3, 4 and 5.
3U88
*9Tarfsre^fa
smito^ciHa
*T35U3taT*T
fa*p
(î)
fe|ra
'
u*
3Zfl
wfua:
ufa:
See
II
In 'yu' and 'plu/ long

Chhandas.
3544.
See
sacrificial act"?
is
substituted for
'
'
before
'lyap' in the
Thus 2TR*Fnjg fagq;

Chhandas
By
Observe #ipl,
'?
VI.
UrXJ
sfgiffT uf*T*nx
*ft
lltflfa in
72 the augment ^n^
4.
Imperfect
the Aorist, the
and
ll
Why
do we
say, in the
the classical literature.
added to verbs beginning with a vowel,
is
In the Vedai,
the Conditional.
it
in
comes before
verbs beginning with consonants also.
3U8U
S^wfq ?**H
IRSTTcftalfWriro:
The
3545.
It
is
when VIII.
STPJpi3i
VI.
II
(If. 4.
4.
*Wra:
augnfen
Thus *HT^, from

2.
'*
is
e*
merm'
I
finally
11
(***<=)
is
The
in the Aorist.
sraj
from
^t^TcF,
changed
si is
;rai
the Imperfect of
*rej
T5T is elided
to
when VIII.
by II
4.
by VIII.
11
2.
SipT ÔTRreSTTtffq
* m: vi&qwsTv
by
II.
2.
36
63 applies and
80.
<RTTO from
11
The augments w% and mz are elided when the Particle ITT

But not necessarily so in the Vedas as taught below.
74.
3^83
also.
beginning with a vowel as well as before
*rra: is Aorist of 35*, the affix being elided
80) and ^npTg?
found in the Chhandas
63 does not apply, then
becomes ^ and
which
STO
'at*
found there before the roots
consonant roots.
4. 80,
WT*Z
S3
is
added.
See
s^t grra: 'm s: ire ^^^15^^^:'

There is diversity in the Chhandas the augment 'at'
3546.
or 'at' is added even with 'ma,' and 'sometimes not added even
when there is no ma'.
srsr^T
sa:
<3ifai5T
33:
'
'
Thus in mUzsi 33: (Rig. X. 73. 1), wumtfa (Rig. I. 53. 3) and cRTWuSft*
the augment is not added tnough there is no *n
In wt cj: gi JHSTtaTTOgTW:;
WT fw?eiTt, *U wm:, the augment is not elided, though the particle WT is added.
II
3H8S
st5t i
56
[Vol. TIT. Ch. VI.
3547.
3547. 'Re' is diversely substituted for 'ire' in the Veda.

Thus cr fospr **m 3 iito: (Rig. X. 82. 5) nj & viTizii In sra, the
*jjt
ii
VT
?T by VI.
elided, before the affix
is
as asiddha (VI.
Here
the
4. 64,
22) for the purposes of the elision of sn
4.
^z augment
added to *
is first
becomes ?*, then t is substituted again

condition.
is brought back to its original
of
substitution being considered
5;
after the
To show
and the
affix
thus
by this sutra, thus the
affix
jfy
for this ^5;
li
roots
repetition
this
the sutra has exhibited the word ?*ilTJ in the dual number.
3^8*
^3ot *ptot
*s
w^fwiinwTfcfcrf^ î *Rgf^ fcraw
sfw
ST
foreran
zmwfii,'
'%yn\
'+ asarrefai aRtfta wg*rj
'
'H*a nirr'
In the Chhandas,
3548.
h-t^
ori
TOTaawj-faraigi
err
'bl)u' and
the semisometimes
and
^g^
case of a stem in
in the
the^m
sometimes
'sudhi' are found
vowel substitution.
As fg*5?T,
fewem
it
Vdrtika:
vn: and
fclWcrw,
hwt fanR
There
fcT*cT* fcTST
(Rig Veda IV.
7.
1)
diversely the substitution of
is
aud the
das, after a^j <&c.
crag fsre
sjfvrq: n
ishtto
for ifivin
^q^ aud êfg
in the
Chhan-
This ordains substitution even after words which
rest.
not roots.
are
As,
a^
itojt
(Rig Ved. X. 128. 1) or H-Tci
Wisraiij or faureiCT; " Three-
tl
eyed."
Hfor%3^ftf
^R^m^Tim:
fa*
nffin
'pat'
when
it
As
<
'forrtfW^ eras:'
(
i
*F<ip!T
^3
tjftrm'
utstot faa*
In the Chhandas, the root- vowel of
3549.
and
^f^fcT wfq^
to
fall, is
WW
*k'
It is the
Though the
*H of ?r^ is elided.
'
to stretch
elided before an affix beginning with a vowel,
has an indicatory
fcrtfSTC
'tan'
or 'n\
3rd Person Plural Perfect of
elision
is
fj^\
asiddha yet the rule VI.
I)
The
4.
120 requir-
vowel
ing the substitution of s and the elision of the reduplicate r does not apply because then the present sutra would be nullified.
ôR^t ?cT uftrTW: (Rig Ved. IX.
:
107. 20).
This
syyo
is
also ftrc
II
Sjfai*T^fa
In the classical language we have fafifaT,

I
The root-vowel
3550.
Chhandas, before any
affix,
100
of 'ghas'
Thus sfnas^w wtfasg

added to the root
+ fH= ÊT +
f?T
w%
fa being
5, SStlT
then by
II
and
'
bhas
'
is
elided
in the
whether beginning with a vowel or a
consonant, which has an indicatory 'k

is
ilf?T*T
II. 4.
'
or
^ft W^t:
39,
is
'
li
'.
H?m:
is
thus
derived: faysj
substituted for a^;
elided by the present sutra)
*j
thus
?m
+ fa Qr being elided by
Vol.
ITT.
On. VI.
2.
26), then
VIII.
-h
Hm
nitya,
ly,
changed to V, and
changed to e VI.
is
tf
SWTstt: fhj: = sfi\j:
perative of
Vaidic Rules.
3553.]
II
84).
s[+ vitw=
do we
fa = 5JWH+*fr? (VII.
4)ogTOfa
1.
having an
first,
rule of elision
but, as a Vaidic
anoma-
This
(VI. 4. 100)
being a
beginning also with a
affix
before
takes placo
HB + JTW
See VII. 2A 67.
first.
read "befoie an
cause the elision
ssum
ought to have operated
rule,
the reduplication takes placo
Why
Then
n and wo have fiv*:
The word sshtw is the Im-
to
3.
MH+^ + H!W = W+Hm=S
vm, thus
(VIII. 2. 26)=
and a subsequent
Why
(sm^
vowel
(VIII.
indicatory q; or
affix also,
Stts^ff?
WH
*fj
55).
4.
Observe vtaft
Be-
consonant"?
as
SWfel
The ^ h a &
II
been added into the aphorism by the Vartikakara.
\ft ^5iJj'
8551.
9 and 3
'iziijvft firc:'
'tra&fiS
'
'ssqrcsfa'
substituted for f^ in
f\J is
^tn^fvi
W,
the Vedas. after ST,
G,
I!
&t*
As *$t
(Rig Ved.
I. 2, 1.) sj^fa
fe: (Rig Ved. VIII. 84. 3.)
^^fcHTSSFfci and *cngfa It
In *Z*!Jtft, the f*| is not elided after the 3 or m, as it was required by VI. 4.
The lengthening take*
106, since the present aphorism specifically mentions it.
The forms other than sjnrfy are irregular; sjtr being added
place by VI. 3. 137.
diversely by III. 1. 85, and then elided diversely by gxHa^fg
II. 4. 73-
TTTOrtf (Rig Ved.
Note
is
3* by
uTvi
VII.
I.
the
qr
ohanged to
from
is
gs;
fgTfuST
I.
3 J. 12).
is
from g
of q*t
is
changed
by VIII.
3.
The
'to protect'.
102. S. 2495* and
it is
to
siq
is
elided
for the final tR there
lengthened by VIII. 2. 77
by VIII.
4.
S.
354
gstKsfa
27 S. 3649 and the visarjaniya
50. S. 3635,
3552. In the Chhandas the substitute
ed as not having an indicatory
'
'
hi' is optionally treat-
p.'
The result is that in the Chhandas, the second person singular of shs has
two forms, as iftanfs or tftnftf? ggfg or gmftj, fa being substituted for fs in
the Vedas (by VI. 4. 103 S. 3553) as in the following verse:
;
Rig Veda
'mhftf ^Trrfs:'
3553.
not
'
Nit \
'
air.
Dhi
w^
'
is
am:
sjq:
substituted for
I.
18&
Yajur Veda,
40. 16.
J
i
'^fert:/ fawr
*
hi
'
aurtfi
when the tense -affix
is
Tite Siddhasta Kaumudi.
58
Under
3552 f% is also fa?? in the Vedas and when

Thus srufkr, wf^J and traiftl in the following
88
III. 4.
not fe?? by
it is
[Vol. III. Cn. VII. 3553.
S.
fqa*
it is
tmm^l
1. 2. 4.
5jjwi rT*2*hcr ijqf^j; qu\zis*ra afgnrnwi: n
Why
by
not fea
it is
irregularly formed
is
Observe
'
Parasmaipada of
ifaftfTl
**j
37 as the
4.
from g
not fefj
affix is
(*nfr?), the aiq
being replaced by sg; uOtfia
^TrJTôssnihjffcr:
when
the
WS*
affix
marians. Thus rWTT
^B^53Wrf:
may
'riju'
As
syilS
mrll3
mT$
and
fmra*R
elided,
elided
by
(3)qzfrfci
(Rig Ved. VIII. 11. 4).
otTeiirc:
(Rig Ved. VII.
Xi
7.
elided,
is
by ancient Gram-
FJIgT ?iffqs?
1).
tfsnziPJ^fsf
'rci
affixes ishtha,
'ra'
^foTTSs:, in rf *f5lE5JTJRf& (Rig
TV*'
Hf^flT
*Q$3n& 3T
iman and lyas, the

in the Chhandas.
Ved.
I.
^r3ErsrT^?aj^T^gm^Tfî!?raTftT^^fg
not
is
is
the beginning of 'atman'
iforos:
*rt
of the Instrumental singular affix, given
ifihj
Before the
3555.
'cnwt 333'
the
of the Instrumental Singular follows.
name
the
is
sarerfe
the Mantras,
In
3554.
qw
(2) trofkjis from
II
II
the sjq being replaced
The
und the reduplicate lengthened as a Vedic form.
3*r,
VI.
'when
do we say
(1) TTCfasI
91.
of
1).
'p.*
<t$U
TOtazna:
?fri
In the Chhandas the following are irregularly formed

Ritvya, Vastvya, Vastva, Madhvl, and Hiranyaya.
3556.
The word
S?T,
from
cTCrT,
affix shut
feus
^floEl
is
being changed to
g^f^
as
in
wsr:
the feminine
with the
affix
derived from
II
^^, and gTHcl9 from gr^g with the affix

oTTCrf! W^R = cTTSram
U aTSrS is
M^W=^cmT,
=Rrft
= cH8r3: with the

as
affix
sjHir
ll
JTlveft
wa^, the
from
with the
it\|
feugg is
'f^îN H^HT iw' (Rig
'wr^:G-r<2ftwh' Rig Ved.

being elided, as
I.
90.
G.
from
Ved.
I. 35. 2.)
CHAPTER
By
VII.
3rd Person
1.
8 2442; the augment
Plural Atmanepade.
But
*z
VII.
is
added to the- tense- affix
the Vedas
in
other affixes also.
3UU$
UTWT5T ^?f
snpr
3^'
^*fa
'SH^fTw'
'*fft
<*
fws in' (*<>3)
the
augment
is
*fffT
the
added to
Vol.
Cb. VII. 3561.]
III.
The augment
3557.
50
Vaidic Rules.
diversely applied in the Chhan-
'rut* is
das.
The a
of
*?T
by VII.
elided
is
41. S. 3563,
1.
Thus
one alternative.
in
When then there is no elision, we have ^?? 33gH So also *H7WW

iwaf TOSTCHT TOjJg Here TOjJg ia the Imperfect (?*3;)
50T *Hg3g
plural of 5^
Thus ^f[ + *K = gg + *?J = ^3]?, the a being elided by VII. 1. 41.
\fafr
T^
II
li
II
augment does not take place, a& w^r? n

the augment * is added to other affixes
Sometimes, the
'diversely',
5Tf!5T,
Owing
to the
than
also,
word
As
ii
This is the aorist in to? of the root gsj by III. 1. 57.

3TO| in **rosj SK??a:
the guna ordained by VII. 4. 16, does not take place.
By VII. 1. 9 S. 203 ; i^ is substituted for fira in the Instrumental Plural
after nouns ending in *.
But not always so, in the Vedas.
it
In the Chhandas the substitution takes place diversely.
3558.
That
short
im
is
substituted for fke even after stems which do not end in

and some times the substitution does uot take place even after
is
as *{&:
stems ending in short
*ga'
(asa*)
and
am
as,
3f:, in 5^3irfwHnWf| (Rig Veda
1,
I.
4).
In the Chhandas, at
3559.
(or ad)
not the substitute of
is
(Norn, and Ace. ISg.) endings, after
As ?rrcfarTCW!3W5nW; cn^hrfwrKW
Sfl*3 Sj3"T
By VII.
II
Why
su,
itar.
in the
Vedas
See ^cTTcf SsHSCT,
II
first
member
37. S. 3332,
1.
which
of
is
*gtr
an
substituted for
is
Indeclinable but not
compound
ktva in a
In
the
Vedas,
the
this is
optional.
3USO
ytznfk
m*z?*
OofSTR qftvnufarciT
<M 3*
In the Chhandas the 'ktva' also, as well as lyap, is

3560.
substituted for ktva, after an Indeclinable compound, other than
one preceded by the Negative 'nan/
Thus
?y$<*
&jt{
&m
st3t usHTTi ufromftif^T
^trft
STrft
^fft
raisin fsfcmqsn ^f^srî'

*raf*ffT
mjj
S^T^lWfh'
II
qf ^^gw^feiinsTsiTtiTara:
5hk*
I
\ft?BT
<qt
'mite fejr
gSRT^Wwfkfa
WRIT
fCSf^frT tfTXR
30
JJqS5Hireft^:
'QT *J*S1T
wrat faf^qsft' ^shst wrg *t 'Sruîûrn'

wirgT'
ufwfa *to '* gof gnawer:'
'tor
i
UTC5
31
3S5TT
^ZTSIPJT
35HTT VJian^fcT
HTfl UT
The SidmiaSta Kaumodi.
CO
'*twt qfaan:'
UV&
*HT#t SIT
snurfcrFn htj} st
I
TT^qT
fesra
+ÎâT^m^wqH^5ElT5^w^
The
3561.
3T5I3T
3TfaT
fra?ro'
hsitscit
5jttrt>i
of the Plural,
'as'
(3) the
the end vowel of the stem, (4)
Nom.
ing of the
(9)
'^tV-tV
substituted for
's'of the Nom*
homogeneous long vowel

e
a, (5) at, (6)
se
for the
any, that follows
if
it
for
end-
in the stem,
(10) ya, (yach)
ya (dya) with the similar shortening of the stem,
and
(11)' a' (accent of Ma'),
Thus
Ydrt:
(1) *PZ3tt 3?5ra: H*rl q^STT:
Vdrt:
One
wunmu
xrref
(2)
<mfa
^31*
Rig Veda X. 85. 23.
sfguruw* Rig L
case-endings promis-
164. 9).
Vedas
in the
(for cr^fcfr) Rig. I. 162. 6.
As mw
fe
(3) Lengthening
^n substitute :
(4)
(Rig Ved. I. 22.
%W[T*fi
:
11
**m,
for
case-endings replace
personal ending replaces another personal ending
^-elision
elision of
It should be stated that
cuously, as \|ft gfgnrisT: (for
5Elta^ (Tait-up. II.
*gnm
1)
for
'
*srifl*TTm
3^T
sforfa
and
<c,
Hore
^TTSSfaT
faferepT
u% *pu\ fsfeosf), awt,
Instead of
2).
1.
SiSScft for \JtfaT, TfrUJ
\5rjft, Weft,
As
is
II
*faRT
we have m,
<&c.
(5)
snra-^rn^
(6)
sr-5*
S^TqssiRt;
gw
mînw
(for
Rig. IV. 49.
for strjt
gwig)
urig
ll
fsrajl FIT F5IT
here qj
ciTSTSRisr:, Rig. VIII. 68. 19.
vm
is
for
(for
qw
11
wwwm)
4.
(7)
m-ssm, yzmm
(8)
ST-siTW
and
for ssttjt
(for JRTWTj
^cQT:
^lajrnu
Rig.
I.
11
143.
4.
OTMO-gllSH 3^JT5rqmR for 5S*n^qr Ait Br. II. 6. 15. sqs-TCST^ McIT^
The word sjî^T (feminine) is derived from ît with the affix ?H3?
T5TCISR sfiftri
(III. 3. 106) and the preposition ?h*t
In the Instrumental Singular, the zi is re(9)
placed by sit
by the
II
But
is
not
the
affix
forms like cqqi33T

(10)^
m*U
mw
(I.
1-
95
106
Not always,
HT^;
the elision of
sjiFT-qwT q^ff
for
UB^
11
*r
set aside in the case of
for Panini himself
35) showing that sen takes the
HTVJdT for
does not take place.

(11)
of III. 3.
specific affix fffi^ of III. 3.
*J^-
Plural, (7) yd, (8) a (da), with the elision of the
vowel and the consonant,
last
?nnzi3(7r aic
mfi w^reta:
(1)
*T*f
the /^-elision of the case-endings,
(2)
substitution of the
single
?c*tt|:
following irregular endings are
the various case endings in the Chhandas

Sg. for
idsiK
mum-
U&fl ^TH TTTtH

3*HHT Jiwfrl TTTXR ?5T
,
i
Ch. VII. 3561.
III.
^gcsT^wgissT
'cWrlT UcT'
g^ srmsro'
srogf
si
*$t>i
UTC
Tfd9f?I WT^R
*+?aif3!n3ftsFT*UnTg'JH*3ElT^*'
farcrrH nits
sngssJtôrcram^'
*Hi
[Vol.
affix
q^F
has
m\
used
also.
which was otherwise required
Vol.
Ca
III.
Art
VII. 3563.]
The
f3TO with the

it, and (c) long
*T%f*m
61
following substitutes should
enumerated, (a) vrr,
he
filad
vowel aud the consonant,
the final
elision of
if
any, that
(6)
follows
As
(a) sfchu ^frailly, for ttmi, so *10 aifsrUT for sjtÎDT

{t>)
and FmfauT for gmfoun
(c) ^fc?
sf
STCcfi HlBt
WITOf
ggfenUT,
for
Vaidic Rules.
II
II
(Kig Ved. VII. 103. 2) for Jrcfe u
The
however may be otherwise explained.

The ordinary exis
replaced by .long ^ of this Vartika.
The
word s*Ht
planation
is
that fe (Loo. Sing),
word ought to have udatta on the first syllable, but anomalously the accent
on the last.
Thus say those who give this example.
But as a matter of
falls
is the
feminine in #ta of 8TO
The Loc. Sing. fg is elided after
by clause (2) of this sutra ; and it is not an example of the addition of long ^ to
TOI Well, what is then the example of * substitution of this vartika ? That
fact ST^ft here
ii
it
II
must be found out.

Note; Sayana
m^ wirsrc:
m&
also explains
in this
way
fo*
ll
$f?lf*ra
sfatf
SJflgR
b*b* innftraraqh #ta m&i M qf ^^br " ?for swat g^ wsffi

s*Fh fasir ^wtRi^ sjw h fasesri wirf win? : u
Vdrt
So also (a) *ht3F (b) wuirl and (c) *qTT : as WSIT^SIT ftmcTW (Rig Ved.
VII. 62. o), for TO1CTT
The 3 is gnnatad to sn by VII. S. Ill, and $T is
changed to *ng before *HT (6) îu 13V ioRCT for saj}^, (c) fn^mg susfor (Rig
Ved. I, 97, 8) for 5H5IT
The * in ^jai* regulates the accent.
;
II
The word 311^3?

word *Trl = 'JIT + WTrJ
compounded
in the sutra is
of three words *ht +
*WTrl
ij,
tho
II
3U^
*m
mi
'gvft
qiix
smTvjqfeTfrT
'
80
sna iron aimnra:
firgiOT^nwT jto
?fk i^
ut^
fsJcciTr^retfiro:
^ftafigg:-'
fc^ *)
For the Personal ending am of the First Person
3562.
gular (in the Aorist)
ma
(I. 1.
55)
is
Sin-
substituted in the Chhandas.
The %&f here is the substitute of ftra and not the accusative singular
affix. The *x in
WS! is for the sake of pronunciation only. As c|\5f ^3TJT ( for ?Hc[The ?xz augment is diversely elided (VI. 4. 75). The
ftrcrij ) Rig. I. 165. 8
The
indicatory U of u<sr shows that the tohole of the affix sjto is to be replaced.
The substitution of ^ for jj is to prevent the
long ^ is added by VII. 3. 96.
,
change of
into anusvira as in VIII. 3. 25.
Note
( III. 1.
fe^ +CT
if
(VIII.
Thus ^ + fef+frra
t
=
%
5TO+?r*T+mu
= 5ro +
'
iteT
3r*
^3*5
^m
'
*?<J^Hfc? THXc7
II. 4.
<?3+f8^+OT(
= cTtf+^ + ftra+li^ +
28) = gvft* ( VI. 1. 101 ).
2.
? + fag + f*TO
Present Sutra
S5^f
TrT fJT
44 )=q\i +
(
11
'
*i
43
VII. 3. 96
sf^?Uci: ?SQ
III. 4.
'
I
g*j+f*ra+fmr %
101
q\j+*3 +
cl\J-HS3 +
TJ& ^ffT TUfl
'
I
4^ +
*TrW$-
'
In the Chhandas the ta of the Atrnanepada Personal

3563.
ending is elided.
w^
As ^T
for
STC^r?
place
as
^rTTsra*T
sHirWRST^fiapsa
3%<Dcr.
sjij for
38, this substitution sometimes
1.
Why
II
VIL 1.8);
see
the anuvritti of ?nfa from VII.
[Vol. III. Ch. VII. 3563,
Atmanepada
in the
Owing
II
does
Observe 3?^f 3lfnT
to
not take
SRSrai
II
3US8
\mr \mn
8s
In the Chhandas, 'dhvat'

3564.
sonal ending 'dhvanV.
As
^nf^TOTld cTTTU^Ta
srenS^
3565.
is
^ren^w
for
substituted for the Per-
is
Ait Br. II. 6. 14.
II
irregularly formed in the
Vedas for H^Vtf*HJJ
II
The wordqgi\zr*i followed by ^;m loses its final jj in the Vedas.

As U3i\zN
ftwRVi: (Rig. VIII. 2. 37).
The Kasika adds "that sr is also irregularly changed
into
zt
"
the form would then
3USS
1
BW
W* ^^wnanj
As
ttt^
Ait Br.
3U$0
Jmuafa^TT^
'tat'
in the
nransiT
fa^rww'
5SJT^T
H*tf
This
is,
ta of the
2nd Pers.
and
(for srcira),
Imperative
PI.
'Jreaw53i5j^'
'
I
8U
EcgismsfiT:
mfsra
feci\5i irrs
srem^f H^cTTrj ( = HSSIfl
W^RT STATS*
however, a mistake.
is
Chhandas.
rraTOTO^TCg
fî
88
sraffrTTrT
II. 6. 15, 16.
sfcraf
?T153i:
For the ending
3566.
substituted
SpTCcT)
'
HTH
be ustoi six^
"ft f $
*3*lcn?J ( for
OTiTTOrlTcS
- 1*nifl).
srcrssrfwfri
WrTO:
mtfl sjra*R trcwtra
U^53J1^1^T
\fal
^^
^^B
3567. Also ta and tana (before both, on accountof the indicatory
the preceding vowel of the verbal stem is strengthened, or if

weak, not shortened), tana and thana are substituted for the ta of
the 2nd Pers. PI. Imperative in the Chhandas.
(l) nm\ri maun: (for^sira),
*RTrR U^r? g^fclTlH (Rig. Ved. V. 34. 1). *|5 TrR ST^rMI
fa^HW (Rig Ved. X. 36. 13). The indicatory^ makes SU x and
Thus
=-"
(2)
S^fenji
nou-ferT affixes
(I.
2.
(4) ^5T
affix
fasilifctTHT
sfa
asrq %
4).
JT^fl: asgreps* (Rig Ved. VII.

(3) a* :
maipada and Slu ate anomalous.
taking the
3>JTf?5!
*l*m afrits*
and **?
'to be.'
||
31^ +
59.
9).
for
The pronoun
rT=^+SR= ^5!
sjiq^n, the
ziff
Paras-
becomes ÛTH by
Padamanjari says.
Vol.
III.
Cn. VII. 3572.]
63
Vaidic Rules.
"The Rig Vedins read afrits?* instead of affile in Sarnhita Patha, ofinaffn jr^ht
In tliis caso, it is derived
uf?TCS5? ; and in Pada Patha they read it as qffl^j:*
ll
from *to "to be."
3US*
WTr?
Kasika derives
%3&n
Tifq
Thus *mT
w*5r?
The word
Rig Ved.
w:
for
?rfe in the Sutra
is
'
might have been jth

3y<
t*c?T
^r
"
*ro
assumes
in the
Thus fel
HSR
8$
The ^
added to
is
the
affix
ir^
used for
To the
VIII 100.
<n 8*
?Nra
The
ll
other forms like this, as tftrcfanr for qTfclT
^Transc^Ta
S lWH ST$3
ttorhtq:
Trc7T
01^
jRrsnfesr,
m?Z et cetera means

mrH, as qt?gT <c.
'
'
affix
gets at
'ktva
8).
8*
final
sjjt
is
irregu-
by 4^rq
replaced
is
II
As
that there are
sutra indicates
in the
ll
*nTSRHWinn faqTrsn
Tariff! Viva
'Snatvi' &c.
3571.
sutra
added cR?3 T , and the
is
^trzcftsra cTcTT^ for ^q^pjT
^rfcTîocT:
it
'ishtva.'
root U5J
in
The
ll
In the Chhandas the Absolutive 'ishtvinam'
3570.
A3 wfs
fQWrntt
'ya.'
finrrf JlcStm (Big Ved.
sgtafafa
Vedas a form which ends
In the Chhandas the Absolutive
3569.
5Uso
?w:
for
I. 1. 7),
ii
the end, the augment
Thus
?w:
Chhandas
in the
read without any case ending.
In other words the augment
3s<l
'rmimm a^ wfa'
II
the sake of utterance only.
larly
^fa**
';mT wx*ri
i.
J&fa
(Rig Ved. VIII. 92. 32)
ii
The Personal ending mas becomes
mast ending with an
is for
wish."
''to
3568.
*ro ejntim: snfcjfk mcier
?fa wro
in
5)
from ?q
it
'fes:
srrrdft
nmfstf
'uWt
are irregularly formed in the
for htfcit
of the form
Chhandas.
The word
srosi mm for otr^T
namely words having the form like
qT?3T
II
of,"
'
Vi^
3572.
the
end.
Nom.
O ^
wHT^SRWTR
^TTi^ST3R
SJcUIlfcrnerfTcq TOT
UO
59TB:
^T^TlffTS:
After a stem ending in a long or short, the

PI. gets, in
affix
as of
the Chhandas the augment as (asuk) at the
64
srgmm: fam: mrnim
Thus
for
[Vol. III. Ch. VII. 8572.
3T5imT: and HT*m
Rig VI, 75, 10.
wsfim V 3HtTO: (Rig X. 15. 2) for pf and ^q^ n So also gms: (R. I. 3. 4).
Note
The form mw. instead of si^T: is oat of respect for ancient gram:
marians.
ansa
^Twr*fnr$7atfk
Gen. PI. 'am' gets the augment

As îkrm^TCT
This
Note
:
Nadi wo<d
W$T *ift*nTW
The
Nadi
54
1.
'fcrem
5. qft is
option-
a vya
amorts^
STfTTaa
if
the
'grTOTwf>
the-
compound be ^raTTO ^
11
fsn irmfrf
fig
I. 4.
Vedas, and optionally every
flH mafcnJT,
will be
necessity of this sutra will, however, arise
^cramnq:
by
the option of that sutra
in the
UTOTlftam. we have
ETcT
and 'gramani'
'ii'
X. 45. *5).
We make
always
fit is
Genitive PI. of which by VII.
nTJTTursra
'n.'
(Rig Ved.
the Genitive plural.
in
As regards
else.
93
sutra could be well dispensed with
vasthita-vibhasha, by saying
where
In the Chhandas after the words
3573.
ally a
sp
tttttw'
'otsto Em*
'neri
um qgaidg'
trrai^ftr
s^fs bsht itaf*<j5Rr3T?| 'fairs nmfrf jistw'

3574. After go, when standing at the end of a Rik verse,
the augment na eomes before the Gen. PI. dm.
gtfg^j
As fefrtf'g F3T nlaff? spiifaur (Rig Ved. X. 47. 1); but vm ntaJprSsi
"All rules have exceptions in the Vedas" ia
33%-*: in the beginning of a Pada.
an established maxim, so at the end of a Pada ? sometimes this rule do^s not
apply, as
122.
inHT SR*0T
3f*I
fan^
ifftlf??
*T5n^
JT9T SIflT
W^
(Rig Ve<$.
I.
7).
TOTOT5^5TTn^
'?^t g\îT TOifw:'
In the Chhandas also, the stems asthi,dadbi,5^^/and

are
found
akshi
to take the substitute anin before endings other
3575.
than those mentioned

Thus the
the Vedas
VW?m
it
substitute
<omos before
(Rig Ved.
3576.
in
is
I.
The
VII.
1.
75 S. 322.
ordained before endings beginning with a

affixes
beginning
with a consonant.
vowel.
As %z$\
In
avrt^rf
84. 13).
acutely accented
i
is substituted
for the final
of asthi, dadhi, sakthi and akshi, in the Cbhandas, when the caseaffixes of the dual follow.
'
'
Vol.
On. VII. 3581.]
III.
As *dj^WJT?J H
which ordained
73,
seded,
5TTfH5KTWlT?T
(Rig
II
-TJJ,
is
Rut*.
ved. X.
the stem before the
not added to
5TIT is
Vaidic
103.
H%\
In
1).
the
Pss
1.
superseded by the present sutra, and being once super-
superseded for good. (S3^ n^T fawfrTOVj SgT?vJri HgTTtfcW-a)
it is
augment
eliding, because VII.
vowel-beginning
f5R^crsr:^rr5rm
&^?$
<*m <=3
II
f^, ÔT and ^fl3*j take the augment num before

su (Nominative and Vocative Singular) in the Vedas.
3577.
the
affix
Thus if^, fTT^; QT^, h^?, ^TcH^T

III. 2. 60), is elided
The lengthening
^fe^
by
VIII. 2. 23
and
^5TT^ and ^cJcTPT
in
is
ôfflciT^,
through VI.
Rig, Ved.
I.
10;
35.
is
ainf;:
3578.
S3
tjufc:
That
^P^t
62.
47. 12;
for the final long 3f of a root
when
Iu the Vedas hov ever,
In the Chhandas, the ur substitution for
is,
it
takes place even
5mf*:, and
3579.
Hru
is
Chhandas before the

5g
r\&
when the
utjft:
formed by the
Utjft: are
As
2.
'ri'
of a root-
diverse.
is
does not take place even

3iT
by VIII.
4. 14.
diversity.
HHft:
\3
stem
for
preceded by a labial consouaut belongiug to the root.
there
l^ST (formed by
<q of
III. 54, 12, VI.
For^rTcH^ see Rig Ved. IV. 2. 6.

By VII. 1. 102 S 2494 3* is substituted
is
The
(Rig. Ved. X. 108. 3).
for ScjcjT^see
it
II
substituted
g^HW
when the
letter
is
from h T and u
affix fiR^[
(HI.
preceding letter
labial.
ll
Thus
cTafr.
is
words
All theae
not
labial,
(Rig Ved.
Hflft,
I.
and
145. 3)
5mf* and
171).
substituted for hvar (Bhvadi
978)
in
the
Participial-affix.
^, *H5gfTffl ^"crefaET (Voj San.
1.
9).
But'sr.W
in the
classical literature.
trim
TrTtfTCa.^sjfQTMTcrr fatrrcar7
3580.
The word
'*raft^$m:
'aparihvritah
is
^hth
crra*;'
irregularly
formed in the
Chhandas.
The 3g substitution required by the last sutra, does not take plase here.
As TOifaâ: sttiT?T ciTSm (Rig I. 100. 19). The word being found in the plural
number in the Vedas, it is so shown in the sutra aUo.
TftE Siddhanta Katjmudi.
[Vol.
Ch. Vlt. 3581.
III.
Hwaritak is irregularly formed from ^z/ri in the

Chhandas, by guna substitution and 'it' augment, when it refers to
Soma.
3581.
Asm
?ftRi3Tcqc7
'>3fl
*: #*ft gftrft, fagftrU^faiT
^^THtSf^rTTTTgogHIT'
'gel
UT^'
'RH Heft'
ÎWT
rfi
'f^^fWR
<n=fl*'
SJSWTof: I'^TTTlfWaTlJrf:'
'^' "JTg' 'SJIf TOSrTO ^W15f:

'
TOT^T
mm'
f'imfSfT:
^TJT
tffft
Hftrtt-Hftrn
3^'
?|3 '33'
TTflT^rSJTfT
35^t^tt5i^^hw:
5^^ror^^5C^srQ^f o( 5ICTT
^ WTWmasTT
gToTOTW SclSTSrlT'
sro
grtcIT-clftcTT
5HT5niTjft f^HITfSCT
WcHT
^T^TR'
fTCFITnj
miix&vt
353B*jfrT
frroTr3H
II
g*ffl
'3sr
sftjJV
'grc
tn&TnlT ^nffl
sr5'
BR?rI
'saw
TO%
In the Chhandas,the following irregular forms are
3582.
found,
'fa^T
SrS-
cra*isF3afora
fig
<
I
Sr?TWrm'
'QSf ÊT:
some with, and some without the augment
skabhita, 3stabhita, 4 uttabhita,
'it'
grasita,
5 chatta, 6 vikastah, 7 visastri, 8
sanstri, 9 sastri, 10 tarutri, 11 tarutri,
vaiutrih, 15 ujjvaliti, 16 kshariti, (17
12 varutri, 13
varutri,
14
kshamiti,) 18 vamiti and 19
amiti.
Of the above nineteen words,

(I.
661)
^w
'to stop' (I.
therefore by VII. 2
II
-5JI5IT
(
414) and
1,
2, 3,
Srmw
56 read with VII.
2.
and 4 are from roots

413)
'to
swallow*
all
Thus ggsj^fw: sfsm (ver. TO) sm3tj?m Rig Ved. X. 39. 13. feWRfajl
(Rig Veda VI. 70.1) ( = fa***!:)
fa STOfwrm (Rig Ved. X. 121.5)
;
^^W),
||
Bra^rlfwrn wfk: (
with the preposition
3?7,
BtT*:) Rig Ved. X. 85
g3
î
(6)
1.
the irregularlity
with other prepositions, the form SfTTHcI
Similarly (5) 3tTT (=effTrTT) as in St?>
from
to
having an indicatory 3, and

15, their Nuhtha, would not have taken
(I.
f^TS^TcnrfacRT
^H^rTmH:
fgqfiSrm (Rig
Veda
is
(Rig Ved.
I.
117.
is
only
not employed.
X. 155. 2,)
24).
3tTRHJT
The word vikastah generally occurs in the plural

and is therefore so shown in the Sutra. But the singular is also valid.
The forms, 7, 8, and 9 are from the roots STFT f^HTaTJT and sj$| ScTcfr, and
WT S **5f*.*Ct witn tne affix ^.^ and no augment; as SsfiFfgTSgraÔlfercHErlT (Rig
^cftf
q^
f^SR^rTJT
(ssfcTcRf^rlJT)
Vol. IN.
Veda
I.
Crr.
VI.
162.
19)
mm
trcmrn
The forms
with tho
affix
Veda X.
178.
or clftFTTW)
I.
which
in
formed
( = 355r5Rfr?),
= cwfrr),
We
of the feminine g^^ffr merely
(q^- and
^-)
Will** Ri^
rn*;r?TT
TSJT^m (
g^:
<=
aUrTRW
exhibited
is
sake of showing one
for the
qnffrre.fin fcrc?a:
Here the plural
is
word as ST^nr
The feminine form could have
by adding #far, the special mention is explanatory..
5T5?J,
ll
?m
3TO
and the augment ^z is added

As ^forss^fcrfrT
( * ^nfa). SffTcR gftfrT ( = Srefrf), 3: tm' ^fwffl
Sometimes we have qromfifrT, as.
(=*jjwmffr)
elided
is
mm
II
gWrT
a*4]j:
ll
II
should read here again VII,
3 j^
i
ferem
= 3jfarTT),
and 19 are from 3r?-5S^T, ^TC. ^R, ^W and *jm, formed

and the affix of the 3rd Per. Sing fatl sj being substituted
sjjwsfjrfrT
CTcmwmtfH
q and $
As HSrTTT or
II
(Rig Veda VTr. 34. 22).
is
17, 18
rest 15, 16,
with the vikarana
162.5)
I.
or arft?m0. mJcTTTH or eTCrTITq
H.Sir^Tsn
pi.
Veda
and 14 are from the roots
irregularly, by taking the
for*$i of 3117, or
(Rig
II
augment 33 and 313
- rTftrTUJT
been easily obtained from
The
= mnfafllj)
found: another form
is
it
mgn:
3fT sfjrTT
6),
12, 13
10, 11,
tfWtfir.
94.
I.
rfZ and the
form of Nom.
in this
form
( = fa^fem),
(Rig Veda
GT
Vaidic Rim**.
3584.]
3R
ii
-^
2527.
64. S.
2.
w^rariî^wsrsmfrr fan*
nfl wrawreT
'ifaiwcggcif f?rrV
'stcjwi
$%
3 3fg*nfo$r ie'
ret
vnmw <* swfasj <$iTafar sMf^w cieifdrfcT

3582 A. In the Nigama (Veda) are found the irregular forms
5TVTO, ^JTrlrRJ, 5TTW and gg^ n
f^nnt gem'
s^TTfrTUT
As, fgHPTT ?mcsr
an ^T wsr
^T^ft^wgf
(Rig Veda X. 47.
SUZWTrT 3T%njfa?5?*jro
(Rig Veda.
fTrT5U
1).
22.
III.
r OTTfrTUT fcTHWT
WZ
2),
In the classical literature, we have svrfera, 'HTrlRa, 5Hjr^JT and cfsiHTi respectively.
3U*3
sfTOsfaoTTSW
^fnfifTr^^fWTR:
qiclSRT:'
+'
gwife
^TcTTWlTH^mmTcrsg fauTrQ^
UrHaFUfSRlfoa
5f?T
cIT^W
'fgTnqcHTjf:
STgqt
3583.
This
j^rp^
SRTrTclf
^TH
'+ HTo[5RT5T5tt
5)
;gfcf
is
The form sasanivansam with sanin

derived from fl^rfa or ^nffT
HflfaciTWa
The augment ^Z
ll
to , nor the elision of the
is
added, there
reduplicate before
when not preceded by Sffcm

literature we have HôlTHW
cm
ll
a This form HefacJTtfJT
irregularly formed.
is
with the
root
affix
is
Kvasu.
The other form

is
As
no change of
Vedic,
in
*jj
sjjfssr
of h=T-
is
^faorNrcr
tlie
classical
II
Vd>t
As
The feminine
fsroicnir:
the classical
3H C 8
^pa:
utoI^t:,
literature.
i
of
UTcni
uth
(See
VIL
<&G. in
^t*T3rt:
3. 45. S.
Qr^mT SfeaT
3
'mm zzzn**&U'
'ataâifsi cjtsto'
the Vedas does not take
^g^rr:
for
ll
But ungsRi:, *niifjT3U: ia
461),
so
d-c.
'qafîwi sfcvf
The Siddhanta
The
3584.
final
3nm
As suâr
By
VIE.
99
Qrsf
srarsiipn:'
5a^
9T:
sonant
is elided
'sit' affix..
(tffjrmfel.
ti
nfaznfa
sarvalhatuka
consonantal
single
and after the Aorist
(ss)
otrfctbi'
'shrr:
^fn
$%:
character
a$w:
?fci
^gwiaî^s:
(581)1 '*
'
'sifo
feg
according
II
affix gc
But
in the
ipjj' sraeRrra:
gaacr
srti
^319
sra-rfea
um
'treifawir
11
a^
aT
na'
t^mora'
irTftfTOT:
vz
usia
augment 'it' after as and sich

am: Here 9U is used instead of 9T9i"fl
9fa*f
*re
1
*It
'sinaei--
is
11
11
thus evolved.
9+*JI9
t-
2225 dues not

by VI.
1.
68
S.
frTtl
Then the
252).
II
The ^ that would have
9 + 99 +
So we have
Q<B9fJ>
rT
is
9T9
(the final
changed
con-
* and then
^ is changed
to.
aud we hive 9JT

Then in sanhita, the visarga or
3. 17 S. 167. aud we get 913 ll Then this v. is elided by VIII.
67, and so we have san" 9T
U
to visarga
19
The h becomes in
Chhandas ? Observe
diversely the
S.
to
shortened before a
is
5.)
in the
2225 a
(9f*cT)
(**)
come by
,
But,
In the Chhandas, a single consonantal Sarvadhatuka
mm
Note:
r\
Why
15
'^^r smss/ai
3586.
affix trets
85. 41.)
'sjsftcrtsi' (âso)
^*jiiwit:*'i
(Rig. X.
diversity.
is
'HawT ^za'
^fc?
4.
96. S.
3.
after
Chhandas, there
As
(Rig- X. 10.
by VIII.
augment ^z,
(is 9)
mr ZZZ JWafq
35. 8.)
I.
optionally
II
trfw^fsr? ^fTlf I
to KAsika)
may
'let*.
In the Chhandas nn
3585.
As
(Rig.
Ch. VII. 3548,
III.
of 'da and 'dha' ('ghu roots)
be elided in the Subjunctive

also nsfaspsia ZZlfi
Kaxjmudi. [Vol.
v by VIII.
S,
3.
^9
Similirly in TITW^T:
dhi takes place by
By
VII.
3.
S.
108, a
Singular, and also in

Va.rtika
guni
the
It
is
the aorist
The absence
2330.
is
to
of
is
i&
protect.'
5 and 3
by VII.
Plural
'to
The
Yrid-
the Vaidic irregularity.
substituted for short
Nominative
makes an exception
(g\)
of ^z.
these as well as the
3.
in the Vocative
109.
The following
other rules
of the
third
hapter of the Seventh Book from sutra 108 downwards.
Vdrt:
All these rules
up
to the
of optional application in the Vedas.

SJffSifa:
(Rig Vela X.
or nsjir
mmi, fcfi%5>an, fefezfivm
By
VIT.
3.
end of this (7th B.ook, 3rd)
As 9?a
97. 2) or <Hr*5fifa;
87 the guaa
in the reduplicated form, of
is
or 9sa, traif sfdr or
ma s|HlT
chapter are
um?
a*una (Rig Veda
35pf,
I.
9MT
43. 2),
it
not substituted
a rojt, before a
for
the penultimate short
Sa.tvadhatuka
affi.x
s?,
beginning with
Vol.
III.
V A mrc
Cn. VII. 3586.]
a vowel and having an indicatory ^

i
mfT^r
of^
l
* 10 j the ?T5
penultimate
The
diV<?rSity ln th
following
VcJaS
ca
As
'
Short ^r
3587.
e
IS
Bulks.
VArtika
*^*
^* (
"
invariably substituted in the
^ or ^ of a
make, an etcej*
Veda Uf.
Chhandas
for
Causative stem, in the Reduplicated
Aorist.
As vqfcro; Ri g Veda VIII.
3^
7?
^R^ppe*
TOft?**^,
S)
8.
3^
v&%
In the Chhandas the rules causing

lengthening or the
for the final vowel of the stem
before the
kyach, do not apply, except in the
case of putra.
3588.
substitution of long
affix
^^ ^
,^ t" ^
ThUS
*"'
f5fnTfH
96. 4.)
StatGd
fc
HI.
I"""
3589.
In the Chhandas
Smi
"
"
But
5*^
* ^^ ^ "*' -
îw,
2XW,
S**
**
^SsFrl and
VI*
Ri S-
See
ftsrcsfa
are irregularly formed..
A8
Wife (,^ substituted
3590.
ot
^
3^
3TO; ( .
fcra^T (BTOrtufir, here
for
gffT
ia
with the
affix
substituted for
froaft, -
In the Chhandas, long
m^
5^
ft(Jded tQ
ila
,,K
ffc^fe (ft*, substituted
is
substituted fox
asva and agha, before the Denominative
kyach.
As
wn^
*^
for
fe>
the final
IVW! (Rig. VII. 32. 23), T

9*T
This also
indicates that other words do not
lengthen their vowel i the
Vedas b fore
*'
is taught in VII. 4. 35. S. 33SS. See
Vdrtika to III 1 8 Thp u, *
0CCUlS
' WOrd TOT
Rig. I. 120. 7, 27;. 3,
9
* ^t
wind fe*
^l
70
[Vol. III. Ch. VII. 3572.
The long 'a is substituted for the final of rtkz/# and

3'&$1<
sumnd before the Denominative kyach in the Yajush Kathaka.
As ^gTq^rft UaUTR: wrs^rit ?amt Why in the Yajus ? Observe if5nf33|I
TTlfrT
^33:
example
According to Haradatta the
author
Padamanjari,
of
Why do we say in the Kathaka ? Observe

has a Katha Shakha.
In this sutra, Yajush is not confined merely to the Mautra,
Veda
Therefore the rule will apply
general.
in
this
counter
taken from the Katha Shakha of the Rig Veda, for the Rig Veda also
is
found
also, if it is
in the
That
Yajur Veda.
the Rig Veda also, in the- Rig Veda,
Mantra
but means
of the
the rule will apply
is,
such a Mantra which
it be-
if
to a
HJjqftsfneTfl
to.
Rig Veda
Mantra o
common
is
the
to*,
the Rig and Yajur Veda Katha Shakha.
'cjifci'
tFOT?mft:'
.(m<0
'jjresrc'
'WZU
'qflsu'
sam^w
JmaiftlR'
ell
wrcWJia
rkr.
'SWflrl
^H^'
<it
îfefgiro
'3VJTrTfi:'
%mi
'h
(BOSS)
faftrer
51113*^
feffr*:
In the Rig Veda, the
final
dropped before the Denominative
R^
3592.
of
sfifa,
tobk and ScRT
is
trim fafcrei sRsifniifc (Rig. I. 96.. 2). wean

wgmunir
3mi5fmqcl*pT (Rig Veda X. 74. 5),
By VII- 4 42. S. 3076 f% is substituted for the \3T of
By VII. 4. 43,
beginning with ^ and having an indicatory gj
^r
("Rig
Veda X.
41. 3),
3^%
affix
S.
substituted for the ^t of
W3
faWTin
Hi is
3593.
gîfa
before cFt3
&?sfa
But
88
in the
Vedas
there
before
3331
is
art.
fig is
diversity
*hf before 'ktva' in
the ChhandasAs
fBr^lT Sift*
STrJSB, ot
^c^T
also.
The long i
of VI.
4.
take place also as a Vedic irregularity.
3VK8
^rra^Riri^f^Rffensrgftrnxi
(vnu), tnm^frT
TUft
'<nifr
fw' (88-3)
8U
62 deos not
Vol.
sat
rT%r
Ch
III.
UC2tt:
Vlt. 3596]
FifT^fg:
The
affix tU,
71
farapj?3:
^fr? wnsaTi^TfTtf
33 and
*j,
and
ttmh-'
'*
arc*
ftrcftu
ii
(seat)
HJT
As iw
ll
regularly formed,
ll
and TOHdrT are .formed from the root
five, tgfarT, asjFvirT
preceded by
RlW
fa^ ^rafeuraa ?fa
*ciR:
following five Vedic forms
farT, mftlrl, ^nftlff,
Of these
the
'swrrfg^Tasm'
a^raT^tdfQT g *3a: f*H'
3594.
namely
Vaidic Roles.
jttrt ffviriw (Rig
Veda
with
X.
27.
= faa-l), ctf^Jrm^T flTTr? ( = wfs?T).

The word cmfvicf is a Karmadharaya compound, according to Huradatta, In the Veda-Bhasya it is explained
16).
^T^t
as
>JTrTR TT^TrTITJT
As:
3rWc7
The form
It
rf\af?T
with
fai^
is
also
found
in the
f*WR (Rig Veda VII. 90. 3). ^rfufTT * 5fT (Rig

Veda X. 93. 13) ( = T<tffSrTT)
means 'half.' fyissr is Imperative 2nd Per.
Sg. of VJT, there is no reduplication, as falser mm$ = vjr*=r
falis^
g^TT 135FT *TsfefllTnfa: (Rig Veda VI. 18. 9). fuutq is Benedictive Atmauepada 1st Per,
Vedas.
Sljfiafrf
II
II
Sg. of mt, the regular form being vutfta
By
VII.
48. S. 442,
4.
case-ending beginning with
See
II
III.
106.
4.
substituted for the final of the stem
is
wtr
before a
In the Vedas this substitution takes place
It
in the
dec
case of jtth
The a substitution takes place in the Chhandas for the final of

Thus WTfaw:, STtfaW:
WTH becomes m^ by VI. 1. 63.
I-shti :
The fr substitution should take pi-tee, according to Patanjali, after
^3S, ^rtgn and 3GTCT also. As ^gfej: 3993 is derived from sgg 'to protect,'
with the affix WQ*\ and the prefix 5|
It means 'he whose
protection is g-od.'
See Rig Veda I. 35, 10; &c. ,
The word ^ft^h is derived from the root ?T with the affix ot^ and Prefix
It means ^r^t^
or
3311
wealthy.
As SflctfcW: See S. 3633.
Similarly
3T*fg: as in SWrfg:
(Rig Veda I. 6. 3).
V&rtika:
WT8
<c.
II
ll
mum:
This word
(See Unadi IV.
who
formed by the
is
222 and 233).
follows evidently the lost
affix
This
is
nfg which
Unadi Sutras which
Ha
?frT
By VII.
3UT
4.
63. S.
2641, the Palatal
eg (cfiqfl)
plies to the
gsij also.
The
3595.
is
Palatal
eu
and not
not substituted
in the Inteusive.
is
S[: for!
II
In
5tgfrT
atnrfS
Ill
the Vedas
for the
Guttural
of
this prohibition ap-
not substituted for the Guttural of the

when in the Intensive.
reduplicate of 'krish' in the Chhandas,

As sR&3tOi3*K33jqra: otherwise g^t^reia
m*
fefiFT
Haradatta,
Ten Padas.
II
the reduplicate of
root
as for? after cT^
the opinion of
consisted of
the present CJnadi Sutra of Five Padas we have 3*:
Q5I
treated
is
according to
^ratasr:
11
"
3^^^f^mg^frt%$TOh^Trir^
The Sjddhanta
73
sa^: Hips* sfp^rsR srasna?ss*j
farira:
'fa*R
KAutocDi.
[Vol. III.
^ths^ksi
lira*
VII. 596.
Cii.
fewwcwaTew
si^RsiTttra:
'for
>^CHa^HlT5T!W SJHawiTOS?
SRKifTa^^ 'sfcTSTHT
I
In the Chhandas are found the
3596.
regularly reduplicated forms:
bobhutu.
shi, 4
wfasrerronftij'
fcTTTTH^T >31^T^H
folio wiug
rota ^WFI*
eighteen
ir-
dadharti, 2 dardharti, 3 dardhar-
sam
7 a paniphanat, 8
5 tetikte, 6 alarshi,
sani-
shyadat 9 karikrat' 10 kanikradat, 11 bharibhrat, 12 davidhvatah,

I3 davidyutat, 14 taritratah, 15 sarisrpatam, 16 varivrjat, 17 marin rjya
and
ganiganti.
18 a
The Word tg^fe
drawn
is
to
in
this sutra,
by force
of
The from
11
from the Causative of the root >j^ 3i3&n5 or from ^st in the
there is lengthening of the abhyasa and elision of far
(2) So
SSTOftS, is either
trj or jxw
^,
also Z\3 TO
be a form of
sive
TTg;
O^ ^R.
no irregularity.
is
(4)
the abhyasa.
im?T.
is
from
(3) 3\jft
the
in
if
it
Inten-
Imperative, irregularly
Present,
GO,
4.
there
of
without g.sni (6) sjsrfTSf is form the root gj

2nd Person, the ^ of abhyasa is not elided, though required
and this *: is changed t> tH irregularly.
This form is found in the
*T5R
?*J?r7 ) iu
(
by VII.
11
augment
the form in slu, with ^qj
is
3rd Person also, as ^^fcff 3^f:
^TO tt
3rl (R'g
ment aud
ÊTcJ
II
Veda VIII.
affix is
added
TOT *8&&TQizil (Rig Veda VIII
*H*r?TT
48. 8).
to qg- stcK,
1.
7).
(7) *ht vîTfUUrl i from tRq with wi augand in th> reduplicate sft is added. (8) #-
from va^s with the Preposition HTT, in the Intensive yafi Ink, with 3Jr|
The Preposiaffix, fa being added in the abhyasa, the root fl is changed to
tj
tion H is not absolutely necessary, with other Propositions also we have this form*
faw2J*
is
11
as
m nfaiZJIfl
Îrj,
in the
ll
the reduplicate.
there
is
(9) SifTSTO
abhyasa
there
is
is
no
(10) qifacIvJrT
no chutva (VII.
4.
(11) wfalfj from
3;
WTO
palatal change
fr rn
Efi 5
'
),
in the Intensive
(VIL
n tne
4. 62).
Aorist
with
and
form
w (fgw?H)
is
sjiamjto
II
m&
gif-iaiS^^T^TTJ
in yaii luk with sjq, without
yan
fi is
62) of the reduplicate, and the augment
In the classical literature, the

4).
from
luk, with
added to
reduplication,
fn
is
added.
(Rig Veda II. 4.
of VII. 4. 76,
Vol.
Ch. VIII. $361)6.)
lit.
without jastva,
Veda
aud
ft
added
is
(12) ^fgw?:
4. 4).
II.
Vaidtc Ruttt.
number Nominative. The fa is

W*: <wq: ^[5^1 (Rig Veda IV.
fam
the reduplicate,
to
(Kg
wfrwjurvftij
from yq (vzrrfl) in the yan luk, satri, plural

added to the reduplicate, the %j is elided, afa-
13. 4.)
(13) gfa agHH is From dyut, van luk
no vocalisation of the reduplicate, with * change and fa augment. (14) fffroff: from ^ (nT?a) with slu, satr, genitive singular: and ft added
r
to abhyasa. cirreif r?far?T: (ttig Veda IV
40. 3).' (15) Sttaqn from qn with ftu
II
with
satr, there is
(16) gft$3f?? from 35? with slu, s;ity

and tV augment. (17) ju grfrom^ with fa^ ( Perfect ) m*, * added to abhyasa,
and u added to the root, and there is no viiddhi, because there is no short penultiiatt,
Accusative with ft added to abhyasa.
mate how.
86. (18)
there
wtf W
is
In fact VII.
%n
*T^JT?5?T is
114
2.
im
from
no chutva (VII.
4.
The word ^fa
and augment
62),
(Rig Veda Vi. 75.
ll
to be qualified
is
by the words
from VII.
*TO<JVJ
with the Prepositiou *t, in the Perfect, with

sft is
added,
3.
slu,
93f iWtnfo
ggqjfft
3).
in the aphorism indicates that other forms, similar to
these*
are also to be included.
v.
f nfafe
WTirauf
mwas
gninwtswnaw m&i famraft
'life s^rS *rfwa(
wg* *fa
In the Chhandas sasuva
3597.
is
irregularly formed
in the
Perfect.
It
is
derived from
igr
thus
3^*! 5^ft?
wwjt&fNrt*:
3598.
tariffs
'I* is
yqfi fajfe* (from
'vm
diversely
Vowel of the reduplicate,
in
tc
Kig Veda IV.
fagfte'
qirtfin^tf
substituted in
the
Chhandas.
the
the Reduplicated Present-form,

sterns wrs:
CHAPTER
Vllt.
Pra> sam, upa> and
3599.
ing, the foot of a verse
is
tit
are repeated,
when by
so doubl-
completed.
vt vnimfamamimk (Rig. VII. 8. 4),rifcfaSaqt 9*1 t*(Kg Veda X. 101.

& m\HU (Rig Veda I. 126. 7), M ^5 tM 8tflT3 (&<g Veda IV. 21.
As
Stira
for
crtr).
srff!
ni#
otherwise *j]jg
tt<
As
e^ wftiT
nfe
18. 10.
3500
^^*k:
^j
SrtJf*rlTiqiT5f!Tl QI.S1 IffitTOi 3:
FHrJ
10
)
'fcftg3
UWllj'
iftsf^
]).
9).
ê
7*
In the Chhandas v
3600.
when the stem ends

As, iftaH
vfann
The
3601.
in u
or
Veda
(Rig
affix
stem ending
after a
SiDDiiANTA Kaxjmudi. [Vol.
is
of mat^
in
* we have
substituted for the
r.
Of the stems ending
III. 52. 7).
mat gets the augment
'nut' in
the Chhandas,
in an.
As m^racRK swftR H*ma: {Rig Veda X.
Veda
Ch. Vlll. 360t>.
III.
71. 7)
TOTO*fsra5TOn feiwfS (Rig
164. 4).
I.
320*
;ng^j
is
ll
3602.
augment nut
stem
after a
affixes tar
and
tarn receive the
in n.
The affixes mQ and rroti are called *il Thus Ftjfaj^ + tnc = Hirfa + ftl (VII I.
= *pfa + sicrc(VIII. 2. I7)grffis*n:
FdrJ :
The augment 33: is added to these affixes after vrftSl^f as wftZ^riv. (III. 2. 74, the affix is gfauj 5R: (Rig Veda VIII. 5< 39).
Long ^ is the substitute of the final of *?sisj before at and ?m The
Fdrt:
The final sf is first
word *fa^ is formed by the affix jffa in the sense of WHU
2. 7)
elided by VIII. 2. 7, and then for the short

If the long
by the present vartika.

as ifari +
then
flt,
this long
aj
being asiddha,
it
long
of ifa the
were substituted
substituted
is
of tfasj
could not be compounded
by eka-
for the
final
^ into t and the form would always remain

andttfcm natam (Rig Veda I. 11. 1). Or this ^ may be
As
desa with the preceding
tfa^Rt:
*sftrrc:,
considered to
have come
after
3S03
VB
in the sense of JTcTO
TOrlfiroflT^TOrWCTaifa
^sfa
g*
II
In the Chhandas we have the following irregular

Participles nasatta, nifchatta, anutta, praturtta, surtta and gurtta.
The words 5*8tT and four! are derived from the root tt preceded by *f aud
In the clasfa, and there is not the ^ change of VIII. 2. 42. Thus sTOt*W35WT
3603.
II
sical iterature
(Rig Ved.
I.
we have
146. 1) but
g-5 with the negative
V^rim H iroa^
When
it
is
^B^W
II
fawnr:
'H^)
derived from
u
II
So
alt-o
fourr: in the Vedas, as
in the classical literature.
The option
wg^W
is
c3T then
&z
is
faurlJiW
The word
of VIII. 2. 56 does not
from
in
^-Jri:
W
from
apply here.
?p> as Txn^ <3TfsR*?

added by VI. 4. 20 ; and
?SfT or
is
As
= UgTOTJ?) H
when from
Vol.
jgrs
Ch. VIII. 3G08.]
Iir.
then VI.
as rtf ITTC:
21
4.
*gf ray ^t
applied.
is
^rTHCTSr
JT#
II
Vatdic Rules.
*pr
'ng^^-^^r to
from H, the
is
nr as
from
is
JTrlf
ssu ss-3i>cr
is
changed
(=TOn)
IKtrlSa
to
*g ss-wsto
irregularly
"
In the Chhandas, both ru and ra are substituted

3604.
lb* the final of amnas, udhae, and avas.
Thus w% S3 or *BH*r, 3JVJ Scl or 3IYJTO *g izw. or ^g^g n
When * is
substituted for the fiuals, this * is replaced by n by VIII, 3. 17, which is elided.
by VIII. 3. 19.
The word m*m means 'a little', and
'protection.'
;
m^
*o*
V3S3 U?T3H|S:
S*
II
In the Chhandas, ru and ra may replace the

3605.
the word 'bhuvas' when used as a maha-vyahriti.
Thus'
w:, wgj:
^feFrlfTgjJ
and
*bi:
30
&&
The maha-vyahn'tis
ll
are
of
three
11
5lT*WT5T*
Fjrauw
srhisssrcsfr.
rnvzi
?PFWC3f$
wsr
ôr
final
c$>
11
^wi^
"shaw
gufgrU?
<hw rera fawr
^rfw?8
The vowel
3606.
in
om
pluta in the beginning of a sacred
is
text.
text.
The word wfreTT*i means the commencement

Thu* w.*n *n**ft îflH; Qirra 35TOf<F3f3T
Why
"in -the beginning"?
do we say
(Chhandogya
Upanishad
I.
1.
Here
1).
wencenient of a Text or Mantra, but
3os
9 TOOTfai r*
\
5a usnrri
employed
Thus
Observed
is
S,
I.
1.
vedic
1.)
not used
to indicate
the com*
the subjpct of commenjt.
11
ssuws
of ye becomes pluta in a sacred text, whert
?fa
Why do we say when employed in

uâT^m "Yc yajimahe'' consists of five
II
a sacrificial
syllables.
work?
Here
it;
a simple recitation.
1
unrro:
UlUilSfjOT
?J
tuflVrHT^r:
WTR
In a
sacrificial
vowel, with the consonant,
is
l
I
11
VWk TT?H fa^n*?'
':' fail?.
W^J^W,
3 608.
It
^
1
(Rig
a sacrificial work-
3335118%
ZJ5ITWS
asoc
WT
in
faw
'u*-' ^fa
The vowel
3607.
it is
a sacred mantra or
Observe ^Tfa^H3gTW^tOTTJ7T#r?
is
*j?nr
is itself,
of
H
work,
if
5lT3JJ is
any, that
may
follow
it.
of asentei
ce.
The word Hqrcr means thtjt u,

The word ififf*JTriirJis understood here also.
the name given to this syllable. This wtw is substituted for the final, letter
The Stimihauta Kauwudi.
"
-j
'
word which stands either at the
(rS) of that
[Vol. TH. Gh. VIII. 360&.
*
,
end of a Pada of
a sacred
hymn or
Thus for wit tfrifa Fftssffl (Rig. VHP.

we may have *tdT TSffa -ftiqetftnt $ H So also for 331* faTOlfH 3*5*.
III. 27. 1), we may have 33131 fsimfrf H^^%JT
at the end of a hemistich of such Rik.
44.
16.),
(Hig.
II
The word
repeated in this aphorism in spite of its armvritti from VIII.
fcr is
*jm replaces the whole of the last syllable, with its vowel,
Had Fs not been repeate then by the rule of mrT9t*ira the
only of the fj portion of a sentence would have been replaced.
Thus
2. 82, to indicate
that
consonant.
aiid
#nal
letter
1,
would have been replaced.
in tp33*. the visarjauiya alone
When
not employed in connection with sacrificial
Thus
substitution.
sjtri
tmfa
faw
*rst*:'
fasaffT
in,
(he simple reading
The
3609.
when employed
last
af?r sT*ti z-
such
works,
in sacrificial
;
g.
VIjJ.
wra
Hsfrc&fa itad
end of Mantras called Yajya,
vowel at the
Thus wi&Tayinâa (R
$.
no
is
ii
'qraqwravT grasHrspnreqiiiri
works, there
the Yedas, we should always recite.
of
43;.
is
1 1),
pluta and has the

fagroi*
to$
Acute.
^SJ3TTITa*J (Rig. X.
6),
Why
do we say
hymn.
pluta, in such a
vcwel of the
hymn
3GIO.
In
^mz
'at the
The
sentences.
several
and ^?T8^
at
a,
is
emY
final
To prevent
the end of
So also
is
in
srftBtffc'
it,
the word "auta"
work, the
sacrificial
is
used, so that the fiual
first
syllable of sffg,V8f,
11WZ
pluta.
fqWTQT^spa^f
is
hymns, consisting of
sentence would have become
of every
becomes pluta.
T.
on. tie
no prolation
^tawS m^
in
wets
i<
<?
qp*d Jfmmfa
11),
analogy of
illustrative of the sir forms
But there
3Sn
(f;j)
all,
Thug WRifcag^tftl (Maitr S
word inS3
There are some Yajya
vowel
;?
so also
f)
v\vu, **g
MIWW^T
3TU^, lTQ^, 315*^
qSWT^ja
SelT^
i
sjfg,
&WZ, itm^,
(or
VTOV
5I7H
fcr.
II
The
QWvZ
if
I.
301, 1-
In a& order given* to Agnidhra
as well as the succeeding syllable
is
priest, the first syllable
pluta-
In a Yajfia, the principal priests (yitvij) are four, Adfovaryn,
and Brahma,
Every one of these has three subordinate
tydgata,
priests.(ritvij)
Hota
under him
Vaidig Rblr*
Vol. Hf. Ca. VIII. 5612.]
T?
The duty of Agnidhra is to kindle the sacrificial fire.

In a summons or
made by the Adhvaryu, who is the Director of ceremonies, to the
call (ifam)
Agnidhra
to perform the functions of
The word
A^nidh,
both, syllables
compound vnuu:
qp?tta if tuff ia
become pluta.
jf noiw "a
summons
or
call
relating to Agu.id.h duty.'*
Thus
examples
&V*
Str:
i:'
fww
3hl m\ \ *S
ero,
fawn se nf**^
muff: *&i
wdfw
3612.
5*5j
$:
takes place omly in
plu,ta
i,j
h m^m
writ
'The
*n^3"ft^ foil;
therefore, not here, as
wM
?tfi
<t
*<re^'4fa
th.es.9
fej
wfaafofV
'-was.
'Hi' at the
end of an answer to
a question
may
option-,
ally be pluta.
miof: ** 33t
Thus
Q.
Why
do wesay
Ans. Wfira 1*
'
answer to a question"
< 4 in
I or
Observe
\Vhy do we say %: 'of l%"
TO UgTW
'TOWIsmflJTWV
3613.
when
it
rUH t:
ST
flrU
The end
*?RUl f
Observe wftUT
*g
wz mfamm
mfcr grfiST
TOUITOrifef
syllable of that sentence
is
S3JT-
optionally pluta,
something which has been refuted, and
asserts
fit
is
employ-
ed by the victor by the way of censure.

The
word
means
fau*;:
the
refutation
gerund, and means having refuted*,
When
position which has been refuted.
reproach or reprimand, then the

sutra literally
of another's opinion,
the expression of the
is
assertion by
such a sentence
of
final syllable
meaoa "Having
fsnref
is
same
pro-
a person Has demonstrated the untenable-
then employs the said
ness of another's assertion, and
The
way
n^qtn*
when
refuted (it)
way
same
(the
asserting
of taunt,
becomes pluta.
by
of censure)."
Thus an opponent
"The word
asserts that
is
not eternal. "
(vfeai*
proving by arguments the untenableness of this position, and after refuting

Victor says
'This
is
by way of
then your assertion
ftwmWT 3
3614.
a threat
or *SHIT\SnTr*Tr*I
'ssot^sfra
reprimand;
is
JiUfRi:
that the
*rs
word
TRJTW
si
Similarly
Or qflamigf f OTTO.
*uf fsrurwif %*?#qTOiinr
final syllable
it,
the
% or *T>ca *T53 *Rn?H
not eternal*.
is
*3imT3TWfUTWr
^THfowrfw touj'
The
'^"tr
*raHJT\R-
trY
of an amredita vocative is pluta
when
expressed.
Vocative
final syllable
VSff:)-
is
reiterated
becomes pluta.
when a threat
Thus 3S3T 3SJt
is
meant (VIII.
i ttlrlfQVlfjifqi
1.
d
8,
S. 2143,).
Its
The
?8
Though the
of the sentence
VIH.
anuvritti of the sutra
[Vol. MI. Cn. VIII. 3614.
cur re lit here, yet the iiuah
2. 82, is
not pluta, hut of the amredita.
is
any one of the repeated words may be pluta
It should be- rather stated that
by
Kauwum.
Side>hanta
Thus S^fia ^fr or
The word amr dita ia employ^frx t?r %

ed in the sutra as illustrative of the doubling, for the threat is expressed by botK
alternation.
words,
may
so that pluta
only, though that
&n
*f r*$*
to,
Thus
W f^T%
Why
Why
do we say
33. S. 3940).
TOlTJ^. ^ftpR.
The
36 16.
denote
II
Here
*^
w%
3JTSTT
Thus
sacrifice in, the
SltfTat^ U
Here
also
itfTSEfc
3$t$>
pf earth or a
Observe
has the
force
jht^
TO
Here-
complete the sense.

Therefore not
also.
of
(VIII,
solicitation.
which
pluta,
is
balancing between two alternatives).

all
arguments pro
sftafow 1.U
\*
**
aud
#fT5Drr?JT
eon
called
is
should one per-
shouU
it
be put
flat
by the yajamana.
common
speech,
<s* n
the
vowel of the
fifcal
first
only pluta.
This makes a niyama or restriction.
at
to
3TT*T*T V
house of an injtiated person.' Similarly ffftSBJVTa^ 'JFTWST

being reflected upon whether gjcj f?TC5rj or zrft v^7%TR H
to the Vedic literature,
Thus *fg **
e-
^JUSWTSf; instil M
In
is
it is
g g vrronnij
36 17.
alternative
'*$=
|.
we** *<*&
?dT=ff ITTWfa
S^fa
of those sentences
should the stake remain upright or
f5R gllfanSjFg, %: 5TT
itoTCrl fa.Elf
understood here
is
weighing
thing by
vichara or judgment..
form a
last sutra
3ronf*T
final syllable
a.
TfTS?' f*HT
joined; with-it, arid it demand's
is
for a conclusion' ?
this calls
of the
rT
STT*ro'
^rTsa^WMTîrfff
of a finite verb, used as a threat
Observe
acts, of reflection (or
To determine
word
of the second,
complete the conclusion.
a yerb'
The word Wc^r
V%
e.
*C
a complete sentence and does not demand another
ip.
i.
w^ *w?
l^T^f: WTTOTH oimiT
we say 'when
do,
fare
final syllable
another sentence
it i&
M $
when the word anga
pluta,
and not
'*f f 5T3 ^frft ITTFlf*
'qn^T^g^
i,
The
3615
comes
^W
frTCTSFTS
Qt* ffi&ri TôTH
s^tV
IcRfrT ftrora
be of both words in turn
technically 'called' amredita.
is
^Tfr*
and not
T33ig, 'Is
pigeon
.?'
it
to the
The previoua
classical.
sutra,
is
thus
confined
here has the force of
a BUaMar, a rope' iSrtit
^1
SRîai^
'
la
it
'
only.'
a clod
Vol.
Ch. VIII. 3^20.]
ttr.
The
Vaidic Rottti
priority, of course,
70
depends upon employment.
Tue order
of words de
pends upon one's choice.
gigaw zi gaisuw nfasrT^ *s*iwtfmszi *

'fw. 3J3{' wfarlJT^W 3t1 fawnî*
S^lfaa'
The
3618.
listening
sutra to restrict
2.
3. ifct3jTf Wt:, fsRWlrSJI
st
Z?n
jkll, 1.
1.
II
is
means
in the
promise
to
proposition,
n* H 33Tfwa
It also
nothing
promise.'
something to
3. to
2. faflj: 3j^*T
listen to
an-
NfagJtii?? a
II
II
Wtfl
rtt
nz* 3
has three senses,
it
'**w
pluta.
acknowledge the truth of some
Thus nt
**3TtT:
Thus
scope.
its
to
other's words
^qwrTa ^
is
agreement, assent or
All these senses are to be taken here, as there
to.'
a petitioner,
& zh Sn'
*rf
of the sentence which expresses as-
final syllable
sent or promise, or listening to,

The word u?rTV3<n means
f Tt^flTftjg fa^W
*3?rr7*QTT3TTrr5romf$*
nw#
'iifavrrV 'qzi' SrTCT:
^^5Tt?: iga:
fffvftua
iittf*:
igssfa
jn?ng^ 1
The
3619.
is pluta,
which
That
tl^T^H:
vowel at the end of a question or of a praise
final
but unaccented.
datta-ness of those syllables wnich

fccv
an interrogative sentence
the end of
employed at
is
The meaning
mn* v
Thus
i.
igk\*\
e. qprar:
finals in
called
become pluta by the previous rules VIII. 2. 84

That pluta which comes at the end of
is :
of the sutra then
an Interrogative sentence or a sentence denoting admiration,
is
According to some, this rule does not ordain pluta, but only ordains the anu-
iMt*=^ ura'a^j
JJTWIW HVtf$a
^fawma^
or vizi )
a question, become auudatta as well
Ac. become svarita and pluta by VIII.
2.
fgfef*
See VIII.
105.
gfami *nprora
stsrisj *?T3Tr?: t*m:

*raffg3T*?:
'giprara' fspw
3620.
The
datta and pluta,
nmra
treT a
The words *fa*[r7, and vzi ""being

The other words *httjt:
as pluta.
As regards llfwiifs?^ we have JTTH^: mzefa

7nm33i becomes anudatta and pluta.
35r
anudatta.
is
or *irch: jpi'a^
'sjfofesTtrra a'
HTHJclSFiT
^ 1101
^n^nf^g^T wnuri
2.
107.
Here the
II
fiual of
wfoifar wist
'scwm' few
end- vowel at the end of a sentence becomes anu-
when
the
particle
chit is
employed,
denoting
comparison.
The word
sjiststtT is
understood here.
This sutra ordams pluta as well, and
not merely accent.
Thus wfafa^ WTOTirJ 'niay he shine

he shine as a King'.
as
fire'.
So also ngtfsre VfTnrl 'may
80
SmoHlNTA KAumudi.
trite
Why
- r-
'when the sense
do we say
[VoL. Ill Ch. VIII. 3620.
wi
of comparison'? Observe
that
is
Here fan? has the force of 'littleness or difficulty'.

Why do we say fripmi^ 'when expressly employed' ? Observe *f*
*m:
ftra
NT3TH 'Let the boy shine
like
fire'.
Here
irfm^t
hence the rule does
fa?j is understood,
hot apply.
h rants**:
*jt?j
^ft
In
3621.
'sqftfiEasmh h'
H i&* *
'w-.fercmVa
feff *IT*J^ the end- vowel
W-
anudatta and
is
pluta.
The word
anudatta
been pluta hereby Vtll.
understood
is
97
2.
S.
The
here also.
3616, the present
would have
eud- vowel
sutra really ordaius acceut-
lessness of this pluta.
w.
Thus
*nta
is
Fw<J"W*2ri,
3TI??:
fosraVaa (Rig X.
udatta by VIII.
pluta and
In the
129. 5).
the second
97, in
2.
first
portion
anudatta by
it is
tha
present sutra.
saftr?: nan:
snstif fsa
<tfs|rm3ft
nw
h^qtutit
vfacuai*
*fwxiii
fa*
hmi $ ifin:~\
Ot the two vocatives of the same form standing at
3622.
the beginning of a sentence, the end-vowel of the first becomes
pluta and svarita, when envy, praise, anger, or blame is expressed*
*BT5if 9iifa
sn^w
fctre
siTritaa nif^^R
This sutra ordains pluta

The Vocative is doubled by VIII. 1. 8. S 2143.
Thus Envy : *rrai9nT% *TT*nssR> <n?w*nj*ta *rwasF, hr* H wfwtaw
praise
Anger:
HTHrîa WU&a*, ^TU5Rf3 llfwstjai 3JTW5?: *S*5n%
trim*
Blaine
3l!i3 WTms*. ^fg^fTcRlB *fasftfl*l Sawf UCTIfc 5U5W
innfaRT 5 STlffr*
there.
II
intat ana uirsta?
fim *
wq ircifa iwnf?i
h*b
ifa*
When
3623.
vrornra rah* sustea *j=t ^

'rnnumjmf few 3^rfaj*fcr ^Fw^tfosfH*
II
m*
s&T<JTfr
ms
area
urn
an
error against
when
a benediction or a bidding
finite
verb becomes pluta and svarita,
is
polite usage'is
intended,
if this
censured, or
the end syllable of a

requires another sen-
tence to complete the sense.

The word
in
usage
tfV.
'
or
means
svarita
want
order
'
'
is
understood here.
of
good breeding.' (VIII.
or
commanding by
The word feqr means the error

benediction.'
60) tuiiti means
'
I.
Words.'
Vol.
Ch. VIII. 3625]
III.
Vatpic Rules.
hi
Thus ^ro* **R Jrfftl, 3*nnf nTrfof imsfrT u *qd *t^t W3\t*3, 3<nIn both these, the first sentence requires the second aa its
Vara tR^ maafrl
complement, and hence there is STWii^^T
ll
Benediction:
Order:
Why
STr?hg
Stt'a
do we say
SUtfttsjTi *l?T
XlT*f
when
il^S
few
HTrT
VQl*
3?^T\ZIir>tT3 SJ18RTHT ,
SFftr%3,
SfKsg fag
II
II
another seutence as its complement' ?

There cannot be any counter-example of
required
it
Observe 3\^r?8rcfe ipsfte^ft^

feuT, for there two sentences
are absolutely
necessary to
express the
sense of
censure.
*5T5roP3T?rnFJTfn U2FJ Z: mfcri:
oiq?Rin^
*HT5En3
l&rl Qr\VV.
JW
w ^rah ^ umia ^
^j*tw^
^HWB^BTTa ^ HTWl^ ^
In a question or narration* the end- vowel of a word,

3624.
though not final in a sentence, becomes svarita and pluta> as well
as of the word which is final in a sentence.
The word
The end-vowel
padasya
of a word
'
is
understood here:
which
when
the last word, becomes svarita and pluta,
In
narrated.
Thus
tTCTaS
in
fact, all
all
a question
'svtirita.'
as well as of
asked, or
is
a fact
is
the words of a sentence become svarita and pluta hereby.
questioning we
in
Thus
II
and so also the Word
nut the last Word in a sentence,
is
have
Wmrai gsr'n^ tfraia^ îfef *T??T3^ or
Words have becume svarita and pluta.
The final word would
:
one alternative, become anudatta also, by
sutra.
The
svarita,
aud thus
VIII. 2. 100/ as shown under that

word ^jfe in the sutra, is to make the final word alsd
sutra makes VIII. 2. 100 an optional sutra with regard to
force of the
this
question.
In dkhydna or narration, there

Therefore there,
all
Thus *u*m*T
this sutra.
3xy
unsr
their last
Hâra
tsfffTCnErf
II
ll
aarsqarfegHT
84
2.
$5 fesita*
<fcc.
when
applied to
namely
of
i*
5?
or
or
Nominative dual of *qn, and the aphorism
5(T
Cause the
31 The word
literally
means
3 are pluta of the diphthongs 5 and 5n'

Thus intfasrrasi, $nuna u
Thus W+H and *w + 3 each has
This pluta of $ and T has foUr matras.
matra.
The pluta of * and 3 will have thee matras. Thus * f^ and
'? and
one
jfira
the diphthongs ai and art
pltita of
prolatiou of the last element of these diphthongs

in the siitra is
this.
force of
and U get the pluta*
The pluta ordained by VI II.

cS^T
debarred by
is
pluta necessarily, by the
In forming the
element
and
*i*ff.1 tffl.S
ram WTgrT^^g:
^rromqwr
3625.
%W*
JTRT&g ?|HT
KTi^tHTTsa
vn
no other rule, which
is
words become svarita
* + 3ab
ll
-f-
or the whole has four matras,
II
/
Thk Siddhanta Kaumudi.
82
3$r
m wr
<^
w^
suriftr rfrftffr
'Utt^s*' fan
qntrfarrT sÊffn isjrifasRTCTJii
+'
cirfisa:
oth* ^t%
w^na? vt
&XU-Q
<o
VIIT
363<?.
teiViîi
TOFT. WTiJflTTO
Ch
III
s%TSUW3iT|rng?r jTaron^rar^grvi
WWISJWgTJfTT^f
H ^THTgc^
WWTOFlT9RTr.
*
*o
c>
c\
5Rf?eaiT
[Vol
a:
eÎW!
"o
In the diphthongs, which are not Pragyihya (I. 1. It

&c) and which become pluta under the circumstances mentioned
3626.
VIII.
2.
prolated
'a/,
and
+3
for the second portion e or u.

or
*j
are s, ^,
and
'Ht
?jft
n+%, and
Their elements are
thong
these diphthongs are t) be prolated, at the end of a word, the diphresolved into its elements, the first portion m is prolated, and ^ or 3
is
may be.
may
aided, as the case
This rule
Vdrt:
The
rules to which
it
be
or
or 3,
3, in fact, are the
or
sft
substitutes
and VIII.
scope of
90 only, according
2.
100.
2.
to the following Vartikas.
be determined by
this sutra should
the
of
not of universal application, but applies to Rules VIII.
is
97, VIII. 2. 83,
2.
? and
This
second portion, which
enumerating the
applies.
F4/*; It should
and
a call from
is
When
VIII.
thai circumstance
for the first half, there is substituted the
84);
2.
The diphthongs
*s
when
83 &c, but not
a distance (VIII.
stated that
be
it
applies to
sutras VIII.
2. 100, 97,
83
90.
Thus VIII.
EFjftfa
iVSiii
2. 90:
2.
As viraTt: tph^ UTOT^

So also VIII.
UZ1\4
100:
TTTHraSRH IjfrWrTT*? or
l
So
83
also VIII. 2.
sgiÛl
as.
2.
as,
ijrnpm^
97: as ^RBI
STY* *fi^[Hit'I or xrerrl
SSTreTS #m<JTTa fvj
u_T*
or
*faff?TiV?
*rftwfawnifWTa%h
W^[
aftferTW
So also VI II.
(Tait.
S. I. 3.
14.7).
This pluta
sjtt
is
which has been applied,

everywhere
else,
Why
i,
udatta.
the auuvritti of udatta
focrwH
udatta, anndatta or svarita, according to the particular inle
is
do we restrict
at the end of a qaestion
a.
The % and
it
is
are of course,
auuhitta or svarita, and

ahyaja udatta
because
current here.
this sutra to the
fsiîvrFra ^Trtfannfa' rciT *$<tit^p
above mentioned four rules
fawwn
wr wunssR
Observe
h\ f icr., the present sutra being contined to the above-mentioned four rules,
<he Words Bc?*Tc^Fi
n the sutra, are
redundant: and should not have
Moreover the word Uî^r! should have been used

d ph thongs at the end-oi a pada. Therefore, not in
>ie the -sarvanatnasthana athx
-Why
nlo
Vdrt:
we
say 'when
This
it
*r is
is
not a pada
not a Pragrihya'
Aa TRiîaf
t.B.Sia,*
wj
(I. 4.
}ieculiar modification of pluta
tive case in the Vedas.
the sutra,
in
f*lfa
hihfa
it
I
been used.
applies
He*
*ft
to
oe-
17).
Obbeive
sjiw^r WT5T a
vowel takes
tfiil
tor
RiT^T
^W
place in
fu
the Voca-
Here by no
Vol.
Cn. VIII. 0028.]
III.
Vaidic Rule*.
88
other rule, the Vocative woull have become prolated..
***
*tV
fair
vKfra^squ
'flfsrTtUTa'f**?
3627. For these vowels
a vowel follows them
v*?? *^:
Hf?cnaifsrr3*2JTa<-
and u, are substituted y and v when

asamhita (in an unbroken flow of speech).
in
The word TJfgoTT^ro is an adhikara and exerts its influence up to the end of
Whatever we shall teach hereafter, up. to the end of the- Book, will
the Book.
apply to the words which are
the Sanhita,
in.
wrsfa^w,
Thus ^n^Tiuivr. usn^TsiT:,
Why
Why
m^n
do we say
when a vowel
'
do we say sferFTaTJT.
? **5m* 33TB3 3*>J*

This sutra
is
^ and
3. being Pluta-modifications
^t
ed as asiddha (VIII. 2_ 1) for the purposes of

posing that somehow
sent rule
(VI.
or other, these
and
(VI.
1.
are consider-
But sup*
77).
be considered siddha,
3,
VI.
and VI.
101,
1.
the pre-
still
ought
the present sutra
be made, in
to
VI.
127.
I.
vowel
If
it
127, would not apply, because
1.
Vartika*:c^g&Q99lifâT>CTTO WRltirT
at ill
m&f*
unchanged by
or their retaining their form
1),
said, thnt th-ese rules
the
Observe
necessary to prevent their lengthening before a homogeneous
is
10
1.
uninterrupted flow of speech'
Pada Patha.
in the
made, because
Ooserve qpsnsgvqh
follows' }
an
in
'
trcntgswy
Brfisa:
(Vartika to
order to prevent
be
of,
VI. 1.77);
âccent
(VII,
3657).
2. 4. S.
âfaafrfiSRT fain:
si*tto
's^ w*c9 55 wrs.
For the
3628.
Trsr-riw
*mw
*: wth ^^Tisw-w' (**) ^fo vfinnwati

"gRim for raj' 's^sta:' (seoo) *fo
i
1,
of the affixes mat and vas there
final
is
sub-
stituted ru, in the Vocative singular, in the Chhandas.
The word
STfl,
changes
tvftSHTQT
its
final
Vocative singular. Thiss

itftt
rSTT
who
he
is
by VIII.
I.
19.
Here
10;
The
the
15.
H
â
affix
(of
^trsrenftn
With
,12, for
TTfi
ni?cg.: is
understood here.
(I.
52. S.
1.
&$
word ending
V tmP
WSc3 TS
S. 3
Vocative Sg. of *TSf3?7 and
(nom. sg.)
VII.
The base
00.
1.
^ftci: (Riff.
era :-*ft2>'?cftaiT3
is
70)
changed
&
6).
nw
H*
I.
The
jt
to
1.
68
of
gftfj
ll
the
WR
affix
or
Ghhmidas, in the
HI. 51.
7).
jjfl. is
*h$l
meaning
of cfran.
changed to
termination
the jt
^ by this
(Rig. ir. 33. 14).
formation of ot^tM, HT|T^ with
(Rig.
tfim
*T*?? before this
elided by VI..
is
in
into r, in the
42)
possessed of Maruts or ffari horses.'
2.
23, and the

era*?Ts*:
is
or
is
Bha by
is
elided by VIII. 2.
sutra,.
So also ^^TUrfe
^ST|!:
See VI.
1.
Tre Siddhanta Kasmupi.
84
Why
do we say
of jt?j
and
israj
Observe 5n?l^ WiTOiw:
'
[Vol. fll C*i. VIII. 3629.
the Vocative Singular'? Observe a ôf fsgrafcnnviTf
'in
Chhandas'
Observe
in*R. 1 ufas^
wgRjsf ^TfaisjTrj 'QHcsri^
erc^T
The
3629.
participles
Why
Why
do we say
do we say
'in
the
II
TTirifTfci:
â
to:
dMvan, sahvan and mjdhvan are ir
regulaily formed without; reduplication.

The word 3i3cM^
is
from the root ^1^2
'to give'
with the
affix SRTCJ (III.
2.
107); here the reduplication and the augment ^z are prohibited irregularly; aa
3T3criT Zû: ^r?W (Rig. I. 3. 7). The word *H|IT^ is derived from the root
to endure/ by adding the affix efg^ (III. 2, 107), the irregularity being in leng-
thening the
penultimate,
Thus OTxn^
5l5TT^3;
affix gjra (III.
2.
not
So
and the reduplication

sprinkle'
'to
with the
107) the irregularity consisting in non-reduplication, non-appli-
As iftâTSRia
ift&V^ cumes from fan;
penultimate vowel, and the change
cation of ?^, the lengthening of the
augment
allowing the
also
rRma
H*r (Rig Veda,
II. 33.
these words should be in the singular always
U).
in their
It
plural
of jj into,
not necessary that
is
forms also they do
not reduplicate.
V&it
The
afcni
As ^F3TQ5ri
the root
1.
ertpTT
gf should also be enumerated.
affix
meant
are both
here.
The word Trrafcfc^
HTrlfraiM
(fro) preceded by hth;
See
l,
III.
2.
The
affixes gflftrc^
and
Vocative Sg.
in the
formed by adding TOf*HJ % to
fa
75.,
The g^
is
added by
Vt
71.
3$3<>
3**rcref
S3
In both ways,
3o30.
in
compulsory.
word ending
followed by
times there
q^pSrsTO
is
changes
*^T V TOoTO!*
3631,.
^^th:^
I
9,0.
its
final st to
Thus
by which the * substitution waa

^^ class, which itself
by a letter of
^ optionally in the Rig Veda.

?fim.j^ r^T avufff or
flfwH WT
Some-
SVlfa
8).
swRmf
SWtrejflagî;?
Ru is
sutra,
la,s.fc
in sj followed
^ and sometimes
(Rig Veda X.
3S39
mvg,
it
the Rig verses.
This ordains a,n option to the
is
changed to
Its final is also
<
'B^raT^Jlf^3TH%'
optionally substituted, for that final
of a word
which
preceded by a long vowel, and is followed by an 'at* letter

(vowels and semi- vowels with the exception of/),, when these ('n
and 'at') come in contact with each other in the same stanza of the
is
Jlig
Veda,
VIU.
Ch.
Vol. Ill
The
HWTH713
s;
VIH.
af
Vaidic Rules.
3635.]
3.
"iCaiis 97QTer,
understood here
is
and
when both words are
t.
i-
?ft
the vere.
Tons aft^r
ICWJpaT;
(Rig Yeda IV. i 2.)
s 33T
107. 19)
iffT (Rig.. IX.
wii *^t * *i*HI
so also
The word
same Pada of
one and the
in
S1S93TR
(Rig
II
(iiiji.
1.
2)
Veda VIU. 6
1.)
I.
The word 3HQBT of the preceding antra is understood here a'so

and ^ remains unchanged also, as mf^rQT^ WTU?
;
an optojul rale
mfamffl
3s3x
vfz
wr$m%
*T^rfe far*m
mw*
A nasal
3632.
when
ngraTH:
ar?rT lv.
n? ^rîr
See VIII.
1).
mw
3 W
VIII.
woull have been optionally nasal
Thus wi|T *fs

'ff^Tâja
necessarily so
6.
1).
zh
Some
aftiftm^Fr w-jott-
tor
pratyahara
'at'
before ruy
'a'
(i.
e-
when
it is
ra)..
5 substitution of
by the last antra.
9 teaches
3.
***.'
always substituted
is
followed by a vowel or ha, ya, va. or

Thus
'wgT
sg ^ spasms fsnj
ia
HT?5fnt^
a. '3.
farajrg=nfa*:
ffh *T5^
vowel
followed by a letter of
it is
so that
(Rig Vela VIII, 67.
sit
(Rig- III. 46.
the long
z\,
W^T
%)
<qj
The present
preceding
n ^TSSI
\sf[
\t %
mikes
sntra
it
VIII*
(Rig.
\\
e.
(*.
the Taittariyas) read
according to the Easterns.
it
This
as anusvara.
a Vedic diversity*
is
In this view, the necessity of the aatia
is
rather-
doubtful.
*S33
*5r=raT*iTtT
The n
3633.
rt
of 'svatawan'
is
changed to
'ru*
before 'p&yu.*
As *g?g: n_T^^ (Rig. IV. 2. 6). The word is f9rT99, the sja is a Ided by
The word is derived from <T qyft with the affix to^ (WtlilT seisiN
VII. 1. 83.
SI-TOT^)
See S. 3594.
II
3*38
*$**
Q^fff
:'
S*
3634.
STTiRTOferTOT:
8*
II
'
Sa may
optionally
be substituted
before a hard guttural and labial, in the
the
for
Chhandas
visarga
but neither
before f>ra y nor before a doubled word.

Thus
Veda VIII.
Why
(Av. V. 26.
SZW
to
98.
tTTH ^'rTPSRfa:
4).
do we say
1),
gmj:
%*j
not before
ijwr: afc
?!
'wreirr
VIII 60
(Rig Ved.
wjsi:
um:
qff?:
5.)
fnfnr
(Rg Veda
and a doubled word'?
fdTOTOg: (Rig
X. 48-
1).
Observe q|fa:
T*
feg}*\
it
K:SRtrSFTfrTgif>J3iHS3^faCH:
f^HJTW w. WT??
qtsTv'
But not here
wire*:'
*n* wsja?* TOffn*'
'n^r
U<>
It
5t gsre*sir'
wfaraV ^f fa*
>
'am
^ti ^r^fitf??'
sit
'are
*rd?ti:, **??'
*fi
The Visarga
3635.
gifa and
SRTH, SFtfrf,
9$:
Thai xrfstl^l^80: the 3g of

elided by VI.
UZJT^T
3RTH
5l=Ctf
anomaly.
I.
3.
42).
Why
to T&
VZ
'feercxrasiT:
of gy;
1 ^1*
*j<l
hare **??, then

4.
75.
18
Similarly
5|
OTejaftwsrm
imm:'
See VIII.
102.
4.
*3rTW,
here g&?NJ
qm.^T
Observe
of
is
fa by VI.
to
wei5lr*J
27, for
is P.ist
Participle
swa
(Rig Veda
ilfef?*:
39
uw
nfcsisi
*r.
'fefsrcrTtrotf
hit'
*>zre
Ablative case
visarga of the
The
3636.
we
*, with re by IH. I. 5$.

added instead of 3, as a Vedi*
the Imperative of 31, the fi& is changed to fa,
g?f\j is
SfJT
II
3635.
has been elided by II. 4.
thus
not added by V.
is
Aornt
the
is
*tZ
qsgau: TOsram
tre^jftrisnjJTw
i
here
fe
the
g?,
affk frTU
%
do we say 'but not of vfefa:'?
353$
fsRH
5Rryj
tne
is
and fn changed
elided
is
th? change of H
<R*fo
3T*n*3rv*.
the vikarana
the Aarist of
and the augment
Here also
II
hei e
HTJUSSRtffT,
of
68
1.
gift:
gnuated before th*
*R is
VIH.
changed to s in the Chhandas, before

hut not so the vi saiga of adifi.
is
is
5Ft
II
[Vol. III. Cn.
changed to
is
before pari meaning 'over'.

The word Chhandas
Ved. X. 45. 1)
Why do we say
(Rig Ved. VI. 47. 27).
3*3$
mm ^
3g**ij
Thus
8S3*
5 in
p&tu
'
'
Veda X.
qfj^^crrrcreTOWW
fcgsrii fcfauuirr.
STW
37. I)
'
'nawttf 5Wi3i|'
Vela X. 81. 7>,

ri falÔTlBfrTO, (^ g
Veda
III 2. 12;
(Rg
fogies w^m*:
r
92. 6). afcsfol ^siFia* (Rii?
CtTOTV a-aWT^S
Why
3S3<
.do
S^HcTR
Sometimes, the change does
I),
** n
is
the Vedas, before Ufa, jp, 9^, TO, TC, TJTO and
Thus
tfjjffl
Chhandas
in the
(Rig Veda X. 158.
For the visarga of the Genitive, there
3638.
(Rig
5nj
as ufaus*. UTcT H
*B*n:
aftsta ^srcf'
1TOJT
diversely be substituted for the visarga of the
tfin^T fj*8IT<*,
fc^Flf*
H!î
Ablative before the verb

not take place
Tims
understood, here also.
when lift mems 'over? See farsT: qfilsaT:

Here TifjC has the sense of 'on all sides'.
5 may
3637.
is
Veda
128.
1).
substituted
*ft* W
fecJSTlT* *fa,
jmnsmw
fecIWaT fef ^TOJT (R'g Veda X. 114.
Rig. Veda X. 17. 9).
we say
^TOT
'
after a genitive case
3T
H8
'
II
See
jw
q<ittft
Rig
(Rig Veda
Z\i SJWSIH.U
*.
1).
Vaiiuc Hulks.
Vol. III. Cu. VIII. $3612.]
87
Sd is optionally substituted fur the

bjfore/v/i &c, (VIII. 3. 53.) in the Chhand is.
vi&arga of 'idayah'
3639.
Thus
QW
?srai:
^sTqiwi??: 'g^nnw^^r:
ar
TOW. q;s ?snT wuh,
qmr
^^-QT:
totstt:viv* TOKPCTTaff u
Here we must read agun the utia VIII.
^ST<it: qq:
fawqfa
35
fTOTOqRWfT&R
mm
H5ritw fpa*j:
q^:q^wqrn?q^:
^"siaTt grpi:
vitqtfusw
U3
TOTqr.
TOWiWi:
3S3*
fasr:
?si<4iW3J
2103;
S.
igr tetsq5i *tir?q:'
't'iî<?
102
3.
'iRiqere
fRir
i>
3639 A. Ska is substituted for the sa of nis before tlie verb

when the meaning is not that of repeatedly making red hot.'
tap
'
As fa*sg *i
Why
w?w
fa*s,qT
when
do we say
ihe
Ooserve f*r5&qfr? meaning
hot"'?
wctuwcq hw *r va?q:
%9 z&
afari:'
f91157*3:'
hî
'flfwq^T
The
hot.'
HsfwCTcfqffi
'
I
fsratmn;' i*TiTfaidrT ^cifqi^wt^ri
3640.
making red
that of repeatedly
not
makes repeatedly red
wragRTnTsw g q*g gwaissn: roanftatrr: f*fwq'ufatzgmq' 'sucnqin^ft

'surest stws?'
?ifwt5'
'*n?:qT3' faff
meaning U
q*T WTcRfU ?tTî3frTC?Fg;KT8Txf-
mzi:
?j
standing in the inner half of a stanza
is
changed
and tad and latakskus.
to sA before the ta of twain &c.
The word qcn^ here means the substitutes raw, ram, 7T, 7?5T As nftsresf,
7T3, TOr 9*5 sfqcsg,
r7, *nn*i!5 fa*c(m*q
ITW^?f F3T, *f^5l Svg'qmfs
(Uig.
(Rig. \ 111. 43. 9;
X.
2.
*fafg3oWiq7nfrT,
4)
SJT5lT<jfqciT facjHfl^,
HfJ,
i
Why
do we say
'
in the inner half of a
W^?3^?T?q^'715ITH^Tf5gqfaT:
stanza whi'e 7?^
is
not
in
the
is
at the beginning of toe see-on
middle of
qwTHfif?^^ niri
Observe
stanza']
Here the word *fl*:
is
at
itfvrvTftTJTT
he
stanza, therefore the
ftn^r-
end of the
*r
first
of^fwm
a stauzi.
hw f >;-5i
sr
wfifwsr^sny
n'mzz
*qjj
sBfefntssg:
qg *W*HraimrqT?ci
In the opinion of some, the above change takes place
3641.
in tlie
mn
Yajurveda
also.
Thus *fgfnTS3JT or ^ra'Brgff

^'i'wBSrRf: or wramsTrsa: u
SSfc^
*gi#fTWTS5^fa
qftragHCQ-sg'it:
s/t
ufattq
3
or
1SI
TrnsTWff-irTSTnww
^f^wiiJJ
rftffGSd or
w^
II
sgqcnrerqq fa^T
of stut and stoma in the Chhandas,

in the opinion of some.
3642.
to
The
^hw
qqsamfn^
is
i.
changed
fHE SlDDHANTA kAUMbDI.
8fc
[VoL.
III.
Ch. VIII.
$641
Thus fafwtgrTOT or fotfVurTrT^r. mxsttf ifrsfopTO, or m*flm tfTtfawtf

this
change would have taken place by the general rule contained in the next antra
I
VIII.
105,
3.
The word
the special mention of
mm here
and
;^Jfi
governs subsequent sutra
^Jsfigr of this sutra
m 3t
'^fe^nm
a mere amplifico.t.on
is
alsOi
'ij^fs w: Wrft*
In the ChhaudaS) according to some, s is changed to*
sk, when it stands in the beginning of a second word, preceded by
a word ending in i &c
gaz!ifafwmrcrcw
*rro
srfsr *&:'
3643.
The
fanfrrT
3?^%
wot- Is
rW**:or
%nf^?t
and
both understood here.
nsftvi are
f^gfo*:; jtîsstiw or H^QTOf?.
fgnf^J: or
fgOTstf
II
The word Tjgq^ here means the

ns the prior word other than that
ma^tim
P3TCMI
19.
Thus
fgSTisf fascHrT or
(Rig Veda
fgfcriss:
first
member
of a compound word as well

Thus fawsv&r&in or f^stl^SggTreu: iEaSrlt (Rig Veda IX.
a compound.
in
108.
I.
11).
2).
3*88
S5i:
90S
II
The sa of the Particle su is changed to ska

preceded by an other word having in
when
Chhandas,
3644.
change-effecting letter
the
in
the
it
&c.
(Rig Veda I. 36. 13.) *jft xj Uf: S^mif (Rig Veda IV,
Thus ot? 3; g
The lengthening takes place by VI 3. 134; and * changed to m by Vllt.
31. 3).
4. 27.
3S8M
'nitrt
*5t&:*:
sj^t
The
3045.
to sk
'dw'
'**r.'
4c
few
ms?*:
when
sa of the verb san
it
loses its n,
changed
is
under the same circumstances.

Thus
mmi
elided by VI.
Why
III. 20.
53.
5|ut
(Rig. IX. 2
So
41.
4.
do we say 'when
Here the
10).
formed by the
10),
also 3|ut:
loses its
it
(III.
uffix is
affix
fas
(til.
2. 6?),
the
sj
is
II
m^fa ^few^H^
Observe
2.
See however
27).
mmm
(Ath-irv.
iu Rig.
VI.
10.
3585
^RrTTaTiw
The
3646.
*t: SrTCrifwU
qrwnsR
^t?t
of ska
is
Thus xjfjmqi^W ^rrrcrr^T

other than those mentioned in
ai8a
*o<*
^Batmui?
changed
it.
f^fawnsârara
to sk after ptitand
The word
The worl
st
si
and
rtt.
'and' in the sutra includes
^gifting
s^fa
\
I!
words
would be valid by this also.
<wc
\\
Vol.
Ch. VIII. 3649.]
III.
Ssi |r&3:
?n<faf?T-;getefT
The
3647.
Thus
Chhandas
after
and S9H
not to be read into this sutra.
is
than these two.
general rule and applies to verbs other
WWnST?! or
and abhi when the augment 'at' intervenes.

sggtefl fam *:; suiterf or sastafr? fam *n; *wnil3a or
83
Theanuvyitti of
ft
*nTr?-'wuj^T?|
ni, vi
or
^ni>5Sff
caaterj-sqgterT
optionally substituted in the
s/i is
the prepositions
89
Vaidic Rules.
W^RtfT
It
is,
in
fact
As arena, 'a^Trf,
II
mutitrrrareraBiruciu 5?fu
urt
s*"&r.
ftRj*ron
In the Chhandas, na of a second terni is changed into

S648.
'fca' When the prior terra ends with a short 'ri' even when there is
ah avagraha or hiatus between the two terms.
The word |reri3Tff is understood here. The word ^5TCfff means a hiatus or
Here u is *3ire3
Thus ftrc| tWDH, 5j nun:
The change of |
is effected ordinarily then, when the terms, one containing the cause, aud
separation.
into
II
the other
st,
For the rules of Sandhi and the rules
are in efllrTT or conjunction.
words
like these can aply only to

it,
ll
3CBr
in HftfFTT
The present
II
and^here, even when the words are not in
between the two, the change
tnpeufj
'**$
^r
still
up
exerts regulating influence
m:
is
an exception to
is
an actual hiatus
sfeu
of VIII. 2. 108,
end of the Book.
to the
The word
takes place.
rule
but there
tfffJcTT,
fsramT *fw^'
^rsnswTftzns:
^fn
'3i*iD*aRfci'
aswiun
ifcfsR
'*w*ijTn:'
'in*
*&:'
ii
In the Chhandas, the na of (the Pronoun) Has is changit comes after a root having a ra or ska or after
the words urn and sku.
3649.
ed into
'na'
when
Thus <Ht3*3Tin:
(Rig. VII. 32. 26)
HisftsmT
;TO
is
this.'
3*: 3*?n^fa
protect
us.'
fsrai
(Rig. VIII. 75. 11)
3*2& Jiiw: g^ro (Rig.
here the pronoun tc, which
is
(Rig. IV. 31. 3).
The word
0 Agni
(Rg. VII. 15. 13)
'Teach us
w\ *fm^
g **ftip:
36. 13).
the substitute, in certain cases
and does not mean here the sflj substitute of 5rn%3iT

means 'that Which exists in a dh-itu/ namely ^ and tj when occurring in a
The word 35 means the word form 3*; and ig means W5T, and is exhibited
of <4FPt3 (VIII. 1. 21)

\jtftct
root.
with tr-change.
It does
not
r^T *JT?TT n%*

the lengthening is by VT.
not
in
Veda.
gf\ft is
changed
to
ll
mean the
The word
3.
2nd Person Sg.

by VIII.
3.
35.
affix
T^rr is
The
root
Imperative of
50.
of the
Locative
2nd Person
the
fsra has the
(VI.
In *jmtij there
is
4.
sense of
Here ends
the
^r
102),the visarga
lengthening by VI.
so also in 3TOHT: &c.
12
Therefore
Plural.
singular, Imperative
Book on Vedic forms.
in
the
of;*: is
3.
134,
wa
v&x*m
sen:
ON ACCENTSCHAPTEK
I.
gram
'+ sfafsrESârc^ftrarcrcRi* fsrauirwi ^f?r
iTFaa^raa i
^jt 'mopj
farnic7
''5^'
sfa fwtsfa 'vn' w5r fjh ^ fawn
A word
3650.
is,
few
?fri
fspg ?re set
+'
^tt^^tbt^
ifewfaq
*nj
gnvifcj-
ij'tjfta:'
\?T
*^
syllable, unac-
with the exception of one
cented.
That
only one syllable in a word
is,
or unaccented.
This
make all the other

means having anudatta
What
vowel.'
'
of
anudatta
regard to
be
it
the
all
acute (udatta) or a
circumflex
maxim must be applied,

The word WJSTrl
word unaccented.
that
syllables of
to
rest are
interpretation with
accented,
word, there this
ordained with regard to a
is
is
maxim
a Paribhasba or
Wherever an accent
the laws of accent.

(svarita
is
is
be excepted
%nt to
the
That one
about which any particular accent has been taught in the rules here-in-after given.
Thus
VI.
162 teaches that a
1.
Thus
the last
in 'Jhuuiri *:' (Rig
on the
root has acute accent

syllable, all the
Veda VI.
the acute
71, 4)
final.
Therefore,
are
unaccented.
other syllables
accent
is
on
q,
all
the rest
are uuaccented.
The
Vdrt
when
and the
Bfafarcs accent
a Vikarana accent.
it ia
affix
Why
accent of
*jjtu
III.
6.
it is
10).
all
which precede
it,
except
above example, the root accent
of
na
accent prevails.
?f
a Vikarana
Observe nil
accent'?
*m
Here the vikarana
accent
is
H^[
HTcTHJisZ,
does not prevail over o^r accent.
it
Note
The
rule
is
that except
other syllables take anudatta.

accent
guided by the
is
^"
îfrrfaltS 5
mle
in the
do not remain, but
we say 'except when
d<>
sr?33f Um^Bi (Rig Veda

out
stronger than
is
Thus
II
namely
(2) a Nitya rule
ranga,
(4<)
the
is
Apavada
following
(I) the
maxim
zjj
in a sutra the
accent taught
a conflict
is
"aTfsTRJT5H<fTaolT3:
sequence, a succeeding
rule
of
rules, the
*gTC3EJ5IOTT ^fcni-
setting aside a prior
stronger than Anitya (3) Antaranga stionger than BahiWhen all these are exhausted,
is stronger than Utsarga.
then we apply the rule of ^rfafiare

of Kasika,
one special
Theisfore, where there
fg ufar^ S?rT fajnid
II
What
S r*W
is
this rule ?
T>J*T
WSffcT
To quote the words
that which does remain
Vot.
91
Accbsts.
3653.]
III. Cfl. T.
Thus in
presence of another, debars snoh other.'
neie tne Wfagsa*: M the accent of the affix " (III. 1. 3) by which the
and must
TTTcnsffT
acute
is
last in spite of the
on the
by which the
affix accent
by the
syllable of the affix
first
a dhatu
final of
in its
ia.
an apavada
is
acute, and.
is
to.
the \rmRlt: (VI.
turn deb irred in the case of derivative verbs formed with
even
rule of sfafsrss, because
2.
is
affixes.
these worda.
affix,
" The son
of
him
black color, the Son of Baladeva," the
of
apavala
an
being
1)
the
Similarly in giT5l^fT^^*Tjft$^l:
whose upper garment (nttaiaânsa)

Bahuvrihi-accent (VI.
after, the a,d iition of
rttain the designation- of dhatu.
192)
1.
debars the dhatu-accent; but this
it
Samasa 7 accent
to
(VI,
223),
I,
by
compound is formed and the final word is a.
compound only and not a Bahuvrihi. Though the accent of the Vikarana is a nfa*
Thua in
fare, yet it does not debar the Sarvadhatuka accent (VI. 1. 186).
debars the samasaaccent
when
the rnle of HfrTfare
$&<(
its
m 331^3^.
An
3651.
on account of
it
(VI.
on the
(VII
aeif
<fec
when
1.88);
ami the
'+*af\S?f ^f?T
SFJTti*
5t^
vm\
WJ =
(IV. 2. 87),
The Word
II
added to
So also
The
qrVjsj
â?J,
anudatta
affix sr?j (g?i) is
is
uhi^
+.
Ins ao te
Scrsar?
(III.
it,
f h.
1. 4).
VIII. 100. 11 and 101. 16).
when
elided.
333
II
m\R
ft?Ti^Ks3gf7T a* ^WT^rfhrTH.:
gram**
3T>fta:
ssrTrTfjTgfTrcaniiSTs:
*nyg:
vtrwx&x ^srnr
In compound words ending
3652.
m vtezm:
becomes uditta.
^ = xjji, q?
g3+^Wrp = $g?f H
ufa=f4-
are en 1-acnte,
*t
are*
the unaccented (aiiudatta)
anudatta
148)-, the
*T* (Rig Veda
3SU9
RSI
*_*f
is
words 3RJJ3
Thus 5RJli?>^ =
understood here.
is
1.
So also
last.
wi?j
?reiteTT?;
the preceding acute
The word, udatta
HH * i^;
HB
unaccented vowel gets also the acute accent,
has acute on, the last,
MI is elided
debarred
turn
a farther
^ TrU^jr^m
^rttttw
qftjT?^5TH
the
in
ia
the accent of the vikarana $\ does not debar the accent of
^sftri:,
aBTTTT
but this Bahuvrihi-accent
'^^taY
âfi
ii
in anck, the final
vowel of
the preceding word has the acute accent in the weak cases in which
only ch of aneh remains..

VI.
1.
Thus z^^^rt
161, 170 and
Vd't:
This
H:ere the accent
3SVU
3653.
Thus
is
mm 333^;
VI.
2.
(Rig Veda IH.
6.
This
1).
rule does apt apply before a Ta-ldhita

regulated, by the affix (III.
^TWfc^nWg
The
vm i^
first syllable
eUur fw*
accent ordained by VI.
2.
is
an exception to
52.
148.
9<
1.
affix.
As
3T>foI:, WTOiJ:
ll
3).
II
of a Vocative gets the acute accent-.
if^T: (Rig Vela V. 4
Though
the affix
3.
may
2),
This debars the fin^l
be elided
by a TOTT^ wor*i
T?de Siddhanta Kaumudi.
92.
C^Wi. *TO or
3y
tr* faripri
in
wa
yet the effect of the
?<?t),
sirofoccOT
tjgnfgajWT^^f
'*$ Hsafer^'
Jwf ifa Hirfa'
III.
Ch.
remains behind in spite of
affix
m ^
[Vol.
I. 1.
^TcT:'
'swra^Rw' few
and
it,
qda^[
ft
All the syllables of a Vocative are unaccented
3654.
a word precedes
As
63.
it
'to*
3^654.
I.
whea
does not stand at the beginning
it
of
hemistich.
The Vocative is acutely accented on the first by VI. 1. 198, the present
makes it all unaccented, and is thu* an exception to the last sutra.
Thus *ww Tt% 05 5_ 51^. fa ( Ri ^ Veda X 75 5 )*
Why do we say 'when it does not stand at the beginning of & hemistich* !
Observe STrtfs^rftiTW (Rig Veda X. 75. 5).
-
But
rule VIII.
other word
is
1.
412
72. S.
taught us that a Vocative standing before an-
considered as non-existent.
cative gets the acute by the last sutra,

$lg.
Therefore in
^ gsm
sjjwt
acoentleas, for the Vocative being non-existent,.
every Vo-
make
and the present sutra does not
^SxJ:
&c. are considered as not
preceded by another word.
To VIII.
S. 413.
the other, the
first
for the purposes
words
72, S. 412 there
1.
tejasvin
Vocative (or the
apposition' ?
are not in apposition,
uyuonyms:
it
is
1.
'
e":
vinm
When
optionally
not considered as
Observe
sjreRf
ijfar
'
^1
fgrftqsq faîrft
73,
non-existent
here
the
but they
^fara:
is
considered as non-existent,
it, is
SâffT
other,,
1.
qualifying
the
Why
words,
are merely
applies.
the preceding Vocative
cative, in apposition -with
SRUu",
is
one does not qualify the
and therefore the present sutra
fashrai trrsfa
3655.
qualified),
in apposition, one
Hence in *jfT asifâr^ ; 'sr^f 'STTcn

qualify Ague; and therefore they are unaccented.
and tr&tah
in
however an exception made by VIII.
present sutra.
of the
do we say 'wheu
is
where there are two. Vocatives
Therefore
11
in the Plural
if t}re
number,
subsequent Vo-
a specific term.
The VIII. i. sutras 73 and 74 as enunciated by Panini are srmfsrTH WRlf*l

and Q"rcrrercrctff faHTfar? fgre93$ âtanjali made the amendment by add-,
I
yi^ CTnStrcra$ to 73 and
This ordains option,

the consideration of the
completed the present sutra by adding grggg^jr to
where the sutra
first
VIII.
1.
73, S,
41?
vocative as existent, compulsory.
would have
Thus
ireft;
it.
mada
qgqf ^S;
Vol.
Sui>cT
sr.
III. Cfl
9T:
(Rig Veda X. 128.
shuqt: or
5).
i^gr sttuot:
Here g^
JuisaftTfa^:
+ shswttt
in
rr^g
*'
<3f( oitai?t'
tiff?
So also
case, is
regarded as
ii
if it
component part of such subsequent vocative
fs^w
err
'3^^'*^: gl3fÎ
when
a case-affix,
in
ffgTOR^fcT nft-
qpjRTTcR
'^friT^ wgiim' -towt^sot
'q&sqgtarctgi frsrem'
the vocative
an adjective qualifying %&'
UB5a5Timwf^rflT?rf
ÔTrnf sdrm'
A word ending
3,656.
word
is
it
'+ TTOSqUTfora^reâsni +'
m=i
93
Accent*.
3656-]
I.
it
by a
was the anga or
followed
when a
word,,
rule
relating to accent is to be applied.

In other words* the word ending in a case-affix enters, as
Thus
f the vocative (amautrita) word.
ending in a vocative
Now,
syllable.'
oase-affix,
this rule will
precedes such word in the
has udatta on the

inflected
first
into the body-
if,
198S. 3653 declares

gets the udatta accent on the beginning
apply even when a word ending with, a
sutra VI.
a word
1.
i.e., first
case-affix
Thus the word Q^'rft

two. lords
Now, when this word is preceded by another
vocative case.
syllable*
noun as 3pTC' of prosperity/ the accent
being considered as a single v/ord
as
*f*c*f
will
fall
on
iRsr^Wt
'
'!
ST,
the two Words
SWSlfft l
'Q Asvius, ridiug on quick horses, lords of prosperity and bestowers of plenty of food, eat the sacrificial offerings to your satisfaction.'
1J5W51T ÎCTtTiT
Here VIII.
1.
(Rig. 1.
3..
sgffj tmrft
1).
19, S. 36.5-4 does not
make
the word accentless, for
Vocative, 'dravatpani' being considered as non-existent, the second
the preceding
beginning of
is
âiM
But in the following example ira feilT

WTsFm (Rig. Veda VII.
31. 5) the word faq: is accentless because of the VIII. 1 19. S. 3654.
So also tKSRT
thou cutting with an axe'
The word tjvs? is
fbrmed from the root sz with the prefix xn and the Unadi affix m which is treated
as f%fj (See (Jn.adi I. 34).
Hence it has acute on the final. But by the present
a Pada.
9^1
'
sutra, being considered as the

first-acute.
VArt
The
denotes the agent
component part of the Vocative q?^T,
rule of this sutra should
(karaka)
of
be confined
the verb with which
and to the Geuitive governing the Vocative.

stantive pure and simple cannot
Verb in the sentence has
not so here:
I.
mm&%
stand
a karaka.
olftrTT
word
the Vocative
is
becomes
only that
connected
Though the Vocative being a
in relation
That
to that
it
is
meant
(Rig Veda X. 142.
sub-
of a karaka to a verb, yet
1)
in the Vartika.
the
Therefore
and ScT*T^ a^dfT (Rig Veda
31. 18).
Here the words *gaw and

the Vocative refers
while in
5^q
are not
connected with the verb
trORT qsa* the word
otsri
<
to
with the axe
which
'
is
94
T**e.
denoted
karaka to the verb
Siddhanta Kaumudi.
'to cat
the root gfl^
by.
la other words, the preceding
3*3?^ comes.
with the
affix
srwCTrft where the
as, in
from
fffl
the
sn^.,
base
(I),
TO)
is
or
I.
365$.
from which, the Vocative
'
when
word *W?5
being
Ch.
Fit.
becomes the integral
woi?d
the Vocative under two conditions only, namely,
ing the Vocative
[Vol.
it
part of
a Genitive govern*
is
in the sixth case (derived
when
(2)
preceding
the
word stands in the relation of a. karaka to the action denoted by the root from,
which the Vocative is. derived :' as in tfrvm 3gsg*f
with, axe cutting!'
Or we may dispense with this Vartika, and get the same result by the rulefor only that word
can become the integral part of a Vocative
of OTW^ferfvK'
which
syntactically connected with,
is
precede
Y&rt
That
is,
should be
It
Veda
33.
XI.
of far?* which
therefore, tWrTTJT also

als:> ufrT
cST
<
Y&rt
word ?TCHTO
strwr
I
3,657.
part of the
^ forl^ W*?UJf
*HT
Vocative, and
accentless, because a
is
3)
here fag.:
of fa??^
accentless,
is
must be stated of Indeclinables as
not so of
So
because the
V&
^HfrvftqiT
II
the Avyayibhava, compounds, which are also Indeelint
ll
saftrTFti^
^XBITCJT
becomes
Thus
the order.
becomes* as an anga or component parti
fq?j^
(Mg. VII. 81.
Prohibition
As ^"PirotaT*
fcbles.
part of the preceding'*
uiguata.
1S
But
Ithti.
compoi>ent
becomes accentless being considered as anga
fts*^ feci:
Vocative sftSfi^
reverse
the preceding word,
is
preceding woid
that the
1).
Here the subsequent
nW.
aai not any wosd that might |happen to
rather stated
teaches
while the sutra
subsequent word, Katyayana would

(Kig
it,
it.
^ in
turn*: trcCTi-jsTHw rafter: sjt??
FjftfTFJ itITf^5Bfi5!Tf\gP5nîaf5!^Tr!l
A svarita vowel
is
jiww fssaftrTW
II
the substitute of an anudatta vowel K
when, the latter follows after such a semivowel, as has replaced aa
udatta or a svarita voweL
An
unaccented vowel becomes svarita, when
which HOT
itself
Thus TOOW fe
It is
1).
1. 2.
*ht
the
this
udatta-yan
is
of the
present sutra.
Now
The word ^?h
I,
doubled by VIII.
amredita VIII.
and
it is
first is
4. S.
1.
comes
after a
ms
(semi-vowel Y
finally acute (See Phit Sutras IV, 12.
The second
2140.
anudatta by VIII.
udatta, the
hence the
"sg
1. 3. S.
of second
of tne
second
is
*fffw
3670.
*f $ + vf ~ *JW Q + *fw *wrfw
I.
Therefore in *ftf+-
anudatta, the
*Hf*j after it
and
gets the designation of
is
changed
to u,
becomes svarita by the
II
to take an example of a svarita-yarL
The word'tgerqîs finally acute by

The Looative singular- of this word is J35TO* +
krit-accent (VI. 2. 13.9. S. 3873).

^T
it
has come in the room of a vowel which was acute or svarita once.
= xa^rftg, by VI.
of the acute
3i,
4.
83.
therefore,
S 281).
it is
This
is
the Locative beoomes svarita by the
first
a semivowel whioh
comes
in
the room
After this udatta-yan, the anudatta
udatta-yan,.
part of this sutra.
Now when
of
tp3PZf+-
V>l.
fit.
msjr
*re
Ch.
combined by Baudhi,
The unaccented
The word *9T3IT
svarita-yan.
i&RTj
sunn
59
Accents.
3G:>3.]
I;
thiB svarita
is
and
q;
to
therefore, a
it is,
As
after this svarita-yan.
svn-rita,
acute
finally
changed
i's
become
*jf will
consequently
not acute
is
(Phit/l. 18).
This svarita
Therefore rule VI.
udatta
vowel
Thus
is
of
(Rig Veda 61.
^h
which
jp
first
WTfaâ^'
%Z\ri:
'iw
?*53
VIII.
ITS??:
formed by adding
is
Here
18. S. 403.
1.
<V.
affix
3.
185. S. 3729).
1.
The
II. 6.
*^T#>f fettzta'
The
Thus
this
I.
151).
again changed to
is
becomes purva-mpa by VI. L 109.
12. S 1959. and VII. 2. 105. S.

The word >zz is acutely acceuted
single long substitute
'^RittJi**
udatta.
ia
wsfaRfgwaTcaifeûiii: ^3 fen:
n^
flJSRf^
IraifwfaBfTg s' ??h
s^nrasj
'ÎTaSWTHtrf
single substitute of an unaccented vowel, stand-
&Z WTfR^'rt *W TOT5FT Tffsft*^

I
wise.
There
will necessarily
substitute of (^ + ^) or of two short

plication of 53; q^tsfJTfJ *ffl (VI.
long vowel comes
Thus
in.
in
substituted for two short ?'s.

technically called
in VI. 1. 109.
1.
This
may
option-
where there
(2)
fr's,
n'jerc^f
long
is
uiatta where a
will be
fa + ^g-jy = g>jj in sh 5*1

This substitution of a long
OT-ramirtr?
lesha,
e.,
fr^3& the long is

^ tor two short Vs is
the long $ is necessarily
the peculiar sandhi
So also
whore there
is
taught
ira:
the substitution of a semi* vowel in the r<om of an udatta or svarita
as ^rwifa
sakhyas:
The above
^SRTWsg
a single substitute for

acute.
As vta
rules about
V11&Q
the single
purva ropa by the ap-
is
There
109. S. 86)
Where there is Pras

l
when there is *wFwF=TEr7ef*J: i.
Thus
a vyavasthita-vibhasha
is
be svarita (1) where a
bwj
Similarly
svaiita.
e.,
|Un.
grar^ to *snj
which
be svarita or udatta.
ally
t.
12).
The word a: is anuThe word jig:
ing at the beginning of a word, with an udatta vowel,
in
S.
1.
an unaccented vowel with an
H&: U3T5TfTfl-" (eg) ^f?f C(Str SaUrT 9cT
3659.
it
ThusSfr s*g T :
by the Phit
3w
as
first,
svarita (VI.
vTTcraioa
2.
udatta,
is
is
asiddha (VIII.
to lose its accent. Cf. 3660.
to ^ (VIII. 2. 66. S. 162),
forme! from fmxt by
is
2299) and
on the
changed
is
is
it
sn
and asrref
2)
21. S. 405. read with
1.
113. S. 163).
1.
S. 6.
and hence
udatta.
(VI.
evolved by the present sutra which belongs to the
single substitute of
5Rr sftiSgi:
datta by VIII.
The f
is
158. does not cause the
1.
The
3658.
is
of tfTOIT
vi\
section of the Ashtadhyayi,
Tripadi
svarita are
aTfafsriHi| ^
? + ^ (one
thus
summarised
But whare a loug
of the ^'s being long), there
*5'TOT fCTtaff (Rig. 1.
190.4).
The
words
^
it
is
in
sf*J
vowel
the Piati-
substituted as
must always be
tefa%$*J*
are
The Siddhanta Kaumud*.
96
compounded
into fesrtq^
VI.
1.
S.
by
VIH
171,
The word fefW* (Locative
'rmtenim:'
The Svarita
3660.
rule VI.
which was
comes
it
lost its accent
taken place (VIII.
2.
1.
fTO.^m: ( R te
Veda
is
is
the
The long
anudatta.
The word {wangi
inserted by VII.
1.
to rule' with the affix sn^TO,
derived from *hf
finally acute because of
it is
Anudatta
had not
and the svarita accent
finally acute.
H^ being
The word ^Hns?
1.
of agni.
2 ).
Here jhj the Accusative singular of fdf is

the Nominative Plural of ^sj-r, the augment
being a sro
vrfe^:, or as if it
is
"therefore both the udatta
S. 12).
are heard.
3572.
by rule VIII.
<&5T3Tt*
after the udatta
158, S. 3650. does not change this svarita into an
1.
because for the purposes of that rule, the present rule
therefore
acute by
finally
Anudatta vowel
the substitute of an
is
28, becomes svarita by th6 present rule, as
S.
is
ahd has
it^t,
which follows an Udatta vowel.

Here $
Thus *foro + 4^ - ^ft^jft**
Ss
singular)
3717. sraîs from the Divadi root
3^30.
I.
28. S. 3935.
1.
The
[Vol. III. Ch.
The Nom.
fa?j accent.
and the
of
50i
and
gt^
PI. affix
are svarita.
All prohibit the above substitution of svarita, except
3661.
the Acharyas Grargya, Kasyapa
and Galava
>
when an udatta
or
a svarita follows the anudatta.

Thus * u *n*: (Rig Veda
Note
ed by an udatta
terminology of
svarita
is
is
if'; ejTrJâ"
12S. 1959)
Why
Observe
does
u
f
;
Sfl^r
These are
The word
The word
Trp'q: %',
say
gp is
which
become
is
The word 333 means

anudatta
which
is
follow*
xjx in
followed
the
by a
Thus ^Trfteu:
acute by fkf? accent,
before this
So with ^srftHTCQ:
JTin J
svarita being formed by the ffra affix *H?T (V. 3
svarita.
g does not become
svarita.
the opinion of Gargya, Kasyapa and Galava'
except in
m'SSrR
II
Bahuvrihi compounds.
before this svarita the preceding
do we
jJtt is first
of these words does not
According to
their
opinion, the
svarita
change
tak*> place.
The employment
is for
33Trfcw
That
Grammarians.
called ^SffTRTHrq:
rra tfhm:
That anudatta
called 3STrite3: or
ancient
jfna^sf, afTcTW
udatta, the
III, 7. 1). SnoTT:;
This debars the preceding rule.
of the longer
the sake of auspiciousness,
very utterance of the word
333
is
word 32J3 instead of the shorter word tit

Book has approached the end.
The
for the
auspicious.
All sacred
works
commence with
Vol.
Ch.
III.
I.
36G4.]
Accents.
97
an auspicious word, have an auspicious word
Thus
picious word.
increase
(in
'
Sutra
commences
Partini
I.
1.
1)
and end
in the middle,
his siitra, with
has the word fajg 'the well wisher
with an aus-
the auspicious word

'
$F\S:
the middle
in
and gsu at the end.
(IV. 4. 143),
The mention of the names
of those several
Acharyas
for the
is
sake of show-
ing respect (pujartham).
In addressing a person from a distance, the
3662.
tailed Ekasruti or
Monotony or Ekasruti
dressed
there
is
there
in it
is
tone
that tone which
is
an absence of
no definite pitch in
It
it.
is
perceived when
the three tones
all
a person
is
mentioned above
therefore, the ordinary recitative tone.
is,
'0 boy Devadatta
r mqjofoB SGHTrna
the accents in the above case; and the

into plaia by VIII.
emr rut
3<risjirani:
(silent
84 feii^
itcjt
In the
3663.
japa
2.
5fi
ad-
and
The word Sambuddhi ' means here addressing a person from a distauce
has not its technical meaning of the singular number of the vocative case.
95rTJT5g&
is
monotony.
final
^ g)
come/
There
is
and
As
vanishing of all
Devadatta
short vowel of
changed
is
il
fawnrw
^pm
srorotsar *trkt:
if^r^Vriniî
Monotony, except in
repetition 'of a formula), NyliNkha vuwels (sixteen sorts
works, there
sacrificial
is
and the Sama Vedas.
of om)
In
'sacrificial
works' or on occasions of
are recited in Ekasruti or monotony.
mantras are
occasions
to be recited with their proper three-fold
japa
the repetition
the mantras of the
sacrifice,
But on
of mantras, arid
Veda*
ordinary reading, the
of
accents.
their recitation
in a low voice or
Whisper as when a person immersed in a river recites them. Nyunkha is the name
of certain hymns of the Vedas and the names of 1 6 sorts of Om.'
Some of these
*
'
is
are pronounced with udatta and others

or the musical cadence in which
tfsrffesc:
5R9}?<jfcT':
qf^SBT
with anudatta accent.
some vedic hymns are
WiJi
iTOiw
Sahias are
tcrife fgTOcfr * *J
songs,
As :- *nfa|(Rig Veda VIII.
to be uttered.
14. 16).
When
accent.
As
When
rhantras
a mantra
not
recited as
fcli|
$m*1
it must
be
Veda X. 128. 1).
a japa, then
(Rig
employed on occasions of
must have
9SS8
is
*ntt* oT^f
353$rrci ST airesn::
sacrifice,
and there
their proper accent,
13
j
>
but
will
>9
tt
be
pronounced
with an
are ordinarily read,

no"
the
Ekasruti,
"
The Siddhanta Kaumudt.
98
The pronunciation
36G4.
[Vol.
of the word 'vashat'
(accutely accented), or
ly be by raising the voice
TtT.
it
Cs.
36<54.
may optionalmay be pro-
nounced with monotony.

The phrase
'yajna karma'
word atu^
may
the
SU^
in the sutra signifies gtac
3$su
^?H
understood here.
Even
CTTf?
cSmfWrTfcWTOinT
HflHTUT
The monotony is optional in the

may be recited with accents.
In the Chhaulas or
f ^&W
Sl^Hf-
recitation of the
the Vedts there is option either to use the Ekasruti

Even on the occasion of ordinary reading, the Chhau-
monotonously.
Some say
adjusted in this way.
In reading
das might be uttered either with the three accents or

is
sacri*
The word
they
or.
tone or the three tones.
this
yajna-karmas or
in
in a raised tone.
<J
fa^rm ^^fa
faWTUT SSTOftT:
3660.
Vedas,
is
optionally be pronounced
fices
a limited option
(vyavasthita-vibhasha).
The option allowed by
this sutra
the Mantra portion of the Veda, every
Brahmana portion
to be
is
word must be pronounced
with
its
proper
Veda there might be Ekasruti. This

while some say there must be Ekasruti necesis the opinion of the Rig Vedins,
sarily and uot optionally in the recitation of the Brahma nas.
accent: but in the
Thus
^p4*ft^ 5 nficf
of the
or simply
*fwm^
Agni
the
^fs' (tea*) ?fe? *
wiflt
xj*tfsri
'
praise
purohita'.
sfawrauusifaire
renew??
wi33^fTrfTi^sT
'crasirafur
am*d
'
(bssb)
^f?r 'fawniT
,
,
+TOn2Jc3?R:+
tnsss^raTfa tmerH
3t:
fum Q^H
There should be no Monotony in the recitation of the

Subrahmanya hymns and in those hymns, the vowels, that would
otherwise have taken the svarita accent, take the 'udatta' accent
3666.
instead.
The subrahmanya hymns
are portions of the Rig
Veda mentioned
in
Satapa-
tha Brahman a.
nya.
This sutra prohibits Ekasruti in the case of certain prayers called subrahma-_
I. 2. 34 read with I. 2. 36 ante, prayers might be optionally uttered with
By
JSkasruti acoeut.
This
ordains
an
exception to
that
rule.
In
subrahmanya
Cm
Vol. III.
pray e i-8 there
is
no
ekasruti
by any rule of grammar

accent
and
these hjoins,
iu
would have taken a
vowel which
svarita
otherwise
an
takes
accent,
udAtta
instead.
As
fjT^TTT^
SI^tust 3
*r
by the add.tiou of the
Vl
get svarita accent by
to the
4 98)
185, (ffTrftaftrTq) as
1.
is
1.
(VIII. 4. 66)
must become
of ^sj
wi^S,
the in
t
is-
udatta, the
is
sjjt-
of Indira
jj
is
changed into svarita
is
^&
changed
this na-
both vowels become udatta.
uddtta by the
to
four syllables are
first
S> also
only anuddtta.
the letters 5T and
but by the present sutra

in sp^f,
uddtta; the next letter which was anudatta becomes
is
it
the sentence sfsg 3W1^$, the

syllable
svarita,
changed into an udatta. Thus
and from svarita
svatita,
is
The anuddtta preceded by an udatta
198.
*j|
is
In the word
case,
by 'he
f?
In the phrase e^[
Thus the
scent svarita
has an indicatory
it
changed into udatta.
the word Lndra being in the vocative
anudatta VI.
Here the word wsrenia is formed

word ^g^rar, and this v will
m*V58_.
?lfter
affix ira (IY.
present sutra, this nascent svarita

J\vg> }
99
Accents.
3667]
I.
in
are anudatta,
^gf?;g
all
mnvS,
the rest are
accented.
acutely
in
tiflh
given above,
for the reasons
all
Thus
present rule.
acutely accented, the
Shat
Cf.
Br. III. 3. 4. 17 and fgg..
Vdrt:
native case
is
In the Subralimanya
hymns
the final vowel of a
word in the Nomi-
acute.
Thus TTTnrf H5T^

Here JTPQ is derived from TNT by the affix 33T (IV. 1
and therefore it ought to be acute on the first because of fee? accent.
Thus we have htwj*: instead of Tina: H:
But the present vartika prevents that.
I
105),.
Vdrt:
manya
So
nymic
ETTg*: fori? *J5!r7
and
affix [5I
Vdrt
also the finalof a
As
texts.
But
word
I
in
the Genitive
Here ^TT%
is
is
acute in the Sabrah-
derived from sratby thn Patro-
would have been srejp but the vartika makes
it
the penultimate as well
as the
it Z1^*'. H
ending
Genitive
the
final of
udatta.
iu ca is
Thus JTlii^ faHT

Vdrt
the word
is
U?\ft
a Proper
3667.
Name.
The word
Here there are two udattas
Optionally Ahe
penultimat? of a Genitive
As
THHT USlci or
ifereTTCT*
'deva'
and Brahman a*
in the
same word.
facTT
ifcrsris*
in those
when
udatta,
in TO is
031^
hymns have
'anudatta' accent.
By
is
I.
2.
37,
was declare!, that
it
ifCIT
and
[T?7TiTT
occurring
As iaT
^tRi<IT 5gT77^5?T
lidiitd
accent
on
the
in>
those
hymns.
Those words
'come ye Davas and B ahmanas.'

syllable
by
VI.
1.
has origins
ly
an
a udatta
first
is
on the beginning)
4.
66 (an anuddtta fodowing an uddtta
the subrahnianya, hymns,
in
Th'S sutra make* an exception
replaced by uddUa accent.
aj
is
changed
198
(in
in
accent
svariirt.
favor ox the words
have anudtdtta
Here the word
accent.
^ciT gets
the voc /live the
accent which
into svaritoj would
by
accent
Vlil.
have beeu
The Siddhanta Kaumudj.
100
changed into
uddtta
3668.
I.
rule,
it
is
In other words, the original
replaced by anuddtta.
unchanged.
anuddtta remains
Monotony
The
3668.
Ch.
III.
This svarita, by the previous sutra required* to be changed into
svarita.
but by this
[Vol.
the place of
takes
the anudatta
vowels which follow the svarita vowels, in close proximity (sankita).
Sanihta
is
the joining of two or more words in a sentence, for
of reading or reciting.
When
accents become Ekasruti
if
to
As
ed monotonously.
Yamuna, Saras vati
words are thus glued
the purposes
together, then
the anuddtta
they are preceded by svarita vowels; and are pronounc' *Tf 3JT$
Veda X.
(Rig
TO^ff?
75,
5)
Ganga,
0,
this mine.
to
Here the word
has udatta on the last syllable
anuddtta, but by rule VIII.
4.
after this svarita all anudd/ta
vowels of the words tt^ uijr

vocative get auuciatta
if
66
following an uddtta,
<fcc,
the word
had anudatta accent by
standing in the middle of a
is originally
*r
changed into svarita
by
replaced
&o., are
like njy.,
it is
ekasruti.
VHI.
rule
A,ll the.
19
1.
(all
and not beginning
sentence
a stanza.)
The word 'sanhita' has been used

a hiatus between the words then
Tbe word
sanhita
is
^nri^m
defined in sutra
is
no
show
that
when
change of anudatta into
there, is
ekasruti.
109,
4.
I.
qlrawTTiw^TTr^:
The accent
ia the sutra to
there
sn?j
wsif.
sTcff^f '
'stags
hsb!:'
i,
<aw
Sannatara is substituted in the

yoom of an anuddtta vowel, which has an udatta or svarita vowel
366$.
following
it.
In the previous sutra

bee
tvarL
.
es Ekasruti.
doe8 uo
ifc
called
*<
it
was said that an
however such au
If
anuddtta preceded
anuddtta
is
by a
followed by an
become Ekasruti but becomes sannatara
i.e.,
low,er
svarita
udatta or a
than
anu~
ddtta.
The
which
wnnatara
^ eded
is pt
This
is
does not take
t.
is
nccent which
therefore that
b y * svarita and
is
followed
by
an,
was
originally anuddtta,
udatta or a
and
svarita.
There is another explanation which

^ e explanation of the sutra.
The au,udatta is replaced
ê anuvritti of Ekasruti in tliis sutra.
by sannatara whe ^ sUch anudatta immediately

T hu3
The sannatra is ai ^ c all ed aaudatfca
-
'
precedes
m&fo
au
*??%
udatta or a smrita.
1
W3Q[*f^
I,
VOL
HI. CH.
WW qfwnfSllk
As 5*T
qra; has
on the
udatta
The
(jttht:+WI:)
syllable
H ere
MdM*
f^'
Thus <fea
That which
3670.
^fcat
rl
VI.
The word
anudatta.
is
the
In
171.
1.
phrase mcfrnr:
anudatta, because anudatta + anudatta = anudatta.
is
the word WT7TT:
by
syllable
last
This anudatta vi, preceding the uddtta

3S$>0
101
RoOT-AOCENTft.
3673.]
II.
changed into sannatara.
II
called &mredita
is
(Rig Veda
tn, is
1.
is
gravely accented.
3).
I.
the vowels of the amredita become anudatta or accentless.
is, all
Here ends
the Chapter
^m
on Accents in general.
vnw&ix:
CHAPTER
II.
ROOT-ACCENTS
lt>R
yxmi:
*ttT 32fra:
The word
I.
i^
iHHTUri* WJT3 RS
'
u
*
itftf hf*:'
A root has the acute on the end- syllable.
3671.
Veda
n*t1
is
Thus
understood here.
'-trurniTrr,
3T:'
Brq:' (Rig
^T^ST^T ST WITH
WTOTTV^Tar.
U# TTHia^^ WWSTrTrn '^tWlTO^' 5^
FHrrefai ^SH'S^T^^lSn^T *N3T<lw q*

*f\TlW.
'*fiff
87. 4).
WTOT%T
*ctHT5t?
fssfcfi
The acute accent
3672.
optionally on the
is
when a Personal-ending, being a SarvadMtuka

ning with a vowel, (provided that the vowel
follows after 'svap'
The phrase
RfaftrT or W3tffcrT,
&a,
first
syllable
tense affix begin-
not the augment
'it')
or after 'hius.'
the locative
*ren\JT?T5R in
Safari,
is
or ScpIfcrT
case
f^st^T
or
is
here.
Thus
The accent on the
understood
f^fer
Why do we say 'before an affix

by the accent of the affix III. 1. 3.
vowel? "I
Observe taTOTrT, Tffwra
Why do we say not taking
r
Observe F*Ttj*: and *crf;R<?':
the augment
middle
falls
beginning with a
Ishti
it
This rule applies to those .vowel-beginning
does not apply to sfaifst, fe^Hlfsf
3s>3
^f
TOrcHTwjOTfe
1^
it
affixes
which are feci
The Siwxhanta
102
Kaumljd*.
[Vol. III. Ch.
$3 >7$>
I.
The acute accent falls an the first syllable of the reduwhen followed by an affix beginning with a vowel (the
not
and being a sarvadh&tuka personal ending.
it
vowel being
3673.
plicate verbs
'
Thus
')
JgfrT, starT, SfWfrf, ^Tag:

Slf^K?:
the repetition
is
or the sake of niaking this
It being
(Kig Veda
?^
Jsf??,
SSHfJ
4.
I.
5yfrT
ftrj,
H^
Before
was 'understood here from
Wife?
rule as those in the foregoing.

cent, as 3\*t*T
15).
3,2.
Before consonant affixes
Though the word
Veda VII.
33ffF fatlToNjr (Rig
zi
IftffT,
affixes
aphorism,
the last
an invariable rule and not an optional
a subsequent., sutra* debars the
fgf| ac-
5),
sHfasjin^TTji^ ^reT^viTHâi:iwi^FTTRTHT^3iTi:
'sreTfa
*<**
afsruf
srai*
'
i>
Also when the unaccented: endings of the three per-
3674.
sons in the singular follow, the
of the reduplicate has.
first syllable
the acute..
The endings
?Htf
fcltr
and fag areanudatta (IN.
1.
This sutra applies*
4).
Thus
to those personal endings which do not begin with a vowel.

sfvJTfrT, T^f S^^faSftft^
i.
au
e.,
which there
affix in
a portion of the
and
fvjTrsi^
3$su
sriifrT
'
or
>iriT^r55R^R^?T5rr^t *rTOTf*
ufrsmT
'
I
In *T, ft,
3675.
WIHT: Vtt
'
J,
1^2^
*T|, 5T*,
reduplicates, the acute accent
SfSTfcT, STgrfcT,
be construed here as a Bahuvrihi
is to
a semivowel is substituted: as
%few g zi?m (Rig Veda t 94. 14).
*5*
3*aT?H
m*g3TO,
no udatta vowel, so that the rule
is
affix is elided
n^ ^:
The word
'
'
XQh
fqfn
SlT'if* cc|W
sfi^T
'
may
apply when*
JJJ fll
<StfTfJ,
q<^
11
and SIR,
in their
before the sarvadhatuka unaccent--
is,
ed endings of the three persons in singular, pit, on the syllable
which precedes the

This
affix.
on the beginning.
debars the accent
STlffcT *WtI ?t: uftaJOT (Rig Veda

taken in the Chhandas the vikarana
^^W
The verb
is
example. 3V?^f? from
augment
HZ
l>eing
SK^TTfT, Slinfta
%z
here
\m
or
the
M\*Jl,
aided by III
hi the case
I.
**T,
the
Thus
of
4. 94.
of other
fsitf
fa, f^Jg^frT,
Here the root
122. 3).
though,
it
us
belongs to Divadi class,
Vedic Subjunctive, so also
is
elided by
4.
97,
*umsr>? 3V31*T (R'g VedaX.
73.
f?T
being
verbs we
have
III.
Jsfifr?
3676
fafel i.
<K3
affix
next
the
1). T*4=TrT,
affixes
singular
II.
The acute accent
preceding the
and
II
alal'rrT,
the
Before
which have not the indicatory U (to e., all endings other than the three
endings), the accent will be*- on the first syllable
as ej'rcgjfa
3s
fsrwf'H
has diversely
falls on the
that has an indicatory /,
syllable
immediately
Vol.
TIT.
Ch.
Thus
AlTIY ArCFXTS.
3680.
Tit.
f^û*:
fgsR'nlsR:,
with the
affix
ng^ (HI.
gsrrfiWrKJT with the affixes fgvrtj and w?fi3r (IV.
The
^677.
may
syllable
first
103
2.
133),
1.
tfrftieSfsrvHy
54) Recent on the
and
fR
nnd
ft
ii
be optionally acute when the
ibsolutive affix 'tyamul' follows.
Thus ^j Rtm
or ^t*i ujt
unaccented by VIII.
not accented,
is
1.
In the reduplicate form SrR, the
The
3.
p-esent
get the accent
will
by
sutra
makes
^fi
second
This rule
fori accent.
is
part
confined to
polysyllabic the Absolutives, namely to the reduplicated Absolutives (VIII.
3uafte5T*rrRi sR^^fî n* snfarssTrft
The
3678.
vowel,
inal
stt
%u$
roots which are exhibited in the
may
optionally
1.
4).
Dhatupathawith a
have the acute on the
efore the affixes of the Passive 'yak'

is
s^sh: iâfcsr
sf
When ^T
accented,
first syllable,
when the sense of the verb
Reflexive.
The word
aa
or m\ii
lable, it foils
3679.
suihEr
ft
on * (VI.
understood here.
I.
When
Thus
*qf&
or
the accent does not
f iffl
fall
F3TT:
on the
*33*ta
first syl-
186).
The acute accent may be
optionally
late syllable
sisting of
%Z1T: î^mci
of the reduplicated Aorist in
more than two
on the penulti-
'chaii'
the
word con-
syllables.
m fg gfofrTTW
or gfcS*fUW
The augment HZ is elided by the addifs prevents the verb from becoming auudatta VIII. 1. 34
ihen comes the feft accent of g^ n
The augmented form with nz has acute
ilways on the first syllable VI. 4. 71.
When the word is of less than three smi-
Thus
tion of WT, VI. 4. 74;
thies,
the rule does not apply, as
Here ends
wifif ZVft
the Chapter
II
of
Root-accents,
?m xrcpreRi:
CHAPTER
III.
AFFIX-ACCENTS.
The SiddhantA KAumudi.
104
3680.
[Vot. lit.
<3h.
ill.
3680.
stem formed with the Krita-affix 'ghan' has the acut

if it is formed from the root krisk, (kar~
accent on the end-syllable,
shad) or has a long a in

Thus sim*:, qieR:, jam:,
it.
3iu:, vim:
*i5:,
197 by which
affixes
The word
formed with the Vikara'ria
cfiii
gro of Bhvadi gana
to indicate that
The word
Tudadigana.
the
is
51
siq, is
accient
on the
i.
first syllable.
used in the aphorism instead of gyq
by
affected
this rule, arid riot 3Hi-3njffT of
w&
derived from the Tudadi
5Ri|:
an exception to VI.
I'his is
have acute
has the acute accent
ori
first syllable.
'erscTW. ^fspififaqTir vji'
3681.
words uchchka, &e
!fhe
aWn?'
^jsq^r 'inn infi
tt*n:
wQsjsat
'nmi
hafe acute accent on the
last
syllable.
Thus
But
&rans!l: fF*J#fw*7i
(Rig Veda III. 26.
ijtt
The word wg is formed by ^m

m*. (Rig Veda VI. 28. 5).
So also
3tW
(Rig Veda X.
3).
we have u\n ihn HSr^RTW (Rig Veda
in other places
and spciH as
in
3grm
asur (Rig Veda
I.
30. 7).
I.
the following
as in
affix,
jrfa:
24. 15).
mc? asms?
^cFW^^
frO. 3).
iVote :
1. 35^ :, 2. *^$:, 3. of^si :, 4. sreqr'i These are formed by ^5T, and
would have taken acute accent on the first. 5. sm :, 6. sro: are formed by *jftr affix
words would have takeu the
(III. 3. Gl) which being grave (HI. 1.
4.), these
accent of the dhatu 'VI.
I.
162),
acute
e.
i,
ori
the
Some read
first syllable.
mi: is derived from gsf by ^js? affix, the non-causirig of guna is

In other
irregular, and the word means 'a cycle of time', 'a part of a carriage'.
is formed by *jfti
a*nd has this accent
8. tr: = (%&)
senses, the form is in n:
SOW
also here,
7.
when
it
m:
ei^f:,
'
means
denoting
denoting vneT the

vfcvsr\
51tT*i^t:
senses, the
accent
siv>j:,
falls
on
the
first syllable.
first
10.
syllable.
l^Bfe^CTfa^sfe)
9.
e.
(j.
sgsf^*:, the Zll has end-acute* when meaning
12.
when formed bv
sjj^ affix
it
in other
nifatw, thus Wild*.,
rTin
WseraiTT Qtfa:,
&%%:, ^ragir:
this also.
the
v Tin ill. crafa: Sffrir, the stotra means the Sama Veda, the word
occurring in the Sama Veda has acute on the last in other places, it has the
otherwise
JQqsrr
on
is
uftf^r?'
accent on the middle.
acute
These words are formed by ^m by II f.

5R*#
instrument (ofRltf) they take' the above accent, when!
3*?: (iNs:), and
When
3. 121.
'poison', in other
root
15.
is
e.
g.
senses, the
l
gSR?
fi&
acute
Some read the
wg?jvwTirar*ill: (HTH51T)
here
35^, 2 j&vS, 3
SteanaisscsRn:,
'-.,
has acute on the
first.
is
13L
on the
These are formed by
14.
first.
limitation
a cave',
HTJSWTOT 19of
*jgj,
3tW-
wran^f iriW
wg though
II
53!,
gus) M*n,
4 5T*a,
10
5TCT,
F^sra^fa
I
STV1
(SJtf),
7 WH, 8 IRT |W, 9
(<rftt?J> sipj, sft^ff),
11 srif*:
Vol.
III.
Cn.
13
12 *gij zt',
sfri,
mramth
^HTTSni 33Itt: sjfaitf
The word
3682.
105
Affix- accf^ts.
3684.]
III.
Mransfaiw.
srrw: g^dasr?:'
stmsnari&r (^fftnraatiflvraT)
'*F t:-'
folio wecTby
chatur,
(*)
qrfa
*Tiraq
the accusative
erg-
plural,
has acute accent on the last syllable.

Thus gg*;
nine of
wh^
Vart.),
and
RS3qfl:
^<TO (VII.
is
(Rig Veda X. 114. 6) the accent is on

2. 99), which has acute accent on the
accusative plural will not have accent
its
because
vtf*.
has acute on the
Its substitute
HH
will also be so,
Is so,
first,
by the
ciation of *JU3I3TtI with regard to g?re in
on the
rule of
FnfatfR
Vartika
the
gn^! +
100
here, however, the ^ (VII. 2.
prevent the udatta formation
and take the acute, as there

As vimi
take an accent.
Pro.
Stffi,
Max Muller
(Unadi V. 56),
The special enun-
^h^
Now comes the
3*3
i*4fa
final of
*G*S
of the *n of
H1H
^rt'i:
egr.
nor will
>
^b but a
Professor
I have
fl
no vowel
exists
This
syllable.
7reafal3IiTfacnrPi 5RJTOT
299) substitute of =r
S.
Another reason
present
Sutra
being sthanirat,
^r be considered as
consonant * which
Bohtlingk places the
followed Prof.
for Bohtlingk's interpretation
ing this sutra;
nd not the
= ^R5f+3JH
3TC?
(VII. 2. 99
affix
(VII. 2. 99) indicates that the present rule does not apply to
for this is as follows
The femi-
tirst
last
formed by 3*^
a8
jj
Max
will
final
cannot
accent thus
Muller in interpret-
would make the ending sjh acceuted
II
^TrW*
Ho
aww' 'fd^'i^fefw:' 'fa' faw 'fs[ T;" sroFrtaTw'

The numerals 'shat', 'tri' and 'chatur' when taking a
i
ii
3683.
Mor
beginning with a
case-affix
get the acute accent on the
when the said numerals assume a form conmore syllables.
penultimate syllable,
sisting of three or
The numerals vz, f% and g^T when ending
in a case-affix
beginniug
with a
H?^ consonant, form a full word (tre), in such a word the penultimate syllable
The very word penultimate shows that the uz must be
Thus tniffw:, StRfw:, fcreTfw:, Q*nl:

msrafw:
Veda III. 7. 7). *crfwcbR3ffai (Rig Veda X." 39. 10). *flWT
WTSWTSf: (Rig Veda VIII. 96. 16). snasjfwfgcKclr?: (Ri$ Veda VIII. 72. 8). Why
Observe, sraT^T sraataTW (Rig Veda I.
do we say 'beginning with h and W ?
191. 13).
Why do we say 'the penultimate syllable'? Observe OTtrefwrfqfeng sSfelfw: (Rig Veda VIII. 35. 3).
j?-r: (Rig Veda II. 18. 4)
of three
tjSrlfw:
syllables at least.
li
(Rig
'
3S c 8 froim wTOTtroj
3*>faw
14
<i
<m
ii
Thb Siddhanta Kmjmudi.
106
In the
3684.
language this
classical
[Vol. Ill- Ch. III. 3684.
optional.
is
The H^ l fg case-affixes coming after the above numerals tR, fa and ^Ht
may make the words so formed take the acute on the penultimate optionally, in
In the alternative, VI.
the ordinary spoken language.
Thus q*4ffw: or xj*r:
i
1.
So
179 applies.
s^tl
*3w
V%
gfir*
The acute
3685.
fe^fw:
also -Sflfw: or BflfiS:, ffl^fm: or
is
ll
<<* n
on the
syllable of sarva
first
when the
cae-endings follow.
Thus * 5?^?h nvsm (Rig Veda X.
3C$
fi^rtfefi^TO
fef5r?W faz*RW
tory
5C
is
<H
SJTrJ
<K$>
*
II
Qferf^g^Tf^
derived with an
WOT
'
V*:
9wfill
BTTST-
having an indica-
affix
or H, has the acute invariably on the first syllable.
Thus
(Rig Veda
ufaPT^ faarf^ OTFJT
Here irNu
manadi
^T^^TrT:
Whatever
3686.
71. 10).
class.
is
(F. 1.124.
w^ zfavai *?&{:
uaTfasim^T:
g%
from
&
(Rig Veda
by force of the word
and
then
of
^TO
I.
5. 9).
because
affix
1ZJ5C
6).
Here *am
it
belongs to the Brah-
1788.)
I. 3.
'with the affix *sr^^
also)
the
with the
is
mn
(Unadi IV. 199),>which takes the augment sj^
'and' in
is
elided,
the sutra
above
quoted (Unadi IV. 199),
^sro means 'food/
The acute accent is on the first syllable of pathin and

mathin when followed by a strong case-ending.
3687.
The words qfasj and wfajsj are derived by the Unadi affix ^f*i, (TV. 12. and
13 and are oxvtone by III. 1. 3. They become adyudatta before strong cases.
Thus
mtf nrar. (Rig
Veda IV.
18. 1).
Why do we say when followed by a sarvanamasthana case-affix f Observe

The accent is on the final by VI. 1.
'aarfawa: Ufh tg, (Rig Veda X. 53. 6).
*
J62 there being
3688.
lable
elision of the
The
and on the
'
udatta
Infinitive in tavai has the

last syllable at
acute on the
one and the same time.
first syl-
Vol.
III.
Ch.
*$H
Thus
3.
by which
VI.
dfTrTaf
H9
of
107
Affix-accents.
3692.]
III.
(Rig Veda IV. 21.
ought
is
an exception to III.
it
also
This
9).
have got the aocent, and
to
1.
countermands rate
1S8. by which there can be only a single acute in a single woicL.
1.
*T3J3TtI: CTTrJ
S3 i30 SJ?TOH
HlZFrK
II
The word kshaya has the acute on the
3689.
syllable
first
in the sense of' house, dwelling.'

(Rig Veda X. 118. 1). The word is formed by ^ affix
Thus *go sjfaHH
118. and worn hi have hid accent on the affix (III. 1. 3). When not meaning
The word is formed by
a_house, we have
gof grTrT artEpTOT
(III. 2. 31).
l
IIT.
1.
3$<o
5pr. 5Rtm^[
The acute accent
3690.
||
on the
falls
of jaya, in
first syllable
the sense of whereby one attains victory.'

Thus ôtsW, but otherwise 510T ETrfcT ST^nirRTiri
'
9 affix,
(lit.
3<l
3*T3[tai
îf^^HT?r:
*T3tff?inin$?m
The words
3691.
to
118), the second by
1.
'
^9
The former
era
srrafw^fksfeifft
'
znm\:
'
&c, have the acute on the
vrisha
by
is
(III. 2. 31).
first syL-
lable.
Thus STifamfasfolfft
1.
$**:,
2.
Jr:,
The word
04).
W*:,
3.
HO:, 9. ho;, 10.
jto
is
4.
(Big.
qV-,
5.
md
Tin:, 18. w^5f.
tfW:, 21. OTH:,
TO
>y
III.
TO:.
12.
^z
first,
should be considered as
gq:, 2 5W:, 3
gcrr,
?3RH
i-
1).
(III. 1.
7.
HO:, 8.
to, nuna*
135) 15. TO:, 16.
1.
HHHT WTSf^wwi:
sn^r?: formed by
19.
7.
I.
to
\nn r 24. gRTTT,

to, 26, gwr
to:
fcro, 20.
(all
three formed
27.
m*: formed
159,
1.
All words^ which are acutely accented

class, if their
accent
oa
cannot:
rule.
93TOmTS3fTT:
%?:
er (III.
?mwT H^TOT
134),
tt
14. g^-, (formed by
belonging to. this
jrn'..
3''?TR3I*3:
treated as
it is
formed by
III. 1.
It is ^TSsfHiNff:
14 TO:,
*m*:, 2 5J:, 13 jpj
18 TTTPH:, 19 oRTtf:,. 20 OTW.i 21
27 qq:, 28 33:, 29 ^TOifrTnittH
"
is
(Rig Veda
either take the accent indicated by the affix or by VI*
be accounted for by any other

1
^smft:
These are formed by
13. ^n?:,
17.
to
10)
irregularly
Sfcj:,
3 104).
(formed by
both formed by TO, 22, TOl, 23.

to = m-anfetj formed by
TO^ which may
*IWJ
6 o:
III. 3. 104), 25.
28, qq:, 29. -53:
the
to
I. 3.
f*
from'fr-nTOrT,
-ao:, 11.
8 to 11 are not in Kasika).
(formed by
Veda
5 *q:, 6
5
JTffT,
*qu 7
v?
mo*.
9 ho:, 10 aq:
',
16 -Jimî HFTO: HJ-THJ aTSTOin:, 17 h?H:,
UT 22 urn.
nq:, 8
SJ^r
It
23 q$m,
3RHT.T-7
24, g-g:,
25
an*?
srot:,
26 qia:,
iTTOqfrf.
It
108
The acute accent
3692
with which something

Thus
u rv?*rr,
4f>3r,
of the
3<ma
3. 98.
It
3T8*
The
when
be asked
V&rt
The
it is
a name,
96)
3.
elided, its
is
mark,
maxim
Urtfq^ranj rule
is
the
first
whera
62,
1.
I.
of this sutra indicates the exist-
The formation
by V.
elided here
causing
197), will remain behind by virtue of
I.
word
syllable of that
3WR words used as names
are
SR^ (V.
affix
is
cRsj
then the necessity of this sutra.
ence of the following
first
All these
(the thing compared).
might
on the
likened, provided that
is
*Jfcgi^
syllable to be acute (VI.

is
falls
[Vol. IN. Ch. III. 3692.
not of universal application in the rules relating
to accent.
When
the word
upamana we have
not a Name, we have *B?wrafalI5ra:
is
A dissyllabic Participle in ta
3693.
an
When
it Is
not an
ihr: (VI. 2. 148).
first syllable,
(Nishtha),
but not
if
the
when
Name'
syllable has.,
first
'a.'
Thus
participles
TM??:,
*gr, |tT:
we have 33:,
In Participles having long

the Participle
358
jrasR^&r
Srrrarapi^T
w.
Also
3694.
the
hi in
'
Thus
^m:,
In
3).
non-
fafsflH:, *f%ri:
*lfl:
When
II
* *{*&?'
sjyjjR
W&% and ^S have
These are non-Names.
we have
^05 h
^^TtfTW^W
accent (III. 1.
we have,
first syllable,
have, SFrW, ^R*
C M
affix
In polysyllabic Participles
Name we
not a
is
This debars the
w1*f:
acute on the
m and miiz
II
<ll?T
H 1
first
syll*
'
3pK*J (Rig Vt
4. 4).
3S*y
*nfim:
1
Cfi|3T'3CITf IIrniS3
The word
3695.
the
sifrf
WZTZm:
<l
*$>
'SR*far?TJiTW*ll?3ra*l'
II
OTp&rT meaning 'having eaten has acute on
first syllable.
Thus 'srofgRtuTST
3S<
fi^
T&xm
f^rfivsi eufa^Tr*:
3696.
WTfiffrU?' (Rg
1
far.
The word
<l
Veda X.
aarof g
rikta
117. 7).
'fsreT
may have
H3W?j' (*e*i)
^ffl
faswisj-
optionally the acute on the
first syllable.
will
Thus f?fK: or faS:

make it always first
But when
acute.
No
is
Name,
option
is
allowed then.
it
then
VI.
I.
205. S. 3693,
Vol.
Oh
III.
^T2J^
en â:
In the Chhandas, the words 'jushta' and 'arpita' have
3697.
optionally the acute on the

Thus
acoent
is
or
5i <z:
first syllable.
{fq'n: or
sns*:;
always on the last syllable
nam*
109
Affix-accents.
III. 3700.]
sretwraiciw
zaar.'
'arcet
*&fr/ri:
In the
classical literature
the
'
(III.
3).
i.
**?*
**rrjs
tfrr'rm' *r?arc:
triors fro*:
In the Mantras, these words jushta' and 'arpita have

always the acute on the first syllable.
Thus mxi ^majSfua Tva TUTIJ
Some say that this rule applies only to
3698.
"
gra and not
to mftfrl
which option
in
This sutra
5).
and q*rc OTBT fa*cTl3 Ac, they will

employment of the word a^fa
would never have been

(Rig Veda
g*TT:
this also
first,
we
in that
shows
sutra
so that
II
that in the Mantra
So these
a TOTword siftfm: is end-acute, and

the present sutra.
For it shows that in the
Moreover, in the Mantra,
find that
an argument against
is
fauHT a WftniTrfai
aS opposed to the ordinary language.
final acute.
164. 48),
I.
g. ft*npTOTSR
in the
for the
the words have acute on the
e.
examples gpST 3Tav (Rig Veda V. 4.

have acute on the first, by the preceding sutra,
For
superfluous.
is
allowed even in the Mantra
is
has acute on the last in the Mautra even
it
^qrffj' fTT : tlTtsz
the
Mantra, these words are not invariably first-acute.
wfsTOra:
3699.
soTf|
The
'si
fei *an at
acute accent
wsf' u
on the
is
syllable of
first
yushmad
and asmad in the Genitive Singular.
tm and an, and not $ and ^

Thus
and <n^ are derived from nu and na by
= QOT^ + nif (VII. 1. 27) = an +
139) ipr^ +
This applies when the forms are
HH sarw, an ^?
adding the
+ *ST
affix
The word
wf^j
(VI. 2. 96)
(Un.
I.
nm%
= ?q + *hj (VII.
2.
90) =
?^
(VI.
1.
97).
would have been udatta, but the present sutra makes
'aw f&mai'
'jt*T
crif?:'
una m'
Thus
2).
RwfB^W
(Rig Veda
II,
udatta.
So also
2.
5\
with
it
The acute accent is on the

3700.
and asmad'in the Dative Singular.
128.
Here by VIH.
36.
1).
first syllable
rgf
gm:
a^f.T.7
of
yushmad
(Rig Veda X.
110
3$oq,
*JRT$*T9:
The
Sidd-hanta Kaumudi.
nrjTTraupHFi i|**a TrrfesTTTf:
Whatever
*93
Ch.
III.
3701.
III.
sna few
[Vol
'*
sa^cita *jtoJV
WRtiihpsflisit
formed by, the affix yat\ has, if it is a

dissyllabic word, the acute on the first syllable,, with the exception
~
of navyah from nau.'
3701.
'
is
'
'
understood here from: VI.
The word ^sa^.

The muS\
Veda 1 6. 2).
i8
(Ris;
WASH?* ^*cf<sn? (V.
1.
is
from
Thug gsst^WOT mVQt
205.
1.
+ fm +
9RTT
OrT
5 ft, ^"aw
(III.
97);.
1.
This rule debars the Svarita accent required by
6).
f?Trl
^he ruleBut ^T-TTodH as ^gffj ^rsoTsfwy (Rig Veda I. 121. 13).

Tawiw'ij, sraTSRIW
does not apply to words of more than two syllables thus:
(VI.
vifis
185)'
1.
grow'
s^fw^'ro
srm'
II
The acute accent is on the first syllable of ff; 8R, ^T

TOT and 3U, when they ate followed by the affix. nyat."
The two letters uj and *r
Thus i siw ^533 W, gic&w, Sisaw, 2f^T vifap
3702.
'
II
being indicatory, the
*nyat'
is
accent would be regulated by
The q in the sutra

rule.
See III.
takes kyap affix.
4^frT^H
vzg $T Sfe 9J&W
35-03
(Rig
in^WT ST
venu
or
'
and
'
of the
'
a however
:
the
35J
S%**JT33t:
wfaw'
thus
it
û
II
11
is
optionally on the
formed by
if t is
^\mj
first syllable of*
*5*jtst gets
acute on the nrddle.
syllable, the pre ent inle ordains
SSOfl
t ^ ien
l*
It
that. also.
*tt3*3iht 91
wzxTtriiT
v9
tit:
9m
S*5w.
which
sarvadhatuka
ula
becomes
(VI-
final.
nnudatta
is
1.
The
If it
161), and.
would never have acute on the first

When ^m is used ag an upainana.
inviriibiy acitely accented on the
FITIHhlÎ^^^^gR^T^TW
or
(III. 38),
00 the
the accent
sparer the affir bein^ a

it
fwT.
This allows an option.
first.
have
will
replaces udatta final uf the root,
SiH^S 9W'<
this-
*3lfe class
indhan/
considered to be formed by
and as
of
The
2*0*3 (Rig Veda X. 110. $)

fa^T* sftq* (Rig Veda I. 10. 5)^
^*
2).
would always have acute on the
word ^5STR>
sutra.
*rrei|p? srt
1. 2).
fsrfl
last
debarred by
is
Thus ^JT^T *fTJT (Rig Veda II. 25. 1), q%j: or qp,
The word ircy is derived by the Unadi nffix ig
^WR:
being a
is
I.
The acute accent
3703.
1
yat
109.
1.
-s*ir5r
of
'
Kriyadi class
qs; HrFr of
is
Veda
The accent
II
(Rig Veda X. 24.
from
?!
not included in
q^Tsrsr^rTT.
first
r^
ir
(VI.
It
1.
2 J4
Vt>L. III.
Oh.
The acute
3704.
Thus fam:,
or Rim:,
affix
and by VI.
first
syllable also.
(III.
1.
8R*i:
wT:
?tit;
woul
f>9
*so^
or g^g
or
HT8
These are formed by
II
WW:
'ass:,
feroT*
the
is
h*0
formed by *ra
accent,
'
cfaqfTCirft
The lengthening lakes
(IV. 2- 85).
SKlolfft
Why
II
mzm
3SO
the Feminine Gender' ?
'in
when followed by
Observe nqrreRt
?*' ?
VifitaflFHT:
veiritaitdNMtTi 33Tti:
chrcifrT
3^0
in
Why
Observe surai^ H
do we say
M
||
^ra: fvrQTzrzmrzi
The Names ending
3606.
'avati'
nrCfTSf
It
have the acute accent
last syllable.
Thus
by ^f a
or
VJ5I
on the
do we say 'the *ht'? Observe SSWrTt,

The words ^rg (Un. fit. 157) and sw (V. 2. 108) are end-acute, so the
on JWJ by VI. I. 176.
Why do we say 'when a name' ? Observe
is formed by
and has acute on the first (Un. I. 151;.
M
do we say
on the
'
l|r35nS?f>
acute
this ordains
tiiin],
The a' before the affix 'mat has the acute

word is a name in the Feminine Gender.
place by VI. 3. 120.
Why
iw.
*as: or
Thus ^saflScft, TpF^fiarTT,

5*rei*Ht M
syllables of
first
take acute on the
tiht: thiwifUTiniT
3705.
accent
optionally on the
is
13).
1.
when
accent
*3&. and
f*rnr, rnr, irra, 3ji?,
Ill
Affix- accent*.
3707.]
III.
*RraU5Tfft
*ateg?h
would have been
HBTffT
and not g?ft
really
nwsrtf
valid for
the
purposes
C,F
fsrrCTT:
9
i
tiual
ll
These words being formed
(III.
I.
4).
Why
<(
Ô
<nêtcit
wte?rr
rule
is
(VIII.
do we
held
2.
use
the word
for
considered asiddha for the furpoges
to be
2).
of
is
non-
But the
this rule.
*rsfts?ft u
The Names ending
w^smt
eRHTTStfrh
application of this
1S
syllable.
Thus
subsequent elision of
the
of the
3?BRiwTra m^rff
3707.
=g?!)
^StfHl
the rule would apply to rr5ra?TT also,
ending in *H^rT
change off? into
$SO$
Then
uuaccented on the
in ivati
have the acute on the
last
^ro f^R^ **[Un
THE PH1T SUTRAS

CHAPTER
fa
vtffttffegi
1.
name
HWrT 33TtT:
nominal stem
CTTR
Nominal stems or Pratipadikas,
of
3:
As 3 j
acute.
finally
ia
I.
in the
The word
II
is
fqffi
the
terminology of the ancient Gram-
marians.
iJHd^ ranrei 33Ttt;
9fa
m^
^rnsfUJ
'hts^t* 'uras^T' 'sjsut' '<n5^n
'otr|' 's&Tfa^Trr'
'îTcTfi'
^raT2a?flTlr3 UTtcf
HTTT*:
also ^TH?:,
n^w
and
*wtar7,
So alno
sjira
Sga:
ijrreioTCi
WTcl T
I,
This
TOaTOT:
'srarasH-
WTHT
'3*-
II
TO*T,
mn*
and
tn^T
are finally acute. Pata-
By
Phit
II.
19 the heavy
makes these end acute.

So also *miT5l|j,
are syuonymns meauing a kind of plant (Cassia
So
This last is an excrption to Phit II. 9.
this
sfa tnjf
^feranj' foil
smn
flTqsratsim
^%a
II
The words denoting house,
3.
Feminine.
^fk unfar.
II
'srafcrcraej-'
<TO3TST5lTjTO5fiTf
>
ti^fm:
srfcf
of UT2*TT, ^B1T*r|;T, ^Wctt
vowel would have got the accent
fistula).
mz$l, tJ^^T,
a kind of herb
Hnfvren??,
'wt^**'
3*3
The synonyms
2.
la is
are end-acute, provided they are not in the

II.
3.
Thus
which
is
first-acute,
an exception to Phit
is
not in the Feminine
Observe
sjTi3T
Trgjj
Why
we say
do
because of this prohi-
bition.
Wr?
*racw
wra
s^tttt:
^T^?W3TW^5r?T^TJj'
4.
But
in
mm
*T3*?
TOnI TfTTTCI3TTTrn?
'siTwuiw*
HfTTSST^
f^Rir
'î^wre=T j^tvq:
II
As Trgjw
So also the word ns, but not in the feminine, is end-acute.
As
the feminine it is first-acute by Phit II. 6. and then ZVI S is added.
*T5tfn ipnva:
feroro
otiî
V
5JT3T
(Rig Veda X. 136.
^sftfaTOPJ
'UTSfTPn^faTragw' ^TRaTrarci HTjf

,
rai^rasnrfraw
3).
11
'faulrc^g^^^J
faw
?wt
g^m
'S?V ?ffl fall
'QRtora:'
tflSTJ?
XJ5(5rT-
(aaoi) ^wtcjcttI
III.
Phit Oh.
6.
Vol.
feminine
Why
This
an exception
is
words only which
S.
zm-
the sutra
and
'âfsrossj-'
is
acute by Phit
The word
have no
is
first
Why
acute.
affix ir?
in the
to those
confined
masculine
corresponding
is
end-
is
JNtlr, 5TTUT
first-acute
by VI.
1.
vma
'^hhttS:' faro
*TC73TT?c5m
is
t$i
Tumi
end-acute, provided
SpTfl", 3:*sfW,
3*3T
*paiy
^n
'saifffin-
'sfte:^ fa^sas^' ûtt-
fsrartfre?
it
does not begin with
The word nig would have been
first-
G ; w*a and a;:*s! would also have been first-acute by Phit II. 3.
which means a pot would have been also first-acute by Phit If.
a manufactured article. Why do we say 'if not beginning with si
II.
3*slT
because
or '?
in
rule
The word ^wj
and a
middle-acute by Phit III. 13.
<?frr
word ending
Thus mga,
ends
it
The
vj
So also ^mT,
20.
because
first-acute,
feminine,
^f?r 'sTsTfauaCT-' ?ftr sfi
6.
8.
is
faruzi in
are always
3701. and gfcra
*H5ra:*srar.
word
Therefore, not here, cfWJT, ^rfaaT
form.
or
to Phit II.
13 which would have made these
to III.
have we used the
213,
an exception
is
Observe ^r*T which
113
Si-tras.
feminine word ending in a vowel and preceded by
acute; as lJ5?raf
This
The Phit
7.]
T.
it is
Observe
foofcm,
W, governed by Phit
II.
6 or
3.
The word jfig being the name of a part of the human body is first-acute by
Or because it is a Neuter noun, rule II. 3. of the Phit Sutras apPhit II. 6.
plies and makes it first-acute.
Sjte
The word fsHsTt is formed by tJn. V. 24 With the addition of ^J to the

The affix *r being expressly taught as fa^ makes the word f*H3
acute before the addition of the feminine Z1U as
it
is first
?yrfti otto??
^w'^rafaT
7.
Thus
5if?TS5:
Or even by Phit
acute.
word ending
w'wsmn_OT
in
(superlative of
np,
H^HT TO 5*
anomalously.
^1
is
the
word
ôTFBT:,
is
first-acute.
the far*
affix
VI. 2.
2.
^T^TrT
by VI.
4.
qz&*\ (V. 3. 55).

9),
is
??ot?:
and 9r3t are end-acute.
substituted
sjj'fes snfflTOS, (Rig Veda V. 62.
In
it
as well as sjfffES
the
of
II. 6.
^smggq^w^friînj^
'
ffT, ST??, si,
would have been first-acute, because

**:
first
an antaranga operation, no
is
the word Tutsi
root
the
word
debarred,
by
157).
It
In sif^tsis
first-acute
which
the
member would have retained its accent in an Indeclinable compound. With

This debars Phit II. 19.
With ^, we have
BTctfrt*:, wSfthi
fr? we have
set aside.
As
is
regards
19
words ending in w
Phit
II.
also
Here
r5n?T3JfT
first
15
1U
TfiR SlDDHANTA KaUMUDI.
Panitii
Vf,
V. 41.
19).
would govern them; as
144.
2.
Sakatayana's sutra, therefore,
The word 3?gt&
"8.
*Treft*n:
When
noun meaning
'
*?s
As
^gm^TSJ^rff nufî2TTr^
The
-Qf^rojr sjT^:
it
means
it
or
^fewf 3H!
dakshina,
towards dakshina
&%fa g
*raif T^fw^rj
In the
10.
zâw
if
it
Why
may
a Pro-
would apply.
In
has other mean*
WsaniEinw' few
when
a person
or south,
it is
the
be either end-acute or
nraref
name
facing
sits
and may
left
'
hand, though
In
in
one
for then his left
hand
'
west,
of
acute.
first
the word akhya used in the sutra
is
is
be called dakshina bahu or
the
II
sfgnr:
?^
tjafaurTsrsTTrasTTft
'grenrV
when
^t
*m
it
^tfw:'
The word ^nan
11.
an exception tc Phit
when denoting a
wild
does not
mean
*snnairai
end-acute,
5t
îiancrt
xrzn
or end-acute.
3%'*nT
^t^^t em'
sijjd
11
This
of an animal.
1
^Tsqft
first
3[fcNirnrcf
sttcwt
name
not the
10.
3t
tt5T
^w:
But
II
3T 3TOVIZOT
II
when
Krishna
is
Proper Name.
As *tn
sn_
(Rig. VIII. 85. 3).
The Rishi Krishna invokes you two,
<U
sr^f^
if it is
As
arm.
right
As ^WT*T ^t^Sim
animal, we have ^PHift XV&i
vfavwi <gV?f enfsrclsf

*
is
II.
Optionally so,
12.
11
Chhandasalso the word dakshina may be either
the case even
iz if?^ 3?Wnn 5^*pr nfe-tai sfenra

fasnî'fRig VedfTx. 107. 7).
is
&r:
the rule to the
fit
*utct
Sffain:
pointing towards south.
uo
This
^ft:
right hand,
the application of
will be called
will point,
arm
Phit II
first-syllable of ^ffgnT is optionally acute,
When
order to prevent
case
As ^mrTlTf
first-acute, if it be
The word dakshina
it.
Veda
(Rig
8.
far.
'skilful.'
will be
it
f.
sincere, courteous, submissive, &o.'
9.
a limb.
when meaning
19 would govern
II.
Trm?CTlih:
superfluous so
In this case
'south,' 'right hand.'
any other case Phit

ings, as
end-acute
is
qiw^TT
is
has not this significance,
it
{VOL. TIL PHIT Ch.
urn miniTiTv
11
Asvinas
Lords of riches.'
STOUT
Vol.
Phit Ch.
til.
wifâs
fafagcfTfr.
Th* Phit Sutras.
19.]
I.
ara^grfa ffa g gr*w
115
'Hb'm^T vmfavi'
RRi5*rr-
The first-syllable of skr and 3tt* is acute.

Some say it ia a ooinpuU
and uot an optional one. Others read the anuvritti of qt into it and
13.
sory rale
make it optional.
According
Names and therefore in ell"
perly end-acute, as
it
is
Proper
to the first opinion, the rule is confined to

fttTT usrrfti.srT (tyig
not a
Veda VIII. 45.
21),
it is
pro-
Name.
Th^ fiuals of *HgT2> 333?, stR and <5T3JT are acute in. the Chhaudas.
14.
The word mgxS would have been middle-acute by Phit III. 3, this ox-dains hnalSo also with gqf
aoute.
word gsjf
is
employed
It
would have been
for the sake of
in the classical language, it
is
And
15.
it ia
HS
16.
is
jjisi
qg: where it
|
end-acute,
Why
trT
by Phit.
II.
that
wvjfi
when
JRahVrr
sjttsjt
*wg
means
cfi*ri
in the
name
it is
the
of
straw.
name
it
1.
As
This
iG5*T or
an exception,
is
of straw' ?
Observe W3!'TT;
means 'master.'
213
Otherwise
it
See also Paniui III.
S. 3701.
is first1.
103-
'
direction
'
then
T_ h^j\ fe4>kiw.
means
<K
*^nUTSTf5^PJT*!Tm
'^^ ^TSJTWSlfr'll.
uot the name of a direction.
if it is
sjJTSIT
In the classical?
II. 6.
9..
it
I
is
direction.
II
As
first-aoute s
(Rig.
II;
Jn ha. conqueror of euLin.es, muke us free from, fear
Here
Chhandas.
by Phit
Wr! 3cf TlTqcRTr25âq?aBJ13JcfTHm
end-acute,
is
its vartika.
feni^TcOT^T^fasHT
18.
The-
7.
II
when
end-acute,
word mil and
the
if it is
acute by Phit III. 13 or Panini VI.

for the
II.
end-acute in the Vedaa only;.
II
3PTO7 tcUUJKdEJT g<j
is
by Phit
first-acute
it is
first-acute also
is
do we say 'when
is first-acute
mn
17.
i.e., it
* TO1 ^STTW
to Phit II. 9.
<t
the word
qtsw
end acute
ijts is
optionally so,
tirst-acute.
a?=3W5 33TtT. WTgT wthtutw
lnnguage,
niyama
41.
from
12).
all
This implies
^hj
3TTOlttJ9J*T
Miy the
w.T
directions or sides.'
19.
acute.
[Vol.
III.
II. 19; while qc5T, *f3C5T, yfai^T, being formed by

been first-acute by faa accent.
Not
20.
tika.
The
wTtTSRT
f^Rw
end-acute
'%&
place, ghee
all
should be
3.
5SIE5
s?ij_T35
^Ht^fifrT
rclTS
and
rest,
and
meauing age'
from HvQ (V.
sent sutra
i
is
(
I
m*G
H*
fwfkg
luminosity
its
and do
K;rit"
As
not
HJTF
^[
ghee
fire,
This
<fcc/
under any
fall
STfa tf
birth-
is
its
is
an Akri-
other rule,
class.
W['^ ^WBT'
gweiôiT
?
3.
'SlifalSS
1ITS ^rW-'
sRHtVi^ ^rt^
3rrfrT_
ifr'
a:
Ribhu, sfiqlm^
refers
to his
oldest
BiVirararii'rtz
(Rig. IV. 33. 5)
*TqW
Here
feRIT
50*5
and youngefifcriss *stai
531S5 nieaus
younger brother
the
Bibhva, and
gq in 53^5 here is the substitute

Why do we say 'when
by V. 3. 64.
Observe 5rG5=*5ics derive! from tnjSJ (V. 3. 61), and cfi fi{VS
The pre-,
These are first-acute by f^ accent.
64) = shtW*:
youngest brother Vaja.
and sr^
for qq;* in sifaiss:
thus an exception to fafl accent.
fRpffiTOfr:
^f^m
^fri
The
finals of Tsr^g
st
ftra^g ww.
and
As
alternative they will be acute.
fflca
are
^rarfe:: htsr srai;:
ii
ura:
II
optionally
II.
In the
svan'ta
fgsci* ur faser, fcron' or
CHAPTER
i
of
19.
II
As
ghee
end-acute,
tRW^r"^^
refers to
refers to the
<l
II.
II.
and srri are end-acute when meaning age

^}ri
of qgi (V. 3. 62)
23.
name
the feminine are not
SRI in
'1 sprinkle ghee on
11).
under the Ghvitadi
331*: Wfrf
As
the
is
^Sfif'lglfr&lftf U
22.
eldest,'
H.
abode of
its
HliftiaRT, cTgfacfiT
rest are end-acute.
words which are
classified
<H*tT
sfifrflSS
js
words ending in
that the
would have
?*5^,
by Phit
first-acute
it is
fa'mij' SIT^!ffITT^rT5qR
^_r!So[fC| V3TW, (Rig.
est.'
19.
^r?and the
21.
not acute
is
Others hold
*5rl 33Tt|:
<
^mm
^T2ttai
and the asterism
so, if the final letter is 5iT
final of
and they mention
rH
tiguna
I.
The uaoies .of Ast.erisms, which take the feminine affix ^n, are endThe asterisins *mgwT, HRnvn, &e. would have been otherwise governed
by Phit
T^HT
Phit Ch.
frrf
II
otheif
Vol.
Phit Oh.
III.
From
1.
II.
ia
on the
first
2.
mm
words taught.
h$:
ii
in a light vowel,
As
fR:
exerts the go-
*jrrfe
to sjaRfcajaR^j (IV. 1) exclusive, the accent
word ending
gf^r:,
117
Chapter HI, the word
of
up
this sutra
sifa:
end
to the
From
syllable of the
*Tfe*3Tr*:
first-acute.
up
this
verning influence.
The Phit Sutras.
7.]
aud
used always in the feminine,
ia.
An invariable neuter noun, with the exception of one ending in ^SF, is

The word sttj means sro^rsR or Neuter. As cR_ * snq: (Rig Veda X.
But gfq*, srfel, *f^ kc. ending in ?s are end-acute.
3.
first-acute.
39.
1).
^cagifw^ri:
gran:
rtcjt:
wtw:
Words denoting ' straw and

4.
The word ^STO^sra
two syllables.
of
TTT^TfCT: is
acute on the middle by Phit
to vowels by Ancient
5.
the word
ample
?:
is
Numeral ending
acute by VI.
compouud
1.
180.
which
As
II.
19.
cig^f
m^m:
ff
are first-acute
qfsjT:,
consisting
OTSt:, fcJ%U:
eRTajT:,
The word
when
si*
is
the
Name
But
given
in
nix
middle-aoute by
1
fhsrr:
Grammarians.
iimw?-
gîs^m^:
is
'grain'
'
For gg?:
^cUffi
is first
is
or
is
As u sg,
first-acute*
accent; see Panini VII.
end acute by VI.
is
governed by VI.
acute by VI.
^T^ftldmdlfrlFn^
2.
1,
1.
1.
4tr9lT:
In ^?3lTC:
The proper
98.
167, *fii:
Hence example
179.
ex-
middle-*
is
of a
29..
II
The words denoting bodily organs and ending in m as well as the ProThe fare is the name given to Pronouns (H^ffm) by anA^ sfiht'wit l^'ejiraftl, (Rig Veda X. 163. 1) ; $rB5rfa5r
cient Grammarians.
W*p, (Rig Veda II. 39. 6,) feisfr fasTqT?(Rig Veda I. 28. 6).
6.
nouns are
first-acute.
mftiRt
wmi^
wsufror^ WTf3*3Tfr:
^ttii
5RT5f:
%m:
'^'a^''
mfaisTTW
faw
g*
"
qW-
The
7.
Thus
11
eRrsR:,
syllable preceding the sr
beings'? Observe
by Phit
II.
H..
is
acute in the names
^"^' (Rig Veda I. 50. 12). Why

g^ gfa'w^fW (Rig VeJa IX. 07. 32).
$**:,
.of
animate beings.
do we say
Here
33*
'of
is
living
end-acute
The Sibdhanta Kaumudi.
118
The g preceding a *aa

As
8.
name
of an artificial thing.
3tc
9.
fr
fnn
*&sw
n^ WW?
and
?t
WoHs
10.
Thus
<**
fft^:,
The
11.
g*f3i:
But not so
<^
The word
12.
Rig': (Rig Veda
ÔT
i,
H3
othfi
But when
it
first-acute,
ifan*W daq'
n.
As gsr:
5rcq
(Rig Veda X. 108. 9)..
acute.
when they end
in
Q %
fa, fa,
II
udatta when
is
But when
the word' ends with a shor*

initial
vowel
is,
short
<jr
A*
when not meaning

means ag^ or
it
'to
As w^r
gamble.'
play,
wgwt
we have
II
*h\i
fmn??n:
'
portions,
denotes equal
ii
when meaning not equal.'

e.
when it means 'half':
first-acute
'.
As wxft ^TOFT
we have ***
II
The words denoting
14.
srî
It
is
iftrrera*ifam
the-
iff**:, ftc7 H
is first-acute,
sirssicF
is
34. 13).
The word
13.
$m:
wg
word
the
ll
^TW^^
*a>jf
r*J:
161. 13).
I.
VedaX.
(Rig
98
in
3gra7T393F*
but not so when the
'
when
&
17).
short vowel
habit
&W&
s^ are first
S^WR R51T SUM*
f^JHrU *)<?
initial
v^wel, and denotes
TSjffl:,
fjit
and
5ff,
1).
acute,
is-
II.
11
'wimi
de-otiug color aro
>!:,
f*cfT?rTO
g^
Veda X, 27
Ri S
surd letter)
11
in flans' a*j'i
The words ending in

"sw (liig Veda V. 64.
9fl-
(th
aRnj'cR:
[Vol. III. PhitCh.
^^ or yellow-trees
are
As
6r>t-acute.
iji
r?^:
ll
uth:
95
htjt:
otjt;
The words
15.
I
T 3
UTIT
ii.
and the rest are
gÔTqQ^TmiTOJ
53T
'
T^HniW
'
?fr7
first-acute.
As tfm:, H***:,
ll
HTCTWR
f^fnfrT gn: TTF3T HWT
U\
*t:
ll>
It
Cn
>iirT
II.
tne Prit
?1]
The words ending
16.
Compared are
in a *nt
is
by V.
elided
is f*UiT5T?*S3
The
Thus ^ 53T
elision.
Why
98.
3.
denoting the name of the thing
elided-affix
Another reading
first-acute.
given by Eastern Grammarians to *ra

(V. 3. 96)
SutrAs.
do we siy
in
tho
is
ftufaj
which the
mime
affix
sr^
ending word'/ Observe
tja^
*rftja: n
wsttsi w: ami:
ftfe:
crra sa rt*t:
The words denoting trees and mountains, and the words cam, fatf
The word fsHau qualiand irfâ are not first-acute when objects of comparison.
mountains, and not th wordfies J#g[ and tjg*?T, and means species of trees and
Thus fnw ^5f OTR:, irefrcf ihr:,
forms $g and u<3rT
boto &c., aie word-forms.
But when we have gg ^sntf ^:,.Wr VqTTCI nan:, then
Cam:, fa?:, Jmja:
SBTironi;T!3TOT%?;3i3i *
17.
these two words would be first-acute by the
The name
18.
parative
because
any particular kingdom, ending with a Htt
of
provided that the word has a
affix, is first-acute,
The word
first syllable.
it is
itt
?ro?SfT
= q\5
Thus
<WT^:,
gâ crash:
A word
whose
HHTsifi^sRro n^^îrT:
final 'syllable
is
ô
but *^r:
is
com-
letter in
its
counter-example,
or srcuthj:;
a>i 5*:^*r:
w*?nnT:
$t*ttoy:
ii
word whose two

wherever that may be.
light, or a polysyllabic
syllables are light, gets the asute on the heavy
Thus m&XHB
elided
4
Vriddhi
not a Vriddham.
raT
19.
preceding sutra.
syllable,
or ahcr l*r: U
^fsiTOa*frratraTTiiTiJ
v
NS\
nm 'ztnTmvjmiTi:
*<5JlrauaT|
w?wr*T
bot:
*%$t
sfmft
wgirsjTfTr.
The words Which are invariably feminine, the words denoting color
20.
Feminine words
as
and words standing before the word *T are first-acute.
*fv&*il
denoting color, as -sifrnt, %flJ^t
^<t
sispftai
S?3 33TtT FITrT
13(5?'
%h*
TO
I
^Z'
The words denoting

Thus 5&5F3R3:,
ceding the final.
21.
p^
TTrl
TmrSTOTTOT*!
Q1IT3lf WTlR^TTlFSf
22.
The
5?
followed by
*g
as
*g:
II
fflfaft.-
II
birds have the acute on

frffrlft:
the
light
syllable pre-
ll
II
SSTO
*W
II
rules relating to acute accent mentioned, however, do not apply to
the names of seatons and animals.
As
tngpH:
metre:
The Sjddhanta Kaumud*.
120
The words denoting the names
23.
and ending with a
in their first syllable
TTsWraT: ending
ever governed by Phi III. 18*
acute,
SRSMIi
The words
24.
fsRW
uts^t: or Srq
St
w^r:
in the sutra
iserve S5RH:
is
Thus q
denoting corn
is
cRi^n^fT: or wdfreiT:
in a
II
vowel, are first-acute*
governed by Phit
is
II.
13
wtfz*ZtW.
do we say
'
Why
do we
into this
îfa
'
51
or
5T*m
*f,
on
The word.
beginning with a "g^f?
See wî:
lerter
optionally
They
Some read
give the examples
II
II
A word ending
syllables.
say
sutra.
and the counter-example q*iT*UT
with the
first syllable,
a non- conjunct
word SRcreTSTT
fe^*
^f?T
two
and ending
on the
or ut *ra, *rvf%r?, or
srsrsr
equivalent to
of the
US^TSTT*., SRTOffii:.
consists of
In the Phit-vritti
words
T3fRT:,
and ending
with a consonant,
beginning
Why
the anuvritti
26.
how-
is
According
A word
the penultimate syllable.
*aTWT5RT:
II
not being a conjunct consonant, has acute
"g
of
vamT'fiT:,
These are
II
^Jtfa^lOTffireireiftTflR!: til gT
25.
The heavy vowel
denoting countries
Their examples are 'WfT:, c(fT:
Û
Siddhanta Kaumudi.
does not occur in the sutra.

'
Vriddhi vowel
Thus
would be a better example.
According to some, the accent of this word
having a
ure first-acute.
ij,
These are names of corns.
the
Thus the accent maybe
&c.'
5h ZiT2:
explained as meaning
Suf^^ST*:
As
of.
5fUT33iTi
word
to another recension, the

is
of corns, and
or a
and a respectively.
g?
the examples given by the author
the sutra
sr
[Vol. III. Phit Ch. III. $1.
in ^,
Thus
=r or
^ fa:
%rÔ
tTT^t
long or
Some
II
short,
is
first-acute,
when
read the anuvritti of the word
it
5T5|-
ITCT^TW into this sutra: and so their examples are ^ <cl: and g^fa: (9R* and iffe),
Because îfa: is found to be end -acute in
and their counter example is 3fn
I
mi* wf atar. fqftravrci (Kig Veda X. 34.
CHAPTER
1.
Up
to
governing force.
âTniRl
In
all
<fec,
13).
III.
(HI- l7 ) exclusive, the words 'second syllable
rules
up
to
sutra 16
words 'second syllable' should be supplied.
inclusive
of
this
'
Chapter,
hf.T9
tha
Vol.
Phit Ch.
III.
'Of a word consisting
2.
up
in the following sutras
The Pnrr
III. 8.]
to
of three syllables'
arara:
wu
Words
3.
sraw
Sutra
jtsrt. <fcc.
^T^TirasrfafaT^
*rera:
As
ttû:
JJTcRIT
SJeTiJWT
5.
tri-syllabic
on the second.
As
by trim
illustrate it
htsu:
6.
by Phit
II.
6.
has acute on
it
the second syllable
II
II
word beginning with
sjTcTÎT
SFrTTTOlT
sr
and denoting vegetables, has acute
Some
the sutra as ST3T5UIJ and
read
II
wan:
if
racre"tof
first-syllable is light
ft
*qrqTT
word ending
tri-syllabic
in
and
jj
As UT?u:, mte?n:
has acute on the second.

the
first-acute
urarai irafdura
ST3*i are
word beginning with
trfe*^:
^fT^Ht OTSRT^S
ii
trisyllabic
ttcrt:
(or bodily organs)
they do not begin with a

But the guttural-beginning cRtft 5H is middle
provided that
*r t: n
4.
^rlrTClf
19 and T.H1I and
II.
mzfai g
and denoting limbs
consisting of three syllables
-oragi As
acute by Phit
the phrase to be supplied
is
8.
ii
get the acute on their second syllable,

guttural, a
121
Sutras.
and
ârei?!
sfam
II
beginning with a
But Wfifjj
sftif sr (VI. 2. 192),
(VI.
2.
heavy
syllabi
189),
because
beoause the word consists of two
syllables.
^rîrs^ram
>
\
*ifi
*g?iiT
7.
As
wf hi;,
^fa
trisyllabic
wth:,
wrfr:.
fonfitfi
&KT
i?),
(or
w&), I S3
v? M
esussT),
WoFt5|^5m?3rrf5rrl
Either the
(or
first
51
ITeR*:
Id
or the second
(or Cflf*),
wfa and *f<n has acute on
the second.
qf TOel
y *3 mTSRT^T^TSFTSftHI fl f^^T
(or
qrraf )
It
35<S ?c?TT3 H
syllable
(or
of these
HK^H),
*Tf8*), Srai (or ST^T), W5II
q'tsr (or tot), ^t^tt
16
fanftn u
in g?i,
ii
SnTHlfefg'eftilT iTcTTTl:
8.
^fur
word ending
may have
the acute
fcTrTCT (or fêfse?),
(or srIi),
|m
(or
a**/,
^g
(oi
irtcst
(oi
122
In the Chhandas, several other words than *T5M
9.
on the
The words
As gram
99
(or
mzwi &c, have
eR3*m), qf^TCT
The
or gnfajFT
9T
5RT
the syllable
or alefi:,
cfSfi:
or on the second.
or irpTfr:
11
I!
syllable
of
^nfer ftoftf may get the
Thus sfnfor^SHT:
of this word.
<ris ^tstttiw
r 3*1*
W-
11
n^nasHFsra
11
Of a neuter noun ending in m*t the first or the

The word 5?^ means srg'ScR or Neuter.
Thus
12.
first
ufWft:
II
uraT^nrro
?ro:
^Tfsfg
acute either on the
(or qjHdT),
second or the fourth
first,
a means
acute-accent.
9*
either
11
TTfÎRiT^^r
11.
sFatm^taf
10.
&c, have acute
or on the second*
first
90
$5W
[Vol. III. PhitCh. III.
second syllable
may
be acute.
3SHR5IJT
TO5rw
or *1^T*
II
93
*7TrlWITiJlf^si*4
arena:
II
11
13.
w&m:
3CT5ira ;
word ending
in
uhas acute on
the syllable preceding such
As
ii
98
OT?rra
STT^TSat
14.
g 5TT5m^
^ g 33T$
word-ending
*?T:
in
II
SW
HSfTOT
II
has acute on the syllable
may immediately
and on the
any)
s?t (if
Others read this

As s^rziT SWT
bvitraas IJIStTcU ^ ^T w^^t f a word ending in vn and having ^r or a light syllable
preceding such sn has acute on such sn and the light vowel.'
They give examples of ^SfT, ffcTT, Jp*T
light syllable that
precede
it.
II
9U
ftr^m?TOTt^ft^tfgTt3^cgfT
'W'WTr^g^TTf
&&$%:
t.fsjsmf*::
(or
fu^Tt:
or
(formed by
3e|t*:),
11
The second. syllables
of the
following
are optionally acute,
tra of IV. 2. 80); eo also guTUHK , ^fa^ti:,
TU3T5! under
3*Zt&V (or 33131**:),

g5t%ra (or g^cT^).
or fafsjm**:),
is
ST^T^*Tfj*^^fa^5TtTOT3T?lT*J
fg<*t3*J3nf at
16.
11
either on the penultimate or the second
Tlj'QnW
(or 5Rt*g:), &5%ll: (another reading
9$
II
The following words have acute
15.
syllable
fgcftli cIT
III. 2. 49, S.
2966.
and Ziivenzi
si SiTTO:
See Vartika
Vol.
*te
^TT*rrer ^JTt^Tfacsrf u
17.
word ending
have acute on the
As "g^QT, HTf^QT
fttct
rf%5amTCTT5rt3e5RT^n
iiif5cfTTT:
The
19.
on the
ms*>
word
mm
first
acute.
^sifesrsRîratiî tot3(h
3STt?*
iszftz;,
natfz:
nmfzi, wtfti:
V&iZt
VSW.,
Trissai: or
TTTC55I,
TTT^Jf SCT^Tar
IV.
and sjsr^
and sis^f :
is
aoute by turns.
Thu s
II
when
is
it
Otherwise
HiTzm
mnsTrnSreTrmcii*
the
s^tKretreiffresrc (VI. 2. 139), as
it is
ll
ii
aTejifs
vizffi:. si<Ist:
So also the word
2.
ii
II
BI^RTJTO*TO1
ingsrci
^TmTnfUTTi:
ill
Every syllable of the words
1.
QHTW:
CHAPTER
q
a*ai
ii
iwjtct sitcstFcT
1*1*:, 9*1*131:,
33jta:,
w&,
when meaning 'queen/ and ^TOTSKT when

As wfsift SHUT
<HTOT3T 3treraif?T
jJffiGft
of a sacrifice are
first
^zv, fiwa, <ma,
^QTfiT^, sid*, akra,
<k
ii
The following have acnte
18.
name
and beginning with a consonant, may optionally
in <5UT
first syllable.
smmfe^Trr:
if ara,
123
The Phit Sutras.
Phit Oh. IV. 4.]
III.
trcr:
the
it
name
will
of a
Brahmana.
As
be always end-acute by
ii
Shi
aiTOTSTHW
3.
So also the word mUcTrT. with the exception of its penultimate syllable.
But the penultimate syllable s is never
and mn^rf :
HTCTSTrl:
II
As HTCT9R:, quTora:
acute.
wragra:
SBTûrai:
ii
So also the words ^JJSTT* with the exception of *i, wSttRij with the exception of 5T, oFTSrara with the exception of *r, and WT^ftcrioR with the exception
4.
of
WT
get acute in turn on
every
syllable.
Thus ^w^Tg:, ^srfg:, ^WSIT^*:
124
w^si^j:, w5iiM&:, jpsiiraf:
aiftrasi:
iftisi:
In the
5.
syllable
Ufrasi:
wrataf sr:,
su*ftinR: or wt-
As
the words
and
CRfa^gj
cfifa^raj:/ gtfifijor:,
6.
*T3*cTCT ^rftHT
II
The words
(Rig Veda
aiftrerar.
The
7.
jr^?
and
have svarita accent. As ^'^tlTO
8.
syllables of sirere
and ca'^KST are
svarita.
i5gi:
sRTTsTirfg^fjij
The
finals of
'umsira:'
(asoq) ^fa vnva
II
ii
the following words are svarita; faî, fajga
The word fcregw=frT*TTSTT W3R <*

OTS, SWU, *T5RI, WTOJ
Some of these
WT3H, ff fw^T^Tcq W?q wfrf 3^: 8RTOT 31515^111
I
H?zf,
mmm
WR*lf
flim-
are exceptions to
213.
1.
<
f^jgvrcasfhrffin
As
HflT
fa*3 33frTO5c|
The words
10.
Veda VII. 101
Veda VIII.
WcJfilci
^^ftr
In the Chhandas the following words
9.
39. 1),
r^rj, ?5, S*T,
3),
are finally svarita
fs^g', Mâ',
II
and few are wholly anudatta.
^ r*J W^
ftmsw (Rig Veda
Ri S
(
I.
Veda
7l
As
4 ) 'W'tiTW *X%
^R^Vf^
(Rig
115. 4).
II
In the Atharva Veda the word few
11.
confined to the Atharva Veda

3?f
tagSH ^'
II
first
ffâfsW^cU SFTwf 5\IT^yoRWlTTT5!^^gWTTrnn^:
^sarafa
(Rig
with
So also
II. 24. 3).
dftfl: SJTr*
iM'
on every
get acute
jjftsfoj
ffiftriR*?!:,
II
VI.
Piut Ch. IV. 5.
III.
ii
Chhandas,
turn.
in
gSraerra:, giTsrafsr:
[Vol.
foww
<K
(Rig Veda
i
SITST
from
I
I.
115.
it is
4).
*ra*Trn:
is
finally acute.
so found in the Rig
Veda
The
also.
rule
is
not
As cnSSl-
Vol.
III.
Phit Ch. IV. 19.]
12.
The
13.
The upasargas are
Indeclinables aro
'hew s:-' (qooe) ^fa

The
14.
TOnatanj
S. 1009, the
words â
As
ua*,
wording
first
*sr
TisRTOr
n^Tf,
^jt
suns
and the
,'gw
si
ittsi^th sf?i
are finally
rest
qîr,
with the exception of *fa
sa*
125
As *3tyt
acute.
first-acute
msTrrny
serorîftrffT
ss
Thb Phit Sutras.
91H 3*
$&*
h w&*:
*w* *F^
rtfi^w
Another
acute.
_ftfw:
reading
In
Thus there
first-acute according to Kasika.
is
tr*
VI
is
78
3.
an apparent
is
contradiction.
Both
15.
syllables of the
The*words
16.
is
'&
vvfth
^r
and the
mscT^
The word q?n
vm
fifflTwaY
is
accented. (V.
1.
158).
As
??* *t'
rest are anudatta,
11
^fwâY.asn'^1
17.
This debars
words ata and the rest are acute.
the general rule by which, in one word only one syllable
'otcth'
is
fey
'TOijt iifef?^: 3*3'
anudatta at the
(Rig Veda*VIII. 75. 5).
But
11
end of a Pada or
x
quT'Sfr
*fe
frT: arc?*
verse.
where
it is
not at
the end of a verse (Rig Veda L 43. 2).

<{*
ITSRTTTfatfjW
qUBTSrT 33TO:
18.
W&*Zl
double- word
is
II
finally acute
when
it
denotes
tJsRTT
This would have been finally acute by Panini's rule also; VIII.
<k
shr
^jg^Tfi
'iin Hasr-jarre*'
19.
âmrmfsfg^ffiHJ atfwRro:
fef^3 mta:
UT2f:
All other double-words are anudatta.
Veda
I.
1.
3).
Thus nzvz'.
11 and 12.
11
?fcT
fixa f<ja (Rig
&c.
1.
wprrwj
the
feafsa
sfn
11
11
As TnmJW, (Rig Veda VII.
11
Here end
Phit Sutras,
8.
4)
(Vol. III. Accents Ch. III. 3708.
The Sjddhanta Kajmudi.
126
CHAPTER
III.
AFFIX-ACCENTS (continued).
Btoc
?in^Tfnra
wraq vnzxzm S3
S3Tc*
That which
3708.
ufa-
ll
srh Wff
II
called an affix, has an acute accent on its
is
first syllable.
This sutra
udatta accent
the
So
mfrh formed
3$0<5
Thus the
with the
The
(pit)
consists of
if it
hoi has udatta on the
affix
first
% as in SR^sm
fa (Unadi IV. 50),
affix
3RT^T fWHT
3709.
tory /#
and
affix,
The
more than one vowel, then on
Paribbasha or an Adhikara sutra.
also be treated as a
on the
of the vowels.
first
also
may
falls
<M
case-affixes (sup)
II
and the
affixes
having an
indica-
are anudatta.
As
This is an exception (apavada) to the last aphorism.

*T gwffc (Rig Veda V. 54. 3).
Here the root if^Traii is end-acute by VI. 1. 162. To
U;3ei,
so
also
]l
it is added 3PJ
which
v
Than is added fh^
becomes svarita, as it is preceded by an udatta (VIII. 4. 66).
which becomes monotone by I. 2. 39. S 3668, as' it is preceded by a svarita. So
the affix f?itf becomes monotone.
5^0
uwri
fen:
33tht srer
^fsro:
A stem
3710.
on the
final,
'bahu'
and
are
really
'akach'.
prefixes,
3W
affixes
*jj5R?r
siinrc:
It
>s
3^:
'qefc
affix
5^<fVwg ri^w a n
or augment or substitute)
i
having an iudicatory
affix
iu
<a,
the acute accent falls
an aggregate for the sake of
affixes
cnprST
rtfgfTOr
3
l
added
middle of the word, but
(Rig Veda VIII.
(Rig Veda
in the
the accent
(V. 3. 71).
TOnTOra^ SW
l
The affix srfrg is one of thoce few affixes which

The accent will not, therefore, fall on ^, but
(V. 3. 68).
of the whole word compounded of the prefix and the base. So
Thus
on the end; as
Vril. 21. 18).
gw'
gets acute on the end syllable.
'ch',
taking the stem and the
also with the affix
Thus:
^âwî
In the cases of
on the last syllabla
will fall
(formed by an
Ydrt:
'
H39
I.
Mg8
133. 4).
II
39.
1).
q^ S^rftw
(Rig Veda
0L.
On. Accents
III".
A stem formed
3711.
catory
formed by the
efitssnUJnf
WT^SSWro:, dual
accent
).
the
affix tcj (IV. 1. 98).

3i55i + îra +513cRTSauwf: i^JX being elided by II. 4. 62, aud thu
In this affix there are two indicatory letters g and
q?T55!Tq^JT, pi.
giving scope to g<KaT
with a Taddhita-affix having an indi-
has acute on the end syllable.
ch,
Thus
has only one function, namely, regulating the accent according
has two functions, one to regulate the accent by VI.
rule, while 5T
other to cause Vriddhi by VII. 2. 117.

the accent of
of
127
Affix-accents.
3714.]
III.
or of
and not of
Now
The present
for the latter finds
51,
regulate the accent,
3$<K
or'
fort:
1.
word get
arises the question, 'should the
rule declares that
a function
still
it
should get the accent
to
left
to this
197, and an-
while
it,
if
M39
fafTSFlf^rrensrf 3cfTfl:
II
stem formed by a Taddhita affix having an

tory ka has acute accent on the end syllable.
Thus uaTRtf:
Here the affix &R is added to *fisrby IV. 2. 33 S.
indica-
1236.
3^3
ffl^wn *ra:
33TtT:
*&5r7
HS3
fa^TT Sf T3*T sfajj:'
The Nominative
3713.
to
II
'HOT**:'
3712.
was
would have no scope.
II
plural fas of tisri has acute accent on
the last syllable.

Thus fa^T
2.
'fcTC^r! ITsfsf f&'
the
in
The
3714.
that follow
it
91. 3)
Observe
above example
tive be'ng
substitute would also
by VII.
debars
s'rf 3T31J
5f
of
||)
if
accent.
end-acute.
is
?re n mxa hh: nn ^sTfefawrysssTTiT

sîfa TTsr^rsaTrxr^ra st Wfr 'nij^ g &J
fJrfiQTfe T>RW ?
Here
100.
2.
that svarita
'stbt
nmm
II
and of the cases
the stem in the Locative
refers to the *r of the
Locative
plural.
Why do we say 'if the stem in the Locative plural is mononi^g $ Bs'mSTOHTft ^^JiSTrng' m vim (Rig Veda
though here
its
to *
fa&a$ imfa<V
and the rest'
being
This
because the stem in the Locative PI. of
dissyllabic
Observe
fflSJ
changed
case-affixes of the Instrumental
Thus grar fcTCH

I.
is
Plural is monosyllabic.
The word ST (locative
yllabic7
3B
st few? tractrraT
as, the
the 5iH svarita.
FjFTteifpw?
siTsrfa
f*W
affix
4 would have made
Therefore the word few:
few.'
35. 6).
I.
end-acute ; ,the feminine
is
Before the
be end-acute.
VIII.
stag: (Big Veda
SITS:
The word fa
Observe
it is
monosyllabic.
(R'g Veda VI.

s?
%z$ are
taken in the sutra,
1.
ira^T,
monosyllabic, but
say monosyllable '?
Why do wo
Why do say
13).
(Rig Veda X- 71.
the rule
is' not
4).
'
the
The
does not apply to fSUT
Instruments
plural of Loca-
and Fgfq
as in
128
[Vol.
the plural of the Locative they have more than

locative their
3$>n
^T^THT
one syllable, though in
^TgTffrerKMdU dL ^7 rKgTTgfarq gUTO

I
1XCT3T3T
dnjular
II
II
The same
3715.
3715.
III.
stem has one syllable.
WTfJ
STI
Accents Ch.
III.
may
case endings
optionally have the
acute
accent, if the monosyllabic
word stands at the end of a compound,
and has acute accent on the
final,
when the compound can be
easily
unloosened.
The phrases
j&X^. and rffTTUlferef m?*:

compounds are excluded by
are understood
nitya or invariable
WWîf:
SreT,
or
orrii
QtrofW:
or gi'lj:
So
also
here
mWcfgT
or
The
also.
Thus mirafsT,
this rule.
mw-
or
?3^t &c.
In the Chhandas, the case-endings other than the
3716.
sarvanamasthana, get the acute accent when coming after anch.

In the Vedas, a stem ending
^39
the word
in
the affixes previously mentioned, but on
only on
has the acute not
the accusative plural
Th.ua
affix also.
Here the word avftg had accent on \j>

by VI. 1. 222, but by the present sutra, the accent falls on the case-affix sjih u
Though the anuvritti of 'Instrumental anVl the rest was understood here-,
(Rig Veda I
ireeifw:
^T*T"3^ftiTT
&4. 13).
'
the word asarvanamasthana has been used
As gari*
ctTfFT nfflW^\zrcrT*T
3W
3^
(Rig Veda X. 87.
3fedMdWdJwSajOT
HSR H
<l
also.
* 33rjroiTOrj SRcTBW +'

<Hg3lj
^JTT 'sfw*
OT ^Tcfl ^^31*
^sgisir a
''HnfteTTrTa' ^r^h:
i o H^T^T^TTrRTW^fH cmam
I
wtwit in
wwtrV
'
sr
'^f^fsr^T'
to
4).
JTO5Ti:i W55TSTII
fw^faV.'
here to include the ending
g%:
'
'
'
3717.
acute accent,
'
'
(s^)
tissiroT^fcraj-'
^fa
tre
U3T33:
'
wfw :'
ifV*/ njj
vrsvuj
vrUv** 3 *t' 11a

'sinf
'nin a/nf* '*jjfr vr?rf '1 feci 'fsjiTst'
The same (asarvanamasthana) case-endings have
'on^HwifswrrV
'?
when
the stem ends in
'
van
'
;
fad &c
11
also after idam,
th<
afte
(upto 'nis' VI. 1. 63) after apa, puns, rai and div.
Thus (1.) 312:
tK^t, raTHT
Vdrt: In the case of 3*3 the penultimate 3; should be taken. Therefor
:
II
not here
*^sraT, *^sig
\\
toi.
Accents Ch.
III.
53W sfw5?WHW:
(2)
Not
so in anvadesa (II.
understood
this
in
in the case of
of ?3JT
is
si8TfR
350), because the anuvritti of qr^T3TTTr7 is

it
be said that there is final udatta
?a*T
Because in anvadesa
also.
expressly taught to be anudatta by
Thus
acute.
S.
in the following
muiT
Here
ût?*
mvii
17. 11).
Nor should
sutra.
anvadesa
(KigVeda IV.
32
4.
129
Affix-accents.
3719.]
III.
32,
4.
II.
the
and
Rik verse (Rig Veda IV. 32. 22):
*g
faraa:
substitute
*h3t
can never bo end-
it
fl
?3TO?H
ii
?htwjt is used as *H?orTis3I referring to
sw
preceding
of the
^,
line*
WTO "p and fms (VI.

i. 63, S. 228).
Thus q^wjf vrfw:
<5T* fsr^T (Rig Veda X.' 68. 6). sitqh* mfa
(Kig Veda I. 24. 12).
mfiff (Rig Veda X. 52. 3). jrafa^ %Z
ug
(3)
These are the
&g.
six
words
Qc$, ?f{,
(4)
(
HX
5)
*tr : as
as
WT^sr
(6)
*_-as wt ^n
(7)
fea as
3s><l*
sojj^t
(Rig Veda VIII. 14. 13).
*r
Veda
g*H: (Rig
I.
124.
(Rig Veda IV. 42. 10).
feg fî (Rig Veda
t*An
I.
7).
ffifc
y?rf (Rig
Veda V.
ii
The asarvanamasthana ease-endings after

when it gets the form ashta.'
3718.
15. 1).
1. 3).
'eight* have acute accent,
'ashtan'
The word wz?\ has two forms in the Ace. pi. and the other cases that follow
namely *Jtt5T and niz
The affixes of Ace. pi. &c, are udatta after the long
Thus *HT3rftl: (Rig Veda II. 18. 4) opposed to
form *JN5T and not after %avs
The word âzz * has acute on
*NS*fw:, WZ1W : con. ^jrelw, 'JH^T^ con. squfg
the last syllable, as it belongs to the class of ^?nfe words (Phit I. 21) ; and
by VI. 1. 180 the accent would have been on the penultimate syllable.
This
it,
rule debars
it.
After an oxytone Participle in at the feminine suffix

and the case endings beginning with vowels (with the exception of strong cases) have acute accent, when the participa
affix has not the augment n (i. e is not ant).
3719.
H*
(nadi)
The
word
iinfteTTTTfl 'after
*t55K3* frTOTSTTfrft (Rig Veda

If the
sNfft
participle
Here the accent
do we say
17
is
is
not having the
an oxytoned word'
III. 31.
not an
on the
6).
So also
is
understood here.
gyricra (III. 2.
80
S.
Thus
2990).
oxytone, the rule does not* af ply.

As sfefft,
syllable by VT.
1. 189. S. 3673.*
Why
first
augment
spr
?'
Observe
fjlEnft
Here also
by VI.
1.
[Vol. 111. Accents C&.
The SiddHanta Kaumudi.
130
3720
III.
186. S. 3730, after the root f?^ which has an indicatory *, in the Dhatupatha
This anudatta
âf, the sarvadhatuka affix sjq (^r) is anudatta.
being written
coalescing with the udatta
and
VIII. 2.
not the feminine
3jfiT^TP'
affix.
'^mT^ft'
(VI. I. 162), becomes udatta (V11I. 2. 5);

m of
not being held applicable here, the Participle gets the accent, and
*&cj,
'a,??
&*m$
isrra
sfsri
The same endings have
3720.
the acute accent,
acutely accented final vowel of the stem, a semivowel
and which
Sgcf
is
have consequently acute accent on the
^TSîTHal:
But not
3721.
(IV.
11),
3.
I.
itrsn
$$t (Rig Veda VII.
All these are <j^ ending
1).
final (VI. 1.
RSU
163).
is
of the feminine
substitutes
vowels of the root, when
final
a^rsr^resr.
is
vfasp^T,
udatta (III.
ing vowel
*JTT,
of the
udatta
preceded by
is
^T^î
37
(IV.
1. 3),
The
<sr
last sutra,
but
Let
svarita.
^^'
us take
original
being substituted by VI.

(Rig Veda VI.
3$^
xjonrifs'
Thus gfFSRTErf'
4.
affix after
the second
the oxytone.
before the vowel case-endings.
83.
it
would
the general rule VIII
an example of a semi-vowel
93^cT' and x$i*p3T, iSIHizf
ffit^ affix,
namely,
accent,
the
*35^*cTt';
respectively formed by
its
not being so,
substitute of the vowel of a root (^Tg-tmr)
retaining
of the
substituted for 3; before the ending
a semi-vowel substitute of an udatta (33TTraH[)
compound
66) or
also udatta (VIII. 2. 5).
from 5B3iwI and
1.
consonant, the weak case-
from \ft*raf which has acute accent on 3?, because

and the ekadesa of it, wlien it combines with the preced-
have become udatta by the

it
2. 4 applies and makes
gwi
affix 'u>
66), or the final of a root.
1.
endings beginning with a vowel do not take the acute accent.
3i3? is
76. 7\
words aud
ii
when the vowel
so,
After the semi-vowel
udatta
for the
substituted,
preceded by a consonant.
Thus gisfa^ fW*ITW (Rig Veda

snq Sf^H HfcT% (Rig Veda IT. 30.
3^<l
when
is
member
tfce
of the
semi-vowel
So also
^TFcrrsR:
66. 3).
l*3Jf*T WjFW
<*&
II
II
'+ T3J53T3g +'
TJ3T
^^H:'
II
The otherwise unaccented mat (vat) takes the acute

accent, when an oxytoned stem ends in a light vowel, or the affix
has before it the augment n (VIII. 2. 16),
3722.
Accents Oh.
"ol. III.
III.
word *!FRT3THT?f
KThe* fem
as
76,
2. 16,
is
is
understood here
Thus
also.
So also when w?ro takes

tggq^m, *^g'rT: 3iff5i'fT: qmu: (Rig Veda X. 71. 7).
Here by VII.
the word srfg takes ww^ and becomes n&\, then is added *$% by VIII.
and we have *g^ ^ WfTtr
The preceding sj. is elided. When the stem
iafsmT
OT
Affix-accents.
3725.]
ûff?
(Rig Veda V. 42. 14).
as I hh ^
rule does not t*pply
mFST fcl3The word |g has acute on the first syllable, as
So
affix 3
(Un 1. 10) which is f*rl (Un I. 9;.
not oxytone (antodatta) this
fexniT^ (Rig Veda
formed from
it is
g^
the wcjc^ retains
42. 2).
II.
its
with the
anudatta here.
So also in the case of
does not become acute, though the word
tervening
^*fgvn
faQrclT^T Scfrofl (Rig Veda

Vdrt
The
affix
*req TT = *fa*CTTfel
tion of one, as
* ?,
YII.
1.
U*??'
is
this, as
41.
icHrft
**iûij
also
added
affix is
JTScST
III. 47.
is
1),
2),
become
then, gnna, as
zj
heavy vowel of *
the
acute after
vocalisation of
of *fq, as
?:
as
^, then substitu-
Veda VIII.
t^T^ ^9**: (R'g
in
nam' has optionally the acute

^Wrftw (Rig Veda I. 3. 11).
2.
13) 4
accent.
'
or sfisfttaj, cUSflfw, or
3Rr7*dlTP[ or 5Rfl%nT*? (see
^Tffsrm
II
In the Chhandas, the ending ' nam/ has diversely the
acute accent after the feminine
affix
'
i.'
Thus ScrFRTTm ^?w^[fft5TiT, (Rig Veda X. 103.

Bot take place, as SHinTtam *T5: (Rig Veda X. 103. 8),
3$*U
TCfc^rlrif ÎTfe:
3^t swft gHTfafg
Mffff55Trn
HS*
The case-endings beginning with

acute accent after the Numerals called, skat
after tri
The
it
does,
'
ferfwrsa s'g'
II
a consonant, have the

(T. 1. 24), as well as
and cJwtur.
anuvritti of *nsrrteTT?T3f ceases
u5T and
o^ftf :,
Sometimes
8).
w ^fwf* wtV.'
3725.
Why
fact that
Veda
in-
maxim
the general
(Rig
"
54).
3724.
like
affix
After an oxytoned stem which ends in a light vowel
3723.
Thus
II.
JTrT<J
There
the genitive ending

So
zrcpn^, the
stj^srofgamT^cTcJ does not apply here, because the very
only taken as an, exception, shows
has acute on, the final as the
VP6*{|
makes the 3 of heavy when the
fj
sfcFT
trgw:,
do we say
which
nWfro, ^thiw.
for
are acute on the

fcrftl:,
thepresent rule applies even to words

initial
hv Phit
faw!., TttmSre,
II.
5.
âwfw
before case-affixes begiuuiug with consonants
'
Thus*
WHifm
(See VII.
Observe
1.
55)
|[flSL
The Siddhanta Kadmudi.
132
<j*a {VI.
167 and VII.
1.
SI fs?|J (g
m fffWsWf:
2. 99).
Veda IX.
[Vol. III. Accents Ch. III. 3726.
(Rig Veda
II.
18. 4).
fafn?
67, 26).
The foregoing
from VI. 1. 168 downwards have

no applicability after go, and 's>an' and words ending in them; nor
after a stem which before the case ending of the Nominative singu^
ar has a or a, nqr after 'raj,' nor after a stem ending vaanch, no.P
after krunch and krit.
3726.
mWvr
Thus nan, S,
1.
the case-endings
168,
rules
ngf 3IHT (Rig Veda
as in
Here by VI.
is however
(Big Veda VIII. 45j,
122. 7).
I.
would have got otherwise the accent, which
So also ^T, Sând ||rKim

iftwft iTTrJW
Here VI. 1. 169 is prohibited. So also srU, *f$, *fun?T-, UlWSpT, VJM^
and unrÎwror
SRrsa^qw (Rig Veda V. 2. 7), The woTd HToignf:
(igt ^loWff-:) means 'what
has sj or nx before *| (1st sing.)
Thus **:,
*$m\, **:
Hwiteraw (Rig Veda V.79. 7). mj HT%
^nj (Rig Veda I.
prohibited.
30).
'
mt
2. 1).
sh^ =
the
lm TWTTTstT
f^
prohibition
nasal
nasal
W&
the
there
also'
is
from
&
<
to
The word
applies
*T5$
is
fg^
formed by
form of
that
to
this
affix.
word wherein.
Thus Tn%g"T, HV\Wiro

Where the
must take the accent ; as itHIt tit *
fag^ formed word. Thus afs^T, apg, tWWsfisgi
3<rJ
do' or from
'to cuN;
by fcfclTj; as sfm, #3
elided (VI.
not
is
derived
the
elided,
is
*m?f{
is
So also xtmi,
ssisg
4.
30).
case-ending
'
and tgros-rn
Why has the word *&*[ been especially mentioned in thi^
sutra, when the rule would have applied to it even without such enumeration,
l
because
word assumes
the Nominative Singular this
in
quently
it
is
3Tag?fc
The
inclusion
should not be considered asiddha for the purposes

sent rule will not apply
as ^T and
fijrn after
Singular of
affix
^gq
176
will be
will be
will get
fer.
to,
words
like
the elision of
qft
by VI
udatta after
sj
and
of
168
1.
fam
ftrej
qj^
;
5iiW wfk5TT3TT?T
by VI.
that the elision
which
(VII.
in,
of
Norn.
3. 94).
Sing, end in q|f
Thus the Locative

and the.
But rule VI. I.
1.
176 as
ftr<$Fr?5T
^^PWr, because %^ is
'sfwTTgfw'i
f' ?fn
foil
a jgras
'â'
rcir*^
After [&;.}& ease-ending beginning with bha or sa
3727.
Therefore, the pre-
of.this rule.
this prohibition not applying,
debarred by the present in the case of
an
the form ^qTT and conse-
of Scl^ indicates
is
unaccented.
Thus
Why
sfttirw, afftf Trgf*: (Rig
do we' say
Rig Veda
I.
beginning with a
7).
H?5T
Veda
I.
34.
8).
consonant'
This debars' VL
Observe
1.
168, 171.
3Uc^p^ feir
feil^
Vol.
Accents Ch.
III.
9t>^
? ^TOrlTOT*
9C8
II
ending beginning with bha or $0
-4fter w *% a case
3728.
I 33
A fpix- accents.
3730.]
III.
is
optionally unaccented.
Thus sf fir.
Yeda IX. 75. 3).
3^<
or *&$:, sf
frlf?Krft;TW
3729.
w,
But not
^w:, =f varo,
#.'
s?p?t*j,
9*U
sjfiurow
(Tîg;
II
affix
^3,
'
so ^tt,
/,
svarita
is
i. e.,
has
pircumflex accent.
Thus
faeRTiznT, ferf|TC5rJT,
This
USr! (III. 1. 124).
For exception
adyudatta.
formed by
(III.
nr{
an exception
is
to III.
1.
213
tp ttys rule see yi. 1,
makes
which
&c.
with
^t"q*t
97). srt'^W,
1.
affixes
all
Veda
eWR5*fj (Rig
I.
88. %)\
5^0 h wwdii%f?3^^mi^T^Tg^w32:TTm^f;criT
1
StStJITO
^SJrlw
ft'iffta:'
^3T^r1
'
q *l*cT
fgr^5[T5W^q 5(TIc7
guihairsOTTi!
5fcT cfrTiBJJJ
3730.
t^
'sift?
sKj'lTT^ *3*f"
ûrai'sf
'gj&l
Sl^'fTW:'
'
I
'
fsRJT
'<*cfts
9<=
STCwiraiTr]
rnFQTfswn
'^rosTEr*' fei*j
s 9
'
11
3^5T,
^F 3.3
fsraTsn
'
1
^ IF*-' (iSIl) ?frT |[ WTO felflW U

The Personal-endings and their substitutes (III. 2.
'
are,
J24-126)
feci:
Osl'T
f^y
'
Bfiâ 'n^TrlF*
*
when they
are s&rvadhatuka (III.
4.
113 &c), un-
accented, after the characteristic of the Periphrastic future
tasi'
Dhatupatha has an unaccented vowel or

a n (with the exception of hnun and in' ) as indicatory letter,
as well as after what has a final a in the Grammatical system of
which
after a root
'
in the
'
'
'
'
'
'
Instruction (upadeâ).
Thus
Anudattet:
rnfe:, oFht*,
5B5frlfw: (Rig
as,
*TH
Veda VII.
g^MolT g^FJrVW
*rfi n,
S?T*rT,
104. 8).
Veda
fJt'g
debars the
arar*:, this
cW
Ifer7
I. 3.
1).
fee?:
gijihff::
root
fW\
affix
accent (III.
#r7. site
1.
3).
*Fw3T
as rf^rn, ffcTO> if 3??:, ^ScT: l

taking srq^ (>%) is considered as
ending with an V, as the indicatory letters tj and g

Thus ugin*:,
maxim 1T^5IW SJpN?nf;T?3ifci ( = sqÛolrei)
The augment ipj is added by nw JTeK yiT. 2. 82 which may be
a^WR:
explained in two wajs
fimt, the augment g?F is a ided to the final *ji of the
base (anga) when sn?T
follows
or secondly, the augment TT5R is
<fcc.)
('SHl^ra
added to the base (anga) which eds in 9, when vi^ fallows.
In the first case
and therefore Weftrirar will mean aud include
W^j becomes part and parcel of
an sh haying such jpj, on the maxim USTIWTri^2#WriT5rT3U^R T^jrT That
taught (upadesa) as
if
are disregarded on the
134
augment
to which an
not merely
denotes
it
III.
Accents Ch.
because the augment
added denotes,
is
but
itself,
[Vol.
whatever results
also
III.
forms part of
from
with that augment.'
Therefore JpR will not prevent the verb becoming
be taken as
secondly
JT5R
part of the
which *'ends
base
it
combination
its
But
if
3730*
in
*n3rtr3 sj
then the
"sg,
But we get
âqifsj, because TI intervenes.
by considering jter augment as Bahiranga and therefore asiddha
not follow an
STEnetaTrTcR does
rid of this difficulty
when the Antaranga operation of accent
The augment *p$
to be performed.
is
(w) in the last two examples consequently does not prevent the application of the
Though
rule.
STR^ has an
the affix
debarred by this rule, as
Why
it is
do we say after Hlfe &c.
10) fas^rfWF:
The vikarana
fa^ accent (VI. 1. 163)

As 5TOOT5T ^3 3W (Rig Veda I. 1. 8).
indicatory ^, yet
subsequent.
**j
*fw3$
Observe
is
(I. 2.
fee?
4)
Veda
(Rig
TOlftri:
with regard
to
III
is
&
operatuns
and not those which affect the subsequent.

Therefore
though 'ag is considered as fea for the purposes of preventing the guna of the
prior term fg, it will not be considered so for the purposes of subsequent accent.
Or the word Wfj in this &utra may be taken as equal to f^3133I and not the
Why do we use the word upadesa 1 So that the rule
'HTfa^fsToR feci 1'ke *g
may apply to if gig:, trenr:, but not to ^h:, <gsj: the dual of n^r. which ends in ?j
affecting the prior term,
though before yra and
in upadega,
sro
has assumed the form
it
Therefore
Why
do we use the word *f

Observe gRrftl fa^T^rr formed by SJTT^ added to *&\ (III. 2.
(Peisonal endings) ?
128), which not being a substitute of *r<, is not a personal ending like TgT^g
$-,
^SjSi
^HT^masft
(Rig Veda VI.
60. 6).
Why
do we use the word Sarvadatuka
do we say with the exception of

Vartika
JC15IT
Prohibition
(Rig Veda VII.
This
is
8.
t?sj^
Observe
and e^?
must be stated
rtprcj,
Observe l*lh
of fa^,
In
fsjfaif?:
,
Why;
^^ v^BIR*
i*a, and fxs^
II
Thus ^p^T
1).
explained in the Mahabhashya on sutra
3731.
fajso IB
'sich
'
Aorist, the
first
VL
syllable
1. 16.1.
may
S. 3651.
optionally
have
the acute accent.

The word ^flrT
m fc ^Tfcrem
40. I
and VII.
*S^
understood here.
Thus,
So
11
m fs m
TiJ,
m f% srtcT T*f
mfqxi srf&rfas% (Rig Veda VIIV
also
67. 10).
*lfo
when
falls either
ing.
is
ht f% ?nfciifT
^^T
cTT
%t
Before the ending tka of the
3732
singular,
or
this.ending takes the
on the
first syllable,
It
Perfect, second person
augment
or on this
i,
i,
the acute accent
or on the personal end-
Vol.
III.
Accents Ch. IV 3735.]
Thus g
srflsisi,
tj*f
few,
the syllable preceding the
^fg V,
may
affix
get the four forms given above.

fall
When
on any syllable.
3S>33
35TtW
ftTff
f*?nfauFrrcawT?"*m3iTT wt?t
(VI*.
Ur$
lias
1.
rlo
3676)
S.
an
indicatory
Thus we
193).
may
the accent
on the root and we
the accent falls
193
1.
qqra
ll
II
u^ts^s
'
^^
not
Wrnq^lTT:
sgfrl
What is
3733.
As
have also the accent (VI.
vi is
and srafem
135
In short, with ^si termination,
the
f^ accent
have one form only by
Accent of Compounds.
formed by an
II
having an indicatory ra
affix
has acute on^the penultimate syllable, the
word consisting
full
of more than two syllables.
penultimate syllable can be
H^Hta^by giT^
word consisting of three syllables
only in a
^w^qw
Thus SMurfam and
or more.
formed by *Rtat (III. 1. 96) ; JjgSU Bin:,

This debars III. 1. 3.
33113^3
(V. 3. 19)
II
Here end
Affix-accents.
^wra^rer:
^jto
CHAPTER
IV.
ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS.
$$38
uir fan*
(Rig Veda
existent for the purposes of
may
^9
not be
final,
the
fiual
I.
accent
3735.
the udatta
will fall
SRTsfttT
In a Bahuvrihi, the
in the first
the vowel though
member
w*r*IT
it
\
,
The word Tjga^W means here the

is
being held to be non-
on
being a consonant.
'Scar3^raa^tfm:
first
member
original accent.
which
acute on the last syllable.
The consonants
4. 7).
*$r*T ip***
ssiT^ftrrorfn ip na w3?qt vx\t[
3$>3U
II
A compound word has the
3734.
Thus
tttUMUl
accent
whether
means, 'retains
By
the
its
'33ra~'
wife fa*|
preserves
udatta
or
its
own
svarita
own nature, does
not-
the final of a
com
last rule
become modified into an anudatta accent.'

their accent,
pound -efs the accent, so that all the preceding members lose
except one,
unaccented
are
syllables
all
word
one
in
become anudatta, as
accent
Thus the first member of a Bahuvrihi would have lost its
1.158.
to the
exceptions
the
comimences
become anudatta with the present sAtra
Thus
^9WH:
Sfara*T*
udatta.
always
that the final of a compound is
j
II
and
VI.
and
rule
36
[Vbi. III. Accents Ch. IV. 375$.
Therefore
The words udatta, and svarita are understood in this aphorisrri.
the syllables of the purvapada are anudatta, the present rule has no geupe
there, and such a compound will get udatta on the final by the universal rule
Thus otot8:> here HW being all anudatta, the accent
enunciated in VI. I. 223.
if all
falls
on
it
tl
5jjh ngir^vrfTTWra^^
HFCT5U:
*3ic*n
foRT^TTJT 5RTî: fcfifteRTin:
Hosier,
In a Tatpurusha, the
3736.
'aifsrrTînsaT
'a^tW^SfS^f'
first
0>a*)
*5Uc?rf
?^
W^CtffrT 3RT35R
member
preserves
^rfa
llfcT
its origi-
when it is a word (l) meaning a resemblance', or (2)

an Instrumental Or (3) a Locative or (4) a word with which the
second member is compared, (5) or an Indeclinable, or (0) an Accusative, or (7) a Future Passive Participle.
nal accent,
Thus
'
(1)
(2)
1. 30).
ed
as a
rT^Jf
When
fcfifsr;:
fcRfj
is
55nra?T:
?!
68, S. 749 and
This
a Karmadharaya compound formed under II*
is
member
the first
is
formed by the Unadi
is
in the Instrumental case, as

affix
^togi (Un. IV.
(Un. IV. 142) has udatta on the
When
(3)
being formed by 973
the
g^TjUT (Rig Veda
first
member
is
first
;
143), and
(VI.
f?
it
1.
1.
216ji
f^TOT:
(II*
being treat-
final.
a word in the Locative case,
as
tl?WW3-
Here
WBfzjrjg^n is c, Locative Tatpurusha compound. 3ffS33rj is an epithet of Indra.

JTâfrT^wreii = ? ;? 3PGTJT H
When the first member is a word with which the second member is com(4)
These compounds are formed by II. 1. 55.
pared, as
n&?wnm
graft is
formed by Gauradi #txi and is final-acute.
4.
I.
7).
When
(5)
67. 9
).
II
The
the
first
member is an Indeclinable as, ^HiterreaJ (Rig Veda Vl

compouud has udatta on the first, it is formed by II.
I
Indeclinable
2. 5.
Vdrt:
In
compounds, tne
Indeclinable
oases of
those which are
formed by
the
negative
(nipata).
Though ST5I is one of the Nipatas, its
^-accent debars even the subsequent ^-accent as
Therefore,
it
does
not apply to
<TrTT9iT*rQR:
rule
by
applies
only
to
and by Particles
separate mention indicates that
Particle
g?,
*iaRfiu: (III. 3. 112, S. 3389).
which has acute
on the
final a"nd
belongs to Mayuravyansakadi class.

(6)
They
When
cented on the
(7)
first
(VI.
1.
1.
member
29.
is
in the accusative case, as:
w^tT* belongs to
ôt^lf?
class
gfT^tf'S*?
acutely
and
ac-
is
last.
When
compounding
final
the
are formed by II.
is
the
by
185).
first
II.
1.
member
G8.
is
WTOT
a Kritya-formed word, as, WTS^CHTTT

is
formed by Tmri
and has
The
svarita on the
Vol.
airraid
^rrat^H
aiijgTfaiTKtj?j
137
Accents of Compounds.
Accents Ch. IV. 3739.]
III.
nz vmrni h<^^
xis
s.njraiT*:
$tf*n
The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its original accent, when a word denoting color is compounded with another color-denoting word, but not when it is the word eta.
3737.
Thus
SUlfH1Tf[T, ^T*fscJeR*mTO:
has acute on the

(Un. III. 94)
Why
final (III.
we say
do
Why
do we say
223).
Why
'
II.
1.
197).
Observe
it
is
5a'
affix
(Un.
trcircian
4)
and
to
223).
(VI. 1.
Observe ^TSufff ;
IT.
added
affix r[
Observe SFurtfHsn:* (VI.
color-denoting word' ?
1.
The com-
69.
1.
irrcraa^T: tot
saSrsrrcnsih: TrmmsTfefa
ffmrofwsTrraftsiawnf
formed by mfi
is
formed by the
(VI.
first
but not when
do we say
is
color-denoting word'
with another
pounding takes place by
ass*
i$m
sfrrgH
1, 3).
ssr
8 u
*^v
cirssiii
* gsrrram
'Terror'
n3traT
fa*
wtr
^foirrygssR*?
trewmw
ano-
11
The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its original

when the second term is 'gadha' or lavana, and the com-
3738.
accent,
pound expresses a
'
measure or mass.'
Thus *?t *irna*pOTJ
'
water as low or
m 39HT3T,
depth of a pestle/
much
'so
are Genitive Tatpurusha compounds,
fordable as an Aritra
salt as
sjrfnr is
may
be given
formed
by the
t. e.
to a cow.'
affix
^r
of the
These
added
to
and has acute on the middle (III. 1. 3): ttt is formed by iT (Un.
The word ujtuh here denotes quantity/
II. 68) and has acute on the final <5rr
' measure, '* mass,
' limit,
and not merely the length.
The power of denot-
SR (III.
2.
184),
'
'
by these words
ing measure
When
sea*
fair
not denoting
i
acnrraci
here indicated by and
is
nmu
cthiS
wnnvMj
we have
s
(S.
is
depeudeut upon accent.
3734).
wrerTQia: n
its
In a Tatpurusha compound, having the word dayada as

second member, the first member denoting inheritance preserves
its
original accent.
3739.
Thus fasf T3THT3:, V*ren*T3r:

The word
Though the Unadi Sutra II.
II. 81).
I
>3T5f
(Un.
preceded by
is
?*T,
yet by the rule of siTpr
not preceded by
18
fsf,
(III. 3.
and *R has acute on the

'
;."
\FT
is
derived by adding j
81 ordains
1) it
?g
after the
comes after VT,
first (III. I. 3).
also
root
when
to
vn
it
The Siddhanta Kaumum.
138
\tfhy do
we say
223) taking the
final
ufoswaifg
'
(Vol.
when meaning inheritance
'
III.
Accents Cb.
IV.
3739
Observe UWSTStI: (VI,
1.
acute of a compound.
fStfsr
v&mi
sftcuito^hiit feaRTSwrfci
QZrimrwsv
srror.
wwhfiT
rtireferfcr
mv&
eattM^sn tm$
i
fo^ f ^rere^*? h
In a Tatpurusha compound, having the Words ckira or
3740.
sit
iifcrafaj
'tifrisrfei
'
member, tlie first member, when it denotes

that which experiences an obstacle, preserves its original accent*
kvichchhra, as its second
The words xvsm and SJTB**IF are formed

Thus S*Rf<a*sr, or aif 3C<IJ3I^*| \
This compound belongs either
and have far* accent (VI. 1. 193).
to the class of Mayura-vya n sakadi (II. 1. 72), or of an attribute and the thing
qualified.
When going to a place is delayed owing to some defective arrangement or cause, or becomes difficult, th^re is produced an obstacle or hinderauce, and
Why do we say which experiences a hinderor W&fSvgi^
is called im^lf^T
by
^; affix,
'
ance
'
Observe *nre?^5JT
fi.HJIU3IT
II
its original
pada denoting
The word
3f[Kcra5T
member
In a Tatpurusha compound, the first

accent, when the second member
3741.
serves
II
tffew
The word
a pretext/
*Btraf3J
I
pre-
the word
is
means
Gone on
a pretext,'
pretext of
derived by
JT3T is
3^
'
s ^TlRR
'Thus
a contrivance.'
irferaii
voiding urine or excreta.
adding the
v&\ to the
and has acute
affix
of jth, (Un. IV. 163),
the
root *ra,
on the
first
3J
(VI.
The word s^Tt

it may be a word formed by tt to the root tt^ram
The
formed by ^ra and by VI. 2. 144, S. 3878, has acute on the final.
compounding takes place by It. 1. 72 or it is an attributive compound.
1.
197) or
is
also
Why
tj'dW
3sr
foam
TJ^rrfTjjsa; tit
tfSMr*
when meaning a pretext V
do we say
3T3^t5t
gmûnsnfV?*
fasiTrrej^na S$: nrair
3742-
fawn
ira JJ
fsrail-
it
RFUsir trans u&rtn
n the ene of
'a
>
s^foSTrrw
Sv3J
fasnHn
ll
In a Tatpurusha compound, the

1
Observe
ll
first
protection from wind.'
is
member
the word
preserves
'
nivata*
AcoRffTa Ph. IV. 37 H.]
Vol. flL
Thus
So
also
wxm:
pound =gTrTW
^tfa^THfJ & c
eJr^lfacnR*?
(II.
->
sranfwr^
words
of two
others hold that
The
accent.
hero
3.
in
last (III.
augment
Uff with the
sr
to &} and, the affix has the
the
compounds
by adding
has the acute on the first
it
an Avyayibhava
faclJfT is
41).
1.
a hut as the only shelter from the wind*.'
The Word
0): or a B&hUYri&ivftfffl
1.
are examples of
formed by ^tij (IV.

*j& is derived from
fejjrj,
^tfagTrm
qvSJg' fa^TF? = *F
ufaqTrH* or
139
is
gjjjt is
Some
say that
1.
3).
and treating
derived by the
nut
urord
apposition.
^5R
it is
com-
The
it
but part
indicatory
as
&m
affix
of
affis.
Why
SWfrT=
do we say when meaning' a shelter from wind
he
'
lives
3$83
3743.
II
fan
^tHTOTOPH
a Tatpunusha compound,, the first member pre-
*5^T^*g' ÎTSJcjr^
serves
Observe TTtF*9TH
Here fasUH = OTTO: or vicimt>y.
under the shelter of the king,'
^TRts^TrlS
'
Iii;
SIPirfSfi:
its original
'
WflTfii
'
accent,
word
the
is
*Sarad' having any other sense than that of autumnal.'

'
The word lVTrT3 means appertaining to season (^r?) i. e. when the word
Thus ?55rajHcttf53ifJ
VJIZ does not refer to the season of STCrj or autumn.
fresh drawn water.'
and it forma,
The word 3JT*3 means here fresh,' new
The word ToS! is formed by 3 affix added to ^fj 11$*
an, invariable compound.
being elided.'
The affix 3 is treated as far? (Un. I. 9) aud the
I. 15), the s
t
'
'
'
on the
accent--, falls
Why
syllable (VI.
first
197)^
I.
when not meaning autumnal'

the best autumnal grass &c/
(VI. I; 223).
do we say
3$>88
siwgsKirc^rafm
W53T53*. I^TSISISfl:
Thus
îsr'o^g':
3.
S'>
Ta IhiU
I
101), audi
also
formed by
dp,
Tli s
with a hxed meaning*
added thi
is
^rUnjUcl"**
q<> u
rJWTH-' ^TUtHaTt^Tf^wr^^' (q8C) ^fo fare:
word ^hEP* or SRUTO
is the-
kind,'
(IV.
Observe
qiS^*aRT^9R
3744 In a Tatpurusha compound denoting a genus, the

member preserves; its original accent, when the second men-
first
ber
<
we say
'
affix
eRS
the affix
affix
h derive
faff* (IV. 3.
^TgiK^âTaxT.
tt
II
is.
then.
This
by
104.
eLijled;
is
to
S.
affu (LII.
by IV.
acme on
Obsetve,
I.
34),
1484), in the sense

3. 107,
a Genitive compound.
ad led to gT* and has
when, meaning a genua'
compound denoting 'genus
Appositional
an,
is
S.
to
of
3f
it
oris
WirTi
1487.
The word
the final (VI,
mmyajfl,
and
1.
^rarfifaT
WJvyv
165).
UTcF^T9: (VI?
1.
223).
140
mm-, fa
wfaT
faqe^sj:
'm^*'
[Vol. III. Accents Ch. IV. 3745.
fajj
qare?ir:
smHT*if.r* qre*mT*rai
Iq a Tatpurusha compound expressing resemblance

with some one or something, the first member preserves its origin3745.
when the second member is
al accent,
Thus faq^f^r:
and
Why
finally accented.
is
lUJTOfW
not
The word
(VI.
223)
1.
fijj is
sadrtea
'
or
'
pratirupa'
?j^ (Un II. 95)

when meaning resemblance' ? Observe
honor' and
of the compound is that of
do we say
here the sense
'
formed by Unadi
affix
'
lesemblance.'
3$>8S
xnmt
jft
nmmww '+nm^
i
second
'fgm' fsR*
member
first
member is
43
f^ innra
?ff? wreito
i
#fiirei:
*!rrciaTTi:
preserves
'vwiw' fa*| rorotrTOH?
Tatpurusha compound denoting
In a
quantity', the
^t fgmfsfoff*'
scroti^ tn^striew:
3746.
its original
'
urarwm
ii
measure or
when the
accent,
a Dvigu.
Thus **BratrOTT:
The word 3<?Wt: = S1H8OT: WTHnww I the affix wrro
denoting 'measure' (V. 2.37. S. 1838) is elided (See V. 2- 37. S. 1838 Vart) wrWI
wtrWWTO
5K3TFt
the
first.
Why
ifraWRBW:
do we say
'when denoting measure
mnnsrciss **
3747.
an Eastern seven-years old
Observe
?*
tmj&
'
before a Dvigu'
nÔTgrf^
Before the word
a Tatpurusha preserves
its
'
uTRH^HJm
traagifar
vanij
accent,
';
Observe arffWW;
nr! has acute on

Why -do we say
'
prefers
a trader,
when
it is
'
retfasinj
the
first
w^srifmsr*
member
of
a word specifying the
place whither one has to go, or the ware in which one deals.
Thus w^3Tfar5i:=JT^rfei5 JTF3T sramfcrT
the Madra-merchants i. e. 'who
Madra All these are Locative oompuunds.
WS is derived by
affix (Un II. 11 ) and is acutely accented on the last (VI. 1. 165),
In the
'
trade by going to
CoK
'
sense of qraq we have

II.
irtarftnST.
'
a dealer in cows
'
fh
is finally
accented (Un
67).
Why
deals
\
'
do
we say
Observe
'
the
place whither
tTTTT^nfoi^r:
II
one goes, or the goods
in
which
oi
Vol.
Accents Ch.
III.
The
3748.
member
first
before the words
matra,'
141
Accents op Compounds.
IV. 3751.]
accent
its
'upakrama, and 'chhaya' when
upajna,'
these words appear as neuter.

Thus twgjjrnJ
The word
being = fQTQTW*nnrnif, and
is
JTHTT
synonymous with ?pa, the phrase

The word fug t is derived
is herje
a Genitive compound.
from fag, by the feminine affix * (III. 3. 103. S. 3280), and has acute on the final
(II. 1. 3). So alao with 3<n&T, as qifdRiaOT (see II. 4. 21). All these are Genitive
compounds. The word
^faamflll
qrfifffsf is
first.
So also with 3095*?,
The word **3 is formed by *re (III. J. 144). The

Tatpurusha compounds ending in 3TOT and 315**1 are neuter by II. 4. 21. So
also with 5TBT, as îreaTTTO
The word *i| is derived from ** by 3 affix (Un. I,
as
JTRTfa
13),and.it being treated as faff (Un.
The compound
I.
197).
by
II. 4. 22.
a$8<
3749.
When
compound
the
TOfjraSTfia
The
is
is
member
first
when the second term

delight, or
I.
9) the acute falls
a Genitive Tatpurusha
is
is
on *the
^tmjf
first
syllable (VI.
and
3?Tirr;
it
not a Neuter we have gftTOiQT

1
is
Neuter
(II. 4. 25).
sukha or priya, and the sense
its
accent
is
to feel
'
good.*
Thus wrag&T? 'the pleasure of going.' TUT^ftrqw

These are appositional
compounds.
The word nwi is formed by FU^ affix and has acute ou the syllo le
preceding the affix (VI. I. 193).
The word sukha and priya have the gene of
denoted by the first term
e. when the thing
fTSrI or 'well' 'good? 'beneficial,'
the cause of pleasure or delight. When this is not the sense we have trcfftrahl H
1
:'.
3SU
lftm
WRW^<D15t1T3t3t
'tftrh'
The
3750.
uTijrRW
ntr^T jrarroT
f*TR
first
MS
wu?Hirsj*3
I
II
mas*?
rTaWpSW
sraftwT.ywra:
mvwvmnMfl
II
member of a Tatpurusha preserves
the second term being sukha or priya in the sense of
its
accent,
agreeable to
One, or desired/
Thus OT9H!]Fct9 ma# 'the sweetmilk desired by or agreeable to the Brahmanas/ $i4fairoront!: &c.
The words WTWO and ^T^r have acute on the final
bein<< f.rmed'by the nffixes *jhjt and th respectively (V 4. 62 and III. I. 3).
When
not meaning agreeable to or desired, we have tT5fW<3W,
II
5W
*9 *crcfnfa
wifinisi n* sasifa ggu* mil
qs
11
mwiwt
saw'
fa
mwsnift
11
The Siddhanta Kaumuw.
142
Iq a Tatpurusha compound,
3751.
tnin'asits secotid member,

thing possessed, retains
the
III.
having the word 'sva-
when
term,
first
denotes the
it
member
first
not a word
is
denoting possss-
II
In a Tatpurusha ending
3752.
ter' or
'
lord,'
Thus
the
first
member
nfrraisa
u*
TOi^snftafsi
The words
3753.
pati when
(III
3TSR,
The word
trm
wsr;
preserve their original accent in a Tatpurusha,,

fore the
word pati denoting
:,
ed by VI.
f^fyâfti*:
sisFjifk;
STRfgw
err
i
gsrc*
vrcRnffi:
'^fn^* 7
*o
^"9
~'
however, do not
when coming
be-
aphorism. Thus *mfa* 3T^ffi%

compounds and are finally accent**
,.
rr
^ **^
The word bhuvana may
3754.
Tatpurusha, before pad denoting

Thus WERqffl*
or
ggsrofa:
and has acute on tie
wf^rai^gHTu:
a Tatpurusha
first
tfwras-H-f
Before
3755.
(VI.
3nrer|;
I.
it,
a.
'lord.'
wan
The word
gasraisa:
optionally keep its accent in
formed by wi% (Un.
is
IlL
197).
jm^Tsrjpfm
3iraTO,
xtosttsctvjij
and ^fcm, the
compound preserves
its
nireSsta:
first
mrem-
member
when
original accent,
in
it
treats about a supposition.
The word HOTsr^TT * nfcrimtvaRtqnn: the hesitation about the

Thus rm^T*3T^* cr<f ^ one fers the journey'
Similarly
'
a thing.'
EJH
'
ttjt^
R nv Vi.lv
223.
I.
3^8
last
All these- are Genitive
ll
fe
'lord.'
This debars the accent taught by the

?V7fvfr
formed by
is
frffwuf??:
fkfw
and
f^rT,
accent
ig
3).
I.
3?Hfa
means 'mas*
it
its original
60. 4).
I.
final
cTcssxj
*T,
in
preserves
(Rig Veda
i$Strfag$-
3frs*T
144) and has aoute on the
(III. I.
80),
"Accents Oh. IV. 3751.
its original accent.
Thus irr 5TTJTt

When the
we have urocarat
i
sion,
(Vol.
smUH
SsM^qj
directly before.'
fftf
??WT5qH
it
gf?a-=n^fma
has
stepped
f*<3t3r7<;fafj
in
as an obstacle
H*T533
tl<;
existence of
WFfTanwr
to
journey/
journey
jstamU
Vol.
Accbnts Ch. IV 3758,]
Til.
Why
do we say
when a supposition
the above words are formed by <&%
*sy$
*ttwt *pfga
troroof:
The
3756.
|p tot qfafaud igay*
is
'
had been
this
VrfTtrtft^'mSJgtf':
belongs to Mayura-vyansakadi
Why
a?fw
'**"
make
therefore, to
$tj
lately
been
The
rich.'
compound
place by
II.
vraTOTCrr
fare
The
3757.
-WBrtifawT
smira'
had been
'
a'?Tff
it
TOU iq';*,
Observe
lately.'
Jf
is
u*m
analysed as
irwiTajfrs*
arnjfturcrat'aw
strafe iNr
of the
ihretra'ejw
which
writs':
Iu order
compound.
n^î|
member of a Tatpurusha compound preserves

when the second member is tlfoTO, *lfor
first
original accent,
fliisr,
we must know the sense
s^ nqfem
57
1.
class.
this rule applicable
v&ifui
Tgrsf*
uareSsrw
RJTOT/3r,
'
becomes an example under the rule and not a counter-example.
it
fwiy
.'
formerly had
'
do we say when meaniug
should be analysed as
then
All
193).
1.
first
be analysed in the above way.
it
(VI.
'
Thus w?HT
its
Observe nTW*r3tn:
member of a Taipurusha compound preserves

accent when the word purva is the second member,
and the sense
or
wsiijra*:
'
and have far? accent.
affix
ii
its original
must
jtsr.iTrra'sri
meant
is
143
and 3SI
in the
sense
off
what pan be found
in the
vicinity thereof?
Thus
w^sficrcnj, nwTrssftsit,
WT*jftT*Tmrfcrjj,
rhe accpnts of these words have been taught before in

voids sfsra Ac., are derived from
fatuity'
favraT
sr?
w^fsra = JTSnuri twftnwj
Why
do
Ac.,
Jgiw
and
Sutras VI.
2.
but they
we say 'when meaning
a
thereof? Observe qn JrafeaiWrT* TOnt^' %iq
4frm SJrafe=iitH*raff *T the bounded field of Chaitra.'
ricinity
field
fa wMSK ^WT
utw^sujiji
ifntn.
WWH
3758.
"ollowed
'
1
VT
ts*H2*J3T
50T-' ?frr
1
fajHff
'
TTffR^SrTT:
fa*
the
in
'
by an Adjective word
ihouM be anahsed
effijOT
(s^c*) fRrRBSTO
i
fasre!
'
thus f?SF7T3
first
as
mm
in a
&c. preserve their accent
*f?r
sn;*r
5F3iW
.J
it
first
when
compound.
"O
acute on the
fasHE-'
fafa^r
The compounding takes place by
The word fesitg has acute on the

s also
11
The words vispa^hta
ThusfeffmszT
'
fsrer^BTOnn:
bound-
having
try.'
all
Hgoisnr
13. The
mean 'in the
12,
by VI.
gets the accent of the
2.
49.
II.
I. 4.
and
it
The word (2)-f<5M3*

Some read the
Indeclinable.
144
word as
fgfgrT:,
[Vol.
which being a Bahuvrihi has
has svarita on the
first
by VIII.
The
2. 4.
Accents Ch. IV. $3758.
III.
The word
also first acute.
(5) n*z or set, (6) ufq^cT, (7) *}*ll (8) *u^ and (9) fsrg^f.
the word <girf has acute on the final by VI. 2. 144 ; j?z is formed
*tjf
1.
Of
which being considered as fafj (Un. 1
18),
(3) srjtf
remaining: words of this class are (4)
has acute on the
9), it
by
these,
3 (Un
first.
trfq^tl
formed by fR to the root wz, and is finally acute (VI. 2. 144). qrcj*r has accent
on the final, being formed by a krit afiix (^n^ 5TTT?T=^gr:,
WViift, or Un I.
106). ^rsj being formed by a fg?f affix (Un. I. Ill), has acute on the final (VI.
is
understood in the Unadi sutra Un.
1. 163), for f%rj is
The word fcram has acute on the
106.
affix
added
to
wm
by VI.
final
from
Ill
I.
2.
sutra (Jn.
I.v
formed by
144, being
&c.
Why do we say 'of ferei^ <kc., ? Observe UTimaiim having acute on the
Why do we say when followed by a word expressing a quality ? Observe
final.
'
3$*K
u3?m
*5RWTe4UMnM3rtf *JT SKTOTtS
wil-*fff
few
abstain*
JT1 [f?
Verbal noun 'bhava' preserves
sisting of a
from
fore adjective forms built
iwre
im^rou:
'sra
(V.
'
its
3.
member
first
con-
original accent be'
60),
jya
'*
(V.
6l)
3.
'avama and kan (V. 3. 64), and bef6re a form built

word papa.'
Thus Sw^tsw, ^wotto:, nwra*m, JjRwfrow jftrainfinsi? row
'
from the
'
'
II
In a Karmadharaya compound, the
3759.
II
WHnfmsJM *-'
wm
im^^ra:
im*refsiE5W
im*!Ta*m
uuoHi^f??
hittowtj^ mi' faw
imsra*5W
wife faw
'
'
FO
formed word and has
The words
gq, and
f^Tff
accent
are
substitutes
comparative and superlative degrees,
syllable,
first
(VI.
1.
which oertain adjectives take

and the employment of these forms
comparative and
the
sutra indicates that
on the
i.e.,
superlative
words
having
is
193).
in the
in the
these
ele-
ments should be taken as second members, and so also of trw, the comparative
and superlative are taken, for this is the meaning here of the word TjTtjaFJ II
Why
do we say
imi
= niaRs^sf
(III.
is
1.
<
&c.'
Observe tottotmto?
Why
do we say
Observe nsrâ:, TlW^â: = im**q: a better carriage
Noun'
carriage
Why
117. S. 3293).
in the Genitive
3$o
3760.
is
in the
sense
a Karmadharaya
a verbal
of cRTUj
and
compound
'
not WTT
Not
so
compound.
srhtoo
WW*h
here *qz^
'
do we say
<
where the word'
qjOTJt*WDT
5$
11
Sprnwrs^TSTtT.
II
The word 'kumara preserves its original accent, when

first member in a Karmadharaya compound.
standing as a
Thus mrflrfviNlT
The word
mmt
has acute on the
final,
as
it is
derived
Vol.
Accents Ch, IV. 3763.]
III.
from the root qpTT sftsTSTW with the

it is
ordained that aim*
Notk
Vnm
is
70) to
1.
make
Grammar,
something original
or
when a term
thing formed by
II.
1.
70,
S.
702
is
followed by
hold that the word SRJTITmust be
They
this rule applicable.
M whenever a term
ufauifTriniT: TT?fTH3T?RW9 ntjtnw
note both
By
compounded with
Some commentators
&c. (II.
to of reifa
vmm &c.
affix
145
and
also
employed
maxim
sigqj-
employed which might deresulting from a
something else
in a rule
another rule in which the
ployed, and also somethiug else formed
is
refer to the
rule of
which might denote both some-
same individual term has been emrule, suoh a term should be
by a general
taken to denote, in the former case, only that which

case, only that
which
is
has been employed."
in the latter
is original, and
which the same individual term
Other Grammarians, however do not make any such limit-
formed by that rule
but apply the rule to
ation,
3761.
all
in
Karmadharaya compounds
of
mtlK
II
In a Karmadharaya compound of Kumara followed by

falls on the first syllable of Kurnara.
pratyenas, the acute
The word UclRF nfcmrTH*T5Sl
Thus
V
GR
tntreRi:>ll
The first syllable of Kumara is acute

the second member is a word denoting the name
3762.
'
The word mi means
or gprcaTrraif :
apif^TflSFT:
(VI. 2. 26),
5THfi &c, are
horae-names
is
and the
sr
So also with
affix sjq is
added
to
3RTTîH9RT: or
qf wk^WcIoKt:
them by V. 3. 112
In the above examples
elided in the Plural by II. 4, 62.
of a horde.'
Thus
a multitude, a collection &c.'
'
when
optionally,
Here
which
when the word 'Ku-
mara is not accented on the first syllable, it gets accent on the last by VI. 2.
26, when the wfrTuifTTfi maxim is not applied : when that maxim is applied, the
final of the compound takes the accent by the general rule VI. 1. 223.
'
vmmi
31* uttj wsf'
uojgsmci:
fsfiw
H^rai:'
ircmtfa:
trmnrosi irej^refk:
trsrarccro:
<sfa
tra^^ss? iraaaTTi:
'snnufstj'
arauiTSTwr^T 3*tjttr:
faw
qsraT*?:
MgnT
ii
In a Dvigu compound, the firsfrmember preserves its

original accent, before a stem ending in a simple vowel, with the
exception of a (ik), before a word denoting tinie, as well as be3763.
fore
'
kapala/
19
'
bhagala
'
and
'
sarava.^
1*6
Thus ti5?n*fo:
equal to u'^ttsto:
Dvigu
WTFI
(V.
is
So also
formed
The word q
3T
s;
wnra
affix
'
it^muro:, tfamnivr:,
by IV.
2.
(II.
always
is
2)
1.
elide
in
tfsrasiTia:
These are also
elided by IV. 1*
the affix min being
16,
by Phit
apute
is first
Why do we say
Why do we say
denoting
WWJ
1.80-82 S 1744-46).
lei:,
an example of Taddhitartha Dvigu
Vart).
Taddhitartha Dvigu
v
88.
ia
vmm
So also >So also 3OTT*o:=5SJ

*JHT
also a Taddhitartha Dvigu (II. 1. 52), formed by the ;ffix tm. (V.
3
2.
This
The above
TTOTCOWW, the
(Vol. III. AcGftNTS Ch. IV. 3763*
(II. 5).
w
an <JKt stem &o l Observe tr'gfwT?ih 5Jftr7:=ifalH Observe
a Dvigu Compound |
qCTTtfa*: n
before
'
in
- (a sis) ?fn MsriH u

In a Dvigu compound, the word bahu may optionally
3764.
preserve its accent, when followed by an ik-ending stem, or by a
time -word, or by kapala, bhagala and sarava.
*frT '^siTi^fcfiuT:
'
This allows option where the

srH'^fgi: or
oi||Tf<s*:,
aiWUll:, si^Sirra:
formed by the
affix
smwnQ:
or
example, the anudatta

the
first
on the
member
*TCrT:
is
The word
29).
When
changed
its
the
on the
srg*
has acute
changed
to
by VIII.
2.
is
into syarita
iinal
being
as in the first
%
4.
3657, when
S.
In the other alternative, the accent falla
accent.
Ufll
ally preserve
vitasti as
5TT
fgTTT
Harafcffe
its
accent,
when
^SJ^f^rTfe?: H
first
followed by the ^vords
or
usafsfe*:,
3766.
preserves
*wft ftf^Rti^wrgsRT^TH
A locative-ending word,
its original
accent,
u^fgrrffRJ
and vitasti (V.
tFsafarlfe: or
elided after the tUTUff denoting words dishti
3$>SS
member may
option'dishti
second members.
Thus tfegfefe
is
VERM
In a Dvigu compound, the
3765.
HFra
preserves
I.
Thus
sn^wnTsr: or
sn|gRcn^:,
last syllable.
5fWn
and
sreprush
(Un.
required the accent necessarily.
last rule
oTgwisf:, SRfcRUTsr: or
or
when
when
it
The
affix
2. 37).
3*3 n
does not denote time,
'sushka'
followed by siddha,
pakva, and bandka, in a compound.

The
Thus sfoTtfiitH^: or mqrraam^:, SFTf*n*Sfa\?: or SRTfwfwfro:
word sfsursu is formed by the affix una added to ^SRTSI (IV. 2. 80). The words,
samkasya and kampilya have acute on the final, and by Phit Sutra (II T. 16) in
The word
the alternative the acoent falls on the middle.
So also 'HTcmsrcsF
I
Vol.
UTX2:
The
Accents-
fir.
Oft.
formed by zgj\
is
v
and has acute on the begiuning. So also
affix,
wtord chakra, has acute
147
IV. 3768.]
on the
gtfi5i;y:
final.
Why do we say when not denoting time.' ? Observe tjrerf^nfjff^:

The
compounding takes place by II. 1. 41.
The accent of the Locative Tatpurusha
taught in VI. 2. 1. wan debarred by Krit-acceut taught in VL 2. 144. The present
sutra debars this last rule regarding Krit-accent and reordains the Locative Tatpurusha. acoent when the Exit-words are ffrvS &&.
'
n?r?]grafwii
*sTrj
tokktito
The
S7G7.
ûfatrrfw
^nm^TTci
aimiT^r 5a
tt%ttr*rcram ttfv
snip mutt
fe\gr3T5STOtiî^w5TT
itpii suzfr:
stmnf irra^TTn:
5i*?5ftfs-
qqrarwFrarreirejw farcer sraSjrwnl-
framcjfsfi
'area-'
?fcr fair v
utt ufa
and apa, preserve their
particles pari, prati, upa,
accent before that word, which specifies an exclusion, or a portion

f day and night, (in an Avyayibhava
Thus
II.
1. 11.
Baffin;
and
Trftf%iHr ^pi 3:
and
if'fwT^nT
So also
12).
compound
qe*
^QT^cnfT
(See
Trigarta.'
in)
vftrvi rrew
tffrgTcfwfa,
f agafcfror, fagcfo^w,
jfemw, iTraorci^.
also).
round (but not
It rained all
iter:,
So also
(II.
I.
11.
12).
Sutras IV. 12, and 13
By Phit
So
syllable.
*cute on the
1
'
pari
'
In a Tatpurusha
first.
*
prati
&c. as
rules already gone
first
before
;'
have acute on the
Particles (Nipata)
all
also upasargas with the exception of *nfw
and
Therefore
Bahuvrihi compounds,
members would
have retained
<fcc,
these
the preservation of the accent to Avyayibhava compounds also*

it is
first
have
words
their .accent by
the present sutra, therefore; extends
WVt and of* alone- denote the limit exclusive or g^br, and
irfr
th*
the principle of
The prepositions
therefore with these
two prepositions only that the second member can denote the thing excluded, and
With these prepositions sin and ijft, the second term if
not with jrfrT and 3H
I
denoting a
member
of
day or night,
is
also taken even as
excluded,
therefore no
illustrations of those are given.
ieparate
Why
ight
do we say
before a
word which
Observe nrnfar srsrm: unf^t?
3$>s
is
TT^^^g^^Tfs^r^fes
excluded, or
it
a part of a day
and
r'c
Wr
rl
gTzrwmnTTt
giir
wcwg
tot:
wrcafri'gai vraitra
^â^^ctrra Pf?
5?
tt^^stt:
'snpsrasra' few
$n flm
s^qjrsw
^TTiî^nifa?Tmftjffic?3nT^f
aj*
'<rasRqfang' fa
^sdrcnsjsih 'g*5 faw quintet spin ^fon^wiT:
gfaaTin>i
'
The first member of a Dvandva compound, formed of

names denoting the Kshatriya (warrior) clans in the plural num.
3768.
148
ber, retains
clan of
its
Thus
accent
original
Andhaka
[Vol. III. AccektsCh. IV. 3768.
when the
warrior belongs to the
or Vrishni.
SefTO^gfihreiT:,
?qRCT*rt:,
faifaerreigT:
The word
formed by *nm affix (IV. 1. 114) and has acute on the last
word fsjfa has acute on the first syllable, and does not change
&vaphalka
(III.
in
1.
3)..
is
The
denoting Patro-
nymic.
Why
Here
do we say
%*T*Uf*i ScTT
The word
and Haimayana)
Why
Why
crittti:
here means
*T5T?g
the family of anointed kings
Observe gra^vrrasrn
clan* ?
and warriors
Vrishni clans, but
these
are
not
who belong
those Kshatriyas
(^sifwfaTficfsin:)
%WT*R: -
(Dvaipya
do not belong to any such family.
do wo say
number'
in the Plural
do we say
'in
do we say
a Dvandva compound
Observe HSRSTO^'TCjiifr
'
Observe
^wtai
SFF^Tt=^fwB-
Why
35><
ri^T
Andhaka
of
Û
and Vrishni
clans'
v
Observe ^nr5f x 9Tn :
it
The numeral word, standing as the

preserves its accent.
compound,
Dvandva
3769.
VI.
Wcm
10) = gftr
3.
These nam^s belong to Andhaka and
the warrior-names.
to
denoting a Warrior
'in
derived from ghr by the affix H3T (IV.
is
Thus 5^T33J, ?f T33J, 3T3fSI or ^rth*3?T

18) and has acute on the final.
The
mm
first
is
member
of a
the substitute of Tn
3.
3770.
When
retains its
accent-
words denoting scholars are named after thei r

teachers and are compounded into a Dvandva, the first member
The word ^^cng^ means a pupil '' a boar*r; not a day scholar.*
When the scholar is named by an epithet derived from the name of his teacher,
Thus mfar
fajftt ot:
that name is vrraTOTTOî: or teacher-derived name.
The word sjn^T^niBoth words have acute on the middle as formed by ^ affix.
the first member only.
qualifies the whole Dvandva compound and not
JrIr
That is, the wliole oompound in all its parts should denote scholars, whose names
I
are derived
from those
where though the
Why
do
of
first is
we say
their
teachers.
Therefore
not
a teacher-derived name, the second
"names derived from the
teacher's*
in
is
I
trTTirjsftil-iscl^Tft
not.
Observe
$T3siu
Vol. TIL Accents Ch.
Who
do we say 'a scholar?'
3sst
IV. 3771.]
5ET<MRT5nrra:g:ra
Observe
*jnftTCJ*iaTftERt?i *m<3r
3&
14d
ll
mnfifoi n
Also
3771.
members
and cR5m these being

IV.
3.
IV.
114
Patron,
words.
of these
list
from
is
the quadruple significant
*Hcff;ri
II.
being a Tadraj
which
derived from Pila
the
fitfaf
Pila
IV.
The word &yaparna belongs
59.)
It
not necessary that the
is
have trasmuirftfT
Paila, the
is
Bidadi
to
which
156,
I.
compound should be
Kapi has aoute on the final.

formed by o^ IV. 1. 107, which is however elided by
muse, therefore, be always in the plural.
6.
by
which
is
IV.
114, the
I.
elided by II.
her yuvan descendant
We
is
^5} IV.
The son
4.
58.
59, which
be
female
The
number here
plural
is
not
is
Panch^li,
compulsory.
also.)
(The son of Katuka

Plural by II. 4. 66.
elided in the
is
will
This compound
descendant
Panchala's
SFêRorrvpaT: or cfigqren^Rtn:
I.
Kapi
of
II. 4. 64.
is the
name of a Rishi, his son will be
yuvan descendant of the latter will be formed
Panchaleya.
have trHSRTgtrTsraT^n
7.
her will
plural always.
($itikaksha
irfrI9RTgijigT?TOT:
sh!T>
is
class IV.
also.
3ifci3UTCHljaT:
aitikaksha by
the
the plural;
being elided.
*ht!|
son of
adding
formed by
added
is
elided in
104, the female descendant will be ^yaparni the yuvan descendant of
be Syaparneya.
5.
gscf
and WTOf 5R3 by
affix
end-acute, to
is
which
of Paila will be
however, elided by
is
is
in the sense of Patronymic,
formed by
is
171,
I.
faolTHT 5R12T: =
yuvan descendent
We
first
have been so
or plural. affix
The following
The word Avanti
nyau by IV.
xtasmtrciraT: (Paila is
4.
I.
names)
Rishi
sjjTol^rqsJTSFT:
affix
Wcl^rftai
&c, the
'
119).
I.
Patron
kartkaujapau
a dual
in
of distinctness.
HT^fwffTO^âT (savarni
2.
Z*
I.
which end
this list
sake
for the
5RTH-gRT5!TU (formed by mig
1.
'
retain their accent.
Those words of
exhibited
the Dvandvas
in
be formed
will
The son
of
by
Varchala
Varchaleya).
8.
(The son of akala
STraj^rerasRT:
H*H IV.
2.
111.
The son
of
by
will be elided in the Plural
the ôt
affix after
9.
10.
the
Kanvadi class IV.
of the
is
(the
<HT3ffa*TT3T*n:
by Richava,
11.
Sanaka
srnjeFSira^T:
cfif?rraTit5T:.
II.
elided
son
by
of
II,
being
final,
!akalya,
his pupils are
Some read
4. 64).
4. 66.
Babhru
is
it
IV.
akalah by
104,
which
as sjSRHSTCrrsRTt,
where
I.
So also sj^greria:
ll
B&bhrava).
are those
added by
who study the work produced

Mudgala belongs to
IV. 3/104.
Maudgalah are pupils of the
son of Mudgala).
This a Dvaudva of Kuuti and Suras'htia
country-names derived from them
aoute on the
is
be 3aunaka by *5f
will
(Archavinah
affix fcofsT
2. Ill
$unaka
like Avanti.
Kunti
in
and
the plural or
Chinti have
150
class
12.
fafcfgTHST: as the last.
formed by *rcr III. 1. 134, from
13.
and are enumerated
patronymic
H.
mtarQTi:
15.
Here also
Pacha*
to
Bhvadi 300, WIS is formed from

being elided, and both have acute on the
?n
IV.
list
In the flural
105.
1.
the
64.
4.
64.
is elided by II. 4.
Avimatta has acute on the firit being
Both the words lose 5[ patronymic by II. 4. 66.
qs? affix
wfsrWrloRTJTslVIT: or fe3JT:
formed by the sia
(Both belong
rTxmtfrmST:
in the Gargadi
elided by II.
affix U5! is
Accents Ch. IV. 3771.
III.
flfg rlTSR
the same root with the prefix &g, the

final:
[Vol.
particle.
The son of Babhru is Babhrava, and the son

smrasn^nraJIT:
&alanku or &alanka of s^rfe IV. 1. 99 is âlankayana.
16.
STTH33R^rIf:
17.
by
18.
RS3rRTOT:,
TinfsMTV.
144
the
nw
by
elided
are Kalapah
IV.
^5j in the patronymic which
is
elided
portion
sfsf
cRS^KTspT:
(IV.
elided before
is
Katha, the
affix
164 but
by
a Vartika under VI. 4.
ll
Those who study the work of Kuthumin are
83; the
I.
HQ
4.
of
Those who study the work

by IV. 3. 108, which required
107.
3.
added
the inm being
of Kalapin to e retained by VI.
19.
by
Danchyuta takes
Kathah are those who read the work
104.) being
3.
of Kalapin,
66.
II. 4.
the
of
m^
being elided before
by
VI.
work
of
eRTSpTT:
144
4.
formed
Vart already
referred to above.
SKTsp^nRTgi:
20.
Or the
kshah.
Those who study
Lokaksha
son of
is
the
Lokaksha
Laukakshi, the pupils
are Lauka,
are Lau-
of latter
kakshah.
^fapTTJT
22. fnstrujsnST:
21.
Stri has accent
The son
of
Muda
on the
is
final.
Maudi/the pupils of latter areMaud&h.
So also Paippaladah.
23.
VI.
5fr3*roj5rref :
223
1.
24.
grBT5TTR or
So also
25.
The double reading
word
of this
indicates that Rule
also applies.
^r^grt^: = 3rH + 5TCR
HT^Prtri^ciT:,
they take
gnj
added
to
on the
final
vm, the gi is
by ffTrj accent
IV.
1.
The
Vatsa has acute on the
final.
pupils of Susruta and Prithu are so called
5m*IrB, 27. nTsqrsfsTTsil Yajya is formed by naff,

It has svarita
not changed to a Guttural by VII. 3. 66.
83. 26.
(VI.
1.185).
Anuvakya
is
derived
from ami
+>
vach + nyat.
3c
3772.
following
||
The word JJtTR V^J retains its

$ftf%, ^W3<n, tfz, ^Tg, SCTST*!,
OT3, and TT^g
II
accent before the

*TTT,
WTCfl,
tfofra,
Vol.
Accents Ch. IV 3776.]
III.
151
Thus w'gT^tfg:, wlmqul:, wfuife, wfMram:, *rT5!Tcn*i:, *nfr*K:'

JT^WUcn, *rjl%?*rfV9:, JTgRira:, *J^mq\S:,
The WTfl n 8 acute on the final
(Un II. 84.) On the uffTO^fffi maxim already mentioned under VI. 2.26. S 3760,
ll
accent
this
will
apply to
1.61. S. 740 for that

to
sha.
thatjcompound
which
of w^rf
it
forms under rule
the particular rule of Karraadharaya compounding
is
II.
elating
mahat (pratip idokta). This rule therefore, will not apply to Genitive TatpuruThus wsfTT eftfa: = JT^3atf#: which has recent on the final by VI. 1.223.
The words mahat and kshullaka

word Vaisvadeva.
3773.
before the
Thus
thus
JflrlhsitenT, and
the word has uda-tta on the
3$>8
B?jHT?fT
162
IV.
3$>sy
(V.
3.
8<>
kshullaka
7 3.
<fcc)
is
is
derived
added: and
accent before 'sadi*
retains its
'
and
The word
isjSTTjft U
mmfo
irTOTTfia:
The word go
3775.
sarathi
Thus
m: wnmiTz&Trfm
mmzi
and
vami
Un
'
The word ushtra
Thus
affix (
The word
ll
final.
3g: mfacsTPnfr:
3774.
and
T^slirarcaw
which the Diminutive
a\JsnFnr=g$s?: to
retain their accent
first
3^
is
VI. 1.
derived from
311
by
t^s|
197.)
89
11
retains
its
accent before 'sada\
'
s&di
'.
mi *ife:=mmfc, and 5*HTTfa: sra

formed from
with the atfix
and forms a Genitive compound (mi HTcf:).
Or from the causative verb gTSJsfrl, we get TTTOTSf: by adding ms (III. 9. l)irmi^
is formed by fifffsr from the same causative root.
The Kyit-accent is debarred in
tti:st3: or jit 9i3ttfff în'ora:,
11
is
the case of qrz and Sife5! ; the Samasa-accent VI.
*RX5r*ff
1.
aCTstonTOT g
8^
g
^
H^-RT HJTTHTSTf 3T#THTag 3U3 tf^WT
I
3vG:
in the case of
guf*
It
II
Tim
3TOTQTO:
223
SjSTTrgOflW
3j^*!jT TIT'gin
'+ q^frTrT
sn^re*'
T>rfiT JJ5: t\:tSJTS:
^TTTitirrw
Hw fefWTaV
sFsmsrerTH:
(^S) ^t"Rf^rRT3
'msa^TrT:
^ffT
SNrft
The Siddhanta KaumudI.
152
na
'
sgTOtwij'
siHcfîses:
tit -ajfTT
The
3776.
first
dridba-rupa,
member
Accents Ch. IV. 377 Q,
' (atuxT)
f?ifaHrrBra:.i
retains its accent in the following:
Rikta-guru,
2.
Pare-vadava,
5.
III.
fafq^WTfnfFT 'SRWuufva^w
^faflssicaispCTTT: grass:
Kuru-garhapata,
1.
[Vol.
3.
Asuta-jarati,
Taitila-kadruh,
6.
4.
Asiila-
Panya-kam-
7.
and Da&i-bhara &c.
balah,
The
seven words are compounds,
first
any
without
case-ending,
g^flrgqriw (gv&*ni
has acute on the
Kuru
is
the
five
formed by
first
two of these are
are
in
aj affix
Nom.
added
exhibited
Thus
Singular.
to 3i
Un.
I.
24,)
and
final.
So
Vdrt
So
TTrtJUrT,
remaining
the
also ?f fonrfJUfTW, the
word
also f*?fit n^tssfrrfTns: or f^fTiJT^:
or on the second (VI.
3trT*3T9^f ^*aT
1.
208
S.
Vriji
has Kcute accent on the
for rikta
3696). So also *|r
first.
has acute either on the
m *K&=$Wrimi;ai,
first
sr*jft*n3-
Asuta and aslila being formed by -To! particle have acute on

That which has vft is called *5ft*f, the affix sna being added
by its belonging to Sidhmadi class, and * changed to 5T by its belonging to kapiThis is a samasa
lakadi class (VIII. 2. 18.) So also xm^^cJT, this is = UTTcllSFS
with the force of cjsr, and there is irregularly no elision of the case-ending. It is
not a compound under II. 1. 18, S. 672 The word ui* belongs to Ghritadi class,
and has acute on the final,
^frfsniT cR3:=Hfrl^'li^:, the son cr pupil of Titilin ij
Taitila formed by shit affix.
nrjUcRScj^:, panya entis in Qcj and has acute on the
the
first
VI.
II
2.
2.
ll
first
(VI.
213).
i.
^q^â^r:
Othei
has acute on the first only when it is a name.
compound, the accent will be on the final by the geners
The word qqn being formed by afl affix (III. 1. 101) is acut
rule VI. 1. 223.
ly accented on the first (VI. 1. 213).
The word tranefiiSR: is a Name when it
means the market-blanket i. e. a blanket of a well known determinate sis
and fixed price, which is generally kept for sale by the blanket-sellers. But wher
the compound means a saleable blanket, it takes the samasa accent (VI. 1. 223]
If it be objected what is the use this Vartika, for the word rmu being formec
by a kritya affix, will retain its accent in the Tatpurusha, by VI. 2. 2, we repb
that the s?i?3j used in VI. 2. 2 relates to pratipadokta kritya compounds such
ordained by c&fl*aT$aT *H5nrqT (II. 1. 68), while here the compound is by fofsjqi
Vdrt:
wise in
trfiDfTcS giJcrar
f^TZHJT
(II.
1.
51) and
is
a genernj compound.
The words belonging to Dasi bhaj-adi class

compouud words, not governed by any of the rules of
So also 3TWWH::=3TtWT*:
all
those Tatpurusha
cent, in
As
which
anomaly.
is
desired
that
the
first
member should
retain
its
accei
wi
The word qjfaa means
e q^v&TW (Rig Veda I. 5. 3).
The affix is fsR, and the case-ending of g* is retained as a Vaidi(
The word jj^ is first acute by Puit II. 3.
\\u
WiTO'
it
'
IN Accbwts
0L.
9sso
gg*n rot
3777.
its
word
85
Dative case as the
in the

become the former,
member
first
expresses that which
accent,
ed to
153
Ch. IV. 3781.]
retains
is
suit-
Thus tf qZTV
The word ip has acute on the first syllable, a9 it is formed
by q (Un. til. 27) treated as af^f? (Un. Ill 26).
This accent applies when the
second member denoting the material is modified into the first by workmanship.
I
The composition
3SSC
takes place by II.
3TO
STO qT HTO?ri SSRrBT
H8
Before the
3778.
II
STW
36.
1.
artha,
'
the
member
first
Dative
in the
retains its accent.
Thus
irIrTT&j;
being formed by a fa?j
2farr7T
(V.
affix
27) has acute on
4.
the middle.
3SS<
fR
WTO q*
cpq=T?
3779.
The
V&m
first
Wt
member
before a Past Participle in

Thus
qffigfljj
3$>*
WTO
*5Wyi^' fa*
not a
it itself is
its
accent
36.
II
^113153
*f(D3irT*J
3?l
1.
II.
'
*ITCJ3Tt!:
'*frx5T'
fcfiJT
the
kta,'
Past Participle, retains
its
qn^RfTT:
SifTTJSirro
fTT-
II
member,
first
original accent
Karmadharaya compound.
*n a
This rule
mentioned
2(3irrr:
which
The word
affix qqj
(Un
3$*<l
*^wn
ii
The word
20
Why do
Why do
121).
for^HF
^ffi
as
first
it
qq.
is
is
<fco.
Nouns
Thus
specifically
sj'fiosfriT:,
formed by the
end-acute as
it
is
fa
affix
formed
we say 'in a Karmadh iraya compound'

we say when it is a non-nishtha word
Here the compounding is by II. 1. 60.
I.
sm3 wto
qTWTISST
pratipadokta
of
has acute on the
**ft fgrfan
*i5taaT%fa
+
fqj
^rrin^-H *T
TO^Tr*:
vn
maxim
on the
considered faa (Un. IV. 51).
is
by the
59,
1.
and the
Past Partioiples
confined to the
is
in II.
Observe ôqi ^??* =

Observe ^JHTJ^rTW
snjj
83
^fi&ISiRT:
$HqT
place by
Before a Past Participle in
3780.
when
Dative case retains
in the
kta.'
qT qskfolSSTO' q^FRJl
U^TOTcCTt?:
'
II
sfiTOTTSsfinjf
II
qTf^HW
8$
dffisaw +'
î
fal?
i
?
?
II
qr fgrftqTO* q^trqr
'vit$'
'
qrofarr.
SRTOTnrft??:
spaqiq*.
II
'sun-*
atmr??:
qrcssissT-
(a<=*c)
^fqwiqîiT
The Siddhakta Kaumudi.
154
Before a Past Participle
8781.
the Accusative case retains
Ck
[Vol. III. Accents
in
'
kta,
a word ending in
'
when
its accent,
tV. 3781.
mean a
does not
it
separation.
Thus
;
first,
as
JjmiTH:
mist has acute on the end
JJijt has acute on thd
formed by the fHrJ affix j?*\ added to to, the mini being replaced by
Why do we say 'when not meaning separation' ? Ooserve
143).
cRiss fair?:,
it is
^T (Un.
I.
toT5T?T*T<ft?l
Vdrt
attached
because one has taken himself beyond kautara.
:,
This rule does not apply when the Past Participle has an upasarga
as
^^nrrtrf :, (VI.
UJW^T^
fKTSH ttf
3782.
A word
TT3SF3T
<Jrftgi5r?
ending
cent before the Past
This
144).
4.
in
an exception to rule VI.
is
'ratals*.'
*tttK
WlTHSlia:
an Instrumental ease retains
Participle in
'kta',
when
144.
2.
531
its ac-
has a Passive
it
meaning.
Thus riTHTO: - r^ST
is
formed by
3iHT:
Tfam: protected by
'
*5^H:
thee,'
nf^
CTjssjgrgHT J\m\
rT?T5#
U55?ar
sfafaiiOTiTOTfesaJc sol
3783.
word
*#
by the Samasauta affix z%

Observe t?Rznn. =TQ3Iff:
having a Passive signification'?
added to a verb of motion with an Active significance.
tKit3ra33i
TgTCT5l*ri:
22) added to the causative Tlfe

HHRra is formed
an I has acute on the final.
Whv do we say when
?3i affix (XJn II.
c\alled
Gati
ately before a Participle in
im*fii:' fara
my-
kta'
ia
wj^st
(^ c ^ c) SrawraaTas u
60) when standing immedihaving a Passive significance
(1. 4.
kta
'
trnfecm
grorpra:
The
retains its accent.
affix
have
223
Thus TjTtfaflW
*?H added to
applied
(2)
tr<a
do We say
by VI.
IKST
39.
namely,
Indeclinable
(3) or th6 end-acute
Why
word
by V. 3.
otherwise,
the
or
The
2.
immediately
either
first
end-acute, as
is
Here one
to
T Q0
139 and 144.

?
'
Observe ni&
is
Samasa
the
(1)
member
it
formed by
of the following
retain
its
rules
end-acute
IV.
1.
accent VI.
2.
2,
present sutra debars
^Hi
"Where
the
would
all these.
the distant
Gati
Word *r?H does not preserve its accent, but the immediately preceding Gati, 3^
does retain its accent, though it is not the first member of the compound word.
Compare also VlR 2 70. But in gnq + JuTH: (agata being governed by this
rule) we hava ZTizwa: (H. 1. 39 arid VI 3. 2). where VI 2. 14 4 has its scope
though
it
had not
Notb
HIHJ
with that
JtQlfl
to
its
scope in
nf + 3^\&r?:
Wfl^qW.
In the formei case the following
Krit
aftit
denotes whenever
which that Krit
affix
it is
maxim
applies
^tHHiT
JlfrT55TT- iTSf
employed, a word-form which begins
has been added, and which en
Is
with the Krit
Acgrnts Oh. IV. 3786.)
fll.
am?
but moreover should a Gati or a noun such as
affix,
Kn
u prefixed to that word-form, then the

(ini together with the
form
G iti
maxim
word v^^n;
to the
v$h:
as
hwtott
*
*a^r
f*w
'
3i2 ita^fl:
otto:
stffi
prefixed to
has not
Participle
the
skit nor
it.'
giveu
a Passive
understood here
is
de'bars VI. 2. 144.
sfitra
tms^n
nfk: vvsm\
^nn
wroift
htw^t'
'
ii
An
3,784.
This
nirsssf^d
far??
When
because the word
significance, the rule does not apply
also
have been
not applied, because scope should be
is
aphorism.
in this
may
which
noun
or the
In the second example, this
denotes a cise-relation have
must denote the sum; word-
affix
fc
155
of Compounds.
Accents
Vol.
immediately preceding Gati retains its original:

formed by), a Kr it-affix beginning with t
accent before (a word
which has indicatory
but not before
n,
U^rtqi^ffl^T
Thus
T
(with HIT^, v vfri: (with frF^r)
139).
Why
do we say
with
the affix
forme 1
governel by VI.
formed by fjq
its
(III.
isrnJt^
Why
When
affix.
TrsrftJfTO
$he Unadi
affix
Why
a^
2.
with
??'
fj
.but.,
(VI, 2.
irii*crr*R:
'which,
say
on the Vartika grsflssh
do we, say
II
Observe
and the Gati the accent being

is. farr' ?
Observe uaRrTT
155),
do we
(with rp\) VMfiffi?.,
3). tftfifff
debars the Krit-affix accent
a Krit-affix takes the augment
character of beginning with
lfsrfarTT,
sfrtra
before an affix beginning
139.
2.
(Rig Vela III. 19.
This
tu.
not.
g'
before
^,
not
does
it
aiarofa^W
rr
lose
Thus
Observe wnref: with
<>
nimrggrniFrnT ssr^r njf^tvmfG

jsmaais:
gmiirTgw*
tt3^t
!??.
w^'fiaT
4J
ii
An. immediately preceding Gati retains
3785,
cent
before, aji
simultaneously the
Thus
which
4^3**
Infiuitive in
final
4.
original
its
14) but
whereby
has the acute as well.
All npasargas
tavai (III.
have
acute
on
the
except
first
abhi
'
acute on the final.

(Phit IV. 13) which declares 3tH3nf
This debars s?a accent (Vf. 2. 13.9) and is an exception to
^hj ru'e that in a single word, a single syllable, only has acute.
has
therefore
*n<nilTlT wfasreiw
BS^S
Tirasiirq^
B35i^ ^m
u
a
'
rot
'
^f^HTSSgHT
STTrTO
3u*cin?<iTccrr3im5i
Si ^ UP
fijq*Wfa si^t tmV.
'
fow
'auras'
ii
3786'
An
immediately preceding Gati
ins its original ascent before
follows.
'
afich
'
no*
ending
when an
in
affix
'
'
or
having
[Vol. Ill Accents Ch
156
Thus *an3I3: in V unsjgSFTT^ (Rig Veda I. 164. 19).

and optionally svarita by Vfll 2. 6. Why do we say 'not
Observe
Why
by VI.
do we say 'before an
afioh'
TTrHsra:, here
is
The accent
affix
elided, then rule VI. 1.
Observe 335ra?r:
'1
222 presents
When
The Gatis
ginal accent before

sq^
Thus
'
nV and
anch
The
'
rule
nasal of
the
superseded
is
is
subsequent.
In some texts, the

67).
adhi however, retain

followed by a y affix.
*
their ori-
'
'
becomes svarita
^f
original accent.
itself; but that rule
when a Gati not ending in ? or gf precedes, because the present

Thus 5u*: in sffg svraTfa OTJ# Utt'fe: (Rig Veda VI. 25. 3).
reading is to^htoiirh)
The affix g % is like fgfli^ &c, (VI. 1.
3787.
its
acute
is
in ? or
ending
139 the second member retains
2.
IV 3787.
by VIII.
2.
4.
So
3657.
S.
also.
*ZH
iuT^STT:
may
,
4flfera*ro*rlT3TTT:
'
sJtfrJSRSTi:
Ishat,
optionally preserve
Thus
&c
The word
3788.
'
iag 3 ^m\Z\ SJflW S3

when first member of a compound,
its original accent.
or iiKjcRST?:
on the
45c? has acute
the Krit-accent will necessarily take place (VI.
allowed
maxim
because the compounds to which the
formed
of pratipadokta, those
by
present
?q^
Jwith
But
final.
in
nsw:
being
13 9); no option
2.
rule applies are,
non-Kr.t woida
on
the.
under
II.
2.7.
3W
ffTO3qfan*Ji vft !
?|cHirtjf*OT*n3Tfi3
mwn
3*3
SI uu
y5 g sp$ nfniTWWBf fa
oTT IRRrBTT
II
fg*p*
fits
*r faRjj fsreiitnCT h
first member, |denoting the quantity of gold
retains optionally its original accent, before the word
u
'
tsrw
3789.
eRragsr^Hij
'
The
^Thus fgg^Vrjj or fggqijvisnj

gfTO qftWTWSJ=fggen8) R%g \i9f^|
It
This
is
may
also
Karmadharaya compound
be
treated as a
Bahuvrihi
compound, then the accent will be of that compound, as

fg^T&W: or fopwina*
Why do we say 'gold'? Observe w
Why do We say 'quantity'?
Observe gng^qw
Why .do we say tre ? Observe f^c^^r^T
I
W y^
'
II
$S<0
TOWSf^TTTOTOT
U5
II
Vol.
III.
Aocbnts
3793]
IV.
Cf?.
The word 'prathama
3790.
pound, retains optionally
157
when standing first in a comaccent, when meaning

a
'
its original
'
novice.'
The word wf^TtraafT?
^fetitrsFW-or *fwR5!csm
HWWÛT*Tm:=HufriaJT5fil*ira\flfT*liqTT:
Grammar.
The word usjt
'
accent the acute
falls
Why
last.
Observe q*mDqTTO!j: (IfaTSiUinsTTJTTSrT

a Grammarian of the
vm
derived from
is
on the
Thus swiiqTtiiTnr: or
one who has recently commenced to study
'
first rank.'
Ay
(Un V. 68) and by fsa

when meaning a Novice ?
the first Grammarian of
U: W.)
q&rrer
do we say
WX?z?T
'
always have acute on the
It will
final.
first
member
of a compound, retain optionally their original accent, in a
Karma-
The words
3791.
an d KfW, standing as the
SFrlt
dharaya.
Thus SRnfS:.or
is
katara
and
compound, by
*
cRH*3Jif :, qjfWqiS: or 9RHH5F3:
used for the sake of the next

'
katama
'
II.
1.
'
The word Karmadharaya
sutra could have
sutra., this
it,
as
63.
^Tii^îm:
*nqqj*m:
inqf xiqg^fcnsni^TTrr.
sniraua ^rug
wt^td:
aignnifar-' ?t>t few snq^faq:
1
faw
qTTi-
11
htv.'
'
'
The word arya optionally retains its original accent

ku.m&ra.'
a Karmadharaya, before the words Br&hmana and
3792.
in
done without
only Karmadharaya
by the maxim of pratipadokta, form
'
'
'
'
'
The word *jnq

Thus WTq'sn^Hir: or îortî?:, lli'aqpH: or wocth?:
formed by qqrj affix and has avarita on the final.
Why do we say Ai*va
Observe uttTBTVnff:, QCT3NTlf:
Why do we say before Brahmana and 'Ku
i
'
is
'
'
Observe vnrofaa:
According to
avufarim$:
milra
'
Why Karmadharaya
'
Accentuated
the
'
Observe suqro ST^THi:
Text the accent
is
Jim
(Pro.
Bohtliugk).
BTWnigm^T:
fWTJT
3*m&
3793.
the words
Thus
is
'
?T5?SITfff
mi
or
affix wfsfST,
'
SIT trec3T
^WVJkS
nTOTOHn:
rajan,' retains optionally its
and
is
TT5J3JWT*:
STU
added
is
:.
of
urn
?T5tqjim: or TTSfSRWlf:
to TToT
not
for the sake of the
USI^ runs and not that
accent before
Kurn&ra', in a Karmadharaya.
TT5IHl^"ff
compound
where the
separate aphorism
of
tm\
The word
BraMimana
formed by the
fHfrfin:
OT^T
II
h\
I.
156).
Kaimudharaya.
The word
Buc
*T5JTT
The'
niaking
TTS5J
ST^Nn:=*l3Tof
this a
subsequent suira into which the auuvritti
158
tma&WT TT5U W&srfs
The
3794.
m TOrBl
tlj
woi;d
rajan
'
[Vol.
Tlof^W^T:
ending
'
Accents Oh. IV. 371,
35t
the
in
word
jtipnally retains Jts accent, before the
III.
'
fail?
tive
Vco'svii^
Why
'
of the Geni-
When
21.
$.
4o we Bay
Thus rur:
also.
sign
not elided by VI,
is
or roiffffl 5t:
WQrX
pratyenas.*
'
The words Ti5f5^ and ^jqjpRWm are understood here

Tlif
^sn: or TT^: tfRW. wf?mH* J'?: ma' Ufa - trefsw
I
Genitiye case, op^
qnaJTO is not meant, we haye,

ending in tê Qenitive ' ? Observe
Il,5l!raf
in.
ngu îj
*Ttjtrrt: no option.
rgrftqT*WTnW
f=fRJ^55^RJan?
*T3J3lr?:
sfaff
word haying the sense of

accent, before a Past Participle
3795.
qTOTS^TOiRfTCTTi:
*fr?
'
always',
retains op-
in
kta.'
tionally its
These aie Accusative compounds
Thus fo*c*urst5?f: or faratfBfa??:
formed under Rule II. 1. 28. S. 690
far** is formed by cQV affix, added to the
upasarga fa (IV. 2. 104 Vart) ; and has acute on the first, the upasarga retaining
'
its
accent, the
Note;
set aside
by
(III.
when the
'
TX
term means always
144, which
UTwqrrftw
is
xnw^r5 wisJcnT*:
The word
man
acute on the
trm
'
workman
fgR^r
'
1
'
'
'
'
\
grama when
'
fir^t
as
Observe
'
1
is
it
urn:'
2.
1.
144.
**!-
223
this in its turn
was
was
fa*
qnraifim:
fsifarfa
member of a compound,
word denoting a profes-
first
'
fa for fa
'
'
*uroaj?n5i: or
formed by the
wwrrfcm*:
TheHvord
optionally
pressed.
or xrmirTaa*:,
Observe btztc^zh
TiasuuteT:
3797.
noun,
Observe
or artisan.'
Thus uiwrrmrT.
he say
debarred by the present.
again
optionally retains its accent, before

sional
'
WlWl
3796.
w^.8
^T8f? as end-acute by VI. 2.
1. 4).
first
In the case of forumfe?!: &c, the samasa accent VI.
fR accent VI. 2.
w n^rsi
I
being anudatta
do we say
aside by the Accusative Tatpunisha accent VI.
first set
fail*
affix
Why
S 3878.
Why
where there
few
is
*Ta?Srft
Tl?e
void
m*
no option.
u.
rajan' followed
retains its
wreRra:
Why do
wf^q (Un I. 148).
do we say a silpi, a professional
affix
accent,
by a profession denoting
when
praise
is
to
be
ex"
Vol.
ill.
Thus
*.
?T3RlTtTfT. or
Why do we
Why do
barber.'
'king's
Why
a Genitive com| ouwl.
a Karmiiriharhya or
qTWûfq??:
say
king even'
serve the
to
fit
tTsspns?:
or
Traisnfqrf:, ?T5!3pn*r:
or one
barber
a skilful
e.
159
Accents ot C6mpound*.
Accbnts Ch. IV 3792.]
we say
'
A royal bajbef
we say Trx^'
do
when denoting
'
It friy be either
fco.
praise
'
Observe
Observe
nSTOTTBTl
man'? Observe roil&Rt
a professional
royal elephant.
^fcrennsqw
the
In the following up to VI.
3798.
syllable in
first
has the acute,'

This
is
is
in
The
the acute in the following aphorisms.
syllable'
it
understood upto VI.
is
phrase
governs upto VI.
3^
2.
will get
adirudar ta
'
The ord
should
'
^rrfe
'
the
longer stietch
33TtI has
237.
turuTtaifuiT
tw
word
the
2. 91,
n snsr
syllable of the
first
In short, the
be supplied to comjlete the sense of the subsequent butras.

first
Nominative)
the
to be always supplied.
adhikara aphorism.
an
91 inclusive, the phrase
2.
(the word standing
^s^tm
$i
(asq) <?f?r sqwt^TgqfesRT '^ffTaiH

^faaqxnarfaqrrw
iqT2RUn^5rft
tu wg^Tfsg eiiTqfqqnfe ETTrred qifesfrrstai ?g scrrfgrVfri vmq-' ^fa few *&*&*m 'viîw' fai* 3TSSTHTnjj ssoUut *q ares: ftf* stafaiNngTroRra sritTqqîiS vz&un rt&Tmfwvmn
qrrsfq ^?t^t srfccsrcqr grain ?fqB**o ?fa faqvN
Rnîtfsura*
T8:
g*&*Tqfasro
-'
'SRTTs?Tft=r
(sc)
SrljHSK
'
member of a compound, if in the Locative

name of the receiver of a tax, has acute on
the first syllable, when the second member is a word denoting
'what is lawful', but not when it is harana.'
The
3799.
first
case Or denoting the
'
The word vrfolf means he who appropriates the dues or taxes

and
MVQXJ means the due or tax which has been determined by the custom or usage
'
'
'
of the country, towu, sect or family, that
The word
both.
\lxq*
which one
formed by qa under IV."
entitled
has
following
the customary due of the sacrificer.'
So also
established usage
a sac ificer &c.
do we say
mare.'
lawfully
to get.'
the sense of
of a due-receiver ^rft we have the
to
is
91 and 92, and
4.
Of Locative words we have the followiug examples:

w%-9TqfqqjW,
These compounds are formed under II. 1. 44, S. 721 and the
the Locative is not elided by VI. 3. 9 and 10, S. 968.
With the name
^-fgqfeiT
sign of
is
urnj
is
to <;ive a
Why
karshVpnna coin
do we siy
but not before jfun

is
'
'
what
is
q.?înT3:
h
in
qT -SUITS frit
lawful
'
'
the horse which

In
Mukuta ^c
'
Observe
some
or to give a hor e
(fttirck;
Observe OTSSJfuJn 'that which
that. customary tood, which
is
is
places the
is
Why
given to a
given to a mare, after bhe has been
The SidohantA Kaumudi.
160
[Vol.
Accents
III.
3800
IV.
Cfi.
covered, in order
mm
The word
strengthen her.
fcd
is
whew preceded by
this rule,
the Krit accent enjoined by VI.

first
by
jcoo
qS g
139,
2.
subsequent VI.
this rule, the
*s
| t
smra ^sfwrciSTTn*
gpRsifefrT
and thus
denoting word;
igrct
governed by
this sutra supersedes
Thus 5T339T& has acute on the
so far.
2.
Krit-forraed word, iti
however, are
exclusion here indicates that other Krit-formed words,
139 not applying.
ii
nta^te:
'Wrfa* rTrsd gar.' w
The first member of a compound has acute on the

syllable, when the second member denotes that by whom the
3800.
first
things denoted by the nYst are regulated or kept in order.

The word
duty
'
i.
means
g?fi
lje
who
the person appointed
e.
prompt
is
in the disoharge
Thus
to look after.
appointed
of his
TTTSwig: 'a cowherd look-
ing after cow.'
3co<*
favnimH^r
iraraig:
11
3801.
The acute
word nya^
3q
optionally on the
is
syllable
first
when
the
follows.
Thus Ssrnzia:
or TT*mzd:
'
a superintendent of cows
The word papa has
3802.
lable,
'
'
when followed by
'
optionally acute on the
first syl-
word denoting a professional man.
This rule applies to the pratipadokta

Thus v? TUsrrfafT. or UTtretfar?:
samasa of nil, in the sense of censure, as taught in II. 1. 54. S. 733 when it is
Thug
an appositional compound and not when it forms a Genitive compound.
ll
Ta^nfacr:=uTa5n?o;fi
3*03
qrr*rr4toi:
iiT*raaTftnnm3OTîN
SjWTafa^wrsRTm q siimfefa:
?N^rwTUjcr:
fen' fq>w
f^rf
^tgusfmrT wrin^:
esTBrsnfas:
'^m faRw
TfrfRTfa
wusJi^T^n:
twrarewi:
S<
sjnsnTra^Tta^
i
rT
wire srrsrm: ^trcra
femâ
'imrT
member of a compound
has the acute accent before a Patronymic name or a scholar-name,
as well as before
Manava' and 'Brahmana,' when a reproach is
3803
The
first
'
meant.
Thus mat*. ma: a descendant of Snsruta, under the
The compounding takes place by the analogy
'
of his wife.'
petticoat
government
of tfraftrrf&r:
The
III.Accwts Ch. IV. 3806.]
.Vol.
above
*
an
is
example
the pupils of
Daksha
for the
or rrnke therm Ives the

<fco.
Now
of a Gotra word.
Daksha,
wi 3roTfunTtqT:
Accents or Compounds.
pupils
nmU
fear of punishment. '$T 5TC

BTfffai:
W<n$
Why do we
Why do we
'
The
3804.
gets the acute,

Thus
JT**! ?
inw
ingredient'?
**m* *mnj
3805.
iw&m
'J'
he
say
say
'
and
compounding is by II. l.4

whoa followed by a Gotra
when reproach a meant ?
'
Observe
'
'
qra&tf:
Why
Why
II
do. we say when
do
we say
'before
II
f
i
?raSg' fa*j
ftmfira:
eregtfvuiiz
word denoting
when standing
syllable,
fauTwrag^
?f??
girls.'
word preceding Maireya

denotes the ingredient of the same.
it
Observe gvtnBCi:
'
work of
the
sake of
htist Hciff?
the maireya prepared from honey.'
irvgiroi:
denoting* an
for the
i*t3T*T:
9j
who study
e.
syllable of 'the
first
when
names.
he
a Brahman* 'not willingly, bat through
birth, acts like
Where no other rule applies.

word ?
Observe aisrstfaa
Observe WCSTBTOm:
of Daksha,
iwWivW.^fwiahrouj
who being a Brahmana by
with scholar
sake of marriage
161
food, gets the acute on the first

before a word which denotes a repository
suited to contain that.
$m*W;
Thus
Why
food.
wratae:,
do we say when
diuing halls, (the word

'
substance
Why
').
fw^Tfiro:, which
a*S
wsra:
smm
sm*J =
do we say
'
is
ThfsrsTr*:
tfce
name
of
WW
,
'
an
dr.
.first
jmfg w.
member
s
srTjaa:
names
are
'
Observe
gets acute on the

i
of
Observe gwiSJSnsrJ:
action * and not of a
tadartheshu suited to contain that
Bahuvrihi' and the
is
fa^T
like
denoting the name of food
mfST^3*iijmn3
3806.
acute on the
trcra
The words
'
final.
*j T *i irTfrefrT
ftnrg;
wmif*:
word denoting the object of comparison gets the

syllable when standing before m, fa^T, f^ and
first
ii
Thus
the words
ritigana.
\n;*j7TS:
<fcc,
^Jraj
The meaning
Thus
appropriateness.
21
infra
being considered
of
the
The
to
compounding takes place by
belong to Vyaghradi
class,
which
compound must be given according

means irqTVfllKqfaQH' VTO
So
W^ng:
II.
to
also
1,
56
an
Akusage and
is
mfalW-
[Vol. III. Accents Ch. IV. 3806
The Siddhahta Kaumum.
if uTm:,
%rX%*W,
son
Observe
'
Why
nntfsV*
do we say
denoting
WTO
raf
the object of compari-
3tTW3 ^fsfSRroanfafa
VWJtTWUTnT
when
namasTTm s^Ta*:
W5
The first member of a compound has the acute on the

syllable, when the second-member is a word ending in the
aka/ and the compound expresses a calling by which one gets
3807.
first
affix
'
his living.
The compounding takes place by

Thus 3ff5orai:-33n5$* 3SJ ariftWRT
711. Why do we say when meaning 'means of living'? Observe
17. S.
I
II. 2.
WTttfa'Jii **
^"
All affixes
ending
do we say
ing takes
in the
ultimately become
Whicn
Thus
stitutes, are called waR affixes.
affirm;'
qsrej,
^,
are
<kc.
Observe nrafttnRTl?
place by II. 2. 17, and the affix ifa
is
added
*H3i
by taking sub-
affixes (VII.
1.
Why
1).
Here the compound-
in the sense of sport
and
not of livelihood.
irnismifsret
TOnsragtrirofssreT
ûjptteT ssteT
ending
'cffteTtira'
3808
wteT
sme
rTgTfafa
(a**0
'sirranr'
few
Her
traatrerftiiRT
IgiêFijiinwfwraiT
qafs
^^
winîr?
*st?j
^s^r=nraTfij:RT
is
a word
syllable.
first
II.
affix
(III.
Why
17. S. 711.
2.
109. S.
3.
do we
say
Observe atetrstraTHJeiiT, which is a sport of the Northern

do we say when denoting a sport' ? Observe flenroqiraTfqwT'thy
of the Eastern Folk
Why
These are formed by *g<j
3286,) and the compounding takes place by
People.
faro
and which denotes the sport of the Eastern
people, gets the acute accent on the
ire tjst
compound the second member of which
in 3JjR affix,
Thus
wnraraFrt
'xn&m'
gffT ssr^
'
turn for &c.' which
is
'
formed by usra
mw u* fagtraifafc!
mt
(III. 3.
ip
Ill) and denotes
wrererraw
**wc:
'
rotation or turn.'
faip*'
fair
wtui
Wis
3809.
ending
in
compound, the second member of which is a word

the Kril-affix ^*n and which denotes a functionary, gets
the acute on the

Thus &-7vm:
first syllable.
Why
do we eay when
meaning
'
a functionary' ?
Observe
/t.
AocBtfT* Oh. IV. 3814.]
ITT.
fajrwîfafa qmissnw*a
farfaifa
fan*
'
*tf tii*Ti?aa<T*
*:
'
i
fa*?
'
thro**:
ijw^tt:
*h
wrffl
nwira:
And when such a compound ending in ^nn affix denotes
3.810.
the name
siniisna:
183
Accent* of Compounds.
man, but not when the second term
of a professional
WHC (derived from
the acute
8^),.
on the
is
first
id
syllabLe of the first
wordThug a*?rTSrnj:
Wbv do
Here also the second terra ends in wa affix.
we *ay when denoting. a work-man or professional person' 1 Observe snirg^Tcr:
Why do we s;y but not when the affix snrj comes after jr.' t Observe gWfil*:
i
'
II
Also when such an upapada compound ending in 3H3

Name, the acute falls on the first syllable but not
3811.
denotes a
affix
when the second term

Thus
tncRlK:
'
3*^
hum:
*
Qra
'
name
the
mi
cifsrfvrar:
mrtffir:
?fa faw
when
followed'
Thus iftm^:,
calves are tied.
ary, which
9 sc
wfagwTsf nim
feftr
3813.
Why
7tl,
rtfm and
by
THsT
do we say
as
%<
m' sfa fan
get the acute
*iar
The word
afcr?
2. 7,5. S.
3809.
followed
by
s^rum:
on the
first
is
which
the rope with
Why
W9
'
do
we say in
Observe ?m3:
tfcc.
II
Krit-affix faffa (*$) has
in the
member-
of the first
stow vtssiwummz
When
'
||
wn jigftiim-$roifei!Ti?TOiT
3814.
This applies to words not denoting a function-
frff^),
first syllable
i|*ll<H5TTT^
3 c<
so snu with
11
compound ending
the acute on the
not
ii
would be governed by VI.
3<13
Thus
^PnrTinsr:, Scroll:
(ag.fs5n* +
Observe 3rOTn:
But
spider.'
ii
The words
3812.
syllable
Ting:
insect,
a Brahmana caste.'
of
innfifPrt
It
'a kind of
5rT=Iia:,
rt
is srtc
the
'
first
with which resemblance
is
TOTona&r
member
'
fa*r
of a
denoted, then
qsusssit
'
'sanrTs^w fa w
'
compound expresses that

it
ha.^
acute
on the
first
164
a word formed by finfk
syllable, before
word
latter
is
[Vol. III. Accents Ch. TV. 3814*
a radical without any preposition,
out a definite sound like so and

The word su^ra means the
when such
and means giving
only then,
affix,
'
so.'
object with which something
is
likened
sjssrff
means 'expressing a sound'; TT3fk means root, without any preposition.' Thus
The word* ûnra shows the scope of this sutra as
*>T^gofer^
sgJ5fiTf3PJ,
distinguished from the last.
So that; when the first term is an 33lTTSf word,
the preceding sutra will not apply, though the second member may be a ftnfa
*
formed word.
When
At
ply.
the second term
g5Roif5Q%(.
is
not a word denoting
which retains
not ap-
sound, the rule will
krit aocent (VI. 2. 139).
Why do we say t a radical word without any proposition' ? Observe IT3*

Here the second term radioally (i. t. charin) does not denote sound,
*Hinft^
The force of
but it is with the help of the Preposition 33 that it means sound.
Ijg
is
that the 3u;rt?T words are
syllable only then
3*
grfim^TCT^
Such words get
restricted.

*
is
acute on the
The compounds yuktarohin &c, have acute on the
3815.
first
a radical sound name.
first
syllable.
Tims
iTcRSBft, 7
zfrRKT^,
<gTJrawrft
^THH^S?^, 5 ^FTrRSf,
2 JTnTrfrvt, 3 ^TnrTOTvft, 4
by
These are formed
6 $J-
and are illustrating
ftfffa affix,
of
Some say, these declare a restrictive rule with regard to the first
Thus Tlfig^ &c. must be preceded by grR
and second members of these terms.
Thus
<fec.
and
to make VI. 2. 79 applicable.
by
&c.
&o. followed
ziYfi
*rfe?(
Ru'e VI.
2.
79.
Sc^rrfc?^ though ending in fmfsr does not take aoute on the first, so igrfiTWrfii ^
The last two are Genitive com8 ^Tn?mr?FJT or rf&, 9^#T%Tm, 10 wfnf?T**Trf
I
pounds under Rule

xr=?.%
16
w=tit5:
11 Jnsrin^R, 12 jtafcrra:, 13
II. 2. 9.
(iTJirnT^:),
16
*f3}ffruTfT=J?^:raiff7:Tii3Tira
a Taddhitartha
is
farfrT:
on the
final, as
the
swuts:
This
Samasa
Tatpurusha
is
are
All these
iMfeWTOi 14 G^ttf*
genitive compounds.
17.
The word
53i-
a Bahuvrihi of three terms.
and being a Tatpurusha, required aoute

This declares acute on tl
(II. 1. 51),
accent
stronger.
is
by VI. 2. 29, this word TjSRnifa: would have aoute on the firs
But the very fact that this word
Dvigu ending in a. simple vowel.
enumerated here, shows that other Dvigu compounds in faff! are not governed b]
The enumeration" of the
VI. 2. 29, therefore fgfijTrftn^ has acute on fh
Moreover
first
as
it
is
ii
WrTSTrJ further proves by implication that the (^snfsjfHaTH â5*' STQSi faf
the application
*8*siftirc?r5rEj) aocent for
(See Mahabhashya
1.
II.
1.
1).
48) also belongs ip this

1
The
of
class of
which a case
is
oompouuds known
present
is
stronger
as uMregfarT
&<>,
(H
class.
JrTiTTT^, 2 *5WTt?i:TS\, 3 ^TTTHQl ^,
6 WTHrfUTBld, 7 *TfTrWHlS: (ÛTcllTr|FIT), 8
4 *?77TH5JSrft
Qtttm,
^TTTfT^
9 wfrRtaflf,
(HTTrRSf)
10
XITWmV"
Vol.
IV 3819.]
Accents Ch.
III.
11 w*arroir: 12 TiTT^rer*:, 13 sfasfaTnr:,
WZ\vi:
6RTO9I:
vowel, or
'
ja
is
W^ft:
the
wOTm
Thus aTzta:,
In a word
irsrreqraj
falls
padas ending
JHUrfa
do we
"a
say
jsm
ienrm:
tre
c8
rfifâr^gTfg
113331?!*
'^Tsrassr?:'
Before
3818.
long
by
affix
'
vuravta:
more than rr two
'srg*:'
faw
syllables, follast.
two words have upagoverned by this sutra and not the
is
qfTSsfasra^:
5sre3TiWoR:
in
followed
is
These are formed by the
otot*:
Polysyllabic
II
3^c
and
crltfT*: (though the last
a long vowel, the accent
in
Why
word ending
on the syllable before the
Thus 3HQTat:, WWsWftsi:, aud

last).
gf<j3l:
consisting of
the acute
/a,
97).
2.
ag*: *s^T?*jTcW*ra*prre
lowed by
is
first syllable:
i:,*Tt5:,
cj
vsfafamr?,
II
member
first
on the
falls
added to =R?f (IH.
3817
Q^3T:
ninais: (aimoT3:), 13
kaa,' tusha, bhrashtra' or vata,
the acute
'
HUa!:
When
3816.
165
few
gram a* the
member
first
"
Observe
sivjaifqr
ll
* jr^xrm:
^Tusfsftj^r
sifgam: CTfefcnro: u
i
sparer
first
member
has acute, when thereby inhabitants are not meant.

Thus
S5rTriT3R:
femH;
Why
um
Here
do we say
is
equal
to
when not meaning-
s|T5
'
an assembly'. srcrra:=3tfObserve ^Tf^HIR,
inhabitants'.
a village inhabited by the decendants of Daksha'.
3*<K
OTJTfarj
arfg^ta:
3819.
3Tfg*re:
The
first
3ifgf 3:
member has
acute on the
first
syllable
when
followed by ghosha &c.

Thus
|rrg*ita:,
ftif ^:, ârrFgftrcj^:,
f t%*^:, 5T%tn^r^:,
lifere^T, 3Ttgs**r:, tfrfgig^:, g^tg-
3t%tot, *3TfOTTm,
*3Trg*n5rT,
fai^T, "^rag***:, *3Tfgsn**mt, 3p33<nw,
Of the above, those which denote places of

bers though
denoting inhabitant!
or
v%\ or 3n*i:),
habitation, there
get the acute acoent.
Some do
anuvritti of ^fagg^t?: in this aphorism, others however read

1
^ta, 2 5R2 Qzz), 3
8 Wi*TT, 9 Xftl (CfQj 10

fsnart,
16 gfa, 17
tx
ejwW (ti^3*).
3JT5TT
11
the
first
mem-
not read the
it.
4 165, 5 513ft (**), 6 ftrjp, 7 ftnjj,
j(*Jw), 11 fs, 12 ^l^JTsft,

3 hi)
3T (v *Tf
%ifg-
jratrgfa:, *3TrggsT, "arrays: u
\3
^fo,
?mr, 15,
Ihe Siddhanta Kaumudi.
166
*
..
3*SO
3&TWOT:
slferaiwT
I.
I
I
Aocests Oh. IV. 38
III.
I
>
'
wc
vtzfta <ratfa
wti
srfasjrec* m
The words 'chhatri' &c, get acute on

when followed by the word sala.'
3820
lable
20.
'
*$**$*$
uaifa urarert: swtSt
TO<wn<*afaflf?uKtaHi$4
(^cis)
vrenni *g*TO'
TIT^TtrTW
coTfs*n*n
[Vol.
the
syl-
first
'
Thus
ifciarTaT, $*rersn*n, wtftissjren n
Where
oompouud ending in siren becomes Neuter, by the

25; there also in the case of these words, the acute falls
on the first syllable of th first term ; thus superseding Vf. 2. 123. S, 385? which
specifically applies to Neuter Tatpurushas.
Thus gy.faajrenj. ^ rsrsjrenr
the Tatpurusha
option allowed in
II. 4.
II
^tF%
vwiRz 3ruu3
fwr
Tiftgnrai:
m\h,
5 imafqs, 6 wife, 7
qt&farcu:
But not
nor lso
in cfftfcroE:,
wat (wa>),
gjsfif,
g^-rofwaw
prastha
'
first
{
i
*^
the
in
&c, gets the acute on the
vowels.
treated as Vriddhi
(I.
5!tt^
totuw:
syllable of
w^
m
l
mala* &c, gets the acute when
1.
it
first
ggmrsjsiH
i
sir?*
'w-ptaTij, fan?
member has
word naâraôut not when

it
ê letters
first
H and
*fr
syl-
are
75).
5srjuw
The
3823.
though the
This sutra applies even
In the word Jim and illOT
a* *ri*si*erf^Ff
when
syl-
aw,
?ris>xri
gmr,
srts**, 8 ?, 9
it
w^r^nnr
fore the
first
(araw), 5 *nn, 6 wdi:, 7
4 znqpa
wren, 2 siren, 3 innn (sinn), 4 areji, 5
WTW, 10 gTWT
in the
follows-
lables are Vriddhi
nor
?îreq:
it
&c
3 W5fid,
Thus SrefTOW., ?rrerraBK
few
3ff^WW, which has Vriddhi
in
irahrett
trrcnTOn
The
3822'
wswtaw:
(mfw)!t
'
Thus i*gvm:
lable
m?w
member, which has not a Vriddhi
first
or which is not 'karki.'

prastha.'
syllable before
first syllable,
first
wra
sCTarfaqfew^s?' jqFtowiw^ch'
'TOwriatanT.' ^fa faro
The
3821.
3 vnfas, 4
(ijra),
iirer
wfffsnrcq
it is
not of Northern People
1* lt nofc
'
in Wtn!iraj
'w-' *fa
it
acute on the
first
syllable be-
the word mahat> or
refers to a city in the lands of the
Thus JgTswTJTl
jibfmtw
nwa,
Northern People.
and 5^5f IW?.
Observe *re5t*nwj Wi:?H7rc*j
Why
it
do we say
but
Vol.
Accbhts of Compourds.
Accbnts Ch. IV 3827.]
III.
w&
*3xm
3raûfrattKnTnTWi2a3 si?
vfc
3^
167
t^-i^wi 'iraww
RgmfT n
xttjixtxt
fax?
5 Bt|fw' ?* wfirssRixTx? ^HTc^smrU'a

word of two or three syllables ending in 'a'
3824.
'
*A
'
exception of
(with the
the word 'arma

Thus
'
Why
Observe efiFqssrcrrem
Why
The words
TO
* WaTfWT5ftsmnW*!*sW*
^HT^ra3fTT?Tf51
TIT
ftptfttalOT?
XT^TXTW
+ vnzrcHriTCnrar
The
3825.
3TCrar
VTHTXTXT
qTOnth?
(long or short)/ ?
be rea
syllables'
II
*?
*9
HîmiJ
5K5^TJTXT
$sCTatra*$ErFTtf +'
before
arma
'
'
viz.
The
here also.
II
tT^TTOtWlf ttalR-
II
TsnV
'feeu'^rera
words do not get acute on
following
and sr>5R
*?M*Tllxf
W^TSRW
feinTwatoT
when standing
syllable,
are to
and sfcnWCT
in
two or three
consisting of
and srg
rule therefore does not apply to XT^TETT
5 c rU
first syllable.
xt?jt
or
nava'). standing before
do we say 'ending
we say
do
'
has acute on the

sf$3Txrxr %
TftfTTJTW
Observe 313TTXT
mahd and
'
'
spf,
sgfa^
ii
the
first
*nft3, XT,
II
Thus wmw**?, *famm*q, xjstcrro'xf, *TgTx>*xr, *nrcrravi?, wgriwis'ir (because the sutra shows the compounding of those words in madrasmam) Sfi55F?nX4**f
All these compounds have acute ou the final by VI. 1. 223.
l
In the Vedas the words T3$r3T9 *fcc, have acute on

Thus fe^raTgni anr* (Rig Veda IV. 30. 20).
Vdrt
lable.
3*S
*w
wfvj5RKT<w
the
first
syl-
ii
tTTjtiwaTfaati'aiTr? u
In the following sutras up to VI. 2. 110 inclusive, is

to be supplied the phrase
the last syllable in a word standing
3826.
'
in the
Nominative case has the
This
of the first
[sutra the
is
member
of
acute.'
In the succeeding sutras,
compound
gets
word xjg gets acute on the
the acute
the last
Thus
accent.
syllable
the next
in
This adhikara extends up to VI. 2.
final.
110. inclusive.
3^5
STCJ
iH&ohlftMii
ro'tra: iigireiTSTft^mH
|faxj
ScftiT TOH7TC*.
HSîrT.
*ref
wr:
II
otxt'^t^
'trcf j?'
fax?
through and through.'
uTxrara:i
vnm-
II
The acute is on the final of the word

member before an attributive word, in the
3827.
las first
sarva,'
standing
sense of
'
whole,
168
Thus ssf **??:. scfa*
Why
do we
55
sav
%i*\ h
Observe
vades through and through the

of
final
mw
Why
*3!?f:
do we
Why
offix
say
'attributive word
which
',
modification.
do
In fact
not
is
it
SrTqt: q*rT: T$4
The
Wiq:
Why
do
it
all,
ss-
state but
but a facfiHsncTssq
ll
by
takes place
the
eli&ion
of
the
shows only comparative, not absolute,
Moreover, in this example, the 'kartsnya'
*R5aFuMl
*ftfnsfa5RTa:
'SCIOTO/ fa*T x
member
last syllable of the first
Thus *55nfnft:
i
original
is
QtfT
It
when
liikaya has the acute,
facFTq.
here at
'golden',
15*5:,
in their
not of the 'attribute', but of the 'substance'.
'guni',
WSrTteTrW %
SlW"ufofi.q:
3828.
not on the
it
Kartsnya or complete pervaeion.' -Observe 3Tnr
'
whiteness, the rule does not apply.
Observe^
the com) ounuing
heie
not that <f 'gunV but of
frlft:
'
TiqjeRTrf S^q
denoting comparison, ami as
f??a
but the accent
denote any attribute
not;
do we use the word
c B9* sr?i:
îfflr?*:
here the at tribute of *?? per*
trt*T*5ft:,
object referred to,
silvery
'
[Vol. III. Accents Ch. 1V.J3827.
The
'when
say
.we
the
finals of
compound
anjana
is
it
is
is
before giri and
Name.
lengthened by VI.
Name
'
3. 117.
*ft?r,f-
Observe fuwinfc?:, $lfF*ufl.
li
3 c r*
5*mfr smfa
ipqs*T5TiteTTiCT v
g^rawnt
gqraTq qq? g^Tfefw;

f*m % q*xrapm>
i
qprrcrarej:
WRT^nfaswur:
sre'qqm*n
g'sT
Rf sq \%
nwfi *
if
q^fafarwri
wwrcRwa
sofa
it
3829.
The last syllable of the first member gets the acute
when the word'kurnari' follows, the compound denoting age.
Thus q^qjxnd an old maid'.
The compounding
ôrd $^st becomes masculiue by VI. 3. 42 in the example.
is
by
The
1.57.
II.
The word *j*mt was formed by w)u by IV. 1. 20 in denoting the prime
how can this word be now applied to denote old age by being coupled
with $^TT
it is a contradiction in terms.
Am. The word ffixuft has two senses ;
one denoting 'a young maiden' and second
unmarried virgin'. It is in the latter
<>.
of youth,
'
sense, that the attribute q>ST
denotes age
'
a<=30
*qra*f
is
Observe qui4TORt
3glsfs fiai
fa*
yigTfta?'*
Why
applied.
do
\re
<g
compound
ii
swit 332R qS gef Hsmgnrar,
wuw I'waUm si-jst* xmif uei) fa q* ssfrw:

3830.
say 'when the
jiiijqw
ferr
w&tf*
î3*wi
Before the word udaka, when the compound denotes
a mixture,' the last
'*qtaH'
faw
member has
the acute.
Tol.
III.
Accrars Ch. IV. 3834.]
Accents or Compounds.
169
Thus 3 3,3*1? or 53,3**

When we hllve a rcadj made the acute
rue the, the svarita accent may
result optionally, by the c or :ation
of
gU a
th8 """"ei" 9 "' gv
3 of 33*, by rule VIII. 2 6. S.
.
Z\
I?
3659.
fhe word
means mixture.
When mixture is not meant, thi. ml.
doe. not apply.
As 3jtm3*lJ
,
th,s
w,*
3831.
Before a Dvigu, when the compound

denotes a sacrithe last syllable of the first
member has the
fice,
^^
acute.
? = ^nf
W:
T '' ,f%C
J!"i!,'
Pound
serve
,
',lf
^ ^^ ^
Why
**
Cu fc, nWf|
do we
say 'before
the Samasanta affix

* (V. 4. 87, has acute on the
do we say < when denoting
a sacrifice , Observe
3=3?
*rorai
3832.
the
of the
do we say -when
The word B
Frat padok a
"**'
&C
in the Neuter' ?
becomes Neuter
" 0rd
""
'
393*3
=,t=3W
C
,
U6Uter
uraiw
>
^rsiT4?>
HHJT
exhibited as Neuter
it is
'
last syllable.
I.
II. 4.
the
final of
the
23-24
h
:
therefore
when
the preceding term
'<"" <*
ncnter.
is
particu
1s
ru
i,
f n
a,
fj,
35w
when tne compound denotes

a
final
of the
" F53V 'T,
Wh'
22
Observe' triasm
DOt
Before the word u

P
the Eastern People, the
3833.
c,ty ot
Jr, t5iaHn
under rules
3? smwif
Why
j!.:
16 3)
1.
m^m
Ob.erve
the accent does not fall on
'he
con-
II
Ua because the tlrng designated

but
(*f$)
3=33
<j
compound gets acute on the
Thus mora sww, sfrVwr

do wo say 'before
Why
Why
Before the word sabha when
member
first
(VI
Dvicu
f^îf^,,*,
mi pftwifcnw
sum, 8t ng'mfiqf
final
first
d * we
member has
sajofthe
the
'
'
[Vol. III. Accents
The Sjddhanta Kaumcdi.
170
When
3834.
first
member has
ftlf gtir%
By
and gauda
the force
^Tft?RTO!3Fm5tlT:
But when the word
3835.
'
'
is
an exception to VI.
fer
safsraw
by
'W ??h few
Thus lf**x
*t|
fa*TW
^Why
fe*isn5n
?TW
'
pura.'
in the
aphorism,
1^
h&stina
do'
wVy
'
before
âwn a=ra *
ags Hsaurt
on their
final.
,
word
'
'
the acute
bila.'
Tm*T?a*m
But
Observe SjfÔTW*
v ^twsiwt TOWtw few

i
mar*
ami
phalaka
fW, and m*U have
5Jfercni x
ftfftraw %l
fall
"
Thus îfejsTtRW TKrScfiTrew nWJj^

the word belonging to ûbhradi class.
|TO,
last syllable before the
the
first,
<5*,
The words ^pf,
3836.
on the
99.
2.
The s ,u of HZ is WT3Q formed

The 3 is elided by VI. 4. 147.
*nfe'
stand
of the word gtf
deya' precede 'pura' the acute does not

This
'
rale to wfi*f*<? WW, SrngWftfg**, A
we can apply the
3*Vi
arishta
'
the acute on the final before the word
Thus *fti!arw
the words
Ch. IV. 3834:.^
not so
iu
II
swa:
wa-
II
/Words expressing direction (in space or time) hav e

a
on the last syllable, when followed by a word denoting
3837-
acute
village, or
a country or a narrative, and before the word
'
cbana
rata.'
Thus jS^wiinnift
by
II.
I.
50.
Country
or
g*
(VIII.
'
Wgran W fr^T
name *' x&vmr.
1. 58).
Story name
of the term
*55
6).
These are Karmadharaya
place-
tsompoivndi (IU
^WR*
The emplojmen
So also
as in TO
words
time-denoting
V3f^
that
shows
aphorism
the
: g^rniim
in
2.
OTUTH* should also be included.
3838.
The
the final.
direction denoting words have acute on
Vol.
names
bef<
before
the
tho:se
Thui
17.1
when such names are derived from
ot scholars,
trg utTurtut:.
Scholar-names
to)
of Compounds.
of their teachers.
'
VL
Compare
from the names of their
Accents
AcoRetTs ^h. TV. 3840.]
ITT.
Teachers
'
Why
36.
2.
Observe 9 QT?lIRta Ulâ*
do we say
Observe tot^tT T*ft
(mfajsfttf
VVby
wheo derived
do we say
TO* fe*:^:
UTa*J
II
$?*<t
3ia3f rarVisRRi
toto
5TtTt
TO" U3i:
to g
4r{WZiqgi
to
ut
qf^jfig'f'SfTT
mojgisicfi:
*oy
flgr^HTui; a?
tototoitoi:
rr
to' tnssT
fg gRasa nnsrert
up
<h?Vi*t*'
Fww
TO WTH
Ik
Words denoting
3839.
acute on the
sarva 'have
word
direction and the
before a word which takes Vriddhi in the
final,
term by VII.
first
12 and I3.
3.
By the sutra 3f*Ttraw VII. 3. 10; 12,. the- Vriddhi. of the Uttarajada is or
dained when the Taddhita affixes haying 51 TIT, or er. follow, the Purvapada being
The word ^TS^fe: therefore, means that word which takes
, TO. and. to.
Vriddhi, under the rute relating to uttarapada,
Thus
These
TOTtfTCTOOi:, TO*'qi5[3Tr3iM
Why
and 13
do we say
which takes Vridihi
'
Had the word ^TWTCSiTfT
? "
:'.
in
under rule VII.
<?.,
to
formed by
a re
to *TW,
by virtue
of
VH.
bÎt
This
3.
12
used by us in explaining
would
have ap-
TO^TTsr: where *rre: and gmR: are Vriddhi words not
'faâ'qraf
fa 1333:'
ftrw'TOT:
wia
trcn*sffr*gnu
to"
SfpfcU?'
'sHTf-^git'cJ^
'totsijt: faij
fsrsra'TO'.
wto
'9TOt%T
innsratara TO'g
II
The word 'visva'has

a, Bahuvrihi. when it is
3840.
member
125)
12.
fasa ^ a toi*s
H^fWTT:
2.
not been
fgsg^^: toq^*: s'lrmnr^g^:
ima^TTiWTnciTS:
fa^,
3.
12 and 13
the second term under VII.
<3?VlSJF*J
the sutra, then the Sutra, would haye run thus 33ft Scf ^, and
plied to cases like
3.
affix (IV.
in
is
an exception
would have retained
its
to VI, 2.
original
Why
do we say
Why
do.
in a
the
being
final,
first
Name.
by which the
accent.
wfiwztt' TOnirTu
VIII. 98. 2,.
acute on
Thus
first
member
TtTsgqnirf
in,
a Bahuvrih 1
HTSclicJ: (Rig
Veda,
ll
Bahuvrihi
compound
Observe fg*9
*..
TOK
e fa?9.
337:
fg^cTTTHVl an
we say when a
tksctTfs-ST:
subsequent rule VI.

the
2.
name?
Observe
have acute on the
IG.>
which
succeeding sutras up- to VI.
fgsirij^rf
final
supersedes this.
2.
120
inclusive.
as
WW
they are
The
T9TO59:
governed
But
.1
by,
the
word Bahuvrihi governs
172
i .-.
*8'1
^TTT#32
The
3841.
'
udara
'
*lOO
member
first
asva' and
'
ishu
compound denotes a Name.
2.
by which the
Thus q#if 3T*>
u%
and
fJtTsot:,
first terra
Bahuvrihi,
in a
words
before the
when
gets acute on the final syllable,
'
the
II
u:
This sutra
would have retained
also an exception
is
to VI.
The word
original accent.
its
The word ^fr is also first acute

^sr has acute on the first by Phit II. 7.
The word w^rT is end-acute by V. 2. 38.
(Un IV. 118).
formed by
as
Its
mention here appears redundant.
3*8^
S1-T31
%ii
^r^
I *
;?
ii
5T5HWJTH- (êoS) ?fHWeri% nfcPTO*
A word
3842.
before
vrihi gets acute on the
udar
'
'
If
asva
'
'
and
when reproach
final,
Thus TOi*a*:, 5F^SR?*a:, QCTvrcr'g:
'
Bahu-
in a
meant.
is
The word viz
ishu
'
is
formed by
TO
(HI.
by
1. 134) and has acute on the final, and so it would have retained this accent
(V. 3. 75)
VI. 2. 1. even without this sutra. The word gfefi being foimed by
has acute on the
changed
final
3*83
to
wotit?:
as its second
*
i'
'swfa' fa*
1<
in
the
II
mirrftra:
member, the
nadi
('
ending
optionally be
are concerned.
*wfsi
'
11
Q3
first
member ending
word) has the acute on
Thus wiif'sRi:
TTT^J
may
But TO3?: and ;g3<: have acute on
6.
2.
the acutes
In a Bahuvrihi compound, having the word
3843.
affix
and
TTdCT
VIII.
all
172, S. 3900 which being a subsequent sutra, supersedes this pre-
2.
sent, so far as
In this and the last sutra,
by
into svarita
by VI.
srerepss
first.
The word
(IV.
1.
105),
ttittF is
its
in the
final syllable.
formed by adding &\v(
and therefore,
bandhu'
Feminine
'
acute^
it is first
(IV.
By
VI.
1.
2.
16) to
1
this
accent would have been retained, but for the present sutra.
Why
do we say 'a Nadi (Feminine
word srgr has acute on the first syllable

and it retains that accent {VI. 2. 1).
Why
3 C 88
do we say
l
before
5RJ
'
f^Tflfoi*TOriraTO
knsSTn** *t*cOTnfT3TT?
51T
in
as
i) word'
it is
Observe
formed by wfa^
Observe nTnffaa:
I
SVJTrHJTS:
'fatST'
<ô
faw
^ â^:, the
(Un IV. 146)
||
HR5JfiJTig:
'3aSlTtdi'
Vol.
In a Bahuvrihi compound, a Participle
3844.
ceded by a preposition, standing as the
pound, has optionally acute on the

Thus
TTOTHtJTC. or uviTRTirgf: (VI
Why
do we say
a Nishtha
'
do we say
acute on the
3*8U
3Trea3Tf>*fitt ^Tai3T?r!JT
VI.
member has
This
up
999
is
com
which
acute
is
the
in
which has
^TGafiWRi:
*T3lf\j3iTT5rJ
'tfSRrJJT
MUT^m' (3 C ^^) ^rScrTVl^:
the
syllable of
first
II
136 inclusive,
2.
the
the acute.'
an adhikara
aphorism and
word
the
end of the chapter, while the word
to the
of the
139).
Observe
should always be supplied the phrase
second
2.
In the following sutras, up to VI.
3845.
pre-
'
206.
1.
STCCTdlfk:
uSg^JT^:
jr.*
preceded by a preposition'
by VI.
first
member
first
kta
'
last syllable.
Ob.se ve
in
169).
2.
mitMle by the krit accent being retained after
Why
173
IV 3847.]
Accents Ch.
ITT.
exerts
Sr.Ttref
influence
its
has scope up to VI.
"Sinfe
187 ex-
2.
clusive.
3<=8S
5TOT gilMsRH H
*^m
faR?
^hit^:
^gnmif^sg
sriraifcRT
'craragnnrr'
999
wmn^s
faw
sjtctct^t
snwôRm:
ai?n%T
âiii
In a Bahuvrihi compound, the word karna
3846.
'
'
as second member, has acute on the
syllable,
first
tNsfiS
when
standing
it is
pre-
ceded by a word denoting color or mark.

Thus with
row
'
tkc
such a
are
mark
Why
we have
color
the lengthening of
made on
the ears of
which
'
do we say
van (II, 1. 134)
is
and with
sravSRiir:
takes place by VI.
sjqfi
is
meant
cattle to
do we say
'
when
Observe STTWêMir where

this accent
is
3*8s
*1ctto3tT3
cR^S snsraiTi
3847.
on the
first
by
PKni^lS:,
It
is
formed by
135)
is
also
compound.
by a word
qg
denoting
(III. 2.
^txiw
993
II
m*m:
color
149)
is
mark ?
end-acute and
or
'
member karna has acute

compound denotes a Name or a
when
the
Resemblance.
Thus
(III. 1.
5R
In a Bahuvrihi, the second

syllable,
'
distinguish them.
1).
wftnswn:
in the
being formed by
2.
mark and
being formed
preceded
ihw
retained (VI.
mark-name, we have SJ^^tti:

The marks of scythe,' ar-
sirrTQTCt, sr^st^: here ^r?T being
end.acute, and srs
end-acute and these accents are retained
Why
115.
here.
Observe
gwii ?
3.
'
'
is
having ears like a cow.'
Name
ihcfii:,
denotes
resemblance
i.
persons
e.
y
7 he Siddhanta Kaumudi.
174
TOTusooTsr^lT
Wr^hs:
ssTO^tss:
[Vol.
gifts:
the second
member
TO,
3FOT.
Accents Ch. IV. 3830..
sn&snro:
Name
In a Bahuvrihi expressing a
3848^
TIT.
or
$raw
?g*
coroparisoni
and 5f3^T have acute on the
jftgT
first syllable.
Thus Name
Resemblance
Afg:
TtvfGS
the
sutra giJUSgissnteTSra
is
final
*pjlg:
H
a Samahara Dvaudva.
by VI.
wci^zit--' ?Fc? fa**
qn&IS:
Resemblance
Name miwf-tsii
Name m$t-
srosrcii sr:
Neuter gender, and gfcn is shortened, as it

accent would have fallen on.
in
In the case of sifcfc the
&
1Z2, this ordains- acute on
2.
^qlto$:
Comparison
Name
Resemblance ihsora:,
The
is
fjrfÛSI
:'
it
it.
In a Bahuvrihi denoting age, (as well as a
3849
Resemblance), the second member
sringa
'
Name
or a
gets acute on the
'
first
syllable.
Thus
^^JTrTCZ
gjfrpTO
:,
'sT^-:
Comparison
3*U
ih^g
come
Why
sâYiT
on the
first
*hJt<:,
syllable of
'at
5TC,
im*:, irfj?^: and
<W
usra
'
JT<, firsr
*jjj$
&-
sfifcr
the
?Rmwt
Siibrcft
sjarffair:
1
'#r:'
hs^
foil
a nircrr*
3851.
in niiin
'jutw
and
<m
^h^
FI
age
Name
(fee*
igizj
^creraz^:
'^fir^wja'
'*t
II
do we say
say
' $t rerafamr: ssi^tt
'srtq treta'
and
Why
muUjTâRTfff
*pr.
'
It
srergsrew'
Why lo we
Observe SITS? infant:
when the final gets the acute by VI. 2. 172.
Particle ?
3*yi
denotes the particular age
*rff
out, or beconje one inch long.
After a Negative Particle, in a Bahuvrihi, the acute
3850.
Thus
^STT SWUfiH^lrlT:
*sr: urrefl srrcreTrn
falls
word
frere the
iff:
of the cattle at which the horns
51*
&Q.'
after
shstji
it
fsTctr
ajw: fJ*^t:
gererf:'
*imw\ tsstt irjrafri %aroii*V few ^toti

i*&r:
(ao$) ^frt nafw
Wrjjm'
f
After' the adjective $ in a Bahuvrihi, a stem

vz;
a Negative
Observe
11
ending
with the exception of Ionian and ushas has acute on
first syllable.
Vol.
Thus H3RWTOT:
Ved
Veda VI. 22.
and
also wer.5?
changed
is
*JS^: (Rig
7).
35.
*pzjr!
to
WW
fsjgrr
(Rig Veda II
S?
IV 38W.]
Accknts Ch.
III.
do we say
and
after
2.
*3i
q%
fam^,
*J
affix
this substitution
as
ttmjQ
Observe frr**R.
H3ra*T (Rig
r tnm*-
41).
gtflTH
tro'tlff,
and these words are taken

?'
X. 85.
with the
tzjjt^
175
^T a^rafsTOT*:
(Kig Veda
STH
and
But
72.
IV. 2. 17).
?TO?Tr.
from the root
by VI II-.
wq
Veda
spm^, *TOW^
1).
for the purposes of accent,
Why
Accbhts o Compounds.
njgo
traffl^ *o
The final
considered
is
Why
1
x
asid iha
ending
if still
v&
in
do we say 'en-
Observe *WT5H and *JrT^ formed by the :.fnx Sif^ ;Vn.

i, 156), and the accent is on sr an
h. but with *T, the accent ii thrown on the
fiual by VI. 2, 172 S. 3906.
Why do we say with the exception of snOT and
ding
in JT*
?'
3r?
here
or
Observe ^^Tfl^ and st a (VI. 2. 127).

The following maxim applies
*fa;^;j tf^lUT^crrTT ^M^HfR ^ ?I3fnffclfy lraTOtxrsn whenever *R. or vsj
or JT5^, when they are employed in Giammar, denote by
I, 1. 72, some'
mm
thing that ends with *IR or <f^ or IJ^ or w^, there (^, ^, ?jjs, and Tf^)
present these combinations of letters, both in so far as they possess and also
so far as they are void
Thus
ing are also included here.
*j*fcj is
formed by
wf (Un
140), but
I.
in
void of mean-
Therefore the jf^ and ^ng
a meaning.'
of,
re-
sfijj^ is
formed by ttTt^ (Un. IV. 145), and trfw? i=s formed by ^wfagr affix (V. 1.
Similarly Q3HT is formed by ^n^ (Un IV.
122) in which JT? is only a part.
is
191), and so also STTfl^

affix
fîq
III.
2.
(Un IV. 202)
76) the rule applies
But when the eamaânta
affix 6F<j
is
the syllable immediately preceding

S,
3907 supersedes the present
W*$
but in
also,
though
added (V.
srtj
is
fl0ni
4. 154), then the
rule i thus stsrjt :,
^Hl^rT^:
acute
the
^X
here part of
for there the subspquenfc
After su in a Bahuvrihi,
3852.
(l^^,
*b^
with the
the root.
accent
Rule
falls
VI.
2.
on
173
on the
falls
first
syllable oikratu &c.

Thus tfrsnOT* *pK: (Rig Veda
(Rig Veda
I.
3853.
of
I.
25. 10) $j|aj:,
In a Bahuvrihi compound,
two syllables with acute on the
su, gets acute
on the
*,
(Kig Ve<ia VIII. 68. 16).
which they 1i*d originally
and qra^
?|a|mi$ssw
Un.
II.
first
in
the
syllable,
Chhnndas, a word
when preceded by
first syllable.'
In other words, such a word retains

<HTTV*fan5r
sp^fofi:
40. 4).
Heie
also, for *nssr
2) respectively
its
accent.
âg:
and
Thus:
*t?*j:
IJMT^gnar F
have acute
and *q are Formed by
and have the
fsffj
accent (VI.
fps^
1.
on
(L'n.I.
197).
TTlf"
* and
151)
Thr Siddhanta Kaumudi.
176
Why
do we say
âVf?;: (Rig. II. 32.
Why
Veda
I.
we say
do
VIII. 95.
'
viia
The word
4).
sftq
strap *r
3u?ft*:n
fcrcsâHfaisef H
aug sw
3tm*rw
^nfe smf faiw
syllable
first
Thus sncR^w, StTf^TW, 3<irW,
Why
Why
found
'
do we say
do we say
'
^&
in
&c.' ?
we have accent on
3*US
fgSKR:
Observe
5R5T
<fec.
stRjWH
2.
3tf
tlfcT,
385G.
Thus
In a
f^fsifa:,
28) fgw^T., (the
is
fan:
f^R
q^
STTsIT,
3TO
and
These
II
Observe
'
3TiTSfi5Ti7,
the words
sjjq,
3??JT
wo Id
33, and
&c.
33, the present sutra supersedes VI. 2.
%*""
9*9
first
(^Tvaf
affix
f*:Swi
(II. 1. 17)
fg?TT
fo*T
TJTWoFU:
'gW: fgQTQ3R fg^l^TT
Dvigu Compound the following second members
I
get acute on their
26
'
and not on the Prepositions.
qisTl^^TSlSRT^
fgfl-Si:
compounds
of
'
'
c*
syllable
eRmwf
V.
1.
-3TO,
WW
is
I
eiided by V.
Why
1.
m*Q and
*PT,
arte: the affix fe;;* V.
19
elided) fgufcq:, fg-HMis:
II
1.
tmw
c^TO,
|K3, rfa,
an Avyayibhava compound
have becomes accentless by VI.
mm
adyudatta.
âjiftwra
sere**!*, 3tTOT5W, wSjto,
Tishthadgu class
in
After the prepositions utt,
is
3UTgw
straw*
svarita on the fiual

it
II
last four are to be
W*T*T
literature
3trsn5m
'
terms have acute on their
and mi
syllable.
first
Avyayibhava compound, the following second
In an
3855.
'
su
'
So also sprtdsi nracT: (Rig Vena
The word effg has
^fotra: (Rig
SUTTflff,
2. 172.
the Chhandas, after
in
In the classical
9.
srsr
Observe
ii
122. 3).
213, does not apply to cftq
1.
-r 'a_T?:
formed by
27
I.
formed by 33 affix and by VI. 1. 213, S. 3701

But its enumeration in this sutra shows that
is
first.
Chhandas, by Phit IV.
in the
'
have acute on the
Veda X.
*fa*nT (Rig
|g*cftTOT
'
Observe
(Un.
3).
syllables
Mro
,^
vrlya
'
Rule VI.
two
).
'
final
an exception to VI.
is
and
'
syllable
first
In a Bahuvrihi compound
3854
the words
Thus
sfttîiT
affix III.
having
This sutra
125. 2).
3 c ya
it
7).
Accents Ch. TV. 3853
III.
Here sn^ has acute on the
and has the accent of the
affix
on the
having acute
[Vol.
1.
25
is
28) fgsrV:, (the
do we say
in a
Dvigu
SRTO^
elided by V.
affix
1.
tot V.
Observe tjir
Vol.
Accbnts Ch. TV 3860.]
ITT.
*JT5TT3n3T^
faw,
sigggfifaj?
??r<J*TI
353n*f WTwringR^w x
when exhibited
Thus
Why
'
do we say
HW
'
3711*3*1513!?^
sn^Haiw/
ala
first
Why
do we say
W hy
do we say
HrS**
1
!?p^
the word 3n*u
on the
first
wrm:
and the
Neuter
affix w> (III.
Genitive compounds.
aa<
1.
^H*
136)
When
syllable of
'
Observe 5d^WH3IT*n
'
is
2.
1,)
II
Compare VI.
frnj?WSFF3W %
(VI.
final.
2.
86.
WT|JT*?7m
member.
is
w%
The wordo^sjfjT: denotes
'
chihana
'
though
its
formed by the preposition
The compound
the word
i
Neuter by
is
II.
the
descendant
with the verb
9^
trewTSjâiTTraj^
These are
20.
not Neuter we have S-jf^JcR^T
is
II
11
11
in
'kantha'the
first
&c. have the acute.
As faiqj5R5m %> Tt^V&*m xi if ^tflWIW

firs>
25.
4.
retains its accent
In a Neuter Tatpurusha ending
3859.
the
II.
has acute on the
it
33**3*113^31^
snfkft^tnTatfcnw
sufefrfo era wi$ tpvvur
with %ci
first syllable.
II
<HT|{*iWlj,
(sfhw: niri 99l)
this sutra,
Tatpurusha compound
Observe STlBlIW'm
'
Thus gtafajhoi?,
of
member
first
a Nishtha word,
in the
cfTfggfJSQT
??rq*d-
In a Neuter Tatpurusha ending in 'kantha'the acute
3858.
falls
is
'
Tatpurusha'? Observe 3ân*f at^Hn*^** waich
Sfq'fTWfaf 5RTOT3J53
f5FW v
'
'
gTOIffOTTOr,
The compound' becomes Neuter by
in a
member
177
rreitnsiraT n
at the end of a
'
Bahuvrihi compound and therefore the
and as the
fair
Neuter, has acute on the
in the
STTSHDSIT
'
The word
3857.
anuvritti was
member gets the acute.

which gives faf? and
The
The word fetn

fcsr is
of the
repetition
that the
present^ indicates
word srrfe
syllable
on
first
derived from the root fe^lfrf
is
formed by adding *fg
(III.
1.
134) to %?\
?Jc?+^R = frjgcrj
*c0
the elision off?
irregular.
%îf3*^5RgRT^ l^TOI*
*T3^3??:cr3T*JT3J3TTuf5T
5nf3Ti* vmi
3860.
is
ij
n^f
The words
3?#3a
snsrfsjfeiTf^miT:
**,
purusha have acute on the
*5*
5ht*^sjt
i
I^C
i
II
3fa*3SRii
'ir^fqin'
asri
f*w
qrwi<m
uraii
and 3RT*m at the end of a Tat-
first syllable,
when a reproach
is
meant.
Thus qî^Tw, smulf'sw

O^s *fti 3<n3TJi, r?g^ 3r) ^tuw^sfw (w^sfwThe reproach is denoted of the sons &c. by comparing them to
S9T3) mfToRTqSH
The analysis will be tjnrci^fwa . e, i*r8r| r?^W x and the compounding
ifci &c.
,
23
178
Tb-e SiDDHAtfTA Kaumudi.
under tl.
takes; place
Vyaghradi
56: the
1.
not meant, we have utjt^tjt
Jft-tfach is
3*S9
gfcjjTOTqn
The word
3861.
acute on the
chira
end of a Tatpurusha, has
at the
'
syllable,'wheh something is compared with
first
meant
is
^n**i*Tt
tor
<
i
%
annrcrrcf %
3862.
acute
notes
tratp:
'wasur frrataram/ (e&) sfa Sra:
it.
when com-
F*rl
ending
V&&,
and
|TO
SIT5R
the
when the compound
de-
in
of these,
syllable
first
food mixed or seasoned with something.
takes place by
II.
1.
^Hfu:,
^<TOTSRn % =
35. S. 697.
Why
fW
^H*
5?tt:
|M|id^<Hi>wrf: *raroi*
'OTTtiTff
'
faw
atwf ^tit
u*rr*
<fcc.
The compounding
do we say 'when meaning mixed or sea-
Observe tuwqsrai^ u
3*3
3UT
do we say
II
In a Tatpurusha
Thus ^HoNrm %
soned
trH3jrawT %
Why
ii
on the
falls
&
Observe OTJTrTtTW
?'
re-
II
Thus a^rw ^kfara = 3*51^7% jt, gra5ltW.

parison
When
an akrtigana.
class being
9^$>
Accents Ch. IV. $8Gl.
[Vt)L. III.
ii
%
The words fp*, J5, ^^ and have acute on their

syllable, when at the end of a Tatpurusha denoting a Name-
3863.
first
Thus sifgapriT sjfustfsw, STOSTO^^WT, snfigsRtf:

When not a name we have trcH^**
of villages.
3S8
ÎSRmjTlS ttSOTJ
<13<>
WH'wiWlfSa BrVSV *1*QXrimZtUtf%mtl
TORl^
these are
name
ii
aWWt3*W,
<*Sv-' *T?T
T*W
II
The word
3864.
when
All
II
at the end of a
'raj yam'
has acute on the
Tatpurusha compound, which
first syllable,
is
not a Kar-
ma dharay a.
Thus HT^wnTT3?lW
In a Karmadharaya We have tjtwttssw
ydrt .-The accent taught
eded by
stands
the accent of
first
a****
and
i
the Indeclinable taught in
this subsequent'."
amfetiTg
3860
VI. 2. 126 to 130 S
in
As
i
5R
g^n
<m
VI.
rT5flW x
2.
II
2,
to
3804
though
is
that
superrule
Vol.
Accents Ch. IV 3868
III.
179
At the end of a non-Karmadharaya Tatpurusha comvargya &c. have acute on the first syllable.
words
pound, the
3865.
Thus qn^*?id:, gT*|Sa*mn:
WW
In
a Karmadharaya we have qtronq:
The
no where exhibited as such; the primitive words gq, QH, nqj

sub-division of femfg (IV. 3. 54) are here referred to, as ending with q?* affix.
words
&t5.
Ao.
ai-e
q*ww: TC .iprira.. tox*TtKR**

wtafjwrasi:
'gun:'
faw
sitsrtg 5*:
.i
The word puira coming
3866.
Tatpurusha has acute on the
Why
do we say
'after
jxw: g^ft siTSiîTf:
gqranqg*:
%m:
g^r:
snareTq^g^:
sgwr: safaR:
infwr<pv:
fair
Masculine noun
after a
in
first syllable.
Why
Jsn3iTqsiirT?qqfaTqjT afg^miiri
Jcisg*:
'gstf
do we say 'a-fj ? Observe tafe?TO

a masculine word' ? Observe ST^fani: H
Thus grafag*^:* mfâq'^r:

Jim
*nrfaipr:-
ii
4*a*g^:
sqi^rg^:
ainiiT
^*sa^:
qfcqnr x
^rerngq:
wffssRg^:
mcwqcigsrei* srwiar.
q^^g*:
HTfag^r:
word putra has not acute on the first; syllable

word which falls under the category, of tea*chers,. kings, priests, wife's relations, and agnates and cognates.
prince, king', ^ffSsj a sacrificing
The word m^llf. meani teacher,' nsn
3867.
Xhfi
when
preceded, by a
priest',
egrKT:
'
relations through the
wife's
kinsmen related through
^xfa maaus all

The word ^ngij shows
'
well -a* to particular
u%
the rule applies to the
lable by. the general rule VI.

1
I,
^Tgfcsinfmiratu:
The words
'
accent
wirTehsqqiugq-îR, the word
falls
special accent
on the
last syl-
95H; n
rfrq^q
g^f^rw,
i'
*q-' *fh
fasw
Tatpurusha compound
when- thej>receding word ends in,
churn.i'&c.
in
a?
aTW^lfw^ where
Grammarians.
Here the
3. 23).
have acute on the first syllable,

a Genitive and does not denote a living being.
Thus jj^rg%!l*? "ÎM^x lult w ^ w f ^*? where
being, and
<fec.
2 23.
smfa qTfmf**aiOTr^TaqnnqTaa3TTiTfa
38G8-;
brother-inlaw'
synonyms of teachers' *fco aThus WT^Tqg^:, 3qTOinig3:, SJTqrerq^q^:

*&**g^ TOrasg** iwq**:, (VI. 3. 23) sg^*:
th.it
taught in the last sutra being prohibited, the
3<s$c
'
and mother or blood-relations. *'
teacher' &e.
*fgJ*, *Wl*g*, "Wf*.

*si?i*gl:, OT5TWpr*:, ^Tfrig*:, WTTgqgl:, (VI.
of
as SUTSTT
side'
father
it
is
not
gqq
Genitive.
the
first
term
is
Another reading of the
being the ancient
name
of
ws&
given
a living
sutra.
is-
hy old
The Siddhaxta Kaumudi.
180
2 qfer, 3 qfoq, 4
f m,
nmz,
snfi????,
[Vol. TIL Accents Ch. IV. 3868.
3RO, 10 gwt, 11 3SRR5! (^R5f g5reR) 12
Tbe word
derived f urn
the root
qi?*5 and asfaa are formed with the
upapada
'to protect' respectively, and
affix
with the
sgdri
affix ?-.*&
is
the
gives TSZiZ; this with
*Jiqr
II
|rft arill
(Div 50)
the
with
affix ?ff;
and ths verbs 5IT to go and qi

(qifancnffl = cfifta) (III. 2. 3); 3IeR
'
tffti
cR
added diversely (Un
(s^w),
8 gpraw
6 ^t^t, 7 ^rw,
lhT
II.
56)
(rlglfs') gives SMSiS
am
'
with *az?[ (Un IV.
81)
^TRR ^*ffl- JTST (Prishodaradi) ;

the penultimate being lengthened ; the word qj?2E is
;
O*15^) wlt^ " gives c[5cl

formed by the afiix fgpq added to the root z with the upapadaqj (^'^'rfk^^H*
S^rtfrr) the augment jiit being added to eg
qjs* fwwtfl = 9p3 w:
tt with
HW
tbe
formed by *rc
a c <?
(III,
1.
134) added to
TO g 5RT^Tifa
wmfmciTSfsiT ^nsjeSTrnfa
*n*ii?
gives 3*Tq:, g*l with *jjg^ forms ^JTH, then
affix 3Rq?j
âprw
The
3869.
Sutras VI.
2.
I'Jij' fa"?
and reduplication,
55
swejnus??
nsiHa:
'
<*^
Sfw^fa*?
<afa,
added îq
^?!
3i3r&TqflisTi:
is
II
||
frisiqsrari?
wq~' ?fa few
words SRT^,
six
126-129
have acute on the
5R5|
is
gîreq:
*
3tT5RT*I3 x
qra, gfH,
wsias-
ii
and
SITSfi
f^
preceded by a non-living genitive
of
word
first syllable.
As W^Tq^JT, 3wVt**r
hi the last
parison, that case being governed by
example
VI. 2. 127,
sfar is
Wk*rw,
not used
as
com-
^WV, w*qrajT<In
<
Here q^ra, j^q and sjtcR do not denote mixing, which isgo\erne d by VI
2. 128.
srefrff*!*, he.e the compound does not denote a Name, which would be the
case
under VI. 2. 129.
Why these 'six only ? Observe,^* <5:
Why
non-living?
*
Observe
'
II
arasiTiresr n
3<=so
5^
5RJJ
*?
qjq^wraaf.TT 9sraThi^T fipjirq
Hr^qgW
193
II
3%insw
qjqgsisffh*
wvg<fi
<
i
g?m fa*
'
II
3870.
The word kunda' at the end of a Tatpuruslia compound denoting a wood or forest', has acute on the first syllable.
<
'
Why
The word 3j?r here denotes <a wood' by metaphor.

Thus
do we say when denoting a wood' ? Observe WficRqsu
3*a<l
vrm vmrw*
wnwOTjwroj
wye(t3TOt
6 erves
its original
<
ir*:
WW
The word qîrq governs
'
qjwlwnsr*
qjwtocjmi?
qjwftwqmw
(a ess) ^f?r qr^cj a
bhagala
'
at
the end of a Tatpurusha,
pre-
accent.
The synonyms of
are
The words W7T*T
mfotamtr,
q^fai
r??q*q
q^?qfqf>jg?Hw
The word
3871.
gfl^.|
II
also included.
<fcc.,
have acute
the subsequent sutras
up
As
qpiwim*m
on "the
to VI.
2.
middle.
U3.
S.
^sq^l!
^Phit
3877
II.
9.
Vol.
Accksts. Ch. IV 3*73.]
III.
ftjffTUSîTT:
gstrerafawrniaisrTitf inn:
when
181
a word retains in a Bahuviihi its original

always of not mure than two syllables, with the
After
3vS72.
accent,
it is
'
s*iti
"
exception of bhasad.'
'
Thus Wh^TS:, rWhfS:

203) aud has acute on the
has acute on the
Why
the
and
1.
being
*jjj:
to
quife
class
to (Un
formed by
V.
(VI
2l>
1
ffi
197).
do we say after fajffl ?

Observe *44tar.l: which being
formed by
Hwftq^ has acute on the penultimate syllable sit by VI. 1. 217
affix
word
(VI.
first
The word tn3 belongs
first,
'
Why
do we say
ftrf??
has acute on the
tion to VI. 2.
^$3
with the exception of HrJ

first
syllable
(Phit
'
Observe fgjftwsr?
The
This sutra is an excen "
P
II.
10).
1.
nf>l5RT^Tcro3CTHgiH
thrown
3<ro*Ta
3#.Tnr
****:
<ftg
||
*fo'
rt, fe,
In a Tatpurusha, a word ending
3873.
^*T
*-*',
a Krit-affix preserves
in
when- preceded by an Indeclinable called

Gati
(I. 4. 60), or a noun standing in
intimate relation to a verb (Kara
ka), or any word which gives occasion
for compounding
(Upapada
r
see III. 1. 92).
Thus wsSt**:, wfotb

$j
^3,^,, (Rig Veda
poundmg ,s here hv If 2 18.
With kf-aka-word we have
,
2)
:Liw
W
""" - " -*!fc
AH
e rjj
fei
;
^
vr
m
*-
X^c^S^r
'
th
Pa,,aaa
fI
by
l-
II'
thee!
"
affi
''
WW
6
**
Jr~ =tj "'
">""
:;Tv u
att
Gati>
ro<" (ihatu)
root
'
name
is
Karaka>
u
Here
the Genitive
at. ir;:. t r
The word *a
/iZ
'
employed
r*
in
r 8n
f*
chere wouid have
in the sutra for
e WM
F r
'",'" a Snma,a
vfetwdw,, A 8iuj 8a
-
Word., hut not with tin.nta word..
,-
* <*
doe8 not
"- -
Observe
"*
?"
, karaka
the "sake of distinctness
re
-"
for
tW 8 lt8 <"' " <*>

after!
can take place with kri.-f,,,!,.
So that without e.npio
u**
in
th
182
could have inferred that
gRff
was meant.
Therefore,
TOafaftttq, Wa^frlrnTT*?, by
plain the accent in
it
is
said the
According to
the sake of distinctness.
;u the sutra for
ployed
tying that
'Krit'
this view
is
em-
we
ex-
compounding
fl*q\ and rmq
first
u and
the words Q^forlT and trafffrm ending in

added
and the accent of the whole word is regulated by *hjw by
W?,
the rule of jjfrTfsjtS ( aee V. 3. 56. and V. 4- 11). According to others, the gift
in order to prevent the gati accent applying to verbal
is taken in this sutra,
takes pi ice with
and then
is
compounds
(V. 3
words
in
term retaining
first
STt^ ^QTrUrT
CTîri
Zlftu (V.
atf?T
3-
67), or
q a^fasnw
these will be governed by the rule of the Indeclinable
'^T aratqfaV
tf^frT %vi', or
of
accent.
its
'ri^qTC^ra
like
The accent
66).
SJTf TcnfepaiaTS^ST?: 3retal33:
'WOT*
îfo^m'
f^wicr^n^^:
'sgr.srq
'Sjgtfw' ?fr1
In vanasfati, &c, both members of the compounds

3874.
original accent simultaneously.
their
preserve
Thus 9TOfo SR *T
(Rig Veda X. 101. 11). g^qfrT'a: (Rig Veda

Veda VIII. 15 13) H^mynH (Rig Veda III)
sn?5R*T (Rig Veda I. 106-. 4) ^sr;^:w(Rig Veda V.. 2, 7
29. 11); TO
and
qfa have acute on the first syllable-, and the ^2 augmentcomes
Ij^SffTt, both tt
The word
or gf^5fr7: = BrSf7f qfa: (VI. I. 157).
1.
(2)rfTOf:
157.
by VI.
Note
IV. 50.
5ra
is
7)
îIGrt
sr^qfmr
(Rig
accented on the
acutely
srerftTfcT: (&tchi being
final,
some say
has acute on
it
^qj some make
formed by
achi
the
acute on the
first.
(3)
first sjsft-
(4) rfâTrJ (taim being

nfal, by including it in Sarangrava 'class (IV. I. ?3).
fiual,
according
to
others it has acute on
acute
on
the
formed by 3; Un I 80 has
acute on the first).
and
has
=
p&layati
with
pati
or
na
nipat
na
fgq
and
the first
is formed by *q and,
or
(aa
5a
sfafrrT)
smfrrl
TO
*fiER3Ttft*rr.
(5) nnshs:
place by VI;
has acute on the first, S msa is formed by gsr, the lengthening takes
the Genitive is not elid(6) sf sr. ii*'m=im <?3 irattW is a Bahuvrihi
3. 137).
(7) STH3TO5RJ bothed by (VI. 3. 21 Vart), and both have acute on the first,
*
the lengthenfirst
have
acute
the
on
by
formed
being
mi
&and* and Marka
on the
acute
has
Trishna
'(8)
137.
ifWTWPli'l
3.
VI
place
by
takes
(W
'
'
ing
first,
(9)
the
3tTT has acute on the
OT&fe*99-$r
final,
as
fore by VI. 3.
on the
fi
included
ml.
iu
Bamba
visvavajas
is
The leugtoeuiLg here
final.
is
finally acute,
Bahnvrih-i
au
visva by
VI.
formed by fsro
are
is
2.
The lengthening
W*
137.
(10) WW?**:
The words governed by this sutra
is
alao
by VI.
3.
137'.
106 has acute on
takes
place as
be-
and w?g has acute

which would not be
affix
those-
the next two sutras.
3875.
In a
Dvandva compound of names
both members retain their original accent.
of Divinities, the
Vol. III. Accents
IV
Cft.
183
38*5.]
Thus *nu 4z%vasm\ (Rig Veda VI. 68. i) |^T^W*fft 53* (Rig Veda IV.
The word ^^ has acute on the first (by uip&tana), S5U? is formed by
3^
49. 5).
(Un.
53) and by VI.
III.
by VI.
ûwffl
first.
140, and Iudra-Brihaspati has three acutes.
2.
Observe
of divinities' ?
3*sS
fl^qflTVJt
Why
do we
Dvandva'
do we say
two acutes
bai
say
98?
names
Observe
II
Dvandva compound of the names of divinities

the compound simultaneously do not retain their
In a
both members of
when the
first
the exception of ^fash

Thus
Why
?ftWT?S*dLltH3tf3#ri)^qyHfat|
3876.
accent,
197 has acute on the
1.

*T
XNR and wfoR
*T?T**ftwiT 5R gmr: (Rig
Veda
word
anudatta, with
is
II
109. 3). Agni has acute on the final.
I.
Why do we say with the exception of 'prithivi' &c ? Observe STrsiTqftjsrr

IRtFT (Rig Veda X. 66. 9.) dvyava has acute on the first, 'prithivi' being formed
by 'riish', has acute on the final.
$**n*sfr* Rudra is formed by 'rak' affix (Un.
II. 22.), and has acute on the final.
lîqu^T (Rig Veda VII. 35. 1) Pushan
has acute on the end.
have acute on the
(Un.
I.
ukra and manthin
sraRi^wfosfiT, the words
159)
final.
The word uttarapada is repeated in the sutra, in order that it should be

by th word 'anudattadau', which latter would otherwise have qualified
Dvandva.
The word 'anudattadau' shows the scope of the prohibition and the
qualified
injunction.
*a
ma:
famTTstiiT %
'w'âsiror.'
*ff? feuig:
W*
supplied the phrase
member has the
3*s*
11
should always be
WTf5>:
In the following sutras up to the end of the chapter
3877.
second
^nrasnunfftj^^TUTm
*rasr:
to
ran:
v* *w^:
1
irJ x
JTf^TT^TtJtRfTf3f?T5r
'the
syllable
last
of the
acute,'
*5fs:
rf
*pg*
whi
wrt ^sft
**
Ham
$***_??:
**?f5re*i x
II
'
tpij gfKreihj
m^v:
sg*
wsifawsnfe
]8t
The
3878.
when preceded by a
in
Gati, a
*I,
and but
3),
(Un. HI.
TO,
^5,
Tfl,
TZ and
3TO,
2.
R,
139).
19),"awa formed by eRa* affix (Un. II.

this sutra, by VI. 2. 139 this word would have retained
for
which was wcute* on the
original accent,
affix
3TCJ,
the acute
Karaka or an Upapada (VI.
Thus aHatQTOT: (Big Veda V. 41

and
member has
second
nouns ending
in the verbal
[Vol. ITI. Accents Ch. IV. 3878.
116).-
m5J
triHf:.
?R:
ma: mierea: formed by
first,
yiafam* gTO?r: fRig Veda
*na^
11.
T.
2
its
4).
tpn ml|a3Sia Srja: 'praised in man 7

lands',
word
the
mm (HI. 3 56)
lima:,
ma 'dwelling,' is end acute, otherwise
on the first (VI. 1. 201, 202).
a-TrT3a: =
?m amfcilw
amsT:
The word qa
being added by III. 1. 135).
af aafc?, (III. 2. I Vart)
(
has acute on the first, as it belongs to âife class (VI. 203). When the precedThe word aatSR:
should
:
be analysed
as
ing words are not Gati, Karaka or Upapada, this rule does not apply
wm?n, where
being Karmapravacbaniya, the word gets
the accent of
as
TO*Jri*
In
the
declinable.
irwmsng or TfiTwrsmTSTTro '^hw w't ^cr^'' msn*T/ro: u

3879.
The participle in kta has acute on the final, when it
preceded by su or by a word with which the second member is
i
is
compared.
Thus
V
?iri ff
With Upamana
When
f?
is
Rik â*a
in the following
words we
have
mm*a?H&
^^rTpj (Rig Veda X. 85. 24-
aTsft
Thi
debars
not a Gati, the rule doas not apply, as
h^cTcj**?
afa^TîaiTr?T^T?aiTnf Trmwtrmr?T^5cr3ifarg[T
T
sFTfirs 5*:
'msf-' ^f?r f*>*r x
The
3880.
mrfaair^
3afj?r:
VI. 2. 49
3iTcR*a:
Thus
Participle in 'kta' has acute on the
3tT|fl*: 3!T5fi*a:,
is
aafirT
?i3ET5rfT3fTTTT
WctfrT
(m" r ii),
I
a^T
The word *F^?n in

the namj of anything
acute on the
3q
This debars VI.
last syllable
final.
H OK W*mT
above
thT?
else
ii
fsisfi;,
does not take
than a 'cow'
but
the com-
49.
Why
do
cTTrnfTSTrT 5el)
list
2.
if
&c.
6 af?raa,
10 sraTwr, 11 sfisciTafa (sferfresert
mufasris,
a^Tn^âw ami
II
acute on the
when
it
denotes
when
final,
'a
cow'
it
it
has
uggrcfclt
TfiTOiTTrcq3tism3TTra x
aor
irchsair
aftmim: irtfaâ:
not mTfarT &o.' Observe mrfarra
mif^r?, 2 aaffarf, 3 ^TsaTfafT, 4 afnz^tar. 5
8 afame,
is
it
aftanm:
mTsaifarrc^ u
when preceded by a Gati, or a Karaka or an Upapada,

pound denotes a Name, but not in 'acbita' &c.
we say 'when
and 48.
WSflrTT H
Wa
a^^s:
li
no,?*:
mOTnafHWHW
mref??-
Toi/. ITT. A^ccRifTs Cfi. IV.
The
3881.
acute on the
Thus
V%&,
bave acute on the
applicable to compounds which do not

The words have acute on the final, even
rule
is
only in connection
is
with
2 ug^ft qu*f:, 3 *ipT*uijar: or
?jff^JT sRwfin
mi
(YscV)
'
ngUT:
along with
that these
*fec.
g^flW
This being an Akritigana we have
îfsjix? r?*f 3srwf fcrou:

'
it
final.
uqs' m^TT,
isioiTfiT
The
an Akritigana.
Some hold
these words.
OTm
THpi:
It is
followed by qTSTfee., though in the Uanapitha they are read
when not
have
'pravriddha' &c., ending in'kta'
woi*ds
final.
denote a name.
18&
3582:]
rT*
words
SUtt3tf,
mizfc Jafafl;
Sffia:, 4
hîij?^! isffH i^rr ^ri* h
sjssifgijaFi
?fri ipa3treffis=rcF3*ci wciffl h
The final of Past Participles 'datta' and 'sruta' alone

has acute, in a compound denoting a Name and a benediction, the
preceding word being a word standing in close relation to an
3882.
action
(karaka).
Thus i^T 5iiqm:

^ = 3^^:,
1
when
the rule will not apply
Why
do we say
though a Name,
final, for
is
'of Zrt
the present rule
benediction and a
and wrf
makes a
the
146, S. 3880 but such a word

ticiple be
do
and
146,
restriction
accent
is
Why
final
do we say
is
even after
fore does not apply to
do
we say
*
indicates that
So
is
not on the
2.
as required by VI.
final,
48,
S.
2.
3782 unless the Par-
rule applies.
that
the restriction
should
For the words Datta and

a nonkiraka word.
As F^rT:
apply to
ruta
will
II
?' The rule

will not apply
^THT = 5âiTRT This rule applies to
a karaka-word, only when benediction is meant. It thereisfsri 'the name of Arjuna's conch', as *TCS^T*T 3?H 3*3^:,
governed by VI. 2.48.
24
Why^
eRTToR
with regard to that rule even.
'when denoting benediction*
not meant.
Datta and &ruta after
'Oft
ttfaifaa: (VI. 2. 48), which,

and does not take acute on the
governed by VI.
*n& (alone)' ? So
not to Datta and, Sruta.
where benediction
is
Observe
2.
we use
have aoute on the
which
Datta and sruta^ when the present
Why
'karaka',
fem*tc!*;
The word
preceded by a karaka, and the compound denotes
rfi is
Name,
a gati or upapada precedes.
not governed by VI.
that where a Participle in

ei
fewxg *aT3 =
R
^
Observe 5WHT TTWTaia:
'
'preceded by a karaka'
As
The Siddhawta Kaumudi.
186
^rmVTFST
Sirlfjlclf cifwî HI
3883.
The
The word
VI.
Participle in kta has acute on the
*pnrerfa?W
final,
when the
condition/
means 'being in such a condition/

Thus Ht?HI*rfarT*f
This is an exception to
??si(cT
When
(WT9) then by VI.
words
the
3884.
**:
&c.
a*rfarl
wra^H* afresh*
fa^
'
isriiaui:
vm: UiR
1
member ending
the Abstract or the object
(i.
Adjective), has acute on the

Thus liquid *J<5W
CT5WT5RT: 3IT5W,
ed by 3Q3 under
is
This
nn-
sRun
the
148,
VR, and denoting an action in
having the senses of a Passive
e.
an example of *?T3 or Abstract Verbal Noun.
SRTrarasf or
Passive
116. For the Sutra III.
III. 3.
2.
final.
is
an example of
spaw
sFrTOTasm

in the affix
Actiou
of
final.
gisritîTfw
mt-' sf?f fcBw
Noun
are used to denote
144 they get of course acute on the
2.
sBT*5RTra*wnirqinnT*
SItsrt: snsra:
second
SJTrJ
as Adjectives
48.
2.
OTTHSFHT TfiT^WTTTa^W^TSlTf
denotes 'done by one ip such a
compound
UWrpftrra
Adjective.
116
3.
may
This
is
form-
be explained
by-
when the Upapada is in the objective case and bhava is meant, (2) as well as when object is to be expressed.
When the first explanation is taken, the above are examples of Bhava
when the second explanasaying that (1) *g^
is
applied
Karma. Why do we say ending in *jr' ? Obdo we say 'when expressing an action in the ab-
tion is taken they are examples of
serve l^Tg'ltmsfs^??
Why
stract (bhava), or an Object (karma)
karaka
after an Instrumental
Observe faasPTR
there
In
an"
Observe 5nT>3T5TBr
x
(III. 3, 117).
the
Why
here
do we say
counter-examples, the
second
after a
is
added
karaka* ?
members
retain
original accent.
3885.
The words.ending in *?
BWPTT^, SI^R, 3JT*R,
on the
word.
final,
when
mjH and fa
at the end of a
or
ffffjj
as well as
affixes,
tJT513R
and the word

&c. have
acute
compound, preceded by a karaka
Vol.
Thus
TVQm*
JHJ
*TH^
fai 5!
^1^0^^^: HmarPT ^sTsan?o4a

TOawnfw ma3iTT3 words
to be taken here
ihcRtff:
2.
48
This
is
is
VI.
II. 2.
are those
compounds
and those
9,
are
only
^faoigrai*:
as STTfR tuqtsisr :, gfciraTaffi:, STTamg^To?:,
SRTH
2. 139,
and in the case of gfrrl, r,1,e VI.
The words sqtqeu^ &c. do not denote here wra or ot, had
an exception to VI.
is
superseded.
they done
ber
CTlfTOsftT,
*jim
TOT*
which form Genitive compounds under
TTSTCja 5***^
187
op Compounds.
Accents
til.
VI.
so, rule
149 would have
2.
not a kraka, we have UWHT 8*nf?m %
When
covered them.
'
Here the
acoent
the
mem-
first
by
governed
is
60, S. 3784.
2.
3c8T^
UT5T*, 2
iiffsR,
3 qfr^TtoR, 4 uf>ifosF
(3rST3*) 8 3|?faR,
%T<J,
10
11
ems;
tjfricrcR,
WJ,
TOiTHjefi,
12
sthsj, 6 *\zncn*i, 7
13
qf*iHIJ5R,
qi?J,
14
15 arfani
fcnj.
^TCTtTO
wit
w\Zjq^gqqw
iriN g*ra iregimw
cpH*-' (a^lS) *fa *T<?m
'ffrg**
The word 'punya' has acute on
3886.
'gtHcnV
when
the final
preced-
ed by a noun in the Locative case.

Thus
*pWT = ^jrcnusTaiiqiT
*&>zjq$
The
compounding takes
place by II.
40 by the process of splitting the sutra (yoga-vibhaga), taking gtrTZTT there as

Here by VI. 2. 2, S. 3736 the first member
a full sutra, and ftiql: another.
would have preserved its accent, the present sutra supersedes that and ordains
1.
final.
The word tpw
and would have retained its natural
aoute on the
the
syllable
first
Observe
case' ?
wTUT^w
by
krit-accent.
accent (VI.
(VI.
err ipw = iregsw
wTHfcr**nr v
derived by the
is
^t^5?i:
Why
139).
do
(Un V.
15)
get acute
on
uf?
we say
a locative
fjrftaTip'TOrc^faûacnsTsw
**
srFw
II
The acute
3887.
*
affix
II
m3TfHF375g fesf fjrftaramf BW5!TO t
of
2.
Unadi
213) and thus
1.
una/ and of
'
falls on the final of words having the sense

kalaha when they are second members in a com'
pound, preceded by a term in the instrumental case.

Thus jnrrr^w,
The compounding takes place by II.

wrafererai^. snsKcjra^:
an exception to VI. 2. 2 by which the first member being in the
third case, would have retained its original accent.
Some say that the word m$
1.
31.
This
in the sutra
is
means the word' form mfi so that the apjhorism would mean
the final'
gjsf, sm, and 5F*M| get aoute on
f
an Instrumental case, the words
examples
will be in addition to the above:
then the word-form
To
this
we
35T
followed by the word ir
By
sutra
II.
not
synonyms
1.
The
,,
w^s^rfc^:=v^TOTa
alone will be taken and
reply, that a;si will denote its
after
its
also,
synonyms
If this
like
by the fact of
be so,
fersfi*r
its
&c.
being
13, aRqjra and era* always take the
[Vol. HI. Accents Vn IV. 3887
188
Instrumental case, so we could have omitted the word ejrftuTOT:, from this sutra*
by the maxim of pratipadokta <fec. ^sTra^t? would have referred to the com"
for
pound ordained by
II.
1.
31.
The mention
of
here
?j?ût
only
is
sake of
the
fear
clearness
irofor/ fat*
wrwrqifjT^T
faaiiftnn:
*im
The word
3888.
'
strumental case, when

does not
mean
ittronasurei' ?sci iiunfii? %
'Fw^5cr^
www si sfiri
t^mma*:
'irnvn'
few
misra' has acute on the final after an

it is
In.
Preposition and
not joined with any
compact or
alliance.'
Thus frrafirln: sWfirir:

Why do we say Tiro ? Observe ippfRT:
Why do we say not having a T reposition ? Observe frT*ra* frro: The employment in this sutra of the phrase anupasargam implies, that wherever else,
the word misra is used, it includes misi- a with a preposition also. Therefore in IT.
1. 31 where the word ftra is ased, we &> n form t ne Instrumental compounds with
l
'
?JW preceded by
Why
irwiwftisR:
a preposition also.
do we say
fif^Srim W^frfMf^Tf
mivd
s?
a'enfa
*T*sfaf?r fa
'h'^-' ?fa
1.
final,
gf^rqjfa^T rraiT-
flrTOfrriTOT
feRw
Q^TÎ^ FTCnq
mftn^wsfta
1.
5),
99),
deserving that' (V.
'capable to effect that' (V.
when preceded by the Negative
1.
fa?Yi:
sTfujafa:
3889.
the
Observe
'3^^^' J? J ^ J|^WIT,5snj5^5iTTiwfw:
*j\T?3rTf?ai5Elfl
fitted for that' (V.
that' (V.
com^wo
not d/enoting
fains w*faatt;
'
101),
mftnafta
good
'
63),
Particle
J^T fa
W.ljrite-
denoting
affixes
1.
for
have acute on
'
nah
makes a negation with regard to the abovementioned
'
when
it
attributes.
Thus snufs 'suited for that (V. 1. 99) : ^smfraTSsfafaf go*?" 5* 3H1&
The affix is 35J
Stefan (^Tff i^^TWH FWlfe)
vi deserving that (V.
The affix is 5* (Y. 1. 64 and V. 1.
1. 63) : ?jreifa*:-T %fa efi: (r<jrri?f??).
19). faff 'good for ihat' (V. 1. 5) : TOip&iT: = * SFBlifit fam:
The affix
to effect that'
is ^ V. 1. 1. snsrwsr. -capable
(V. 1. 101)
*s ?nftle!f: *? 9*The affix is So! (V. 1. 18). Why do we say ' after arn ? Observe
<RTTQ:
'
'
'
'
ii&mrocfrTsTUwtfwR:,
fore the
avyaya fa retains
fairraswfaefi:, where the negative fa

its
accent by VI.
2. 2.
Why
do we
is
used and there-
say
'
negation of
Vol.
A&cents
III.
that attribute
'
mas
Observe
trcfavrcFa: = VTiaJWTfaw:
Taddhita
means the
attribute
general.
Thus irarrwitefaRW BUZ - wrf#c<5^TWjm
the senso
of
Why
samapaii
do we say
aV9T3T
denoted by
Taddhita
Observe
affixes
Here ffa a krit
the
&c' ?
'
in
maw
the
any attribute
Why
trrnjraltrovitq^
efisqr
The word nw here
and not
affix,
Observe
addid
is
189
3892]
IV.
Cft.
do we
trrftnHta:
smrftlRto:
araJTsfa = ftsmiriCT,
sense of
deserving
'
'
(III.
'
'
'
+ ??3g3roas^?nr?33S*ia-r-'
?f?r
$s
êrmasair
169).
3.
'
ST$T
*l
aam *h ?ff\SHT ?i?r5ri^TT?n5w st^t nqjijfairofsreaTrTjawisrT îw.

ITOTCT?
qTUT^T Hf 5*. nrSST *im*n T mWf WZrQ*
*lrT3i fail?
I
in
say -in
W1r\
flfe^'
11
The words formed with the Taddhita affixes * and **?

3890.
when not denoting 'useful for that,' have acute on the last syllable,
after the particle
TO
negativing the attribute.
Thus qnrRT Si: = UTWt:, l tmrcn: =sitn*aT:, (IV. 2. 49) efîj srasaroug
^Wss^Sf^sfw^ (V. I. 6). Why do we say 'atadartha: not useful for that,
Observe HT3T^W^5RJT =m<nw % st qiaw = wttzih (V. 4. 25).
Why do we say
5!
'
Taddhita'
This rule does not apply when the
formed with the
krit-affix Hr[
must be negation of the
"When
Why
do we say
affixes are not
and the other with the
gmisie'SsrraSsm^
effective element,
2.
such as si
(IV.
tfcc.
2.
9),
thus
9.
ed by the particle TO, has acute on the

is
anubandhas has another
A word formed with the krit affix
3891.
See IV.
There
The affix a and q<g one without any anubandha

anubandha & being specifically mentioned, excludes all
it."
other affixes having q as their

s
îm
not denote that which in addition to those one or more

to
'
Paribhdshd:
^RITS^rJ^'WaraW
more Anubandhas is employed in Grammar, it does
attribute, othfifwise
a term with one or
Anubandha attached
Taddhita, as
negativing the attribute
final,
^f
and
when
3,
preced-
the meaning
'not capable'.
Thns
wa:=3TJW f
we say when meaning
'
3IrTT?T,
cook his fojd, not because he
vows
so also
not capable'
is
sraro 3
q^: utt^^tî5it?tîwt^
s
i
134
(III. 1.
physically incapable ofjcooking,
of his particular order ha is prohibited
*<*
nfefail:
Observe <nqin ^f^RT:
<feo).
anîr*
Why
do
does not
but beoause by the
from cooking.
u
*<w mm.
mj m
lraroftraaiTUFTTOd
[Vol. HI. Accents
Thk SfDDHANTA Kaumudi.
190
3892.
krit-affixes "TO or
word formed by* the
by the Negative particle, has acute on the

somebody by that word.
Ctt.
IV.3895.
preceded
3R,
whenône abuses
final
Thus van%? sti 5U?*T:

this rogue does not cook, though he can" do so.
Here avarice is indicated, the fellow wants more pay bofore he will cook and'
*
not his incapacity.
When
3893.
acute on the
Thus
'
have acute on the

Thus
kritya:
57 fiaGona
2.
saaira
is
*tt5it
3cR,
Ro
*rcv
ii
moraii?
'
^5:
sa*
sa
particle,
words formed by the
and
and the words gTC &c.
fTStBT^,
vnmmjf:
3*:
though the
i
TOroiRsfaRFmo:
two
contains
latter
but
instead
of
The
affit
anubandhas.
In
f*gano with ?,
the
^cura without . As *T is udatta, *+

But
So that we would have got the required form.
well exhibited as
+ 'STW^
vj
exhibited there with an
?*na
only, so that
sutra
frre &c:
ordained after
as a matter of fact the affix
sent
has
final.
^sraajw:
might have beeu
affix
'
by
95),
1.
includes TGTCQra also
sutra III.
'
D^vadatta, not deserving of this name.'
nsnjp j^f^fe
kritya affixes (III.
nan
'
denoting a Name.
No
After the Negative
3894
^HK3
meant, a word preceded by
is
8%$9VeCT9feiITO
ârc:
abuse
final, in
313 93H:
3*8
wafts:
So also vnaf^q*:
may
here
include
The
SW*l
words 8cfn*
WlaHUff, and ctmhto preceded by
for the sake of
*R*f wap:
srai^f :, VR3TT>f :. vihf^R:, iisrerRi:,
cFWTrJ (double negation).
ft^TCUra also
the pre-
IRTSmfaaif :,
(double negation). ?bh-
WOTTO,
ca*WTn,
taliTTn
when denoting
names have acute on

the final, mfaw?:, vn^r: and 3ifa*!TTST3Si: (fa*TC and S3ST taken jointly and
separately), qnzcvfn, ^^ûfriSR:
In the
lln^TT and im%: in the Vedas only.
(s*sr)
Vernacular they have the accent of

1.
î*, 2 srg, 3
arafw
sisr,
i.
(tfrfagi)
e.
udatta on the
4 vnfdara, 5 asra, 6
wnso>iwT5TraTWTTnfy!ji7nir^TajnTiin^ms^TwT5!T:
8 fg^fTTF^^ HISH
B*<U
ijsf
**iH?
SW*H
(jlfiwiTt,
*rer
ww
(faramui
*H33J *fasRTTS3Sr), 9
fsurt! spagrft^rsrfgj
*cfr^mw x
first.
*rarf<a
TgqffT,
WBureK:
u
11
toshth, 7
qfcnrrar)
10
oh
totstw^,
i5ltfn, 11
Vol.
III.
After the Negative
3895.
ing
is
optionally acute
nkw,
^-ww^S or
the words *ra,

Thus
orvî
TOW, *$*:
particle, the final
: a word formed
a nd *rf*
W
The
of the follow,
with the
and
affix 'trin,'
**
191
^g^,
fcc-**|w or iJVwjy,
alternative
accent
that of
is
the'
r **fft.
Indeclinable
(VI. 2. 2).
3*<tS
9fA^rfawR^pr: towtodwt:
mc*
foinrarc, i c i *
i
TOTssiaiOT 3<sr*:
*a vwwwwi e rtvvw:
Qrizfgrftii:
nivswir
5t%r
fee ** van <*,**:
jj^ t .'
f
^ Tn f gW7Jflwwm:
' TOrrajga:' faro;
iiqirmi-:
wrgtqrai:' fas*
hit^ **,
I
'
Fg
mn*'
iwr'
ftiw
%
vcnr:
'
to'towt:
fa qT
wot. 5 *t a i*vtim: ganrarofara

faro
*ro
**otit *ra& ^tosri rf<i ma.ro vww%riteTiiw
i
www smcr
'
(^
In a Bahuvrihi, after the words *5W,

rf and fl?
the last syllable of TOW and of a proper Ordinal
Numeral, has the
acute, when the number of times of an action
is meant.
Thus *i v ,rf qrt a,** ,,,,*. this
is the fint time of
3896.
eating.
mpnm
^zfgrfru:,
W,_mi TOWS
or
Why
do we say in a
Bahuvrihi ?'
Here the compounding takes place under

by the method of yoga-bibhaga.
'
member, being
hjd 0WeSay
first term retains

,
nrst
Why
*5*
the third case, retains

'
afterida,n&C/
accent by
its
do we say
its
of
VI.
*-TOlililir,
prathama and the Ordinals
Why
I
do we say in counting an action

Here subttances are counted and not
Why
HOTTO
do we say 'in counting ?

and the word
means here
When
the arc
affix is
7 m, fw, *"
3897-
'
>
Observe
Observe tf
'
foremost,'
added, the acute
falls
BahUV,ihi g0V6raS
'
mfaifg,,.
rar OT T=?3
and
is
not a
,^ = _
on the last
thB
svlMble
-^-t
'
_*
receding
8
sdtras up to
<
stana
'
tl
has
final.
l
*M
fcfclb2r^"T
I.OWiiii
Why do we
Why
d We
say *ro> ?
numeral
In a Bahuvrihi, after a Numeral, the word
acute on the
bere.the
action.
Observe tf
'
T" e
first
1.
divid-
Here the
accent by VI. 2. 2.
0b8OTe
2.
692 by
S.
ing that sutra into two parts
Observe
sa ?' after
Numeral'?
Observe fgrsm:
I.
Observe
19*2
-
[Vol.
Accents Ch.1V. 38fr
lit.
"
gc^c
38$8.
al
&z$a
faHTi*T
Optionally
has acute on the

Thus fgwsiT
isfe^:
55
\$%
m the Vedas, the stana after a
so,
&t:i*rt
or fgScMTT, ^rT:*rWl or
srautfosw*
on the
falls
Numeis
final.
'^'ircarq' faro
Ite
firaftre:.ii.
In a Bahuvrihi, ending
3899.
acute
in
mitra
'
'ajina't h%
and
'
when the compound denotes a Name*
last syllable,
that
Why do we say a Name ? Observe fsrafira:

As 38fa4n, SRUmfsi^W
Prohibition must be stated in the case of fw5T when the name
Vdrt:
of a Rishi.
As fgscrMJTJi: which is governed by VI. 2. 106 U
the
final,
'
It
the acute falls on

In a Bahuvrihi ending in antara
word which denotes that which lies between.'
3900.
eHa5fi5ri!*T
'
Why
dec.
3^01
'
'
after a
Thus
\JT3^f ssi
i.
through an
we
do
3^ **Tf*
cloth
intervened
say
when meaning,
MQ
II
In a Bahuvrihi the acute
3901.
cond member
is
'
^ScWnl* 5dcJbetween'? Observe
or drapery,'
lying
is
on the
mukha meaning mouth,

'
i;
when the
final,
se-
the actual bodily
e.
part of an animal and not used metaphorically.

Thus
sWigQIT
frrcTRsi:.
3TT5TT
3^
mukha
'
jt*3
In a
we say
'
an
actual part
of a body
'
Observe-
entrance'.
Bahuviihi,
the acute does not
denoting a real mouth, when
and a name of
able,
do
means
^Toq[^fe^finTT^m^wfe^^R%wi:
3902.
*
Why
Here
a'direction, or after
it
comes
tts
U1?J, FpT,
such
on
fall
after
an Indeclin,
S^>
^3
anc*
Sf^ll
Thus vera:
fo*
Tn'vgta:
3fW *a:
The word 3 is finally acute and retains

Tne word *1S has acute on the first by VI. Z, o2
i
its
acoent.
&o
i-
Vol.
III.
mV
mem ,ers
Accents Cn. IV. 3001]
wlifw:' tgftgw, gffiggw,,
Vflj
,3^ and ^
In
thege
of the Bahuvrihi preserve their

respective accents, under
lb6
e f TOm 01"1
preCeJe ''
P
"' Sfe.
> *W. the
tl
taught
id tthe next sutra is also
superseded by anticipation,
"
(he
>
Role VI
though the words may

'
denote comparison.
3<f3
fi"!ariTOTqT3raifn:TOTif
e.
In a Bahuvrihi, the word
3903.
<ts<e
'mukha'
denoting
actual mouth.' has optionally

the acute on the final,
'
PartiCiple
y
ta
rby
Wherewith
'
clpa r ed.
acute,?;::
the fit
1.
ISO
sftrt mrtfiii
member
preserves
its
when
"Yr^
original accent,
which
is
that o
when
'an
prece,.
-omethbgh
the
- ot
the "atf (V I
||
^.^SCTi.lK^^
Aftera
of
ofaw
a w o!dfor
dfor
<
!**-.!?*.
W*
d deR tinga Sp6CieS With

ê exception
garment or covering and after
a time-denoting
a aft6r
SUkha &c
Participle in kta>
",
ZtZ^l
:::
:
W-
'
;;; :::'^;r
('I.
-S.
stand
uvrihi> but not so
37,, the part,c,ple be.ug

placed after
first
optional r7,le
in a
comply,
wh -
ha!
the
*****
the word Putra
L^ uTaC,
^ ^T
TheSiddhanta Khumud'i.
194
%:xa, 3
31s, 2
(?m far)
q$,
[Vol. III. Accents Ck. iV.33904
**, 5 w*,
*ts,
**ta,
*$,
w^nr, 10 otho, 11 shs, 12 un5f.
3<H*
SIT
lll^
SttS
qn
srfrT5RT*?*mf3*s:
<i$*
II
surrosiT aTnfraTTi:
aRisrifl:
fcresum
11
After a species (with the exception of garment) or a

time denoting word, or after sukha &c in a Bahuvrihi, the word
3905.
'
'
*jata' has optionally acute on the

Thus
<r*KSlTr
by Phit
3<?o
crPj trim
*&-w
wt^sr:
ni
6.
nan*
'
qt*
11
swmw
wfa
tpfraif?
wwrawgfc:
(V.
'
by
nan 'or
and ending
su
153) has acute on the syllable preceding
4.
'
'
'
affix.
By
2TTt? l
the last sutra,
3fa Hrf Fwr>T
the accent would have
Thus maw*?*:,
it.
*ir3i:
When
3908.
the
nail
'
and
Thus
ftnuvritti
'
su
to
'
mf tfm:,
was
compound ends
which
STOTUaR:
present
'
from the
sru^ taV.es
final syllable
counting, of
is
possible
course,
on the syllable
purvim.
^ and m
%M
in a
last,
by VI.
x
this
makes
fall
it
II
acute
Bahuvrihi preceded by
sutra,
this
jg in
though
its
the last
aphorism,
the
while here the syllable
preceding
the
shows, that in
word which
or aro % ).
added.
is
has the acute
with a
preceding!
'
en qra
in a light vowel, the
repetition of
the acute,
syllable preceding
Th's
last,
kap
The
short-vowel-ending
1
fallen
gajw'lftw: U
5R5R!Ff BT^TSlrlraJfJ
on the syllable before such
falls
is
formed by the Negative particle
Bahuvrihi, formed
kap
on the vowel preceding
BRU
v^riwz nz*a**
ni the affix
'
I.
II
11
3907.
the
and Qig are end-acute by Phit
has acute on the last syllable of the compound.
'
Thus wtff:, |jnm*:
5o$
A Bahuvrihi
su
wp
The words
15.
II.
TOSWiT*
3906.
by
s^gur?:, wra^TH*: or T?m&m:, **35Ucf : or g^wm:

The word 3^ is first aoute by Phit IT. 6 ; ut8 i*
35r5TT?f : or
or ^:^5ITf?.' Ac.
first-acute
or
final.
is,
and not
at
least, of
Therefore, in
2.
the
syllable
two
n$m: and
173, because
it
preceding
syllables
(not
jpsR:, the acute
has here
no antyat-
Cm
Accents
Vol. TIT.
3^*q3Tqsrgf5i5nf$T s%t: qti raw

^fmras:otto*-' fa fow^ 3*53 otStsbi
*
mm w*:
^5r:
fith
Wjcftrirai:
h ayni:- u
195
Accinti or Compounds.
IV. 3911]
bahu has the same accent as nafi

when it denotes muchness of the 'object expressed by the second
member.
3909.
all
'
'
m-
in
the
172
2.
member,
first
is.
Negative Partiola
rules which apply to a Bahuvrihi with a
those
such as Rules VI.
'
Bahuvrihi with the word
In other words,
governed by
Bihuvrihi with
when this gives the sense of multiety of the objects,

Thus wj'ft*: by VI. 2. 174. anjfsFMsrsi: u
<fcc.
denoted by the second, member.
Why
we
do
say
uttara-pada bhumni
member
denoted by the second
when
multeity
of
the
objeot
meant' ? Observe stwj *nrcttCT=STji?W VHPT V
is
(VI. 2. i;.
^ ^
nurTapfrsOTir:
q*w
ogwra:
gwfecraifftirai:
'
mnrarr:
*$
'
f*m
ir
vggfr ?gs:
vraraflTOl-
vuitrifr nun:
c
In a Bahuvrihi, after
bahu/ the acute does not fall

guna &c. when they appear in> the compound as
ingredient of something else*
3910.
on the
final of
'
Thus w^goni ximj, agq* incw

agura: (VI. 2.
Why do we say when it denotes an. avayava, or,
sjgwfsT^wir^^âu^fiHaTgTnaJhs^jinT:
%
serve
gqnfe
1).
Akrtig'ana.
ingredient'
is
1
aa
Ob.
ii
2 urg*, 3 vuijq, i
1 Tim,
*<m
3:911.
SQHjrff^r^ uotto'
qqus:
W*JT$T %W.
^m,
Harare:
'
Ig91{
'
uq&Kcqq
faiJJ
3grg:
s^thh,
i.
grwrfff
3
'
fair
'
*<JS[
vuvfinrai n
i
Has
faw
i
3*f tftaqts:
fgq^:
'stj?w
word denoting a part of the body, which
stant (and indispensable), with the exception of
a Preposition
'
parû
'
f*f
is
con-
has, after
compound, the acute on the
in a Bj.hu vrihi
'
last syl-
lable.
Thus wp|:
rams*
Why do we say
Why do we say
Why do. we say
IRTOfrf
Why
fccTH
us* qira qts'irof?f q xtvzg:\i
after a Preposition
*
part of the body'
dhruva
is
constant
'
Observe^rf^qijiss:
Observe TOftim qg:
and
indispensable'
11
11
Observe 3gTW :
up only at the time of cursing and not always
temporary and not permanent.
Here the hand
so the state of 3gT*|
4
1
is
raised
do we say with the exception of qir
Observe fenifc
(VI.
2.
1).
U6
The Silpitakta Kadmuci,
After a preposition,
3912.
compounds of every
[Vol. III. Accektb
vana has acute on the
<
'
3<<U
3ra:
After
3913.
Thus ^3rTg
when
nr*t 3315
the acute
'
This sutra
by
VIII.
4.
sorts of compounds,
an tar
'
in
final
kind.
Thus Venn* WZ&rq, fag jgr^ftD^QH, the *j changed to

word samasa ' is used in the sutra to indicate that all
are meant, otherwise only Bahuvrihi would have been meant.
IV. 89 1 7.
Cii.
falls
made
is
on the
in order
final of
'
vana.*
make 5R oxytoned,
to
a preposition (upas*>rga) does not precede.
KR8
*5?W
gusifeer:
sjsgftesRteTtr.
1*9
info:
II
s*rt,
The word antar has
3914.
'
'
11
acute on the final
when preced-
ed by a Preposition.
Thus TOnf :, 5WnT.
$<<IU
?U5fT:
'
a Bahuvrihi or a BTT3 compound.
is
WU
* fkfkvZTR S
aî to TOJramssrc sfcr ^ $
5*
'
TOT^fTcwuHn:-' (asus)
The word antar has not acute On the
3915.
prepositions ni and
Thus
This
after
final,
*ftf
the
vi.
*sfo:, eafo.*, here the
is then substituted for the vowel
first
member
retains
its
acute,
then the subsequent grave
and semivowel
is
changed
to
svarita by VIII, 2. 4. S. 3657.
After
3916.
pari'
a word, which expresses something, which
has both this side and that

lias
acute on the
3
3917.
the Word
'
nianrlala,
11
w^t^ ^TtrTW
TT*ItS^
as
final.
Thus uftsR*? *r xjfaiqe^
3^^
side, as well
'**3T^fr'
fa*
After
pr,i y
body, has acute on the
TOSJT
TO)
which does not denote a part qf

when the compound is a name,
a word,
final,
II
Thus TPTB UW,
WSrfcfTWlfa
Why
f=TS3Si*
Thus fa*3SRW
1 f^r^^^T, 2
ready by VI.
the root
Bttv,
added
is
wfe
as
either
Bahuvrihi.
SJTTH or
compounds then
bbava
the
they
U
If
ate [end-acute
= ^crCVq:
Bahuvrihi
fa^clft
3W ^w qm
i
affix
al-
aud we have
The word
The words
qfwsf
final after qft, as, qf<Tg*r?:
SlFw^T *n*n
4 faw'SFF, 5 faisgRgRTsis;, 6 tîs&srttW,
fasrid*?, 11 faifo*, 12 g^fasi, 13 stm-a*,
ending in the
SjfcSIrT StT{tk
tu tlie
Sfiq
ihe
efiTr
final.
The word frnzRf^R: = fawRT. OT^TrT, is a Pradi-8am.&a

The word cl^q: is thus formed to
affix fi^
223.
I.
Obseivi
he considered
avjayi
as
part'/
<fcc.
fW %*?,
fomfto, 10
These may
body
II
f=w!*T
fsreirq%r %f
,
k
they be considered
with the word
fa*(I5IW
denoting a
'not
say
l\.9H
nirudaka, &p, have acute on the
f**U5 fassrq 3
T faqqq, 8 g^fta, 9
Note
we
do
The words
3918.
IV 3921.]
Vol. III. Accents Ch,
:,
ftsrictei:
^SrT,
qft^lj:,
<t^
(00 HI. 158)
fjf^
is
ms,
cT*tw % qtff?
formed by adding the ?.ffix

have acute ou
9R3J and g^
and qftspq '^;
ii
The word mukha has acute on the
3919.
when preced-
final
ed by a bki.
As, *jjf*milbT
It
is
a Bahuvrihi or a TITT3 samasa. If
it is
an Avyayibbava,
By
VI. 2. 177, even
then
JT*r
al
it
by VI.
fiual
I.
223
also.
would have oxytone after an upasftrga, the present sutra makes
declaration that ttÎ
when
it
is
oxytone even when the compound
is
the addition-
not a
Bahuvrihi,
does not denota an indispensable part of body, or a part of body even, as
was the case
Thus ^tVjt^t
in VI. 2. 177.
3<x<>
mtt
H*
The word 'mukha
3920.
3Ji*n
II
ii
.has
acute on the
final,
after the
preposition apa.
Thus
qpfw
The
separation of this from the last sutia,
is
for
subsequent aphorism, in which the auuvritti of
of the
3^1
uro^fe
w\
^farraa^T^ttA^feshvim 3TO g
Htwiwi wretar-i
www, *m nmw
i
the sake
only goes.
i
q*$>
ii
efqinarr^f^muRm^^-
108
by
apa.
the
final,
Thus
V.
is
85,
i.
a far?
'a
Accents Ch. IT. 3921.*
III.
HJ^H,
3TC5ra,
^fe, TOT^ arid
plough', have acute on the
final,
when preceded
The words JjfiOT, *,
3921.
a word denoting
[Vol
afanT,
WX\m\, UTW*
vufcisiii?, srotjrfMT, *U5iftn*j,
(This ardains acute
where the compound apa/ihwa^does not take the
when
takes that
it
affix,
the acute will also
This further shows that the
affix.)
sam-Uanta
on the
fall
samasanta
because
final
and
end-acute
qjfg: will be
body and a
by VI.
permanent condition and the
compouud must not be
After
when they
compound
denote
by
**|
These
fw?!T
parts of
Here the
Bahuvrihi.
is
a Bahuvrihi, nor should these words
and permanent condition of these
3922.
also
177,
2.
on
not compul-
affixes are
(vfaftrur samTSr?:)' *ro$fa5i w*&h, vrof:, wkttjH*'?' wwwr*

are mfe compounds or Bahuvrihi or Avyayibhavas.
Some of these viz.
sory,
|[H
to
affix
denote parts of body
parts.
that word, which denotes that thing which
ixfvi,
overlaps or stands upon, has acute on the
final.
Thus ^fvren^sêftilft 3w*lTCRW *XW$ a tooth

c
an-
over
that grows
other tooth.'
Why
Here the
do we say
acute
on
is
when
qj,
Observe ufawi *njw *

meaning 'standing upon ?
krit-formed second taember retaining its accent
'
the
(VI. 2. 139).
*RT:TOiTOTOnf aRT3*^T*rTT3TTra
vtTotitto:
*giTfT:
**w-' fk few
aR^m^^Rîn^
w*n$i satsn-pras:
grwreTOTOT*:
vîmj stnsrs^&f xs:
as 'kanlyas' has acute on the
^rainrraTOW.
tot*ti
whtiitotow
fe
After 'anu' a word which
3923.
is
not the Principal, as well
final.
The word fRTOT* means a word which stands in a dependant relation in a.

= <Rsg5!its*: These are wfe samasa in which
compound. Thus *njiTHT
ll$iTa: ^TtqT ;f==*13* ;TTflT(, iece
the first member is the principal or Pradhana.
Had
the w\rd gwtaH is taken as TOM
the second member is the Principal
^n
ll
it
been non-pradhana,
there would have
say
'
*TOTT
3<r8
<jrt:
'
it
would be covered by the
been no
necessity of
mstsm^vns:,
Observe m^ffffr
yflWj aTfare:
qTws6ntren*it
its
first
separate
tretfUnTtSTri:
<K
portiou of
the sutra,
enumeration.
where
sfe
is
the
Why
and
do wa
Principal.
*s6iifire5
gtfnjjjw
*saiTro:.
Vol.
Accbnts. Cn. IV.327.]
III.
After
3924.
when
anu
'
Accents ok CoMrofcNDS.
the acute
'
The woid qîfetZ menus
m*&z*a'
*sr??T9iT*sR:
*3ran3**T5rTteTTi:
After
3925.
pada
'
'
Observe
'
employed
siffUTTuf:
srm+'
'ati
rule
That
But
it
would
The word
CTSi
do we say
The
3W
'
men,
*^-
z*
'TO?q
irrumfamui:
s *
tot?t
and the
krit-affix,
syllable.
Why
do we say
nonkrit.word and
'
'
when
apply to
force of fa
which
in
does not apply
it
a root has
to
is
to
be
ij-RW mui:s
when analysed becomea
which
SlfheirreSi:,
ngrasifaFa*i:
n\* the second

the sense
fa\!Fi=*JrosU3JHT
when
compounds
to those
11
is
member has
*gw,
'*fa\n$'
the acute on the
Thus
manifest.'
not laying down'
rtU<yid^4WrM*3
'
making
that of faqra
fa|piw
of not laying down.'
is
not
'
meaning
hh: n?5iiOTURhntn:
fsrfarare
^twt
Therefore,
After
last syllable,
ma^ft
ifrTtra?T
analysing the compound, a verb like a?w
in
adirazftari
far^T z*&\ fn5Q3:,n
3926.
Why
restricted
is
to complete the sense.

ll
sttu:
a word not formed by a
'
when
is,
frraramraiTsiHT
i
ssot ur
^Tn:, Hiffmsi jtWtIT
equal to vftfRTCi: 3U*JJ
fw
tps:
ifex^'-
*f?iSiT*SF: *
The
V&ri
been elided.
*Rjg5h
have acute on the last
Thus ^ros-qren*
*3
inferior,' or
Thus V*
mentioned.'
ir
* *H*nrT^tu *fa
Word
purusha,
WW. gw:=î:i
but
urn-.
importance,
of a secondary
tioned again after having already been
f*w
final of
means a man of whom mention was already made.
it
<J*S:;
on the
falls
lf>9
Observe
fasr^fw, sa^fa
fsi3*K:=fsjrscit
here.
*r>umf.y*r:
ks
*?aV.
it
vfiiOT
afansiT
smsinTFJ?
In a Tatpurusha compound, the word 'ansV &c3927.

have acute on the final when preceded by prati.'
*
Thus TOTCg*:, irfflodr:, vfati^T

In the case of xm*\ this rule applies
when the Samasanta affix z^ is not added, when that affix is added, the
ll
on the
acute will also be
*fam,
I.
by virtue of z^l which
10 *>5, 11 g* (*rgt *ju\j<w:)
The word
(TJ1.1
final
37),
*B3T
iim*
is
is
formed by
formed by
the
is
a ferT affix.
11
the
affix
affix gj
mfa*\
under
(Un
I.
the
general
156), 315 by
class
*nro-
adding %s^ to
The Siddhanta
200
gtj
bum
Ho
(Un
*BTsrt
^t +
53)
I.
*X
II
(Un IV.
(III. 3.
do we
say 'in
W^rRRI
Tatpurusha'
the
mzm
(Un
f*w
'*m*nra:'
3^Tt:
gain:
final
'
fot. 2
10
cFi^q,
'
3<W$
3a
HTtsi^r
^vTra^feH:
FsRHj ajgisron
'-asra
After
3929.
jn a
T*
Observe
'
'
UsTTSTWcI
ad' fa?i
su,'
'
su
'
denotes praise, but
Why
p roach or censure.
reproach
is
meant
3*30
'
4<9
33W
Firc3$ 8
it
faÊTT
by the
affix
^^rmiT
II
rTOifmaWT?!
'
meant,
'is
spRJcrfHrT*
farTTWlT
in
that
r j?
H ? Observe ^nptn:
Why
So *k ^MD*f
3$g *p^3
<ks
here
when
II
11
VV& faz&XTSmi
Sagwa^r
fsTttTUT
'{(&&
11
'
utpuchha may optionally

'
final.
always have taken acute on the
The
II
n;^TR=3c<Wf. or ^rWZg: (VI. 2. 2). When this word

sra (III. 3. 56 S. 32 31) [from n^W3^ffl*3raîlfrT, then
indicates re*
3rSRT5r?:
q^JTSJ=3r<J^J5
<ht
spite of
The word
do we say 'after
Observe nu5ig
In a Tatpurusha, the word
option there also.
acute on the final
the sens? of the whole sentence
is
n^ ir s 3fa ^5:
have acute on the

Thus
jj\i
11
the second member*has
Fciw5tr^ s
393O.
8 stot, 9
II
msraTTO x r=R
^gaura
^ra^5tr?3T tfTtfTfeRTCHI f^rSnT^TSTrlc^

1
stout, (stoutt)
which denotes praise.
Thus ?3 iafwISTsfl
verily
in 3U*th:, 3tR<*:
dittos* = 3UHTW.
3lPTcT:
Tatpurusha compound, when reproach
the addition of
tsrw
so
Tatpitrusha
in a
Bat not
(5xr) 3 ^^r, 4 jhg, 5 9reff 6 fsigT,
11 tire
'
rest.
Thus 3'inaT isr.*?*!* :, 3*^:, gtnfsRJi
Why
smfst
Swnsi a
'
'
'
(its)
Serf
two syllables and

when preceded by upa but not
have acute on the

when they are gaura and the
ajina
awg:
sti-th:
(III. 1.
In a Tatpurusha, the words of
39281
suite:
few
'h?**.*'
fa*
^fT
vftmm WW$ts& =
atnpnr iregn^sRwfsi'T în-terrf Hr^sS Tftn^scrlffucsrr

sro
by
added to
T3i
147) 3g>7-t-TOr
III.
Observe
formed
is
SlfelT
augment
with the
106),
^H + frTSR^ =
||
Why
162), fara^ + ?m*T
^t+^
+ SJ3 =*crHTT
[Vol. Tit. Accents. Ch. IV. 3927.
Katjmudi.
rule
final
does
by VI.
not
apply
2.
to
144, the
a
present
non-Tatpursha
is
it
derived
would
sutra
ordains
as,
33Rrn*
Vol.
Accents
lit.
3<t3l
m^gS w
fffroi
qTTSawr^T^T 5TI
*Tffli
'flJTOfa" Wi?n:T*xm'
WTU*iW
SA35I
on the
tionally acute
'
TTITH
or fg'inq as in
or T^fai^ as in
fg'jrvrf as in
fw^^rf
^7^1
I
and
have op-
jK&sj
II
Fgtna
?TO1T*
.ft
4)
Veda
(Rig
:'
*W~R<Wl5l*m?*Jra
SmgTnft M^TTHX *T
I
fW$vzflj (Rig Veda X.90.*
scmfaww
fagyfaff
201
3^T
trrar,
and fa
final after fj
Thus gT *T3Taw= %q*Trf
tWl^
'x^farS:
In a BahuvrShi, the words
3931.
tga^*T or
TgTI^rTOUTxxg
mffaWWfWmmn* H* WUVS*
SWrHVriVnTteTTTrSr q*T FITR
IV. 51. 5)
snfsftti
'
Compounds
or
I.
TOT* (Rig v *
r
fg|sj
146,
or ?g
**
The word
)).
UT^ is in* with its * elided, (V. 4. 140) %t\ is the substitute of 3*H (V. 4. 141)
an \ |Tv/^ retains its 5j not allowing samasanta affix.
This also indicates that, the
samisanta rule
the acute
is
is
only a part of
HT1TV3T
here the
retainel (VI.
3**
it.
first
2. 1 )
When
not universal.
on the
is
final, for
Thus
is
middle
Why
acute by
after
Phit
<K*
and
ending
ittw byR^(Un.
in ir/ ?
3933.
III. 19) are
Observe âjeej;^:
<V. 4, 113) a fa?j
and
thi
this
accent
ia
II
final
optionally.
in 'kra'
Thus 3rTTâ
The word rrc being formo
by Tt% fa
the samasanta form of 8eR?tf (V. 4. 113).
or StiIssrzi:, TOatnHSRSj: or ssrâjg^*:
W$
kheii also
Observe 9?*3*-
IL 19 and
The word 'saktha* has acute on the

when preceded by any word other than what ends
is
compound,
Fgand fa
3932.
The word gq;*
added,
affix is
Observe g*n% tfs fgf f tf
'Bahuvrihi' ?
TOTO gnUTÎTH
samasanta
the
q?raf is here the Bahuvrihi
fgwâ':, tV*T3?
member
JWhy
the
which
both
is
end-acute.
always
Why
oxytone as
'not
it is
after a woi
formed by
an
affix.
The
first
syllable of the
second
member
is
diversely
acute, in the Vedas.
The word gr. "the sôood member" refers to wxtj, as Wei! as to any oth?r wri'd it|
Thus *r>ga^msWrT, but HTUWR*: so also ÎTSUg:, ST^fcT;, f / /if f
general.
.1
26
2he Siddhanta
^02
[Vol.
KAUrtUDi.
Accents Oh. IV. 3933*
III.
In the non-Vedio literature these last two compounds

223, rule VI.
The
rule
be
will
final
acute by VI.
\8 not applying because of the prohibition contained in VI.
2.
rather too restricted.
is
syllable
and the final
and the
first syllable of the
ought
It
preceding
to be
member,
member
"In the Vedas, the
as well as the
1.
19.
2.
first
final syllable
are seen to have the acute
accent,
in supersession of all the foregoing rules."
As to where the first s/llable of

we have afgsiTrlT 3*S*JT (Rig Veda
As
(2)
we have
where the
to
final of all
fs^ *Tfe^ng\(Rig
As
(3)
As
(4)
we have
where the
to
have fg^cMg:
vff-g
fiual of
I.
I.
the second terms (tin*??:) takes

8.
the
2.)
takes the
2. 9.)
ufereSi: (Rig
preceding
Veda
I.
the acute
183. 1.)
takes the acute, w
(trafjfr:)
it
where the
to
Veda
member (mnfe)
the second
(1)
accent,
(wgfe)
syllable of the preceding
first
mw*nu H
as fssnaTOia
takes the acute
Here end the Accents of Compounds.
CHAPTER
V.
ACCENTS OF VERBS.
TO
^rHIT^TicJ eRTglHro
W^m
mil
S^rO
when
Thus
TFaffl
td^fol is
contempt
is
*n^W when
,
hilt
is
bound
repetition or intensity
word
for
iC is
fcfi*I
means
contempt
is
^ff
tram
'$?*-' ?th
it
is
denoted.
after a finite
'to
Gotra
<fec,
make
so that
he
i.
e.
And
trafa u^fr?
Similarly qaf?T
IsrJT,
U3fr? trafrT
51
by the
get food
Where
he repeatedly utters his
marriage-rites &c.
a noun derived frôm the root
may
evident' (Bhu, 181).
atlix
cf.Jj,
the era
tt T^r
w,
^gw
when
The
substitution
has not taken place, as an anomaly.
1 *u% s 5fc(, 3 qgg^, 4 *?**, 5 neF.TrsT,

6 v<wm, 7 111153, 8 srm,
$^*n, 11 faneuun, i- ^33*0, 13 ssjwu, h ^Tgss, 15 st mix {mn
wssjh, 17 SHoR n
10
intended.
has the force of repetition,
to do, in
is
few
meant.
'he proclaims his
from the rcot qfa safrR^T^
not meant,
Gotra as one
Jh^Tfe-' ?fff
a contempt or a repetition
Here urefa
Ac'
II
The words gotra 8ic., become unaccented
3934.
verb,
3R SCT
som
err)
16
Tot.
Acciwts Ch.
fit.
203
Accents op Verbi.
V. 3937.]
The word sim optionally becomes anudatta

Thus rafa jsrn or q^ff? $\j? u
in the alternative,
it
first
is
acute.
The words 'contempt and

or sutra, and not the word
that wherever
the word ifcnfk
nor the word ^tr^TtT understood.

used
is
also the sense
Why
of contempt
is
do we say 'Gotra and the
this Chapter,
in
Thus
sense of 'oontempt or repetition.'
and there
the whole
the text qualify
repetition' in
mîfe
the
and
rest'
m^nfe
w/>ril
it
sentence
For we
always
find
implies the
used in VIII.
J3
57
1.
repetition.
Observe ugfrT triwr
Here
xmr
an adverb.
Why
%$m
5TO*
do we say 'when contempt or repetition
'He digs a
A finite
3935.
which
not a
is
It is
verb
is
gtifgrf (Rv.
(Rv. V.
1.
1),
1.
I.
& ?&%%
l).
u^ njfe
Isiwi^ci
preceded by a word which

This restricts the scope of the
r:
when
unaccented,
word precedes
it,
ttiht srh
efraf,soi: sRt*1*T,
fa:
ta after the affix mfiffhy VI.
1.
is
I.
X.
4),
&3
not unaccented, when
is
not a finite verb.

which was rather too wide.
last sutra
The Sarvadhatuka
(Rv.
nssfri
But the Periphrastic Future
3936.
tgstfff irnf.
finite verb.
Thus sifami^
ijWRf ws
Observe
meant']
13
having assembled the Gotra/
well,
186, the whole affix
affixes 3T,
**t %
??m becomes
Thus
are anudat-
udatta
(III.
1.
and where the fc portion of m*. . e. the syllable ?jjt*T, is elided before the affix
^T, there also the ijjt of <gl becomes uditta, because the udatta has beeu elided.
3)
See
VI
161.
1.
JlRfsf
TIT^rR'
3937-
The
the particles
3jferf,
cle,
'
* fa?*l3
well',
implying
*%
^H>
'
'
that,'
not',
Rir.
hope' or
11),
G %2 g*\i%*
its
'
hope
Thus U^TOTWtlcci (R g Veda VIII.

5).
gjfojf VTHSf (Rii? Veda VII.
I.
SJTJTgRItf
3^fT
'
Q&
not)',.
1),
%*l,
'if,
3tferJ
44. 2.3).
91.
'
5?S:'
'
I
*??*$
accent in connection with
3&,
because/
'
irjf, 'if,
74.
Sff'^
verb retains
finite
*
(i
also'
!,
jterrogative
and yatra
ggj *iS
$5J
'
'
0,!
parti-
where.'
WVj:
faTOtUtfilT
sif^f JnfrST; ireitTq=* fqfltT wsftrT (Rig
(Rig Veda
Veda
ffflH?
5TT5R
I.
89. 9.
204
The
Hf
partiole
v
n?ar r>i
9S3
indicatory
ur has
wfrofr?
I.*
3*1
ty
The finite verb retains

when employed in the sense
3938.
ab a'
Whea something
reply
made by
*iys to B:
Then A
urged by one,
'Eat this
letains its accent, which

fillows <B?ni3r (VI.
Why
fa
8J?iw
n\m*[
formed by *ig
ending
in
m4
Thus
a negation,
then the
Thus
pratyarambha.
is
rejects the offer repeateuly,in anger or jest.

'
^ W33S
as
asseveratrve' ? Observe
acute by
with
connection
accent in
of forbidding.
becomes
fnfij
*h^
accent,
is
as
it
1. 3).
af*R'w $T** afOT-
sfts if
they do not wish for
WT^nS
Here
accentless
and Fl becomes udatta by the xtmnrnx (IN.
when
is first
its
No, you will eat
in that world
Verily
%H
of
aoute on the middle, for
Is
186),
do we say,
negation.
1.
please/
anger or jest says
in
force
rejected insultingly by another,
is
with
tauntingly,
thje first
the
3938
HFSTTm
5f^
with the
vni.
[Vol. Itt. AccbntsCh. V.
Here
fee.'
it is
acute because
final
pure
it
is
HQrfe (III. 1. 134), Z feqj i* firi.t acute, because it is a Pronoun

(*3T$ fareTWSRIRTI^ Phit II. 6) and êsfsri is anudatta by VIII. I,
of
28.
SrTOJrTi'
fas^*
1TR
^T^TTr?
tfûS
5FJ
'
1T8$
The finite verb retains its accent

when used in asking a question.
3939.
'
satya
'
Thus
1
in
Brtf
questioning
3<W
WTâ#
'
'
Truly, will you eat'?
Observe wj*if*TgT 3^ H*
^^TUTfa^FW
qtra fTisff Tfia sn*ra
'
1
<t
'fMrfflgT
^H
Why
do
we say
11
II
*sifaiir?wilr wsf'Sfjraror wsfri h
The finite verb retains its accent

anga when used in a friendly assertion.
connection with
in
'
Anything done
to injure
In fact,
or friendliness.
do.'
connection with
in
SrTgTCT^
3940.
'
fa*T
SrUrr>ilTO
Mlfw^
93
'
it is
another
is
pratiloma, opposite of this isapratiloma,
equal to anuloma.
This
si^sr*
yes,
you
may
Here anga has the force of friendly permission.
But when
it
has
the
force
*3t*?f SJIRjf* SIT^l 'Well, chuckle
Here mj%
is
of
pratiloma,
sinner!
used in the sense of censure,
ih person and
is
for
soon
we have;
wilt
chuckling
thou
is
va%
srai
learn,
a thing not
pratiloma action: for fcluta-vowel see VIII.
2.
96..
QR
coward.'
liked by
Vol.
Wi
ft
faipK ffir^
i
hi
'
*t
Vuwa.
Accents or
mW
iT*pT*iw %
300
*m mfa
ils
'
i
The
when used in a friendly assertion.
Tha: wfwnlf<f (Rig Ve-ia IV. 29.
finite verb retains
3941.
V. 8944
Accksts Ch.
III.
mt f
wi*
ti
t
accent in connection with
its
tnfron'
2).
Veda
(Rig
VIII.
12. ty
*w
î?a^f bt
liprW
WM
msTfgn^m
f
friWSrâwfa
fs*5S*JH
in
is,
Thus
cent.
W^t a
sin will
and
this
meaning of
<
9<?8*
urapinuira^
vwi nm
3S
3<88
toth ijiww,
'win
$mmunm*
is
that the verb retains
JRITHi IR3I*9
its
HW^rlsras!
a falsehood, be-
it
accent,
so
3$
with
even when QT5r? and hut

Imperqtigfttt, is the
fsnui *ngeST*m
vraar^vi
i
fe^nri: ffTHfiram
But not
fn=ni
fWTuni/ few
is,
when
the verb loses
nvx trafa hwww
Why
Why
g^ffT,
its
its
accent,
oto^
tot
craa: ir*fe
'praise'.
and become* auudatta. Thus UT3fT
u.
f?f
rt
11
do we say 'immediately'?
its
irrawTOTH vTwnr,
11
the verb retains
1
%
wmm* few,
these particles 'yavat' and 'yatha im-
mediately precede the verb and denote
it
and
11. 6.
I.
uotto
3944.
ww
3?lf?T
According to
'because'.
ii
it.
mercrnTwi gnnranti
That
fff
>
verb retains
finite
ac-
*B5jV
Thus hvt fe*J **rajrre?m %

The word
Seoond Person Dual of the root *a % 11
ative (fTC % )
'yatha'.
The meaning
followed after
irrw*w
Here both verbs
UH
UWISJ KHtfspT
is
See Maitra Saunita

i
the drunkard tells falsehood, therefote
has the force of
TT5
sentence
wt-jsttw
fire^ri
3943.
yavat' and
accent (but
example
a drunkai dadoes not incur the sin of telling
not in his seuses.
is
its
stands in correlation
it
he does incur sin."
e.
'.
Kaiyyata the
cause he
mo wr
one.
g'suffl 'Because
g^Syl
a*%'
verb retains
when
'hi',
than one verb, we have the following
more
of
*l
f*
'via' f w^n
finite
more than
fgQsrrff? retain their acceut
ihdni
sometimes one verb, sometimes more than one verb retain their
UTOHtR* fe
make him impute
3f?f
rt^sttiw
connection with
to another verb, even
II
In the Vedas, the
3942.
not always),
That
m*TCaw
5Knfa
'praise'
Observe
accent by the last sutra.
Observe
UTCTCf
uisrs 393rT:
WVff * N
Tl%fr?
vmsf
The Sidphanta Kaumudi.
206
[Vol
III.
Accents
Ch. V. 3945.
3945.
A finite verb loses its accent, when it denotes 'praise'
joined iai mediately with y&vat and yatha, through the
intervention of an upasarga (or .verbal preposition).
and
is
The
ceded by
taught that the verb loses
last sutra
man
and
ztnl
the intervention of a
^TMTJT^
titrafa
when
accent
its
Preposition does not
debar
immediately pre"
and teaches that
This qualifies the Word 'immediately'
Thus UT3R
immediateaess.
'
II
The word immediately' is understood here

The upasarga v has ndatta accent.
U
Thus
also.
UTHcJ
5133.:
q q^Fc!
3ITW3*
jjFw^hs
W,
??wr *
3946.
TOJrF,.
and
fsnmw
Fst^^h
finite
3J^>
3R[T
^flsjm 313313 ^ramro^
A finite
3947.
80
*i?i
ift FcWTOT
ii
933: traFa sh?RtT
<a|i
with a ho meaning 'praise'.

Thus *%T 333: iTaFr? SITW3'
38<=
'praise'.
ll
verb retains
its
A finite
or
'
8R
fl
verb retains
iist
its
to
ii
accent optionally,
e,
(i.
where
it
when n
i
does not
The ira means here senses other than

This is a speech
Thus TOMTIT wfaSffl or TO%T 3I r**lT^
anger or envy and not in praise (mOTH cr^srj
is
the sru alluded to here ?
II
3<8<
^TT
irrfwW* gT.'Wwj:
3949.
tiou with
b.efore
15TCI?*
zfikmfa
praise.'
uttered in
connection*
in
praise).
What
tTSTT
when
connection with aho in the remaining cases
mean
accent
^ri^3 33? F3S3* sngairf ^suimv,
3948.
accent in connection with H^
its
when meaning
Thus *TOE' ^swra-g n^'ri^fSwF^T

9<80
'vrar^ Fjpanrg^ ipro^Riir'F* t' n
verb retains
'
r,m*TT*n*?
amavai*^
finite
fc*T
it
3 3 *3
verb retains
pura' when
means
its
8r
ll
gn vii3
accent
'haste'
frojftfW*
vn
conned
when 'pura' mean s
optionally in
(i.e.
').
The word ufra^T means r3Il or 'quick.' Thus v\ata( *nHT33i

The word qn here expresses the future occurrauce which
i
JH
is
FaSIT
A3
imminent
"
III.
Accents
A.cCEn Qk, V. 3952.]
or very near at haud.
It
of
-'
tfi
while
study
against the rule of Dharmus.'istvas to
is
it
thunders or lightens.
Why do we say 'when meaning haste'? Observe tffift CT u*T>ftq^

Here
qn expresses a past time; that is, it means long ago.' See 111. 2. 113
122, for the employment of gn in the Past Tense, and III. 3. 4, for the Pre
the word
and
'
sent.
<H5RTaf: wz r&H
*% *5cttw qisafrig^srarj
verb retains its accent in connection with nanu,
when with this Particle permission is asked.
n^sîwra^:
*>$-'
3950.
^Tn fam
11
finite
The word XIWI means asking, praying.' The won! *H?*n means permisThe compound ^R^rquiT means asking of permission.'
Thus ^^^ if^Slfw
can [ go sir.'
The sense is give me permission to go.'
ilC
Why do we say when asking for permission '? Observe TCRilif 5fi f^W ?
s^ 5FTT?sr in:
hast thou made the mat ?
Well, I am making it.'
Here f^
*
sion.'
'
'
'
has the force of an answering particle,
hence the verb loses
nsfc?
?g#TT
'am^H'
qf?T
its
'Hâgii'
fa*
used iu asking
and
permission
gq^fa sh
fctf
tramf??
'^mfafa^n
fow
fas
II
3951.
and not
accent.
verb
finite
retains
with
its
when with this is asked a question relating to an action, and

when the verb is not preceded by a Preposition or by a Negation*
kim,
Thus
Fsr fg5i:
q'efn, *%T
fe^
irea?fa
ll
Why
do we say when the question relates to a foqt or

will not apply, when the question relates to an object or
action ?
3WT
H^fe^
*ipT5T
Why
faR is
5T
5IT
The
Thus
fsp
rule
Vim"
II
do we say
when a question
is
aske
'
used to express coutempt, and not to ask a
Observe
fsRBT
usfrl
Here
question.
Why
do we say
not preceded by a Prepositiou
Why
do we say
'
not preceded by a
negative
'
Observe
particle.'
?eb
Observe,
QeffT 3??
fg& fgsif
qsffr u
3W
ini fkvmi
famrrainiT 3t* si
3952.
question,
ia^ri:
<i
8U
*ray*n%T?sa?q5f??
When however kitn is not

the finite verb may optionally
11
added
in
asking such
retain its accent.
[Vol
Thb Siddhamta Kaumudi.
208
f*w
Wh-ni
verb which
elidei in asking a question
is
of Panini has taught
it
an
a Negative
When is there the elision

Wheu the sense is that of
does not bicome anudatla.
Accents Ch. V. 3953.
to
ra'atiuij
not preceded by a Preposition or
is
III.
action, the
finite
optionally
Particle,
of this fsRW because no rule
an
but the
interrogation,
here does not mean the Gralopa

In short, the word
word fsRJT is not used.
As
non-use.
a fa (or
merely
but
SS33:
V%\mmatical substitute,
interrogative,
even without the em^sentence
is
the
Here
(or
a
sfa)
firai Q*sffT
'
3*^)
ployment
of feRW
The option
nected with the sense of
a***
sfow
*?<8*I53^?W*
fflWw:
mm*'
*rasr
Cff{
In connection with
The word
as
posit .on <HTS;
Why
cent.
^ff?
^^
W*?ir
im
*J?S
'HFI^T^T-
'ehitnanye' used derisively, the
retains its accent
it,
Thus
wsq
sffc
i.
e.
mockery,
derision,
raillery,
5t9 09, *$8 W^HfaffTfolfa:
Hrfi
preceded by
jeer-
The
the
pre-
Observe i?ft{OTQ
used derisively' ?
$TCT wj?q ^fa
II
eutra
'
nfg *ra, the w% is accented only then when

meant and not otherwise.
Thus the &z loses its acceut here :
tion with the Imperative
1<U8
3Tr3q?ta
sn<|
wfmfs
3954.
'jatu
'
is
derision
-uffj
irad
II
vfaaora' vet usarg fa
ws
wt5
$135*
?*w
con-
VI IL 1. 5t, S. 3958 after the Imperative sffj which is a verb of

(n?a^) the following First Future (^) would hare retained its acThe present sutra makes a niyama or restriction, namely, that in connec-
motion
is
is
II
do we say
1^ RJ#,
it
*** ?*' WISH*
sfig
the Imperative, second Person of the root
jff^ is
as
WW
at?T3 means great laughter,
ing, gibing, sneering.
By
<t
Wsqi $I2R
First Future, that follows
SfT^TH a^3THTW
SESni'
I
a Prapta-vibhasha,
is
11
3953.
word
of this sutra,
11
u*n? &z
IJt*
*!#' fa>
faq
8S
fwrT
grR*
mÔTfir^
wt?j
$r*a$
'
*$f
11
finite
verb retains
its
accent after
jatu'
when
this
not preceded by any other word.
Here is anudatta by VI. 1. 186, as it is a sarvawra*a#

coming after an *JU33J; tha word gn?J is first acute, as it is a
Nipata.
Why do we say when not preoeded by any other word' ? Observe
The word 5R3 is end-acute as it is a fqRj or noun.
OR? srrg *^w_fi?f
Thus
dhatuka
SfTF[
affix
\xmm' ^wfrr
m ijwn
^q' fwsfw
wfs s&& n
vg* ?Rwa ww fa'fxifvsf??
1
Wfufwj
^riRfaar;
'
fa^fuw faw,
'
Vol. TIT. Accents
Also after a form of 'kirn' when the particle

and when no other word precedes such form of
3955.
follows
the
209
Accbnts or Vnrcs.
V. 3958.]
Cft.
it,
verb retains
finite
'chit'
'kirn',
its accent.
The word
The word feng?? in a Genitive Tatpurusha meaning faih^Tf
means any form of fsr.w with its case-affixes, as well as the forms of fevt
when it Jakes the atfixes %n* and ?W Thus qp[f*3 HSFrff *, OiRCrmf {"tt??, *fll
farr^fj
Why
do we say
The word v^wt

IsseB its accent here
fams
followed by fa?j
'
of the last
Observe $T WF/tf
S?H
tf
therefore,
the
verb
11
'wgsf-' ?fa faro
thisnUo;
sutra qualifies
Tjt: fetfe?*
ijS farmat g^qfr?
'
ita iit^t *Jff
Also after an immediately preceding aho and ut&ho'

when these follow after no other word, the verb retains its accent.
3956.
The
also there
'
prohibition of nigh&ta or want of accentuation
the anuvritti of *ntr3" from
is
Thus mi%i
3HT1T
or
*J3\?fi
the
Why
Why
3H1$T
3<SUS
do we say
when
'
'immediately preceding
'
do not imme-
these particles
when no word precedes them
5 fem*T
90
ararfw* ?frc*n* aTgarTTf*T %
iprf
When
3957.
ho
so
'
Observe
3g WTil
or
11
*twt
here,
verb.
do we say
aa"
understood
is
last.
In the following sutra will be taught option,

diately precede the
'
'
11
*t$t is: u*fa
11
'aho' and 'uta-
the abovementioned particles
do not immediately precede the verb, the verb
may
option-
ally retain its accent.
Thus w%i $3:

3<U*
TJ^ffl or VJZ
nPJ^t^T
11
safag
^rn^trSRitsR
<*
KR
irr^T^T $TST g^ ff^Jfi SfTgcTTrfW IR3 liK^ $H rT^S ^f<T #r?

IHTOS
$3 xrm ^qfs 337 =tU igsHT snsro: *tut Sian^ 'npa*-' few u* as $t'^' faw
tjr wrasiism
'rtet' fa*T
'jnn'siior uw'
vin^s ia
'st 3r*'
id mn* wtoto
*f?r foRw^
inn^ ot qm' fam $ $ra*f wiûa
'tow/ far?w
-wTn^g s mw* erf *r^ g ^raarai s*firf*i3rfa fsramriKfr itot wt??
U^TSSriSJ 5RH3? H^TÛ STSS^T^Je^
I
s^^m
II
The First Future
its accent
in connection
with the Imperative of a verb denoting 'motion* ('to go' 'to come'
3958.
'
to start' &c),
of"
but only
in
retains
that case, when^the
both the verbs are not wholly differed

27
*"
orê
subject and object
from another.
210
The Siddhakta
KAUMttDi.
[Vol. Ill Accents Ch. V. 3058.
Those verba which
have similar meaning with the word irffT 'motion' are

Imperative of the 7\&m verbal roots, is called aaia^TS
In connection with such an Imperative of verbs of 'motion', the First
Future does
not become anudatta, if the karaka is not all different. The sense is, with
whatever
calle(TiTRNrt: u
The
case-relation (karaka),
whether the Subject or Object, the Imperative is employed,

with the same karaka, the First Future must be employed.
In connection with
the finite verb here, the word srtJ* denotes the Subject and Object
only, and not
any other karaka, such as Instrument, (fee.
Thus
*m5B
$*am
ZjBpfm,
'Come
the subjects of both verbs wrirea? and

verbs are also the same, namely
gw
and
33
both lose their accent (VIII,
Deva, thou shalt see the village/ Here
aâfg
'JIT
are the same, and
is
19 and 28,)
1.
*W
*W
Why
a*W
do we say
do we
say the
Hm,
do we say
ftlrfT
Why do we use
W& S s^STS a"W
the
is
*nirea?
is3ri
from that
its
accent,
word
Observe
'wholly'?
prohibition
is
<flTiT"3"
is?!**
nigh&ta
of
is
is*
subject
of the
Vuture
is
the same.
in
not wholly
i*S
different
is
the sub-
with another.
conjunction
Had ss
lim,
and the First
For here the subject of the Imperative
though only partly,
pver, the object here in both
*m*$
not loholly different'? Observe
is
there
for the
of the Imperative.
ject also of the Future,
a*afg
aw",
used.
Future retains
&
II
Here also
rice
^rn^f^S aw, ar^Q^f-
Observe
Observe
'First Future'?
the karaka
'if
"Let the
used.
is
3 $T2R >*L^H^.
formed
is ^T3R, MT gaij **
Observe tj3
the Imperative'?
'after
Here the Present Tense
II
Why
3t?
do we say 'verbs of motion'?
Here the Potential mood
WTSiM
a8
accented,
is
first-acute being
is
by the fa?? affix

Similarly 33lnlT is*** STWa:. TWIST
be carried by Devadatta, they will be eaten by Rama."
Why
Why
the objects of both
a Preposition, and
not heen used
More-
in the sutra,
where the sentence would have remained the same, there the rule would have applied,
and not where the sentences became

3<ite
CTZ
5w?T JirawzT
rm isi"j--' g^sro,
*Tnf is
awis:
aw
tft
zp* sugsw**;
sister xtm
nwss is aw
a*a
'n?sa
-flTa-ses
'
tra
tswj
1
Also an Imperative, following after an Imperative of
both the verbs,
is
its
t/w
when
the subject or
object of
11
*J"ra,sW % because the first Imperative

wnsf i?S aw' a*Ja*if because the first
But not here us is3rft3f,

verb.
accent,
not* wholly different.
Thus vTiravigam
nnv
11
verbs of 'motion', retains
one of
II
is aw wirier ** twrn *arstaf-jras

-jnn-55 is aw' fs
sii s
Hsanrnrrss wris
'$13' few,
auifswa "jTWa:
3959.
different,
Nor
het-o,
not Imperative but Potential.
is
not
verb
is
m.
Vol.
M the
will
subject and object of both Imperatives
By
ifa
vm,
the force of the anuvritti of
'i'he
by
siitra,
WW
Thus
not apply.
im
'option!
$T*?fi nruHwtzi g?R
is
last?, is
apply to the following:
sake of the subsequent
for the
^H$ and
with regard to
different, the rule
"
will
the rule
fav*a' ot^st**
wholly
are
*W
QWJH S*'
which the
21!
Acces ts op Vfrbs.
AoOBKTs Oh. V. 8962.]
not.
W^
wires a nw' wfaii
'Stwtw'
An
Imperative preceded by a Preposition,, and not in.

the First Person, following after an Imperative of verbs of 'mo3960.
may
tion',
optionally
when
accent,
its
retain.,
the
Karaka
is
not
"wholly different,
The whole
Thus
WT3S
the upasarga loses
Why
the preceding
of
vibhasha.
its
35f
accent by VIII.
is
understood here.
is
or
via
3J
When
This
the verb
a Prapta-
is
is
accented
71.
1.
When there is no
joined with a Preposition' /
As mm^s 51
no option allowed, and the laBt ra'e will apply.
do we say anrqqn
Preposition, there
sutra
qiw nf?r5
'
OTtftraq u
Why
do we say *RtTO,
'
5Hw^5f g^Wriw itsrri sngcTTrfw

awTâsrfs-' (a*aV) ?fk fisnmiffTiro:
An Imperative,
3961.
optionally retain
its
First Person.
With the exoeption
Observe m\ tiwftl 33, Jim
a First Person/ 1
not.
nf
irfasj
'^tWw'
HTtronfwwa
u*a $*
trt iro^snsi n
i
fRR
with a Preposition preceding
it,
may
accent, in connection with 'hanta,' but not the

of jirto ^TSl
Ac, the whole of the preceding
sutra
is
understood here.
Thus
it is
*5tT
tf* fersr
or
irfaj;
not preceded by a preposition.
But no option is allowed here 1R? *&, as

Here rule VUI. 1. 30, S. 3937 makes the
accent compulsory after
tFW-i
used, the verb retains
accent oonipulsorily by VIII.
its
So also
^Sff
WW5!T5I%, where the 1st Person

S. 3937.
1. 30
is
The word TCR5U3.1 i8 Imperative First Person, Dual of the root W5T in Atmane pada (I. 3. 06). The Personal ending 3% is anudatta by VI. 1. 186, because
the v,er,b is anudatta-it.
The vik;trana sr therefore retains its accent.
&&
fas*!
*rrc?
wwrefa
^wnirafaâirefoii
Saaaa
wwf^fU}'
faijj
<*
wwYf?
uu
aaaro
ii
'sr^'
f*f
The Siddhanta Kaumuw.
212
one word, the Vocative retains

not near.
is
Thus *TW trafa Z&ttl \
The nighdta being hereby
by VI.
cative gets accent on the first syllable
Why
by VIII.
wn
do we say
Observe
SJTSR
prohibfted,
the vo-
198.
1.
trafe
sagfH
Here
anudatta
is
it
19.
1.
Why
do we say ^sjt^RW
Why
Why
do we say
STT^TrlW
STRlftffl
hi q*WHqSq
separated only by one
33^T
See
'?
not near
*%gqt $^Fa
firWFSrl
'
the Vocative
do we say 3Rf^fi
3<&3
wafrf
by not more than

when the person adit
accent,
its
Accents Ch. V. 3962.
III.
After 'am,' but separated from
3962.
dressed
[Vol
WTO CEtnVf3f
nm traffl gsarn H
wn q^fij 3933
US
xt
II
'gsjfcr? f*'
WrenOTfar H 3
IRTOtlTZT
S*?rl
wh
Observe
"I
See
"I
<t
Iltfft:,
word
grT?TO
'faqT^q^-
iTSnlSJ fa*IT&
II
A finite
3963.
verb followed by yat or hi or tu
retains its
accent in the Chhandas.

The anuvritti of SJraf^rcT should not be taken in this
Thus with Tlrmi we have
ngf ttTOgrosfr q^ff *:
but that of
sutra,
The verb 339,31

is the Imperfect (TO ) 2nd person singular of
95J of the Tudadi class. With fff we
have, !535T ST idjW f% (Rig Veda 1 2. 4).
The ver*b 3*r% is the Present
The samprasarana takes place because it
(s?^) Plural of S3J of the Adadi class.
With ?| we have, wrOTBll*fw HHl By the previous
belongs to i&gnfe class.
frTC x
II
sutra VIII.
30. S.
1.
3937 a verb
connection with qfj would have retained
in
its
by the sutra VIII. 1. 34, S. 3941 and in

connection with g by VIII. 1. 39, S. 3946 the present sutra is, therefore, a niyama
rule. The verb retains its accent when these three Particles only follow and net any
other.
If any other Particle follows, the verb need not retain its accent.
Thus
accent, so also in connection with fu
WTO *3T TT^T^ftl Here frlTO is the 1st Person Dual of the Imperative of t^X*^
being elided, as 15 is
+ Sjq % +clHx =5?n!+ <HT3 + 9q III. 4. 92=TT1TS! the
like i^ III. 4. 85 and 99). The verb jjfg is the 2nd Person Singular of the Imr
perative of the root TO, preceded by the Particle wi&
Here in q?% ItITS ( = ^TI
TSTO *5[T?fg), the verb
But
accent
5!T<5
VIII.
VIII.
cause
1.
it is
for this rule, it
1.
52
*TUTO
51),
it
n?TO
would
is
is
would have retaiued

another
have stained
* by VIII.
(VI.
Another reading
3.
111).
changed
to
^t^
its
following after a non
a fas*
elided before
is
followed by the Particle
II
3. 14,
in
siT *T3TO?3
*q is
It is
does not retain
Because
with
But now
word ^q:
friW
and
accent.
connection
accent.
then the preceding

is
its
*ht,
it,
it
ijfig
and
accent be-
visarga of ^q:
lengthened and we have
a Vedic anomaly,
its
a n?cre!
therefore, by
loses its
The
is
is
^n
the visarga
Vol.
u^g
Uij
ir:
qgfa
su^Trm
UTfTTSfTtfSr?*
irnrw
is: tretfrWRSW?
as: q^fr? **
is: uafflHrafo
ceded by a Gati Particle
'
when
it
sr
ii
not pre-
is
followed by
it is
by
or
3B: ug?ftg
is: flusfa
accent,
affix,
tari
With' faij
60 &c), and when
(I. 4.
?a, Snr &c., a Taddhita
g?f, fecj,
as: u^fa
A finite verb retains its
3964.
213
Accents of Verbs.
Accents Ch. V. 3966.]
III.
its
own doubled
The
list
form.
Thus is: q'sfa
words
SSW
is
=!
VIU.
VSWIT
is: H fil
and contempt
,
is: if safrT
given under sutra

w
fsrj,
The
<fec.
other Taddhita
added
affix
ia:
9OTil % <ICT %
to the
is: if afti
denote oensure
here also,
The examples should be

(V. 3. 66 aud 67).
like
ctra %
verb
would cause the verb
accent, the Taddhita accent overpowers the
Gotr^di
of
%nm.
iffrift
Gotradi words,
With a Taddhita affix, ig: v^fft

given with anudatta Taddhhita affixes,
Any
if HTS
is:
Thus
27.
1.
CKcra
verb accent
to
lose its
qfrli**il (V.
as
3.
67).
With a doubled
Why
we say
do
Observe is: H
9^^H
qg?H
îF**
verb, as
*f
is: if afrf UsffT
when
iraircfci
M V
whb*
before the Particles

The
first
verb loses
its
B<*$
verb retains
g3T*nir
siit
ipvpraKftr ami
tion with
The
into this.
its
Gati
called
is: HSfa
(aess)
IRTaffT
qmfffroT*
qrHrovzid
fr? fa^Tc?:
mentioned in
wa have
gati,
1.
is:
its
accent
24).
sutra VIII.
iscEri:
fgrfttf
1.
Thus is:
24.
H u fa S U
^.^L
'
accent by virtue of the next sutra, but the second
TOOT
q?mT
eha
'
first finite
and
<l
3<MI
i
ims
fgrftmif^fi^îra
rrrrsfrT
verb only retains
cftuii
ST STOTF?
$rj
its
accent in
connec-
'va.'
auuvritti of *qim: which was
Thus
frTS?fswfTfRTpTfn
fcraifTis* Trcraureoi
The
'
Participle
aocent.
<aa?aTWT
3966.
*Z and S3 VIII.
those
But when preceded by a

Here the
by
not preceded by a gati, retains
(9T, 3,
words are
grfa
^stst**-'
A. finite verb,
3965.
preceded
not
ST3T%StJ U** fWfi' siTgaTTl^
qqsfa s
im wsfo,
stitjt
drawn
in
the
sîâfaX^T
last
sutra,
does
st miriwtiTij
not run
214
[Vol. III. Accents. Ch. V. 3966.

*
The word
is
sutra indicates that the mere connection with the verb*
iiin in tbe
meant, whether this connection takes place by adding these
before the verb, or after the verb,
The word XLVM\ shows that the
(not so in the last).

this rule
immaterial for the
is
first
verb
and eN
^.
of this sutra,.
governed by
is
aud not the second.
wwfcWRd
v^fKT irowT fa^fawfawfgaTTU

qaTfa'
words
purposes
xiwafrf
'
(as**)
fgqrsjt:-'
*f?r
gn:
*3u*
tf
wh
srF?r
aatwa'
ii
In connection with ha,' tbe first verb retains

offence against custom is reprimanded,
an
when
cent,
3967.
'
The word T%OT means an
error or mistake of duty, a
breach of
its ac-
etiquette
or a fault against good breeding.
Wf
3ni\ZJTil U3T??f, TTJT^HTH ' He himself goes oa

3,
a car, while he causes his Preceptor to trudge behind on foot.' Here the uighata of.
the first verb is prohibited. The verb becomes svarita-pluta by VIM. 2. 104
Thus Wtn
S?fH
S. 3623.
3*
tram
irenTFT
ik&\ raw?
fgarai
*rea?i
$9
^qwu
to* mfcr
In connection with ix%f the
when
feamf ^
fa*nr vtm
gqrana totTr* infw h.
th-titotsr f^^fir
frra ftmfrfiitiîTn
toitot
3968.
cent,
*tfr! fsrfTOliT
first
verb retains
when
refers to various commissions, (as well as
it
breach of good manners
ac-
its
a-
condemned).
is
The word fatfstdnf means sending a person to perform several commissions.

The word ^ in the sutra draws in the anuvritti of font also.
Thus r9
in? UTW,
^mrs **w
meant,
*rea?,
aifrT a,
Fa'
to oti *HOT
3tnwq
qanm*
siqfa
is.
swd
gq
when fam
So also
'*' Scmiiro wwr fa^fawfTfRT^Tn

Sa sa anf n^j *a wtot
utjtoot h nâjrpacire: a sa mtt iresfj *m sauna ifsbh qro' fer-
<'
ireg
*TO?
1;
sfea**
JT5fcar*rq:
^fpferaraq:
to5tii:
*5raq;^flTaa
When
3969.
<a
tKarra:
'vawmnf'
fR^
ta
sa" a
w-
11
cha and aha
are
when eva with the
retains its accent,
elided,
the
first
verb
still:
force of limitation, takes their
place.
When
does this 5ni take* place }
Where
the sense
noted by the seutenoe, but these words are not directly

the elision of
9 and
and
that of
of *hs
same; and
is
wb
is
There the
qni.i
<
elided
only
'
when
($7r:r)
thft
foroe of
The n
H
is
is
<a
or bh
that of aggregation
elided
agents are several,
of
employed, there
is
is
con-
then
(sw^q),
when the agent
is
the
Vol.
Accents Ch.
TIT.
Thus where n
TiWrT
UTW'nWJ,
OCT
ira QOTtqtl
JHWH 3TW UUU
II
So where *fl
TOTTO
SFflH,
elided:
is
215
Accents of Vf.rbs.
V. 3972.]
elided
is
H?J *TR
9ST*r
as
5* *W
*&
STW* 5BcJ, TTW
59
WOT
iTCSrJ
- OTR
II
Why
do we say TO^TTUl* when limitation is meant '?

See gs 959 WTO*
The first
The
word ug here has the sense of never' 'an impossibility.'
oft
sentence means q mfez $V9i& W+JRMeraT by qwi (VI. 1. 94. Vart).
3<r$o
3Tfe5ra fgOTtfT
"
S3
II
BanniiaTstt htu uwrt fn* jawffiRfcprreiT
m9*rj
jahyfij
**rn ht vtoitii 3*fcr
When
3970.
optionally retains
W3QTQ
So
also
^nf*?!
when ST
is
îi*
**^r ctt^^ $wer
sJrfigwSite
toq5??
elided, the first
and 58) are
spa
II
verb
accent.
its
V^
Thus Wilh * HTU:

ITT
^3
",
g, (9T,
sttx*
9I^g $T$S
^wt HTl^T WSlfsR or 9fsj, *i?n
Here wgfrrT optionally may either l<ge or retain its accent.
So also with the
elided, as
eftfftfa qgfa or SaT*., $5
:
q^cM
remaining.
3<ts<*
laraf??
^ ss^fa
'*nsT iarararotq'
Also
3971.
ally, in
*%%
we*
first
59T5Tm *TTrJ (or
<re
*toiw^
vai
vf
vava
'
'
may
SU
,
I
option-
its accent.
^SrT ^T^tff
(or *Tsft?r) H
that of jrfsfe and
3^fa
gmnwnw' faw
and
'
STS
qi$Z and gm, and 919
ttor ^315^'
'r^ttî:
'
11
verb retain
WTTOT StKT TOW! *W^ftMffR^^TT

njtVf'
?f
'ira
the Chhandas, the
Thus
,\
11
WWThRT
ssrt
qrsz
fsra^f??'
^Tînfatecf
'TCfTWJif
5^ ifo
#*gjT
11
3972. Also in connection with eka and anya, optionally in the

Chhandas, the first verb retains its accent, when these words have
the same meaning (' the one the other ').
Thus vmzhffr fjsstVr (or farafH^, ^^wsftt^th

(v^tto: fouref tsi(f fa
(or *fa), JOTHiren fain*i*ri1H (Kig Veda T. 164. 20, Mundaka Upanishad III.
i
1).
Why
Here
s?R
is
word S*n&
ings
do we say SJTOTWT having the ssme mewing '} See t&ri 3aTgtlTT?re?S
the one another.'
a Numeral and has not the sense of *?a
Th
'
'
is
used, in fact, to restrict the
while there
wtm ws$
?tot
is
no
ambiguity
meaning
about the
stmttst wrjsijViwtiit
of
v^prd
* Hjpra
^w,
for
vq
it
has various meanQ!fiT,S?3TO
Tl\n$
fr
Tbk Siddhanta
216
In connection with yad
3973.
[Vol. III. Accents
Katjm&di.
Ch. V. 397-3.
the
in all its forms*
verb re-
tains its accent always.
The
anuvritti of
v^
sentence the Word

the form of th$
V.
S.
5.
Iskti;
occurs, that
1.) zn$
1.
prohibition
present here
is
u^rf
called
is
The
ceases.
29)
1.
declensions with case
word
The
what ever
denotes
See also the
affixes.
nighata,
of
In
also.
here
explanation
48.
1.
Thus t *rl\
(T.
(VI TI.
^TZ,
?!
in all its
of fsR'qn in VIII.
ana $*$fs
xremi
which commenced with
*rmm
s??
Though
tfsd
cng:
the
Srjp*: (Rig
Veda X. 121. 10)
For the form Tn see VI.
yet
it,
the operation
tervention of ens: does not prevent
therefore
re-
cjrfH,
the in
this rule, according
to tbfc
in
of
BTigSffs
92.
(q^HTfl) and
the Ablative
s u tra is in
quires that the verb should immediately follow
aatq*
3.
qgnr-
5TTg
opinion of Patanjali.
3<$8
TJSRTr^rm^tri
w^T^g
HSITWTW^
gTOuraTcre;:
the word whose praise

The word SRTCSTfew,
jwranpr
1
wawrT
ÛT7Tti9R:
rm:
aft:
"fdrt
is
coming
is
223).
<a:
^gtarartrai:
1
first
added
members
of which are
'cHaerara
Wd
3TTOTfara:
qraTcntprffcrcra:
^rfi
ow
zfhfiwHfi:
wgwrarrq^:
wHpflTTO:
t
*a\HTasR:
wipe
11
gHramrac
vgmfitronwras:
irrc
saMmre?: *fa Wrum1
vji
praise-denoting
from a V&rtika.
to the autra
snjTrraJTtisR:
The
final
should be elided
in the
of *jr<JTt? takes place in the
in
forming
w^rraiT-
But there
is
no
hence the elision of
compound, and
elision in ep**!TJT\ziTa3i:
also of the second word.
By
noted, where the case-affix
is
eenondjmember
as ST**uw^ft$,
tfre.
nop employed and so the
is
there
When
^mwaijjmx
11
there
is
In such
This be-
taught.
composition.
after
and
is
Tf
In fact
finally acute (VI. 1.

is
no loss of accent
the V&rtika 'irentpra', this further fact
becon es anilf alfct*.
The word
these words.
accusative case, like xnw* TH:
anexoeption to the general rule by which a compound
11
an adverb, and therefore
elision of
II
sirowTSTwaroaii*:
aRTusifw^tisR:, 3Ttnremrai:,
îg^rrrwrirai:
zrfawnsR:
is
a case, there can be no compounding
it
denoted, becomes anudatta.
is
the
TOttrrTtpriwTaeR:
*ran unwrap:
3TOI?
<|
II
Thus witstamrai:,
tktisr:
*m*TF3tvmft HW^lf^wftr SfT^nTlUn^qfl ?fr7

After a word denoting praise belonging to 'kasthadi'
This refers to compounds,

words.
Hri%<3
3974.
class,
nrsm-. **
SFT^TfewT:
is
also de-
the
not heard; there
no compounding,
there
is
no
Accents On.
Vol. tit
Though
should follow
of Vi:rds.
of ufsTfT
immediately alter the word
construction of the sutra,
is
"iu
5TT5T?rTaJTT^tq?i
word may be exihibited
denoting qSPT
the existence
a jiiapaka of
H***lT Q5=a?Tt fa?Jsr$ fiT
the Ablative case,
iu
been illustrated in
term
?fj
word indicated by
there should
This has
it."
foims
farUCT, in explaining
like
&c.
cfigciiffi
Though
this
peculiar
or context, though a
dues not follow that
it
u^tHR
the previous rule of
Iu foot, this
of the following tule:
subdivision
thid
be consecutiveness between the Ablative and the
03f3^
2 17
word us^T would have implied its correlative term ufstrr, the
the aphorism indicates that the word denoting tjfsict
it]
the
mention
specific
Accents
V. $397G.]
was current,
the anuvritti of anudatta
employment
the express
which
in the sutra indicates that the prohibition (of anudatta)
now ceases.
The words aires, &c.
also
of
was
current,
digious
1
are
synonyms
all
and are words denoting
9R7t3, 2 STSlff, 3 WTTHTIF*, 4 ggj, 5
*WfT, 10
^j^ffi,
3xSU
11 wu, 12
-sre,
Wlfrttfq frl^
13
mm,
sRTTs^TTsrwifer^sTT
praised)
is
may
any, that
iconderful, pro-
^l^miH,
*T|% 8
^tlTfT, 7
6*
17
sqfcf,
gfsTfmg^TTny
armies tr<rafH
(â*)
'ff^s-fHS-:'
verb
finite
becomes anudatta, even along with the
gati, if
precedent.
Whether a finite verb is compounded with a gati

compound and the simple verb lose their aceeut, when it
Thus q?? etfTCS n^fa, QFT 25TC5 uvjafa U
efircs &c.
the finite verb would have
prohibited by VII
ÎpT, 9
m~Q\
S a
(After such words denoting praise) the
3975.
(which
meaning
?T,
14 fjVR, 15 H, 16
N.
5Rw:
of SreW
praise.
1.
I.
30
3937
connection
in
By
S.
3935
but this loss was
the present sutra re-
1.
both the
by the adverbs
VIII. 1. 28,
cfiTtS,
with Hr\
ordains the loss, by setting aside the prohibition of VIII.
single,
qualified
is
the word
lost its accent after

S.
or stands
30.
S.
3937.
The word HnffT 'along with its Gati', indicates that the Gati even loses its
accent.
The word Gati here is restricted to Upasargas.
Ishti
Therefore not
:
here Sfj cRn^t 3I5& SfiMrf
3s
g gg?R ur
gje^R
frran
trafa
5?sr ^
'airSR'
m^rw
faw
*pjTfr5n|T
snfrrcnfnifti for^g^ta:
vmzftn
^th^w
'gfq'
S<t
faw
11
ugf?? njn
mrafrT
ngffi Tariff!
ijfcT
a^frf
'^m^rei' fRw
11
'* fotrrsRw^
'
II
^fa crrejw
+'
+ en as^sR^Trtfirff? cn^m
3976.
finite
m*f:
+'
*Km$ *u w?
a^f^nff?
verb, along with
becomes anudatta, when a Noun,
ngfauffricraTT: n
11
prt ceding Gati,
>s
denoting
follows, with the exception of 'gotra' &c.

2S
>
if
any^
the fault of the action
The Siddhanta Kaomudi.
218
The
sutra
mn
Accents Ch. V. 39*76.
111.
But the anuvritti of the last

1.
17) ceases.
Thus w^fr^ ffi, I^Ll^L ifo ^LS^L ^WWT *L*.^?H fwzm
anuvritti of uziri (VIII.
current.
is
[Vol.
il
'
Why
do we say gR^jir
Why
Why
do we say gftr 'a noun
denoting the fault of the action
'
See
'1
xt^ftii
5TTH-
firSTO,
q%fa
do we say
Observe *????
'?
the exception of
with
fSTSRTfn
il
See q*gf?j
&c.
trr*
w^jf, <rafa tra^rirti

âr^
should be mentioned that the
It
mode
be the fault relating to the
The rule will not apply,

Thus if ffl qfflfserer!:
Vdrt
this
Vdrt
tthen
innafiT*
tffci:,
3<sa
mentioned
the sutra, mus^
and not
to
the
verb*
the action-
trfa*: or
plural
in the
then tfm
Tprafa?
The
finally acute, because of the indicatory
is
jfai
5>o
<l
number,
loses its
Thus
end-acute.
is
accent
ujjfrr?
effect of
il
optiouallyt
$&-,
or qg?5fl
II
ft
A Gatijbecomes unaccented,
3977.
in
denoted by
action,
il
verb
finite
nfaiffiT
fault'
It should be stated that ^fa has an indicatory
loses its accent,
it
'
the
the fgcSR refers to the agent
if
that the word trfn
is
of doing
when
followed by an-
other Gati.
Thus *Hi*&tfR
W
i[
Why
Here 593tT
when followed by
93TTt ugffl
do we say
Smfw: (Rig Veda
III. 45.
verb
But
it
is
Jnui?B
retains
its
would have
any
is
accent.
as
Observe
do we say ifoi ' a lati becomes <fec '?
Why
a Pratipadika and does not lose its accent.
a Gati
is
*jrj
Had
Observe
'?
Here **
1.)
is
Trfmg^Trr.
3978.
'
what followed
a?jwrafa
^T*faufn3 Wg*
been used in the sutra, this *ht

would have been too wide, without
ji^T not
it.
fas ^tretoiprragri:
1
Wjffcj?
not followed by a Gati, but by a Pcatipadika jjs^,
the word
lost its accent, because the rule
restriction of
*jjt
a Gati to the verb tnf^, the complete
uFtmmT&j
wami
fig
ufrBRiir
Gati becomes anudatta, when followed by an ac
cented
finite verb.
The word
Why
nffT. is
understood here.
have we used the vord fnfe
scope of the word gcnrrafrT
udatta root only, but before
Lo
Thus
Uf{
in the sutra
XTQ^lfa
?
In
II
order to
that a Gati would not become
luUtta conjugated
verbs.
restrict
aocentless
The employment
the
before
of
the
Vol. III. Accbkts Ch.
219
Accents of Verbs.
V. 3978.]
term frffe is necessary, in order to indicate that the verb must be a finite *erb
and not a verbal root.
So that though a verbal root be udatta, yet if in its conjugated form (ffTS ^) it is not udatta, the JTT?T will not lose its accent.
Thus
1
in
tfr?
SttUH, the root 5?
hence the rule
will
not been qualified by thtV
TFHTOilHil w^H*.
anudatta, but
is
apply here
the
For the maxim
form
\r\4T\
qjrifH
is
tns*m H*T
OflfaiqTgrtfT:
Therefore in a fcUF^Yj* the designation of nfcl"
udatta,.
is
would not have been the case had 33TrigfrT
which
is
srf?T
7T*
with regard.
to >*Tg or verbal roofc.
Why
by VIII.
loses its acceut
1.
Observe tMraff?
3ST<rigTH ?
28 hence the Gati retains
Here end
the Accents
Here the
verb,
accent.
its
of Verbs*
A VATDIC ILLUSTRATION ON ACCENTS.

VH
H&IW
IfasFSlSRra *3T8* WHS!*: SFTO^-' 'af^WTS
TOg*
F5IT333T3:
'
TrrsG5T.ffa
setc:
yraT
'
(v>ss)
fsrissmf '^vjTHfi:'
mi
charya).
33T#5T-'
^tft
ûisi TTfas^rcun^rfteTTr.
'g*rr-
8*nssa"ct!i
^grrwaa^'m^TQi
is finally
an
gprfteTtT.
illustration
Thus the
Hert
if
acute by
But as a matter
in the Ghritiii list of
hwu: farenasprraci raftcraaaT
n.
shall give
Agni
UmiZ*!
cf the rules of accent.
it
^ftr
farcifa u*TCjTsajpqw v
Now we
W^T^T9r^T-
was xnuf s^TrreiftHTWw ssicrc:' ^r^g^Tr?**:

Ssm aaisia tw^faww: ^tjî^^TTTrg ^ftara^
farOTff ^TnfeTH: ^HT>sr^ô5f: ^TTltl?tff^rfIînT5RT2rTT: %T<J-
traascrc:
*3T*& Tfr33*3**II
raw.
'
favm: sTumst wrmssfanrs'Fsmmw -' (issc) *fh 'F <3r*w
ijr.sjsatawa ^figmsr
airs*
then
(am)
.*
'
WOtm
'iff?
^^T^T^T
if* %h' 0* c *0
f^s-fas
(asis) fFgartw
s-jaraw-'l^seo) tfltait: ssitth:
'
first
from the
Vedas, to show the application
verse of the Rig
mfnr be considered a word

Phit
I.
of fact,
1.
This
*f?
words (tee Phi$
I,
is
is
is
without
the pinion of
end-acuff
21.)
Veda
the following:
any
derivation
Madhava
because
it is
(SayanjL-
enumerated
The Siddiianta Kaumudt.
220
But
then
The accusative
1.
affix
ndatta by VIII.
^fi?m
in
*jjjt
mr
3709). *fT +
4. S.
^fm
(^
it
a case-affix (ITT.
is
end-acute even
is
^ becomes
Theêkadesa
19 A)
S.
fa
affix
affix.
anudatta because
is
w=^
Thus mji^jf
5. S. 365.8.
2.
3708), because of the
3. S.
1.
Accents.
ITT.
formed by the Unadi
*fui be considered a derivative word,
if
end-acute, (III.
is
it
[Vol
tu
declined
its
form.
5?:
2.
into
wf^m^T,
3935 (VIII.
It loses its accent by S.
a verb,
is
When
preceded by a noun agnim.
then the anudatta
^f
while the anudatta of < becomes ekasruti by S- 3668
unfig?m
3.
*a?Q (V. 3.
of
the fs
vjt,
g*: + f^n:
compounded with
member tpc: to retain its

member fgH which is a
but
this last accent
the
first
4.
member
and
it
is*:
5.
retains
The
2.
It is
1.
TRT?35i
6.
3076 (VII,
its
UtT
I.
is
qi:i
'"he
R makes
67) and
4.
retain
T^rT
S.
requires
(VI. 2. 139)
its
accent
3783
it
is
it
49)
2.
first
the second
also VI.
(VI.
144
2.
II
derived from
U5 with
Therefore
affix.
srg*
being a case-affix (111*1. 4/S. 3709)
anudatta
is
II
W&
word ^ffg^
In any view,
is
it is
S.
It is
or by
3708)
end
the
end-acute.
because
end-acute,
vn^
affix
of
the
krJt-acceufe
139, S. 3873).
7.
ifmn?
has accent on
8.
sa accent
3fr,
TgreiTrm.W
(VI.
1.
The
word |t?J
because the
I
It
223.
affix
means
S.
is
has an indicatory
Jr^lfa STOTfrl
3734) or
krit-
t\
(VI.
1.
affix
197
33
S.
It is finally acute, either
accent of the second
to
It
3686).
by sama-
member being
re-
tained by VI, 2, 139 S. 3873.
of sr
and thus
3669.
formed from the root fer % with the

1
or by the affix-accent (HI. 1. 3.
I.
(I.
requires the Indeclinable
2. 2)
to
40
2.
768
S-.
affix
the Nishtha
Then the compound utt?1H would
VI.
word
recent, as
163 S. 3710) of
it is
42) the affix
4.
a gati by
is
hate
formed by the
it is
end-acute, because
but S. 3873
krit-formed
affix *?j
by Phit
far? accent (VI.
is
set aside by the final rule S.
is
becomes svarita 3ttW
acute, either
(VI.
acceut
U^gi-The word
end-acute.
S.
^rc:
but S. 3736
becomes anudattatara by
it is
by
vjt
Here
'is
it
Thus we
(1- 2. 39).
end-acute because
is
$g?T also
fir? by S. 761 (II. 2. 18).
end-acute by S. 3734
It
nr.
The word
substituted for
is
Then
end-acute.
be
The word
39. S. 1975).
28) as
I.
+ 4oo are combined in the Sanhita text

becomes svarita bv S- 3660 (VIII. 4. 66)
qrfcra^
The affix rWTt being fun is anudatta, the n of ?T becomes svarita, and that
becomes ekasruti. fft is first acute being Neuter (Phit II. 3.)
Here
ends, the Section
Thus here has been shown a

Leît
rules applicable to them.
Bhavaui.
brief
on Accents-
outline
only
find favor with the
of
Vaidic words and
Lord of the
the
Universe and
ON RULES
OF,
GENDERS
CHAPTER
I.
FEMININE GENDER.
q
'fag*' u
The Gender.
1.
Note:
*
'13ft'
There are three Genders, viz:

i
wfasmnri sh
Masculine,
Feminine and Neuter.
ii
The Feminine (Gender).
2.
The jurisdiction of the void "p wider*

These two are A'dhikara Sutras.
of "feminine" up to the end of this chapter only
; but
extends up to the end
fatrsr^^hi #tfairo?T sR^f faTfm*HT*rTF3Trj

5fa
Wîf^grnR SFRfgTWSlIrT
WT^r 'mother,'
3.
5WST
wife,'
'a
These
^H
By
husband's
five
IV.
1.
fn^^riHT^ fejiwii^rrm favn$
II
^^
^fi^
'daughter/
sister,'
these five nouns ending
'sister,' Tj-rq 'a
husband's brother's
in g? are feminines.
words are the only examples of feminines that naturally

words belonging to the svasradi
10, S. 308, the seven
end
form their feminine by #far or Z1V X like the nouns kartri <fcc. which end
Hence they are feminine in their original form.
sf in the feminine.
in
do not
class
in
long
refer-
show that it includes all these five words, in adAs these two are secondary derivatives, from fa and ^FR
The primithey are not originally feminine but have become so by derivation.
tive words fa and tot do not end in tR; aud hence fa^ and ^HST are not-
ence to the Svasradi

dition to fas&
shown
in this sutra.
gw:
list will
and ^rfM
'ôtrixjt5HT
'TTratmnnw'
fan
*jra:'
i
sr:
Verbal nouns formed with the
4.
Thus*ctf?r: 'the earth' (Un.
do we say "formed
with affixes"?
II.
fasjcafa^:
wrtrf
*cffa:
affixes *qfa atjd gj are feminines.
102).
Observe
to the root feo[ t (to shine).
affix fcjcta
^RiuTnTsg vm: fegi
*fawr*nn=Ti
itesrT: faar<i %
TO:
aj:
'an army.'
which
The word
zx
is
is
(Un.
I.
80).
Why
feminine and of
special
gender.
i
5.
Wtftn
'a
f,
i
*3ifawTT!*w*!T3:
The nouns sngf*,

piece of wood used
to being feminines).
n*fa
?atra* srcifa:
'Indra's thunderbolt,'
ii
wiiu
'BharalH'
for kindling sacred fire/ ar? also
masculines
(in
addition
Thb Siddhanta Kaumuds.
222
Thus
511 or
*a mu?*:
This sutra
three words though formed by the
[Voj,
I.
an exception to the preceding.
is
*fa (Un.
affix
Gender Ch.
III.
5.
These
102) are yet both masculine
II.
and feminine.
fwTraqT5rft flWWtJT5r?9^ VWJ5 fenf JTR

vrfw:
5nfjf:
Verbal nouns formed with the affixes fir and f;f are feminines.
'fiFWfl:'
6.
Thus wfw:
'the
(Un. IV.
earth'
The nouns
8.
and ^fw
'the wave'
*s*ra st Win:
(U n IV. 5) iftfar
(Un. IV.
51).
and
cloud,' (Un. IV. 49)

to the
last.
it
'the hip,'
jftftij
'a
an exception
is
it
i*nfrr. 'exhaustion'.
(Un. IV. 51), gfian
'fire'
&
tj%
'îftnsTOw s:
45);
(Un. IV. 50) are masculines. This
'fire'
But the nouns gf$
7.
mfa
'the source'.
(Un. IV. 44) are also
masculines
(Un.. IV. 51)
addition to
(in
being fe-
minines).
Thus
?ii or
'f^^sr?:*
*u* ntTm:
I
Sifrrfrwnfa
Nouns formed with
9.
Thus
<
f?R^ are feminines.
affix
&o.
asfri:
'^sRTttstT^
4hraniTO:
Nouns ending
10.
the
in
long
555ft
win
affix
*f^*ft: h
feminines.
are
Thusngjft: u
The here must be an
as in sn3*ft the affix
affix:
added by Un.
is
Ill*
160.
'aapmsRra*' *;: feran i

Nouns formed with the affixes &, (IV. I. 66) and
Thus wz: (See IV- 1. 66- S. 521) and fam* The*
q<i
11.
mrtr
*m
^m,
three affixes
q*
and îu
gixr
'ng^w^tgn?'
11
$: '^sft^tp' f*j ijsraiH h

Monosyllabic nouns formed with the affixes ^ and
12.
*rt:
are feminines.
includes all the
are feminines*
Thus**: (U n II. It) $:

Why do we say <monosyllabic nouns'? Observe ijrepsft: "Prithu's luck" which
ll
is
masculine.
c
qa
srafrr:
ferajf?nfoT5T5m:'
^^fn:
%u
fchnfn:
f^sra
gcaifirar?|
13.
Numerals from "twenty" to "ninety" are
Thus ?q* fererfn: 'twenty*. So also fcfam
*53HJfT
'fifty'
The
nfe
list of
usiara?;
fltah
ûafti n
'sixty',
feminines.
'thirty'.
grSnfJcsjpr
'forty,'
3flfr?: 'seventy,' srcftfH: 'eighty', sisffi: 'ninety.'
the words "fa'sjffl and the
rest'' is
given in Pacini's Sutra V.
1.
09. S- 1725.
'asafwraij'
stf a*afw:
'^#3'
The word a^ftf when used
14.
in
fa*
the
wi a^fwafafasreiJgTT
sense of an axle pole
is
Thus ** gsffw:^
Why do we say in the sense of TO 'or axle'? Observe *iT a^fa:
masculine when it means a musical instrument or an Asura.
w
15.
'sfifcrc^rf'sro'
?* sr#w
The word snfw
irana:
feminine
It
'navel' is
feminine when
it
does not
mean
a Kshatriya.
Vol.
Gbndkr Ch.
III.
Thus ^q* sufa:
223
Feminines.
19.]
I.
'navel',
sra ?tfi 's*p^sffi^sa^TiiiwT?i*tflga*ifa5nfwFw:'
SFTwiWfl HTWTsq *g*S5R
wfrnflRlTaTTgig
&qt:
gm
oTftuiicTr*!
5nfr[:
S^fa
To
?3
we
say,
"The
depends on the usage
"Nabhi
to
any
gender of words need not be taught,
as enunciated
word
is
Neuter, denoting
for it
by Patanjali that "the
and so need
u ot be taught:"
Thus we
also correct.
gender
and there
Medini
find in the
masculine when
is
And
of both genders.
it is
meaning a paramount sovereign, or the

But wheu meaning 'navel' of a living being,
feminine only when meaning 'musk/
also says'to the>same
'The word nabhi
effect
masculine when
is
it
means
paramount
lord, or a
Ksha-
both masculiue and feminine when meaning the navel of a living be-
it is
ing, the
Bharavi
are really
nave of a wheel, or a Kshatriya.
Rasabha
lines of
gender, just like ^wffK:" U
reference
of the people
fore the masculine use of the
following
no
grammar
of
other than that of a Kshatriya,
in the
words srtbst &o here
or having
maxim
senses
in all
masculiue
say, as a matter of fact the
a well-known
a Kshatriya.'
be feminino
sfifw:
gender,
Or we may
justify its use as a
this
indiscrete
triya
and *nfw are masculines.
^fas: 'Nabhi
word
If the
how do you
it is
3n$
Otherwise
16.
Kosha
II
Thus
is
sfn mcfs:
STCr^H*?^ 'fa^majwj TOfinrarST*
^Trjt^tn ^fT95Twi' k?& Rcf^tj jwtjoii?- 'goKTâfaa srifvr:

JiqwgfavusqTnfa
gaRmii **jt$ foam **h fafiTRS' ?f
aTqa^sR g^T:
STOW
511*211?
nave of a wheel, and a leader or
chieftain.
purely
It is
feminine
when
meaning ''musk".
Thus
U>
it
should be understood in other
'rWr?:'
HVl feSTST WTrJ
ST* SI *f%T OTRHT
3SHT
Scl
Nouns formed with
17.
Thus
3Tj5RrlT
^TrTT
3*^1
19.
the affix
SJHifiT
fl^y
(V.
1.
119
(Biahmanical),
vrfw (the Earth),
of
rivulet), m<{\ (a creeper),
HlîTSJ S.W B1VHB?H

are feminines.
S. 1781),
Xfmw
(rural)
t^HT which
sfacIT STTTIrT M
Thus frfaw:
q
HIS!
Nouns synonymous
18.
stream or
TRW
fNTOWT
(whiteness),
has the same meaning as iss
cases also.
'HT3T
fercici
TO 'saw
wttw?t
'
i
Q"l39 % although
crfam
'fgaja (lightening),
STT?J (a
(wife) also are femiuines.
nfaf faiim
qrejtsjsa:
strgTTOTjfu
meaning
*a
stream/
is
^crra^t
J575T
FITS
;dfam
oifdfr.
Neuter and not feminine.
224
The nouns Hi9,

20.
Thus ?s wt: &c.
-si
wjr.if *v'q% &
i
The nouns
21.
s feat
3UT^
3faff3 % and
R5R, fesF,
a:
sKti
Cu.jl. 20.
are feminines.
%
w tijt-w*uw
and ^hht
pillar)
TRiqjT (a ptoot or
Genders
[Vol. III.
s;iitf-3;iii*i
Neuter
(in
mna means
the
(woo))
are
addition to being feminine).
Here sthuna means a wooden

wool of sheep
22.
The words F"DT and
Thus
ire^Jrxnw (a pillar of a house)
a niyama or a restrictive
*a
The words
23.
fas
tfa
cfif^r
'
VTi%Z,
The
'
words
<
$itlfa
'
and
and
herb,'
'a
*nni
'
cfifc
II.
This
hair).
id
107.
9.
'
are
Sri
'knowledge'
and rorfa
â
affix
tarn
(?)
sfai 'an
corner,'
'
loin
drop of
liquid,'
r[%
feminine.
sr.
'
eifgf,
tj%
#ta
altar,'
entrance'
(?)
xgfa
^fa
finger' are feminine.
fcc.
^wT^reiTi-'Tri^m gin:' sfa
?roT
*mfei:-
frai
wfer
<$^^fr^mfeT^Îq:
^faxw-'fafarai fafa murrmfatfi^ <gf?r u

fa srgfnw <?fa sue?
The words fnfa the day of the moon,' snfa a vessel or pulse,' sfa
eh fa 'awave/snfa <a drain,' vjrfa 'dust,' fgpifcR 'the cocoanut tree,'
*sftr5r
'
play,'
^fa
'
'
hue, color,' Tifa
ê? frrfa:
feminine.'
(Amar.
night
of
I.
So also Bharavi
as a
are feminines.
Amarakosha says 'the word fnfa
is
both
masculine and
4. 1).
in the
So also 3ri Harsha

titlii
'
<fec.
following
line
been feminine the word would have been
the word
(the hare's
uihlir
'light'
ffci<r
a ladle,' fafe,
'
Neuter.
are
srsj
the rainy season', fern
35lf or sfef
As
afef,
colocynth
But the author
it
'
faces, excrement/
Thus
taste,'
and
feiat wri u
Sri
words take optionally the
pillar
aud
after iji
See Amarakosha
rule.
Thêse
25.
'
a mine/ sjifa
ftraTfa
or
agriculture,
stave
'^fJf^?3irfs^r^^T^mif^wt^ vj*si|îi:'
24.
'
3J*rrr
'HTq^fert^^feisffciis:'
thirst,'
forked
&c'
in
'
fn?j wfej
sngfa?zi:
in
ergfrTOTO
the following line: faf*$R T ^ fafa
masculine.
fffsia:
the Plural and
orftffffl
nut
Hud
?
fa &*[ u a es
Vol. III. Genders Ch.
STtajfa:
II
The words
26.
tage,'
*
Thus
*tf sjraifa:
5ST 3*3Rft
dfw
a pad/
'
a line
'
wfc
'a streak,'
passage,' ufoi
H^fs 'frown/ *Jz
a cot-
'
'cutting/
vftm
are femiumes.
ii
OTHT
3UT: nTHTfv3IS5T^
II
misfortune/
entrance/ *mr$ 'calamity
The words nfrTO^
fgtra
'an assembly,' nftg^
the autumn' (Un I. 129). 933
27.
'
'
wealth,' 7!X 3
'
'auditory
OTsufor
lightening/
TOjFsr
sacrificial offering/ q'fffi
*?nr<J
225
Feminine.
29.]
I.
'Dawn,' Hfafl
a meeting,' 3tPB
'
g3
knowledge,'
particular
'
'
division of Hell,' Wrj
joy
<
delight,'
grinding
sfaro
'
crushing,'
fuel/
wood
gfj
are
'
femi-
nines.
Thus
ufauc$
û*
3flT 3^$5rft
*c
door
'
'
a yoke/
igrc
a city/
ift*
'speech
11
w;^:
tnfasiW
5lT|f3
gixrw'
wgretaf hwiot sftfa* sn^rei w

husW
srasrreft' g h'fTw
'*|oth OTSirft sufc*:'
'C^RT
fsSROT
^RJSI3f*p
HSreT^JSOTaT'
faûm' (qsqa) -îf 'hotst sOTim*' ^fa ottot^

tT 'OTTSTfli
The words
29.
'
are feminiues,
'HT'sft:
'few:
(W>0 ^frT
fsîrTT
blessing,'
'
%
11
'sutr^wwwTfgsRrnsmfani srera '
sot:
OTJ5W'
sotsot
'
the presiding deity of the dawn.
is
3OTsftftr*nf3
The words *rafcr
As ?u
mm
The Usha
WT#*f yrfgfo'
28.
and gi*
11
sni x
5gOT*OT' ?fcT
grTSIT^TOT
water/ spsTH,
sand, gravel/ and qxtf
'
^s^ni^w
a flower
'
WTOra^TlTTrr
11
*T
HOT
(jasmine),
'
wm^-
'fimrar
a year'
rain/ are feminines and used in the plural
num-
ber only.
Thus mmx sot:

flower
qutf
'
namely,
the
The word sumanas

flower
Amarakosha II. 4.
As HtlS
masculine only.
sent sutra
is
When
17.
TOT:
3JOTW
in the feminine
malati or jati
called
it
means
jasmine,
means a Deva
or
See Amarakosha
I.
'
kind
as ?3RQ:
a divine being,
1. 7.
of;
statist
it
Here the
is
pre-
debarred by sutra 9 of the next chapter, with regards to words denot-
ing Devas.
These words are geuerally found, in usage,

as
sometimes they are used in the singular also
one grain of sand is
inoapable of producing oil.'
Patanjali in his Mahabhashya under sutra I. 2. 45.
;
Similarly
shya by
swt HOT fasnarT
^mqf OTOT
29
plural
number
number.
but
^ fs3Rm
This
H5I3T$ *OTJ*n
example is given by
1813^has been explained
(V. 2. 12. S.
in the singular
the
in
5^>T
in the
Bha-
226
Kaiika uses the word 5gw^F
example
ing on this
nasah
justifies
under sutra
in the dual also,
Haradatta
1.
W*j3
VrfuSfi
30.
II. 4. 78. in
the
commentAmaraainha suma-
According to Paniniya sutra apsumanUsa, &c, this
^ facRm
SRT
not, however, universal
as
singular.''
ftaCTrTOOTT' ?f?T
WTO
WînTrJ
ll)
long (an Indeclinable

The words asj 'garland,' r&zfi 'skin,* gqiqj
barley gruel,' 5i
boat and f^jj^j
gra speech/ qgiq
hips
are
30.
I.
53^
I.
Padamanjari, on
in his
That plurality is
word requires to be always plural.
we find the Mahabhashya using the word sikatd in the
H^
Gender Ch.
the use of the dual, by saying " according to
in the plural is feminine.
sftq K^T,
III.
sprTOT 3cl3^T
<HtfTQTrTTVT
[Vol
'
37),
'
'
'
'
feminines.
Thus ?q
a<i
^qj,
'fifetftmH'snan:'
Thus ^q* qfe,
3*
^m
The words
it
*rew
^fe
boundary
'
s*sn
i
ftqjqj u
stan *" siw
?|fe:
^ttt
or
'^fs^gfin^TqW
32.
*3\Tl
^q
The words qfe
31.
qgTq:, $T and
r^rsR, sqta;, ciisr,
a fire-place,' slfcn
'
and
gnran
are feminines
braid of hair
(Un. IV. 48)
'
a measure of grain/ are feminines,
'
'fnn*wT5m?^5!T3*mr
aa
ThUTT Îiqafrl ?frT ?5(qttjqiT*: II
i
sraisRT fsaui
fa?qw
ufareaq
farqq^qjflsqqi
The words m*T
33.
a star,'
^TTT
a current,'
'
faftrCSfT
light
'
<fcc.
art
feminines.
The word
Note
above, may
sjsihrt
The
a small
force
always feminine.
stick,' is
of the word
always
'
that the other words
is
be of masculine or neuter gender also.
In
fact,
the gender
given
depends
upon usage.
CHAPTER
II.
THE MASCULINE GENDER.

The Masculine Gender.
1.
This
hand/
an adhikdra Sutra.
i
are;:
mm
Nouns formed with the
2.
is
'raa???:'
hus with ^3?;
m;
'poison'.
m*.
ht:
affixes
^ looking,
;
v&
ware ssaw
and
*q
*q/swcafgfaiz wra
are masculine.
fqiq: 'renunciation/ with ?nq
we have
cfiT:
Vol.
Genders Ch.
III.
The
affix
must have the
ST5J
nouns of
one
the
lyut with the force of bhdva
affix
have
(Chap.
rules ffflq?rT:
'he
Analogically the
and
III. 2
&G
purposes of
the
for
be
abstract
of ^ra
3).
(Chapter
or
iiouiis
of the
two
Thus with
"Nouns formed by
aud the Nistha affixes with the same force
Sjmilarly in the case of the feminines, we
sqzw
regards to Neuters we have the rules *nq

are Neuters."
should
we iufer from the analogy

Feminines and the other to the Neuters.
the
relating to
or condition
*nS
force of
nouns so formed
meaning
This
action.
227
Masculine.
75
In other words, the
this rule.
rules,
II.
I.
9)
faiST
where
<fcc.
fr
fytf^
here must also be a bh&va denoting
li
bhdva
are
<fec.
affixes.
For the force of
affix.
See IH. 3. 16
*J$^ is generally that of ura or Noun of action.
18.
To form
Neuter nouns of action we have kta and lyut by III. 3. 114 aud 115.
To
form feminine nouns of action we have klin, hyap, <fcc. by III. 3. 95, 98.
Therefore by elimination, to form the masculine nouns of action, to us is left the affix
Hence we say
tlW only.
ghan here has the
'the
force of
bhava.'
But when ghan has the force of karma or of karana <fcc., as it has by III 3
116 and 117 <fcc, then the words so formed need not be masculine.
They will
have the gender of the word with which they are in construction. They will have
their own specific gender.
As we have in the Bhashya, HJ=EI*m-pFfl tq^ Here
f
the word 'sambandha' though formed by ghan,
cause the force of ghaS.
'^tststH*'
Thus fasrK:
*
victory'
qaw
gender: be-
fasac:
nw.
q:
'extension/ ritat:
5W wife
affixes
and
*jia
are masculines.
a: 'rampart
'pasturage,'
collection',
gj
fcc.
'wsfafwnqsT?*! 13*9^'
smfa *v*%
jrt:
wem
fofpw
wm
The nouns wq
4.
'foot*
wn
faff 'gender',
fear',
'the
perinaeum of
females',
33
are neuters.
Thus vtow, faffw,

a
'snpsrit'
Thus
srs^Rjmsri:
qw:
'sacrifice,'
fcsraTVf'
%l
nz*i x
gTs
WTrf
'qq^rft
qar:
11
are masculines.
'effort'.
'begging'
is
faqrqqT?rft 3:
feminine,
q/fs
grfitgfgTw
few,
The nouns formed with the
7.
*re
an exception to the last aphorism.
is.
straw
q*r:
affix
igrqwTqqre:
The noun qrasrr
This
s9
nm
'qrasn
6,
ww
f>.
few
the Neuter
here that of karma.
is
3.
used in
is
'^:'
VQ\r\
n\?v
fafq:
ssfa:
'w^:'
11
affix
?5R fro.
roots
belonging
to the
class are masculines.
The
roots belonging to
'abode/ 33fa: 'water.'
(which
is
Neuter).
Why
^ class are zj and vu. Thus hiTm:

do we say "formed With the affix fai"
'agony', fsrfa:
1
Observe aitn
The Siddhanta Kaumum.
228
Why
s
do we say "roots belonging to the
'?gfa:
ssft sr
The noun
8.
sqt: ct:
^rjt:
The words which
*an
heaven,' & fnft
'the
of
the hair,' 3*r? 'the tooth,' *FR 'the breast,'
the dagger,'
Thus
sfiw
n:
cJT:
tot: stc^st:
q*lp crwtst:
qo
si^t: 5?qt:
fajmsi:
5R3JT:
sftranrar:
5t:
H^^fsa:
srost
ssht
'demon,'
^l
n*r:
mm
'the
'the arm,' qiqs 'the
*J3!
<fec.
w^
'the sea,'
<s$:
'self,'
nail', 5RSJ
throat,'
ig$
masculines.
are
iTrn sNir:; ra*tf sna?:
<mm; m*i qp:
fnft: qsf?r:;
gin
st:
swst-
afiHT ira:-
&c.
qf;s srfqr:
'fafsreqfawsR *g's*i'
mud'
'the lake,' qgj 'the
fnfr: q&fr.
win
3sr 'god,'
^w^
mountain,'
'the
rani stt^:
synonyms
are
*rR:qj*:
9.
both masculine and feminine.
#w.
*Tcm
thai fajTrea:
sb^s:
3=^ sraw
"sregTsr.
sin mifrn: > n|g: are* wife
sua:
qfacfanT
'a quiver' is
^fijfci:
**j?:t
^ class" 1 Observe
feat gTg ^ igrasnaarTa:
^jfasiss:
Thus *q or^q* ?ijfu:

Ten
[Vol. III. Genders Ch. IT. 8.
snsi?
<j<r>q fsrosa*
Wsnsuir
ran?tVwr?TqT
10.
The noun fefcNSQ' meaning ' the heaven* is neuter.
This word being
synonymous with raif would have been considered masouline by the last apho-
rism, but this aphorism prevents that.
The nouns
11.
By
sutra
and
3lV
'
tarei
sm
sidered masculines, but this ap'iori

l*
'^ST^
The nouns
12.
By
II
the arrow
îj
'
and sng
arm
the
'
in the sutra, these
'
are also
words are
feminines.
to be
considered
also.
'snxngsnilT snj
s ^'
The nouns ann
13.
By
^Trgfa
the force of the letter
masculines
*a
fe*IT '
are feminines.
'
being synonyms of ^qf^ would have been conprevents that.
these two words
9,
the heaven
'
*n?tfm tVsrrsqrqifearpf^T ifemrTrqsnqsTart n

an arrow and gnm a section' are also neuters.
i
'
'
in the sutra,
these words are to be
considered
masculine also.
The
<18
SWH
The
last four sutras are exceptions to

I
'5Trpr:'
*q
Ij'fa
TT5TT
H9T
5f3*95iliaR^ gg^WTTUr^TfJ
fa' *frT
14.
The nouns ending
Thus
TT3f^, rT^FJ
in
But.not
the sutra
* 5 OT
9.
SwfeflSqffToqTftfT:
are
w^
5^q: qq^f:
wqj
$\xzi
II
III. 33.
'JT^SET^^T-
masculines.
'
skin,
'
smsj
armour' which are neuters.
rule however should not be extended to xiW[. qijjj &c.
because of the subsequent rule
II
These
are
Neuters
Vol. TN.Gendsrs Ch.
Tbe nouns which
15.
the cheek* ij^q
WHIG
Thus
qe
a?cj*\2ir.
16.
This
is
qs
'3*ttTOi:
fisiaTw
to the
g'fa
'
sir??
wsifrsnigj
man,
the sacrifice/ gr. 'the
'
JTO3:
ipj'S:
d$T fits:
n
neuter.
is
last.
wg.-
3^T: 3Rar5TTgfU3' ?f?T fcrgfa:
ssmsqûfcr
*a
of w?j
cloud' are masculines
itel
wrai mw:
oloud
'
an exception
J
synonyms
igrafHjTaarar:
fsarosg^^raT^r
*???
gtrnro
'to* *g's*w'
The nouns **
are
the ankle,'
'
229
Mascot,!**.
II. 23.]
faroa:
an?
^rrof
'g^F5RTfs*iT
'*^'.i
*> 3*'
'aftgrtHiT
vara*:
iri
na'urrim*-
fsracuisi safari:
w-'fajjarafeifaaifiit
The nouns ending

Thus wj: ?g:
17.
in
are masculine.
11
According to Medini, the noun ?|t when meaning 'a wanton woman,' the
But it is both masculine
commencement of a dance/ or 'disease' is feminine.
aud feminine when it means the chin/
Aocording to Amara, the noun BRng when meaning a she-elephant' is feotherwise masculine when it means an elephant.
minine
The words which are
'
'
subject to
As
sal
application
if it
is
tion of all other rules.
qc
sesha rule
The nouns
vjg
'
it
is
univer-
of
not debarred by any specific rule."
a oow/ tssj 'rope/
new moon-day/
are
creeper
'the
^rnj
are feminine.
'
II
is
faraTi?'ii
rope' in a
*ggi
gender
rule of
a rule that remains after the applica-
'
The noun
Thus
00m pound
also
is
the masculine.
used in
3i8R3*35rT or 5fi?ra;T55Tsn.
'W^^T^^^Tg^^g^RTffa *g *$'
20.
taste /
e. t
i.
H^ bodv/ *^r atom/ fans name of a

WT *5gj: 3T9 ^' a^3*SJ55rT=5F5R2*SSJ5?T
19.
*0
said
Provided that
Sarayu/
<K
been
has
'^ss^srgfigngftfSfa:
18.
river
it
governed by any other specific
which are not
this rule are like these
text to the contrary.
The nouns *?nj

4
tear/
gig
'
bared,'
wax/
qrtj
stt^
lead
'
II
the knee,' *3TS
and yn^
'
sweetness
the palate
'
'
relish;
are neuters.
OTefcnfa'
'sreaTfa' *fk fsRW
'^w^Tfj^ysnfy^^'
The noun g^ when meaning 'wealth' is neuter. Why do we say
For otherwise it is masculine when meaning JTg*3 'a
meaning wealth'?
*q
'srcj
11
21.
when
ray of light
**
ut^
By
'
fire
'
and
Msnftro
23.
'
*na w^n: or
w*:
wealth'.
fl*
^ w^n.
h:
'*ra?ri:'
*nr.
'
Meru/
sta:
Wgfo *3
I
'honey,'
W3*:
aftvj
'
S3 W^J
* kind of
neuters.
in the sutra, these
words are also masculines.
affixes
are masculines.
Thus
lord of
*$*&
The nouns jjît 'a kind of pulse' ;

summit/ SFTTTrgtj 'water-pot* are also
Thus
*3
*?*
'TT^JJT^^^TgSRTTUlffsT
22.
wine,'
'
'
a bridge.'
(Un. IV. 101) and
g (Un
I.
69)
230
The nouns 31* tree,'

iTW sour cream, whey,'
24.
'
object,'
*A
^Tc^'fa *tR :,-Wm
The noun BtR
25.
By
and therefore ought
affixes
$*'m
*9t*
Thus ^z 21^
an exception to the last sutra.
is
formed by % and n
porridge
m*
fruit,'
24.
II.
'collar bone,
&m
'
are Neuters.
'
This
all
'a kiud of
eircfc
Genders Ch.
[Vol. III.
'
words are
II
also neuter.
is
the sutra,
si in
These
have been masculiuea.
to
Thus qmt
also masculine.
it is
or 9tR.
as
'HTuwajwa:'
From
26.
this
up
'tfwfkamfrroriTf*' ^f?T saa?H
SHWTûisrf
trisj
gender of nouns ending
to sutra 66, the
will
be-
66;
and
ap-
in
mentioned.
This
It extends
an adhikara sutra.
is
nouns ending
plies to
in si
'SKTUVI:'
Thus
*c
S*fo SJTf?
5RT&*JT.y5RTU5T?:
The nouns ending
27.
a cluster'
sasr*:
in si
The nouns
28.
'
This
fi3g*i
filth.'
the crude-noun
is
the chin
'
S!*3{5R
(Un. III.
an exception to the
The nouns
29.
mzx
mz*
liquor';
'
*%&k ^
<austf
40).
3^^
OTrtffe
army
a goblet'
of Shiva
staff,
'
ftresR*
;'
WTO5 m
basket
'
a thrill of joy', are
By
Thus
nra:
Thus
a<i
^Z ÛS^W
zradu^rcTO:
Nouns en ling
30.
tiz:
'a
a ball
*W*
Jtmm
mt*
'
SfiTTCcR:
mm
the head,
'
v&m
alf^K 'lustre; fqs!T 'the

' an
army, belt', snsm
mafSR yellow orpiment/ 'an ear ornament'
ftws^
a vessel/
qjW5R 'blade,'
xmm
also neuters.
SHi" 9RTI3*: Or
io
water-lily,.
are neuters.
'
(Un. IV. 16. 17)
'
'book,' flSTSR 'tank,' fqissR a kind of coin,' 3JER 'dryness/
bow
torch
il
the
of
a thorn,' sretai
'
are masculines*
'the root
last sutra.
a sweetmeat,'
zr.
^k^thstts:
SJTfT*i
a garment/
'
eR?R3ÎT!^5FÎ3SKfIT^3iTU^cRa5ITSRTf5I
road
(II.
SR^fJ: >k
with the penultimate
%&m:
5CT3*:
'fagsiranfr 9RinffTtr%3KT^^TW gRifa sro's*'
HT?fltlf35R,
to rasmi-divasa
P3
;'
up
II
jar,'
in
uj:
m
'
in
the
afttra
these words are also
masculine.
&C.
g'ftr
wr?f
*rc: trj:
it
are
sculines.
a piece of cloth.'
?sRfte$3j m<aizvz&zn% rzxxizSjszifa
*ub%
fsFrctefafinfe k
31.
*
The nouns feftz
kind of tree/ gte
(?)
'a crown,
'
jjjzrz
'a crowu,
'
5T5ITS
*f?TC 'a mountain with three peaks,
'
'
'
forehead,
nz
a place where
Vol.
Genders Ch.
III.
four Voads'meet.'
39.] 'Masculines.
II.
9lZ
23{
au elephant's cheek,' (Un. IV. 81) and
'
$mz
'a clod of
earth' are also neuter.
By
Thus
^
farutfz
fsjtfte:
cer
',
words are also
masculines.
or fajftew &c.
*Z^m^^VlZZ!iQZ*zfa*zlZ*iZ'lfa ^g'e^ *
The nouns
hypocrite
'
in the sutra, these
^Trtffg
ZiZl
ZiZ-
II
32.
ZiXlZ
fagis
<
<
near
zgz
a water pot
cheating,' gjqTS
vicinity,'
i&z
By
3*
'
a fort,
door,
'
a worm,
they
eFtf
'
mz
'
fraud
illusion
"patched garment,' zrz

a mat'
sr2
a house'
a dan-
'
are also neuters.
are also masculine.
Thus
srjw
or
srs:
fee.
dura.*
inm^T^m*?*: gTs sna
Nouns ending
Tims
JTin:
34.
The nouua tR^
battle'
zvm
ai
is
in
'
'
mm mm
i
quality,' n*n: 'a host,'
heat
This
uiauo:
debt,' *T3<n
a stone.'
'
mn
salt,'
^W
leaf/
'
a portal,'
**o
are neuters.
an exception to the last sutra.
The nouns
boil/ g**n
aroror: n
are masculines.
xjr
^nafam^R&f on5?nn^TJnînnfsiaT^|rof?nnTf5!
35.
1
33.
'
sfiitroJUT
a kind of
bCrotum
foot,' ^nitf 'the
coin,
fcrcrmr
'
5*3*
â^f
a horn,'
si ^
^TciiTg
gold,' spjifr
'
^m
am
gold,'
'
powder/
cfco
are also
masculine,
'grass/
are also neuters.
By the
as
Thus wax
ro:
35T155T
words
sj
are masculines.
wood/
qcs
back/
'
fc^fti
inheritance,'
fgaRSi
'
are neuters.
'
<fcc.
fenrf feain
The noun
38.
is
'
cfiTtS
Thus ^z 5KTC5W
i
in qr
wax,' gqro '.a sentence
ac
in the s tra, these
chariot'.
The nouns
37.
bee's
Nouns ending
36.
force of the letter
intra:
srtgst
*wt: wust:
wheu denoting
ii
region
quarter or
'a
the world
of
feminine.
Thus arm:
*
39.
HI 'a
srtcst:
rftîftafpjnraTfar sg'ssF
The
nouns
cft^S
herd/ and nizi 'a singer
^Trtffa
'pilgrimage/
j
a song
'
x(\7i
wi*
'
?iWi:
?3*
the nose of a
are also
neuters.
?ft*iw
ii
horse;
the
hip/
The Siddhanta Kaumudl.
232
By
Nouns endiug
Thus
antelope
'
(Un.
'
The nouns
a crane/
'
mm
qiqu:
'
forest,
52)
II.
or
sjTd
gem/ fa?3
rule/
iiqTST
'
'
a low
place,
'
a*q:
words are also
sq':
sacrificial' 'post'
masoulines.
(Un. III. 27).
sftq:
'a lamp'
'
'
fl?q
'
jjq*:
'
^q
'
bed,
an island
fareq
'
qjmq 'a
srg
to
a winnowing
^rq"
corpse, 'a spear/
gta
'
?s ^qTwcqife
basket/ SRHq
an island/
'
ii
Brahmana
fsrgq 'a branch,'
Thus
<flq* srq':
8 8
wmu;
or
^ ^q jt
saw
46.
Nouns ending
Thus
JifTW:
art,'
a promou-
neuters (as well as masculines).
8$
u
*
<fec.
qjaqquoq^qfasqifif
The nouns
a snake.'
w qiq^TRnfe
93) are neuters.
Thus ?3* qiqn
45.
possibility
it
'
'
t&qsf
the ty-
'
with the penultimate q^ are masculine.
'
3.
w^lTO
SWT5R
dress/
qTqqi^qH'?qhr5qqqqTDqqij*Rqi5ri6qTf?ii s*q%5K
'vocabulary,
<feo.
qq:
wfwyR
53) grsns 'garden/
are also neuters.
in the sutra, these
*n*?w
in
II.
The nouns qiq sin, q form,' g^q a raft,'

flower/ uqtj 'young grass/ Htftq vicinitj/ nsrKtq
of grass/
hair'
'
'sandalwood,'
house,' 5PB1
'
'
(Un.
'
gsfjR
a place/
wgR
q%
44.
8i
a black
Qfcra
forest,'
pay,'
'carriage,'
qisr
a sandbank
'
j=eiT5f
fBf
Nouns ending
tary (VI.
the skin of
as*
'
gfrsi
cemetry,'
pride,'
a baloon
'
wa^ri:
Thus qq: 'a
'
(Un. V. 32) *fg|5T
sfil^sf
'
W31T*
43.
ice,
wra
qf*R
'honor.'
fcWTI
Thus *q
tjq
are masoulines.
to the last aphorism.
a seat/
B5*n5T
(?)
88
a thicket/ (Un.
an exception
is
ing-post,'
8a
the hip,'
copulation,'
'
sleeping/ WT^sf
By
sj
foam'.
ii
g^
48)
a wood;
'
a lotus;
fgwrasr
'
are neuters.
'
42.
'
If.
fagsr
'
sign
'
lord,' tfrr.
The nouns gram
This
stf*R
in *H with the penultimate
qisnqarc:
fgfqsr
ladder,
fa|?
these words are masculines also.
in the sutra,
fftsw.
^îfgsfgfi^qiTwa^fa^fqîHTOTH^m^
41.
'
^zq
or
?ftsi:
40.
gTfrr srg'^w
sin,
Thus mu
[Vol. III. Genders. Ch. II. 40
'
&c.
ii
in *g 4 with the
pillar,'
fisw *q*g5Fw
sjw:
qjw
qq
'a
penultimate
water
WTqqTS*.
II
jar.'
are masculines.
a kind
are
also
Genders Oh.
Vol. HI.
The noun a*T
47
This
Thus 3TWHJ
Ht
mq:
Thus HTW:
HTW:
io
'yawning'
is
wta:
'
The nouns
blossom,' *\ziTrW
Thus
'
ere'
The
51.
sqvr, 'gold,'
spiritual,' 3i*g*r
'
3iim
are masculine.
Bhima.'
m fa
"3*^
f%vm
<?3
ssw.fwRiifa
'scab,' qijr 'couple,'
saffrou
'
?\jr
'fuel,' jt?*T
are Neuter.
&c.
%
nouns
'dwelling-house,'
in *H
*5RfHURg*mmn5WTuaTrwaj!;
50.
also neuter.
*ftw: u
the Soma,
last.
sp?:
or
Nouns ending
49.
mw
The noun
48.
neuter.
is
an exception to the
is
233
Masculine.
56.]
II.
9*gra
3TffCT 'pomegranate,' qftpr 'flower,' turn!*
'fight,'
'happiuess'
#tr
(Un.
cloth/
138) gtJI 'silkeu
I.
%jn 'homa'
32ETHT 'violently' are also Neuter.
By
Thus wi
a*
'
55m:
*ftq*K
'
Nouns ending
52.
Thus 9jrq: 'time

ia
The nouns
an upper garment
1
'
'
Thus
'nut*:'
mwa
with the penultimate u are masculine.

the horse.'
*tJ*HSR'
^33
SN5W
11
?f^q
'the heart,'
'the sense,'
^r^fta
m:
'cow-dung,'
zrww
mwai-Trmsw
'the red color,' w*tq
'Malaya
Indeclinable' are also neuters.
'
ll
*j;r.
Nouns ending
Thus fT:
masculiue
II
mwu^mwJTaramswTfsf *g*g$a'
litaq: or jftwaw x
55.
these wordy are also
are neuter.
The nouns
54.
jj
sutra,
11
faRe*rq 'a sprout/
irefQ 'Association,' *ji5uq
in
na:
;'
the
s'tfT*m %
in:
in
'fgRH^Q^Saf^T^dUTftff
53.
48
53
or
s*w
in
11
jc
are masculines.
'the hoof,' <H|;*: 'the blossom.'
3m3n^**t*^^W^T551IS3nf5rcrc3T*Uq^tn|jT^
fro
*a*s#i'
56.
II.
13)
?3 gitfwcmfe
The words gi*
fitfi
30
11
'door,' *nn 'in front,'
'curdled milk,' qvr 'crooked,'
sm
8;q?U 'swelling
'rampart,'
fgq
'a
abuudance' (Un,
measure of time,'
I^HE SlDDHANTA KAUlfUDI.
234
JVoL.
O ENDERS fill. II.
III.
56.
gg
'small/
fej
to
'hole,'
cowherd/ uwft
'deep/
33*
'the coral tree/
'a
'the
court-yard/
mira/ sfa
'
'
urine,'
'leaf/ qt^T
Thus ^3*
5^
53
Here
SI5RW.
*h:
stjk
and
'the
root/
eF3T,
'a
*a
sn?tf fa
weapon/
it is
name
not the
TlcR
(?)
TO
a5T 'a thunderbolt,'
'disc,'
'th* further
or opposite
of the god
'&astra
(&ukra).
sjfacFTC 'darkness,'
^t
side/
the force of the word
i" tne sutra,
these
'muy:'
Thus q:
So
ga:
'milk/ H1WT,
are
'a bull
The
60.
snwiOn
'a
m*
'es-
'an iion
kind of grass,,
Thus
masculines.
also
in
/ ag:
<
11
with the penultimate,
"Q
are masculines.
tree.'
'a
'f^ldaTl^^dilQt^tiqflii^feiticK^fTTTiTfin ^ft}*^'
^5
$g:
Nouns ending
59.
gq: or gara &c.
and
sns*
means 'semen.'
'
'um-
qi^^j 'star' are neuters.
club/ TBglT, 'the sentiment of love/ *?;3i* the coral tree/ 3Tjta
fflfn?: 'darkness/ fs&fsj* 'dew' are also neuters.
h?ad
&H
'gotra,' "^nf^nC 'a
^BR:-gmfjTRITf3 n
The nouns gai
58.
sence/ iHTau
'instrument,'
a picture/
'
nre
Sfr *the eye,'

'*JS5r
u?^
loom,'
'g^g^T^^7cm^T^T^ml^^m^^f^HfKJ^^Kl^tTff^fmhIfmTT^^
By
*q?oT*
neuter when
is
3T5R
'face,'
instrument,'
vessel/
'a
a?7
friend,' 3i*re 'a wife,' fere
(?) *S5r 'an
Thus 53* 3jtw <fco.

us '^qrjTScrmuTw'
The noun
'
'thread/ arK
a^jl 'cloth/ qa
g'
'mea-
'immortal/ 5TS* 'the stomach,'
'dew,'
cloth,' fWfsiT
'a field/ fa^f
w^
ic
'a
armlet,' 5F3T*
'the body,'
sjrt*
sflsrr
jmfa
'
fiuger-protector/
57.
'constant/
*jj5to
and q*^t 'skeleton/
'water', ^JSir. 'sky
JhTtT,
'an
diffi-
'
enmity, gra* 'ch&mara/ nxsFX 'the lake/ Jig* 'the cave/ 9*3* a
hut/ 5j?fo 'a crab/ ^fa* 'a court-yard' (Un. II. 121), 5RT*wt* 'kas.
dominion/ ire
brella/
s^
a den,'
fc
cavity,' 3j3t* 'a
^tT
'a tear
*H?J'
distance/
'
blood,' *aj 'a hole;
'cruel/ fafgii 'beautiful,' WiUt
tfi*
stomach/
dow,'
W3T*
?fa 'shore,' 3T
multitude;'
'a
culty,' 'misery,' l*f\l 'a hole/
farcin 'the
'a
name
fryingpan,'
of a tree' inii
'
11
an expiession of joy/
qfap 'nectar/ (Un. IV.
76),
lift
<sftq
'
the
'faeces/ fefi*jfa3 'sin/
SF5JTTH 'stain' are neuters.

s<*
'qq^ftqfwqfaqaqffm ^q/ssR g'
The words en 'soup,'
6i.
tion,'
faq
By
'
sflpof
'
^3
aw.
qq:
*qq*
cow-dung', ftjq
qsitq 'dry
?3 qqfaraTfs
11
'pretext,' 'emula-
'
theê words are also masculine.
in the Sutra,
*?
'a calf (tin.
The words tR8
63.
aissr.
Nouns ending \u%
Thus aw:
gTFq'fa
year' are also neuters.
the word
qq: or
siqvj:'
62,
and H'tlS
aq
the foice of
Thus
^
poison/
tt^t^tr:
11

III.
02)
jack fruit/
courage/ are neutera.
aiqs:
fag
'a
are
ST
masculines.
orow/ S^TIB:
the fibre
of a
lotus,'
'a kitchen.
as
'
chaff/
Vol. III.
Genders Ch.
The words giro a vessel,' *g, T* juice,' fain* 'gum juice,' 3QoTTe
month,' W18, 5RTB'
perfume; 'habitation ; WTH
tfiTvW 'cotton,' sth
cough,' gifa bell metal,' and WTH 'flesh are also neuters.
64.
23 5
MasOBUNB.
$72.1
II.
'
fast,'
'
'
'
'
gTO
Thus
ws?
or
&c.
STffT H
The noun gig when not meaning
65.
When
it
means a
then
living bein^,
living
a.
never feminine and means 'a drinking vesel, cup

is
it
neuter.
being., is
It
is
or. can.'
name
the
of.
a king
of
Muthnra
son of UgraBena and enemy of Krishna.
Nouns which
66.
synonyms
are
of ifaw
'
a ray of
and fsJ38
light,'
'
day' are masculine.
Thus *ronr|pii
The noun
67.
This
is
fsesrerT
sfrfuTrT:
an exception
vw
a ray of light
'
to the last
The nouns fz^ 'a day
68.
an exception
'
is
'
feminine.
aphorism.
and
*rg^ 'a day
'
are
This
neuters.
is
also
to the aphorism. &6.
Nouns which
69.
are
synonyms
of
*T!*T>
'
a measure, a
standard'
are.
masculines.
UW
Thus
Sjgs:,
70.
The words ^THI
a measure
'
of capacity
'
and
<HT39i
'
a measure
of.
grain* are neuters also*
Thus î ^TOJsr
The words
71.
*
a kind
of weight
'
Thu&â.^Td,
3*
72.
'
taift
THI:
'
a measure of grain equal to 16 dronas
sjtf
WjfofiT
clt|rg
and
vnfrtRt.
The nouns 3UT'wife,'

grain,'
?R
3T*i:
*gr?j
the five
II
'whole grain
vital, breaths'
or unhusked
are alwnys plural.
II.
&$
'
are feminities.
2jmgH*TT51TSRT
parched or fried
3TTT*.
or
the force of the word *.in the sutra, they are feminiuest
rice,' rtst?
Thus
^si;
The Sidphanta Kaumudi.
23C
^:
wi
snstano:
with
*aTf
sTT^t, IPX
5R
and
The words gqj

Sutra
Thus
united!:
74.
The
as
*T*rT
infa 'the head/
member
'
'
and 03
'
a foot
*pa
"
11
compounded
'
srtc:
'
(i.
Masculine and Neuter), but this
e.
(when compounded with the above words).
wind' (Un.
94)
I,
jt*?j
the wing of a bird
'
'
ST?J
a sacrificial priest/ are masculines.
'
II
The words
75.
water/ afol 'knot/
neuters,
w*a
wards
swimming' and ^f^rer
Thus mu
qTn
II. 73.
respectively are masculines.
*ht$:
'a boil/
&c. are of both genders
debars their use
Genders Ch.
III.
srto:i annstamwqfaf rT yfa w*5iRifa$?a
The nouns gen
73.
[Vol.
^Rfcr
*fcr
'
a seer/ ttFst
'
worm/
'a
fcfifw
sun/
the
'
\zrff
aheap/
'
<g?s?
the poet/
Sifsi
leathern bag for
^ff?'a
'sound/
holding
offering/ sfcTfa (?)
and
<a monkey,'
and
wfa
grass/
g'si
5Rfij
sage/ are masculines.
Thus
*tf TRfu:
76.
The
a heap
'
<W>
Scare
ii
words
\z?-5T 'flag,'
um
elephant,'
ws
'a
of
sort
are masculines.
l^^T^TH^Tr7|^ff|rTfR^rif:' I5 3 T9I
'
WT^
'
gftftrferoil!
ii
The words ^&t
77.
titude/
erm
tree/ gtjjH
'
moment/
the hand/
'the wind.' |?T
*>r 'a lance/ vfa
a messenger/ vpf
'
rogue/
'a
'the
*j?l
end/
a son/
HTrT
|rff
'
mul-
'the
mango
are masculines.
According to Amarakosha,
(I. 4.
gyf
11)
is
never feminine, (i
e.
it is
both
masculine and neuter).
The nouns UTTg a bull, w& the scum of boiled rice/ aros a small
bamboo w?^^ 'master/ g^ns 'a multitude/ <rng< mouth/ nn
78.
box
or
basket of
the cheek,' jjqs
'
'
'
'
man
with bald head/ mife
'
a heretic,' and^
fa^s
a crest'
are masculine.
Thus wf wis:
ii
ajragtonn:' sra eta:

gft <ct**3 *tt3tsj:
anfrnr frsr
waan
*OTiaT: waroft
WuBnrg^Tironcfs^
(qH) Tfir fewrTTwanrfl
&%-. vttsw
( w<0 ifrr ^ fcrora*n?; w*rm * us ftnrnTOgT srw *raw
itctstswsttWw
fn wre:
..-.*
'
ii
79.
masou lines.
The nouns
**
'a family/ '*
a share/
gftlTV 'an
oblation' are
Voi,
'
Genders Cn. HI.
III.
Thus
ding the
na*
sfsj:
The
237
Neuter.
4.]
'a cake-offerm/
purodasa
word
with the force of karma to the root
affix Î3l
%
pada
ijtt
The z
word
find the
changed
is
so spelt in
changed
Or the Z
is
2. 71. S.
3414.
5 by no
to
IV.
sutras
3.
zm^
particular
and IV.
derived by ad-
by the upa-
Gram mar, but we
rule of
70, S. 1449
is
preceded
148
3.
and
g by nipatana even in the present sutra
Thus in Magna also we ^find XKTSnj W5WT ^tzt?^
to
fice
1528.
S.
sutia
the
III.
sacri-
of purodasa eaters.'
co
'
^3gR53rap35[3g33j33T:
The words
80.
'
<$z
* ?3t
'
'
a lake,' 5R53 'root/
q^
a kind of
'
&z
jasmine.'
513
'bubble' are masculines.
Thus *u* â:
11
,
ca
'q^^f'aw7^wTg^?^f^RJ5Jt^^T:
niro:
11
The words mr
offering, nfaj5j 'a road, OTtFj 'a churning
stick,
iRWTg^ a name of In Jra/ t^vsl a clump of grass forlTO, the buttocks,' and wi
81.
'
'
'
'
a heap' are masculines.
Thus *m' n4j:

c*
q^îT^^^qi^g^TgfÔT^wsiTfqifT^f gTfq^^wspr^Jiîis^H:'
VQ Q^ra ^rtltfz H
The words nîsr a sprout,' trara a small pool,' g;qj cough,' ?Ui
82.
11
'
'sound,' 9R3Tt5 'frying pan,'

'jewel,' f\iu
wave,'
tachment,' s*Jg"
ca
'
H*f
fasgl
'
a peg,'
'horse' jjyj 'smell,' *tz'*l
and
ocean,'
ti^
'
The words ST*fal
83.
the abdomen,'
tjiflU
Thus *q
qa
'
an
ascetic,'
'a
*3*
wfaff
^n
Thus wj u^sn
a musical instrument,'
ijTg
charioteer,' *gf??faj
the hand',' igsifa
'
the hut of
a falcon,' are masculines.
mTOfcffzrsRfgeifei mTitrc^Rii:
'
TfZ
*?*r.
guest,' 3>fg 'the
the hollow of the hands
'at<fcc.
'
are
womb,' gf^r?
masculines.
OTlftr: &c.
^fr? tffa^TfaaiT*:
11
THE NEUTER GENDER.

(
<*
5rg'^3>n'
The Neuter Gender.
1.
This
iifasrcttiro
is
an Adhikara sutra.
wra ^s^tT:
?9W
TOTOfa:
v^jottcr: W3TT:
This
QZ are neuters.
is a repetition of III. 3. 115, S
3290. Thus ^rsto (laughter).
Why do we say
abstract nouns of action ?' Observe x&*. 'fire';
an axe ; these
*>liratcre:
words are masculines and not neuters.
1
'Wt' fa*?
Abstract nouns of action formed with the
2.
11
affix
'
'
'fTOT ^'
MT^ ST fsTBST fT3nT tt\& SIT*

lTTfln\ II
JTHfW
Abstract nouns of action formed with the'fsHST affix are neuters.
I
3.
is
also repetition of III. 3
This
114. S. 3090.
Thus ?farTW
laughter,' iftim ' a song.'
n3KJ3r> r?%$T
8
Wa;F3W-3fifai<3m BJ5T: fdrdSTmnfpi^r
a W ,-^THft HWaqw -BTWOT
*> fefKR-ftl fa^T
'
Among
4.
(See V.
1.
123
S.
II
m and
taddhitas, words formed frith the affixes
1787).
>
S^FST*
gj??-
are Neuters
238
Thus
3Tdtr3tT v
whiteness
and
'
[Vol. Ill, Genders Ch. III. 4.
'
3Tl5t?qiT
whiteness.
nouns are optionally feuiinines because of the indicatory
498
scope
in order to give
Thus ^T?J*m
iHTfaWJT % or wfarft
(<*so)
'
8TJUJjm
5W#
or
The
are neuters. This
'RfqirT<qT35R.
gSTq*W
is
qTqqw
(
i
g^gJTÎinfswiT cf3
5fJ
(qsca)
fq?TX
II
%
m^
q?T, q, âR, qqf,
thereof are
*Rqr,
55T % and
1790.
Thus
muu^
Thus
g*$ZTO v
gj in
neuters.
added by virtue of
affix q?j is
(qse*)
'HTqi*l5^tfr?g.qtotgqT5nfTrTf5W?T^
the affixes
the senses of nature or action

(a)
*TclTqftqW
Nouns formed with
6.
goods/
h^jr
(<lS>a) ^TTVjqraJT v
qsfi'
irSTTWl^: (<lCOO)
effects,
Brahmanical.'
'
îq^T^qSTlfa^qhlTT (qsi)
iamb. (qsq)
SrfqnflrnfswTT
3^5RW
cleverness.
124, S. 178a.
i.
ig*qw
41, S>
1.
aptness.'
'
Thus gT^Htfm
qfaglT,
'
Brahmanadi words when denoting work aud quality
5.
repetition of V.
qj5^ formed
q by IV.
the indicatory q.
to,
mnft
or
v
The
'
letter
V.
125,
1.
S.
'theft.'
The
(6)
'
affix
added
is
by
virtue V.
It.
12:6,
S-.
1791.
friendship.'
The
(c)
affix
33?
added by virtue
is
of V.
1.
Thus qnqqw %
127, S. 1792.
'ape-like.'
The affix qqj
(d)
added by virtue of V.
is
12$, S% 1793. Thus *Tfaqfq*^
1.
{authority.'
The
(e)
8
affix *T5T
is
%
1.
Thus *fh5W v
129, S. 1794.
camel-like.'
The
(/)
'the action of
(g)
1798.
*m
added by v'rtue of V.
is
and filial.*'
is
The
Thus ^^TqiW^
130, S. 1795.
1.
days.'
The affix g*
Thus fqmqîsw^
(h)
mtw
affix
two
affix
is
1.
132.
and 133, S. 1797 and
'paternal
1.
135*,
&
Thus
1800,
*^$jc?ir
ii
x
Note:
This Sutra summarises
the affixes taught
all
^SKftmS:-' (S"if) *faf5R5T

Nouns which are <n&iqtYH3 compounds
7.
Thus *?*ife
in
V.
124-135.
1.
II
are neuters.
(See XT. 84. 18 r S. 659)
8.
'Zftt***^ ^T?inqT3n
Nouns which are gsg comjounds
Tims UTfinUT^W^
*
ii
'
'SWiqiqi %Tlf5FfJJTTîTTT^ '

,
are neuter.
SHEW
II
(See
II.
4.
2, S.
906)..
Vol. HI. Genders Ch.
The compound
9.
fftrsrrfu fajTt
the uon-claBSical literature.
(See
of the
an adhikara
This"" is
qq
*Ra &IV1
11.
neuter
the
Thus *i*T$Tim
q^
23,
hb
<a
house'
'CTC^r?'
nm'
the last word in
qe
H^
ttsit
ending
18.
17, S.
lu
when
being'
is
by
preceded
(See
neuter.
mi
WT
$TOT 'shatheir being
ending
in
'wine/
Dvanda
4. 26.
IT.
S.
II
Tatpurusha
or a
compound
is
like
that of
812).
or a Tatpurusha
masculine.
compound ending with tin
'night,'
*]?
(See II. 4. 29, S. 814.)
tf
vgUTi 'bad road'
issmstf Tifa:'
and qqaTfl 'sacred day' are neuters.
(See
II.
ftm^*
1.
(See
821 Vdrtika).
i
fsRsr
*ra*r?: n
word nfer when preceded by a
'F**3nua$' ^f?T
compound ending with
Dvigu
neuter.
17, S.
4.
II.
the
52, S. 730).
II
do we saySvhen preceded by a
Observe vim n?:
numeral"?
which
is
fgn:
feqj
^'
kwqum
uwssft
fawg^w
Nouns which are Dvigu compounds
pie feminines albo.
821 Vartikas).
Thus
'court'
'non-human
masculine.
qc
SWT
in
^w^W
and
'army,'
of a
'a day' is
Thus fon^W
Why
is
'night' aie also feminines (in addition to
vjm' (cq)
815 and
is
'shadow'
indicated by
15, S. 828.
(See
it.
The words
II. 4. 30, S.
17.
chhaja
*q*iTnjm% ^g*^ H
16.
qs
^5rawfRnfs
qrapTOQ^v: qTafa^: WTH
The Dvanda
day' and
numeral
'ttttt^t^t:
15.
'a
frnffT
II. 4.
The gender
14.
the word
that of profuseness of the thing
is
Tatpurusha compound
See
also neuter).
qi
||
Tatpurusha compounds
13.
19, S. 822).
^5f swjt ' the king's court* Ac,

'^n^RT^TaTJjTsnfsren feai g' u
dow,' n"rai
formed
820).
S.
Thus
ia
22, S. 825,.
4.
words which are synonyms of

4.
4.
II.
which
becomes neuter gender,
ll
'nsfiwôrogf
12.
(See
Tatpurusha compound ending with
term. (See II.
first
in
siitra.
gender, when the sense
in
of that
Karmadharaya compound,
OTWHIT
neuter
is
3399).
the cases explained in the following sutras.
in
*%nri
masculine, and
ia
II. 4. 28. S.
compound, with the exception
10. A Tatpurti8ha,
by the particle nan, and
II.
239
Nrutfr.
III. 18.]
Tj5=aw^1 'five-roots,' fJ3nr55TW "'three worlds.'
(See
II.
4.
210
Nouns ending
19.
Thus ifa:
read with
The nouns *f^
although
*jsj:
II.
115
being
neu-
a bow' (Un.
is
feminine also
û*
The word aft
aft:
'the roof
also
a^RTftjiqsmr?
sfrsr^^ffT
vz&
?w5c:
aft:
always feminine.
is
(see
Un.
word
is
108)
II.
root arft becomes
noun aft
that the
which neuter.
tresr*
^r
affix
The
to the churadi class.
commentators say
mentioned along with
'sifehjfe-
vzzmr&zute
?re
II
In the Amaiakosha, we find the
97, S. 2985.
There the
(in addition to its
II
:w^ ??aTf^T f*a:
14).
II.
III. 25,
*gfsgh
Thus ^q aft:
It is
to the root anfe belonging
4.
3S
108) and
II.
(see
sftsmi cI^T^WTSJTlSJTfTK 373QT:

21.
VI.
(Un.
'
fire
ray
'
f^r
aft: f^rarag
?h
^raifeiT
ends
it
Thus ?q
i
^g
in
oblation to
Genders Ch.
III.
117).
II.
20.
ter,
[Vol
u^^f aft:
(II.
neuter because
This explanation of the
by
ar<3
it is
commenta-
tors should be rejected.
anfa m\& wj wawrasm

*fat ir*n an&R srcwm
i
irewsRw
irewraTZRre
22.
to
^feKDW
'the
f*wr
^rt
are
\R
^t?* srtwt
sr
gift
sr* ttist^
to
snffaij
jt*s
synonyms
of
and *ir
'wealth,'
wis
'face,'
qiR
ijftraft^T: tfiH
139*
'a
utoh
hole/
otST
gsi*
TO
jtts wt-
bthsri
*R
are mentioned.
II
The words afa
23.
II
In the next three sutras exceptions to this
**
<^fa*nw
'food' are neuters.
<*RW.
wfamfiRw
'a eye, *fT3 'cop-
'blood,' oRUcrai 'a bow,'
5TQ5T
*r
month,' *fa*
'a
plough/
fRw
fsrat
Srasft?
wrw
î^g ort*iw
errcr shrw
*f\n: mw
an Sift
fag* fcR*r
Thus
fwtm
The words which
per,' 35? 'forest/ *?re
water/
stir' ^t^sto
'a
mi
plough/
'
wealth'
and miz*
'food* are
mascu-
line.
*h
irat$i
iroriRW
Thus shf: or Qt^t
25.
stst
'the face/ sfcr 'the
Arjuna's bow' ate also maseulines
"54
srjw
SHft
hnf
wnifrtfHraii
ii
The words 5R[
24.
'
msRinrairraetaTR 13%
nzzh fartm
?r: or
eye/ sgujg 'the. forest/ and w*lta
(as well as neuters.)
5^w
iiwq: or **qiiw x
The word h^qt
'the forejt' is feniiuiue.
flraita or JTHI3RW,
Genders Ch.
Vol. III.
26.
Nouns ending
Thus
W*W
27.
The followiug
Palmyra tree/
naau/ gq*r
vf fa
fm
3i^r*r 'a
are masculines
granary/ <hs
ft'
T?JBRt
*3
The following are masculines
Qi^
fibre/
foî
Thus
^
child/
h^t
stone/ HTSI 'the
'a
%qw
'blauket/
'a
virtuous
Thus
'Slcm 'a
to their
HTH
qsnsi
tree/
'a
demon/
'strand
being neu-
qma
'lotus,
'flesh ;'s0T9r
jhusk/
fBRTR,
*tm*
tfa faw
'OTTfa:'
q$T * v*:
*t?t
a hundred'
<fcc.
are neuters.
hundred/ H33IT 'a thousand.*

Observe qR: 'one/ gT 'two/ atpsi: 'many.'
do we say, 7m &o. ?
Observe siasajf;
do we say when meaning 'the numerals' ?
Why
Why
Here
of a mountain).
i
also (in additiou
the planet Mars/
^jrnzf xjnwt qr?n n
The numerals
30.
II
'swallowing/
fansr
*j?m
29.
ao
cotton/ 3Q9T
tfitsvl
*a spear,'
or sjtaw x
Site:
sraife:
'a
desert/ spr
'a
s'isn fff? fgRw %
name
'
'ear-ornament/ qgsr 'a
'bottom/ JJBHj' pestle/ 3jUi5l
'a cat/
sftnfacUTfa
vta:,'conduct/ tra "root/ Wff^
a lotus
'place.'
necklace/
'a
neuters.
^nzj |rr: <fcc-
28.
ters):
W5W
race/ ag^W x 'a shore/
'a
^ are
with the peuultimate
'a audra.'
Thus
^WC
in
241
Neuters..,
III. 33.]
n<ngrragaT: g fa
The words
K
'a
Sffi
(the
sjn'is masculine.
i
m:
*q'
hundred/
fa* srafarqife n
vigft 'a
myriad/ ng?c
'a
million' are also
masculines.
Thus mv'
a<*
* z tow
sra: or
*igT sktfz: fssiaTW x
<fcc.
q* cgr
wufjwtfwfq tgw 11
The words 5IQT 'a lakh' and
31.
Thus *q* si^T, *q sfeife:
w'
$ife:
'cit
s^t ?*g
qlife 'ten million' are
n?j'
tw,
feminine.
11
According to Amarakosha
(III. 5.
24) the
word
93
also
is
Thus
neuter.
a*
32.
I'S
3^
^^Wl:
The word
sjqj'j
$fa?!
ten
VlTfltB:
billions,
W* TOBW
aud sometimes
II
8VR
'a
thousand'
is
mas-
culine.
Thus *q S8:
zsresR:
faw
33.
*ftnm
Nouns
or
8StOT
afam
*?R?f ft
fa*
aaTfr?
* f
of two syllables formed with the affix
ing an agent are neuters,
31
sttwt
H^
11
and when not denot-
The
242
Thus TOfy
Why
Siddhajtta Kkvuvti
[Vol. HI. GsabKfts
fi.
til. $35.
'skin/ sirsj 'armor,' QRW5 'work'

%
do we say
of two syllables ?
'
mbam^
Observe
'
wf
'minuteness/
'glory.'
Why
do we Say 'when not denoting an ageut
The word a^jsj
34.
Thus
i*
The words sm*^
an amplification
as
Nouns
Thus q*re %
Why
is
^:- tooth'
'name' and,
uqtf: n
are neuters-
ftirsj 'hair,'
This
mere-
is
of sutra 33.
'wm gW
30.
'w^si
'a giver'
also masculine.
*s gjp
*ra b^jtt or
iraftTwft *<h*i
35.
ly
is
Observe z\W\
'
*:
w*:
'^sm*:' faw
**%m:
of two syllables formed with the affix *ro *re
JR^
'glory/
do We say
'of
'mind/ fllH x
^two syllables
'
is
neuters.
'austerity.'
Observe **TS 'the
moon,'
which
masculine.
\9
*t#*tj
fe*HT;
nm
wars:
UTOiniq a^sRrsniR: m
The word *raero is feminine.

Thus Tim *TCBW
Generally, this word
37.
'^TRi:'
Thus tror
39.
The
iron
80
a pupil,'
'
affix
urn
qbh
tusk,'
'snwiwfwsft far*
(Un. IV. 159).
are neuters.
au umbrella.'
following are always feminine
fa wro:
*ra i*s:
*fa
fi'
'journey/
mil
a mea-
'
a strap.'
msf^fllfa OTfafa H
* ^mfn^c
irj 'fgttofw*
*ww
finrt-
(^<m)
rl* SUITOro;' *f?l
tfa
RQirVftf*?-
*BK3l3TgT5Rwf<I 5Wt SKWlfaTWclT:' (*cio) ^frf mrCTfiwon-
II
The
40.
dia,' ih|
^ iH ^ a q icsi; g'fo'
'
ffWiWIcl feqj
**w.
a leathern bag,* 3*51
*uf<jftair*9il|
VR
a leaf
^5JHWT#iW QW
'ttTffi^fti ^ u
qafrmw
fr35r!i:
ST5CJJ
Nouns formed with the
3d.
sure,'
TRW,
used in the Plural number only.
is
following are masculines
ijt|
a sou/ *g
a ram,' 3x5
'
a mantra/
IT*
'
q^
'
a servant/
name
of a
*nfim 'an enemy/
demon
killed
by In-
a camel.'
Thus n' Tf;

fw^JT a non -friend t.e. au enemy.
sjifjnr: is equal to q
Thus we find in JVlagha aw far*iHQfTjiWF
So also wirTUfforsY f^ ^ H
i
In commenting ou the sutra fgqfafjjî

his Padaiuanjari says
Un\di
amiira
affix *3r^
is
under
not a negative
JBâust had
it
The word amitru

sutra IV. 174,
compound
of
is
(11L
113
2.
derived from
in the
^H+fmr
S.
3111), Haradatta
the root
am
in
with the
The vord
of au enemy.
would appear at 6rst sifcht.
sense
as
it
taeu a Tatpurusha cowpouul of a + milra, then by sutra XL
i,
16,
S. 812,
aid
ter,
GEMnRRCH.
TIT.
Vot,.
'
amitra
be masculine,' then there arises the difficulty as
will
then by VI.
2.
3, S.
3736 the
will retain its acceut
intended that the accent should
it is
243
would have been Neuter, because the word mitra is Neuter.

the gender of a word depends upon usage, and though mitra
it
that
Nutr.
Til. 46.]
Rig Vedins read
be on fa
the fa?r
i.e.
For
But
accent.
to
For the
accent.
as in the
be
it
Tatpurusha.
in the
middle of amitra,
with the acute on the
it
If
be Nea-
following
*f*TTO oraor W^fw^: (Rig Veda VI. 25..2), *m?w* win (Rig VIII. 75. 10)
But these two objections of Haradatta proceed on the assumption that the'
word amitra is a Tatpurusha compound.
But as a matter of fact it is a Bahu
vrihi oompound and consequently the rule of gender taught in II. 4. 26 does not
*
apply to
it.
Haradatta overlooked the context in applying 'this rule. He further forgot sutra VI. 2. 116. S. 3850 which specifically applies to the accent of
amitra, wheu he raises the objection as to accent.
Nots
116
or
is
Did Haradatta
really misapply sutra
a Bahuvrihi and not a Tatpurusha

less/
and not
The
41.
nn
Thus
qn
'
a vessel
mnr
n^f: or
rope, striug* q^sf
31, Knsika says
one view of the
'
The Bahuvrihi amitra would mean
qfqi
'
of 55?
'
holy
'
Tp
'
fight
(I. 2.
'
aj*|*T
friend-
'
line.
VZR and srfsR
padma meaning
lotus is
are
ip*
a flower,'
sh &nvt
'
names of a
the lotus flower/ although
(in addition to their being
39)
'
Thus
are neuters.
neuters).
masculines.
optionally
This
neuter only.'
is
however
case.
wrag'aiftr gfe
'
The words ^Tiar and f?Vw 'fight* are masculines.
44.
VI. 2.
j'pi'a
a thread
'
courage or strength/
and *uj
aaff, 56JT*T, ^TrXISf
In the Araarakosha,
II. 4.
forget
vftwn be taken as
kind of flower, are masculines also

In
26 and
a town
The words
43.
4.
foliowiug are masculines (in addition to their being neuters)
The syuouyms
42.
It
should the word
an enemy.'
a leaf
'
Why
not Bhattoji floundering ?
these words being
synonyms
of rana
would have
been
Neuters.
By
III.
42
makes
This
them masculines.
The word
45.
*rfi* fight
is
This also by $tra *- ant
always feminine.,
would have been Neuter.

.e
4G.
'xrasnfa
Names
5
'
i
TR^5nfrTTt sisii
of fruits are neuters.
*$nm
fjth
*mw*
*m**
244
Thus
iTTOHsft
one of the myrobolans,
*rTtTO9*T%
feminine
is
also.
which produces that
Names
47.
The
48.
following are neuters
of water/ srg^j
âsfar
7
not a universal rule.
is
5^ wtan: fj/
'
are neuters,:
far!
'
bile,'
'
mun
butter,' *q5trT c a well,'
'
fan 'mind/
wealth,
word
but the tree
the universe,' ^nsa 'once/ i&R * ordure,' ijtlTT a

whey/
ordure/ (Un. IV. 58), ug?? 'the liver,' 33rWJ
The following
49.
fruit,
^^t1T^??T^TqrTfqfwHfaHfflTlFa^Wf?T5If7^HTlf9rrTlf5f
'
But the
mango.'
of the myrobolans.
fgn?7 'the sky/ sin?
drop
'
mean the
This
of treeB are feminines only.
fsiaggfiT?9f?fiiT^qa^WJa5cfFrri:/
<HTnra %
'
does not
fruit.
Thus *k*H*V 'one
however
It
[VolÎII. Genders Ch. 111. 47.#
*fl
'a lie,' *H*tf?
ima
fast/
'
'
'nectar/ fsifwrT 'cause/
q*
silver/
'
faw
an event/ ufafi
-'gray hair.
10
'
^T^f^^3ga>5ÎTffî>35WOT^ IJHOTTW^*T^WTI^giTf^'
The
50.
following
are.
neuters
^TSS
a funeral
seat/ arcs
'
a bowl,' (Un. 1.^112). tfn 'the body.' afvi
thigh
(Un. III. 154), *qfg
'
sky /
iq
sin/ and
'
5RH5I
a'fa
iter*
Thus 35m
ATI
Swnfa
or
The
5.2.
vit^j
luck'
is
'
a house
;'
Thus ^%'
The
53.
'
the
'
tail
of a
^ra
54.
Why
II
'
'clarified
a poem
a loop or swing
'
made
a kind of musical

'
5T3
'
'
m*X
of rope
'
truth / *nq?a
'
$r
instrument / *q
'anoblation
'
of
offspring ;'|^Q
TVS1 'wine
a wall/
'
'
qua 'vendible/
an army.'
peacock,'
*gf*%q'
a peacock's tail/
fsjpg
boon,' 7I< 'an arrow,' qsSTtOS

I
\jTrQJ7 v &0,
couple
gpg
H*
the
a place,' *t*TO 'the
'
butter/ ?*a ' orop/ ^nzr 'silver/

'conquerable/ ssa 'clarified butter/ gtsa
yot
the price / fajaa
3?q
also masouline !
corn/ *T5i
'saffron/
'
'a
fate,' xfts
\\
food to deceased ancestors/ ansa

*
'
W^TOTSro*PDWQ;TKlWrOTEOTW*^
ourdled mi\k/ wf*i
'
bone/ WTOTI
*afsz' a
'
fjsw-ia:
^3* WUfWRJife
'
the thunderbolt of Indra/
the seed.'
'
%&:
'
an eye,
sfrsr
The word %%
51.
raa
rite', Siftfrcj
SHlfa
ifc^d
shadow/
3:m
'sorrow
^m
g
'
;'
cjfini
relation/
'a
fish
mere
'
hook/ faF
amulet/ a?
a deity/
'
'
f^ST
TOT$t3tKT
The word**qg when it means one of the special senses is neuter.

do we say one of the special senses f It will not be Neuter when
'
jpetôf the azl* of a ohariot,
&o.
5?H
*g*HT?VJRTT:
IJ
it
Vol.
Genders Ch. iy.
III.
245
Masculines and Feminine*.
4.]
MASCULINE AND FEMININE GENDERS.

Masculine and Feminine Genders.
1.
This
,
-a
The following belong
2.
'
'the cow,' irfnr
TTT
afa?
flower,'
an adhikara sutra.
is
mafaIaf^3wfear^fsI5rnRTaITFl??5r%wfffw^ll:
a gem,'
*nw%
'residing,'
qfe
'the
'a stick,' 'JjfiGE
'u'amejrf a tree,'
*fe
*t
SIt: n
feminine genders
masculine and
to both
Tamj
U1ZVG
fist;
wfg
'cutting'
'the
trumpet-
ink,' wftfai 'pep-
per-'
Thus *n
*
(Un.
or van hi.
'w^w<^g^*w^fsresF*i^l$*^^J9:
3.
The following
JTO
'anger' (Un. Ill
*twh* *t nag:
are both masculine*and feminines
20),
w TO
'death
;'
**\j 'rum/ wiRsg 'the
jujube tree
93) in 'scratching,' fcg 'an atom of dust.'
I.
Thus ?u*
or *ra
w?a:
si
Nouns ending
4.
That
4
*Ti?nnrafe3'
denoting quality or
all
qualification are
the three genders.
Thus
uj, tr^:,
neuters.
also
H^st,
*&T<nra:-$T<ii?s* n
H%rT nouns which
Those
5.
in
they belong to
is
denote an offspring are
masouline and
both
feminine.
Thus
STtnrer: or
Sums*
n
f
\fa ftg ifasror:
MASCULINE AND NEUTER GENDERS.

*
nftraifoiny w
Masculine and Neuter Genders.
'3rt^R^T:'
1.
This
is
an adhkara sutra.
being/ *p*
kind of grass/ efaf7
*a
and neuters
following are both masculines
The
2.
'play/
*$TTOH
Jin 'butter,' *TH 'any
elephant/
'Indra's
gs? R
*a
book/ air? the burnt orust of roast meat/ ^rffEH 'redness.'

l
Thus *q
The
3.
'half/
^?r. or
*wtf
v?TW.
following are both masculines and neuters
fasTO 'heat/
Thus
^$
32m
izf : o r
'effort/ *n*j 'a
^*
spear/
3$
*Z|J
'a
horn,
'a
multitude,'
'firm/
'
* ***?
'^^srarof^tf^^qfafcra^nÔT:' *n* uw. t** a **?

W5I
The following are both nmsculinea and neuters
7
xn
m*H
wmetr/ (Un.L
'a tree/
'a
^
4
carpet/
137), ?'
Tfcus TO* Sat: or
*<r*
'a
bundle,'
xm
'half a verse/ an*
33W
'a level
'
p'ain/ *'
'pride'
a kiud of grass/ and
*m
ot&
'a
'tail.'
The Siddhanat
246
<4
'araWSUIspaism:'
The
5.
8
i
both
WW*
trunk/ $TTO 'medicine,'
w:
focsn
following are
[Vol
Kauicudi,
and
neuter
weapon.'
3ireWX15'nq^TnsS^l5rTnTO^ra9R?TSfiTnV3R'jr5Ff^ÎT:'
Tmg3 hm uti g^
'wsrr
fi '5T1STO3-'
m *n mrf'
(loo)
mm
sp&'
w:
*?a fai^:
SR*ft
9r*fa-' (^so)
The
6.
q*q*??*ilft:
f&aTq
am
'ZjUl SfTIWSIF:
ZV91
$5 'ân^nffg' *f?r vqqtitiv

h* siift*givn*f.yai5ri? s* *
masculines and
following are both
headless
'a
srsnaiTST^
3Tf<Jl ??
sfa
sarar? *-'t3t gcnasrsrei itofaregirraraf:' ^fn
i
ow*?
^
*T?3*|%*irroif93Rl^ tftfil
*fa:
f??
V. $5.
masculine
'a
Gbndsr Ch.
III.
neuters
$n*
'
punishment/
WTRf 'the scum of boiled rice/ *3Tre 'a break/ *rr 'the corpse,' *39 'a kiud of
rock-salt/ cri*3 'the side/ qinr 'cough/ **^pr 'a book, a goad/ 91917! *the sky/
'kusa grass,' gfcni 'thunder-bolt.'
These words are both masculines and neuters.
kosha
'<
Kusa
is
the
name
well as the rope of kusa
rod (salaka)
ploughshare or a
1.
But when
42, S. 500.
rfl
Thus we find in the Visvameans also darbha grass, as
it
(neuter) means water
it is
As ann
'a
it
piece of
means a salaka made

wood.'
As we find
Wl OTH 'you kusas are the children of the
with
so,
This
is
by sutra IV,
of wood, the feminine
the
in
tree,
the
when it means a
when the salaka is
But
That being
feminine.
a plough
of
'
of iron the feminine will be formed by ffh| as SRTH
by ZV{
Rama,
of
connecting the yoke
grass for
Kusam
plough, and an island.
made
of the son
sruti
formed
is
WBTST^FJ WT?
do you protect me.'
in VIII. 3. 46, S. 160, we find the werd $*jt used.

So also in the Vyasa Sutra we find the word
used. See Vedanta
Sutra III. 3. 26 where the getting rid of good and evil is mentioned; "the ob*
taining of this good aud evil by others has to be added, because the statement
So also
wm
about the obtaining
is
supplementary
getting rid of,
statement about the
to the
as iu the case of the husast the metres, the praise and the singiug.
reason for this) has heen stated in the Purva Mimansa."

mentators, small
are called kusas.
So
Thus we
find that the &ruti (kusa vanaspatyafci), the sutra
is
Sutra
III. 3.
equal to
Bhashya (kusa nama &c)
SR^fT
plus $:
and- not
is
MICBÊP
of the sutra into
author
Bhamati, and
ponder over
and
it is
it.
is
ma
this
The
26 (Kusa Ohhandas &o).
on the Saririka Bhashya
.of.
all
plus
WU + ^T
f^:
46, S.
in stating that
Bhamati the commentary

wrong when it analyses the words
So it is a mere bold assertion of the
ît^S^J-.
3.
find
word which is used in the Vedanta

words 37111*3:3: in that sutra are
therefore evidently
not borne out
(VIII.
unanimousely agree
the
stotraa
commentary on the above sutra by Sankaracharya, we
such a word as kusa
there
{i.e.
the com-
wooden rods used by the Udgatris in counting the

ThibauC* Vedanta Sfttras Part II. p. 227).
also in the
160),che saririka
This
(According to
by any
authority.
Let
the
learned
Vol. 111. Genders Ch. VI.
'!XW3^qrct5TtsiQ3la*raj*T*'
The
7.
'
a ram,'
* 3
5*
'
cloud/ srs3
'it
following are both masculines
the body/ tr^

'
2 *7
Common Gender.
7.]
a slab,
summit
the peak or
and
feminities
QZ*
tablet,'
'a
nz
'
R house,' if*
kettle-drum/
TC1W
(?)
of a mountain.'
COMMON GENDER.
The
1.
This
rest.
an adhikara
is
s^trsl.
^ <vmv' wfjurwawa."
The avyayas
2.
words
(Indeclinable*),
p?
fn,
and
Wl^
can be used
with
in all the three genders.
'wru
sW
finer iinra
Numerals ending
3.
s:
a and
in
uw
w'^Bft
*m $*w
cau be used with words in
uj
all
the three
genders.
Thus
*
tws:
Thus
&
'guraesr' '
So
4.
js*:
s*n ft
i
*t W:
nZ
The kritya
*rw T
(III.
3.
*#
SJK WHIW,
ipii
aw*
(III. 3.
derivatives?also.
kritya affixes follow the gender
of the
words which
171: S. 3312).
The words formed by the
6.
r location.
7.
qg:
fJWl Ofs
The words formed by
aw* gsw^
also attributive words.
76t:
they qualify.
117
S.
'esfsftfa ef erratf*'
The Pronominal*
affix
lyut added with the force of
3 293).
i
wtsiia'
fare
tarva 'etcetera/
it
ijw^j
17-5-05.
^
(I.
ii
n
1.
27
S.
213).
instrument
PK
317
V3
Panini
tThe AshtadhyayT
v.2
>
*
PLEASE
CARDS OR
DO NOT REMOVE
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
'VW'^^'P*'
'
I
wy
i
'
'
POCKET
LIBRARY
3W

Ashtadhyayi

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Ashtadhyayi

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO

THE DONNER CANADIAN

THE ASHTADHYAYl OF PANINI

Provincial Civil Service, N,

Published by Sindhu Charan Bose

gir John (Mje, JK. <f

CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES,

WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION,

RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIP'S

SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF

BY HlS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT

In the room of the

single vowel, there are two*

Upto Sutra VI,

to be understood that for the

two are to be made, I. e, the first

fe* follows, there are two

room of the first

means that which consists of one* vowel (srw) H When

portion consisting of one vowel

of a single vowel, as?

'to go', then strictly speaking there cannot be

(JPT*) or ekach consisting of a single

Bk. VI. Cii

Here, however, will this rule be applied and % will be reduplicated,

^q^f^^^TRrni/' "An operation which affects

does not attach".

do not exist, that special designation

maxim. In making Reduplications

the rule will apply under the above

room of one; but of the

not a rule ordaining substitution of two, in the

of the one. Compare VIII.

vowel, there are two in the

taining a single vowel.

be reduplicated and not the

+ *r^= ST? + f^-f

and the 3rd per. sing is 3TT?

*R?cT root srf^T,

also STHnf^if^, srnrc^nt H

(VII. 2. 74) = st* + ? + ST (VII. 3. 84, and VI.

35=3Tf^r)> reduplicates the second

by the phrase f$^^HPTTfsr%,

but the consonant-affix

not be made the cause of the application of a grammatical

f|^ words does not apply

cannot be the cause

persons explain the

not Genitive Singular) of

as tne Ablative singular (and

they consider the word

dharaya compound and not a Bahuvrlhi compound. According to them the

the word f$#q^J

fl^^Nt s^re^cn": ^mr^r * fe^s^r

srfHhf f^ra^r% % t^t f fa to***

f and t being the

compound consonant and being

part of the second syllable,

are not reduplicated.

Thus the Desiderative root of 3*9

by adding ^and ??ll

SFSfiT of the last

understood in this sutra

Here though the second syllable consists of n, d and r, yet ^ alone

TF?r 33; JTRff^ SRTFf, 3TPTJ